Table of Contents

As filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on October 16, 2013

Registration No. 333-190880

 

 

UNITED STATES SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION

Washington, D.C. 20549

 

 

AMENDMENT NO. 1

TO

Form S-1

REGISTRATION STATEMENT

UNDER

THE SECURITIES ACT OF 1933

 

 

FIDELITY & GUARANTY LIFE

(Exact name of registrant as specified in its charter)

 

Delaware   6311   46-3489149

(State or other jurisdiction of

incorporation or organization)

 

(Primary Standard Industrial

Classification Code Number)

 

(I.R.S. Employer

Identification Number)

1001 Fleet Street, 6 th Floor

Baltimore, Maryland 21202

(410) 895-0100

(Address, including Zip Code, and Telephone Number, including Area Code, of Registrant’s Principal Executive Offices)

 

 

Eric L. Marhoun, Esq.

Fidelity & Guaranty Life

1001 Fleet Street, 6th Floor

Baltimore, Maryland 21202

(410) 895-0100

(Name, Address, including Zip Code, and Telephone Number, including Area Code, of Agent for Service)

 

 

Copies to:

 

Ethan T. James, Esq.

Debevoise & Plimpton LLP

919 Third Avenue

New York, New York 10022

(212) 909-6000

 

Joseph A. Hall, Esq.

Michael Kaplan, Esq.

Davis Polk & Wardwell LLP

450 Lexington Avenue

New York, New York 10017

(212) 450-4000

Approximate date of commencement of proposed sale to the public: As soon as practicable after the effective date hereof.

 

 

If any of the securities being registered on this Form are to be offered on a delayed or continuous basis pursuant to Rule 415 under the Securities Act of 1933, check the following box.    ¨

If this Form is filed to register additional securities for an offering pursuant to Rule 462(b) under the Securities Act, check the following box and list the Securities Act registration statement number of the earlier effective registration statement for the same offering.    ¨

If this Form is a post-effective amendment filed pursuant to Rule 462(c) under the Securities Act, check the following box and list the Securities Act registration number of the earlier effective registration statement for the same offering.    ¨

If this Form is a post-effective amendment filed pursuant to Rule 462(d) under the Securities Act, check the following box and list the Securities Act registration number of the earlier effective registration statement for the same offering.    ¨

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, a non-accelerated filer, or a smaller reporting company. See the definitions of “large accelerated filer”, “accelerated filer” and “smaller reporting company” in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act. (Check one):

 

Large accelerated filer   ¨

   Accelerated filer   ¨    Non-accelerated filer   x    Smaller reporting company   ¨
      (Do not check if a smaller reporting company)   

CALCULATION OF REGISTRATION FEE

 

 

Title of Each Class of
Securities to be Registered
  Proposed Maximum
Aggregate
Offering Price(1)(2)
  Amount of
Registration
Fee(3)

Common Stock, $0.01 par value per share

  $100,000,000   $13,640

 

 

(1) Includes offering price of shares which the underwriters have the option to purchase.
(2) Estimated solely for the purpose of calculating the amount of the registration fee pursuant to Rule 457(o) under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended.
(3) Previously paid.

The Registrant hereby amends this Registration Statement on such date or dates as may be necessary to delay its effective date until the Registrant shall file a further amendment which specifically states that this Registration Statement shall thereafter become effective in accordance with Section 8(a) of the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, or until the Registration Statement shall become effective on such date as the Commission, acting pursuant to said Section 8(a), may determine.

 

 


Table of Contents

The information in this prospectus is not complete and may be changed. These securities may not be sold until the registration statement filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission is effective. This prospectus is not an offer to sell these securities and it is not soliciting an offer to buy these securities in any state or jurisdiction where the offer or sale is not permitted.

 

SUBJECT TO COMPLETION, DATED OCTOBER 16, 2013

            Shares

 

LOGO

Common Stock

 

 

Prior to the offering, there has been no public market for our common stock. The initial public offering price per share is expected to be between $         and $         per share. We will apply to list our common stock on the                  under the symbol “        ”.

We are selling              shares of common stock.

The underwriters have an option to purchase a maximum of              additional shares from us to cover over-allotments of shares.

Investing in our common stock involves risks. See “ Risk Factors ” beginning on page 12 of this prospectus.

 

 

 

      

Price to

Public

    

Underwriting
Discounts and
Commissions(1)

    

Proceeds to
Company

Per Share

     $      $      $

Total

     $      $      $

 

(1) See “Underwriting” beginning on page 172 for additional information regarding underwriting compensation.

Neither the Securities and Exchange Commission nor any state securities commission has approved or disapproved of these securities or determined if this prospectus is truthful or complete. Any representation to the contrary is a criminal offense.

Delivery of the shares of common stock will be made on or about                      , 2013.

Credit Suisse

Prospectus dated                        , 2013.


Table of Contents

LOGO


Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS

     Page  

P ROSPECTUS S UMMARY

     1   

S UMMARY H ISTORICAL C ONSOLIDATED F INANCIAL AND O PERATING D ATA

     8   

R ISK F ACTORS

     12   

S PECIAL N OTE R EGARDING F ORWARD -L OOKING S TATEMENTS

     40   

U SE OF P ROCEEDS

     42   

D IVIDEND P OLICY

     43   

C APITALIZATION

     44   

D ILUTION

     45   

S ELECTED H ISTORICAL C ONSOLIDATED F INANCIAL D ATA

     46   

M ANAGEMENT S D ISCUSSION AND A NALYSIS OF F INANCIAL C ONDITION AND R ESULTS OF O PERATIONS

     48   

B USINESS

     101   
     Page  

M ANAGEMENT

     125   

E XECUTIVE C OMPENSATION

     132   

C ERTAIN R ELATIONSHIPS AND R ELATED P ARTY T RANSACTIONS

     158   

P RINCIPAL S TOCKHOLDER

     161   

D ESCRIPTION OF C APITAL S TOCK

     162   

S HARES OF C OMMON S TOCK E LIGIBLE FOR F UTURE S ALE

     167   

U.S. F EDERAL I NCOME T AX C ONSIDERATIONS FOR N ON -U.S. H OLDERS

     169   

U NDERWRITING

     172   

L EGAL M ATTERS

     178   

E XPERTS

     178   

W HERE Y OU C AN F IND A DDITIONAL
I NFORMATION

     178   

I NDEX TO THE C ONSOLIDATED F INANCIAL S TATEMENTS

     F-1   

 

We are only providing you with the information contained in this prospectus or in any free writing prospectus we have prepared, and we take no responsibility for, and can provide no assurance as to the reliability of, any other information that others may give you. Neither we nor the underwriters have authorized anyone to provide you with information that is different from that contained in this prospectus or any free writing prospectus. Neither this prospectus nor any free writing prospectus is an offer to sell, or seeking offers to buy, anywhere or to anyone where or to whom we are not permitted to offer or to sell securities under applicable law. The information in this prospectus or any free writing prospectus is accurate only as of the date of this prospectus or such free writing prospectus, as applicable, regardless of the time of delivery of this prospectus or any free writing prospectus or of any sale of our common stock. Our business, financial condition, results of operations and prospects may have changed since that date.

 

 

MARKET AND INDUSTRY DATA

This prospectus includes estimates regarding market and industry data and forecasts, which are based on publicly available information, industry publications and surveys, reports from government agencies, reports by market research firms and our own estimates based on our management’s knowledge of, and experience in, the market sectors in which we compete. We have not independently verified market and industry data from third-party sources. This information cannot always be verified with complete certainty due to the limits on the availability and reliability of raw data, the voluntary nature of the data gathering process, and other limitations and uncertainties inherent in surveys of market size.

When we refer to the middle-income market in this prospectus, we use the definition employed by the Life Insurance Management Research Association (“LIMRA”) in its 2012 study of life insurance products owned by U.S. households relative to projected needs, which is households earning between $35,000 and $100,000 per year.

When we refer to National Association of Insurance Commissioners (“NAIC”) ratings, we refer to ratings ranging from NAIC 1, which is assigned to obligations exhibiting the highest quality, to NAIC 6, which is given to obligations that are in or near default. See “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations—Investment Portfolio” for further detail.

 

i


Table of Contents

PROSPECTUS SUMMARY

The following summary highlights information contained elsewhere in this prospectus and does not contain all of the information that you should consider before investing in our common stock. You should read this entire prospectus, including the sections entitled “Risk Factors” and “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” and our consolidated financial statements and the related notes to those statements, before making an investment decision. Unless the context otherwise indicates or requires, the terms “we”, “our”, “us”, “FGL”, and the “Company”, as used in this prospectus, refer to Fidelity & Guaranty Life (formerly, Harbinger F&G, LLC) and its subsidiaries and the term “FGLH” refers to Fidelity & Guaranty Life’s direct subsidiary Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc. FGL primarily operates through FGLH’s subsidiary, Fidelity & Guaranty Life Insurance Company (“FGLIC”), which is domiciled in Maryland. Our fiscal year ends on September 30 of each year.

Company Overview

For over 50 years, our Company has been helping middle-income Americans prepare for retirement and unexpected loss of life. Our focus on the middle-income market gives us access to significant, underserved market niches and drives our product development. As of June 30, 2013, we had approximately 700,000 policyholders counting on the safety and protection features of our fixed annuity and life insurance products, and we constantly seek to innovate our products to meet their evolving needs.

Through the efforts of our approximately 170 employees, who are primarily located in Baltimore, MD, we offer various types of fixed annuities and life insurance products. Fixed annuities represent a retirement and savings tool which our customers rely on for principal protection and predictable income streams. In addition, our life insurance products provide our customers with a complementary product that allows them to build on their savings and assign payment of a death benefit to a designated beneficiary upon the policyholder’s death. Currently, our most popular products are fixed indexed annuities (“FIAs”), which provide our customers with interest tied to the performance of the stock market, while limiting the risk of losing money should the stock market decline. We believe this mix of “some upside but limited downside” fills the need for middle-income Americans who must save for retirement but who want to limit the risk of decline in their savings. In addition to FIAs, we also sell indexed universal life policies (“IULs”) and other fixed annuities.

In fiscal year 2012, FIAs generated approximately 95% of our total sales. Our fixed indexed products such as FIAs tie contractual returns to specified market indices, such as the Standard & Poor’s (“S&P”) 500 Index. The benefit of FIAs to our customers is to provide a portion of the gains of an underlying market index without the risk of losing the original principal. We invest the fixed annuity premium in fixed income securities and hedge our risk, predominantly using call options on the S&P 500 Index, and pass through a portion of the returns of the stock market index to our policyholders. The majority of our products contain provisions that permit us to annually adjust the formula by which index credits are provided in response to changing market conditions. In addition, our annuity contracts generally either are not surrenderable or include surrender charges that discourage early redemptions.

We offer our products through a network of approximately 200 independent insurance marketing organizations (“IMOs”) that in turn represent an estimated 19,000 independent agents.

In April 2011, Harbinger Group Inc. (“HGI”), a publicly traded diversified holding company, acquired FGLH through Fidelity & Guaranty Life, a holding company formed in connection with the acquisition. Since this acquisition, we have strengthened our financial profile and risk-based capital ratios, increased our market share, decreased the risk in our investment portfolio, including through better alignment of our asset and liability cash flows, and generated positive net earnings.

 


Table of Contents

For example, we have increased total adjusted capital (“TAC”) (defined in accordance with statutory accounting principles (“SAP”)), for our primary operating company, FGLIC, to $1,167.4 million and a company action level risk-based capital (“RBC”) ratio for FGLIC to 474% as of June 30, 2013 from $805.1 million and 305% as of December 31, 2008. Furthermore, our $16.4 billion investment portfolio has an average S&P rating of “A-” as of June 30, 2013, with over 60% being rated NAIC 1, compared with approximately 53% rated NAIC 1 for our $17.4 billion investment portfolio as of September 30, 2010. Our FIA market share in terms of sales grew from 1.67% for the three-month period ended March 31, 2011, ranking us at 15th place among our competitors, to 2.9% for the three-month period ended June 30, 2013, ranking us at 10th place among our competitors. We estimate that there are approximately 45 companies selling FIA products in our markets in the relevant periods.

Our Industry

The demand for retirement planning products is large and growing. Over 10,000 people will turn 65 each day in the United States over the next 15 years, and the proportion of the United States population over the age of 65 is expected to grow from 13% in 2010 to 18% in 2030. The U.S. Government Accountability Office has indicated that increasing life expectancy has created a risk that many retirees will outlive their retirement assets. Additionally, employer-sponsored private sector pension plans face severe funding deficits. According to a report by Mercer Consulting, a consulting and research firm, the aggregate funding deficit for pension plans sponsored by companies included in the S&P 1500 Index was $557 billion as of December 31, 2012. Americans realize that funding deficits in government and employer-sponsored pension plans leave them exposed to retirement income shortfalls. According to a 2013 study conducted by LIMRA, 50% of individuals aged 35 to 54 are not confident in their ability to have a secure retirement.

We operate in the sector of the insurance industry that focuses on the needs of middle-income Americans. The underserved middle-income market represents a major growth opportunity for FGL. In 2012, LIMRA conducted a study of life insurance products owned by U.S. households relative to projected needs. The study concluded that the middle-income market accounted for 41% of U.S. households, but represented over 57% of the estimated life insurance coverage shortfall. Similarly, a study conducted by the National Institute on Retirement Security found that in the second lowest quartile of households based on income, representing annual incomes between approximately $28,000 and $46,000, 49% had no form of retirement savings account. In contrast, 89% of all households in the highest quartile had some type of IRA, 401(k), or defined benefit account.

As a tool for addressing the unmet need for retirement planning, we believe that many middle-income Americans have grown to appreciate the “sleep at night protection” that annuities such as our FIA products afford. As a result, the FIA market grew from nearly $12 billion of sales in 2002 to $34 billion of sales in 2012, representing a compound annual growth rate (“CAGR”) of 11.1%. Similarly, the IUL market expanded from $100 million of annual premiums in 2002 to over $1.3 billion of annual premiums in 2012 representing a CAGR of 29.3%.

Our Competitive Strengths

We believe the following strengths will allow us to capitalize on the growth prospects for our business:

 

   

Middle-Income Market Focus . We have historically sold life insurance to the large and underserved middle-income market. Our experience designing and developing annuities and life insurance products allows us to continue to introduce innovative products and solutions designed to meet customers’ changing needs. We believe that this experience has given us a keen understanding of the financial safety, wealth accumulation and protection, and retirement income needs of middle-income Americans.

 

   

Deep Distribution Relationships . Our collaborative, demand-driven approach to product design anchors the loyalty of our IMOs, and we design customized products to support the marketing strategies of our

 

 

2


Table of Contents
 

key IMOs. For example, our core annuity Prosperity Elite product was developed in partnership with one of our leading IMOs and accounted for approximately 62% of our annuity sales in the nine months ended June 30, 2013. In addition, we have worked with our IMOs to create innovative, mobile-friendly tools that enable them to deliver real-time information when marketing and providing service to their clients. The average tenure of our top 20 IMOs is approximately 11 years, and this long-term association with us demonstrates valued loyalty.

 

   

Seasoned Management Team and an Ownership Culture . Our management team has extensive experience in the insurance sector and has managed large and small companies through numerous economic cycles. Our executive officers average over 25 years of tenure in the insurance and financial services sector. The majority of our leadership has also played key roles in publicly held companies in this sector. In addition, we have a long-term incentive plan that we believe aligns employees with shareholders. We provide these incentives broadly, and 43% of our employees participated in this plan as of June 30, 2013.

 

   

Highly Scalable Operating Structure . We manage our core competencies internally and outsource other operations to external vendors. Our outsourcing model provides us with predictable pricing and volume capabilities and also allows us to benefit from technological developments that enhance our customer experience and sales processes in ways that we would not otherwise have without deploying more capital. For example, our arrangement with Transaction Applications Group, Inc., a subsidiary of Dell Inc. (“Transaction Group”), allowed us to launch our core Prosperity Elite product in a short time without adding employees while growing this product from inception in August 2011 to $1,497.3 million in sales over a period of only 22 months.

 

   

Strong Risk Management Culture . Risk assessment and management is an important aspect of every decision we make. Our Chief Risk Officer heads our risk management process and reports directly to our CEO, who actively reviews more significant risks. Our Enterprise Risk Committee is comprised of our entire executive management team, including the CEO, and discusses and approves all risk policies and reviews and approves risks associated with our activities. We manage our risk limits based on two key metrics: regulatory capital and earnings sensitivities. Our Enterprise Risk Committee regularly reviews our operational, governance, strategy, product distribution and investment risks.

 

   

Conservative Investment Portfolio . We maintain a high quality, conservatively positioned investment portfolio, as our business model is designed to allow us to operate profitably without over-reliance on investment returns. As of June 30, 2013, 96.5% of our fixed maturity investment portfolio was rated NAIC 2 or higher (investment grade), with 58.7% having a NAIC 1 rating. We also have a conservative approach to asset-liability management: at June 30, 2013, our average asset duration was less than our average liability duration by a quarter of a year.

 

   

Strong Balance Sheet and Cash Flow Profile . We maintain strong capital balances, including an RBC ratio of over 350%, and our long-term target of total debt to total U.S. generally accepted accounting principles (“U.S. GAAP”) capital ratio (excluding accumulated other comprehensive income (“AOCI”)) is in the mid-20% range. As of June 30, 2013, FGLIC had $1,167.4 million of TAC and an RBC ratio of 474%, which is substantially above management’s internal target and applicable regulatory minimums and does not reflect $70.2 million of cash and investments at FGLH. We believe the over $330 million in capital above our target RBC ratio of 350% that we have developed over the last three years provides us flexibility to capitalize on the sales growth opportunities we currently see in our market.

Our Strategy

We will seek to grow our business by pursuing a set of short-, medium- and long-term efforts aimed at delivering sustainable and profitable growth for shareholders. Our main strategies include:

 

   

Increase Market Share in Our Existing Market . We believe that increasing demand for retirement and principal protection products combined with an evolving competitive landscape present us with

 

 

3


Table of Contents
 

significant opportunities to grow with the market and through increased market share. We will continue to pursue tactical opportunities to increase shelf space in the IMO market. We expect to increase the size of our account management team to strengthen coverage of key accounts and actively pursue relationships with IMOs with whom we currently do not conduct business. At the same time, we will continue to make regular modifications to rates and features based on the investment environment to remain competitive with other carriers, and also continue to develop unique, proprietary products for select marketing.

 

   

Expand the Types of Products We Sell . We also expect to develop and distribute new products that will address important unmet needs of middle-income households and a growing senior population. These products are expected to diversify our asset, liability and revenue mix as well as help us to capitalize on the significant future growth opportunities we perceive. We are well-positioned to offer products through our current distribution system in, for example, the group, non-medical and niche life-insurance product markets.

 

   

Diversify Our Distribution Channels. We will leverage our strong capital position and target higher ratings to develop broader relationships with broker-dealers, banks and financial planning professionals, thereby increasing the ways in which we reach our customers. Effective implementation will require phased investment over a number of years in institutional relationships, systems, marketing, wholesaling and product development.

 

   

Selectively Pursue Acquisitions . Although acquisitions are not the primary focus of our current business strategy, we actively monitor the life insurance and annuity markets for opportunities to acquire businesses which are compatible with our existing operations. We also look for opportunities to acquire seasoned blocks of in-force business with measurable experience, which can help leverage our existing operational and corporate structures to generate enhanced returns on invested capital.

 

   

Bottom-line, Profit-oriented Objectives . We focus on initiatives that we expect will deliver target profits and avoid markets and products when industry pricing makes it difficult to achieve targeted profit margins.

SUMMARY RISK FACTORS

Our business is subject to numerous risks described in the section entitled “Risk Factors” and elsewhere in this prospectus. You should carefully consider these risks before making an investment. Some of these risks include:

 

   

our assumptions and estimates regarding mortality, persistency, expenses and interest rates, tax liability, business mix, frequency of claims, contingent liabilities, performance and fair value of our investments, among others, could differ from actual experience and adversely affect our financial condition and results of operations;

 

   

a downgrade or potential downgrade in our financial strength rating or credit ratings could make our product offerings less attractive and increase our cost of capital, and thereby adversely affect our financial condition and results of operations;

 

   

the stock of our primary operating subsidiary is subject to the security interest of its former owner;

 

   

HGI has substantial indebtedness and has pledged its shares of our stock to secure a portion of such indebtedness;

 

   

we and HGI are currently involved with ongoing law enforcement and regulatory investigations and may be the target of future litigation, law enforcement investigations or increased regulatory scrutiny;

 

   

our business is highly regulated and subject to numerous legal restrictions and regulations, and changes in regulation or the application of regulation may reduce our profitability;

 

 

4


Table of Contents
   

we may be adversely affected if our reinsurers are unable to meet their obligations, increase their rates, or become subject to adverse developments;

 

   

restrictions on our ability to use captive reinsurers could adversely impact our competitive position and statutory capital and surplus position;

 

   

we could be forced to sell investments at a loss to cover policyholder withdrawals, which could adversely affect our financial condition and results of operations;

 

   

our business, financial condition and results of operations could be negatively affected by interest rate fluctuations;

 

   

equity and credit market volatility could negatively impact our business;

 

   

sales of our products could be affected by changes in federal income tax laws;

 

   

our intent to distribute a substantial portion of the proceeds from this offering to HGI;

 

   

HGI’s continuing controlling interest in us following the offering may result in conflicts of interest that adversely impact our public shareholders; and

 

   

the lack of comparability of our recent operating results from period to period.

OWNERSHIP AND CORPORATE INFORMATION

We are a holding company with no operations of our own. Our only significant asset and source of cash is our indirect wholly owned subsidiary, FGLIC, a Maryland life insurance company. We also indirectly own Fidelity & Guaranty Life Business Services, Inc. (“FGL Services”), which employs our employees and provides administrative services such as processing payroll and vendor payments on an at-cost basis to our insurance subsidiaries. On September 28, 2001, FGLIC was acquired by Old Mutual plc through Old Mutual US Life Holdings (“OMUSLH”). In 2010, Old Mutual plc publicly announced plans to sell OMUSLH as part of a corporate reorganization.

In April 2011, OMUSLH was acquired by HGI through Harbinger F&G, LLC, a holding company formed in connection with the acquisition of OMUSLH by HGI, and changed its name to Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc. following the acquisition (the “FGLH Acquisition”). On August 26, 2013, Harbinger F&G, LLC, a Delaware limited liability company, converted into a Delaware corporation pursuant to a statutory conversion and renamed itself Fidelity & Guaranty Life. Prior to the statutory conversion, Harbinger F&G, LLC distributed its ownership interests in its wholly owned subsidiaries, HGI Real Estate, LLC and FS HoldCo Ltd. (together with its subsidiaries, “Front Street”), a reinsurer, to HGI, as well as all of Harbinger F&G, LLC’s rights, title, interest, liabilities and obligations under its litigation against OM Group (UK) Limited (“OMGUK”) related to a claimed $50 million purchase price adjustment in connection with the FGLH Acquisition.

Prior to the completion of this offering, and after the statutory conversion, all shares of our common stock were beneficially owned by HGI. After the completion of this offering, HGI will beneficially own              shares of our common stock, or approximately     % of our outstanding common stock, assuming the underwriters’ over-allotment option is not exercised. As a result, we expect to qualify as, and elect to be, a “controlled company” within the meaning of the                  (“                ”) rules following the completion of this offering. This election will allow us to rely on exemptions from certain corporate governance requirements otherwise applicable to                 -listed companies. See “Management—Corporate Governance”.

 

 

5


Table of Contents

The following diagram is a summary of our corporate organizational structure following this offering, assuming the underwriters’ over-allotment option is not exercised:

 

LOGO

 

(a)   On a fully-diluted basis, Harbinger Capital Partners and its affiliates own 39.2% of HGI’s common stock with other shareholders (including stock traded on the New York Stock Exchange) owning the remaining 60.8%. The references to percentage ownership in the above diagram do not give effect to the conversion of HGI’s Series A and A-2 Participating Convertible Preferred Stock (or any limitations on voting by any preferred shareholders prior to receipt of certain regulatory approvals) or certain outstanding options issued to employees.

*****

We are a Delaware corporation and the address of our principal executive office is 1001 Fleet Street, 6th Floor, Baltimore, MD 21202. Our telephone number is (410) 895-0100. Our website address is https://home.fglife.com/. None of the information contained on, or that may be accessed through, our website or any other website identified herein is part of, or incorporated into, this prospectus. All website addresses in this prospectus are intended to be inactive textual references only.

 

 

6


Table of Contents

THE OFFERING

 

Common stock offered by us

             shares

 

Option to purchase additional shares of common stock

The underwriters have a 30-day option to purchase an additional              shares of common stock from us to cover over-allotments, if any.

 

Common stock to be outstanding after this offering

             shares (or              shares if the over-allotment option is exercised in full)

 

Use of proceeds

We intend to use the net proceeds from this offering to pay a $             dividend to HGI and for working capital to support the growth of our business and other general corporate purposes, including the costs associated with being a public company. See “Use of Proceeds”.

 

Risk factors

See “Risk Factors” and other information included in this prospectus for a discussion of factors you should carefully consider before deciding whether to invest in shares of our common stock.

 

Dividend policy

We initially expect to pay quarterly cash dividends to holders of our common stock of $         per share, subject to the discretion of our board of directors in accordance with applicable law and dependent on a variety of factors including our financial condition, earnings, operating results, current and anticipated cash needs and plans for growth, legal requirements and other factors that the board of directors deems relevant. See “Dividend Policy”.

 

Proposed                  trading symbol

“            ”

As of June 30, 2013,              shares of our common stock were outstanding. See “Description of Capital Stock”.

Unless we indicate otherwise, the information in this prospectus assumes the following:

 

   

a         -for-1 stock split of our shares of common stock to be effected on                     , 2013;

 

   

the issuance of              shares of common stock in this offering;

 

   

no exercise by the underwriters of the over-allotment option;

 

   

the initial public offering price of our common stock of $         per share (which is the midpoint of the price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus); and

 

   

the effectiveness of the amendments to our certificate of incorporation and by-laws to be adopted prior to the completion of this offering.

 

 

7


Table of Contents

SUMMARY HISTORICAL CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL AND OPERATING DATA

The following table sets forth, for the periods and as of the dates indicated, our summary predecessor and successor historical consolidated financial and operating data. For financial statement purposes, FGLH has been identified as the predecessor and FGL as the successor. We have prepared the summary financial and operating data, other than statutory and certain other data, in conformity with U.S. GAAP.

We have derived the summary predecessor financial and operating data as of and for the year ended December 31, 2010 and for the period from January 1, 2011 through April 5, 2011, from the audited consolidated financial statements of FGLH included elsewhere in this prospectus. We have derived the summary successor financial operating data: (i) as of and for the year ended September 30, 2012, as of September 30, 2011, and for the period from April 6, 2011 through September 30, 2011, from the audited consolidated financial statements of FGL included elsewhere in this prospectus and (ii) as of and for the nine months ended June 30, 2013 and for the nine months ended June 30, 2012, from the unaudited interim condensed consolidated financial statements of FGL included elsewhere in this prospectus. Balance sheet data as of December 31, 2010 are derived from audited consolidated financial statements not included in this prospectus. Financial and operating data as of June 30, 2012 and April 5, 2011 are derived from unaudited interim condensed consolidated financial statements not included in this prospectus. “Other Data” and “Other Statutory Data” for all periods presented below are also unaudited.

The unaudited interim condensed consolidated financial statements have been prepared on the same basis as the audited consolidated financial statements and notes thereto and, in the opinion of management, include all adjustments (consisting of normal recurring adjustments) necessary for a fair statement of the information for the unaudited interim periods. Operating results for interim periods are not necessarily indicative of the results that may be expected for the entire fiscal year.

We have derived the statutory data from the statements filed by our insurance subsidiaries with regulatory authorities and have prepared the statutory data in accordance with SAP, which vary in certain respects from U.S. GAAP. See Note 17, Insurance Subsidiary Financial Information, in the audited consolidated financial statements for the year ended September 30, 2012, for a discussion of the material differences between SAP and U.S. GAAP.

 

 

8


Table of Contents

You should read the following information in conjunction with the sections entitled “Selected Historical Consolidated Financial Data”, “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” including “—Presentation of Financial Information” and our consolidated financial statements and related notes appearing elsewhere in this prospectus.

 

    FIDELITY & GUARANTY LIFE (SUCCESSOR)           FIDELITY & GUARANTY
LIFE HOLDINGS, INC.
(PREDECESSOR)
 

(in millions, except share amounts)

  NINE MONTHS
ENDED
    YEAR ENDED     PERIOD FROM           PERIOD
FROM
    YEAR
ENDED
 
  JUNE 30,
2013
    JUNE 30,
2012
    SEPTEMBER 30,
2012
    APRIL 6, 2011 –
SEPTEMBER 30,
2011
          JANUARY 1,
2011 –
APRIL 5,
2011
    DECEMBER 31,
2010
 
    (unaudited)     (unaudited)                                

Revenues:

  

             

Premiums

  $ 46.9      $ 42.2      $ 55.3      $ 39.0          $ 53.7      $ 220.0   

Net investment income

    522.8        537.6        716.2        369.8            232.6        915.6   

Net investment gains (losses)

    411.5        254.6        410.0        (166.9         84.5        60.1   

Insurance and investment product fees and other

    44.4        28.2        40.3        48.9            23.8        108.3   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

       

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total revenues

    1,025.6        862.6        1,221.8        290.8            394.6        1,304.0   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

       

 

 

   

 

 

 

Benefits and expenses:

               

Benefits and other changes in policy reserves

    431.7        559.7        777.4        247.6            228.7        863.0   

Acquisition and operating expenses, net of deferrals

    76.0        101.4        123.9        75.8            23.1        100.9   

Amortization of intangibles

    163.1        112.0        160.7        (11.1         131.7        273.0   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

       

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total benefits and expenses

    670.8        773.1        1,062.0        312.3            383.5        1,236.9   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

       

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating income (loss)

    354.8        89.5        159.8        (21.5         11.1        67.1   

Interest expense(a)

    (5.9     (1.9     (2.6     (1.9         (5.9     (25.0

Bargain purchase gain from business acquisition

    —          —          —          158.3            —          —     

Gain on contingent purchase price reduction

    —          41.0        41.0        —              —          —     

Other income, net

    0.2        0.1        0.2        —              —          —     
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

       

 

 

   

 

 

 

Income before income taxes

    349.1        128.7        198.4        134.9            5.2        42.1   

Income tax (expense) benefit

    (112.1     (11.8     145.7        41.7            7.8        130.1   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

       

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net income

  $ 237.0      $ 116.9      $ 344.1      $ 176.6          $ 13.0      $ 172.2   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

       

 

 

   

 

 

 
 

Earnings per share(b):

               

Net earnings per share

               

Common shares outstanding

               
 

Other Operating Data:

               

Pretax AOI(c)

  $ 89.9      $ 39.9      $ 57.8      $ 44.7            N/A        N/A   

Return on equity, after tax AOI(d)

    8.5     9.5     8.1     16.8         N/A        N/A   

Return on AAUM, after tax AOI(e)

    0.5     0.2     0.2     0.4         N/A        N/A   
 

Balance Sheet Data (as of period end):

               

Cash and cash equivalents

  $ 1,003.0      $ 1,563.6      $ 1,054.6      $ 820.9          $ 904.7      $ 639.2   

Total investments

    16,419.9        15,549.8        16,556.5        15,751.1            15,818.9        15,906.6   

Total assets

    21,012.6        20,369.8        20,990.3        19,408.1            20,587.9        20,612.8   

Contractholder funds

    15,342.7        15,285.8        15,290.5        14,550.0            14,967.3        15,081.7   

Future policy benefits

    3,576.2        3,602.7        3,614.8        3,598.2            3,464.6        3,474.0   

Notes payable

    300.0        —          —          95.0            248.5        244.6   

Total equity

    1,285.6        895.6        1,290.8        675.4            1,351.1        1,344.6   

Total equity excluding AOCI

    1,110.2        615.5        856.3        515.9            1,329.9        1,317.0   
 

Other Statutory Data:

               

Statutory net gain from operations before net realized capital gains(f)

  $ 25.8      $ 131.8      $ 156.6      $ 43.3          $ 10.8      $ 295.1   

Total adjusted statutory capital(g)

  $ 1,167.4      $ 883.5      $ 901.4      $ 861.6          $ 940.2      $ 902.4   

Company action level RBC ratio(h)

    474     358     355     338         367     350

 

 

9


Table of Contents

 

(a) “Interest expense” has been reclassified out of “Benefits and expenses” in the predecessor periods to conform to the presentation of the financial statements in the successor periods.

 

(b) Common shares outstanding and per share amounts give retroactive effect to our statutory conversion on August 26, 2013 and the         -for-         stock split effected on                 , 2013.

 

(c) Pretax Adjusted Operating Income (“Pretax AOI”) is a non-U.S. GAAP measure used in the successor period only. Pretax AOI is calculated by adjusting income before income taxes to eliminate (i) interest expense and other, (ii) certain gains related to the FGLH Acquisition, (iii) the impact of net investment gains, excluding gains and losses on derivatives and including net other-than-temporary impairment (“OTTI”) losses recognized in operations, (iv) the effect of changes in the rates used to discount the FIA embedded derivative liability and (v) the effects of acquisition-related reinsurance transactions, net of the corresponding value of business acquired (“VOBA”) and deferred acquisition costs (“DAC”) impact related to these adjustments. These items fluctuate from period-to-period in a manner inconsistent with our core operations. Accordingly, we believe using a measure which excludes their impact is effective in analyzing the trends of our operations. Together with income before income taxes, we believe Pretax AOI provides a meaningful financial metric that helps investors understand our underlying results and profitability. Our Pretax AOI may not be comparable to similarly titled measures of other organizations because other organizations may not calculate Pretax AOI in the same manner as we do.

The adjustments to income before income taxes noted in the table below are net of amortization of DAC and VOBA. Amounts attributable to the fair value accounting for derivatives hedging the FIA index credits and the related embedded derivative liability fluctuate from period to period based upon changes in the fair values of call options purchased to hedge the annual index credits for FIAs, changes in the interest rates used to discount the embedded derivative liability, and the fair value assumptions reflected in the embedded derivative liability. The accounting standards for fair value measurement require the discount rates used in the calculation of the embedded derivative liability to be based on risk-free interest rates. The impact of the change in risk-free interest rates has been removed from operating income. Additionally, in evaluating our operating results, the effects of acquisition-related reinsurance transactions have been removed from income before income taxes.

The following is a reconciliation of Pretax AOI to the corresponding U.S. GAAP measure, income before income taxes:

 

     FIDELITY & GUARANTY LIFE (SUCCESSOR)  
     NINE MONTHS ENDED      YEAR  ENDED
SEPTEMBER 30,
2012
     PERIOD FROM
APRIL 6, 2011 –

SEPTEMBER 30,
2011
 

(in millions)

   JUNE 30, 2013      JUNE 30, 2012        
     (unaudited)      (unaudited)                

Reconciliation to income before income taxes:

           

Income before income taxes

   $ 349.1       $ 128.7       $ 198.4       $ 134.9   

Interest expense and other

     5.7         1.8         2.4         1.9   

Bargain purchase gain from business acquisition

     —           —           —           (158.3

Gain on contingent purchase price reduction

     —           (41.0      (41.0      —     
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Operating income (loss)

     354.8         89.5         159.8         (21.5

Effect of investment (gains), net of offsets

     (206.1      (72.2      (132.4      (0.6

Effect of change in FIA embedded derivative discount rate, net of offsets

     (58.8      10.8         18.6         42.6   

Effect of acquisition-related reinsurance

     —           11.8         11.8         24.2   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Pretax AOI

   $ 89.9       $ 39.9       $ 57.8       $ 44.7   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

During the period prior to the FGLH Acquisition (the predecessor period above), we used a different economic measure to evaluate financial performance that is not comparable or meaningful to include in this summary.

 

(d) Return on Equity, After Tax AOI. Return on Equity, After Tax AOI is a non-U.S. GAAP measure used in the successor periods only. It is calculated by dividing after tax adjusted operating income (“After Tax AOI”) (using an effective tax rate of 35%) by total average equity (excluding AOCI). Average equity (excluding AOCI) is the sum of the equity at the end of each month divided by the number of months in the period. Our Return on Equity, After Tax AOI may not be comparable to similarly titled measures of other organizations because other organizations may not calculate Return on Equity, After Tax AOI in the same manner as we do. During the period prior to the FGLH Acquisition (the predecessor period above) we used a different economic measure to evaluate financial performance that is not comparable or meaningful to include in this summary. For periods less than a full fiscal year, amounts disclosed in the table are annualized.

 

     FIDELITY & GUARANTY LIFE (SUCCESSOR)  
     NINE MONTHS ENDED     YEAR  ENDED
SEPTEMBER 30,
2012
    PERIOD FROM
APRIL 6, 2011 –

SEPTEMBER 30,
2011
 

(dollars in millions)

   JUNE 30, 2013     JUNE 30, 2012      
     (unaudited)     (unaudited)              

Pretax AOI

   $ 89.9      $ 39.9      $ 57.8      $ 44.7   

Effective tax rate(1)

     35     35     35     35

After tax AOI

   $ 58.4      $ 25.9      $ 37.6      $ 29.1   

Average equity (excluding AOCI)

     915.9        363.9        462.3        346.7   

After tax AOI return on average equity (excluding AOCI)(2)

     8.5     9.5     8.1     16.8

 

 

10


Table of Contents

 

  (1) For illustration purposes only, we have assumed an effective tax rate of 35% for all periods presented.

 

  (2) Periods less than twelve months have been annualized.

 

(e) Return on AAUM, After Tax AOI. Return on AAUM, After Tax AOI is a non-U.S. GAAP measure used in the successor period only. It is calculated by dividing After Tax AOI (using an effective tax rate of 35%) by Average Assets under Management (“AAUM”). AAUM is the sum of the AUM at the end of each month in the period divided by the number of months in the period. Our Return on AAUM, After Tax AOI may not be comparable to similarly titled measures of other organizations because other organizations may not calculate Return on AAUM, After Tax AOI in the same manner as we do. During the period prior to the FGLH Acquisition (the predecessor period above) we used a different economic measure to evaluate financial performance that is not comparable or meaningful to include in this summary. For periods less than a full fiscal year, amounts disclosed in the table are annualized.

 

     FIDELITY & GUARANTY LIFE (SUCCESSOR)  
     NINE MONTHS ENDED     YEAR  ENDED
SEPTEMBER 30,
2012
    PERIOD FROM
APRIL 6, 2011 –

SEPTEMBER 30,
2011
 

(dollars in millions)

   JUNE 30, 2013     JUNE 30, 2012      
     (unaudited)     (unaudited)     (unaudited)     (unaudited)  

After tax AOI

   $ 58.4      $ 25.9      $ 37.6      $ 29.1   

AAUM

   $ 16,565.5      $ 16,255.4      $ 16,111.9      $ 16,272.3   

After tax AOI return on AAUM

     0.5     0.2     0.2     0.4

 

(f) Statutory Net Gain from Operations before Net Realized Capital Gains . Based on SAP prescribed or permitted by regulatory authorities for our insurance subsidiaries after appropriate elimination of intercompany accounts among such subsidiaries.

 

(g) Total Adjusted Statutory Capital . Derived from the statutory statements filed by our insurance subsidiaries with regulatory authorities which are prepared in accordance with SAP.

 

(h) Company Action Level RBC Ratio . Calculated by dividing TAC by company action level RBC, which is a measure of the capital resources that an insurer holds to protect customers against adverse developments.

 

 

11


Table of Contents

RISK FACTORS

Investing in our common stock involves a high degree of risk. You should consider and read carefully all of the risks and uncertainties described below, as well as other information included in this prospectus, including our consolidated financial statements and related notes appearing at the end of this prospectus, before making an investment decision. The risks described below are not the only ones facing us. The occurrence of any of the following risks or additional risks and uncertainties not presently known to us or that we currently believe to be immaterial could materially and adversely affect our business, financial condition or results of operations. In such case, the trading price of our common stock could decline, and you may lose all or part of your original investment. This prospectus also contains forward-looking statements and estimates that involve risks and uncertainties. Our actual results could differ materially from those anticipated in the forward-looking statements as a result of specific factors, including the risks and uncertainties described below. See “Special Note Regarding Forward-Looking Statements”.

Risks Relating to Our Business

Our results of operations and financial condition depend on the accuracy of a broad range of assumptions and estimates made by our management.

We make certain assumptions and estimates regarding mortality, persistency, expenses and interest rates, tax liability, business mix, frequency of claims, contingent liabilities, investment performance and other factors related to our business and anticipated results. We rely on these assumptions and estimates to estimate the amounts of VOBA, policy liabilities and accruals, future earnings and various components of our consolidated balance sheet. These assumptions are also used in making decisions crucial to the operation of our business, including the pricing of products and expense structures related to products. These assumptions and estimates incorporate many factors, none of which can be predicted with certainty. Our actual experiences, as well as changes in estimates, are used to prepare our consolidated statement of operations. To the extent our actual experience and changes in estimates differ from original estimates, our business, operations and financial condition may be materially adversely affected. We have minimal experience to date on policyholder behavior for our guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit (“GMWB”) products which we began issuing in 2008; as a result, future experience could lead to significant changes in our assumptions. If emerging experience deviates from our assumptions on GMWB utilization, such deviations could have a significant effect on our reserve levels and related results of operations.

The calculations we use to estimate various components of our balance sheet and consolidated statement of operations are necessarily complex and involve analyzing and interpreting large quantities of data. The assumptions and estimates required for these calculations involve judgment and by their nature are imprecise and subject to changes and revisions over time. Accordingly, our results may be adversely affected from time to time by actual results differing from assumptions, by changes in estimates and by changes resulting from implementing more sophisticated administrative systems and procedures that facilitate the calculation of more precise estimates. See “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations—Critical Accounting Policies and Estimates”.

Our financial condition and results of operations could be adversely impacted if our assumptions regarding the fair value and future performance of our investments differ from actual experience.

We make assumptions regarding the fair value and expected future performance of our investments. For example, expectations that our investments in residential and commercial mortgage-backed securities (“RMBS” and “CMBS”, respectively) will continue to perform in accordance with their contractual terms are based on assumptions a market participant would use in determining the current fair value and considering the performance of the underlying assets. We have increased our non-agency RMBS holdings recently from $660.6 million at September 30, 2012 to $1,354.0 million at June 30, 2013. It is possible that the collateral underlying these investments will not meet performance expectations and the lower performance levels may lead

 

12


Table of Contents

to adverse changes in the cash flows on our holdings of these types of securities. This could lead to potential future OTTI within our portfolio of mortgage-backed and asset-backed securities (“ABS”). In addition, expectations that our investments in corporate securities or debt obligations will continue to perform in accordance with their contractual terms are based on evidence gathered through our normal credit surveillance process. It is possible that issuers of corporate securities in which we have invested will perform worse than current expectations. Such events may lead us to recognize potential future OTTI within our portfolio of corporate securities. We recorded OTTI charges of approximately $1.6 million and $22.8 million for the nine months ended June 30, 2013 and the fiscal year ended September 30, 2012, respectively. It is also possible that such unanticipated events would lead us to dispose of certain of those holdings and recognize the effects of any market movements in our financial statements. It is possible that actual values will differ from our assumptions. Such events could result in a material change in the value of our investments, business, operations and financial condition.

A financial strength ratings downgrade, potential downgrade, or any other negative action by a rating agency could make our product offerings less attractive and increase our cost of capital, and thereby adversely affect our financial condition and results of operations.

Various nationally recognized rating agencies review the financial performance and condition of insurers, including our insurance subsidiaries, and publish their financial strength ratings as indicators of an insurer’s ability to meet policyholder and contractholder obligations. These ratings are important to maintaining public confidence in our products, our ability to market our products and our competitive position. Any downgrade or other negative action by a rating agency with respect to the financial strength ratings of our insurance subsidiaries could materially adversely affect us in many ways, including the following:

 

   

reducing new sales of insurance products;

 

   

adversely affecting relationships with distributors, IMOs and sales agents;

 

   

increasing the number or amount of policy lapses or surrenders and withdrawals of funds;

 

   

requiring a reduction in prices for our insurance products and services in order to remain competitive;

 

   

adversely affecting our ability to obtain reinsurance at a reasonable price, on reasonable terms or at all; and

 

   

requiring us to collateralize reserves, balances or obligations under reinsurance and securitization agreements.

Rating agencies assign ratings based upon several factors. While most of these factors relate to the rated company, some factors relate to the views of the rating agency, general economic conditions and circumstances outside the rated company’s control. In addition, rating agencies use various models and formulas to assess the strength of a rated company, and from time to time rating agencies have, in their discretion, altered the models and may do so in the future in ways that negatively impact the financial strength ratings of our insurance subsidiaries and make it more difficult to maintain or obtain comparable ratings going forward. As rating agencies continue to evaluate the financial services industry, it is possible that rating agencies will heighten the level of scrutiny that they apply to financial institutions, increase the frequency and scope of their credit reviews, request additional information from the companies that they rate and potentially adjust upward the capital and other requirements employed in the rating agency models for maintenance of certain ratings levels. It is possible that the outcome of any such review of us would have additional adverse ratings consequences, which could have a material adverse effect on our results of operations, financial condition and liquidity. We may need to take actions in response to changing standards or capital requirements set by any of the rating agencies which could cause our business and operations to suffer. If the financial strength ratings of our insurance subsidiaries are downgraded, we anticipate that our sales of new policies will be adversely impacted and that we could

 

13


Table of Contents

experience substantial surrenders of existing policies. In order to improve or maintain their financial strength ratings, our insurance subsidiaries may limit the amount of dividends that they would otherwise pay to us. In that regard, we may implement business strategies to improve the RBC ratio of our insurance subsidiaries to a level anticipated by the rating agencies to maintain or improve our current rating. If we are unable to achieve this level, we may limit dividend payments from FGLIC to the extent necessary. We cannot guarantee these measures will be successful, and if FGLIC fails to maintain such a target RBC ratio, its financial strength rating could suffer. We cannot predict what actions rating agencies may take in the future, and failure to improve or maintain current financial strength ratings could adversely affect our financial condition and results of operations.

We are required to maintain minimum ratings as a matter of routine practice under our over-the-counter derivative agreements on forms promulgated by the International Swaps and Derivatives Association, Inc. (“ISDA”). Under some ISDA agreements, we have agreed to maintain certain financial strength ratings. A downgrade below these levels provides the counterparty under the agreement the right to terminate the open derivative contracts between the parties, at which time any amounts payable by us or the counterparty would be dependent on the market value of the underlying derivative contracts. Our current rating allows multiple counterparties the right to terminate ISDA agreements. As of June 30, 2013, the amount at risk for ISDA agreements which could be terminated based upon our current ratings was $227.3 million, which equals the fair value to us of the open over-the-counter call option positions. The fair value of the call options can never decrease below zero. See “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations—Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures about Market Risk—Credit Risk and Counterparty Risk”. No ISDA agreements have been terminated, although the counterparties have reserved the right to terminate the ISDA agreements at any time. Additionally, under certain insurance reserve financing arrangements, if FGLH were to take certain actions without the counterparties consent, and such actions resulted in a specified financial strength ratings downgrade, FGLH would be in default.

In certain transactions, we and the counterparty have entered into a collateral support agreement requiring either party to post collateral when the net exposures exceed predetermined thresholds. These thresholds vary by counterparty and credit rating. As of June 30, 2013 and September 30, 2012, no collateral was posted by our counterparties. Accordingly, the maximum amount of loss due to credit risk that we would incur if parties to the call options failed completely to perform according to the terms of the contracts was $227.3 million and $200.7 million at June 30, 2013 and September 30, 2012, respectively.

The amount of statutory capital that our insurance subsidiaries have and the amount of statutory capital that they must hold to maintain their financial strength ratings and meet other requirements can vary significantly from time to time and are sensitive to a number of factors outside of our control.

Our insurance subsidiaries are subject to regulations that provide minimum capitalization requirements based on RBC formulas for life insurance companies that establish capital requirements relating to insurance, business, asset, interest rate, and certain other risks.

In any particular year, statutory surplus amounts and RBC ratios may increase or decrease depending on a variety of factors, most of which are outside of our control, including, but not limited to, the following:

 

   

the amount of statutory income or losses generated by our insurance subsidiaries (which itself is sensitive to equity market and credit market conditions);

 

   

the amount of additional capital our insurance subsidiaries must hold to support business growth;

 

   

changes in reserve requirements applicable to our insurance subsidiaries;

 

   

our ability to access capital markets to provide reserve relief;

 

   

changes in equity market levels;

 

   

the value of certain fixed-income and equity securities in our investment portfolio;

 

   

changes in the credit ratings of investments held in our portfolio;

 

   

the value of certain derivative instruments;

 

   

changes in interest rates;

 

   

credit market volatility;

 

14


Table of Contents
   

changes in consumer behavior; and

 

   

changes to the RBC formulas and interpretation of the NAIC instructions with respect to RBC calculation methodologies.

The financial strength ratings of our insurance subsidiaries are significantly influenced by their statutory surplus amounts and capital adequacy ratios. Rating agencies may also implement changes to their internal models, which differ from the RBC capital model, that have the effect of increasing or decreasing the amount of statutory capital our insurance subsidiaries must hold in order to maintain their current ratings. In addition, rating agencies may downgrade the investments held in our portfolio, which could result in a reduction of our capital and surplus and our RBC ratio.

In extreme equity market declines, the amount of additional statutory reserves our insurance subsidiaries are required to hold for fixed indexed products may decrease at a rate less than the rate of change of the market value of the invested assets. This mismatch could result in a reduction of the capital, surplus or RBC ratio of our insurance subsidiaries. To the extent that an insurance subsidiary’s RBC ratios are deemed to be insufficient, we may seek to take actions either to increase the capitalization of the insurer or to reduce the capitalization requirements. If we are unable to accomplish such actions, the rating agencies may view this as a reason for a ratings downgrade.

While the amount of statutory reserves is not directly affected by changes in interest rates, additional statutory reserves may be required as the result of an asset adequacy analysis, and this analysis of cash flow testing is altered by rising or falling interest rates and widening credit spreads.

The failure of any of our insurance subsidiaries to meet its applicable RBC requirements or minimum capital and surplus requirements could subject it to further examination or corrective action imposed by insurance regulators, including limitations on its ability to write additional business, supervision by regulators or seizure or liquidation. Any corrective action imposed could have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition. A decline in RBC ratios also limits the ability of an insurance subsidiary to make dividends or distributions to us and could be a factor in causing rating agencies to downgrade the insurer’s financial strength ratings, which could have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition.

The stock of our primary operating subsidiary is subject to the security interest of its former owner.

Fidelity & Guaranty Life and FGLH have granted the security interests in the shares of capital of FGLH and FGLIC to OMGUK in order to secure our indemnity obligations under the stock purchase agreement relating to the FGLH Acquisition. We are currently in litigation with OMGUK over its obligation to pay us a $50 million purchase price adjustment under that agreement. In August 2013, we transferred all of our rights, title, interest, liabilities and obligations under the litigation, including the right to receive such purchase price adjustment, to HGI. Although we are not aware of any events or transactions that would obligate us to perform under the obligations secured by the pledges, if we were to fail to perform such obligations, OMGUK could foreclose on the pledged shares, which would have a material adverse effect on our financial condition and results of operations.

HGI has substantial indebtedness and has pledged its shares of our stock to secure a portion of such indebtedness.

HGI has substantial indebtedness and has pledged its shares of our stock to secure a portion of such indebtedness, which includes HGI’s $925.0 million of 7.875% senior secured notes due 2019 (the “HGI 2019 Notes”). If HGI were in default on the debt secured by this pledge, the holders of the HGI 2019 Notes, could foreclose upon these shares and sell them to third parties, resulting in a change of control of our Company. This could cause us to be required to repurchase debt issued by FGLH on unfavorable terms. See “—The indenture governing the 6.375% senior notes due 2021 issued by FGLH imposes significant operating and financial restrictions, which may prevent us from capitalizing on business opportunities”. In addition, HGI’s debt service requirements could result in decisions by our board of directors to pay dividends at a rate necessary to meet HGI’s cash requirements, which could leave us with less cash available to invest in attractive business opportunities.

 

15


Table of Contents

We and HGI are currently involved with certain ongoing law enforcement and regulatory investigations and may be the target of future litigation, law enforcement investigations or increased regulatory scrutiny.

The financial services industry, including the insurance sector, is sometimes the target of law enforcement and regulatory investigations or other actions resulting from such investigations. For example, FGLIC is currently under review by the New York State Department of Financial Services (“NYDFS”) related to the possible unauthorized sale of insurance by FGLIC within the State of New York. Resulting publicity about any such investigation or action may generate inquiries or investigations into or litigation against other financial services companies, even those who do not engage in the business lines or practices at issue in the original action. Responding to these inquiries, investigations and lawsuits, regardless of the ultimate outcome of the proceeding, is time-consuming and expensive and can divert the time and effort of our management from its business.

In addition, Philip A. Falcone is the Chairman and Chief Executive Officer of HGI, our parent company, and the ultimate controlling person of FGL. On August 19, 2013, the SEC announced that Mr. Falcone, Harbinger Capital Partners LLC (“HCP”) and certain of its affiliated entities (together with HCP, the “HCP Parties”) agreed to a settlement with the SEC to resolve all matters related to two pending civil actions filed by the SEC against the HCP Parties.

The HCP Parties agreed to pay a fine and make certain admissions of fact regarding activities relating to the HCP Parties. Mr. Falcone also agreed to be barred and enjoined for a five-year period from acting as or being an associated person of any “broker”, “dealer”, “investment adviser”, “municipal securities dealer”, “municipal adviser”, “transfer agent”, or “nationally recognized statistical rating organization” (after which Mr. Falcone may seek the consent of the SEC to have the bar and injunction lifted). Under the settlement, Mr. Falcone may continue to own and control HGI and serve as its Chief Executive Officer and Chairman of its board. 

The settlement was approved by the federal court overseeing the action. HGI and its subsidiaries, including us, are not parties to the settlement and the duties and obligations described therein are the duties and obligations of the HCP Parties and not of HGI, FGL or their respective subsidiaries. HGI may continue to own and control us.

In addition, on October 7, 2013, the NYDFS announced an agreement with Mr. Falcone, HGI, FGLH and Fidelity & Guaranty Life Insurance Company of New York (“FGL NY Insurance”) that Mr. Falcone will not exercise control, within the meaning of New York insurance law, over FGL NY Insurance or any other New York-licensed insurer for seven years (the “NYDFS commitment”). Pursuant to the NYDFS commitment, neither Mr. Falcone nor any employee of HCP shall serve as one of our officers or directors, or of any of our subsidiaries, nor may they be involved in any investment decisions made by us or our subsidiaries. Mr. Falcone also agreed to recuse himself from participating in any vote of the board of HGI relating to the election or appointment of officers or directors of such companies. Under the NYDFS commitment, FGLH also agreed to maintain FGL NY Insurance’s RBC level at no less than 225% company action level RBC ratio, and to establish a trust account funded with $18.5 million of cash or eligible securities to support that agreement. FGL NY Insurance agreed to file quarterly estimated RBC reports in addition to the annual reports required by law.

Neither FGL nor any of our directors, officers or subsidiaries were involved in the SEC settlement or any of the implicated activities. Mr. Falcone is not a director or officer of us or any of our subsidiaries and we do not expect either the SEC settlement or the NYDFS commitment to have any direct impact on our business and operations. However, we cannot be certain that our business will not suffer indirect consequences in dealing with third parties as a result of the publicity and the facts surrounding the SEC settlement and the fines imposed by the SEC on the HCP Parties, including potential counterparties and regulators who may be concerned about the implications of the SEC settlement and the HCP Parties’ affiliation with us.

Future legislation or regulation or governmental views on business practices in the financial services industry may result in us altering our practices in ways that could adversely affect our business and results of operations. It is impossible to predict the outcome of such investigations or actions, whether they will expand

 

16


Table of Contents

into other areas not yet contemplated, whether they will result in changes in regulation, whether activities currently thought to be lawful will be characterized as unlawful, or the impact, if any, of such scrutiny on the financial services and insurance industry or on us. Adverse publicity, governmental scrutiny, pending or future investigations by regulators or law enforcement agencies and/or legal proceedings involving us or our affiliates can also have a negative impact on our reputation and on the morale and performance of employees, and on business retention and new sales, which could adversely affect our business and results of operations.

Our business is highly regulated and subject to numerous legal restrictions and regulations.

State Regulation

Our business is subject to government regulation in each of the states in which we conduct business. Such regulation is vested in state agencies having broad administrative, and in some instances discretionary, authority with respect to many aspects of our business, which may include, among other things, premium rates and increases thereto, underwriting practices, reserve requirements, marketing practices, advertising, privacy, policy forms, reinsurance reserve requirements, acquisitions, mergers and capital adequacy, and is concerned primarily with the protection of policyholders and other customers rather than shareholders. At any given time, we and our insurance subsidiaries may be the subject of a number of ongoing financial or market conduct examinations, audits or inquiries. From time to time, regulators raise issues during such examinations or audits that could, if determined adversely, have a material impact on our business.

Recently we have received inquiries from a number of state regulatory authorities regarding our use of the U.S. Social Security Administration’s Death Master File (“Death Master File”) and compliance with state claims practices regulations and unclaimed property or escheatment laws. The NYDFS issued a letter and subsequent regulation requiring life insurers doing business in New York to use the Death Master File or similar databases to determine if benefits were payable under life insurance policies, annuities and retained asset accounts. Other states, including the state of Maryland (FGLIC’s state of domicile), have enacted laws which will impose requirements on insurers to periodically compare their in-force life insurance policies and annuities against the Death Master File or similar databases, investigate any identified potential matches to confirm the death of the insured and determine whether benefits are due and attempt to locate the beneficiaries of any benefits that are due or, if no beneficiary can be located, escheat the benefit to the state as unclaimed property. We have received notice of escheatment audits from several states. It is possible that these requirements will result in additional payments to beneficiaries, additional escheatment of funds deemed abandoned under state laws or administrative penalties and expenses. During Fiscal 2012, we incurred an $11 million benefit expense, net of reinsurance, to increase reserves to cover potential benefits payable resulting from this ongoing effort. While we believe that we have established sufficient reserves with respect to these matters, it is possible that third parties could dispute these amounts and additional payments or additional unreported claims or liabilities could be required or identified given the ongoing regulatory developments, the effects of which could be significant and could have a material adverse effect on our results of operations in any one period.

State insurance departments conduct periodic examinations of the books and records, financial reporting, policy and rate filings, market conduct and business practices of insurance companies domiciled in their states, generally once every three to five years. The Maryland Insurance Administration (“MIA”) is currently conducting its routine financial examination of FGLIC for the three-year period ended December 31, 2012. The NYDFS is completing a routine financial examination of FGL NY Insurance for the three-year periods ended December 31, 2009 and December 31, 2012, and the Vermont Department of Financial Regulation is conducting a routine financial examination of Raven Reinsurance Company (“Raven Re”) for the period from April 7, 2011 (commencement of business) through December 31, 2012. FGLIC is currently the subject of nine ongoing market conduct examinations in various states, including a review by the NYDFS related to the possible unauthorized sale of insurance by FGLIC within the state of New York. While FGLIC does not believe that any of the current market conduct examinations it is subject to will result in any fines or remediation orders that will be material to its business, market conduct examinations can result in monetary fines or remediation and generally require FGLIC to devote significant resources to the management of such examinations.

 

17


Table of Contents

NAIC

Although our business is subject to regulation in each state in which we conduct business, in many instances the state regulatory models emanate from the NAIC. State insurance regulators and the NAIC regularly re-examine existing laws and regulations applicable to insurance companies and their products. Changes in these laws and regulations, or interpretations thereof, are often made for the benefit of the consumer and at the expense of the insurer and, thus, could have a material adverse effect on our business, operations and financial condition. We are also subject to the risk that compliance with any particular regulator’s interpretation of a legal or accounting issue may not result in compliance with another regulator’s interpretation of the same issue, particularly when compliance is judged in hindsight. Under insurance guaranty fund laws in most states, insurance companies doing business therein can be assessed up to prescribed limits for policyholder losses incurred by insolvent companies. We cannot predict the amount or timing of any such future assessments. There is an additional risk that any particular regulator’s interpretation of a legal or accounting issue may change over time to our detriment, or that changes to the overall legal or market environment, even absent any change of interpretation by a particular regulator, may cause us to change our views regarding the actions we need to take from a legal risk management perspective, which could necessitate changes to our practices that may, in some cases, limit our ability to grow and improve profitability.

Some of the NAIC pronouncements, particularly as they affect accounting issues, take effect automatically in the various states without affirmative action by the states. Statutes, regulations, and interpretations may be applied with retroactive impact, particularly in areas such as accounting and reserve requirements. Also, regulatory actions with prospective impact can potentially have a significant impact on currently sold products. The NAIC continues to work to reform state regulation in various areas, including comprehensive reforms relating to life insurance reserves.

Both the NAIC and certain state insurance regulators have in recent months announced intentions to review the trend of hedge fund and private equity acquisitions of life insurance and annuity companies. Such reviews are ongoing and preliminary and they may result in stricter regulatory scrutiny or additional regulatory restrictions that could be adverse to our ability to grow through acquisitions or to our business generally.

Federal Regulation

At the federal level, bills are routinely introduced in both chambers of the U.S. Congress, which could affect insurance companies. In the past, Congress has considered legislation that would impact insurance companies in numerous ways, such as providing for an optional federal charter for insurance companies or a federal presence in insurance regulation, pre-empting state law in certain respects regarding the regulation of reinsurance, increasing federal oversight in areas such as consumer protection, solvency regulation, employee benefit plan regulation and other matters. We cannot predict whether or in what form reforms will be enacted and, if so, whether the enacted reforms will positively or negatively affect us or whether any effects will be material.

The Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act (the “Dodd-Frank Act”) makes sweeping changes to the regulation of financial services entities, products and markets. Certain provisions of the Dodd-Frank Act are or may become applicable to us, our competitors or those entities with which we do business, including, but not limited to:

 

   

the establishment of federal regulatory authority over derivatives;

 

   

the establishment of consolidated federal regulation and resolution authority over systemically important financial services firms;

 

   

the establishment of the Federal Insurance Office;

 

   

changes to the regulation of broker dealers and investment advisors;

 

   

changes to the regulation of reinsurance;

 

   

changes to regulations affecting the rights of shareholders;

 

18


Table of Contents
   

the imposition of additional regulation over credit rating agencies;

 

   

the imposition of concentration limits on financial institutions that restrict the amount of credit that may be extended to a single person or entity; and

 

   

the clearing of derivative contracts.

Numerous provisions of the Dodd-Frank Act require the adoption of implementing rules or regulations. In addition, the Dodd-Frank Act mandates multiple studies, which could result in additional legislation or regulation applicable to the insurance industry, us, our competitors or those entities with which we do business. Legislative or regulatory requirements imposed by or promulgated in connection with the Dodd-Frank Act may impact us in many ways, including, but not limited to:

 

   

placing us at a competitive disadvantage relative to our competition or other financial services entities;

 

   

changing the competitive landscape of the financial services sector or the insurance industry;

 

   

making it more expensive for us to conduct our business;

 

   

requiring the reallocation of significant company resources to government affairs;

 

   

increasing our legal and compliance related activities and the costs associated therewith; and

 

   

otherwise having a material adverse effect on the overall business climate as well as our financial condition and results of operations.

In recent years, the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission (the “SEC”) and state securities regulators have questioned whether FIAs, such as those sold by us, should be treated as securities under the federal and state securities laws rather than as insurance products exempted from such laws. Treatment of these products as securities would require additional registration and licensing of these products and the agents selling them, as well as cause us to seek additional marketing relationships for these products, any of which may impose significant restrictions on our ability to conduct operations as currently operated. On December 17, 2008, the Commission voted to approve Rule 151A under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended (“Rule 151A”), and apply federal securities oversight to FIAs issued on or after January 12, 2011. On July 12, 2010, however, the District of Columbia Circuit Court of Appeals vacated Rule 151A. In addition, under the Dodd-Frank Act, annuities that meet specific requirements, including requirements relating to certain state suitability rules, are specifically exempted from being treated as securities by the SEC. We believe that the types of FIAs FGLIC and FGL NY Insurance sell meet these requirements and therefore are exempt from being treated as securities by the SEC and state securities regulators. However, there can be no assurance that federal or state securities laws or state insurance laws and regulations will not be amended or interpreted to impose further requirements on FIAs.

We may also be subject to regulation by the U.S. Department of Labor (“DOL”) when providing a variety of products and services to employee benefit plans governed by the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as amended (“ERISA”). Severe penalties are imposed for breach of duties under ERISA.

Other Regulation

Other types of regulation that could affect us include insurance company investment laws and regulations, state adopted statutory accounting principles, antitrust laws, minimum solvency requirements, federal privacy laws, insurable interest laws and federal anti-money laundering and anti-terrorism laws.

Compliance with applicable laws and regulations is time-consuming and personnel-intensive, and changes in laws and regulations may materially increase the cost of compliance and other expenses of doing business. There are a number of risks that may arise where applicable regulations may be unclear, subject to multiple interpretations or under development or where regulations may conflict with one another, where regulators revise their previous guidance or courts overturn previous rulings, which could result in our failure to meet applicable standards. Regulators and other authorities have the power to bring administrative or judicial proceedings against

 

19


Table of Contents

us, which could result, among other things, in suspension or revocation of our licenses, cease and desist orders, fines, civil penalties, criminal penalties or other disciplinary action, which could materially harm our results of operations and financial condition. If we fail to address, or appear to fail to address, appropriately any of these matters, our reputation could be harmed and we could be subject to additional legal risk, which could increase the size and number of claims and damages asserted against us or subject us to enforcement actions, fines and penalties. See “Business—Regulation” for further discussion of the impact of regulations on our business.

We cannot predict what form any future changes in these or other areas of regulation affecting the insurance industry might take or what effect, if any, such proposals might have on us if enacted into law. In addition, because our activities are relatively concentrated in a small number of lines of business, any change in law or regulation affecting one of those lines of business could have a disproportionate impact on us as compared to other more diversified insurance companies.

Financial services companies are frequently the targets of litigation, including class action litigation, which could result in substantial judgments.

We, like other financial services companies, are involved in litigation and arbitration in the ordinary course of business. Although we do not believe that the outcome of any such litigation or arbitration will have a material adverse effect on our financial condition, it is possible our results of operations and cash flows could be materially affected by an unfavorable outcome. More generally, we operate in an industry in which various practices are subject to scrutiny and potential litigation, including class actions. In addition, we sell our products through IMOs, whose activities may be difficult to monitor. Civil jury verdicts have been returned against insurers and other financial services companies involving sales, underwriting practices, product design, product disclosure, administration, denial or delay of benefits, charging excessive or impermissible fees, recommending unsuitable products to customers, breaching fiduciary or other duties to customers, refund or claims practices, alleged agent misconduct, failure to properly supervise representatives, relationships with agents or other persons with whom the insurer does business, payment of sales or other contingent commissions and other matters. Such lawsuits can result in substantial judgments that are disproportionate to the actual damages, including material amounts of punitive non-economic compensatory damages. In some states, juries, judges and arbitrators have substantial discretion in awarding punitive and non-economic compensatory damages, which creates the potential for unpredictable material adverse judgments or awards in any given lawsuit or arbitration. Arbitration awards are subject to very limited appellate review. In addition, in some class action and other lawsuits, financial services companies have made material settlement payments.

Our reinsurers, including Wilton Re and Front Street, could fail to meet assumed obligations, increase their rates, or become subject to adverse developments that could materially adversely affect our business, financial condition and results of operations.

Our insurance subsidiaries cede material amounts of insurance and transfer related assets and certain liabilities to other insurance companies through reinsurance. For example, a material amount of liabilities were reinsured to Wilton Reinsurance Company (“Wilton Re”) in 2011 and to Front Street in 2012. As of June 30, 2013, the amount recoverable from Wilton Re and Front Street was $1.5 billion and $1.4 billion, respectively. Given our significant concentration of reinsurance with Wilton Re, if Wilton Re fails to perform its obligations under the various reinsurance treaties, such failure could have a material impact on our financial position. See “Business— Reinsurance—Wilton Re Transaction”. However, notwithstanding the transfer of related assets and certain liabilities, we remain liable with respect to ceded insurance should any reinsurer fail to meet the obligations assumed. Accordingly, we bear credit risk with respect to our reinsurers, including our reinsurance arrangements with Wilton Re. The failure, insolvency, inability or unwillingness of Wilton Re or other reinsurers to pay under the terms of reinsurance agreements with us could materially adversely affect our business, financial condition and results of operations.

Our ability to compete is dependent on the availability of reinsurance or other substitute financing solutions, both of which could involve the use of reinsurance affiliates referred to generally as “captives”. Premium rates

 

20


Table of Contents

charged by us are based, in part, on the assumption that reinsurance will be available at a certain cost. Under certain reinsurance agreements, the reinsurer may increase the rate it charges us for the reinsurance. Therefore, if the cost of reinsurance were to increase, if reinsurance were to become unavailable on commercially reasonable terms or at all, if alternatives to reinsurance were not available to us, if the use of captives were materially restricted through regulation, including certain general proposals under consideration by the NAIC, or if a reinsurer should fail to meet its obligations, our business, financial condition and results of operations could be materially adversely affected.

If a reinsurer loses its accredited reinsurer status in any state where we are licensed to do business, or captives upon which we rely are disqualified from providing reserve relief, we will not be entitled to take credit for reinsurance in that state if the reinsurer does not post sufficient qualifying assets in a qualifying trust or post qualifying letters of credit, and we would be required to establish additional reserves. Similarly, the credit for reinsurance taken by our insurance subsidiaries under offshore reinsurance agreements is, under certain conditions, dependent upon the offshore reinsurer’s ability to obtain and provide sufficient qualifying assets in a qualifying trust or qualifying letters of credit issued by qualifying lending banks. The cost of letters of credit, when available, continues to be very expensive in the current economic environment. Loss of reserve credit by an insurance subsidiary would require it to establish additional reserves and would result in a decrease in the level of its capital, which could have a material adverse effect on our profitability, results of operations and financial condition.

In recent years, access to reinsurance has become more costly for members of the insurance industry, including us. In addition, the number of life reinsurers has decreased as the reinsurance industry has consolidated. The decreased number of participants in the life reinsurance market resulted in increased concentration of risk for insurers, including us. If the reinsurance market further contracts, our ability to continue to offer our products on terms favorable to us could be negatively impacted, resulting in adverse consequences to our business, operations and financial condition.

In addition, reinsurers are facing many challenges regarding illiquid credit or capital markets, investment downgrades, rating agency downgrades, deterioration of general economic conditions and other factors negatively impacting the financial services industry generally. If such events cause a reinsurer to fail to meet its obligations, our business, financial condition and results of operations could be materially adversely affected. For example, one of our reinsurers, Scottish Re (U.S.), Inc. (“Scottish Re”), is currently operating under regulatory supervision.

Restrictions on our ability to use captive reinsurers could adversely impact our competitive position and results of operations.

Recently, the NAIC and NYDFS have been scrutinizing insurance companies’ use of affiliated captive reinsurers or off-shore entities. On June 11, 2013, NYDFS issued a highly critical report setting forth its findings to date relating to its inquiry into the life insurance industry’s use of captive reinsurance companies and recommending that (i) the NAIC develop enhanced disclosure requirements for reserve financing transactions involving captive reinsurers, (ii) the Federal Insurance Office, Office of Financial Research, the NAIC and state insurance commissioners conduct inquiries similar to NYDFS inquiry and (iii) state insurance commissioners consider an immediate national moratorium on new reserve financing transactions involving captive reinsurers until these inquiries are complete. Like many life insurance companies, we utilize captive reinsurers to satisfy statutory reserve requirements. If NYDFS or other state insurance regulators restrict the use of such captive reinsurers or if we otherwise are unable to continue to use captive reinsurers in the future, our ability to write certain products, or to hedge the associated risks efficiently and/or our RBC ratios and ability to deploy excess capital, could be adversely affected or we may need to increase prices on those products, which could adversely impact our competitive position and our results of operations.

 

21


Table of Contents

We could be forced to sell investments at a loss to cover policyholder withdrawals.

We offer certain products that allow policyholders to withdraw their funds under defined circumstances. In order to meet such funding obligations, we manage our liabilities and configure our investment portfolios so as to provide and maintain sufficient liquidity to support expected withdrawal demands and contract benefits and maturities. However, in order to provide necessary long-term returns, a certain portion of our assets are relatively illiquid. There can be no assurance that withdrawal demands will match our estimation of withdrawal demands. As interest rates increase, we are exposed to the risk of financial disintermediation through a potential increase in the number of withdrawals. Disintermediation risk refers to the risk that policyholders may surrender their contracts in a rising interest rate environment, requiring us to liquidate assets in an unrealized loss position. If we experience unexpected withdrawal activity, whether as a result of financial strength downgrades or otherwise, we could exhaust our liquid assets and be forced to liquidate other less liquid assets, possibly at a loss or on other unfavorable terms, which could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations. Additionally, we may experience spread compression, and a loss of anticipated earnings, if credited interest rates are increased on renewing contracts in an effort to decrease or manage withdrawal activity.

Interest rate fluctuations could negatively affect our business, financial condition and results of operations.

Interest rates are subject to volatility and fluctuations. For the past several years interest rates have trended downwards to historically low levels. In order to meet our policy and contractual obligations, we must earn a sufficient return on our invested assets. A prolonged period of historically low rates or significant changes in interest rates could expose us to the risk of not achieving sufficient return on our invested assets by not achieving anticipated interest earnings, or of not earning anticipated spreads between the interest rate earned on investments and the credited interest rates paid on outstanding policies and contracts. Additionally, a prolonged period of low interest rates in the future may lengthen liability maturity, thus increasing the need for a re-investment of assets at yields that are below the amounts required to support guarantee features of our contracts. Both rising and declining interest rates can negatively affect our interest earnings and spread income (the difference between the returns we earn on our investments and the amounts we must credit to policyholders and contractholders). While we develop and maintain asset liability management (“ALM”) programs and procedures designed to mitigate the effect on interest earnings and spread income in rising or falling interest rate environments, no assurance can be given that changes in interest rates will not materially adversely affect our business, financial condition and results of operations.

An extended period of declining interest rates or a prolonged period of low interest rates may also cause us to change our long-term view of the interest rates that we can earn on our investments. Such a change in our view would cause us to change the long-term interest rate that we assume in our calculation of insurance assets and liabilities under U.S. GAAP. This revision would result in increased reserves, accelerated amortization of DAC and VOBA and other unfavorable consequences. In addition, while the amount of statutory reserves is not directly affected by changes in interest rates, additional statutory reserves may be required as the result of an asset adequacy analysis, which is altered by rising or falling interest rates and widening credit spreads.

Additionally, our ALM programs and procedures incorporate assumptions about the relationship between short-term and long-term interest rates and relationships between risk-adjusted and risk-free interest rates, market liquidity and other factors. The effectiveness of our ALM programs and procedures may be negatively affected whenever actual results differ from these assumptions.

Changes in interest rates may also affect the attractiveness of certain of our products. For example, lower interest rates may result in decreased sales of certain of our insurance and investment products. However, during periods of declining interest rates, certain life insurance and annuity products may be relatively more attractive investments to consumers, resulting in increased premium payments on products with flexible premium features, repayment of policy loans and increased persistency or a higher percentage of insurance policies remaining in force from year to year during a period when our investments carry lower returns. As a result, we could become unable to earn our desired level of spread income.

 

22


Table of Contents

Our expectation for future interest earnings and spread income is an important component in amortization of DAC and VOBA and significantly lower interest earnings or spreads may cause us to accelerate amortization, thereby reducing net income in the affected reporting period.

Higher interest rates may increase the cost of debt and other obligations having floating rate or rate reset provisions and may result in lower sales of other products. During periods of increasing market interest rates, we may offer higher crediting rates on interest-sensitive products, such as universal life insurance and fixed annuities, and we may increase crediting rates on in-force products to keep these products competitive. A rise in interest rates, in the absence of other countervailing changes, will increase the net unrealized loss position of our investment portfolio which will decrease our accumulated other comprehensive income and shareholders’ equity as shown by the recent rapid increase in interest rates in the quarter ended June 30, 2013. Our unrealized loss was $217.3 million as of June 30, 2013 compared to $30.5 million as of September 30, 2012. In addition, if long-term interest rates rise dramatically within a six- to twelve-month time period, certain of our products may be exposed to disintermediation risk. Increases in crediting rates, as well as surrenders and withdrawals, could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.

Our investments are subject to market and credit risks. These risks could be heightened during periods of extreme volatility or disruption in financial and credit markets.

Our invested assets and derivative financial instruments are subject to risks of credit defaults and changes in market values. Periods of extreme volatility or disruption in the financial and credit markets could increase these risks. Underlying factors relating to volatility affecting the financial and credit markets could lead to OTTI of assets in our investment portfolio.

The value of our mortgage-backed investments depends in part on the financial condition of the borrowers and tenants for the properties underlying those investments, as well as general and specific economic trends affecting the overall default rate. We are also subject to the risk that cash flows resulting from the payments on pools of mortgages that serve as collateral underlying the mortgage-backed securities we own may differ from our expectations in timing or size. Cash flow variability arising from an unexpected acceleration in mortgage prepayment behavior can be significant, and could cause a decline in the estimated fair value of certain “interest-only” securities within our mortgage-backed securities portfolio. Any event reducing the estimated fair value of these securities, other than on a temporary basis, could have an adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition.

Significant continued financial and credit market volatility, changes in interest rates, credit spreads, credit defaults, real estate values, market illiquidity, declines in equity prices, acts of corporate malfeasance, ratings downgrades of the issuers or guarantors of these investments and declines in general economic conditions, either alone or in combination, could have a material adverse impact on our results of operations, financial condition or cash flows through realized losses, OTTI, changes in unrealized loss positions and increased demands on capital. As of June 30, 2013 and September 30, 2012, we had gross unrealized losses of $217.3 million and $30.5 million, respectively. In addition, our investment portfolio is concentrated in certain industries. As of June 30, 2013 and September 30, 2012, our most significant investment in one industry was our investment securities in the banking industry with a fair value of $1,944.6 million and $2,000.4 million, or 11.8% and 12.0%, respectively, of the invested assets portfolio. Our holdings in this industry include investments in 78 and 118 different issuers as of June 30, 2013 and September 30, 2012 with the top ten investments accounting for 34.9% and 36.1%, respectively, of the total holdings in this industry as of June 30, 2013 and September 30, 2012. In addition, market volatility can make it difficult for us to value certain of our assets, especially if trading becomes less frequent. Valuations may include assumptions or estimates that may have significant period-to-period changes that could have an adverse impact on our results of operations or financial condition.

We are exposed to credit loss in the event of nonperformance by our counterparties on call options. We seek to reduce the risk associated with such agreements by purchasing such options from large, well-established financial institutions, but there can be no assurance that we will not suffer losses in the event of counterparty

 

23


Table of Contents

nonperformance. As of June 30, 2013 and September 30, 2012, no collateral was posted by our counterparties as they did not meet the net exposure thresholds. Accordingly, the maximum amount of loss due to credit risk that we would incur if parties to the call options failed completely to perform according to the terms of the contracts was $227.3 million and $200.7 million at June 30, 2013 and September 30, 2012, respectively. See Note 5 to our audited consolidated financial statements for further discussion of credit risk.

Equity market volatility could negatively impact our business.

Equity market volatility can negatively affect our revenues and profitability in various ways, particularly as a result of guaranteed minimum withdrawal or surrender benefits in our products. The estimated cost of providing guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefits incorporates various assumptions about the overall performance of equity markets over certain time periods. Periods of significant and sustained downturns in equity markets, increased equity volatility or reduced interest rates could result in an increase in the valuation of the future policy benefit or policyholder account balance liabilities associated with such products, resulting in a reduction in our revenues and net income. The rate of amortization of DAC and VOBA costs relating to FIA products and the cost of providing guaranteed minimum withdrawal or surrender benefits could also increase if equity market performance is worse than assumed, hence materially and adversely impacting our results of operations and financial condition.

Credit market volatility or disruption could adversely impact our financial condition or results of operations.

Significant volatility or disruption in credit markets could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations. Changes in interest rates and credit spreads could cause market price and cash flow variability in the fixed income instruments in our investment portfolio. Significant volatility and lack of liquidity in the credit markets could cause issuers of the fixed-income securities in our investment portfolio to default on either principal or interest payments on these securities. Additionally, market price valuations may not accurately reflect the underlying expected cash flows of securities within our investment portfolio.

Changes in federal or state tax laws may affect sales of our products and profitability.

The annuity and life insurance products that we market generally provide the policyholder with certain federal income or state tax advantages. For example, federal income taxation on any increases in non-qualified annuity contract values (i.e., the “inside build-up”) is deferred until it is received by the policyholder. Non-qualified annuities are annuities that are not sold to a qualified retirement plan. With other savings investments, such as certificates of deposit and taxable bonds, the increase in value is generally taxed each year as it is realized. Additionally, life insurance death benefits are generally exempt from income tax.

From time to time, various tax law changes have been proposed that could have an adverse effect on our business, including the elimination of all or a portion of the income tax advantages described above for annuities and life insurance. Additionally, insurance products, including the tax favorable features of these products, generally must be approved by the insurance regulators in each state in which they are sold. This review could delay the introduction of new products or impact the features that provide for tax advantages and make such products less attractive to potential purchasers. If legislation were enacted to eliminate the tax deferral for annuities, such a change would have a material adverse effect on our ability to sell non-qualified annuities.

We may be required to increase our valuation allowance against our deferred tax assets, and may face restrictions on our ability to fully utilize such assets which could materially adversely affect our capital position, business, operations and financial condition.

Deferred tax assets refer to assets that are attributable to differences between the financial statement carrying amounts of existing assets and liabilities and their respective tax bases. Deferred tax assets in essence represent future savings of taxes that would otherwise be paid in cash. The realization of the deferred tax assets is

 

24


Table of Contents

dependent upon the generation of sufficient future taxable income, including capital gains. If it is determined that the deferred tax assets cannot be realized, a deferred tax valuation allowance must be established, with a corresponding charge to net income.

Based on our current assessment of future taxable income, including available tax planning opportunities, we anticipate that it is more likely than not that we will generate sufficient taxable income to realize all of our deferred tax assets as to which we do not have a valuation allowance. If future events differ from our current forecasts, the valuation allowance may need to be increased from the current amount, which could have a material adverse effect on our capital position, business, operations and financial condition.

In addition, we expect that the completion of this offering will give rise to an “ownership change” within the meaning of Sections 382 and 383 of the U.S. Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the “Code”), which is generally defined as a greater than 50% increase in equity ownership by “5% shareholders” (as that term is defined for purposes of Sections 382 and 383) in any three-year period. As a result, we expect that these provisions may limit our ability to use our existing net operating losses and certain other tax assets to reduce our income tax liabilities for tax periods after the date of this offering.

Our business model depends on the performance of various third parties including independent distributors, underwriters, actuarial consultants and other service providers.

We rely significantly on various third parties to provide services for our business operations. As such, our results may be affected by the performance of those other parties. For example, we are dependent upon independent distribution channels to sell our products and to perform underwriting functions and independent consultants to perform actuarial analyses and to manage certain of our assets. Additionally, our operations are dependent on various service providers and on various technologies, some of which are provided or maintained by certain key outsourcing partners and other parties.

Many of our products and services are complex and are frequently sold through third-party intermediaries. In particular, our insurance businesses are reliant on these intermediaries to describe and explain their products to potential customers. The intentional or unintentional misrepresentation of our products and services in advertising materials or other external communications, or inappropriate activities by our personnel or an intermediary, could adversely affect our reputation and business prospects, as well as lead to potential regulatory actions or litigation.

The third parties upon which we depend may default on their obligations to us due to bankruptcy, insolvency, lack of liquidity, adverse economic conditions, operational failure, fraud, loss of key personnel or other reasons. Such defaults could have a material adverse effect on our financial condition and results of operations. In addition, certain of these other parties may act, or be deemed to act, on behalf of us or represent us in various capacities. Consequently, we may be held responsible for obligations that arise from the acts or omissions of these other parties.

The loss of key personnel could negatively affect our financial results and impair our ability to implement our business strategy.

Our success depends in large part on our ability to attract and retain key people. Intense competition exists for key employees with demonstrated ability, and we may be unable to hire or retain such employees. Our key employees include investment professionals, such as portfolio managers, sales and distribution professionals, actuarial and finance professionals and information technology professionals. Additionally, our Chief Executive Officer is a party to an employment agreement providing for an employment term that expires on April 30, 2014 and automatically renews each year for an additional one-year period. While we do not believe that the departure of any particular individual would cause a material adverse effect on our operations, the unexpected loss of several of our senior management, portfolio managers or other key employees could have a material adverse effect on our operations due to the loss of their skills, knowledge of our business, and their years of industry

 

25


Table of Contents

experience as well as the potential difficulty of promptly finding qualified replacement employees. We also rely upon the knowledge and experience of employees involved in functions that require technical expertise in order to provide for sound operational controls for our overall enterprise, including the accurate and timely preparation of required regulatory filings and U.S. GAAP and statutory financial statements and operation of internal controls. A loss of such employees could adversely impact our ability to execute key operational functions and could adversely affect our operational controls, including internal controls over financial reporting.

Interruption or other operational failures in telecommunication, information technology and other operational systems, or a failure to maintain the security, integrity, confidentiality or privacy of sensitive data residing on such systems, including as a result of human error, could harm our business.

We are highly dependent on automated and information technology systems to record and process our internal transactions and transactions involving our customers, as well as to calculate reserves, value-invested assets and complete certain other components of our U.S. GAAP and statutory financial statements. We could experience a failure of one of these systems, our employees or agents could fail to monitor and implement enhancements or other modifications to a system in a timely and effective manner, or our employees or agents could fail to complete all necessary data reconciliation or other conversion controls when implementing a new software system or implementing modifications to an existing system. Despite the implementation of security and back-up measures, our information technology systems may be vulnerable to physical or electronic intrusions, viruses or other attacks, programming errors and similar disruptions. We may also be subject to disruptions of any of these systems arising from events that are wholly or partially beyond our control (for example, natural disasters, acts of terrorism, epidemics, computer viruses and electrical/ telecommunications outages). All of these risks are also applicable where we rely on outside vendors, including Dell, to provide services to us and our customers. The failure of any one of these systems for any reason, or errors made by our employees or agents, could in each case cause significant interruptions to our operations, which could harm our reputation, adversely affect our internal control over financial reporting, or have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition.

We retain confidential information in our information technology systems and those of our business partners, and we rely on industry standard commercial technologies to maintain the security of those systems. Despite our implementation of network security measures, our servers could be subject to physical and electronic break-ins, and similar disruptions from unauthorized tampering with our computer systems. While we perform annual penetration tests and have adopted a number of measures to protect the security of customer and company data and have not experienced a successful cyberattack, there is no guaranty that such an attack will not occur or be successful in the future. Anyone who is able to circumvent our security measures and penetrate our information technology systems could access, view, misappropriate, alter, or delete information in the systems, including personally identifiable customer information and proprietary business information. Information security risks also exist with respect to the use of portable electronic devices, such as laptops, which are particularly vulnerable to loss and theft. In addition, an increasing number of jurisdictions require that customers be notified if a security breach results in the disclosure of personally identifiable customer information. Any compromise of the security of our information technology systems that results in inappropriate access, use or disclosure of personally identifiable customer information could damage our reputation in the marketplace, deter purchases of our products, subject us to heightened regulatory scrutiny or significant civil and criminal liability and require us to incur significant technical, legal and other expenses.

In the event of a disaster such as a natural catastrophe, an industrial accident, a blackout, a computer virus, a terrorist attack or war, our information technology systems may be inaccessible to our employees, customers, or business partners for an extended period of time. Even if our employees are able to report to work, they may be unable to perform their duties for an extended period of time if our data or systems are disabled or destroyed. Any such occurrence could materially adversely affect our business, operations and financial condition.

 

26


Table of Contents

Our insurance subsidiaries’ ability to grow depends in large part upon the continued availability of capital.

Our insurance subsidiaries’ long-term strategic capital requirements will depend on many factors, including their accumulated statutory earnings and the relationship between their statutory capital and surplus and various elements of required capital. To support their long-term capital requirements, we and our insurance subsidiaries may need to increase or maintain their statutory capital and surplus through financings, which could include debt, equity, financing arrangements or other surplus relief transactions. Adverse market conditions have affected and continue to affect the availability and cost of capital from external sources. We are not obligated, and may choose not or be unable, to provide financing or make any capital contribution to our insurance subsidiaries. Consequently, financings, if available at all, may be available only on terms that are not favorable to us or our insurance subsidiaries. If our insurance subsidiaries cannot maintain adequate capital, they may be required to limit growth in sales of new policies, and such action could materially adversely affect our business, operations and financial condition.

New accounting rules, changes to existing accounting rules, or the grant of permitted accounting practices to competitors could negatively impact us.

We are required to comply with U.S. GAAP. A number of organizations are instrumental in the development and interpretation of U.S. GAAP, such as the SEC, the Financial Accounting Standards Board (“FASB”) and the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants. U.S. GAAP is subject to constant review by these organizations and others in an effort to address emerging accounting rules and issue interpretative accounting guidance on a continual basis. The FASB has issued an exposure draft regarding accounting for insurance contracts proposing that life insurance liabilities be accounted for on a fair value approach. The FASB proposal also contains implications for systems data communications with stakeholders, internal controls processes and resources. We cannot assure you that future changes to U.S. GAAP will not have a negative impact on us. U.S. GAAP includes the requirement to carry certain investments and insurance liabilities at fair value. These fair values are sensitive to various factors including, but not limited to, interest rate movements, credit spreads, and various other factors. Because of this, changes in these fair values may cause increased levels of volatility in our consolidated financial statements.

In addition, our insurance subsidiaries are required to comply with SAP. SAP and various components of SAP (such as actuarial reserving methodology) are subject to constant review by the NAIC and its task forces and committees as well as state insurance departments in an effort to address emerging issues and otherwise improve financial reporting. Various proposals are currently, or have previously been, pending before committees and task forces of the NAIC, some of which, if enacted, would negatively affect our insurance subsidiaries. The NAIC is also currently working to reform state regulation in various areas, including comprehensive reforms relating to life insurance reserves and the accounting for such reserves. We cannot predict whether or in what form reforms will be enacted and, if so, whether the enacted reforms will positively or negatively affect us. In addition, the NAIC Accounting Practices and Procedures manual provides that state insurance departments may permit insurance companies domiciled therein to depart from SAP by granting them permitted accounting practices. We cannot predict whether or when the insurance departments of the states of domicile of our competitors may permit them to utilize advantageous accounting practices that depart from SAP, the use of which is not permitted by the insurance departments of the states of domicile of us and our insurance subsidiaries. With respect to regulations and guidelines, states sometimes defer to the interpretation of the insurance department of the state of domicile. Neither the action of the domiciliary state nor action of the NAIC is binding on a state. Accordingly, a state could choose to follow a different interpretation. We can give no assurance that future changes to SAP or components of SAP or the grant of permitted accounting practices to its competitors will not have a negative impact on us.

Our risk management policies and procedures could leave us exposed to unidentified or unanticipated risk, which could negatively affect our business or result in losses.

We have developed risk management policies and procedures and expect to continue to enhance these in the future. Nonetheless, our policies and procedures to identify, monitor, and manage both internal and external risks

 

27


Table of Contents

may not effectively mitigate these risks or predict future exposures, which could be different or significantly greater than expected. These identified risks may not be the only risks facing us. Additional risks and uncertainties not currently known to us, or that we currently deem to be immaterial, may adversely affect our business, financial condition or operating results. We hedge our FIA index credits with a combination of static and dynamic strategies, which can result in earnings volatility. In addition, our FIA hedging strategy economically hedges the equity returns and exposes us to the risk that unhedged market exposures result in divergence between changes in the fair value of the liabilities and the hedging assets.

Difficult conditions in the economy generally could adversely affect our business, operations and financial condition.

A general economic slowdown could adversely affect us in the form of changes in consumer behavior and pressure on our investment portfolios. Concerns over the continuation of the Federal Reserve’s stimulus plan, the slow economic recovery, the level of U.S. national debt, the European sovereign debt issues, unemployment, the availability and cost of credit, the U.S. housing market, inflation levels, energy costs and geopolitical issues have contributed to increased volatility and diminished expectations for the economy and the markets. Our top five states for the distribution of our products are California, Texas, Florida, Pennsylvania and Michigan, and, as a result, any adverse economic developments in these states could have an adverse impact on our business. As a result of these and other concerns, consumer behavior could change, potentially resulting in decreased demand for our products and elevated levels of policy lapses, policy loans, withdrawals and surrenders. In addition, our investments, including investments in mortgage-backed securities, could be adversely affected as a result of deteriorating financial and business conditions affecting the issuers of the securities in our investment portfolio.

We may not be able to protect our intellectual property and may be subject to infringement claims.

We rely on a combination of contractual rights and copyright, trademark and trade secret laws to establish and protect our intellectual property. Although we use a broad range of measures to protect our intellectual property rights, third parties may infringe or misappropriate our intellectual property. We may have to litigate to enforce and protect our copyrights, trademarks, trade secrets and know-how or to determine their scope, validity or enforceability, which represents a diversion of resources that may be significant in amount and may not prove successful. The loss of intellectual property protection or the inability to secure or enforce the protection of our intellectual property assets could adversely impact our business and its ability to compete effectively.

We also may be subject to costly litigation in the event that another party alleges our operations or activities infringe upon that party’s intellectual property rights. We may also be subject to claims by third parties for breach of copyright, trademark, trade secret or license usage rights. Any such claims and any resulting litigation could result in significant expense and liability for damages or we could be enjoined from providing certain products or services to our customers or utilizing and benefiting from certain methods, processes, copyrights, trademarks, trade secrets or licenses, or alternatively, we could be required to enter into costly licensing arrangements with third parties, all of which could have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition.

Our business could be interrupted or compromised if we experience difficulties arising from outsourcing relationships.

In addition to services provided by third-party asset managers and actuarial consultants, we outsource the following functions to third-party service providers, and expect to continue to do so in the future: (i) new business administration, (ii) hosting of financial systems, (iii) servicing of existing policies, (iv) information technology development and maintenance, (v) call centers and (vi) underwriting administration of life insurance applications. If we do not maintain an effective outsourcing strategy or third-party providers do not perform as contracted, we may experience operational difficulties, increased costs and a loss of business that could have a material adverse effect on our results of operations. In addition, our reliance on third-party service providers that we do not control does not relieve us of our responsibilities and requirements. Any failure or negligence by such

 

28


Table of Contents

third-party service providers in carrying out their contractual duties may result in us becoming subjected to liability to parties who are harmed and ensuing litigation. Any litigation relating to such matters could be costly, expensive and time-consuming, and the outcome of any such litigation may be uncertain.

Moreover, any adverse publicity arising from such litigation, even if the litigation is not successful, could adversely affect our reputation and sales of our products.

We are exposed to the risks of natural and man-made catastrophes, pandemics and malicious and terrorist acts that could materially adversely affect our business, financial condition and results of operations.

Natural and man-made catastrophes, pandemics and malicious and terrorist acts present risks that could materially adversely affect our results of operations. A natural or man-made catastrophe, pandemic or malicious or terrorist act could materially adversely affect the mortality or morbidity experience of our business or our reinsurers. Such events could result in a substantial increase in mortality experience. Although we participate in a risk pooling arrangement that partially mitigates the impact of multiple deaths from a single event, claims arising from such events could have a material adverse effect on our business, operations and financial condition, either directly or as a result of their effect on our reinsurers or other counterparties. Such events could also have an adverse effect on lapses and surrenders of existing policies, as well as sales of new policies. While we have taken steps to identify and manage these risks, such risks cannot be predicted with certainty, nor fully protected against even if anticipated. In addition, such events could result in a decrease or halt in economic activity in large geographic areas, adversely affecting the marketing or administration of our business within such geographic areas or the general economic climate, which in turn could have an adverse effect on our business, operations and financial condition. The possible macroeconomic effects of such events could also adversely affect our asset portfolio.

We operate in a highly competitive industry, which could limit our ability to gain or maintain our position in the industry and could materially adversely affect our business, financial condition and results of operations.

We operate in a highly competitive industry. We encounter significant competition in all of our product lines from other insurance companies, many of which have greater financial resources and higher financial strength ratings than us and which may have a greater market share, offer a broader range of products, services or features, assume a greater level of risk, have lower operating or financing costs, or have different profitability expectations than us. Competition could result in, among other things, lower sales or higher lapses of existing products.

Our annuity products compete with fixed indexed, fixed rate and variable annuities sold by other insurance companies and also with mutual fund products, traditional bank investments and other retirement funding alternatives offered by asset managers, banks and broker-dealers. Our insurance products compete with those of other insurance companies, financial intermediaries and other institutions based on a number of factors, including premium rates, policy terms and conditions, service provided to distribution channels and policyholders, ratings by rating agencies, reputation and commission structures.

Consolidation in the insurance industry and in distribution channels may result in increasing competitive pressures on us. Larger, potentially more efficient organizations may emerge from such consolidation. In addition, some mutual insurance companies have converted to stock ownership, which gives them greater access to capital markets and greater ability to compete. The ability of banks to increase their securities-related business or to affiliate with insurance companies may materially and adversely affect sales of all of our products by substantially increasing the number and financial strength of potential competitors. Consolidation and expansion among banks, insurance companies and other financial services companies with which we do business could also have an adverse effect on our business, operations and financial condition if they demand more favorable terms than we previously offered or if they elect not to continue to do business with us following consolidation or expansion.

Our ability to compete is dependent upon, among other things, our ability to develop competitive and profitable products, our ability to maintain low unit costs, and our maintenance of adequate financial strength

 

29


Table of Contents

ratings from rating agencies. Our ability to compete is also dependent upon, among other things, our ability to attract and retain distribution channels to market our products, the competition for which is vigorous. We compete for marketers and agents primarily on the basis of our financial position, support services, compensation and product features. Such marketers and agents may promote products offered by other life insurance companies that may offer a larger variety of products than we do. Our competitiveness for such marketers and agents also depends upon the long-term relationships we develop with them. If we are unable to attract and retain sufficient marketers and agents to sell our products, our ability to compete and our revenues will suffer.

Our ability to maintain competitive policy expense costs is dependent upon the level of new sales and persistency of existing business.

Our ability to maintain competitive policy expense costs is dependent upon a number of factors, such as the level of new sales, persistency of existing business and expense management. A decrease in sales or persistency without a corresponding reduction in expenses may result in higher policy expense costs. Our business plan includes expense reductions, but there can be no assurance that such reductions will be achieved.

In addition, lower persistency may result in higher or more rapid amortization of VOBA costs, which would result in higher unit costs and lower reported earnings. Although many of our products contain surrender charges, such charges decrease over time and may not be sufficient to cover the unamortized DAC and VOBA costs with respect to the insurance policy or annuity contract being surrendered.

There may be adverse consequences if the independent contractor status of our IMOs is successfully challenged.

We sell our products through a network of approximately 200 IMOs representing approximately 19,000 independent agents and managing general agents. We currently treat these IMOs as independent contractors who own their own businesses. However, the tests governing the determination of whether an individual is considered to be an independent contractor or an employee are typically fact sensitive and vary from jurisdiction to jurisdiction. Laws and regulations that govern the status of the IMOs are subject to change or interpretation by various authorities. If a federal, state or local authority or court enacts legislation or adopts regulations or adopts an interpretation that changes the manner in which employees and independent contractors are classified or makes any adverse determination with respect to some or all of our independent contractors, we could incur significant costs in complying with such laws, regulations or interpretations, including, in respect of tax withholding, social security payments and recordkeeping, or we could be held liable for the actions of such independent contractors or may be required to modify our business model, any of which could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations. In addition, there is the risk that we may be subject to significant monetary liabilities arising from fines or judgments as a result of any such actual or alleged non-compliance with federal, state or local tax or employment laws. Further, if it were determined that our IMOs should be treated as employees, we could possibly incur additional liabilities with respect to any applicable employee benefit plan.

If we are unable to attract and retain national marketing organizations and independent agents, sales of our products may be reduced.

We distribute our annuity products through a variable cost distribution network which included approximately 200 IMOs and 19,000 independent agents as of June 30, 2013. We must attract and retain such marketers and agents to sell our products. Insurance companies compete vigorously for productive agents. We compete with other life insurance companies for marketers and agents primarily on the basis of our financial position, support services, compensation and product features. Such marketers and agents may promote products offered by other life insurance companies that may offer a larger variety of products than we do. Our competitiveness for such marketers and agents also depends upon the long-term relationships we develop with them. Our most important IMOs (those who are able to meet certain production targets) are referred to as “Power Partners”. We currently have 31 Power Partners that accounted for approximately 75% of our 2012 sales volume. While we have only lost three Power Partners in the last five years (two of which were terminated by FGL), there

 

30


Table of Contents

can be no guaranty that such relationships will continue in the future. If we are unable to attract and retain sufficient marketers and agents to sell our products, our ability to compete and our revenues would suffer.

We may be subject to an additional tax as a personal holding company on future undistributed personal holding company income if we generate passive income in excess of operating expenses (subject to certain exclusions relating to our life insurance subsidiaries).

Section 541 of the Code subjects a corporation (not including a life insurance corporation) that is a “personal holding company” (“PHC”) to a 20% tax on “undistributed personal holding company income” in addition to a corporation’s normal income tax. A corporation (not including a life insurance corporation) other generally is considered to be a PHC if (i) at least 60% of its adjusted ordinary gross income (excluding dividends paid by any non-consolidated life insurance subsidiary) is PHC Income (defined below) and (ii) more than 50% in value of its outstanding stock is owned, directly or indirectly, by five or fewer individuals (including, for this purpose, certain organizations and trusts) at any time during the last half of the taxable year. Personal holding company income (“PHC Income”) is comprised primarily of passive investment income (but does not include non-passive income such as insurance premiums or dividends paid by any non-consolidated life insurance subsidiary) plus, under certain circumstances, personal service income.

So long as individuals and their affiliates hold (directly or by attribution) more than 50% in value of our outstanding common stock, including through ownership of the outstanding common stock of HGI at any time during any future tax year, it is possible that we will be a PHC if at least 60% of our adjusted ordinary gross income consists of PHC Income (taking into account the rules and exclusions discussed above). In the past, we have not incurred the PHC tax. However, there can be no assurance that we will not be subject to this tax in the future, which, in turn, may materially and adversely impact our financial position, results of operations, cash flows and liquidity.

The indenture governing the 6.375% senior notes due 2021 issued by FGLH imposes significant operating and financial restrictions, which may prevent us from capitalizing on business opportunities.

The indenture governing the 6.375% senior notes due 2021 (the “Senior Notes”) issued by FGLH contains various restrictive covenants which limit, among other things, FGLH’s ability to:

 

   

incur additional indebtedness;

 

   

pay dividends or certain other distributions on its capital stock other than as allowed under the indenture;

 

   

make certain investments or other restricted payments;

 

   

place restrictions on the ability of subsidiaries to pay dividends or make other payments to FGLH;

 

   

engage in transactions with stockholders or affiliates;

 

   

sell certain assets or merge with or into other companies;

 

   

guarantee indebtedness; and

 

   

create liens.

In addition, if FGL or FGLH undergoes a “change of control” as defined in the indenture, each holder of Senior Notes will have the right to require us to repurchase their Senior Notes at a price equal to 101% of the principal amount and any accrued but unpaid interest. See “—The stock of our primary operating subsidiary is subject to the security interest of its former owner” and “—HGI has substantial indebtedness and has pledged its shares of our stock to secure a portion of such indebtedness”.

As a result of these restrictions and their effect on us, we may be limited in how we conduct our business and we may be unable to raise additional debt financing to compete effectively or to take advantage of new business opportunities. The terms of any future indebtedness we, or our subsidiaries, may incur could include more restrictive covenants.

 

31


Table of Contents

Our subsidiaries may not be able to generate sufficient cash to service all of their obligations and may be forced to take other actions to satisfy their obligations, which may not be successful.

Our subsidiaries’ ability to make scheduled payments on or to refinance their debt obligations, including the Senior Notes, depends on their financial condition and operating performance, which in turn are subject to prevailing economic and competitive conditions and to certain financial, business and other factors beyond their control. Our subsidiaries may not be able to maintain a level of cash flows from operating activities sufficient to permit them to pay the principal, premium, if any, and interest on indebtedness.

If our subsidiaries’ cash flows and capital resources are insufficient to fund our subsidiaries’ obligations, we could face substantial liquidity problems and may be forced to reduce or delay investments and capital expenditures, or to sell assets, seek additional capital or restructure or refinance indebtedness. Our ability to restructure or refinance our subsidiaries’ debt will depend on the condition of the capital markets and our financial condition at such time. Any refinancing of our subsidiaries’ debt could be at higher interest rates and may require compliance with more onerous covenants, which could further restrict our business operations. The terms of existing and future debt instruments may restrict us from adopting some of these alternatives. In addition, any failure to make payments on outstanding obligations on a timely basis would likely result in a reduction of our ratings, which could harm our ability to conduct our business and to incur additional indebtedness. In the face of such substantial liquidity problems, we may be required to dispose of material assets or operations to meet our obligations. We may not be able to consummate those dispositions and these proceeds may not be adequate to meet any obligations then due.

Conflicts of interest could arise with respect to transactions involving business dealings between us and HGI or its affiliates, including Front Street.

Following the completion of this offering, HGI will hold a majority of the outstanding shares of our common stock. In addition to being our majority stockholder, HGI also owns a number of other companies, some of which we engage with in business dealings from time to time, including Front Street, Salus and Five Island Capital Management. As a result, conflicts of interest could arise with respect to transactions involving business dealings between us and HGI or its affiliates, including potential business transactions and potential acquisitions of businesses or properties. HGI may favor its other companies in these business dealings, and the resolution of these conflicts may not always be in our best interest.

We have entered into business transactions with Salus Capital Partners, LLC (“Salus”) and would be adversely affected if Salus and third party borrowers were unable to meet their obligations.

We participate, and expect to continue to participate, in loans originated by Salus, a company indirectly owned by HGI that originates senior secured asset-based loans to unaffiliated third-party borrowers. Pursuant to a participation agreement among FGLIC, Front Street and Salus dated January 1, 2013, FGLIC expects to participate in up to $300.0 million of loans originated by Salus in 2013, of which $162.2 million was outstanding as of June 30, 2013. FGLIC purchased $117.5 million of asset-backed securities as part of a collateralized loan obligation (“CLO”) securitization completed by Salus in February of 2013. FGLIC may enter into further similar arrangements with Salus from time to time in the future. FGLIC would have to recognize a loss on the investments if the third-party borrowers are unable to meet their contractual loan requirements and the proceeds from liquidating the collateral is insufficient to repay the outstanding loan balance.

FGLIC also provides Salus with financing in the form of a $20.0 million unsecured term loan and an unsecured revolving loan of $10.0 million of which $0 was outstanding as of June 30, 2013. If Salus is unable to obtain access to capital and liquidity on a cost-effective and sustainable basis, Salus may face significant challenges which could result in Salus being unable to meet its loan obligations and FGLIC having to recognize a loss.

 

32


Table of Contents

We are a holding company with no operations of our own. As a consequence, our ability to pay dividends on our stock will depend on the ability of our subsidiaries to pay dividends to us, which may be restricted by law.

We are a holding company with limited business operations of our own. Our primary subsidiaries are insurance subsidiaries that own substantially all of our assets and conduct substantially all of our operations. Accordingly, our payment of dividends is dependent, to a significant extent, on the generation of cash flow by our subsidiaries and their ability to make such cash available to us, by dividend or otherwise. Our subsidiaries may not be able to, or may not be permitted to, make distributions to enable us to meet our obligations and pay dividends. Each subsidiary is a distinct legal entity and legal and contractual restrictions may also limit our ability to obtain cash from our subsidiaries.

Our insurance subsidiaries are subject to various statutory and regulatory restrictions and the ability of our insurance subsidiaries to pay dividends is limited by applicable insurance laws and regulations. See “Business—Regulation—Dividend and Other Distribution Payment Limitations”. The Maryland Insurance Code and the New York Insurance Law regulate the amount of dividends that may be paid in any year by FGLIC and FGL NY Insurance, respectively. This could limit both our ability to receive cash flow from our direct wholly owned subsidiary, FGLH, FGLH’s ability to receive cash flow from its direct wholly owned subsidiary, FGLIC, and FGLIC’s ability to receive cash flow from its direct wholly owned subsidiary, FGL NY Insurance.

Each year FGLIC may pay a certain limited amount of ordinary dividends or other distributions without being required to obtain the prior consent of the Maryland Insurance Commissioner. FGLIC is required to provide notice to the Maryland Insurance Commissioner of its intention to pay dividends that are deemed ordinary dividends and to request approval to pay dividends that are deemed extraordinary dividends. Pursuant to Maryland insurance law, ordinary dividends are payments, together with all other such payments within the preceding twelve months, that do not exceed the lesser of (i) 10% of FGLIC’s statutory surplus as regards policyholders as of December 31 of the preceding year; or (ii) the net gain from operations of FGLIC (excluding realized capital gains for the 12-month period ending December 31 of the preceding year and pro rata distributions made on any class of FGLIC’s own securities).

Dividends in excess of FGLIC’s ordinary dividend capacity (including any dividends in a year after FGLIC suffers a net loss from operations) are referred to as extraordinary and require prior approval of the Maryland Insurance Commissioner. In deciding whether to allow payment of an ordinary dividend or to approve a request to pay an extraordinary dividend, Maryland insurance law requires the Maryland Insurance Commissioner to consider the effect of the dividend payment on FGLIC’s surplus and financial condition generally and whether the payment of the dividend will cause FGLIC to fail to meet its required RBC ratio. In addition, Delaware law may impose requirements that may restrict our ability to pay dividends to holders of our common stock. FGLIC has not paid out extraordinary dividends since 2008, and there is no guarantee that FGLIC may not be required to request approval to pay an extraordinary dividend in the future or if requested, that such request would be approved by the Maryland Insurance Commissioner.

It is possible that in the future, our insurance subsidiaries may be unable to pay dividends or distributions to us in an amount sufficient to meet our obligations or to pay dividends due to a lack of sufficient statutory net gain from operations, a diminishing statutory policyholders surplus, changes to the Maryland or New York insurance laws or regulations or for some other reason. Further, the covenants in the agreement governing the existing indebtedness of FGLH significantly restrict its ability to pay dividends, which further limits our ability to obtain cash or other assets from our subsidiaries. If our subsidiaries cannot pay sufficient dividends or distributions to us in the future, we would be unable to meet our obligations or to pay dividends. This would negatively affect our business and financial condition as well as the trading price of our common stock.

 

33


Table of Contents

Risks Relating to This Offering and Our Common Stock

Our common stock has no prior public market and the market price of our common stock may be volatile and could decline after this offering.

Prior to this offering, there has not been a public market for our common stock, and an active market for our common stock may not develop or be sustained after this offering, which could depress the market price of our common stock and could affect your ability to sell your shares. We will negotiate the initial public offering price per share with the representatives of the underwriters and therefore, that price may not be indicative of the market price of our common stock after this offering. We cannot assure you that an active public market for our common stock will develop after this offering or, if it does develop, it may not be sustained. In the absence of an active public trading market, you may not be able to liquidate your investment in our common stock. An inactive market may also impair our ability to raise capital by selling our common stock, our ability to motivate our employees through equity incentive awards, and our ability to acquire other companies, products or technologies by using our common stock as consideration. In addition, the market price of our common stock may fluctuate significantly in response to various factors, some of which are beyond our control. In addition to the factors discussed in this “Risk Factors” section and elsewhere in this prospectus, the factors that could affect our stock price are:

 

   

industry or general market conditions;

 

   

domestic and international political and economic factors unrelated to our performance;

 

   

actual or anticipated fluctuations in our quarterly operating results;

 

   

changes in or failure to meet publicly disclosed expectations as to our future financial performance;

 

   

changes in securities analysts’ estimates of our financial performance or lack of research and reports by industry analysts;

 

   

action by institutional shareholders or other large shareholders, such as HGI, including sales of large blocks of common stock;

 

   

speculation in the press or investment community;

 

   

changes in investor perception of us and our industry;

 

   

changes in market valuations or earnings of similar companies;

 

   

announcements by us or our competitors of significant products, contracts, acquisitions or strategic partnerships;

 

   

changes in our capital structure, such as future sales of our common stock or other securities;

 

   

changes in applicable laws, rules or regulations, regulatory actions affecting us and other dynamics; and

 

   

additions or departures of key personnel.

In particular, we cannot assure you that you will be able to resell your shares at or above the initial public offering price. The stock markets have experienced extreme volatility in recent years that has been unrelated to the operating performance of particular companies. These broad market fluctuations may adversely affect the trading price of our common stock. In the past, following periods of volatility in the market price of a company’s securities, class action litigation has often been instituted against such company. Any litigation of this type brought against us could result in substantial costs and a diversion of our management’s attention and resources, which would harm our business, operating results and financial condition.

Future sales of a substantial number of shares by existing shareholders could cause our stock price to decline.

Sales of substantial amounts of our common stock in the public market following this offering, or the perception that these sales could occur, could cause the market price of our common stock to decline. Based on shares outstanding as of                      , upon completion of this offering, we will have              outstanding shares of

 

34


Table of Contents

common stock (or          outstanding shares of common stock, assuming exercise of the underwriters’ overallotment option in full). All of the shares sold pursuant to this offering will be immediately tradeable without restriction under the Securities Act unless held by “affiliates”, as that term is defined in Rule 144 under the Securities Act. The remaining              shares of common stock outstanding as of              will be restricted securities within the meaning of Rule 144 under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended (“Securities Act”), but will be eligible for resale subject to applicable volume, means of sale, holding period and other limitations of Rule 144. We also intend to enter into a registration rights agreement with HGI pursuant to which HGI will be able to require us to register shares it holds for resale. Any such sales will be subject to the terms of the lock-up agreements entered into among us, our executive officers and directors, the underwriters and HGI described below.

We, HGI, our executive officers and directors have agreed to a “lock-up”, meaning that, subject to certain exceptions, neither we nor they will sell any shares or demand registration of any shares without the prior consent of Credit Suisse, for 180 days after the date of this prospectus. Following the expiration of this 180-day lock-up period,              shares of our common stock will be eligible for future sale subject to applicable limitations of Rule 144. In addition, Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC (“Credit Suisse”), as representative of the underwriters, may, in its sole discretion and at any time without notice, release all or any portion of the securities subject to lock-up agreements entered into in connection with this offering. See “Underwriting”. See “Shares of Common Stock Eligible for Future Sale” for a discussion of the shares of common stock that may be sold into the public market in the future. As resale restrictions end, the market price of our common stock could decline if the holders of those shares sell them or are perceived by the market as intending to sell them.

In the future, we may issue additional shares of common stock or other equity or debt securities convertible into common stock in connection with a financing, acquisition, litigation settlement or employee arrangement or otherwise. Any of these issuances could result in substantial dilution to our existing shareholders and could cause the trading price of our common stock to decline.

If securities or industry analysts do not publish research or publish misleading or unfavorable research about our business, our stock price and trading volume could decline.

The trading market for our common stock will depend in part on the research and reports that securities or industry analysts publish about us or our business. We do not currently have and may never obtain research coverage by securities and industry analysts. If there is no coverage of our company by securities or industry analysts, the trading price for our stock would be negatively impacted. In the event we obtain securities or industry analyst coverage, or if one or more of these analysts downgrades our stock or publishes misleading or unfavorable research about our business, our stock price would likely decline. If one or more of these analysts ceases coverage of our company or fails to publish reports on us regularly, demand for our stock could decrease, which could cause our stock price or trading volume to decline.

Under our amended and restated certificate of incorporation, HGI and its affiliates, in some circumstances, any of our directors and officers who is also a director, officer, employee, member or partner of HGI and its affiliates, have no obligation to offer us corporate opportunities.

The policies relating to corporate opportunities and transactions with HGI to be set forth in our amended and restated certificate of incorporation to be effective prior to the completion of this offering (“amended and restated certificate of incorporation”) address potential conflicts of interest between us, on the one hand, and HGI and its officers and directors who are our directors or officers, on the other hand. Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation will provide that HGI and its affiliates and in some circumstances, any of our directors and officers who is also a director, officer, employee, member or partner of HGI and its affiliates, will not have any obligation to present to us, and HGI may separately pursue, or present to other of its subsidiaries, corporate opportunities of which they become aware, even if those opportunities are ones that we would have pursued if granted the opportunity. This includes Front Street, which may, for example, be interested in pursuing acquisitions of blocks of business or insurance companies that we may also be interested in pursuing. By

 

35


Table of Contents

becoming one of our shareholders, holders of our common stock will be deemed to have notice of and have consented to these provisions of our amended and restated certificate of incorporation. Although these provisions are designed to resolve conflicts between us and HGI and their respective affiliates fairly, conflicts may not be so resolved.

Future offerings of debt or equity securities that rank senior to our common stock may adversely affect the market price of our common stock.

If, in the future, we decide to issue debt or equity securities that rank senior to our common stock, it is likely that such securities will be governed by an indenture or other instrument containing covenants restricting our operating flexibility. Additionally, any convertible or exchangeable securities that we issue in the future may have rights, preferences and privileges more favorable than those of our common stock and may result in dilution of the percentage ownership of the holders of our common stock. We and, indirectly, our shareholders, will bear the cost of issuing and servicing such securities. Because our decision to issue debt or equity securities in any future offering will depend on market conditions and other factors beyond our control, we cannot predict or estimate the amount, timing or nature of our future offerings. Thus, holders of our common stock will bear the risk of our future offerings reducing the market price of our common stock and diluting the value of their stock holdings in us.

Fulfilling our obligations incident to being a public company, including with respect to the requirements of and related rules under the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, will be expensive and time-consuming, and any delays or difficulties in satisfying these obligations could have a material adverse effect on our future results of operations and our stock price.

We have historically operated as a private company, or as a subsidiary of a public company, and have not been subject to the same financial and other reporting and corporate governance requirements as a public company. After this offering, we will be required to file annual, quarterly and other reports with the SEC. We will need to prepare and timely file financial statements that comply with SEC reporting requirements. We will also be subject to other reporting and corporate governance requirements, under the listing standards of the applicable stock exchange and the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, which will impose significant new compliance costs and obligations upon us. The changes necessitated by becoming a public company will require a significant commitment of additional resources and management oversight which will increase our operating costs. These changes will also place significant additional demands on our finance and accounting staff, which may not have prior public company experience or experience working for a newly public company, and on our financial accounting and information systems. We may in the future hire additional accounting and financial staff with appropriate public company reporting experience and technical accounting knowledge. Other expenses associated with being a public company include increases in auditing, accounting and legal fees and expenses, investor relations expenses, increased directors’ fees and director and officer liability insurance costs, registrar and transfer agent fees and listing fees, as well as other expenses. As a public company, we will be required, among other things, to:

 

   

prepare and file periodic reports, and distribute other shareholder communications, in compliance with the federal securities laws and              listing standards;

 

   

define and expand the roles and the duties of our board of directors and its committees;

 

   

institute more comprehensive compliance, investor relations and internal audit functions; and

 

   

evaluate and maintain our system of internal control over financial reporting, and report on management’s assessment thereof, in compliance with rules and regulations of the SEC and the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board.

In particular, upon completion of this offering, the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 will require us to document and test the effectiveness of our internal control over financial reporting in accordance with an established internal control framework, and to report on our conclusions as to the effectiveness of our internal controls. In

 

36


Table of Contents

addition, upon completion of this offering, we will be required under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (the “Exchange Act”), to maintain disclosure controls and procedures and internal control over financial reporting. Any failure to implement required new or improved controls, or difficulties encountered in their implementation, could harm our operating results or cause us to fail to meet our reporting obligations. If we are unable to conclude that we have effective internal control over financial reporting, investors could lose confidence in the reliability of our financial statements. This could result in a decrease in the value of our common stock. Failure to comply with the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 could potentially subject us to sanctions or investigations by the SEC, applicable stock exchange, or other regulatory authorities.

Even if HGI sells sufficient common stock in the future so that it is no longer our majority shareholder, anti-takeover provisions in our charter documents and Delaware law could discourage, delay or prevent a change in control of our company and may affect the trading price of our common stock.

Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and amended and restated by-laws which will be filed immediately prior to the effectiveness of this offering include a number of provisions that may discourage, delay or prevent a change in our management or control over us that shareholders may consider favorable in the event that HGI sells sufficient stock in the future so that it is no longer our majority shareholder. For example, our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and amended and restated by-laws will:

 

   

authorize the issuance of “blank check” preferred stock that could be issued by our board of directors to thwart a takeover attempt;

 

   

establish a classified board of directors, as a result of which our board of directors will be divided into three classes, with members of each class serving staggered three-year terms, which prevents shareholders from electing an entirely new board of directors at an annual meeting;

 

   

limit the ability of shareholders to remove directors if HGI ceases to own at least 50% of the outstanding shares of our common stock;

 

   

provide that vacancies on our board of directors, including vacancies resulting from an enlargement of our board of directors, may be filled only by a majority vote of directors then in office;

 

   

prohibit shareholders from calling special meetings of shareholders if HGI ceases to own at least 50% of the outstanding shares of our common stock;

 

   

prohibit shareholder action by written consent, thereby requiring all actions to be taken at a meeting of the shareholders, if HGI ceases to own at least 50% of the outstanding shares of our common stock;

 

   

establish advance notice requirements for nominations of candidates for election as directors or to bring other business before an annual meeting of our shareholders; and

 

   

require the approval of holders of at least 66 2/3% of the outstanding shares of our common stock to amend our amended and restated by-laws and certain provisions of our amended and restated certificate of incorporation if HGI ceases to own at least 50% of the outstanding shares of our common stock.

These provisions may prevent our shareholders from receiving the benefit from any premium to the market price of our common stock offered by a bidder in a takeover context. Even in the absence of a takeover attempt, the existence of these provisions may adversely affect the prevailing market price of our common stock if the provisions are viewed as discouraging takeover attempts in the future. See “Description of Capital Stock—Anti-Takeover Effects of our Certificate of Incorporation, By-laws, and Delaware Law”.

Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and amended and restated by-laws may also make it difficult for shareholders to replace or remove our management. These provisions may facilitate management entrenchment that may delay, deter, render more difficult or prevent a change in our control, which may not be in the best interests of our shareholders.

Many states, including the jurisdictions where our principal insurance subsidiaries FGLIC and FGL NY Insurance are organized (Maryland and New York, respectively), have insurance laws and regulations that

 

37


Table of Contents

require advance approval by state agencies of any direct or indirect change in control of an insurance company that is domiciled in or, in some cases, has such substantial business that it is deemed to be commercially domiciled in that state. Therefore, any person seeking to acquire a controlling interest in us would face regulatory obstacles which may delay, deter or prevent an acquisition that shareholders might consider in their best interests.

Our management will have broad discretion over the use of the proceeds we receive in this offering and might not apply the proceeds in ways that increase the value of your investment.

Our management will have broad discretion to use the net proceeds we receive from this offering, and you will be relying on the judgment of our management regarding the use of these proceeds. Our management might not apply the net proceeds of this offering in ways that increase the value of your investment. In particular, we expect to use a portion of the net proceeds from this offering to pay a dividend to HGI of $             . We have not allocated the remaining net proceeds for any specific purposes, and there is no guarantee that the remaining net proceeds will be invested in a way that benefits new investors. Our management might not be able to yield a significant return, if any, on any investment of these net proceeds. You will not have the opportunity to influence our decisions on how to use the net proceeds from this offering. If we do not invest or apply the net proceeds from this offering in ways that enhance shareholder value, we may fail to achieve expected financial results, which could cause our stock price to decline.

Investors purchasing common stock in this offering will experience immediate and substantial dilution as a result of this offering and future equity issuances.

The initial public offering price per share will significantly exceed the net tangible book value per share of our common stock outstanding. As a result, investors purchasing common stock in this offering will experience immediate substantial dilution of $         a share, based on an initial public offering price of $        , which is the midpoint of the price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus. This dilution is due in large part to the fact that our earlier investors paid substantially less than the initial public offering price when they purchased their shares. Investors purchasing shares of common stock in this offering will contribute approximately     % of the total amount we have raised since our inception, but will own only approximately     % of our total common stock immediately following the completion of this offering. In addition, we have issued options to acquire common stock at prices significantly below the initial public offering price. To the extent outstanding options are ultimately exercised, there will be further dilution to investors in this offering. In addition, if the underwriters exercise their over-allotment option, or if we issue additional equity securities, investors purchasing common stock in this offering will experience additional dilution.

We expect to be a “controlled company” within the meaning of the applicable listing standards and, as a result, we will qualify for, and currently intend to rely on, exemptions from certain corporate governance requirements. You will not have the same protections afforded to shareholders of companies that are subject to such requirements.

After completion of this offering, HGI will hold more than 50% of our common stock, so we will qualify as a “controlled company” within the meaning of the corporate governance rules of the applicable stock exchange. Under these rules, a company may elect not to comply with certain corporate governance requirements, including:

 

   

the requirement that a majority of the board of directors consist of independent directors;

 

   

the requirement that we have a nominating and corporate governance committee that is composed entirely of independent directors with a written charter addressing the committee’s purpose and responsibilities;

 

   

the requirement that we have a compensation committee that is composed entirely of independent directors with a written charter addressing the committee’s purpose and responsibilities; and

 

   

the requirement for an annual performance evaluation of the nominating and corporate governance and compensation committees.

 

38


Table of Contents

Following the offering, we intend to utilize these exemptions. As a result, we will not have a majority of independent directors, our compensation committee and nominating and corporate governance committee may not consist entirely of independent directors and such board committees may not be subject to annual performance evaluations. Consequently, holders of our common stock will not have the same protections afforded to shareholders of companies that are subject to all of the applicable stock exchange’s corporate governance rules and requirements. Our status as a controlled company could make our common stock less attractive to some investors or otherwise harm our stock price.

Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation will designate the Court of Chancery of the State of Delaware as the exclusive forum for certain litigation that may be initiated by our shareholders, which could limit our shareholders’ ability to obtain a favorable judicial forum for disputes with us.

Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation will provide that the Court of Chancery of the State of Delaware will be the sole and exclusive forum for (i) any derivative action or proceeding brought on our behalf, (ii) any action asserting a claim of breach of a fiduciary duty owed to us or our shareholders by any of our directors, officers, employees or agents, (iii) any action asserting a claim against us arising under the General Corporation Law of the State of Delaware (“DGCL”) or (iv) any action asserting a claim against us that is governed by the internal affairs doctrine. By becoming a shareholder in our company, holders of our common stock will be deemed to have notice of and have consented to the provisions of our amended and restated certificate of incorporation related to choice of forum. The choice of forum provision in our amended and restated certificate of incorporation may limit our shareholders’ ability to obtain a favorable judicial forum for disputes with us.

Our Principal Shareholder’s interests may conflict with yours, and if the ownership of our common stock continues to be highly concentrated, it could prevent you and other shareholders from influencing significant corporate decisions.

Following the completion of this offering, HGI will own approximately     % of the outstanding shares of our common stock, assuming that the underwriters do not exercise their overallotment option. As a result, HGI is in a position to exercise significant influence over all matters requiring shareholder approval for the foreseeable future, including decisions regarding extraordinary business transactions, fundamental corporate transactions, appointment of members of our management, election of directors and our corporate and management policies.

Even if HGI reduces its beneficial ownership below 50% of our outstanding common stock, it will likely still be able to assert significant influence over our board of directors and certain corporate actions. Following the consummation of this offering, HGI will have the ability to designate for nomination for election at least a majority of our directors as long as HGI owns at least 50% of our common stock.

Because HGI’s interests may differ from your interests, actions HGI takes as our controlling shareholder or as a significant shareholder may not be favorable to you. For example, the concentration of ownership held by HGI could delay, defer or prevent a change of control of us or impede a merger, takeover or other business combination which another shareholder may otherwise view favorably. Other potential conflicts could arise, for example, over matters such as employee retention or recruiting, or our dividend policy.

 

39


Table of Contents

SPECIAL NOTE REGARDING FORWARD-LOOKING STATEMENTS

This prospectus includes forward-looking statements. Some of the forward-looking statements can be identified by the use of terms such as “believes”, “expects”, “may”, “will”, “should”, “could”, “seeks”, “intends”, “plans”, “estimates”, “anticipates” or other comparable terms. However, not all forward-looking statements contain these identifying words. These forward-looking statements include all matters that are not related to present facts or current conditions or that are not historical facts. They appear in a number of places throughout this prospectus and include statements regarding our intentions, beliefs or current expectations concerning, among other things, our consolidated results of operations, financial condition, liquidity, prospects and growth strategies and the industries in which we operate and including, without limitation, statements relating to our future performance.

Forward-looking statements are subject to known and unknown risks and uncertainties, many of which are beyond our control. We caution you that forward-looking statements are not guarantees of future performance and that our actual consolidated results of operations, financial condition and liquidity, and industry development may differ materially from those made in or suggested by the forward-looking statements contained in this prospectus. In addition, even if our consolidated results of operations, financial condition and liquidity, and industry development are consistent with the forward-looking statements contained in this prospectus, those results or developments may not be indicative of results or developments in subsequent periods. A number of important factors could cause actual results to differ materially from those contained in or implied by the forward-looking statements, including the risks and uncertainties discussed in “Risk Factors”. Factors that could cause actual results to differ from those reflected in forward-looking statements relating to our operations and business include:

 

   

the accuracy of management’s assumptions and estimates;

 

   

the accuracy of our assumptions regarding the fair value and future performance of our investments;

 

   

our and our insurance subsidiaries’ ability to maintain or improve financial strength ratings;

 

   

our and our insurance subsidiaries’ potential need for additional capital to maintain our and their financial strength and credit ratings and meet other requirements and obligations;

 

   

the stock of our primary operating subsidiary is subject to the security interest of its former owner;

 

   

our ability to manage our business in a highly regulated industry, which is subject to numerous legal restrictions and regulations;

 

   

regulatory changes or actions, including those relating to regulation of financial services affecting (among other things) underwriting of insurance products and regulation of the sale, underwriting and pricing of products and minimum capitalization and statutory reserve requirements for insurance companies, or the ability of our insurance subsidiaries to make cash distributions to us (including dividends or payments on surplus notes those subsidiaries issue to us);

 

   

the impact of our reinsurers failing to meet or timely meet their assumed obligations, increasing their rates, or becoming subject to adverse developments that could materially adversely impact their ability to provide reinsurance to us at consistent and economical terms;

 

   

restrictions on our ability to use captive reinsurers;

 

   

being forced to sell investments at a loss to cover policyholder withdrawals;

 

   

the impact of interest rate fluctuations;

 

   

the availability of credit or other financings and the impact of equity and credit market volatility and disruptions on both our ability to obtain capital and the value and liquidity of our investments;

 

   

changes in the federal income tax laws and regulations which may affect the relative income tax advantages of our products;

 

40


Table of Contents
   

increases in our valuation allowance against our deferred tax assets, and restrictions on our ability to fully utilize such assets;

 

   

being the target or subject of, and our ability to defend ourselves against or respond to, litigation (including class action litigation), enforcement investigations or regulatory scrutiny;

 

   

the performance of third parties including distributors, underwriters, actuarial consultants and other service providers;

 

   

the loss of key personnel;

 

   

interruption or other operational failures in telecommunication, information technology and other operational systems, or a failure to maintain the security, integrity, confidentiality or privacy of sensitive data residing on such systems;

 

   

the continued availability of capital required for our insurance subsidiaries to grow;

 

   

the impact on our business of new accounting rules or changes to existing accounting rules;

 

   

our risk management policies and procedures could leave us exposed to unidentified or unanticipated risk;

 

   

general economic conditions and other factors, including prevailing interest and unemployment rate levels and stock and credit market performance which may affect (among other things) our ability to sell our products and the fair value of our investments, which could result in impairments and OTTI, and certain liabilities, and the lapse rate and profitability of policies;

 

   

our ability to protect our intellectual property;

 

   

difficulties arising from outsourcing relationships;

 

   

the impact on our business of man-made catastrophes, pandemics, and malicious and terrorist acts;

 

   

our ability to compete in a highly competitive industry and maintain competitive unit costs;

 

   

adverse consequences if the independent contractor status of our IMOs is successfully challenged;

 

   

our ability to attract and retain national marketing organizations and independent agents;

 

   

adverse tax consequences if we generate passive income in excess of operating expenses;

 

   

significant operating and financial restrictions, which may prevent us from capitalizing on business opportunities;

 

   

the inability of our subsidiaries and affiliates to generate sufficient cash to service all of their obligations;

 

   

our subsidiaries’ ability to pay dividends to us;

 

   

the ability to maintain or obtain approval of the MIA and other regulatory authorities as required for our operations and those of our insurance subsidiaries; and

 

   

the other factors discussed in “Risk Factors”.

All forward-looking statements are made only as of the date of this prospectus and we do not undertake any obligation, other than as may be required by law, to update or revise any forward-looking statements to reflect future events or developments. Comparisons of results for current and any prior periods are not intended to express any future trends, or indications of future performance, unless expressed as such, and should only be viewed as historical data.

 

41


Table of Contents

USE OF PROCEEDS

Based upon an assumed initial public offering price of $         per share, which is the mid-point of the price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, we estimate that we will receive net proceeds from this offering of approximately $         million, after deducting estimated underwriting discounts and commissions in connection with this offering and estimated offering expenses payable by us of $         million. See “Underwriting”.

We intend to use the net proceeds we receive from this offering:

 

   

to pay a $         dividend to HGI; and

 

   

for working capital to support the growth of our business and other general corporate purposes, including the costs associated with being a public company.

We will have broad discretion over the way that we use the net proceeds of this offering received by us. See “Risk Factors—Risks Relating to This Offering and Our Common Stock—Our management will have broad discretion over the use of the proceeds we receive in this offering and might not apply the proceeds in ways that increase the value of your investment”.

A $1.00 increase (decrease) in the assumed initial public offering price of $         per share (the mid-point of the price range set forth on the front cover of this prospectus) would increase (decrease) the net proceeds to us from this offering by $        , assuming the number of shares offered by us, as set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, remains the same, and after deducting estimated underwriting discounts and commissions in connection with this offering and estimated offering expenses payable by us. An increase (decrease) of 1,000,000 shares in the number of shares offered by us would increase (decrease) the total consideration paid to us by new investors by $         million, assuming the initial public offering price of $         per share (the mid-point of the price range set forth on the front cover of this prospectus) remains the same and after deducting the underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us. The information discussed above is illustrative only and will adjust based on the actual public offering price and other terms of this offering determined at pricing.

 

42


Table of Contents

DIVIDEND POLICY

We are a holding company, and we have no operations. Our ability to pay dividends to holders of our common stock is limited by our ability to obtain cash or other assets from our subsidiaries, which may be limited or restricted by applicable insurance laws. These restrictions are based in part on the prior year’s statutory income and surplus. Such restrictions, or any future restrictions adopted by the states in which our insurance subsidiaries are domiciled, could have the effect, under certain circumstances, of significantly reducing dividends or other amounts payable to us by our subsidiaries without affirmative approval of state regulatory authorities. Further, the covenants in the agreement governing the existing indebtedness of FGLH significantly restrict the ability of FGLH to pay dividends, which further limits our ability to obtain cash or other assets from our subsidiaries and, as a result, our ability to pay dividends. Any payment of dividends will be at the discretion of our board of directors and will depend upon various factors then existing, including earnings, financial condition, results of operations, capital requirements, level of indebtedness, contractual restrictions with respect to payment of dividends, restrictions imposed by applicable law, general business conditions and other factors that our board of directors may deem relevant. See “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations—Liquidity and Capital Resources”.

We initially expect to pay quarterly cash dividends to holders of our common stock of $        , subject to the discretion of our board of directors in accordance with applicable law and dependent on a variety of factors including our financial condition, earnings, operating results, current and anticipated cash needs and plans for growth, legal requirements and other factors that the board of directors deems relevant. Under Delaware law, we can only pay dividends either out of “surplus”, which is defined as total assets at fair market value minus total liabilities, minus the aggregate par value of our outstanding stock, or out of the current or the immediately preceding year’s earnings. We cannot assure you that we will pay any dividends to our common stockholders, or as to the amount of any such dividends if our board of directors determines to do so.

We intend to use a portion of the net proceeds from this offering to pay a $         dividend to HGI in connection with the closing of this offering.

 

43


Table of Contents

CAPITALIZATION

The following table sets forth our capitalization as of June 30, 2013:

 

   

on an actual basis; and

 

   

on an adjusted basis to give effect to (i) the sale of shares of common stock in this offering, at an assumed initial public offering price of $         per share, the mid-point of the range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, after deducting estimated underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us, and (ii) the use of the net proceeds therefrom as described in “Use of Proceeds”. Each $1.00 increase (decrease) in the assumed initial public offering price of $         per share, the mid-point of the range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, would increase (decrease) our total shareholders’ equity and total capitalization by $         million (assuming no exercise of the underwriters’ over-allotment option).

 

     As of June 30, 2013  
     Actual
(unaudited)
     As Adjusted
(unaudited)
 
     (in thousands, except per share data)  

Long-term debt (a)

     

Senior Notes

   $ 300,000       $ 300,000   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

   $ 300,000       $ 300,000   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Shareholders’ equity

     

Common stock, $0.01 par value per share,              shares authorized: (i) Actual:              shares issued and outstanding and (ii) As adjusted:              shares issued and outstanding(b)

   $                    $                

Additional paid-in capital

     525,992      

Retained earnings

     584,246      

Accumulated other comprehensive income

     175,402      

Total shareholders’ equity

   $ 1,285,640       $                

Total capitalization

   $ 1,585,640       $                

 

(a) Does not include FGLIC’s reserve facilities used to support its statutory reserves. See “Business—Reserve Facilities”.

 

(b) Harbinger F&G, LLC, a Delaware limited liability company, converted into a Delaware corporation, pursuant to a statutory conversion, and in connection with the statutory conversion, issued common stock to HGI, the sole member of Harbinger F&G, LLC. As of June 30, 2013, and prior to the statutory conversion, Harbinger F&G, LLC had no shares of common stock.

Our capitalization presented above is illustrative only and our capitalization following the completion of this offering will be adjusted based on the actual initial public offering price. You should read this table in conjunction with the sections of this prospectus entitled “Selected Consolidated Financial and Other Data”, “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” and our consolidated financial statements and related notes included elsewhere in this prospectus.

 

44


Table of Contents

DILUTION

If you invest in our common stock, your ownership interest will be immediately diluted to the extent of the difference between the initial public offering price per share of our common stock and the as adjusted net tangible book value per share of our common stock immediately after this offering.

Our net tangible book value as of June 30, 2013 was $1,285.6 million, and our net tangible book value per share was $        . Net tangible book value per share before the offering has been determined by dividing net tangible book value (total book value of tangible assets less total liabilities) by the number of shares of common stock outstanding at June 30, 2013 after giving effect to our statutory conversion on August 26, 2013 and a     -for-     stock split of our common stock effected on                      2013.

After giving effect to the sale of              shares of common stock sold by us in this offering at an assumed initial public offering price of $         per share (the mid-point of the price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus) and after deducting the underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us and the application of the net proceeds therefrom as described in “Use of Proceeds”, our as adjusted net tangible book value at June 30, 2013 would have been $         million, or $         per share. This represents an immediate increase in as adjusted net tangible book value per share of $         to the existing shareholders and an immediate dilution of $         to new investors who purchase shares in this offering. The following table illustrates this per share dilution to new investors:

 

Assumed initial public offering price per share

      $                

Net tangible book value per share as of June 30, 2013

   $                   

Increase in net tangible book value per share attributable to new investors in this offering

     
  

 

 

    

As adjusted net tangible book value per share after this offering

     
     

 

 

 

Dilution in as adjusted net tangible book value per share to new investors

      $                
     

 

 

 

A $1.00 increase (decrease) in the assumed initial public offering price of $         per share (the mid-point of the price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus) would increase (decrease) total consideration paid by new investors by $         million, assuming that the number of shares offered by us set forth on the front cover of this prospectus remains the same, and after deducting the underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us. An increase (decrease) of 1,000,000 shares in the number of shares offered by us would increase (decrease) the total consideration paid to us by new investors by $         million, assuming the assumed initial public offering price of $         per share (the mid-point of the price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus) remains the same and after deducting the underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us.

In addition, we may choose to raise additional capital due to market conditions or strategic considerations even if we believe we have sufficient funds for our current or future operating plans. To the extent that additional capital is raised through the sale of equity or convertible debt securities, the issuance of such securities could result in further dilution to our shareholders.

 

45


Table of Contents

SELECTED HISTORICAL CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL DATA

The following table sets forth, for the periods and as of the dates indicated, our selected predecessor and successor historical consolidated financial data. For financial statement purposes relative to the FGLH Acquisition, we have identified FGLH as the predecessor and FGL as the successor. We have prepared the selected financial data, other than statutory data, in conformity with U.S. GAAP. We have derived the selected predecessor financial data for the year ended December 31, 2010 and for the period from January 1, 2011 through April 5, 2011 from the audited consolidated financial statements of FGLH included elsewhere in this prospectus. We have derived selected predecessor financial data as of December 31, 2010, and as of and for the years ended December 31, 2009 and 2008 from the audited consolidated financial statements of FGLH not included in this prospectus. We have derived the selected successor financial data: (i) as of and for the year ended September 30, 2012, as of September 30, 2011 and for the period of April 6, 2011 through September 30, 2011 from the audited consolidated financial statements of FGL included elsewhere in this prospectus; and (ii) as of and for the nine months ended June 30, 2013 and for the nine months ended June 30, 2012 from the unaudited interim condensed consolidated financial statements of FGL included elsewhere in this prospectus. We have derived selected financial and operating data as of June 30, 2012 and April 5, 2011 from the unaudited interim condensed consolidated financial statements of FGL not included in this prospectus. Our unaudited interim condensed consolidated financial statements have been prepared on the same basis as the audited consolidated financial statements and notes thereto and, in the opinion of management, include all adjustments (consisting of normal recurring adjustments) necessary for a fair statement of the information for the unaudited interim periods. Our historical results are not necessarily indicative of results to be expected in any future period, and our operating results for interim periods are not necessarily indicative of the results that may be expected for the entire fiscal year.

We have derived statutory data from the statements filed by our insurance subsidiaries with regulatory authorities and have prepared the statutory data in accordance with SAP, which vary in certain respects from U.S. GAAP. Statutory data, except for the years ended December 31, 2010, 2009 and 2008, are unaudited.

You should read the following information in conjunction with the more detailed information contained in “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations”, including “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations—Presentation of Financial Information” and our consolidated financial statements and related notes appearing elsewhere in this prospectus.

 

46


Table of Contents
    FIDELITY & GUARANTY LIFE
(SUCCESSOR)
    FIDELITY & GUARANTY LIFE HOLDINGS, INC.
(PREDECESSOR)
 
    NINE MONTHS
ENDED
    YEAR ENDED
SEPTEMBER 30,

2012
    PERIOD FROM
APRIL 6, 2011 –
SEPTEMBER 30,

2011
    PERIOD FROM
JANUARY 1,
2011 – APRIL 5,

2011
    YEAR ENDED
DECEMBER 31,

2010
    YEAR ENDED
DECEMBER 31,

2009
    YEAR ENDED
DECEMBER 31,

2008
 

(in millions, except share amounts)

  JUNE 30,
2013
    JUNE 30,
2012
             
    (unaudited)     (unaudited)                                      

Revenues:

                 

Premiums

  $ 46.9      $ 42.2      $ 55.3      $ 39.0      $ 53.7      $ 220.0      $ 252.4      $ 273.8   

Net investment income

    522.8        537.6        716.2        369.8        232.6        915.6        957.7        1,004.1   

Net investment gains (losses)

    411.5        254.6        410.0        (166.9     84.5        60.1        (138.1     (969.6

Insurance and investment product fees and other

    44.4        28.2        40.3        48.9        23.8        108.3        112.1        119.4   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total revenues

    1,025.6        862.6        1,221.8        290.8        394.6        1,304.0        1,184.1        427.7   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Benefits and expenses:

                 

Benefits and other changes in policy reserves

    431.7        559.7        777.4        247.6        228.7        863.0        1,097.3        826.4   

Acquisition and operating expenses, net of deferrals

    76.0        101.4        123.9        75.8        23.1        100.9        150.5        155.2   

Amortization of intangibles

    163.1        112.0        160.7        (11.1     131.7        273.0        170.6        294.6   

Goodwill impairment

    —          —          —          —          —          —          —          112.8   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total benefits and expenses

    670.8        773.1        1,062.0        312.3        383.5        1,236.9        1,418.4        1,389.0   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating income (loss)

    354.8        89.5        159.8        (21.5     11.1        67.1        (234.3     (961.3

Interest (expense)(a)

    (5.9     (1.9     (2.6     (1.9     (5.9     (25.0     (19.8     —     

Bargain purchase gain from business acquisition

    —          —          —          158.3        —          —          —          —     

Gain on contingent purchase price reduction

    —          41.0        41.0        —          —          —          —          —     

Other income, net

    0.2        0.1        0.2        —          —          —          —          —     
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Income before income taxes

    349.1        128.7        198.4        134.9        5.2        42.1        (254.1     (961.3

Income tax (expense) benefit

    (112.1     (11.8     145.7        41.7        7.8        130.1        50.4        121.9   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net income

  $ 237.0      $ 116.9      $ 344.1      $ 176.6      $ 13.0      $ 172.2      $ (203.7   $ (839.4
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Earnings per share:(b)

                 

Net earnings per share

                 

Common shares outstanding

                 
 

Balance Sheet Data (as of period end):

                 

Cash and cash equivalents

  $ 1,003.0      $ 1,563.6      $ 1,054.6      $ 820.9      $ 904.7      $ 639.2      $ 823.3      $ 967.9   

Total investments

    16,419.9        15,549.8        16,556.5        15,751.1        15,818.9        15,906.6        15,135.4        13,434.3   

Total assets

    21,012.6        20,369.8        20,990.3        19,408.1        20,587.9        20,612.8        20,671.7        19,634.2   

Contractholder funds

    15,342.7        15,285.8        15,290.5        14,550.0        14,967.3        15,081.7        15,241.5        15,838.8   

Future policy benefits

    3,576.2        3,602.7        3,614.8        3,598.2        3,464.6        3,474.0        3,469.6        3,524.8   

Notes payable

    300.0        —          —          95.0        248.5        244.6        244.8        —     

Total equity

    1,285.6        895.6        1,290.8        675.4        1,351.1        1,344.6        936.0        (382.5

Total equity excluding AOCI

    1,110.2        615.5        856.3        515.9        1,329.9        1,317.0        1,147.9        23.4   
 

Statutory Data (as of period end)(b):

                 

Statutory capital and surplus

  $ 1,102.9      $ 850.7      $ 861.6      $ 833.4      $ 922.6      $ 902.1      $ 816.4      $ 802.7   

Total adjusted capital

  $ 1,167.4      $ 883.5      $ 901.4      $ 861.6      $ 940.2      $ 902.4      $ 818.7      $ 805.1   

 

(a) Interest expense has been reclassified out of “Benefits and expenses” in the predecessor periods to conform with the presentation of the financial statements in the successor periods.
(b) Common shares outstanding and pre-share amounts gives retroactive effect to our statutory conversion on August 26, 2013 and the         -for-         stock split effected on                 , 2013.
(c) We have derived the statutory data from statements filed by our insurance subsidiaries with regulatory authorities which are prepared in accordance with SAP, which vary in certain respects from U.S. GAAP. See Note 17, Insurance Subsidiary Financial Information, in the audited consolidated financial statements for the year ended September 30, 2012, for a discussion of material differences between SAP and U.S. GAAP.

 

47


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION

AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

You should read the following discussion and analysis of our financial condition and results of operations in conjunction with “Prospectus Summary—Summary Historical Consolidated Financial and Operating Data”, “Selected Historical Consolidated Financial Data” and our consolidated financial statements and related notes included elsewhere in this prospectus. This discussion contains forward-looking statements and involves numerous risks and uncertainties, including, but not limited to those described in the “Risk Factors” section of this prospectus. Actual results may differ materially from those contained in any forward-looking statements as a result of various factors. You should read “Special Note Regarding Forward-Looking Statements” and “Risk Factors”.

Presentation of Financial Information

The FGLH Acquisition that was completed on April 6, 2011 resulted in the application of the acquisition method under U.S. GAAP, which required the total purchase price of the acquisition to be allocated to the assets acquired and liabilities assumed based on their acquisition date fair values. For financial statement purposes relative to the FGLH Acquisition, FGLH has been identified as the predecessor and FGL as successor. In addition, we have revised our financial reporting period to coincide with that of HGI and its other affiliates. These changes have significantly affected the presentation of our financial information, including in the following respects:

 

   

Diminished Comparability of Pre- and Post-acquisition Financial Condition and Results of Operations . The application of the acquisition method had a significant impact on, among other things, intangible assets related to our life and annuity portfolio. Because these assets are amortized through income over time, this adjustment also affected the comparability of our results of operations before and after the FGLH Acquisition. For example, the value of DAC and VOBA at December 31, 2010, was $1,764.9 million, after net amortization expense of $273.0 million for the twelve months ended December 31, 2010. In contrast, the total fair value of our insurance intangible assets (VOBA) at April 6, 2011 after the application of the acquisition method was $577.2 million, and the amortization charge for the period from April 6, 2011 to September 30, 2011 was negative $11.1 million.

The application of the acquisition method also had a significant impact on our investment portfolio, which was reset to fair value on the acquisition date. Because the amount of net premium over par value is amortized through net investment income over time, this adjustment resulted in an additional $41.9 million of premium amortization for the period from April 6, 2011 to September 30, 2011. Additionally, following the FGLH Acquisition, we ceded the majority of our life insurance business to Wilton Re, with the exception of life insurance products that contain return of premium riders, which reduced our post-acquisition premium revenue and benefit and expenses.

 

   

New Financial Reporting Periods . Prior to the FGLH Acquisition, FGLH had a fiscal year end of December 31. The Company has a fiscal year end of September 30 with fiscal quarters that end on the last day of each quarter. As a result, references to Fiscal Year 2012 refer to the twelve months ended September 30, 2012.

Certain financial data relating to FGLIC and our other insurance subsidiaries have been derived from their statutory financial statements, which are based on SAP permitted or prescribed by the insurance regulator in their state of domicile. Statutory accounting varies in certain respects from U.S. GAAP. See Note 17 to our audited consolidated financial statements for a discussion of these differences. In particular, our statutory financial statements continue to apply a December 31 calendar year end, as they did before the FGLH Acquisition, and such financial statements were not subject to the acquisition method adjustments, which only affected our U.S. GAAP financial statements.

 

48


Table of Contents

Due to these changes, as well as significant changes in our business strategy since the FGLH Acquisition, we do not believe it would be useful to compare our results of operations in pre- and post-acquisition periods. Therefore, our “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” addresses the following periods:

 

   

Nine Months ended June 30, 2013 compared to Nine Months ended June 30, 2012 . We refer to these periods as the Fiscal 2013 Nine Months and the Fiscal 2012 Nine Months, respectively. The unaudited interim condensed consolidated financial statements for the Fiscal 2013 Nine Months and the Fiscal 2012 Nine Months, respectively, are included in this prospectus. Operating results for interim periods are not necessarily indicative of the results that may be expected for the entire fiscal year.

 

   

Fiscal Year Ended September 30, 2012. We refer to this period as Fiscal Year 2012. We have provided a discussion of this period without comparison to prior or subsequent periods, as it is the first full annual period subsequent to the FGLH Acquisition. As such, we do not believe it would be useful to compare our results of operations in pre- and post-acquisition periods.

 

   

Period from April 6, 2011 through September 30, 2011 . We have provided a discussion of this period without comparison to prior or subsequent periods, as it represents a stub period subsequent to the FGLH Acquisition. As such, we do not believe it would be useful to compare our results of operations in pre- and post-acquisition periods.

 

   

Period from January 1, 2011 through April 5, 2011 . We have provided a discussion of this period without comparison to prior or subsequent periods, as it is represents a stub period prior to the FGLH Acquisition. As such, we do not believe it would be useful to compare our results of operations in pre- and post-acquisition periods.

 

   

Year Ended December 31, 2010 . We have provided a discussion of this period without comparison to prior or subsequent periods, as it is the last period prior to the FGLH Acquisition. As such, we do not believe it would be useful to compare our results of operations in pre- and post-acquisition periods.

Overview

We provide our principal life and annuity products through our insurance subsidiaries—FGLIC and FGL NY Insurance. Our customers range across a variety of age groups and are concentrated in the middle-income market. Our fixed indexed annuities provide for pre-retirement wealth accumulation and post-retirement income management. Our life insurance provides wealth protection and transfer opportunities through indexed universal life products. Life and annuity products are primarily distributed through IMOs and independent insurance agents

Since the FGLH Acquisition, we have made several significant changes to our business. We have ceded the majority of our life insurance business, with the exception of traditional life products that contain return of premium riders, to Wilton Re to transfer the risk of the lifetime guarantee on a large portion of the universal life insurance line of business; we reduced the number of product offerings to concentrate on capital efficient products and to this end have launched several new FIA products; we began managing a significant portion of our investment portfolio internally; and we re-positioned our investment portfolio by shortening the overall duration, all of which are described in more detail below. These changes have positively impacted our recent net income and profitability.

Trends and Uncertainties

The following factors represent some of the key trends and uncertainties that have influenced the development of our business and our historical financial performance and that we believe will continue to influence our business and financial performance in the future.

 

49


Table of Contents

Market Conditions

Market volatility has affected and may continue to affect our business and financial performance in varying ways. Volatility can pressure sales and reduce demand as consumers hesitate to make financial decisions. In the long-term, however, we believe that the 2008 through 2010 financial crisis and resultant lingering financial uncertainty will motivate individuals to seek solutions combining elements of capital preservation, income and growth. We believe current market conditions may ultimately enhance the attractiveness of our product portfolio. We continue to monitor the behavior of our customers, as evidenced by mortality rates, morbidity rates, annuitization rates and lapse rates, which adjust in response to changes in market conditions in order to ensure that our products and services remain attractive and profitable.

Interest Rate Environment

The current low interest rate environment has affected and is likely to continue to affect the demand for our products and our financial performance. Our investment portfolio, which had a fair value of approximately $16.4 billion as of June 30, 2013, consists predominantly of fixed income investments. As investments that were made in a relatively higher interest rate environment mature, we earn a lower yield as we reinvest the proceeds. Over the next five years, we anticipate $6,273 million of investment cash flows from maturities, calls, and pay-downs with an average yield of 4.66%. We believe there is limited reinvestment risk resulting from these investment cash flows because of the close match to our expected policyholder benefit cash flows during the same period. The current average yield on our fixed income investment portfolio is approximately 4.8%, and we currently anticipate that proceeds that are reinvested in fixed income investments in the second half of 2013 will earn an average yield in the range of 5.0% to 5.3%. If prevailing interest rates were to rise, we believe the yield on our new investment purchases would also rise and positively impact earnings. Rising interest rates also influence the prices of fixed income investments that we sell on the secondary market rather than holding until maturity or repayment, with rising interest rates generally leading to lower prices in the secondary market, and falling interest rates generally leading to higher prices.

Certain of our products include guaranteed minimum crediting rates, most notably our fixed rate annuities. As of June 30, 2013, the GAAP reserves and average crediting rate on our fixed rate annuities were $2.8 billion and 3.5%, respectively. We are required to pay these guaranteed minimum crediting rates even if earnings on our investment portfolio decline, which would negatively impact earnings. In addition, we expect more policyholders to hold policies with comparatively high guaranteed rates for a longer period in a low interest rate environment. Conversely, a rise in average yield on our investment portfolio would positively impact earnings if the average interest rate we pay on our products does not rise correspondingly. Similarly, we expect that policyholders would be less likely to hold policies with existing guarantees as interest rates rise and the relative value of other new business offerings are increased, which would negatively impact our earnings and cash flows.

See “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations—Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures about Market Risk” for a more detailed discussion of interest rate risk.

Aging of the U.S. Population

We believe that the aging of the U.S. population will affect the demand for our products. As the “baby boomer” generation prepares for retirement, we believe that demand for retirement savings, growth and income products will grow. The impact of this growth may be offset to some extent by asset outflows as an increasing percentage of the population begins withdrawing assets to convert their savings into income.

Industry Factors and Trends Affecting Our Results of Operations

Demographics and macroeconomic factors are increasing the demand for our FIA and IUL products, for which demand is large and growing: over 10,000 people will turn 65 each day in the United States over the next 15 years. The proportion of the U.S. population over the age of 65 is expected to grow from 13% in 2010 to 18% in 2030.

 

50


Table of Contents

Due to a turbulent period for the stock market in 2007 and 2008, many middle-income Americans have grown to appreciate the security these indexed products afford. As a result, the IUL market expanded from $100 million of annual premiums in 2002 to over $1.3 billion of annual premiums in 2012. Similarly, the FIA market grew from nearly $12 billion of sales in 2002 to $34 billion of sales in 2012.

The following charts demonstrate relevant market trends:

FIA Industry Sales

(dollars in billions)

 

LOGO

IUL Industry Sales

(dollars in millions)

 

LOGO

Source: AnnuitySpecs.

 

51


Table of Contents

Competition

Our insurance subsidiaries operate in highly competitive markets. We face a variety of large and small industry participants. These companies compete for the growing pool of retirement assets driven by a number of exogenous factors, such as the continued aging of the U.S. population and the reduction in financial safety nets provided by governments and corporations. In many segments, product differentiation is difficult as product development and life cycles have shortened.

The top three sellers of FIAs accounted for 38% of total FIA sales for the six months ended June 30, 2013, the top ten carriers accounted for 72% and no single carrier represented more than 15%. During this same time period, we had a market share of approximately 3% and 1% for FIAs and IULs, respectively. The composition of the IUL segment resembles that of the FIA segment. The top three carriers accounted for 30% of total IUL sales, the top ten carriers accounted for 67% and no single carrier represented more than 13%. Our own sales of FIAs and IULs by quarter in recent years were as follows:

 

     FIA Sales      IUL Sales  

(in millions)

   Fiscal 2010      Fiscal 2011      Fiscal 2012      Fiscal 2013      Fiscal 2010      Fiscal 2011      Fiscal 2012      Fiscal 2013  

Q1

   $ 177.9       $ 200.6       $ 344.5       $ 243.1       $ 3.3       $ 4.5       $ 4.2       $ 5.5   

Q2

     161.4        126.6        539.8        238.6        3.2        3.4        4.5        4.3  

Q3

     194.8        142.1        461.4        263.8        4.3        4.1        3.4        4.3  

Q4

     218.3        167.8        259.8        —           3.4        4.3        4.0        —     
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

   $ 752.4       $ 637.1       $ 1,605.5       $ 745.5       $ 14.2       $ 16.3       $ 16.1       $ 14.1   

We had a different business model prior to the FGLH Acquisition and, since 2010, have changed our business model and reinsured substantially all of our life business as of the FGLH Acquisition Date. Thus, we do not have comparable sales data for the period from 2002 to 2010. As illustrated in “—Industry Factors and Trends Affecting Our Results of Operations” above, the FIA market grew 132% between years 2002 to 2005 before leveling off until 2009, when the market reached the first of four record years through modest growth. We believe we were a key contributor to the FIA market’s early growth, ranking in the top five in terms of market share from 2003 through 2007. Our CAGR for the period from 2010 to June 30, 2013 is 39.3% for FGLIC’s FIAs and 12.5% for FGLIC’s IULs. Our favorable FIA results were due to the successful introduction of Prosperity Elite in September 2011, our first new product launch since the FGLH Acquisition. The new product re-engaged our distribution outlets, which increased our market share back into the top ten. Even though FGLIC’s IULs showed significant sales growth, the industry showed a higher growth rate, which we believe was largely due to FGLIC’s lower financial strength ratings relative to our main competitors.

We believe that our strong presence in the FIA market and the longevity of our relationships with our leading IMOs position us to effectively serve consumers’ increasing demand for retirement savings, income and protection solutions. We maintain strong relationships with the IMOs through product innovation, attention, and compensation. Frequent new product introductions give our IMOs something new to sell while we maintain shelf relevance. A distinct benefit to selling our products is the potential for IMOs to design products in partnership with us and have the exclusive right to sell such products for a specified time period. Our IMOs receive a high level of service from operations and direct access to senior management. Lastly, our strong compensation plan, including overrides, production bonuses and potential to participate in the Power Partner Incentive program, is designed to keep loyalty strong.

Fiscal Year 2012 shows the impact of the release of Prosperity Elite, a product developed with one of our leading IMOs. The product includes competitive features and commissions meeting our profitability targets. The IMO remained loyal with us even as we adjusted our sales volume to maintain profitability.

Key Components of Our Historical Results of Operations

Under U.S. GAAP, premium collections for fixed indexed and fixed rate annuities and immediate annuities without life contingency are reported as deposit liabilities (i.e., contractholder funds) instead of as revenues.

 

52


Table of Contents

Similarly, cash payments to customers are reported as decreases in the liability for contractholder funds and not as expenses. Sources of revenues for products accounted for as deposit liabilities are net investment income, surrender and other charges deducted from contractholder funds, and net realized gains (losses) on investments. Components of expenses for products accounted for as deposit liabilities are interest-sensitive and index product benefits (primarily interest credited to account balances or the cost of providing index credits to the policyholder), amortization of DAC and VOBA, other operating costs and expenses, and income taxes.

Earnings from products accounted for as deposit liabilities are primarily generated from the excess of net investment income earned over the interest credited or the cost of providing index credits to the policyholder, known as the net investment spread. With respect to FIAs, the cost of providing index credits includes the expenses incurred to fund the annual index credits, and where applicable, minimum guaranteed interest credited. Proceeds received upon expiration or early termination of call options purchased to fund annual index credits are recorded as part of the change in fair value of derivatives, and are largely offset by an expense for index credits earned on annuity contractholder fund balances.

Our profitability depends in large part upon the amount of assets under management (“AUM”), the net investment spreads earned on our AAUM, our ability to manage our operating expenses and the costs of acquiring new business (principally commissions to agents and bonuses credited to policyholders). As we grow AUM, earnings generally increase. AUM increases when cash inflows, which include sales, exceed cash outflows. Managing net investment spreads involves the ability to manage our investment portfolios to maximize returns and minimize risks on our AUM such as interest rate changes and defaults or impairment of investments, and our ability to manage interest rates credited to policyholders and costs of the options and futures purchased to fund the annual index credits on the FIAs or IULs. We analyze returns on AAUM pre- and post-DAC and VOBA as well as pre- and post-tax to measure our profitability in terms of growth and improved earnings.

Pretax Adjusted Operating Income

Pretax AOI is an economic measure we use to evaluate financial performance each period for the periods subsequent to the FGLH Acquisition.

Pretax AOI is calculated by adjusting income before income taxes to adjust for interest expense and certain gains realized from the FGLH Acquisition, to eliminate the impact of net investment gains, excluding gains and losses on derivatives and including net OTTI losses recognized in operations, the effect of changes in the rates used to discount the FIA embedded derivative liability, the effects of acquisition-related reinsurance transactions, net of the corresponding DAC and VOBA impact related to these adjustments. These items fluctuate period-to-period in a manner inconsistent with our core operations. Accordingly, we believe using a measure which excludes their impact is effective in analyzing the trends of our operations. Together with income before income taxes, we believe Pretax AOI and Return on AAUM provide meaningful financial metrics that help investors understand our underlying results and profitability.

Pretax AOI should not be used as a substitute for income before income taxes. However, we believe the adjustments made to operating income in order to derive Pretax AOI are significant to gaining an understanding of our overall results of operations. For example, we could have strong operating results in a given period, yet report income before income taxes that is materially less, if during such period the fair value of our derivative assets hedging the FIA index credit obligations decreased due to general equity market conditions but the embedded derivative liability related to the index credit obligation did not decrease in the same proportion as the derivative assets because of non-equity market factors such as interest rate movements. Similarly, we could also have poor operating results in a given period yet show operating income that is materially greater, if during such period the fair value of the derivative assets increases but the embedded derivative liability did not increase in the same proportion as the derivative assets. We hedge our FIA index credits with a combination of static and dynamic strategies, which can result in earnings volatility, the effects of which are generally likely to reverse over time. Our management and board of directors review Pretax AOI, and Return on AAUM and income before income taxes as part of their examination of our overall financial results. However, these examples illustrate the

 

53


Table of Contents

significant impact derivative and embedded derivative movements can have on our income before income taxes. Accordingly, our management and board of directors perform an independent review and analysis of these items, as part of their review of our hedging results each period.

The adjustments to income before income taxes are net of DAC and VOBA amortization. Amounts attributable to the fair value accounting for derivatives hedging the FIA index credits and the related embedded derivative liability fluctuate from period to period based upon changes in the fair values of call options purchased to fund the annual index credits for FIAs, changes in the interest rates used to discount the embedded derivative liability, and the fair value assumptions reflected in the embedded derivative liability. The accounting standards for fair value measurement require the discount rates used in the calculation of the embedded derivative liability to be based on risk-free interest rates. The impact of the change in risk-free interest rates has been removed from operating income. Additionally, in evaluating our operating results, the effects of acquisition-related reinsurance transactions have been removed from operating income.

In addition, we regularly monitor and report the production volume metric titled “Sales”. Sales are not derived from any specific GAAP income statement accounts or line items and should not be view as a substitute for any financial measure determined in accordance with GAAP. Management believes that presentation of sales as measured for management purposes enhances the understanding of our business and helps depict longer term trends that may not be apparent in the results of operations due to the timing of sales and revenue recognition.

Results of Operations

On August 12, 2013, we distributed our ownership interests in the parent company of Front Street to HGI. Prior to that date, Front Street’s only significant transaction was its reinsurance transaction with us, which incepted January 1, 2013. As a result, Front Street’s results are not material relative to our consolidated results prior to December 31, 2012, and Front Street’s results will not be included in our results for any period after the fiscal year ended September 30, 2013. To enhance comparability with prior and future periods, in this section we disclose Fiscal 2013 Nine Months results attributable to Front Street where they are material relative to the consolidated item being discussed.

The following is a discussion of our consolidated results of operations and should be read in conjunction with the “Overview” section above, as well as with the information contained in our consolidated financial statements and related notes included elsewhere in this prospectus.

Nine Months ended June 30, 2013 (“Fiscal 2013 Nine Months”) compared to the Nine Months ended June 30, 2012 (“Fiscal 2012 Nine Months”)

The following tables set forth the combined results of operations for the Fiscal 2013 Nine Months and the Fiscal 2012 Nine Months:

 

(in millions)

   Fiscal 2013
Nine Months
    Fiscal 2012
Nine Months
    Increase/(Decrease)  

Revenues:

      

Premiums

   $ 46.9      $ 42.2      $ 4.7   

Net investment income

     522.8        537.6        (14.8

Net investment gains

     411.5        254.6        156.9   

Insurance and investment product fees and other

     44.4        28.2        16.2   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total revenues

   $ 1,025.6      $ 862.6      $ 163.0   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Benefits and expenses:

      

Benefits and other changes in policy reserves

     431.7        559.7        (128.0

Acquisition and operating expenses, net of deferrals

     76.0        101.4        (25.4

Amortization of intangible assets

     163.1        112.0        51.1   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total benefits and expenses

     670.8        773.1        (102.3
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating income

     354.8        89.5        265.3   

Interest expense

     (5.9     (1.9     (4.0

Gain on contingent purchase price reduction

     —          41.0        (41.0

Other income, net

     0.2        0.1        0.1   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Income before income taxes

     349.1        128.7        220.4   

Income tax expense

     (112.1     (11.8     (100.3
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net income

   $ 237.0      $ 116.9      $ 120.1   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

54


Table of Contents

Net income for the Fiscal 2013 Nine Months was $237.0 million, an increase of $120.1 million, from $116.9 million for the Fiscal 2012 Nine Months. The increase was primarily due to the revaluation of the embedded derivative liabilities to reflect increased interest rates which resulted in an increase in operating income of $58.8 million, net of related DAC and VOBA amortization, trading gains on our available-for-sale (“AFS”) portfolio and mortality gains. Realized investment gains on AFS securities increased $133.9 million period over period, net of related DAC and VOBA amortization, due to portfolio re-positioning trades and implementation of a tax strategy. We also experienced immediate annuity mortality gains of $27.3 million during the Fiscal 2013 Nine Months due to higher large case deaths. Partially offsetting these increases to operating income was a $100.3 million increase in income tax expense period over period due to a discrete period adjustment in the Fiscal 2012 Nine Months which resulted in a release of a portion of the deferred tax asset valuation allowance.

Annuity sales during the Fiscal 2013 Nine Months and Fiscal 2012 Nine Months were $761.6 million and $1.4 billion, respectively, including $745.5 million and $1,345.7 million, respectively, of FIA sales. Sales of our core product, Prosperity Elite, which was introduced during the fiscal quarter ended September 30, 2011, was the primary driver of the strong sales during the Fiscal 2012 Nine Months. Product sales declined period over period as a result of the targeted production levels we established for the product. FIAs have become the dominant product within the fixed annuity market and industry growth is expected to continue as individuals nearing retirement increasingly seek the safety and guaranteed income benefits of fixed index annuities.

Pretax AOI

The table below shows the adjustments made to reconcile income before income taxes to Pretax AOI:

 

(in millions)

   Fiscal 2013
Nine Months
    Fiscal 2012
Nine Months
 

Reconciliation to income before income taxes:

    

Income before income taxes

   $ 349.1      $ 128.7   

Gain on contingent purchase price reduction

     —          (41.0

Interest expense and other

     5.7        1.8   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating income

     354.8        89.5   

Effect of investment gains, net of offsets

     (206.1     (72.2

Effect of change in FIA embedded derivative discount rate, net of offsets

     (58.8     10.8   

Effects of acquisition-related reinsurance

     —          11.8   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Pretax AOI

   $ 89.9      $ 39.9   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

AAUM

   $ 16,565.5      $ 16,255.4   

Return on AAUM, Pretax AOI

     0.7     0.3

For the Fiscal 2013 Nine Months, Pretax AOI increased $50.0 million to $89.9 million, or 125.3%, from $39.9 million for the Fiscal 2012 Nine Months. This increase is primarily due to immediate annuity mortality gains of $27.3 million recognized in the Fiscal 2013 Nine Months caused by large case deaths, as discussed below in benefits and other changes in policy reserves, as well as the absence of a $11.0 million charge for unclaimed death benefits recorded in the Fiscal 2012 Nine Months resulting from a search of the Social Security Administration database that produced a listing of deceased policyholders that died while their policy was in force. See Note 11 to our unaudited condensed consolidated financial statements for additional information regarding this charge.

AAUM was $16.6 billion for the Fiscal 2013 Nine Months, an increase of $0.3 billion, compared to $16.3 billion for Fiscal 2012 Nine Months. Return on AAUM, Pretax AOI was 0.7% (annualized) for the Fiscal 2013 Nine Months, an increase of 0.4% (annualized), compared to 0.3% (annualized) for the Fiscal 2012 Nine Months.

 

55


Table of Contents

Revenues

Premiums. Premiums primarily reflect insurance premiums for life insurance products which are recognized as revenue when due from the policyholder. We have ceded the majority of our life insurance business to Wilton Re. The remaining traditional life insurance business is primarily related to traditional life insurance contracts that contain return of premium riders, which have not been reinsured to third-party reinsurers.

For the Fiscal 2013 Nine Months, premiums increased $4.7 million or 11.1%, to $46.9 million from $42.2 million for the Fiscal 2012 Nine Months. The increase for the Fiscal 2013 Nine Months is primarily due to the partial rescission of a coinsurance agreement which resulted in the return of $4.5 million of premium previously ceded.

Net investment income. For the Fiscal 2013 Nine Months we had net investment income of $522.8 million, which includes $27.9 million for Front Street, compared to $537.6 million for the Fiscal 2012 Nine Months. Investment income has been impacted by our decision in Fiscal Year 2012 to be defensive with our investment portfolio, given the interest rate environment, by continuing to reduce the credit and interest rate risk exposures in the portfolio, and to shorten the duration of the portfolio relative to our liabilities. In addition, we sold certain investments that utilized pre-acquisition tax benefits (carryforwards) which resulted in tax free capital gains. These strategies resulted in significant sales of investments during Fiscal Year 2012 through the first half of Fiscal Year 2013. The proceeds from the investment sales, including the tax free gains, were primarily held in cash, cash equivalents and treasury notes, which temporarily lowered investment income until the proceeds were reinvested. We began reinvesting the sales proceeds during the second quarter of Fiscal Year 2013. For the Fiscal 2013 Nine Months, net investment income decreased $14.8 million, as compared to Fiscal 2012 Nine Months, due to lower average yield on invested assets for the first six months of Fiscal Year 2013. This lower average yield on AAUM was the result of the portfolio changes noted above.

The average annualized yield earned on AAUM was 4.27% and 4.54% compared to average annualized interest credited and option costs of 3.06% and 3.26% for the Fiscal 2013 Nine Months, and Fiscal 2012 Nine Months, respectively.

Our net investment spread is summarized as follows (annualized):

 

     Fiscal 2013
Nine Months
    Fiscal 2012
Nine Months
 

Average yield on AAUM

     4.27     4.54

Interest credited and option cost

     3.06     3.26
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net investment spread

     1.21     1.28
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

The decrease in net investment spread for the Fiscal 2013 Nine Months is primarily attributable to the decrease in net investment income due to our strategy to not reinvest the proceeds during the period, partially offset by lower interest credited/option costs that resulted from lower crediting rates on a large block of fixed rate annuities renewing at a lower rate and a reduction in the cost of call options hedging the FIA index credits.

Net investment gains. For the Fiscal 2013 Nine Months, we had net investment gains of $411.5 million, which includes $72.8 million for Front Street, compared to net investment gains of $254.6 million for the Fiscal 2012 Nine Months. The period-over-period increase of $156.9 million is primarily due to $285.3 million of net investment gains on fixed maturity and equity AFS securities in the Fiscal 2013 Nine Months, compared to net investment gains of $173.0 million for the Fiscal 2012 Nine Months, which is primarily due to our investment strategy described above. In addition, net investment gains due to an increase in net realized and unrealized gains on long futures and call options of $44.0 million, primarily resulting from the performance of the indices upon which the call options and futures contracts are based and an increase in the number of call options purchased. We utilize a combination of static (call options) and dynamic (long futures contracts) instruments in our hedging strategy. A

 

56


Table of Contents

substantial portion of the call options and futures contracts are based upon the S&P 500 Index with the remainder based upon other equity and bond market indices. The S&P 500 index increased 11.5% from Fiscal 2012 Nine Months, increasing the realized and unrealized value of the call options. The increase in the actual amount of call options purchased was due to a change in our hedging strategy beginning in August 2012 to be more statically hedged, thereby increasing the aggregate amount of call options purchases in subsequent periods, and due to sales of the Prosperity Elite product line which was introduced during the fourth quarter of Fiscal Year 2011. We changed our hedging strategy to improve the matching of the movements in our derivative assets and FIA embedded derivative liabilities, which reduced the earnings volatility associated with the dynamic component of our hedging strategy. Included in the Fiscal 2012 Nine Months results, was $30.5 million of gains paid to Wilton Re as part of the initial asset transfer on October 1, 2011, for the closing of the final acquisition-related reinsurance transaction with Wilton Re.

The components of the realized and unrealized gains on derivative instruments are as follows:

 

(in millions)

   Fiscal 2013
Nine Months
     Fiscal 2012
Nine Months
 

Call options:

     

Gain (loss) on option expiration

   $ 87.4       $ (57.3

Change in unrealized gain

     26.6         106.0   

Futures contracts:

     

Gain on futures contracts expiration

     11.9         25.3   

Change in unrealized gain

     0.7         8.6   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 
   $ 126.6       $ 82.6   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

The average index credits to policyholders were as follows:

 

     Fiscal 2013
Nine Months
    Fiscal 2012
Nine Months
 

S&P 500 Index:

    

Point-to-point strategy

     5.36     2.34

Monthly average strategy

     4.90     1.48

Monthly point-to-point strategy

     4.26     0.02

3 year high water mark

     23.67     17.41

A point-to-point strategy is an indexing method that calculates the percentage change in the value of the S&P 500 Index on two specified dates. In a monthly point-to-point strategy, the point-to-point changes in the S&P 500 Index for each month are added together, subject to a maximum monthly cap. A monthly average strategy calculates the average of the percentage change in the S&P 500 Index for each month over the course of a year.

For the Fiscal 2013 Nine Months, the average credit to contractholders from index movements during the period was 5.01% (annualized), compared to 1.45% (annualized) for the Fiscal 2012 Nine Months. The period-over-period increase was primarily due to greater appreciation in the S&P 500 Index.

Actual amounts credited to contractholder fund balances may be less than the appreciation in the S&P 500 Index due to contractual features in the FIA contracts (caps, spreads, participation rates and asset fees) which allow us to manage the cost of the options purchased to fund the annual index credits.

Insurance and investment product fees and other. For the Fiscal 2013 Nine Months, insurance and investment product fees and other consists primarily of cost of insurance charges, policy fees collected from the contractholder and surrender charges assessed against policy withdrawals in excess of the policyholder’s allowable penalty-free amounts (up to 10% of the prior year’s value, subject to certain limitations). These revenues increased $16.2 million, or 57.4%, to $44.4 million, including $3.4 million for Front Street, for the

 

57


Table of Contents

Fiscal 2013 Nine Months, from $28.2 million for the Fiscal 2012 Nine Months primarily due to cost of insurance revenue on new universal life policies issued during the last twelve months and policy fees on the Prosperity Elite product line which was introduced during the fourth quarter of Fiscal Year 2011.

Benefits and expenses

Benefits and other changes in policy reserves. For the Fiscal 2013 Nine Months, benefits and other changes in policy reserves decreased $128.0 million, or 22.9%, to $431.7 million, including $28.3 million for Front Street, from $559.7 million for the Fiscal 2012 Nine Months, principally due to the present value of future credits and guarantee liability which decreased $131.7 million during the Fiscal 2013 Nine Months, compared to a $6.1 million increase during the Fiscal 2012 Nine Months. The period-over-period decrease in the present value of future credits and guarantee liability of $137.8 million was primarily driven by the increase in the risk free rates during the Fiscal 2013 Nine Months, compared to the decrease in such rates during the Fiscal 2012 Nine Months. In addition, immediate annuity policy reserves were lower in Fiscal 2013 Nine Months by $27.3 million. The decrease in reserves was due to a favorable mortality experience on our immediate annuities. Upon a death, we release the reserve established for the expected remaining benefits which are based on assumptions for mortality among other things. To the extent the actual deaths in the period are higher than expected, additional reserves will be released.

Below is a summary of the major components included in benefits and other changes in policy reserves for Fiscal 2013 Nine Months and Fiscal 2012 Nine Months:

 

(in millions)    Fiscal 2013
Nine Months
    Fiscal 2012
Nine Months
    Increase/
(Decrease)
 

FIA market value option liability change

   $ 17.3      $ 119.7      $ (102.4

FIA present value future credits and guarantee liability change

     (131.7     6.1        (137.8

Index credits, interest credited and bonuses

     421.5        271.1        150.4   

Annuity payments

     167.7        182.3        (14.6

Other policy benefits and reserve movements.

     (43.1     (19.5     (23.6
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total benefits and other changes in policy reserves

   $ 431.7      $ 559.7      $ (128.0
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Acquisition and operating expenses, net of deferrals. Acquisition and operating expenses, net of deferrals, decreased $25.4 million, or 25.0%, to $76.0 million, including $5.5 million for Front Street, for the Fiscal 2013 Nine Months, from $101.4 million, including $2.5 million for Front Street, for the Fiscal 2012 Nine Months, principally due to a $31.1 million ceding commission paid to Wilton Re. This ceding commission primarily related to $30.5 million of investment gains realized on the securities transferred to Wilton Re on October 17, 2011, in connection with closing the final acquisition-related reinsurance transaction with Wilton Re.

Amortization of intangibles . For the Fiscal 2013 Nine Months, amortization of intangibles increased $51.1 million, or 45.6%, to $163.1 million from $112.0 million for the Fiscal 2012 Nine Months. Amortization of intangibles is based on historical and future expected gross margins (pre-tax operating income before amortization). The change in the embedded derivative liability moves with the changes in the market value of the option liability as well as with changes in interest rates. If the current embedded derivative liability increases then future margins increase, as the higher liability amortizes into income over time and vice versa. When future expected margins increase amortization generally slows down and vice versa when the future expected margins decrease. For the Fiscal 2012 Nine Months, the embedded derivative liability increased, slowing amortization compared to the Fiscal 2013 Nine Months. Another contributing factor to the increased amortization for the Fiscal 2013 Nine Months was the increased net investment gains described above.

 

58


Table of Contents

Other items affecting net income

Interest expense. Interest expense for the Fiscal 2013 Nine Months was $5.9 million compared to interest expense of $1.9 million during the Fiscal 2012 Nine Months. The increase for the Fiscal 2013 Nine Months is due to interest related to the $300.0 million in Senior Notes issued in March of 2013.

Income tax expense . Income tax expense for the Fiscal 2013 Nine Months was $112.1 million, compared to $11.8 million for the Fiscal 2012 Nine Months. The increase in income tax expense of $100.3 million for the Fiscal 2013 Nine Months over the Fiscal 2012 Nine Months is primarily due to an increase in pre-tax income.

In assessing the recoverability of our deferred tax assets, we regularly consider the guidance outlined within ASC 740 (“Income Taxes”). The guidance requires an assessment of both positive and negative evidence in determining the realizability of deferred tax assets. A valuation allowance is required to reduce our deferred tax asset to an amount that is more likely than not to be realized. In determining the net deferred tax asset and valuation allowance, we are required to make judgments and estimates related to projections of future profitability. These judgments include the following: the timing and extent of the utilization of net operating loss carry-forwards, the reversals of temporary differences, and tax planning strategies. We have recorded a partial valuation allowance of $170.9 million against our gross deferred tax assets of $412.3 million as of June 30, 2013.

We maintain a valuation allowance against certain §382 limited capital loss carry-forwards and the deferred tax assets of our non-life insurance company subsidiaries. A valuation allowance has been placed against §382 limited capital loss carry-forwards to reduce these deferred tax assets to an amount that is more likely than not to be realized before the attributes expire. Our non-life insurance company subsidiaries have a history of losses and insufficient sources of future income in order to recognize any portion of their deferred tax assets.

The valuation allowance is reviewed quarterly and will be maintained until there is sufficient positive evidence to support a release. At each reporting date, we consider new evidence, both positive and negative, that could impact the future realization of deferred tax assets. We will consider a release of the valuation allowance once there is sufficient positive evidence that it is more likely than not that the deferred tax assets will be realized. Any release of the valuation allowance will be recorded as a tax benefit increasing net income or other comprehensive income. The valuation allowance was decreased by $6.6 million for the Fiscal 2013 Nine Months. The adjustment is due to previously unrealizable capital loss carryforwards that are now expected to be utilized during Fiscal Year 2013, which was partially offset by full valuation allowance placed against the current period income tax benefit of our non-life insurance company subsidiaries.

 

59


Table of Contents

Fiscal Year Ended September 30, 2012

The following tables set forth the combined results of operations for Fiscal Year 2012:

 

     Fiscal Year  

(in millions)

   2012  

Revenues:

  

Premiums

   $ 55.3   

Net investment income

     716.2   

Net investment gains

     410.0   

Insurance and investment product fees and other

     40.3   
  

 

 

 

Total revenues

   $ 1,221.8   
  

 

 

 

Benefits and expenses:

  

Benefits and other changes in policy reserves

     777.4   

Acquisition and operating expense, net of deferrals

     123.9   

Amortization of intangible assets

     160.7   
  

 

 

 

Total benefits and expenses

   $ 1,062.0   
  

 

 

 

Operating income

     159.8   

Interest expense

     (2.6

Gain on contingent purchase price reduction

     41.0   

Other income, net

     0.2   
  

 

 

 

Income before income taxes

     198.4   

Income tax benefit

     145.7   
  

 

 

 

Net income

   $ 344.1   
  

 

 

 

Net income for Fiscal Year 2012 was $344.1 million and included realized investment gains on AFS securities of $265.3 million, which is net of $22.8 million of OTTI. Gains on these securities resulted in DAC and VOBA amortization of $102.4 million in Fiscal Year 2012. The realized gains in Fiscal Year 2012 primarily resulted from sales made to shorten the duration of our portfolio and improve our asset/liability matching profile. Included in realized gains for Fiscal Year 2012 is $30.5 million of gains associated with the asset transfer on October 17, 2011, in connection with closing the final acquisition-related reinsurance transaction with Wilton Re. The $30.5 million of gains payable to Wilton Re were also reflected in operating expenses as such amounts were ceded to Wilton Re. Also included in Fiscal Year 2012 net income was a $145.7 million income tax benefit due to a partial release of the valuation allowance held against certain deferred tax assets of $204.7 million and our change in judgment regarding the realization of certain deferred tax assets in future years due to our continued profitability since the FGLH Acquisition. The spread for Fiscal Year 2012 was negatively impacted by the strategic portfolio re-positioning to shorten the overall portfolio duration in anticipation of rising interest rates.

Annuity sales during Fiscal Year 2012 were $1.7 billion, including $1.6 billion of FIA sales. Sales of our core product, Prosperity Elite, which was introduced during the quarter ended September 30, 2011, was the primary driver of the strong sales during Fiscal Year 2012 and improved our ranking among FIA writers to number eight for calendar year ended December 2012 with a market share of 4.6%. The continued decline in interest rates made it more difficult to maintain profitability targets, as a result sales were intentionally scaled back in the second half of Fiscal Year 2012.

 

60


Table of Contents

Pretax AOI

The table below shows the adjustments made to reconcile income before income taxes to our Pretax AOI:

 

     Fiscal Year  

(in millions)

   2012  

Reconciliation to income before income taxes:

  

Income before income taxes

   $ 198.4   

Gain on contingent purchase price reduction

     (41.0

Interest expense and other

     2.4   

Operating income

     159.8   
  

 

 

 

Effect of investment gains, net of offsets

     (132.4

Effect of change in FIA embedded derivative discount rate, net of offsets

     18.6   

Effects of acquisition-related reinsurance

     11.8   
  

 

 

 

Pretax AOI

   $ 57.8   
  

 

 

 

AAUM

   $ 16,111.9   

Return on AAUM, Pretax AOI

     0.4

For Fiscal Year 2012, Pretax AOI was $57.8 million. Pretax AOI for Fiscal Year 2012 was primarily affected by the impact of holding a larger cash balance during the year due to the sale of bonds with longer durations at gains made to shorten the overall duration of the portfolio, which resulted in lower net investment income. Additionally, we recorded an $11.0 million liability in Fiscal Year 2012, net of reinsurance, for estimated unreported death claims resulting from a search of the Death Master File that produced a listing of deceased policyholders who died while their policy was in force. See Note 14, to our audited consolidated financial statements for additional information regarding this charge.

AAUM was $16.1 billion and the Return on AAUM, Pretax AOI was 0.4% (annualized) for Fiscal Year 2012.

Revenues

Premiums . Premiums primarily reflect insurance premiums for life insurance products which are recognized as revenue when due from the policyholder. Premiums for Fiscal Year 2012 were $55.3 million.

Net investment income . For Fiscal Year 2012, investment income of $727.9 million less $517.0 million of interest credited and option costs on annuity deposits resulted in net investment spread of $210.9 million or 1.28%. AAUM (on an amortized cost basis) at September 30, 2012 were $16.1 billion and the average yield earned on AAUM was 4.40% for Fiscal Year 2012 compared to interest credited and option costs of 3.12%. The average yield on AAUM for the year was impacted by the sale of bonds with longer durations at gains during the year made to strategically shorten the overall duration of the portfolio to improve the match of our expected liability cash flows to asset cash flows, in anticipation of rising interest rates.

Our net investment spread is summarized as follows:

 

     Fiscal Year  
     2012  

Average yield on AAUM

     4.40

Interest credited and option cost

     3.12
  

 

 

 

Net investment spread

     1.28
  

 

 

 

Net investment gains. Net investment gains, reduced by impairment losses, recognized in operations fluctuate from period to period based upon changes in the interest rate and economic environment and the timing of the sale of investments or the recognition of OTTI. For Fiscal Year 2012, fixed maturity AFS securities and equity securities

 

61


Table of Contents

had gross investment gains of $288.1 million, related to security sales offset by OTTI of $22.8 million during the year. The OTTI for Fiscal Year 2012 included impairment losses of $17.1 million related to change of intent on securities held and $5.7 million of credit impairments. Realized gains for Fiscal Year 2012 also included $30.5 million of gains associated with the asset transfer on October 17, 2011, in connection with closing the final acquisition-related reinsurance transaction with Wilton Re. The $30.5 million of gains were payable to Wilton Re as part of the initial asset transfer. For Fiscal Year 2012, there were also net realized and unrealized gains of $146.1 million on derivative instruments purchased to hedge the annual index credits for FIA contracts.

The components of the realized and unrealized gains (losses) on derivative instruments for Fiscal Year 2012 are as follows:

 

     Fiscal Year  

(in millions)

   2012  

Call options:

  

Loss on option expiration

   $ (53.0

Change in unrealized gain

     153.0   

Futures contracts:

  

Gain on futures contracts expiration

     42.7   

Change in unrealized gain

     3.4   
  

 

 

 
   $ 146.1   
  

 

 

 

Realized and unrealized gains and losses on derivative instruments primarily result from the performance of the indices upon which the call options and futures contracts are based and the aggregate cost of call options purchased. A substantial portion of the call options and futures contracts are based upon the S&P 500 Index with the remainder based upon other equity and bond market indices. Thus, the changes in the S&P 500 Index are a major driver of fluctuations in the fair value of the derivatives from period to period. Accordingly, the change in unrealized gain on derivatives was primarily driven by the 31.1% increase in the S&P 500 Index during Fiscal Year 2012. The average index credits to policyholders were as follows:

 

     Fiscal Year  
     2012  

S&P 500 Index:

  

Point-to-point strategy

     2.68

Monthly average strategy

     1.84

Monthly point-to-point strategy

     0.45

3 year high water mark

     17.51

The average credit to contractholders from index movements during Fiscal Year 2012 was 1.81%. Actual amounts credited to contractholder fund balances may be less than the index appreciation. This is due to contractual features in the FIA contracts (caps, participation rates and asset fees) which allow us to manage the cost of the call options purchased to fund the annual index credits. The level of realized and unrealized gains and losses on derivative instruments is also influenced by the aggregate cost of call options purchased. The aggregate cost of call options is primarily influenced by the amount of FIA contracts in force. Both the amount of contractholder funds allocated to the various indices and market volatility (which affects option pricing) influence the aggregate cost of call options. The cost of call options purchased during Fiscal Year 2012 was $128.6 million.

Insurance and investment product fees and other. Insurance and investment product fees and other for Fiscal Year 2012 was $40.3 million and consisted primarily of cost of insurance, charges and policy fees collected from the contractholder and surrender charges assessed against policy withdrawals in excess of the policyholders’ allowable penalty-free amounts (up to 10% of the prior year’s value, subject to certain limitations). Withdrawals from annuity and IUL policies subject to surrender charges were $1.2 billion for Fiscal Year 2012 and the average surrender charges collected on annuity withdrawals were 1.89% for Fiscal Year 2012. During the first quarter of Fiscal Year 2012, we executed the second acquisition-related reinsurance amendment

 

62


Table of Contents

with Wilton Re, in which we ceded the majority of our IUL insurance block of business to Wilton Re. As a result, the cost of insurance and surrender fees associated with this line of business are now ceded to Wilton Re thus reducing the total amount retained by us in Fiscal Year 2012.

Benefits and expenses

Benefits and other changes in policy reserves. Benefits and other changes in policy reserves of $777.4 million for Fiscal Year 2012 include the change in the FIA embedded derivative liability which includes the market value option liability change and the present value of future credits and guarantee liability change. The market value option liability increased $177.9 million for Fiscal Year 2012, primarily due to changes in the equity markets during those periods. The present value of future credits and guarantee liability increased $7.0 million for Fiscal Year 2012. The increase in Fiscal Year 2012 was primarily due to lower risk free rates during the year. Fair value accounting for derivative instruments and the embedded derivatives in the FIA contracts creates differences in the recognition of revenues and expenses from derivative instruments including the embedded derivative liability in our FIA contracts. The change in fair value of the embedded derivatives will not correspond to the change in fair value of the derivatives (purchased call options and futures contracts) because the purchased derivatives cover the next annual index period while the embedded derivative liability covers estimated credits over the expected life of the FIA contracts. Additionally, there were index credits, interest credits and bonuses of $382.4 million, annuity payments of $241.7 million, and policy benefits and other reserve movements of $31.6 million during Fiscal Year 2012. Changes in index credits are attributable to changes in the underlying indices and the amount of funds allocated by policyholders to the respective index options. Benefits also include claims incurred during the period in excess of contractholder fund balances, including the unreported death claim liability, traditional life insurance benefits and the change in reserves for traditional life insurance products.

Below is a summary of the major components included in benefits and other changes in policy reserves for Fiscal Year 2012:

 

     Fiscal  

(in millions)

   2012  

FIA market value option liability change

   $ 177.9   

FIA present value future credits & guarantee liability change

     7.0   

Index credits, interest credited & bonuses

     382.4   

Annuity payments

     241.7   

Other policy benefits and reserve movements

     (31.6
  

 

 

 

Total benefits and other changes in policy reserves

   $ 777.4   
  

 

 

 

Acquisition and operating expenses, net of deferrals. Acquisition and operating expenses, net of deferrals for Fiscal Year 2012, was $123.9 million and included costs and expenses related to the acquisition and ongoing maintenance of insurance and investment contracts, including commissions, policy issuance expenses and other underwriting and general operating costs. These costs and expenses are net of amounts that are capitalized and deferred, which are primarily costs and expenses that vary with, and are primarily related to, the sale and issuance of our insurance policies and investment contracts, such as first-year commissions in excess of ultimate renewal commissions and other policy issuance expenses. Also included in acquisition and operating expenses for Fiscal Year 2012 is a $31.1 million ceding commission paid to Wilton Re primarily related to $30.5 million of investment gains realized on the securities transferred to Wilton Re on October 17, 2011, in connection with closing the final acquisition-related reinsurance transaction with Wilton Re. For Fiscal Year 2012, acquisition and operating expenses included general operating expenses of $89.8 million.

Amortization of intangible assets . For Fiscal Year 2012, amortization of intangible assets of $160.7 million included $174.3 million of net VOBA amortization based on gross margins and $17.2 million of DAC amortization. Partially offsetting these expenses was capitalized interest of $30.8 million, which increased the

 

63


Table of Contents

DAC and VOBA intangible assets. Strong gross margins during Fiscal Year 2012 resulted in significant amortization of DAC and VOBA. In general, amortization of DAC and VOBA will increase each period due to the growth in our annuity business and the deferral of policy acquisition costs incurred with respect to sales of annuity products; however, we may experience negative DAC and VOBA amortization when capitalized accrued interest is greater than the amortization expense. The anticipated increase in amortization from these factors will be affected by amortization associated with fair value accounting for derivatives and embedded derivatives utilized in our FIA business and amortization associated with net realized gains (losses) on investments and net OTTI losses recognized in operations.

Other items affecting net income

Interest expense. Interest expense for Fiscal Year 2012 was $2.6 million. This reflects interest expense related to the $95.0 million surplus note issued to OMGUK, our former parent, by Raven Re, our wholly owned subsidiary. This note was settled in October 2011.

Gain on contingent purchase price reduction. During Fiscal Year 2012, we recorded a $41.0 million increase in the estimated fair value of a contingent purchase price reduction receivable related to the FGLH Acquisition due to the regulatory non-approval of a proposed reinsurance transaction that was the basis of the contingency. See Note 18 to our audited consolidated financial statements, for additional information.

Income tax benefit. Income tax benefit for Fiscal Year 2012 was $145.7 million. This reflects $52.1 million of tax expense and other tax related charges, and a release in the valuation allowance of $197.8 million. For Fiscal Year 2012, our effective tax rate was (73.4)%. Income taxes were positively impacted by the release of a portion of the valuation allowance based on our determination that certain of our deferred tax assets became more likely than not realizable during the reporting period coupled with the tax benefits associated with the gain on contingent purchase price reduction recorded by us.

We have recorded a partial valuation allowance of $177.5 million against its gross deferred tax assets of $457.1 million as of September 30, 2012.

As of September 30, 2012, management determined that sufficient positive evidence existed, based on a change in circumstance related to our cumulative loss situation, to conclude that it was more likely than not that additional deferred tax assets were realizable and therefore reduced the valuation allowance accordingly. In addition, the valuation allowance was further adjusted in the reporting period for certain items related to a potential purchase price contingency adjustment and a change in circumstance related to a contemplated reinsurance transaction. Accordingly, a net valuation allowance release of $197.8 million was recognized for Fiscal Year 2012.

 

64


Table of Contents

Post-Acquisition Period from April 6, 2011 through September 30, 2011 (Successor Period)

The following tables set forth the combined results of operations for the post-acquisition period from April 6, 2011 through September 30, 2011:

 

(in millions)

   Period from April 6, 2011
through

September 30, 2011
 

Revenues:

  

Premiums

   $ 39.0   

Net investment income

     369.8   

Net investment (losses)

     (166.9

Insurance and investment product fees and other

     48.9   
  

 

 

 

Total revenues

   $ 290.8   
  

 

 

 

Benefits and expenses:

  

Benefits and other changes in policy reserves

     247.6   

Acquisition and operating expenses, net of deferrals

     75.8   

Amortization of intangibles

     (11.1

Total benefits and expenses

   $ 312.3   
  

 

 

 

Operating (loss)

     (21.5

Interest expense

     (1.9

Bargain purchase gain from business acquisition

     158.3   
  

 

 

 

Income before income taxes

     134.9   

Income tax benefit

     41.7   
  

 

 

 

Net income

   $ 176.6   
  

 

 

 

Net income was $176.6 million for the period from April 6, 2011 to September 30, 2011. Income for the period included adjustments related to equity market volatility and lower interest rates which impacted the value of our derivative assets and embedded derivative liabilities and to transaction-related activities in connection with the FGLH Acquisition. The embedded derivative liability increased $42.6 million, net of DAC and VOBA effect, primarily related to the decrease in risk-free rates used to discount the liability. Additionally, settlement adjustments through September 30, 2011 for the life business ceded to Wilton Re resulted in a $10.4 million charge for the period. The period also included a $13.8 million charge for letter of credit (“LOC”) facility fees due to the early termination of the facility. The facility which collateralized statutory redundant reserves ceded to Raven Re was replaced by recapturing the block and ceding it to Wilton Re as of October 17, 2011. Substantially offsetting these items was a $41.7 million income tax benefit primarily resulting from the recognition of deferred tax assets which previously had a reserve set up against them.

Annuity sales during the period were $380.0 million including $310.0 million of FIA sales. FIA sales have become the dominant product within the fixed annuity market and industry growth is expected to continue as individuals nearing retirement increasingly seek fixed annuity benefits. Net client cash flows (premiums and deposits reduced by benefit payments and withdrawals) in the period from April 6, 2011 to September 30, 2011 included policyholder benefits and surrenders of $1.1 billion which exceeded new deposits and premiums of $423.7 million. In addition, there was a $535.8 million outflow resulting from the assets ceded to Wilton Re related to a new reinsurance transaction FGLIC entered into on April 8, 2011. Assets under management as of September 30, 2011 were $16.3 billion.

 

65


Table of Contents

Pretax AOI.

The table below shows the adjustments made to reconcile income before income taxes to our Pretax AOI for the period from April 6, 2011 through September 30, 2011.

 

(in millions)

   Period from
April 6, 2011
through
September 30,
2011
 

Reconciliation to income before income taxes:

  

Income before income texes

   $ 134.9   

Bargain purchase gain

     (158.3

Interest expense and other

     1.9   
  

 

 

 

Operating (loss)

   $ (21.5

Effect of investment gains, net of offsets

     (0.6

Effect of change in FIA embedded derivative discount rate, net of offsets

     42.6   

Effects of acquisition-related reinsurance

     24.2   
  

 

 

 

Pretax AOI

   $ 44.7   
  

 

 

 

AAUM

   $ 16,272.3   

Return on AAUM, Pretax AOI

     0.5

For the period from April 6, 2011 through September 30, 2011, Pretax AOI was $44.7 million. The adjustments to reported operating loss noted in the table above are net of amortization of DAC and VOBA. Amounts attributable to the fair value accounting for derivatives hedging the FIA index credits and the related embedded derivative liability fluctuate from period to period based upon changes in the fair values of call options purchased to fund the annual index credits for FIAs, changes in the interest rates used to discount the embedded derivative liability, and the fair value assumptions reflected in the embedded derivative liability. The accounting standards for fair value measurement require the discount rates used in the calculation of the embedded derivative liability to be based on the risk-free interest rates adjusted for our non-performance. A decline in the equity market during the period caused the fair value of our derivative assets and embedded derivative liability to decrease. However, a decrease in discount rates resulted in a partially offsetting increase in the embedded derivative liability, which we have removed from adjusted operating income. Also included in adjustments to operating income was LOC facility fees amortization due to the early termination of the facility. The facility which collateralized redundant reserves ceded to an affiliate on April 7, 2011 was replaced by recapturing the block and ceding it to Wilton Re as of October 17, 2011. Settlement adjustments through September 30, 2011 for the life insurance business ceded to Wilton Re also resulted in a charge for the period which we have removed from operating income. In evaluating our operating results, these adjustments have been removed from operating income as acquisition-related reinsurance transactions.

AAUM was $16.3 billion and the Return on AAUM, Pretax AOI was 0.5% for the Period from April 6, 2011 through September 30, 2011.

Revenues

Premiums. Premiums of $39.0 million reflect insurance premiums for life insurance products which are recognized as revenue when due from the policyholder. We have ceded the majority of our traditional life insurance business to an unaffiliated third-party reinsurer. The remaining life insurance business is primarily related to life insurance contracts that contain return of premium riders, which have not been reinsured to third-party reinsurers.

 

66


Table of Contents

Net investment income. Investment income of $376.9 million, less $284.2 million of interest credited and option costs on annuity deposits, resulted in a net investment spread of $92.7 million, or 1.32% (annualized), during the period from April 6, 2011 through September 30, 2011. AAUM (on an amortized cost basis) for the period from April 6, 2011 through September 30, 2011 was $16.3 billion and the average yield earned on AAUM was 4.78% (annualized) compared to interest credited and option costs of 3.46% (annualized) for the period.

Our net investment spread for the period is summarized as follows (annualized):

 

     Period from April 6, 2011
through

September 30, 2011
 

Average yield on AAUM

     4.78

Interest credited and option cost

     3.46
  

 

 

 

Net investment spread

     1.32
  

 

 

 

Net investment losses. Net investment losses, including impairment losses, recognized in operations fluctuate from period to period based upon changes in the interest rate and economic environment and the timing of the sale of investments or the recognition of OTTI. For the period from April 6, 2011 through September 30, 2011, fixed maturity AFS securities and equity securities had net investment gains of $23.9 million related to security sales offset by OTTI of $18.0 million during the period. The OTTI were primarily related to securities we intended to sell as of September 30, 2011. Net investment gains for the period were offset by net realized and unrealized losses of $170.8 million on derivative instruments purchased to hedge the annual index credits for FIA contracts. The components of the realized and unrealized losses on derivative instruments are as follows:

 

(in millions)

   Period from April 6, 2011
through

September 30, 2011
 

Call options:

  

Loss on option expiration

   $ (23.2

Change in unrealized loss

     (119.7

Futures contracts:

  

Loss on futures contracts expiration

     (21.4

Change in unrealized loss

     (6.7
  

 

 

 
   $ (171.0
  

 

 

 

Realized and unrealized gains and losses on derivative instruments primarily result from the performance of the indices upon which the call options and futures contracts are based and the aggregate cost of call options purchased. A substantial portion of the call options and futures contracts are based upon the S&P 500 Index, with the remainder based upon other equity and bond market indices. Thus, the fair value of the derivatives will fluctuate from period to period based upon changes in the S&P 500 Index. Accordingly, the change in the unrealized loss on derivatives was primarily driven by the 15.3% decrease in the S&P 500 Index during the period from April 6, 2011 through September 30, 2011.

The average index credits to policyholders during the period from April 6, 2011 through September 30, 2011 is as follows:

 

     Period from April 6,  2011
through
September 30, 2011
 

S&P 500 Index:

  

Point-to-point strategy

     4.63

Monthly average strategy

     4.03

Monthly point-to-point strategy

     2.69

3 year high water mark

     0.04

 

67


Table of Contents

The average credit to contractholders from index movements during the period was 3.61%. Actual amounts credited to contractholder fund balances may be less than the index appreciation due to contractual features in the FIA contracts (caps, participation rates and asset fees) which allow us to manage the cost of the call options purchased to fund the annual index credits. The level of realized and unrealized gains and losses on derivative instruments is also influenced by the aggregate costs of call options purchased. The aggregate cost of options is primarily influenced by the amount of FIA contracts in force. The aggregate cost of call options is also influenced by the amount of contractholder funds allocated to the various indices and market volatility which affects call option pricing. The cost of options purchased during the period from April 6, 2011 through September 30, 2011 was $68.2 million.

Insurance and investment product fees and other. Insurance and investment product fees and other for the period were $48.9 million and consisted primarily of cost of insurance, charges and policy fees charged to the contractholder and surrender charges assessed against policy withdrawals in excess of the policyholders allowable penalty-free amounts (up to 10% of the prior year’s value, subject to certain limitations). Withdrawals from annuity and universal life policies subject to surrender charges were $571.9 million for the period and the average surrender charge collected on withdrawals was 3.49% for the period.

Benefits and expenses

Benefits and other changes in policy reserves. Benefits and other changes in policy reserves of $247.6 million for the period from April 6, 2011 through September 30, 2011, includes the change in the FIA embedded derivative liability which includes the market value option liability change and the present value of future credits and guarantee liability change. The market value option liability decreased $263.6 million for the period from April 6, 2011 through September 30, 2011 primarily due to the decrease in the equity markets during the period. The present value of future credits and guarantee liability increased $121.1 million for the period primarily as a result of the decrease in the risk-free rates. Fair value accounting for derivative instruments and the embedded derivatives in the FIA contracts creates differences in the recognition of revenues and expenses from derivative instruments, including the embedded derivative liability in FIA contracts. The change in fair value of the embedded derivatives will not correspond to the change in fair value of the derivatives (purchased call options and futures contracts) because the purchased derivatives cover the next annual index period while the embedded derivative liabilities cover estimated credits over the expected life of the FIA contracts. Additionally, there were index credits, interest credits and bonuses of $292.0 million and policy benefits and other reserve movements of $98.1 million during the period. Changes in index credits are attributable to changes in the underlying indices and the amount of funds allocated by policyholders to the respective index options. Benefits also include claims incurred during the period in excess of contractholder fund balances, traditional life insurance benefits and the change in reserves for traditional life insurance products. Below is a summary of the major components included in benefits and other changes in policy reserves for the period:

 

(in millions)

   Period from April 6,  2011
through
September 30, 2011
 

FIA market value option liability change

   $ (263.6

FIA present value future credits and guarantee liability change

     121.1   

Index credits, interest credited & bonuses

     292.0   

Other policy benefits and reserve movements

     98.1   
  

 

 

 

Total benefits and other changes in policy reserves

   $ 247.6   
  

 

 

 

Acquisition and operating expenses, net of deferrals. Acquisition and operating expenses, net of deferrals, for the period were $75.8 million and include costs and expenses related to the acquisition and ongoing maintenance of insurance and investment contracts, including commissions, policy issuance expenses and other underwriting and general operating costs. These costs and expenses are net of amounts that are capitalized and

 

68


Table of Contents

deferred, which are primary costs and expenses that vary with, and are primarily related to, the sale and issuance of our insurance policies and investment contracts, such as first-year commissions in excess of ultimate renewal commissions and other policy issuance expenses. During the period, acquisition and operating expenses included a $13.8 million charge for letter of credit facility fees due to the early termination of the facility, $6.3 million in expense allowances paid to reinsurers, general operating expenses of $40.8 million, and $11.1 million of commission and bonus expenses, net of deferrals. Included in total net commission expense was $9.1 million of commission related to pre-acquisition life business which was not deferred as there was no VOBA established for it as of the acquisition date.

Amortization of intangibles. Amortization of intangibles of $(11.1) million includes capitalized accrued interest of $14.0 million, which increases the and VOBA intangible asset, less $2.0 million of net VOBA amortization based on gross margins, resulting in net negative VOBA amortization of $12.0 million, which was partially offset by $0.9 million of DAC amortization for the period from April 6, 2011 through September 30, 2011.

Other items affecting net income

Interest expense. Interest expense for the period from April 6, 2011 through September 30, 2011 was $(1.9) million. This reflects interest expense related to the $95.0 million surplus note issued to OMGUK, our former parent, by Raven Re, our wholly owned subsidiary. This note was settled in October 2011.

Income tax benefit. Income tax benefit for the period from April 6, 2011 through September 30, 2011 was $41.7 million. Our effective tax rate of (30.9%) was positively impacted by the release of valuation allowance attributable to our determination that certain of its deferred tax assets became more likely than not realizable during the current reporting period.

We have recorded a partial valuation allowance of $375.3 million against its gross deferred tax assets of $583.0 million as of September 30, 2011.

For the year ended September 30, 2011, we recorded a release of valuation allowance of $30.0 million, related in large part to the recognition of certain acquisition-date built-in gains. The recognition of built-in gains had the effect of increasing our annual §382 limit, which in turn allowed for the release of valuation allowance against capital loss carryforwards and net operating losses previously reserved for as components within the valuation allowance.

Bargain purchase gain from business acquisition. The FGLH Acquisition was accounted for under the acquisition method of accounting, which requires the total purchase price to be allocated to the assets acquired and liabilities assumed based on their estimated fair values, which resulted in a bargain purchase gain under U.S. GAAP. We believe that the resulting bargain purchase gain of $158.3 million is reasonable based on the following circumstances: (a) the seller was highly motivated to sell FGLH, as it had publicly announced its intention to do so approximately a year prior to the sale; (b) the fair value of FGLH’s investments and statutory capital increased between the date that the purchase price was initially negotiated and the date of the FGLH Acquisition; (c) as a further inducement to consummate the sale, the seller waived, among other requirements, any potential upward adjustment of the purchase price for an improvement in FGLH’s statutory capital between the date of the initially negotiated purchase price and the date of the FGLH Acquisition and (d) an independent appraisal of FGLH’s business indicated that its fair value was in excess of the purchase price.

 

69


Table of Contents

Pre-Acquisition Period from January 1, 2011 through April 5, 2011 (Predecessor Period)

The following tables set forth the combined results of operations for the pre-acquisition period from January 1, 2011 through April 5, 2011:

 

(in millions)

   Period from January 1, 2011
through

April 5, 2011
 

Revenues:

  

Premiums

   $ 53.7   

Net investment income

     232.6   

Net investment gains

     84.5   

Insurance and investment product fees and other

     23.8   
  

 

 

 

Total revenues

   $ 394.6   
  

 

 

 

Benefits and expenses:

  

Benefits and other changes in policy reserves

     228.7   

Acquisition and operating expense, net of deferrals

     23.1   

Amortization of intangibles

     131.7   
  

 

 

 

Total benefits and expenses

   $ 383.5   
  

 

 

 

Operating income

     11.1   

Interest expense

     (5.9
  

 

 

 

Income before income taxes

     5.2   

Income tax benefit

     7.8   
  

 

 

 

Net income

   $ 13.0   
  

 

 

 

Net income for the period from January 1, 2011 through April 5, 2011 was $13.0 million. Income for the period included adjustments to our derivative assets and embedded derivative liability related to the positive movements in the equity markets during the period. The investment spread measured in dollars was $73.5 million during the period. In addition, investment gains were realized on the sale of certain investments in advance of the FGLH Acquisition. We also released $11.0 million of the deferred tax asset valuation allowance.

Revenues

Premiums. Premiums for the period from January 1, 2011 through April 5, 2011 were $53.7 million and reflect insurance premiums for life insurance products, which are recognized as revenue when due from the policyholder. Sales were reduced as part of certain business transformation and capital adequacy programs implemented during 2010.

Net investment income. Net investment income for the period from January 1, 2011 through April 5, 2011 was $232.6 million. This primarily reflects net investment income on our fixed maturity and equity AFS securities of $233.1 million. Average invested assets (on an amortized cost basis) were $15.8 billion and the average yield earned on average invested assets was 5.81% (annualized).

 

     Period from January 1, 2011
through

April 5, 2011
 

Average yield on invested assets

     5.81

Less: Interest credited and option cost

     3.96
  

 

 

 

Net investment spread

     1.85
  

 

 

 

 

70


Table of Contents

Net investment gains. Net investment gains for the period from January 1, 2011 through April 5, 2011 were $84.5 million. This reflects realized gains on fixed maturity and equity AFS securities of $19.2 million primarily attributable to the disposition of protected and excluded assets under agreements entered into in anticipation of the FGLH Acquisition. Also contributing to net investment gains for the period from January 1, 2011 through April 5, 2011 were net realized and unrealized gains of $65.3 million recognized during this period on long futures and call options purchased to hedge the annual index credits for FIA contracts. A substantial portion of the call options and futures are based upon the S&P 500 Index, with the remainder based upon other equity and bond indices. Accordingly, the change in the unrealized gain on derivatives was primarily driven by the 4.8% increase in the S&P 500 Index during the period from January 1, 2011 through April 5, 2011.

Insurance and investment product fees and other. Insurance and investment product fees and other for the period from January 1, 2011 through April 5, 2011 were $23.8 million. This primarily consists of cost of insurance and surrender charges assessed against policy withdrawals in excess of the policyholder’s allowable penalty-free amounts.

Benefits and other expenses

Benefits and other changes in policy reserves. Benefits and other changes in policy reserves for the period from January 1, 2011 through April 5, 2011 were $228.7 million. Benefits and other changes in policy reserves primarily reflect index credits, interest credits and bonuses totaled $155.2 million as well as $31.3 million in the change in FIA embedded derivative liability. The remainder of the activity for the period from January 1, 2011 through April 5, 2011 is made up of other policy benefits and other reserve movements.

Acquisition and operating expenses, net of deferrals. Acquisition and operating expenses, net of deferrals for the period from January 1, 2011 through April 5, 2011 were $23.1 million. This includes costs and expenses related to the acquisition and ongoing maintenance of insurance and investment contracts, including commissions, policy issuance expenses and other underwriting and general operating costs. For the period from January 1, 2011 through April 5, 2011, acquisition and operating expenses included general expenses of $18.6 million. On January 1, 2011, we adopted new accounting guidance related to accounting for costs associated with acquiring or renewing insurance contracts early. For the period from January 1, 2011 through April 5, 2011, our capitalized acquisition costs were $0.8 million lower than if our previous policy had been applied during that period.

Amortization of intangible assets. For the period from January 1, 2011 through April 5, 2011, amortization of intangible assets was $131.7 million. Amortization of DAC and VOBA is attributed to both investment gains and losses and to other expenses for the amount of gross margins or profits originating from transactions other than investment gains and losses. Unrealized investment gains and losses represent the amount of DAC and VOBA that would have been amortized if such gains and losses had been recognized.

Other items affecting net income

Interest expense. Interest expense for the period from January 1, 2011 through April 5, 2011 was $5.9 million. This reflects interest expense on the long-term notes due to OMGUK, our former parent. These notes bear interest at 10.24%.

Income tax benefit. Income tax benefit for the period from January 1, 2011 through April 5, 2011 was $7.8 million. The effective tax rate for the period from January 1, 2011 through April 5, 2011 was (152.9%). The effective tax rate on pre-tax income reflects a benefit relative to the prevailing corporate income tax rate of 35%. The benefit was largely attributable to the release of valuation allowance related to the period change in recoverability of capital losses. We have recorded a partial valuation allowance of $76.3 million against our gross deferred tax assets of $241.1 million as of April 5, 2011. The amount of the valuation allowance fluctuates with market movements as unrealized gains in our investment portfolio are the primary source of future capital income

 

71


Table of Contents

which losses can be utilized against. A valuation allowance is recorded for the excess of capital deferred tax assets over unrealized built-in gains. As a result, a valuation allowance release of $11.0 million was recognized for the year period from January 1, 2011 through April 5, 2011 relating to the period change in recoverability of capital loss carryforwards.

Year Ended December 31, 2010

The following tables set forth the combined results of operations for the year ended December 31, 2010:

 

(in millions)

   Year ended
December 31, 2010
 

Revenues:

  

Premiums

   $ 220.0   

Net investment income

     915.6   

Net investment gains

     60.1   

Insurance and investment product fees and other

     108.3   
  

 

 

 

Total revenues

   $ 1,304.0   
  

 

 

 

Benefits and expenses:

  

Benefits and other changes in policy reserves

     863.0   

Acquisition and operating expense, net of deferrals

     100.9   

Amortization of intangibles

     273.0   
  

 

 

 

Total benefits and expenses

   $ 1,236.9   
  

 

 

 

Operating income

     67.1   

Interest expense

     (25.0
  

 

 

 

Income before income taxes

     42.1   

Income tax benefit

     130.1   
  

 

 

 

Net income

   $ 172.2   
  

 

 

 

Net income for the year ended December 31, 2010 was $172.2 million. We released $144.8 million of the deferred tax asset valuation allowance primarily due to the change in recoverability of capital losses. The S&P 500 Index increased 11% during the year, which resulted in a favorable movement of our derivative assets compared to the FIA embedded derivative liability. The investment spread measured in dollars was $368.3 million.

Revenues

Premiums. Premiums for the year ended December 31, 2010 were $220.0 million. Premiums represent income from traditional insurance products and immediate annuities with life contingencies. Sales were reduced as part of certain business transformation and capital adequacy programs implemented during 2010.

Net investment income. Net investment income for the year ended December 31, 2010 was $915.6 million. This primarily reflects net investment income on our fixed maturity and equity AFS securities of $889.9 million. For the year ended December 31, 2010, the average invested assets (on an amortized cost basis) was $16.2 billion and the average yield earned on average invested assets was 5.63%.

 

     Year ended
December 31,  2010
 

Average yield on invested assets

     5.63

Less: Interest credited and option cost

     3.28
  

 

 

 

Net investment spread

     2.35
  

 

 

 

 

72


Table of Contents

Net investment gains. Net investment gains for the year ended December 31, 2010 were $60.1 million. This reflects $13.7 million of net investment gains related to the disposition of our trading securities portfolio as well as $20.3 million of net realized losses on our fixed maturity and equity AFS securities. Also contributing to net investment gains for the year ended December 31, 2010 were net realized gains and unrealized losses of $66.7 million recognized during this period on long futures and call options purchased to hedge the annual index credits for FIA contracts. A substantial portion of the call options and futures are based upon the S&P 500 Index, with the remainder based upon other equity and bond indices. The S&P 500 Index increased 12.8% during the year ended December 31, 2010.

Insurance and investment product fees and other. Insurance and investment product fees and other for the year ended December 31, 2010 was $108.3 million. This primarily consists of cost of insurance and surrender charges assessed against policy withdrawals in excess of the policyholder’s allowable penalty-free amounts (up to 10% of the prior year’s value, subject to certain limitations).

Benefits and expenses

Benefits and other changes in policy reserves. Benefits and other changes in policy reserves for the year ended December 31, 2010 was $863.0 million. Benefits and other changes in policy reserves primarily reflect index credits, interest credits and bonuses totaling $557.7 million, as well as $42.2 million due to the change in FIA embedded derivative liability. The remainder of the activity for the year ended December 31, 2010, was comprised of other policy benefits and other reserve movements.

Acquisition and operating expenses, net of deferrals. Acquisition and operating expenses, net of deferrals, for the year ended December 31, 2010 was $100.9 million. This includes costs and expenses related to the acquisition and ongoing maintenance of insurance and investment contracts, including commissions, policy issuance expenses and other underwriting and general operating costs. For the year ended December 31, 2010, acquisition and operating expenses included general expenses of $92.1 million.

Amortization of intangible assets. For the year ended December 31, 2010, amortization of intangible assets was $273.0 million. Total amortization of $388.8 million, including $31.9 million related to unlocking, was offset by $115.8 million of interest. Amortization of DAC and VOBA is attributed to both investment gains and losses and to other expenses for the amount of gross margins or profits originating from transactions other than investment gains and losses.

Other items affecting net income

Interest expense on notes payable to affiliate. Interest expense for the year ended December 31, 2010 was $25.0 million. This reflects interest expense on the long-term notes due to OMGUK. These notes bear interest at 10.24%.

Income tax benefit . Income tax benefit for the year ended December 31, 2010 was $130.1 million. The effective tax rate for the period is (310.0%). The effective tax rate on pre-tax income reflects a benefit relative to the prevailing corporate income tax rate of 35%. The benefit was largely attributable to the release of valuation allowance related to the period change in recoverability of capital losses.

We recorded a partial valuation allowance of $87.1 million against our net deferred tax assets of $238.8 million as of December 31, 2010.

The amount of the valuation allowance fluctuates with market movements as unrealized gains in our investment portfolio are the primary source of future capital income, which losses can be utilized against. A valuation allowance is recorded for the excess of capital deferred tax assets over unrealized built-in gains. As a result, a valuation allowance release of $144.8 million was recognized for the year ended December 31, 2010 relating mainly to the period change in recoverability of capital loss carry-forwards.

 

73


Table of Contents

Investment Portfolio

The types of assets in which we may invest are influenced by various state laws, which prescribe qualified investment assets applicable to insurance companies. Within the parameters of these laws, we invest in assets giving consideration to three primary investment objectives: (i) maintain robust absolute returns; (ii) provide reliable yield and investment income; and (iii) preserve capital.

Our investment portfolio is designed to contribute a stable earnings and balance risk across diverse asset classes and is primarily invested in high quality fixed income securities.

As of June 30, 2013 and September 30, 2012, the fair value of our investment portfolio was approximately $16.4 billion and $16.6 billion, respectively, and was divided among the following asset classes:

 

(dollars in millions)

   June 30, 2013     September 30, 2012  

Asset Class

   Fair Value      Percent     Fair Value      Percent  

Corporates

   $ 10,212.7         62.2   $ 11,009.0         66.5

ABS

     1,555.0         9.5     1,027.9         6.2

Non-agency RMBS

     1,354.0         8.2     660.6         4.0

Municipals

     1,036.9         6.3     1,224.0         7.4

CMBS

     523.9         3.2     553.8         3.3

Hybrids

     508.3         3.1     528.2         3.2

Other (primarily policy loans and derivatives)

     420.9         2.6     219.5         1.3

U.S. Government

     394.0         2.4     930.4         5.6

Equities(a)

     303.2         1.8     248.1         1.5

Agency RMBS

     111.0         0.7     155.0         0.9
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total investments

   $ 16,419.9         100.0   $ 16,556.5         100.0
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

(a) Includes investment grade non-redeemable preferred stocks ($208.3 million and $208.4 million, respectively), Federal Home Loan Bank of Atlanta common stock ($44.9 million and $39.7 million, respectively) and other preferred and common stocks ($50.0 million and $0 million, respectively) all of which is held by Front Street.

Insurance statutes regulate the type of investments that our life insurance subsidiaries are permitted to make and limit the amount of funds that may be used for any one type of investment. In light of these statutes and regulations, and our business and investment strategy, we generally seek to invest in (i) corporate securities rated investment grade by established nationally recognized statistical rating organizations (each, an “NRSRO”), (ii) U.S. Government and government-sponsored agency securities, or (iii) securities of comparable investment quality, if not rated.

As of June 30, 2013 and September 30, 2012, our fixed maturity AFS securities portfolio was approximately $15.7 billion and $16.1 billion, respectively. The increase in B and below investments from September 30, 2012 to June 30, 2013 is primarily due to the acquisition of certain non-agency RMBS securities, which carry a NAIC 1 designation. The following table summarizes the credit quality, by NRSRO rating, of our fixed income portfolio:

 

(dollars in millions)

   June 30, 2013     September 30, 2012  

Rating

   Fair Value      Percent     Fair Value      Percent  

AAA

   $ 1,266.4         8.3   $ 1,842.3         11.5

AA

     2,559.3         16.3     2,042.9         12.7

A

     4,150.2         26.4     4,280.4         26.6

BBB

     5,925.0         37.7     7,084.0         44.0

BB(a)

     507.4         3.2     459.0         2.9

B and below(b)

     1,287.5         8.1     380.3         2.3
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

   $ 15,695.8         100.0   $ 16,088.9         100.0
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

74


Table of Contents

 

(a) Includes $71.3 million and $61.7 million at June 30, 2013 and September 30, 2012, respectively, of non-agency RMBS that carry a NAIC 1 designation.
(b) Includes $1,097.5 million and $334.9 million at June 30, 2013 and September 30, 2012, respectively, of non-agency RMBS that carry a NAIC 1 designation.

The NAIC’s Securities Valuation Office (“SVO”) is responsible for the day-to-day credit quality assessment and valuation of securities owned by state regulated insurance companies. Insurance companies report ownership of securities to the SVO when such securities are eligible for regulatory filings. The SVO conducts credit analysis on these securities for the purpose of assigning an NAIC designation or unit price. Typically, if a security has been rated by an NRSRO, the SVO utilizes that rating and assigns an NAIC designation based upon the following system:

 

NAIC

Designation

 

NRSRO

Equivalent Rating

1

  AAA/AA/A

2

  BBB

3

  BB

4

  B

5

  CCC and lower

6

  In or near default

The NAIC adopted revised designation methodologies for non-agency RMBS, including RMBS backed by subprime mortgage loans and for CMBS. The NAIC’s objective with the revised designation methodologies for these structured securities was to increase the accuracy in assessing expected losses and to use the improved assessment to determine a more appropriate capital requirement for such structured securities. The NAIC designations for structured securities, including subprime and Alternative A-paper, or Alt-A, RMBS, are based upon a comparison of the bond’s amortized cost to the NAIC’s loss expectation for each security. Securities where modeling results in no expected loss in all scenarios are considered to have the highest designation of NAIC 1. A large percentage of our RMBS securities carry a NAIC 1 designation while the NRSRO rating indicates below investment grade. This is primarily due to the credit and intent impairments recorded by us which reduced the amortized cost on these securities to a level resulting in no expected loss in all scenarios, which corresponds to a NAIC 1 designation. The revised methodologies reduce regulatory reliance on rating agencies and allow for greater regulatory input into the assumptions used to estimate expected losses from such structured securities. In the tables below, we present the rating of structured securities based on ratings from the revised NAIC rating methodologies described above (which may not correspond to rating agency designations). All NAIC designations (e.g., NAIC 1-6) are based on the revised NAIC methodologies.

The tables below present our fixed maturity securities by NAIC designation as of June 30, 2013 and September 30, 2012:

 

(dollars in millions)                                                                              June 30, 2013

 

NAIC

Designation

   Amortized Cost      Fair Value      Percent of Total
Carrying  Amount
 

1

   $ 9,041.7       $ 9,333.2         59.6

2

     5,727.7         5,812.0         37.0

3

     393.7         409.9         2.6

4

     84.7         83.3         0.5

5

     53.0         52.9         0.3

6

     2.0         4.5         0.0
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
   $ 15,302.8       $ 15,695.8         100.0
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

75


Table of Contents

September 30, 2012

 

NAIC

Designation

   Amortized Cost      Fair Value      Percent of Total
Carrying  Amount
 

1

   $ 8,070.1       $ 8,634.0         53.7

2

     6,569.1         7,047.4         43.8

3

     381.3         386.4         2.4

4

     8.5         8.8         0.1

5

     8.2         8.2         0.0

6

     3.8         4.1         0.0
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
   $ 15,041.0       $ 16,088.9         100.0
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

The amortized cost and fair value of fixed maturity AFS securities by contractual maturities as of June 30, 2013 and September 30, 2012, as applicable, are shown below. Actual maturities may differ from contractual maturities because issuers may have the right to call or prepay obligations.

 

     June 30, 2013      September 30, 2012  

(in millions)

   Amortized
Cost
     Fair Value      Amortized
Cost
     Fair Value  

Corporate, Non-structured Hybrids, Municipal and U.S. Government securities:

           

Due in one year or less

   $ 394.5       $ 398.0       $ 700.5       $ 703.9   

Due after one year through five years

     2,874.1         2,937.2         3,230.6         3,324.5   

Due after five years through ten years

     3,468.3         3,528.8         3,692.3         3,995.8   

Due after ten years

     5,092.9         5,225.9         4,972.2         5,532.4   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Subtotal

   $ 11,829.8       $ 12,089.9       $ 12,595.6       $ 13,556.6   

Other securities which provide for periodic payments:

           

Asset-backed securities

   $ 1,533.7       $ 1,555.0       $ 1,010.9       $ 1,027.9   

Commercial-mortgage-backed securities

     496.5         523.9         520.0         553.8   

Structured hybrids

     59.3         62.0         135.8         135.1   

Agency residential mortgage-backed securities

     108.7         111.0         149.5         154.9   

Non-agency residential mortgage-backed securities

     1,274.8         1,354.0         629.1         660.7   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total fixed maturity available-for-sale securities

   $ 15,302.8       $ 15,695.8       $ 15,040.9       $ 16,089.0   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Subprime and Alt-A Mortgage Exposure

Between 2009 and 2011, we actively reduced our exposure to non-agency RMBS holdings where we saw fundamental concerns and prospective impairments. Consistent with this strategy, and as part of the Stock Purchase Agreement with HGI, our insurance subsidiaries sold approximately $1.6 billion of structured assets.

In late 2011 and 2012, following stabilization in the housing market, and a review of the loss severity methodology utilized by the NAIC, which took into account home price appreciation vectors, rather than NRSRO ratings criteria, we began to increase exposure to non-agency RMBS securities across the spectrum, including prime, Alt-A, subprime, and option-adjustable rate mortgage securities, where the purchase price was sufficiently low enough to ensure a cushion to an NAIC 1 rating. These investment decisions were driven by rigorous analysis of the underlying collateral, as well as considerations of structural characteristics associated with these positions.

In all cases, we have been buyers of non-agency RMBS securities in the secondary market. We do not originate non-agency whole loans, regardless of underlying collateral.

Our investment in non-agency RMBS securities is predicated by the conservative and adequate cushion between purchase price and NAIC 1 rating, favorable capital characteristics, general lack of sensitivity to interest

 

76


Table of Contents

rates, positive convexity to prepayment rates, and correlation between the price of the securities and the unfolding recovery of the housing market. We believe the incremental purchases of non-agency RMBS securities brings our asset allocation back more in line with typical life insurance company’s structured exposure.

The fair value of our investments in subprime and Alt-A RMBS securities, respectively, was $366.8 million and $347.2 million as of June 30, 2013, respectively, and $233.3 million and $121.6 million as of September 30, 2012, respectively. We continue to focus on NAIC 1 and 2 rated investments and have reduced our exposure to NAIC 4 or lower rated investments. The following tables summarize our exposure to subprime and Alt-A RMBS by credit quality using NAIC designations, NRSRO ratings and vintage year as of June 30, 3013 and September 30, 2012:

 

     NAIC Designation     NRSRO     Vintage  

As of June 30, 2013

     1         92.0   AAA      5.1     2007         20.0
     2         6.3   AA      2.2     2006         27.5
     3         1.1   A      9.6     2005 and prior         52.5
     4         0.6   BBB      3.8     
               

 

 

 
     5         0.0   BB and below      79.3        100.0
          

 

 

      

 

 

 
     6         0.0        100.0     
     

 

 

      

 

 

      
        100          
     

 

 

           

As of September 30, 2012

     1         92.5   AAA      11.0     2007         14.3
     2         5.0   AA      20.3     2006         15.5
     3         1.6   A      9.9     2005 and prior         70.2
     4         0.8   BBB      0.6     
               

 

 

 
     5         0.0   BB and below      58.2        100.0
          

 

 

      

 

 

 
     6         0.1        100.0     
     

 

 

      

 

 

      
        100          
     

 

 

           

 

77


Table of Contents

ABS Exposure

As of June 30, 2013, the ABS exposure was largely composed of NAIC 1 rated tranches of CLOs, which comprised 91.0% of all ABS holdings. These exposures, typically rated NAIC 1, are senior tranches of CLOs, which have leveraged loans as their underlying collateral. The remainder of the ABS exposure was largely diversified by underlying collateral and issuer type, including credit card and automobile receivables and home equity-backed securities.

The following tables summarize our exposure to ABS holdings. The non-CLO exposure represents 9.0% of total ABS assets, or 0.8% of total invested assets. As of June 30, 2013, the CLO and non-CLO positions were trading at a net unrealized gain (loss) position of $21.9 million and $(0.6) million, respectively.

The non-CLO exposure at September 30, 2012 represents 5.9% of total ABS assets, or 0.4%, of total invested assets. As of September 30, 2012, the CLO and non-CLO positions were trading at a net unrealized gain position of $16.8 million and $0.2 million respectively.

 

(dollars in millions)

   June 30, 2013     September 30, 2012  

Asset Class

   Fair Value      Percent     Fair Value      Percent  

ABS CLO

   $ 1,415.8         91.0   $ 967.0         94.1

ABS Car Loan

     11.7         0.8     4.6         0.5

ABS Credit Card

     8.6         0.6     10.5         1.0

ABS Home Equity

     19.3         1.3     —           0.0

ABS Other

     90.0         5.7     35.7         3.5

ABS Utility

     9.6         0.6     10.0         0.9
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total ABS

   $ 1,555.0         100.0   $ 1,027.8         100.0
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Unrealized Losses

The amortized cost and fair value of fixed maturity securities and equity securities that were in an unrealized loss position as of June 30, 2013 and September 30, 2012, respectively, were as follows:

 

     June 30, 2013  

(in millions)

   Number of
Securities
     Amortized
Cost
     Unrealized
Losses
    Fair
Value
 

Fixed maturity securities, available for sale:

          

United States Government full faith and credit

     20       $ 204.2       $ (3.9   $ 200.3   

United States Government sponsored agencies

     13         7.7         (0.3     7.4   

United States municipalities, states and territories

     69         479.8         (27.4     452.4   

Corporate securities:

          

Finance, insurance and real estate

     171         1,834.1         (69.6     1,764.5   

Manufacturing, construction and mining

     45         484.1         (36.5     447.6   

Utilities and related sectors

     69         513.2         (17.4     495.8   

Wholesale/retail trade

     45         364.6         (12.9     351.7   

Services, media and other

     55         497.0         (27.1     469.9   

Hybrid securities

     9         119.1         (3.1     116.0   

Non-agency RMBS

     76         334.0         (9.3     324.7   

CMBS

     8         29.4         (0.7     28.7   

ABS

     49         382.7         (4.6     378.1   

Equity Securities

     14         129.4         (4.5     124.9   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 
     643       $ 5,379.3       $ (217.3   $ 5,162.0   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

78


Table of Contents
     September 30, 2012  

(in millions)

   Number
of
Securities
     Amortized
Cost
     Unrealized
Losses
    Fair
Value
 

Fixed maturity securities, available for sale:

          

United States Government full faith and credit

     6       $ 0.9       $ (0.2   $ 0.7   

United States Government sponsored agencies

     10         7.3         (0.1     7.2   

United States municipalities, states and territories

     18         72.3         (1.1     71.2   

Corporate securities:

          

Finance, insurance and real estate

     31         241.7         (4.9     236.8   

Manufacturing, construction and mining

     10         95.6         (3.0     92.6   

Utilities and related sectors

     7         48.5         (0.4     48.1   

Wholesale/retail trade

     7         59.1         (1.3     57.8   

Services, media and other

     4         21.9         (0.4     21.5   

Hybrid securities

     8         130.7         (9.6     121.1   

Non-agency RMBS

     26         118.9         (4.3     114.6   

CMBS

     9         13.9         (2.4     11.5   

ABS

     17         178.9         (1.6     177.3   

Equity Securities

     3         45.7         (1.2     44.5   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 
     156       $ 1,035.4       $ (30.5   $ 1,004.9   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

The gross unrealized loss position on the portfolio as of June 30, 2013, was $217.3 million, an increase of $186.8 million from $30.5 million as of September 30, 2012. The following is a description of the factors that we believe caused the increase in the gross unrealized loss. Through June 30, 2013, Treasury yields climbed as concerns about the cessation of Federal Reserve stimulus affected market participants. Bond mutual fund flows turned sharply negative in the last months of the quarter, and fixed income security prices declined accordingly. Longer dated assets, such as municipal bonds, were particularly affected and account for $27.4 million of the unrealized loss position; to date, this sector has not seen material price movements and we view the recent price action in municipal bonds as largely interest-rate related.

Our municipal bond exposure is a combination of general obligation bonds (fair value of $336.1 million and an amortized cost of $326.5 million) and special revenue bonds (fair value of $700.8 million and amortized cost of $675.4 million). Across all municipal bonds, the largest issuer represented 10.1% of the category, and the largest single municipal bond issuer represents less than 0.60% of the entire portfolio and is rated NAIC 1. Our focus within municipal bonds is on NAIC 1 rated instruments, and 99.8% of the municipal bond exposure is rated NAIC 1. We have no exposure to troubled municipalities including the City of Detroit.

Finance and finance-related corporates and hybrids remain the largest component of the $217.3 million unrealized loss position. We view the increase in the unrealized loss position as a function of higher Treasury yields. The unrealized loss position in non-agency RMBS increased from $4.3 million to $9.3 million as the risk-off trade affected more market-sensitive asset classes, and as concerns about the strength and duration of the housing recovery affected real estate-sensitive assets. These recent developments notwithstanding, we continue to see the underlying fundamentals in this asset class as relatively stable, and ultimately, less subject to interest rate volatility. We continue to find opportunities in non-agency residential mortgage-backed holdings, generally targeting those securities with NAIC 1 ratings.

 

79


Table of Contents

The amortized cost and fair value of fixed maturity securities and equity securities (excluding U.S. Government and U.S. Government-sponsored agency securities) in an unrealized loss position greater than 20% and the number of months in an unrealized loss position with fixed maturity investment grade securities (NRSRO rating of BBB/Baa or higher) as of June 30, 2013, were as follows:

 

    June 30, 2013     September 30, 2012  
    Number of
Securities
    Amortized
Cost
    Fair Value     Gross
Unrealized
Losses
    Number of
Securities
    Amortized
Cost
    Fair Value     Gross
Unrealized
Losses
 

Investment grade:

               

Less than six months

    4      $ 33.2      $ 25.2      $ (8.0     —        $ —        $ —        $ —     

Six months or more and less than twelve months

    —          —          —          —          3        2.6        0.9        (1.7

Twelve months or greater

    2        0.4        —          (0.4     —          —          —          —     
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total investment grade

    6        33.6        25.2        (8.4     3        2.6        0.9        (1.7
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Below investment grade:

               

Less than six months

    2        —          —          —          —          —          —          —     

Six months or more and less than twelve months

    —          —          —          —          1        0.8        0.5        (0.3

Twelve months or greater

    —          —          —          —          1        —          —          —     
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total below investment grade

    2        —          —          —          2        0.8        0.5        (0.3
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total

    8      $ 33.6      $ 25.2      $ (8.4     5      $ 3.4      $ 1.4      $ (2.0
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

As of June 30, 2013, we held (i) eight securities that had unrealized losses greater than 20% that were in an unrealized loss position less than six months (ii) zero securities that were in an unrealized loss position greater than six months but less than 12 months and (iii) two securities that were in an unrealized loss position greater than 12 months. This included six investment grade securities (NRSRO rating of BBB/Baa or higher) with an amortized cost and estimated fair value of $33.6 million and $25.2 million, respectively as well as two securities below investment grade with an amortized cost and estimated fair value of less than $0.1 million.

As of September 30, 2012, we held five securities that had unrealized losses greater than 20% that were in an unrealized loss position greater than six months and one security that was in an unrealized loss position greater than 12 months. This included three investment grade securities (NRSRO rating of BBB/Baa or higher) with an amortized cost and estimated fair value of $2.6 million and $0.9 million, respectively, as well as two securities below investment grade with an amortized cost and estimated fair value of $0.8 million and $0.5 million, respectively.

OTTI and Watch List

We have a policy and process in place to identify securities in our investment portfolio each quarter for which we should recognize impairments.

At each balance sheet date, we identify invested assets which have characteristics creating uncertainty as to our future assessment of an OTTI (i.e., significant unrealized losses compared to amortized cost and industry trends). As part of this assessment, we review not only a change in current price relative to its amortized cost, but also the issuer’s current credit rating and the probability of full recovery of principal based upon the issuer’s financial strength. Specifically, for corporate issues, we evaluate the financial stability and quality of asset coverage for the securities relative to the term to maturity for the issues we own. On a quarterly basis, we review structured securities for changes in default rates, loss severities and expected cash flows for the purpose of assessing potential OTTI and related credit losses to be recognized in operations. A security which has a 20% or

 

80


Table of Contents

greater change in market price relative to its amortized cost and a possibility of a loss of principal will be included on a list which is referred to as our watch list. At June 30, 2013 and September 30, 2012, our watch list included only eight and five securities, respectively, in an unrealized loss position with an amortized cost of $33.6 million and $3.4 million, unrealized losses of $8.4 million and $2.0 million, and fair value of $25.2 million and $1.4 million, respectively. Our analysis of these structured securities included cash flow testing results which demonstrated the June 30, 2013 and September 30, 2012 carrying values were fully recoverable.

There were six and five structured securities on the watch list to which we had potential credit exposure as of June 30, 2013 and September 30, 2012, respectively. Our analysis of these structured securities included cash flow testing results which demonstrated the June 30, 2013 and September 30, 2012 carrying values were fully recoverable.

European Exposure

Our investment portfolio had no direct exposure to European sovereign debt as of June 30, 2013 or September 30, 2012. The exposure to peripheral European financial institutions is limited to the obligations of two Spanish banks, denominated in U.S. dollars. As of June 30, 2013, the portfolio had exposure to bonds issued by two foreign subsidiaries of Banco Santander, Spain’s largest bank, Banco Santander USA and Banco Santander Chile, with fair values of $5.9 million and $5.2 million, respectively. As of September 30, 2012, the portfolio had exposure to bonds issued by Banco Santander Chile, with a fair value of $44.3 million. We do not view these particular foreign holdings as vulnerable to any prolonged weakness in the domestic Spanish economy given their focus on business in their home markets, mainly the United States and Chile. In addition to Banco Santander, we also own bonds issued by BBVA, Spain’s second largest banking concern, which had a fair value of $42.6 million and $32.8 million as of June 30, 2013 and September 30, 2012, respectively. These securities are obligations of a domestic subsidiary and are exposed to the domestic Spanish economy. As such, the ratings on these securities are likely to reflect any changes to the sovereign rating of Spain. With the recovery in capital markets during Fiscal Year 2012, we have seen an improvement in the pricing of both the Banco Santander obligations as well as the BBVA bonds. During Fiscal Year 2012, we recorded a gain of $3.0 million on the elimination of our portfolio’s exposure to the Italian banking concern Unicredito by selling HVB Funding Trust I and III, which were previously written down due to a change of intent from hold to sell.

AFS Securities

For additional information regarding our AFS securities, including the amortized cost, gross unrealized gains (losses), and fair value of AFS securities as well as the amortized cost and fair value of fixed maturity AFS securities by contractual maturities as of June 30, 2013 and September 30, 2012, refer to Note 4 to our audited consolidated financial statements.

Net Investment Income and Net Investment Gains

For discussion regarding our net investment income and net investment gains refer to Note 4 to our audited consolidated financial statements.

Concentrations of Financial Instruments

For detail regarding our concentration of financial instruments refer to Note 3 to our audited consolidated financial statements.

Derivatives

We are exposed to credit loss in the event of nonperformance by our counterparties on call options. We attempt to reduce the credit risk associated with such agreements by purchasing such options from large, well-established financial institutions.

 

81


Table of Contents

We will also hold cash and cash equivalents received from counterparties for call option collateral, as well as U.S. Government securities pledged as call option collateral, if our counterparty’s net exposures exceed pre-determined thresholds. See Note 5 to our audited consolidated financial statements for additional information regarding our derivatives and our exposure to credit loss on call options.

Liquidity and Capital Resources

Liquidity is our ability to generate sufficient cash flows to meet the cash requirements of our operating, investing and financing activities. Our ability to generate and maintain sufficient liquidity depends on the prevailing economic and competitive conditions, the profitability of our businesses, the timing of cash flows, and certain financial, business and other factors beyond our control.

If our cash flows and capital resources are insufficient to fund our obligations, we could face substantial liquidity problems and may be forced to reduce or delay investments and capital expenditures, or to sell assets, seek additional capital or restructure or refinance our indebtedness. Our ability to restructure or refinance our debt will depend on the condition of the capital markets and our financial condition at such time. Any refinancing of our debt could be at higher interest rates and may require us to comply with more onerous covenants, which could further restrict our business operations. The terms of future debt instruments may restrict us from adopting some of these alternatives. In addition, any failure to make payments on our outstanding obligations on a timely basis would likely result in a reduction of our ratings, which could harm our ability to conduct our business and to incur additional indebtedness. In the absence of such cash flows and resources, we could face substantial liquidity problems and might be required to dispose of material assets or operations to meet our obligations. We may not be able to consummate those dispositions and these proceeds may not be adequate to meet any obligations then due.

Consolidated Cash Flow Activities

Presented below is a table that summarizes the cash provided or used in our activities for the periods indicated:

 

     Fiscal 2013
Nine Months
    Fiscal 2012
Nine Months
     Fiscal 2012     Successor
Period
April 6,  2011
through
September 30,
    Predecessor
Period
January 1,
2011
through
April 5,
    Year Ended
December 31,
 

(in millions)

          2011     2011     2010  

Net cash provided by (used in) operating activities

   $ 238.1      $ 192.5       $ 300.0      $ (25.4   $ 273.9      $ 608.4   

Net cash (used in) provided by investing activities

     (347.6     432.0         53.0        902.9        242.5        (50.7

Net cash provided by (used in) financing activities

     58.0        118.2         (119.3     (56.8     (251.0     (741.7
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net increase (decrease) in cash

   $ (51.5   $ 742.7       $ 233.7      $ 820.7      $ 265.4      $ (184.0
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Our principal sources of cash include sales of our products, income from our investment portfolio and proceeds from sales of investments. As an insurance business, we typically generate positive cash flows from operating activities, as premiums collected from our insurance products and income received from our investments exceed policy acquisition costs, benefits paid, redemptions and operating expenses. These positive cash flows are then invested to support the obligations of our insurance and investment products and the required capital supporting these products. Our cash flows from operating activities are affected by (i) the timing of premiums, (ii) fees and investment income received and (iii) benefits and expenses paid. Changes in cash from

 

82


Table of Contents

financing activities primarily relate to the issuance of, and redemption and benefit payments on, investment contracts including annuity and IUL contracts and the issuance and repayment of borrowings.

Operating Activities

Cash provided by operating activities totaled $238.1 million for the Fiscal 2013 Nine Months, as compared to $192.5 million for the Fiscal 2012 Nine Months. The $45.6 million increase in cash provided by operating activities is primarily due to (i) a decrease in transfers of cash to reinsurers relating to a reinsurance transaction in the Fiscal 2012 Nine Months and (ii) a decrease in policy acquisition and operating expenses, partially offset by (a) an increase in benefits paid and (b) a decrease in cash premiums, investment income and fees.

Cash provided by operating activities for the Fiscal Year 2012 was $300.0 million. Cash provided by operating activities was primarily comprised of $812.2 million in investment income and $75.4 million in insurance premiums and investment product fees, offset by $314.2 million in policy acquisition and operating expenses, $176.8 million in transfers of cash to reinsurers relating to reinsurance transactions and $140.4 million in benefits paid.

Cash used in operating activities for the period from April 6, 2011 through September 30, 2011 was $25.4 million. These cash flows were derived substantially from net income before adjusting for certain non-cash charges, including $140.0 million of interest credited/index credit to contractholder account balances. This was partially offset by $52.6 million of cash transferred to reinsurers in connection with reinsurance transactions.

Cash provided by operating activities for the period from January 1, 2011 through April 5, 2011 was $273.9 million. These cash flows were derived substantially from net income before adjusting for certain non-cash charges, including $131.7 million for amortization of intangible assets and $155.2 million for interest credited/index credit to contractholder account balances.

Cash provided by operating activities for the year ended December 31, 2010 was $608.4 million. These cash flows were derived substantially from net income before adjusting for certain non-cash charges, including $557.7 million for interest credited/index credit to contractholder account balances.

Investing Activities

Cash used in investing activities was $(347.6) million for the Fiscal 2013 Nine Months, as compared to cash provided of $432.0 million for the Fiscal 2012 Nine Months. The $779.6 million decrease in cash provided by investing activities is principally due to reinvestment from cash generated in prior periods.

Cash provided by investing activities for the Fiscal Year 2012 was $53.0 million. This reflects proceeds from sales, maturities and repayments, net of purchases of fixed maturity securities, and other investments of $209.3 million, offset by new investments in related party loans of $150.1 million.

Cash provided by investing activities for the period from April 6, 2011 through September 30, 2011 was $902.9 million. This reflects cash acquired of $695.5 million as well as cash provided from sales, maturities and repayments, net of purchases of fixed maturity securities and other investments of approximately $215.8 million.

Cash provided by investing activities for the period from January 1, 2011 through April 5, 2011 was $242.5 million. This reflects cash provided from sales, maturities and repayments, net of purchases of fixed maturity securities and other investments of approximately $242.5 million.

Cash used in investing activities for the year ended December 31, 2010 was $50.7 million. This reflects cash used to purchase fixed maturity securities and other investments, net of proceeds from sales, maturities and repayments of approximately $49.9 million.

 

83


Table of Contents

Financing Activities

Cash provided by financing activities was $58.0 million for the Fiscal 2013 Nine Months, as compared to cash provided by financing activities of $118.2 million for the Fiscal 2012 Nine Months. The $60.2 million decrease is the result of dividends paid of $93.7 million in the Fiscal 2013 Nine Months and a $248.8 million increase in cash used, from the issuance of, net of redemptions and benefit payments on, investment contracts including annuity and universal life insurance contracts, offset by an increase in cash provided by the issuance of $300.0 million of Senior Notes.

Cash used in financing activities for the Fiscal Year 2012 was $119.3 million. This reflects the repayment of the $95.0 surplus note, repayment of advance from HGI of $49.3 million, and a dividend payment of $40.0 million, offset by the issuance of, net of redemptions and benefit payments on, annuity and universal life insurance contracts of $60.9 million.

Cash used in financing activities for the period from April 6, 2011 through September 30, 2011 was $56.8 million. This reflects redemptions and benefit payments on annuity and universal life insurance contracts, net of issuances of $465.0 million as well as a dividend payment of $20.0 million, offset by $378.9 million of capital contributions, primarily to fund the FGLH Acquisition, and advances from HGI of $49.3 million.

Cash used in financing activities for the period from January 1, 2011 through April 5, 2011 was $251.0 million. This reflects redemptions and benefit payments on annuity and universal life insurance contracts, net of issuances of $272.3 million, offset by a drawdown of revolving credit facility from affiliate of $21.3 million.

Cash used in financing activities for the year ended December 31, 2010 was $741.7 million. This reflects redemptions and benefit payments on annuity and universal life insurance contracts, net of issuances of $738.6 million, as well as a $33.7 million return of capital to our former parent, offset by a $30.7 million capital contribution from our former parent.

Holding Company

We are a holding company with limited business operations of our own. Our primary subsidiaries are insurance subsidiaries that own substantially all of our assets and conduct substantially all of our operations. Dividends from our subsidiaries and interest earned on FGLH’s investments are our principal sources of cash to pay shareholder dividends and to meet our obligations. Accordingly, our payment of dividends is dependent, to a significant extent, on the generation of cash flow by our subsidiaries and their ability to make such cash available to us, by dividend or otherwise. Our subsidiaries may not be able to, or may not be permitted to, make distributions to enable us to meet our obligations and pay dividends. See “Risk Factors—Risks Relating to Our Business—We are a holding company with no operations of our own. As a consequence, our ability to pay dividends on our stock will depend on the ability of our subsidiaries to pay dividends to us, which may be restricted by law”. Each subsidiary is a distinct legal entity and legal and contractual restrictions may also limit our ability to obtain cash from our subsidiaries. Other principal sources of cash also include sales of assets held by our subsidiaries.

Insurance Subsidiaries

The liquidity requirements of our insurance subsidiaries principally relate to the liabilities associated with their various insurance and investment products, operating costs and expenses, the payment of dividends to us, payment of principal and interest on their outstanding debt obligations and income taxes. Liabilities arising from insurance and investment products include the payment of benefits, as well as cash payments in connection with policy surrenders and withdrawals, policy loans and obligations to redeem funding agreements.

Our insurance subsidiaries have used cash flows from operations and investment activities to fund their liquidity requirements. Our insurance subsidiaries’ principal cash inflows from operating activities are derived from premiums, annuity deposits and insurance and investment product fees and other income. The principal cash inflows from investment activities result from repayments of principal, investment income and, as necessary, sales of invested assets.

 

84


Table of Contents

Our insurance subsidiaries maintain investment strategies intended to provide adequate funds to pay benefits without forced sales of investments. Products having liabilities with longer durations, such as certain life insurance, are matched with investments having similar estimated lives such as long-term fixed maturity securities. Shorter-term liabilities are matched with fixed maturity securities that have short- and medium-term fixed maturities. In addition, our insurance subsidiaries hold highly liquid, high-quality short-term investment securities and other liquid, investment grade, fixed maturity securities to fund anticipated operating expenses, surrenders and withdrawals.

The ability of our subsidiaries to pay dividends and to make other payments is limited by the applicable laws and regulations of the states in which our subsidiaries are domiciled, which subject our subsidiaries to significant regulatory restrictions. These laws and regulations require, among other things, our insurance subsidiaries to maintain minimum solvency requirements and limit the amount of dividends these subsidiaries can pay. Along with solvency regulations, the primary driver in determining the amount of capital used for dividends is the level of capital needed to maintain desired financial strength ratings from the rating agencies. Given the economic events of 2008 through 2010 that have affected the insurance industry, both regulators and rating agencies could become more conservative in their methodology and criteria, including increasing capital requirements for our insurance subsidiaries which, in turn, could negatively affect the cash available to us from insurance subsidiaries. It is possible that in the future, our insurance subsidiaries may be unable to pay dividends or distributions to us in an amount sufficient to meet our obligations or pay dividends on our common stock due to a lack of statutory net gain from operations, a diminishing statutory policyholders surplus, changes to the Maryland or New York insurance laws or regulations or for some other reason. See “Risk Factors—We are a holding company with no operations of our own. As a consequence, our ability to pay dividends on our stock will depend on the ability of our subsidiaries to pay dividends to us, which may be restricted by law”.

The following table presents dividends permitted to be paid by our insurance subsidiaries without the need for insurance regulatory approval for the calendar years presented:

 

     Dividends Permitted without Approval  

(in millions)

       2013              2012              2011      

Subsidiary Name:

        

Fidelity & Guaranty Life Insurance Company

   $ 90.0       $ 84.6       $ 90.2   

Fidelity & Guaranty Life Insurance Company of New York

     1.0         4.5         0.9   

In addition, Raven Re, a special purpose financial captive insurance company subsidiary domiciled in Vermont, provides reinsurance to FGLIC related to the excess statutory reserve associated with the waiver of surrender charge feature on certain deferred annuity contracts.

In July 2013, FGLIC received regulatory notice of non-objection from the MIA to make distributions to FGLH in the aggregate amount of $40.0 million.

Our Indebtedness

Senior Notes

We borrow funds to provide liquidity, invest in the growth of the business and for general corporate purposes. Our ability to access these borrowings depends on a variety of factors including, but not limited to, the credit rating of FGLH, FGLIC’s ordinary dividend capacity and general macroeconomic conditions. In March 2013, FGLH issued $300.0 million aggregate principal amount of 6.375% Senior Notes due April 1, 2021, at par value pursuant to the indenture, dated as of March 27, 2013, between FGLH, certain of its subsidiaries from time to time parties thereto and Wells Fargo Bank, National Association, as Trustee (the “Trustee”), and the first supplemental indenture dated as of March 27, 2013, between FGLH, certain of its subsidiaries from time to time parties thereto and the Trustee. The Senior Notes bear interest at a rate of 6.375% per annum. Interest on the

 

85


Table of Contents

Senior Notes is payable semi-annually in cash in arrears on April 1 and October 1 of each year, commencing October 1, 2013. As of June 30, 2013, FGLH had outstanding approximately $300.0 million aggregate principal amount of the Senior Notes.

With the net proceeds received from the issuance, FGL paid HGI a $73.0 million dividend in March 2013. In connection with the Senior Notes, we capitalized $10.2 million of debt issue costs. The fees are classified as “Other assets” in the accompanying consolidated financial statements and will be amortized to interest expense over the remaining term of the debt.

Contractual Obligations and Future Capital Requirements

Contractual Obligations

The following table summarizes, as of June 30, 2013, our contractual obligations that were fixed and determinable and the payments due under those obligations in the following periods.

 

     Payments Due by Fiscal Period  

(in millions)

   Total      2013      2014 and
2015
     2016 and
2017
     After
2017
 

Annuity and universal life products(a)

   $ 16,940.1       $ 479.5       $ 3,706.4       $ 3,556.3       $ 9,197.9   

Operating leases

     10.4         0.3         2.4         2.5         5.2   

Debt

     300.0         —           —           —           300.0   

Interest expense

     152.8         4.8         38.2         38.2         71.6   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

   $ 17,403.3       $ 484.6       $ 3,747.0       $ 3,597.0       $ 9,574.7   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

(a) Amounts shown in this table are projected payments through the year 2030 which we are contractually obligated to pay our annuity and IUL policyholders. The payments are derived from actuarial models which assume a level interest rate scenario and incorporate assumptions regarding mortality and persistency, when applicable. These assumptions are based on our historical experience, but actual amounts will differ.

FHLB

We are currently a member of the Federal Home Loan Bank of Atlanta (“FHLB”) and are required to maintain a collateral deposit that backs any funding agreements issued. We have the ability to obtain funding from the FHLB based on a percentage of the value of our assets, subject to the availability of eligible collateral. Collateral is pledged based on the outstanding balances of FHLB funding agreements. The amount of funding varies based on the type, rating and maturity of the collateral posted to the FHLB. Generally, U.S. government agency notes and mortgage backed securities are pledged to the FHLB as collateral. Market value fluctuations resulting from changes in interest rates, spreads and other risk factors for each type of assets are monitored and additional collateral is either pledged or released as needed.

Our borrowing capacity under these credit facilities does not have an expiration date as long as we maintain a satisfactory level of creditworthiness based on the FHLB’s credit assessment. As of June 30, 2013 and September 30, 2012, we had $557.7 million and $363.2 million in non-putable funding agreements, respectively, included under contract owner account balances on our consolidated balance sheet. As of June 30, 2013 and September 30, 2012, we had assets with a market value of approximately $628.8 million and $390.4 million, respectively, which collateralized the FHLB funding agreements. Assets pledged to the FHLB are included in fixed maturities, AFS, on our consolidated balance sheets.

Collateral—Derivative Contracts

Under the terms of our ISDA agreements, we may receive from, or deliver to, counterparties, collateral to assure that all terms of the ISDA agreements will be met with regard to the Credit Support Annex (“CSA”). The

 

86


Table of Contents

terms of the CSA call for us to pay interest on any cash received equal to the federal funds rate. As of June 30, 2013 and September 30, 2012, no collateral was posted by our counterparties as they did not meet the net exposure thresholds. Collateral requirements are monitored on a daily basis and incorporate changes in market values of both the derivatives contract as well as the collateral pledged. Market value fluctuations are due to changes in interest rates, spreads and other risk factors.

Statutory Capital and Risk-Based Capital

FGLIC and FGL NY Insurance are subject to minimum RBC requirements established by the insurance departments of their applicable state of domicile. The formulas for determining the amount of RBC specify various weighting factors that are applied to financial balances or various levels of activity based on the perceived degree of risk. Regulatory compliance is determined by a ratio of TAC, as defined by the NAIC, to RBC requirements, as defined by the NAIC. FGLIC and FGL NY Insurance exceeded the minimum RBC requirements that would require regulatory or corrective action for all periods presented herein. RBC is an important factor in the determination of the financial strength ratings of FGLIC.

FGLIC and FGL NY Insurance are required to prepare statutory financial statements in accordance with statutory accounting practices prescribed or permitted by the insurance department of the state of domicile of the respective insurance subsidiary. Statutory accounting practices primarily differ from GAAP by charging policy acquisition costs to expense as incurred, establishing future policy benefit liabilities using different actuarial assumptions as well as valuing investments and certain assets and accounting for deferred taxes on a different basis. Certain assets that are not admitted under statutory accounting principles are charged directly to surplus.

Statutory capital and surplus of FGLIC and our other insurance subsidiaries is as follows for the periods presented:

 

     As of  

(in millions)

   June 30, 2013      September 30, 2012  

Subsidiary Name:

     

Fidelity & Guaranty Life Insurance Company

   $ 1,102.9       $ 861.6   

Fidelity & Guaranty Life Insurance Company of New York

     60.9         45.3   

Raven Reinsurance Company

     159.9         23.8   

We monitor the ratio of our insurance subsidiaries’ TAC to company action level risk-based capital (“CAL”). A ratio in excess of either (i) 100% or (ii) 150% if there is a negative trend, indicates that the insurance subsidiary is not required to take any corrective actions to increase capital levels at the direction of the applicable state of domicile.

The ratio of TAC to CAL for FGLIC and FGL NY Insurance is set out below for the periods presented:

 

     As of June 30, 2013     As of September 30, 2012  

(in millions)

   CAL      TAC      Ratio     CAL      TAC      Ratio  

Fidelity & Guarantee Life Insurance Company

   $ 246.2       $ 1167.4         474.2   $ 253.8       $ 901.4         355.2

Fidelity & Guarantee Life Insurance Company of New York

   $ 8.4       $ 62.5         744.0   $ 7.3       $ 46.2         632.9

Future Capital Requirements

We believe that our existing cash and cash equivalents combined with our expected cash flow from operations will be sufficient to meet our projected operating and capital expenditure requirements for at least the next twelve months.

In addition, we expect that the net proceeds from this offering will provide us with the financial flexibility to execute our strategic objectives. Our ability to generate cash, however, is subject to our performance, general economic

 

87


Table of Contents

conditions, industry trends and other factors. To the extent that funds from this offering, combined with existing cash and cash equivalents and operating cash flow are insufficient to fund our future activities and requirements, we may need to raise additional funds through public or private equity or debt financing. If we issue equity securities in order to raise additional funds, substantial dilution to existing shareholders may occur. If we raise cash through the issuance of additional indebtedness, we may be subject to additional contractual restrictions on our business. There is no assurance that we would be able to raise the additional funds on favorable terms or at all.

Captive Reinsurers

FGLIC currently has a reinsurance agreement with Raven Re, its wholly-owned captive reinsurance company, whereby FGLIC cedes to Raven Re a 100% quota share of FGLIC’s statutory reserves related to the risk that FGLIC does not receive contractual surrender charges that are waived in certain circumstances. As of June 30, 2013, FGLIC had ceded $232.3 million of statutory reserves to Raven Re; however, the reserves ceded are only reflected in FGLIC’s statutory financial statements. Accordingly, the only impact on our consolidated GAAP financial statements is the expense associated with the related letter of credit facility and the amortization of the up-front structuring fee. The facility fee, including the amortization of the up-front structuring fee, was $4.3 million and $0 for the Fiscal 2013 Nine Months and Fiscal 2012 Nine Months, respectively. Raven Re does not assume or cede any business to any third parties. See “Business—Reserve Facilities—The CARVM Facility”.

If our insurance regulators introduce new regulations that restrict our ability to use captive reinsurers, FGLIC may have to recapture the business ceded to Raven Re, which would reduce FGLIC’s statutory capital and surplus by the amount of ceded reserves recaptured. See “Risk Factors—Restrictions on our ability to use captive reinsurers could adversely impact our competitive position and results of operations” for further discussion.

Off Balance Sheet Arrangements

We do not have any off balance sheet arrangements as of June 30, 2013.

Critical Accounting Policies and Estimates

General

The preparation of financial statements in conformity with GAAP requires us to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities and disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities at the date of the financial statements and the reported amounts of revenues and expenses during the reporting period. Critical estimates and assumptions are evaluated on an ongoing basis based on historical developments, market conditions, industry trends and other information that is reasonable under the circumstances. There can be no assurance that actual results will conform to estimates and assumptions and that reported results of operations will not be materially affected by the need to make future accounting adjustments to reflect changes in these estimates and assumptions from time to time.

We have identified the following accounting policies, judgments and estimates as critical in that they involve a higher degree of judgment and are subject to a significant degree of variability: valuation of AFS securities and derivatives, evaluation of OTTI, amortization of DAC and VOBA, reserves for future policy benefits and product guarantees, recognition of deferred income tax assets and related valuation allowances and estimates of loss contingencies.

In developing these accounting estimates and policies, we make subjective and complex judgments that are inherently uncertain and subject to material changes as facts and circumstances develop. Although variability is inherent in these estimates, we believe the amounts provided are appropriate based upon the facts available upon preparation of our audited consolidated financial statements.

The above critical accounting estimates are described in Note 2 to our audited consolidated financial statements.

 

88


Table of Contents

Valuation of AFS Securities and Derivatives

Our fixed maturity and equity securities classified as AFS are reported at fair value, with unrealized gains and losses included within AOCI (loss), net of associated intangibles adjustments and deferred income taxes. Unrealized gains and losses represent the difference between the cost or amortized cost basis and the fair value of these investments. We measure the fair value of our AFS securities based on assumptions used by market participants, which may include inherent risk and restrictions on the sale or use of an asset. The estimate of fair value is the price that would be received to sell an asset in an orderly transaction between market participants (“exit price”) in the principal market, or the most advantageous market in the absence of a principal market, for that asset or liability. We utilize independent pricing services in estimating the fair values of AFS securities. The independent pricing services incorporate a variety of observable market data in their valuation techniques, including: reported trading prices, benchmark yields, broker-dealer quotes, benchmark securities, bids and offers, credit ratings, relative credit information and other reference data.

We categorize our AFS securities into a three-level hierarchy based on the priority of the inputs to the valuation technique. The fair value hierarchy gives the highest priority to quoted prices in active markets for identical assets (Level 1) and the lowest priority to unobservable inputs (Level 3). If the inputs used to measure fair value fall within different levels of the hierarchy, the category level is based on the lowest priority level input that is significant to the fair value measurement of the instrument. The following table presents the fair value of fixed maturity and equity securities, AFS, by pricing source and hierarchy level as of June 30, 2013 and September 30, 2012 .

As of June 30, 2013

 

(dollars in millions)

   Quoted Prices in
Active Markets for
Identical Assets
(Level 1)
    Significant
Observable Inputs
(Level 2)
    Significant
Unobservable
Inputs
(Level 3)
    Total  

Prices via third party pricing services

   $ 217.0      $ 15,202.8      $ —        $ 15,419.8   

Priced via independent broker quotations

     —          —          528.7        528.7   

Priced via other methods

     —          —          50.5        50.5   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total

   $ 217.0      $ 15,202.8      $ 579.2      $ 15,999.0   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

% of Total

     1.4     95.0     3.6     100.0
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

As of September 30, 2012

 

(dollars in millions)

   Quoted Prices in
Active Markets for
Identical Assets
(Level 1)
    Significant
Observable Inputs
(Level 2)
    Significant
Unobservable
Inputs
(Level 3)
    Total  

Prices via third party pricing services

   $ 930.0      $ 15,242.0      $ —        $ 16,172.0   

Priced via independent broker quotations

     —          —          133.0        133.0   

Priced via other methods

     —          —          32.0        32.0   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total

   $ 930.0      $ 15,242.0      $ 165.0      $ 16,337.0   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

% of Total

     6     93     1     100
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Management’s assessment of all available data when determining fair value of the AFS securities is necessary to appropriately apply fair value accounting. The independent pricing services also take into account perceived market movements and sector news, as well as a security’s terms and conditions, including any features specific to that issue that may influence risk and marketability. Depending on the security, the priority of the use of observable market inputs may change as some observable market inputs may not be relevant or

 

89


Table of Contents

additional inputs may be necessary. We generally obtain one value from our primary external pricing service. In situations where a price is not available from the independent pricing service, we may obtain broker quotes or prices from additional parties recognized to be market participants. We believe the broker quotes are prices at which trades could be executed based on historical trades executed at broker-quoted or slightly higher prices. When quoted prices in active markets are not available, the determination of estimated fair value is based on market standard valuation methodologies, including discounted cash flows, matrix pricing, or other similar techniques.

We validate external valuations at least quarterly through a combination of procedures that include the evaluation of methodologies used by the pricing services, comparisons to valuations from other independent pricing services, analytical reviews and performance analysis of the prices against trends, and maintenance of a securities watch list. See Note 4 and Note 6 to our audited consolidated financial statements for a more complete discussion.

Our FIA contracts permit the holder to elect to receive a credit based on an interest rate or the performance of a market index. We hedge certain portions of our exposure to equity market risk by entering into derivative transactions. In doing so, we purchase derivatives consisting of a combination of call options and futures contracts on the equity indices underlying the applicable policy. These derivatives are used to fund the index credits due to contractholders under the FIA contracts. The call options are one-, two- and three-year call options, purchased to match a majority of the funding requirements underlying the FIA contracts, with the balance of the equity exposure hedged using futures contracts. On the respective anniversary dates of the applicable FIA contracts, the market index used to compute the annual index credit under the applicable FIA contract is reset. At such time, we purchase new one-, two- or three-year call options to fund the next index credit. We attempt to manage the cost of these purchases through the terms of the FIA contracts, which permit changes to caps or participation rates, subject to certain guaranteed minimums that must be maintained. We are exposed to credit loss in the event of nonperformance by our counterparties on the call options. We attempt to reduce the credit risk associated with such agreements by purchasing such options from large, well-established financial institutions as well as holding collateral when individual counterparty exposures exceed certain thresholds.

All of our derivative instruments are recognized as either assets or liabilities at fair value in our Consolidated Balance Sheets. The change in fair value of our derivative assets is recognized in our Consolidated Statements of Operations within “Net investment gains (losses)”.

Certain products contain embedded derivatives—a feature in certain FIA contracts that permits the holder to elect an interest rate return or an equity-index linked component, where interest credited to the contract is linked to the performance of various equity indices. The FIA embedded derivative is valued at fair value and included in the liability for contractholder funds in our Consolidated Balance Sheets with changes in fair value included as a component of “Benefits and other changes in policy reserves” in our Consolidated Statements of Operations.

The fair value of derivative assets and liabilities is based upon valuation pricing models and represents what we would expect to receive or pay at the balance sheet date if we cancelled the options, entered into offsetting positions, or exercised the options. The fair value of futures contracts at the balance sheet date represents the cumulative unsettled variation margin (open trade equity net of cash settlements). Fair values for these instruments are determined externally by an independent actuarial firm using market observable inputs, including interest rates, yield curve volatilities and other factors. Credit risk related to the counterparty is considered when estimating the fair values of these derivatives. However, we are largely protected by collateral arrangements with counterparties when individual counterparty exposures exceed certain thresholds. The fair values of the embedded derivatives in our FIA contracts are derived using market value of options, swap rates, mortality multiplier, surrender rates and non-performance spread and are classified as Level 3. See Note 5 and Note 6 to our audited consolidated financial statements for a more complete discussion. The discount rate used to determine the fair value of our FIA embedded derivative liabilities includes an adjustment to reflect the risk that these obligations will not be fulfilled (“nonperformance risk”). Through the Fiscal 2013 Nine Months, our nonperformance risk adjustment was based on the expected loss due to default in debt obligations for similarly

 

90


Table of Contents

rated financial companies. See Note 5, Derivative Financial Instruments, and Note 6, Fair Value of Financial Instruments, to our unaudited condensed consolidated financial statements for a more complete discussion.

Evaluation of OTTI

We have a policy and process in place to evaluate securities in our investment portfolio quarterly to assess whether there has been an OTTI. This evaluation process entails considerable judgment and estimation and involves monitoring market events and other items that could impact issuers. The evaluation includes but is not limited to such factors as: the length of time and the extent to which the fair value has been less than cost or amortized cost; whether the issuer is current on all payments and all contractual payments have been made as agreed; the remaining payment terms and the financial condition and near term prospects of the issuer; the lack of ability to refinance due to liquidity problems in the credit market; the fair value of any underlying collateral; the existence of any credit protection available; the intent to sell and whether it is more likely than not we would be required to sell prior to recovery for debt securities; the assessment in the case of equity securities including perpetual preferred stocks with credit deterioration that the security cannot recover to cost in a reasonable period of time; the intent and ability to retain equity securities for a period of time sufficient to allow for recovery; consideration of rating agency actions; and changes in estimated cash flows of residential mortgage and ABS. An extended and severe unrealized loss position on an AFS fixed income security may not have any impact on: (a) the ability of the issuer to service all scheduled interest and principal payments and (b) the evaluation of recoverability of all contractual cash flows or the ability to recover an amount at least equal to its amortized cost based on the present value of the expected future cash flows to be collected.

When assessing our intent to sell a security or if it is more likely than not we will be required to sell a security before recovery of its amortized cost basis, we evaluate facts and circumstances such as, but not limited to, sales of investments to meet cash flow or capital needs

We determine whether OTTI losses should be recognized for debt and equity securities by assessing all facts and circumstances surrounding each security. Where the decline in market value of debt securities is attributable to changes in market interest rates or to factors such as market volatility, liquidity and spread widening, and we anticipate recovery of all contractual or expected cash flows, we do not consider these investments to be OTTI. For equity securities, we recognize an OTTI in the period in which we do not have the intent and ability to hold the securities until recovery of cost or we determine that the security will not recover to book value within a reasonable period of time. We determine what constitutes a reasonable period of time on a security-by-security basis by considering all the evidence available, including the magnitude of any unrealized loss and its duration. Impairment analysis of the investment portfolio involves considerable judgment, is subject to considerable variability, is established using management’s best estimate and is revised as additional information becomes available. As such, changes in or deviations from the assumptions used in such analysis can have a significant effect on the results of operations. See “—OTTI and Watch List,” Note 2 and Note 4 to our audited consolidated financial statements for a more complete discussion. Also, see Note 4 to our unaudited condensed consolidated financial statements for discussion around our gross unrealized losses as of June 30, 2013.

DAC and VOBA

Acquisition costs that are incremental, direct costs of contract acquisition, as well as certain costs that are directly related to successful acquisition activities are capitalized as DAC. DAC consists principally of commissions and certain costs of policy issuance that are directly related to the successful acquisition of new business. Indirect or unsuccessful acquisition costs, maintenance, product development and overhead expenses are charged to expense as incurred.

VOBA is an intangible asset that reflects the estimated fair value of in-force contracts in a life insurance company acquisition less the amount recorded as insurance contract liabilities. It represents the portion of the purchase price that is allocated to the value of the rights to receive future cash flows from the business in-force at the acquisition date.

 

91


Table of Contents

DAC and VOBA are subject to loss recognition testing on a quarterly basis or when an event occurs that may warrant loss recognition.

For annuity products and IUL, DAC and VOBA are being amortized generally in proportion to estimated gross profits from net investment spread margins, surrender charges and other product fees, policy benefits, maintenance expenses, mortality net of reinsurance ceded and expense margins, and recognized gain (loss) on investments. Current and future period gross profits for FIA contracts also include the impact of amounts recorded for the change in fair value of derivatives and the change in fair value of embedded derivatives. At each valuation date, the most recent quarter’s estimated gross profits are updated with actual gross profits and the assumptions underlying future estimated gross profits are evaluated for continued reasonableness. If the update of assumptions causes estimated gross profits to increase, DAC and VOBA amortization will decrease, resulting in lower amortization expense in the period. The opposite result occurs when the assumption update causes estimated gross profits to decrease. Current period amortization is adjusted retrospectively through an unlocking process when estimates of current or future gross profits (including the impact of recognized investment gains and losses) to be realized from a group of products are revised. Our estimates of future gross profits are based on actuarial assumptions related to the underlying policies’ terms, lives of the policies, duration of contract, yield on investments supporting the liabilities and level of expenses necessary to maintain the polices over their entire lives. Revisions are made based on historical results and our best estimates of future experience. Estimated future gross profits vary based on a number of sources including net investment spread margins, surrender charge income, policy persistency, policy administrative expenses and recognized gains and losses on investments including credit related OTTI losses. Estimated future gross profits are sensitive to changes in interest rates which are the most significant component of gross profits.

Changes in assumptions can have a significant impact on DAC and VOBA, amortization rates and results of operations. Assumptions are management’s best estimate of future outcome. Several assumptions are considered significant and require significant judgment in the estimation of gross profits and are listed below. We periodically review these assumptions against actual experience and update our assumptions based on additional information that becomes available.

 

   

Assumptions related to interest rate spreads and credit losses also impact estimated gross profits for all applicable products with credited rates. These assumptions are based on the current investment portfolio yields and credit quality, estimated future crediting rates, capital markets, and estimates of future interest rates and defaults.

 

   

Other significant assumptions include estimated policyholder behavior assumptions, such as surrender, lapse, and annuitization rates. We use a combination of actual and industry experience when setting and updating our policyholder behavior assumptions and such assumptions require considerable judgment.

We perform sensitivity analyses to assess the impact that certain assumptions have on DAC and VOBA. The following table presents the estimated instantaneous net impact to income before income taxes of various assumption changes on our DAC and VOBA. The effects presented are not representative of the aggregate impacts that could result if a combination of such changes to interest rates and other assumptions occurred.

 

(in millions)

   As of June 30, 2013  

A change to the long-term interest rate assumption of -50 basis points

   $ (52.3

A change to the long-term interest rate assumption of +50 basis points

     36.0   

An assumed 10% increase in surrender rate

     (60.8

Assumptions regarding shifts in market factors may be overly simplistic and not indicative of actual market behavior in stress scenarios.

 

   

Lower assumed interest rates and higher assumed annuity surrender rates tend to decrease the balances of DAC and VOBA, thus decreasing income before income taxes.

 

92


Table of Contents
   

Higher assumed interest rates and lower assumed annuity surrender rates tend to increase the balances of DAC and VOBA, thus increasing income before income taxes.

See Note 2 and Note 7 to our audited consolidated financial statements for a more complete discussion. We continually update and assess the facts and circumstances regarding all of these critical accounting matters and other significant accounting matters affecting estimates in our financial statements.

Reserves for Future Policy Benefits and Product Guarantees

The determination of future policy benefit reserves is dependent on actuarial assumptions. The principal assumptions used to establish liabilities for future policy benefits are based on our experience. These assumptions are established at issue of the contract and include mortality, morbidity, contract full and partial surrenders, investment returns, annuitization rates and expenses. The assumptions used require considerable judgment. We review overall policyholder experience at least annually and update these assumptions when deemed necessary based on additional information that becomes available. For traditional life and immediate annuity products, assumptions used in the reserve calculation can only be changed if the reserve is deemed to be insufficient. For all other insurance products, changes in assumptions will be used to calculate reserves. Changes in, or deviations from, the assumptions used can significantly affect our reserve levels and related results of operations.

Mortality is the incidence of death amongst policyholders triggering the payment of underlying insurance coverage by the insurer. In addition, mortality also refers to the ceasing of payments on life-contingent annuities due to the death of the annuitant. We utilize a combination of actual and industry experience when setting our mortality assumptions.

A surrender rate is the percentage of account value surrendered by the policyholder. A lapse rate is the percentage of account value canceled by us due to nonpayment of premiums. We make estimates of expected full and partial surrenders of our fixed annuity products. Our surrender rate experience in fiscal 2013 on the fixed annuity products has been averaging 7.2% which is within our assumed ranges. Management’s best estimate of surrender behavior incorporates actual experience over the entire period, as we believe that, over the duration of the policies, we will experience the full range of policyholder behavior and market conditions. If actual surrender rates are significantly different from those assumed, such differences could have a significant effect on our reserve levels and related results of operations.

The assumptions used to establish the liabilities for our product guarantees require considerable judgment and are established as management’s best estimate of future outcomes. We periodically review these assumptions and, if necessary, update them based on additional information that becomes available. Changes in or deviations from the assumptions used can significantly affect our reserve levels and related results of operations.

At issue, and at each subsequent valuation, we determine the present value of the cost of the GMWB rider benefits in excess of benefits that are funded by the account value. We also calculate the expected value of the future rider charges for providing for these benefits. We accumulate a reserve equal to the portion of these fees that would be required to fund the future benefits less benefits paid to date. In making these projections, a number of assumptions are made and we update these assumptions as experience emerges when required. We have minimal experience to date on policyholder behavior for our GMWB products which we began issuing in 2008, as a result, future experience could lead to significant changes in our assumptions. If emerging experience deviates from our assumptions on GMWB utilizations, such deviations could have a significant effect on our reserve levels and related results of operations.

See Note 2 to our audited consolidated financial statements for further information on our reserves for future policy benefits and product guarantees.

 

93


Table of Contents

Deferred Income Tax Assets and Related Valuation Allowance

ASC 740-270-25 provides that for interim reporting periods, income tax expense (or benefit) related to ordinary income (or loss) shall be computed at an estimated annual effective tax rate (“ETR”) and any discrete tax expense (or benefit) related to other items shall be individually computed and recognized when the items occur. FGL computed its income tax expense for the Fiscal 2013 Nine Months utilizing an annual ETR approach. Separate annual effective tax rates were calculated for its life and non-life companies. The effective tax rates were applied to pre-tax GAAP income of the life and non-life subgroups, respectively, for the Fiscal 2013 Nine Months.

Management reassessed the recoverability of its deferred tax assets at the June 30, 2013 reporting date. Based on management’s consideration of all positive and negative evidence regarding the reliability of its deferred tax assets, management adjusted its partial valuation allowance to $170.9 million against its gross deferred tax assets of $412.3 million at June 30, 2013. This resulted in a release of valuation allowance in the amount of $6.6 million for the Fiscal 2013 Nine Months.

The calculated ETR for the life companies, after taking into account the impact of the valuation allowance release, is 32.1% for the Fiscal 2013 Nine Months. The non-life companies recorded a full valuation allowance against the computed income tax benefit for the Fiscal 2013 Nine Months, resulting in a 0% net ETR (after valuation allowance.) On a consolidated basis, our ETR is 32.1% for the Fiscal 2013 Nine Months.

Accounting Standards Codification section 740, Income Taxes (ASC 740), provides that deferred tax assets are recognized for deductible temporary differences and operating loss and tax credit carry-forwards. A valuation allowance is recorded if, based on the weight of available evidence, it is more likely than not that a portion of or all deferred tax assets are not more-likely-than-not realizable. Assessing the need for, and the amount of, a valuation allowance for deferred tax assets require management’s judgment, considering all available positive and negative evidence as to the reliability of deferred tax assets.

Future realization of deferred tax assets ultimately depends on the existence of sufficient taxable income of the appropriate character (i.e., ordinary income or capital gain) in either the carryback or carry-forward period under tax law. The four sources of taxable income that may be considered in determining whether a valuation allowance is required are:

 

   

Future reversals of existing taxable temporary differences (i.e., offset of gross deferred tax assets against gross deferred tax liabilities);

 

   

Taxable income in prior carryback years, if carryback is permitted under tax law;

 

   

Tax planning strategies; and

 

   

Future taxable income exclusive of reversing temporary differences and carry-forwards.

At each reporting date, management considers new evidence, both positive and negative, that could impact management’s judgment regarding the future realization of deferred tax assets. As of June 30, 2013, management gathered the following positive and negative evidence concerning the future realization of deferred tax assets:

Positive Evidence:

 

   

As of June 30, 2013, we were in a cumulative income position based on pre-tax income over the prior 12-quarters;

 

   

We are projecting significant pre-tax GAAP income from continuing operations;

 

   

We have projected that the reversal of taxable temporary timing differences will unwind in the 20-year projection period;

 

   

Limited tax planning strategies that will allow us to utilize capital loss carry-forwards on otherwise limited §382 tax attributes;

 

94


Table of Contents
   

We have a history of utilizing all significant tax attributes before they expire; and

 

   

Our inventory of §382 limited attributes has been significantly reduced.

Negative Evidence:

 

   

§382 limited carry-forwards reduce our ability to utilize tax attributes in future years; and

 

   

Brief carryback/carry-forward period for capital losses.

Based on management’s evaluation of the above positive and negative evidence, management concluded that a partial valuation allowance continued to be necessary at June 30, 2013. This resulted in a valuation allowance release totaling $6.6 million for the Fiscal 2013 Nine Months.

Loss Contingencies

Loss contingencies are recorded as liabilities when it is probable that a loss has been incurred and the amount of such loss can be reasonably estimated. The outcome of existing litigation and pending or potential examinations by various taxing or regulatory authorities are examples of situations evaluated as loss contingencies. Estimating the probability and magnitude of losses is often dependent upon management’s judgment of potential actions by third parties and regulators.

The establishment of litigation and regulatory reserves requires judgments concerning the ultimate outcome of pending claims against us and our subsidiaries. In applying their judgment, management utilizes opinions and estimates obtained from outside counsel to apply the appropriate accounting for contingencies. Accordingly, estimated amounts relating to certain claims have met the criteria for the recognition of a liability. Other claims for which a liability has not been recognized are reviewed on an ongoing basis in accordance with accounting guidance. A liability is recognized for all associated legal costs as incurred. Liabilities for litigation settlements, regulatory matters, legal fees and changes in these estimated amounts are not expected to have a material adverse effect on our financial position, although it is possible that the results of operations and cash flows could be materially affected by an unfavorable outcome.

If the actual cost of settling these matters, whether resulting from adverse judgments or otherwise, differs from the reserves totaling $5.7 million that we have accrued as of June 30, 2013, that difference will be reflected in our results of operations when the matter is resolved or when our estimate of the cost changes. See further discussion in Note 14 to our audited consolidated financial statements.

Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures about Market Risk

Market risk is the risk of the loss of fair value resulting from adverse changes in market rates and prices, such as interest rates, foreign currency exchange rates, commodity prices and equity prices. Market risk is directly influenced by the volatility and liquidity in the markets in which the related underlying financial instruments are traded. We have significant holdings in financial instruments and are naturally exposed to a variety of market risks. We are primarily exposed to interest rate risk and equity price risk and have some exposure to credit risk and counterparty risk, which affect the fair value of financial instruments subject to market risk.

Enterprise Risk Management

We place a high priority to risk management and risk control. As part of our effort to ensure measured risk taking, management has integrated risk management in our daily business activities and strategic planning. We have comprehensive risk management, governance and control procedures in place and have established a dedicated risk management function with responsibility for the formulation of our risk appetite, strategies, policies and limits. The risk management function is also responsible for monitoring our overall market risk exposures and provides review, oversight and support functions on risk-related issues. Our risk appetite is aligned with how our businesses are managed and how we anticipate future regulatory developments.

 

95


Table of Contents

Our risk governance and control systems enable us to identify, control, monitor and aggregate risks and provide assurance that risks are being measured, monitored and reported adequately and effectively in accordance with the following three principles:

 

   

Management of the business has primary responsibility for the day-to-day management of risk.

 

   

The risk management function has the primary responsibility to align risk taking with strategic planning through risk tolerance and limit setting.

 

   

The internal audit function provides an ongoing independent (i.e. outside of the risk organization) and objective assessment of the effectiveness of internal controls, including financial and operational risk management.

The Chief Risk Officer (“CRO”) heads our risk management process and reports directly to our Chief Executive Officer (“CEO”). Our Enterprise Risk Committee discusses and approves all risk policies and reviews and approves risks associated with our activities. This includes volatility (affecting earnings and value), exposure (required capital and market risk) and insurance risks.

We have implemented several limit structures to manage risk. Examples include, but are not limited to, the following:

 

   

At-risk limits on sensitivities of earnings and regulatory capital to the capital markets provide the fundamental framework to manage capital markets risks including the risk of asset / liability mismatch;

 

   

Duration and convexity mismatch limits;

 

   

Credit risk concentration limits; and

 

   

Investment and derivative guidelines.

We manage our risk appetite based on two key risk metrics:

 

   

Regulatory Capital Sensitivities: the potential reduction, under a moderate capital markets stress scenario, of the excess of available statutory capital above the minimum required under the NAIC regulatory RBC methodology; and

 

   

Earnings Sensitivities: the potential reduction in results of operations under a moderate capital markets stress scenario. Maintaining a consistent level of earnings helps us to finance our operations, support our capital requirements and provide funds to pay dividends to stockholders.

Our risk metrics cover the most important aspects in terms of performance measures where risk can materialize and are representative of the regulatory constraints to which our business is subject. The sensitivities for earnings and statutory capital are important metrics since they provide insight into the level of risk we take under stress scenarios. They also are the basis for internal risk management.

We are also subject to cash flow stress testing pursuant to regulatory requirements. This analysis measures the effect of changes in interest rate assumptions on asset and liability cash flows. The analysis includes the effects of:

 

   

The timing and amount of redemptions and prepayments in our asset portfolio;

 

   

Our derivative portfolio;

 

   

Death benefits and other claims payable under the terms of our insurance products;

 

   

Lapses and surrenders in our insurance products;

 

   

Minimum interest guarantees in our insurance products; and

 

   

Book value guarantees in our insurance products.

 

96


Table of Contents

Interest Rate Risk

Interest rate risk is our primary market risk exposure. We define interest rate risk as the risk of an economic loss due to adverse changes in interest rates. This risk arises from our holdings in interest sensitive assets and liabilities, primarily as a result of investing life insurance premiums and fixed annuity deposits received in interest-sensitive assets and carrying these funds as interest-sensitive liabilities. Substantial and sustained increases or decreases in market interest rates can affect the profitability of the insurance products and the fair value of our investments, as the majority of our insurance liabilities are backed by fixed maturity securities.

The profitability of most of our products depends on the spreads between interest yield on investments and rates credited on insurance liabilities. We have the ability to adjust the rates credited, primarily caps and credit rates, on the majority of the annuity liabilities at least annually, subject to minimum guaranteed values. In addition, the majority of the annuity products have surrender and withdrawal penalty provisions designed to encourage persistency and to help ensure targeted spreads are earned. However, competitive factors, including the impact of the level of surrenders and withdrawals, may limit our ability to adjust or maintain crediting rates at the levels necessary to avoid a narrowing of spreads under certain market conditions.

In order to meet our policy and contractual obligations, we must earn a sufficient return on our invested assets. Significant changes in interest rates exposes us to the risk of not earning the anticipated spreads between the interest rate earned on our investments and the credited interest rates paid on outstanding policies and contracts. Both rising and declining interest rates can negatively affect interest earnings, spread income and the attractiveness of certain of our products.

During periods of increasing interest rates, we may offer higher crediting rates on interest-sensitive products, such as IUL insurance and fixed annuities, and we may increase crediting rates on in-force products to keep these products competitive. A rise in interest rates, in the absence of other countervailing changes, will result in a decline in the market value of our investment portfolio.

As part of our ALM program, we have made a significant effort to identify the assets appropriate to different product lines and ensure investing strategies match the profile of these liabilities. Our ALM strategy is designed to align the expected cash flows from the investment portfolio with the expected liability cash flows. As such, a major component of our effort to manage interest rate risk has been to structure the investment portfolio with cash flow characteristics that are consistent with the cash flow characteristics of the insurance liabilities. We use actuarial models to simulate the cash flows expected from the existing business under various interest rate scenarios. These simulations enable us to measure the potential gain or loss in the fair value of interest rate-sensitive financial instruments, to evaluate the adequacy of expected cash flows from assets to meet the expected cash requirements of the liabilities and to determine if it is necessary to lengthen or shorten the average life and duration of our investment portfolio. The “duration” of a security is the time weighted present value of the security’s expected cash flows. Duration is used to measure a security’s sensitivity to changes in interest rates. When the durations of assets and liabilities are similar, exposure to interest rate risk is minimized because a change in the value of assets could be expected to be largely offset by a change in the value of liabilities.

Credit Risk and Counterparty Risk

We are exposed to the risk that a counterparty will default on its contractual obligation resulting in financial loss. The major source of credit risk arises predominantly in our insurance operations’ portfolios of debt and similar securities. The carrying value of our fixed maturity portfolio totaled $15.7 billion and $16.1 billion at June 30, 2013 and September 30, 2012, respectively. Our credit risk materializes primarily as impairment losses. We are exposed to occasional cyclical economic downturns, during which impairment losses may be significantly higher than the long-term historical average. This is offset by years where we expect the actual impairment losses to be substantially lower than the long-term average. Credit risk in the portfolio can also

 

97


Table of Contents

materialize as increased capital requirements as assets migrate into lower credit qualities over time. The effect of rating migration on our capital requirements is also dependent on the economic cycle and increased asset impairment levels may go hand in hand with increased asset related capital requirements.

We manage the risk of default and rating migration by applying disciplined credit evaluation and underwriting standards and limiting allocations to lower quality, higher risk investments. In addition, we diversify our exposure by issuer and country, using rating based issuer and country limits. We also set investment constraints that limit our exposure by industry segment. To limit the impact that credit risk can have on earnings and capital adequacy levels, we have portfolio-level credit risk constraints in place. Limit compliance is monitored on a daily or, in some cases, monthly basis.

In connection with the use of call options, we are exposed to counterparty credit risk—the risk that a counterparty fails to perform under the terms of the derivative contract. We have adopted a policy of only dealing with creditworthy counterparties and obtaining sufficient collateral where appropriate, as a means of mitigating the financial loss from defaults. The exposure and credit rating of the counterparties are continuously monitored and the aggregate value of transactions concluded is spread amongst seven different approved counterparties to limit the concentration in one counterparty. Our policy allows for the purchase of derivative instruments from nationally recognized investment banking institutions with the equivalent of an S&P rating of A- or higher. Collateral support documents are negotiated to further reduce the exposure when deemed necessary. See Note 5 to our unaudited condensed consolidated financial statements for additional information regarding our exposure to credit loss.

 

(in millions)

  Credit
Rating
(Moody’s/
S&P)
  June 30, 2013     September 30, 2012  

Counterparty

    Notional Amount     Fair Value     Notional Amount     Fair Value  

Bank of America

  Baa2/A–   $ 2,098.4      $ 76.4      $ 1,884.0      $ 64.1   

Deutsche Bank

  A2/A+     1,564.0       
57.4
  
    1816.5        61.7   

Morgan Stanley

  Baa1/A–     2,024.7        64.4        1,634.7        51.6   

Royal Bank of Scotland

  Baa1/A–     479.0        24.6        353.9        19.6   

Barclay’s Bank

  A2/A+     127.1        4.5        131.3        3.1   

Credit Suisse

  A2/A     —          —          10.0        0.6   
   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 
    $ 6,293.2      $ 227.3      $ 5,830.4      $ 200.7   
   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

We also have credit risk related to the ability of reinsurance counterparties to honor their obligations to pay the contract amounts under various agreements. To minimize the risk of credit loss on such contracts, we diversify our exposures among many reinsurers and limit the amount of exposure to each based on credit rating. We also generally limit our selection of counterparties with which we do new transactions to those with an “A-” credit rating or above or that are appropriately collateralized and provide credit for reinsurance. When exceptions are made to that principle, we ensure that we obtain collateral to mitigate our risk of loss. The following table presents our reinsurance recoverable balances and financial strength ratings for our five largest reinsurance recoverable balances as of June 30, 2013:

 

(dollars in millions)

   Reinsurance
Recoverable
     Financial Strength Rating

Parent Company/Principal Reinsurers

      AM Best    S&P    Moody’s

Wilton Reinsurance

   $ 1,476.8       A    Not rated    Not rated

Front Street Re

     1,401.9       Not rated    Not rated    Not rated

Scottish Re

     204.7       Not rated    Not rated    Not rated

Security Life of Denver

     171.1       A    A-    A3

Sunlife/Keyport

     117.6       A-    BBB    Baa2

In the normal course of business, certain reinsurance recoverables are subject to reviews by the reinsurers. We are not aware of any material disputes arising from these reviews or other communications with the counterparties, and, therefore, as of June 30, 2013, no allowance for uncollectible amounts was recorded.

 

98


Table of Contents

Equity Price Risk

We are primarily exposed to equity price risk through certain insurance products, specifically those products with guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefits. We offer a variety of FIA contracts with crediting strategies linked to the performance of indices such as the S&P 500 Index, Dow Jones Industrials or the NASDAQ 100 Index. The estimated cost of providing guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefits incorporates various assumptions about the overall performance of equity markets over certain time periods. Periods of significant and sustained downturns in equity markets, increased equity volatility or reduced interest rates could result in an increase in the valuation of the future policy benefit or policyholder account balance liabilities associated with such products, resulting in a reduction in our net income. The rate of amortization of intangibles related to FIA products and the cost of providing guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefits could also increase if equity market performance is worse than assumed.

To economically hedge the equity returns on these products, we purchase derivatives to hedge the FIA equity exposure. The primary way we hedge FIA equity exposure is to purchase over the counter equity index call options from broker-dealer derivative counterparties who generally have a minimum credit rating of Baa2 from Moody’s and A- from S&P. The second way to hedge FIA equity exposure is by purchasing exchange traded equity index futures contracts. Our hedging strategy enables us to reduce our overall hedging costs and achieve a high correlation of returns on the call options purchased relative to the index credits earned by the FIA contractholders. The majority of the call options are one-year options purchased to match the funding requirements underlying the FIA contracts. These hedge programs are limited to the current policy term of the FIA contracts, based on current participation rates. Future returns, which may be reflected in FIA contracts’ credited rates beyond the current policy term, are not hedged. We attempt to manage the costs of these purchases through the terms of our FIA contracts, which permit us to change caps or participation rates, subject to certain guaranteed minimums that must be maintained.

The derivatives are used to fund the FIA contract index credits and the cost of the call options purchased is treated as a component of spread earnings. While the FIA hedging program does not explicitly hedge statutory or U.S. GAAP income volatility, the FIA hedging program tends to mitigate a significant portion of the statutory and U.S. GAAP reserve changes associated with movements in the equity market and risk-free rates. This is due to the fact that a key component in the calculation of statutory and U.S. GAAP reserves is the market valuation of the current term embedded derivative. Due to the alignment of the embedded derivative reserve component with hedging of this same embedded derivative, there should be a reasonable match between changes in this component of the reserve and changes in the assets backing this component of the reserve. However, there may be an interim mismatch due to the fact that the hedges which are put in place are only intended to cover exposures expected to remain until the end of an indexing term. To the extent index credits earned by the contractholder exceed the proceeds from option expirations and futures income, we incur a raw hedging loss.

See Note 5 to our unaudited condensed consolidated financial statements for additional details on the derivatives portfolio.

Fair value changes associated with these investments are intended to, but do not always, substantially offset the increase or decrease in the amounts added to policyholder account balances for index products. For the Fiscal 2013 Nine Months, the annual index credits to policyholders on their anniversaries were $232.0 million. Proceeds received at expiration on options related to such credits were $200.9 million. The shortfall is funded by our net investment spread earnings and futures income.

Other market exposures are hedged periodically depending on market conditions and our risk tolerance. The FIA hedging strategy economically hedges the equity returns and exposes us to the risk that unhedged market exposures result in divergence between changes in the fair value of the liabilities and the hedging assets. We use a variety of techniques including direct estimation of market sensitivities and value-at-risk to monitor this risk daily. We intend to continue to adjust the hedging strategy as market conditions and risk tolerance change.

 

99


Table of Contents

Sensitivity Analysis

The analysis below is hypothetical and should not be considered a projection of future risks. Earnings projections are before tax and noncontrolling interest.

Interest Rate Risk

We assess interest rate exposures for financial assets, liabilities and derivatives using hypothetical test scenarios that assume either increasing or decreasing 100 basis point parallel shifts in the yield curve, reflecting changes in either credit spreads or risk-free rates. If interest rates were to increase 100 basis points from levels at June 30, 2013, the estimated fair value of our fixed maturity securities would decrease by approximately $867.4 million. The impact on shareholders’ equity of such decrease, net of income taxes and intangibles adjustments, would be a decrease of $324.1 million in AOCI and shareholders’ equity. If interest rates were to decrease by 100 basis points from levels at June 30, 2013, the estimated impact on the embedded derivative liability of such a decrease would be an increase of $103.4 million. The actuarial models used to estimate the impact of a one percentage point change in market interest rates incorporate numerous assumptions, require significant estimates and assume an immediate and parallel change in interest rates without any management of the investment portfolio in reaction to such change. Consequently, potential changes in value of financial instruments indicated by these simulations will likely be different from the actual changes experienced under given interest rate scenarios, and the differences may be material. Because we actively manage our investments and liabilities, the net exposure to interest rates can vary over time. However, any such decreases in the fair value of fixed maturity securities, unless related to credit concerns of the issuer requiring recognition of an OTTI, would generally be realized only if we were required to sell such securities at losses prior to their maturity to meet liquidity needs. Our liquidity needs are managed using the surrender and withdrawal provisions of the annuity contracts and through other means.

Equity Price Risk

Assuming all other factors are constant, we estimate that a decline in equity market prices of 10% would cause the market value of our equity investments to decrease by approximately $30.3 million, our derivative investments to decrease by approximately $48.2 million based on equity positions and our FIA embedded derivative liability to decrease by approximately $25.1 million as of June 30, 2013. Because our equity investments are classified as AFS, the 10% decline would not affect current earnings except to the extent that it reflects OTTI. These scenarios consider only the direct effect on fair value of declines in equity market levels and not changes in asset-based fees recognized as revenue, or changes in our estimates of total gross profits used as a basis for amortizing DAC and VOBA.

Recent Accounting Pronouncements

See Note 2, Significant Accounting Policies—Recent Accounting Pronouncements, to our audited consolidated financial statements.

 

100


Table of Contents

BUSINESS

Overview

For over 50 years, our Company has been helping middle-income Americans prepare for retirement and unexpected loss of life. Our focus on the middle-income market gives us access to significant, underserved market niches and drives our product development. As of June 30, 2013, we had approximately 700,000 policyholders counting on the safety and protection features of our fixed annuity and life insurance products, and we constantly seek to innovate our products to meet their evolving needs.

Through the efforts of our approximately 170 employees, who are primarily located in Baltimore, MD, we offer various types of fixed annuities and life insurance products. Fixed annuities represent a retirement and savings tool which our customers rely on for principal protection and predictable income streams. In addition, our life insurance products provide our customers with a complementary product that allows them to build on their savings and assign payment of a death benefit to a designated beneficiary upon the policyholder’s death. Currently, our most popular products are FIAs, which provide our customers with interest tied to the performance of the stock market, while limiting the risk of losing money should the stock market decline. We believe this mix of “some upside but limited downside” fills the need for middle-income Americans who must save for retirement but who want to limit the risk of decline in their savings. In addition to FIAs, we also sell IULs and other fixed annuities.

In fiscal year 2012, FIAs generated approximately 95% of our total sales. Our fixed indexed products such as FIAs tie contractual returns to specified market indices, such as the S&P 500 Index. The benefit of FIAs to our customers is to provide a portion of the gains of an underlying market index without the risk of losing the original principal. We invest the fixed annuity premium in fixed income securities and hedge our risk, predominantly using call options on the S&P 500 Index, and pass through a portion of the returns of the stock market index to our policyholders. The majority of our products contain provisions that permit us to annually adjust the formula by which index credits are provided in response to changing market conditions. In addition, our annuity contracts generally either are not surrenderable or include surrender charges that discourage early redemptions.

We offer our products through a network of approximately 200 independent IMOs that in turn represent an estimated 19,000 independent agents.

In April 2011, HGI, a publicly traded diversified holding company, acquired FGLH through Fidelity & Guaranty Life, a holding company formed in connection with the acquisition. Since this acquisition, we have strengthened our financial profile and risk-based capital ratios, increased our market share, decreased the risk in our investment portfolio, including through better alignment of our asset and liability cash flows, and generated positive net earnings.

For example, we have increased TAC (defined in accordance with SAP), for our primary operating company, FGLIC, to $1,167.4 million and a company action level RBC ratio for FGLIC to 474% as of June 30, 2013 from $805.1 million and 305% as of December 31, 2008. Furthermore, our $16.4 billion investment portfolio has an average S&P rating of “A-” as of June 30, 2013, with over 60% being rated NAIC 1, compared with approximately 53% rated NAIC 1 for our $17.4 billion investment portfolio as of September 30, 2010. Our FIA market share in terms of sales grew from 1.67% for the three-month period ended March 31, 2011, ranking us at 15th place among our competitors, to 2.9% for the three-month period ended June 30, 2013, ranking us at 10th place among our competitors. We estimate that there are approximately 45 companies selling FIA products in our markets in the relevant periods.

 

101


Table of Contents

Competitive Strengths

We believe the following strengths will allow us to capitalize on the growth prospects for our business:

 

   

Middle-Income Market Focus . We have historically sold life insurance to the large and underserved middle-income market. Our experience designing and developing annuities and life insurance products allows us to continue to introduce innovative products and solutions designed to meet customers’ changing needs. We believe that this experience has given us a keen understanding of the financial safety, wealth accumulation and protection, and retirement income needs of middle-income Americans.

 

   

Deep Distribution Relationships . Our collaborative, demand-driven approach to product design anchors the loyalty of our IMOs, and we design customized products to support the marketing strategies of our key IMOs. For example, our core annuity Prosperity Elite product was developed in partnership with one of our leading IMOs and accounted for approximately 62% of our annuity sales in the nine months ended June 30, 2013. In addition, we have worked with our IMOs to create innovative, mobile-friendly tools that enable them to deliver real-time information when marketing and providing service to their clients. The average tenure of our top 20 IMOs is approximately 11 years, and this long-term association with us demonstrates valued loyalty.

 

   

Seasoned Management Team and an Ownership Culture . Our management team has extensive experience in the insurance sector and has managed large and small companies through numerous economic cycles. Our executive officers average over 25 years of tenure in the insurance and financial services sector. The majority of our leadership has also played key roles in publicly held companies in this sector. In addition, we have a long-term incentive plan that we believe aligns employees with shareholders. We provide these incentives broadly, and 43% of our employees participated in this plan as of June 30, 2013.

 

   

Highly Scalable Operating Structure . We manage our core competencies internally and outsource other operations to external vendors. Our outsourcing model provides us with predictable pricing and volume capabilities and also allows us to benefit from technological developments that enhance our customer experience and sales processes in ways that we would not otherwise have without deploying more capital. For example, our arrangement with Transaction Group, allowed us to launch our core Prosperity Elite product in a short time without adding employees while growing this product from inception in August 2011 to $1,497.3 million in sales over a period of only 22 months.

 

   

Strong Risk Management Culture . Risk assessment and management is an important aspect of every decision we make. Our Chief Risk Officer heads our risk management process and reports directly to our CEO, who actively reviews more significant risks. Our Enterprise Risk Committee is comprised of our entire executive management team, including the CEO, and discusses and approves all risk policies and reviews and approves risks associated with our activities. We manage our risk limits based on two key metrics: regulatory capital and earnings sensitivities. Our Enterprise Risk Committee regularly reviews our operational, governance, strategy, product distribution and investment risks.

 

   

Conservative Investment Portfolio . We maintain a high quality, conservatively positioned investment portfolio, as our business model is designed to allow us to operate profitably without over-reliance on investment returns. As of June 30, 2013, 96.5% of our fixed maturity investment portfolio was rated NAIC 2 or higher (investment grade), with 58.7% having a NAIC 1 rating. We also have a conservative approach to asset-liability management: at June 30, 2013, our average asset duration was less than our average liability duration by a quarter of a year.

 

   

Strong Balance Sheet and Cash Flow Profile . We maintain strong capital balances, including an RBC ratio of over 350%, and our long-term target of total debt to total U.S. GAAP capital ratio (excluding AOCI) is in the mid-20% range. As of June 30, 2013, FGLIC had $1,167.4 million of TAC and an RBC ratio of 474%, which is substantially above management’s internal target and applicable regulatory minimums and does not reflect $70.2 million of cash and investments at FGLH. We believe the over $330 million in capital above our target RBC ratio of 350% that we have developed over the last three years provides us flexibility to capitalize on the sales growth opportunities we currently see in our market.

 

102


Table of Contents

Business Strategy

We will seek to grow our business by pursuing a set of short-, medium- and long-term efforts aimed at delivering sustainable and profitable growth for shareholders. Our main strategies include:

 

   

Increase Market Share in Our Existing Market . We believe that increasing demand for retirement and principal protection products combined with an evolving competitive landscape present us with significant opportunities to grow with the market and through increased market share. We will continue to pursue tactical opportunities to increase shelf space in the IMO market. We expect to increase the size of our account management team to strengthen coverage of key accounts and actively pursue relationships with IMOs with whom we currently do not conduct business. At the same time, we will continue to make regular modifications to rates and features based on the investment environment to remain competitive with other carriers, and also continue to develop unique, proprietary products for select marketing.

 

   

Expand the Types of Products We Sell . We also expect to develop and distribute new products that will address important unmet needs of middle-income households and a growing senior population. These products are expected to diversify our asset, liability and revenue mix as well as help us to capitalize on the significant future growth opportunities we perceive. We are well-positioned to offer products through our current distribution system in, for example, the group, non-medical and niche life-insurance product markets.

 

   

Diversify Our Distribution Channels. We will leverage our strong capital position and target higher ratings to develop broader relationships with broker-dealers, banks and financial planning professionals, thereby increasing the way in which we reach our customers. Effective implementation will require phased investment over a number of years in institutional relationships, systems, marketing, wholesaling and product development.

 

   

Selectively Pursue Acquisitions . Although acquisitions are not the primary focus of our current business strategy, we actively monitor the life insurance and annuity markets for opportunities to acquire businesses which are compatible with our existing operations. We also look for opportunities to acquire seasoned blocks of in-force business with measurable experience, which can help leverage our existing operational and corporate structures to generate enhanced returns on invested capital.

 

   

Bottom-line, Profit-oriented Objectives . We focus on initiatives that we expect will deliver target profits and avoid markets and products when industry pricing makes it difficult to achieve targeted profit margins.

Products

Our experience designing and developing annuities and life insurance products will allow us to continue to introduce innovative products and solutions designed to meet customers’ changing needs. We work hand-in-hand with our customers and distributors to devise the most suitable product solutions for the ever-changing market. We believe that, on a practical basis, we have a unique understanding of the safety, accumulation, protection, and income needs of the middle-income Americans.

Our current most popular product line is FIAs. Most FIAs have two phases—accumulation and distribution or payment. During accumulation, a policyholder’s money is credited with interest linked to an index, but never less than zero. High surrender charges apply for early withdrawal, typically for seven to 14 years after purchase. During the distribution or payout phase, the policyholder will receive money from the annuity. The policyholders are guaranteed minimum values based on state regulation.

 

103


Table of Contents

Annuity Products

Through our insurance subsidiaries, we issue a broad portfolio of deferred annuities (fixed indexed and fixed rate annuities) and immediate annuities. A deferred annuity is a type of contract that accumulates value on a tax deferred basis and typically begins making specified periodic or lump sum payments a certain number of years after the contract has been issued. An immediate annuity is a type of contract that begins making specified payments within one annuity period (e.g., one month or one year) and typically pays principal and earnings in equal payments over some period of time.

 

Deferred Annuities

FIAs . Our FIAs allow contract owners the possibility of earning interest based on the performance of a specified market index, predominantly the S&P 500 Index, without risk to principal. The contracts include a provision for a minimum guaranteed surrender value calculated in accordance with applicable law. A market index tracks the performance of a specific group of stocks representing a particular segment of the market, or in some cases an entire market. For example, the S&P 500 Composite Stock Price Index is an index of 500 stocks intended to be representative of a broad segment of the market. Most FIA policies allow policyholders to allocate funds once a year among several different crediting strategies, including one or more index-based strategies and a traditional fixed rate strategy.

The value to the contractholder of a FIA contract is equal to the sum of deposits paid, premium bonuses (described below) index credits, up to a cap and a participation rate based on the annual appreciation (based in certain situations on annual point-to-point, monthly point-to-point or monthly average calculations) in a recognized market index less any fees for riders. Caps generally range from 3.0% to 6.0% when measured annually and 1.0% to 3.0% when measured monthly and participation rates generally range from 30.0% to 100.0% of the performance of the applicable market index. The cap can be reset annually.

Approximately 90% of the FIA sales for the nine months ended June 30, 2013 involved “premium bonuses” or vesting bonuses. For premium bonuses we increased the initial annuity deposit by a specified premium bonus of 2.0% to 4.0% and a vesting bonus of 2.0% to 8.0%. The vesting bonuses are earned over time, which increases the account value when the bonus is settled. We made compensating adjustments in the commission paid to the agent or the surrender charges on the policy to offset the premium bonus.

Fixed Rate Annuities . Fixed rate annuities include annual reset and multi-year rate guaranteed policies. Fixed rate annual reset annuities issued by us have an annual interest rate (the “crediting rate”) that is guaranteed for the first policy year. After the first policy year, we have the discretionary ability to change the crediting rate once annually to any rate at or above a guaranteed minimum rate. Fixed rate multi-year guaranteed annuities are similar to fixed rate annual reset annuities except that the initial crediting rate is guaranteed for a specified number of years before it may be changed at our discretion. For the nine months ended June 30, 2013, we did not sell any fixed rate annual reset annuities. For the nine months ended June 30, 2013, we sold $12 million of fixed rate multi-year guaranteed annuities. As of June 30, 2013, crediting rates on outstanding (i) fixed rate annuities generally ranged from 1.5% to 6.0% and (ii) multi-year guaranteed annuities ranged from 1.0% to 6.0%. The average crediting rate on all outstanding fixed rate annuities at June 30, 2013, was 3.5%.

As of June 30, 2013, the distribution of the annuity account values by crediting rate was as follows:

 

(dollars in millions)

                              

Crediting Rate

     1% to 2     2% to 3     3% to 4     4% to 5     5% to 6

Account Value

     $19.8        $245.2        $1,680.8        $583.0        $226.6   

Withdrawal Options for Deferred Annuities . After the first year following the issuance of a deferred annuity policy, holders of deferred annuities are typically permitted penalty-free withdrawals up to 10.0% of the prior year’s value, subject to certain limitations. Withdrawals in excess of allowable penalty-free amounts are assessed a surrender charge if such withdrawals are made during the penalty period of the deferred annuity

 

104


Table of Contents

policy. The penalty period typically ranges from seven to 14 years for FIAs and three to ten years for fixed rate annuities. This surrender charge initially ranges from 9.0% to 17.5% of the contract value for FIAs and 5.0% to 12.0% of the contract value for fixed rate annuities and generally decreases by approximately one to two percentage points per year during the penalty period. The average surrender charge is 8.6% for our FIAs and 4.8% for our fixed rate annuities as of June 30, 2013. Certain fixed annuity contracts contain a market value adjustment provision that may increase or decrease the amounts available for withdrawal upon full surrender. The policyholder may elect to take the proceeds of the surrender either in a single payment or in a series of payments over the life of the policyholder or for a fixed number of years (or a combination of these payment options). In addition to the foregoing withdrawal rights, policyholders may also elect to have additional withdrawal rights by purchasing a guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit. These riders provide a guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit, regardless of index performance, for the life of the contract.

Immediate Annuities

We also sell Single Premium Immediate Annuities (or “SPIAs”), which provide a series of periodic payments for a fixed period of time or for the life of the policyholder, according to the policyholder’s choice at the time of issue. The amounts, frequency and length of time of the payments are fixed at the outset of the annuity contract. SPIAs are often purchased by persons at or near retirement age who desire a steady stream of payments over a future period of years.

The following table presents the deposits (also known as “sales”) on annuity policies issued by us for the nine month period ended June 30, 2013 and fiscal year ended September 30, 2012, as well as reserves required by U.S. GAAP (“U.S. GAAP Reserves”) as of June 30, 2013 and September 30, 2012:

 

     June 30, 2013      September 30, 2012  

(in millions)

   DEPOSITS ON
ANNUITY
POLICIES
     U.S.
GAAP
RESERVES
     DEPOSITS ON
ANNUITY
POLICIES
     U.S.
GAAP
RESERVES
 

Products

           

Fixed Indexed Annuities

   $ 747.6       $ 10,007.3       $ 1,614.2       $ 9,893.2   

Fixed Rate Annuities

     25.5         2,755.0         64.5         2,964.2   

Single Premium Immediate Annuities

     7.0         1,427.6         7.8         3,583.1   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

   $ 780.1       $ 14,189.9       $ 1,686.5       $ 16,440.5   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Life Insurance

We currently offer IUL insurance policies and have sold term and whole life insurance products in the past. Holders of universal life insurance policies earn returns on their policies which are credited to the policyholder’s cash value account. The insurer periodically deducts its expenses and the cost of life insurance protection from the cash value account. The balance of the cash value account is credited interest at a fixed rate or returns based on the performance of a market index, or both, at the option of the policyholder, using a method similar to that described above for FIAs.

Almost all of the life insurance policies in force, except for the return of premium benefits on life insurance products, as of the date of the FGLH Acquisition are subject to a reinsurance arrangement with Wilton Re. See “—Reinsurance—Wilton Re Transaction”.

Distribution

The sale of our products typically occurs as part of a four-party, three stage sales process between FGLIC, an IMO, the agent and the customer. FGLIC designs, manufactures, issues, and services the product. The IMO, with whom FGLIC contracts, recruits large numbers of agents to its firm and provides training in return for exclusive sales agreements with FGLIC. The IMOs will usually sign contracts with multiple insurance carriers to

 

105


Table of Contents

provide their agents with a broad and competitive product portfolio. The IMO will discuss product options over the phone with agents about to meet with clients. The IMO staff will also provide assistance to the agent during the selling and application process. The agent may get customer leads from the IMOs. The agent will conduct a fact find and present suitable product choices to the customers. We monitor each distribution partner for pricing metrics, mortality, persistency, as well as market conduct and suitability.

Within this business model, we offer our products through a network of approximately 200 IMOs, representing approximately 19,000 agents, and identify our most important IMOs—those who are able to meet certain production targets and qualify for extra-contractual production bonuses—as “Power Partners”. We currently have 31 Power Partners, comprised of 19 annuity IMOs and 12 life insurance IMOs. During fiscal year 2012, these Power Partners accounted for approximately 75% of our annual sales volume. We believe that our relationships with these IMOs are strong. The average tenure of the top twenty Power Partners is approximately 11 years.

Our Power Partners play an important role in the development of our products. Over the last ten years, the majority of our best-selling products have been developed with our Power Partners. We intend to continue to have the Power Partners play an important role in the development of our products in the future, which we believe provides us with integral feedback throughout the development process and assists us with competing for “shelf space” of new design launches.

The table below shows our top ten IMOs as of June 30, 2013 as well as their rankings in calendar years 2006 through 2012:

 

 

Rank as of June 30, 2013

   %
Total Sales
in 2013 (1)
    2013
Rank (1)
     2012
Rank
     2011
Rank
     2010
Rank
     2009
Rank
     2008
Rank
     2007
Rank
     2006
Rank
 

IMO 1

     13.4     1         1         2         2         1         1         1         1   

IMO 2

     13.0     2         2         1         1         3         6         6         4   

IMO 3

     10.2     3         3         3         3         4         4         4         6   

IMO 4

     10.0     4         4         4         4         2         2         2         2   

IMO 5

     7.6     5         6         5         5         5         7         8         8   

IMO 6

     5.9     6         5         6         6         6         3         3         3   

IMO 7

     5.1     7         8         8         8         8         5         5         5   

IMO 8

     4.0     8         10         —           —           —           —           —           —     

IMO 9

     3.7     9         9         10         9         10         10         —           —     

IMO 10

     3.5     10         7        7        7        7        9        9        —    

 

(1)  

Calendar year through June 30, 2013.

The top five states for the distribution of FGLIC’s products in 2012 were California, Texas, Florida, Pennsylvania and Michigan, which together accounted for nearly 50% of FGLIC’s premiums.

Marketing

We strive to be a leader in metric-driven digital marketing to distributors, which includes web, email, social media, and video. We believe that this approach in the short-term will continue to prove a cost-effective way to target and engage the IMO and independent agent community. We strive to start all projects with metrics-centric objectives; we develop digital concepts to drive activity, sharing, and engagement by targeted communities; and we refine our programs quickly based on daily results. We will continue to rapidly expand our ability to engage with our networks of customers, distributors and other contacts.

We also believe that mobile tools will create competitive advantage in the short-term and will be a requirement to conduct business with independent agents in the future. We believe we are a pioneer in mobile technology for the independent agent market. We have developed and released two apps that support the marketing, projections and

 

106


Table of Contents

illustrations of five products that account for over 90% of our sales. Our iPad/iPhone/iTouch apps facilitate the explanation of complex features, encourage customers to explore more planning scenarios, enable the illustration to be emailed from device to client, and attract and retain tech-savvy representatives.

These new competencies will position us well to compete effectively for the next generation of IMOs, agents, and consumers.

Investments

We embrace a long-term conservative investment philosophy, investing nearly all the insurance premiums we receive in a wide range of fixed income interest-bearing securities.

Our employees manage the bulk of the investment portfolio, and with respect to certain asset classes we utilize experienced third party companies, as well as our affiliates. As of June 30, 2013, 74.5% of our $15.7 billion fixed maturity investment portfolio was managed by our employees, with the 25.5% balance managed by third parties. Our investment strategy is designed to (i) achieve strong absolute returns; (ii) provide consistent yield and investment income; and (iii) preserve capital. We base all of our decisions on fundamental, bottom-up research, coupled with a top-down view that respects the cyclicality of certain asset classes.

In addition to active management of assets, our Investments department is also responsible for defining portfolio strategy, managing our asset/liability profile, hedging our product guarantees. We also leverage the risk management and capital markets experience of HGI and its affiliates to add value to our investment activities.

The types of assets in which we may invest are influenced by various state laws, which prescribe qualified investment assets applicable to insurance companies. Additionally, we establish conservative risk thresholds which in turn define risk tolerance across a wide range of factors, including credit risk, liquidity risk, concentration (issuer and sector) risk, and caps on specific asset classes.

Our investment portfolio consists of high quality fixed maturities, including publicly issued and privately issued corporate bonds, municipal and other government bonds, ABS, RMBS and CMBS. We also maintain holdings in floating rate, and less-rate sensitive investments, including senior tranches of collateralized loan obligations (“CLOs”), non-agency RMBS, and various types of ABS. It is our expectation that our investment portfolio will broaden in scope and diversity to include other asset classes held by life and annuity insurance writers, such as commercial mortgage loans. We also have a small amount of equity holdings through our funding arrangement with the Federal Home Loan Bank of Atlanta.

Portfolio Activity

Since 2011, we have been seeking to shorten our asset duration and have been selling longer dated high grade bonds. Proceeds of these sales were conservatively redeployed into top tranche (NAIC 1) CLOs and more recently non-agency RMBS. Over the last year, we continued to reduce our high grade public bond exposure as we sought to establish exposure to similar duration high grade private bonds, which has allowed us to improve portfolio diversification and bondholder protection through more stringent covenants.

As a result of these portfolio repositionings, we currently maintain:

 

   

a well matched asset/liability profile (asset duration 0.25 year short vs. liability duration); and

 

   

a large exposure to less rate sensitive assets (27% of invested assets).

We believe our investment portfolio is well positioned for the current investment environment, with room to incrementally increase exposure to risk assets if spreads and capital efficiency warrant such actions. We intend to maintain a defensive duration posture to provide for increased investment flexibility as rates rise.

 

107


Table of Contents

For further discussion of portfolio activity, see “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations—Investment Portfolio”.

Derivatives

Our FIA contracts permit the holder to elect to receive a return based on an interest rate or the performance of a market index, most typically based on the S&P 500 Index. We purchase derivatives consisting predominantly of call options and, to a lesser degree, futures contracts on the equity indices underlying the applicable policy. These derivatives are used to fund the index credits due to policyholders under the FIA contracts. The majority of all such call options are one-year options purchased to match the funding requirements underlying the FIA contracts. On the respective anniversary dates of the applicable FIA contracts, the market index used to compute the annual index credit under the applicable FIA contract is reset. At such time, we purchase new one-, two- or three-year call options to fund the next index credit. We attempt to manage the cost of these purchases through the terms of our FIA contracts, which permit us to change caps or participation rates, subject to certain guaranteed minimums that must be maintained. The change in the fair value of the call options and futures contracts is generally designed to offset the equity market related change in the fair value of the FIA contract’s embedded derivative. The call options and futures contracts are marked to fair value with the change in fair value included as a component of net investment gains (losses). The change in fair value of the call options and futures contracts includes the gains and losses recognized at the expiration of the instruments’ terms or upon early termination and the changes in fair value of open positions.

Outsourcing

We outsource the following functions to third-party service providers:

 

   

new business administration;

 

   

hosting of financial systems;

 

   

service of existing policies;

 

   

investment accounting and custody;

 

   

information technology development and maintenance;

 

   

call centers; and

 

   

underwriting administration of life insurance applications.

We closely manage our outsourcing partners and integrate their services into our operations. We believe that outsourcing such functions allows us to focus capital and FGL employees on our core business operations and perform differentiating functions, such as investment, actuarial, product development and risk management functions. In addition, we believe an outsourcing model provides predictable pricing, service levels and volume capabilities and allows us to benefit from technological developments that enhance our customer self-service and sales processes that we would not otherwise be able to take advantage of without deploying more of our own capital.

We outsource our new business and existing policy administration for annuity and life products to Transaction Group. Under this arrangement, Transaction Group manages all of our call center and processing requirements. We and Transaction Group have entered into a seven-year relationship, which is subject to automatic renewal for an additional two years in June 2014.

We have partnered with Hooper Holmes, Inc. (“Hooper Holmes”) to implement our life insurance underwriting policies. Under the terms of the arrangement Hooper Holmes has assigned us a team of underwriters with Fellow Life Management Institute designations. We and Hooper Holmes entered into a three-year relationship, which was automatically renewed for an additional two years in December 2012. Underwriting

 

108


Table of Contents

guidelines for each product are established by our Chief Underwriting Officer in collaboration with our actuarial department. Our Chief Underwriting Officer and actuarial department work closely with the applicable reinsurance company to establish or change guidelines. Adherence to underwriting guidelines is managed at a case level through daily underwriting audits conducted by our Chief Underwriting Officer as well as the Hooper Holmes lead underwriter. Every three years underwriting audits are conducted by our reinsurers.

We believe that we have a good relationship with our principal outsource service providers.

Competition

Our ability to compete is dependent upon many factors which include, among other things, our ability to develop competitive and profitable products, our ability to maintain stable relationships with our contracted IMOs, our ability to maintain low unit costs and our maintenance of adequate financial strength ratings from ratings agencies. We face competition in the FIA market from traditional insurance carriers such as Allianz Life Insurance Company of North America (“Allianz”), Aviva Life Insurance Company, American Equity Investment Life Insurance Company (“American Equity”) and Security Benefit Life Insurance Company (“Security Benefit”). Principal competitive factors for FIAs are initial crediting rates, reputation for renewal crediting action, product features, brand recognition, customer service, cost, distribution capabilities and financial strength ratings of the provider. Competition may affect, among other matters, both business growth and the pricing of our products and services.

As of June 30, 2013, the leading three providers of FIAs were Allianz, Security Benefit and American Equity. Their respective market shares were 14.1%, 12.2% and 11.5%. The aggregate market share of the top ten providers of FIA’s for the same period was 72.0%. We are the tenth largest provider of FIA in terms of premium, and our market share for the same period was 2.9%.

In the IUL market we compete with large, well-established life insurance companies in a mature market, where price and service are key drivers. Primary competitors include the AEGON Companies (“AEGON”), National Western Insurance Company (“National Western”) and Pacific Life Insurance Company (“Pacific Life”). Principal competitive factors for IULs are based on service and distribution channel relationships, price, brand recognition, financial strength ratings of our insurance subsidiaries and financial stability.

As of June 30, 2013, the leading three providers of IULs were AEGON, Pacific Life, and National Western. Their respective IUL market shares were 12.9%, 9.8% and 7.3%. The aggregate market share for the top ten providers of IUL for the same period was 69.0%. We are the 22nd largest provider of IULs in terms of premium, and our market share for the same period was 1.5%.

Ratings

Our access to funding and our related cost of borrowing, the attractiveness of certain of our products to customers and requirements for derivatives collateral posting are affected by our credit ratings and insurance financial strength ratings, which are periodically reviewed by the rating agencies. Financial strength ratings and credit ratings are important factors affecting public confidence in an insurer and its competitive position in marketing products.

As of September 30, 2013, Moody’s, Fitch, S&P and A.M. Best Company issued financial strength credit and/or ratings and outlook statements regarding FGLH and its wholly owned insurance subsidiaries, FGLIC and FGL NY Insurance as listed below. Credit ratings represent the opinions of rating agencies regarding an entity’s ability to repay its indebtedness. Financial strength ratings represent the opinions of rating agencies regarding the financial ability of an insurance company to meet its obligations under an insurance policy and generally involve quantitative and qualitative evaluations by rating agencies of a company’s financial condition and operating performance. Generally, rating agencies base their financial strength ratings upon information furnished to them

 

109


Table of Contents

by the insurer and upon their own investigations, studies and assumptions. Financial strength ratings are based upon factors of concern to policyholders, agents and intermediaries and are not directed toward the protection of investors. Credit and financial strength ratings are not recommendations to buy, sell or hold securities and they may be revised or revoked at any time at the sole discretion of the rating organization.

 

Company

   A.M. Best    S&P    Moody’s    Fitch

Fidelity & Guaranty Life Insurance Company

           

Financial Strength Rating

   B++ (5 of 16)    BBB- (10 of 22)    Ba1 (11 of 21)    BBB (9 of 21)

Outlook

   Stable    Positive    Positive    Stable

Fidelity & Guaranty Life Insurance Company of New York

           

Financial Strength Rating

   B++ (5 of 16)    BBB- (10 of 22)    Ba1 (11 of 21)    BBB (9 of 21)

Outlook

   Stable    Positive    Positive    Stable

Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc. (Senior Unsecured Notes)

   bb+ (11 of 22)    BB- (13 of 22)    B1 (14 of 21)    BB- (13 of 21)

Outlook

   Stable    Positive    Positive    Stable

 

Rating Agency

   Financial Strength
Rating Scale
   Senior Unsecured Notes
Credit Rating Scale

A.M. Best(1)

   “A++” to “S”    “aaa to rs”

S&P(2)

   “AAA” to “R”    “AAA to D”

Moody’s(3)

   “Aaa” to “C”    “Aaa to C”

Fitch(4)

   “AAA” to “C”    “AAA to D”

 

(1) A.M. Best’s financial strength rating is an independent opinion of an insurer’s financial strength and ability to meet its ongoing insurance policy and contract obligations. It is based on a comprehensive quantitative and qualitative evaluation of a company’s balance sheet strength, operating performance and business profile. A.M. Best’s long-term credit ratings reflect its assessment of the ability of an obligor to pay interest and principal in accordance with the terms of the obligation. Ratings from “aa” to “ccc” may be enhanced with a “+” (plus) or “-” (minus) to indicate whether credit quality is near the top or bottom of a category. A.M. Best’s short-term credit rating is an opinion to the ability of the rated entity to meet its senior financial commitments on obligations maturing in generally less than one year.

 

(2) S&P’s insurer financial strength rating is a forward-looking opinion about the financial security characteristics of an insurance organization with respect to its ability to pay under its insurance policies and contracts in accordance with their terms. A “+” or “-” indicates relative strength within a category. An S&P credit rating is an assessment of default risk, but may incorporate an assessment of relative seniority or ultimate recovery in the event of default. Short-term issuer credit ratings reflect the obligor’s creditworthiness over a short-term time horizon.

 

(3) Moody’s financial strength ratings are opinions of the ability of insurance companies to repay punctually senior policyholder claims and obligations. Moody’s appends numerical modifiers 1, 2, and 3 to each generic rating classification from Aa through Caa. The modifier 1 indicates that the obligation ranks in the higher end of its generic rating category; the modifier 2 indicates a mid-range ranking; and the modifier 3 indicates a ranking in the lower end of that generic rating category. Moody’s long-term credit ratings are opinions of the relative credit risk of fixed-income obligations with an original maturity of one year or more. They address the possibility that a financial obligation will not be honored as promised. Moody’s short-term ratings are opinions of the ability of issuers to honor short-term financial obligations.

 

(4)

Fitch’s financial strength ratings provide an assessment of the financial strength of an insurance organization. The IFS Rating is assigned to the insurance company’s policyholder obligations, including assumed reinsurance obligations and contract holder obligations, such as guaranteed investment contracts.

 

110


Table of Contents
 

Within long-term and short-term ratings, a “+” or a “–” may be appended to a rating to denote relative status within major rating categories.

In addition to the financial strength ratings, rating agencies use an “outlook statement” to indicate a medium or long term trend which, if continued, may lead to a rating change. A positive outlook indicates a rating may be raised and a negative outlook indicates a rating may be lowered. A stable outlook is assigned when ratings are not likely to be changed. Outlooks should not be confused with expected stability of the issuer’s financial or economic performance. A rating may have a “stable” outlook to indicate that the rating is not expected to change, but a “stable” outlook does not preclude a rating agency from changing a rating at any time without notice.

Ratings actions affirmation and outlook changes by A.M. Best, Fitch, Moody’s and S&P from September 30, 2012 through the date of this prospectus are as follows:

 

   

On December 13, 2012, S&P raised the financial strength ratings on FGLIC and FGL NY Insurance to ‘BB+’ from ‘BB’ and revised the outlook to stable. On March 18, 2013, S&P assigned a ‘B+’ long-term counterparty credit rating to FGLH and a rating of ‘B+’ to its $300 million Senior Notes with a stable outlook. On July 17, 2013, S&P raised its long-term counterparty credit rating on FGLH to ‘BB-’ from ‘B+’ and raised its senior unsecured notes rating to ‘BB-’ from ‘B+’. At the same time, they raised the financial strength ratings on FGLIC and FGL NY Insurance to ‘BBB-’ from ‘BB+’. The outlook was raised to positive on the ratings.

 

   

On October 19, 2012, Fitch affirmed the ‘BBB’ Insurer Financial Strength ratings assigned to FGLIC and FGL NY Insurance with a stable outlook. On March 18, 2013, Fitch assigned a ‘BB’ Long-term Issuer Default Rating (IDR) to FGLH. At the same time Fitch has assigned a ‘BB-’ rating to FGLH’s issuance of $300 million Senior Notes with a stable outlook. Fitch also affirmed the ‘BBB’ Insurer Financial Strength ratings assigned to FGLIC and FGL NY Insurance with a stable outlook.

 

   

On March 18, 2013, Moody’s assigned a ‘B1’ senior unsecured debt rating to FGLH’s $300 million Senior Notes with a positive outlook. At the same time, Moody’s affirmed the ‘Ba1’ insurance financial strength rating of FGLIC and raised the outlook to positive.

 

   

On October 26, 2012, A.M. Best affirmed the financial strength rating of ‘B++’ of FGLIC and FGL NY Insurance with a stable outlook. On March 26, 2013, A.M. Best assigned an issuer credit rating of “bb+” to FGLH and a debt rating of “bb+” to the $300 million Senior Notes with a stable outlook.

A.M. Best Company, Fitch, Moody’s and S&P review their ratings of insurance companies from time to time. There can be no assurance that any particular rating will continue for any given period of time or that it will not be changed or withdrawn entirely if, in their judgment, circumstances so warrant. While the degree to which ratings adjustments will affect sales and persistency is unknown, we believe if our ratings were to be negatively adjusted for any reason, we could experience a material decline in the sales of our products and the persistency of our existing business. See “Risk Factors—Risks Relating to Our Business—We operate in a highly competitive industry, which could limit our ability to gain or maintain our position in the industry and could materially adversely affect our business, financial condition and results of operations”; “Risk Factors—Risks Relating to Our Business—A financial strength ratings downgrade or other negative action by a ratings agency could adversely affect our financial condition and results of operations”; and “Risk Factors—Risks Relating to Our Business—The amount of statutory capital that our insurance subsidiaries have and the amount of statutory capital that they must hold to maintain their financial strength ratings and meet other requirements can vary significantly from time to time and are sensitive to a number of factors outside of our control”.

Potential Impact of a Ratings Downgrade

Under some ISDA agreements, we have agreed to maintain certain financial strength ratings. A downgrade below these levels provides the counterparty under the agreement the right to terminate the open derivative contracts between the parties, at which time any amounts payable by us or the counterparty would be dependent

 

111


Table of Contents

on the market value of the underlying derivative contracts. Our current rating allows multiple counterparties the right to terminate ISDA agreements, at which time the counterparty would unwind existing positions for fair market value. No ISDA agreements have been terminated, although the counterparties have reserved the right to terminate the ISDA agreements at any time. As of June 30, 2013, the amount at risk for ISDA agreements which could be terminated based upon our current ratings was $227.3 million, which equals the fair value to us of the open over-the-counter call option positions. The fair value of the call options can never decrease below zero. See “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations—Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures about Market Risk—Credit Risk and Counterparty Risk”.

In certain transactions, we and the counterparty have entered into a collateral support agreement requiring either party to post collateral when the net exposures exceed predetermined thresholds. These thresholds vary by counterparty and credit rating. As of June 30, 2013 and September 30, 2012, no collateral was posted by our counterparties. Accordingly, the maximum amount of loss due to credit risk that we would incur if parties to the call options failed completely to perform according to the terms of the contracts was $227.3 million and $200.7 million at June 30, 2013 and September 30, 2012, respectively.

If the insurance subsidiaries held net short positions against a counterparty, and the subsidiaries’ financial strength ratings were below the levels required in the ISDA agreement with the counterparty, the counterparty would demand immediate further collateralization which could negatively impact overall liquidity. Based on the market value of our derivatives as of September 30, 2012 and June 30, 2013, we hold no net short positions against a counterparty; therefore, there is currently no potential exposure for us to post collateral.

Risk Management

Risk management is a critical part of our business. We seek to assess risk to our business through a formalized process involving (i) identifying short-term and long-term strategic and operational objectives, (ii) utilizing risk identification tools to examine events that may prevent us from achieving goals, (iii) assigning risk identification and mitigation responsibilities to individual team members within functional groups, (iv) analyzing the potential qualitative and quantitative impact of individual risks, (v) evaluating risks against risk tolerance levels to determine which risks should be mitigated, (vi) mitigating risks by appropriate actions and (vii) identifying, documenting and communicating key business risks in a timely fashion.

The responsibility for monitoring, evaluating and responding to risk is assigned first to our management and employees, second to those occupying specialist functions, such as legal compliance and risk teams, and third to those occupying supervisory functions, such as internal audits and the board of directors.

The Fidelity & Guaranty Acquisition

On April 6, 2011, pursuant to the First Amended and Restated Stock Purchase Agreement, dated February 17, 2011 (the “F&G Stock Purchase Agreement”), by and between Fidelity & Guaranty Life (formerly Harbinger F&G, LLC) and OMGUK, FGL, a wholly owned direct subsidiary of HGI, acquired from OMGUK all of the outstanding shares of capital stock of FGLH and certain intercompany loan agreements between OMGUK, as lender, and FGLH, as borrower, in consideration for $350.0 million. As described further herein, the F&G Stock Purchase Agreement provided that the $350.0 million purchase price may be reduced by up to $50.0 million post-closing if certain regulatory approvals were not obtained. Following the consummation of the FGLH Acquisition, FGLH became our direct wholly owned subsidiary and FGLIC and FGL NY Insurance became wholly owned subsidiaries of FGLH. FGLIC and FGL NY Insurance are our principal insurance companies.

Reinsurance

FGL both cedes reinsurance and assumes reinsurance from other insurance companies. We use reinsurance both to diversify risks and manage loss exposures. For instance, we have sought reinsurance coverage in order to

 

112


Table of Contents

limit our exposure to mortality losses and enhance our capital position. The use of reinsurance permits us to write policies in excess of amounts we would typically seek to retain, and also to write a larger volume of new business. The portion of risks exceeding the insurer’s retention limit is reinsured with other insurers.

In instances where we are the ceding company, we pay a premium to a reinsurer in exchange for the reinsurer assuming a portion of our liabilities under the policies we issued. Use of reinsurance does not discharge our liability as the ceding company because we remain directly liable to our policyholders and are required to pay the full amount of our policy obligations in the event that our reinsurers fail to satisfy their obligations. We collect reinsurance from our reinsurers when we pay claims on policies that are reinsured. In instances where we assume reinsurance from another insurance company, we accept, in exchange for a reinsurance premium, a portion of the liabilities of the other insurance company under the policies that the ceding company has issued to its policyholders.

We monitor the credit risk related to the ability of our reinsurers to honor their obligations to pay the contract amounts under various agreements. To minimize the risk of credit loss on such contracts, we generally diversify our exposures among many reinsurers and limit the amount of exposure to each based on financial strength ratings, which are reviewed at least monthly. The A.M. Best Company rating of our reinsurers with the largest reinsurance recoverable balances are A- or better with the exception of Scottish Re. These reinsurers are Wilton Re, Security Life of Denver, Transamerica Occidental Life Insurance Co., Sun Life Insurance Company and Scottish Re, which is operating under regulatory supervision. We have determined no valuation allowance is required for the Scottish Re recoverable balance as of June 30, 2013 based on our evaluation of Scottish Re’s ability to meet its ongoing reinsurance obligations.

Wilton Re Transaction

On January 26, 2011, FGL entered into an agreement (the “Commitment Agreement”) with Wilton Re U.S. Holdings, Inc. (“Wilton”), pursuant to which Wilton agreed to cause Wilton Re, its wholly owned subsidiary, to enter into certain coinsurance arrangements with FGLIC following the closing of the FGLH Acquisition of the predecessor company. Pursuant to the Commitment Agreement, Wilton Re has reinsured a 100% quota share of certain of FGLIC’s policies that are subject to redundant reserves under Regulation XXX and Guideline AXXX, and that were reinsured under the reserve facility (the “Raven Block”), as well as another block of FGLIC’s in-force traditional, universal and interest-sensitive life insurance policies (the “Camden Block”).

More specifically, on April 8, 2011, FGLIC ceded to Wilton Re on a coinsurance basis a 100% quota share of risks associated with the Camden Block and, in connection therewith, transferred assets to Wilton Re having an aggregate fair value of approximately $535.8 million, which reflected a $121.8 million ceding allowance, which we retained. On October 17, 2011, FGLIC and Wilton Re completed a further reinsurance arrangement involving the recapture of business ceded to Raven Re by FGLIC and the re-cession of such business to Wilton Re. The cession to Wilton Re of risks related to the Raven Block was completed on October 17, 2011 (with an effective date of October 1, 2011) and, in connection therewith, FGLIC transferred assets having an aggregate fair value of approximately $580.7 million, which included a $140.1 million negative ceding allowance, to Wilton Re. While Wilton Re had no liability with respect to the Raven Block prior to the effective date, at October 17, 2011 the amount payable to Wilton Re was adjusted to reflect the economic performance for the Raven Block from January 1, 2011 through October 1, 2011.

Wilton Re’s reinsurance of such FGLIC policies has not extinguished FGLIC’s liability with respect to such business because FGLIC remains directly liable to policyholders and is required to pay the full amount of its policy obligations in the event that Wilton Re fails to satisfy its obligations with respect to the reinsured business.

The Front Street Reinsurance Transaction

On December 31, 2012, following approval by the MIA FGLIC entered into a coinsurance agreement (the “Cayman Reinsurance Agreement”) with Front Street, at the time, an indirectly wholly owned subsidiary of FGL.

 

113


Table of Contents

Pursuant to the Cayman Reinsurance Agreement, Front Street reinsured approximately 10%, or approximately $1.4 billion of FGLIC policy liabilities as of June 30, 2013. Under the terms of the agreement, Front Street paid an initial ceding allowance of $15.0 million which was determined to be fair and reasonable according to an independent third-party actuarial firm. The coinsurance agreement was on a funds withheld basis, meaning that funds were withheld by FGLIC from the coinsurance premium owed to Front Street as collateral for Front Street’s payment obligations. Accordingly, the collateral assets remain under the ultimate ownership of FGLIC. The effects of this transaction have been eliminated in consolidated financial statements.

Reserve Facilities

Life insurance companies operating in the United States must calculate required reserves for life and annuity policies based on statutory principles. These methodologies are governed by “Regulation XXX” (applicable to term life insurance policies), “Guideline AXXX” (applicable to universal life insurance policies with secondary guarantees) and the Commissioners Annuity Reserve Valuation Method, known as “CARVM” (applicable to annuities). Under Regulation XXX, Guideline AXXX and CARVM, insurers are required to establish statutory reserves for such policies that exceed economic reserves.

The CARVM Facility. On October 5, 2012, FGLIC entered into a yearly renewable term indemnity reinsurance agreement with Raven Re, a wholly owned subsidiary of FGLIC (the “Raven Reinsurance Agreement”) pursuant to which FGLIC ceded a 100% quota share of its liability for the CARVM business. To collateralize its obligations under the Raven Reinsurance Agreement, Raven Re entered into a reimbursement agreement with Nomura and FGL (the “Reimbursement Agreement”) whereby a subsidiary of Nomura issued trust notes and Nomura issued a $295 million letter of credit that, in each case, were deposited into a reinsurance trust as collateral for Raven Re’s obligations under the Raven Reinsurance Agreement (the “Nomura Facility”). Pursuant to the Nomura Facility, FGLIC takes full credit on its statutory financial statements for the CARVM reserve ceded to Raven Re. The letter of credit facility automatically reduces each calendar quarter by $6.25 million. As of June 30, 2013, there was $282.5 million available under the letter of credit facility. The Nomura Facility will terminate on September 30, 2017, although the facility may terminate earlier, in accordance with the terms of the Reimbursement Agreement. Under the terms of the Reimbursement Agreement, in the event the letter of credit is drawn upon, Raven Re is required to repay the amounts utilized, and FGLH is obligated to repay the amounts utilized if Raven Re fails to make the required reimbursement. FGLH also is required to make capital contributions to Raven Re in the event that Raven Re’s statutory capital and surplus falls below certain defined levels. As of June 30, 2013, Raven Re’s statutory capital and surplus was $19.6 million in excess of the minimum level required under the Reimbursement Agreement.

See “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations—Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures About Market Risk—Credit Risk and Counterparty Risk.”

Other Agreements

The F&G Stock Purchase Agreement includes customary mutual indemnification provisions relating to breaches of representations, warranties and covenants. In connection with the F&G Stock Purchase Agreement, FGL entered into the Guarantee and Pledge Agreement (the “Pledge Agreement”). Pursuant to the Pledge Agreement, FGLH has granted security interests to OMGUK of FGLH’s equity interest in FGLIC (the “Pledged Shares”) in order to secure certain of FGL’s obligations arising under the F&G Stock Purchase Agreement, including its indemnity obligations. In the event that FGL defaults or breaches any remaining secured obligations, OMGUK could foreclose upon the Pledged Shares.

 

114


Table of Contents

Employees

As of June 30, 2013, we had approximately 170 employees. We believe that we have a good relationship with our employees, as demonstrated by consistent high employee engagement scores on our annual employee engagement survey. In addition, our voluntary attrition has been below 10% for the past four years, which is also an indicator of an engaged and motivated workforce.

Regulation

Overview

FGLIC, FGL NY Insurance and Raven Re are subject to comprehensive regulation and supervision in their domiciles, Maryland, New York and Vermont, respectively, and in each state in which they do business. FGLIC does business throughout the United States, except for New York. FGL NY Insurance only does business in New York. Raven Re is a special purpose captive reinsurance company that only provides reinsurance to FGLIC under the CARVM Treaty. FGLIC’s principal insurance regulatory authority is the MIA. State insurance departments throughout the United States also monitor FGLIC’s insurance operations as a licensed insurer. The NYDFS regulates the operations of FGL NY Insurance, which is domiciled and licensed in New York. The purpose of these regulations is primarily to protect policyholders and beneficiaries and not general creditors and shareholders of those insurers. Many of the laws and regulations to which FGLIC and FGL NY Insurance are subject are regularly re-examined and existing or future laws and regulations may become more restrictive or otherwise adversely affect their operations.

Generally, insurance products underwritten by and rates used by FGLIC and FGL NY Insurance must be approved by the insurance regulators in each state in which they are sold. Those products are also substantially affected by federal and state tax laws. For example, changes in tax law could reduce or eliminate the tax-deferred accumulation of earnings on the deposits paid by the holders of annuities and life insurance products, which could make such products less attractive to potential purchasers. A shift away from life insurance and annuity products could reduce FGLIC’s and FGL NY Insurance’s income from the sale of such products, as well as the assets upon which FGLIC and FGL NY Insurance earn investment income. In addition, insurance products may also be subject to ERISA.

State insurance authorities have broad administrative powers over FGLIC and FGL NY Insurance with respect to all aspects of the insurance business including:

 

   

licensing to transact business;

 

   

licensing agents;

 

   

prescribing which assets and liabilities are to be considered in determining statutory surplus;

 

   

regulating premium rates for certain insurance products;

 

   

approving policy forms and certain related materials;

 

   

determining whether a reasonable basis exists as to the suitability of the annuity purchase recommendations producers make;

 

   

regulating unfair trade and claims practices;

 

   

establishing reserve requirements and solvency standards;

 

   

regulating the amount of dividends that may be paid in any year;

 

   

regulating the availability of reinsurance or other substitute financing solutions, the terms thereof and the ability of an insurer to take credit on its financial statements for insurance ceded to reinsurers or other substitute financing solutions;

 

115


Table of Contents
   

fixing maximum interest rates on life insurance policy loans and minimum accumulation or surrender values; and

 

   

regulating the type, amounts and valuations of investments permitted, transactions with affiliates and other matters.

Financial Regulation

State insurance laws and regulations require FGLIC, FGL NY Insurance and Raven Re to file reports, including financial statements, with state insurance departments in each state in which they do business, and their operations and accounts are subject to examination by those departments at any time. FGLIC, FGL NY Insurance and Raven Re prepare statutory financial statements in accordance with accounting practices and procedures prescribed or permitted by these departments.

The NAIC has approved a series of statutory accounting principles and various model regulations that have been adopted, in some cases with certain modifications, by all state insurance departments. These statutory principles are subject to ongoing change and modification. For instance, the NAIC adopted, effective with the annual reporting period ending December 31, 2010, revisions to the Annual Financial Reporting Model Regulation (or the Model Audit Rule) related to auditor independence, corporate governance and internal control over financial reporting. These revisions require that insurance companies, such as FGLIC and FGL NY Insurance, file reports with state insurance departments regarding their assessments of internal control over financial reporting. Moreover, compliance with any particular regulator’s interpretation of a legal or accounting issue may not result in compliance with another regulator’s interpretation of the same issue, particularly when compliance is judged in hindsight. Any particular regulator’s interpretation of a legal or accounting issue may change over time to FGLIC’s or FGL NY Insurance’s detriment, or changes to the overall legal or market environment, even absent any change of interpretation by a particular regulator, may cause FGLIC and FGL NY Insurance to change their views regarding the actions they need to take from a legal risk management perspective, which could necessitate changes to FGLIC’s or FGL NY Insurance’s practices that may, in some cases, limit their ability to grow and improve profitability.

State insurance departments conduct periodic examinations of the books and records, financial reporting, policy and rate filings, market conduct and business practices of insurance companies domiciled in their states, generally once every three to five years. Examinations are generally carried out in cooperation with the insurance departments of other states under guidelines promulgated by the NAIC. State insurance departments also have the authority to conduct examinations of non-domiciliary insurers that are licensed in their states. The MIA completed a routine financial examination of FGLIC for the three-year period ended December 31, 2009, and found no material deficiencies and proposed no adjustments to the financial statements as filed. The MIA is currently conducting its routine financial examination of FGLIC for the three-year period ended December 31, 2012. The NYDFS is completing a routine financial examination of FGL NY Insurance for the three-year periods ended December 31, 2009 and December 31, 2012.

Additionally, the Vermont Department of Financial Regulation, is conducting a routine financial examination of Raven Re for the period from April 7, 2011 (commencement of business) through December 31, 2012.

Dividend and Other Distribution Payment Limitations

The Maryland Insurance Code and the New York Insurance Law regulate the amount of dividends that may be paid in any year by FGLIC and FGL NY Insurance, respectively. Each year, FGLIC and FGL NY Insurance may pay a certain limited amount of ordinary dividends or other distributions without being required to obtain the prior consent of the Maryland Insurance Commissioner or the NYDFS, respectively. However, to pay any dividends or distributions (including the payment of any dividends or distributions for which prior consent is not required), FGLIC and FGL NY Insurance must provide advance written notice to the Maryland Insurance Commissioner or the NYDFS, respectively.

 

116


Table of Contents

Pursuant to Maryland insurance law, ordinary dividends are payments, together with all other such payments within the preceding twelve months, that do not exceed the lesser of (i) 10% of FGLIC’s statutory surplus as regards policyholders as of December 31 of the preceding year; or (ii) the net gain from operations of FGLIC (excluding realized capital gains for the 12-month period ending December 31 of the preceding year and pro rata distributions made on any class of FGLIC’s own securities).

Dividends in excess of FGLIC’s ordinary dividend capacity (including any dividends in a year after FGLIC suffers a net loss from operations) are referred to as extraordinary and require prior approval of the Maryland Insurance Commissioner. In deciding whether to allow payment of an ordinary dividend or to approve a request to pay an extraordinary dividend, Maryland insurance law requires the Maryland Insurance Commissioner to consider the effect of the dividend payment on FGLIC’s surplus and financial condition generally and whether the payment of the dividend will cause FGLIC to fail to meet its required RBC ratio.

In recent calendar years, FGLIC has had the dividend capacity and paid dividends to us as set forth in this table:

 

(in millions)

   2009      2010      2011      2012      2013  

FGLIC Ordinary Dividend Capacity

   $ 67.2       $ 59.4       $ 90.2       $ 84.6       $ 90.0   

FGLIC Ordinary Dividends Paid

     —           59.0         40.0         40.0         40.0   

On December 20, 2010, FGLIC paid an ordinary dividend to FGLH in the amount of $59.0 million with respect to its 2009 results. On September 29, 2011 and December 22, 2011, FGLIC paid ordinary dividends of $20.0 million and $20.0 million, respectively, to FGLH, with respect to its 2010 results. On September 26, 2012 and December 20, 2012, FGLIC paid an ordinary dividend to FGLH in the amount of $20.0 million and $20.0 million, respectively, based on its 2011 results. Based on its 2012 fiscal year results, FGLIC has dividend capacity to declare an ordinary dividend up to $90.0 million, subject to notice and review by the Maryland Insurance Commissioner. Any additional amount beyond $90.0 million would be an extraordinary dividend requiring notice to and approval from the Maryland Insurance Commissioner. On July 12, 2013, FGLIC paid an ordinary dividend of $40.0 million. After taking into account dividends that have been paid in the last twelve months (i.e., on December 20, 2012 and July 12, 2013) which total $60.0 million, FGLIC’s remaining ability to pay ordinary dividends until December 20, 2013 is $30.0 million, which increases to $50.0 million on December 21, 2013 until January 1, 2014.

Any payment of dividends by FGLIC is subject to the regulatory restrictions described above and the approval of such payment by the board of directors of FGLIC, which must consider various factors, including general economic and business conditions, tax considerations, FGLIC’s strategic plans, financial results and condition, FGLIC’s expansion plans, any contractual, legal or regulatory restrictions on the payment of dividends and its effect on RBC and such other factors the board of directors of FGLIC considers relevant. For example, payments of dividends could reduce FGLIC’s RBC and financial condition and lead to a reduction in FGLIC’s financial strength rating. See “Risk Factors—Risks Relating to Our Business—A financial strength ratings downgrade or any other negative action by a rating agency could adversely affect our financial condition and results of operations”. FGLH generally uses the dividends it receives from FGLIC to meet its debt service requirements. In connection with the Senior Notes, FGLH paid a $73.0 million dividend to FGL.

FGL NY Insurance has historically not paid dividends. In 2012, FGL NY Insurance paid a $4.4 million dividend to FGLIC after a determination that, as a result of capital contributions by FGLIC, FGL NY Insurance was overcapitalized.

Surplus and Capital

FGLIC and FGL NY Insurance are subject to the supervision of the regulators in states where they are licensed to transact business. Regulators have discretionary authority in connection with the continuing licensing

 

117


Table of Contents

of these entities to limit or prohibit sales to policyholders if, in their judgment, the regulators determine that such entities have not maintained the minimum surplus or capital or that the further transaction of business will be hazardous to policyholders.

Risk-Based Capital

In order to enhance the regulation of insurers’ solvency, the NAIC adopted a model law to implement RBC requirements for life, health and property and casualty insurance companies. All states have adopted the NAIC’s model law or a substantially similar law. RBC is used to evaluate the adequacy of capital and surplus maintained by an insurance company in relation to risks associated with: (i) asset risk, (ii) insurance risk, (iii) interest rate risk, and (iv) business risk. In general, RBC is calculated by applying factors to various asset, premium, claim, expense and reserve items, taking into account the risk characteristics of the insurer. Within a given risk category, these factors are higher for those items with greater underlying risk and lower for items with lower underlying risk. The RBC formula is used as an early warning regulatory tool to identify possible inadequately capitalized insurers for purposes of initiating regulatory action, and not as a means to rank insurers generally. Insurers that have less statutory capital than the RBC calculation requires are considered to have inadequate capital and are subject to varying degrees of regulatory action depending upon the level of capital inadequacy. As of the most recent annual statutory financial statements filed with insurance regulators, the RBC ratios for FGLIC and FGL NY Insurance each exceeded the minimum RBC requirements. Nevertheless, it may be desirable to maintain an RBC ratio in excess of the minimum requirements in order to maintain or improve our financial strength ratings. Our historical RBC ratios are presented in the table below. See “Risk Factors—Risks Relating to Our Business—A financial strength ratings downgrade or any other negative action by a rating agency could adversely affect our financial condition and results of operations”.

 

     RBC RATIO  

As of:

  

June 30, 2013

     474

December 31, 2012

     406

December 31, 2011

     371

December 31, 2010

     350

December 31, 2009

     312

December 31, 2008

     305

Insurance Regulatory Information System Tests

The NAIC has developed a set of financial relationships or tests known as the Insurance Regulatory Information System (IRIS) to assist state regulators in monitoring the financial condition of U.S. insurance companies and identifying companies that require special attention or action by insurance regulatory authorities. A ratio falling outside the prescribed “usual range” is not considered a failing result. Rather, unusual values are viewed as part of the regulatory early monitoring system. In many cases, it is not unusual for financially sound companies to have one or more ratios that fall outside the usual range. Insurance companies generally submit data annually to the NAIC, which in turn analyzes the data using prescribed financial data ratios, each with defined “usual ranges”. Generally, regulators will begin to investigate or monitor an insurance company if its ratios fall outside the usual ranges for four or more of the ratios. IRIS consists of a statistical phase and an analytical phase whereby financial examiners review insurers’ annual statements and financial ratios. The statistical phase consists of 12 key financial ratios based on year-end data that are generated from the NAIC database annually; each ratio has a “usual range” of results. As of December 31, 2012, FGLIC had two ratios outside the usual range, FGL NY Insurance had three ratios outside the usual range, and Raven Re had eight ratios outside the usual range. There were two different IRIS ratios as to which FGLIC and FGL NY Insurance fell outside the usual range, including: change in premium and change in reserving ratio. In addition, FGL NY Insurance’s adequacy of investment income also fell outside of the usual range. In addition to these three IRIS ratios falling outside the usual range, Raven Re’s five other IRIS ratios outside of usual range were: net change in

 

118


Table of Contents

capital and surplus, gross change in capital and surplus, net income to total income, change in product mix and change in asset mix, which are primarily the result of reinsurance transactions with its parent company, FGLIC.

We do not anticipate regulatory action as a result of the 2012 IRIS ratio results. In all instances in prior years, regulators have been satisfied upon follow-up that no regulatory action was required. FGLIC, FGL NY Insurance and Raven Re are not currently subject to regulatory restrictions based on these ratios. It is possible that similar results may not occur in the future.

Insurance Reserves

State insurance laws require insurers to analyze the adequacy of reserves. The respective appointed actuaries for FGLIC, FGL NY Insurance and Raven Re must each submit an opinion on an annual basis that their respective reserves, when considered in light of the respective assets FGLIC, FGL NY Insurance and Raven Re hold with respect to those reserves, make adequate provision for the contractual obligations and related expenses of FGLIC, FGL NY Insurance and Raven Re. FGLIC, FGL NY Insurance and Raven Re have filed all of the required opinions with the insurance departments in the states in which they do business.

Credit for Reinsurance Regulation

States regulate the extent to which insurers are permitted to take credit on their financial statements for the financial obligations that the insurers cede to reinsurers. Where an insurer cedes obligations to a reinsurer which is neither licensed nor accredited by the state insurance department, the ceding insurer is not permitted to take such financial statement credit unless the unlicensed or unaccredited reinsurer secures the liabilities it will owe under the reinsurance contract. Under the laws regulating credit for reinsurance issued by such unlicensed or unaccredited reinsurers, the permissible means of securing such liabilities are (i) the establishment of a trust account by the reinsurer to hold certain qualifying assets in a qualified U.S. financial institution, such as a member of the Federal Reserve, with the ceding insurer as the exclusive beneficiary of such trust account with the unconditional right to demand, without notice to the reinsurer, that the trustee pay over to it the assets in the trust account equal to the liabilities owed by the reinsurer; (ii) the posting of an unconditional and irrevocable letter of credit by a qualified U.S. financial institution in favor of the ceding company allowing the ceding company to draw upon the letter of credit up to the amount of the unpaid liabilities of the reinsurer and (iii) a “funds withheld” arrangement by which the ceding company withholds transfer to the reinsurer of the reserves which support the liabilities to be owed by the reinsurer, with the ceding insurer retaining title to and exclusive control over such reserves. FGLIC and FGL NY Insurance are subject to such credit for reinsurance rules in Maryland and New York, respectively, insofar as they enter into any reinsurance contracts with reinsurers which are neither licensed nor accredited in Maryland and New York, respectively.

Insurance Holding Company Regulation

As the parent company of FGLIC and the indirect parent company of FGL NY Insurance, we and entities affiliated for purposes of insurance regulation are subject to the insurance holding company laws in Maryland and New York. These laws generally require each insurance company directly or indirectly owned by the holding company to register with the insurance department in the insurance company’s state of domicile and to furnish annually financial and other information about the operations of companies within the holding company system. Generally, all transactions between insurers and affiliates within the holding company system are subject to regulation and must be fair and reasonable, and may require prior notice and approval or non-disapproval by its domiciliary insurance regulator.

Most states, including Maryland and New York, have insurance laws that require regulatory approval of a direct or indirect change of control of an insurer or an insurer’s holding company. Such laws prevent any person from acquiring control, directly or indirectly, of us or of HGI, FGLH, FGLIC or FGL NY Insurance unless that person has filed a statement with specified information with the insurance regulators and has obtained their prior

 

119


Table of Contents

approval. In addition, investors deemed to have a direct or indirect controlling interest are required to make regulatory filings and respond to regulatory inquires. After January 1, 2014, such investors will need to obtain approval to divest of their controlling interest. Under most states’ statutes, including those of Maryland and New York, acquiring 10% or more of the voting stock of an insurance company or its parent company is presumptively considered a change of control, although such presumption may be rebutted. Accordingly, any person who acquires 10% or more of our voting securities or that of us, HGI, FGLH, FGLIC or FGL NY Insurance without the prior approval of the insurance regulators of Maryland and New York will be in violation of those states’ laws and may be subject to injunctive action requiring the disposition or seizure of those securities by the relevant insurance regulator or prohibiting the voting of those securities and to other actions determined by the relevant insurance regulator.

Insurance Guaranty Association Assessments

Each state has insurance guaranty association laws under which insurers doing business in the state may be assessed by state insurance guaranty associations for certain obligations of insolvent insurance companies to policyholders and claimants. Typically, states assess each member insurer in an amount related to the member insurer’s proportionate share of the business written by all member insurers in the state. Although no prediction can be made as to the amount and timing of any future assessments under these laws, FGLIC and FGL NY Insurance have established reserves that they believe are adequate for assessments relating to insurance companies that are currently subject to insolvency proceedings.

Market Conduct Regulation

State insurance laws and regulations include numerous provisions governing the marketplace activities of insurers, including provisions governing the form and content of disclosure to consumers, illustrations, advertising, sales and complaint process practices. State regulatory authorities generally enforce these provisions through periodic market conduct examinations. In addition, FGLIC and FGL NY Insurance must file, and in many jurisdictions and for some lines of business obtain regulatory approval for, rates and forms relating to the insurance written in the jurisdictions in which they operate. FGLIC is currently the subject of nine ongoing market conduct examinations in various states, including a review by the NYDFS related to the possible unauthorized sale of insurance by FGLIC within the State of New York. Market conduct examinations can result in monetary fines or remediation and generally require FGLIC to devote significant resources to the management of such examinations. FGLIC does not believe that any of the current market conduct examinations it is subject to will result in any fines or remediation orders that will be material to its business.

Regulation of Investments

FGLIC and FGL NY Insurance are subject to state laws and regulations that require diversification of their investment portfolios and limit the amount of investments in certain asset categories, such as below investment grade fixed income securities, equity, real estate, other equity investments and derivatives. Failure to comply with these laws and regulations would cause investments exceeding regulatory limitations to be treated as either non-admitted assets for purposes of measuring surplus or as not qualified as an asset held for reserve purposes and, in some instances, would require divestiture or replacement of such non-qualifying investments. We believe that the investment portfolios of FGLIC and FGL NY Insurance as of June 30, 2013 complied in all material respects with such regulations.

Privacy Regulation

Our operations are subject to certain federal and state laws and regulations that require financial institutions and other businesses to protect the security and confidentiality of personal information, including health-related and customer information, and to notify customers and other individuals about their policies and practices relating to their collection and disclosure of health-related and customer information and their practices relating to protecting the security and confidentiality of such information. These laws and regulations require notice to

 

120


Table of Contents

affected individuals, law enforcement agencies, regulators and others if there is a breach of the security of certain personal information, including social security numbers, and require holders of certain personal information to protect the security of the data. Our operations are also subject to certain federal regulations that require financial institutions and creditors to implement effective programs to detect, prevent and mitigate identity theft. In addition, our ability to make telemarketing calls and to send unsolicited e-mail or fax messages to consumers and customers and our uses of certain personal information, including consumer report information, are regulated. Federal and state governments and regulatory bodies may be expected to consider additional or more detailed regulation regarding these subjects and the privacy and security of personal information.

FIAs

In recent years, the SEC and state securities regulators have questioned whether FIAs, such as those sold by us, should be treated as securities under the federal and state securities laws rather than as insurance products exempted from such laws. Treatment of these products as securities would require additional registration and licensing of these products and the agents selling them, as well as cause us to seek additional marketing relationships for these products, any of which may impose significant restrictions on our ability to conduct operations as currently operated. On December 17, 2008, the Commission voted to approve Rule 151A, and apply federal securities oversight to FIAs issued on or after January 12, 2011. On July 12, 2010, however, the District of Columbia Circuit Court of Appeals vacated Rule 151A. In addition, under the Dodd-Frank Act, annuities that meet specific requirements, including requirements relating to certain state suitability rules, are specifically exempted from being treated as securities by the SEC. We expect that the types of FIAs FGLIC and FGL NY Insurance sell will meet these requirements and therefore are exempt from being treated as securities by the SEC and state securities regulators. However, there can be no assurance that federal or state securities laws or state insurance laws and regulations will not be amended or interpreted to impose further requirements on FIAs.

The Dodd-Frank Act

The Dodd-Frank Act makes sweeping changes to the regulation of financial services entities, products and markets. Certain provisions of the Dodd-Frank Act are or may become applicable to us, our competitors or those entities with which we do business, including, but not limited to:

 

   

the establishment of federal regulatory authority over derivatives;

 

   

the establishment of consolidated federal regulation and resolution authority over systemically important financial services firms;

 

   

the establishment of the Federal Insurance Office;

 

   

changes to the regulation of broker dealers and investment advisors;

 

   

changes to the regulation of reinsurance;

 

   

changes to regulations affecting the rights of shareholders;

 

   

the imposition of additional regulation over credit rating agencies;

 

   

the imposition of concentration limits on financial institutions that restrict the amount of credit that may be extended to a single person or entity; and

 

   

the clearing of derivative contracts.

Numerous provisions of the Dodd-Frank Act require the adoption of implementing rules or regulations. In addition, the Dodd-Frank Act mandates multiple studies, which could result in additional legislation or regulation applicable to the insurance industry, us, our competitors or those entities with which we do business. Legislative or regulatory requirements imposed by or promulgated in connection with the Dodd-Frank Act may impact us in many ways, including, but not limited to:

 

   

placing us at a competitive disadvantage relative to our competition or other financial services entities;

 

121


Table of Contents
   

changing the competitive landscape of the financial services sector or the insurance industry;

 

   

making it more expensive for us to conduct our business;

 

   

requiring the reallocation of significant company resources to government affairs;

 

   

increasing our legal and compliance related activities and the costs associated therewith; or

 

   

otherwise having a material adverse effect on the overall business climate as well as our financial condition and results of operations.

Until various studies are completed and final regulations are promulgated pursuant to the Dodd-Frank Act, the full impact of the Dodd-Frank Act on investments, investment activities and insurance and annuity products of FGLIC and FGL NY Insurance remain unclear.

ERISA

We may offer certain insurance and annuity products to employee benefit plans governed by ERISA and/or the Code, including group annuity contracts designated to fund tax-qualified retirement plans. ERISA and the Code provide (among other requirements) standards of conduct for employee benefit plan fiduciaries, including investment managers and investment advisers with respect to the assets of such plans, and holds fiduciaries liable if they fail to satisfy fiduciary standards of conduct. Generally, we maintain policies and procedures that are intended to limit the circumstances under which FGL or any insurance subsidiary could be deemed a fiduciary with respect to plans covered by ERISA and/or the Code, or to the extent that they may be deemed to have such fiduciary status, to ensure compliance with applicable requirements of ERISA and/or the Code.

In 1993, the U.S. Supreme Court issued an opinion in John Hancock Mutual Life Insurance Co. v. Harris Trust and Savings Bank , holding that certain contractholder funds held by John Hancock Mutual Life Insurance Company in its general account under a participating group annuity contract were “plan assets”, and therefore, subject to ERISA’s fiduciary provisions. However, under Section 401(b)(2) of ERISA, if an insurance company issues a guaranteed benefit policy to a plan, the assets of the plan are deemed to include the policy, but do not, solely by reason of the issuance of the policy, include any assets of the insurance company. Section 401(b)(2)(B) of ERISA defines the terms “guaranteed benefit policy” to mean an insurance policy or contract to the extent such policy or contract provides for benefits the amount of which is guaranteed by the insurer. FGL and its insurance subsidiaries intend that their annuity contracts and life insurance policies qualify as guaranteed benefit policies as defined by Section 401(b)(2)(B) as further interpreted by court decisions and the DOL.

Real Property

We lease our headquarters at 1001 Fleet Street, Baltimore, Maryland, and sublease a property in Lincoln, Nebraska for legal, claims and processing needs. We believe our existing facilities are suitable and adequate for our present purposes.

Legal Proceedings

We are subject to litigation arising in the ordinary course of our business, including litigation principally relating to purported class actions and disputes regarding our fixed annuity and life insurance products. We can not assure you that our insurance coverage will be adequate to cover all liabilities occurring out of such claims. In the opinion of management, we are not engaged in any legal proceedings that we expect will have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition, cash flows, or results of operations other than set forth below.

From time to time, in the ordinary course of business and like others in the industry, we receive requests for information from government agencies in connection with their regulatory or investigatory authority. Such requests can include subpoenas or demand letters for documents to assist the government in audits or investigations. We review such requests and notices and take appropriate action. We have been subject to certain requests for information and investigations in the past and could be subject to them in the future.

 

122


Table of Contents

Since May 2008, Fidelity & Guaranty Life Insurance Company has been working with the NYDFS and its predecessor to remediate certain allegations relating to cross-border sales of deferred annuities to New York residents. In June 2013 we notified the NYDFS of the completion of this remediation. The NYDFS has not yet notified us of its assessment of our efforts in this matter and we have no way of knowing whether it will require further remediation or impose other penalties. We also have no way of knowing whether other states may yet raise similar issues.

On July 18, 2011, a putative class action complaint was filed in the United States District Court, Central District of California, captioned Eddie L. Cressy v. OM Financial Life Insurance Company, et. al., Case No. 2:2011-cv-05871. The plaintiff asked the court to certify the action as a class action on behalf of both a nationwide and a California class defined as certain persons who were sold OM Financial Life Insurance indexed universal life insurance policies.

The plaintiff alleged, inter alia, that the plaintiff and members of the putative class relied on defendants’ advice in withdrawing equity from their homes and using the proceeds to purchase unsuitable insurance policies. On March 12, 2012, the court dismissed the class action complaint without prejudice and with leave to re-file. The plaintiff filed an amended complaint on April 2, 2012 that asserted fewer federal claims. On May 9, 2013, the court dismissed the remaining federal causes of action with prejudice. It dismissed the state law claims without prejudice and granted the plaintiff leave to re-file in California state court.

On July 5, 2013, the plaintiff filed a putative class action captioned Eddie L. Cressy v. Fidelity Guaranty [sic] Life Insurance Company, et. al. , Superior Court of California, County of Los Angeles No. BC-514340. The state court complaint asserts that the plaintiff and members of the putative class relied on defendants’ advice in withdrawing equity from their homes and using the proceeds to purchase unsuitable insurance policies. The plaintiff seeks to certify a class defined as “all persons who reside or are located in the state of California who were sold OM Financial/FG Life equity-indexed universal life insurance policies as an investment.” In August 2013, the Superior Court of California struck the status conference scheduled for October and the case remains adjourned until further notice from the Court. In light of this and due to the early stages of the case, we do not believe damages related to this matter are probable or reasonably estimable at this time.

Since September 2012, Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc. has received notices from approximately 10 states regarding an examination of its escheatment practices, which may include some focus with respect to the company’s Social Security death master file search practices. The examination will be conducted by a vendor appointed by the various states. We are currently in the process of scheduling a preliminary meeting with the vendor to discuss the scope of the examination. During Fiscal Year 2012, we incurred an $11 million benefit expense, net of reinsurance, to increase reserves to cover potential benefits payable resulting from this ongoing effort. While we believe that we have established sufficient reserves with respect to these matters, it is possible that third parties could dispute these amounts and additional payments or additional unreported claims or liabilities could be required or identified given the ongoing regulatory developments. See “Risk Factors – Our business is highly regulated and subject to numerous legal restrictions and regulations”. We believe that this examination is without merit and we continue to defend ourselves vigorously in this matter.

Philip A. Falcone is the Chairman and Chief Executive Officer of HGI, our parent company, and the ultimate controlling person of FGL. On August 19, 2013, the SEC announced that Mr. Falcone and the HCP Parties agreed to a settlement with the SEC to resolve all matters related to two pending civil actions filed by the SEC against the HCP Parties.

The HCP Parties agreed to pay a fine and make certain admissions of fact regarding activities relating to the HCP Parties. Mr. Falcone also agreed to be barred and enjoined for a five-year period from acting as or being an associated person of any “broker,” “dealer,” “investment adviser,” “municipal securities dealer,” “municipal adviser,” “transfer agent,” or “nationally recognized statistical rating organization” (after which Mr. Falcone may seek the consent of the SEC to have the bar and injunction lifted). Under the settlement, Mr. Falcone may continue to own and control HGI and serve as its Chief Executive Officer and Chairman of its board. 

 

123


Table of Contents

The settlement was approved by the federal court overseeing the action. HGI and its subsidiaries, including us, are not parties to the settlement and the duties and obligations described therein are the duties and obligations of the HCP Parties and not of HGI, FGL or their respective subsidiaries. HGI may continue to own and control us.

In addition, on October 7, 2013, the NYDFS announced the NYDFS commitment with Mr. Falcone, HGI, FGLH and FGL NY Insurance that Mr. Falcone will not exercise control, within the meaning of New York insurance law, over FGL NY Insurance or any other New York-licensed insurer for seven years. Pursuant to the NYDFS commitment, neither Mr. Falcone nor any employee of HCP shall serve as one of our officers or directors, or of any of our subsidiaries, nor may they be involved in any investment decisions made by us or our subsidiaries. Mr. Falcone also agreed to recuse himself from participating in any vote of the board of HGI relating to the election or appointment of officers or directors of such companies. Under the NYDFS commitment, FGLH also agreed to maintain FGL NY Insurance’s RBC level at no less than 225% company action level RBC ratio, and to establish a trust account funded with $18.5 million of cash or eligible securities to support that agreement. FGL NY Insurance agreed to file quarterly estimated RBC reports in addition to the annual reports required by law.

Neither FGL nor any of our directors, officers or subsidiaries were involved in the SEC settlement or any of the implicated activities. Mr. Falcone is not a director or officer of us or any of our subsidiaries and we do not expect either the SEC settlement or the NYDFS commitment to have any direct impact on our business and operations. However, we cannot be certain that our business will not suffer indirect consequences in dealing with third parties as a result of the publicity and the facts surrounding the SEC settlement and the fines imposed by the SEC on the HCP Parties, including potential counterparties and regulators who may be concerned about the implications of the SEC settlement and the HCP Parties’ affiliation with us.

 

124


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT

Executive Officers and Directors

The following table sets forth information about our executive officers and directors. The respective age of each individual in the table below is as of September 30, 2013:

 

NAME

  

POSITION

   AGE  

Leland C. Launer, Jr.

   President, Chief Executive Officer & Director      58   

Wendy J.B. Young

   Vice President & Chief Financial Officer      49   

Rajesh Krishnan

   Executive Vice President & Chief Investment Officer      42   

Eric L. Marhoun

   Senior Vice President, General Counsel & Secretary      51   

John P. O’Shaughnessy

   Senior Vice President, Chief Actuary & Chief Risk Officer      57   

John A. Phelps, II

   Senior Vice President, Chief Distribution Officer      53   

Rosanne Boehm

   Senior Vice President, Human Resources      55   

Christopher S. Fleming

   Senior Vice President, Operations & Technology      45   

Paul Tyler

   Senior Vice President, Strategy & Corporate Development      48   

Phillip J. Gass

   Chairman and Director      35   

Omar M. Asali

   Director      42   

William S. Bawden*

   Director      67   

Kostas (Gus) Cheliotis

   Director      35   

Kevin J. Gregson*

   Director      54   

William P. Melchionni*

   Director      68   

L. John H. Tweedie

   Director      68   

Thomas A. Williams

   Director      54   

 

* Independent director

Executive Officers

Leland C. Launer, Jr. initially joined the predecessor company, Old Mutual US Life, as the CEO-Designate in August 2010 leading up to the FGLH Acquisition by HGI. Following the FGLH Acquisition, Mr. Launer assumed the role as our President and Chief Executive Officer. Mr. Launer is an accomplished insurance executive having several leadership positions through a 28-year career with one of the world’s major insurance companies, MetLife. From 2007 to 2010, Mr. Launer was a private consultant in the life insurance industry and served as the Chief Investment Officer of two Bermuda-based start-up reinsurer companies, Bridge Point Insurance Ltd. and Lennox Reinsurance Ltd. He was president of Institutional Business from 2005 to 2007 and assembled teams to create and execute significant business plans in highly mature and competitive markets, which resulted in $1.5 billion profit in both 2005 and 2006. As the Chief Investment Officer at MetLife from 2003 to 2005, he created a strategy to accurately assess investment risk and opportunities for a $300 billion investment portfolio. From 2000 to 2001, Mr. Launer held the Treasurer post at MetLife. In addition to his tenure at MetLife, he previously served as Chairman of the Board for Reinsurance Group of America and was also an active board member at MetLife Bank. Mr. Launer is a trustee at the University of Redlands, where he completed his Bachelor of Science in Chemistry before obtaining an M.B.A. at the University of Southern California.

Wendy J.B. Young joined the company in 2000 as Actuary. During her tenure with the company, she was promoted to Vice President and has assumed ever increasing responsibilities, including leading the Financial Planning & Analysis area. Ms. Young has been instrumental in many of the major financial projects over the past several years, including the recent issuance of the Senior Notes by FGLH. In April 2013, Ms. Young moved into the Chief Financial Officer role where she manages capital planning, income taxes, financial reporting, investment accounting, reinsurance reporting, internal controls, internal audit and treasury for the company’s life and annuity operations. Ms. Young has over 25 years of experience as an actuary in the insurance industry. Prior to joining the company, Ms. Young served for ten years at the Acacia Group, a life and annuity company,

 

125


Table of Contents

holding various actuarial roles, ending as 2nd Vice President and Associate Actuary responsible for statutory reporting and projections for regulatory filings. Ms. Young began her career in Ernst & Young’s insurance practice performing auditing and consulting functions. Ms. Young has extensive experience across all aspects of the life actuarial practice area, particularly in financial reporting, capital planning, analysis and M&A which prepared her to be an integral part of the finance leadership team at FGL. She holds a Bachelor of Science in Insurance with a concentration in Actuarial Science from The Pennsylvania State University. Ms. Young is a Member of the American Academy of Actuaries as well as a Fellow in the Society of Actuaries.

Rajesh Krishnan is our Executive Vice President and Chief Investment Officer and is responsible for all aspects of our investment portfolio. Mr. Krishnan joined the predecessor company, Old Mutual US Life in 2009, as Senior Vice President and Chief Investment Officer, and led the restructuring of the Company’s fixed income portfolio. Following the FGLH Acquisition, Mr. Krishnan led the development of in-house asset management capabilities including the establishment of the Company’s Baltimore-based trading desk, and was promoted to Executive Vice President in August 2012. Prior to joining Old Mutual US Life, Mr. Krishnan spent fourteen years with Wellington Management Company, an investment management company, in Boston, Massachusetts, where he was most recently a Fixed Income Portfolio Manager and Associate Partner focusing on managing bond portfolios for a wide range of insurance clients. Mr. Krishnan is a Chartered Financial Analyst and a member of the Boston Security Analysts Society. He holds a Bachelor of Arts degree from Harvard College.

Eric L. Marhoun joined the Company in 2007 as Senior Vice President and General Counsel. In his current position, Mr. Marhoun oversees Legal and Compliance matters for the U.S. life and annuity businesses of HGI. Mr. Marhoun has 25 years of legal experience in U.S. and non-U.S. insurance markets. Mr. Marhoun was previously Senior Vice President and General Counsel to Old Mutual US Life and managed the Legal and Compliance departments for the U.S. and Bermuda life and annuity businesses of Old Mutual plc of the United Kingdom from 2007 to 2011. Prior to joining Old Mutual US Life, Mr. Marhoun was Vice President, Lead Group Counsel and Secretary of American Express Financial Advisors, Inc., a financial services company, from 1995 to 2006 where he oversaw the legal operations of the insurance division of American Express. He was also Of Counsel with Lord, Bissell & Brook in 2006 and an Associate with the firm at the beginning of his career. Mr. Marhoun received his J.D. cum laude from DePaul University College of Law and is admitted to practice law in the states of Illinois, Minnesota, Wisconsin and Georgia as well as various federal courts.

John P. O’Shaughnessy joined FGL in January 2009 as Vice President, Actuary, Special Projects. Mr. O’Shaughnessy assumed responsibility for the Company’s asset/liability model development and product review. In April 2009, Mr. O’Shaughnessy was promoted to Vice President and Chief Insurance Risk Officer. In this expanded role, Mr. O’Shaughnessy oversaw the Company’s entire actuarial function including reinsurance relationships and product development. Two years later in April 2011, Mr. O’Shaughnessy was named Chief Actuary and Chief Risk Officer—reporting directly to the CEO. In addition to the aforementioned responsibilities, Mr. O’Shaughnessy has risk oversight for all actuarial functions. Prior to joining FGL in 2009, Mr. O’Shaughnessy served as Vice President and Actuary, Product Development at Great American Financial from 2004 to 2009. While at Great American Financial, he designed and developed a complete suite of annuity products as the company re-entered the fixed annuity marketplace. This included providing risk adjusted evolution of existing and proposed products and working with several producer groups to develop proprietary products for niche markets. Subsequent to his position at Great American Financial, Mr. O’Shaughnessy held positions at Lincoln Financial from 2002 to 2004, Travelers in 2001, Sage from 2000 to 2001 and Nationwide Financial from 1989 to 2000. Mr. O’Shaughnessy is a Member of the American Academy of Actuaries as well as a Fellow of the Society of Actuaries. He earned his Bachelor of Science from Columbus State University and his Master of Arts (Mathematics) from the University of Louisville.

John A. Phelps, II joined FGL in 2000 as National Life Sales Director and in 2002 was promoted to Vice President, Brokerage Life Sales. During that time Mr. Phelps led an aggressive life product development campaign including the recruitment of brokerage distribution to support a broad-based product portfolio. In September 2003, Mr. Phelps was promoted to Vice President, Life Distribution. In that position he directed all

 

126


Table of Contents

aspects of life and fixed annuity portfolio development and distribution of FGL. The life distribution channel grew from a small, niche player to a top-20 carrier. In Mr. Phelps’ tenure at FGL, the Company has held major market positions in fixed IUL, mortgage term and brokerage term. During his 27-year career prior to joining FGL, Mr. Phelps has served as a personal producer, general agent and has held executive sales and marketing positions with home office insurance companies as well as having served on the ACLI Life Insurance committee, the LIMRA Distribution Leaders Round Table committee and LIMRA Brokerage committee. Mr. Phelps obtained his Masters of Science Management degree from The American College and holds Bachelor of Science degrees in Marketing and Economics from Manchester University.

Rosanne Boehm joined FGL as Assistant Vice President, Organization Development in 2008 and was promoted to Vice President, Human Resources in April 2011. After a successful year including recruiting activities in 2011 of over 22% of the current workforce adding high quality industry talent to the organization, she was promoted to Senior Vice President (“SVP”) Human Resources in August 2012. She is responsible for all of the Company’s human resources and talent management strategies and initiatives. Ms. Boehm has more than 25 years of domestic and international human resources experience in the financial services, manufacturing and government services industries. Prior to joining FGL, Ms. Boehm held human resources leadership positions with companies including Honeywell Technology Solutions, Northrop Grumman and PACE Incorporated and has experience with both large and small, union and non-union as well as multi-location organizations. Ms. Boehm holds a Bachelor of Science degree in Business Administration/Human Resources from Columbia Union College as well as a Graduate Certification in Organization Development from Johns Hopkins University. She holds an active accreditation as Senior Professional in Human Resources (SPHR) from the Human Resources Certification Institute and a Fellow—Life Management Institute (Level 1) from LOMA. Ms. Boehm is a member of the Society of Human Resources Management and the Organization Development Network, and holds a number of professional certifications in the use of various human resources assessment tools and instruments.

Christopher S. Fleming joined FGL in November 2011 as Senior Vice President, Operations & Technology. Prior to joining FGL, he was Head of Corporate Six Sigma & Strategic Cost Management at ING North American Insurance Corporation, a $1.7 billion operating expenses and 7,000 employee retirement, investment and insurance company. Prior to his tenure at ING, Mr. Fleming served as Chief Operating Officer for ING Central Europe Insurance—a region that generated double-digit top-line growth and served eight million clients. Mr. Fleming also previously held leadership roles at General Electric and American General holding Senior Vice President and Vice President roles, respectively. Mr. Fleming earned his Bachelor of Science degree in Business Administration, majoring in Finance and Economics from The Ohio State University. Additionally, he is a Six Sigma Master Black Belt.

Paul Tyler joined FGL in May 2012 as Senior Vice President, Strategy and Business Development. Mr. Tyler is responsible for corporate strategy, brand development, marketing communication, social media and mobile applications. From 2011 to 2012, Mr. Tyler was CEO and President of 1837 Media Inc., a digital media company. Prior to that, Mr. Tyler worked at MetLife, an insurance company, in a variety of roles for 14 years. He held strategic leadership roles in operations, technology, sales, compliance and was Chief of Staff to the President of MetLife’s retail business. Prior to that, Mr. Tyler worked in management consulting as a project manager for Monitor Group, specializing in the financial services and telecommunications industries. He earned his A.B. from Princeton University and his J.D. from Cornell Law School.

Board of Directors

Phillip J. Gass has served as director of FGL since 2011 and as Chairman of the board of directors since June 2013. Mr. Gass serves as Managing Director of Investments of HGI and is responsible for HGI’s investments in financial institutions, including insurance, reinsurance, specialty finance and asset management. Mr. Gass led the acquisition of FGL, HGI’s anchor insurance company, and the formation of Front Street, HGI’s reinsurance platform focusing on fixed annuities. He was also responsible for the formation of Salus, HGI’s asset based lending platform. Prior to joining HGI, Mr. Gass was a senior analyst with an affiliate of HGI, Harbinger Capital, a private

 

127


Table of Contents

investment firm. He joined Harbinger Capital in 2008 after serving as Vice President with GE Capital, the financial services unit of General Electric, where he was responsible for leading the underwriting of private equity and structured finance investments. Prior to GE Capital, Mr. Gass held roles at Dresdner Kleinwort Wasserstein where he focused on loan workouts and company turnarounds. Mr. Gass began his career at the Sumitomo Bank underwriting structured finance investments. Mr. Gass also currently serves on the boards of Front Street and HGI Asset Management Holdings. Mr. Gass received a B.S. in Finance from New York University and is a CFA charterholder. We believe that Mr. Gass’s insurance, asset management and financial experience well qualifies him to serve on our board of directors.

Omar M. Asali has served as director of FGL since 2011. He has also served as President of HGI effective as of October 2011, as Acting President since June 2011, and as a director of HGI since May 2011. Mr. Asali is Vice Chairman of Spectrum Brands and a director of Zap.Com, each a subsidiary of HGI. Prior to becoming President of HGI, Mr. Asali was a Managing Director and Head of Global Strategy of Harbinger Capital, an affiliate of HGI. Prior to joining Harbinger Capital in 2009, Mr. Asali was the co-head of Goldman Sachs Hedge Fund Strategies (“Goldman Sachs HFS”), a hedge fund sponsor, where he helped manage approximately $25 billion of capital allocated to external managers. Mr. Asali also served as co-chair of the Investment Committee at Goldman Sachs HFS from 2008 to 2009. Before joining Goldman Sachs HFS in 2003, Mr. Asali worked in Goldman Sachs’ Investment Banking Division, providing M&A and strategic advisory services to clients in the High Technology Group. Mr. Asali previously worked at Capital Guidance, a boutique private equity firm. Mr. Asali began his career working for a public accounting firm. Mr. Asali received an MBA from Columbia Business School and a B.S. in Accounting from Virginia Tech. We believe that Mr. Asali’s financial and asset management experience well qualifies him to serve on our board of directors.

William S. Bawden has served as a director and Chairman of the Audit Committee of FGL since 2013. Mr. Bawden previously served as a member of the board of directors of Aviva USA Corporation, a life and annuity insurance company, where he also chaired the audit committee and was a member of the risk committee. He is a retired partner of PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP (“PwC”), in which role he served the insurance industry for many years. While at PwC, Mr. Bawden led the PwC Canadian insurance practice from 1995 to 2007, was chairman of the world insurance partner leadership team from 1987 to 1993, and was co-chairman of the firm’s US insurance practice from 1987 to 1992. He also has been a member of several AICPA and Canadian standards setting committees that focused on insurance accounting and reporting. Mr. Bawden has a B.S. and M.B.A. from Indiana University. We believe that Mr. Bawden’s extensive accounting and insurance qualifications and experience enable him to provide a valuable perspective as a member of our board of directors.

Kostas (Gus) Cheliotis has served as director of FGL since 2012 and as Chairman of the Compensation Committee since June 2013. He currently serves as Vice President and Investment Counsel of HGI and is focused on HGI’s investments in financial institutions, including insurance, reinsurance, specialty finance and asset management. Mr. Cheliotis leads HGI’s legal teams responsible for transactions relating to FGL, Front Street, Salus and Five Island Asset Management. He also currently serves as a board member of Front Street and HGI Asset Management Holdings. Prior to joining HGI, Mr. Cheliotis served as Vice President & Investment Counsel of Harbinger Capital. Mr. Cheliotis started his career in 2002 as an Associate at Milbank, Tweed, Hadley & McCloy LLP, in the firm’s Mergers & Acquisitions group. At Milbank, he represented public and private companies in connection with mergers, acquisitions, divestitures, complex joint ventures, restructurings and other corporate transactions. He has completed transactions throughout Asia, Europe, Latin America and the United States in numerous regulated and non-regulated industries including, among others, insurance, financial services, gaming, telecommunications, power and energy, infrastructure, pharmaceuticals and airlines. Mr. Cheliotis received his B.A. from St. John’s University, magna cum laude and his J.D. from New York Law School, summa cum laude, where he was a member of the Law Review. We believe that Mr. Cheliotis’s legal and regulatory background and experience well qualifies him to serve on our on our board of directors.

Kevin J. Gregson has served as director of FGL since 2011 and is a member of the audit, compensation and related party transactions committees. Mr. Gregson currently serves as the Lead Account Director for the

 

128


Table of Contents

Insurance Industry for Towers Watson. Prior to his role at Towers Watson, Mr. Gregson was a managing director at Alvarez and Marsal Business Consulting, a financial advisory services company, focused primarily on the financial services industry. With over 30 years of experience, he specializes in developing and implementing business solutions for global organizations. Prior to joining Alvarez and Marsal, Mr. Gregson served as founder and president of Bridge Pointe, LLC, a Bermuda-based insurance and reinsurance company and advisory services firm that provides innovative insurance solutions for insurers and corporate sponsors. Previously, he was a co-founder and principal of The Gregson Group, a business advisory firm helping companies align business strategies with organizational and human capital strategies. Before that, he served as a managing partner and Life Science industry group leader with Ernst & Young. Mr. Gregson earned a bachelors degree from the University of Delaware and has attended the Executive Finance Program at the University of Michigan. We believe that Mr. Gregson’s insurance and human resources experience well qualifies him to serve on our board of directors.

Leland C. Launer, Jr. has served as a director of FGL since 2011 and previously served as Chairman of the board of directors from 2011 to June 27, 2013. See “—Executive Officers” for more information. Mr. Launer brings to our board of directors his extensive executive experience within the insurance industry.

William P. Melchionni has served as director of FGL since 2012. Mr. Melchionni currently works as an independent consultant for a number of financial services companies. For 17 years, he served in a number of senior roles for Credit Suisse, an investment bank, in the investment advisory business. Prior to Credit Suisse, Mr. Melchionni worked for Solomon Brothers for 12 years as a director. He played professional basketball with the Philadelphia 76ers and New York Nets. He received a Bachelor of Science in Economics from Villanova University. We believe that Mr. Melchionni’s asset management experience well qualifies him to serve on our board of directors.

L. John H. Tweedie has served as director of FGL since 2011. Mr. Tweedie serves as CEO and is responsible for setting and executing the strategy of Front Street. Over a period of 35 years, Mr. Tweedie has managed businesses that provide individual life and annuities, property & casualty in both domestic and international markets. Most recently, he served as President and CEO of Northstar Re, a start-up, from 2002 to 2009. Mr. Tweedie served as an officer of MetLife for more than 25 years and, in his last role as Senior Executive Vice President, he served as a member of its Executive Group. We believe that Mr. Tweedie’s extensive actuarial, financial and executive experience well qualifies him to serve on our board of directors.

Thomas A. Williams has served as director of FGL since 2013. Mr. Williams has been the Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer of HGI since March 2012 and HGI Asset Management Holdings since April 2013. Mr. Williams also serves as the Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer of Zap.Com, a subsidiary of HGI, since March 2012. Mr. Williams is also a director of Front Street Re (Cayman) Ltd., since August 2012. Prior to joining HGI, Mr. Williams was President, Chief Executive Officer and a director of RDA Holding Co. and its subsidiary Reader’s Digest Association, Inc. (together, “RDA”) from April 2011 until September 2011. Previously, Mr. Williams was RDA’s Chief Financial Officer from February 2009 until April 2011 where his primary focus was on developing business restructuring plans for the company. RDA later filed for bankruptcy protection in February 2013. Prior to joining RDA, Mr. Williams served as Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer for Affinion Group Holdings, Inc., a portfolio company of Apollo Management, L.P., from January 2007 until February 2009 where his primary focus was on growing enterprise value, finance, accounting, treasury, tax, investor relations and SOX compliance. Previously, Mr. Williams spent more than 21 years with AT&T, Inc., where he held a progression of senior financial and officer positions including Chief Financial Officer, AT&T Networks; Chief Financial Officer, AT&T Global Network Technology Services; Chief Financial Officer, AT&T Laboratories; and AT&T Chief Process Officer. Mr. Williams started at AT&T with Bell Laboratories in June 1985. Prior to his tenure at AT&T, Mr. Williams was International Controller of McLean Industries Inc. from 1984 to 1985, Industry Analyst of Interpool Ltd. from 1982 to 1984 and Commodity Trading Associate with Bache Halsey Stuart Shields, Inc. from 1981 to 1982. Mr. Williams received a B.A. in Economics from the University of South Florida. We believe that Mr. Williams’ accounting and financial experience well qualifies him to serve on our board of directors.

 

129


Table of Contents

Corporate Governance

Board Composition and Director Independence

Our business and affairs are managed under the direction of our board of directors. Our board of directors is currently composed of nine members. Prior to the completion of this offering, we expect that our board of directors will be composed of nine members. Upon completion of this offering, our amended and restated certificate of incorporation will provide that our board of directors will be divided into three classes with members of each class serving staggered three-year terms. Any additional directorships resulting from an increase in the number of directors will be distributed among the three classes so that, as nearly as possible, each class will consist of one-third of the directors. See “Description of Capital Stock—Anti-Takeover Effects of our Certificate of Incorporation, By-Laws and Delaware Law—Classified Board of Directors”.

Under our amended and restated by-laws, our board of directors will consist of such number of directors as may be determined from time to time by resolution of the board of directors. Any vacancies or newly created directorships may be filled only by the affirmative vote of a majority of our directors then in office, even if less than a quorum, or by a sole remaining director and the elected person will serve the remainder of the term of the class to which he or she is appointed. Each director will hold office until his or her successor has been duly elected and qualified or until his or her earlier death, resignation or removal.

Our board of directors will be led by our non-executive Chairman, Mr. Gass. Our board of directors has determined that Messrs. Bawden, Gregson and Melchionni are independent within the meaning of the federal securities laws and we expect they will be independent within the meaning of the applicable listing standards.

Controlled Company

After the completion of this offering, HGI will control a majority of the voting power of our outstanding common stock. HGI will own approximately     % of our common stock (or     % if the underwriters exercise in full their option to purchase additional shares) after the completion of this offering. As a result, we expect to be a “controlled company” within the meaning of the applicable corporate governance standards. Accordingly, we intend to rely on exemptions from certain corporate governance requirements. Specifically, as a controlled company, we would not be required to have (1) a majority of independent directors, (2) a nominating and corporate governance committee composed entirely of independent directors or (3) a compensation committee composed entirely of independent directors.

Committees of the Board of Directors

Our board of directors will maintain an audit committee, a compensation committee, a nominating and corporate governance committee, and an executive committee. The composition and responsibilities of each committee are described below.

Audit Committee

The audit committee is responsible for, among other things, assisting our board of directors in overseeing and reviewing our accounting and financial reporting and other internal control processes, the audits of our financial statements, the qualifications and independence of our independent registered public accounting firm, the effectiveness of our internal control over financial reporting, and the performance of our internal audit function and independent registered public accounting firm. Our audit committee reviews and assesses the qualitative aspects of our financial reporting, our processes to manage business and financial risks, and our compliance with significant applicable legal, ethical and regulatory requirements. Our audit committee is directly responsible for the appointment, compensation, retention and oversight of our independent registered public accounting firm. Upon completion of this offering, the members of our audit committee are expected to be                     ,                     and                     . Prior to the consummation of this offering, out board of directors will adopt a written charter under which the audit committee will operate. A copy of the charter will be available without charge on our website upon completion of this offering.

 

130


Table of Contents

Compensation Committee

The compensation committee will be responsible for, among other things, reviewing and approving the compensation and benefits of our employees, directors and consultants, administering our employee benefit plans, authorizing and ratifying stock option grants and other incentive arrangements, and authorizing employment and related agreements. Upon completion of this offering, the members of our compensation committee are expected to be                     ,                     and                     . Prior to the consummation of this offering, out board of directors will adopt a written charter under which the compensation committee will operate. A copy of the charter will be available without charge on our website upon completion of this offering.

Nominating and Corporate Governance Committee

Our nominating and corporate governance committee will be responsible for, among other things, identifying and recommending candidates to the board of directors for election to our board of directors, reviewing the composition of the board of directors and its committees, developing and recommending to the board of directors corporate governance guidelines that are applicable to us, and overseeing board of directors evaluations. Upon completion of this offering, the members of our nominating and corporate governance committee are expected to be                     ,                     and                      . The charter of our nominating and corporate governance committee will be available without change on our corporate website upon completion of this offering.

Executive Committee

The executive committee will have the responsibility for assisting the board of directors with its responsibility and, except as may be limited by law, our amended and restated certificate of incorporation or amended and restated by-laws, to exercise the powers and authority of the board of directors while the board of directors is not in session. Upon completion of this offering, the members of our executive committee are expected to be                     ,                     and                      .

Code of Business Conduct and Ethics

In connection with this offering, our board of directors intends to adopt and maintain an Code of Business Conduct and Ethics that applies to members of our board of directors and all of our employees, including our senior executive and financial officers, which include our principal executive officer, principal financial officer, principal accounting officer, and persons performing similar functions. A copy of the Code of Business Conduct and Ethics will be available on our website upon completion of this offering. We will promptly disclose any future amendments to this code on our website as well as any waivers from this code for executive officers and directors. Copies of this code will also be available in print from our corporate secretary upon request.

 

131


Table of Contents

EXECUTIVE COMPENSATION

Compensation Discussion and Analysis

Introduction

In this Compensation Discussion and Analysis (our “CD&A”), we provide an overview of the material elements of our executive compensation program, including a discussion of our compensation philosophy. We review the material elements of compensation earned by or paid to our named executive officers in fiscal year 2013 and the decisions made by the compensation committee. FGL currently does not directly sponsor any employee benefit plans or compensation arrangements. All benefit plans and compensation arrangements, including cash-based and share-based incentive plans and dividend plans, described in this CD&A are sponsored by FGLH. Historical actions taken by the compensation committee described in this CD&A were taken by the compensation committee of FGLH, and, following the completion of the offering, actions taken by the compensation committee will be taken by the compensation committee of FGL.

For purposes of our CD&A, the following individuals are our “named executive officers” or “NEO”s:

 

Current Officers

  

Position

Leland C. Launer, Jr.

   President and Chief Executive Officer

Rajesh Krishnan

   Executive Vice President and Chief Investment Officer

John A. Phelps, II

   Senior Vice President and Chief Distribution Officer

John P. O’Shaughnessy

   Senior Vice President and Chief Actuary/Chief Risk Officer

Wendy J.B. Young

   Vice President and Chief Financial Officer

Former Officers of FGLH

  

Position

Barry G. Ward

   Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer, FGLH

Former Officers of Harbinger F&G LLC

  

Position

Philip A. Falcone

   Chief Executive Officer

Thomas A. Williams

   Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer

With respect to our former officers: Mr. Ward served as Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer of FGLH until July 16, 2013; following his departure, we named Wendy J.B. Young as our Chief Financial Officer. Mr. Falcone served as the Chief Executive Officer of Harbinger F&G, LLC (the predecessor entity to FGL) until August 27, 2013; Mr. Williams served as the Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer of Harbinger F&G, LLC until August 27, 2013.

In connection with the FGLH Acquisition, HGI created Harbinger F&G, LLC (the predecessor entity to FGL) for the sole purpose of acquiring FGL. As such, Messrs. Falcone and Williams were appointed as officers of Harbinger F&G, LLC, but have not been considered members of our management team. For a description of our management team, see the discussion entitled “Management”. Messrs. Falcone and Williams are HGI’s Chairman and Chief Executive Officer and Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer, respectively. Messrs. Falcone and Williams have not received any compensation from Harbinger F&G, LLC or FGL. Messrs. Falcone and Williams are not eligible to participate in any compensatory plans or programs sponsored by FGL or FGLH.

Throughout this CD&A, we refer to the eight executives above as our NEOs. Any reference to the “Chief Executive Officer” in this CD&A refers to our President and Chief Executive Officer, Leland C. Launer, Jr.

 

132


Table of Contents

Summary of our Executive Compensation Program

During Fiscal Year 2013, the compensation programs for our NEOs consisted mainly of the following elements:

 

   

Base salary;

 

   

Short-term incentive compensation, called the Employee Incentive Compensation Plan (“EICP”);

 

   

Long-term incentive compensation; and

 

   

Certain other benefits and perquisites.

Set forth below is a discussion of each element of compensation, the rationale for each element, and how that element fits into our overall compensation philosophy. In addition, in Fiscal Year 2013, we made payments to certain executive officers for recognition of extraordinary efforts in Fiscal Years 2012 and 2013 to successfully drive business initiatives. These payments are described in greater detail below.

All of these elements are considered individually critical to our executive compensation packages. During Fiscal Year 2013, base salary made up the largest component of total executive compensation. Our long-term incentive compensation plan, which was adopted in November 2011, increased the total compensation package of our executive officers by including incentives through stock option and restricted share awards in FGLH that vest over time and grow in value as our value grows. Allocating a greater portion of executive compensation to long-term compensation directly correlated to our long-term success incentivizes and aligns our management team to achieve our goals.

While most of the data and information provided in this CD&A refers to Fiscal Year 2013, some data is more effectively illustrated through calendar year metrics and statistics. In such instances, the calendar year has been noted.

Determining and Evaluating Executive Compensation

Executive Compensation Philosophy and Objectives . Our compensation policies and programs are designed to accomplish the following objectives:

 

   

Attract and retain highly qualified executive officers;

 

   

Ensure alignment of our executives with our tactical and long-term strategic goals by rewarding and incentivizing achievement of those goals;

 

   

Build an ownership culture through the grant of equity-based compensation; and

 

   

Align the interests of our executive officers with those of our stockholders.

These objectives have guided and continue to guide the decisions made by management and the compensation committee with respect to the compensation of our NEOs.

Our Compensation Committee . Our compensation committee is responsible for reviewing and approving the compensation and benefits strategy for our employees, including our NEOs, authorizing and ratifying equity grants and other incentive arrangements, and authorizing employment and related agreements. The compensation committee has the full authority of the board of directors to make compensation related decisions related to our NEOs. Any matters not resolved by the compensation committee are referred to the board of directors for final decision.

Role of Executive Officers . Although our compensation committee has the authority to make final decisions with respect to executive compensation, our SVP of Human Resources in partnership with the Chief Executive Officer, Mr. Leland C. Launer, Jr., drives the design and implementation of all executive compensation programs. The goal is to ensure that the design of our compensation programs supports our overall strategy. Except for his own compensation, the Chief Executive Officer has final management-level review of any compensation program or

 

133


Table of Contents

individual element of compensation for our named executive officers before it is reviewed by the compensation committee. The Chief Executive Officer and our other NEOs do not participate in discussions regarding their own compensation.

Role of Compensation Consultants . Periodically, we have engaged consultants in reviewing and evaluating our executive compensation programs. In the past, we have engaged PwC to conduct a review of our executive compensation. In addition, our Human Resources team, in making recommendations as to executive compensation, relies on compensation data from a number of sources including LOMA, Mercer, Towers Watson and ERI. In the past, we have also participated in, and received compensation data from, a compensation study conducted by McLagan Ins. Mans & Admin Survey. Both the PwC study and the McLagan Survey used peer comparators including Allianz, AVIVA, Genworth Financial, Great West Life & Annuity, Securian Financial Group, New York Life, Met Life, and Sun Life Financial as well as several others. In Fiscal Year 2013 we engaged Mercer to conduct a review of our executive compensation plans. Once completed, this data will be utilized in proposing and making any changes to our NEOs’ compensation.

Market Comparisons . Management has utilized market and comparative data as one of many factors in making recommendations as to the compensation of our NEOs and when reviewing or establishing our executive compensation programs. At least annually, a market review of the competitiveness of total compensation of our executives and a review of our equity program is performed. The information is used to assist us in understanding the competitive landscape of the executive compensation market and how executives are compensated at other companies that are similar in size or industry, and companies with whom we compete for talent. We used peer group data provided by McLagan and PwC. The PwC report contained composite survey data from ERI, LOMA, Towers Watson and Mercer. Management used this peer group data to make recommendations with respect to executive compensation in Fiscal Year 2013. The peer group used at that time includes the companies listed in the tables below.

Loma Survey

 

American Family Insurance

  National Life Group

Aviva

  National Western Life Insurance Co.

Conseco, Inc.

  Ohio National Financial Services

COUNTRY Financial

  OneAmerica Financial Partners, Inc.

CUNA Mutual Group

  Protective Life Corporation

Erie Insurance Group

  Reinsurance Group of America

Farmers Insurance Group

  Securian Financial Group

FBL Financial Group, Inc.

  Southern Farm Bureau Life Insurance Co.

Fidelity Investments

  StanCorp Financial Group

Great American Insurance

  Swiss Re America Holding Corporation

Great-West Life & Annuity Insurance Co.

  UNIFI Companies

Modern Woodmen of America

  Western & Southern Financial Group

Mutual of Omaha

  Woodmen of the World

 

134


Table of Contents

McLagan Survey—U.S. Insurance Mgmt & Admin

 

AIG

   Modern Woodmen of America

Allianz Life Insurance of North America

   National Life of Vermont

Ameriprise Financial, Inc.

   New York Life Insurance Company

AXA Equitable

   Northwestern Mutual Life Insurance Company

CUNA Mutual Group

   Prudential Financial

Fidelity Investments

   Raymond, James & Associates

Fidelity & Guaranty Life

   Charles Schwab & Co., Inc

Genworth Financial

   Securian Financial Group

Great-West Life Assurance Company

   Security Benefit Corporation

Guardian Life Insurance Company of America

   StanCorp Financial Group, Inc.

John Hancock Financial Services

   Sun Life Financial

Lincoln Financial Group

   TIAA-CREF

Metropolitan Life Insurance Company

   Transamerica Life Insurance Company

MassMutual Life Insurance Company

   Zurich North America

Elements of Our Executive Compensation Program

Base Salary

We provide a base salary to our NEOs to compensate them for their services rendered on a day-to-day basis during the year. Base salaries are set to attract and retain executives with qualities necessary to ensure our short-term and long-term financial success. We strive to set base salaries at a level that is competitive with our peer group for executives in similar positions with similar responsibilities at companies included in our peer market data. We generally target salaries to be in the median range of our peer group. The determination of any particular NEO’s base salary is based on market compensation rates (including external and internal equity), as described above under “Market Comparisons”, and individual factors including personal performance and contribution, experience in the role, and scope of responsibility and overall impact on the business. The base salaries of our NEOs are reviewed annually and adjusted when necessary to reflect market conditions as well as individual roles and performance.

2013 Base Salaries

Each of our NEOs received the base salary in Fiscal Year 2013 as set forth in the Summary Compensation Table under “Salary”. Mr. Launer’s base salary is as set forth in his employment agreement. See “—Narrative Disclosure to Summary Compensation Table and Grants of Plan-Based Awards Table—Employment Agreements with Named Executive Officers”.

In connection with our 2013 annual review of the NEOs’ base salaries, an increase in base salary was recommended and approved for Rajesh Krishnan for calendar year 2013 in conjunction with his promotion from Senior Vice President to Executive Vice President, effective October 9, 2012, and Wendy Young in conjunction with her promotion, for compensation purposes, from the position of Vice President to the position of Vice President, II, effective October 1, 2012. As reflected in the table below, no other increases were recommended or made.

 

Name

   Calendar Year      Base Salary      % Increase from
2012 Calendar Year
 

Leland C. Launer, Jr.

     2013         700,000         —     

Rajesh Krishnan

     2013         350,000         7.7

John A. Phelps, II

     2013         325,000         —     

John P. O’Shaughnessy

     2013         325,000         —     

Wendy J.B. Young

     2013         220,000         8.9

Barry G. Ward

     2013         400,000         —     

 

135


Table of Contents

Short-Term Incentives

We pay annual cash incentives to our NEOs pursuant to our EICP in March of each year for performance in the prior calendar year. The EICP is designed to focus our executive officers on producing superior results against key financial and other operational metrics relative to the Company as a whole. A significant portion of each NEO’s total compensation is tied to the EICP in order to ensure our “pay for performance” culture. The EICP rewards executive officers for achievement of short-term financial and operational objectives, which also support our long-term financial goals. Each year the Chief Executive Officer and the FGL executive team in conjunction with HGI develop such objectives, with the financial components generally receiving greater weight than the operational components. The compensation committee reviews and approves these objectives. The EICP goals are then communicated to all employees and individual objectives are developed to ensure alignment with these goals. The EICP payout also includes an individual performance component, which is determined by the impact and performance against our goals and how each NEO contributed to the achievement of the goals for that calendar year. Performance against the EICP objectives are reviewed and approved by the compensation committee in determining the results used for establishing the EICP bonus pool in a given calendar year.

2012 Calendar Year EICP

The 2012 calendar year EICP included two performance components: one based on achievement of certain specified financial and operational objectives, which we refer to as the “corporate performance component”, and the other based upon achievement of certain measurable individual objectives, which we refer to as the “individual performance component”. Each of the corporate performance component and the individual performance component is weighted at 50% of the NEO’s bonus calculation. As a result of the performance against our goals in calendar year 2012, the bonus pool for determining individual executive incentive awards paid in March 2013 under our EICP resulted in an overall award of 122.5% of target.

The target EICP bonus percentage for each of our NEOs is reflected in the table below and expressed as a percentage of base salary earnings:

 

Position Title

   2012 Calendar Year
Target Bonus

(% of Base
Salary Earnings)
 

Chief Executive Officer

     100

Executive Vice President

     50

Senior Vice President

     40

Vice President, II

     35

The corporate performance component, which is comprised of the financial and operational objectives, for the 2012 calendar year included the following metrics:

 

2012 Objectives

   Weighting  

Achieve the Financial Plan

     50

Achieve the Sales and Conservation Plan

     15

Implement Corporate Strategic Initiatives

     15

Implement Investment Strategy

     10

Engage and Develop Talent

     10

Weighting Total

     100

 

Minimum Target Payout

  

Target Payout

  

Maximum Target Payout

50%

   100%    150%

 

136


Table of Contents

For the 2012 calendar year EICP, the compensation committee set the percentage of base salary to be paid for performance at the following target levels depicted below, which reflects the promotions of Mr. Krishnan and Ms. Young described on page 135 under the heading “2013 Base Salaries”. Prior to the effective date of their promotions, the 2012 target bonus percentage of base salary earnings for Mr. Krisnan and Ms. Young were 40% and 30%, respectively. The table also reflects the actual percentage earned for each of our NEOs in the 2012 calendar year, which was paid out in March 2013.

 

Name

   2012 Target  Bonus
(% of Base Salary Earnings)
    Actual Bonus  Earned
(% of Base Salary Earnings)
 

Leland C. Launer, Jr.

     100     122.5

Rajesh Krishnan

     50     61

John A. Phelps, II

     40     46

John P. O’Shaughnessy

     40     43

Wendy J.B. Young

     35     39

Barry G. Ward

     50     60

2013 Calendar Year EICP

The corporate performance component, which is comprised of the financial and operational objectives, for the 2013 calendar year includes the following metrics:

 

2013 Objectives

   Weighting  

Achieve the Financial Plan

     60

Achieve the Sales/Product Development Plan

     15

Implement Corporate Strategy

     10

Implement Investment Strategy

     10

Implement People Strategy

     5

Weighting Total

     100

 

Minimum Target Payout

  

Target Payout

  

Maximum Target Payout

50%

   100%    150%

For the 2013 calendar year EICP, the target percentages of base salary to be paid for performance are as depicted in the table below.

 

Name

   2013 Target  Bonus
(% of Base Salary Earnings)
 

Leland C. Launer, Jr.

     100

Rajesh Krishnan

     50

John A. Phelps, II

     40

John P. O’Shaughnessy

     40

Wendy J.B. Young

     35

Incentive payments under the 2013 calendar year EICP are scheduled to be paid out in March of 2014 based on 2013 calendar year results. Our current assessment is that we are on target to meet all of the corporate performance goals for the 2013 calendar year.

Long-Term Incentives

Stock Options and Restricted Stock

We believe that equity-based awards link compensation levels with performance results and ensure sustained alignment with shareholders’ interests. Additionally, we believe equity awards provide an important retention tool for our NEOs, as they are subject to multi-year vesting. In furtherance of these objectives, we adopted the Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc. Stock Incentive Plan (the “Stock Incentive Plan”) on November 2, 2011. The Stock Incentive Plan provides for grants of stock options to purchase Class A shares of common stock of FGLH.

 

137


Table of Contents

The target long-term incentive awards are based on relative percentage of base salary as well as the number of FGLH options or shares offered to be granted. This target is based on the executive’s position and level in the organization. For our NEOs the targets are as follows:

 

Position Title

   LTI Award
(% of Base  Salary)
 

Chief Executive Officer

     100

Executive Vice President

     50

Senior Vice President

     40

Vice President, II

     25

In November 2011, we granted stock options to purchase Class A shares of common stock of FGLH to our NEOs. Each NEO received a grant of FGLH options, which was at least equal to each individual’s grant target listed in the chart above. In addition, it was recommended by the Chief Executive Officer and our SVP Human Resources to provide a “founder’s grant” to each key executive, which included our NEOs. In March 2012, the compensation committee decided that the exercise of the first tranche of vested FGLH options granted to the NEOs in November 2011 would be settled in cash. The FGLH options granted in November 2011 that remain outstanding are reflected in the “Outstanding Equity Awards of Fiscal Year End 2013” Table.

In December 2012, our compensation committee amended and restated the Stock Incentive Plan of FGLH (the “Amended and Restated Stock Incentive Plan”) to align our long-term incentive awards with those of our peer group and reflect FGLH’s dual-class share structure. Under the Amended and Restated Stock Incentive Plan, the compensation committee may grant FGLH stock options as well as FGLH restricted stock awards to executives and other key employees. Holders of equity awards granted on or after December 31, 2012 under the Amended and Restated Stock Incentive Plan will receive non-voting Class B shares of common stock of FGLH upon vesting of such awards. The number of shares and options of FGLH stock to be granted to the NEOs was determined by utilizing the target percentage for the long-term incentive award reflected in the table above. In addition, the Compensation Committee approved the grant to be split between options at fifty percent (50%) and restricted shares at fifty percent (50%) for the Chief Executive Officer and fifteen percent (15%) options and eighty-five percent (85%) restricted shares for all other participants. Awarding the NEOs a significant portion of their grants in restricted shares of FGLH stock provided for ownership in the business once the shares vested which do not need to be exercised to earn value.

On December 31, 2012, each of our NEOs was granted FGLH stock options and restricted stock awards under the Amended and Restated Stock Incentive Plan. The table below reflects the number of FGLH options granted at a per share exercise price equal to $49.45 and the number of FGLH restricted shares that were granted to the NEOs:

 

Name

   Options Granted
(Dec 31, 2012)
     Restricted Stock Granted
(Dec 31, 2012)
 

Leland C. Launer, Jr.

     90,909         7,078   

Rajesh Krishnan

     8,084         3,567   

John A. Phelps, II

     5,455         2,407   

John P. O’Shaughnessy

     6,331         2,794   

Wendy J.B. Young

     3,117         1,375   

Barry G. Ward

     9,740         4,297   

All FGLH equity awards granted under the Stock Incentive Plan and the Amended and Restated Stock Incentive Plan, with the exception of Mr. Launer’s equity, will vest ratably over three years beginning on the first anniversary of the grant date, subject to continued employment of the NEO holding such awards. For Mr. Launer, on March 21, 2013, we amended his employee stock option agreements and his restricted stock agreement in respect of his outstanding FGLH equity. The amendments provide that the third tranche of FGLH options granted on November 2, 2011 (equal to one-third of such options), the second tranche of FGLH options granted on December 31, 2012 (equal to one-third of such options), and the second tranche of FGLH restricted stock granted

 

138


Table of Contents

on December 31, 2012 (equal to one-third of such restricted stock award), which were originally scheduled to vest, respectively, on November 2, 2014, December 31, 2014 and December 31, 2014, will vest on the earlier of either (x) April 30, 2014, if Mr. Launer remains employed through April 30, 2014 or (y) Mr. Launer’s last day of employment, if his employment is terminated for a reason other than death, disability or “cause”, or if Mr. Launer resigns for “good reason” (each, as defined in his employment agreement).

We treated any outstanding options held by Barry G. Ward, the former Chief Financial Officer of FGLH, upon his termination according to the rules outlined in the plans for voluntary termination. Specifically, the one-third of his 2011 FGLH option grant which was vested at the time of his termination was paid out to him in an amount equal to the aggregate fair market value over the aggregate exercise price. His remaining 2011 option and 2012 option and restricted share grants were forfeited according to the plan rules.

See the narrative description following the table entitled “Potential Payments upon Termination or Change-in-Control at Fiscal Year End 2013” for information on the treatment of the equity awards upon certain terminations or a change in control event.

Dividend Equivalents

2011 Dividend Equivalent Plan . On November 2, 2011, our compensation committee adopted the Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc. Dividend Equivalent Plan (“2011 DEP”), which provides holders of FGLH stock options with certain dividend equivalent rights. The 2011 DEP provides that if FGLH declares a dividend on its common stock, each holder of an FLGH option would receive a dividend equivalent award in the amount equal to the ordinary cash dividends declared and paid on FGLH stock in each calendar year, including any indebtedness repayment, subject to the Company’s achievement of certain performance goals. This calculation would start in the year in which the dividend equivalent award is granted and end in the year immediately prior to the year in which the dividend equivalent award vests. For the purposes of the 2011 DEP (and the 2012 DEP described below), the dividend equivalent awards include any indebtedness repayment, which are payments made to HGI for repayment of indebtedness by FGLH. The per share value is determined by dividing the loan repayment amount by the number of outstanding shares of FGLH common stock.

The number of dividend equivalents granted to each of our NEOs in a given year is equal to the number of options or restricted shares in respect of FGLH stock granted in each year.

2012 Dividend Equivalent Plan . In connection with the adoption of the Amended and Restated Stock Incentive Plan to provide for FGLH restricted stock grants in addition to FGLH option grants, the compensation committee approved and adopted the Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc. 2012 Dividend Equivalent Plan (“2012 DEP”). The 2012 DEP provides for dividend equivalents for holders of options and restricted stock in FGLH; for the holders of restricted stock in FGLH, the dividend equivalent awards were in respect of indebtedness payments only (as described above under “2011 Dividend Equivalent Plan”).

The number of dividend equivalents granted to each of our NEOs in a given year is equal to the number of options or restricted shares in respect of FGLH stock granted in each year. The total number of dividend equivalents granted December 31, 2012 to each of our NEOs is represented in the table below:

 

Name

   2012 Dividend Equivalents  

Leland C. Launer, Jr.

     97,987   

Rajesh Krishnan

     11,651   

John A. Phelps, II

     7,862   

John P. O’Shaughnessy

     9,125   

Wendy J.B. Young

     4,492   

Barry G. Ward

     14,037   

 

139


Table of Contents

All of the dividend equivalent awards under the 2011 DEP and 2012 DEP will vest following the end of a three- to four-year performance cycle, subject to FGLH attaining the aggregate dividend schedule set forth in each plan.

According to the rules in the 2011 DEP and 2012 DEP covering the treatment of dividend equivalent awards upon voluntary termination, Barry G. Ward, the former Chief Financial Officer of FGLH, forfeited all of his outstanding dividend equivalent awards upon his termination.

See the narrative description following the table entitled “Potential Payments upon Termination or Change-in-Control at Fiscal Year End 2013” for information on the treatment of the dividend equivalent awards upon certain terminations or a change in control event.

Benefits and Perquisites

Our NEOs are eligible to participate in our tax-qualified 401(k) defined contribution plan and our health and welfare plans on the same basis as our other salaried employees. Our NEOs also participate in a limited number of perquisite programs.

401(k) Plan . Under the 401(k) Plan, for all participating employees, the Company will match 100% of a participant’s contributions up to five percent of compensation, subject to the limits specified in the Internal Revenue Code. For years prior to calendar year 2013, the employer match vests ratably over three years of employment. Effective January 1, 2013, the employer match vests immediately. The 401(k) plan also allows for annual discretionary profit sharing contributions, which historically has been 2% of earnings, subject to Internal Revenue Code limits. Any profit sharing contributions are immediately vested.

Nonqualified Deferred Compensation Arrangements . We permit our NEOs to defer on an elective basis a specified portion of their base salaries and performance-based bonus compensation (if any). See the narrative description following the table entitled “Nonqualified Defined Contribution and Other Nonqualified Deferred Compensation Plans in Fiscal Year 2013” for more information surrounding the terms of the nonqualified deferred compensation plan.

Health and Welfare Benefits . We also offer a package of insurance benefits to all salaried employees, including our NEOs, including health, vision and dental insurance, basic life insurance, accidental death and dismemberment insurance and short- and long-term disability insurance.

Limited Executive Perquisites . All of our NEOs are eligible to participate in the Executive Life Insurance Plan. Under this plan, the beneficiary of a participant who dies while employed by us is entitled to a lump sum payment equal to three times their annual base salary at the time of hire. Our NEOs are also offered executive physicals at our cost once biannually. In addition, Mr. Launer was eligible for a housing reimbursement up to $2,500 per month through March 2013 under his prior employment agreement. See “—Narrative Disclosure to Summary Compensation Table and Grants of Plan-Based Awards Table—Employment Agreements with Named Executive Officers”. The value of these executive perquisites is reflected in the “All Other Compensation” column of the Summary Compensation Table below.

We maintain no defined benefit pension plans or retiree medical plans.

Employment Agreements

Each of Messrs. Launer, Krishnan, O’Shaughnessy is, and prior to his termination Barry G. Ward was, party to an employment agreement which includes the specific terms set forth in greater detail below in “—Narrative to Summary Compensation Table and Grants of Plan-Based Awards Table—Employment Agreements with Named Executive Officers”. We believe that having employment agreements with our NEOs is beneficial to us because it provides retentive value, subjects the executives to key restrictive covenants, and generally provides us with a competitive advantage in the recruiting process over a company that does not offer employment agreements.

 

140


Table of Contents

One-Time Special Bonus/Recognition Award

In Fiscal Year 2013, our compensation committee approved a one-time bonus to the NEOs (other than our Chief Executive Officer) and other executive team members to recognize extraordinary efforts with regard to the numerous projects undertaken, including a number of merger and acquisition projects which took place during calendar year 2012. We granted this bonus to demonstrate the value management placed on the efforts of a cohesive and dedicated team. While it was intended to be a one-time special recognition, management believes that using its discretion to recognize the efforts of the key executive team is integral to keeping the NEOs motivated to provide returns to our shareholders. The amount of each individual bonus was determined by management and approved by the compensation committee based on the individual contributions to the various projects. The bonus was paid in the form of 50% cash on January 18, 2013 and 50% FGLH equity awards under our Amended and Restated Stock Incentive Plan, which were granted on December 31, 2012. The portion paid in FGLH equity awards was included in the total 2012 awards reflected in the table on page 138 describing the grant of FGLH equity awards on December 31, 2012 and in the “Grants of Plan-Based Awards for Fiscal Year 2013” table; the equity portion was awarded 85% in FGLH restricted stock and 15% in FGLH options. Each of the NEOs received the following award. The table below reflects all of the awards granted under the Special Bonus/Recognition Award for Fiscal Year 2013:

 

     Amount Paid under Award  

Name

   Total
Award
     Cash
Portion
     FGLH
Equity
Portion
 

Rajesh Krishnan

   $ 65,000       $ 32,500       $ 32,500   

John A. Phelps, II

   $ 20,000       $ 10,000       $ 10,000   

John P. O’Shaughnessy

   $ 65,000       $ 32,500       $ 32,500   

Wendy JB Young

   $ 50,000       $ 25,000       $ 25,000   

Barry G. Ward

   $ 100,000       $ 50,000       $ 50,000   

Impact of Tax Considerations

With respect to taxes, Section 162(m) of the Code imposes a $1 million limit on the deduction that a company may claim in any tax year with respect to compensation paid to each of its Chief Executive Officer and three other NEO’s (other than the Chief Financial Officer), unless certain conditions are satisfied. Certain types of performance-based compensation are generally exempted from the $1 million limit. Performance-based compensation can include income from stock options, performance-based restricted stock, and certain formula-driven compensation that meets the requirements of Section 162(m). One of the factors that we may consider in structuring the compensation for our named executive officers is the deductibility of such compensation under Section 162(m), to the extent applicable. However, this is not the driving or most influential factor. Our compensation committee may approve non-deductible compensation arrangements after taking into account several factors, including our ability to utilize deductions based on projected taxable income, and specifically reserves the right to do so.

 

141


Table of Contents

Summary Compensation Table for Fiscal Year 2013

 

Name and Principal Position

  Fiscal
Year
    Salary
($)
    Bonus
($)(1)
    Stock
Awards
($)(2)(3)
    Option
Awards
($)(4)(5)
    Non-Stock
Incentive Plan
Compensation
($)(6)
    Nonqualified
Deferred
Compensation
Earnings ($)
    All Other
Compensation
($)(7)(8)(9)
    Total ($)  

Leland C. Launer, Jr.

President and Chief Executive Officer

   

 

2013

2012

  

  

   

 

700,000

700,000

  

  

   

 

—  

—  

  

  

   

 

350,007

—  

  

  

   

 

350,000

172,903

  

  

   

 

739,375

794,164

  

  

   

 

—  

—  

  

  

   

 

1,288,641

591,213

  

  

   

 

3,428,023

2,258,280

  

  

Rajesh Krishnan

Executive Vice President and Chief Investment Officer

   

 

2013

2012

  

  

   

 

350,000

322,165

  

  

   

 

32,500

390,900

  

  

   

 

176,388

—  

  

  

   

 

31,123

47,173

  

  

   

 

181,250

201,029

  

  

   

 

—  

—  

  

  

   

 

182,990

176,662

  

  

   

 

954,251

1,137,929

  

  

John A. Phelps, II

Senior Vice President and Chief Distribution Officer

   

 

2013

2012

  

  

   

 

325,000

322,165

  

  

   

 

10,000

390,900

  

  

   

 

119,026

—  

  

  

   

 

21,002

47,173

  

  

   

 

135,000

163,529

  

  

   

 

—  

—  

  

  

   

 

139,652

132,518

  

  

   

 

749,680

1,056,285

  

  

John P. O’Shaughnessy

Senior Vice President and Chief Actuary/Chief Risk Officer

   

 

2013

2012

  

  

   

 

325,000

314,423

  

  

   

 

32,500

351,670

  

  

   

 

138,163

—  

  

  

   

 

24,374

44,461

  

  

   

 

132,000

147,479

  

  

   

 

—  

—  

  

  

   

 

137,620

154,293

  

  

   

 

789,657

1,012,326

  

  

Wendy J.B. Young

Vice President and Chief Financial Officer(10)

    2013        220,000        25,000        67,994        12,000        77,682        —          71,898        474,574   

Barry G. Ward

Former Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer(11)

   

 

2013

2012

  

  

   

 

318,462

395,769

  

  

   

 

50,000

473,250

  

  

   

 

212,487

—  

  

  

   

 

37,499

72,249

  

  

   

 

60,000

243,400

  

  

   

 

—  

—  

  

  

   

 

246,260

255,652

  

  

   

 

924,708

1,440,320

  

  

Former Officers of Harbinger F&G, LLC

                 

Philip A. Falcone

Former Chief Executive

Officer (12)(14)

   

 

2013

2012

  

  

   

 

—  

—  

  

  

   

 

—  

—  

  

  

   

 

—  

—  

  

  

   

 

—  

—  

  

  

   

 

—  

—  

  

  

   

 

—  

—  

  

  

   

 

—  

—  

  

  

   

 

—  

—  

  

  

Thomas A. Williams

Former Executive Vice President/Chief Financial

Officer (13)(14)

   

 

2013

2012

  

  

   

 

—  

—  

  

  

   

 

—  

—  

  

  

   

 

—  

—  

  

  

   

 

—  

—  

  

  

   

 

—  

—  

  

  

   

 

—  

—  

  

  

   

 

—  

—  

  

  

   

 

—  

—  

  

  

 

(1) The amounts reported for Fiscal Year 2013 in this column represent the cash portion of the one-time special bonus paid on January 18, 2013. See “—One-Time Special Bonus/Recognition Award” above.

 

(2) The amounts reported in this column are valued based on the aggregate grant date fair value computed in accordance with ASC Topic 718. See Note 12 to our audited consolidated financial statements and Note 9 to our unaudited condensed consolidated financial statements.

 

(3) For Messrs. Krishnan, Phelps, O’Shaughnessy and Ward and Ms. Young, the amounts reported in this column include 85% of the equity portion of the one-time special bonus awarded on December 31, 2012. See “—One-Time Special Bonus/Recognition Award” above.

 

(4) The amounts reported in this column are valued based on the aggregate grant date fair value computed in accordance with ASC Topic 718. See Note 12 to our audited consolidated financial statements and Note 9 to our unaudited condensed consolidated financial statements.

 

(5) For Messrs. Krishnan, Phelps, O’Shaughnessy and Ward and Ms. Young, the amounts reported in this column include 15% of the equity portion of the one-time special bonus awarded on December 31, 2012. See “—One-Time Special Bonus/Recognition Award” above.

 

142


Table of Contents
(6) The amounts reported for Fiscal Year 2013 in this column reflect (a) the actual payout of 25% of the 2012 calendar year EICP bonus award (i.e., the portion of the bonus in respect of the period from October 1, 2012 to December 31, 2012) on March 8, 2013 and (b) 75% of the 2013 calendar year EICP bonus award (i.e., the portion of the bonus earned in respect of the period from January 1, 2013 to September 30, 2013). Mr. Ward did not earn and was not paid any bonus in respect of the 2013 calendar year EICP bonus award.

 

(7) For Mr. Launer, “All Other Compensation” includes (a) long-term disability benefits, (b) life insurance benefits, (c) a 401(k) match, (d) a temporary housing allowance of $33,353 pursuant to the terms of Mr. Launer’s prior employment agreement, (e) fringe earnings for spousal travel to company events and (f) a grant of dividend equivalents pursuant to the 2012 DEP. The DEP amount for Mr. Launer totaled $1,223,858.

 

(8) For Messrs. Krishnan, Phelps and O’Shaughnessy and Ward, “All Other Compensation” includes (a) long-term disability benefits, (b) life insurance benefits, (c) a 401(k) match, (d) a supplemental retirement employer contribution to a non-qualified deferred compensation plan account, (e) fringe earnings for spousal travel to company events and (f) a grant of dividend equivalents pursuant to the 2012 DEP. These DEP amounts totaled $145,521 for Mr. Krishnan; $113,971 for Mr. O’Shaughnessy; $98,196 for Mr. Phelps and $175,322 for Mr. Ward.

 

(9) For Ms. Young, “All Other Compensation” includes (a) long-term disability benefits, (b) life insurance benefits, (c) a 401(k) match, (d) a supplemental retirement employer contribution to a non-qualified deferred compensation plan account and (e) a grant of dividend equivalents pursuant to the 2012 DEP. These DEP amounts totaled $56,105 for Ms. Young.

 

(10) Ms. Young was not an NEO in fiscal year 2012.

 

(11) Mr. Ward’s employment with FGLH terminated effective as of July 16, 2013.

 

(12) Mr. Falcone is the Chairman of the Board and Chief Executive Officer of HGI. Mr. Falcone received no compensation from FGL or FGLH during Fiscal Year 2013. Mr. Falcone no longer serves an officer of the Company as of August 27, 2013.

 

(13) Mr. Williams is the Chief Financial Officer and Executive Vice President of HGI. Mr. Williams received no compensation from FGL or FGLH during Fiscal Year 2013. Mr. Williams no longer serves as an officer of the Company as of August 27, 2013.

 

(14) The NEO is not listed in any of the tables that follow because the NEO is not eligible to participate, and has not participated, in any compensatory plans or programs sponsored by FGL or FGLH and has not received any compensation in respect of his services to FGL.

 

143


Table of Contents

Grants of Plan-Based Awards for Fiscal Year 2013

The following table provides information concerning awards granted to the NEOs in the last fiscal year under any plan. The options reflected in the table are stock options to purchase Class B shares of common stock of FGLH, and the restricted stock reflected in the table are restricted shares of Class B common stock of FGLH.

 

Name

  Grant Date    

 

Estimated Future Payouts under Non-
Equity Incentive Plan Awards

    All Other
Stock
Awards:
Number of
Shares of
Stocks or
Units (#)
    All other
Option
Awards:
Number of
Securities
Underlying
Options(#)
    Exercise or
Base Price of
Option
Awards

($/Sh)
    Grant Date
Fair Value of
Stock Option
Awards $
 
    Threshold $     Target $     Maximum $          

Leland C. Launer, Jr.

    12/31/2012 (1)      —          —          —          —          90,909      $ 49.45      $ 3.85   
    12/31/2012 (2)      —          —          —          7,078        —          —          —     
    12/31/2012 (3)      —        $ 1,223,858        —          —          —          —          —     
    3/8/2013 (4)    $ 87,500      $ 175,000      $ 262,500        —          —          —          —     
    1/1/2013 (5)    $ 262,500      $ 525,000      $ 787,500        —          —          —          —     

Rajesh Krishnan

    12/31/2012 (6)      —          —          —          —          8,084      $ 49.45      $ 3.85   
    12/31/2012 (7)      —          —          —          3,567        —          —          —     
    12/31/2012 (3)      —        $ 145,521        —          —          —          —          —     
    3/8/2013 (4)    $ 17,484      $ 34,967      $ 52,451        —          —          —          —     
    1/1/2013 (5)    $ 65,625      $ 131,250      $ 196,875        —          —          —          —     

John A. Phelps, II

    12/31/2012 (6)      —          —          —          —          5,455      $ 49.45      $ 3.85   
    12/31/2012 (7)      —          —          —          2,407        —          —          —     
    12/31/2012 (3)      —        $ 98,196        —          —          —          —          —     
    3/8/2013 (4)    $ 16,186      $ 32,371      $ 48,557        —          —          —          —     
    1/1/2013 (5)    $ 48,750      $ 97,500      $ 146,250        —          —          —          —     

John P. O’Shaughnessy

    12/31/2012 (6)      —          —          —          —          6,331      $ 49.45      $ 3.85   
    12/31/2012 (7)      —          —          —          2,794        —          —          —     
    12/31/2012 (3)      —        $ 113,971        —          —          —          —          —     
    3/8/2013 (4)    $ 16,010      $ 32,019      $ 48,029        —          —          —          —     
    1/1/2013 (5)    $ 48,750      $ 97,500      $ 146,250        —          —          —          —     

Wendy J.B. Young

    12/31/2012 (6)      —          —          —          —          3,117      $ 49.45      $ 3.85   
    12/31/2012 (7)      —          —          —          1,375        —          —          —     
    12/31/2012 (3)      —        $ 56,105        —          —          —          —          —     
    3/8/2013 (4)    $ 8,041      $ 16,083      $ 24,124        —          —          —          —     
    1/1/2013 (5)    $ 28,875      $ 57,750      $ 86,625        —          —          —          —     

Barry G. Ward

    12/31/2012 (6)      —          —          —          —          9,740      $ 49.45      $ 3.85   
    12/31/2012 (7)      —          —          —          4,297        —          —          —     
    12/31/2012 (3)      —        $ 175,322        —          —          —          —          —     
    3/8/2013 (4)    $ 24,880      $ 49,760      $ 74,640        —          —          —          —     

 

(1) One-third of the options to purchase shares of Class B common stock of FGLH will vest on December 31, 2013, subject to Mr. Launer’s employment or earlier on a termination without “cause”, for “good reason” or in the event of a change in control. One-third will vest on the earlier of (x) April 30, 2014, if Mr. Launer remains employed through April 30, 2014 or (y) Mr. Launer’s last day of employment, if his employment is terminated for a reason other than death, disability or “cause”, or if Mr. Launer resigns for “good reason” (each, as defined in his employment agreement). The remaining one-third will vest on December 31, 2015, subject to Mr. Launer’s employment or earlier on a termination without “cause”, for “good reason” or in the event of a change in control.

 

(2) One-third of the restricted shares of Class B common stock of FGLH will vest on December 31, 2013, subject to Mr. Launer’s employment or earlier on a termination without “cause”, for “good reason” or in the event of a change in control. One-third will vest on the earlier of (x) April 30, 2014, if Mr. Launer remains employed through April 30, 2014 or (y) Mr. Launer’s last day of employment, if his employment is terminated for a reason other than death, disability or “cause”, or if Mr. Launer resigns for “good reason” (each, as defined in his employment agreement). The remaining one-third will vest on December 31, 2015, subject to Mr. Launer’s employment or earlier on a termination without “cause”, for “good reason” or in the event of a change in control.

 

144


Table of Contents
(3) This amount represents the target value of the December 31, 2012 FGLH dividend equivalent grant. The grant of dividend equivalents vests after three or four years subject to continued employment of the NEO and upon the Company meeting specified aggregate dividend thresholds.

 

(4) Amount equal to 25% of 2012 calendar year EICP bonus award (i.e., the portion of the bonus in respect of the period from October 1, 2012 to December 31, 2012). Grant date represents actual payment date.

 

(5) Amount equal to 75% of possible 2013 calendar year EICP bonus award (i.e., the portion of the bonus in respect of the period from January 1, 2013 to September 30, 2013). Grant date represents the date the bonus entitlement was granted.

 

(6) The grant of options to purchase Class B shares of FGLH common stock vests ratably over three years beginning on the first anniversary of the grant date, subject to continued employment of the NEO holding such awards.

 

(7) The grant of restricted shares of Class B common stock of FGLH vests ratably over three years beginning on the first anniversary of the grant date, subject to continued employment of the NEO holding such awards.

Narrative Disclosure to Summary Compensation Table and Grants of Plan-Based Awards Table

Employment Agreements with Named Executive Officers

Mr. Launer’s Amended and Restated Employment Agreement

On March 21, 2013, FGL Services entered into an Amended and Restated Employment Agreement with Mr. Launer, which amended and restated his prior employment agreement (dated as of June 27, 2011 and subsequently amended on November 1, 2012). The employment agreement has an initial term commencing on May 1, 2013 and ending on April 30, 2014, provided that the agreement will automatically renew each year for an additional one-year period unless either party provides prior written notice of non-renewal. The employment agreement provides for an annual base salary of $700,000. During the initial term of the employment agreement, Mr. Launer is eligible for an annual target bonus opportunity in an amount equal to 100% of his base salary, although actual bonus payout may be more or less than target depending on company and individual performance during the performance period. Except upon certain qualified terminations (as described below), Mr. Launer must be actively employed by the employer on the date the bonus is scheduled to be paid in order to receive the annual bonus.

The amended and restated employment agreement also provides for future equity grants from FGLH. For each additional term in which Mr. Launer is employed by the employer as of the first day of each additional term (May 1 of each year starting in 2014), Mr. Launer will be granted by the following December 31 stock options, restricted stock or both with a grant date fair market value of $700,000. Each equity grant will vest and become exercisable in equal annual installments on the first three anniversaries of the grant date.

On any termination of employment, Mr. Launer will receive base salary through the termination date, accrued but unused vacation days as of the termination date and any earned and unpaid bonuses for any previously completed bonus years. The employment agreement also provides, in general terms, for the following severance benefits: (i) if Mr. Launer’s employment is terminated because of death or disability, a pro rata annual bonus for the year in which the termination occurs; (ii) if Mr. Launer’s employment is terminated by the employer without “cause” (and not as a result of death or disability) or if Mr. Launer terminates his employment for “good reason”, a pro rata annual bonus for the year in which the termination occurs and continued payment of base salary through the remainder of the term (including any additional term) or, if for longer, for six months following his termination, (iii) if Mr. Launer’s employment is terminated as the result of a non-renewal of the term by the employer, base salary for a period of three months from the date the employer notifies Mr. Launer of its election to not renew the term. As a condition to receiving any severance payments, Mr. Launer (or the executor or administrator of his estate in the event of his death) must execute and not revoke a general release agreement in a form provided by the employer within thirty days following his separation from service.

Mr. Launer will be deemed terminated for “cause” under the amended and restated employment agreement if the employer terminates his employment in writing after Mr. Launer (i) has been convicted, indicted for, or

 

145


Table of Contents

entered a plea of nolo contendere to, any felony or any other act involving fraud, theft, misappropriation, dishonesty or embezzlement, (ii) has committed intentional and willful acts of misconduct that materially impair the goodwill or business of the employer or (iii) has willfully refused to, or willfully failed to, perform in any material respect his duties under the agreement, provided that the employer had given written notice of his refusal or failure and Mr. Launer had not cured the refusal or failure within ten days.

“Good reason” under Mr. Launer’s employment agreement generally means one of the following events: (i) any material diminution in his title, responsibilities or authorities, (ii) the assignment of duties that are materially inconsistent with his duties as President and Chief Executive Officer of the employer, (iii) any change in the reporting structure so that he reports to any person or entity other than the board of directors of FGLH, (iv) a breach by the employer of any material terms of the employment agreement or (v) any failure of the employer to obtain the assumption of its obligations under the employment agreement by any successor to all or substantially all of its business or assets upon the consummation of a corporate transaction, in each case above, without either (x) Mr. Launer’s express prior written consent or (y) full cure by the employer within 30 days after Mr. Launer gives written notice requesting cure (provided that his written notice is given within 60 days after he first learns the event has occurred). To constitute “good reason”, Mr. Launer must terminate his employment no later than four months following the date he learns of the event constituting “good reason”.

The employment agreements also provide that in the event that any payments and benefits payable pursuant to the employment agreement or any other agreement in connection with a change in control would be subject to the golden parachute excise tax, (1) such payments and benefits will be reduced to the amount that would result in no portion of the payments or benefits being subject to the excise tax and (2) if any portion of the payments or benefits that would be reduced pursuant to clause (1) would not be so reduced if the stockholder approval requirements of Section 280G(b)(5) of the Code are satisfied, then the employer will use commercially reasonable efforts to cause such portion of the payments and benefits to be submitted for approval prior to giving rise to the payments.

Mr. Launer is subject to a non-competition covenant and a non-solicitation covenant during employment and six and twelve months thereafter for the non-competition covenant and the non-solicitation covenant, respectively.

The amended and restated employment agreement also provides that the employer may elect, in its sole discretion, on or before the thirtieth day following Mr. Launer’s termination of employment (i) by the employer without cause, (ii) by reason of non-renewal of the term by the employer or (iii) by reason of a resignation by Mr. Launer with good reason, to pay to Mr. Launer his continued base salary for an additional period not to exceed 270 days beyond the expiration of the expiring term, provided that Mr. Launer agrees (x) to comply with the requirements of the non-competition and non-solicitation covenants for the duration of the extended period and (y) to comply with each of his other obligations under the employment agreement, including the requirements related to confidentiality and non-disparagement and his obligation to release the company.

In connection with Mr. Launer’s amended and restated employment agreement, FGLH amended Mr. Launer’s employee stock option agreements and restricted stock agreement governing his outstanding equity awards. The amendments are described above under “—Long Term Incentives—Options and Restricted Stock”.

Mr. Launer’s Prior Employment Agreement

Mr. Launer was party to a prior employment agreement, dated as of June 27, 2011, and amended as of November 1, 2012, with FGL Services. The terms of the agreement, as amended, were substantially the same as his current employment agreement. See“—Mr. Launer’s Amended and Restated Employment Agreement” above. The principal differences between the agreements are that the prior employment agreement contained terms related to (i) the award of a one-time cash signing bonus related to the FGLH Acquisition (which was paid in fiscal 2011), (ii) the commitments to grant equity in FGLH with a grant date fair market value of $700,000 on or before December 31, 2011 (which Mr. Launer has since been granted and is reflected in the “Outstanding Equity Awards

 

146


Table of Contents

at Fiscal Year End 2012” table) and to grant additional equity in FGLH with a grant date fair market value of $700,000 on or before December 31, 2012 (which Mr. Launer was granted on December 31, 2012), (iii) the reimbursement of housing expenses incurred by Mr. Launer for housing in the Baltimore, Maryland area up to a maximum of $2,500 per month and (iv) enhanced severance in the event of a termination prior to May 1, 2013. Severance entitlements upon a termination after May 1, 2013 are the same as under his current amended and restated employment agreement. The amended and restated employment agreement with Mr. Launer, dated as of March 21, 2013, supersedes his prior employment agreement in its entirety.

Employment Agreements with Messrs. Krishnan, O’Shaughnessy and Ward

FGL Services (through its predecessor entity, Old Mutual Business Services, Inc.) is party to employment agreements with Rajesh Krishnan and John P. O’Shaughnessy, each dated as of December 21, 2009, and, prior to his termination of employment, was party to an employment agreement with Barry G. Ward, dated as of April 13, 2010.

The employment agreements do not have a fixed term and provide for compensation and benefits at the employer’s sole discretion. Under the employment agreements, the employer may terminate the executive’s employment for “cause” at any time. Either the employer or the executive may terminate the executive’s employment (other than in cases of cause, death or disability) by giving the other party three months’ written notice. In the event that either party provides notice, for the duration of the three-month notice period, the executive will continue to receive the base salary that he received immediately prior to the notice and will continue to be eligible for benefits. Except as provided below, the executive will not be eligible for any bonus (either in full or pro rata) otherwise payable after the date on which notice is given, nor be eligible for any benefits after the termination date. Upon a termination of employment, the executive will have the right to elect COBRA continuation coverage at his expense.

Under any termination, the executive will be entitled to salary, accrued and unused vacation time and accrued benefits through the termination date. Upon a termination by the employer other than for “cause”, provided the executive signs and delivers, and does not revoke, a general release in a form acceptable to the employer, the executive will be entitled to receive the following severance benefits in a lump sum following the expiration of any revocation period in the release agreement: (i) severance payment equal to two weeks of base salary for every year of employment (counting service to the predecessor entity and its affiliates), subject to a minimum payment of, for Messrs. Krishnan and O’Shaughnessy, 26 weeks’, and for Mr. Ward, 39 weeks’, base salary and, for all three executives, a maximum payment of 52 weeks’ base salary, and (ii) if the executive properly elects COBRA coverage, the employer will make payments to the insurance provider equal to the amount due for the executive’s COBRA coverage payments for a period of time equal to the number of weeks of severance payments (or, if sooner, until the executive is eligible to receive health benefits under another medical plan).

Upon a termination for disability, the executive will receive a pro rata bonus for the period when the executive was performing his or her regular duties on a full-time basis. Upon the executive’s death, the executive’s estate shall be eligible to receive the executive’s bonus, if any, for the period up through the executive’s death (and in the event the executive’s death is prior to the end of a compensation year, the bonus will be prorated).

For purposes of the employment agreements, “cause” means, generally, the employer’s determination that (i) the executive has breached his obligations under the employment agreement; (ii) the executive has failed to perform duties assigned to him in a manner satisfactory to the employer, subject to the employer’s obligation to provide the executive with prior notice providing reasonable detail of the bases for the unsatisfactory performance and an opportunity to correct the performance deficiencies; (iii) the executive has engaged in acts of dishonesty or moral turpitude, or any unlawful conduct; or (iv) the executive has engaged in conduct that is likely to affect adversely the business and/or reputation of the employer.

 

147


Table of Contents

During the executive’s employment and for one year following any termination of employment, the executive is subject to a non-solicitation covenant under the employment agreement related to clients and employees.

Outstanding Equity Awards at Fiscal Year End 2013

The following table sets forth the outstanding equity awards in FGLH held by our NEOs at the end of Fiscal Year 2013. Each equity grant is shown separately for each NEO.

 

Name

  Number of
Securities
Underlying
Unexercised
Options (#)
Exercisable
    Number of
Securities
Underlying
Unexercised
Options (#)
Unexercisable
    Option  Exercise
Price

($)
    Option
Expiration Date
    Number of
Shares or Units
of Stock that
Have Not Vested
(#)
    Market Value of
Shares or Units
that Have Not
Vested
($)(1)
 

Leland C. Launer, Jr.

    14,778 (2)      29,556 (2)      38.14        11/2/2018        —          —     
    —          90,909 (3)      49.45        12/31/2019        —          —     
    —          —          —          —          7,078 (4)   

Rajesh Krishnan

    4,032 (5)      8,064 (5)      38.14        11/2/2018        —          —     
    —          8,084 (6)      49.45        12/31/2019        —          —     
    —          —          —          —          3,567 (7)   

John A. Phelps, II

    —   (8)      8,064 (8)      38.14        11/2/2018        —          —     
    —          5,455 (6)      49.45        12/31/2019        —          —     
    —          —          —          —          2,407 (7)   

John P. O’Shaughnessy

    3,800 (5)      7,600 (5)      38.14        11/2/2018        —          —     
    —          6,331 (6)      49.45        12/31/2019        —          —     
    —          —          —          —          2,794 (7)   

Wendy J. B. Young

    —   (9)      2,485 (9)      38.14        11/2/2018        —          —     
    —          3,117 (6)      49.45        12/31/2019        —          —     
    —          —          —          —          1,375 (7)   

Barry G. Ward (10)

    —          —          —          —          —          —     

 

(1)   Value will be based on the fair market value of FGLH common stock on September 30, 2013. At the time of filing of this amendment, the fair market value of FGLH common stock on September 30, 2013 is not known, and amounts in this column will be reported in a subsequent amendment once this amount is known.

 

(2)   The options to purchase shares of Class A common stock of FGLH were granted on November 2, 2011 under the Stock Incentive Plan. One-third of the grant vested on November 2, 2012. One-third will vest on November 2, 2013, subject to Mr. Launer’s employment or earlier on a termination without “cause”, for “good reason” or in the event of a change in control. The remaining one-third will vest on April 30, 2014, subject to Mr. Launer’s continued employment as of the vesting date; provided that, if Mr. Launer’s employment terminates for a reason other than “cause”, death or disability, or if he resigns for “good reason” before April 30, 2014, the FGLH options relating to the third installment will vest on the effective date of the termination of employment.

 

(3)   The options to purchase shares of Class B common stock of FGLH were granted on December 31, 2012 under the Amended and Restated Stock Incentive Plan. One-third will vest on December 31, 2013, subject to Mr. Launer’s employment or earlier on a termination without “cause”, for “good reason” or in the event of a change in control. One-third will vest on the earlier of (x) April 30, 2014, if Mr. Launer remains employed through April 30, 2014 or (y) Mr. Launer’s last day of employment, if his employment is terminated for a reason other than death, disability or “cause”, or if Mr. Launer resigns for “good reason” (each, as defined in his employment agreement). The remaining one-third will vest on December 31, 2015, subject to Mr. Launer’s employment or earlier on a termination without “cause”, for “good reason” or in the event of a change in control.

 

(4)   The restricted shares of Class B common stock of FGLH were granted on December 31, 2012 under the Amended and Restated Stock Incentive Plan. One-third will vest on December 31, 2013, subject to Mr. Launer’s employment or earlier on a termination without “cause”, for “good reason” or in the event of a change in control. One-third will vest on the earlier of (x) April 30, 2014, if Mr. Launer remains employed through April 30, 2014 or (y) Mr. Launer’s last day of employment, if his employment is terminated for a reason other than death, disability or “cause”, or if Mr. Launer resigns for “good reason” (each, as defined in his employment agreement). The remaining one-third will vest on December 31, 2015, subject to Mr. Launer’s employment or earlier on a termination without “cause”, for “good reason” or in the event of a change in control.

 

148


Table of Contents
(5)   The options to purchase shares of Class A common stock of FGLH were granted on November 2, 2011. One-third of the options vested on November 2, 2012. One-third of the grant will vest on the second anniversary of the grant date, and the remaining one-third will vest on the third anniversary of the grant date, in each case subject to continued employment of the executive officer holding such awards or earlier on a termination without “cause” or in the event of a change in control.

 

(6)   The options to purchase shares of Class B common stock of FGLH were granted on December 31, 2012 under the Amended and Restated Stock Incentive Plan. The options vest ratably over three years beginning on the first anniversary of the grant date, subject to continued employment of the executive officer holding such awards or earlier in the event of a change in control.

 

(7)   The restricted shares of Class B common stock of FGLH were granted on December 31, 2012 under the Amended and Restated Stock Incentive Plan. The restricted shares vest ratably over three years beginning on the first anniversary of the grant date, subject to continued employment of the executive officer holding such awards or earlier in the event of a change in control.

 

(8)   12,096 options to purchase shares of Class A common stock of FGLH were granted to Mr. Phelps on November 2, 2011. One-third of the options vested on November 2, 2012. These vested options were exercised for cash by Mr. Phelps in Fiscal Year 2013, which is reflected in the “Option Exercises and Stock Vested” table. The remaining options will vest ratably on the second and third anniversaries of the grant date, in each case subject to continued employment of the executive officer holding such awards or earlier on a termination without “cause” or in the event of a change in control.

 

(9)   3,726 options to purchase shares of Class A common stock of FGLH were granted to Ms. Young on November 2, 2011. One-third of the options vested on November 2, 2012. These vested options were exercised for cash by Ms. Young in Fiscal Year 2013, which is reflected in the “Option Exercises and Stock Vested” table. The remaining options will vest ratably on the second and third anniversaries of the grant date, in each case subject to continued employment of the executive officer holding such awards or earlier on a termination without “cause” or in the event of a change in control.

 

(10)   Mr. Ward was terminated on July 16, 2013 and he held no outstanding equity awards at the end of Fiscal Year 2013.

Option Exercises and Stock Vested in Fiscal Year 2013

The following table sets forth information regarding stock options exercised by our NEOs during Fiscal Year 2013. No restricted shares of FGLH stock vested in Fiscal Year 2013.

 

     Option Awards     Stock Awards  

Name

   Number of
Shares
Acquired on
Exercise (#)
     Value
Realized on
Exercise ($)
    Number of
Shares
Acquired  on
Vesting (#)
     Value
Realized on
Vesting ($)
 

Leland C. Launer, Jr.

                              

Rajesh Krishnan

                              

John A. Phelps, II

             45,602 (1)                

John P. O’Shaughnessy

                              

Wendy J. B. Young

             28,578 (2)                

Barry G. Ward

             142,087 (3)                

 

(1)   Mr. Phelps exercised 4,032 vested options in respect of FGLH Class A common stock on January 4, 2013. We settled the options in cash, and Mr. Phelps did not receive any shares of common stock of FGLH upon exercise. The dollar value reflects the difference in the fair market value of Class A shares of common stock of FGLH at the time of exercise ($49.45) and the option’s exercise price ($38.14).

 

(2)   Mrs. Young exercised 1,242 vested options in respect of FGLH Class A common stock on July 19, 2013. We settled the options in cash, and Mrs. Young did not receive any shares of common stock of FGLH upon exercise. The dollar value reflects the difference in the fair market value of Class A shares of common stock of FGLH at the time of exercise ($61.15) and the option’s exercise price ($38.14).

 

(3)   Mr. Ward exercised 6,175 vested options in respect of FGLH Class A common stock on June 21, 2013. We settled the options in cash, and Mr. Ward did not receive any shares of common stock of FGLH upon exercise. The dollar value reflects the difference in the fair market value of Class A shares of common stock of FGLH at the time of exercise ($61.15) and the option’s exercise price ($38.14).

Pension Benefits

We do not provide any defined benefit plans to our NEOs.

 

149


Table of Contents

Nonqualified Defined Contribution and Other Nonqualified Deferred Compensation Plans in Fiscal Year 2013

The following table provides information concerning the nonqualified deferred compensation of each of the participating NEOs in the Executive Nonqualified Deferred Compensation Plan of Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc. (the “Deferred Compensation Plan”) as of September 30, 2013. Our Chief Executive Officer, Mr. Launer, does not participate in the Deferred Compensation Plan.

 

Name

  Aggregate
Balance at
Beginning of
Last Fiscal Year
    Executive
Contributions in
Last Fiscal Year
($)(1)
    Company
Contributions in
Last Fiscal Year
($)(2)
    Aggregate
Earnings (Losses)
in Last
Fiscal Year

($)(3)
    Aggregate
Withdrawals/
Distributions
($)
    Aggregate
Balance at Last
Fiscal Year End
($)(4)
 

Leland C. Launer, Jr.

    —          —          —          —          —          —     

Rajesh Krishnan

    110,009        13,029        17,500        838        —          141,375   

John A. Phelps, II

    54,387        —          16,250        (835     —          69,802   

John P. O’Shaughnessy

    21,480        27,200        16,250        9,702        —          74,632   

Wendy J. B. Young

    —          —          —          —          —          —     

Barry G. Ward

    63,892        —          20,000        7,006        90,898 (5)      —     

 

(1)   Amounts reported in this column are included in the Summary Compensation Table in the “Salary” and “Non-Stock Incentive Plan Compensation” columns for Fiscal Year 2013.

 

(2)   Amounts reported in this column are reported as compensation in the “All Other Compensation” column of the Summary Compensation Table for Fiscal Year 2013.

 

(3)   Amounts reported in this column are not reported as compensation in the Summary Compensation Table.

 

(4)   Amounts reported in this column were reported as compensation to the NEO in the Summary Compensation Table for Fiscal Year 2012 only to the extent of our contributions to the NEO’s account for such fiscal year.

 

(5)   The vested balance of Mr. Ward’s deferred compensation account was distributed upon his termination on July 16, 2013.

Narrative Disclosure to Nonqualified Defined Contribution and Other Nonqualified Deferred Compensation Plans

The Deferred Compensation Plan permits our participating NEOs and certain other employees to elect to defer up to 50% of their base salary and up to 100% of any performance-based bonus compensation. Any deferral elections are made under the Deferred Compensation Plan pursuant to a participation agreement with the NEO. We may make an annual discretionary grant to each active participating NEO equal to 5% of base salary. Employer contributions vest 20% for each year of service and are fully vested after five years of service. Deferred amounts and employer contributions are contributed to individual accounts in the OMUSLH Executive Deferred Compensation Plan Trust. The participants self-direct the notional investment of deferred contribution accounts in investment funds from a selection made available by our retirement committee.

The vested balance of the deferred compensation accounts will be distributed to each participating NEO upon his or her death, disability or separation from service (including retirement). Participants may elect upon initial enrollment to have accounts distributed upon a change in control event, although none of our NEOs have so elected. In-service hardship and education account withdrawals are permitted under the plan with respect to participant deferrals and employer credits.

The vested balance of Mr. Ward’s account was distributed to him upon his termination on July 16, 2013.

Potential Payments upon Termination or Change in Control in Fiscal Year 2013

Effect of Termination or Change in Control under the Employment Agreements

For a description of the potential payments upon a termination pursuant to the employment agreements with our NEOs, see “Narrative Disclosure to Summary Compensation Table and Grants of Plan-Based Awards Table—Employment Agreements with Named Executive Officers”. The employment agreements do not provide for severance or payments upon a change in control, except as set forth in the equity documentation.

 

150


Table of Contents

Effect of Termination or Change in Control on FGLH Options

Termination of Employment . In the case of a termination for “cause” (as defined in the Stock Incentive Plan), the optionee’s unvested and vested FGLH stock options will be canceled as of the effective date of the termination. Upon a termination of employment for any reason other than for cause, the treatment of an optionee’s FGLH options will be as set forth in the optionee’s option agreement pertaining to such options. For the NEOs who hold FGLH options (other than Mr. Launer), upon a termination of employment other than for “cause” (as defined in the executive’s employment agreement, or, in the absence of an employment agreement, by the applicable stock incentive plan), any unvested FGLH options granted on November 2, 2011 will immediately vest as of the effective date of the termination, and any unvested FGLH options granted on December 31, 2012 will be immediately forfeited and canceled. For Mr. Launer, upon a termination of employment by the Company other than for “cause” or for “good reason” (each as defined in his employment agreement), all unvested FGLH options held by him will immediately vest as of the effective date of the termination. All vested FGLH options (including as a result of accelerated vesting described above) will be settled in cash following the next scheduled valuation date of FGLH. In the event the aggregate exercise price of the vested FGLH options equals or exceeds the fair market value of the common stock underlying the options, the underwater vested options will be terminated without payment.

Change in Control . If FGLH experiences a “change in control” (as defined in the applicable stock incentive plan), any outstanding FGLH options will accelerate and be canceled in exchange for a cash payment equal to the change-in-control price per share minus the exercise price of the applicable FGLH option, unless our compensation committee determines to allow alternative awards in lieu of acceleration and payment.

Effect of Termination or Change in Control on Restricted Stock

Termination of Employment . Upon a termination for any reason, any unvested restricted shares of FGLH stock held by an NEO (other than Mr. Launer) will be immediately forfeited and canceled.

If Mr. Launer’s employment is terminated without “cause” or if he resigns for “good reason” (each as defined in his employment agreement), any unvested restricted shares of FGLH stock will become vested as of the date of termination. Upon a termination for “cause” or by Mr. Launer without “good reason”, or as the result of Mr. Launer’s death or disability, any unvested restricted shares of FGLH stock will be forfeited as of the termination date.

Change in Control . In the event of a change in control of FGLH, the restricted period applicable to any restricted shares of FGLH stock will lapse and all shares of FGLH will vest and become non-forfeitable.

Effect of Termination or Change in Control on Dividend Equivalents

Termination of Employment . If an executive’s employment terminates for any reason, (i) any dividend equivalents held by a participant that have not vested on or before the termination date will be forfeited and terminate immediately and (ii) any vested dividend equivalents on the termination date will be settled such that we will deliver to the executive a payment in cash equal to the amount of the dividend equivalent on or as soon as practicable following the termination date. Upon settlement, the dividend equivalent will immediately terminate.

Change in Control . In the event of a change in control of FGLH, if the applicable minimum “net dividend value” has been achieved, all outstanding dividend equivalents will vest immediately prior to the change in control and be settled such that FGLH will deliver to the executive a payment in cash equal to the amount of the dividend equivalent on or as soon as practicable following the vesting date. “Net Dividend Value” means the aggregate value of cash dividends declared and paid by FGLH to HGI (including for this purpose Indebtedness Repayments) minus the aggregate value of all cash contributions from HGI to FGLH in a particular period. “Indebtedness Repayments” means payments made to HGI for repayment of indebtedness with the value per share of common stock determined by dividing such loan repayment amount by the number of outstanding shares of Class A and Class B common stock.

 

151


Table of Contents

Effect of Termination or Change in Control on Nonqualified Deferred Compensation

For any participating NEO in our deferred compensation plan, the vested balance of the deferred compensation accounts will be distributed upon death, disability or separation from service, and, if elected upon initial enrollment, upon a change-in-control event. None of our participating NEOs have elected to have vested account balances distributed upon a change-in-control event without a separation from service. For more information on our nonqualified deferred compensation plan, see the narrative description entitled “—Narrative Disclosure to Nonqualified Defined Contribution and Other Nonqualified Deferred Compensation Plans”.

Effect of Termination under our General Severance Policy

Our general severance policy is available to all of our employees (who are not otherwise party to an employment agreement) and does not discriminate in favor of our NEOs. Our general severance policy is a discretionary policy that provides for a lump sum severance payment equal to two weeks’ base salary for each full year of continuous service, with a minimum payment of four weeks’ base salary upon an involuntary termination as a result of position elimination or restructuring.

 

152


Table of Contents

Potential Payments upon Termination or Change-in-Control at Fiscal Year End 2013

The following table sets forth the estimated amount of compensation each of our NEOs (other than Mr. Ward) would receive under the termination or change in control situations, as applicable, discussed above. The table assumes that such termination or change in control event occurred on September 30, 2013. For Mr. Ward, the table sets forth the actual amount of compensation Mr. Ward received as a result of his termination on July 16, 2013. The table excludes (i) amounts accrued through the termination date that would be paid in the normal course of continued employment, such as accrued but unpaid salary, (ii) vested account balances under our 401(k) plan that are generally available to all of our employees and (iii) except as indicated in the footnotes below, any post-employment benefit that is available to all of our employees and does not discriminate in favor of our NEOs.

 

Name(1)

 

Termination Trigger

  Severance
(Salary)(2)
    Severance
(Bonus)(3)
    Equity &
Dividend
Equivalent
Vesting(4)
    Nonqualified
Deferred
Compensation(5)
    Other
Benefits(6)
    Total(7)  

Leland C. Launer, Jr. .

  Involuntary Termination without Cause or Resignation for Good Reason(8)   $ 933,333      $ 523,562      $          —        $ 40,393      $ 1,497,288   
  Voluntary Termination(9)     —          —          —          —        $ 40,393      $ 40,393   
  Retirement(10)(11)     —          —          —          —          —          —     
  Death(10)     —        $ 523,562        —          —        $ 40,393      $ 563,954   
  Disability(10)     —        $ 523,562        —          —        $ 40,393      $ 563,954   
  Change in Control(12)     —          —        $ 1,359,130        —          —        $ 1,359,130   

Rajesh Krishnan

  Involuntary Termination without Cause(8)   $ 175,000        —        $        $ 126,243      $ 31,614      $ 332,858   
  Voluntary Termination(9)     —          —          —        $ 126,243      $ 20,196      $ 146,440   
  Retirement(10)(11)     —          —          —          —          —          —     
  Death(10)     —        $ 134,615        —        $ 126,243        —        $ 260,859   
  Disability(10)     —        $ 134,615        —        $ 126,243      $ 20,196      $ 281,055   
  Change in Control(12)     —          —        $ 263,427        —          —        $ 263,427   

John P. O’Shaughnessy

  Involuntary Termination without Cause(8)   $ 162,500        —        $        $ 74,632      $ 30,172      $ 267,303   
  Voluntary Termination(9)     —          —          —        $ 74,632      $ 18,754      $ 93,386   
  Retirement(10)(11)     —          —          —          —          —          —     
  Death(10)     —        $ 125,00        —        $ 74,632        —        $ 199,632   
  Disability(10)     —        $ 125,00        —        $ 74,632      $ 18,754      $ 218,386   
  Change in Control(12)     —          —        $ 235,058        —          —        $ 235,058   

John A. Phelps, II

  Involuntary Termination without Cause(8)(13)   $ 150,000        —        $        $ 69,802      $ 23,434      $ 243,236   
  Voluntary Termination(9)     —          —          —        $ 69,802      $ 23,434      $ 93,235   
  Retirement(10)(11)     —          —          —          —          —          —     
  Death(10)     —          —          —        $ 69,802        —        $ 69,802   
  Disability(10)     —          —          —        $ 69,802        —        $ 69,802   
  Change in Control(12)     —          —        $ 236,449        —          —        $ 236,449   

Wendy J.B. Young

  Involuntary Termination without Cause(8)(13)   $ 110,000        —        $          —        $ 15,863      $ 125,863   
  Voluntary Termination(9)     —          —          —          —        $ 15,863      $ 15,863   
  Retirement(10)(11)     —          —          —          —          —          —     
  Death(10)     —          —          —          —          —        $ —     
  Disability(10)     —          —          —          —          —        $ —     
  Change in Control(12)     —          —        $ 87,590        —          —        $ 87,590   

Barry Ward

  Voluntary Termination(14)     —          —          —        $ 90,898      $ 30,123      $ 121,022   

 

153


Table of Contents

 

(1) Entitlements in this table for each event are as set forth in (i) certain employment agreements in effect as of the relevant date for each of Messrs. Launer, Krishnan, O’Shaughnessy and Ward; (ii) each of the 2011 Stock Incentive Plan, the 2011 Dividend Equivalent Plan, the 2012 Amended and Restated Stock Incentive Plan, the 2012 Dividend Equivalent Plan and accompanying award agreements; and (iii) participation agreements for any participating NEO under the nonqualified deferred compensation plan.

 

(2) Under the terms of Mr. Launer’s employment agreement, severance is payable in the form of salary continuation. For Mr. Launer, amounts in this column assume that the employer elected to pay Mr. Launer his continued base salary for an additional period of 270 days provided that Mr. Launer agreed with the restrictive covenants in his employment agreement for the duration of the additional period. Under the terms of the employment agreements with Messrs. Krishnan and O’Shaughnessy, severance pays out in a lump sum. Amounts payable in this column are subject to the executive executing and not revoking a release of claims against the employer. See “Narrative to Summary Compensation Table and Grants of Plan-Based Awards Table—Employment Agreements with Named Executive Officers”.

 

(3) Amounts in this column include, if provided in an employment agreement with the NEO, a pro rata bonus for the year of termination upon certain types of terminations. The full bonus would not be earned until December 31, 2013.

 

(4) Amounts in this column assume the triggering event took place on September 30, 2013. At the time of filing of this amendment, the fair market value of FGLH common stock on September 30, 2013 is not known, and amounts in this table will be updated in a subsequent amendment once this amount is known. Accordingly, amounts in this column reflect, if applicable, accelerated vesting of dividend equivalent award amounts only.

For certain qualifying terminations and a change-in-control event, (i) the value of FGLH stock options will be calculated by multiplying the number of vested options (including any unvested options that would accelerate on a qualifying termination or change-in-control event) by the excess of the fair market value of FGLH common stock on September 30, 2013 over the applicable exercise price per share and (ii) the value of FGLH restricted stock will be calculated based on the fair market value of FGLH common stock on September 30, 2013. The following table will detail the valuations of the outstanding equity awards determined using the fair market value of a shares of FGLH stock on September 30, 2013 for qualifying terminations and/or a change in control event in a subsequent amendment once the fair market value of a share of FGLH stock as of September 30, 2013 is known:

 

Name

   FGLH Stock
Options Granted on
November 2, 2011
     FGLH Stock
Options Granted on
December 31, 2012
     FGLH Restricted
Stock Granted on
December 31, 2012
 

Leland C. Launer, Jr.

   $         $         $     

Rajesh Krishnan

   $         $         $     

John P. O’Shaughnessy

   $         $         $     

John A. Phelps, II

   $         $         $     

Wendy J.B. Young

   $         $         $     

The following table details the estimated valuations of the dividend equivalent awards on September 30, 2013 for a change in control event:

 

Name

   2011 Dividend
Equivalents
     2012 Dividend
Equivalents
 

Leland C. Launer, Jr.

   $ 661,463       $ 697,667   

Rajesh Krishnan

   $ 180,472       $ 82,955   

John P. O’Shaughnessy

   $ 170,088       $ 64,970   

John A. Phelps, II

   $ 180,472       $ 55,977   

Wendy J.B. Young

   $ 55,607       $ 31,983   

 

(5) For any participating NEO, the vested balance of the deferred compensation accounts will be distributed upon death, disability or separation from service.

 

(6) Amounts include any accrued vacation as of September 30, 2013, which would be paid out upon a termination. For Messrs. Krishnan, and O’Shaughnessy, this amount also includes payments by us to the insurance provider equal to the amount due for COBRA coverage payments for a period of time equal to the number of weeks of severance payments.

 

(7) The total amounts in this column do not include amounts in respect of accelerated vesting of FGLH stock options or FGLH restricted stock awards, where applicable, because the fair market value of a share of FGLH stock on September 30, 2013 is not known at this time. This column will be updated to include these amounts in a subsequent amendment.

 

(8) With respect to the options to purchase Class A common stock of FGLH granted on November 2, 2011: On a termination of employment “without cause” or, in the case of Mr. Launer only, by the executive for “good reason”, any unvested FGLH options will immediately vest as of the termination date. All vested options to purchase Class A common stock of FGLH held by any NEOs as of the termination date (including as a result of accelerated vesting) will be settled in cash following the next scheduled valuation date of FGLH.

With respect to the options to purchase Class B common stock of FGLH granted on December 31, 2012: (i) For the NEOs other than Mr. Launer, upon a termination of employment “without cause”, any unvested options to purchase Class B common stock of FGLH will

 

154


Table of Contents

be immediately forfeited and canceled as of the termination date, and (ii) for Mr. Launer, upon a termination of employment “without cause” or upon his resignation for “good reason”, any unvested options to purchase Class B common stock of FGLH will immediately vest as of the termination date. All vested options to purchase Class B common stock of FGLH held by any NEOs as of the termination date (including, for Mr. Launer only, as a result of accelerated vesting) will be settled in cash following the next scheduled valuation date of FGLH.

With respect to the restricted shares of Class B common stock of FGLH granted on December 31, 2012: (i) For the NEOs other than Mr. Launer, upon a termination of employment “without cause”, any unvested restricted shares of Class B common stock of FGLH will be immediately forfeited and canceled as of the termination date, and (ii) for Mr. Launer, upon a termination of employment “without cause” or upon his resignation for “good reason”, any unvested restricted shares of Class B common stock of FGLH will immediately vest as of the termination date.

With respect to the dividend equivalents granted in 2011 and 2012: upon a termination of employment “without cause” or, in the case of Mr. Launer only, by the executive for “good reason”, (i) any dividend equivalents held by an NEO that have not vested on or before the termination date will be forfeited and terminate immediately and (ii) any vested dividend equivalents on the termination date will be cash settled.

 

(9) On a voluntary resignation of an NEO, other than, in the case of Mr. Launer only, for “good reason”, the treatment of the FGLH equity is as follows: (i) for any outstanding FGLH options as of the termination date, (x) unvested FGLH options will be canceled and (y) vested FGLH options will be cashed out, and (ii) for any FGLH outstanding dividend equivalents held as of the termination date, (x) any unvested dividend equivalents will be forfeited and terminate immediately and (y) any vested dividend equivalents will be settled in cash.

 

(10) Our stock incentive plans and dividend equivalent plans do not provide for accelerated vesting on death, disability or retirement.

 

(11) As of September 30, 2013, none of our NEOs were retirement eligible.

 

(12) In the case of a change in control of FGLH, we assume that the vesting of all FGLH options and dividend equivalents was accelerated as a result of the transaction. See footnote 4 above and “—Effect of Termination or Change in Control on FGLH Options” and “—Effect of Termination or Change in Control on Dividend Equivalents” above for more information.

 

(13) Amounts include severance under our general severance policy, which is available to all of our employees (who are not otherwise party to an employment agreement) and does not discriminate in favor of our NEOs. Our general severance policy is a discretionary policy that provides for a lump sum severance payment equal to two weeks’ base salary for each full year of continuous service, with a minimum payment of four weeks’ base salary upon an involuntary termination as a result of position elimination or restructuring.

 

(14) Mr. Ward’s employment was terminated on July 16, 2013 by reason of voluntary termination. Amounts in this row are in respect of actual compensation paid to Mr. Ward in connection with his termination. Amounts in this row exclude any compensation paid in respect of Mr. Ward’s voluntary exercise of his vested FGLH options upon his termination.

Compensation of Directors for Fiscal Year 2013

The following table provides summary information concerning compensation paid or accrued by us to our non-employee directors for services rendered to us during Fiscal Year 2013. Employee directors do not receive separate compensation for their service as directors.

 

Current Board Member Name

   Fees Earned
or Paid in
Cash
($)(1)(2)
     Stock
Awards
($)(3)
     Option
Awards
($)(4)
     Non-Stock
Incentive Plan
Compensation
($)
     Change in
Pension Value
and
Nonqualified
Deferred
Compensation
Earnings
($)
     All other
Compensation
($)(5)
     Total
($)
 

Omar M. Asali .

     —           —           —           —           —           —           —     

William Bawden

     21,250            —                    21,250   

Kostas (Gus) Cheliotis

     —           —           —           —           —           —           —     

Phillip J. Gass

     —           —           —           —           —           —           —     

Kevin J. Gregson

     70,000         10,701         1,995         —           —           —           82,696   

William P. Melchionni

     73,750         10,701         1,995         —           —           —           86,446   

L. John H. Tweedie

     —           —           —           —           —           —           —     

Former Board Member Name

                                                

Fred Cohen(6)

     63,750         —           —           —           —           7,165         70,915   

Ian Estus(7)

     —           —           —           —           —           —           —     

Keith M. Hladek(8)

     —           —           —           —           —           —           —     

Robin Roger(9)

     —           —           —           —           —           —           —     

 

155


Table of Contents

 

(1) For Messrs. Bawden and Gregson, the “Fees Earned or Paid in Cash” amounts reflect director fees.

 

(2) For Mr. Cohen, the “Fees Earned or Paid in Cash” amount includes (a) a director fee of $52,500 and (b) an Audit Committee Chair of FGLH fee of $11,250, in each case paid prior to his separation from service. For Mr. Melchionni, the “Fees Earned or Paid in Cash” amount includes (a) a director fee of $70,000 and (b) an Affiliate Transaction Committee Chair of FGLH fee in respect of the period beginning on July 1, 2013 of $3,750.

 

(3) Messrs. Gregson and Melchionni each received a grant of 175 restricted shares of Class B common stock of FGLH in April 2013 under the Amended and Restated Stock Incentive Plan. The amounts reported in this column are based on the aggregate grant date fair value computed in accordance with ASC Topic 718. See Note 12 to our audited consolidated financial statements and Note 9 to our unaudited condensed consolidated financial statements.

 

(4) Messrs. Gregson and Melchionni each received a grant of 300 options to purchase shares of Class B Common Stock of FGLH in April 2013 under the Amended and Restated Stock Incentive Plan. The amounts reported in this column are based on the aggregate grant date fair value computed in accordance with ASC Topic 718. See Note 12 to our audited consolidated financial statements and Note 9 to our unaudited condensed consolidated financial statements.

 

(5) Amounts in this column reflect the accelerated vesting of Mr. Cohen’s outstanding FGLH options and his exercise of such FGLH options in connection with his termination. Mr. Cohen received cash on exercise and did not receive any shares of FGLH.

 

(6) Mr. Cohen is no longer a director of the Company effective as of June 27, 2013.

 

(7) Mr. Estus is no longer a director of the Company effective as of June 27, 2013.

 

(8) Mr. Hladek is no longer a director of the Company effective as of September 27, 2013.

 

(9) Mrs. Roger is no longer a director of the Company effective as of September 27, 2013.

Narrative to the Director Compensation Table

In Fiscal Year 2013, our non-employee directors were paid director’s fees at the rate of $70,000 annually, with an additional $15,000 fee annually to non-employee directors serving as committee chair. In fiscal 2013, the directors received the amounts set forth in the Director Compensation Table. Mr. Cohen received a director’s fee of $52,500 and an Audit Committee Chair fee of $11,250, in each case paid prior to his separation from service. Mr. Melchionni received a director’s fee of $70,000 and an Affiliate Transaction Committee Chair of FGLH fee (in respect of the period beginning on July 1, 2013) of $3,750. Mr. Gregson received a director’s fee of $70,000, and Mr. Bawden received a director’s fee of $21,250. In addition, in Fiscal Year 2013, Messrs. Gregson and Melchionni were each awarded 300 options to purchase Class B common stock of FGLH and 175 restricted shares of Class B common stock of FGLH, in each case pursuant to the Amended and Restated Stock Incentive Plan.

In connection with Mr. Cohen’s separation from service, we accelerated the vesting of his outstanding options to purchase Class A common stock of FGLH. Mr. Cohen received $7,165 in cash upon exercise and did not receive any shares of FGLH.

Following the effective date of this offering, we anticipate that all directors will receive an annual fee for service on the Board of Directors, and directors serving as the Chair of a committee of the Board of Directors will receive an annual fee for service as the Chair of a committee of the Board of Directors, and all directors may also receive equity awards from time to time, as long as consistent with all applicable laws and regulations. All members of the Board of Directors will be reimbursed for reasonable costs and expenses incurred in attending meetings of the Board of Directors and meetings of Committees of the Board of Directors, and meetings with management.

Compensation Committee Interlocks and Insider Participation

For Fiscal Year 2013, our compensation committee consisted of Gus Cheliotis, who was appointed as a member and Chair of the compensation committee in June 2013, and Kevin Gregson. Prior to June 2013, Phil Gass was member and Chair of the compensation committee. During Fiscal Year 2013, there were no members of the compensation committee who served as an officer or employee of the Company or any of its subsidiaries.

 

156


Table of Contents

In addition, during Fiscal Year 2013, no executive officer of the Company served as a director or as a member of the compensation committee of a company (i) whose executive officer served as a director or as a member of the compensation committee of the Company and (ii) which employed a director of the Company. Mr. Cheliotis serves as Vice President and Investment Counsel of HGI. See “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions”.

Relationship of Compensation Policies and Practices to Risk Management

We adhere to compensation policies and practices that are designed to support a strong risk management culture. We have reviewed our compensation programs, policies and practices for employees and have determined that risks arising from such those programs, policies and practices are not reasonably likely to have a material adverse effect on us.

 

157


Table of Contents

CERTAIN RELATIONSHIPS AND RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS

In addition to the compensation arrangements with directors and executive officers described above in the sections entitled “Management”, and “Executive Compensation”, the following is a description of each transaction since January 1, 2010 and each currently proposed transaction in which (i) we have been or are to be a participant, (ii) the amount involved exceeded or will exceed $120,000 and (iii) any of our directors, executive officers, holders of more than 5% of our capital stock, or any member of their immediate families or person sharing their household had or will have a direct or indirect material interest. The list of certain relationships and related party transactions excludes Front Street’s investments in loans originated by Salus in 2013 and the loan to the HGI subsidiary EXCO Resources, Inc. because we transferred ownership in Front Street to HGI effective as of July 1, 2013.

Policies and Procedures for Related Person Transactions

Upon completion of this offering, we intend to adopt a related person transactions policy pursuant to which our executive officers, directors and principal shareholders, including their immediate family members, will not be permitted to enter into a related person transaction with us without the consent of an independent committee of our board or the full board. We expect that this policy will provide procedures for the approval of transactions with related persons as set forth in the rules and regulations of the SEC as well as “Affiliate Transactions” that require approval pursuant to the covenants set forth in the indenture governing the Senior Notes.

Related Person Transactions

Harbinger Ownership; Indemnification

HGI currently owns all of the outstanding shares of our common stock and has four representatives, Phillip J. Gass, Omar M. Asali, Kostas Cheliotis and Thomas A. Williams, on our board of directors (the “HGI directors”). We expect that following this offering a majority of our board of directors will continue to be affiliated with us and HGI. The HGI directors are considered related persons in the transactions involving HGI described below as a result of their affiliation with HGI and us. The HGI directors do not have any direct interest in any of the transactions described below. In addition, our bylaws provide for the indemnification of our directors, including the HGI directors, to the fullest extent permitted by law against liabilities and expenses incurred in connection with any threatened, pending or completed claim or proceeding, whether brought by or in the right of the company or otherwise, in which a director is involved because he or she is or has been a director.

Since our inception in 2011, we have utilized the services of the management and staff of HGI and also share office space with HGI. We recorded approximately $25,000 as contributed capital for such services for the year ended September 30, 2012. We believe these allocations were made on a reasonable basis; however, they do not necessarily represent the costs that we could incur on a stand-alone basis.

Reinsurance Transaction

On December 31, 2012, following approval by the MIA, FGLIC entered into the Cayman Reinsurance Agreement with Front Street, at the time, an indirect wholly owned subsidiary of FGL. Pursuant to the Cayman Reinsurance Agreement, Front Street reinsured approximately 10%, or approximately $1.4 billion of FGLIC policy liabilities as of June 30, 2013. Under the terms of the agreement, Front Street paid an initial ceding allowance of $15.0 million which was determined to be fair and reasonable according to an independent third-party actuarial firm. The coinsurance agreement was on a funds withheld basis, meaning that funds were withheld by FGLIC from the coinsurance premium owed to Front Street as collateral for Front Street’s payment obligations. Accordingly, the collateral assets remain under the ultimate ownership of the FGLIC. FIAM, an asset management company indirectly owned by HGI, manages certain of the collateral assets on behalf of Front Street. Front Street is responsible for the payment of FIAM’s asset management fees, which totaled $1.2 million for the Fiscal 2013 Nine Months. The effects of this transaction have been eliminated in FGL’s consolidated financial statements.

 

158


Table of Contents

Loan Participation Agreement

FGLIC participates in loans originated by Salus, a company indirectly owned by HGI that originates unaffilated senior secured asset-based loans to third-party borrowers. Pursuant to a participation agreement among FGLIC, Front Street and Salus dated January 1, 2013, FGLIC expects to participate in up to and in excess of $300.0 million of unaffiliated loans originated by Salus in 2013, of which $162.2 million was outstanding as of June 30, 2013. Pursuant to a participation agreement among FGLIC and Salus dated January 20, 2012, FGLIC participated in certain loans originated by Salus in 2012. In February 2013, Salus completed a CLO securitization and FGLIC sold the majority of its 2012 participation interests to the CLO and acquired $117.5 million of ABS as part of the securitization. As of June 30, 2013, the outstanding balance on the remaining loans underlying the 2012 participation interests is $32.6 million. In addition to the participation in loans originated by Salus, FGLIC also agreed to provide Salus with financing in the form of a $20 million term loan and a revolving loan of $10.0 million of which $10.0 million remains undrawn as of June 30, 2013. See Note 13 to our unaudited condensed consolidated financial statements for additional information about the Salus loans.

Term Loan Agreement

On February 25, 2009, prior to the FGLH Acquisition, FGLH borrowed $225.0 million under a term loan agreement with OMGUK. OMGUK assigned its interest in this agreement to FGL in connection with the FGLH Acquisition. On February 28, 2013, FGLH entered into a termination and release agreement with FGL whereby FGL notified FGLH of its election to convert the note payable to equity. Accordingly, FGLH converted the balance of the note payable as of December 30, 2012 of $209.8 million to equity on February 28, 2013. This resulted in an increase in FGLH’s paid-in capital without issuance of stock as it is our wholly owned subsidiary of FGL. No gain or loss was recognized on the conversion of the debt.

Distributions

Prior to the statutory conversion of Harbinger F&G, LLC into Fidelity & Guaranty Life, Harbinger F&G LLC distributed its ownership interests in its wholly owned subsidiaries, HGI Real Estate, LLC, a Delaware limited liability company, and Front Street, to HGI effective as of July 1, 2013. Harbinger F&G, LLC also distributed and assigned to HGI all of its rights, title, interests, liabilities and obligations under its litigation against OMGUK related to a claimed $50 million purchase price adjustment in connection with the FGLH Acquisition.

EXCO Acquisition

In connection with the acquisition by HGI Energy Holdings, LLC, a subsidiary of HGI, of EXCO Resources, Inc., on February 14, 2013, FGLIC and Front Street loaned $100.0 million to the HGI subsidiary of which $20.0 million is part of the Front Street funds withheld account investments. The loan was rated “B-” by Fitch, and matures on January 23, 2021 and pays interest at a rate of 9.0% annually. In accordance with Maryland insurance law, the terms of the loan were determined to be fair and reasonable to FGLIC. See Note 13 to our unaudited condensed consolidated financial statements as of and for the nine month period ended June 30, 2013 for additional information about the HGI subsidiary loan.

Registration Rights Agreement

In connection with the offering, we expect to enter into a registration rights agreement with HGI. The registration rights agreement will grant HGI specified demand and piggyback registration rights with respect to our common stock. As a result, HGI may require us to use reasonable best efforts to effect the registration under the Securities Act of the shares of our common stock which they own, at our own expense. In addition, if we determine to register our common stock under the Securities Act, HGI will have the right to require us to use our

 

159


Table of Contents

reasonable best efforts to include in our registration statement shares of our common stock which they own, subject to certain limitations. We expect that the registration rights agreement will also provide for us to indemnify HGI in connection with the registration of our common stock.

Tax Sharing Agreement

We expect to enter into a customary tax sharing agreement with HGI pursuant to which we will compensate HGI for the discharge of our (and those of our consolidated subsidiaries) tax obligations and be compensated for the use of our (and those of our consolidated subsidiaries) favorable tax attributes.

 

160


Table of Contents

PRINCIPAL STOCKHOLDER

Prior to the completion of this offering, all shares of our common stock were beneficially owned by HGI, whose principal offices are located at 450 Park Avenue, 30th Floor, New York, NY 10022. After the completion of this offering, HGI will beneficially own              shares of our common stock, or approximately     % of our outstanding common stock, assuming the underwriters’ over-allotment option is not exercised. We have granted the underwriters a 30-day option to purchase up to an additional              shares of our common stock to cover over-allotments. If the underwriters exercise this option in full, HGI will beneficially own approximately     % of our outstanding stock.

 

161


Table of Contents

DESCRIPTION OF CAPITAL STOCK

Upon completion of this offering, our authorized capital stock will consist of              shares of common stock, par value $0.01 per share and              shares of undesignated preferred stock, par value $          per share. Upon completion of this offering there will be              shares of our common stock issued and outstanding.

In connection with this offering, we will amend and restate our certificate of incorporation and by-laws. The following descriptions of our capital stock, amended and restated certificate of incorporation and amended and restated by-laws are intended as summaries only and are qualified in their entirety by reference to our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and amended and restated by-laws, which will become effective upon the completion of this offering and will be filed as exhibits to the registration statement, of which this prospectus forms a part, and to the applicable provisions of the DGCL.

Common Stock

Holders of common stock will be entitled:

 

   

to cast one vote for each share held of record on all matters submitted to a vote of the shareholders;

 

   

to receive, on a pro rata basis, dividends and distributions, if any, that the board of directors may declare out of legally available funds, subject to preferences that may be applicable to preferred stock, if any, then outstanding; and

 

   

upon our liquidation, dissolution or winding up, to share equally and ratably in any assets remaining after the payment of all debt and other liabilities, subject to the prior rights, if any, of holders of any outstanding shares of preferred stock.

Any dividends declared on the common stock will not be cumulative. Our ability to pay dividends on our common stock is subject to our subsidiaries’ ability to pay dividends to us, which is in turn subject to the restrictions set forth in the indenture governing the Senior Notes. See “Dividend Policy”.

The holders of our common stock will not have any preemptive, cumulative voting, subscription, conversion, redemption or sinking fund rights. The common stock will not be subject to future calls or assessments by us. The rights and privileges of holders of our common stock are subject to any series of preferred stock that we may issue in the future, as described below.

Before the date of this prospectus, there has been no public market for our common stock.

As of August 27, 2013, we had 10,000 shares of common stock outstanding and one holder of record of common stock. The number of shares has not yet been adjusted to reflect our anticipated stock split prior to the completion of this offering.

Preferred Stock

Under our amended and restated certificate of incorporation, our board of directors will have the authority, without further action by our shareholders, to issue up to              shares of preferred stock in one or more series and to fix the voting powers, designations, preferences and the relative participating, optional or other special rights and qualifications, limitations and restrictions of each series, including dividend rights, dividend rates, conversion rights, voting rights, terms of redemption, liquidation preferences and the number of shares constituting any series.

Upon completion of the offering, no shares of our authorized preferred stock will be outstanding. Because the board of directors will have the power to establish the preferences and rights of the shares of any additional

 

162


Table of Contents

series of preferred stock, it may afford holders of any preferred stock preferences, powers and rights, including voting and dividend rights, senior to the rights of holders of our common stock, which could adversely affect the holders of the common stock and could delay, discourage or prevent a takeover of us even if a change of control of our company would be beneficial to the interests of our shareholders.

Annual Shareholders Meeting

Our amended and restated by-laws will provide that annual shareholder meetings will be held at a date, time and place, if any, as exclusively selected by our board of directors. To the extent permitted under applicable law, we may conduct meetings by remote communications, including by webcast.

Voting

The affirmative vote of a plurality of the shares of our common stock present, in person or by proxy, at the meeting and entitled to vote on the election of directors will decide the election of any directors, and the affirmative vote of a majority of the shares of our common stock present, in person or by proxy, at the meeting and entitled to vote at any annual or special meeting of shareholders will decide all other matters voted on by shareholders, unless the question is one upon which, by express provision of law, under our amended and restated certificate of incorporation, or under our amended and restated by-laws, a different vote is required, in which case such provision will control.

Anti-Takeover Effects of our Certificate of Incorporation, By-Laws, and Delaware Law

The provisions of our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and amended and restated by-laws to be in effect upon completion of this offering summarized below may have an anti-takeover effect and may delay, defer or prevent a tender offer or takeover attempt that you might consider in your best interest, including an attempt that might result in your receipt of a premium over the market price for your shares. These provisions are also designed, in part, to encourage persons seeking to acquire control of us to first negotiate with our board of directors, which could result in an improvement of their terms.

Classified Board of Directors. Upon completion of this offering, in accordance with the terms of our amended and restated certificate of incorporation, our board of directors will be divided into three classes, Class I, Class II and Class III, with members of each class serving staggered three-year terms. Under our amended and restated by-laws, our board of directors will consist of such number of directors as may be determined from time to time by resolution of the board of directors, but in no event may the number of directors be less than one. Any additional directorships resulting from an increase in the number of directors will be distributed among the three classes so that, as nearly as possible, each class will consist of one-third of the directors. Our amended and restated by-laws will also provide that any vacancy on our board of directors, including a vacancy resulting from an enlargement of our board of directors, may be filled only by the affirmative vote of a majority of our directors then in office, even if less than a quorum, or by a sole remaining director. Any director elected to fill a vacancy will hold office until such director’s successor shall have been duly elected and qualified or until such director’s earlier death, resignation or removal. Our classified board of directors could have the effect of delaying or discouraging an acquisition of us or a change in our management.

Special Meetings of Stockholders. Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation will provide that a special meeting of stockholders may be called only by the Chairman of our board of directors or by a resolution adopted by a majority of our board of directors. Special meetings may also be called by our corporate secretary at the request of the holders of at least 50% of the outstanding shares of our common stock until HGI ceases to own at least 50% of the outstanding shares of our common stock. Thereafter, stockholders will not be permitted to call a special meeting of stockholders.

 

163


Table of Contents

No Stockholder Action by Written Consent . Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation will provide that stockholder action may be taken only at an annual meeting or special meeting of the stockholders, provided that stockholder action may be taken by written consent in lieu of a meeting until HGI ceases to own at least 50% of the outstanding shares of our common stock.

Removal of Directors. Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation will provide that directors may be removed with or without cause at any time upon the affirmative vote of holders of at least a majority of the outstanding shares of common stock then entitled to vote at an election of directors until HGI ceases to own at least 50% of the outstanding shares of our common stock. Thereafter, our amended and restated certificate of incorporation will provide that directors may be removed only for cause upon the affirmative vote of holders of at least a majority of the outstanding shares of common stock then entitled to vote at an election of directors.

Stockholder Advance Notice Procedure. Our amended and restated by-laws will establish an advance notice procedure for stockholders to make nominations of candidates for election as directors or to bring other business before an annual meeting of our stockholders. The amended and restated by-laws will provide that any stockholder wishing to nominate persons for election as directors at, or bring other business before, an annual meeting must deliver to our corporate secretary a written notice of the stockholder’s intention to do so. These provisions may have the effect of precluding the conduct of certain business at a meeting if the proper procedures are not followed. We expect that these provisions may also discourage or deter a potential acquirer from conducting a solicitation of proxies to elect the acquirer’s own slate of directors or otherwise attempting to obtain control of our company. To be timely, the stockholder’s notice must be delivered to our corporate secretary at our principal executive offices not fewer than 90 days nor more than 120 days before the first anniversary date of the annual meeting for the preceding year; provided, however, that in the event that the annual meeting is set for a date that is more than 30 days before or more than 70 days after the first anniversary date of the preceding year’s annual meeting, a stockholder’s notice must be delivered to our corporate secretary (x) not earlier than 120 days prior to the meeting or (y) no later than the close of business on the later of the 90th day prior to such annual meeting or the 10th day following the day on which a public announcement of the date of the such meeting is first made by us.

Amendments to Certificate of Incorporation and By-Laws. The DGCL generally provides that the affirmative vote of a majority of the outstanding stock entitled to vote on any matter is required to amend a corporation’s certificate of incorporation or by-laws, unless either a corporation’s certificate of incorporation or by-laws require a greater percentage. Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation will provide that, upon HGI ceasing to own more than 50% of the outstanding shares of our common stock, specified provisions of our amended and restated certificate of incorporation may not be amended, altered or repealed unless the amendment is approved by the affirmative vote of the holders of at least 66 2/3% of the outstanding shares of our common stock then entitled to vote at any annual or special meeting of stockholders, including the provisions governing the liability and indemnification of directors, corporate opportunities, the elimination of stockholder action by written consent and the prohibition on the rights of stockholders to call a special meeting.

In addition, our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and amended and restated by-laws will provide that our amended and restated by-laws may be amended, altered or repealed, or new by-laws may be adopted, by the affirmative vote of a majority of the board of directors, or by the affirmative vote of the holders of (x) as long as HGI owns more than 50% of the outstanding shares of our common stock, at least a majority, and (y) thereafter, at least 66 2/3%, of the outstanding shares of our common stock then entitled to vote at any annual or special meeting of stockholders.

These provisions make it more difficult for any person to remove or amend any provisions in our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and amended and restated by-laws that may have an anti-takeover effect.

Section 203 of the Delaware General Corporation Law. In our amended and restated certificate of incorporation, we will elect not to be governed by Section 203 of the DGCL, as permitted under and pursuant to subsection (b)(3) of Section 203. Section 203 prohibits a publicly held Delaware corporation from engaging in a

 

164


Table of Contents

business combination, such as a merger, with a person or group owning 15% or more of the corporation’s outstanding voting stock for a period of three years following the date the person became an interested stockholder, unless (with certain exceptions) the business combination or the transaction in which the person became an interested stockholder is approved in a prescribed manner. Accordingly, we will not be subject to any anti-takeover effects of Section 203.

Authorized but Unissued Shares of Capital Stock

Common Stock. The remaining shares of authorized and unissued common stock will be available for future issuance without additional stockholder approval. While the additional shares are not designed to deter or prevent a change of control, under some circumstances we could use the additional shares to create voting impediments or to frustrate persons seeking to effect a takeover or otherwise gain control by, for example, issuing those shares in private placements to purchasers who might side with our board of directors in opposing a hostile takeover bid.

Preferred Stock . Under our amended and restated certificate of incorporation, our board of directors will have the authority, without further action by our stockholders, to issue up to          shares of preferred stock in one or more series and to fix the voting powers, designations, preferences and the relative participating, optional or other special rights and qualifications, limitations and restrictions of each series, including dividend rights, dividend rates, conversion rights, voting rights, terms of redemption, liquidation preferences and the number of shares constituting any series. The existence of authorized but unissued preferred stock could reduce our attractiveness as a target for an unsolicited takeover bid since we could, for example, issue shares of preferred stock to parties who might oppose such a takeover bid or shares that contain terms the potential acquiror may find unattractive. This may have the effect of delaying or preventing a change of control, may discourage bids for the common stock at a premium over the market price of the common stock, and may adversely affect the market price of, and the voting and other rights of the holders of, our common stock.

Insurance Regulations Concerning Change of Control

Many state insurance regulatory laws intended primarily for the protection of policyholders contain provisions that require advance approval by state agencies of any change in control of an insurance company or insurance holding company that is domiciled or, in some cases, having such substantial business that it is deemed to be commercially domiciled in that state.

Limitations on Liability and Indemnification

Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation will contain provisions permitted under DGCL relating to the liability of directors. These provisions will eliminate a director’s personal liability for monetary damages resulting from a breach of fiduciary duty, except in circumstances involving:

 

   

any breach of the director’s duty of loyalty;

 

   

acts or omissions not in good faith or which involve intentional misconduct or a knowing violation of the law;

 

   

Section 174 of the DGCL (unlawful dividends, unlawful stock repurchases, or unlawful redemptions); or

 

   

any transaction from which the director derives an improper personal benefit.

The principal effect of the limitation on liability provision is that a shareholder will be unable to prosecute an action for monetary damages against a director unless the shareholder can demonstrate a basis for liability for which indemnification is not available under the DGCL. These provisions, however, should not limit or eliminate our rights or any shareholder’s rights to seek non-monetary relief, such as an injunction or rescission, in the event of a breach of director’s fiduciary duty. These provisions will not alter a director’s liability under federal securities laws. The inclusion of this provision in our amended and restated certificate of incorporation may discourage or deter shareholders or management from bringing a lawsuit against directors for a breach of their fiduciary duties, even though such an action, if successful, might otherwise have benefited us and our shareholders.

 

165


Table of Contents

Our amended and restated by-laws will require us to indemnify and advance expenses to our directors and officers to the fullest extent not prohibited by the DGCL and other applicable law, except in the case of a proceeding instituted by the director without the approval of our board of directors. Our amended and restated by-laws will provide that we are required to indemnify our directors and executive officers, to the fullest extent permitted by law, for all judgments, fines, settlements, legal fees and other expenses incurred in connection with pending or threatened legal proceedings because of the director’s or officer’s positions with us or another entity that the director or officer serves at our request, subject to various conditions, and to advance funds to our directors and officers to enable them to defend against such proceedings. To receive indemnification, the director or officer must have been successful in the legal proceeding or have acted in good faith and in what was reasonably believed to be a lawful manner in our best interest and, with respect to any criminal proceeding, have had no reasonable cause to believe his or her conduct was unlawful.

Prior to the offering, we will enter into an indemnification agreement with each of our directors. The indemnification agreement will provide our directors with contractual rights to the indemnification and expense advancement rights provided under our amended and restated by-laws, as well as contractual rights to additional indemnification as provided in the indemnification agreement.

Corporate Opportunities

Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation will provide that we, on our behalf and on behalf of our subsidiaries, renounce any interest or expectancy in, or in being offered an opportunity to participate in, corporate opportunities, that are from time to time presented to HGI or any of its officers, directors, employees, agents, shareholders, members, partners, affiliates or subsidiaries (other than us and our subsidiaries), even if the opportunity is one that we or our subsidiaries might reasonably be deemed to have pursued or had the ability or desire to pursue if granted the opportunity to do so. Neither HGI nor its officers, directors, employees, agents, shareholders, members, partners, affiliates or subsidiaries will generally be liable to us or any of our subsidiaries for breach of any fiduciary or other duty, as a director or otherwise, by reason of the fact that such person pursues or acquires such corporate opportunity, directs such corporate opportunity to another person or fails to present such corporate opportunity, or information regarding such corporate opportunity, to us or our subsidiaries unless, in the case of any such person who is a director or officer of the Company, such corporate opportunity is expressly offered to such director or officer in writing solely in his or her capacity as a director or officer of the Company. Shareholders will be deemed to have notice of and consented to this provision of our amended and restated certificate of incorporation.

Choice of Forum

Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation will provide that the Court of Chancery of the State of Delaware will be the sole and exclusive forum for (i) any derivative action or proceeding brought on behalf of the Company, (ii) any action asserting a claim of breach of a fiduciary duty owed to the Company or the Company’s shareholders by any of the Company’s directors, officers, employees or agents, (iii) any action asserting a claim against the Company arising under the DGCL or (iv) any action asserting a claim against the Company that is governed by the internal affairs doctrine. We may consent in writing to alternative forums. By becoming a shareholder of the Company, you will be deemed to have notice of and have consented to the provisions of our amended and restated certificate of incorporation related to choice of forum.

Listing

We will apply for listing our common stock on the              under the symbol “        ”.

Transfer Agent and Registrar

Upon the completion of this offering, the transfer agent and registrar for our common stock will be American Stock Transfer & Trust Company.

 

166


Table of Contents

SHARES OF COMMON STOCK ELIGIBLE FOR FUTURE SALE

Prior to this offering, there has been no public market for our common stock. Future sales of substantial amounts of our common stock, including shares issued upon exercise of outstanding options, in the public market could adversely affect prevailing market prices of our common stock. Some shares of our common stock will not be available for sale for a certain period of time after this offering because they are subject to contractual and legal restrictions on resale some of which are described below. Sales of substantial amounts of common stock in the public market after these restrictions lapse, or the perception that these sales could occur, could adversely affect the prevailing market price and our ability to raise equity capital in the future.

Sales of Restricted Securities

After this offering,             shares of our common stock will be outstanding. Of these shares, all of the shares sold in this offering will be freely tradable without restriction under the Securities Act, unless purchased by our “affiliates”, as that term is defined in Rule 144 under the Securities Act. The remaining             shares of our common stock that will be outstanding after this offering are “restricted securities” within the meaning of Rule 144 under the Securities Act. Restricted securities may be sold in the public market only if they are registered under the Securities Act or are sold pursuant to an exemption from registration under Rule 144 or Rule 701 under the Securities Act, which are summarized below. Subject to the lock-up agreements described below, shares held by our affiliates that are not restricted securities or that have been owned for more than one year may be sold subject to compliance with Rule 144 of the Securities Act without regard to the prescribed one-year holding period under Rule 144.

Lock-up Agreements

We, our directors, our executive officers, certain of our other officers and HGI have agreed that, subject to certain exceptions, for a period of 180 days from the date of this prospectus, we and they will not, without the prior written consent of Credit Suisse, as representative of the underwriters, offer, sell, issue, contract to sell, contract to purchase, grant an option, right or warrant to purchase, pledge or otherwise transfer or dispose of, directly or indirectly, any shares of our common stocks or securities convertible into or exchangeable or exercisable for any shares of our common stock, enter into a transaction which would have the same effect, or enter into any swap, hedge or other arrangement that transfers, in whole or in part, any of the economic consequences of ownership of the shares of our common stock, whether any such aforementioned transaction is to be settled by delivery of our common stock or such other securities, in cash or otherwise. See “Underwriting”.

Upon the expiration of the applicable lock-up period, substantially all of the shares subject to such lock-up restrictions will become eligible for sale, subject to the limitations discussed above.

Registration Rights Agreement

HGI will have the right, subject to the lock-up agreements described above, to require to us to register shares of our common stock for resale in some circumstances. See “Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions—Registration Rights Agreement”.

Rule 144

In general, under Rule 144 as currently in effect, beginning 90 days after the date of this prospectus, and subject to the lock up agreements described above, our affiliates who have beneficially owned shares of our common stock for at least six months, including the holding period of any prior owner other than one of our affiliates, would be entitled to sell within any three-month period a number of shares that does not exceed the greater of:

 

   

1% of the number of shares of our common stock then outstanding, which will equal approximately              shares immediately after this offering; and

 

167


Table of Contents
   

the average weekly trading volume in our common stock on the             during the four calendar weeks preceding the date of filing of a Notice of Proposed Sale of Securities Pursuant to Rule 144 with respect to the sale.

Sales under Rule 144 by our affiliates are also subject to manner of sale provisions and notice requirements and to the availability of current public information about us.

The volume limitation, manner of sale and notice provisions described above will not apply to sales by non-affiliates. For purposes of Rule 144, a non-affiliate is any person or entity who is not our affiliate at the time of sale and has not been our affiliate during the preceding three months. Beginning 90 days after the date of this prospectus, a non-affiliate who has beneficially owned restricted shares of our common stock for six months may rely on Rule 144 provided that certain public information regarding us is available. However, a non-affiliate who has beneficially owned the restricted shares proposed to be sold for at least one year will not be subject to any restrictions under Rule 144, including the public information requirement.

We are unable to estimate the number of shares that will be sold under Rule 144 since this will depend on the market price for our common stock, the personal circumstances of the stockholder and other factors.

 

168


Table of Contents

U.S. FEDERAL INCOME TAX CONSIDERATIONS FOR NON-U.S. HOLDERS

The following is a discussion of U.S. federal income tax considerations relating to the purchase, ownership and disposition of our common stock by Non-U.S. Holders (as defined below) that purchase our common stock pursuant to this Offering and hold such common stock as a capital asset. This discussion is based on the Code, U.S. Treasury regulations promulgated or proposed thereunder, and administrative and judicial interpretations thereof, all as in effect on the date hereof and all of which are subject to change, possibly with retroactive effect, or to different interpretation. This discussion does not address all of the U.S. federal income tax considerations that may be relevant to specific Non-U.S. Holders in light of their particular circumstances or to Non-U.S. Holders subject to special treatment under U.S. federal income tax law (such as banks, insurance companies, dealers in securities or other Non-U.S. Holders that generally mark their securities to market for U.S. federal income tax purposes, foreign governments, international organizations, tax-exempt entities, certain former citizens or residents of the United States, or Non-U.S. Holders that hold our common stock as part of a straddle, hedge, conversion or other integrated transaction). This discussion does not address any U.S. state or local or non-U.S. tax considerations or any U.S. federal gift, unearned income Medicare contribution or alternative minimum tax considerations.

As used in this discussion, the term “Non-U.S. Holder” means a beneficial owner of our common stock that, for U.S. federal income tax purposes, is:

 

   

an individual who is neither a citizen nor a resident of the United States;

 

   

a corporation that is not created or organized in or under the laws of the United States, any state thereof, or the District of Columbia;

 

   

an estate that is not subject to U.S. federal income tax on income from non-U.S. sources which is not effectively connected with the conduct of a trade or business in the United States; or

 

   

a trust unless (i) a court within the United States is able to exercise primary supervision over its administration and one or more U.S. persons have the authority to control all of its substantial decisions or (ii) it has in effect a valid election under applicable U.S. Treasury regulations to be treated as a U.S. person.

If an entity treated as a partnership for U.S. federal income tax purposes invests in our common stock, the U.S. federal income tax considerations relating to such investment will depend in part upon the status and activities of such entity and the particular partner. Any such entity should consult its own tax advisor regarding the U.S. federal income tax considerations applicable to it and its partners relating to the purchase, ownership and disposition of our common stock.

PERSONS CONSIDERING AN INVESTMENT IN OUR COMMON STOCK SHOULD CONSULT THEIR OWN TAX ADVISORS REGARDING THE U.S. FEDERAL, STATE AND LOCAL AND NON-U.S. INCOME, ESTATE AND OTHER TAX CONSIDERATIONS RELATING TO THE PURCHASE, OWNERSHIP AND DISPOSITION OF OUR COMMON STOCK IN LIGHT OF THEIR PARTICULAR CIRCUMSTANCES.

Distributions on Common Stock

If we make a distribution of cash or other property (other than certain pro rata distributions of our common stock or rights to acquire our common stock) in respect of a share of our common stock, the distribution generally will be treated as a dividend to the extent it is paid from our current or accumulated earnings and profits (as determined under U.S. federal income tax principles). If the amount of such distribution exceeds our current and accumulated earnings and profits, such excess generally will be treated first as a tax-free return of capital to the extent of the Non-U.S. Holder’s adjusted tax basis in such share of our common stock, and then as

 

169


Table of Contents

capital gain. Distributions treated as dividends on our common stock that are paid to or for the account of a Non-U.S. Holder generally will be subject to U.S. federal withholding tax at a rate of 30%, or at a lower rate if provided by an applicable tax treaty and the Non-U.S. Holder provides the documentation (generally, Internal Revenue Service (“IRS”) Form W-8BEN) required to claim benefits under such tax treaty to the applicable withholding agent.

If, however, a dividend is effectively connected with the conduct of a trade or business in the United States by a Non-U.S. Holder (and, if required by an applicable income tax treaty, is attributable to a U.S. permanent establishment maintained by the Non-U.S. Holder), such dividend generally will not be subject to the 30% U.S. federal withholding tax if such Non-U.S. Holder provides the appropriate documentation (generally, IRS Form W-8ECI) to the applicable withholding agent. Instead, such Non-U.S. Holder generally will be subject to U.S. federal income tax on such dividend in substantially the same manner as a U.S. holder (except as provided by an applicable tax treaty). In addition, a Non-U.S. Holder that is treated as a corporation for U.S. federal income tax purposes may be subject to a branch profits tax at a rate of 30% (or a lower rate if provided by an applicable tax treaty) on its effectively connected income for the taxable year, subject to certain adjustments.

The foregoing discussion is subject to the discussion below under “—FATCA Withholding” and “—Information Reporting and Backup Withholding”.

Sale, Exchange or Other Disposition of Common Stock

A Non-U.S. Holder generally will not be subject to U.S. federal income tax on any gain recognized on the sale, exchange or other disposition of our common stock unless:

 

  1. such gain is effectively connected with the conduct of a trade or business in the United States by such Non-U.S. Holder (and, if required by an applicable income tax treaty, is attributable to a U.S. permanent establishment maintained by the Non-U.S. Holder), in which event such Non-U.S. Holder generally will be subject to U.S. federal income tax on such gain in substantially the same manner as a U.S. holder (except as provided by an applicable tax treaty) and, if it is treated as a corporation for U.S. federal income tax purposes, may also be subject to a branch profits tax at a rate of 30% (or a lower rate if provided by an applicable tax treaty);

 

  2. such Non-U.S. Holder is an individual who is present in the United States for 183 days or more in the taxable year of such sale, exchange or disposition and certain other conditions are met, in which event such gain (net of certain U.S. source losses) generally will be subject to U.S. federal income tax at a rate of 30% (except as provided by an applicable tax treaty); or

 

  3. we are or have been a “United States real property holding corporation” for U.S. federal income tax purposes at any time during the shorter of (x) the five-year period ending on the date of such sale, exchange or other disposition and (y) such Non-U.S. Holder’s holding period with respect to such common stock, and certain other conditions are met.

Generally, a corporation is a “United States real property holding corporation” if the fair market value of its United States real property interests equals or exceeds 50% of the sum of the fair market value of its worldwide real property interests and its other assets used or held for use in a trade or business (all as determined for U.S. federal income tax purposes). We do not believe that we are, and we do not presently anticipate that we will become, a United States real property holding corporation.

The foregoing discussion is subject to the discussion below under “—FATCA Withholding” and “—Information Reporting and Backup Withholding”.

 

170


Table of Contents

FATCA Withholding

Under the Foreign Account Tax Compliance Act provisions of the Code and related U.S. Treasury guidance (“FATCA”), a withholding tax of 30% will be imposed in certain circumstances on payments of (a) dividends on our common stock on or after July 1, 2014, and (b) gross proceeds from the sale or other disposition of our common stock on or after January 1, 2017. In the case of payments made to a “foreign financial institution” (generally including an investment fund), as a beneficial owner or as an intermediary, the tax generally will be imposed, subject to certain exceptions, unless such institution (i) enters into (or is otherwise subject to) and complies with an agreement with the U.S. government (a “FATCA Agreement”) or (ii) is required by and complies with applicable foreign law enacted in connection with an intergovernmental agreement between the United States and a foreign jurisdiction (an “IGA”), in either case to, among other things, collect and provide to the U.S. tax authorities or other relevant tax authorities certain information regarding U.S. account holders of such institution. In the case of payments made to a foreign entity that is not a financial institution (as a beneficial owner), the tax generally will be imposed, subject to certain exceptions, unless such entity provides the withholding agent with a certification that it does not have any “substantial” U.S. owner (generally, any specified U.S. person that directly or indirectly owns more than a specified percentage of such entity) or that identifies its “substantial” U.S. owners. If our common stock is held through a foreign financial institution that enters into (or is otherwise subject to) a FATCA Agreement, such foreign financial institution (or, in certain cases, a person paying amounts to such foreign financial institution) generally will be required, subject to certain exceptions, to withhold tax on payments of dividends and proceeds described above made to (x) a person (including an individual) that fails to comply with certain information requests or (y) a foreign financial institution that has not entered into (and is not otherwise subject to) a FATCA Agreement and is not a person required to comply with FATCA pursuant to applicable foreign law enacted in connection with an IGA. Each Non-U.S. Holder should consult its own tax advisor regarding the application of FATCA to the ownership and disposition of our common stock.

Information Reporting and Backup Withholding

Amounts treated as payments of dividends on our common stock paid to a Non-U.S. Holder and the amount of any tax withheld from such payments generally must be reported annually to the IRS and to such Non-U.S. Holder.

The information reporting and backup withholding rules that apply to payments of dividends to certain U.S. persons generally will not apply to payments of dividends on our common stock to a Non-U.S. Holder if such Non-U.S. Holder certifies under penalties of perjury that it is not a U.S. person (generally by providing an IRS Form W-8BEN) or otherwise establishes an exemption.

Proceeds from the sale, exchange or other disposition of our common stock by a Non-U.S. Holder effected through a non-U.S. office of a U.S. broker or of a non-U.S. broker with certain specified U.S. connections generally will be subject to information reporting (but not backup withholding) unless such Non-U.S. Holder certifies under penalties of perjury that it is not a U.S. person (generally by providing an IRS Form W-8BEN) or otherwise establishes an exemption. Proceeds from the sale, exchange or other disposition of our common stock by a Non-U.S. Holder effected through a U.S. office of a broker generally will be subject to information reporting and backup withholding unless such Non-U.S. Holder certifies under penalties of perjury that it is not a U.S. person (generally by providing an IRS Form W-8BEN) or otherwise establishes an exemption.

Backup withholding is not an additional tax. Any amounts withheld under the backup withholding rules generally will be allowed as a refund or a credit against a Non-U.S. Holder’s U.S. federal income tax liability if the required information is furnished by such Non-U.S. Holder on a timely basis to the IRS.

U.S. Federal Estate Tax

Shares of our common stock owned or treated as owned by an individual Non-U.S. Holder at the time of such Non-U.S. Holder’s death will be included in such Non-U.S. Holder’s gross estate for U.S. federal estate tax purposes and may be subject to U.S. federal estate tax unless an applicable estate tax treaty provides otherwise.

 

171


Table of Contents

UNDERWRITING

Under the terms and subject to the conditions contained in an underwriting agreement dated                      , 2013, we have agreed to sell to the underwriters named below, for whom Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC is acting as representative, the following respective numbers of shares of common stock:

 

Underwriter

   Number
of Shares

Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC

  
  

 

Total .

  
  

 

The underwriting agreement provides that the underwriters are obligated to purchase all the shares of common stock in the offering if any are purchased, other than those shares covered by the over-allotment option described below. The underwriting agreement also provides that if an underwriter defaults, the purchase commitments of non-defaulting underwriters may be increased or the offering may be terminated.

We have granted to the underwriters a 30-day option to purchase on a pro rata basis up to             additional shares at the initial public offering price less the underwriting discounts and commissions. The option may be exercised only to cover any over-allotments of common stock.

The underwriters are offering the shares, subject to prior sale, when, as and if issued to and accepted by them, subject to approval of legal matters by their counsel including the validity of the shares, and subject to other conditions contained in the underwriting agreement, such as the receipt by the underwriters of officer’s certificates and legal opinions. The offering of the shares by the underwriters is also subject to the underwriters right to reject any order in whole or in part.

The underwriters propose to offer the shares of common stock initially at the public offering price on the cover page of this prospectus and to selling group members at that price less a selling concession of up to $         per share. After the initial public offering, the representative may change the public offering price and selling concession.

The following table summarizes the compensation we will pay:

 

     Per Share      Total  
     Without
Over-allotment
     With
Over-allotment
     Without
Over-allotment
     With
Over-allotment
 

Underwriting Discounts and Commissions paid by us

   $                    $                    $                    $                

We estimate that our out-of-pocket expenses for this offering (not including any underwriting discounts and commissions) will be approximately $        . We have agreed to reimburse the underwriters for expenses of $         related to clearance of this offering with FINRA.

The representative has informed us that the underwriters do not expect sales to accounts over which the underwriters have discretionary authority to exceed 5% of the shares of common stock being offered.

We have agreed that we will not offer, sell, contract to sell, pledge or otherwise dispose of, directly or indirectly, or file with the Securities and Exchange Commission a registration statement under the Securities Act relating to, any shares of our common stock or securities convertible into or exchangeable or exercisable for any shares of our common stock, or publicly disclose the intention to make any offer, sale, pledge, disposition or filing, without the prior written consent of Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC for a period of 180 days after the date of this prospectus, except issuances pursuant to the conversion or exchange of convertible or exchangeable

 

172


Table of Contents

securities or the exercise of warrants or options, in each case outstanding on the date hereof, grants of employee stock options pursuant to the terms of a plan in effect on the date hereof or issuances pursuant to the exercise of such options. However, in the event that either (1) during the last 17 days of the “lock-up” period, we release earnings results or material news or a material event relating to us occurs or (2) prior to the expiration of the “lock-up” period, we announce that we will release earnings results during the 16-day period beginning on the last day of the “lock-up” period, then in either case the expiration of the “lock-up” will be extended until the expiration of the 18-day period beginning on the date of the release of the earnings results or the occurrence of the material news or event, as applicable, unless Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC waives, in writing, such an extension.

Our officers, directors and HGI have agreed that they will not, subject to customary exceptions, offer, sell, contract to sell, pledge or otherwise dispose of, directly or indirectly, any shares of our common stock or securities convertible into or exchangeable or exercisable for any shares of our common stock, enter into any transaction that would have the same effect, or enter into any swap, hedge or other arrangement that transfers, in whole or in part, any of the economic consequences of ownership of our common stock, whether any of these transactions are to be settled by delivery of our common stock or other securities, in cash or otherwise, or publicly disclose the intention to make any offer, sale, pledge or disposition, or to enter into any transaction, swap, hedge or other arrangement, without, in each case, the prior written consent of Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC for a period of 180 days after the date of this prospectus. However, in the event that either (1) during the last 17 days of the “lock-up” period, we release earnings results or material news or a material event relating to us occurs or (2) prior to the expiration of the “lock-up” period, we announce that we will release earnings results during the 16-day period beginning on the last day of the “lock-up” period, then in either case the expiration of the “lock-up” will be extended until the expiration of the 18-day period beginning on the date of the release of the earnings results or the occurrence of the material news or event, as applicable, unless Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC waives, in writing, such an extension.

We have agreed to indemnify the several underwriters against liabilities under the Securities Act, or contribute to payments that the underwriters may be required to make in that respect.

We intend to apply to list the shares of common stock on the              under the symbol “            ”.

Prior to the offering, there has been no public market for our common stock. The initial public offering price will be determined through negotiations between us and the representatives. In determining the initial public offering price, we and the representative expect to consider a number of factors including:

 

   

the information set forth in this prospectus and otherwise available to the underwriters;

 

   

our prospects and the history and prospects for the industry in which we compete;

 

   

an assessment of our management;

 

   

our prospects for future earnings;

 

   

the recent market prices of, and demand for, publicly-traded common stock of generally companies;

 

   

the general condition of the securities markets at the time of the offering; and

 

   

other factors deemed relevant by the underwriters and us.

Neither we nor the underwriters can assure investors that an active trading market will develop for our common stock, or that shares of our common stock will trade in the public market at or above the initial public offering price.

 

173


Table of Contents

In connection with the offering, the underwriters may engage in stabilizing transactions, over-allotment transactions, syndicate covering transactions and penalty bids in accordance with Regulation M under the Exchange Act.

 

   

Stabilizing transactions permit bids to purchase the underlying security so long as the stabilizing bids do not exceed a specified maximum.

 

   

Over-allotment transactions involve sales by the underwriters of shares in excess of the number of shares the underwriters are obligated to purchase, which creates a syndicate short position. The short position may be either a covered short position or a naked short position. In a covered short position, the number of shares over-allotted by the underwriters is not greater than the number of shares that they may purchase in the over-allotment option. In a naked short position, the number of shares involved is greater than the number of shares in the over-allotment option. The underwriters may close out any covered short position by either exercising their over-allotment option and/or purchasing shares in the open market.

 

   

Syndicate covering transactions involve purchases of the common stock in the open market after the distribution has been completed in order to cover syndicate short positions. In determining the source of shares to close out the short position, the underwriters will consider, among other things, the price of shares available for purchase in the open market as compared to the price at which they may purchase shares through the over-allotment option. If the underwriters sell more shares than could be covered by the over-allotment option, a naked short position, the position can only be closed out by buying shares in the open market. A naked short position is more likely to be created if the underwriters are concerned that there could be downward pressure on the price of the shares in the open market after pricing that could adversely affect investors who purchase in the offering.

 

   

Penalty bids permit the representative to reclaim a selling concession from a syndicate member when the common stock originally sold by the syndicate member is purchased in a stabilizing or syndicate covering transaction to cover syndicate short positions.

These stabilizing transactions, over-allotment transactions, syndicate covering transactions and penalty bids may have the effect of raising or maintaining the market price of our common stock or preventing or retarding a decline in the market price of the common stock. As a result, the price of our common stock may be higher than the price that might otherwise exist in the open market. These transactions may be effected on the          or otherwise and, if commenced, may be discontinued at any time.

A prospectus in electronic format may be made available on the web sites maintained by one or more of the underwriters, or selling group members, if any, participating in this offering and one or more of the underwriters participating in this offering may distribute prospectuses electronically. The representative may agree to allocate a number of shares to underwriters and selling group members for sale to their online brokerage account holders. Internet distributions will be allocated by the underwriters and selling group members that will make internet distributions on the same basis as other allocations.

Other Relationships

Certain of the underwriters and their affiliates have provided in the past to us and our affiliates and may provide from time to time in the future certain commercial banking, financial advisory, investment banking and other services for us and such affiliates in the ordinary course of their business, for which they have received and may continue to receive customary fees and commissions. In addition, from time to time, certain of the underwriters and their affiliates may effect transactions for their own account or the account of customers, and hold on behalf of themselves or their customers, long or short positions in our debt or equity securities or loans, or derivatives or other securities based on our annuities and life insurance products, and may do so in the future. The underwriters are full service financial institutions engaged in various activities, which may include securities trading, commercial and investment banking, financial advisory, investment management, principal investment, hedging, financing and brokerage activities.

 

174


Table of Contents

Selling Restrictions

Notice to Prospective Investors in the European Economic Area

In relation to each Member State of the European Economic Area which has implemented the Prospectus Directive (each, a “Relevant Member State”), each underwriter represents and agrees that with effect from and including the date on which the Prospectus Directive is implemented in that Relevant Member State, it has not made and will not make an offer of shares which are the subject of the offering contemplated by this prospectus to the public in that Relevant Member State other than:

 

  (a) to any legal entity which is a qualified investor as defined in the Prospectus Directive;

 

  (b) to fewer than 100 or, if the Relevant Member State has implemented the relevant provision of the 2010 PD Amending Directive, 150, natural or legal persons (other than qualified investors as defined in the Prospectus Directive), as permitted under the Prospectus Directive, subject to obtaining the prior consent of the representatives for any such offer; or

 

  (c) in any other circumstances falling within Article 3(2) of the Prospectus Directive, provided that no such offer of shares shall require us or any underwriter to publish a prospectus pursuant to Article 3 of the Prospectus Directive.

For the purposes of this provision, the expression an “offer to the public” in relation to any shares in any Relevant Member State means the communication in any form and by any means of sufficient information on the terms of the offer and the shares to be offered so as to enable an investor to decide to purchase or subscribe the shares, as the same may be varied in that Member State by any measure implementing the Prospectus Directive in that Member State, the expression Prospectus Directive means Directive 2003/71/EC (and amendments thereto, including the 2010 PD Amending Directive, to the extent implemented in the Relevant Member State), and includes any relevant implementing measure in the Relevant Member State and the expression “2010 PD Amending Directive” means Directive 2010/73/EU.

Notice to Prospective Investors in the United Kingdom

Each of the underwriters severally represents, warrants and agrees as follows:

 

  (a) it has only communicated or caused to be communicated and will only communicate or cause to be communicated an invitation or inducement to engage in investment activity (within the meaning of Section 21 of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 (“FSMA”) received by it in connection with the issue or sale of the shares in circumstances in which Section 21 of the FSMA does not apply to us; and

 

  (b) it has complied with, and will comply with all applicable provisions of the FSMA with respect to anything done by it in relation to the shares in, from or otherwise involving the United Kingdom.

 

175


Table of Contents

NOTICE TO CANADIAN RESIDENTS

Resale Restrictions

The distribution of the shares in Canada is being made only in the provinces of Ontario, Quebec, Alberta, British Columbia and Manitoba on a private placement basis exempt from the requirement that we prepare and file a prospectus with the securities regulatory authorities in each province where trades of the shares are made. Any resale of the shares in Canada must be made under applicable securities laws which may vary depending on the relevant jurisdiction, and which may require resales to be made under available statutory exemptions or under a discretionary exemption granted by the applicable Canadian securities regulatory authority. Purchasers are advised to seek legal advice prior to any resale of the shares.

Representations of Purchasers

By purchasing shares in Canada and accepting delivery of a purchase confirmation, a purchaser is representing to us and the dealer from whom the purchase confirmation is received that:

 

   

the purchaser is entitled under applicable provincial securities laws to purchase the shares without the benefit of a prospectus qualified under those securities laws as it is an “accredited investor” as defined under National Instrument 45-106— Prospectus and Registration Exemptions ,

 

   

the purchaser is a “Canadian permitted client” as defined in National Instrument 31-103— Registration Requirements and Exemptions , or as otherwise interpreted and applied by the Canadian Securities Administrators,

 

   

where required by law, the purchaser is purchasing as principal and not as agent,

 

   

the purchaser has reviewed the text above under Resale Restrictions, and

 

   

the purchaser acknowledges and consents to the provision of specified information concerning the purchase of the shares to the regulatory authority that by law is entitled to collect the information, including certain personal information. For purchasers in Ontario, questions about such indirect collection of personal information should be directed to Administrative Support Clerk, Ontario Securities Commission, Suite 1903, Box 55, 20 Queen Street West, Toronto, Ontario M5H 3S8 or on (416) 593-3684.

Rights of Action—Ontario Purchasers

Under Ontario securities legislation, certain purchasers who purchase a security offered by this prospectus during the period of distribution will have a statutory right of action for damages, or while still the owner of the shares, for rescission against us in the event that this prospectus contains a misrepresentation without regard to whether the purchaser relied on the misrepresentation. The right of action for damages is exercisable not later than the earlier of 180 days from the date the purchaser first had knowledge of the facts giving rise to the cause of action and three years from the date on which payment is made for the shares. The right of action for rescission is exercisable not later than 180 days from the date on which payment is made for the shares. If a purchaser elects to exercise the right of action for rescission, the purchaser will have no right of action for damages against us. In no case will the amount recoverable in any action exceed the price at which the shares were offered to the purchaser and if the purchaser is shown to have purchased the securities with knowledge of the misrepresentation, we will have no liability. In the case of an action for damages, we will not be liable for all or any portion of the damages that are proven to not represent the depreciation in value of the shares as a result of the misrepresentation relied upon. These rights are in addition to, and without derogation from, any other rights or remedies available at law to an Ontario purchaser. The foregoing is a summary of the rights available to an Ontario purchaser. Ontario purchasers should refer to the complete text of the relevant statutory provisions.

 

176


Table of Contents

Enforcement of Legal Rights

All of our directors and officers as well as the experts named herein may be located outside of Canada and, as a result, it may not be possible for Canadian purchasers to effect service of process within Canada upon us or those persons. All or a substantial portion of our assets and the assets of those persons may be located outside of Canada and, as a result, it may not be possible to satisfy a judgment against us or those persons in Canada or to enforce a judgment obtained in Canadian courts against us or those persons outside of Canada.

Taxation and Eligibility for Investment

Canadian purchasers of the shares should consult their own legal and tax advisors with respect to the tax consequences of an investment in the shares in their particular circumstances and about the eligibility of the shares for investment by the purchaser under relevant Canadian legislation.

 

177


Table of Contents

LEGAL MATTERS

The validity of the common stock offered in this offering will be passed upon for us by Debevoise & Plimpton LLP, New York, New York and for the underwriters by Davis Polk & Wardwell LLP, New York, New York.

EXPERTS

The financial statements of Fidelity & Guaranty Life and subsidiaries (Successor) as of September 30, 2012 and 2011 and for the year ended September 30, 2012 and the period from April 6, 2011 through September 30, 2011, and of Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc. (Predecessor) for the period January 1, 2011 through April 5, 2011, and for the year ended December 31, 2010 have been included herein in reliance upon the report of KPMG LLP, independent registered public accounting firm, appearing elsewhere herein, and upon ther authority of said firm as experts in accounting and auditing.

WHERE YOU CAN FIND ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

We have filed with the SEC a registration statement on Form S-1 under the Securities Act, with respect to the common stock offered hereby. This prospectus does not contain all of the information set forth in the registration statement and the exhibits and schedules thereto. Some items are omitted in accordance with the rules and regulations of the SEC. For further information with respect to us and the common stock offered hereby, we refer you to the registration statement and the exhibits and schedules filed therewith. Statements contained in this prospectus as to the contents of any contract, agreement or any other document referred to are summaries of the material terms of the respective contract, agreement or other document. With respect to each of these contracts, agreements or other documents filed as an exhibit to the registration statement, reference is made to the exhibits for a more complete description of the matter involved.

A copy of the registration statement, and the exhibits and schedules thereto, may be inspected without charge at the public reference facilities maintained by the SEC at 100 F Street, N.E., Washington, D.C. 20549. Copies of these materials may be obtained by writing to the Public Reference Section of the SEC at 100 F Street, N.E., Washington, D.C. 20549. Please call the SEC at 1-800-SEC-0330 for further information on the operation of the public reference facilities. The SEC maintains a website that contains reports, proxy and information statements and other information regarding registrants, like us, that file electronically with the SEC. The address of the SEC’s website is http://www.sec.gov.

Upon the completion of this offering, we will become subject to the information and periodic reporting requirements of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, and, accordingly, will file annual reports containing financial statements audited by an independent public accounting company, quarterly reports containing unaudited financial statements, current reports, proxy statements and other information with the SEC. You will be able to inspect and copy these reports, proxy statements and other information at the public reference facilities maintained by the SEC at the address noted above. You will also be able to obtain copies of this material from the Public Reference Room of the SEC as described above, or inspect them without charge at the SEC’s website. Upon completion of this offering, you will also be able to access, free of charge, our reports filed with the SEC (for example, our Annual Report on Form 10-K, our Quarterly Reports on Form 10-Q and our Current Reports on Form 8-K and any amendments to those forms) through the “Investor Relations” portion of our Internet website home.fglife.com. Reports filed with or furnished to the SEC will be available as soon as reasonably practicable after they are filed with or furnished to the SEC. Our website is included in this prospectus as an inactive textual reference only. The information found on our website is not part of this prospectus or any report filed with or furnished to the SEC.

 

178


Table of Contents

INDEX TO THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

     Page  

Audited Consolidated Financial Statements

  

Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

     F-2   

Consolidated Balance Sheets as of September 30, 2012 and 2011.

     F-3   

Consolidated Statements of Operations for the year ended September  30, 2012, the period from April 6, 2011 through September 30, 2011, the period from January 1, 2011 through April 5, 2011, and the year ended December 31, 2010

     F-4   

Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Income for the year ended September  30, 2012, the period from April 6, 2011 through September 30, 2011, the period from January 1, 2011 through April 5, 2011, and the year ended December 31, 2010

     F-5   

Consolidated Statements of Changes in Member’s Equity for the year ended September  30, 2012, the period from April 6, 2011 through September 30, 2011, the period from January 1, 2011 through April 5, 2011, and the year ended December 31, 2010

     F-6   

Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows for the year ended September  30, 2012, the period from April 6, 2011 through September 30, 2011, the period from January 1, 2011 through April 5, 2011, and the year ended December 31, 2010

     F-7   

Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

     F-8   

Schedule I—Summary of Investments—Other than Investments in Related Parties

     F-52   

Schedule II—Condensed Financial Information of Parent Only

     F-53   

Schedule III—Supplementary Insurance Information

     F-56   

Schedule IV—Reinsurance

     F-57   

Unaudited Condensed Consolidated Financial Statements

  

Condensed Consolidated Balance Sheets as of June 30, 2013 (unaudited) and September  30, 2012 (audited).

     F-59   

Unaudited Condensed Consolidated Statements of Operations for the Nine Months Ended June  30, 2013 and June 30, 2012

     F-60   

Unaudited Condensed Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Income for the Nine Months Ended June  30, 2013 and June 30, 2012

     F-61   

Unaudited Consolidated Statements of Changes in Member’s Equity for the Nine Months Ended June 30, 2013 and June 30, 2012

     F-62   

Unaudited Condensed Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows for the Nine Months Ended June  30, 2013 and June 30, 2012

     F-63   

Notes to Unaudited Condensed Consolidated Financial Statements

     F-64   

 

F-1


Table of Contents

Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

The Board of Directors and Shareholder

Fidelity & Guaranty Life:

We have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of Fidelity & Guaranty Life and subsidiaries (formerly, Harbinger F&G, LLC) (Successor) as of September 30, 2012 and 2011, and the related consolidated statements of operations, comprehensive income, changes in equity, and cash flows for the year ended September 30, 2012 and the period April 6, 2011 through September 30, 2011, and of Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc. (formerly, Old Mutual U.S. Life Holdings, Inc) (Predecessor) for the period January 1, 2011 through April 5, 2011, and the year ended December 31, 2010. In connection with our audits of the consolidated financial statements, we also have audited financial statement schedules I to IV. These consolidated financial statements and financial statement schedules are the responsibility of the Company’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these consolidated financial statements and financial statement schedules based on our audits.

We conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. An audit also includes assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.

In our opinion, the consolidated financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of Fidelity & Guaranty Life and subsidiaries (Successor) as of September 30, 2012 and 2011, and the related consolidated statements of operations, comprehensive income, changes in equity, and cash flows for the year ended September 30, 2012 and the period April 6, 2011 through September 30, 2011, and Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc (Predecessor) for the period January 1, 2011 through April 5, 2011, and the year ended December 31, 2010, in conformity with U.S. generally accepted accounting principles. Also in our opinion, the related financial statement schedules, when considered in relation to the consolidated financial statements taken as a whole, present fairly, in all material respects, the information set forth therein.

As discussed in Note 1 to the consolidated financial statements, the Successor acquired the Predecessor on April 6, 2011. Accordingly, the accompanying consolidated financial statements have been prepared in conformity with ASC 805, “Business Combinations,” for the Successor as a new entity with assets, liabilities and a capital structure not comparable to prior periods.

/s/ KPMG LLP

August 28, 2013

Baltimore, MD

 

 

F-2


Table of Contents

FIDELITY & GUARANTY LIFE AND SUBSIDIARIES

CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS

(In thousands)

 

     September 30,
2012
     September 30,
2011
 
ASSETS   

Investments:

     

Fixed maturity securities, available-for-sale, at fair value

   $ 16,088,913       $ 15,367,474   

Equity securities, available-for-sale, at fair value

     248,087         287,043   

Derivative investments

     200,667         52,335   

Other invested assets

     18,814         44,279   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total investments

     16,556,481         15,751,131   

Related party loans and investment

     182,069         —     

Cash and cash equivalents

     1,054,588         820,903   

Contingent purchase price reduction receivable

     41,000         —     

Accrued investment income

     191,577         212,848   

Reinsurance recoverable

     2,363,083         1,612,036   

Intangibles, net

     273,543         457,167   

Deferred tax assets

     279,636         207,729   

Other assets

     48,371         346,322   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total assets

   $ 20,990,348       $ 19,408,136   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 
LIABILITIES AND MEMBER’S EQUITY   

Contractholder funds

   $ 15,290,475       $ 14,549,970   

Future policy benefits

     3,614,788         3,598,208   

Liability for policy and contract claims

     91,082         56,650   

Note payable

     —           95,000   

Other liabilities

     703,222         432,907   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total liabilities

     19,699,567         18,732,735   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Member’s equity

     

Contributed capital

     415,576         379,359   

Retained earnings

     440,723         136,549   

Accumulated other comprehensive income

     434,482         159,493   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total member’s equity

     1,290,781         675,401   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total liabilities and member’s equity

   $ 20,990,348       $ 19,408,136   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.

 

F-3


Table of Contents

FIDELITY & GUARANTY LIFE AND SUBSIDIARIES

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF OPERATIONS

(In thousands)

 

    Successor           Predecessor  
    Year Ended
September 30,
2012
    April 6, 2011
to September 30,
2011
          January 1, 2011
to April 5,

2011
    Year Ended
December 31,
2010
 

Revenues:

           

Premiums

  $ 55,297      $ 39,002          $ 53,684      $ 219,970   

Net investment income

    716,271        369,840            232,634        915,587   

Net investment gains (losses)

    410,000        (166,891         84,485        60,117   

Insurance and investment product fees and other

    40,251        48,915            23,783        108,254   
 

 

 

   

 

 

       

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total revenues

    1,221,819        290,866            394,586        1,303,928   
 

 

 

   

 

 

       

 

 

   

 

 

 

Benefits and expenses:

           

Benefits and other changes in policy reserves

    777,372        247,632            228,729        862,994   

Acquisition and operating expenses, net of deferrals

    123,920        75,840            23,130        100,902   

Amortization of intangibles

    160,656        (11,115         131,703        273,038   
 

 

 

   

 

 

       

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total benefits and expenses

    1,061,948        312,357            383,562        1,236,934   
 

 

 

   

 

 

       

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating income (loss)

    159,871        (21,491         11,024        66,994   

Interest expense

    (2,556     (1,926         (5,922     (25,019

Bargain purchase gain from business acquisition

    —          158,341            —          —     

Gain on contingent purchase price reduction

    41,000        —              —          —     

Other income, net

    201        31            —          —     
 

 

 

   

 

 

       

 

 

   

 

 

 

Income before income taxes

    198,516        134,955            5,102        41,975   

Income tax benefit

    145,658        41,744            7,802        130,122   
 

 

 

   

 

 

       

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net income

  $ 344,174      $ 176,699          $ 12,904      $ 172,097   
 

 

 

   

 

 

       

 

 

   

 

 

 
 

Supplemental disclosures:

           

Total other-than-temporary impairments

  $ (24,336   $ (17,466       $ (2,939   $ (143,737

Less non-credit portion of other-than-temporary impairments included other comprehensive income

    (1,529     500            —          (57,614
 

 

 

   

 

 

       

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net other-than-temporary impairments

    (22,807     (17,966         (2,939     (86,123

Gains (losses) on derivative instruments

    146,052        (170,752         65,313        66,722   

Other realized investment gains

    286,755        21,827            22,111        79,518   
 

 

 

   

 

 

       

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total net investment gains (losses)

  $ 410,000      $ (166,891       $ 84,485      $ 60,117   
 

 

 

   

 

 

       

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

 

See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.

 

F-4


Table of Contents

FIDELITY & GUARANTY LIFE AND SUBSIDIARIES

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME

(In thousands)

 

    Successor           Predecessor  
    Year Ended
September 30,
2012
    April 6, 2011
to September 30,
2011
          January 1, 2011
to April 5,

2011
    Year Ended
December 31,
2010
 

Net income

  $ 344,174      $ 176,699          $ 12,904      $ 172,097   
 

Other comprehensive income (loss)

           

Unrealized investment gains:

           

Changes in unrealized investment gains before reclassification adjustment

    906,473        420,929            76,739        880,075   

Net reclassification adjustment for gains included in net income

    (263,948     (3,861         (19,172     20,307   
 

 

 

   

 

 

       

 

 

   

 

 

 

Changes in unrealized investment gains after reclassification adjustment

    642,525        417,068            57,567        900,382   

Adjustments to intangible assets

    (218,454     (172,057         (71,018     (612,827

Changes in deferred tax valuation allowance

    —          —              750        49,106   

Changes in deferred income tax asset/liability

    (148,469     (85,709         4,606        (100,617
 

 

 

   

 

 

       

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net unrealized gains on investments

    275,602        159,302            (8,095     236,044   
 

 

 

   

 

 

       

 

 

   

 

 

 

Changes in non-credit related other-than-temporary impairment:

           

Non-credit related other-than-temporary impairment

    (1,529     500            16,053        17,644   

Adjustments to intangible assets

    586        (206         (13,966     (10,764

Changes in deferred income tax asset/liability

    330        (103         (730     (2,408
 

 

 

   

 

 

       

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net non-credit related other-than-temporary impairment

    (613     191            1,357        4,472   
 

 

 

   

 

 

       

 

 

   

 

 

 

Other, net of tax

    —          —              290        (907
 

 

 

   

 

 

       

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net change to derive comprehensive income (loss) for the period

    274,989        159,493            (6,448     239,609   
 

 

 

   

 

 

       

 

 

   

 

 

 

Comprehensive income, net of tax

  $ 619,163      $ 336,192          $ 6,456      $ 411,706   
 

 

 

   

 

 

       

 

 

   

 

 

 

See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.

 

F-5


Table of Contents

FIDELITY & GUARANTY LIFE AND SUBSIDIARIES

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CHANGES IN MEMBER’S EQUITY

(In thousands)

 

     Additional
Paid-in Capital
    Retained
Earnings
(Accumulated
Deficit)
    Accumulated
Other
Comprehensive
Income
    Total
Equity
 

(Predecessor)

        

Balances at December 31, 2009

   $ 1,757,641      $ (609,692   $ (211,946   $ 936,003   

Net income

     —          172,097        —          172,097   

Unrealized investment gains, net

     —          —          240,516        240,516   

Other

     —          —          (907     (907

Issuance of 2.5 shares of common stock

     30,655        —          —          30,655   

Return of capital to parent

     (33,725     —          —          (33,725
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Balances at December 31, 2010

   $ 1,754,571      $ (437,595   $ 27,663      $ 1,344,639   

Net income

     —          12,904        —          12,904   

Unrealized investment losses, net

     —          —          (8,095     (8,095

Non-credit related other-than-temporary impairments

     —          —          1,357        1,357   

Other

     —          —          290        290   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Balances at April 5, 2011

   $ 1,754,571      $ (424,691   $ 21,215      $ 1,351,095   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

 

 

     Contributed
Capital
     Retained
Earnings
(Accumulated
Deficit)
    Accumulated
Other
Comprehensive
Income
    Total
Equity
 

(Successor)

         

Balances at April 6, 2011

   $ 491       $ (20,150   $ —        $ (19,659

Net income

     —           176,699        —          176,699   

Unrealized investment gains, net

     —           —          159,302        159,302   

Non-credit related other-than-temporary impairments

     —           —          191        191   

Capital contributions from Harbinger Group Inc.

     377,152         —          —          377,152   

Capital contributions from Harbinger Capital Partners Master Fund I, Ltd. to Front Street Re, Ltd.

     1,716         —          —          1,716   

Dividend

     —           (20,000     —          (20,000
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Balances at September 30, 2011

   $ 379,359       $ 136,549      $ 159,493      $ 675,401   

Net income

     —           344,174        —          344,174   

Unrealized investment gains, net

     —           —          275,602        275,602   

Non-credit related other-than-temporary impairments

     —           —          (613     (613

Stock compensation

     163         —          —          163   

Capital contributions from Harbinger Group Inc.

     36,054         —          —          36,054   

Dividends

     —           (40,000     —          (40,000
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Balances at September 30, 2012

   $ 415,576       $ 440,723      $ 434,482      $ 1,290,781   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.

 

F-6


Table of Contents

FIDELITY & GUARANTY LIFE AND SUBSIDIARIES

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS

(In thousands)

 

    Successor           Predecessor  
    Year Ended
September 30,
2012
    April 6, 2011
to September 30,
2011
          January 1, 2011
to April 5,

2011
    Year Ended
December 31,
2010
 

Cash flows from operating activities:

           

Net income

  $ 344,174      $ 176,699          $ 12,904      $ 172,097   

Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash provided by (used in) operating activities:

           

Bargain purchase gain from business acquisition

    —          (158,341         —          —     

Gain on contingent purchase price reduction

    (41,000     —              —          —     

Net recognized (gains) losses on investments

    (410,000     166,891            (84,485     (60,117

Amortization of intangibles

    160,656        (11,115         131,703        273,038   

Depreciation of properties

    2,846        1,685            —          —     

Stock-based compensation

    163        —              —          —     

Amortization of fixed maturity discounts and premiums

    86,943        59,937            4,602        3,850   

Deferred income taxes

    (220,047     (40,869         (8,492     (131,845

Deferred policy acquisition costs

    (194,900     (41,152         (25,012     (133,120

Interest credited/index credits to contractholder account balances

    586,814        140,004            155,172        557,672   

Collateral returned (posted)

    49,339        (148,420         —          —     

Charges assessed to contractholders for mortality and administration

    (14,932     (28,358         (8,157     (30,347

Cash transferred to reinsurers

    (176,770     (52,585         —          —     

Changes in operating assets and liabilities:

           

Trading securities

    —          —              —          240,130   

Reinsurance recoverable

    (89,078     (39,446         (1,908     (17,225

Accrued investment income

    15,224        1,674            (22,151     (10,612

Future policy benefits

    16,580        (6,337         (9,337     4,329   

Liability for policy and contract claims

    34,432        (3,750         (1,336     (16,349

Other operating

    149,581        (41,925         130,443        (243,119
 

 

 

   

 

 

       

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net cash provided by (used in) operating activities

    300,025        (25,408         273,946        608,382   

Cash flows from investing activities:

           

Cash acquired of $1,040,470 in 2011, net of acquisition cost of $345,000

    —          695,470            —          —     

Proceeds from investments, sold, matured or repaid:

           

Fixed maturities

    5,723,266        1,468,427            616,799        3,417,679   

Equity securities

    110,157        13,768            2,393        114,864   

Derivative investments and other invested assets

    157,563        86,437            44,736        290,372   

Cost of investments acquired:

           

Fixed maturities

    (5,583,495     (1,285,951         (397,032     (3,763,386

Equity securities

    (56,595     —              —          —     

Derivative investments and other invested assets

    (141,603     (66,905         (24,390     (109,460

Related party loans and investments

    (150,069     —              —          —     

Capital expenditures

    —          (1,745         —          —     

Other investing activities, net

    (6,209     (6,642         —          (769
 

 

 

   

 

 

       

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net cash provided by (used in) investing activities

    53,015        902,859            242,506        (50,700
 

 

 

   

 

 

       

 

 

   

 

 

 

Cash flows from financing activities:

           

Contractholder account deposits

    2,040,512        494,956            200,509        1,401,854   

Contractholder account withdrawals

    (1,979,558     (959,961         (472,816     (2,140,503

Capital contributions

    4,030        378,868            —          30,655   

Settlement of note payable

    (95,000     —              —          —     

Advances from Harbinger Group Inc.

    (49,339     49,339            —          —     

Drawdown of revolving credit facility from affiliate

    —          —              21,296        23,616   

Repayment of revolving credit facility to affiliate

    —          —              —          (23,616

Dividends paid

    (40,000     (20,000         —          (33,725
 

 

 

   

 

 

       

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net cash provided by (used in) financing activities

    (119,355     (56,798         (251,011     (741,719
 

 

 

   

 

 

       

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net increase (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents

    233,685        820,653            265,441        (184,037

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of period

    820,903        250            639,247        823,284   
 

 

 

   

 

 

       

 

 

   

 

 

 

Cash and cash equivalents at end of period

  $ 1,054,588      $ 820,903          $ 904,688      $ 639,247   
 

 

 

   

 

 

       

 

 

   

 

 

 

Supplemental disclosures of cash flow information:

           

Interest paid

  $ 2,556      $ 1,926          $ 23,296      $ 25,275   

Income taxes paid

    8,059        —              —          652   

See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.

 

F-7


Table of Contents

FIDELITY & GUARANTY LIFE AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

(Dollar amounts in thousands)

(1)    Basis of Presentation and Nature of Operations

Fidelity & Guaranty Life (formerly, Harbinger F&G, LLC) (“FGL” and, collectively with its subsidiaries, the “Company”) is a direct, wholly-owned subsidiary of Harbinger Group Inc. (“HGI”). HGI is a diversified holding company focused on obtaining controlling equity stakes in companies that operate across a diversified set of industries. HGI’s shares of common stock trade on the New York Stock Exchange (“NYSE”) under the symbol “HRG”.

FGL was formed on August 3, 2010 under the name of Harbinger OM, LLC, a Delaware limited liability company, which was at that time wholly-owned by Harbinger Capital Partners Master Fund I, Ltd. (the “Master Fund”), a 68.4% holder of the outstanding common stock (representing a 50.8% voting interest) of HGI as of September 30, 2012. On March 9, 2011, the Master Fund contributed its 100% membership interest in Harbinger OM, LLC to HGI pursuant to a transfer agreement discussed further in Note 16. In connection therewith, the Master Fund transferred to FGL its 100% ownership of FS Holdco Ltd. (“FS Holdco”), the ultimate parent company of Front Street Re Ltd. (“Front Street”), a Bermuda-based reinsurer. On April 8, 2011, HGI caused the name of “Harbinger OM, LLC” to be changed to “Harbinger F&G, LLC”. The Company did not have any significant activities in the period prior to April 5, 2011, other than incurring acquisition related expenses of $19,938 which are not reflected in the consolidated statement of operations but included in the consolidated statement of changes in equity.

The contribution of FGL, including FS Holdco and Front Street, to HGI is considered a transaction between entities under common control of the Master Fund under Accounting Standard Codification (“ASC”) Topic 805, “ Business Combinations ,” and is accounted for similar to the pooling of interest method. In accordance with the guidance in ASC Topic 805, the assets and liabilities transferred between entities under common control are recorded by the receiving entity based on their carrying amounts (or at the historical cost basis of the parent, if these amounts differ). Accordingly, FS Holdco and Front Street are reflected in the accompanying consolidated financial statements at the historical cost basis of the Master Fund, as if they were held by HFG from their inception. Other than FS Holdco and Front Street, HFG had no assets, liabilities or operations at the date it was contributed to HGI. As of September 20, 2010, Front Street had received cumulative capital contributions of $491 from the Master Fund and incurred general administrative start-up costs of $212 which are reflected as the opening balances of contributed capital and accumulated deficit, respectively, in the accompanying Consolidated Statement of Equity for the year ended in September 20, 2011.

As discussed further in Note 18, on April 6, 2011 (the “FGLH Acquisition Date”), the Company acquired Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc. (formerly, Old Mutual U.S. Life Holdings, Inc.), a Delaware corporation (“FGLH”), from OM Group (UK) Limited (“OMGUK”). Such acquisition (the “FGLH Acquisition”) has been accounted for using the acquisition method of accounting. Accordingly, the results of FGLH’s operations have been included in the Company’s financial statements commencing April 6, 2011.

FGLH’s primary business is the sale of individual life insurance products and annuities through independent agents, managing general agents, and specialty brokerage firms and in selected institutional markets. FGLH’s principal products are deferred annuities (including fixed indexed annuity (“FIA”) contracts), immediate annuities and life insurance products. FGLH markets products through its wholly-owned insurance subsidiaries, Fidelity & Guaranty Life Insurance Company (“FGL Insurance”) and Fidelity & Guaranty Life Insurance Company of New York (“FGL NY Insurance”), which together are licensed in all fifty states and the District of Columbia.

In these financial statements, “Successor” refers to the Company and “Predecessor” refers to FGLH prior to the FGLH Acquisition. The accompanying financial statements are presented for Successor and Predecessor

 

F-8


Table of Contents

periods, which relate to the accounting periods after and before April 6, 2011, respectively, the date of the closing of the FGLH Acquisition. For periods after April 6, 2011, the accompanying financial statements comprise the consolidated financial statements of the Company, which include the accounts of the Company and its subsidiaries including FGLH and their subsidiaries. For comparative purposes, FGLH’s consolidated financial statements have been included in the accompanying financial statements for periods prior to April 6, 2011 and include the consolidated accounts of FGLH and their subsidiaries. FGLH’s financial performance and financial condition reflected in these accompanying financial statements may not be indicative of the Company’s financial performance and financial condition in the future.

The Company’s business consists primarily of fixed rate annuities and, accordingly, there is only one reporting segment. Premiums and annuity deposits (net of coinsurance), which are not included as revenues (except for traditional premiums) in the accompanying consolidated statements of operations, collected during the year ended September 30, 2012, the Successor period from April 6, 2011 to September 30, 2011, the Predecessor period from January 1, 2011 to April 5, 2011, and the year ended December 31, 2010, by product type were as follows:

 

(in thousands)

   Successor           Predecessor  

Product Type

   Year Ended
September 30,
2012
     April 6, 2011 to
September 30,
2011
          January 1,
2011 to April 5,
2011
     Year Ended
December 31,
2010
 

Fixed indexed annuities

   $ 1,614,211       $ 314,521          $ 125,815       $ 760,205   

Fixed rate annuities

     64,718         26,423            15,845         251,476   

Single premium immediate annuities (SPIA)

     7,844         3,659            940         8,763   

Life insurance(1)

     85,919         93,264            64,265         246,712   
  

 

 

    

 

 

       

 

 

    

 

 

 
   $ 1,772,692       $ 437,867          $ 206,865       $ 1,267,156   
  

 

 

    

 

 

       

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

(1) Life insurance includes Universal Life (“UL”) and traditional life insurance products.

Prior to its acquisition by the Company, FGLH had a fiscal year end of December 31. The Company has a fiscal year end of September 30. Accordingly, the Company is presenting audited financial statements for nine months ended September 30, 2011, the transition period, which includes the results of the Predecessor and Successor in the accompanying financial statements.

The accompanying financial statements have been prepared in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America (“US GAAP”).

(2)    Significant Accounting Policies and Practices

Principles of Consolidation

The accompanying audited consolidated financial statements include the accounts of FGL and all other entities in which FGL has a controlling financial interest (none of which are variable interest entities). All intercompany accounts and transactions have been eliminated in consolidation.

Revenue Recognition

Insurance Premiums

The Company’s insurance premiums for traditional life insurance products are recognized as revenue when due from the contractholder. The Company’s traditional life insurance products include those products with fixed and guaranteed premiums and benefits and consist primarily of term life insurance and certain annuities with life contingencies.

 

F-9


Table of Contents

Premium collections for fixed indexed and fixed rate annuities, indexed universal life (“IUL”) policies and immediate annuities without life contingency are reported as deposit liabilities (i.e., contractholder funds) instead of as revenues. Similarly, cash payments to policyholders are reported as decreases in the liability for contractholder funds and not as expenses. Sources of revenues for products accounted for as deposit liabilities are net investment income, surrender and other charges deducted from contractholder funds, and net realized gains (losses) on investments.

Net Investment Income

Dividends and interest income, recorded in “Net investment income”, are recognized when earned. Amortization of premiums and accretion of discounts on investments in fixed maturity securities are reflected in “Net investment income” over the contractual terms of the investments in a manner that produces a constant effective yield.

For mortgage-backed securities, included in the fixed maturity AFS securities portfolios, the Company recognizes income using a constant effective yield based on anticipated prepayments and the estimated economic life of the securities. When actual prepayments differ significantly from originally anticipated prepayments, the effective yield is recalculated prospectively to reflect actual payments to date plus anticipated future payments. Any adjustments resulting from changes in effective yield are reflected in “Net investment income’’.

Net Investment Gains (Losses)

Net investment gains (losses) include realized gains and losses from the sale of investments, write-downs for other-than-temporary impairments of AFS investments, and gains and losses on derivative investments. Realized gains and losses on the sale of investments are determined using the specific identification method.

Product Fees

Product fee revenue from IUL products and deferred annuities is comprised of policy and contract fees charged for the cost of insurance, policy administration and is assessed on a monthly basis and recognized as revenue when assessed and earned. Product fee revenue also includes surrender charges which are recognized and collected when the policy is surrendered.

Cash and Cash Equivalents

The Company considers all highly liquid debt instruments purchased with original maturities of three months or less to be cash equivalents. As of September 30, 2012 and 2011, cash equivalents were $2,250 and $2,768, respectively.

Investments

Investment Securities

The Company’s investments in debt and equity securities have been designated as AFS and are carried at fair value with unrealized gains and losses included in “Accumulated other comprehensive income” (“AOCI”), net of associated intangibles “shadow adjustments” (discussed in Note 7) and deferred income taxes.

Available-for-Sale Securities—Other-Than-Temporary Impairments

The Company regularly reviews AFS securities for declines in fair value that it determines to be other-than-temporary. For an equity security, if the Company does not have the ability and intent to hold the security for a sufficient period of time to allow for a recovery in value, it concludes that an other-than-temporary impairment has occurred and the cost of the equity security is written down to the current fair value, with a corresponding

 

F-10


Table of Contents

charge to “Net investment gains (losses)” in the accompanying Consolidated Statements of Operations. When assessing its ability and intent to hold an equity security to recovery, the Company considers, among other things, the severity and duration of the decline in fair value of the equity security as well as the cause of the decline, a fundamental analysis of the liquidity, business prospects and the overall financial condition of the issuer.

For its fixed maturity available-for-sale securities, the Company generally considers the following in determining whether its unrealized losses are other-than-temporarily impaired:

 

   

The estimated range and period until recovery;

 

   

Current delinquencies and nonperforming assets of underlying collateral;

 

   

Expected future default rates;

 

   

Collateral value by vintage, geographic region, industry concentration or property type;

 

   

Subordination levels or other credit enhancements as of the balance sheet date as compared to origination; and

 

   

Contractual and regulatory cash obligations.

The Company recognizes other-than-temporary impairments on debt securities in an unrealized loss position when one of the following circumstances exists:

 

   

The Company does not expect full recovery of its amortized cost based on the estimate of cash flows expected to be collected;

 

   

The Company intends to sell a security; or

 

   

It is more likely than not that the Company will be required to sell a security prior to recovery.

If the Company intends to sell a debt security or it is more likely than not the Company will be required to sell the security before recovery of its amortized cost basis and the fair value of the security is below amortized cost, the Company will conclude that an other-than-temporary impairment has occurred and the amortized cost is written down to current fair value, with a corresponding charge to “Net investment gains (losses)” in the accompanying Consolidated Statements of Operations. If the Company does not intend to sell a debt security or it is more likely than not the Company will not be required to sell a debt security before recovery of its amortized cost basis and the present value of the cash flows expected to be collected is less than the amortized cost of the security (referred to as the credit loss), an other-than-temporary impairment has occurred and the amortized cost is written down to the estimated recovery value with a corresponding charge to “Net investment gains (losses)” in the accompanying Consolidated Statements of Operations, as this amount is deemed the credit loss portion of the other-than-temporary impairment. The remainder of the decline to fair value is recorded in AOCI as unrealized other-than-temporary impairment on available-for-sale securities, as this amount is considered a non-credit (i.e., recoverable) impairment.

When assessing the Company’s intent to sell a debt security or if it is more likely than not the Company will be required to sell a debt security before recovery of its cost basis, the Company evaluates facts and circumstances such as, but not limited to, decisions to reposition the Company’s security portfolio, sale of securities to meet cash flow needs and sales of securities to capitalize on favorable pricing and tax planning strategies. In order to determine the amount of the credit loss for a security, the Company calculates the recovery value by performing a discounted cash flow analysis based on the current cash flows and future cash flows the Company expects to recover. The discount rate is the effective interest rate implicit in the underlying security. The effective interest rate is the original purchased yield or the yield at the date the debt security was previously impaired.

When evaluating mortgage-backed securities and asset-backed securities, the Company considers a number of pool-specific factors as well as market level factors when determining whether or not the impairment on the security is temporary or other-than-temporary. The most important factor is the performance of the underlying

 

F-11


Table of Contents

collateral in the security and the trends of that performance. The Company uses this information about the collateral to forecast the timing and rate of mortgage loan defaults, including making projections for loans that are already delinquent and for those loans that are currently performing but may become delinquent in the future. Other factors used in this analysis include type of underlying collateral (e.g., prime, Alternative A-paper (“Alt-A”), or subprime), geographic distribution of underlying loans and timing of liquidations by state. Once default rates and timing assumptions are determined, the Company then makes assumptions regarding the severity of a default if it were to occur. Factors that impact the severity assumption include expectations for future home price appreciation or depreciation, loan size, first lien versus second lien, existence of loan level private mortgage insurance, type of occupancy and geographic distribution of loans. Once default and severity assumptions are determined for the security in question, cash flows for the underlying collateral are projected, including expected defaults and prepayments. These cash flows on the collateral are then translated to cash flows on the Company’s tranche based on the cash flow waterfall of the entire capital security structure. If this analysis indicates the entire principal on a particular security will not be returned, the security is reviewed for other-than-temporary impairments by comparing the present value of expected cash flows to amortized cost. To the extent that the security has already been impaired or was purchased at a discount, such that the amortized cost of the security is less than or equal to the present value of cash flows expected to be collected, no impairment is required. The Company also considers the ability of monoline insurers to meet their contractual guarantees on wrapped mortgage-backed securities. Otherwise, if the amortized cost of the security is greater than the present value of the cash flows expected to be collected, then an impairment is recognized.

The Company includes on the face of the Consolidated Statements of Operations the total other-than-temporary impairment recognized in net investment gains (losses), with an offset for the amount of non-credit impairments recognized in AOCI. The Company discloses the amount of other-than-temporary impairments recognized in AOCI and other disclosures related to other-than-temporary impairments in Notes 4 and the Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Income.

Derivative Financial Instruments

The Company hedges certain portions of its exposure to product related equity market risk by entering into derivative transactions. All of such derivative instruments are recognized as either assets or liabilities in the accompanying Consolidated Balance Sheets at fair value. The change in fair value is recognized within “Net investment gains (losses)” in the accompanying Consolidated Statements of Operations.

The Company purchases and issues financial instruments and products that may contain embedded derivative instruments. If it is determined that the embedded derivative possesses economic characteristics that are not clearly and closely related to the economic characteristics of the host contract, and a separate instrument with the same terms would qualify as a derivative instrument, the embedded derivative is bifurcated from the host contract for measurement purposes. The embedded derivative is carried at fair value with changes in fair value reported in the accompanying Consolidated Statements of Operations.

Intangible Assets

The Company’s intangible assets include value of business acquired (“VOBA”) and deferred acquisition costs (“DAC”).

VOBA represents the estimated fair value of the right to receive future net cash flows from in-force contracts in a life insurance company acquisition at the Acquisition Date. DAC represents costs that are related directly to new or renewal insurance contracts, which may be deferred to the extent recoverable. These costs include incremental direct costs of contract acquisition, primarily commissions, as well as certain costs related directly to underwriting, policy issuance and processing. Up front bonus credits to policyholder account values, which are considered to be deferred sales inducements (“DSI”), are accounted for similarly to DAC.

 

F-12


Table of Contents

The methodology for determining the amortization of DAC and VOBA varies by product type. For all insurance contracts accounted for under long-duration contract deposit accounting, amortization is based on assumptions consistent with those used in the development of the underlying contract adjusted for emerging experience and expected trends. Under traditional insurance contract accounting, US GAAP requires that assumptions for these types of products not be modified unless recoverability testing deems them to be inadequate. DAC and VOBA amortization are reported within “Amortization of intangibles” in the accompanying Consolidated Statements of Operations.

DAC and VOBA for IUL and investment-type products are generally amortized over the lives of the policies in relation to the incidence of estimated gross profits (“EGPs”) from investment income, surrender charges and other product fees, policy benefits, maintenance expenses, mortality net of reinsurance ceded and expense margins, and recognized gains (losses) on investments.

Changes in assumptions can have a significant impact on DAC and VOBA balances and amortization rates. Due to the relative size and sensitivity to minor changes in underlying assumptions of DAC and VOBA balances, the Company performs quarterly and annual analyses of DAC and VOBA for the annuity and IUL businesses. The DAC and VOBA balances are also periodically evaluated for recoverability to ensure that the unamortized portion does not exceed the expected recoverable amounts. At each evaluation date, actual historical gross profits are reflected, and estimated future gross profits and related assumptions are evaluated for continued reasonableness. Any adjustment in estimated future gross profits requires that the amortization rate be revised (“unlocking”) retroactively to the date of the policy or contract issuance. The cumulative unlocking adjustment is recognized as a component of current period amortization.

The carrying amounts of DAC and VOBA are adjusted for the effects of realized and unrealized gains and losses on debt securities classified as available-for-sale and certain derivatives and embedded derivatives. Amortization expense of DAC and VOBA reflects an assumption for an expected level of credit-related investment losses. When actual credit-related investment losses are realized, the Company performs a retrospective unlocking of DAC and VOBA amortization as actual margins vary from expected margins. This unlocking is reflected in the accompanying Consolidated Statements of Operations.

For investment-type products, the DAC and VOBA assets are adjusted for the impact of unrealized gains (losses) on investments as if these gains (losses) had been realized, with corresponding credits or charges included in AOCI.

Reinsurance

The Company’s insurance subsidiaries enter into reinsurance agreements with other companies in the normal course of business. The assets, liabilities, premiums and benefits of certain reinsurance contracts are presented on a net basis in the accompanying Consolidated Balance Sheets and Consolidated Statements of Operations, respectively, when there is a right of offset explicit in the reinsurance agreements. All other reinsurance agreements are reported on a gross basis in the Company’s Consolidated Balance Sheets as an asset for amounts recoverable from reinsurers or as a component of other liabilities for amounts, such as premiums, owed to the reinsurers, with the exception of amounts for which the right of offset also exists. Premiums and benefits are reported net of insurance ceded.

Income Taxes

FGL and certain of its non-life insurance subsidiaries are included in the consolidated U.S. Federal income tax return of HGI. The Company’s life insurance subsidiaries file a consolidated life insurance income tax return. Income taxes are accounted for under the asset and liability method. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are recognized for the future tax consequences attributable to differences between the financial statement carrying amounts of existing assets and liabilities and their respective tax basis and operating loss and tax credit

 

F-13


Table of Contents

carryforwards. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are measured using enacted tax rates expected to apply to taxable income in the years in which those temporary differences are expected to be recovered or settled. The effect on deferred tax assets and liabilities of a change in tax rates is recognized in income in the period that includes the enactment date. The Company has the ability and intent to recover in a tax-free manner assets (or liabilities) with book/tax basis differences for which no deferred taxes have been provided, in accordance with ASC Topic 740, “ Income Taxes ”. Accordingly, the Company did not provide deferred income taxes on the gain on contingent purchase price reduction of $41,000 in the year ended September 30, 2012 or on the bargain purchase gain of $158,341 on the FGLH Acquisition in the Successor period of April 6, 2011 to September 30, 2011.

The Company applies the accounting guidance for uncertain tax positions which prescribes a minimum recognition threshold a tax position is required to meet before being recognized in the financial statements. The guidance also provides information on derecognition, measurement, classification, interest and penalties, accounting in interim periods, disclosure and transition. The Company recognizes the effect of income tax positions only if those positions are more likely than not of being sustained. Recognized income tax positions are measured at the largest amount that is greater than 50% likely of being realized. Changes in recognition or measurement are reflected in the period in which the change in judgment occurs. Accrued interest expense and penalties related to uncertain tax positions are recorded in “Income tax benefit” in the Company’s Consolidated Statements of Operations. The Company had no unrecognized tax benefits related to uncertain tax positions as of September 30, 2012 and 2011.

Contractholder Funds and Future Policy Benefits

The liabilities for contractholder funds and future policy benefits for deferred annuities, IUL and UL policies consist of contract account balances that accrue to the benefit of the contractholders, excluding surrender charges and other liabilities. The liabilities for FIAs consist of the value of the host contract plus the value of the embedded derivative. The embedded derivative is carried at fair value in “Contractholder funds” in the accompanying Consolidated Balance Sheets with changes in fair value reported in the accompanying Consolidated Statements of Operations. Liabilities for immediate annuities without life contingencies are the present value of future benefits.

The liabilities for future policy benefits and claim reserves for traditional life policies and life contingent pay-out annuity policies are computed using assumptions for investment yields, mortality and withdrawals based principally on generally accepted actuarial methods and assumptions at the time of contract issue.

Liabilities for the secondary guarantees on IUL-type products or Investment-type contracts are calculated by multiplying the benefit ratio by the cumulative assessments recorded from contract inception through the balance sheet date less the cumulative secondary guarantee benefit payments plus interest. If experience or assumption changes result in a new benefit ratio, the reserves are adjusted to reflect the changes in a manner similar to the unlocking of DAC and VOBA. The accounting for secondary guarantee benefits impacts, and is impacted by, EGPs used to calculate amortization of DAC and VOBA.

Federal Home Loan Bank of Atlanta Agreements

Contractholder funds include funds related to funding agreements that have been issued to the Federal Home Loan Bank of Atlanta (“FHLB”) as a funding medium for single premium funding agreements issued by the Company to the FHLB.

Funding agreements were issued to the FHLB in 2003, 2004, 2005 and 2011. The funding agreements (i.e., immediate annuity contracts without life contingencies) provide a guaranteed stream of payments. Single premiums were received at the initiation of the funding agreements and were in the form of advances from the FHLB. Payments under the funding agreements extend through 2022. The reserves for the funding agreements totaled $364,140 and $169,580 at September 30, 2012 and 2011, respectively, and are included in “Contractholder funds” in the accompanying Consolidated Balance Sheets.

 

 

F-14


Table of Contents

In accordance with the agreements, the investments supporting the funding agreement liabilities are pledged as collateral to secure the FHLB funding agreement liabilities. The collateral investments had a fair value of $390,563 and $191,331 at September 30, 2012 and September 30, 2011, respectively.

Benefits and Other Changes in Policy Reserves

Benefit expenses for deferred annuity, FIA and IUL policies include benefit claims incurred during the period in excess of contract account balances. Other changes in policy reserves also include the change in reserves for life insurance products with secondary guarantee benefits. For traditional life, policy benefit claims are charged to expense in the period that the claims are incurred.

Retrospective Adjustments

As discussed further in Note 18, in Fiscal 2012, the Company finalized the provisional acquisition method balances for the FGLH Acquisition, resulting in retrospective adjustments which increased the bargain purchase gain and net income by $7,264 for the Successor period of April 6, 2011 through September 30, 2011.

Recent Accounting Pronouncements

Presentation of Comprehensive Income

In June 2011, the Financial Accounting Standards Board (“FASB”) issued amended disclosure requirements allowing the option to report comprehensive income either in a single continuous statement of comprehensive income which contains two sections, net income and other comprehensive income, or in two separate but consecutive statements. This guidance is effective for fiscal years ending after December 31, 2012 for nonpublic companies, but allows for early adoption. The Company elected early adoption using the two-statement approach.

Offsetting Assets and Liabilities

In December 2011, the FASB issued amended disclosure requirements for offsetting financial assets and financial liabilities to allow investors to better compare financial statements prepared under US GAAP with financial statements prepared under International Financial Reporting Standards. The new standards are effective for the Company beginning in the first quarter of its fiscal year ending September 30, 2014. The Company is currently evaluating the impact of this new accounting guidance on the disclosures included in its consolidated financial statements.

Accounting for Costs Associated with Acquiring or Renewing Insurance Contracts

In October 2010, as a result of a consensus of the FASB Emerging Issues Task Force, the FASB issued ASU No. 2010-26, “Financial Services-Insurance (Topic 944): Accounting for Costs Associated with Acquiring or Renewing Insurance Contracts” (“ASU 2010-26”), which modifies the definition of the types of costs incurred that can be capitalized in the acquisition of new and renewal insurance contracts. This guidance defines allowable DACs as the incremental direct cost of contract acquisition and certain costs related directly to underwriting, policy issuance, and processing. ASU 2010-26 is effective for fiscal years and for interim periods within those fiscal years beginning after December 15, 2011, with early application permitted. The guidance could be applied prospectively or retrospectively. The Company early adopted this standard on a prospective basis effective January 1, 2011. The adoption of this standard did not have a material impact on our consolidated financial statements. For the period from January 1, 2011 through April 5, 2011, the Company’s capitalized acquisitions costs were $799 lower than if the Company’s previous policy had been applied during that period.

 

F-15


Table of Contents

( 3)    Significant Risks and Uncertainties

Use of Estimates

The preparation of financial statements in conformity with US GAAP requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities and disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities at the date of the financial statements and the reported amounts of revenues and expenses during the reporting period. Due to the inherent uncertainty involved in making estimates, actual results in future periods could differ from those estimates.

The Company’s significant estimates which are susceptible to change in the near term relate to (1) recognition of deferred tax assets and related valuation allowances (see Notes 13 and 18), (2) fair value of certain invested assets and derivatives including embedded derivatives (see Notes 4 and 5), (3) other-than-temporary impairments of available-for-sale investments (see Note 4), (4) amortization of intangibles (see discussion of “Intangible Assets” in Note 2 and also Note 7), (5) estimates of reserves for loss contingencies, including litigation and regulatory reserves (see Note 14) and (6) fair value of the contingent purchase price reduction receivable (see Note 18).

Concentrations of Financial Instruments

As of September 30, 2012, our most significant investment in one industry was our investment securities in the banking industry with a fair value of $2,000,355, or 12% of the invested assets portfolio. Our holdings in this industry include investments in 118 different issuers with the top ten investments accounting for 36% of the total holdings in this industry. As of September 30, 2012, the Company’s exposure to sub-prime and Alternative-A residential mortgage-backed securities was $233,318 and $121,639, respectively, or each approximately 1% of the Company’s invested assets. As of September 30, 2012 and 2011, the Company had investments in five and 38 issuers that exceeded 10% of stockholders equity with a fair value of $710,069 and $3,582,473, or 4% and 23% of the invested assets portfolio, respectively. Additionally, the Company’s largest concentration in any single issuer as of September 30, 2012 and 2011 had a fair value of $152,876 and $159,265 or approximately 1% of the invested assets portfolio.

Concentrations of Financial and Capital Markets Risk

Financial markets in the United States and elsewhere have experienced extreme volatility and disruption for more than three years, due largely to the stresses affecting the global banking system. Like other life insurers, FGLH has been adversely affected by these conditions. FGLH is exposed to financial and capital markets risk, including changes in interest rates and credit spreads which have had an adverse effect on FGLH’s results of operations, financial condition and liquidity prior to the FGLH Acquisition. As discussed further in the following paragraph regarding risk factors, the Company expects to continue to face challenges and uncertainties that could adversely affect its results of operations and financial condition.

The Company’s exposure to interest rate risk relates primarily to the market price and cash flow variability associated with changes in interest rates. A rise in interest rates, in the absence of other countervailing changes, will decrease the net unrealized gain position of the Company’s investment portfolio and, if long-term interest rates rise dramatically within a six- to twelve-month time period, certain of the Company’s products may be exposed to disintermediation risk. Disintermediation risk refers to the risk that policyholders may surrender their contracts in a rising interest rate environment, requiring the Company to liquidate assets in an unrealized loss position. This risk is mitigated to some extent by the high level of surrender charge protection provided by the Company’s products.

 

F-16


Table of Contents

Concentration of Reinsurance Risk

The Company has a significant concentration of reinsurance with Wilton Reassurance Company (“Wilton Re”) (see Note 15) that could have a material impact on the Company’s financial position in the event that Wilton Re fails to perform its obligations under the various reinsurance treaties. As of September 30, 2012 the net amount recoverable from Wilton Re was $1,317,114. FGLH monitors both the financial condition of individual reinsurers and risk concentration arising from similar geographic regions, activities and economic characteristics of reinsurers to reduce the risk of default by such reinsurers.

(4)    Investments

The Company’s investments at September 30, 2012 and September 30, 2011 are summarized as follows:

 

     September 30, 2012  
     Amortized Cost      Gross Unrealized
Gains
     Gross Unrealized
Losses
    Fair Value and
Carrying Value
 

Available-for-sale securities

          

Asset-backed securities

   $ 1,010,938       $ 18,553       $ (1,609   $ 1,027,882   

Commercial mortgage-backed securities

     520,043         36,178         (2,407     553,814   

Corporates

     10,211,804         807,175         (9,968     11,009,011   

Equities

     237,499         11,860         (1,272     248,087   

Hybrids

     519,009         18,836         (9,550     528,295   

Municipals

     1,083,231         141,854         (1,090     1,223,995   

Agency residential mortgage-backed securities

     149,455         5,769         (334     154,890   

Non-agency residential mortgage-backed securities

     629,122         35,799         (4,262     660,659   

U.S. Government

     917,452         12,915         —          930,367   

Total available-for-sale securities

     15,278,553         1,088,939         (30,492     16,337,000   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Derivative investments

     142,123         66,973         (8,429     200,667   

Other invested assets

     18,814         —           —          18,814   

Total investments

   $ 15,439,490       $ 1,155,912       $ (38,921   $ 16,556,481   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

     September 30, 2011  
     Amortized Cost      Gross Unrealized
Gains
     Gross Unrealized
Losses
    Fair Value and
Carrying Value
 

Available-for-sale securities

          

Asset-backed securities

   $ 501,469       $ 1,785       $ (2,770   $ 500,484   

Commercial mortgage-backed securities

     580,313         3,427         (18,163     565,577   

Corporates

     11,479,862         506,264         (130,352     11,855,774   

Equities

     292,112         3,964         (9,033     287,043   

Hybrids

     699,915         10,429         (51,055     659,289   

Municipals

     824,562         111,929         (7     936,484   

Agency residential mortgage-backed securities

     217,354         4,966         (295     222,025   

Non-agency residential mortgage-backed securities

     465,666         1,971         (23,120     444,517   

U.S. Government

     175,054         8,270         —          183,324   

Total available-for-sale securities

     15,236,307         653,005         (234,795     15,654,517   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Derivative investments

     171,612         405         (119,682     52,335   

Other invested assets

     44,279         —           —          44,279   

Total investments

   $ 15,452,198       $ 653,410       $ (354,477   $ 15,751,131   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

F-17


Table of Contents

Included in AOCI were cumulative unrealized gains of $851 and $524 and unrealized losses of $1,880 and $24 related to the non-credit portion of other-than-temporary impairments on non-agency residential mortgage-backed securities (“RMBS”) at September 30, 2012 and 2011, respectively.

Securities held on deposit with various state regulatory authorities had a fair value of $20,692 and $17,867 at September 30, 2012, and 2011, respectively.

The amortized cost and fair value of fixed maturity available-for-sale securities by contractual maturities, as applicable, are shown below. Actual maturities may differ from contractual maturities because issuers may have the right to call or pre-pay obligations.

 

     September 30, 2012  
     Amortized Cost      Fair Value  

Corporate, Non-structured Hybrids, Municipal and U.S. Government securities:

     

Due in one year or less

   $ 700,491       $ 703,931   

Due after one year through five years

     3,230,602         3,324,453   

Due after five years through ten years

     3,692,333         3,995,811   

Due after ten years

     4,972,233         5,532,389   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Subtotal

     12,595,659         13,556,584   

Other securities which provide for periodic payments:

     

Asset-backed securities

     1,010,938         1,027,882   

Commercial-mortgage-backed securities

     520,043         553,814   

Structured hybrids

     135,837         135,084   

Agency residential mortgage-backed securities

     149,455         154,890   

Non-agency residential mortgage-backed securities

     629,122         660,659   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total fixed maturity available-for-sale securities

   $ 15,041,054       $ 16,088,913   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

As part of its ongoing securities monitoring process, the Company evaluates whether securities in an unrealized loss position could potentially be other-than-temporarily impaired. Excluding the non-credit portion of other-than-temporary impairments on non-agency residential mortgage-backed securities above, the Company has concluded that the fair values of the securities presented in the table below were not other-than-temporarily impaired as of September 30, 2012. This conclusion is derived from the issuers’ continued satisfaction of the securities’ obligations in accordance with their contractual terms along with the expectation that they will continue to do so. Also contributing to this conclusion is its determination that it is more likely than not that the Company will not be required to sell these securities prior to recovery, an assessment of the issuers’ financial condition, and other objective evidence. As it specifically relates to asset-backed securities and commercial mortgage-backed securities, the present value of cash flows expected to be collected is at least the amount of the amortized cost basis of the security and the Company’s management has the intent to hold these securities for a period of time sufficient to allow for any anticipated recovery in fair value.

 

F-18


Table of Contents

The fair value and gross unrealized losses of available-for-sale securities, aggregated by investment category, were as follows:

 

     September 30, 2012  
     Less than 12 months     12 months or longer     Total  
     Fair Value      Gross
Unrealized
Losses
    Fair Value      Gross
Unrealized
Losses
    Fair Value      Gross
Unrealized
Losses
 

Available-for-sale securities

               

Asset-backed securities

   $ 169,794       $ (1,042   $ 7,533       $ (567   $ 177,327       $ (1,609

Commercial-mortgage-backed securities

     813         (853     10,716         (1,554     11,529         (2,407

Corporates

     411,310         (8,124     45,482         (1,844     456,792         (9,968

Equities

     —           —          44,513         (1,272     44,513         (1,272

Hybrids

     13,407         (339     107,707         (9,211     121,114         (9,550

Municipals

     71,160         (1,090     —           —          71,160         (1,090

Agency residential mortgage-backed securities

     1,754         (199     6,110         (135     7,864         (334

Non-agency residential mortgage-backed securities

     12,853         (289     101,777         (3,973     114,630         (4,262
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total available-for-sale securities

   $ 681,091       $ (11,936   $ 323,838       $ (18,556   $ 1,004,929       $ (30,492
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total number of available-for-sale securities in an unrealized loss position

        100           56           156   
     

 

 

      

 

 

      

 

 

 

 

     September 30, 2011  
     Less than 12 months     12 months or longer      Total  
     Fair Value      Gross
Unrealized
Losses
    Fair
Value
     Gross
Unrealized
Losses
     Fair Value      Gross
Unrealized
Losses
 

Available-for-sale securities

                

Asset-backed securities

   $ 275,135       $ (2,770   $ —         $ —         $ 275,135       $ (2,770

Commercial-mortgage-backed securities

     338,865         (18,163     —           —           338,865         (18,163

Corporates

     3,081,556         (130,352     —           —           3,081,556         (130,352

Equities

     99,772         (9,033     —           —           99,772         (9,033

Hybrids

     450,376         (51,055     —           —           450,376         (51,055

Municipals

     1,137         (7     —           —           1,137         (7

Agency residential mortgage-backed securities

     25,820         (295     —           —           25,820         (295

Non-agency residential mortgage-backed securities

     375,349         (23,120     —           —           375,349         (23,120
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total available-for-sale securities

   $ 4,648,010       $ (234,795   $ —         $ —         $ 4,648,010       $ (234,795
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total number of available-for-sale securities in an unrealized loss position

                   505   
                

 

 

 

As the amortized cost of all investments was adjusted to fair value as of the FGLH Acquisition Date, no individual securities had been in a continuous unrealized loss position greater than twelve months as of September 30, 2011.

 

F-19


Table of Contents

At September 30, 2012 and, 2011, securities in an unrealized loss position were primarily concentrated in investment grade corporate debt instruments, residential mortgage-backed securities and hybrids. Total unrealized losses were $30,492 and $234,795 at September 30, 2012 and, 2011, respectively. Exposure to finance-related holdings represents the largest component of the unrealized loss position in the portfolio, as spreads for holdings in this industry sector remain above historical levels. Similar risk aversion effects have impacted prices of commercial mortgage-backed securities and non-agency residential mortgage-backed securities. The Company has added to its non-agency residential mortgage-backed holdings during the year by purchasing securities with an “A” credit rating or above at discounts. As of September 30, 2012, these securities were in an unrealized gain position. The Company has not added to its commercial mortgage-backed security exposure. The improvement in unrealized loss positions in corporate debt instruments from September 30, 2011 to September 30, 2012 was primarily a result of improving conditions for corporate issues.

The combination of ongoing liquidity efforts by global central banks to stem contagion from a Eurozone slowdown, and accommodative monetary policy (especially in the U.S.) that is keeping base interest rates low, helped drive strong performance in risk assets in the September 2012 quarter. The prices of securities exposed to the residential real estate market in the U.S. also increased, which management believes is a result of the decline in risk aversion and data indicating that the housing market in the U.S. has improved.

At September 30, 2012 and 2011, securities with a fair value of $1,192 and $31,320, respectively, were depressed greater than 20% of amortized cost, which represented less than 1% of the carrying values of all investments. The improvement in unrealized loss positions from September 30, 2011 is primarily due to two factors: (i) securities at depressed prices were sold over the past fiscal year, reducing the size of holdings in an unrealized loss position and (ii) improving risk sentiment has lifted the market prices of investment grade bonds. Based upon the Company’s current evaluation of these securities in accordance with its impairment policy and its intent to retain these investments for a period of time sufficient to allow for recovery in value, the Company has determined that these securities are not other-than-temporarily impaired.

The following table provides a reconciliation of the beginning and ending balances of the credit loss portion of other-than-temporary impairments on fixed maturity securities held by the Company at September 30, 2012 and 2011, for which a portion of the other-than-temporary impairment was recognized in AOCI:

 

     Successor  
     Year Ended
September 30,
2012
     April 6, 2011 to
September 30,
2011
 

Beginning balance

   $ 667       $ —     

Increases attributable to credit losses on securities:

     

Other-than-temporary impairment was previously recognized

     112         —     

Other-than-temporary impairment was not previously recognized

     1,902         667   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Ending balance

   $ 2,681       $ 667   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

For the year ended September 30, 2012, the Company recognized impairment losses in operations totaling $22,807, including credit impairments of $5,712 and change-of-intent impairments of $17,095 as well as non-credit losses in other comprehensive income totaling $1,529, for investments which experienced other-than-temporary impairments and had an amortized cost of $162,349 and a fair value of $138,013 at the time of impairment. For the Successor period of April 6, 2011 to September 30, 2011, the Company recognized credit losses in operations totaling $17,966, including credit impairments of $5,059 and change-of-intent impairments of $12,907, as well as non-credit gains totaling $500 in other comprehensive income, for investments which experienced other-than-temporary impairments and had an amortized cost of $103,312 and a fair value of $85,846 at the time of impairment. For the Predecessor period of January 1, 2011 to April 5, 2011, the Company recognized credit losses in operations totaling $2,939, for investments which experienced other-than-temporary impairments and had an amortized cost of $3,125 and a fair value of $186 at the time of impairment. For the year

 

F-20


Table of Contents

ended December 31, 2010, the Company recognized impairment losses in operations totaling $86,123 for investments which experienced other-than-temporary impairments and had an amortized cost of $400,313 and a fair value of $256,576 at the time of impairment. Details underlying write-downs taken as a result of other-than-temporary impairments that were recognized in net income and included in net realized gains on securities were as follows:

 

     Successor         Predecessor  
     Year Ended
September 30,
2012
     April 6, 2011
to
September 30,
2011
        January 1,
2011 to
April 5,
2011
     Year Ended
December 31,
2010
 

Other-than-temporary impairments recognized in net income:

            

Asset-backed securities

   $ —         $ —          $ —         $ 12,784   

Commercial mortgage-backed securities

     —           20          2,695         6,456   

Corporates

     4,116         1,462          —           27,061   

Equities

     —           11,007          —           1,650   

Hybrids

     9,688         —            —           —     

Non-agency residential mortgage-backed securities

     7,531         5,059          2         34,166   

Asset-backed loans and other invested assets

     1,472         418          242         4,006   
  

 

 

    

 

 

     

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total other-than-temporary impairments

   $ 22,807       $ 17,966        $ 2,939       $ 86,123   
  

 

 

    

 

 

     

 

 

    

 

 

 

Net Investment Income

The major sources of “Net investment income” in the accompanying Consolidated Statements of Operations were as follows:

 

     Successor         Predecessor  
     Year Ended
September 30,
2012
    April 6, 2011
to
September 30,
2011
        January 1,
2011 to
April 5,
2011
    Year Ended
December 31,
2010
 

Fixed maturity available-for-sale securities

   $ 707,132      $ 364,771        $ 228,846      $ 889,899   

Equity available-for-sale securities

     13,966        10,190          4,260        22,375   

Trading securities

     —          —            —          4,519   

Policy loans

     707        1,511          1,524        6,072   

Invested cash and short-term investments

     4,921        129          90        272   

Other investments

     1,179        326          1,764        6,901   
  

 

 

   

 

 

     

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gross investment income

     727,905        376,927          236,484        930,038   

External investment expense

     (11,634     (7,087       (3,850     (14,451
  

 

 

   

 

 

     

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net investment income

   $ 716,271      $ 369,840        $ 232,634      $ 915,587   
  

 

 

   

 

 

     

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

F-21


Table of Contents

Net Investment Gains (Losses)

Details underlying “Net investment gains (losses)” reported in the accompanying Consolidated Statements of Operations were as follows:

 

     Successor         Predecessor  
     Year Ended
September 30,
2012
    April 6, 2011
to
September 30,
2011
        January 1,
2011 to
April 5,
2011
     Year Ended
December 31,
2010
 

Net realized gains (losses) on fixed maturity available-for-sale securities

   $ 264,408      $ 16,912        $ 17,419       $ (33,399

Realized gains (losses) on equity securities

     924        (10,977       1,753         13,092   

Realized loss on trading securities

     —          —            —           (30,711

Unrealized gains on trading securities

     —          —            —           44,413   
  

 

 

   

 

 

     

 

 

    

 

 

 

Change in fair value of securities

     265,332        5,935          19,172         (6,605
  

 

 

   

 

 

     

 

 

    

 

 

 

Realized gains (losses) on certain derivative instruments

     (10,280     (44,776       19,565         138,161   

Unrealized gains (losses) on certain derivative instruments

     156,332        (125,976       45,748         (71,439
  

 

 

   

 

 

     

 

 

    

 

 

 

Change in fair value of derivatives

     146,052        (170,752       65,313         66,722   
  

 

 

   

 

 

     

 

 

    

 

 

 

Realized losses on other invested assets

     (1,384     (2,074       —           —     
  

 

 

   

 

 

     

 

 

    

 

 

 

Net investment gains (losses)

   $ 410,000      $ (166,891     $ 84,485       $ 60,117   
  

 

 

   

 

 

     

 

 

    

 

 

 

For the year ended September 30, 2012, the Successor period of April 6, 2011 to September 30, 2011, the Predecessor period of January 1, 2011 to April 5, 2011, and the year ended December 31, 2010, principal repayments, calls, tenders, and proceeds from the sale of fixed maturity available-for-sale securities, including assets transferred to Wilton Re as discussed in Note 15 totaled $4,602,958, $1,803,964, $408,850 and $2,582,646, respectively. For the year ended September 30, 2012, the Successor period of April 6, 2011 to September 30, 2011, the Predecessor period of January 1, 2011 to April 5, 2011, and the year ended December 31, 2010, gross gains on such sales totaled $295,923, $41,989, $25,475 and $146,782, and gross losses totaled $13,482, $17,109, $7,662 and $105,274, respectively.

Underlying write-downs taken to fixed maturity available-for-sale securities as a result of other-than-temporary impairments that were recognized in earnings and included in net realized gains on securities above were $22,807, $17,966, $2,939 and $(86,123) for the year ended September 30, 2012, the Successor period of April 6, 2011 to September 30, 2011, the Predecessor period of January 1, 2011 to April 5, 2011, and the year ended December 31, 2010, respectively. The portion of other-than-temporary impairments recognized in AOCI is disclosed in the consolidated statement of comprehensive income.

 

F-22


Table of Contents

(5)     Derivative Financial Instruments

The carrying amounts (which equal fair value) of derivative instruments, including derivative instruments embedded in FIA contracts, is as follows:

 

     September 30,  
     2012      2011  

Assets:

     

Derivative investments:

     

Call options

   $ 200,667       $ 52,335   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Liabilities:

     

Contractholder funds:

     

FIA embedded derivative

   $ 1,550,805       $ 1,396,340   

Other liabilities:

     

Futures contracts

     928         3,828   
     —           400   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Available-for-sale embedded derivative

   $ 1,551,733       $ 1,400,568   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

The change in fair value of derivative instruments included in the accompanying Consolidated Statements of Operations is as follows:

 

     Successor         Predecessor  
     Year Ended
September 30,
2012
     April 6, 2011
to
September 30,
2011
        January 1,
2011 to
April 5,
2011
     Year Ended
December 31,
2010
 

Revenues:

            

Net investment gains (losses):

            

Call options

   $ 100,030       $ (142,665     $ 54,151       $ 33,430   

Futures contracts

     46,022         (28,087       11,162         33,292   
  

 

 

    

 

 

     

 

 

    

 

 

 
     146,052         (170,752       65,313         66,722   

Net investment income:

            

Available-for-sale embedded derivatives

     400         19          13         13,338   
  

 

 

    

 

 

     

 

 

    

 

 

 
   $ 146,452       $ (170,733     $ 65,326       $ 80,060   
  

 

 

    

 

 

     

 

 

    

 

 

 

Benefits and other changes in policy reserves:

            

FIA embedded derivatives

   $ 154,465       $ (69,968     $ 31,276       $ 42,240   
  

 

 

    

 

 

     

 

 

    

 

 

 

Additional Disclosures

FIA Contracts

The Company has FIA contracts that permit the holder to elect an interest rate return or an equity index linked component, where interest credited to the contracts is linked to the performance of various equity indices, primarily the Standard and Poor’s (“S&P”) 500 Index. This feature represents an embedded derivative under U.S. GAAP. The FIA embedded derivative is valued at fair value and included in the liability for contractholder funds in the accompanying Consolidated Balance Sheets with changes in fair value included as a component of benefits and other changes in policy reserves in the Consolidated Statements of Operations.

The Company purchases derivatives consisting of a combination of call options and futures contracts on the applicable market indices to fund the index credits due to FIA contractholders. The call options are one-, two- and three-year options purchased to match the funding requirements of the underlying policies. On the respective

 

F-23


Table of Contents

anniversary dates of the index policies, the index used to compute the interest credit is reset and the Company purchases new one, two or three year call options to fund the next index credit. The Company manages the cost of these purchases through the terms of its FIA contracts, which permit the Company to change caps or participation rates, subject to guaranteed minimums on each contract’s anniversary date. The change in the fair value of the call options and futures contracts is generally designed to offset the portion of the change in the fair value of the FIA embedded derivative related to index performance. The call options and futures contracts are marked to fair value with the change in fair value included as a component of “Net investment gains (losses)”. The change in fair value of the call options and futures contracts includes the gains and losses recognized at the expiration of the instrument term or upon early termination and the changes in fair value of open positions.

Other market exposures are hedged periodically depending on market conditions and the Company’s risk tolerance. The Company’s FIA hedging strategy economically hedges the equity returns and exposes the Company to the risk that unhedged market exposures result in divergence between changes in the fair value of the liabilities and the hedging assets. The Company uses a variety of techniques, including direct estimation of market sensitivities and value-at-risk to monitor this risk daily. The Company intends to continue to adjust the hedging strategy as market conditions and the Company’s risk tolerance change.

Credit Risk

The Company is exposed to credit loss in the event of nonperformance by its counterparties on the call options and reflects assumptions regarding this nonperformance risk in the fair value of the call options. The nonperformance risk is the net counterparty exposure based on the fair value of the open contracts less collateral held. The Company maintains a policy of requiring all derivative contracts to be governed by an International Swaps and Derivatives Association (“ISDA”) Master Agreement.

Information regarding the Company’s exposure to credit loss on the call options it holds is presented in the following table:

 

Counterparty

  Credit
Rating
(Moody’s/
S&P)
  September 30, 2012     September 30, 2011  
    Notional Amount     Fair Value     Notional Amount     Fair Value  

Bank of America

  Baa2/A–   $ 1,884,047      $ 64,101      $ 1,692,142      $ 14,637   

Deutsche Bank

  A2/A+     1,816,532        61,704        1,463,596        11,402   

Morgan Stanley

  Baa1/A–     1,634,686        51,630        1,629,247        15,373   

Royal Bank of Scotland

  Baa1/A–     353,875        19,595        —          —     

Barclay’s Bank

  A2/A+     131,255        3,081        385,189        4,105   

Nomura

  Baa2/A–     —          —          107,000        4,033   

Credit Suisse

  A2/A     10,000        556        327,095        2,785   
   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 
    $ 5,830,395      $ 200,667      $ 5,604,269      $ 52,335   
   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Collateral Agreements

We are required to maintain minimum ratings as a matter of routine practice under our ISDA agreements. Under some ISDA agreements, we have agreed to maintain certain financial strength ratings. A downgrade below these levels provides the counterparty under the agreement the right to terminate the open derivative contracts between the parties, at which time any amounts payable by us or the counterparty would be dependent on the market value of the underlying derivative contracts. Our current rating allows multiple counterparties the right to terminate ISDA agreements. No ISDA agreements have been terminated, although the counterparties have reserved the right to terminate the ISDA agreements at any time. In certain transactions, the Company and the counterparty have entered into a collateral support agreement requiring either party to post collateral when the net exposures exceed pre-determined thresholds. These thresholds vary by counterparty and credit rating. As of September 30, 2012 and 2011, no collateral was posted by the Company’s counterparties as they did not meet the

 

F-24


Table of Contents

net exposure thresholds. Accordingly, the maximum amount of loss due to credit risk that the Company would incur if parties to the call options failed completely to perform according to the terms of the contracts was $200,667 and $52,335 at September 30, 2012 and 2011, respectively.

The Company held 2,835 and 2,458 futures contracts at September 30, 2012 and 2011, respectively. The fair value of futures contracts represents the cumulative unsettled variation margin (open trade equity net of cash settlements). The Company provides cash collateral to the counterparties for the initial and variation margin on the futures contracts which is included in “Cash and cash equivalents” in the accompanying Consolidated Balance Sheets. The amount of collateral held by the counterparties for such contracts was $9,820 at both September 30, 2012 and 2011.

(6)    Fair Value of Financial Instruments

The Company’s measurement of fair value is based on assumptions used by market participants in pricing the asset or liability, which may include inherent risk, restrictions on the sale or use of an asset or non-performance risk, which may include the Company’s own credit risk. The Company’s estimate of an exchange price is the price in an orderly transaction between market participants to sell the asset or transfer the liability (“exit price”) in the principal market, or the most advantageous market in the absence of a principal market, for that asset or liability, as opposed to the price that would be paid to acquire the asset or receive a liability (“entry price”). The Company categorizes financial instruments carried at fair value into a three-level fair value hierarchy, based on the priority of inputs to the respective valuation technique. The three-level hierarchy for fair value measurement is defined as follows:

Level 1 —Values are unadjusted quoted prices for identical assets and liabilities in active markets accessible at the measurement date.

Level 2 —Inputs include quoted prices for similar assets or liabilities in active markets, quoted prices from those willing to trade in markets that are not active, or other inputs that are observable or can be corroborated by market data for the term of the instrument. Such inputs include market interest rates and volatilities, spreads and yield curves.

Level 3 —Certain inputs are unobservable (supported by little or no market activity) and significant to the fair value measurement. Unobservable inputs reflect the Company’s best estimate of what hypothetical market participants would use to determine a transaction price for the asset or liability at the reporting date based on the best information available in the circumstances.

In certain cases, the inputs used to measure fair value may fall into different levels of the fair value hierarchy. In such cases, an investment’s level within the fair value hierarchy is based on the lower level of input that is significant to the fair value measurement. The Company’s assessment of the significance of a particular input to the fair value measurement in its entirety requires judgment and considers factors specific to the investment.

When a determination is made to classify an asset or liability within Level 3 of the fair value hierarchy, the determination is based upon the significance of the unobservable inputs to the overall fair value measurement. Because certain securities trade in less liquid or illiquid markets with limited or no pricing information, the determination of fair value for these securities is inherently more difficult. However, Level 3 fair value investments may include, in addition to the unobservable or Level 3 inputs, observable components, which are components that are actively quoted or can be validated to market-based sources.

 

F-25


Table of Contents

The carrying amounts and estimated fair values of the Company’s consolidated financial instruments for which the disclosure of fair values is required, including financial assets and liabilities measured and carried at fair value on a recurring basis, with the exception of investment contracts, are summarized according to the hierarchy previously described, as follows:

 

    September 30, 2012  
    Level 1     Level 2     Level 3     Fair Value     Carrying
Amount
 

Assets

         

Cash and cash equivalents

  $ 1,052,338      $ 2,250      $ —        $ 1,054,588      $ 1,054,588   

Contingent purchase price reduction receivable

    —          —          41,000        41,000        41,000   

Fixed maturity securities, available-for-sale:

         

Asset-backed securities

    —          1,012,027        15,855        1,027,882        1,027,882   

Commercial mortgage-backed securities

    —          548,791        5,023        553,814        553,814   

Corporates

    —          10,873,715        135,296        11,009,011        11,009,011   

Hybrids

    —          519,422        8,873        528,295        528,295   

Municipals

    —          1,223,995        —          1,223,995        1,223,995   

Agency residential mortgage-backed securities

    —          154,890        —          154,890        154,890   

Non-agency residential mortgage-backed securities

    —          660,659        —          660,659        660,659   

U.S. Government

    930,367        —          —          930,367        930,367   

Equity securities—available-for-sale

    —          248,087        —          248,087        248,087   

Derivative financial instruments

    —          200,667        —          200,667        200,667   

Related party loans

    —          —          150,069        150,069        150,069   

Related party investments

    —          —          32,000        32,000        32,000   

Other invested assets

    —          —          18,814        18,814        18,814   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total financial assets

  $ 1,982,705      $ 15,444,503      $ 406,930      $ 17,834,138      $ 17,834,138   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Liabilities

         

Derivatives:

         

FIA embedded derivatives, included in contractholder funds

  $ —        $ —        $ 1,550,805      $ 1,550,805      $ 1,550,805   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Futures contracts

    —          928        —          928        928   

Investment contracts, included in contractholder funds

    —          —          12,271,882        12,271,882        13,739,670   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total financial liabilities

  $ —        $ 928      $ 13,822,687      $ 13,823,615      $ 15,291,403   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

F-26


Table of Contents
    September 30, 2011  
    Level 1     Level 2     Level 3     Fair Value     Carrying
Amount
 

Assets

         

Cash and cash equivalents

  $ 818,135      $ 2,768      $ —        $ 820,903      $ 820,903   

Fixed maturity securities, available-for-sale:

         

Asset-backed securities

    —          125,966        374,518        500,484        500,484   

Commercial mortgage-backed securities

    —          565,577        —          565,577        565,577   

Corporates

    —          11,696,090        159,684        11,855,774        11,855,774   

Hybrids

    —          654,084        5,205        659,289        659,289   

Municipals

    —          936,484        —          936,484        936,484   

Agency residential mortgage-backed securities

    —          218,713        3,312        222,025        222,025   

Non-agency residential mortgage-backed securities

    —          440,758        3,759        444,517        444,517   

U.S. Government

    183,324        —          —          183,324        183,324   

Equity securities—available-for-sale

    —          287,043        —          287,043        287,043   

Derivative financial instruments

    —          52,335        —          52,335        52,335   

Other invested assets

    —          —          44,279        44,279        44,279   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total financial assets

  $ 1,001,459      $ 14,979,818      $ 590,757      $ 16,572,034      $ 16,572,034   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Liabilities

         

Derivatives:

         

FIA embedded derivatives, included in contractholder funds

  $ —        $ —        $ 1,396,340      $ 1,396,340      $ 1,396,340   

Futures contracts

    —          3,828        —          3,828        3,828   

Available-for-sale embedded derivatives

    —          —          400        400        400   

Investment contracts, included in contractholder funds

    —          —          11,992,013        11,992,013        13,153,630   

Note payable

    —          95,000        —          95,000        95,000   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total financial liabilities

  $ —        $ 98,828      $ 13,388,753      $ 13,487,581      $ 14,649,198   
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

The carrying amounts of accrued investment income and portions of other liabilities approximate fair value due to their short duration and, accordingly, they are not presented in the table above.

The Company measures the fair value of its securities based on assumptions used by market participants in pricing the security. The most appropriate valuation methodology is selected based on the specific characteristics of the fixed maturity or equity security, and the Company will then consistently apply the valuation methodology to measure the security’s fair value. The Company’s fair value measurement is based on a market approach, which utilizes prices and other relevant information generated by market transactions involving identical or comparable securities. Sources of inputs to the market approach include a third-party pricing service, independent broker quotations or pricing matrices. The Company uses observable and unobservable inputs in its valuation methodologies. Observable inputs include benchmark yields, reported trades, broker-dealer quotes, issuer spreads, two-sided markets, benchmark securities, bids, offers and reference data. In addition, market indicators and industry and economic events are monitored and further market data will be acquired when certain thresholds are met. For certain security types, additional inputs may be used, or some of the inputs described above may not be applicable. For broker-quoted only securities, quotes from market makers or broker-dealers are obtained from sources recognized to be market participants. Management believes the broker quotes are prices at which trades could be executed based on historical trades executed at broker-quoted or slightly higher prices.

 

F-27


Table of Contents

The Company did not adjust prices received from third parties as of September 30, 2012 and 2011. However, the Company does analyze the third-party valuation methodologies and its related inputs to perform assessments to determine the appropriate level within the fair value hierarchy.

The fair value of derivative assets and liabilities is based upon valuation pricing models, which represents what the Company would expect to receive or pay at the balance sheet date if it cancelled the options, entered into offsetting positions, or exercised the options. The fair value of futures contracts represent the cumulative unsettled variation margin (open trade equity net of cash settlements). Fair values for these instruments are determined externally by an independent actuarial firm using market observable inputs, including interest rates, yield curve volatilities, and other factors. Credit risk related to the counterparty is considered when estimating the fair values of these derivatives. The fair values of the embedded derivatives in the FGLH’s FIA products are derived using market indices, pricing assumptions and historical data.

Investment contracts include deferred annuities, FIAs, IUL and immediate annuities. The fair values of deferred annuities, FIA, and IUL contracts are based on their cash surrender value (i.e., the cost the Company would incur to extinguish the liability) as these contracts are generally issued without an annuitization date. The fair value of immediate annuities contracts is derived by calculating a new fair value interest rate using the updated yield curve and treasury spreads as of the respective reporting date. At September 30, 2012 and 2011, this resulted in lower fair value reserves relative to the carrying value. The Company is not required to and has not estimated the fair value of the liabilities under contracts that involve significant mortality or morbidity risks, as these liabilities fall within the definition of insurance contracts that are exceptions from financial instruments that require disclosures of fair value. The fair value of the Company’s note payable at September 30, 2011 approximated its carrying value as it was settled at such carrying value in October 2011.

 

F-28


Table of Contents

Quantitative information regarding significant unobservable inputs used for recurring Level 3 fair value measurements of financial instruments carried at fair value is as follows:

 

    Fair Value at
September 30,
2012
   

Valuation Technique

 

Unobservable Input(s)

  Range (Weighted average)

Assets

       

Contingent purchase price reduction receivable

  $ 41,000      Discounted cash flow   Probability of collection   88% – 96% (92%)
      Expected term   9 months
      Discount rate   0.72%
      Credit insurance risk premium   11.7%

Asset-backed securities

    15,855      Broker–quoted   Offered quotes   100% – 109.73%
(103.09%)

Corporates

    103,319      Broker–quoted   Offered quotes   0% – 140.61%
(68.47%)

Corporates

    31,977      Market pricing   Quoted prices   87.50% – 158.11%
(97.89%)

Hybrids

    8,873      Broker–quoted   Offered quotes   0% – 103% (25.35%)

Commercial mortgage-backed securities

    5,023      Broker–quoted   Offered quotes   100.69%

Related party investment

    32,000      Market approach   Price to book   1.0x – 1.4x
 

 

 

       

Total

  $ 238,047         
 

 

 

       

Liabilities

       

FIA embedded derivatives, included in contractholder funds

  $ 1,550,805      Discounted cash flow   Market value of option   0% – 31.05% (3.55%)
      SWAP rates   0.76% – 1.7% (1.22%)
      Mortality multiplier   70% – 70% (70%)
      Surrender rates   2% – 50% (7%)
 

 

 

       

Total

  $ 1,550,805        Non–performance spread   0.25% – 0.25% (0.25%)
 

 

 

       

The significant unobservable inputs used in the fair value measurement of FIA embedded derivatives included in contractholder funds are market value of option, interest swap rates, mortality multiplier, surrender rates, and non-performance spread. The mortality multiplier is based on the 1983 annuity table and assumes the contractholder population is 50% female and 50% male. Significant increases (decreases) in the market value of option in isolation would result in a higher (lower) fair value measurement. Significant increases (decreases) in interest swap rates, mortality multiplier, surrender rates, or non-performance spread in isolation would result in a lower (higher) fair value measurement. Generally, a change in any one unobservable input would not result in a change in any other unobservable input.

 

F-29


Table of Contents

The following tables summarize changes to the Company’s financial instruments carried at fair value and classified within Level 3 of the fair value hierarchy for the year ended September 30, 2012 and the Successor period of April 6, 2011 to September 30, 2011. This summary excludes any impact of amortization of DAC and VOBA. The gains and losses below may include changes in fair value due in part to observable inputs that are a component of the valuation methodology.

 

     Year Ended September 30, 2012 (Successor)  
     Balance at
Beginning of
Period
     Total Gains (Losses)     Net
Purchases,
Sales &
Settlements
    Net
Transfer In
(Out) of
Level 3(a)
    Balance at
End of
Period
 
      Included
in
Earnings
    Included
in AOCI
       

Assets

             

Contingent purchase price reduction receivable

   $ —         $ 41,000      $ —        $ —        $ —        $ 41,000   

Fixed maturity securities, available-for-sale:

             

Asset-backed securities

     374,518       $ —        $ 7,355      $ 371,896      $ (737,914     15,855   

Commercial mortgage-backed securities

     —           —          24        4,999        —          5,023   

Corporates

     159,684         28        (3,662     (39,686     18,932        135,296   

Hybrids

     5,205         —          (44     —          3,712        8,873   

Municipals

     —           (2     72        10,177        (10,247     —     

Agency residential mortgage-backed securities

     3,312         —          18        —          (3,330     —     

Non-agency residential mortgage-backed securities

     3,759         (126     4        (777     (2,860     —     

Related party investment

     —           —          —          32,000        —          32,000   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total assets at Level 3 fair value

   $ 546,478       $ 40,900      $ 3,767      $ 378,609      $ (731,707   $ 238,047   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Liabilities

             

FIA embedded derivatives, included in contractholder funds

   $ 1,396,340       $ 154,465      $ —        $ —        $ —        $ 1,550,805   

Available-for-sale embedded derivatives

     400         (400     —          —          —          —     
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total liabilities at Level 3 fair value

   $ 1,396,740       $ 154,065      $ —        $ —        $ —        $ 1,550,805   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

(a) The net transfers in and out of Level 3 during the year ended September 30, 2012 were exclusively to or from Level 2.

 

F-30


Table of Contents
     April 6, 2011 to September 30, 2011 (Successor)  
     Balance at
FGL
Acquisition
Date
     Total Gains (Losses)     Net
Purchases,
Sales &
Settlements
    Net
Transfer In
(Out)
of Level 3(a)
    Balance at
End of
Period
 
      Included
in
Earnings
    Included
in AOCI
       

Assets

             

Fixed maturity securities, available-for-sale:

             

Asset-backed securities

   $ 399,967       $ —        $ 863      $ (11,709   $ (14,603   $ 374,518   

Corporates

     197,573         1,993        5,408        (45,229     (61     159,684   

Hybrids

     8,305         —          (61     —          (3,039     5,205   

Agency residential mortgage-backed securities

     3,271         —          41        —          —          3,312   

Non-agency residential mortgage-backed securities

     18,519         2,364        379        (17,503     —          3,759   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total assets at Level 3 fair value

   $ 627,635       $ 4,357      $ 6,630      $ (74,441   $ (17,703   $ 546,478   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Liabilities

             

FIA embedded derivatives, included in contractholder funds

   $ 1,466,308       $ (69,968   $ —        $ —        $ —        $ 1,396,340   

Available-for-sale embedded derivatives

     419         (19     —          —          —          400   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total liabilities at Level 3 fair value

   $ 1,466,727       $ (69,987   $ —        $ —        $ —        $ 1,396,740   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

(a) The net transfers in and out of Level 3 during the Successor period of April 6, 2011 to September 30, 2011 were exclusively to or from Level 2.

 

     January 1, 2011 to April 5, 2011 (Predecessor)  
     Balance at
Beginning of
Period
     Total Gains (Losses)     Net
Purchases,
Sales &
Settlements
    Net
Transfer In
(Out)
of Level 3(a)
     Balance at
End of
Period
 
      Included
in
Earnings
    Included
in AOCI
        

Assets

              

Fixed maturity securities, available-for-sale:

              

Asset-backed securities

   $ 355,807       $ 9,700      $ 11,857      $ 22,603      $ —         $ 399,967   

Corporates

     197,058         404        (6,641     (5,666     14         185,169   

Hybrids

     8,034         —          272        —          —           8,306   

Residential mortgage-backed securities

     20,676         —          1,034        (1,153     —           20,557   

Commercial mortgage-backed securities

     183         —          (24     —          —           159   

Municipals

     —           —          —          —          61         61   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total assets at Level 3 fair value

   $ 581,758       $ 10,104      $ 6,498      $ 15,784      $ 75       $ 614,219   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Liabilities

              

FIA embedded derivatives, included in contractholder funds

   $ 1,462,592       $ 31,276      $ —        $ —        $ —         $ 1,493,868   

Available-for-sale embedded derivatives

     432         (13     —          —          —           419   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total liabilities at Level 3 fair value

   $ 1,463,024       $ 31,263      $ —        $ —        $ —         $ 1,494,287   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

(a) The net transfers in and out of Level 3 during the Predecessor period of January 1, 2011 to April 5, 2011 were exclusively to or from Level 2.

 

F-31


Table of Contents
     Year Ended December 31, 2010 (Predecessor)  
     Balance at
Beginning of
Period
     Total Gains (Losses)     Net
Purchases,
Sales &
Settlements
    Net
Transfer
In (Out) of
Level 3(a)
    Balance at
End of
Period
 
      Included
in
Earnings
    Included
in AOCI
       

Assets

             

Fixed maturity securities, available-for-sale:

             

Asset-backed securities

   $ 324,057       $ (16,406   $ 13,229      $ 25,142      $ 9,785      $ 355,807   

Corporates

     302,064         1,067        (11,092     (94,678     (303     197,058   

Hybrids

     10,996         —          —          —          (2,962     8,034   

Residential mortgage-backed securities

     4,384         —          —          —          16,292        20,676   

Commercial mortgage-backed securities

     20,701         382        (530     (20,553     183        183   

Equity securities available-for-sale

     6,694         (2,196     6,005        (10,503     —          —     
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total assets at Level 3 fair value

   $ 668,896       $ (17,153   $ 7,612      $ (100,592   $ 22,995      $ 581,758   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Liabilities

             

FIA embedded derivatives, included in contractholder funds

   $ 1,420,352       $ 42,240      $ —        $ —        $ —        $ 1,462,592   

Available-for-sale embedded derivatives

     13,770         5,511        62        (18,911     —          432   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total liabilities at Level 3 fair value

   $ 1,434,122       $ 47,751      $ 62      $ (18,911   $ —        $ 1,463,024   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

(a) The net transfers in and out of Level 3 during the year ended December 31, 2010 were exclusively to or from Level 2.

The Company reviews the fair value hierarchy classifications each reporting period. Changes in the observability of the valuation attributes may result in a reclassification of certain financial assets or liabilities. Such reclassifications are reported as transfers in and out of Level 3, or between other levels, at the beginning fair value for the reporting period in which the changes occur. There were no transfers between Level 1 and Level 2 for the year ended September 30, 2012, the Successor period of April 6, 2011 to September 30, 2011, the Predecessor period of January 1, 2011 to April 5, 2011 and the year ended December 31, 2010.

Primary market issuance and secondary market activity for certain corporates, municipals and residential mortgage-backed securities during the year ended September 30, 2012 as well as asset-backed securities, corporate securities and hybrid securities during the Successor period of April 6, 2011 to September 30, 2011 increased the market observable inputs used to establish fair values for similar securities. These factors, along with more consistent pricing from third-party sources, resulted in the Company concluding that there is sufficient trading activity in similar instruments to support classifying these securities as Level 2 as of September 30, 2012 and 2011, respectively. Additionally, during the year a new third party began pricing the Company’s collateral loan obligations (“CLOs”) holdings included in asset-backed securities. This new pricing vendor uses market observable inputs such as actual trade prices, yields, and other market assumptions as well as observable deal, tranche and collateral information in the pricing of CLOs and therefore supported a Level 2 classification of these securities as of September 30, 2012. Accordingly, the Company’s assessment resulted in a net transfer out of Level 3 of $731,707 related to asset-backed securities, corporates, hybrids, municipals and residential mortgage-backed securities during the year ended September 30, 2012, and a net transfer out of $17,703 related to asset-backed securities, corporates and hybrids during the Successor period of April 6, 2011 to September 30, 2011.

 

F-32


Table of Contents

The following tables present the gross components of purchases, sales, and settlements, net, of Level 3 financial instruments for the years ended September 30, 2012, the Successor period of April 6, 2011 to September 30, 2011 and the Predecessor period of January 1, 2011 to April 5, 2011. There were no issuances during these periods.

 

     Year Ended September 30, 2012 (Successor)  
     Purchases      Sales     Settlements     Net Purchases,
Sales &
Settlements
 

Assets

         

Fixed maturity, securities available-for-sale:

         

Asset-backed securities

   $ 410,707       $ —        $ (38,811   $ 371,896   

Commercial mortgage-backed securities

     4,999         —          —          4,999   

Corporates

     1,326         (26,788     (14,224     (39,686

Municipals

     10,197         —          (20     10,177   

Non-agency residential mortgage-backed securities

     —           (475     (302     (777
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total assets at Level 3 fair value

   $ 427,229       $ (27,263   $ (53,357   $ 346,609   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

     April 6, 2011 to September 30, 2011 (Successor)  
     Purchases      Sales     Settlements     Net Purchases,
Sales &
Settlements
 

Assets

         

Fixed maturity, securities available-for-sale:

         

Asset-backed securities

   $ 2,007       $ —        $ (13,716   $ (11,709

Corporates

     10,365         (48,898     (6,696     (45,229

Non-agency residential mortgage-backed securities

     —           (15,729     (1,774     (17,503
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total assets at Level 3 fair value

   $ 12,372       $ (64,627   $ (22,186   $ (74,441
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

     January 1, 2011 to April 5, 2011 (Predecessor)  
     Purchases      Sales     Settlements     Net Purchases,
Sales &
Settlements
 

Assets

         

Fixed maturity, securities available-for-sale:

         

Asset-backed securities

   $ 50,549       $ (17,544   $ (10,402   $ 22,603   

Corporates

     —           (5,666     —          (5,666

Non-agency residential mortgage-backed securities

     —           —          (1,153     (1,153
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total assets at Level 3 fair value

   $ 50,549       $ (23,210   $ (11,555   $ 15,784   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

F-33


Table of Contents

(7)    Intangible Assets

Information regarding DAC and VOBA (including DSI), is as follows:

 

     VOBA     DAC     Total  

(Successor)

    

Balance at April 6, 2011

   $ 577,163      $ —        $ 577,163   

Deferrals

     —          41,152        41,152   

Less: Components of amortization—

    

Periodic amortization

     294        (996     (702

Interest

     14,040        —          14,040   

Unlocking

     (2,320     97        (2,223

Add: Adjustment for unrealized investment (gains), net

     (170,117     (2,146     (172,263
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Balance at September 30, 2011

     419,060        38,107        457,167   

Deferrals

     —          194,900        194,900   

Less: Components of amortization—

    

Periodic amortization

     (171,833     (20,239     (192,072

Interest

     28,883        1,942        30,825   

Unlocking

     (2,487     3,078        591   

Add: Adjustment for unrealized investment (gains), net

     (169,303     (48,565     (217,868
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Balance at September 30, 2012

   $ 104,320      $ 169,223      $ 273,543   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

 

 

     VOBA     DAC     Total  
      

(Predecessor)

    

Balance at January 1, 2010

   $ 121,446      $ 2,406,931      $ 2,528,377   

Deferrals

     128        132,992        133,120   

Less: Components of amortization—

    

Periodic amortization

     (16,827     (340,113     (356,940

Interest

     6,529        109,237        115,766   

Unlocking

     3,708        (35,572     (31,864

Add: Adjustment for unrealized investment (gains), net

     (45,353     (578,238     (623,591
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Balance at December 31, 2010

     69,631        1,695,237        1,764,868   

Deferrals

     21        24,991        25,012   

Less: Components of amortization—

    

Periodic amortization

     (6,327     (148,915     (155,242

Interest

     1,503        24,397        25,900   

Unlocking

     529        (2,890     (2,361

Add: Adjustment for unrealized investment (gains), net

     (3,175     (81,809     (84,984
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Balance at April 5, 2011

   $ 62,182      $ 1,511,011      $ 1,573,193   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Amortization of DAC and VOBA is based on the amount of gross margins or profits recognized, including investment gains and losses. The adjustment for unrealized net investment gains represents the amount of DAC and VOBA that would have been amortized if such unrealized gains and losses had been recognized. This is referred to as the “shadow adjustments” as the additional amortization is reflected in AOCI rather than the statements of operations. As of September 30, 2012 and 2011, the VOBA balance included cumulative adjustments for net unrealized investment gains of $(339,420) and $(170,117), respectively, and the DAC balances included cumulative adjustments for net unrealized investment gains of $(50,711) and $(2,146), respectively.

 

F-34


Table of Contents

The above DAC balances include $9,068 and $5,048 of DSI, net of shadow adjustments, as of September 30, 2012 and 2011, respectively.

The weighted average amortization period for DAC and VOBA are approximately 5.5 and 6.3 years, respectively. Estimated amortization expense for DAC and VOBA in future fiscal years is as follows:

 

     Estimated
Amortization
Expense
        

Fiscal Year

   VOBA      DAC  

2013

   $ 49,851       $ 18,293   

2014

     57,552         23,090   

2015

     51,503         23,376   

2016

     47,148         22,315   

2017

     39,965         21,042   

Thereafter

     197,721         111,818   

(8)    Other Liabilities

Other liabilities consisted of the following:

 

     September 30,  
     2012      2011  

Amounts payable for investment purchases

   $ 206,681       $ 13,353   

Retained asset account

     203,685         191,452   

Income taxes payable

     66,284         —     

Funds withheld from reinsurers

     54,691         52,953   

Amounts payable to reinsurers

     31,959         13,884   

Remittances and items not allocated

     29,469         34,646   

Accrued expenses

     25,199         21,952   

Derivatives—futures contracts

     928         3,828   

Amounts due to HGI (Note 15)

     —           49,339   

Other

     84,326         51,500   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 
   $ 703,222       $ 432,907   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

(9)    Note Payable

On April 7, 2011, Raven Reinsurance Company (“Raven Re”), a newly-formed wholly-owned subsidiary of FGLH, issued a $95,000 surplus note to OMGUK. The surplus note was issued at par and carried a 6% fixed interest rate, as discussed further in Note 15. The note had a maturity date which was the later of (i) December 31, 2012 or (ii) the date on which all amounts due and payable to the lender have been paid in full. The note was settled in October 2011 at face value (without the payment of interest) in connection with the closing of the Raven springing amendment and replacement of the reserve facility discussed in Note 15.

(10)    Equity

Restricted Net Assets of Subsidiaries

FGL’s equity in restricted net assets of consolidated subsidiaries was approximately $1,164,089 as of September 30, 2012 representing 90% of FGL’s consolidated member’s equity as of September 30, 2012 and consisted of net assets of FGLH which were restricted as to transfer to FGL in the form of cash dividends, loans or advances under regulatory restrictions.

 

F-35


Table of Contents

(11)    Employee Benefit Plans

FGLH sponsors a defined contribution plan in which eligible participants may defer a fixed amount or a percentage of their eligible compensation, subject to limitations, and FGLH makes a discretionary matching contribution of up to 5% of eligible compensation. FGLH has also established a nonqualified defined contribution plan for independent agents. FGLH makes contributions to the plan based on both FGLH’s and the agent’s performance. Contributions are discretionary and evaluated annually. Aggregate contributions charged to operations for the defined contribution plans, including discretionary amounts, were $812, $319, $314 and $1,168 for the year ended September 30, 2012, the Successor period of April 6, 2011 to September 30, 2011, the Predecessor period of January 1, 2011 to April 5, 2011 and the year ended December 31, 2010, respectively.

(12)    Stock Compensation

Total stock compensation expense associated with stock option awards recognized by the Company during the year ended September 30, 2012 was $163 ($106, net of related tax expense). No stock compensation expense was incurred during the Successor period of April 6, 2011 to September 30, 2011, the Predecessor period of January 1, 2011 to April 5, 2011 and the year ended December 31, 2010. The stock compensation expense is included in “Acquisition and operating expenses, net of deferrals” in the Consolidated Statements of Operations.

A summary of the Company’s outstanding stock options as of September 30, 2012, and changes during the year, is as follows:

 

Stock Option Awards

   Options     Weighted Average
Exercise Price
     Weighted Average
Grant Date Fair
Value
 

Stock options outstanding at September 30, 2011

     —        $ —         $ —     

Granted

     207        38.20         3.90   

Exercised

     —          —           —     

Forfeited or expired

     (6     38.14         3.90   
  

 

 

      

Stock options outstanding at September 30, 2012

     201        38.20         3.90   
  

 

 

      

Vested and exercisable at September 30, 2012

     —          —           —     
  

 

 

      

Outstanding and expected to vest at September 30, 2012

     161        38.20         3.90   
  

 

 

      

The total compensation cost related to non-vested awards not yet recognized as of September 30, 2012 totaled $464 and will be recognized over a weighted-average period of 2.1 years.

On November 2, 2011, FGLH’s compensation committee (on behalf of its board of directors) approved a long-term stock-based incentive plan that permits the grant of options to purchase shares of FGLH’s common stock to key employees of FGLH. On November 2, 2011, FGLH’s compensation committee also approved a dividend equivalent plan that permits holders of these options the right to receive a payment in cash in an amount equal to the ordinary dividends declared and paid or debt service payments to HGI by FGLH in each calendar year, divided by the total number of FGLH common shares outstanding, starting in the year in which the dividend equivalent is granted through the year immediately prior to the year in which the dividend equivalent vests with respect to a participant’s option shares.

During Fiscal 2012, FGLH granted 207 stock option awards under the terms of the plan. These stock options vest over a period of 3 years and expire on the seventh anniversary of the grant. The total fair value of the grants on their grant dates was approximately $807. As of September 30, 2012, FGLH determined it was probable that the dividend equivalent plan will vest and recorded a provision of $504 for the ratable recognition of such projected liability over the option vesting period.

 

F-36


Table of Contents

The following assumptions were used in the determination of these grant date fair values using the Black-Scholes option pricing model:

 

     2012  

Risk-free interest rate

     0.8%   

Assumed dividend yield

     10.0%   

Expected option term

     4.5 years   

Volatility

     35.0%   

(13)    Income Taxes

As of the financial statement dates, FGL was a limited liability company (subsequently converted to a C corp) wholly owned by HGI. For income tax purposes, FGL and its non-life insurance subsidiaries (exclusive of FGLH’s non-life subs) (collectively “FGNL”) are disregarded entities and taxed as if they were part of HGI. As a result, income tax expense or benefit resulting from their operations is not recorded in the Company’s financial statements. If FGNL were a separate taxable entity, its income tax expense would be computed on a standalone basis in accordance with ASC Topic 740 and, on a pro forma basis, would have been $4,612 for Fiscal 2012, consisting of $3,334 current tax expense and a $1,278 deferred tax expense, and $441 for Fiscal 2011, consisting of a $1,961 current tax expense partially offset by a $1,520 deferred tax benefit.

For the Predecessor periods of January 1, 2011 to April 5, 2011, and year ended December 31, 2010, there were no disregarded entities included in the consolidated group. The income tax benefit for the entire consolidated group is reflected in the Company’s financial statements for those periods.

Income tax benefit was calculated based upon the following components of income before income taxes:

 

     Successor           Predecessor  
     Year Ended
September 30, 2012
    April 6, 2011 to
September 30, 2011
          January 1, 2011
to April 5, 2011
     Year Ended
December 31, 2010
 

Pretax income (loss):

             

United States

   $ 201,647      $ 137,676          $ 5,102       $ 41,975   

Outside the United States

     (3,131     (2,721         —           —     
  

 

 

   

 

 

       

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total pretax income

   $ 198,516      $ 134,955          $ 5,102       $ 41,975   
  

 

 

   

 

 

       

 

 

    

 

 

 

The components of income tax benefit were as follows:

 

     Successor           Predecessor  
     Year Ended
September 30, 2012
    April 6, 2011 to
September 30, 2011
          January 1, 2011
to April 5, 2011
    Year Ended
December 31, 2010
 

Current:

            

Federal

   $ (74,388   $ 875          $ (689   $ (1,723

State

     —          —              —          —     
  

 

 

   

 

 

       

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total current

     (74,388     875            (689     (1,723
  

 

 

   

 

 

       

 

 

   

 

 

 

Deferred:

            

Federal

     220,046        40,869            8,491        131,845   

State

     —          —              —          —     
  

 

 

   

 

 

       

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total deferred

     220,046        40,869            8,491        131,845   
  

 

 

   

 

 

       

 

 

   

 

 

 

Income tax benefit

   $ 145,658      $ 41,744          $ 7,802      $ 130,122   
  

 

 

   

 

 

       

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

F-37


Table of Contents

The difference between income taxes expected at the U.S. Federal statutory income tax rate of 35% and reported income tax expense is summarized as follows:

 

     Successor           Predecessor  
     Year Ended
September 30, 2012
    April 6, 2011 to
September 30, 2011
          January 1, 2011
to April 5, 2011
    Year Ended
December 31, 2010
 

Expected income tax (expense)/benefit at Federal statutory rate

   $ (69,481   $ (47,234       $ (1,786   $ (14,691

Income of FGNL at Federal statutory rate

     20,377        58,370            —          —     

Valuation allowance for deferred tax assets

     197,798        30,064            11,028        145,276   

Other

     (3,036     544            (1,440     (463
  

 

 

   

 

 

       

 

 

   

 

 

 

Reported income tax benefit

   $ 145,658      $ 41,744          $ 7,802      $ 130,122   
  

 

 

   

 

 

       

 

 

   

 

 

 

Effective tax rate

     (73.4 )%      (30.9 )%          (152.9 )%      (310.0 )% 
  

 

 

   

 

 

       

 

 

   

 

 

 

For the year ended September 30, 2012, the Company’s effective tax rate of (73.4)%, representing a tax benefit despite pretax income, was positively impacted by the release of valuation allowance attributed to the Company’s determination that certain of its deferred tax assets are more likely than not realizable, and the gain on contingent purchase price reduction incurred by FGNL, which is reflected in the effect of its income excluded in the above table.

For the Successor period of April 6, 2011 to September 30, 2011, the Company’s effective tax rate of (30.9)% was positively impacted by the release of valuation allowance attributed to the Company’s determination that certain of its deferred tax assets are more likely than not realizable, and the bargain purchase gain incurred by FGNL, which is reflected in the effect of its income excluded in the above table.

For the Predecessor period of January 1, 2011 to April 5, 2011, the Company’s effective tax rate of (152.9)% was positively impacted by the release of valuation allowance attributed to the Company’s determination that certain of its deferred tax assets are more likely than not realizable.

For the year ended December 31, 2010, the Company’s effective tax rate of (310.0)% was positively impacted by the release of valuation allowance attributed to the Company’s determination that certain of its deferred tax assets are more likely than not realizable.

 

F-38


Table of Contents

The following table is a summary of the components of deferred income tax assets and liabilities:

 

     September 30,  
     2012     2011  

Noncurrent deferred tax assets:

    

Net operating loss, credit and capital loss carryforwards

   $ 283,988      $ 475,248   

Deferred acquisition costs

     9,906        74,175   

Insurance reserves and claim related adjustments

     620,285        408,214   

Other

     19,680        22,214   

Valuation allowance

     (177,508     (375,306
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total noncurrent deferred tax assets

     756,351        604,545   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Noncurrent deferred tax liabilities:

    

Value of business acquired

     (36,512     (148,876

Investments

     (438,655     (246,632

Other

     (1,548     (1,308
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total noncurrent deferred tax liabilities

     (476,715     (396,816
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net current and noncurrent deferred tax assets

   $ 279,636      $ 207,729   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

At September 30, 2012, the Company’s deferred tax assets were primarily the result of U.S. net operating loss (“NOL”), capital loss and tax credit carryforwards and insurance reserves. Its net deferred tax asset position at September 30, 2012 and 2011, before consideration of its recorded valuation allowance, totaled $457,144 and $583,035, respectively. A valuation allowance of $177,508 and $375,306 was recorded against its gross deferred tax asset balance at September 30, 2012 and 2011, respectively. The Company’s net deferred tax asset position at September 30, 2012 and 2011, after taking into consideration the valuation allowance, is $279,636 and $207,729, respectively. For the year ended September 30, 2012 and the Successor period of April 6, 2011 to September 30, 2011, the Company recorded a net valuation allowance release of $197,798 (comprised of a full year valuation release of $204,736 related to the life insurance companies, partially offset by an increase to valuation allowance of $6,938 related to FGLH’s non-life companies) and $30,064, respectively, based on management’s reassessment of the amount of its deferred tax assets that are more-likely-than-not realizable.

At September 30, 2012, the Company’s valuation allowance of $177,508 consisted of a partial valuation allowance of $145,854 on capital loss carryforwards and a full valuation allowance of $31,654 on FGLH’s non-life insurance net deferred taxes. At September 30, 2011, the Company’s valuation allowance of $375,306 consisted of a partial valuation allowance of $138,257 on capital loss carryforwards, a full valuation allowance of $24,716 on FGLH’s non-life insurance net deferred taxes and a partial valuation allowance of $212,333 on other net deferred taxes, including NOLs.

As a consequence of FGL’s acquisition of FGLH, certain tax attributes (carry-forwards) of FGLH became limited at the FGLH Acquisition Date. In addition, FGLH experienced cumulative losses during the three year period preceding its acquisition. These are among the factors the Company considered in establishing a valuation allowance against FGLH’s deferred tax asset position at the FGLH Acquisition Date.

 

F-39


Table of Contents

At each reporting date, management considers new evidence, both positive and negative, that could impact management’s view with regard to future realization of deferred tax assets. As of September 30, 2012, management considered the following positive and negative evidence concerning the future realization of FGLH’s deferred tax assets:

Positive Evidence:

 

   

FGL has three years of cumulative US GAAP pre-tax income;

 

   

FGL’s internal projections of taxable income estimated in future periods reflect a continuation of this trend;

 

   

FGL has projected that the reversal of taxable temporary timing differences will unwind in the twenty year projection period;

 

   

FGL has refined tax planning strategies to utilize capital loss carryforwards by selling acquisition date built-in gains;

 

   

FGL has a history of utilizing all significant tax attributes before they expire; and

 

   

FGL’s inventory of limited attributes has been significantly reduced as a result of amending certain tax returns.

Negative Evidence:

 

   

Tax rules limit the ability to use carryforwards in future years;

 

   

There is a brief carryback/carryforward period for life insurance company capital losses (i.e. 3-year carryback/ 5-year carryforward)

Based on an assessment of the evidence above, management determined that sufficient positive evidence exists as of September 30, 2012 to conclude that it is “more likely than not” that additional deferred taxes of FGL are more-likely-than-not realizable and, therefore, reduced the valuation allowance accordingly.

At September 30, 2012 and 2011, FGL has NOL carryforwards of $86,978 and $428,005, respectively, which, if unused, will expire in years 2026 through 2032. FGL has capital loss carryforwards totaling $551,897 and $717,267 at September 30, 2012 and 2011, respectively, which if unused, will expire in years 2013 through 2017. In addition, at September 30, 2012 and 2011, FGL has low income housing tax credit carryforwards totaling $52,780 and $68,099, respectively, which, if unused, will expire in years 2017 through 2032 and alternative minimum tax credits of $7,602 and $6,304, respectively, that may be carried forward indefinitely. Certain tax attributes are subject to an annual limitation as a result of the acquisition of FGLH by the Company, which constitutes a change of ownership, as defined under IRC Section 382.

U.S. Federal income tax returns of FGL for years prior to 2008 are no longer subject to examination by the taxing authorities. With limited exception, FGL is no longer subject to state and local income tax audits for years prior to 2008. However, Federal NOL carryforwards from tax years ended June 30, 2006 and December 31, 2006, respectively, continue to be subject to Internal Revenue Service examination until the statute of limitations expires for the years in which these NOL carryforwards are ultimately utilized.

 

F-40


Table of Contents

(14)    Commitments and Contingencies

Lease Commitments

The Company leases office space under non-cancelable operating leases that expire in May 2021. The Company also leased office furniture and office equipment under non-cancelable operating leases that expired in 2012. For the year ended September 30, 2012, the Successor period of April 6, 2011 to September 30, 2011, the Predecessor period of January 1, 2011 to April 5, 2011 and the year ended December 31, 2010, total rent expense was $2,301, $1,346, $524 and $2,678, respectively. As of September 30, 2012, the minimum rental commitments under the non-cancelable leases are as follows:

 

Fiscal Year

   Amount  

2013

   $ 1,158   

2014

     1,192   

2015

     1,227   

2016

     1,263   

2017

     1,249   

Thereafter

     5,184   
  

 

 

 

Total

   $ 11,273   
  

 

 

 

Contingencies

Regulatory and Litigation Matters

FGLH is assessed amounts by the state guaranty funds to cover losses to policyholders of insolvent or rehabilitated insurance companies. Those mandatory assessments may be partially recovered through a reduction in future premium taxes in certain states. At September 30, 2012, FGLH has accrued $5,909 for guaranty fund assessments which is expected to be offset by estimated future premium tax deductions of $4,213.

The Company has received inquiries from a number of state regulatory authorities regarding its use of the U.S. Social Security Administration’s Death Master File (“Death Master File”) and compliance with state claims practices regulation and unclaimed property and escheatment laws. To date, the Company has received inquiries from authorities in Maryland, Minnesota and New York. The New York Insurance Department issued a letter and subsequent regulation requiring life insurers doing business in New York to use the Death Master File or similar databases to determine if benefits were payable under life insurance policies, annuities and retained asset accounts. Legislation requiring insurance companies to use the Death Master File to identify potential claims has recently been enacted in FGLIC’s state of domicile (Maryland) and other states. As a result of these legislative and regulatory developments, in May 2012 the Company undertook an initiative to use the Death Master File and other publicly available databases to identify persons potentially entitled to benefits under life insurance policies, annuities and retained asset accounts. During Fiscal 2012, the Company incurred an $11,000 benefit expense, net of reinsurance, to increase reserves to cover potential benefits payable resulting from this ongoing effort. Based on its analysis to date and management’s estimate, the Company believes the remaining accrual will cover the reasonably estimated liability arising out of these developments. Additional costs that cannot be reasonably estimated as of the date of this filing are possible as a result of ongoing regulatory developments and other future requirements related to this matter.

The Company is involved in various pending or threatened legal proceedings, including purported class actions, arising in the ordinary course of business. In some instances, these proceedings include claims for unspecified or substantial punitive damages and similar types of relief in addition to amounts for alleged contractual liability or requests for equitable relief. In the opinion of management and in light of existing insurance and other potential indemnification, reinsurance and established reserves, such litigation is not expected to have a material adverse effect on the Company’s financial position, although it is possible that the results of operations and cash flows could be materially affected by an unfavorable outcome in any one period.

 

F-41


Table of Contents

Guarantees

The First Amended and Restated Stock Purchase Agreement, dated February 17, 2011 (the “F&G Stock Purchase Agreement”) between FGL and OMGUK includes a Guarantee and Pledge Agreement which creates certain obligations for FGLH as a grantor and also grants a security interest to OMGUK of FGLH’s equity interest in FGL Insurance in the event that FGL fails to perform in accordance with the terms of the F&G Stock Purchase Agreement. The Company is not aware of any events or transactions that resulted in non-compliance with the Guarantee and Pledge Agreement.

(15)    Reinsurance

The Company reinsures portions of its policy risks with other insurance companies. The use of reinsurance does not discharge an insurer from liability on the insurance ceded. The insurer is required to pay in full the amount of its insurance liability regardless of whether it is entitled to or able to receive payment from the reinsurer. The portion of risks exceeding the Company’s retention limit is reinsured with other insurers. The Company seeks reinsurance coverage in order to limit its exposure to mortality losses and enhance capital position. The Company follows reinsurance accounting when there is adequate risk transfer. Otherwise, the deposit method of accounting is followed. The Company also assumes policy risks from other insurance companies.

The effect of reinsurance on premiums earned, benefits incurred and reserve changes for the year ended September 30, 2012, the Successor period of April 6, 2011 to September 30, 2011, the Predecessor period of January 1, 2011 to April 5, 2011 and the year ended December 31, 2010, were as follows:

 

     Successor  
     Year Ended September 30, 2012     April 6, 2011 to September 30, 2011  
     Net Premiums Earned     Net Benefits Incurred
and Reserve Changes
    Net Premiums Earned     Net Benefits Incurred
and Reserve Changes
 

Direct

   $ 297,964      $ 1,033,336      $ 157,772      $ 392,073   

Assumed

     47,179        34,940        22,858        19,571   

Ceded

     (289,846     (290,904     (141,628     (164,012
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net

   $ 55,297      $ 777,372      $ 39,002      $ 247,632   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

 

 

     Predecessor  
     January 1, 2011 to April 5, 2011     Year Ended December 31, 2010  
     Net Premiums Earned     Net Benefits Incurred
and Reserve Changes
    Net Premiums Earned     Net Benefits Incurred
and Reserve Changes
 

Direct

   $ 80,929      $ 261,333      $ 347,485      $ 1,067,363   

Assumed

     12,198        10,539        47,770        40,851   

Ceded

     (39,443     (43,143     (175,285     (245,220
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net

   $ 53,684      $ 228,729      $ 219,970      $ 862,994   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Amounts payable or recoverable for reinsurance on paid and unpaid claims are not subject to periodic or maximum limits. During the year ended September 30, 2012, the Successor period of April 6, 2011 to September 30, 2011, the Predecessor period of January 1, 2011 to April 5, 2011 and the year ended December 31, 2010, the Company did not write off any reinsurance balances nor did it commute any ceded reinsurance.

No policies issued by the Company have been reinsured with any foreign company, which is controlled, either directly or indirectly, by a party not primarily engaged in the business of insurance.

The Company has not entered into any reinsurance agreements in which the reinsurer may unilaterally cancel any reinsurance for reasons other than non-payment of premiums or other similar credit issues.

 

F-42


Table of Contents

The Company has the following significant reinsurance agreements as of September 30, 2012:

Reserve Facility

Pursuant to the F&G Stock Purchase Agreement, on April 7, 2011, FGL Insurance recaptured all of the life insurance business ceded to OM Re. OM Re transferred assets with a fair value of $653,684 to FGL Insurance in settlement of all of OM Re’s obligations under these reinsurance agreements. The fair value of the transferred assets, which was based on the economic reserves, was approved by the Maryland Insurance Administration. No gain or loss was recognized in connection with the recapture. The fair value of the assets acquired and liabilities assumed is reflected in the acquisition method. See Note 18 for additional details.

On April 7, 2011, FGL Insurance ceded to Raven Re, on a coinsurance basis, a significant portion of the business recaptured from OM Re. Raven Re was capitalized by a $250 capital contribution from FGL Insurance and a surplus note (i.e., subordinated debt) issued to OMGUK in the principal amount of $95,000 (see Note 9 for the terms of such note). The proceeds from the surplus note issuance and the surplus note are reflected in the acquisition method. Raven Re financed $535,000 of statutory reserves for this business with a letter of credit facility provided by Nomura and guaranteed by OMGUK and FGL.

On April 7, 2011, FGL Insurance entered into a reimbursement agreement with Nomura to establish a reserve facility and Nomura charged an upfront structuring fee (the “Structuring Fee”). The Structuring Fee was in the amount of $13,750 and is related to the retrocession of the life business recaptured from OM Re and related credit facility. The Structuring Fee was deferred and was fully amortized as of September 30, 2011 as a result of the termination of the reserve facility in connection with FGL Insurance accelerating the effective date of the amended and restated Raven Springing Amendment which is described in the Wilton Agreement discussion below.

Wilton Agreement

On January 26, 2011, FGL entered into a commitment agreement (the “Commitment Agreement”) with Wilton Re U.S. Holdings, Inc. (“Wilton”) committing Wilton Re, a wholly-owned subsidiary of Wilton and a Minnesota insurance company, to enter into one of two amendments to an existing reinsurance agreement with FGL Insurance. On April 8, 2011, FGL Insurance ceded significantly all of the remaining life insurance business that it had retained to Wilton Re under the first of the two amendments with Wilton. FGL Insurance transferred assets with a fair value of $535,826, net of ceding commission, to Wilton Re. The Company considered the effects of the first amendment in the opening balance sheet and the acquisition method as of FGLH Acquisition Date. Effective April 26, 2011, FGL elected the second of the two amendments under the Commitment Agreement (the “Raven Springing Amendment”), which committed FGL Insurance to cede to Wilton Re all of the business (the “Raven Block”) then reinsured with Raven Re on or before December 31, 2012, subject to regulatory approval. The Raven Springing Amendment was intended to mitigate the risk associated with FGL’s obligation under the F&G Stock Purchase Agreement, by replacing the Raven Re reserve facility by December 31, 2012. On September 9, 2011, FGL Insurance and Wilton Re executed an amended and restated Raven Springing Amendment whereby the recapture of the business ceded to Raven Re by FGL Insurance and the re-cession to Wilton Re closed on October 17, 2011 with an effective date of October 1, 2011. In connection with the closing, FGL Insurance transferred assets with a fair value of $580,683, including ceding commission, to Wilton Re.

In September 2012, Wilton Re and FGL Insurance reached a final agreement on the initial settlements associated with the reinsurance transactions FGL Insurance entered into subsequent to the FGLH Acquisition. The final settlement amounts did not result in any material adjustments to the amounts reflected in the financial statements. FGL Insurance recognized a net pre-tax gain of $18,029 on these reinsurance transactions which has been deferred and is being amortized over the remaining life of the underlying reinsured contracts.

 

F-43


Table of Contents

Commissioners Annuity Reserve Valuation Method Facility (“CARVM”)

Effective September 30, 2008, FGL Insurance entered into a yearly renewable term quota share reinsurance agreement with Old Mutual Reassurance (Ireland) Ltd. (“OM Re”), an affiliated company of OMGUK, FGLH’s former parent, whereby OM Re assumes a portion of the risk that policyholders exercise the “waiver of surrender charge” features on certain deferred annuity policies. This agreement did not meet risk transfer requirements to qualify as reinsurance under US GAAP. Under the terms of the agreement, the Company expensed net fees of $4,004 and $1,809 for the years ended September 30, 2012 and 2011, respectively. Although this agreement did not provide reinsurance for reserves on a US GAAP basis, it did provide for reinsurance of reserves on a statutory basis. The statutory reserves were secured by a letter of credit with Old Mutual plc of London (“OM”), England OMGUK’s parent.

Effective October 1, 2012, FGL Insurance recaptured the CARVM reinsurance agreement from OM Re and simultaneously ceded the business to Raven Re. The recapture of the OM Re CARVM reinsurance agreement satisfies the Company’s obligation under the F&G Stock Purchase Agreement to replace the letter of credit provided by OM no later than December 31, 2015. In connection with the new CARVM reinsurance agreement, FGLH and Raven Re entered into an agreement with Nomura Bank International plc (“Nomura”) to establish a $295,000 reserve financing facility in the form of a letter of credit issued by Nomura and Nomura charged an upfront structuring fee in the amount of $2,800. The structuring fee was paid by FGL Insurance and will be deferred and amortized over the expected life of the facility.

(16)    Related Party Transactions

Since its inception, the Company has utilized the services of the management and staff of HGI and also shares office space with HGI. The Company recorded approximately $25 as contributed capital for such services for the year ended September 30, 2012. The Company believes these allocations were made on a reasonable basis; however, they do not necessarily represent the costs that would have been incurred by the Company on a stand-alone basis. The Company did not record a cost for these services for the Successor period of April 6, 2011 to September 30, 2011, as the amount was inconsequential.

FGLH participates in loans to third parties originated by Salus, an affiliated company indirectly owned by HGI that provides asset-based financing. Salus has assets of $195,000 (unaudited) and liabilities of $163,000 (unaudited) as of September 30, 2012. As part of the participation agreement entered into with Salus, FGLH has committed to participate in its share of up to $182,371 of the loans originated by Salus, of which $52,904 remains undrawn as of September 30, 2012 and $129,467 of loan participations and accrued interest of $602 are included in “Related party loans and investment” in the Consolidated Balance Sheets as of September 30, 2012. In addition to the participation in loans originated by Salus, FGLH also agreed to provide Salus with financing in the form of a revolving loan of $20,000, which is also included in “Related party loans and investment” in the Consolidated Balance Sheets as of September 30, 2012. For year ended September 30, 2012, FGLH earned interest of $2,041 and undrawn line fees of $67 on the revolving loan with Salus, which is included in “Net investment income” in the Consolidated Statement of Operations.

On September 15, 2012, Harbinger Asset Management Holdings, LLC (“HAM”), an affiliated company, transferred its account interest in Salus to FS Holdco. The account interest consists of HAM’s contributed capital to Salus of $32,000 and an annual preferred dividend of 8%. HAM retained its interest in Salus’ residual profits and its ability to direct Salus’ operations. After the transfer of the account interest, Salus is considered to be a variable-interest entity. HAM was determined to be the primary beneficiary of Salus’ operations, based on its ability to direct Salus’ activities that most significantly impact economic performance and the conclusion that the operations of HAM and Salus are more closely related under the related party tie-breaker test, and therefore continues to consolidate Salus. FGL accounted for the transfer at HAM’s carrying value since the transaction was

 

F-44


Table of Contents

between entities under common control. The account interest of $32,000 is included in “Related party loan and investment” in the Consolidated Balance Sheets as of September 30, 2012, as an equity investment carried at fair value through accumulated other comprehensive income. The Company’s loss exposure at Salus is limited to the recoverability of the interest and principal of its investments and loans carried on the Balance Sheet.

HGI had advanced amounts to the Company to fund collateral posted by the Company under the Nomura reserve facility described in Note 15. As of September 30, 2011, the amounts that were due to HGI, which were included in “Other liabilities”, aggregated $49,339, which was subsequently repaid in October 2011 upon the termination of the reserve facility and return of the collateral.

On March 7, 2011, HGI entered into an agreement (the “Transfer Agreement”) with the Master Fund whereby on March 9, 2011, (i) HGI acquired from the Master Fund a 100% membership interest in FGL, which was the buyer under the F&G Stock Purchase Agreement, between FGL and OMGUK, pursuant to which FGL agreed to acquire all of the outstanding shares of capital stock of FGLH and certain intercompany loan agreements between OM Group, as lender, and FGLH, as borrower, and (ii) the Master Fund transferred to FGL the sole issued and outstanding Ordinary Share of FS Holdco, a Cayman Islands exempted limited company (together, the “Insurance Transaction”). In consideration for the interests in FGL and FS Holdco, HGI agreed to reimburse the Master Fund for certain expenses incurred by the Master Fund in connection with the Insurance Transaction (up to a maximum of $13,300) and to submit certain expenses of the Master Fund for reimbursement by OM Group under the F&G Stock Purchase Agreement. The Transfer Agreement and the transactions contemplated thereby, including the F&G Stock Purchase Agreement, was approved by HGI’s Board of Directors upon a determination by a special committee (the “FGL Special Committee”) comprised solely of directors who were independent under the rules of the NYSE and represented by independent counsel and other advisors, that it was in the best interests of HGI and its stockholders (other than the Master Fund and its affiliates) to enter into the Transfer Agreement and proceed with the Insurance Transaction. On April 6, 2011, the Company completed the FGLH Acquisition.

FS Holdco is a holding company, which is the indirect parent company of Front Street. FS Holdco has not engaged in any significant business other than transactions contemplated in connection with the Insurance Transaction.

On May 19, 2011, the FGL Special Committee unanimously determined that it is (i) in the best interests of HGI for Front Street and FGLH to enter into a reinsurance agreement (the “Reinsurance Agreement”), pursuant to which Front Street would reinsure up to $3,000,000 of insurance obligations under annuity contracts of FGLH and (ii) in the best interests of HGI for Front Street and Harbinger Capital Partners II LP (“HCP II”), an affiliate of the Master Fund, to enter into an investment management agreement (the “Investment Management Agreement”), pursuant to which HCP II would be appointed as the investment manager of up to $1,000,000 of assets securing Front Street’s reinsurance obligations under the Reinsurance Agreement, which assets will be deposited in a reinsurance trust account for the benefit of FGLH pursuant to a trust agreement (the “Trust Agreement”). On May 19, 2011, HGI’s board of directors approved the Reinsurance Agreement, the Investment Management Agreement, the Trust Agreement and the transactions contemplated thereby. The FGL Special Committee’s consideration of the Reinsurance Agreement, the Trust Agreement, and the Investment Management Agreement was contemplated by the terms of the Transfer Agreement. In considering the foregoing matters, the FGL Special Committee was advised by independent counsel and received an independent third-party fairness opinion. As discussed further in Note 18, the Reinsurance Agreement required approval of the Maryland Insurance Administration (the “MIA”), which ultimately was not received.

The Company’s pre-closing and closing obligations under the F&G Stock Purchase Agreement, including payment of the purchase price, were guaranteed by the Master Fund. Pursuant to the Transfer Agreement, HGI entered into a Guaranty Indemnity Agreement (the “Guaranty Indemnity”) with the Master Fund, pursuant to which HGI agreed to indemnify the Master Fund for any losses incurred by it or its representatives in connection with the Master Fund’s guaranty of the Company’s pre-closing and closing obligations under the F&G Stock Purchase Agreement.

 

F-45


Table of Contents

(17)    Insurance Subsidiary—Financial Information

The Company’s insurance subsidiaries file financial statements with state insurance regulatory authorities and the National Association of Insurance Commissioners (“NAIC”) that are prepared in accordance with Statutory Accounting Principles (“SAP”) prescribed or permitted by such authorities, which may vary materially from US GAAP. Prescribed SAP includes the Accounting Practices and Procedures Manual of the NAIC as well as state laws, regulations and administrative rules. Permitted SAP encompasses all accounting practices not so prescribed. The principal differences between statutory financial statements and financial statements prepared in accordance with US GAAP are that statutory financial statements do not reflect DAC and VOBA, some bond portfolios may be carried at amortized cost, assets and liabilities are presented net of reinsurance, contractholder liabilities are generally valued using more conservative assumptions and certain assets are non-admitted. Accordingly, statutory operating results and statutory capital and surplus may differ substantially from amounts reported in the US GAAP basis financial statements for comparable items. For example, in accordance with the US GAAP acquisition method of accounting, the amortized cost of FGLH’s invested assets were adjusted to fair value as of the FGLH Acquisition Date while it was not adjusted for statutory reporting. Thus, the net unrealized gains on a statutory basis were $1,245,445 and $697,825 (unaudited) as of September 30, 2012 and 2011, respectively, compared to net unrealized gains of $1,058,447 and $418,210, respectively, on a US GAAP basis, as reported in Note 4.

The Company’s insurance subsidiaries’ statutory financial statements are based on a December 31 year end. Statutory net income (loss) and statutory capital and surplus of the Company’s wholly owned insurance subsidiaries were as follows:

 

     Subsidiary (state of domicile)(a)  
     FGL Insurance (MD)      FGL NY Insurance (NY)  

Statutory Net Income (Loss):

     

Fiscal year ended September 30, 2012 (Unaudited)

   $ 145,199       $ 703   

Period April 6, 2011 to September 30, 2011 (Unaudited)

   $ 38,169       $ 4,850   

Period January 1, 2011 to April 5, 2011 (Unaudited)

   $ 15,332       $ (496

Year ended December 31, 2012

   $ 102,208       $ 1,036   

Year ended December 31, 2011

   $ 110,264       $ 4,540   

Year ended December 31, 2010

   $ 245,849       $ 882   

Statutory Capital and Surplus:

     

September 30, 2012 (Unaudited)

   $ 861,588       $ 45,330   

September 30, 2011 (Unaudited)

   $ 801,945       $ 44,140   

December 31, 2012

   $ 900,472       $ 41,107   

December 31, 2011

   $ 846,434       $ 44,657   

 

 

(a) FGL NY Insurance is a subsidiary of FGL Insurance, and the columns should not be added together.

The amount of statutory capital and surplus necessary to satisfy the applicable regulatory requirements is not significant in relation to FGL Insurance’s and FGL NY Insurance’s respective statutory capital and surplus.

Life insurance companies are subject to certain Risk-Based Capital (“RBC”) requirements as specified by the NAIC. The RBC is used to evaluate the adequacy of capital and surplus maintained by an insurance company in relation to risks associated with: (i) asset risk, (ii) insurance risk, (iii) interest rate risk and (iv) business risk. The Company monitors the RBC of FGLH’s insurance subsidiaries. As of September 30, 2012 and 2011, each of FGLH’s insurance subsidiaries had exceeded the minimum RBC requirements.

The Company’s insurance subsidiaries are restricted by state laws and regulations as to the amount of dividends they may pay to their parent without regulatory approval in any year, the purpose of which is to protect affected insurance policyholders, depositors or investors. Any dividends in excess of limits are deemed “extraordinary” and require approval. Based on statutory results as of December 31, 2011, in accordance with applicable dividend restrictions, the Company’s subsidiaries could pay “ordinary” dividends of $84,643 to FGLH

 

F-46


Table of Contents

in 2012 less any dividends paid during the 12 month period from the last dividend payment. On September 26, 2012, FGL Insurance paid a dividend to FGLH in the amount of $20,000 with respect to its 2011 results. On September 29, 2011 and December 22, 2011, FGL Insurance paid dividends to FGLH in the amount of $20,000 and $20,000, respectively, with regard to its 2010 results. Based on its 2011 calendar year statutory results, FGL Insurance is able to declare an ordinary dividend up to $24,643 from September 27, 2012 through September 29, 2012 (taking into account the dividend payments of $20,000 on September 27, 2011, December 29, 2011 and September 26, 2012), and $44,643 from September 30, 2012 through December 22, 2012 (taking into account the dividend payments of $20,000 on December 29, 2011 and September 26, 2012). In addition, after December 22, 2012, FGL Insurance will be able to declare an additional ordinary dividend in the amount of $64,643 with respect to its 2011 statutory results, subject to management’s discretion.

(18)    Acquisition

FGLH

On April 6, 2011, the Company acquired all of the outstanding shares of capital stock of FGLH and certain intercompany loan agreements between the seller, as lender, and FGLH, as borrower, for cash consideration of $350,000 (including $5,000 re-characterized as an expense), which amount could be reduced by up to $50,000 post closing (as discussed further below). The Company incurred $18,300 of expenses related to the FGLH Acquisition, including $5,000 of the $350,000 cash purchase price which has been re-characterized as an expense since the seller made a $5,000 expense reimbursement to the Master Fund upon closing of the FGLH Acquisition. Such expenses are not included in the Consolidated Statements of Operations for the Successor period of April 6, 2011 to September 30, 2011, but included in the Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity as the acquisition expenses were recognized by the Company during the pre-acquisition period from October 1, 2010 to April 5, 2011. The FGLH Acquisition continued HGI’s strategy of obtaining controlling equity stakes in companies that operate across a diversified set of industries.

Net Assets Acquired

The acquisition of FGLH has been accounted for under the acquisition method which requires the total purchase price to be allocated to the assets acquired and liabilities assumed based on their estimated fair values. The fair values assigned to the assets acquired and liabilities assumed are based on valuations using management’s best estimates and assumptions and were preliminary pending the completion of the valuation analysis of selected assets and liabilities. During the measurement period (which is not to exceed one year from the acquisition date), the Company is required to retrospectively adjust the provisional assets or liabilities if new information is obtained about facts and circumstances that existed as of the acquisition date that, if known, would have resulted in the recognition of those assets or liabilities as of that date. Effective April 1, 2012, the Company finalized such provisional amounts which were previously disclosed as of September 30, 2011.

 

F-47


Table of Contents

The following table summarizes the provisional and final amounts recognized at fair value for each major class of assets acquired and liabilities assumed as of the FGLH Acquisition Date:

 

     Provisional
Amounts
     Fiscal 2012
Measurement
Period
Adjustments
    Final Amounts  

Investments, cash and accrued investment income, including cash acquired of $1,040,470

   $ 17,705,419       $ —        $ 17,705,419   

Reinsurance recoverable

     929,817         15,246        945,063   

Intangible assets (VOBA)

     577,163         —          577,163   

Deferred tax assets

     256,584         (3,912     252,672   

Other assets

     72,801         —          72,801   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total assets acquired

     19,541,784         11,334        19,553,118   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Contractholder funds and future policy benefits

     18,415,022         —          18,415,022   

Liability for policy and contract claims

     60,400         —          60,400   

Note payable

     95,000         —          95,000   

Other liabilities

     475,285         4,070        479,355   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total liabilities assumed

     19,045,707         4,070        19,049,777   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net assets acquired

     496,077         7,264        503,341   

Cash consideration, net of $5,000 re-characterized as expense

     345,000         —          345,000   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Bargain purchase gain

   $ 151,077       $ 7,264      $ 158,341   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

The application of the acquisition method resulted in a bargain purchase gain of $158,341, which is reflected in the Consolidated Statements of Operations for the Successor period of April 6, 2011 to September 30, 2011. The amount of the bargain purchase gain is equal to the amount by which the fair value of net assets acquired exceeded the consideration transferred. The Company believes that the resulting bargain purchase gain is reasonable based on the following circumstances: (a) the seller was highly motivated to sell FGLH, as it had publicly announced its intention to do so approximately a year prior to the sale, (b) the fair value of FGLH’s investments and statutory capital increased between the date that the purchase price was initially negotiated and the FGLH Acquisition Date, (c) as a further inducement to consummate the sale, the seller waived, among other requirements, any potential upward adjustment of the purchase price for an improvement in FGLH’s statutory capital between the date of the initially negotiated purchase price and the FGLH Acquisition Date and (d) an independent appraisal of FGLH’s business indicated that its fair value was in excess of the purchase price.

Reinsurance Transactions

As discussed in Note 15, pursuant to the F&G Stock Purchase Agreement on April 7, 2011, FGLH recaptured all of the life business ceded to OM Re. OM Re transferred assets with a fair value of $653,684 to FGLH in settlement of all of OM Re’s obligations under these reinsurance agreements. Such amounts are reflected in FGLH’s application of the acquisition method. Further, on April 7, 2011, FGLH ceded on a coinsurance basis a significant portion of this business to Raven Re. Certain transactions related to Raven Re such as the surplus note issued to OMGUK in the principal amount of $95,000, which was used to partially capitalize Raven Re and the Structuring Fee of $13,750 are also reflected in FGLH’s application of the acquisition method. Pursuant to the terms of the Raven Springing Amendment, the amount payable to Wilton at the closing of such amendment was adjusted to reflect the economic performance for the Raven Block from January 1, 2011 until the effective time of the closing of the Raven Springing Amendment. The estimated economic performance for the Predecessor period from January 1, 2011 to April 6, 2011 was considered in FGLH’s opening balance sheet and application of the acquisition method. Of the ongoing settlement adjustments resolved with Wilton Re, as discussed in Note 15, it was determined that $11,176, less $3,912 of deferred income

 

F-48


Table of Contents

taxes, related to the pre-acquisition period, and were reflected as measurement period adjustments to the initial application of the acquisition method. Such adjustments have been retrospectively reflected in the accompanying consolidated financial statements as of and for the Successor period of April 6, 2011 to September 30, 2011.

Contingent Purchase Price Reduction

As contemplated by the terms of the F&G Stock Purchase Agreement, Front Street sought to enter into the Reinsurance Agreement with the Company whereby Front Street would reinsure up to $3,000,000 of insurance obligations under annuity contracts of FGLH, and HCP II would be appointed the investment manager of up to $1,000,000 of assets securing Front Street’s reinsurance obligations under the Reinsurance Agreement. These assets would be deposited in a reinsurance trust account for the benefit of FGLH.

The Reinsurance Agreement required the approval of the MIA. The F&G Stock Purchase Agreement provides that the seller may be required to pay up to $50,000 as a post-closing reduction in purchase price if, among other things, the Reinsurance Agreement is not approved by the MIA or is approved subject to certain restrictions or conditions. FGLH received written notice, dated January 10, 2012, from the MIA, rejecting the Reinsurance Agreement, as proposed by the respective parties. HGI is pursuing all available options to recover the full purchase price reduction, including the commencement of litigation against the seller; however, the outcome of any such action is subject to risk and uncertainty and there can be no assurance that any or all of the $50,000 purchase price reduction will be obtained by HGI.

Prior to the receipt of the written rejection notice from the MIA, management believed, based on the facts and circumstances at that time, that the likelihood was remote that the purchase price would be required to be reduced. Therefore a fair value of zero had been assigned to the contingent purchase price reduction as of the FGLH Acquisition Date and at each subsequent quarterly remeasurement date through January 1, 2012. Management now believes that it is near certain that the purchase price will be required to be reduced by the full $50,000 amount and has estimated a fair value of $41,000 for the contingent receivable as of September 30, 2012, reflecting appropriate discounts for potential litigation and regulatory action, length of time until expected payment is received and a credit insurance risk premium. Such $41,000 estimated fair value of the contingent receivable has been reflected in “Other Assets” in the Consolidated Balance Sheet as of September 30, 2012 with a corresponding credit to “Gain on contingent purchase price reduction” in the Consolidated Statement of Operations for the year ended September 30, 2012. Changes in the estimated fair value of the contingent consideration resulting from events after the acquisition date are accounted for in earnings upon each remeasurement date, until such time as the contingency is resolved.

Intangible Assets

VOBA represents the estimated fair value of the right to receive future net cash flows from in-force contracts in a life insurance company acquisition at the acquisition date. VOBA is being amortized over the expected life of the contracts in proportion to either gross premiums or gross profits, depending on the type of contract. Total gross profits include both actual experience as it arises and estimates of gross profits for future periods. FGLH will regularly evaluate and adjust the VOBA balance with a corresponding charge or credit to earnings for the effects of actual gross profits and changes in assumptions regarding estimated future gross profits. The amortization of VOBA is reported in “Amortization of intangibles” in the Consolidated Statements of Operations. The proportion of the VOBA balance attributable to each of the product groups as of the Acquisition date was as follows: 80.4% related to FIA’s, and 19.6% related to deferred annuities.

Refer to Note 7 for FGLH’s historical and estimated future amortization of VOBA, net of interest.

Deferred Taxes

The future tax effects of temporary differences between financial reporting and tax bases of assets and liabilities are measured at the balance sheet date and are recorded as deferred income tax assets and liabilities. The acquisition of FGLH is considered a non-taxable acquisition under tax accounting criteria, therefore, the tax

 

F-49


Table of Contents

basis of assets and liabilities reflect an historical (carryover) basis at the FGLH Acquisition Date. However, since assets and liabilities reported under US GAAP are adjusted to fair value as of the FGLH Acquisition Date, the deferred tax assets and liabilities are also adjusted to reflect the effects of those fair value adjustments. This resulted in shifting FGLH into a significant net deferred tax asset position at the FGLH Acquisition Date, principally due to the write-off of DAC and the establishment of a significantly lesser amount of VOBA which resulted in reducing the associated deferred tax liabilities and thereby shifting FGLH’s net deferred tax position. This shift, coupled with the application of certain tax limitation provisions that apply in the context of a change in ownership transaction, most notably Section 382 of the Internal Revenue Code (the “IRC”), relating to “Limitation in Net Operating Loss Carryforwards and Certain Built-in Losses Following Ownership Change”, as well as other applicable provisions under Sections 381-384 of the IRC, require FGLH to reconsider the realization of FGLH’s gross deferred tax asset position and the need to establish a valuation allowance against it. Management determined that a valuation allowance against a portion of the gross deferred tax asset (“DTA”) would be required as of the FGLH Acquisition Date.

The components of the net deferred tax assets as of the FGLH Acquisition Date (updated for measurement period adjustments) are as follows:

 

Deferred tax assets:

  

DAC

   $ 96,764   

Insurance reserves and claim related adjustments

     401,659   

Net operating losses

     128,437   

Capital losses (carryovers and deferred)

     267,468   

Tax credits

     75,253   

Other deferred tax assets

     24,066   
  

 

 

 

Total deferred tax assets

     993,647   

Valuation allowance

     (405,370
  

 

 

 

Deferred tax assets, net of valuation allowance

     588,277   

Deferred tax liabilities:

  

VOBA

     202,007   

Investments

     121,160   

Other deferred tax liabilities

     12,438   
  

 

 

 

Total deferred tax liabilities

     335,605   
  

 

 

 

Net deferred tax assets

   $ 252,672   
  

 

 

 

2011 Results of FGLH since the FGLH Acquisition Date

The following table presents selected financial information reflecting results for FGLH that are included in the Consolidated Statement of Operations for the Successor period of April 6, 2011 to September 30, 2011:

 

     For the period April 6, 2011 to
September 30, 2011
 

Total revenues

   $ 290,886   

Income, net of taxes

   $ 23,703   

 

F-50


Table of Contents

Supplemental Pro Forma Information—Unaudited

The following table reflects the Company’s unaudited pro forma results as if the FGLH Acquisition was completed on October 1, 2009 and the results of FGLH had been included in the respective full twelve month periods.

 

     Year Ended September 30,  
     2011      2010  

Pro forma:

     

Total revenues

   $ 976,633       $ 953,911   

Net income (loss)

   $ 246,670       $ (166,843

Pro forma total revenues and net income for Fiscal 2011 include the actual reported results of FGLH for the approximate six month period subsequent to April 6, 2011. Reported net income also includes the $158,341 non-recurring bargain purchase gain which was recorded as of the FGLH Acquisition Date, and reflects the retrospective measurement period adjustments disclosed above.

The pro forma information primarily reflects the following pro forma adjustments applied to FGLH’s historical results:

 

   

Reduction in net investment income to reflect amortization of the premium on fixed maturity securities—available-for-sale resulting from the fair value adjustment of these assets;

 

   

Reversal of amortization associated with the elimination of FGLH’s historical DAC;

 

   

Amortization of VOBA associated with the establishment of VOBA arising from the acquisition;

 

   

Adjustments to reflect the impacts of the recapture of the life business from OM Re and the retrocession of the majority of the recaptured business and the reinsurance of certain life business previously not reinsured to an unaffiliated third-party reinsurer, including amortization of the related $13,750 Structuring Fee;

 

   

Adjustments to eliminate interest expense on notes payable to seller and add interest expense on the new $95,000 surplus note payable (which was subsequently settled in October 2011); and

 

   

Reversal of the change in the deferred tax valuation allowance included in the income tax provision.

(19)    Subsequent Events

Conversion to a Corporation

On August 26, 2013, Harbinger F&G, LLC, a Delaware limited liability company, converted into a Delaware corporation, pursuant to a statutory conversion and renamed itself Fidelity & Guaranty Life. Prior to the conversion, Harbinger F&G, LLC distributed its ownership interests in its wholly-owned subsidiaries, HGI Real Estate, LLC, a Delaware limited liability company, and Front Street, to HGI. Harbinger F&G, LLC also distributed and assigned to HGI all of its rights in the interests, liabilities and obligations under its litigation against OMGUK related to a claimed $50 million purchase price adjustment in connection with the FGLH Acquisition. As a result of the statutory conversion, HGI, the sole member of Harbinger F&G, LLC became the holder of all shares of our common stock (prior to the statutory conversion, Harbinger F&G, LLC had no shares of common stock). After the statutory conversion to a corporation occurred, the officers of FGLH were appointed as the officers of Fidelity & Guaranty Life.

 

F-51


Table of Contents

Schedule I

FIDELITY & GUARANTY LIFE AND SUBSIDIARIES

Summary of Investments—Other than Investments in Related Parties

September 30, 2012

( In thousands)

 

     Amortized cost(a)      Fair value      Amount at which
shown  in the balance
sheet
 

Fixed maturities:

        

Bonds:

        

United States Government and government agencies and authorities

   $ 1,435,556       $ 1,466,488       $ 1,466,488   

States, municipalities and political subdivisions

     1,083,774         1,224,554         1,224,554   

Foreign governments

     672         815         815   

Public utilities

     2,166,720         2,400,804         2,400,804   

Convertibles and bonds with warrants attached

     —           —           —     

All other corporate bonds

     10,354,332         10,996,252         10,996,252   

Redeemable preferred stock

     —           —           —     
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total fixed maturities

     15,041,054         16,088,913         16,088,913   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Equity securities:

        

Common stocks:

        

Public utilities

     —           —           —     

Banks, trust, and insurance companies

     67,452         68,692         68,692   

Industrial, miscellaneous and all other

     —           —           —     

Nonredeemable preferred stock

     170,047         179,395         179,395   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total equity securities

     237,499         248,087         248,087   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Derivative investments

     142,123         200,667         200,667   

Policy loans

     11,758         11,758         11,758   

Other long-term investments

     7,056         7,056         7,056   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total investments

   $ 15,439,490       $ 16,556,481       $ 16,556,481   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

(a) Represents (i) original cost reduced by repayments and other-than-temporary impairments and adjusted for amortization of premiums and accrual of discounts for fixed maturity securities, (ii) original cost reduced by other-than-temporary impairments for equity securities and (iii) original cost for derivative investments.

See accompanying Independent Auditors’ Report.

 

F-52


Table of Contents

Schedule II

FIDELITY & GUARANTY LIFE (Parent Only)

CONDENSED BALANCE SHEETS

(In thousands)

 

     September 30, 2012      September 30, 2011  
ASSETS      

Investments in consolidated subsidiaries

   $ 1,026,471       $ 433,041   

Notes and accrued interest receivable from insurance subsidiary

     224,363         243,918   

Contingent purchase price reduction receivable

     41,000         —     

Collateral posted on behalf of insurance subsidiary

     —           49,339   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total assets

   $ 1,291,834       $ 726,298   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 
LIABILITIES AND MEMBER’S EQUITY      

Amounts due to Harbinger Group, Inc. (Parent)

   $ —         $ 49,339   

Accounts payable and accrued expenses

     1,053         1,558   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total liabilities

     1,053         50,897   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Member’s equity

     

Contributed capital

     415,577         379,359   

Retained earnings

     440,722         136,549   

Accumulated other comprehensive income

     434,482         159,493   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total member’s equity

     1,290,781         675,401   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total liabilities and member’s equity

   $ 1,291,834       $ 726,298   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

See accompanying Independent Auditors’ Report.

 

F-53


Table of Contents

Schedule II

(continued)

 

FIDELITY & GUARANTY LIFE (Parent Only)

CONDENSED STATEMENTS OF OPERATIONS

( In thousands)

 

     Successor  
     Year Ended
September  30,
2012
    April 6, 2011
to  September 30,
2011
 

Revenues

   $ —        $ —     

Cost of revenues

     —          —     
  

 

 

   

 

 

 
     —          —     
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating expenses:

    

General and administrative expenses

     666        580   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total operating expenses

     666        580   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating loss

     (666     (580

Other income (expense):

    

Equity in net income of subsidiaries

     282,931        3,812   

Interest income from subsidiary

     23,485        15,414   

Interest expense

     (2,556     (1,926

Bargain purchase gain from business acquisition

     —          158,341   

Gain on contingent purchase price reduction

     41,000        —     

Other income, net

     (20     —     
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Income before income taxes

     344,174        175,061   

Income tax expense

     —          —     
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net income

   $ 344,174      $ 175,061   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

See accompanying Independent Auditors’ Report.

 

F-54


Table of Contents

Schedule II

(continued)

 

FIDELITY & GUARANTY LIFE (Parent Only)

CONDENSED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS

( In thousands)

 

     Successor  
     Year Ended
September 30,
2012
    April 6, 2011
to September 30,
2011
 

Cash flows from operating activities:

    

Net income

   $ 344,174      $ 175,061   

Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash used in operating activities:

    

Bargain purchase gain from business acquisition

     —          (158,341

Gain on contingent purchase price reduction

     (41,000     —     

Equity in net income of subsidiaries

     (282,931     (3,812

Collateral returned (posted)

     49,339        (49,339

Accrued interest from subsidiary

     3,761        4,586   

(Decrease) increase in accounts payable and accrued expenses

     (498     (16,742
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net cash provided by (used in) operating activities

     72,845        (48,587
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Cash flows from investing activities:

    

Acquisition of insurance subsidiary

     —          (345,000

Net repayment of notes from subsidiary

     15,794     

Capital contributions to subsidiaries

     (3,330     (12,904
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net cash provided by (used in) operating activities

     12,464        (357,904
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Cash flows from financing activities:

    

Cash capital contributions from parent

     4,030        377,152   

Advance from parent

     (49,339     49,339   

Dividends payments

     (40,000     (20,000
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net cash (used in) provided by financing activities

     (85,309     406,491   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net increase in cash and cash equivalents

     —          —     

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year

     —          —     
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

     —          —     
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

See accompanying Independent Auditors’ Report.

 

F-55


Table of Contents

Schedule III

FIDELITY & GUARANTY LIFE AND SUBSIDIARIES

Supplementary Insurance Information

(In thousands)

 

     Successor           Predecessor  
     As of or for           As of or for  
     Year ended
September 30,
2012
    Period from
April 6, 2011

to September 30,
2011
          Period from
January1,
2011 to April 5,
2011
    Year Ended
December 30,
2010
 

Life Insurance (single segment):

            

Deferred acquisition cost

   $ 169,223      $ 38,106          $ 1,511,011      $ 1,695,237   

Future policy benefits, losses, claims and loss expenses

     3,614,788        3,598,208            3,464,619        3,473,956   

Unearned premiums

     —          —              —          —     

Other policy claims and benefits payable

     91,082        56,650            62,091        63,427   

Premium revenue

     55,297        39,002            53,684        219,970   

Net investment income

     716,176        369,840            232,634        915,587   

Benefits, claims, losses and settlement expenses

     (777,372     (247,632         228,729        862,994   

Amortization of deferred acquisition costs

     (15,219     (899         (127,408     (266,448

Other operating expenses

     123,920        (72,390         (23,130     (100,902

See accompanying Independent Auditors’ Report.

 

F-56


Table of Contents

Schedule IV

FIDELITY & GUARANTY LIFE AND SUBSIDIARIES

Reinsurance

(Dollars in thousands)

 

For the year ended September 30, 2012

(Successor)

   Gross
Amount
     Ceded to
other
companies
    Assumed
from other
companies
     Net Amount      Percentage of
amount
assumed to
net
 

Life insurance in force

   $ 2,436,312       $ (1,929,017   $ 22,812       $ 530,107         4.30

Premiums and other considerations:

             

Traditional life insurance premiums

   $ 297,964       $ (289,846   $ 47,179       $ 55,297         85.32

Annuity product charges

     117,881         (79,603     —           38,278         0.00
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

    

Total premiums and other considerations

   $ 415,845       $ (369,449   $ 47,179       $ 93,575         50.42
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

For the year ended April 6, 2011 to

September 30, 2011 (Successor)

   Gross
Amount
     Ceded to
other
companies
    Assumed
from other
companies
     Net Amount      Percentage of
amount
assumed to
net
 

Life insurance in force

   $ 2,256,696       $ (1,180,412   $ 22,641       $ 1,098,925         2.06

Premiums and other considerations:

             

Traditional life insurance premiums

   $ 157,772       $ (141,628   $ 22,858       $ 39,002         58.61

Annuity product charges

     68,436         (18,776     —           49,660         0.00
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

    

Total premiums and other considerations

   $ 226,208       $ (160,404   $ 22,858       $ 88,662         25.78
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

For the period January 1, 2011 to

April 5, 2011 (Predecessor)

   Gross
Amount
     Ceded to
other
companies
    Assumed
from other
companies
     Net Amount      Percentage of
amount
assumed to
net
 

Premiums and other considerations:

             

Traditional life insurance premiums

   $ 80,929       $ (39,443   $ 12,198       $ 53,684         22.72

Annuity product charges

     17,056         —          1,487         18,543         8.02
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

    

Total premiums and other considerations

   $ 97,985       $ (39,443   $ 13,685       $ 72,227         18.95
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

For the year ended December 31, 2010

(Predecessor)

   Gross
Amount
     Ceded to
other
companies
    Assumed
from other
companies
     Net Amount      Percentage of
amount
assumed to
net
 

Premiums and other considerations:

             

Traditional life insurance premiums

   $ 347,485       $ (175,285   $ 47,770       $ 219,970         21.72

Annuity product charges

     84,137         —          5,972         90,109         6.63
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

    

Total premiums and other considerations

   $ 431,622       $ (175,285   $ 53,742       $ 310,079         17.33
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

    

See accompanying Independent Auditors’ Report.

 

F-57


Table of Contents

 

 

Unaudited Condensed Consolidated Financial Statements

as of June 30, 2013 and September 30, 2012

and the nine months ended June 30, 2013 and June 30, 2012

 

F-58


Table of Contents

FIDELITY & GUARANTY LIFE AND SUBSIDIARIES

 

CONDENSED CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS

(In thousands)

 

 
     June 30,
2013
     September 30,
2012
 
     (Unaudited)         

ASSETS

     

Investments:

     

Fixed maturity securities

   $ 15,695,781       $ 16,088,913   

Equity securities

     303,167         248,087   

Derivative investments

     227,382         200,667   

Other invested assets

     193,555         18,814   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total investments

     16,419,885         16,556,481   

Related party loans and investment

     221,306         182,069   

Cash and cash equivalents

     1,003,025         1,054,588   

Contingent purchase price reduction receivable

     41,000         41,000   

Accrued investment income

     158,463         191,577   

Reinsurance recoverable

     2,370,998         2,363,083   

Intangibles, net

     480,519         273,543   

Deferred tax assets

     253,677         279,636   

Other assets

     63,733         48,371   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total assets

   $ 21,012,606       $ 20,990,348   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

LIABILITIES AND MEMBER’S EQUITY

     

Contractholder funds

   $ 15,342,671       $ 15,290,475   

Future policy benefits

     3,576,180         3,614,788   

Liability for policy and contract claims

     66,897         91,082   

Long-term debt

     300,000         —     

Other liabilities

     441,218         703,222   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total liabilities

     19,726,966         19,699,567   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Member’s equity

     

Contributed capital

     525,992         415,576   

Retained earnings

     584,246         440,723   

Accumulated other comprehensive income

     175,402         434,482   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total member’s equity

     1,285,640         1,290,781   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total liabilities and member’s equity

   $ 21,012,606       $ 20,990,348   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

See accompanying notes to unaudited condensed consolidated financial statements.

 

F-59


Table of Contents

FIDELITY & GUARANTY LIFE AND SUBSIDIARIES

UNAUDITED CONDENSED CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF OPERATIONS

(In thousands)

 

     Nine months ended  
     June 30,
2013
    June 30,
2012
 

Revenues:

    

Premiums

   $ 46,857      $ 42,170   

Net investment income

     522,841        537,636   

Net investment gains

     411,494        254,616   

Insurance and investment product fees and other

     44,460        28,161   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total revenues

     1,025,652        862,583   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Benefits and expenses:

    

Benefits and other changes in policy reserves

     431,700        559,702   

Acquisition and operating expenses, net of deferrals

     75,927        101,390   

Amortization of intangibles

     163,115        111,979   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total benefits and expenses

     670,742        773,071   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating income

     354,910        89,512   

Interest expense

     (5,865     (1,945

Gain on contingent purchase price reduction

     —          41,000   

Other income, net

     229        71   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Income before income taxes

     349,274        128,638   

Income tax expense

     (112,093     (11,833
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net income

   $ 237,181      $ 116,805   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Supplemental disclosures:

    

Total other-than-temporary impairments

   $ (1,649   $ (21,317

Less non-credit portion of other-than-temporary impairments included other comprehensive income

     —          1,530   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net other-than-temporary impairments

     (1,649     (19,787

Gains on derivative instruments

     126,570        82,648   

Other realized investment gains

     286,573        191,755   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total net investment gains

   $ 411,494      $ 254,616   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

See accompanying notes to unaudited condensed consolidated financial statements.

 

F-60


Table of Contents

FIDELITY & GUARANTY LIFE AND SUBSIDIARIES

UNAUDITED CONDENSED CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME

(In thousands)

 

     Nine months ended  
     June 30,
2013
    June 30,
2012
 

Net income

   $ 237,181      $ 116,805   

Other comprehensive income (loss)

    

Unrealized investment (losses) gains:

    

Changes in unrealized investment (losses) gains before reclassification adjustment

     (379,096     454,793   

Net reclassification adjustment for (losses) gains included in net income

     (281,805     (175,658
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Changes in unrealized investment (losses) gains after reclassification adjustment

     (660,901     279,135   

Adjustments to intangible assets

     260,947        (92,527

Changes in deferred income tax asset/liability

     140,904        (65,357
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net unrealized (loss) gain on investment

     (259,050     121,251   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Non-credit related other-than-temporary impairment:

    

Changes in non-credit related other-than-temporary impairment

     —          (1,530

Adjustments to intangible assets

     (44     598   

Changes in deferred income tax asset/liability

     14        326   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Non-credit related other-than-temporary impairment

     (30     (606
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net change to derive comprehensive (loss) income for the period

     (259,080     120,645   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Comprehensive (loss) income, net of tax

   $ (21,899   $ 237,450   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

See accompanying notes to unaudited condensed consolidated financial statements.

 

F-61


Table of Contents

FIDELITY & GUARANTY LIFE AND SUBSIDIARIES

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CHANGES IN MEMBER’S EQUITY

(In thousands)

 

     Contributed
Capital
    Retained
Earnings
(Accumulated
Deficit)
    Accumulated
Other
Comprehensive
Income
    Total
Member’s

Equity
 

Balances at September 30, 2011

   $ 379,359      $ 136,549      $ 159,493      $ 675,401   

Net income

     —          116,805        —          116,805   

Unrealized investment gains, net

     —          —          121,251        121,251   

Non-credit related other-than-temporary impairments

     —          —          (606     (606

Stock compensation

     163        —          —          163   

Capital contributions from Harbinger Group Inc.

     2,536        —          —          2,536   

Dividends

     —          (20,000     —          (20,000
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Balances at June 30, 2012

   $ 382,058      $ 233,354      $ 280,138      $ 895,550   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Balances at September 30, 2012

   $ 415,576      $ 440,723      $ 434,482      $ 1,290,781   

Net income

     —          237,181        —          237,181   

Unrealized investment gains, net

     —          —          (259,050     (259,050

Non-credit related other-than-temporary impairments

     —          —          (30     (30

Stock compensation

     (163     —          —          (163

Capital contributions from Harbinger Group Inc.

     110,579        —          —          110,579   

Dividends

     —          (93,658     —          (93,658
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Balances at June 30, 2013

   $ 525,992        584,246      $ 175,402      $ 1,285,640   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

See accompanying notes to unaudited condensed consolidated financial statements.

 

F-62


Table of Contents

FIDELITY & GUARANTY LIFE AND SUBSIDIARIES

UNAUDITED CONDENSED CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS

(In thousands)

 

     Nine months ended  
     June 30,
2013
    June 30,
2012
 

Cash flows from operating activities:

    

Net income

   $ 237,181      $ 116,805   

Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash provided by (used in) operating activities:

    

Gain on contingent purchase price reduction

     —          (41,000

Net recognized (gains) losses on investments

     (411,494     (254,616

Amortization of intangibles

     163,115        111,979   

Depreciation of properties

     2,898        2,020   

Stock-based compensation

     3,724        106   

Amortization of fixed maturity discounts and premiums

     24,353        67,881   

Deferred income taxes

     166,876        10,761   

Deferred policy acquisition costs

     (109,188     (157,620

Interest credited/index credits to contractholder account balances

     323,555        414,750   

Charges assessed to contractholders for mortality and administration

     (23,914     (10,394

Cash transferred to reinsurers

     —          (176,770

Amortization of debt issuance costs

     845        —     

Changes in operating assets and liabilities:

    

Reinsurance recoverable

     (6,597     (51,186

Accrued investment income

     33,114        23,348   

Future policy benefits

     (38,607     4,521   

Liability for policy and contract claims

     (24,185     56,542   

Other operating

     (103,614     75,357   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net cash provided by operating activities

     238,062        192,484   

Cash flows from investing activities:

    

Proceeds from investments, sold, matured or repaid:

    

Fixed maturities

     6,990.698        4,113,548   

Equity securities

     57,805        95,073   

Derivative investments and other invested assets

     217,385        90,031   

Cost of investments acquired:

    

Fixed maturities

     (7,180,582     (3,713,966

Equity securities

     (112,121     (41,594

Derivative investments and other invested assets

     (112,505     (105,964

Related party loans and investments

     (205,227     —     

Capital expenditures

     (3,040     (5,079
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net cash (used in) provided by investing activities

     (347,587     432,049   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Cash flows from financing activities:

    

Contractholder account deposits

     1,078,370        1,736,023   

Contractholder account withdrawals

     (1,327,135     (1,505,408

Proceeds from issuances of new debt

     300,000        —     

Debt issuance costs

     (10,195     —     

Capital contribution

     110,579        2,536   

Settlement of note payable

     —          (95,000

Dividends paid

     (93,658     (20,000

Other financing activities, net

     —          58   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net cash (used in) provided by financing activities

     57,961        118,209   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net (decrease) increase in cash and cash equivalents

     (51,564     742,742   

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of period

     1,054,589        820,903   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Cash and cash equivalents at end of period

   $ 1,003,025      $ 1,563,645   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Supplemental disclosures of cash flow information:

    

Interest paid

   $ 5,865      $ 1,945   

Income taxes paid

     2,683        —     

See accompanying notes to unaudited condensed consolidated financial statements.

 

F-63


Table of Contents

FIDELITY & GUARANTY LIFE AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO UNAUDITED CONDENSED CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

(Dollar amounts in thousands)

(1)    Basis of Presentation and Nature of Operations

Fidelity & Guaranty Life (formerly, Harbinger F&G, LLC) (“FGL” and, collectively with its subsidiaries, the “Company”) is a direct, wholly-owned subsidiary of Harbinger Group Inc. (“HGI”). HGI is a diversified holding company focused on obtaining controlling equity stakes in companies that operate across a diversified set of industries. HGI’s shares of common stock trade on the New York Stock Exchange (“NYSE”) under the symbol “HRG”.

The Company’s primary business is the sale of individual life insurance products and annuities through independent agents, managing general agents, and specialty brokerage firms and in selected institutional markets. The Company’s principal products are deferred annuities (including fixed indexed annuity (“FIA”) contracts), immediate annuities and life insurance products. The Company markets products through Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc.’s (“FGLH”) wholly-owned insurance subsidiaries, Fidelity & Guaranty Life Insurance Company (“FGL Insurance”) and Fidelity & Guaranty Life Insurance Company of New York (“FGL NY Insurance”), collectively the Insurance Subsidiaries (“Insurance Subsidiaries”), which together are licensed in all fifty states and the District of Columbia.

The Company’s business consists primarily of fixed rate annuities and, accordingly, there is only one reporting segment. Premiums and annuity deposits (net of coinsurance), which are not included as revenues (except for traditional premiums) in the accompanying consolidated statements of operations, collected during the nine months ended June 30, 2013 and 2012, respectively, by product type were as follows:

 

     Nine months ended  

Product Type

   June 30, 2013      June 30, 2012  

Fixed indexed annuities

   $ 747,605       $ 1,354,089   

Fixed rate annuities

     25,522         49,796   

Single premium immediate annuities (SPIA)

     7,043         6,027   

Life insurance(1)

     87,654         63,853   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 
   $ 867,824       $ 1,473,765   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

(1) Life insurance includes Universal Life (“UL”) and traditional life insurance products.

These condensed consolidated financial statements have been prepared in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America (“US GAAP”) without audit. The condensed consolidated financial statements reflect all adjustments that are, in the opinion of management, necessary for a fair statement of such information. All such adjustments are of a normal recurring nature. Although the Company believes that the disclosures are adequate to make the information presented not misleading, certain information and footnote disclosures, including a description of significant accounting policies normally included in financial statements prepared in accordance with US GAAP have been condensed or omitted. These unaudited condensed consolidated financial statements should be read in conjunction with the Company’s audited consolidated financial statements and notes thereto for the year ended September 30, 2012. The results of operations for the nine months ended June 30, 2013 are not necessarily indicative of the results for any subsequent periods or the entire fiscal year ending September 30, 2012.

Certain prior year amounts have been reclassified or combined to conform to the current year presentation. These reclassifications and combinations had no effect on previously reported results of operations or total member’s equity.

 

F-64


Table of Contents

(2)    Significant Accounting Policies

Principles of Consolidation

The accompanying condensed consolidated financial statements include the accounts of the Company and all other entities in which the Company has a controlling financial interest (none of which are variable interest entities). All intercompany accounts and transactions have been eliminated in consolidation.

Recent Accounting Pronouncements

Presentation of Comprehensive Income

In June 2011, the Financial Accounting Standards Board (“FASB”) issued amended disclosure allowing the option to report comprehensive income either in a single continuous statement of comprehensive income which contains two sections, net income and other comprehensive income, or in two separate but consecutive statements. This guidance is effective for fiscal years ending after December 31, 2012 for nonpublic companies, but allows for early adoption. The Company elected early adoption using the two-statement approach.

Offsetting Assets and Liabilities

In December 2011, the FASB issued amended disclosure requirements for offsetting financial assets and financial liabilities to allow investors to better compare financial statements prepared under US GAAP with financial statements prepared under International Financial Reporting Standards. The new standards are effective for the Company beginning in the first quarter of its fiscal year ending September 30, 2014. The Company is currently evaluating the impact of this new accounting guidance on the disclosures included in its consolidated financial statements.

(3)    Significant Risks and Uncertainties

Use of Estimates

The preparation of financial statements in conformity with US GAAP requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities and disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities at the date of the financial statements and the reported amounts of revenues and expenses during the reporting period. Due to the inherent uncertainty involved in making estimates, actual results in future periods could differ from those estimates.

The Company’s significant estimates which are susceptible to change in the near term relate to (1) recognition of deferred tax assets and related valuation allowances (see Note 10), (2) fair value of certain invested assets and derivatives including embedded derivatives (see Notes 5 and 6), (3) other-than-temporary impairments of available-for-sale investments (see Note 4), (4) amortization of intangibles (see Note 7), and (5) estimates of reserves for loss contingencies, including litigation and regulatory reserves (see Note 11).

Concentrations of Financial Instruments

As of June 30, 2013, the Company’s most significant investment in one industry, excluding treasuries, was its investment securities in the banking industry with a fair value of $1,944,618, or 11.8% of the invested assets portfolio. The Company’s holdings in this industry include investments in 78 different issuers with the top ten investments accounting for 34.9% of the total holdings in this industry. As of June 30, 2013 and September 30, 2012, the Company had investments in 6 and 13 issuers that exceeded 10% of member’s equity with a fair value of $848,751 and $1,625,900, or 5% and 9.8% of the invested assets portfolio, respectively. Additionally, the Company’s largest concentration in any single issuer as of June 30, 2013 and September 30, 2012 had a fair value of $156,913 and $152,876 or 1.0% and 0.9% of the invested assets portfolio, respectively.

 

F-65


Table of Contents

Concentrations of Financial and Capital Markets Risk

The Company is exposed to financial and capital markets risk, including changes in interest rates and credit spreads which can have an adverse effect on the Company’s results of operations, financial condition and liquidity. As discussed further in the following paragraph regarding risk factors, the Company expects to continue to face challenges and uncertainties that could adversely affect its results of operations and financial condition.

The Company’s exposure to interest rate risk relates primarily to the market price and cash flow variability associated with changes in interest rates. A rise in interest rates, in the absence of other countervailing changes, will decrease the net unrealized gain position of the Company’s investment portfolio and, if long-term interest rates rise dramatically within a six-to twelve-month time period, certain of the Company’s products may be exposed to disintermediation risk. Disintermediation risk refers to the risk that policyholders may surrender their contracts in a rising interest rate environment, requiring the Company to liquidate assets in an unrealized loss position. This risk is mitigated to some extent by the high level of surrender charge protection provided by the Company’s products.

Concentration of Reinsurance Risk

The Company has a significant concentration of reinsurance with Wilton Reassurance Company (“Wilton Re”) (see Note 12) that could have a material impact on the Company’s financial position in the event that Wilton Re fails to perform its obligations under the various reinsurance treaties. As of June 30, 2013, the net amount recoverable from Wilton Re was $1,267,178. The Company monitors both the financial condition of individual reinsurers and risk concentration arising from similar geographic regions, activities and economic characteristics of reinsurers to reduce the risk of default by such reinsurers.

 

F-66


Table of Contents

(4)    Investments

The Company’s debt and equity securities have been designated as available-for-sale and are carried at fair value with unrealized gains and losses included in accumulated other comprehensive income (“AOCI”), net of associated adjustments for value of business acquired (“VOBA”), deferred acquisition costs (“DAC”) and deferred income taxes. The Company’s consolidated investments at June 30, 2013 and September 30, 2012 are summarized as follows:

 

     June 30, 2013  
     Amortized Cost      Gross
Unrealized
Gains
     Gross
Unrealized
Losses
    Fair Value and
Carrying Value
 

Fixed maturity securities, available-for-sale

          

Asset-backed securities

   $ 1,533,652       $ 25,938       $ (4,603   $ 1,554,987   

Commercial mortgage-backed securities

     496,448         28,103         (652     523,899   

Corporates

     10,008,793         367,462         (163,528     10,212,727   

Hybrids

     483,618         27,737         (3,064     508,291   

Municipals

     1,005,176         59,103         (27,412     1,036,867   

Agency residential mortgage-backed securities

     108,680         2,663         (360     110,983   

Non-agency residential mortgage-backed securities

     1,274,834         88,428         (9,262     1,354,000   

U.S. Government

     391,497         6,380         (3,850     394,027   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total available-for-sale securities

     15,302,698         605,814         (212,731     15,695,781   

Equity securities

          

Available-for-sale

     265,153         9,227         (4,557     269,823   

Held for trading

     30,006         3,338         —          33,344   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total equity securities

     295,159         12,565         (4,557     303,167   

Derivative investments

     140,609         95,305         (8,532     227,382   

Other invested assets

     193,555         —           —          193,555   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total investments

   $ 15,932,021       $ 713,684       $ (225,820   $ 16,419,885   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

     September 30, 2012  
     Amortized Cost      Gross
Unrealized
Gains
     Gross
Unrealized
Losses
    Fair Value and
Carrying Value
 

Fixed maturity securities, available-for-sale

          

Asset-backed securities

   $ 1,010,938       $ 18,553       $ (1,609   $ 1,027,882   

Commercial mortgage-backed securities

     520,043         36,178         (2,407     553,814   

Corporates

     10,211,804         807,175         (9,968     11,009,011   

Hybrids

     519,009         18,836         (9,550     528,295   

Municipals

     1,083,231         141,854         (1,090     1,223,995   

Agency residential mortgage-backed securities

     149,455         5,769         (334     154,890   

Non-agency residential mortgage-backed securities

     629,122         35,799         (4,262     660,659   

U.S. Government

     917,452         12,915         —          930,367   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total fixed maturity securities

     15,041,054         1,077,079         (29,220     16,088,913   

Equity securities

          

Available-for-sale

     237,499         11,860         (1,272     248,087   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total equity securities

     237,499         11,860         (1,272     248,087   

Derivative investments

     142,123         66,973         (8,429     200,667   

Other invested assets

     18,814         —           —          18,814   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total investments

   $ 15,439,490       $ 1,155,912       $ (38,921   $ 16,556,481   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

F-67


Table of Contents

Included in AOCI were cumulative unrealized gains of $851 and unrealized losses of $1,880 related to the non-credit portion of other-than-temporary impairments on non-agency residential mortgage-backed securities (“RMBS”) at June 30, 2013 and September 30, 2012, respectively. The RMBS write downs represent write downs on securities that were previously impaired. There have been no impairments or write downs on any of the non-agency RMBS securities purchased in 2013.

Securities held on deposit with various state regulatory authorities had a fair value of $19,563 and $20,692 at June 30, 2013 and September 30, 2012, respectively.

The amortized cost and fair value of fixed maturity available-for-sale securities by contractual maturities, as applicable, are shown below. Actual maturities may differ from contractual maturities because issuers may have the right to call or pre-pay obligations.

 

    June 30, 2013  
    Amortized Cost     Fair Value  

Corporate, Non-structured Hybrids, Municipal and U.S. Government securities:

   

Due in one year or less

  $ 394,485      $ 397,980   

Due after one year through five years

    2,874,119        2,937,230   

Due after five years through ten years

    3,468,286        3,528,764   

Due after ten years

    5,092,916        5,225,928   
 

 

 

   

 

 

 

Subtotal

    11,829,806        12,089,902   

Other securities which provide for periodic payments:

   

Asset-backed securities

    1,533,652        1,554,987   

Commercial-mortgage-backed securities

    496,448        523,899   

Structured hybrids

    59,278        62,010   

Agency residential mortgage-backed securities

    108,680        110,983   

Non-agency residential mortgage-backed securities

    1,274,834        1,354,000   
 

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total fixed maturity available-for-sale securities

  $ 15,302,698      $ 15,695,781   
 

 

 

   

 

 

 

The Company’s available-for-sale securities with unrealized losses are reviewed for potential other-than-temporary impairments. In evaluating whether a decline in value is other-than-temporary, the Company considers several factors including, but not limited to the following: (1) the extent and the duration of the decline; (2) the reasons for the decline in value (credit event, currency or interest-rate related, including general credit spread widening); and (3) the financial condition of and near-term prospects of the issuer. The Company also considers the ability and intent to hold the investment for a period of time to allow for a recovery of value.

The Company analyzes its ability to recover the amortized cost by comparing the net present value of cash flows expected to be collected with the amortized cost of the security. For mortgage-backed and asset-backed securities, cash flow estimates consider the payment terms of the underlying assets backing a particular security, including interest rate and prepayment assumptions, based on data from widely accepted third-party data sources or internal estimates. In addition to interest rate and prepayment assumptions, cash flow estimates also include other assumptions regarding the underlying collateral including default rates and recoveries, which vary based on the asset type and geographic location, as well as the vintage year of the security. For structured securities, the payment priority within the tranche structure is also considered. For all other debt securities, cash flow estimates are driven by assumptions regarding probability of default and estimates regarding timing and amount of recoveries associated with a default. If the net present value is less than the amortized cost of the investment, an other-than-temporary impairment is recognized. The Company has concluded that the fair values of the securities presented in the table below were not other-than-temporarily impaired as of June 30, 2013.

 

F-68


Table of Contents

The fair value and gross unrealized losses of available-for-sale securities, aggregated by investment category, were as follows:

 

    June 30, 2013  
    Less than 12 months     12 months or longer     Total  
    Fair Value     Gross
Unrealized
Losses
    Fair Value     Gross
Unrealized
Losses
    Fair Value     Gross
Unrealized
Losses
 

Available-for-sale securities

           

Asset-backed securities

  $ 300,559      $ (4,100   $ 77,578      $ (503   $ 378,137      $ (4,603

Commercial-mortgage-backed securities

    28,715        (287     32        (365     28,747        (652

Corporates

    3,133,452        (142,409     396,024        (21,119     3,529,476        (163,528

Equities

    90,914        (3,152     33,924        (1,405     124,838        (4,557

Hybrids

    75,353        (2,493     40,671        (571     116,024        (3,064

Municipals

    350,949        (21,446     101,413        (5,966     452,362        (27,412

Agency residential mortgage-backed securities

    2,517        (25     6,282        (335     8,799        (360

Non-agency residential mortgage-backed securities

    255,513        (7,972     69,171        (1,290     324,684        (9,262

US Government

    198,909        (3,850     —          —          198,909        (3,850
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total available-for-sale securities

  $ 4,436,881      $ (185,734   $ 725,095      $ (31,554   $ 5,161,976      $ (217,288
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total number of available-for-sale securities in an unrealized loss position

      537          106          643   

 

    September 30, 2012  
    Less than 12 months     12 months or longer     Total  
    Fair Value     Gross
Unrealized
Losses
    Fair Value     Gross
Unrealized
Losses
    Fair Value     Gross
Unrealized
Losses
 

Available-for-sale securities

           

Asset-backed securities

  $ 169,794      $ (1,042   $ 7,533      $ (567   $ 177,327      $ (1,609

Commercial-mortgage-backed securities

    813        (853     10,716        (1,554     11,529        (2,407

Corporates

    411,310        (8,124     45,482        (1,844     456,792        (9,968

Equities

    —          —          44,513        (1,272     44,513        (1,272

Hybrids

    13,407        (339     107,707        (9,211     121,114        (9,550

Municipals

    71,160        (1,090     —          —          71,160        (1,090

Agency residential mortgage-backed securities

    1,754        (199     6,110        (135     7,864        (334

Non-agency residential mortgage-backed securities

    12,853        (289     101,777        (3,973     114,630        (4,262
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total available-for-sale securities

  $ 681,091      $ (11,936   $ 323,838      $ (18,556   $ 1,004,929      $ (30,492
 

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total number of available-for-sale securities in an unrealized loss position

      100          56          156   

At June 30, 2013 and September 30, 2012, securities in an unrealized loss position were primarily concentrated in investment grade corporate debt instruments, residential mortgage-backed securities and municipals. Total unrealized losses were $217,288 and $30,492 at June 30, 2013 and September 30, 2012, respectively. The increase in the unrealized loss position is largely due to the increase in Treasury yields over the reporting period. 10 year US Treasury yields increased from 1.63% at September 30, 2012 to 2.48% at June 30, 2013. As a result, corporate debt holdings generally declined in value during this period. The increase in Treasury yields during the June fiscal quarter is attributable to concerns about the cessation of liquidity measures being provided by the Federal Reserve. These concerns were coupled with fears that reduced stimulus would

 

F-69


Table of Contents

crimp liquidity and affect risk assets, and as a result, credit spreads widened in June. Although elevated Treasury yields, and most recently, credit spreads have resulted in an increase in the unrealized loss position in the portfolio, we note that the largest component of this increase is in securities priced between 90% and 100% of market value. Additionally, we note that the portfolio’s exposure to floating rate and less rate-sensitive assets has provided a buffer to rising Treasury yields.

At June 30, 2013 and September 30, 2012, securities with a fair value of $25,353 and $1,192, respectively, were depressed greater than 20% of amortized cost (excluding United States Government and United States Government sponsored agency securities), which represented less than 1% of the carrying values of all investments. The increase in unrealized loss positions from September 30, 2012 is primarily due to Treasury yields during this period. Based upon the Company’s current evaluation of these securities in accordance with its impairment policy and its intent to retain these investments for a period of time sufficient to allow for recovery in value, the Company has determined that these securities are not other-than-temporarily impaired.

The following table provides a reconciliation of the beginning and ending balances of the credit loss portion of other-than-temporary impairments on fixed maturity securities held by the Company for the nine months ended June 30, 2013 and June 30, 2012, for which a portion of the other-than-temporary impairment was recognized in AOCI:

 

     Nine months ended  
     June 30,
2013
     June 30
2012
 

Beginning Balance

   $ 2,681       $ 667   

Increases attributable to credit losses on securities:

     

Other-than-temporary impairment was previously recognized

     —           112   

Other-than-temporary impairment was not previously recognized

     —           1,902   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Ending Balance

   $ 2,681       $ 2,681   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

For the nine months ended June 30, 2013, the Company recognized impairment losses in operations totaling $1,649, including credit impairments of $757 and change-of-intent impairments of $892 relating to securities having a fair value of $2,444, which relfects the impairment. For the nine months ended June 30, 2012, the Company recognized impairment losses in operations totaling $19,787, including credit impairments of $4,736 and change-of-intent impairments of $15,015 relating to securities having a fair value of $80,570 which reflects the impairment. Details underlying write-downs taken as a result of other-than-temporary impairments that were recognized in net income and included in net realized gains on securities were as follows:

 

     Nine months ended  
     June 30,
2013
     June 30,
2012
 

Other-than-temporary impairments recognized in net income

     

Corporates

   $ —         $ 2,234   

Hybrids

     —           9,688   

Non-agency residential mortgage-backed securities

     1,148         6,901   

Other Assets

     501         964   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total other-than-temporary impairments

   $ 1,649       $ 19,787   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

F-70


Table of Contents

Net Investment Income

The major sources of “Net investment income” in the accompanying Condensed Consolidated Statements of Operations were as follows:

 

     Nine months ended  
     June 30, 2013     June 30, 2012  

Fixed maturity available-for-sale securities

   $ 515,149      $ 531,096   

Equity available-for-sale securities

     11,453        10,839   

Policy loans

     632        550   

Invested cash and short-term investments

     1,396        3,458   

Other investments

     6,326        892   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gross investment income

     534,956        546,835   

External investment expense

     (12,115     (9,199
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net investment income

   $ 522,841      $ 537,636   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net Investment Gains

Details underlying “Net investment gains” reported in the accompanying Condensed Consolidated Statements of Operations were as follows:

 

     Nine months ended  
     June 30, 2013     June 30, 2012  

Net realized gains on fixed maturity available-for sale securities

   $ 278,583      $ 172,188   

Realized gains on equity securities

     6,683        783   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net realized gains on securities

     285,266        172,971   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Realized gains (losses) on certain derivative instruments

     99,269        (32,001

Unrealized gains on certain derivative instruments

     27,301        114,649   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Change in fair value of derivatives

     126,570        82,648   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Realized (losses) on other invested assets

     (342     (1,003
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net investment gains

   $ 411,494      $ 254,616   
  

 

 

   

 

 

 

Underlying write-downs taken to fixed maturity available-for-sale securities as a result of other-than-temporary impairments that were recognized in earnings and included in net realized gains on securities above were $1,649 for the nine months ended June 30, 2013, respectively and were $19,787 for the nine months ended June 30, 2012. The portion of other-than-temporary impairments recognized in AOCI is disclosed in the Condensed Statement of Comprehensive Income.

For the nine months ended June 30, 2013, principal repayments, calls, tenders, and proceeds from the sale of fixed maturity available-for-sale securities totaled $5,741,552, gross gains on such sales totaled $283,985 and gross losses totaled $1,032.

For the nine months ended June 30, 2012, principal repayments, calls, tenders, and proceeds from the sale of fixed maturity available-for-sale securities, including assets transferred to Wilton Re as discussed in Note 12, “Reinsurance”, totaled $4,366,308, gross gains on such sales totaled $211,908 and gross losses totaled $20,897, respectively.

 

F-71


Table of Contents

(5)    Derivative Financial Instruments

The fair value of outstanding derivative contracts recorded in the accompanying Condensed Consolidated Balance Sheets were as follows:

 

     June 30,
2013
     September 30,
2012
 

Assets:

     

Derivative investments:

     

Call options

   $ 227,382       $ 200,667   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Liabilities:

     

Contractholder funds:

     

FIA embedded derivative

   $ 1,585,935       $ 1,550,805   

Other liabilities:

     

Futures contracts

     439         928   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 
   $ 1,586,374       $ 1,551,733   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

The change in fair value of derivative instruments included in the accompanying Condensed Consolidated Statements of Operations is as follows:

 

     Nine months ended  
     June 30, 2013      June 30, 2012  

Revenues:

     

Net investment gains:

     

Call options

   $ 114,082       $ 48,722   

Futures contracts

     12,488         33,926   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 
     126,570         82,648   

Net investment income:

     

Available-for-sale embedded derivatives

     —           400   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 
   $ 126,570       $ 83,048   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Benefits and other changes in policy reserves:

     

FIA embedded derivatives

   $ 35,130       $ 90,125   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Additional Disclosures

FIA Contracts

The Company has FIA contracts that permit the holder to elect an interest rate return or an equity index linked component, where interest credited to the contracts is linked to the performance of various equity indices, primarily the Standard and Poor’s (“S&P”) 500 Index. This feature represents an embedded derivative under US GAAP. The FIA embedded derivative is valued at fair value and included in the liability for contractholder funds in the accompanying Condensed Consolidated Balance Sheets with changes in fair value included as a component of “Benefits and other changes in policy reserves” in the Condensed Consolidated Statements of Operations.

The Company purchases derivatives consisting of a combination of call options and futures contracts on the applicable market indices to fund the index credits due to FIA contractholders. The call options are one, two and three year options purchased to match the funding requirements of the underlying policies. On the respective anniversary dates of the index policies, the index used to compute the interest credit is reset and the Company purchases new one, two or three year call options to fund the next index credit. The Company manages the cost of these purchases through the terms of its FIA contracts, which permit the Company to change caps, spreads or

 

F-72


Table of Contents

participation rates, subject to guaranteed minimums, on each contract’s anniversary date. The change in the fair value of the call options and futures contracts is generally designed to offset the portion of the change in the fair value of the FIA embedded derivative related to index performance. The call options and futures contracts are marked to fair value with the change in fair value included as a component of “Net investment gains”. The change in fair value of the call options and futures contracts includes the gains and losses recognized at the expiration of the instrument term or upon early termination and the changes in fair value of open positions.

Other market exposures are hedged periodically depending on market conditions and the Company’s risk tolerance. The Company’s FIA hedging strategy economically hedges the equity returns and exposes the Company to the risk that unhedged market exposures result in divergence between changes in the fair value of the liabilities and the hedging assets. The Company uses a variety of techniques, including direct estimation of market sensitivities and value-at-risk to monitor this risk daily. The Company intends to continue to adjust the hedging strategy as market conditions and the Company’s risk tolerance change.

Credit Risk

The Company is exposed to credit loss in the event of nonperformance by its counterparties on the call options and reflects assumptions regarding this nonperformance risk in the fair value of the call options. The nonperformance risk is the net counterparty exposure based on the fair value of the open contracts less collateral held. The Company maintains a policy of requiring all derivative contracts to be governed by an International Swaps and Derivatives Association (“ISDA”) Master Agreement.

Information regarding the Company’s exposure to credit loss on the call options it holds is presented in the following table:

 

          June 30, 2013      September 30, 2012  

Counterparty

   Credit  Rating
(Moody’s/S&P)
   Notional
Amount
     Fair Value      Notional
Amount
     Fair Value  

Bank of America

   Baa2/A-    $ 2,098,391       $ 76,405       $ 1,884,047       $ 64,101   

Deutsche Bank

   A2/A+      1,563,976         57,410         1,816,532         61,704   

Morgan Stanley

   Baa1/A-      2,024,702         64,435         1,634,686         51,630   

Royal Bank of Scotland

   Baa1/A-      479,000         24,614         353,875         19,595   

Barclay’s Bank

   A2/A+      127,109         4,518         131,255         3,081   

Credit Suisse

   A2/A      —           —           10,000         556   
     

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
      $ 6,293,178       $ 227,382       $ 5,830,395       $ 200,667   
     

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Collateral Agreements

The Company is required to maintain minimum ratings as a matter of routine practice under its ISDA agreements. Under some ISDA agreements, the Company has agreed to maintain certain financial strength ratings. A downgrade below these levels provides the counterparty under the agreement the right to terminate the open derivative contracts between the parties, at which time any amounts payable by the Company or the counterparty would be dependent on the market value of the underlying derivative contracts. The Company’s current rating allows multiple counterparties the right to terminate ISDA agreements. No ISDA agreements have been terminated, although the counterparties have reserved the right to terminate the ISDA agreements at any time. In certain transactions, the Company and the counterparty have entered into a collateral support agreement requiring either party to post collateral when the net exposures exceed pre-determined thresholds. These thresholds vary by counterparty and credit rating. As of June 30, 2013 and September 30, 2012, no collateral was posted by the Company’s counterparties as they did not meet the net exposure thresholds. Accordingly, the maximum amount of loss due to credit risk that the Company would incur if parties to the call options failed completely to perform according to the terms of the contracts was $227,382 and $200,667 at June 30, 2013 and September 30, 2012, respectively.

 

F-73


Table of Contents

The Company held 1,244 and 2,835 futures contracts at June 30, 2013 and September 30, 2012, respectively. The fair value of futures contracts represents the cumulative unsettled variation margin (open trade equity net of cash settlements). The Company provides cash collateral to the counterparties for the initial and variation margin on the futures contracts which is included in “Cash and cash equivalents” in the accompanying Condensed Consolidated Balance Sheets. The amount of collateral held by the counterparties for such contracts was $4,295 and $9,820 at June 30, 2013 and September 30, 2012, respectively.

(6)    Fair Value of Financial Instruments

The Company’s measurement of fair value is based on assumptions used by market participants in pricing the asset or liability, which may include inherent risk, restrictions on the sale or use of an asset or non-performance risk, which may include the Company’s own credit risk. The Company’s estimate of an exchange price is the price in an orderly transaction between market participants to sell the asset or transfer the liability (“exit price”) in the principal market, or the most advantageous market in the absence of a principal market, for that asset or liability, as opposed to the price that would be paid to acquire the asset or receive a liability (“entry price”). The Company categorizes financial instruments carried at fair value into a three-level fair value hierarchy, based on the priority of inputs to the respective valuation technique. The three-level hierarchy for fair value measurement is defined as follows:

Level 1 —Values are unadjusted quoted prices for identical assets and liabilities in active markets accessible at the measurement date.

Level 2 —Inputs include quoted prices for similar assets or liabilities in active markets, quoted prices from those willing to trade in markets that are not active, or other inputs that are observable or can be corroborated by market data for the term of the instrument. Such inputs include market interest rates and volatilities, spreads and yield curves.

Level 3 —Certain inputs are unobservable (supported by little or no market activity) and significant to the fair value measurement. Unobservable inputs reflect the Company’s best estimate of what hypothetical market participants would use to determine a transaction price for the asset or liability at the reporting date based on the best information available in the circumstances.

In certain cases, the inputs used to measure fair value may fall into different levels of the fair value hierarchy. In such cases, an investment’s level within the fair value hierarchy is based on the lower level of input that is significant to the fair value measurement. The Company’s assessment of the significance of a particular input to the fair value measurement in its entirety requires judgment and considers factors specific to the investment.

When a determination is made to classify an asset or liability within Level 3 of the fair value hierarchy, the determination is based upon the significance of the unobservable inputs to the overall fair value measurement. Because certain securities trade in less liquid or illiquid markets with limited or no pricing information, the determination of fair value for these securities is inherently more difficult. However, Level 3 fair value investments may include, in addition to the unobservable or Level 3 inputs, observable components, which are components that are actively quoted or can be validated to market-based sources.

 

F-74


Table of Contents

The carrying amounts and estimated fair values of the Company’s consolidated financial instruments for which the disclosure of fair values is required, including (i) financial assets and liabilities measured and carried at fair value on a recurring basis, and (ii) financial assets and liabilities not measured at fair value but for which fair value disclosures are required; are summarized according to the hierarchy previously described as follows:

 

     June 30, 2013  
     Level 1      Level 2      Level 3      Fair Value      Carrying
Amount
 

Assets

              

Cash and cash equivalents

   $ 1,003,025       $ —         $ —         $ 1,003,025       $ 1,003,025   

Contingent purchase price reduction receivable

     —           —           41,000         41,000         41,000   

Fixed maturity securities, available-for-sale:

              

Asset-backed securities

     —           1,432,397         122,590         1,554,987         1,554,987   

Commercial mortgage-backed securities

     —           517,976         5,923         523,899         523,899   

Corporates

     —           9,773,772         438,955         10,212,727         10,212,727   

Hybrids

     —           508,291         —           508,291         508,291   

Municipals

     —           1,036,867         —           1,036,867         1,036,867   

Agency residential mortgage-backed securities

     —           110,983         —           110,983         110,983   

Non-agency residential mortgage-backed securities

     —           1,354,000         —           1,354,000         1,354,000   

U.S. Government

     183,632         210,395         —           394,027         394,027   

Equity securities

              

Available-for-Sale

     —           258,083         11,740         269,823         269,823   

Trading

     33,344         —           —           33,344         33,344   

Derivative financial instruments

     —           227,382         —           227,382         227,382   

Related party loans

     —           —           52,985         52,985         52,985   

Related party investments

     —           —           168,321         168,321         168,321   

Other invested assets

     —           —           193,555         193,555         193,555   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total financial assets

   $ 1,220,001       $ 15,430,146       $ 1,035,069       $ 17,685,216       $ 17,685,216   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Liabilities

              

Derivatives:

              

FIA embedded derivatives, included in contractholder
funds

   $ —         $ —         $ 1,585,935       $ 1,585,935       $ 1,585,935   

Futures contracts

     —           439         —           439         439   

Investment contracts, included in contractholder funds

     —           —           12,354,528         12,354,528         13,756,736   

Debt

     —           300,000         —           300,000         300,000   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total financial liabilities

   $ —         $ 300,439       $ 13,940,463       $ 14,240,902       $ 15,643,110   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

F-75


Table of Contents
     September 30, 2012  
     Level 1      Level 2      Level 3      Fair Value      Carrying
Amount
 

Assets

              

Cash and cash equivalents

   $ 1,052,338       $ 2,250       $ —         $ 1,054,588       $ 1,054,588   

Contingent purchase price reduction receivable

     —           —           41,000         41,000         41,000   

Fixed maturity securities, available-for-sale:

              

Asset-backed securities

     —           1,012,027         15,855         1,027,882         1,027,882   

Commercial mortgage-backed securities

     —           548,791         5,023         553,814         553,814   

Corporates

     —           10,873,715         135,296         11,009,011         11,009,011   

Hybrids

     —           519,422         8,873         528,295         528,295   

Municipals

     —           1,223,995         —           1,223,995         1,223,995   

Agency residential mortgage-backed securities

     —           154,890         —           154,890         154,890   

Non-agency residential mortgage-backed securities

     —           660,659         —           660,659         660,659   

U.S. Government

     930,367         —           —           930,367         930,367   

Equity securities—available-for-sale

     —           248,087         —           248,087         248,087   

Derivative financial instruments

     —           200,667         —           200,667         200,667   

Related party loans

     —           —           150,069         150,069         150,069   

Related party investments

     —           —           32,000         32,000         32,000   

Other invested assets

     —           —           18,814         18,814         18,814   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total financial assets

   $ 1,982,705       $ 15,444,503       $ 406,930       $ 17,834,138       $ 17,834,138   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Liabilities

              

Derivatives:

              

FIA embedded derivatives, included in contractholder funds

   $ —         $ —         $ 1,550,805       $ 1,550,805       $ 1,550,805   

Futures contracts

     —           928         —           928         928   

Investment contracts, included in contractholder funds

     —           —           12,271,882         12,271,882         13,739,670   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total financial liabilities

   $ —         $ 928       $ 13,822,687       $ 13,823,615       $ 15,291,403   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

The carrying amounts of accrued investment income and portions of other liabilities approximate fair value due to their short duration and, accordingly, they are not presented in the tables above.

Valuation Methodologies

The Company measures the fair value of its securities based on assumptions used by market participants in pricing the security. The most appropriate valuation methodology is selected based on the specific characteristics of the fixed maturity or equity security, and the Company will then consistently apply the valuation methodology to measure the security’s fair value. The Company’s fair value measurement is based on a market approach, which utilizes prices and other relevant information generated by market transactions involving identical or comparable securities. Sources of inputs to the market approach include a third-party pricing service, independent broker quotations or pricing matrices. The Company uses observable and unobservable inputs in its valuation methodologies. Observable inputs include benchmark yields, reported trades, broker-dealer quotes, issuer spreads, two-sided markets, benchmark securities, bids, offers and reference data. In addition, market indicators and industry and economic events are monitored and further market data will be acquired when certain

 

F-76


Table of Contents

thresholds are met. For certain security types, additional inputs may be used, or some of the inputs described above may not be applicable. For broker-quoted only securities, quotes from market makers or broker-dealers are obtained from sources recognized to be market participants. Management believes the broker quotes are prices at which trades could be executed based on historical trades executed at broker-quoted or slightly higher prices. The fair value of the asset-backed loans originated by Salus approximate their carrying value, as those loans carry a variable rate, are revolving in nature, and can be settled at the demand of either party.

The Company did not adjust prices received from third parties as of June 30, 2013 and September 30, 2012. However, the Company does analyze the third-party valuation methodologies and its related inputs to perform assessments to determine the appropriate level within the fair value hierarchy.

The fair value of derivative assets and liabilities is based upon valuation pricing models, which represents what the Company would expect to receive or pay at the balance sheet date if it cancelled the options, entered into offsetting positions, or exercised the options. The fair value of futures contracts represents the cumulative unsettled variation margin (open trade equity net of cash settlements). Fair values for these instruments are determined externally by an independent actuarial firm using market observable inputs, including interest rates, yield curve volatilities, and other factors. Credit risk related to the counterparty is considered when estimating the fair values of these derivatives. The fair values of the embedded derivatives in the Company’s FIA products are derived using market indices, pricing assumptions and historical data.

Investment contracts include deferred annuities, FIAs, IUL and immediate annuities. The fair values of deferred annuity, FIAs, and IUL contracts are based on their cash surrender value (i.e., the cost the Company would incur to extinguish the liability) as these contracts are generally issued without an annuitization date. The fair value of immediate annuities contracts is derived by calculating a new fair value interest rate using the updated yield curve and treasury spreads as of the respective reporting date. At June 30, 2013 and September 30, 2012, this resulted in lower fair value reserves relative to the carrying value. The Company is not required to and has not estimated the fair value of the liabilities under contracts that involve significant mortality or morbidity risks, as these liabilities fall within the definition of insurance contracts that are exceptions from financial instruments that require disclosure of fair value recognized to be market participants. Management believes the broker quotes are prices at which trades could be executed based on historical trades executed at broker-quoted or slightly higher prices.

The related party loans (discussed in Note 13) carrying value at par approximates fair value as this is the exit price for the obligation of these loans, which cannot be sold to third party participants.

 

F-77


Table of Contents

Quantitative information regarding significant unobservable inputs used for recurring Level 3 fair value measurements of financial instruments carried at fair value at June 30, 2013 and September 30, 2012 is as follows:

 

    Fair Value
at June 30,
2013
    Valuation
Technique
  Unobservable Input(s)   Range (Weighted average)
      Probability of
collection
  88% - 96% (92%)

Assets

      Expected term   9 months
      Discount rate   0.72%

Contingent purchase price reduction

    41,000      Discounted cash   Credit insurance risk   11.7%
    flow   premium  

Asset-backed securities

    122,590      Broker-quoted   Offered quotes   105.5%

Corporates

    400,171      Broker-quoted   Offered quotes   0.00% - 108.25% (93.18%)

Corporates

    38,784      Market Pricing   Quoted prices   88.00% - 126.20% (95.63%)

Commercial mortgage-backed securities

    5,923      Broker-quoted   Offered quotes   100%

Equity securities

    11,740      Market Pricing   Quoted prices   0.44% - 98.22% (57.57%)

Related party investments

    168,321      Market approach   Price to book   1.0x–1.4x
 

 

 

       

Total

  $ 788,529         
 

 

 

       

Liabilities

       

Derivatives:

       

FIA embedded derivatives included in contractholder funds

  $ 1,585,935      Discounted cash   Market value of   0% - 36.85%
    flow   option  
      SWAP rates   1.57% - 2.70% (2.14%)
      Mortality multiplier   80%
      Surrender rates   0.50% - 75% (7%)
      Non-performance
spread
  0.25% - 0.25% (0.25%)
 

 

 

       

Total liabilities at fair value

  $ 1,585,935         
 

 

 

       

 

F-78


Table of Contents
    Fair Value at
September 30,
2012
    Valuation
Technique
  Unobservable Input(s)   Range (Weighted average)
      Probability of
collection
  88% - 96% (92%)

Assets

      Expected term   9 months
      Discount rate   0.72%

Contingent purchase price reduction

    41,000      Discounted cash   Credit insurance risk   11.7%
    flow   premium  

Asset-backed securities

    15,855      Broker-quoted   Offered quotes   100% - 109.73% (103.09%)

Corporates

    103,319      Broker-quoted   Offered quotes   0% - 140.61% (68.47%)

Corporates

    31,977      Market pricing   Quoted prices   87.50% - 158.11% (97.89%)

Hybrids

    8,873      Broker-quoted   Offered quotes   0% - 103% (25.35%)

Commercial mortgage-backed securities

    5,023      Broker-quoted   Offered quotes   100.69%

Related party investment

    32,000      Market approach   Price to book   1.0x–1.4x
 

 

 

       

Total

  $ 238,047         
 

 

 

       

Liabilities

       

FIA embedded derivatives included in contractholder funds

  $ 1,550,805      Discounted cash   Market value of   0% - 31.05% (3.55%)
    flow   option  
      SWAP rates   0.76% - 1.7% (1.22%)
      Mortality multiplier   70% - 70% (70%)
      Surrender rates   2% - 50% (7%)
      Non-performance
spread
  0.25% - 0.25% (0.25%)
 

 

 

       

Total liabilities at fair value

  $ 1,550,805         
 

 

 

       

The significant unobservable inputs used in the fair value measurement of the contingent purchase price reduction receivable are the probability of collection depending on the outcomes of litigation and regulatory action, the expected term until payment, discount rate and the credit insurance risk premium. Generally, an increase in the assumptions for the expected term, discount rate or credit insurance risk premium would decrease the fair value of the contingent purchase price receivable. An increase in the provability of collection would increase the fair value of the contingent purchase price reduction receivable.

The significant unobservable inputs used in the fair value measurement of FIA embedded derivatives included in contractholder funds are market value of option, interest swap rates, mortality multiplier, surrender rates, and non-performance spread. The mortality multiplier is based on the 1983 annuity table and assumes the contractholder population is 50% female and 50% male. Significant increases (decreases) in the market value of option in isolation would result in a higher (lower) fair value measurement. Significant increases (decreases) in interest swap rates, mortality multiplier, surrender rates, or non-performance spread in isolation would result in a lower (higher) fair value measurement. Generally, a change in any one unobservable input would not result in a change in any other unobservable input.

 

F-79


Table of Contents

The following table summarize changes to the Company’s financial instruments carried at fair value and classified within Level 3 of the fair value hierarchy for the nine months ended June 30, 2013 and June 30, 2012. This summary excludes any impact of amortization of DAC and VOBA. The gains and losses below may include changes in fair value due in part to observable inputs that are a component of the valuation methodology.

 

     Nine months ended June 30, 2013  
     Balance at
Beginning

of Period
     Total Gains (Losses)     Net
Purchases,
Sales &
Settlements
     Net
Transfer In
(Out) of
Level 3(a)
    Balance at
End of
Period
 
      Included in
Earnings
    Included in
AOCI
        

Assets

              

Contingent purchase price reduction receivable

   $ 41,000       $ —        $ —        $ —         $ —        $ 41,000   

Fixed maturity securities, available-for-sale:

              

Asset-backed securities

     15,855       $ —        $ (209   $ 117,444       $ (10,500     122,590   

Commercial mortgage-backed securities

     5,023         —          (64     964         —          5,923   

Corporates

     135,296         (335     (10,829     348,610         (33,787     438,955   

Hybrids

     8,873         —          (175        (8,698     —     

Equity securities, available-for-sale

     —           —          1,593        10,147         —          11,740   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total assets at Level 3 fair value

   $ 206,047       $ (335   $ (9,684   $ 477,165       $ (52,985   $ 620,208   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Liabilities

              

FIA embedded derivatives, included in contractholder funds

   $ 1,550,805       $ 35,130      $ —        $ —         $ —        $ 1,585,935   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total liabilities at Level 3 fair value

   $ 1,550,805       $ 35,130      $ —        $ —         $ —        $ 1,585,935   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

(a) The net transfers in and out of Level 3 during the nine months ended June 30, 2013 were exclusively to or from Level 2.

 

F-80


Table of Contents
     Nine months ended June 30, 2012  
     Balance at
Beginning

of Period
     Total Gains (Losses)     Net
Purchases,
Sales &
Settlements
    Net
Transfer In
(Out) of
Level 3(a)
    Balance at
End of
Period
 
      Included in
Earnings
    Included in
AOCI
       

Assets

             

Contingent purchase price reduction receivable

   $ —         $ 41,000      $ —        $ —        $ —        $ 41,000   

Fixed maturity securities, available-for-sale:

             

Asset-backed securities

     374,518         —          6,985        363,076        14,497        759,076   

Corporates

     159,684         207        (5,927     21,929        29,943        205,836   

Hybrids

     5,205         —          (24     —          —          5,181   

Municipals

     —           (2     72        10,177        (10,192     55   

Agency residential mortgage-backed securities

     3,312         —          18        —          (3,330     —     

Non-agency residential mortgage-backed securities

     3,759         (126     4        (777     (2,245     615   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total assets at Level 3 fair value

   $ 546,478       $ 41,079      $ 1,128      $ 394,405      $ 28,673      $ 1,011,763   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Liabilities

             

FIA embedded derivatives, included in contractholder funds

   $ 1,396,340       $ 90,125        —          —          —        $ 1,486,465   

Available-for-sale embedded derivatives

     400         (400     —          —          —          —     
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total liabilities at Level 3 fair value

   $ 1,396,740       $ 89,725      $ —        $ —        $ —        $ 1,486,465   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

(a) The net transfers in and out of Level 3 during the nine months ended June 30, 2012 were exclusively to or from Level 2.

The Company reviews the fair value hierarchy classifications each reporting period. Changes in the observability of the valuation attributes may result in a reclassification of certain financial assets or liabilities. Such reclassifications are reported as transfers in and out of Level 3, or between other levels, at the beginning fair value for the reporting period in which the changes occur. We transferred $79,324 U.S. Government securities from Level 1 into Level 2 for the nine months ended June 30, 2013 reflecting the level of market activity in these instruments. There were no transfers between Level 1 and Level 2 for the nine months ended June 30, 2012.

Primary market issuance and secondary market activity for certain asset-backed and hybrid securities during the nine months ended June 30, 2013 as well corporate securities during the nine months ended June 30, 2013 increased the market observable inputs used to establish fair values for similar securities. These factors, along with more consistent pricing from third-party sources, resulted in the Company concluding that there is sufficient trading activity in similar instruments to support classifying these securities as Level 2 as of June 30, 2013. Accordingly, the Company’s assessment resulted in a net transfer out of Level 3 of $52,985 related to asset-backed, corporate and hybrid securities during the nine months ended June 30, 2013. The Company’s assessment resulted in a net transfer out of Level 3 of $15,766 related to municipals, agency RMBS and non-agency RMBS and a net transfer into Level 3 of $44,440 related to ABS and corporates during the nine months ended June 30, 2012.

Changes in unrealized losses (gains), net in the Company’s FIA embedded derivatives are included in “Benefits and other changes in policy reserves” in the Condensed Consolidated Statements of Operations.

 

F-81


Table of Contents

The following tables present the gross components of purchases, sales, and settlements, net, of Level 3 financial instruments for the nine months ended June 30, 2013 and June 30, 2012. There were no issuances during the nine months ended June 30, 2013 and June 30, 2012.

 

     Nine months ended June 30, 2013  
     Purchases      Sales     Settlements     Net Purchases,
Sales &
Settlements
 

Assets

         

Fixed maturity, securities available-for-sale:

         

Asset-backed securities

   $ 117,500       $ —        $ (56   $ 117,444   

Commercial mortgage-backed securities

     1,026         —          (62     964   

Corporates

     380,076         (9,561     (21,905     348,610   

Equity securities available-for-sale

     10,147         —          —          10,147   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total assets at Level 3 fair value

   $ 508,749       $ (9,561   $ (22,023   $ 477,165   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

     Nine months ended June 30, 2012  
     Purchases      Sales     Settlements     Net Purchases,
Sales &
Settlements
 

Assets

         

Fixed maturity, securities available-for-sale:

         

Asset-backed securities

   $ 394,887       $ —        $ (31,811   $ 363,076   

Corporates

     91,599         (24,398     (45,272     21,929   

Municipals

     10,197         —          (20     10,177   

Non-agency residential mortgage-backed securities

     —           (475     (302     (777
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total assets at Level 3 fair value

   $ 496,683       $ (24,873   $ (77,405   $ 394,405   
  

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

(7)    Intangible Assets

Information regarding VOBA, DAC, and deferred sales inducements (“DSI”), is as follows:

 

     VOBA     DAC     Total  

Balance at September 30, 2012

   $ 104,320      $ 169,223      $ 273,543   

Deferrals

     —          109,188        109,188   

Less: Components of amortization—

      

Unlocking

     22,570        4,844        27,414   

Interest

     16,236        7,055        23,291   

Other amortization

     (151,832     (61,989     (213,821

Add: Adjustment for unrealized investment gains/losses, net

     211,297        49,607        260,904   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Balance at June 30, 2013

   $ 202,591      $ 277,928      $ 480,519   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

     VOBA     DAC     Total  

Balance at September 30, 2011

   $ 419,060      $ 38,107      $ 457,167   

Deferrals

     —          157,620        157,620   

Less: Components of amortization—

      

Unlocking

     (1,106     1,678        572   

Interest

     21,534        1,448        22,982   

Other amortization

     (121,696     (13,837     (135,533

Add: Adjustment for unrealized investment gains/losses, net

     (74,230     (17,699     (91,929
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Balance at June 30, 2012

     243,562        167,317        410,879   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

F-82


Table of Contents

Amortization of DAC and VOBA is based on the amount of gross margins or profits recognized, including investment gains and losses. The adjustment for unrealized net investment gains represents the amount of DAC and VOBA that would have been amortized if such unrealized gains and losses had been recognized. This is referred to as the “shadow adjustments” as the additional amortization is reflected in AOCI rather than the statements of operations. As of June 30, 2013 and September 30, 2012, the VOBA balance included cumulative adjustments for net unrealized investment gains/losses of $128,124 and $339,420, respectively, and the DAC balances included cumulative adjustments for net unrealized investment gains/losses of $1,103 and $50,711, respectively.

The above DAC balances include $20,571 and $9,069 of DSI, net of shadow adjustments, as of June 30, 2013 and September 30, 2012, respectively.

The weighted average amortization period for DAC and VOBA are approximately 4.9 and 7.7 years, respectively. Estimated amortization expense for DAC and VOBA in future fiscal years is as follows:

 

     Estimated Amortization Expense  

Fiscal Year

   VOBA      DAC  

2013

   $ 8,992       $ 4,548   

2014

     45,700         22,281   

2015

     43,688         23,585   

2016

     39,553         22,942   

2017

     32,955         21,962   

Thereafter

     159,828         183,714   

(8)    Long Term Debt

In March 2013, FGLH issued $300,000 aggregate principal amount of its 6.375% senior notes (“Notes offering”) due April 1, 2021, at par value, which FGLH may elect to redeem after April 1, 2015. Interest payments are due semi-annually, April and October 1, commencing October 1, 2013 and total interest expense was $4,987 for the nine months ended June 30, 2013. With the net proceeds received from the issuance, FGLH paid FGL a $73,000 dividend in March 2013 and FGL paid a $73,000 dividend to HGI.

In connection with the 6.375% Notes offering, the Company capitalized $10,195 of debt issue costs. The fees are classified as “Other assets” in the accompanying Condensed Consolidated Balance Sheet as of June 30, 2013 and are being are amortized over the redemption date over the remaining term of the debt, of which $845 has been amortized for the nine months ended June 30, 2013.

(9)    Stock Compensation

FGLH recognized stock compensation expense related to stock option awards and dividend equivalents as follows:

 

     Nine months ended  
     June 30,
2013
     June 30,
2012
 

Stock compensation expense

   $ 3,547       $ 584   

Related tax benefit

     1,241         204   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

Net stock compensation expense

   $ 2,306       $ 380   
  

 

 

    

 

 

 

The stock compensation expense is included in “Acquisition and operating expenses, net of deferrals” in the Condensed Consolidated Statements of Operations.

 

F-83


Table of Contents

A summary of FGLH’s outstanding stock options as of June 30, 2013 and changes during the nine month period is as follows:

 

Stock Option Awards

   Options     Weighted
Average
Exercise
Price
     Weighted
Average
Grant Date
Fair Value
 

Stock options outstanding at September 30, 2012

     201        38.20         3.90   

Granted

     194        49.45         3.85   

Exercised

     (27     38.14         3.90   

Forfeited or expired

     —          —           —     
  

 

 

      

Stock options outstanding at June 30, 2013

     368        43.77         3.88   
  

 

 

      

Vested and exercisable at June 30, 2013

     —          —           —     
  

 

 

      

Outstanding and expected to vest at June 30, 2013

     301        43.77         3.88   
  

 

 

      

A summary of restricted stock and restricted stock units outstanding as of June 30, 2013 and related activity during the nine months then ended are as follows:

 

Restricted Stock Units

   Shares     Weighted
Average
Exercise
Price
     Weighted
Average
Grant Date
Fair Value
 

Restricted stock units outstanding at September 30, 2012

     —          —           —     

Granted

     52        49.45         3.85   

Exercised

     —          —           —     

Forfeited or expired

     (1     —           —     
  

 

 

      

Restricted stock units outstanding at June 30, 2013

     51        49.45         3.85   
  

 

 

      

Vested and exercisable at June 30, 2013

     —          —           —     
  

 

 

      

Units expected to vest

     41        49.45         3.85   
  

 

 

      

Effective December 31, 2012, FGLH granted 194 stock option awards and 52 restricted stock units, under the terms of the plan. These stock options and restricted shares vest over a period of 3 years and expire on the seventh anniversary of the grant date. The total fair value of the option grant and restricted stock unit grant on the grant date was $581 and $2,019, respectively.

The total compensation cost related to non-vested options and restricted stock units not yet recognized as of June 30, 2013 totaled $4,104 and will be recognized over a weighted-average period of 2.41 years.

On November 2, 2011, FGLH’s compensation committee (on behalf of its board of directors) approved a long-term stock-based incentive plan that permits the grant of options to purchase shares of FGLH’s common stock to key employees of FGLH. On November 2, 2011, FGLH’s compensation committee also approved a dividend equivalent plan that permits holders of these options the right to receive a payment in cash in an amount equal to the ordinary dividends declared and paid or debt service payments, divided by the total number of common shares outstanding, to HGI by FGLH in each calendar year starting in the year in which the dividend equivalent is granted through the year immediately prior to the year in which the dividend equivalent vests with respect to a participant’s option shares. As of September 30, 2012, FGLH determined that it was probable that the dividend equivalent will vest and recorded a provision of for the ratable recognition $368 of such projected liability over the option vesting period for the quarter ended June 30, 2013.

 

F-84


Table of Contents

On January 6, 2012 and June 22, 2012, FGLH granted 205 and 2 stock option awards, respectively, under the terms of the plan. These stock options vest over a period of 3 years and expire on the seventh anniversary of the grant. The total fair value of the grants on their grant dates was approximately $623 and $5, respectively. As of September 30, 2012 FGLH determined it was probable that the dividend equivalent plan would vest and therefore, based on the options outstanding, the projected liability should be recognized rateably over the option vesting period. Accordingly, a $504 liability was recorded as of September 30, 2012.

On December 31, 2012, FGLH elected an alternate settlement for the vested portion of the 2012 share options awards. FGLH selected a cash settlement of the vested option awards, which reclassified the plan from an equity plan to a liability plan. FGLH recognized additional expense, of approximately $585, for the difference between the cash settlement amount and the compensation expense previously recognized. FGLH revalued the remaining unvested option awards to fair value and recorded $105 compensation expense.

On December 31, 2012, FGLH also approved a new dividend equivalent plan in connection with the new stock option awards discussed above. FGLH recognized $1,077 related to the dividend equivalent liability as of June 30, 2013 in connection with the 2011 and 2012 stock option awards.

The following assumptions were used in the determination of these grant date fair values using the Black-Scholes option pricing model:

 

     2013

Risk-free interest rate

   0.8%

Assumed dividend yield

   6.0%

Expected option term

   4.5 years

Volatility

   27.0%

(10)    Income Taxes

The provision for income taxes represents federal income taxes. The effective tax rate for the nine months ended June 30, 2013 was 32.1%. The effective tax rate for the nine months ended June 30, 2012 was 9.2%. The effective tax rate (“ETR”) on pre-tax income differs from U.S Federal statutory rate primarily due to current period changes to the Company’s valuation allowance offsetting its deferred tax asset position as well as tax expense from disregarded entities that is reported by HGI on its financial statements.

The Company’s tax provision changes quarterly based on recurring and non-recurring factors, including but not limited to, enacted tax legislation, tax audit settlements and changes in judgment from the evaluation of new information resulting in the recognition or de-recognition and/or re-measurement of a tax position taken in a prior period. Changes in judgment related to a tax position are generally recognized in the quarter in which any such change occurs.

(11)    Commitments and Contingencies

Contingencies

Regulatory and Litigation Matters

The Insurance Subsidiaries are assessed amounts by the state guaranty funds to cover losses to policyholders of insolvent or rehabilitated insurance companies. Those mandatory assessments may be partially recovered through a reduction in future premium taxes in certain states. At June 30, 2013, the Insurance Subsidiaries accrued $5,570 for guaranty fund assessments which is expected to be offset by estimated future premium tax deductions of $4,955.

FGLH has received inquiries from a number of state regulatory authorities regarding its use of the U.S. Social Security Administration’s Death Master File (“Death Master File”) and compliance with state claims

 

F-85


Table of Contents

practices regulation. To date, FGLH has received inquiries from authorities in Maryland, Minnesota and New York. The New York Insurance Department issued a letter and subsequent regulation requiring life insurers doing business in New York to use the Death Master File or similar databases to determine if benefits were payable under life insurance policies, annuities and retained asset accounts. Legislation requiring insurance companies to use the Death Master File to identify potential claims has recently been enacted in FGLIC’s state of domicile (Maryland) and other states. As a result of these legislative and regulatory developments, in May 2012 FGLH undertook an initiative to use the Death Master File and other publicly available databases to identify persons potentially entitled to benefits under life insurance policies, annuities and retained asset accounts. During Fiscal 2012, FGLH incurred an $11,000 benefit expense, net of reinsurance, to increase reserves to cover potential benefits payable resulting from this ongoing effort. Based on its analysis to date and management’s estimate, FGLH believes the remaining accrual will cover the reasonably estimated liability arising out of these developments. In addition, FGLH has received audit and examination notices from several state agencies responsible for escheatment and unclaimed property regulation in those states. FGLH has established a contingency of $2,000, the mid-point of an estimated range of $1,000 to $3,000, relative to the external legal costs and potential liabilities of said audits and examinations. Additional costs that cannot be reasonably estimated as of the date of this filing are possible as a result of ongoing regulatory developments and other future requirements related to this matter.

FGL is involved in various pending or threatened legal proceedings, including purported class actions, arising in the ordinary course of business. In some instances, these proceedings include claims for unspecified or substantial punitive damages and similar types of relief in addition to amounts for alleged contractual liability or requests for equitable relief. In the opinion of management and in light of existing insurance and other potential indemnification, reinsurance and established reserves, such litigation is not expected to have a material adverse effect on FGL’s financial position, although it is possible that the results of operations and cash flows could be materially affected by an unfavorable outcome in any one period.

Guarantees

The First Amended and Restated Stock Purchase Agreement, dated February 17, 2011 (the “F&G Stock Purchase Agreement”) between FGL and OMGUK includes a Guarantee and Pledge Agreement which creates certain obligations for FGLH as a grantor and also grants a security interest to OMGUK of FGLH’s equity interest in FGL Insurance in the event that FGL fails to perform in accordance with the terms of the F&G Stock Purchase Agreement. The Company is not aware of any events or transactions that resulted in non-compliance with the Guarantee and Pledge Agreement.

(12)    Reinsurance

The Company reinsures portions of its policy risks with other insurance companies. The use of reinsurance does not discharge an insurer from liability on the insurance ceded. The insurer is required to pay in full the amount of its insurance liability regardless of whether it is entitled to or able to receive payment from the reinsurer. The portion of risks exceeding the Company’s retention limit is reinsured with other insurers. The Company seeks reinsurance coverage in order to limit its exposure to mortality losses and enhance capital management. The Company follows reinsurance accounting when there is adequate risk transfer. Otherwise, the deposit method of accounting is followed. The Company also assumes policy risks from other insurance companies.

 

F-86


Table of Contents

The effect of reinsurance on premiums earned, benefits incurred and reserve changes for the nine months ended June 30, 2013 and June 30, 2012 were as follows:

 

     Nine months ended  
     June 30, 2013     June 30, 2012  
     Net Premiums Earned     Net Benefits Incurred
and Reserve Changes
    Net Premiums Earned     Net Benefits Incurred
and Reserve Changes
 

Direct

   $ 212,335      $ 579,748      $ 225,757      $ 749,743   

Assumed

     24,484        15,734        35,673        26,975   

Ceded

     (189,962     (163,782     (219,260     (217,016
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net

   $ 46,857      $ 431,700      $ 42,170      $ 559,702   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Amounts payable or recoverable for reinsurance on paid and unpaid claims are not subject to periodic or maximum limits. During the nine months ended June 30, 2013 and June 30, 2012, the Company did not write off any reinsurance balances. During the nine months ended June 30, 2012 the Company did not commute any ceded reinsurance. Effective June 17, 2013, the Company rescinded the portion of the coinsurance agreement dated April 1, 2011 between FGL Insurance and Wilton Re which covers certain disability income riders. Wilton Re has agreed to pay FGL Insurance a rescission settlement of $6,428. In addition, FGL Insurance will re-establish the $4,489 reserve liability previously ceded to Wilton Re in connection with this business. FGL Insurance recognized a net gain on the rescission of $1,939.

No policies issued by the Company have been reinsured with any foreign company, which is controlled, either directly or indirectly, by a party not primarily engaged in the business of insurance.

The Company has not entered into any reinsurance agreements in which the reinsurer may unilaterally cancel any reinsurance for reasons other than non-payment of premiums or other similar credit issues.

The Company has the following significant reinsurance agreements as of June 30, 2013:

Wilton Agreement

On January 26, 2011, FGL entered into a commitment agreement (the “Commitment Agreement”) with Wilton Re U.S. Holdings, Inc. (“Wilton”) committing Wilton Re, a wholly-owned subsidiary of Wilton and a Minnesota insurance company, to enter into one of two amendments to an existing reinsurance agreement with FGL Insurance.

On April 8, 2011, FGL Insurance ceded substantially all of the remaining life insurance business that it had retained to Wilton Re under the first of the two amendments with Wilton. FGL Insurance transferred assets with a fair value of $535,826, which was net of ceding commission, to Wilton Re. The Company considered the effects of the first amendment in the opening balance sheet and the application of the acquisition method as of FGLH Acquisition Date. Effective April 26, 2011, FGL elected the second of the two amendments under the Commitment Agreement (the “Raven Springing Amendment”), which committed FGL Insurance to cede to Wilton Re all of the business (the “Raven Block”) then reinsured with Raven Re on or before March 31, 2013, subject to regulatory approval. The Raven Springing Amendment was intended to mitigate the risk associated with FGL’s obligation under the F&G Stock Purchase Agreement, by replacing the Raven Re reserve facility by December 31, 2012. On September 9, 2011, FGL Insurance and Wilton Re executed an amended and restated Raven Springing Amendment whereby the recapture of the business ceded to Raven Re by FGL Insurance and the re-cession to Wilton Re closed on October 17, 2011 with an effective date of October 1, 2011. In connection with the closing, FGL Insurance transferred assets with a fair value of $580,683, which included ceding commission, to Wilton Re.

In September 2012, Wilton Re and FGL Insurance reached a final agreement on the initial settlements associated with the reinsurance transactions FGL Insurance entered into subsequent to the FGLH Acquisition.

 

F-87


Table of Contents

The final settlement amounts did not result in any material adjustments to the amounts reflected in the financial statements. FGL Insurance recognized a net pre-tax gain of $18,029 on these reinsurance transactions which has been deferred and is being amortized over the remaining life of the underlying reinsured contracts.

Commissioners Annuity Reserve Valuation Method Facility (“CARVM”)

Effective October 1, 2012, FGL Insurance recaptured the CARVM reinsurance agreement from OM Re and simultaneously ceded the business to Raven Re. The recapture of the OM Re CARVM reinsurance agreement satisfies the Company’s obligation under the F&G Stock Purchase Agreement to replace the letter of credit provided by OM no later than December 31, 2015. In connection with the new CARVM reinsurance agreement, FGLH and Raven Re entered into an agreement with Nomura Bank International plc (“Nomura”) to establish a $295,000 reserve financing facility in the form of a letter of credit issued by Nomura and Nomura charged an upfront structuring fee in the amount of $2,800. The reserve financing facility is set to be reduced by $6,250 each quarter subsequent to establishment. The structuring fee was paid by FGL Insurance and will be deferred and amortized over the expected life of the facility. As this letter of credit is provided by an unaffiliated financial institution, Raven Re is permitted to carry the letter of credit as an admitted asset on the Raven Re statutory balance sheet.

While neither FGL Insurance nor FGL NY Insurance follow any prescribed or permitted statutory accounting practices that differ from the NAIC’s statutory accounting practices in the preparation of their statutory basis financial statements, FGL Insurance’s statutory carrying value of Raven Re reflects the effect of the permitted practice to treat the available amount of the letter of credit as an admitted asset. Without such permitted statutory accounting Raven Re’s statutory capital and surplus would be negative $122.6 at June 30, 2013 and its risk-based capital would fall below the minimum regulatory requirements. The letter of credit facility is collateralized by NAIC 1 rated debt securities. If the permitted practice was revoked, the letter of credit could be replaced by the collateral assets with Nomura’s consent.

(13)    Related Party Transactions

The Company participated in unsecured borrowings to third parties originated by Salus Capital Partners LLC (“Salus”), an affiliated company indirectly owned by HGI that provides asset-based and senior secured financing. In February 2013, Salus completed a CLO securitization and the Company sold participation interests and partial participation interests into the CLO and acquired $117,500 asset backed securities, which are included in “Fixed maturities securities” in the Consolidated Balance Sheet as of June 30, 2013. Interest earned on the Salus CLO was $2,343 for the nine months ended June 30, 2013, which is included in “Net investment income” in the Consolidated Statement of Operations.

The Company had remaining 2012 unsecured borrowings originated by Salus of $32,505 and $129,467 and accrued investment income of $124 and $602 at June 30, 2013 and September 30, 2012, respectively, which are included in “Related party loans and investment” in the Consolidated Balance Sheets. Also included in “Related party loans and investment” was financing provided by the Company to Salus in the form of a $10,000 revolving loan and a $20,000 term loan. As of June 30, 2013, accrued investment income on the term loan was $368 and the revolving loan was unfunded. Interest earned on the loan participations and revolving loan was $4,323 for the nine months ended June 30, 2013, which is included in “Net investment income” in the Consolidated Statement of Operations. The Company also purchased $62,000 Salus preferred equity during the nine months ended June 30, 2013, which along with accrued interest of $2,099 is included in “Related party loans and investment” in the Consolidated Balance Sheet. Interest earned on the preferred equity was $2,099 during the nine months ended June 30, 2013.

During the March 2013 quarter, the Company acquired $100,000 unsecured senior notes from HGI Energy Holdings, LLC, a wholly owned subsidiary of HGI. The unsecured senior notes and related accrued income of $3,388 is included in “Related party investments” in the Consolidated Balance Sheet as of June 30, 2013. Interest earned on the unsecured senior notes was $3,375 for the nine months ended June 30, 2013, which is included in “Net investment income” in the Consolidated Statement of Operations.

 

F-88


Table of Contents

In 2013, the Company invested in loan participations originated by Salus of $162,204 with accrued interest of $908 included in “Other invested assets” in the Consolidated Balance Sheet as of June 30, 2013. Interest earned on these loan participations was $2,212 for the nine months ended June 30, 2013, which is included in “Net investment income” in the Consolidated Statement of Operations. The Company also has real estate loans of $3,787 included in “Other invested assets” and $76 included in “Accrued investment income” in the Consolidated Balance Sheet as of June 30, 2013. Interest earned on the real estate loans was $599 for the nine months ended June 30, 2013, which is included in “Net investment income” in the Consolidated Statement of Operations.

(14)    FGLH Acquisition Update

On April 6, 2011, HGI acquired all of the outstanding shares of capital stock of the Company and certain intercompany loan agreements between the seller, as lender, and the Company, as borrower, for cash consideration of $350,000 (including $5,000 re-characterized as an expense), which amount could be reduced by up to $50,000 post closing (as discussed further below).

Contingent Purchase Price Reduction

As contemplated by the terms of the F&G Stock Purchase Agreement, Front Street, a then recently formed Bermuda-based reinsurer and wholly-owned subsidiary of the Company sought to enter into a reinsurance agreement (the “Front Street Reinsurance Transaction”) with the Company whereby Front Street would reinsure up to $3,000,000 of insurance obligations under annuity contracts of the Company, and Harbinger Capital Partners II LP (“HCP II”), an affiliate of the Principal Stockholders, would be appointed the investment manager of up to $1,000,000 of assets securing Front Street’s reinsurance obligations under the reinsurance agreement. These assets would be deposited in a reinsurance trust account for the benefit of the Company.

The Front Street Reinsurance Transaction required the approval of the Maryland Insurance Administration (the “MIA”). The F&G Stock Purchase Agreement provides that, the seller may be required to pay up to $50,000 as a post-closing reduction in purchase price if, among other things, the Front Street Reinsurance Transaction is not approved by the MIA or is approved subject to certain restrictions or conditions. The Company received written notice, dated January 10, 2012, from the MIA, rejecting the Front Street Reinsurance Transaction, as proposed by the respective parties. HGI notified the seller of the failure of the MIA to approve the Front Street Reinsurance Transaction and sought the purchase price reduction. The seller refused, and HGI is pursuing all available options to recover the full purchase price reduction, including the commencement of litigation against the seller; however, the outcome of any such action is subject to risk and uncertainty and there can be no assurance that any or all of the $50,000 purchase price reduction will be obtained by HGI.

Prior to the receipt of the written rejection notice from the MIA, management believed, based on the facts and circumstances at that time, that the likelihood was remote that the purchase price would be required to be reduced. Therefore a fair value of zero had been assigned to the contingent purchase price reduction as of the Company Acquisition date and at each subsequent quarterly remeasurement date through January 1, 2012. Management now believes that it is near certain that the purchase price will be required to be reduced by the full $50,000 amount and has estimated a fair value of $41,000 for the contingent receivable as of June 30, 2013 (essentially unchanged from September 30, 2012 and June 30, 2012), reflecting appropriate discounts for potential litigation and regulatory action, length of time until expected payment is received and a credit insurance risk premium. Such $41,000 estimated fair value of the contingent receivable has been reflected in “Contingent purchase price reduction receivable” in the Condensed Consolidated Balance Sheets as of June 30, 2013. A corresponding credit to “Gain on contingent purchase price reduction” was recorded in earnings during the year ended September 30, 2012.

 

F-89


Table of Contents

(15)    Subsequent Events

Conversion to a Corporation

On August 26, 2013, Harbinger F&G, LLC, a Delaware limited liability company, converted into a Delaware corporation, pursuant to a statutory conversion and renamed itself Fidelity & Guaranty Life. Prior to the conversion, Harbinger F&G, LLC distributed its ownership interests in its wholly-owned subsidiaries, HGI Real Estate, LLC, a Delaware limited liability company, and Front Street, to HGI. Harbinger F&G, LLC also distributed and assigned to HGI all of its rights in the interests, liabilities and obligations under its litigation against OMGUK related to claimed $50 million purchase price adjustment in connection with the FGLH Acquisition As a result of the statutory conversion, HGI, the sole member of Harbinger F&G, LLC became the holder of all shares of our common stock (prior to the statutory conversion, Harbinger F&G, LLC had no shares of common stock). After the statutory conversion to a corporation occurred, the officers of FGLH were appointed as the officers of Fidelity & Guaranty Life.

 

F-90


Table of Contents

 

 

 

 

LOGO

Through and including                     , 2013 (the 25th day after the date of this prospectus), all dealers effecting transactions in these securities, whether or not participating in this offering, may be required to deliver a prospectus. This is in addition to a dealer’s obligation to deliver a prospectus when acting as an underwriter and with respect to an unsold allotment or subscription.


Table of Contents

PART II

INFORMATION NOT REQUIRED IN PROSPECTUS

Item 13. Other Expenses of Issuance and Distribution.

The following table sets forth the costs and expenses, other than the underwriting discount, payable by our company in connection with the sale of common stock being registered. All amounts are estimates except the SEC registration fee, the Financial Industry Regulatory Authority, Inc., or FINRA, filing fees and the Stock Exchange listing fee.

 

SEC registration fee

   $ 13,640   

FINRA filing fee

   $ 15,500   

Stock Exchange listing fee

   $ *   

Printing and engraving expenses

   $ *   

Legal fees and expenses

   $ *   

Accounting fees and expenses

   $ *   

Blue Sky fees and expenses (including legal fees)

   $ *   

Transfer agent and registrar fees and expenses

   $ *   

Miscellaneous

   $ *   
  

 

 

 

Total

   $ *   
  

 

 

 

 

* To be filed by amendment.

Item 14. Indemnification of Directors and Officers.

Delaware General Corporation Law

Section 145(a) of the DGCL provides that a corporation may indemnify any person who was or is a party or is threatened to be made a party to any threatened, pending or completed action, suit or proceeding, whether civil, criminal, administrative or investigative (other than an action by or in the right of the corporation) by reason of the fact that the person is or was a director, officer, employee or agent of the corporation, or is or was serving at the request of the corporation as a director, officer, employee or agent of another corporation, partnership, joint venture, trust or other enterprise, against expenses (including attorneys’ fees), judgments, fines and amounts paid in settlement actually and reasonably incurred by the person in connection with such action, suit or proceeding if the person acted in good faith and in a manner the person reasonably believed to be in or not opposed to the best interests of the corporation, and, with respect to any criminal action or proceeding, had no reasonable cause to believe the person’s conduct was unlawful.

Section 145(b) of the DGCL provides that a corporation may indemnify any person who was or is a party or is threatened to be made a party to any threatened, pending or completed action or suit by or in the right of the corporation to procure a judgment in its favor by reason of the fact that the person is or was a director, officer, employee or agent of the corporation, or is or was serving at the request of the corporation as a director, officer, employee or agent of another corporation, partnership, joint venture, trust or other enterprise, against expenses (including attorneys’ fees) actually and reasonably incurred by the person in connection with the defense or settlement of such action or suit if the person acted in good faith and in a manner the person reasonably believed to be in or not opposed to the best interests of the corporation and except that no indemnification shall be made in respect of any claim, issue or matter as to which such person shall have been adjudged to be liable to the corporation unless and only to the extent that the Delaware Court of Chancery or the court in which such action or suit was brought shall determine upon application that, despite the adjudication of liability but in view of all of the circumstances of the case, such person is fairly and reasonably entitled to indemnity for such expenses which the Delaware Court of Chancery or such other court shall deem proper.

 

II-1


Table of Contents

Section 145(c) of the DGCL provides that to the extent that a present or former director or officer of a corporation has been successful on the merits or otherwise in defense of any action, suit or proceeding referred to in subsections (a) and (b) of Section 145 of the DGCL, or in defense of any claim, issue or matter therein, such person shall be indemnified against expenses (including attorneys’ fees) actually and reasonably incurred by such person in connection therewith.

Section 145(e) of the DGCL provides that expenses (including attorneys’ fees) incurred by an officer or director of the corporation in defending any civil, criminal, administrative or investigative action, suit or proceeding may be paid by the corporation in advance of the final disposition of such action, suit or proceeding upon receipt of an undertaking by or on behalf of such director or officer to repay such amount if it shall ultimately be determined that such person is not entitled to be indemnified by the corporation as authorized in Section 145 of the DGCL. Such expenses, including attorneys’ fees, incurred by former directors and officers or other employees and agents of the corporation or by persons serving at the request of the corporation as directors, officers, employees or agents of another corporation, partnership, joint venture, trust or other enterprise may be so paid upon such terms and conditions, if any, as the corporation deems appropriate.

Section 145(g) of the DGCL specifically allows a Delaware corporation to purchase liability insurance on behalf of its directors and officers and to insure against potential liability of such directors and officers regardless of whether the corporation would have the power to indemnify such directors and officers under Section 145 of the DGCL.

Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation will contain provisions permitted under the DGCL relating to the liability of directors. These provisions will eliminate a director’s personal liability for monetary damages resulting from a breach of fiduciary duty, except in circumstances involving:

 

   

any breach of the director’s duty of loyalty;

 

   

acts or omissions not in good faith or which involve intentional misconduct or a knowing violation of the law;

 

   

under Section 174 of the DGCL (unlawful dividends); or

 

   

any transaction from which the director derives an improper personal benefit.

Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and our amended and restated by-laws will require us to indemnify and advance expenses to our directors and officers to the fullest extent not prohibited by the DGCL and other applicable law, except in the case of a proceeding instituted by the director without the approval of our board of directors. Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and our amended and restated by-laws will provide that we are required to indemnify our directors and officers, to the fullest extent permitted by law, for all judgments, fines, settlements, legal fees and other expenses incurred in connection with pending or threatened legal proceedings because of the director’s or officer’s positions with us or another entity that the director or officer serves at our request, subject to various conditions, and to advance funds to our directors and officers to enable them to defend against such proceedings. To receive indemnification, the director or officer must have been successful in the legal proceeding or have acted in good faith and in what was reasonably believed to be a lawful manner in our best interest and, with respect to any criminal proceeding, had no reasonable cause to believe his or her conduct was unlawful.

Section 102(b)(7) of the DGCL permits a Delaware corporation to include a provision in its certificate of incorporation eliminating or limiting the personal liability of directors to the corporation or its shareholders for monetary damages for breach of fiduciary duty as a director. This provision, however, may not eliminate or limit a director’s liability (1) for breach of the director’s duty of loyalty to the corporation or its shareholders, (2) for acts or omissions not in good faith or involving intentional misconduct or a knowing violation of law, (3) under Section 174 of the DGCL, or (4) for any transaction from which the director derived an improper personal benefit. Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation will contain such a provision.

 

II-2


Table of Contents

Indemnification Agreements

Prior to the offering, we will enter into an indemnification agreement with each of our directors and executive officers. The indemnification agreement will provide our directors and executive officers with contractual rights to the indemnification and expense advancement rights provided under our amended and restated by-laws, as well as contractual rights to additional indemnification as provided in the indemnification agreement.

Directors’ and Officers’ Liability Insurance

We have obtained directors’ and officers’ liability insurance which insures against certain liabilities that our directors and officers and our subsidiaries, may, in such capacities, incur.

In any underwriting agreement we enter into in connection with the sale of common stock being registered hereby, the underwriters will agree to indemnify, under certain conditions, us, our directors, our officers and persons who control us within the meaning of the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, against certain liabilities.

Item 15. Recent Sales of Unregistered Securities.

In March 2013, FGLH issued $300.0 million aggregate principal amount of 6.375% Senior Notes due April 1, 2021, at par value. The initial purchasers were Jefferies LLC, Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC and Macquarie Capital (USA) Inc. and offered the Senior Notes only to qualified institutional buyers under Rule 144A of the Securities Act, or to non-U.S. persons outside of the United States in compliance with Regulation S of the Securities Act.

Item 16. Exhibits and Financial Statement Schedules.

(a) Exhibits.

The Exhibits to this Registration Statement on Form S-1 are listed in the Index to Exhibits which follows the signature pages to this Registration Statement and is herein incorporated by reference.

(b) Financial Statement Schedule.

Schedule I—Registrant’s unaudited condensed consolidated financial statements are included in the registration statement beginning on page F-60.

Item 17. Undertakings.

(a) The undersigned registrant hereby undertakes to provide to the underwriters at the closing specified in the underwriting agreement certificates in such denominations and registered in such names as required by the underwriters to permit prompt delivery to each purchaser.

(b) Insofar as indemnification for liabilities arising under the Securities Act of 1933 may be permitted to directors, officers and controlling persons of the registrant pursuant to the foregoing provisions, or otherwise, the registrant has been advised that in the opinion of the Securities and Exchange Commission such indemnification is against public policy as expressed in the Act, and is, therefore, unenforceable. In the event that a claim for indemnification against such liabilities (other than the payment by the registrant of expenses incurred or paid by a director, officer or controlling person of the registrant in the successful defense of any action, suit or proceeding) is asserted by such director, officer or controlling person in connection with the securities being registered, the registrant will, unless in the opinion of its counsel the matter has been settled by controlling precedent, submit to a court of appropriate jurisdiction the question whether such indemnification by it is against public policy as expressed in the Act and will be governed by the final adjudication of such issue.

(c) The undersigned registrant hereby undertakes that:

(1) For purposes of determining any liability under the Securities Act of 1933, the information omitted from the form of prospectus filed as part of this registration statement in reliance upon Rule 430A and

 

II-3


Table of Contents

contained in a form of prospectus filed by the registrant pursuant to Rule 424(b)(1) or (4) or 497(h) under the Securities Act shall be deemed to be part of this registration statement as of the time it was declared effective.

(2) For the purpose of determining any liability under the Securities Act of 1933, each post-effective amendment that contains a form of prospectus shall be deemed to be a new registration statement relating to the securities offered therein, and the offering of such securities at that time shall be deemed to be the initial bona fide offering thereof.

 

II-4


Table of Contents

SIGNATURES

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, Fidelity & Guaranty Life has duly caused this Registration Statement to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized, in the City of Baltimore, Maryland, on this 16th day of October, 2013.

 

FIDELITY & GUARANTY LIFE

By:

  /s/ Leland C. Launer, Jr.
 

Name: Leland C. Launer, Jr.

 

Title:   President and Chief Executive Officer

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, this registration statement has been signed by the following persons in the capacities and on the dates indicated.

 

Signature

  

Title

 

Date

/s/ Leland C. Launer, Jr.

Leland C. Launer, Jr.

   President and Chief Executive Officer, Director (Principal Executive Officer)   October 16, 2013

*

Wendy J.B. Young

  

Vice President and Chief Financial Officer

(Principal Financial and Accounting Officer)

  October 16, 2013

*

Omar M. Asali

   Director   October 16, 2013

*

William S. Bawden

   Director   October 16, 2013

*

Kostas (Gus) Cheliotis

   Director   October 16, 2013

*

Thomas A. Williams

   Director   October 16, 2013

*

Phillip J. Gass

   Director   October 16, 2013

*

Kevin J. Gregson

   Director   October 16, 2013

*

William P. Melchionni

   Director   October 16, 2013

*

L. John H. Tweedie

   Director   October 16, 2013

*By:

 

/s/ Leland C. Launer, Jr.

  as Attorney-in-Fact

 

II-5


Table of Contents

EXHIBIT INDEX

 

Exhibit No.

 

Description

  1.1*  

Form of Underwriting Agreement

  3.1*   Form of Amended and Restated Certificate of Incorporation of Fidelity & Guaranty Life
  3.2*  

Form of Amended and Restated Bylaws of Fidelity & Guaranty Life

  4.1*  

Form of Common Stock Certificate

  4.2#   Indenture, dated March 27, 2013, among Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc., as issuer, the Subsidiary Guarantors from time to time parties thereto and Wells Fargo Bank, National Association, as trustee, relating to the 6.375% Senior Notes due 2021.
  4.3#   First Supplemental Indenture, dated March 27, 2013, among Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc., as issuer, the Subsidiary Guarantors from named therein and Wells Fargo Bank, National Association, relating to the 6.375% Senior Notes due 2021.
  5.1*  

Opinion of Debevoise & Plimpton LLP

10.1#   First Amended and Restated Stock Purchase Agreement, dated as of February 17, 2011, between OM Group (UK) Limited and Harbinger OM, LLC.
10.2#   Guarantee and Pledge Agreement, dated as of April 6, 2011, among Harbinger OM, LLC, the Grantor parties thereto and OM Group (UK) Limited.
10.3#   Lease Agreement, dated September 30, 2010, between Old Mutual Business Services, Inc. and Harbor East Parcel C—Commercial, LLC.
10.4#   Lease Agreement, dated November 14, 2011, between Fidelity & Guaranty Life Business Services, Inc. and Nebco, Inc.
10.5*   Form of Director Indemnification Agreement
10.6#   Fidelity & Guaranty Life Employee Incentive Plan
10.7#   Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc. Stock Incentive Plan
10.8#   Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc. Stock Incentive Plan (Amended/Restated December 31, 2012)
10.9#   Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc. Dividend Equivalent Plan
10.10#   Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc. 2012 Dividend Equivalent Plan
10.11#   Employment Agreement, dated June 27, 2011, between Leland C. Launer, Jr. and Fidelity & Guarantee Life Business Services, Inc.
10.12#   Amendment to Employment Agreement, dated November 1, 2012, between Leland C. Launer, Jr. and Fidelity & Guaranty Life Business Services, Inc.
10.13#   Amended and Restated Employment Agreement, dated March 21, 2013, between Leland C. Launer, Jr. and Fidelity & Guaranty Life Business Services, Inc.
10.14#   Employment Agreement, dated December 21, 2009, between Rajesh Krishnan and Old Mutual Business Services, Inc.
10.15#   Employment Agreement, dated December 21, 2009, between John P. O’Shaughnessy and Old Mutual Business Services, Inc.
10.16#   Executive Nonqualified Excess Plan
10.17#   Executive Nonqualified “Excess” Plan Adoption Agreement
21.1#  

List of Subsidiaries

23.1*  

Consent of Debevoise & Plimpton LLP (included in Exhibit 5.1)

23.2#  

Consent of KPMG LLP, Independent Auditors

24.1**  

Powers of Attorney (included on the signature page to the Registration Statement on Form S-1)

 

# Filed herewith.
* To be filed by amendment.
** Previously filed

Exhibit 4.2

 

 

 

FIDELITY & GUARANTY LIFE HOLDINGS, INC.

as Issuer

THE SUBSIDIARY GUARANTORS PARTIES

HERETO

 

 

INDENTURE

Dated as of March 27, 2013

 

 

WELLS FARGO BANK, NATIONAL ASSOCIATION

as Trustee

 

 

 

PROVIDING FOR THE ISSUANCE OF NOTES IN SERIES


TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

         Page  

Article I

  

Definitions and Incorporation by Reference

  

Section 1.1.

  Definitions      1   

Section 1.2.

  Other Definitions      39   

Section 1.3.

  Rules of Construction      40   

Article II

  

The Notes

  

Section 2.1.

  Form and Dating      41   

Section 2.2.

  Issuable in Series      44   

Section 2.3.

  Form of Execution and Authentication      45   

Section 2.4.

  Registrar and Paying Agent      46   

Section 2.5.

  Paying Agent to Hold Money in Trust      46   

Section 2.6.

  Lists of Holders of the Notes      47   

Section 2.7.

  Transfer and Exchange      47   

Section 2.8.

  Replacement Notes      57   

Section 2.9.

  Outstanding Notes      57   

Section 2.10.

  Treasury Notes      58   

Section 2.11.

  Temporary Notes      58   

Section 2.12.

  Cancellation      58   

Section 2.13.

  Payment of Interest; Defaulted Interest      58   

Section 2.14.

  CUSIP and ISIN Numbers      60   

 

-i-


Article III

  

Covenants

  

Section 3.1.

  Payment of Notes      60   

Section 3.2.

  Reports      60   

Section 3.3.

  Limitation on Indebtedness      63   

Section 3.4.

  Limitation on Restricted Payments      68   

Section 3.5.

  Limitation on Liens      75   

Section 3.6.

  Limitation on Restrictions on Distributions from Restricted Subsidiaries      76   

Section 3.7.

  Limitation on Sales of Assets and Subsidiary Stock      78   

Section 3.8.

  Limitation on Affiliate Transactions      81   

Section 3.9.

  Change of Control      84   

Section 3.10.

  Future Subsidiary Guarantors      86   

Section 3.11.

  Effectiveness of Covenants      86   

Section 3.12.

  Compliance Certificate      88   

Section 3.13.

  Statement by Officers as to Default      88   

Article IV

  

Successor Company and Successor Guarantor

  

Section 4.1.

  When Company May Merge or Otherwise Dispose of Assets      88   

Section 4.2.

  When a Subsidiary Guarantor May Merge or Otherwise Dispose of Assets      89   

Article V

  

Redemption of Notes

  

Section 5.1.

  Applicability of Article      90   

Section 5.2.

  Right of Redemption      91   

Section 5.3.

  Election to Redeem; Notice to Trustee of Optional Redemptions      91   

 

-ii-


Section 5.4.

  Selection by Trustee of Notes to Be Redeemed      91   

Section 5.5.

  Notice of Redemption      92   

Section 5.6.

  Deposit of Redemption Price      93   

Section 5.7.

  Notes Payable on Redemption Date      93   

Section 5.8.

  Notes Redeemed in Part      93   

Article VI

  

Defaults and Remedies

  

Section 6.1.

  Events of Default      94   

Section 6.2.

  Acceleration      96   

Section 6.3.

  Other Remedies      97   

Section 6.4.

  Waiver of Past Defaults      97   

Section 6.5.

  Control by Majority      97   

Section 6.6.

  Limitation on Suits      98   

Section 6.7.

  Rights of Holders to Receive Payment      98   

Section 6.8.

  Collection Suit by Trustee      98   

Section 6.9.

  Trustee May File Proofs of Claim      98   

Section 6.10.

  Priorities      99   

Section 6.11.

  Undertaking for Costs      99   

Article VII

  

Trustee

  

Section 7.1.

  Duties of Trustee      100   

Section 7.2.

  Rights of Trustee      101   

Section 7.3.

  Individual Rights of Trustee      102   

Section 7.4.

  Disclaimer      103   

Section 7.5.

  Notice of Defaults      103   

 

-iii-


Section 7.6.

  Compensation and Indemnity      103   

Section 7.7.

  Replacement of Trustee      104   

Section 7.8.

  Successor Trustee by Merger      105   

Section 7.9.

  Eligibility; Disqualification      105   

Article VIII

  

Discharge of Indenture; Defeasance

  

Section 8.1.

  Discharge of Liability on Notes; Defeasance      105   

Section 8.2.

  Conditions to Defeasance      107   

Section 8.3.

  Application of Trust Money      108   

Section 8.4.

  Repayment to Company      108   

Section 8.5.

  Indemnity for U.S. Government Obligations      108   

Section 8.6.

  Reinstatement      108   

Article IX

  

Amendments

  

Section 9.1.

  Without Consent of Holders      108   

Section 9.2.

  With Consent of Holders      110   

Section 9.3.

  Effect of Consents and Waivers      111   

Section 9.4.

  Notation on or Exchange of Notes      112   

Section 9.5.

  Trustee To Sign Amendments      112   

Article X

  

Subsidiary Guarantee

  

Section 10.1.

  Subsidiary Guarantee      112   

Section 10.2.

  Limitation on Liability; Termination, Release and Discharge      114   

Section 10.3.

  Right of Contribution      115   

Section 10.4.

  No Subrogation      115   

 

-iv-


Article XI

  

Miscellaneous

  

Section 11.1.

  Notices      116   

Section 11.2.

  Certificate and Opinion as to Conditions Precedent      117   

Section 11.3.

  Statements Required in Certificate or Opinion      117   

Section 11.4.

  Rules by Trustee, Paying Agent and Registrar      118   

Section 11.5.

  Days Other than Business Days      118   

Section 11.6.

  Governing Law      118   

Section 11.7.

  No Recourse Against Others      118   

Section 11.8.

  Successors      118   

Section 11.9.

  Multiple Originals      118   

Section 11.10.

  Table of Contents; Headings      118   

Section 11.11.

  Force Majeure      118   

Section 11.12.

  USA Patriot Act      119   

Section 11.13.

  Communication by Holders of Notes with other Holders of Notes      119   

EXHIBITS

 

EXHIBIT A

  Form of Global Note

EXHIBIT B

  Form of Certificate of Transfer

EXHIBIT C

  Form of Certificate of Exchange

EXHIBIT D

  Form of Certificate of Acquiring Institutional Accredited Investor

EXHIBIT E

  Form of Supplemental Indenture to be Delivered by Subsequent Subsidiary Guarantors

EXHIBIT F

  Form of Supplemental Indenture Establishing a Series of Notes

 

-v-


INDENTURE, dated as of March 27, 2013, as amended, restated, supplemented or otherwise modified from time to time (this “ Indenture ”), among FIDELITY & GUARANTY LIFE HOLDINGS, INC., a corporation duly organized and existing under the laws of the State of Delaware (the “ Company ”), certain subsidiaries of the Company from time to time parties hereto (the “ Subsidiary Guarantors ”) and WELLS FARGO BANK, NATIONAL ASSOCIATION, a national banking association, as trustee (together with its successors and assigns, in such capacity, the “ Trustee ”).

Each party agrees as follows for the benefit of the other parties and for the benefit of the Holders (as defined herein) of the Notes (as defined herein):

ARTICLE I

Definitions and Incorporation by Reference

SECTION 1.1. Definitions .

144A Global Note ” means a Global Note substantially in the form of Exhibit A hereto (as such form may be modified in accordance with Section 2.2) bearing the Global Note Legend and the Private Placement Legend and deposited with or on behalf of, and registered in the name of, the Depositary or its nominee that will be issued in a denomination equal to the outstanding principal amount of the Notes sold in reliance on Rule 144A.

Acquired Indebtedness ” means, with respect to any Person, Indebtedness (1) of a Person or any of its Subsidiaries existing at the time such Person is merged or consolidated with the Company or a Restricted Subsidiary or becomes a Restricted Subsidiary or (2) assumed in connection with the acquisition of assets from such Person, in each case whether or not Incurred by such Person in connection with, or in anticipation or contemplation of, such Person becoming a Restricted Subsidiary or such acquisition, and Indebtedness secured by a Lien encumbering any asset acquired by such specified Person. Acquired Indebtedness shall be deemed to have been Incurred, with respect to clause (1)  of the preceding sentence, on the date such Person is merged or consolidated with the Company or a Restricted Subsidiary or becomes a Restricted Subsidiary and, with respect to clause (2)  of the preceding sentence, on the date of consummation of such acquisition of assets.

Affiliate ” of any specified Person means any other Person, directly or indirectly, controlling or controlled by or under direct or indirect common control with such specified Person. For the purposes of this definition, “ control ” when used with respect to any Person means the power to direct the management and policies of such Person, directly or indirectly, whether through the ownership of voting securities, by contract or otherwise; and the terms “ controlling ” and “ controlled ” have meanings correlative to the foregoing.

Agent ” means any Registrar, Paying Agent or co-registrar.


Aggregate RBC Ratio ” means, with respect to the Insurance Subsidiaries (other than any Insurance Subsidiary that is a Foreign Subsidiary) taken as a whole, on any date of determination, one-half of the ratio (expressed as a percentage) of (a) the aggregate “Total Adjusted Capital” (as defined by the applicable Insurance Regulatory Authority) for each such Insurance Subsidiary to (b) the aggregate “Authorized Control Level Risk-Based Capital” (as defined by the applicable Insurance Regulatory Authority) for each such Insurance Subsidiary.

Annual Statement ” means the annual statutory financial statement of an Insurance Subsidiary (other than any Insurance Subsidiary that is a Foreign Subsidiary) required to be filed with the insurance commissioner (or similar authority) of its jurisdiction of organization, which statement shall be in the form required by its jurisdiction of organization or, if no specific form is so required, in the form of financial statements permitted by such insurance commissioner (or such similar authority) to be used for filing annual statutory financial statements and shall contain the type of information permitted or required by such insurance commissioner (or such similar authority) to be disclosed therein.

Applicable Premium ” means, with respect to any series of Notes, “Applicable Premium” as such term is defined in the Notes Supplemental Indenture establishing such series of Notes.

Applicable Procedures ” means, with respect to any transfer or exchange of or for beneficial interests in any Global Note, the rules and procedures of the Depositary that apply to such transfer or exchange or for other procedural matters.

Asset Acquisition ” means (1) an Investment by the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary in any other Person pursuant to which such Person shall become a Restricted Subsidiary or shall be consolidated or merged with the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary or (2) the acquisition by the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary of assets of any Person.

Asset Disposition ” means any sale, lease (other than an operating lease entered into in the ordinary course of business), transfer, issuance or other disposition, or a series of related sales, leases, transfers, issuances or dispositions that are part of a common plan, of shares of Capital Stock of a Restricted Subsidiary, including any transaction pursuant to a Reinsurance Agreement (other than directors’ qualifying shares or local ownership shares) (it being understood that the Capital Stock of the Company is not an asset of the Company), property or other assets (each referred to for the purposes of this definition as a “ disposition ”) by the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries, including any disposition by means of a merger, consolidation or similar transaction.

Notwithstanding the preceding, the following items shall not be deemed to be Asset Dispositions:

(1) a disposition of assets by a Restricted Subsidiary to the Company or by the Company or a Restricted Subsidiary to a Restricted Subsidiary;

(2) the disposition of Cash Equivalents in the ordinary course of business or the unwinding of any Hedging Obligations;

 

-2-


(3) a disposition of equipment, inventory, accounts receivable and other assets in the ordinary course of business;

(4) a disposition of used, obsolete, worn out, damaged or surplus equipment or equipment or assets that are no longer used or useful in the conduct of the business of the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries and that is disposed of in each case in the ordinary course of business;

(5) the disposition of all or substantially all of the assets of the Company in a manner permitted pursuant to Article IV or any disposition that constitutes a Change of Control;

(6) an issuance of Capital Stock by a Restricted Subsidiary to the Company or to a Restricted Subsidiary;

(7) for purposes of Section 3.7 hereof only, the making of a Permitted Investment or a disposition subject to Section 3.4 hereof;

(8) dispositions of Capital Stock of a Restricted Subsidiary or property or other assets in a single transaction or a series of related transactions with an aggregate Fair Market Value of less than $10.0 million;

(9) the creation of a Permitted Lien and dispositions in connection with Permitted Liens;

(10) dispositions of receivables in connection with the compromise, settlement or collection thereof in the ordinary course of business or in bankruptcy or similar proceedings and exclusive of factoring or similar arrangements;

(11) the licensing or sublicensing of patents, trade secrets, know-how and other intellectual property, know-how or other general intangibles and licenses, leases or subleases of other property which do not materially interfere with the business of the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries as operated immediately prior to the granting of such license, lease or sublease;

(12) to the extent allowable under Section 1031 of the Code, any exchange of like property for use in a Related Business;

(13) foreclosure on assets or transfers by reason of eminent domain;

(14) any sale of Capital Stock, Indebtedness or other securities, of an Unrestricted Subsidiary;

(15) a Sale/Leaseback Transaction that is made for cash consideration in an amount not less than the cost of the underlying fixed or capital asset and is consummated within 180 days after the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary acquires or completes the acquisition of such fixed or capital asset;

 

-3-


(16) the receipt by the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary of any cash insurance proceeds or condemnation award payable by reason of theft, loss, physical destruction or damage, taking or similar event with respect to any of their respective property or assets;

(17) operating leases in the ordinary course of business;

(18) the surrender or waiver of contract rights or litigation rights or the settlement, release or surrender of tort or other litigation claims of any kind;

(19) the transfer of improvements, additions or alterations in connection with the lease of any property;

(20) dispositions of Investments by any Insurance Subsidiary (other than any of its Investments in Subsidiaries engaged in insurance lines of business) consistent with the investment policy approved by the Board of Directors of such Insurance Subsidiary or the Company, as the case may be;

(21) dispositions by Insurance Subsidiaries and Special Purpose Subsidiaries pursuant to Reinsurance Agreements and Statutory Reserve Financings so long as such disposition is entered into in the ordinary course of business for the purpose of managing insurance risk consistent with industry practice;

(22) dispositions of Investments made out of the cash proceeds received from any Insurance Subsidiary pending further distribution in accordance with Section 3.4 hereof; and

(23) dispositions of shares of Capital Stock in order to qualify members of the Board of Directors or equivalent governing body of the Company or a Restricted Subsidiary or such other nominal shares required to be held other than by the Company or a Restricted Subsidiary, as required by applicable law.

Attributable Indebtedness ” in respect of a Sale/Leaseback Transaction means, as at the time of determination, (1) if such Sale/Leaseback Transaction does not constitute a Capitalized Lease Obligation, the present value (discounted at the interest rate implicit in the transaction) of the total obligations of the lessee for rental payments during the remaining term of the lease included in such Sale/Leaseback Transaction (including any period for which such lease has been extended), determined in accordance with GAAP or (2) if such Sale/Leaseback Transaction constitutes a Capitalized Lease Obligation, the amount of Indebtedness represented thereby will be determined in accordance with the definition of “Capitalized Lease Obligations.”

Authentication Order ” has the meaning assigned to such term in Section 2.3 hereof.

Average Life ” means, as of the date of determination, with respect to any Indebtedness or Preferred Stock, the quotient obtained by dividing (1) the sum of the products of the numbers of years from the date of determination to the dates of each successive scheduled principal payment of such Indebtedness or redemption or similar payment with respect to such Preferred Stock multiplied by the amount of such payment by (2) the sum of all such payments.

 

-4-


Beneficial Owner ” has the meaning assigned to such term in Rule 13d-3 and Rule 13d-5 under the Exchange Act, except that in calculating the beneficial ownership of any particular “person” (as that term is used in Section 13(d)(3) of the Exchange Act), such “person” shall be deemed to have beneficial ownership of all securities that such “person” has the right to acquire by conversion or exercise of other securities, whether such right is currently exercisable or is exercisable only upon the occurrence of a subsequent condition. The terms “Beneficially Owns” and “Beneficially Owned” shall have a corresponding meaning.

Board of Directors ” means:

(1) with respect to a corporation, the Board of Directors of the corporation or any committee thereof duly authorized to act on behalf of the Board of Directors with respect to the relevant matter;

(2) with respect to a partnership, the Board of Directors of the general partner of the partnership; and

(3) with respect to any other Person, the board or committee of such Person serving a similar function.

Board Resolution ” means a copy of a resolution certified by the Secretary or an Assistant Secretary of a company to have been duly adopted by the Board of Directors of such company and to be in full force and effect on the date of such certification, and delivered to the Trustee.

Broker-Dealer ” means any broker or dealer registered under the Exchange Act.

Business Day ” means each day that is not a Saturday, Sunday or other day on which commercial banking institutions in New York, New York or the place of payment are authorized or required by law to close.

Capital and Surplus ” means, as to any Insurance Subsidiary, as of any date, total assets minus total liabilities of such Insurance Subsidiary, as at the end of the most recently ended fiscal quarter of such Insurance Subsidiary for which financial statements are available, determined in accordance with SAP.

Capital Market Indebtedness ” means any series of indebtedness specified within clauses (1)  or (2)  of the definition of “Indebtedness” with an aggregate principal amount outstanding in excess of $100.0 million.

Capital Stock ” of any Person means (1) with respect to any Person that is a corporation, any and all shares, interests, rights to purchase, warrants, options, participations or other equivalents of or interests in (however designated) equity of such Person, including any Common Stock or Preferred Stock, and (2) with respect to any Person that is not a corporation, any and all partnership, limited liability company, membership or other equity interests of such Person, but in each case excluding any debt securities convertible into any of the foregoing.

 

-5-


Capitalized Lease Obligation ” means an obligation that is required to be classified and accounted for as a capitalized lease for financial reporting purposes in accordance with GAAP, and the amount of Indebtedness represented by such obligation will be the capitalized amount of such obligation at the time any determination thereof is to be made as determined in accordance with GAAP, and the Stated Maturity thereof will be the date of the last payment of rent or any other amount due under such lease prior to the first date such lease may be terminated by the lessee without payment of a penalty.

Cash Equivalents ” means:

(1) U.S. dollars, pounds sterling, euros, the national currency of any member state in the European Union, or in the case of any Foreign Subsidiary, such local currencies held by it from time to time in the ordinary course of business;

(2) securities issued or directly and fully guaranteed or insured by the United States Government or issued by any agency or instrumentality of the United States ( provided that the full faith and credit of the United States is pledged in support thereof), having maturities of not more than one year from the date of acquisition;

(3) marketable general obligations issued by any state of the United States of America or any political subdivision of any such state or any public instrumentality thereof maturing within one year from the date of acquisition and, at the time of acquisition, having a credit rating of “A” or better from Standard & Poor’s Ratings Group, Inc. or A2 or better from Moody’s Investors Service, Inc.;

(4) certificates of deposit, demand deposits, time deposits, eurodollar time deposits, overnight bank deposits or bankers’ acceptances having maturities of not more than one year from the date of acquisition thereof issued by any commercial bank (x) the long-term debt of which is rated at the time of acquisition thereof at least “A” or the equivalent thereof by Standard & Poor’s Ratings Group, Inc., or “A” or the equivalent thereof by Moody’s Investors Service, Inc. or (y) the short term commercial paper of such commercial bank or its parent company is rated at the time of acquisition thereof at least “A-1” or the equivalent thereof by Standard & Poor’s Ratings Group, Inc. or “P-1” or the equivalent thereof by Moody’s Investors Service, Inc., and having combined capital and surplus in excess of $500.0 million;

(5) repurchase obligations with a term of not more than seven days for underlying securities of the types described in clauses (2) , (3)  and (4)  above, entered into with any financial institution meeting the qualifications specified in clause (4)  above;

(6) commercial paper rated at the time of acquisition thereof at least “A-2” or the equivalent thereof by Standard & Poor’s Ratings Group, Inc. or “P-2” or the equivalent thereof by Moody’s Investors Service, Inc., or carrying an equivalent rating by a nationally recognized Rating Agency, if both of the two named Rating Agencies cease publishing ratings of investments, and in any case maturing within one year after the date of acquisition thereof;

 

-6-


(7) instruments equivalent to those referred to in clauses (1)  through (6)  above denominated in euros or any foreign currency comparable in credit quality and tenor to those referred to in such clauses and customarily used by corporations for cash management purposes in any jurisdiction outside the United States to the extent reasonably required in connection with any business conducted by any Restricted Subsidiary organized in such jurisdiction;

(8) interests in any investment company or money market fund that invests 95% or more of its assets in instruments of the type specified in clauses (1)  through (7)  above and clause (10)  below;

(9) money market funds that (i) comply with the criteria set forth in Rule 2A-7 of the Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended, (ii) are rated at the time of acquisition thereof “AAA” or the equivalent by Standard & Poor’s Ratings Group, Inc. or “Aaa” or the equivalent thereof by Moody’s Investors Service, Inc. and (iii) have portfolio assets of at least $5.0 billion; and

(10) securities with maturities of one year or less from the date of acquisition backed by standby letters of credit issued by any commercial bank satisfying the requirements of clause (4)  of this definition.

CBOs ” means notes or other instruments (other than CMOs) secured by collateral consisting primarily of debt securities and/or other types of debt obligations, including loans.

Change of Control ” means:

(1) any “person” or “group” of related persons (as such terms are used in Sections 13(d) and 14(d) of the Exchange Act) becomes the ultimate Beneficial Owner, directly or indirectly, of 35% or more of the total voting power of the Voting Stock of the Company or Holdings (or their successors by merger, consolidation or purchase of all or substantially all of its assets) other than a Permitted Holder; provided that such event shall not be deemed a Change of Control so long as one or more Permitted Holders shall Beneficially Own at least as much total voting power of the Voting Stock of the Company or Holdings as that Beneficially Owned by such person or group;

(2) the sale, assignment, lease, transfer, conveyance or other disposition (other than by way of merger or consolidation), in one or a series of related transactions, of all or substantially all of the assets of the Company and its Subsidiaries taken as a whole to any “person” (as such term is used in Sections 13(d) and 14(d) of the Exchange Act) other than a Permitted Holder;

(3) the adoption by the stockholders of the Company of a plan or proposal for the liquidation or dissolution of the Company; or

 

-7-


(4) the first day on which a majority of the members of the Board of Directors of the Company or Holdings are not Continuing Directors.

For purposes of this definition, (i) any direct or indirect holding company of the Company (including Holdings) shall not itself be considered a “person” or “group” for purposes of clause (1)  above, provided that no “person” or “group” (other than the Permitted Holders or another such holding company) Beneficially Owns, directly or indirectly, more than 50% of the voting power of the Voting Stock of such company, and a majority of the Voting Stock of such holding company immediately following it becoming the holding company of the Company is Beneficially Owned by the Persons who Beneficially Owned the voting power of the Voting Stock of the Company immediately prior to it becoming such holding company and (ii) a Person shall not be deemed to have beneficial ownership of securities subject to a stock purchase agreement, merger agreement or similar agreement until the consummation of the transactions contemplated by such agreement. In addition, any foreclosure (but not any sale thereof to a third party) with respect to Capital Stock of the Company or any direct or indirect parent of the Company by the Trustee or the holders of Harbinger Group Inc.’s outstanding 7.875% Senior Secured Notes shall not be deemed a Change of Control.

CMOs ” means Notes or other instruments secured by collateral consisting primarily of mortgages, mortgage-backed securities and/or other types of mortgage-related obligations.

Code ” means the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended.

Common Stock ” means with respect to any Person, any and all shares, interests or other participations in, and other equivalents (however designated and whether voting or nonvoting) of such Person’s common stock whether or not outstanding on the Issue Date, and includes, without limitation, all series and classes of such common stock.

Company ” has the meaning assigned to such term in the preamble to this Indenture.

Consolidated EBITDA ” means, with respect to any Person for any period, the Consolidated Net Income of such Person for such period:

(1) increased (without duplication) by the following items to the extent deducted in calculating such Consolidated Net Income:

(a) Consolidated Interest Expense; plus

(b) Consolidated Income Taxes; plus

(c) consolidated depreciation expense; plus

(d) consolidated amortization expense or impairment charges recorded in connection with the application of FASB ASC 350 and FASB ASC 360; plus

 

-8-


(e) other non-cash charges reducing Consolidated Net Income, including any write-offs or write-downs (excluding any such non-cash charge to the extent it represents an accrual of or reserve for cash charges in any future period or amortization of a prepaid cash expense that was paid in a prior period not included in the calculation); plus

(f) any fees, charges or other expenses made or Incurred in connection with any actual or proposed non-ordinary course Investment, asset sale, acquisition, recapitalization or issuance of Capital Stock or Incurrence of Indebtedness or any amendment or modification of Indebtedness (including as a result of Statement of FASB ASC 805), including such fees, expenses or charges related to the offering of the Initial Notes; plus

(g) the amount of any restructuring charges (including lease termination, severance and relocation expenses), integration costs or other business optimization expenses or non-ordinary course reserves or other non-recurring or unusual charges or expenses deducted (and not added back) in such period in computing Consolidated Net Income;

(2) decreased (without duplication) by non-cash items increasing Consolidated Net Income of such Person for such period (excluding any items which represent the recognition of deferred revenue, the reversal of any accrual of, or reserve for, anticipated cash charges that reduced Consolidated EBITDA in any prior period and any items for which cash was received in a prior period that did not increase Consolidated EBITDA in any prior period); and

(3) increased or decreased (without duplication) to eliminate the following items to the extent reflected in Consolidated Net Income:

(a) any non-ordinary course net gain or loss resulting in such period from Hedging Obligations and the application of FASB ASC 815;

(b) all unrealized gains and losses relating to financial instruments or liabilities to which fair market value accounting is applied; and

(c) any net gain or loss resulting in such period from currency translation gains or losses related to currency remeasurements of Indebtedness (including any net loss or gain resulting from Hedging Obligations for currency exchange risk).

Consolidated Income Taxes ” means, with respect to any Person for any period, taxes imposed upon such Person or other payments required to be made by such Person by any governmental authority which taxes or other payments are calculated by reference to the income or profits or capital of such Person or such Person and its Restricted Subsidiaries (to the extent such income or profits were included in computing Consolidated Net Income for such period), including, without limitation, state, franchise and similar taxes and foreign withholding taxes regardless of whether such taxes or payments are required to be remitted to any governmental authority.

 

-9-


Consolidated Interest Expense ” means, for any period, the interest expense of the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries for such period determined on a consolidated basis in accordance with GAAP, including but not limited to the portion of any payments or accruals with respect to Capitalized Lease Obligations that are allocable to interest expense, excluding (x) any write-offs of capitalized fees under agreements governing Indebtedness and all amendments thereto, (y) all non-cash charges for the amortization of deferred financing fees and debt issuance costs, and (z) any interest on tax reserves to the extent the Company has elected to treat such interest as an interest expense under FASB ASC 450 since its adoption.

Consolidated Net Income ” means, for any period, the net income (loss) of the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries determined on a consolidated basis in accordance with GAAP (before preferred stock dividends); provided, however, that (without duplication):

(1) any net income (loss) of any Person if such Person is not a Restricted Subsidiary or that is accounted for by the equity method of accounting shall be excluded from such Consolidated Net Income, except that:

(a) the Company’s equity in the net income of any such Person for such period will be included in such Consolidated Net Income up to the aggregate amount of cash actually distributed by such Person during such period to the Company or a Restricted Subsidiary as a dividend or other distribution (subject, in the case of a dividend or other distribution to a Restricted Subsidiary, to clause (2)  below); and

(b) the Company’s equity in a net loss of any such Person for such period will be included in determining such Consolidated Net Income to the extent such loss has been funded with cash from the Company or a Restricted Subsidiary during such period;

(2) solely for the purpose of determining the amount available for Restricted Payments under clause (3)(A)  of Section 3.4(a) , there shall be excluded from such Consolidated Net Income any net income (but not loss) of any Restricted Subsidiary (other than a Subsidiary Guarantor or an Insurance Subsidiary) if such Restricted Subsidiary is subject to prior government approval or other restrictions due to the operation of its charter or any agreement, instrument, judgment, decree, order, statute, rule or government regulation (which have not been waived), directly or indirectly, on the payment of dividends or the making of distributions by such Restricted Subsidiary, directly or indirectly, to the Company, except that:

(a) the Company’s equity in the net income of any such Restricted Subsidiary for such period will be included in such Consolidated Net Income up to the aggregate amount of cash that could have been distributed by such Restricted Subsidiary during such period to the Company or another Restricted Subsidiary as a dividend (subject, in the case of a dividend to another Restricted Subsidiary, to the limitation contained in this clause); and

 

-10-


(b) the Company’s equity in a net loss of any such Restricted Subsidiary for such period will be included in determining such Consolidated Net Income;

(3) any net income (but not loss) of the Insurance Subsidiaries determined on a combined basis shall be excluded from such Consolidated Net Income; provided that, notwithstanding the foregoing, with respect to any fiscal quarter, there shall be included in Consolidated Net Income any such amount that could have been distributed by any Insurance Subsidiary to the Company as a dividend, distribution or return of capital or as a payment of interest or principal on any Surplus Note to the extent the distribution or payment of such amount would not cause the Aggregate RBC Ratio to be less than 250% as of the last day of such fiscal quarter (assuming for purposes of such calculation that any dividend, distribution, return of capital or payment on any Surplus Note during such fiscal quarter shall not have been made);

(4) any after-tax effect of gain or loss (less all fees and expenses relating thereto) realized upon sales or other dispositions of any assets of the Company or such Restricted Subsidiary (including pursuant to any Sale/Leaseback Transaction) other than in the ordinary course of business shall be excluded from such Consolidated Net Income;

(5) any after-tax effect of income (loss) from the early extinguishment of Indebtedness or early termination of Hedging Obligations or other derivative instruments shall be excluded from such Consolidated Net Income;

(6) the after-tax effect of extraordinary gain or loss shall be excluded from such Consolidated Net Income;

(7) the after-tax effect of the cumulative effect of a change in accounting principles shall be excluded from such Consolidated Net Income;

(8) any after-tax effect of non-cash impairment charges recorded in connection with the application of FASB ASC 350 and FASB ASC 360 shall be excluded from such Consolidated Net Income;

(9) any non-cash compensation expense realized for grants of performance shares, stock options or other rights to officers, directors and employees of the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary shall be excluded from such Consolidated Net Income;

(10) all impairment charges in connection with Investments made by any Insurance Subsidiary in the ordinary course of business shall be excluded from such Consolidated Net Income; provided that the amount of any cash charges relating to such impairment charges shall not be excluded from Consolidated Net Income by operation of this clause (10)  to the extent such cash charges reduce “Total Adjusted Capital” (as defined by the applicable Insurance Regulatory Authority); and

(11) interest related realized net investment portfolio trading losses of any Insurance Subsidiary (other than any Insurance Subsidiary that is a Foreign Subsidiary) shall be excluded from Consolidated Net Income to the extent such losses do not reduce such Insurance Subsidiary’s “Total Adjusted Capital” (as defined by the applicable Insurance Regulatory Authority).

 

-11-


Continuing Director ” means as of any date of determination, any member of the Board of Directors of the Company or Holdings who:

(1) was a member of such Board of Directors on the Issue Date or

(2) was nominated for election or elected to such Board of Directors with the approval of the Permitted Holders or a majority of the Continuing Directors who were members of such Board of Directors at the time of such nomination or election.

Contribution Debt ” means Indebtedness of the Company or any Subsidiary Guarantor in an aggregate principal amount not greater than the aggregate amount of cash received from cash contributions (other than proceeds from Disqualified Stock) made to the capital of the Company after the Issue Date; provided that:

(1) such cash has not been used to make a Restricted Payment and shall thereafter be excluded from any calculation under clause (3)(B)  of Section 3.4(a) or used to make any Restricted Payment pursuant to Section 3.4(b) (it being understood that if any such Indebtedness incurred as Contribution Debt is redesignated as incurred under any provision other than clause (xvii)  of Section 3.3(b) the related capital contribution may thereafter be included in any calculation under clause (3)(B)  of Section 3.4(a) ; and

(2) such Contribution Debt (a) is incurred within 180 days after the making of such cash contributions and (b) is so designated as Contribution Debt pursuant to an Officer’s Certificate on the incurrence date thereof.

Corporate Trust Office ” shall be at the address of the Trustee specified in Section 11.1 or such other address as to which the Trustee may give notice to the Company or Holders pursuant to the procedures set forth in Section 11.1 .

Currency Agreement ” means in respect of a Person any foreign exchange contract, currency swap agreement, currency futures contract, currency option contract or other similar agreement as to which such Person is a party or a beneficiary.

Debt to Total Capitalization Ratio ” means, as of any date, the ratio of (a) the principal amount of, and accrued but unpaid interest on, all Indebtedness for borrowed money of the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries outstanding on such date, other than (i) Indebtedness owing to the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries and (ii) the liabilities (if any) of the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries in respect of Hedging Obligations as determined by reference to the termination value of the agreements or arrangements giving rise to such Hedging Obligations, to (b) Total Capitalization on such date.

Default ” means any event or condition that is, or after notice or passage of time or both would be, an Event of Default.

 

-12-


Definitive Note ” means a certificated Note registered in the name of the Holder thereof and issued in accordance with Section 2.7 hereof, substantially in the form of Exhibit A hereto (as such form may be modified in accordance with Section 2.2 hereof) except that such Note shall not bear the Global Note Legend and shall not have the “Schedule of Exchanges of Interests in the Global Note” attached thereto.

Depositary ” means The Depository Trust Company, its nominees and their respective successors and assigns, or such other depository institution hereinafter appointed by the Company.

Designated Non-cash Consideration ” means any consideration which is not cash or Cash Equivalents received by the Company or its Restricted Subsidiaries in connection with an Asset Disposition that is designated as Designated Non-cash Consideration pursuant to an Officer’s Certificate executed by the Company at the time of such Asset Disposition. Any particular item of Designated Non-cash Consideration will cease to be considered to be outstanding once it has been transferred, sold or otherwise exchanged for or converted into or for cash or Cash Equivalents.

Disqualified Stock ” means, with respect to any Person, any Capital Stock of such Person that by its terms (or by the terms of any security into which it is convertible or for which it is exchangeable) or upon the happening of any event:

(1) matures or is mandatorily redeemable pursuant to a sinking fund obligation or otherwise;

(2) is convertible into or exchangeable for Indebtedness or Disqualified Stock (excluding Capital Stock which is convertible or exchangeable solely at the option of the Company or a Restricted Subsidiary (it being understood that upon such conversion or exchange it shall be an Incurrence of such Indebtedness or Disqualified Stock)); or

(3) is redeemable at the option of the holder of the Capital Stock in whole or in part,

in each case on or prior to the date 91 days after the earlier of the final maturity date of the Notes or the date the Notes are no longer outstanding; provided , however , that only the portion of Capital Stock that so matures or is mandatorily redeemable, is so convertible or exchangeable or is so redeemable at the option of the holder thereof prior to such date will be deemed to be Disqualified Stock; provided , further , that any Capital Stock that would constitute Disqualified Stock solely because the holders thereof have the right to require the Company to repurchase such Capital Stock upon the occurrence of a “change of control” or “asset disposition” (each defined in a similar manner to the corresponding definitions in this Indenture) shall not constitute Disqualified Stock if the terms of such Capital Stock (and all such securities into which it is convertible or for which it is ratable or exchangeable) provide that the Company may not repurchase or redeem any such Capital Stock (and all such securities into which it is convertible or for which it is ratable or exchangeable) pursuant to such provision prior to compliance by the Company with Section 3.7 and Section 3.9 and such repurchase or redemption complies with Section 3.4 . In addition, any Capital Stock held by any future, present or former employee,

 

-13-


director, officer, manager or consultant (or their estates, spouses or former spouses) of the Company, any of its Subsidiaries or any direct or indirect parent company of the Company pursuant to any stockholders agreement, management equity plan or stock option plan or any other management or employee benefit plan or agreement shall not constitute Disqualified Stock solely because it may be required to be repurchased by the Company or its Subsidiaries following the termination of employment or death or disability of such employee, director, officer, manager or consultant with the Company or any of its Subsidiaries or in order to satisfy applicable regulatory or statutory obligation (so long as, in each case referred to in this sentence, any such requirement is made subject to compliance with this Indenture).

Equity Offering ” means any public or private sale, after the Issue Date, of Capital Stock of the Company or of Holdings (to the extent the proceeds thereof are contributed to the common equity of the Company) or any direct or indirect parent of Holdings (to the extent the proceeds thereof are contributed to the common equity of the Company) other than an issuance registered on Form S-4 or S-8, or any successor thereto or any issuance to a Subsidiary of the Company or pursuant to employee benefit plans or otherwise in compensation to officers, directors or employees.

Exchange Act ” means the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, and the rules and regulations of the SEC promulgated thereunder.

Excluded Subsidiary ” means (a) any Foreign Subsidiary or any Subsidiary of a Foreign Subsidiary, (b) any Immaterial Subsidiary, (c) any Insurance Subsidiary or any Subsidiary of an Insurance Subsidiary, (d) any Special Purpose Subsidiary, (e) any Unrestricted Subsidiary, (f) any Restricted Subsidiary that is not permitted by law or regulation to guarantee the Obligations with respect to the Notes or that would be required to obtain governmental (including regulatory) consent, approval, license or authorization to guarantee the Obligations with respect to the Notes (unless such consent, approval, license or authorization has been received) and (g) any Restricted Subsidiary that is prohibited from guaranteeing the Obligations with respect to the Notes by any contractual obligation in existence on the Issue Date (or, in the case of any newly acquired Subsidiary, in existence at the time of acquisition but not entered into in contemplation thereof).

Fair Market Value ” means, with respect to any property, the price that would reasonably be expected to be paid in an arm’s length free market transaction, for cash, between a willing seller and a willing buyer, neither of whom is under undue pressure or compulsion to complete the transaction. Fair Market Value shall be determined in Good Faith by the Company.

Fixed Charge Coverage Ratio ” means, with respect to any Person for any period, the ratio of Consolidated EBITDA of such Person for such period to the Fixed Charges of such Person for such period.

In the event that the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries Incurs, repays, repurchases or redeems any Indebtedness (other than in the case of revolving credit borrowings, in which case interest expense shall be computed based upon the average daily balance of such Indebtedness during the applicable period) or issues, repurchases or redeems Disqualified Stock or Preferred Stock subsequent to the commencement of the period for which the Fixed Charge

 

-14-


Coverage Ratio is being calculated but prior to or simultaneously with the event for which the calculation of the Fixed Charge Coverage Ratio is made (the “ Calculation Date ”), then the Fixed Charge Coverage Ratio shall be calculated giving pro forma effect to such Incurrence, repayment, repurchase or redemption of Indebtedness, or such issuance, repurchase or redemption of Disqualified Stock or Preferred Stock, as if the same had occurred at the beginning of the applicable four-quarter period.

For purposes of making the computation referred to above, Investments, Asset Dispositions, Asset Acquisitions and discontinued operations (as determined in accordance with GAAP), in each case with respect to an operating unit of a business, and any operational changes that the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary has determined to make and/or has made during the four-quarter reference period or subsequent to such reference period and on or prior to or simultaneously with the Calculation Date shall be calculated on a pro forma basis assuming that all such events (and the change of any associated fixed charge obligations and the change in Consolidated EBITDA resulting therefrom) had occurred on the first day of the four-quarter reference period. If since the beginning of such period any Person that subsequently became a Restricted Subsidiary or was merged with or into the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary since the beginning of such period shall have made any Investment, Asset Disposition, Asset Acquisition or discontinued operation or operational change, in each case with respect to an operating unit of a business, that would have required adjustment pursuant to this definition, then the Fixed Charge Coverage Ratio shall be calculated giving pro forma effect thereto for such period as if such event had occurred at the beginning of the applicable four-quarter period.

For purposes of this definition, whenever pro forma effect is to be given to any event, the pro forma calculations shall be made in Good Faith by the Company. Any such pro forma calculation may include adjustments appropriate, in the reasonable good faith determination of the Company to reflect operating expense reductions and other operating improvements, synergies or cost savings for which the actions necessary to realize such reductions, improvements, synergies or cost savings are taken or expected to begin to be taken no later than 12 months from such relevant pro forma event. The Company shall have delivered to the Trustee an Officer’s Certificate signed by the Chief Financial Officer setting forth such operating expense reductions and other operating improvements, synergies or cost savings and calculations and information supporting them in reasonable detail.

If any Indebtedness bears a floating rate of interest and is being given pro forma effect, the interest on such Indebtedness shall be calculated as if the rate in effect on the Calculation Date had been the applicable rate for the entire period (taking into account any Hedging Obligations applicable to such Indebtedness if such Hedging Obligation has a remaining term in excess of 12 months). Interest on a Capitalized Lease Obligation shall be deemed to accrue at an interest rate reasonably determined by a responsible financial or accounting officer of the Company to be the rate of interest implicit in such Capitalized Lease Obligation in accordance with GAAP. For purposes of making the computation referred to above, interest on any Indebtedness under a revolving credit facility computed on a pro forma basis shall be computed based upon the average daily balance of such Indebtedness during the applicable period. Interest on Indebtedness that may optionally be determined at an interest rate based upon a factor of a prime or similar rate, a eurocurrency interbank offered rate, or other rate, shall be deemed to have been based upon the rate actually chosen, or, if none, then based upon such optional rate chosen as the Company may designate.

 

-15-


For purposes of this definition, any amount in a currency other than U.S. dollars will be converted to U.S. dollars based on the average exchange rate for such currency for the most recent twelve month period immediately prior to the date of determination in a manner consistent with that used in calculating Consolidated EBITDA for the applicable period.

Fixed Charges ” means, with respect to any Person for any period, the sum, without duplication, of:

(1) Consolidated Interest Expense of such Person for such period, and

(2) all cash dividend payments (excluding items eliminated in consolidation) on any series of Preferred Stock or Disqualified Stock of such Person and its Restricted Subsidiaries.

Foreign Subsidiary ” means (i) any Restricted Subsidiary that is not organized or existing under the laws of the United States of America or any state thereof or the District of Columbia, (ii) any Restricted Subsidiary that is organized or existing under the laws of the United States of America or any state thereof or the District of Columbia, if all or substantially all of the assets of such Restricted Subsidiary consist of equity or debt of one or more Restricted Subsidiaries described in clause (i) , intellectual property relating to such Restricted Subsidiaries and other assets (including cash or Cash Equivalents) relating to an ownership interest in such Restricted Subsidiaries, and (iii) any Subsidiary of a Restricted Subsidiary described in clause (i) .

GAAP ” means generally accepted accounting principles in the United States of America as in effect as of the Issue Date (except with respect to the financial statements being furnished pursuant to Section 3.2 hereof, as to which such principles in effect from time to time shall apply), including those set forth in the opinions and pronouncements of the Accounting Principles Board of the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants and statements and pronouncements of the Financial Accounting Standards Board or in such other statements by such other entity as approved by a significant segment of the accounting profession. All ratios and computations based on GAAP contained in this Indenture will be computed in conformity with GAAP, except that in the event the Company is acquired in a transaction that is accounted for using purchase accounting, the effects of the application of purchase accounting shall be disregarded in the calculation of such ratios and other computations contained in this Indenture.

Global Note Legend ” means the legend set forth in Section 2.1(b) hereof, which is required to be placed on all Global Notes issued under this Indenture.

Global Notes ” means, individually and collectively, each of the Restricted Global Notes and the Unrestricted Global Notes, substantially in the form of Exhibit A hereto (as such form may be modified in accordance with Section 2.2 hereof) issued in accordance with Section 2.1 or 2.7 hereof.

 

-16-


Good Faith by the Company ” means the decision in good faith by a responsible financial or accounting officer of the Company.

Guarantee ” means any obligation, contingent or otherwise, of any Person, directly or indirectly, guaranteeing any Indebtedness or other financial obligations of any other Person and any obligation, direct or indirect, contingent or otherwise, of such Person:

(1) to purchase or pay (or advance or supply funds for the purchase or payment of) such Indebtedness of such other Person (whether arising by virtue of partnership arrangements, or by agreement to keep-well, to purchase assets, goods, securities or services, to take-or-pay, or to maintain financial statement conditions or otherwise); or

(2) entered into for purposes of assuring in any other manner the obligee of such Indebtedness or other financial obligation of the payment thereof or to protect such obligee against loss in respect thereof (in whole or in part); provided , however , that the term “ Guarantee ” will not include endorsements for collection or deposit in the ordinary course of business. The term “ Guarantee ” used as a verb has a corresponding meaning.

Hedging Obligations ” of any Person means the obligations of such Person pursuant to any Interest Rate Agreement or Currency Agreement, excluding any Obligations of Insurance Subsidiaries with respect to Swap Contracts entered into in the ordinary course of business and consistent with the investment policy approved by the Board of Directors of such Insurance Subsidiary.

Holder ” means a Person in whose name a Note is registered on the Registrar’s books.

Holdings ” means Harbinger F&G, LLC, a Delaware limited liability company.

IAI Global Note ” means a Global Note substantially in the form of Exhibit A hereto (as such form may be modified in accordance with Section 2.2 ) bearing the Global Note Legend and the Private Placement Legend and deposited with or on behalf of, and registered in the name of, the Depositary or its nominee, issued in an initial denomination equal to the outstanding principal amount of the Notes initially sold to Institutional Accredited Investors.

Immaterial Subsidiary ” means any Subsidiary (other than an Insurance Subsidiary) that (a) has assets with an aggregate Fair Market Value less than $2.5 million as of the end of the most recently ended fiscal quarter of the Company, (b) has aggregate revenues less than $2.5 million for the period of four consecutive fiscal quarters most recently ended, and (c) has no Subsidiaries (other than Immaterial Subsidiaries). Any Subsidiary so designated as an Immaterial Subsidiary that fails to meet the foregoing as of the last day of the period of four consecutive fiscal quarters most recently ended shall continue to be deemed an “Immaterial Subsidiary” hereunder until the date that is 60 days following the delivery of annual or quarterly financial statements pursuant to Section 3.2 hereof with respect to such period (or the last quarter thereof, as applicable).

 

-17-


Incur ” means to issue, create, assume, Guarantee, incur or otherwise become liable for; provided, however, that any Indebtedness or Capital Stock of a Person existing at the time such Person becomes a Restricted Subsidiary (whether by merger, consolidation, acquisition or otherwise) will be deemed to be Incurred by such Person at the time it becomes a Restricted Subsidiary; and the terms “Incurred” and “Incurrence” have meanings correlative to the foregoing. Any Indebtedness issued at a discount (including Indebtedness on which interest is payable through the issuance of additional Indebtedness) shall be deemed incurred at the time of original issuance of the Indebtedness at the initial accreted amount thereof.

Indebtedness ” means, with respect to any Person on any date of determination (without duplication):

(1) the principal of and premium (if any) in respect of indebtedness of such Person for borrowed money;

(2) the principal of and premium (if any) in respect of obligations of such Person evidenced by bonds, debentures, notes or other similar instruments;

(3) the principal component of all obligations of such Person in respect of letters of credit, bankers’ acceptances or other similar instruments (including reimbursement obligations with respect thereto, except to the extent such reimbursement obligation relates to a Trade Payable or similar obligation to a trade creditor in each case incurred in the ordinary course of business) other than obligations with respect to letters of credit, bankers’ acceptances or similar instruments securing obligations (other than obligations described in clauses (1)  and (2)  above and clause (5)  below) entered into in the ordinary course of business of such Person to the extent such letters of credit, bankers’ acceptances or similar instruments are not drawn upon or, to the extent drawn upon, such drawing is reimbursed no later than the fifth Business Day following receipt by such Person of a demand for reimbursement following payment on the letter of credit, bankers’ acceptance or similar instrument;

(4) the principal component of all obligations of such Person to pay the deferred and unpaid purchase price of property (except Trade Payables), which purchase price is due more than six months after the date of placing such property in service or taking delivery and title thereto, except (i) any such balance that constitutes a Trade Payable, accrued liability or similar obligation to a trade creditor, in each case accrued in the ordinary course of business, and (ii) any earn-out obligation until the amount of such obligation becomes a liability on the balance sheet of such Person in accordance with GAAP;

(5) Capitalized Lease Obligations and all Attributable Indebtedness of such Person (whether or not such items would appear on the balance sheet of the guarantor or obligor);

(6) the principal component or liquidation preference of all obligations of such Person with respect to the redemption, repayment or other repurchase of any Disqualified Stock or, with respect to any Subsidiary that is not a Subsidiary Guarantor, any Preferred Stock (but excluding, in each case, any accrued dividends);

 

-18-


(7) the principal component of all indebtedness of other Persons secured by a Lien on any asset of such Person, whether or not such Indebtedness is assumed by such Person; provided, however, that the amount of such Indebtedness will be the lesser of (a) the Fair Market Value of such asset at such date of determination and (b) the amount of such indebtedness of such other Persons;

(8) the principal component of Indebtedness of other Persons to the extent Guaranteed by such Person (whether or not such items would appear on the balance sheet of the guarantor or obligor); and

(9) to the extent not otherwise included in this definition, net Hedging Obligations of such Person (the amount of any such obligations to be equal at any time to the termination value of such agreement or arrangement giving rise to such Hedging Obligation that would be payable by such Person at such time).

In no event shall the term “ Indebtedness ” include (i) any indebtedness under any overdraft or cash management facilities so long as any such indebtedness is repaid in full no later than five Business Days following the date on which it was incurred or in the case of such indebtedness in respect of credit or purchase cards, within 60 days of its incurrence, (ii) obligations in respect of performance, appeal or other surety bonds or completion guarantees incurred in the ordinary course of business, (iii) except as provided in clause (5)  above, any obligations in respect of a lease properly classified as an operating lease in accordance with GAAP, (iv) any liability for federal, state, local or other taxes not yet delinquent or being contested in good faith and for which adequate reserves have been established to the extent required by GAAP, (v) any customer deposits or advance payments received in the ordinary course of business, (vi) Obligations of Insurance Subsidiaries with respect to Swap Contracts entered into in the ordinary course of business and consistent with the investment policy approved by the Board of Directors of such Insurance Subsidiary, (vii) the following obligations issued or undertaken in connection with a Statutory Reserve Financing: (A) Surplus Notes or other obligations of any Special Purpose Subsidiary of the Company (“ Reserve Financing Notes ”), (B) any securities backed by such Reserve Financing Notes by an entity formed in connection with a Statutory Reserve Financing, (C) letters of credit issued for the account of any Special Purpose Subsidiary of the Company, (D) reimbursement obligations of any Special Purpose Subsidiary, (E) any guarantees by the Company of the obligations described in (A), (B), (C) or (D) above, (F) reimbursement obligations of the Company or (G) capital maintenance or similar obligations of the Company in favor of any Special Purpose Subsidiary, and (viii) any obligations with respect to insurance policies, annuities, guaranteed investment contracts and similar policies underwritten by an Insurance Subsidiary, in each case, in the ordinary course of business.

The amount of Indebtedness of any Person at any date will be the outstanding balance at such date of all unconditional obligations as described above and the maximum liability, upon the occurrence of the contingency giving rise to the obligation, of any contingent obligations at such date; provided that (x) contingent obligations arising in the ordinary course of

 

-19-


business and not with respect to borrowed money of such Person or other Persons, and (y) the obligations of any Person under Reinsurance Agreements shall be deemed not to constitute Indebtedness. Notwithstanding the foregoing, money borrowed and set aside at the time of the Incurrence of any Indebtedness in order to prefund the payment of interest on such Indebtedness shall not be deemed to be “Indebtedness,” provided that such money is held to secure the payment of such interest.

Independent Financial Advisor ” means (1) an accounting, appraisal or investment banking firm or (2) a consultant to Persons engaged in a Related Business, in each case of nationally recognized standing that is, in the good faith judgment of the Company, qualified to perform the task for which it has been engaged.

Indirect Participant ” means a Person who holds a beneficial interest in a Global Note through a Participant.

Initial Notes ” means the $300,000,000 in aggregate principal amount of 6.375% Senior Notes due 2021 of the Company issued under the first Notes Supplemental Indenture on the Issue Date.

Initial Purchasers ” means, with respect to the Initial Notes, Jefferies LLC, Credit Suisse Securities (USA) LLC and Macquarie Capital (USA) Inc. and, with respect to any Additional Notes, other such initial purchasers party to future purchase agreements entered into in connection with an offer and sale of such Additional Notes.

Institutional Accredited Investor ” means an institution that is an “accredited investor” as defined in Rule 501(a)(1), (2), (3) or (7) under the Securities Act, who are not also QIBs.

Insurance Regulatory Authority ” means, with respect to any Insurance Subsidiary, the governmental or regulatory authority or agency charged with regulating the insurance business of insurance companies or insurance holding companies, in its jurisdiction of legal domicile.

Insurance Subsidiary ” means any Restricted Subsidiary of the Company that is required to be licensed as an insurer or reinsurer.

Interest Payment Date ” means, when used with respect to any Note and any installment of interest thereon, the date specified in such Note as the fixed date on which such installment of interest is due and payable, as set forth in such Note.

Interest Rate Agreement ” means with respect to any Person any interest rate protection agreement, interest rate future agreement, interest rate option agreement, interest rate swap agreement, interest rate cap agreement, interest rate collar agreement, interest rate hedge agreement or other similar agreement or arrangement as to which such Person is party or a beneficiary.

 

-20-


Investment ” in any Person means any direct or indirect advance, loan (other than advances or extensions of credit in the ordinary course of business that are in conformity with GAAP recorded as accounts receivable on the balance sheet of the Company or its Restricted Subsidiaries) or other extensions of credit (including by way of Guarantee or similar arrangement, but excluding any debt or extension of credit represented by a bank deposit other than a time deposit) or capital contribution to (by means of any transfer of cash or other property to others or any payment for property or services for the account or use of others), or any purchase or acquisition of Capital Stock, Indebtedness or other similar instruments issued by, such Person and all other items that are or would be classified as investments on a balance sheet prepared in accordance with GAAP; provided that none of the following will be deemed to be an Investment:

(1) Hedging Obligations entered into in the ordinary course of business and in compliance with this Indenture;

(2) endorsements of negotiable instruments and documents in the ordinary course of business;

(3) an acquisition of assets, Capital Stock or other securities by the Company or a Subsidiary for consideration to the extent such consideration consists of Common Stock of the Company;

(4) a deposit of funds in connection with an acquisition of assets, Capital Stock or other securities; provided that either such acquisition is consummated by or through a Restricted Subsidiary or such deposit is returned to the Person who made it;

(5) an account receivable arising, or prepaid expenses or deposits made, in the ordinary course of business; and

(6) licensing or transfer of know-how or intellectual property or the providing of services in the ordinary course of business.

For purposes of Section 3.4 hereof, (1) “Investment” will include the portion (proportionate to the Company’s equity interest in a Restricted Subsidiary to be designated as an Unrestricted Subsidiary) of the Fair Market Value of the net assets of such Restricted Subsidiary at the time that such Restricted Subsidiary is designated an Unrestricted Subsidiary; provided , however , that upon a redesignation of such Subsidiary as a Restricted Subsidiary, the Company shall be deemed to continue to have a permanent “Investment” in an Unrestricted Subsidiary in an amount (if positive) equal to (a) the Company’s aggregate “Investment” in such Subsidiary as of the time of such redesignation less (b) the portion (proportionate to the Company’s equity interest in such Subsidiary) of the Fair Market Value of the net assets (as conclusively determined in good faith by the Board of Directors of the Company) of such Subsidiary at the time that such Subsidiary is so redesignated a Restricted Subsidiary; (2) any property transferred to or from an Unrestricted Subsidiary shall be valued at its Fair Market Value at the time of such transfer, in each case as determined in good faith by the Board of Directors of the Company; and (3) the value of any “Investment” made by an Insurance Subsidiary shall be calculated net of any liabilities of the Insurance Subsidiary that are assumed by the Person in whom the Investment is being made.

 

-21-


Investment Grade Rating ” means a rating equal to or higher than Baa3 (or the equivalent) by Moody’s Investors Service, Inc. and BBB-(or the equivalent) by Standard & Poor’s Ratings Group, Inc., in each case, with a stable or better outlook; provided that a change in outlook shall not by itself cause the Company to lose its Investment Grade Rating.

Issue Date ” means March 27, 2013.

Lien ” means, with respect to any asset, any mortgage, lien (statutory or otherwise), pledge, hypothecation, charge, security interest or encumbrance of any kind in respect of such asset, whether or not filed, recorded or otherwise perfected under applicable law, including any conditional sale or other title retention agreement, any lease in the nature thereof, any option or other agreement to sell or give a security interest in and any filing of or agreement to give any financing statement under the Uniform Commercial Code (or equivalent statutes) of any jurisdiction; provided that in no event shall an operating lease (or any filing or agreement to give any financing statement in connection therewith) be deemed to constitute a Lien.

Moody’s ” means Moody’s Investors Service, Inc. and any successor thereto.

NAIC ” means the National Association of Insurance Commissioners or any successor thereto, or in the absence of the National Association of Insurance Commissioners or such successor, any other association, agency or other organization performing advisory, coordination or other like functions among insurance departments, insurance commissioners and similar governmental authorities of the various states of the United States toward the promotion of uniformity in the practices of such governmental authorities.

Net Available Cash ” from an Asset Disposition means an amount equal to the cash payments received (including any cash payments received by way of deferred payment of principal pursuant to a note or installment receivable or otherwise and net proceeds from the sale or other disposition of any securities or other assets received as consideration, but only as and when received, but excluding any other consideration received in the form of assumption by the acquiring Person of Indebtedness or other obligations relating to the properties or assets that are the subject of such Asset Disposition or received in any other non-cash form) therefrom, in each case net of: (1) all brokerage, legal, accounting, investment banking, title and recording tax expenses, commissions and other fees and expenses incurred, and all Federal, state, provincial, foreign and local taxes required to be paid or accrued as a liability under GAAP (after taking into account any available tax credits or deductions and any tax sharing agreements), as a consequence of such Asset Disposition; (2) all payments made on any Indebtedness that is secured by any assets subject to such Asset Disposition, in accordance with the terms of any Lien upon such assets, or that must by its terms, or in order to obtain a necessary consent to such Asset Disposition, or by applicable law be repaid out of the proceeds from such Asset Disposition; (3) all distributions and other payments required to be made to minority interest holders in Subsidiaries or joint ventures as a result of such Asset Disposition; (4) the deduction of appropriate amounts to be provided by the seller as a reserve, in accordance with GAAP, against any liabilities associated with the property or other assets disposed of in such Asset Disposition and retained by the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary after such Asset Disposition, including, without limitation, pension and other post-employment benefit liabilities and liabilities related to environmental matters; (5) any portion of the purchase price from an

 

-22-


Asset Disposition placed in escrow (whether as a reserve for adjustment of the purchase price, or for satisfaction of indemnities in respect of such Asset Disposition); and (6) in the case of an Asset Disposition by an Insurance Subsidiary, proceeds that are not permitted to be paid as a dividend or distribution by such Insurance Subsidiary pursuant to regulatory restrictions provided , however , that in the cases of clauses (4)  and (5) , upon reversal of any such reserve or the termination of any such escrow, Net Available Cash shall be increased by the amount of such reversal or any portion of funds released from escrow to the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary.

Net Cash Proceeds ” means, with respect to any issuance or sale of Capital Stock of the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary or Indebtedness, the cash proceeds of such issuance or sale net of attorneys’ fees, accountants’ fees, underwriters’ or placement agents’ fees, listing fees, discounts or commissions and brokerage, consultant and other fees, charges and expenses actually Incurred in connection with such issuance or sale and net of taxes paid or payable as a result of such issuance or sale (after taking into account any available tax credit or deductions and any tax sharing arrangements).

Non-Guarantor Subsidiary ” means any Restricted Subsidiary that is not a Subsidiary Guarantor.

Non-Recourse Debt ” means Indebtedness of a Person:

(1) as to which neither the Company nor any Restricted Subsidiary (a) provides any Guarantee or credit support of any kind (including any undertaking, Guarantee, indemnity, agreement or instrument that would constitute Indebtedness) or (b) is directly or indirectly liable (as a guarantor or otherwise);

(2) no default with respect to which would permit (upon notice, lapse of time or both) any holder of any other Indebtedness of the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary to declare a default under such other Indebtedness or cause the payment thereof to be accelerated or payable prior to its Stated Maturity; and

(3) the explicit terms of which provide there is no recourse against any of the assets of the Company or its Restricted Subsidiaries.

Non-U.S. Person ” means a Person who is not a U.S. Person.

Notes ” means the Initial Notes and any Additional Notes.

Notes Custodian ” means the custodian with respect to the Global Note (as appointed by the Depositary), or any successor Person thereto and shall initially be the Trustee.

Notes Supplemental Indenture ” means a Supplemental Indenture pursuant to which the Company issues Notes in accordance with Section 2.2 , which may be substantially in the form attached hereto as Exhibit F , or in such other form as the Company may determine in accordance with Section 2.2 .

 

-23-


Obligations ” means any principal, interest (including any interest accruing subsequent to the filing of a petition in bankruptcy, reorganization or similar proceeding at the rate provided for in the documentation with respect thereto, whether or not such interest is an allowed claim under applicable state, federal or foregoing law), penalties, fees, indemnifications, reimbursements (including, without limitation, reimbursement obligations with respect to letters of credit and bankers’ acceptances), damages and other liabilities, and guarantees of payment of such principal, interest, penalties, fees, indemnifications, reimbursements, damages and other liabilities, payable under the documentation governing any Indebtedness.

Offering Memorandum ” means the offering memorandum, dated as of March 22, 2013, relating to the offering of the Notes.

Officer ” means the Chairman of the Board, the Chief Executive Officer, the President, the Chief Financial Officer, any Executive Vice President, Senior Vice President or Vice President, the Treasurer or the Secretary of the Company or, in the event that a Person is a partnership or a limited liability company that has no such officers, a person duly authorized under applicable law by the general partner, managers, members or a similar body to act on behalf of such Person. Officer of any Subsidiary Guarantor has a correlative meaning.

Officer’s Certificate ” means a certificate signed by an Officer of the Company.

OM Purchase Agreement ” means the First Amended and Restated Stock Purchase Agreement, dated February 17, 2011, between OM Group (UK) Limited and Harbinger F&G, LLC.

Opinion of Counsel ” means a written opinion from legal counsel which is reasonably acceptable to the Trustee. The counsel may be an employee of or counsel to the Company or a Restricted Subsidiary.

Participant ” means, with respect to the Depositary, a Person who has an account with the Depositary.

Permitted Holders ” means:

(1) each of Holdings, Harbinger Group Inc., Harbinger Capital Partners Master Fund I, Ltd., Harbinger Capital Partners Special Situations Fund, L.P. and Global Opportunities Breakaway Ltd.;

(2) any Affiliate or Related Party of any Person specified in clause (1) , other than another portfolio company thereof (which means a company actively engaged in providing goods and services to unaffiliated customers) or a company controlled by a “portfolio company;”

(3) any Person both the Capital Stock and the Voting Stock of which (or in the case of a trust, the beneficial interests in which) are owned 50% or more by Persons specified in clauses (1)  and (2)  or any group in which the Persons specified in clauses (1)  and (2)  own more than a majority of the voting power of the Voting Stock held by such group, and any Person that is a member of any such group.

 

-24-


Permitted Investment ” means an Investment by the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary in:

(1) the Company or a Restricted Subsidiary, including through the purchase of Capital Stock of a Restricted Subsidiary;

(2) any Investment by the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries in a Person that is engaged in a Related Business if as a result of such Investment:

(a) such Person becomes a Restricted Subsidiary; or

(b) such Person, in one transaction or a series of related transactions, is merged or consolidated with or into, or transfers or conveys all or substantially all of its assets to, or is liquidated into, the Company or a Restricted Subsidiary,

and, in each case, any Investment held by such Person; provided that such Investment was not acquired by such Person in contemplation of such acquisition, merger, consolidation or transfer;

(3) cash and Cash Equivalents or Investments that constituted Cash Equivalents at the time made;

(4) receivables owing to the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary created or acquired in the ordinary course of business and payable or dischargeable in accordance with customary trade terms; provided, however, that such trade terms may include such concessionary trade terms as the Company or any such Restricted Subsidiary deems reasonable under the circumstances;

(5) commission, relocation, entertainment, payroll, travel and similar advances to cover matters that are expected at the time of such advances ultimately to be treated as expenses for accounting purposes and that are made in the ordinary course of business;

(6) loans or advances to, or guarantees of third party loans to, employees, officers or directors of the Company or any Subsidiary in the ordinary course of business in an aggregate amount outstanding at any time not in excess of $2.0 million with respect to all loans or advances or guarantees made since the Issue Date (without giving effect to the forgiveness of any such loan) or to fund such Person’s purchase of Capital Stock of the Company or any direct or indirect parent of the Company;

(7) any Investment acquired by the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries:

(a) in exchange for any other Investment or accounts receivable held by the Company or any such Restricted Subsidiary in connection with or as a result of a judgment, bankruptcy, workout, reorganization or recapitalization of the issuer of such other Investment or accounts receivable;

 

-25-


(b) as a result of a foreclosure by the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries with respect to any secured Investment or other transfer of title with respect to any secured Investment in default; or

(c) in the form of notes payable, or stock or other securities issued by account debtors to the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary pursuant to negotiated agreements with respect to the settlement of such account debtor’s accounts, and other Investments arising in connection with the compromise, settlement or collection of accounts receivable, in each case in the ordinary course of business;

(8) Investments made as a result of the receipt of non-cash consideration (including Designated Non-cash Consideration) from an Asset Disposition that was made pursuant to and in compliance with Section 3.7 hereof or any other disposition of assets not constituting an Asset Disposition;

(9) Investments in existence on the Issue Date and Investments committed to be made as of the Issue Date, and any extension, modification or renewal of any such Investments, or Investments purchased or received in exchange for such Investments, existing on the Issue Date, but only to the extent not involving additional advances, contributions or other Investments of cash or other assets or other increases thereof (other than (x) as contemplated by the terms of such Investment as in effect on the Issue Date, (y) as permitted under this definition or Section 3.4 hereof or (z) pursuant to the terms of such Investment as in effect on the Issue Date, as a result of the accrual or accretion of interest or original issue discount or the issuance of pay-in-kind securities);

(10) any Person to the extent such Investments consist of Hedging Obligations, which transactions or obligations are Incurred in compliance with Section 3.3 hereof;

(11) Guarantees of Indebtedness issued in accordance with Section 3.3 hereof and guarantees to suppliers, licensors or the providers of operating leases (other than guarantees of Indebtedness) in the ordinary course of business;

(12) Investments made in connection with the funding of contributions under any non-qualified retirement plan or similar employee compensation plan, including, without limitation, split-dollar insurance policies, in an amount not to exceed the amount of compensation expense recognized by the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries in connection with such plans;

(13) Investments received in settlement of debts created in the ordinary course of business and owing to the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary or in satisfaction of judgments or pursuant to any plan of reorganization or similar arrangement upon the bankruptcy or insolvency of a debtor;

(14) any Person to the extent such Investments consist of prepaid expenses, negotiable instruments held for collection and lease, utility, unemployment insurance, workers’ compensation, performance and other similar deposits made in the ordinary course of business by the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary;

 

-26-


(15) prepayments and other credits to suppliers made in the ordinary course of business;

(16) endorsements of negotiable instruments and documents in the ordinary course of business;

(17) loans or advances or similar transactions with customers, distributors, clients, developers, suppliers or purchasers of goods or services in the ordinary course of business;

(18) Investments by any Insurance Subsidiary (including by any Subsidiary of such Insurance Subsidiary that is not itself an Insurance Subsidiary) in the ordinary course of business and consistent with the investment policy approved by the Board of Directors of such Insurance Subsidiary or otherwise consistent with Investment guidelines approved by the applicable Insurance Regulatory Authority;

(19) Investments by the Company that constitute Investments that would be permitted to be made by an Insurance Subsidiary pursuant to clause (18)  of this definition of “Permitted Investments”;

(20) Investments of the type described in clause (vii)  of the second paragraph of the definition of “Indebtedness” in connection with Statutory Reserve Financings; and

(21) Investments by the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries, together with all other Investments pursuant to this clause (21) , in an aggregate amount at the time of such Investment not to exceed $35.0 million outstanding at any one time (with the Fair Market Value of such Investment being measured at the time made and without giving effect to subsequent changes in value).

Permitted Liens ” means, with respect to any Person:

(1) (x) pledges or deposits by such Person under workers’ compensation laws, unemployment, general insurance and other insurance laws and old age pensions and other social security or retirement benefits or similar legislation, or good faith deposits in connection with bids, tenders, contracts (other than for the payment of Indebtedness) or leases to which such Person is a party, or deposits to secure public or statutory or regulatory obligations of such Person or deposits of cash or United States government bonds to secure surety or appeal bonds to which such Person is a party, or good faith deposits as security for contested taxes or import or customs duties or for the payment of rent, in each case Incurred in the ordinary course of business and (y) collateral consisting of Cash Equivalents securing letters of credit issued in respect of obligations to insurers in an aggregate amount not to exceed $10.0 million at any time outstanding;

(2) Liens imposed by law and carriers’, warehousemen’s, mechanics’, materialmen’s, repairmen’s and other like Liens arising in the ordinary course of business;

 

-27-


(3) Liens for taxes, assessments or other governmental charges or levies not yet subject to penalties for non-payment or that are being contested in good faith by appropriate proceedings provided appropriate reserves required pursuant to GAAP have been made in respect thereof;

(4) Liens in favor of issuers of surety, appeal or performance bonds or letters of credit or bankers’ acceptances or similar obligations issued pursuant to the request of and for the account of such Person in the ordinary course of its business;

(5) minor survey exceptions, encumbrances, ground leases, easements or reservations of, or rights of others for, licenses, rights of way, sewers, electric lines, telegraph and telephone lines and other similar purposes, or zoning, building codes or other restrictions (including, without limitation, minor defects or irregularities in title and similar encumbrances) as to the use of real properties or Liens incidental to the conduct of the business of such Person or to the ownership of its properties that do not in the aggregate materially adversely affect the value of said properties or materially impair their use in the operation of the business of such Person;

(6) Liens securing Hedging Obligations relating to Indebtedness so long as the related Indebtedness is, and is permitted to be under this Indenture, secured by a Lien on the same property securing such Hedging Obligation;

(7) leases, licenses, subleases and sublicenses of assets (including, without limitation, real property and intellectual property rights) that do not materially interfere with the ordinary conduct of the business of the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries;

(8) judgment Liens not giving rise to an Event of Default, and Liens securing appeal or surety bonds related to such judgment, so long as any appropriate legal proceedings that may have been duly initiated for the review of such judgment have not been finally terminated or the period within which such proceedings may be initiated has not expired;

(9) Liens for the purpose of securing the payment of all or a part of the purchase price of, or Capitalized Lease Obligations, mortgage financings, purchase money indebtedness or other payments Incurred pursuant to Section 3.3(b)(vii) hereof to finance assets or property (other than Capital Stock or other Investments) acquired, constructed, improved or leased in the ordinary course of business; provided that, in the case of this clause (9) :

(a) the aggregate principal amount of Indebtedness secured by such Liens does not exceed the cost of the assets or property so acquired, constructed or improved, plus reasonable fees and expenses of such Person incurred in connection therewith; and

(b) such Liens are created within 365 days of construction, acquisition or improvement of such assets or property and do not encumber any other assets or property of the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary other than such assets or property and assets affixed or appurtenant thereto and the proceeds thereof;

 

-28-


(10) Liens that constitute banker’s Liens, rights of set-off or similar rights and remedies as to deposit accounts or other funds maintained with a bank, depositary or other financial institution, whether arising by operation of law or pursuant to contract;

(11) Liens arising from Uniform Commercial Code financing statement filings regarding operating leases entered into by the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries in the ordinary course of business;

(12) Liens existing on the Issue Date;

(13) Liens on property or shares of stock of a Person at the time such Person becomes a Restricted Subsidiary; provided, further, that such Liens are not created, Incurred or assumed in connection with, or in contemplation of, such other Person becoming a Restricted Subsidiary; provided further , however, that any such Lien is limited to all or part of the same property or assets (plus improvements, accessions, proceeds or dividends or distributions in respect thereof) that secured (or, under the written arrangements under which the original Lien arose, could secure), the obligations to which such Liens relate or is in respect of property that is the security for a Permitted Lien hereunder;

(14) Liens on property at the time the Company or a Restricted Subsidiary acquired the property, including any acquisition by means of a merger or consolidation with or into the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary; provided, further, that such Liens are not created, Incurred or assumed in connection with, or in contemplation of, such acquisition; provided further, however, that any such Lien is limited to all or part of the same property or assets (plus improvements, accessions, proceeds or dividends or distributions in respect thereof) that secured (or, under the written arrangements under which the original Lien arose, could secure), the obligations to which such Liens relate or is in respect of property that is the security for a Permitted Lien hereunder;

(15) Liens securing Indebtedness or other obligations of a Restricted Subsidiary owing to the Company or another Restricted Subsidiary;

(16) Liens on Capital Stock of Unrestricted Subsidiaries and Liens on property of an Unrestricted Subsidiary at the time that it is designated as a Restricted Subsidiary; provided that such Liens were not incurred in connection with or in contemplation of such designation;

(17) good faith deposits as security for contested taxes or contested import to customs duties;

(18) Liens securing Refinancing Indebtedness Incurred to refinance, refund, replace, amend, extend or modify, as a whole or in part, Indebtedness that was previously so secured pursuant to clauses (9), (12), (13), (14), (16) and (18) of this definition; provided that any such Lien is limited to all or part of the same property or assets (plus

 

-29-


improvements, accessions, proceeds or dividends or distributions in respect thereof) that secured (or, under the written arrangements under which the original Lien arose, could secure) the indebtedness being refinanced or is in respect of property that is the security for a Permitted Lien hereunder;

(19) any interest or title of a lessor under any operating lease;

(20) Liens on specific items of inventory or other goods and proceeds of any Person securing such Person’s obligations in respect of bankers’ acceptances issued or created for the account of such Person to facilitate the purchase, shipment or storage of such inventory or other goods;

(21) Liens in favor of customs and revenue authorities arising as a matter of law to secure payment of customs duties in connection with importation of goods;

(22) Liens arising out of conditional sale, title retention, consignment or similar arrangements for the sale or purchase of goods entered into by the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries in the ordinary course of business;

(23) Liens on funds of the Company or any Subsidiary held in deposit accounts with third party providers of payment services securing credit card charge-back reimbursement and similar cash management obligations of the Company or the Subsidiaries;

(24) Liens of a collecting bank arising in the ordinary course of business under Section 4-208 of the Uniform Commercial Code in effect in the relevant jurisdiction covering only the items being collected upon;

(25) Liens arising by operation of law or contract on insurance policies and the proceeds thereof to secure premiums thereunder;

(26) Liens on insurance policies and proceeds of insurance policies (including rebates of premiums) securing Indebtedness incurred pursuant to Section 3.3(b)(xi) to finance the payment of premiums on the insurance policies subject to such Liens;

(27) statutory, common law or contractual Liens of landlords;

(28) customary Liens granted in favor of a trustee to secure fees and other amounts owing to such trustee under an indenture or other agreement pursuant to which Indebtedness permitted under Section 3.3 is Incurred;

(29) Liens on any cash earnest money deposit made by the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary in connection with any letter of intent or acquisition agreement that is not prohibited by this Indenture;

(30) Liens in favor of credit card processors granted in the ordinary course of business;

 

-30-


(31) Liens arising in connection with Cash Equivalents described in clause (5) of the definition of Cash Equivalents;

(32) Liens securing other obligations in an amount not to exceed $50.0 million at any time outstanding;

(33) Liens securing cash management obligations incurred in the ordinary course of business;

(34) Liens securing Indebtedness incurred pursuant to Section 3.3(b)(xii) in an aggregate amount not to exceed $5.0 million and customary set-off rights in favor of depositary banks; and

(35) Liens on the Capital Stock of Fidelity and Guaranty Life Insurance Company (or any successor thereto) arising pursuant to the terms of the OM Purchase Agreement as in effect on the Issue Date; and

(36) Liens on the assets of a Non-Guarantor Subsidiary securing Indebtedness of a Non-Guarantor Subsidiary that was permitted by the terms of this Indenture to be incurred.

Permitted Transactions ” means (a) mortgage-backed security transactions in which an investor sells mortgage collateral, such as securities issued by the Government National Mortgage Association and the Federal Home Loan Mortgage Corporation, for delivery in the current month while simultaneously contracting to repurchase “substantially the same” (as determined by the Public Securities Association and GAAP) collateral for a later settlement, (b) transactions in which an investor lends cash to a primary dealer and the primary dealer collateralizes the borrowing of the cash with certain securities, (c) transactions in which an investor lends securities to a primary dealer and the primary dealer collateralizes the borrowing of the securities with cash collateral, (d) transactions in which an investor makes loans of securities to a broker-dealer under an agreement requiring such loans to be continuously secured by cash collateral or United States government securities, (e) transactions structured as, and submitted to the NAIC Security Valuation Office for approval as, Replication (Synthetic Asset) Transactions (RSAT) ( provided that, to the extent that such approval is not granted in respect of any such transaction, such transaction shall cease to constitute a Permitted Transaction 30 days following the date of such rejection, denial or non-approval) and (f) transactions in which a federal home loan mortgage bank (a “FHLMB”) makes loans to an Insurance Subsidiary, that are sufficiently secured by appropriate assets of such Insurance Subsidiary consisting of government agency mortgage-backed securities in accordance with the rules, regulations and guidelines of such FHLMB for its loan programs.

Person ” means any individual, corporation, limited liability company, partnership, joint venture, association, joint-stock company, trust, unincorporated organization, government or any agency or political subdivision thereof or any other entity.

Preferred Stock ” means, as applied to the Capital Stock of any corporation, Capital Stock of any class or classes (however designated) that is preferred as to the payment of dividends, or as to the distribution of assets upon any voluntary or involuntary liquidation or dissolution of such Person, over shares of Capital Stock of any other class of such Person.

 

-31-


Private Placement Legend ” means the legend set forth in Section 2.1(d) to be placed on all Notes issued under this Indenture except where otherwise permitted by the provisions hereof.

QIB ” means any “qualified institutional buyer” (as defined in Rule 144A).

Quarterly Statement ” means the quarterly statutory financial statement of an Insurance Subsidiary (other than any Insurance Subsidiary that is a Foreign Subsidiary) required to be filed with the insurance commissioner (or similar authority) of its jurisdiction of organization, which statement shall be in the form required by its jurisdiction of organization or, if no specific form is so required, in the form of financial statements permitted by such insurance commissioner (or such similar authority) to be used for filing quarterly statutory financial statements and shall contain the type of information permitted or required by such insurance commissioner (or such similar authority) to be disclosed therein.

Rating Agencies ” means Standard & Poor’s Ratings Group, Inc. and Moody’s Investors Service, Inc. or if Standard & Poor’s Ratings Group, Inc. or Moody’s Investors Service, Inc. or both shall not make a rating on the Notes publicly available, a nationally recognized statistical rating agency or agencies, as the case may be, selected by the Company (as certified by a Board Resolution) which shall be substituted for Standard & Poor’s Ratings Group, Inc. or Moody’s Investors Service, Inc. or both, as the case may be.

Record Date ” means, with respect to any series of Notes, the “Record Date” as such term is defined in the Notes Supplemental Indenture establishing such series of Notes.

Refinance ” means, in respect of any Indebtedness, to refinance, extend, renew, refund, replace, repay, prepay, purchase, redeem, defease or retire, or to issue other Indebtedness in exchange or replacement for or to consolidate, such Indebtedness. “ Refinanced ” and “ Refinancing ” shall have correlative meanings.

Refinancing Indebtedness ” means any Indebtedness that Refinances any other Indebtedness, including any successive Refinancings, so long as:

(1) such Indebtedness is in an aggregate principal amount (or if Incurred with original issue discount, an aggregate issue price) not in excess of the sum of:

(a) the aggregate principal amount (or if Incurred with original issue discount, the aggregate accreted value) then outstanding of the Indebtedness being Refinanced, and

(b) an amount necessary to pay any fees and expenses, including accrued and unpaid interest, premiums, transaction costs and defeasance costs, related to such Refinancing,

 

-32-


(2) the Average Life of such Indebtedness is equal to or greater than the Average Life of the Indebtedness being Refinanced,

(3) the Stated Maturity of such Indebtedness is no earlier than the Stated Maturity of the Indebtedness being Refinanced, and

(4) if the Indebtedness being Refinanced was subordinated to the Notes or the Subsidiary Guarantees, the new Indebtedness shall be subordinated to the Notes or the Subsidiary Guarantees, as applicable, at least to the same extent as such Indebtedness being Refinanced;

provided , however, that Refinancing Indebtedness shall not include:

(1) Indebtedness of a Restricted Subsidiary of the Company that is not a Subsidiary Guarantor that Refinances Indebtedness of the Company or a Subsidiary Guarantor, or

(2) Indebtedness of the Company or a Restricted Subsidiary that Refinances Indebtedness of an Unrestricted Subsidiary.

Regulation S ” means Regulation S promulgated under the Securities Act.

Regulation S Global Note ” means a Regulation S Temporary Global Note or Regulation S Permanent Global Note, as appropriate.

Regulation S Legend ” means the legend set forth in Section 2.1(f) hereof, which is required to be placed on all Global Notes issued under this Indenture except where otherwise permitted by the provisions hereof.

Regulation S Permanent Global Note ” means a permanent Global Note in the form of Exhibit A hereto (as such form may be modified in accordance with Section 2.2 hereof) bearing the Global Note Legend, the Private Placement Legend and the Regulation S Legend and deposited with or on behalf of the Depositary and registered in the name of the Depositary or its nominee, issued in a denomination equal to the outstanding principal amount of the Regulation S Temporary Global Note upon expiration of the Restricted Period.

Regulation S Temporary Global Note ” means a temporary Global Note in the form of Exhibit A hereto (as such form may be modified in accordance with Section 2.2 hereof) deposited with or on behalf of the Depositary and registered in the name of the Depositary or its nominee, issued in a denomination equal to the outstanding principal amount of the Notes initially sold in reliance on Rule 903 of Regulation S.

Regulation S Temporary Global Note Legend ” means the legend set forth in Section 2.1(e) hereof, which is required to be placed on all Regulation S Temporary Global Notes issued under this Indenture except where otherwise permitted by the provisions hereof.

 

-33-


Reinsurance Agreements ” means any agreement, contract, treaty, certificate or other arrangement by which any Insurance Subsidiary agrees to transfer or cede to another insurer all or part of the liability assumed or assets held by it under one or more insurance, annuity, reinsurance or retrocession policies, agreements, contracts, treaties, certificates or similar arrangements. Reinsurance Agreements shall include, but not be limited to, any agreement, contract, treaty, certificate or other arrangement that is treated as such by the applicable Insurance Regulatory Authority.

Related Business ” means any business that is the same as or related, ancillary or complementary to any of the businesses of the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries on the Issue Date and any reasonable extension or evolution of any of the foregoing.

Related Party ” means:

(1) any controlling stockholder, majority owned Subsidiary, or immediate family member (in the case of an individual) of any Permitted Holder; or

(2) any trust, corporation, partnership, limited liability company or other entity, the beneficiaries, stockholders, partners, members, owners or Persons beneficially holding a majority (and controlling) interest of which consist of any one or more Permitted Holder and/or such other Persons referred to in the immediately preceding clause (1).

Restricted Definitive Note ” means a Definitive Note bearing the Private Placement Legend.

Restricted Global Note ” means a Global Note bearing the Private Placement Legend.

Restricted Investment ” means any Investment other than a Permitted Investment.

Restricted Period ” means the 40-day distribution compliance period as defined in Regulation S.

Restricted Subsidiary ” means any Subsidiary of the Company other than an Unrestricted Subsidiary.

Rule 144 ” means Rule 144 promulgated under the Securities Act.

Rule 144A ” means Rule 144A promulgated under the Securities Act.

Rule 903 ” means Rule 903 promulgated under the Securities Act.

Rule 904 ” means Rule 904 promulgated under the Securities Act.

Sale/Leaseback Transaction ” means any direct or indirect arrangement relating to property now owned or hereafter acquired by the Company or a Restricted Subsidiary whereby the Company or such Restricted Subsidiary transfers such property to a Person (other than the Company or any of its Subsidiaries) and the Company or such Restricted Subsidiary leases it from such Person.

 

-34-


SAP ” shall mean, with respect to any Insurance Subsidiary, the statutory accounting practices prescribed or permitted by the Insurance Regulatory Authority of its jurisdiction of legal domicile, consistently applied as in effect from time to time.

SEC ” means the United States Securities and Exchange Commission.

Securities Act ” means the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, and the rules and regulations of the SEC promulgated thereunder.

Significant Subsidiary ” means any Restricted Subsidiary that would be a “Significant Subsidiary” of the Company within the meaning of Rule 1-02 under Regulation S-X promulgated by the SEC.

Special Purpose Subsidiary ” means any Restricted Subsidiary of the Company formed to issue Surplus Notes or other obligations in connection with a Statutory Reserve Financing or enter into Reinsurance Agreements in connection with a Statutory Reserve Financing or enter into ancillary obligations in respect of the foregoing.

Stated Maturity ” means, with respect to any security, the date specified in the agreement governing or certificate relating to such security as the fixed date on which the final payment of principal of such security is due and payable, including pursuant to any mandatory redemption provision, but shall not include any contingent obligations to repay, redeem or repurchase any such principal prior to the date originally scheduled for the payment thereof.

Statutory Reserve Financing ” means a transaction or series of transactions entered into primarily for the purpose of financing a portion of the statutory reserves required to be held by an Insurance Subsidiary, where the proceeds or funding obligations provided by the financing counterparty or counterparties in such transaction or transactions are not expected, as of the date such transaction or transactions are entered into, to be used or applied to pay insurance or reinsurance claims reasonably projected to be payable as of the date such transaction or transactions are entered into.

Subordinated Obligation ” means any Indebtedness of the Company (whether outstanding on the Issue Date or thereafter Incurred) that is subordinated or junior in right of payment to the Notes pursuant to its terms. No Indebtedness of the Company shall be deemed to be subordinated or junior in right of payment to any other Indebtedness of the Company solely by virtue of Liens, guarantees, maturity or payments or structural subordination.

Subsidiary ” of any Person means (1) any corporation, association or other business entity of which more than 50% of the total voting power of shares of Capital Stock entitled (without regard to the occurrence of any contingency) to vote in the election of directors, managers or trustees thereof is at the time owned or controlled, directly or indirectly, by such Person or one or more of the other Subsidiaries of that Person (or a combination thereof), or (2) any partnership (a) the sole general partner or the managing general partner of which is such Person or a Subsidiary of such Person or (b) the only general partners of which are such Person or one or more Subsidiaries of such Person (or any combination thereof). Unless otherwise specified herein, each reference to a Subsidiary will refer to a Subsidiary of the Company.

 

-35-


Subsidiary Guarantee ” means, individually, any Guarantee by a Subsidiary Guarantor pursuant to the terms of this Indenture and any supplemental indenture thereto, and, collectively, all such Guarantees. Each such Subsidiary Guarantee will be in the form prescribed by this Indenture.

Subsidiary Guarantor ” means each Restricted Subsidiary in existence on the Issue Date that provides a Subsidiary Guarantee on the Issue Date (and any other Restricted Subsidiary that provides a Subsidiary Guarantee in accordance with this Indenture); provided that upon release or discharge of such Restricted Subsidiary from its Subsidiary Guarantee in accordance with this Indenture, such Restricted Subsidiary ceases to be a Subsidiary Guarantor.

substantially concurrent ” means, with respect to two or more events, the occurrence of such events within 45 days of each other.

Surplus Note ” means a promissory note executed by an Insurance Subsidiary of the type generally described in the insurance industry as a “surplus note”, the principal amount of which an insurance regulator permits the issuer to record as an addition to Capital and Surplus rather than as a liability in accordance with SAP.

Swap Contract ” means any agreement relating to any transaction (whether or not arising under a master agreement) that is a rate swap, basis swap, forward rate transaction, commodity swap, commodity option, equity or equity index swap or option, bond, note or bill option, interest rate option, futures contract, forward foreign exchange transaction, cap, collar or floor transaction, currency swap, cross-currency rate swap, swaption, currency option, credit derivative transaction or any other similar transaction (including any option to enter into any of the foregoing) or any combination of the foregoing, and any master agreement relating to or governing any or all of the foregoing.

TIA ” means the Trust Indenture Act of 1939 as in effect on the date hereof.

Total Capitalization ” means, without duplication, (a) the amount described in clause (a) of the definition of “Debt to Total Capitalization Ratio” plus (b) the Total Shareholders’ Equity of the Company.

Total Shareholders’ Equity ” means the total common and preferred shareholders’ equity of the Company as determined in accordance with GAAP (calculated excluding (i) unrealized gains (losses) on securities as determined in accordance with FASB ASC 320 (Investments—Debt and Equity Securities) and (ii) any charges taken to write off any goodwill included on the Company’s balance sheet on the Issue Date to the extent such charges are required by FASB ASC 320 (Investments— Debt and Equity Securities) and ASC 350 (Intangibles—Goodwill and Others).

Trade Payables ” means, with respect to any Person, any accounts payable to trade creditors created, assumed or Guaranteed by such Person arising in the ordinary course of business in connection with the acquisition of goods or services.

 

-36-


Trust Officer ” means, when used with respect to the Trustee, any officer within the corporate trust department of the Trustee, including any vice president, assistant vice president, assistant secretary, assistant treasurer, trust officer or any other officer of the Trustee who customarily performs functions similar to those performed by the Persons who at the time shall be such officers, respectively, or to whom any corporate trust matter is referred because of such person’s knowledge of and familiarity with the particular subject and who shall, in each case, have direct responsibility for the administration of this Indenture.

Trustee ” has the meaning assigned to such term in the preamble to this Indenture.

Uniform Commercial Code ” means the New York Uniform Commercial Code as in effect from time to time.

Unrestricted Definitive Note ” means one or more Definitive Notes that do not bear and are not required to bear the Private Placement Legend.

Unrestricted Global Note ” means a permanent Global Note substantially in the form of Exhibit A attached hereto (as such form may be modified in accordance with Section 2.2 hereof) that bears the Global Note Legend and that has the “Schedule of Exchanges of Interests in the Global Note” attached thereto, and that is deposited with or on behalf of and registered in the name of the Depositary, representing Notes that do not bear the Private Placement Legend.

Unrestricted Subsidiary ” means (1) any Subsidiary of the Company that at the time of determination shall be designated an Unrestricted Subsidiary by the Board of Directors of the Company in the manner provided below; and (2) any Subsidiary of an Unrestricted Subsidiary.

The Board of Directors of the Company may designate any Subsidiary of the Company (including any newly acquired or newly formed Subsidiary or a Person becoming a Subsidiary through merger or consolidation or Investment therein) to be an Unrestricted Subsidiary only if:

(1) such Subsidiary or any of its Subsidiaries does not own any Capital Stock or Indebtedness of or have any Investment in, or own or hold any Lien on any property of, any other Subsidiary of the Company that is not a Subsidiary of the Subsidiary to be so designated or otherwise an Unrestricted Subsidiary;

(2) all the Indebtedness of such Subsidiary and its Subsidiaries shall, at the date of designation, and will at all times thereafter while they are Unrestricted Subsidiaries, consist of Non-Recourse Debt;

(3) such designation and the Investment of the Company in such Subsidiary complies with Section 3.4 ;

(4) such Subsidiary, either alone or in the aggregate with all other Unrestricted Subsidiaries, does not operate, directly or indirectly, all or substantially all of the business of the Company and its Subsidiaries;

 

-37-


(5) such Subsidiary is a Person with respect to which neither the Company nor any of its Restricted Subsidiaries has any direct or indirect obligation:

(a) to subscribe for additional Capital Stock of such Person; or

(b) to maintain or preserve such Person’s financial condition or to cause such Person to achieve any specified levels of operating results; and

(6) on the date such Subsidiary is designated an Unrestricted Subsidiary, such Subsidiary is not a party to any agreement, contract, arrangement or understanding with the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary with terms substantially less favorable to the Company than those that might have been obtained from Persons who are not Affiliates of the Company.

Any such designation by the Board of Directors of the Company shall be evidenced to the Trustee by filing with the Trustee a Board Resolution of the Company giving effect to such designation and an Officer’s Certificate certifying that such designation complies with the foregoing conditions. If, at any time, any Unrestricted Subsidiary would fail to meet the foregoing requirements as an Unrestricted Subsidiary, it shall thereafter cease to be an Unrestricted Subsidiary for purposes of this Indenture and any Indebtedness of such Subsidiary shall be deemed to be Incurred as of such date.

The Board of Directors of the Company may designate any Unrestricted Subsidiary to be a Restricted Subsidiary; provided that immediately after giving effect to such designation, no Default or Event of Default shall have occurred and be continuing or would occur as a consequence thereof and the Company could Incur at least $1.00 of additional Indebtedness pursuant to Section 3.3(a) on a pro forma basis taking into account such designation.

U.S. Government Obligations ” means securities that are (1) direct obligations of the United States of America for the timely payment of which its full faith and credit is pledged or (2) obligations of a Person controlled or supervised by and acting as an agency or instrumentality of the United States of America the timely payment of which is unconditionally guaranteed as a full faith and credit obligation of the United States of America, which, in either case, are not callable or redeemable at the option of the issuer thereof, and shall also include a depositary receipt issued by a bank (as defined in Section 3(a)(2) of the Securities Act), as custodian with respect to any such U.S. Government Obligations or a specific payment of principal of or interest on any such U.S. Government Obligations held by such custodian for the account of the holder of such depositary receipt; provided that (except as required by law) such custodian is not authorized to make any deduction from the amount payable to the Holder of such depositary receipt from any amount received by the custodian in respect of the U.S. Government Obligations or the specific payment of principal of or interest on the U.S. Government Obligations evidenced by such depositary receipt.

U.S. Person ” means a U.S. Person as defined in Rule 902(k) of Regulation S under the Securities Act.

 

-38-


Voting Stock ” of a Person means all classes of Capital Stock of such Person then outstanding and normally entitled to vote in the election of directors, managers or trustees, as applicable, of such Person.

Wholly-Owned Subsidiary ” means a Restricted Subsidiary, all of the Capital Stock of which (other than directors’ qualifying shares or local ownership shares) is owned by the Company or another Wholly Owned Subsidiary.

SECTION 1.2. Other Definitions .

 

Term

   Defined in
Section

“actual knowledge”

   7.2(g)

“Additional Notes”

   2.3

“Affiliate Transaction”

   3.8(a)

“Agent Members”

   2.1(f)

“Asset Disposition Offer”

   3.7(c)

“Asset Disposition Offer Amount”

   3.7(d)

“Asset Disposition Offer Period”

   3.7(d)

“Asset Disposition Purchase Date”

   3.7(d)

“Bankruptcy Law”

   6.1

“Change of Control Offer”

   3.9(b)

“Change of Control Payment”

   3.9(b)(i)

“Change of Control Payment Date”

   3.9(b)(ii)

“Company Conference Call”

   3.2(b)(1)

“covenant defeasance option”

   8.1(b)

“Custodian”

   6.1

“Defaulted Interest”

   2.13

“DTC”

   2.1(b)

“Event of Default”

   6.1(a)

 

-39-


Term

   Defined in
Section

“Excess Proceeds”

   3.7(c)

“Guarantor Obligations”

   10.1

“legal defeasance option”

   8.1(b)

“Notice of Default”

   6.1

“Paying Agent”

   2.4

“payment default”

   6.1(a)(vi)(A)

“Redemption Date”

   5.4

“Registrar”

   2.4

“Reinstatement Date”

   3.11(b)

“Restricted Payment”

   3.4(a)(iv)

“Special Interest Payment Date”

   2.13(a)

“Special Record Date”

   2.13(a)

“Successor Company”

   4.1(a)(i)

“Successor Guarantor”

   4.2(a)(i)

“Suspended Covenants”

   3.11(a)

“Suspension Period”

   3.11(b)

“Unutilized Excess Proceeds”

   3.7(c)

SECTION 1.3. Rules of Construction . Unless the context otherwise requires:

(a) a term has the meaning assigned to it;

(b) an accounting term not otherwise defined has the meaning assigned to it in accordance with GAAP;

(c) “or” is not exclusive;

(d) “including” means including without limitation;

 

-40-


(e) words in the singular include the plural and words in the plural include the singular;

(f) unsecured Indebtedness shall not be deemed to be subordinate or junior to secured Indebtedness merely by virtue of its nature as unsecured Indebtedness;

(g) references to sections of, or rules under, the Securities Act or Exchange Act shall be deemed to include substitute, replacement or successor sections or rules adopted by the SEC from time to time;

(h) unless the context otherwise requires, any reference to an “Article,” “Section” or “clause” refers to an Article, Section or clause, as the case may be, of this Indenture; and

(i) the words “herein,” “hereof” and “hereunder” and any other words of similar import refer to this Indenture as a whole and not any particular Article, Section, clause or other subdivision.

ARTICLE II

The Notes

SECTION 2.1. Form and Dating .

(a) The Notes and the Trustee’s certificate of authentication shall be substantially in the form of Exhibit A hereto (as such form may be modified in accordance with Section 2.2 ), the terms of which are incorporated in and made a part hereof. The Notes may have notations, legends or endorsements approved as to form by the Company, and required by law, stock exchange rule, agreements to which the Company is subject or usage. Each Note shall be dated the date of its authentication. The Notes shall be issuable only in minimum denominations of $2,000 and integral multiples of $1,000 in excess thereof.

(b) The Notes shall initially be issued in the form of one or more Global Notes and The Depository Trust Company (“ DTC ”), its nominees, and their respective successors, shall act as the Depositary with respect thereto. Each Global Note (i) shall be registered in the name of the Depositary for such Global Note or the nominee of such Depositary, (ii) shall be delivered by the Trustee to such Depositary or held by the Trustee as custodian for the Depositary pursuant to such Depositary’s instructions, and (iii) shall bear a Global Note Legend in substantially the following form:

UNLESS THIS CERTIFICATE IS PRESENTED BY AN AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OF THE DEPOSITORY TRUST COMPANY, A NEW YORK CORPORATION (“DTC”), TO THE COMPANY OR ITS AGENT FOR REGISTRATION OF TRANSFER, EXCHANGE OR PAYMENT, AND ANY CERTIFICATE ISSUED IS REGISTERED IN THE NAME OF CEDE & CO. OR IN SUCH OTHER NAME AS IS REQUESTED BY AN AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OF DTC (AND ANY PAYMENT IS MADE TO CEDE & CO. OR TO SUCH OTHER ENTITY AS IS REQUESTED BY AN AUTHORIZED

 

-41-


REPRESENTATIVE OF DTC), ANY TRANSFER, PLEDGE OR OTHER USE HEREOF FOR VALUE OR OTHERWISE BY OR TO ANY PERSON IS WRONGFUL INASMUCH AS THE REGISTERED OWNER HEREOF, CEDE & CO., HAS AN INTEREST HEREIN.

THIS NOTE IS A GLOBAL NOTE WITHIN THE MEANING OF THE INDENTURE AND IS REGISTERED IN THE NAME OF THE DEPOSITARY OR A NOMINEE OF THE DEPOSITARY OR A SUCCESSOR DEPOSITARY. THIS NOTE IS NOT EXCHANGEABLE FOR SECURITIES REGISTERED IN THE NAME OF A PERSON OTHER THAN THE DEPOSITARY OR ITS NOMINEE EXCEPT IN THE LIMITED CIRCUMSTANCES DESCRIBED IN THE INDENTURE, AND NO TRANSFER OF THIS NOTE (OTHER THAN A TRANSFER OF THIS NOTE AS A WHOLE BY THE DEPOSITARY TO A NOMINEE OF THE DEPOSITARY OR BY A NOMINEE OF THE DEPOSITARY TO THE DEPOSITARY OR ANOTHER NOMINEE OF THE DEPOSITARY OR BY THE DEPOSITARY OR ANY SUCH NOMINEE TO A SUCCESSOR DEPOSITARY OR A NOMINEE OF SUCH SUCCESSOR DEPOSITARY) MAY BE REGISTERED EXCEPT IN THE LIMITED CIRCUMSTANCES DESCRIBED IN THE INDENTURE.

(c) Temporary Global Notes . Notes offered and sold in reliance on Regulation S will be issued initially in the form of a Regulation S Temporary Global Note, which will be deposited on behalf of the purchasers of the Notes represented thereby with the Trustee, at its New York office, as custodian for the Depositary, and registered in the name of the Depositary or the nominee of the Depositary for the accounts of designated agents holding on behalf of Euroclear or Clearstream, duly executed by the Company and authenticated by the Trustee as hereinafter provided. The Restricted Period with respect to a Regulation S Temporary Global Note will be terminated upon the receipt by the Trustee of a written certificate from the Depositary, together with copies of certificates from Euroclear and Clearstream certifying that they have received certification of non-United States beneficial ownership of 100% of the aggregate principal amount of such Regulation S Temporary Global Note (except to the extent of any beneficial owners thereof who acquired an interest therein during the Restricted Period pursuant to another exemption from registration under the Securities Act and who will take delivery of a beneficial ownership interest in a 144A Global Note or an IAI Global Note bearing a Private Placement Legend, all as contemplated by Section 2.7(b) hereof).

Following the termination of the Restricted Period, beneficial interests in such Regulation S Temporary Global Note will be exchanged for beneficial interests in the Regulation S Permanent Global Note pursuant to the Applicable Procedures. Simultaneously with the authentication of such Regulation S Permanent Global Note, the Trustee will cancel the Regulation S Temporary Global Note. The aggregate principal amount of the Regulation S Temporary Global Note and a Regulation S Permanent Global Note may from time to time be increased or decreased by adjustments made on the records of the Trustee and the Depositary or its nominee, as the case may be, in connection with transfers of interests therein as hereinafter provided.

 

-42-


The provisions of the “Operating Procedures of the Euroclear System” and “Terms and Conditions Governing Use of Euroclear” and the “General Terms and Conditions of Clearstream Banking” and “Customer Handbook” of Clearstream will be applicable to transfers of beneficial interests in a Regulation S Temporary Global Note and a Regulation S Permanent Global Note that are held by Participants through Euroclear or Clearstream.

(d) Except as permitted by Section 2.7(i)(B) , any Note not registered under the Securities Act shall bear the following Private Placement Legend on the face thereof:

THIS NOTE (OR ITS PREDECESSOR) WAS ORIGINALLY ISSUED IN A TRANSACTION EXEMPT FROM REGISTRATION UNDER THE SECURITIES ACT, AND THIS NOTE MAY NOT BE OFFERED, SOLD OR OTHERWISE TRANSFERRED IN THE ABSENCE OF SUCH REGISTRATION OR AN APPLICABLE EXEMPTION THEREFROM. EACH PURCHASER OF THIS NOTE IS HEREBY NOTIFIED THAT THE SELLER OF THIS NOTE MAY BE RELYING ON THE EXEMPTION FROM THE PROVISIONS OF SECTION 5 OF THE SECURITIES ACT PROVIDED BY RULE 144A THEREUNDER.

THE HOLDER OF THIS NOTE AGREES FOR THE BENEFIT OF THE ISSUER THAT (A) THIS NOTE MAY BE OFFERED, RESOLD, PLEDGED OR OTHERWISE TRANSFERRED, ONLY (I) IN THE UNITED STATES TO A PERSON WHOM THE SELLER REASONABLY BELIEVES IS A QUALIFIED INSTITUTIONAL BUYER (AS DEFINED IN RULE 144A UNDER THE SECURITIES ACT) IN A TRANSACTION MEETING THE REQUIREMENTS OF RULE 144A, (II) IN THE UNITED STATES TO INSTITUTIONAL ACCREDITED INVESTORS WITHIN THE MEANING OF RULE 501(a)(1), (2), (3) OR (7) UNDER THE SECURITIES ACT IF THE TRANSFEROR FIRST DELIVERS TO THE TRUSTEE A WRITTEN CERTIFICATE (IN THE FORM PROVIDED IN THE INDENTURE), INCLUDING THE CERTIFICATIONS, CERTIFICATES AND OPINION OF COUNSEL REQUIRED THEREIN, (III) OUTSIDE THE UNITED STATES IN AN OFFSHORE TRANSACTION IN ACCORDANCE WITH RULE 904 UNDER THE SECURITIES ACT, (IV) PURSUANT TO AN EXEMPTION FROM REGISTRATION UNDER THE SECURITIES ACT PROVIDED BY RULE 144 THEREUNDER (IF AVAILABLE) OR (V) PURSUANT TO AN EFFECTIVE REGISTRATION STATEMENT UNDER THE SECURITIES ACT, IN EACH OF CASES (I) THROUGH (V) IN ACCORDANCE WITH ANY APPLICABLE SECURITIES LAWS OF ANY STATE OF THE UNITED STATES, AND (B) THE HOLDER WILL, AND EACH SUBSEQUENT HOLDER IS REQUIRED TO, NOTIFY ANY PURCHASER OF THIS NOTE FROM IT OF THE RESALE RESTRICTIONS REFERRED TO IN (A) ABOVE.

(e) Each Regulation S Temporary Global Note shall bear the following Regulation S Temporary Global Note Legend on the face thereof:

THE RIGHTS ATTACHING TO THIS REGULATION S TEMPORARY GLOBAL NOTE, AND THE CONDITIONS AND PROCEDURES GOVERNING ITS EXCHANGE FOR DEFINITIVE NOTES, ARE AS SPECIFIED IN THE INDENTURE (AS DEFINED HEREIN).

 

-43-


(f) Each Regulation S Permanent Global Note shall bear the following Regulation S Legend on the face thereof:

THIS NOTE (OR ITS PREDECESSOR) WAS ORIGINALLY ISSUED IN A TRANSACTION ORIGINALLY EXEMPT FROM REGISTRATION UNDER THE SECURITIES ACT, AND MAY NOT BE TRANSFERRED IN THE UNITED STATES OR TO, OR FOR THE ACCOUNT OR BENEFIT OF, ANY U.S. PERSON EXCEPT PURSUANT TO AN AVAILABLE EXEMPTION FROM THE REGISTRATION REQUIREMENTS OF THE SECURITIES ACT AND ALL APPLICABLE STATE SECURITIES LAWS. TERMS USED ABOVE HAVE THE MEANINGS GIVEN TO THEM IN REGULATION S UNDER THE SECURITIES ACT.

Members of, or participants in, the Depositary (“ Agent Members ”) shall have no rights under this Indenture with respect to any Global Note held on their behalf by the Depositary, or the Trustee as its custodian and the Depositary may be treated by the Company, the Trustee and any agent of the Company or the Trustee as the absolute owner of the Global Note for all purposes whatsoever, including but not limited to notices and payments. Notwithstanding the foregoing, nothing herein shall prevent the Company, the Trustee or any agent of the Company or the Trustee from giving effect to any written certification, proxy or other authorization furnished by the Depositary or impair, as between the Depositary and its Agent Members, the operation of customary practices governing the exercise of the rights of a Holder of any Note. Any notice to be delivered to DTC (including, but not limited to, a notice of redemption) may be delivered electronically by the Trustee or the Company in accordance with the Applicable Procedures.

SECTION 2.2. Issuable in Series . The Notes may be issued from time to time in one or more series. Except as provided in Section 9.2 , all Notes will vote (or consent) as a single class with the other Notes and otherwise be treated as Notes for all purposes of this Indenture.

The following matters shall be established with respect to each series of Notes issued hereunder in a Notes Supplemental Indenture:

(1) the title of the Notes of the series (which title shall distinguish the Notes of the series from all other series of Notes);

(2) any limit (if any) upon the aggregate principal amount of the Notes of the series that may be authenticated and delivered under this Indenture (which limit shall not pertain to Notes authenticated and delivered upon registration of, transfer of, or in exchange for, or in lieu of, other Notes of the series pursuant to Section 2.7 , 2.8 , 2.11 , 3.7 , 3.9 or 5.8 );

(3) the date or dates on which the principal of and premium, if any, on the Notes of the series is payable or the method of determination and/or extension of such date or dates, and the amount or amounts of such principal and premium, if any, payments and methods of determination thereof;

 

-44-


(4) the rate or rates at which the Notes of the series shall bear interest, if any, or the method of calculating and/or resetting such rate or rates of interest, the date or dates from which such interest shall accrue or the method by which such date or dates shall be determined, and the Interest Payment Dates on which any such interest shall be payable;

(5) the period or periods within which, the price or prices at which, and other terms and conditions upon which Notes of the series (i) may be redeemed, in whole or in part, at the option of the Company, if the Company is to have the option or (ii) shall be redeemed, in whole or in part, upon the occurrence of specified events, if the Notes shall be subject to a mandatory redemption provision;

(6) if other than the principal amount thereof, the portion of the principal amount of Notes of the series that shall be payable upon declaration of acceleration of maturity thereof pursuant to Section 6.2 or the method by which such portion shall be determined;

(7) any addition to or change in the Events of Default which apply to any Notes of the series and any change in the right of the Trustee or the requisite Holders of such Notes to declare the principal amount thereof due and payable pursuant to Section 6.2 ; and

(8) any addition to or change in the covenants set forth in Article III .

The form of the Notes of such series, as set forth in Exhibit A , may be modified to reflect such matters as so established in such Notes Supplemental Indenture.

Such matters may also be established in a Notes Supplemental Indenture for any Additional Notes issued hereunder that are to be of the same series as any Notes previously issued hereunder. Notes that have the same terms described in the foregoing clauses (1)  though (8)  will be treated as the same series, unless otherwise designated by the Company.

For the avoidance of doubt, the Company, the Subsidiary Guarantors and the Trustee may enter into the Note Supplemental Indenture on the Issue Date without notice to or the consent of any Holder to provide for the issuance of the Initial Notes.

SECTION 2.3. Form of Execution and Authentication . An Officer shall sign the Notes for the Company by manual or facsimile signature.

If an Officer whose signature is on a Note no longer holds that office at the time the Note is authenticated, the Note shall nevertheless be valid.

A Note shall not be valid until authenticated by the manual signature of the Trustee. The signature of the Trustee shall be conclusive evidence that the Note has been authenticated under this Indenture.

 

-45-


The Trustee shall authenticate (i) Initial Notes for original issue on the Issue Date in an aggregate principal amount of $300,000,000 and (ii) subject to the Company’s compliance with Section 3.3 , one or more series of Notes (“ Additional Notes ”) (which may be of the same series as any Notes previously issued hereunder, or a different series), for original issue after the Issue Date (such Notes to be substantially in the form of Exhibit A as such form may be modified in accordance with Section 2.2 ) in an unlimited amount, in each case upon receipt of a written order of the Company (an “ Authentication Order ”). In addition, each such Authentication Order shall specify the amount of Notes to be authenticated, the date on which the Notes are to be authenticated, whether the securities are to be Initial Notes or Additional Notes and the aggregate principal amount of Notes outstanding on the date of authentication, and shall further specify the amount of such Notes to be issued as Global Notes or Definitive Notes. Such Notes shall initially be in the form of one or more Global Notes, which (i) shall represent, and shall be denominated in an amount equal to the aggregate principal amount of, the Notes to be issued or (ii) shall be registered in the name of the Depositary or its nominee.

The Trustee may appoint an authenticating agent acceptable to the Company to authenticate Notes. Unless limited by the terms of such appointment, an authenticating agent may authenticate Notes whenever the Trustee may do so. Each reference in this Indenture to authentication by the Trustee includes authentication by such agent. An authenticating agent has the same rights as an Agent to deal with the Company or any Affiliate of the Company.

SECTION 2.4. Registrar and Paying Agent . The Company shall maintain (i) an office or agency where Notes may be presented for registration of transfer or for exchange (including any co-registrar, the “ Registrar ”) and (ii) an office or agency where Notes may be presented for payment (“ Paying Agent ”). The Registrar shall keep a register of the Notes and of their transfer and exchange. The Company may appoint one or more co-registrars and one or more additional paying agents. The term “Paying Agent” includes any additional paying agent. The Company may change any Paying Agent, Registrar or co-registrar without prior notice to any Holder of a Note. The Company shall notify the Trustee in writing and the Trustee shall notify the Holders of the Notes of the name and address of any Agent not a party to this Indenture. The Company or any of its domestically incorporated Wholly-Owned Subsidiaries may act as Paying Agent, Registrar or co-registrar. The Company shall enter into an appropriate agency agreement with any Agent not a party to this Indenture. The agreement shall implement the provisions hereof that relate to such Agent. The Company shall notify the Trustee in writing of the name and address of any such Agent. If the Company fails to maintain a Registrar or Paying Agent, or fails to give the foregoing notice, the Trustee shall act as such, and shall be entitled to appropriate compensation in accordance with Section 7.6 .

The Company initially appoints the Trustee as Registrar and Paying Agent and to act as Notes Custodian with respect to the Notes.

SECTION 2.5. Paying Agent to Hold Money in Trust . The Company shall require each Paying Agent other than the Trustee to agree in writing that the Paying Agent shall hold in trust for the benefit of the Holders of the Notes or the Trustee all money held by the Paying Agent for the payment of principal of, premium, if any, and interest on the Notes, and shall notify the Trustee in writing of any Default by the Company in making any such payment. While any such Default continues, the Trustee may require a Paying Agent to pay all money held by it to the Trustee. The Company at any time may require a Paying Agent to pay all money held by such Paying Agent to the Trustee. Upon payment over to the Trustee, the Paying Agent

 

-46-


(if other than the Company or any of its domestically incorporated Wholly-Owned Subsidiaries) shall have no further liability for the money delivered to the Trustee. If the Company or any of its domestically incorporated Wholly-Owned Subsidiaries acts as Paying Agent, it shall segregate and hold in a separate trust fund for the benefit of the Holders of the Notes all money held by it as Paying Agent.

SECTION 2.6. Lists of Holders of the Notes . The Trustee shall preserve in as current a form as is reasonably practicable the most recent list available to it of the names and addresses of Holders of the Notes. If the Trustee is not the Registrar, the Company shall furnish to the Trustee at least seven Business Days before each Interest Payment Date and at such other times as the Trustee may request in writing a list in such form and as of such date as the Trustee may reasonably require of the names and addresses of Holders of the Notes, including the aggregate principal amount of the Notes held by each thereof.

SECTION 2.7. Transfer and Exchange .

(a) Transfer and Exchange of Global Notes . A Global Note may not be transferred as a whole except by the Depositary to a nominee of the Depositary, by a nominee of the Depositary to the Depositary or to another nominee of the Depositary, or by the Depositary or any such nominee to a successor Depositary or a nominee of such successor Depositary. Global Notes will be exchanged by the Company for Definitive Notes, subject to any applicable laws, only (i) if the Company delivers to the Trustee notice from the Depositary that (A) the Depositary is unwilling or unable to continue to act as Depositary for the Global Notes or (B) the Depositary is no longer a clearing agency registered under the Exchange Act and, in either case, the Company fails to appoint a successor Depositary within 90 days after the date of such notice from the Depositary or (ii) if there shall have occurred and be continuing an Event of Default with respect to the Notes and the Depositary so requests. In any such case, the Company will notify the Trustee in writing that, upon surrender by the Participants and Indirect Participants of their interests in such Global Note, certificated Notes will be issued to each Person that such Participants, Indirect Participants and DTC jointly identify as being the beneficial owner of the related Notes; provided that in no event shall the Regulation S Temporary Global Note be exchanged by the Company for Definitive Notes prior to (A) the expiration of the Restricted Period with respect thereto and (B) the receipt by the Registrar of any certificates required pursuant to Rule 903(b)(3)(ii)(B) under the Securities Act. Global Notes also may be exchanged or replaced, in whole or in part, as provided in Sections 2.8 and 2.11 . Every Note authenticated and delivered in exchange for, or in lieu of, a Global Note or any portion thereof, pursuant to this Section 2.7 or Sections 2.8 or 2.11 hereof, shall be authenticated and delivered in the form of, and shall be, a Global Note. A Global Note may not be exchanged for another Note other than as provided in this Section 2.7 . However, beneficial interests in a Global Note may be transferred and exchanged as provided in paragraph (b) or (c) below.

(b) Transfer and Exchange of Beneficial Interests in the Global Notes . The transfer and exchange of beneficial interests in the Global Notes shall be effected through the Depositary, in accordance with the provisions hereof and the Applicable Procedures. Beneficial interests in the Restricted Global Notes shall be subject to restrictions on transfer comparable to those set forth in this Indenture to the extent required by the Securities Act. Transfers of beneficial interests in the Global Notes also shall require compliance with the applicable subparagraphs below.

 

-47-


(i) Transfer of Beneficial Interests in the Same Global Note . Beneficial interests in any Restricted Global Note may be transferred to Persons who take delivery thereof in the form of a beneficial interest in the same Restricted Global Note in accordance with the transfer restrictions set forth in the Private Placement Legend; provided, however, that prior to the expiration of the Restricted Period with respect thereto, transfers of beneficial interests in a Regulation S Temporary Global Note may not be made to a U.S. Person or for the account or benefit of a U.S. Person (other than an Initial Purchaser). Beneficial interests in any Unrestricted Global Note may be transferred to Persons who take delivery thereof in the form of a beneficial interest in an Unrestricted Global Note. No written orders or instructions shall be required to be delivered to the Registrar to effect the transfers described in this subparagraph (i) unless specifically stated above.

(ii) All Other Transfers and Exchanges of Beneficial Interests in Global Notes . In connection with all transfers and exchanges of beneficial interests that are not subject to Section 2.7(b)(i) above, the transferor of such beneficial interest must deliver to the Registrar either:

(a) (1) a written order from a Participant or an Indirect Participant given to the Depositary in accordance with the Applicable Procedures directing the Depositary to credit or cause to be credited a beneficial interest in another Global Note in an amount equal to the beneficial interest to be transferred or exchanged; and

(2) instructions given in accordance with the Applicable Procedures containing information regarding the Participant account to be credited with such increase; or

(b) (1) a written order from a Participant or an Indirect Participant given to the Depositary in accordance with the Applicable Procedures directing the Depositary to cause to be issued a Definitive Note in an amount equal to the beneficial interest to be transferred or exchanged; and

(2) instructions given by the Depositary to the Registrar containing information regarding the Person in whose name such Definitive Note shall be registered to effect the transfer or exchange referred to in (1) above;

provided that in no event shall Definitive Notes be issued upon the transfer or exchange of beneficial interests in a Regulation S Temporary Global Note prior to (A) the expiration of the Restricted Period with respect thereto and (B) the receipt by the Registrar of any certificates required pursuant to Rule 903 under the Securities Act.

Upon satisfaction of all of the requirements for transfer or exchange of beneficial interests in Global Notes contained in this Indenture and the Notes or otherwise applicable under the Securities Act, the Trustee shall adjust the principal amount of the relevant Global Note(s) pursuant to Section 2.7(k) hereof.

 

-48-


(iii) Transfer of Beneficial Interests to Another Restricted Global Note . A beneficial interest in any Restricted Global Note may be transferred to a Person who takes delivery thereof in the form of a beneficial interest in another Restricted Global Note if the transfer complies with the requirements of subparagraph (ii) above and the Registrar receives the following:

(A) if the transferee will take delivery in the form of a beneficial interest in a 144A Global Note, then the transferor must deliver a certificate in the form of Exhibit B hereto, including the certifications in item (1) thereof;

(B) if the transferee will take delivery in the form of a beneficial interest in the Regulation S Temporary Global Note or a Regulation S Permanent Global Note, then the transferor must deliver a certificate in the form of Exhibit B hereto, including the certifications in item (2) thereof; or

(C) if the transferee will take delivery in the form of a beneficial interest in an IAI Global Note, then the transferor must deliver a certificate in the form of Exhibit B hereto, including the certifications, certificates and Opinion of Counsel required by item (3)(c) thereof.

(iv) Transfer and Exchange of Beneficial Interests in a Restricted Global Note for Beneficial Interests in an Unrestricted Global Note. A beneficial interest in any Restricted Global Note may be exchanged by any Holder thereof for a beneficial interest in an Unrestricted Global Note or transferred to a Person who takes delivery thereof in the form of a beneficial interest in an Unrestricted Global Note if the exchange or transfer complies with the requirements of Section 2.7(b)(ii) above and:

(A) such transfer is effected pursuant to an effective registration statement under the Securities Act; or

(B) the Registrar receives the following:

(A) if the holder of such beneficial interest in a Restricted Global Note proposes to exchange such beneficial interest for a beneficial interest in an Unrestricted Global Note, a certificate from such holder in the form of Exhibit C hereto, including the certifications in item (1)(a) thereof; or

(B) if the holder of such beneficial interest in a Restricted Global Note proposes to transfer such beneficial interest to a Person who shall take delivery thereof in the form of a beneficial interest in an Unrestricted Global Note, a certificate from such holder in the form of Exhibit B hereto, including the certifications in item (4) thereof;

and, in each such case set forth in this subparagraph (B), if the Company so requests or if the Applicable Procedures so require, an opinion of counsel in form reasonably acceptable to the Company to the effect that such exchange or transfer is in compliance with the Securities Act and that the restrictions on transfer contained herein and in the Private Placement Legend are no longer required in order to maintain compliance with the Securities Act.

 

-49-


If any such transfer is effected pursuant to subparagraph (A) or (B) above at a time when an Unrestricted Global Note has not yet been issued, the Company shall issue and, upon receipt of an Authentication Order in accordance with Section 2.3 hereof, the Trustee shall authenticate one or more Unrestricted Global Notes in an aggregate principal amount equal to the aggregate principal amount of beneficial interests exchanged or transferred pursuant to subparagraph (A) or (B) above.

Beneficial interests in an Unrestricted Global Note cannot be exchanged for, or transferred to Persons who take delivery thereof in the form of, a beneficial interest in a Restricted Global Note.

(c) Transfer and Exchange of Beneficial Interests for Definitive Notes .

(i) Transfer and Exchange of Beneficial Interests in Restricted Global Notes for Restricted Definitive Notes . Subject to Section 2.7(a) , if any holder of a beneficial interest in a Restricted Global Note proposes to exchange such beneficial interest for a Restricted Definitive Note or to transfer such beneficial interest to a Person who takes delivery thereof in the form of a Restricted Definitive Note, then upon receipt by the Registrar of the following documentation:

(A) if the holder of such beneficial interest in a Restricted Global Note proposes to exchange such beneficial interest for a Restricted Definitive Note, a certificate from such holder in the form of Exhibit C hereto, including the certifications in item (2)(a) thereof;

(B) if such beneficial interest is being transferred to a QIB in accordance with Rule 144A, a certificate to the effect set forth in Exhibit B hereto, including the certifications in item (1) thereof;

(C) if such beneficial interest is being transferred to a Non-U.S. Person in an offshore transaction in accordance with Rule 903 or Rule 904, a certificate to the effect set forth in Exhibit B hereto, including the certifications in item (2) thereof;

(D) if such beneficial interest is being transferred to an Institutional Accredited Investor in reliance on an exemption from the registration requirements of the Securities Act other than those listed in subparagraphs (B) through (C) above, a certificate to the effect set forth in Exhibit B hereto, including the certifications, certificates and Opinion of Counsel required by item (3)(c) thereof; or

(E) if such beneficial interest is being transferred pursuant to an exemption from the registration requirements of the Securities Act in accordance with Rule 144, a certificate to the effect set forth in Exhibit B hereto, including the certifications in item (3)(a) thereof,

 

-50-


the Trustee shall cause the aggregate principal amount of the applicable Global Note to be reduced accordingly pursuant to paragraph (k) below, and the Company shall execute and, upon receipt of an Authentication Order the Trustee shall authenticate and deliver to the Person designated in the certificate a Restricted Definitive Note in the appropriate principal amount. Any Restricted Definitive Note issued in exchange for a beneficial interest in a Restricted Global Note pursuant to this paragraph (c) shall be registered in such name or names and in such authorized denomination or denominations as the holder of such beneficial interest shall instruct the Registrar through instructions from the Depositary and the Participant or Indirect Participant. The Trustee shall deliver such Restricted Definitive Notes to the Persons in whose names such Notes are so registered. Any Restricted Definitive Note issued in exchange for a beneficial interest in a Restricted Global Note pursuant to this subparagraph (i) shall bear the Private Placement Legend and shall be subject to all restrictions on transfer contained therein.

Notwithstanding Section 2.7(c)(i)(A) and (C)  above, a beneficial interest in a Regulation S Temporary Global Note may not be exchanged for a Definitive Note or transferred to a Person who takes delivery thereof in the form of a Definitive Note prior to (A) the expiration of the Restricted Period with respect thereto and (B) the receipt by the Registrar of any certificates required pursuant to Rule 903(b)(3)(ii)(B) under the Securities Act, except in the case of a transfer pursuant to an exemption from the registration requirements of the Securities Act other than Rule 903 or Rule 904.

(ii) Transfer and Exchange of Beneficial Interests in Restricted Global Notes for Unrestricted Definitive Notes . Subject to Section 2.7(a) , a holder of a beneficial interest in a Restricted Global Note may exchange such beneficial interest for an Unrestricted Definitive Note or may transfer such beneficial interest to a Person who takes delivery thereof in the form of an Unrestricted Definitive Note only if:

(A) such transfer is effected pursuant to an effective registration statement under the Securities Act; or

(B) the Registrar receives the following:

(i) if the holder of such beneficial interest in a Restricted Global Note proposes to exchange such beneficial interest for an Unrestricted Definitive Note, a certificate from such holder in the form of Exhibit C hereto, including the certifications in item (1)(b) thereof; or

(ii) if the holder of such beneficial interest in a Restricted Global Note proposes to transfer such beneficial interest to a Person who shall take delivery thereof in the form of an Unrestricted Definitive Note, a certificate from such holder in the form of Exhibit B hereto, including the certifications in item (4) thereof;

and, in each such case set forth in this subparagraph (B), if the Company so requests or if the Applicable Procedures so require, an opinion of counsel in form reasonably acceptable to the Company to the effect that such exchange or transfer is in compliance with the Securities Act and that the restrictions on transfer contained herein and in the Private Placement Legend are no longer required in order to maintain compliance with the Securities Act.

 

-51-


(iii) Transfer and Exchange of Beneficial Interests in Unrestricted Global Notes for Unrestricted Definitive Notes . Subject to Section 2.7(a) , if any holder of a beneficial interest in an Unrestricted Global Note proposes to exchange such beneficial interest for a Definitive Note or to transfer such beneficial interest to a Person who takes delivery thereof in the form of a Definitive Note, then, upon satisfaction of the conditions set forth in subparagraph (b)(ii) above, the Trustee shall cause the aggregate principal amount of the applicable Global Note to be reduced accordingly pursuant to paragraph (k) below, and the Company shall execute and, upon receipt of an Authentication Order the Trustee shall authenticate and deliver to the Person designated in the certificate a Definitive Note in the appropriate principal amount. Any Definitive Note issued in exchange for a beneficial interest pursuant to this subparagraph (c)(iii) shall be registered in such name or names and in such authorized denomination or denominations as the holder of such beneficial interest shall instruct the Registrar through instructions from the Depositary and the Participant or Indirect Participant. The Trustee shall deliver such Definitive Notes to the Persons in whose names such Notes are so registered. Any Definitive Note issued in exchange for a beneficial interest pursuant to this subparagraph (c)(iii) shall not bear the Private Placement Legend.

(d) Transfer and Exchange of Definitive Notes for Beneficial Interests .

(i) Transfer and Exchange of Restricted Definitive Notes for Beneficial Interests in Restricted Global Notes . If any Holder of a Restricted Definitive Note proposes to exchange such Note for a beneficial interest in a Restricted Global Note or to transfer such Restricted Definitive Notes to a Person who takes delivery thereof in the form of a beneficial interest in a Restricted Global Note, then, upon receipt by the Registrar of the following documentation:

(A) if the Holder of such Restricted Definitive Note proposes to exchange such Note for a beneficial interest in a Restricted Global Note, a certificate from such Holder in the form of Exhibit C hereto, including the certifications in item (2)(b) thereof;

(B) if such Restricted Definitive Note is being transferred to a QIB in accordance with Rule 144A, a certificate to the effect set forth in Exhibit B hereto, including the certifications in item (1) thereof;

(C) if such Restricted Definitive Note is being transferred to a Non-U.S. Person in an offshore transaction in accordance with Rule 903 or Rule 904, a certificate to the effect set forth in Exhibit B hereto, including the certifications in item (2) thereof;

(D) if such Restricted Definitive Note is being transferred to an Institutional Accredited Investor in reliance on an exemption from the registration requirements of the Securities Act other than those listed in subparagraphs (B) through (C) above, a certificate to the effect set forth in Exhibit B hereto, including the certifications, certificates and Opinion of Counsel required by item (3)(c) thereof; or

 

-52-


(E) if such Restricted Definitive Note is being transferred pursuant to an exemption from the registration requirements of the Securities Act in accordance with Rule 144, a certificate to the effect set forth in Exhibit B hereto, including the certifications in item (3)(a) thereof,

the Trustee shall cancel the Restricted Definitive Note, increase or cause to be increased the aggregate principal amount of, in the case of clause (A) above, the appropriate Restricted Global Note, in the case of clause (B) above, the 144A Global Note, in the case of clause (C) above, the Regulation S Global Note, and in the case of clause (D) above, the IAI Global Note.

(ii) Transfer and Exchange of Restricted Definitive Notes for Beneficial Interests in Unrestricted Global Notes . A Holder of a Restricted Definitive Note may exchange such Note for a beneficial interest in an Unrestricted Global Note or transfer such Restricted Definitive Note to a Person who takes delivery thereof in the form of a beneficial interest in an Unrestricted Global Note only if the Registrar receives the following:

(a) if the Holder of such Definitive Notes proposes to exchange such Notes for a beneficial interest in an Unrestricted Global Note, a certificate from such Holder in the form of Exhibit C hereto, including the certifications in item (1)(c) thereof; or

(b) if the Holder of such Definitive Notes proposes to transfer such Notes to a Person who shall take delivery thereof in the form of a beneficial interest in an Unrestricted Global Note, a certificate from such Holder in the form of Exhibit B hereto, including the applicable certifications in item (4) thereof;

and, in each such case set forth in this Section 2.7(d)(ii), if the Company so requests or if the Applicable Procedures so require, an opinion of counsel in form reasonably acceptable to the Company to the effect that such exchange or transfer is in compliance with the Securities Act and that the restrictions on transfer contained in this Indenture and in the Private Placement Legend are no longer required in order to maintain compliance with the Securities Act.

Upon satisfaction of the conditions of any of the subparagraphs in this subparagraph (d)(ii), the Trustee shall cancel the Definitive Notes and increase or cause to be increased the aggregate principal amount of the Unrestricted Global Note.

(e) Transfer and Exchange of Unrestricted Definitive Notes for Beneficial Interests in Unrestricted Global Notes . A Holder of an Unrestricted Definitive Note may exchange such Note for a beneficial interest in an Unrestricted Global Note or transfer such Unrestricted Definitive Notes to a Person who takes delivery thereof in the form of a beneficial interest in an Unrestricted Global Note at any time. Upon receipt of a request for such an exchange or transfer, the Trustee shall cancel the applicable Unrestricted Definitive Note and increase or cause to be increased the aggregate principal amount of one of the Unrestricted Global Notes.

 

-53-


If any such exchange or transfer from an Unrestricted Definitive Note or a Restricted Definitive Note, as the case may be, to a beneficial interest is effected pursuant to subparagraph (ii)(B), (ii)(D) or (iii) above at a time when an Unrestricted Global Note has not yet been issued, the Company shall issue and, upon receipt of an Authentication Order in accordance with Section 2.3 , the Trustee shall authenticate one or more Unrestricted Global Notes in an aggregate principal amount equal to the principal amount of Unrestricted Definitive Notes or Restricted Definitive Notes, as the case may be, so transferred.

(f) Transfer and Exchange of Definitive Notes for Definitive Notes . Upon request by a Holder of Definitive Notes and such Holder’s compliance with the provisions of this paragraph (f), the Registrar shall register the transfer or exchange of Definitive Notes. Prior to such registration of transfer or exchange, the requesting Holder shall present or surrender to the Registrar the Definitive Notes duly endorsed or accompanied by a written instruction of transfer in form satisfactory to the Registrar duly executed by such Holder or its attorney, duly authorized in writing. In addition, the requesting Holder shall provide any additional certifications, documents and information, as applicable, required pursuant to the following provisions of this paragraph (f).

(g) Transfer of Restricted Definitive Notes to Restricted Definitive Notes . (i) Any Restricted Definitive Note may be transferred to and registered in the name of Persons who take delivery thereof in the form of a Restricted Definitive Note if the Registrar receives the following:

(A) if the transfer will be made pursuant to Rule 144A, then the transferor must deliver a certificate in the form of Exhibit B hereto, including the certifications in item (1) thereof;

(B) if the transfer will be made pursuant to Rule 903 or Rule 904, then the transferor must deliver a certificate in the form of Exhibit B hereto, including the certifications in item (2) thereof;

(C) if the transfer will be made to an Institutional Accredited Investor in reliance on an exemption from the registration requirements of the Securities Act other than those listed in subparagraphs (A) through (B) above, a certificate to the effect set forth in Exhibit B hereto, including the certifications, certificates and Opinion of Counsel required by item (3)(c) thereof; or

(D) if the transfer will be made pursuant to any other exemption from the registration requirements of the Securities Act, then the transferor must deliver a certificate in the form of Exhibit B hereto, including, if the Company so requests, a certification or opinion of counsel in form reasonably acceptable to the Company to the effect that such transfer is in compliance with the Securities Act.

(ii) Transfer and Exchange of Restricted Definitive Notes for Unrestricted Definitive Notes . Any Restricted Definitive Note may be exchanged by the Holder thereof for an Unrestricted Definitive Note or transferred to a Person or Persons who take delivery thereof in the form of an Unrestricted Definitive Note if:

 

-54-


(A) any such transfer is effected pursuant to an effective registration statement under the Securities Act; or

(B) the Registrar receives the following:

(A) if the Holder of such Restricted Definitive Notes proposes to exchange such Notes for an Unrestricted Definitive Note, a certificate from such Holder in the form of Exhibit C hereto, including the certifications in item (1)(d) thereof; or

(B) if the Holder of such Restricted Definitive Notes proposes to transfer such Notes to a Person who shall take delivery thereof in the form of an Unrestricted Definitive Note, a certificate from such Holder in the form of Exhibit B hereto, including the certifications in item (4) thereof;

and, in each such case set forth in this subparagraph (B), if the Company so requests, an opinion of counsel in form reasonably acceptable to the Company to the effect that such exchange or transfer is in compliance with the Securities Act and that the restrictions on transfer contained herein and in the Private Placement Legend are no longer required in order to maintain compliance with the Securities Act.

(h) Transfer of Unrestricted Definitive Notes to Unrestricted Definitive Notes . A Holder of Unrestricted Definitive Notes may transfer such Notes to a Person who takes delivery thereof in the form of an Unrestricted Definitive Note. Upon receipt of a request to register such a transfer, the Registrar shall register the Unrestricted Definitive Notes pursuant to the instructions from the Holder thereof.

(i) Private Placement Legend .

(A) Except as permitted by subparagraph (B) below, each Global Note (other than an Unrestricted Global Note) and each Definitive Note (and all Notes issued in exchange therefor or substitution thereof) shall bear the Private Placement Legend.

(B) Notwithstanding the foregoing, any Global Note or Definitive Note issued pursuant to subparagraph (b)(iv), (c)(ii), (c)(iii), (d)(ii), (e) or (g)(ii) of this Section 2.7 (and all Notes issued in exchange therefor or substitution thereof) shall not bear the Private Placement Legend.

(j) Global Note Legend . Each Global Note shall bear the Global Note Legend.

(k) Cancellation and/or Adjustment of Global Notes . At such time as all beneficial interests in a particular Global Note have been exchanged for Definitive Notes or a particular Global Note has been redeemed, repurchased or canceled in whole and not in part, each such Global Note shall be returned to or retained and canceled by the Trustee in accordance with Section 2.12 hereof. At any time prior to such cancellation, if any beneficial interest in a Global Note is exchanged for or transferred to a Person who will take delivery thereof in the

 

-55-


form of a beneficial interest in another Global Note or for Definitive Notes, the principal amount of Notes represented by such Global Note shall be reduced accordingly and an endorsement shall be made on such Global Note by the Trustee or by the Depositary at the direction of the Trustee to reflect such reduction; and if the beneficial interest is being exchanged for or transferred to a Person who will take delivery thereof in the form of a beneficial interest in another Global Note, such other Global Note shall be increased accordingly and an endorsement shall be made on such Global Note by the Trustee or by the Depositary at the direction of the Trustee to reflect such increase.

(l) General Provisions Relating to Transfers and Exchanges .

(i) To permit registrations of transfers and exchanges, the Company shall execute and the Trustee shall authenticate Global Notes and Definitive Notes upon receipt of an Authentication Order.

(ii) No service charge shall be made to a holder of a beneficial interest in a Global Note or to a Holder of a Definitive Note for any registration of transfer or exchange, but the Company may require payment of a sum sufficient to cover any transfer tax or similar governmental charge payable in connection therewith (other than any such transfer taxes or similar governmental charge payable upon exchange or transfer pursuant to Sections 2.3 , 2.11 , 3.7 , 3.9 and 5.8 ).

(iii) Neither the Registrar nor the Trustee shall be required to register the transfer of or exchange any Note selected for redemption in whole or in part, except for the unredeemed portion of any Note being redeemed in part.

(iv) All Global Notes and Definitive Notes issued upon any registration of transfer or exchange of Global Notes or Definitive Notes shall be the valid obligations of the Company, evidencing the same debt, and entitled to the same benefits hereof, as the Global Notes or Definitive Notes surrendered upon such registration of transfer or exchange.

(v) Neither the Trustee, the Registrar nor the Company shall be required (A) to issue, to register the transfer of or to exchange any Notes during a period beginning at the opening of business on a Business Day 15 days before the mailing of a notice of redemption of Notes and ending at the close of business on the day of such mailing or (B) to register the transfer of or to exchange any Note so selected for redemption in whole or in part, except the unredeemed portion of any Note being redeemed in part.

(vi) Prior to due presentment for the registration of a transfer of any Note, the Trustee, any Agent and the Company may deem and treat the Person in whose name any Note is registered as the absolute owner of such Note for the purpose of receiving payment of principal of and interest on such Notes and for all other purposes, and none of the Trustee, any Agent or the Company shall be affected by notice to the contrary.

(vii) The Trustee shall authenticate Global Notes and Definitive Notes in accordance with the provisions of Section 2.3 .

 

-56-


(viii) All certifications, certificates and Opinions of Counsel required to be submitted to the Registrar pursuant to this Section 2.7 to effect a registration of transfer or exchange may be submitted by facsimile.

(ix) The Trustee shall have no obligation or duty to monitor, determine or inquire as to compliance with any restrictions on transfer imposed under this Indenture or under applicable law with respect to any transfer of any interest in any Note (including any transfers between or among Participants or Indirect Participants) other than to require delivery of such certificates and other documentation or evidence as are expressly required by, and to do so if and when expressly required by the terms of, this Indenture, and to examine the same to determine substantial compliance as to form with the express requirements hereof.

(x) Neither the Trustee nor any Agent shall have any responsibility for any actions taken or not taken by the Depositary.

(xi) The Trustee shall have no responsibility or obligation to any Participant or Indirect Participant or any other Person with respect to the accuracy of the books or records, or the acts or omissions, of the Depositary or its nominee or of any participant or member thereof, with respect to any ownership interest in the Notes or with respect to the delivery to any Participant or Indirect Participant or other Person (other than the Depositary) of any notice (including any notice of redemption) or the payment of any amount, under or with respect to such Notes. All notices and communications to be given to the Holders and all payments to be made to Holders under the Notes shall be given or made only to or upon the order of the registered Holders (which shall be the Depositary or its nominee in the case of a Global Note). The rights of beneficial owners in any Global Note shall be exercised only through the Depositary subject to the customary procedures of the Depositary. The Trustee may rely and shall be fully protected in relying upon information furnished by the Depositary with respect to its Participants or Indirect Participants.

SECTION 2.8. Replacement Notes . If any mutilated Note is surrendered to the Trustee, or the Company and the Trustee receive evidence to their satisfaction of the destruction, loss or theft of any Note, the Company shall issue and the Trustee, upon receipt of an Authentication Order, shall authenticate a replacement Note if the Trustee’s requirements for replacements of Notes are met. The Holder must supply indemnity or security sufficient in the judgment of the Trustee and the Company to protect the Company, the Trustee, any Agent or any authenticating agent from any loss which any of them may suffer if a Note is replaced. The Company and the Trustee may charge for their fees and expenses in replacing a Note including amounts to cover any tax, assessment, fee or other governmental charge that may be imposed in relation thereto.

Every replacement Note is an obligation of the Company and shall be entitled to all of the benefits of this Indenture equally and proportionately with all other Notes duly issued here under.

SECTION 2.9. Outstanding Notes . The Notes outstanding at any time are all the Notes authenticated by the Trustee except for those canceled by it, those delivered to it for cancellation and those described in this Section 2.9 as not outstanding.

 

-57-


If a Note is replaced pursuant to Section 2.8 , it ceases to be outstanding unless the Trustee receives proof satisfactory to it that the replaced Note is held by a protected purchaser.

If the principal amount of any Note is considered paid under Section 3.1 hereof, it shall cease to be outstanding and interest on it shall cease to accrue.

Subject to Section 2.10 , a Note does not cease to be outstanding because the Company, a Subsidiary of the Company or an Affiliate of the Company holds the Note.

SECTION 2.10. Treasury Notes . In determining whether the Holders of the required principal amount of Notes have concurred in any direction, waiver or consent, Notes owned by the Company, any Subsidiary of the Company or any Affiliate of the Company shall be considered as though not outstanding, except that for purposes of determining whether the Trustee shall be protected in relying on any such direction, waiver or consent, only Notes which a Trust Officer actually knows to be so owned shall be so considered. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Notes that are to be acquired by the Company, any Subsidiary of the Company or an Affiliate of the Company pursuant to an exchange offer, tender offer or other agreement shall not be deemed to be owned by the Company, a Subsidiary of the Company or an Affiliate of the Company until legal title to such Notes passes to the Company, such Subsidiary or such Affiliate, as the case may be. Upon request of the Trustee, the Company shall furnish to the Trustee promptly an Officer’s Certificate listing and identifying all Notes, if any known by the Company to be owned or held by or for the account of any of the Company or any Affiliate of the Company, and the Trustee shall be entitled to accept and rely upon such Officer’s Certificate as conclusive evidence of the facts therein set forth and of the fact that all Notes not listed therein are outstanding for the purpose of any determination.

SECTION 2.11. Temporary Notes . Until Definitive Notes are ready for delivery, the Company may prepare and, upon receipt of an Authentication Order the Trustee shall authenticate temporary Notes. Temporary Notes shall be substantially in the form of Definitive Notes but may have variations that the Company and the Trustee consider appropriate for temporary Notes. Without unreasonable delay, the Company shall prepare and the Trustee, upon receipt of an Authentication Order, shall authenticate definitive Notes in exchange for temporary Notes. Until such exchange, temporary Notes shall be entitled to the same rights, benefits and privileges as Definitive Notes.

SECTION 2.12. Cancellation . The Company at any time may deliver Notes to the Trustee for cancellation. The Registrar and Paying Agent shall forward to the Trustee any Notes surrendered to them for registration of transfer, exchange or payment. The Trustee shall cancel all Notes surrendered for registration of transfer, exchange, payment, replacement or cancellation and shall dispose of all canceled Notes in its customary manner (subject to the record retention requirements of the Exchange Act). The Company may not issue new Notes to replace Notes that it has redeemed or paid or that have been delivered to the Trustee for cancellation.

SECTION 2.13. Payment of Interest; Defaulted Interest . Unless otherwise specified for Notes of any series in the applicable Notes Supplemental Indenture, as contemplated by Section 2.2 , interest on any Note which is payable, and is punctually paid or

 

-58-


duly provided for, on any Interest Payment Date shall be paid to the Person in whose name such Note (or one or more predecessor Notes) is registered at the close of business on the regular Record Date for such interest at the office or agency of the Company maintained for such purpose pursuant to Section 2.4 .

Any interest on any Note which is payable, but is not paid when the same becomes due and payable and such nonpayment continues for a period of 30 days shall forthwith cease to be payable to the Holder on the regular Record Date by virtue of having been such Holder, and such defaulted interest and (to the extent lawful) interest on such defaulted interest at the rate borne by such Notes (such defaulted interest and interest thereon herein collectively called “ Defaulted Interest ”) shall be paid by the Company, at its election in each case, as provided in clause (a)  or (b)  below:

(a) The Company may elect to make payment of any Defaulted Interest to the Persons in whose names such Notes (or their respective predecessor Notes) are registered at the close of business on a Special Record Date (as defined below) for the payment of such Defaulted Interest, which shall be fixed in the following manner. The Company shall notify the Trustee in writing of the amount of Defaulted Interest proposed to be paid on each Note and the date (not less than 30 days after such notice unless a shorter period shall be acceptable to the Trustee) of the proposed payment (the “ Special Interest Payment Date ”), and at the same time the Company shall deposit with the Trustee an amount of money equal to the aggregate amount proposed to be paid in respect of such Defaulted Interest or shall make arrangements satisfactory to the Trustee for such deposit prior to the date of the proposed payment, such money when deposited to be held in trust for the benefit of the Persons entitled to such Defaulted Interest as in this clause provided. Thereupon the Company shall fix a record date (the “ Special Record Date ”) for the payment of such Defaulted Interest, which shall be not more than 15 days and not less than 10 days prior to the Special Interest Payment Date and not less than 10 days after the receipt by the Trustee of the notice of the proposed payment. The Company shall promptly notify the Trustee, in writing, of such Special Record Date and shall, or at the written request and in the name and at the expense of the Company, the Trustee shall cause notice of the proposed payment of such Defaulted Interest and the Special Record Date and Special Interest Payment Date therefor to be given in the manner provided for in Section 11.1 , not less than 10 days prior to such Special Record Date. Notice of the proposed payment of such Defaulted Interest and the Special Record Date and Special Interest Payment Date therefor having been so given, such Defaulted Interest shall be paid on the Special Interest Payment Date to the Persons in whose names such Notes (or their respective Predecessor Notes) are registered at the close of business on such Special Record Date and shall no longer be payable pursuant to the following clause (b) .

(b) The Company may make payment of any Defaulted Interest in any other lawful manner not inconsistent with the requirements of any securities exchange on which such Notes may be listed, and upon such notice as may be required by such exchange, if, after notice given by the Company to the Trustee of the proposed payment pursuant to this clause (b) , such manner of payment shall be deemed practicable by the Trustee.

 

-59-


Subject to the foregoing provisions of this Section, each Note delivered under this Indenture upon registration of transfer of or in exchange for or in lieu of any other Note shall carry the rights to interest accrued and unpaid, and to accrue, which were carried by such other Note.

SECTION 2.14. CUSIP and ISIN Numbers . The Company in issuing the Notes may use “CUSIP” and “ISIN” numbers (if then generally in use). The Trustee shall not be responsible for the use of CUSIP and ISIN numbers, and the Trustee makes no representation as to their correctness as printed on any Note or notice to Holders. The Company shall promptly notify the Trustee in writing of any change in the CUSIP and ISIN numbers.

ARTICLE III

Covenants

SECTION 3.1. Payment of Notes . The Company shall promptly pay, or cause to be paid, the principal of, premium, if any, and interest on the Notes on the dates and in the manner provided in the Notes and in this Indenture. Principal, premium, if any, and interest shall be considered paid on the date due if on such date the Trustee or the Paying Agent holds in accordance with this Indenture money sufficient to pay all principal, premium, if any, and interest then due and the Trustee or the Paying Agent, as the case may be, is not prohibited from paying such money to the Holders on that date pursuant to the terms of this Indenture.

The Company shall pay interest on overdue principal at the rate specified therefor in the Notes.

Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Indenture, the Company may, to the extent it is required to do so by law, deduct or withhold income or other similar taxes imposed by the United States of America from principal or interest payments hereunder.

SECTION 3.2. Reports .

(a) So long as any notes are outstanding, the Company will furnish to the Trustee:

(1) (A) within 90 days after the end of each fiscal year of the Company, beginning with the first fiscal year ending after the Issue Date, annual audited financial statements for such fiscal year, including a “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” with respect to the periods presented prepared in accordance with GAAP and a report on the annual financial statements by the Company’s independent registered accounting firm (all of the foregoing financial information to be prepared on a basis substantially consistent with the corresponding financial information included in the Offering Memorandum) and (B) with respect to any Insurance Subsidiary (other than any Insurance Subsidiary that is a Foreign Subsidiary), within 5 days following the date such form is filed with the Insurance Regulatory Authority of such Insurance Subsidiary’s jurisdiction of legal domicile, the audited Annual Statement of such Insurance Subsidiary that is not itself a Subsidiary of an Insurance Subsidiary as of the end of such fiscal year and for the fiscal year then ended, in the form filed with such Insurance Regulatory Authority;

 

-60-


(2) (A) within 45 days after the end of each of the first three fiscal quarters of each fiscal year of the Company (or 60 days with respect to the fiscal quarters ending March 31, 2013 and June 30, 2013), beginning with such fiscal quarter ending after the Issue Date, unaudited financial statements for the interim period as of, and for the period ending on, the end of such quarter, including a “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” with respect to the periods presented prepared in accordance with GAAP (all of the foregoing financial information to be prepared on a basis substantially consistent with the corresponding financial information included in the Offering Memorandum) and (B) with respect to any Insurance Subsidiary (other than any Insurance Subsidiary that is a Foreign Subsidiary), beginning with the first fiscal quarter of such Insurance Subsidiary ending after the Issue Date, within 5 days following the date such form is filed with the Insurance Regulatory Authority of such Insurance Subsidiary’s jurisdiction of legal domicile, a Quarterly Statement of such Insurance Subsidiary that is not itself a Subsidiary of an Insurance Subsidiary as of the end of such fiscal quarter and for the fiscal quarter then ended, in the form filed with such Insurance Regulatory Authority; and

(3) within five days of the time period specified for filing current reports on Form 8-K by the SEC, current reports containing information substantially similar to the information that would be required to be filed in a Current Report on Form 8-K under the Exchange Act on the Issue Date pursuant to Sections 1 and 4, Items 2.01, 2.03, 5.01, 5.02(a)(1) (with respect to independent directors only), 5.02(b) (with respect to officers and independent directors only), 5.02(c)(1) and (3), 5.02 (d)(1 ), (2), (3) and (4) (in each case, with respect to independent directors only) and 5.03(b) of Form 8-K (but excluding, for the avoidance of doubt, financial statements and exhibits that would be required pursuant to Item 9.01 of Form 8-K, other than financial statements and pro forma financial information required pursuant to clauses (a) and (b) of Item 9.01 of Form 8-K (in each case relating to transactions required to be reported pursuant to Item 2.01 of Form 8-K) to the extent available (as determined by the Company in Good Faith)) if the Company had been a reporting company under the Exchange Act; provided , however , that no such current report will be required to be furnished if the Company determines in its good faith judgment that such event is not material to Holders or the business, assets, operations, financial position or prospects of the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries, taken as a whole, or if the Company determines in its good faith judgment that such disclosure would otherwise cause material competitive harm to the business, assets, operations, financial position or prospects of the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries, taken as a whole; provided that such nondisclosure shall be limited only to those specific provisions that would cause material competitive harm and not the occurrence of the event itself.

Notwithstanding the foregoing, (a) the Company will not be required to furnish any information, certificates or reports required by (i) Section 302, Section 404 or Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, or related Items 307 or 308 of Regulation S-K, (ii) Regulation G or Item 10(e) of Regulation S-K promulgated by the SEC with respect to any non-generally

 

-61-


accepted accounting principles financial measures contained therein, (iii) Rule 3-09 of Regulation S-X or (iv) Rule 3-05 of Regulation S-X, (b) such reports will not be required to contain the separate financial information for Guarantors or Subsidiaries whose securities are pledged to secure the Notes contemplated by Rule 3-10 or Rule 3-16 of Regulation S-X, and (c) such reports shall not be required to present compensation or beneficial ownership information.

If the Company has designated any of its Subsidiaries as Unrestricted Subsidiaries and such Unrestricted Subsidiaries, either individually or collectively, would otherwise have been a Significant Subsidiary, then the quarterly and annual financial information required by the preceding paragraph shall include a summary presentation, in the footnotes to the financial statements, of the financial condition and results of operations of the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries.

The Company will be deemed to have satisfied the reporting requirements referred to above if the Company or any direct or indirect parent of the Company (including Harbinger Group Inc.) has filed reports containing such information with the SEC.

In addition, the Company and the Subsidiary Guarantors have agreed that they will make available to the Holders and to prospective investors, upon the request of such Holders, the information required to be delivered pursuant to Rule 144A(d)(4) under the Securities Act to the extent such Notes constitute “restricted securities” within the meaning of the Securities Act.

The Company shall maintain a website to which all of the reports and press releases required by this Section 3.2 are posted and made available to Holders, prospective investors that certify that they are qualified institutional buyers (or Non-U.S. Persons or Institutional Accredited Investors that are eligible to purchase the Notes), securities analysts and market makers (unless such reports are otherwise filed with the SEC).

Delivery of such reports, information and documents to the Trustee is for informational purposes only and the Trustee’s receipt of such shall not constitute constructive notice of any information contained therein or determinable from information contained therein, including the Company’s compliance with any of its covenants hereunder (as to which the Trustee is entitled to rely exclusively on Officer’s Certificates).

The Trustee shall have no obligation whatsoever to determine whether or not such information, documents or reports have been posted on the Company’s website.

(b) So long as any Notes are outstanding, the Company will also use its reasonable best efforts to:

(1) within 15 business days after providing the annual and quarterly information required pursuant to clause (1)  of Section 3.2(a) (or such earlier time as the Company determines), hold a conference call (the “ Company Conference Call ”) to discuss the results of operations for the relevant reporting period; and

 

-62-


(2) issue a press release to an internationally recognized wire service no fewer than three business days prior to the proposed date of the Company Conference Call, announcing the time and date of the Company Conference Call and either including all information necessary to access the call or directing Holders, prospective investors that certify that they are qualified institutional buyers (or Non-U.S. Persons or Institutional Accredited Investors that are eligible to purchase the Notes), securities analysts and market makers to contact the appropriate person at the Company to obtain such information. The Company Conference Call may be part of or separate from any earnings or similar conference call relating to the financial results of the Company or any of its Subsidiaries as long as such call otherwise meets the requirements of the foregoing clauses (1)  and (2) .

Notwithstanding the time periods set forth above, the Company Conference Call may be held following any similar financial reporting call of any direct or indirect parent of the Company (including Harbinger Group Inc.) discussing the Company’s results of operations; provided that the failure of such parent to a hold such a call shall not relieve the Company of its obligation to use reasonable best efforts to hold a Company Conference Call during the relevant reporting period (it being understood such a call and provision of a related press release may occur after the time periods set forth above).

(c) In addition, if at any time any direct or indirect parent company of the Company guarantees the Notes (there being no obligation of any such parent to do so), such entity holds no material assets other than cash, cash equivalents and the Capital Stock of the Company or any other direct or indirect parent of the Company (and performs the related incidental activities associated with such ownership) and would comply with the requirements of Rule 3-10 of Regulation S-X promulgated by the SEC (or any successor provision), the reports, information and other documents required to be furnished to Holders pursuant to this Section 3.2 may, at the option of the Company, be furnished by and be those of such parent rather than the Company.

(d) Any and all Defaults or Events of Default arising from a failure to furnish or file in a timely manner a report required by this Section 3.2 shall be deemed cured (and the Company shall be deemed to be in compliance with this Section 3.2 ) upon furnishing or filing such report or certification as contemplated by this Section 3.2 (but without regard to the date on which such report or certification is so furnished or filed); provided that such cure shall not otherwise affect the rights of the holders described pursuant to Section 6.1 hereof hereunder if the principal, premium, if any, and accrued interest have been accelerated in accordance with the terms of this Indenture and such acceleration has not been rescinded or cancelled prior to such cure.

SECTION 3.3. Limitation on Indebtedness .

(a) The Company will not, and will not permit any of its Restricted Subsidiaries to, directly or indirectly, Incur any Indebtedness (including Acquired Indebtedness); provided, however, that the Company and any Subsidiary Guarantor may Incur Indebtedness (including Acquired Indebtedness) if the Fixed Charge Coverage Ratio of the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries for the most recently ended four full fiscal quarters for which internal

 

-63-


financial statements are available immediately preceding the date on which such additional Indebtedness is Incurred would have been at least 2.00 to 1.00 determined on a pro forma basis (including a pro forma application of the net proceeds therefrom), as if the additional Indebtedness had been Incurred and the application of proceeds therefrom had occurred at the beginning of such four-quarter period.

(b) The provisions of Section 3.3(a) shall not apply to the Incurrence of the following Indebtedness:

(i) Indebtedness of the Company evidenced by the Notes (other than Additional Notes) and Indebtedness of Subsidiary Guarantors evidenced by the Subsidiary Guarantees relating to the Notes (other than Additional Notes);

(ii) Guarantees by (x) the Company or a Subsidiary Guarantor (including any Restricted Subsidiary the Company elects to cause to become a Subsidiary Guarantor in connection therewith) of Indebtedness permitted to be Incurred by the Company or a Restricted Subsidiary in accordance with the provisions of this Indenture; provided that if such Indebtedness is by its express terms subordinated in right of payment to the Notes or the Guarantee of such Restricted Subsidiary, as applicable, any such guarantee of such Subsidiary Guarantor with respect to such Indebtedness shall be subordinated in right of payment to such Subsidiary Guarantor’s Guarantee with respect to the Notes substantially to the same extent as such Indebtedness is subordinated to the Notes or the Guarantee of such Restricted Subsidiary, as applicable and (y) Non-Guarantor Subsidiaries of Indebtedness Incurred by the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary in accordance with the provisions of this Indenture;

(iii) Indebtedness of the Company owing to and held by any Restricted Subsidiary or Indebtedness of a Restricted Subsidiary owing to and held by the Company or any other Restricted Subsidiary; provided , however ,

(A) if the Company is the obligor on Indebtedness owing to a Non-Guarantor Subsidiary, such Indebtedness is expressly subordinated to the prior payment in full in cash of all obligations with respect to the Notes;

(B) if a Subsidiary Guarantor is the obligor on such Indebtedness and a Non-Guarantor Subsidiary is the obligee, such Indebtedness is subordinated in right of payment to the Subsidiary Guarantees of such Subsidiary Guarantor; and

(C) (1) any subsequent issuance or transfer of Capital Stock or any other event that results in any such Indebtedness being beneficially held by a Person other than the Company or a Restricted Subsidiary of the Company; and (2) any subsequent sale or other transfer of any such Indebtedness to a Person other than the Company or a Restricted Subsidiary of the Company; shall be deemed, in each case, to constitute an Incurrence of such Indebtedness by the Company or such Subsidiary, as the case may be;

(iv) any Indebtedness (other than the Indebtedness described in clause (i) ) outstanding on the Issue Date, and any Refinancing Indebtedness Incurred in respect of any Indebtedness described under clause (i) , this clause (iv)  or clauses (v)  or (xvii)  or Incurred pursuant to Section 3.3(a) ;

 

-64-


(v) Indebtedness (i) of the Company or any of the Subsidiary Guarantors Incurred to finance an acquisition of any assets (including Capital Stock), business or Person and (ii) of Persons Incurred and outstanding on the date on which such Person became a Restricted Subsidiary or was acquired by, or merged or consolidated with or into, the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary (other than Indebtedness Incurred in connection with, or in contemplation of, such acquisition, merger or consolidation); provided , however , that at the time such Person is acquired by, or merged or consolidated with or into, the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary and after giving effect to the Incurrence of such Indebtedness pursuant to this clause (v) , either (x) the Company would have been able to Incur $1.00 of additional Indebtedness pursuant to Section 3.3(a) or (y) the Fixed Charge Coverage Ratio for the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries would be greater than such Fixed Charge Coverage Ratio immediately prior to such acquisition, merger or consolidation;

(vi) Indebtedness under Hedging Obligations; provided , however , that such Hedging Obligations are entered into to fix, manage or hedge interest rate or currency exposure of the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary and not for speculative purposes;

(vii) the incurrence by the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary of Indebtedness (including Capitalized Lease Obligations, mortgage financings or purchase money obligations), incurred for the purpose of financing or reimbursing all or any part of the purchase price or cost of the acquisition, development, construction, purchase, lease, repair, addition or improvement of property (real or personal), plant, equipment or other fixed or capital assets that are used or useful in a Related Business, whether through the direct purchase of assets or the purchase of Equity Interests of any Person owning such assets (in each case, incurred within 365 days of such acquisition, development, construction, purchase, lease, repair, addition or improvement) and all Indebtedness incurred to refund, refinance or replace any such Indebtedness, in an aggregate principal amount which, when taken together with the principal amount of all other Indebtedness Incurred pursuant to this clause (vii) , will not exceed $10.0 million at any one time outstanding;

(viii) Indebtedness Incurred by the Company or its Restricted Subsidiaries in respect of workers’ compensation claims, health, disability or other employee benefits or property, casualty or liability insurance, self-insurance obligations, performance, bid, surety, appeal and similar bonds and completion Guarantees (not for borrowed money) or security deposits, letters of credit, banker’s guarantees or banker’s acceptances, in each case in the ordinary course of business (including letters of credit issued in connection with reinsurance transactions entered into in the ordinary course of business);

(ix) Indebtedness arising from agreements of the Company or a Restricted Subsidiary providing for indemnification, adjustment of purchase price, earn-outs or similar obligations, in each case, Incurred or assumed in connection with the acquisition or disposition of any business or assets of the Company or any business, assets or Capital

 

-65-


Stock of a Subsidiary, other than Guarantees of Indebtedness Incurred by any Person acquiring all or any portion of such business, assets or Capital Stock for the purpose of financing such acquisition;

(x) Indebtedness arising from the honoring by a bank or other financial institution of a check, draft or similar instrument, including, but not limited to, electronic transfers, wire transfers and commercial card payments drawn against insufficient funds in the ordinary course of business (except in the form of committed or uncommitted lines of credit); provided, however, that such Indebtedness is extinguished within ten Business Days of Incurrence;

(xi) Indebtedness Incurred by the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary in connection with third party insurance premium financing arrangements;

(xii) Indebtedness owed to banks and other financial institutions Incurred in the ordinary course of business of the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries with such banks or financial institutions that arise in connection with ordinary banking arrangements to provide treasury services or to manage cash balances of the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries;

(xiii) guarantees to suppliers or licensors (other than guarantees of Indebtedness) in the ordinary course of business;

(xiv) Indebtedness of the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary to the extent that the Net Proceeds thereof are promptly deposited to defease the Notes in accordance with Article VIII ;

(xv) Indebtedness in connection with Permitted Transactions entered into by Insurance Subsidiaries or by the Company in connection with Investments permitted by clause (18) of the definition of “Permitted Investment”;

(xvi) Non-Recourse Debt of Insurance Subsidiaries incurred in the ordinary course of business resulting from the sale or securitization of non-admitted assets, policy loans, CBOs and CMOs;

(xvii) Any Contribution Debt;

(xviii) Indebtedness of Non-Guarantor Subsidiaries in an aggregate outstanding principal amount which, when taken together with the principal amount of all other Indebtedness Incurred pursuant to this clause (xviii)  and then outstanding, will not exceed $25.0 million at any one time outstanding; and

(xix) in addition to the items referred to in clauses (i)  through (xviii)  above, Indebtedness of the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries in an aggregate outstanding principal amount which, when taken together with the principal amount of all other Indebtedness Incurred pursuant to this clause (xix)  and then outstanding, will not exceed $50.0 million at any one time outstanding.

 

-66-


(c) For purposes of determining compliance with, and the outstanding principal amount of any particular Indebtedness Incurred pursuant to and in compliance with, this Section 3.3 :

(i) in the event that Indebtedness meets the criteria of more than one of the types of Indebtedness described in Section 3.3(b) or could be Incurred pursuant to Section 3.3(a) , the Company, in its sole discretion, may divide and classify such item of Indebtedness (or any portion thereof) on the date of Incurrence and may later reclassify such item of Indebtedness (or any portion thereof) in any manner that complies with this Section 3.3 and only be required to include the amount and type of such Indebtedness once;

(ii) Guarantees of, or obligations in respect of letters of credit or banker’s acceptances related thereto relating to, Indebtedness that is otherwise included in the determination of a particular amount of Indebtedness shall not be included;

(iii) the principal amount of any Disqualified Stock of the Company or a Restricted Subsidiary, or Preferred Stock of a Restricted Subsidiary that is not a Subsidiary Guarantor, will be equal to the greater of the maximum mandatory redemption or repurchase price (not including, in either case, any redemption or repurchase premium) or the liquidation preference thereof;

(iv) Indebtedness permitted by this Section 3.3 need not be permitted solely by reference to one provision permitting such Indebtedness but may be permitted in part by one such provision and in part by one or more other provisions of this Section 3.3 permitting such Indebtedness; and

(v) the amount of Indebtedness issued at a price that is less than the principal amount thereof shall be equal to the amount of the liability in respect thereof determined in accordance with GAAP.

Accrual of interest, accrual of dividends, the accretion of accreted value or the amortization of debt discount, the payment of interest in the form of additional Indebtedness and the payment of dividends in the form of additional shares of Preferred Stock or Disqualified Stock shall not be deemed to be an Incurrence of Indebtedness for purposes of this Section 3.3 . The amount of any Indebtedness outstanding as of any date shall be (i) the accreted value thereof in the case of any Indebtedness issued with original issue discount or the aggregate principal amount outstanding in the case of Indebtedness issued with interest payable-in-kind, (ii) the principal amount or liquidation preference thereof, together with any interest thereon that is more than 30 days past due, in the case of any other Indebtedness, (iii) in the case of the guarantee by a specified Person of Indebtedness of another Person, the maximum liability to which the specified Person may be subject upon the occurrence of the contingency giving rise to the obligation and (iv) in the case of Indebtedness of others guaranteed solely by means of a Lien on any asset or property of the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary (and not to their other assets or properties generally), the lesser of (x) the Fair Market Value of such asset or property on the date on which such Indebtedness is Incurred and (y) the amount of the Indebtedness so secured.

 

-67-


(d) For purposes of determining compliance with any U.S. dollar-denominated restriction on the Incurrence of Indebtedness, the U.S. dollar-equivalent principal amount of Indebtedness denominated in a foreign currency shall be calculated based on the relevant currency exchange rate in effect on the date such Indebtedness was Incurred, in the case of term Indebtedness, or first committed, in the case of revolving credit Indebtedness; provided that if such Indebtedness is Incurred to Refinance other Indebtedness denominated in a foreign currency, and such Refinancing would cause the applicable U.S. dollar-denominated restriction to be exceeded if calculated at the relevant currency exchange rate in effect on the date of such refinancing, such U.S. dollar-denominated restriction shall be deemed not to have been exceeded so long as the principal amount of such Refinancing Indebtedness does not exceed the principal amount of such Indebtedness being Refinanced plus the amount of any reasonable premium (including reasonable tender premiums), defeasance costs and any reasonable fees and expenses incurred in connection with the issuance of such new Indebtedness. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Section 3.3 , the maximum amount of Indebtedness that the Company may Incur pursuant to this Section 3.3 shall not be deemed to be exceeded solely as a result of fluctuations in the exchange rate of currencies. The principal amount of any Indebtedness Incurred to Refinance other Indebtedness, if Incurred in a different currency from the Indebtedness being Refinanced, shall be calculated based on the currency exchange rate applicable to the currencies in which such Refinancing Indebtedness is denominated that is in effect on the date of such Refinancing.

SECTION 3.4. Limitation on Restricted Payments .

(a) Unless the Debt to Total Capitalization Ratio as of the last day of the Company’s most recently ended fiscal quarter for which internal financial statements are available that immediately precedes the date of any Restricted Payment, calculated immediately after giving effect to such Restricted Payment and any related transactions on a pro forma basis, is equal to or less than 17.5%, the Company shall not, and shall not permit any of its Restricted Subsidiaries, directly or indirectly, to:

(i) declare or pay any dividend or make any distribution (whether made in cash, securities or other property) on or in respect of its Capital Stock (including any payment in connection with any merger or consolidation involving the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries) other than:

(A) dividends or distributions payable solely in Capital Stock of the Company (other than Disqualified Stock) or in options, warrants or other rights to purchase such Capital Stock of the Company; and

(B) dividends or distributions by a Restricted Subsidiary payable to the Company or another Restricted Subsidiary (and if such Restricted Subsidiary is not a Wholly Owned Subsidiary, to its other holders of any series or class of Capital Stock on a pro rata basis in respect of such series or class or on a basis that results in the receipt by the Company or a Restricted Subsidiary of dividends or distributions of a greater value than it would receive on a pro rata basis);

 

-68-


(ii) purchase, redeem, retire or otherwise acquire for value any Capital Stock of the Company held by Persons other than the Company or a Restricted Subsidiary (other than in exchange for Capital Stock of the Company (other than Disqualified Stock));

(iii) make any principal payment on, or purchase, repurchase, redeem, defease or otherwise acquire or retire for value, prior to any scheduled maturity, scheduled repayment or scheduled sinking fund payment, any Subordinated Obligations other than the purchase, repurchase, redemption, defeasance or other acquisition of such Subordinated Obligations in anticipation of satisfying a sinking fund obligation, principal installment or final maturity, in each case due within one year of the date of purchase, repurchase, redemption, defeasance or acquisition; or

(iv) make any Restricted Investment

(all such payments and other actions referred to in clauses (i) through (iv) (other than any exception thereto) shall be referred to as a “ Restricted Payment ”), unless, at the time of and after giving effect to such Restricted Payment:

(1) no Default shall have occurred and be continuing (or would result therefrom);

(2) immediately after giving effect to such transaction on a pro forma basis, (1) the Company could Incur $1.00 of additional Indebtedness under Section 3.3(a) hereof; and (2) the Aggregate RBC Ratio exceeds 250%;

(3) the aggregate amount of such Restricted Payment and all other Restricted Payments declared or made subsequent to the Issue Date (excluding Restricted Payments made pursuant to clauses (i), (ii), (iii), (v), (vi), (vii), (viii), (ix), (x), (xi), (xiii), (xiv), (xv), (xvi), (xvii) and (xix) of Section 3.4(b) ) would not exceed the sum of, without duplication:

(A) 50% of the Consolidated Net Income of the Company during the period (taken as one accounting period) beginning with the first day of the fiscal quarter in which the Issue Date occurs to the end of the Company’s most recently ended fiscal quarter for which internal financial statements are available at the time of such Restricted Payment (or, in the case such Consolidated Net Income for such period is a deficit, minus 100% of such deficit); plus

(B) 100% of the aggregate Net Cash Proceeds and the Fair Market Value of marketable securities or other property received by the Company or a Restricted Subsidiary from the issue or sale of its Capital Stock (other than Disqualified Stock) or other capital contributions subsequent to the Issue Date, other than Net Cash Proceeds received from an issuance or sale of such Capital Stock to a Subsidiary of the Company or to an employee stock ownership plan, option plan or similar trust to the extent such sale to an employee stock ownership plan, option plan or similar trust is financed by loans from or Guaranteed by the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary unless such loans have been repaid with cash on or prior to the date of determination; plus

 

-69-


(C) the amount by which Indebtedness of the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries is reduced on the Company’s consolidated balance sheet upon the conversion or exchange subsequent to the Issue Date of any Indebtedness of the Company or its Restricted Subsidiaries for Capital Stock (other than Disqualified Stock) of the Company (less the amount of any cash, or the Fair Market Value of any other property, distributed by the Company upon such conversion or exchange); plus

(D) 100% of the Net Cash Proceeds and the Fair Market Value of property other than cash and marketable securities from the sale or other disposition (other than to the Company or a Restricted Subsidiary) of Restricted Investments made after the Issue Date and redemptions and repurchases of such Restricted Investments from the Company or its Restricted Subsidiaries and repayment of Restricted Investments in the form of loans or advances from the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries and releases of Guarantees that constitute Restricted Investments by the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries (other than in each case to the extent the Restricted Investment was made pursuant to Section 3.4(b)(xi) ); plus

(E) 100% of the Net Cash Proceeds and the Fair Market Value of property other than cash and marketable securities received by the Company or its Restricted Subsidiaries from the sale (other than to the Company or a Restricted Subsidiary) of the stock of an Unrestricted Subsidiary (other than in each case to the extent the Investment in such Unrestricted Subsidiary was made by the Company or a Restricted Subsidiary pursuant to Section 3.4(b)(xi) or (xvi)  or to the extent such Investment constituted a Permitted Investment); plus

(F) to the extent that any Unrestricted Subsidiary of the Company designated as such after the Issue Date is redesignated as a Restricted Subsidiary or any Unrestricted Subsidiary of the Company merges into or consolidates with the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries or any Unrestricted Subsidiary transfers, dividends or distributes assets to the Company or a Restricted Subsidiary, in each case after the Issue Date, the Fair Market Value of such Subsidiary as of the date of such redesignation or such merger or consolidation, or in the case of the transfer, dividend or distribution of assets of an Unrestricted Subsidiary to the Company or a Restricted Subsidiary, the Fair Market Value of such assets of the Unrestricted Subsidiary, as determined at the time of the redesignation of such Unrestricted Subsidiary as a Restricted Subsidiary or at the time of such merger, consolidation or transfer, dividend or distribution of assets (other than an Unrestricted Subsidiary to the extent the Investment in such Unrestricted Subsidiary was made by a Restricted Subsidiary pursuant to Section 3.4(b)(xi) or to the extent such Investment constituted a Permitted Investment).

 

-70-


(b) The provisions of Section 3.4(a) hereof shall not prohibit

(i) any purchase, repurchase, redemption, defeasance or other acquisition or retirement of Capital Stock, Disqualified Stock or Subordinated Obligations or any Restricted Investment made in exchange for, or out of the proceeds of a contribution to the common equity capital of the Company or the substantially concurrent sale of, Capital Stock of the Company (other than (x) Disqualified Stock and (y) Capital Stock issued or sold to a Subsidiary of the Company or an employee stock ownership plan, option plan or similar trust to the extent such sale to an employee stock ownership plan, option plan or similar trust is financed by loans from or Guaranteed by the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary unless such loans have been repaid with cash on or prior to the date of determination); provided, however, that the Net Cash Proceeds from such contribution or sale of Capital Stock shall be excluded from Section 3.4(a)(3)(B) ;

(ii) any purchase, repurchase, redemption, defeasance or other acquisition or retirement of Subordinated Obligations made in exchange for, or out of the proceeds of the substantially concurrent Incurrence of Refinancing Indebtedness;

(iii) any purchase, repurchase, redemption, defeasance or other acquisition or retirement of Disqualified Stock of the Company or a Restricted Subsidiary made in exchange for or out of the proceeds of the substantially concurrent sale of Disqualified Stock of the Company or such Restricted Subsidiary, as the case may be, so long as such Disqualified Stock is permitted to be Incurred pursuant to Section 3.3 hereof;

(iv) dividends paid or redemptions made within 60 days after the date of declaration or the giving of the redemption notice if at such date of declaration or notice such dividend or redemption would have complied with this provision;

(v) the purchase, repurchase, redemption or other acquisition (including by cancellation of indebtedness), cancellation or retirement for value of or payment in respect of (or payments to Holdings or any other direct or indirect parent of the Company to fund any such purchase, repurchase, redemption or other acquisition, cancellation or retirement for value) Capital Stock, or options, warrants, equity appreciation rights or other rights to purchase or acquire Capital Stock, of Holdings (or any other direct or indirect parent of the Company) or the Company held by any existing or former employees, management or directors of or consultants to Holdings, the Company or any Subsidiary of the Company or their assigns, estates or heirs, in each case in connection with the repurchase or payment provisions under employee stock option or stock purchase agreements or other compensatory agreements approved by the Board of Directors of Holdings or the Company as applicable, or the compensation committee thereof; provided that such purchases, repurchases, redemptions, acquisitions, cancellations or retirements pursuant to this clause (v)  will not exceed $3.0 million in the aggregate during any calendar year (with any unused amounts in a given calendar year

 

-71-


being available in succeeding calendar years so long as the amount does not exceed $6.0 million in any given calendar year); provided that amount in any calendar year (with any unused amounts in a given calendar year being available in succeeding calendar years) may be increased by an amount not to exceed:

(A) the Net Cash Proceeds from the sale of Capital Stock (other than Disqualified Stock) of the Company to, or capital contributions by, existing or former employees or members of management of the Company or any of its Subsidiaries that occurs after the Issue Date, to the extent the Net Cash Proceeds from the sale of such Capital Stock or capital contributions have not otherwise been applied to the payment of Restricted Payments (provided that the Net Cash Proceeds from such sales or contributions shall be excluded from Section 3.4(a)(3)(B) ); plus

(B) the cash proceeds of key man life insurance policies received by the Company or its Restricted Subsidiaries after the Issue Date relating to the Company’s or such Restricted Subsidiaries’ key persons who are so insured; less

(C) the amount of any Restricted Payments previously made with the Net Cash Proceeds described in the clauses (A) and (B) of this clause (v) ;

provided that cancellation of Indebtedness owing to the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary from any existing or former employees, management, directors or consultants of the Company, any Restricted Subsidiary, Holdings or any other direct or indirect parent of the Company in connection with a repurchase of Capital Stock of the Company, Holdings or any other direct or indirect parent of the Company will not be deemed to constitute a Restricted Payment for purposes of this Section 3.4 or any other provision of this Indenture;

(vi) (A) the accrual, declaration and payment of dividends to holders of any class or series of Disqualified Stock of the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary or Preferred Stock of any Restricted Subsidiary issued in accordance with the terms of this Indenture to the extent such dividends are included in the definition of Fixed Charges and payment of any redemption price or liquidation value of any such Disqualified Stock or Preferred Stock when due at final maturity in accordance with its terms and (B) the declaration and payment of dividends to a direct or indirect parent company of the Company, the proceeds of which will be used to fund the payment of dividends to holders of any class or series of Preferred Stock (other than Disqualified Stock) of such parent company issued after the Issue Date; provided that (i) the aggregate amount of dividends paid pursuant to this clause (B)  shall not exceed the aggregate amount of cash actually contributed to the common equity capital of Company from the sale of such Preferred Stock and (ii) the amount of cash used to make any payments pursuant to this clause (B)  shall be excluded from calculations pursuant to Section 3.4(a)(3)(B) and shall not be used for the purpose of any other Restricted Payment;

 

-72-


(vii) repurchases or other acquisitions of Capital Stock deemed to occur (i) upon the exercise of stock options, warrants, restricted stock units or other rights to purchase Capital Stock or other convertible securities if such Capital Stock represents a portion of the exercise price thereof or conversion price thereof or (ii) in connection with withholdings or similar taxes payable by any future, present or former employee, director or officer;

(viii) the purchase, repurchase, redemption, defeasance or other acquisition or retirement for value of any Subordinated Obligations in accordance with provisions applicable thereto similar to those described under Sections 3.7 and 3.9 hereof; provided that, prior to or simultaneously with such purchase, repurchase, redemption, defeasance or other acquisition or retirement, the Company has made a Change of Control Offer or Asset Disposition Offer, as applicable, under this Indenture and has completed the repurchase or redemption of all Notes validly tendered for payment in connection with such Change of Control Offer or Asset Disposition Offer, as applicable, under this Indenture;

(ix) cash payments in lieu of the issuance of fractional shares in connection with the exercise of warrants, options or other securities convertible into or exchangeable for Capital Stock of the Company or other exchanges of securities of the Company or a Restricted Subsidiary in exchange for Capital Stock of the Company;

(x) the purchase, repurchase, redemption, acquisition or retirement of Subordinated Obligations with Unutilized Excess Proceeds remaining after an Asset Disposition Offer pursuant to Section 3.7 hereof;

(xi) beginning with the calendar year commencing on January 1, 2014, other Restricted Payments not to exceed $30.0 million in the aggregate in any one calendar year;

(xii) the purchase of fractional shares of Capital Stock of the Company arising out of stock dividends, splits or combinations or mergers, consolidations or other acquisitions;

(xiii) in connection with any acquisition by the Company or any of its Subsidiaries, the receipt or acceptance of the return to the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries of Capital Stock of the Company constituting a portion of the purchase price consideration in settlement of indemnification claims or as a result of a purchase price adjustment (including earn outs or similar obligations);

(xiv) the distribution of rights pursuant to any shareholder rights plan or the redemption of such for nominal consideration in accordance with the terms of any shareholder rights plan;

(xv) payments or distributions to stockholders pursuant to appraisal rights required under applicable law in connection with any merger, consolidation or other acquisition by the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary;

 

-73-


(xvi) the distribution or transfer, as a dividend, Investment or otherwise, of shares of Capital Stock of Unrestricted Subsidiaries (other than Unrestricted Subsidiaries, the primary assets of which are cash and Cash Equivalents);

(xvii) payments made to Holdings (A) (i) to allow Holdings (or any other direct or indirect parent of the Company) to pay administrative expenses and corporate overhead, franchise fees, public company costs (including SEC and auditing fees) and customary director fees; (ii) to allow Holdings (or any other direct or indirect parent of the Company) to pay premiums and deductibles in respect of directors and officers insurance policies and umbrella excess insurance policies obtained from third-party insurers and indemnities for the benefit of its directors, officers and employees, and (iii) to allow Holdings (or any other direct or indirect parent of the Company) to pay reasonable fees and expenses incurred in connection with any unsuccessful debt or equity offering or any unsuccessful acquisition or strategic transaction by such direct or indirect parent company of the Company and (B) to allow Holdings (or any other direct or indirect parent of the Company) to pay (1) any taxes measured by income incurred by Holdings (or such direct or indirect parent of the Company), but only to the extent such taxes are attributable to the Company and its Subsidiaries in an amount not to exceed the amount of such taxes that would be payable by the Company and its Subsidiaries on a stand-alone basis if the Company had filed a consolidated return on behalf of an affiliated group (as defined in Section 1504 of the Code or any analogous provision of state, local or foreign law) including its Subsidiaries of which it were the common parent and (2) franchise and excise taxes, fees and other similar taxes and expenses required to maintain its existence; provided that any payments pursuant to this clause (B) in any period not otherwise deducted in calculating Consolidated Net Income shall be deducted in calculating Consolidated Net Income for such period (and shall be deemed to be a provision for taxes for purposes of calculating Consolidated EBITDA for such period);

(xviii) the payment by the Company of, or loans, advances, dividends or distributions by the Company to any direct or indirect parent of the Company to pay, dividends on the common stock or equity of the Company or any such direct or indirect parent following a public offering of such common stock or equity after the Issue Date in an amount not to exceed in any fiscal year 6% of the net cash proceeds received by the Company (whether directly, or indirectly through a contribution to common equity capital by any direct or indirect parent of the Company) in or from such public offering;

(xix) the declaration and payment of dividends as described in the “Use of Proceeds” section included in the Offering Memorandum.

provided , however , that at the time of and after giving effect to any Restricted Payment permitted under clauses (v) , (viii)  and (xviii) , no Default shall have occurred and be continuing or would occur as a consequence thereof.

(c) The amount of all Restricted Payments (other than cash) shall be the Fair Market Value on the date of such Restricted Payment of the assets or securities proposed to be paid, transferred or issued by the Company or such Restricted Subsidiary, as the case may be, pursuant to such Restricted Payment. The Fair Market Value of any cash Restricted Payment shall be its face amount and any non-cash Restricted Payment shall be determined conclusively in Good Faith by the Company.

 

-74-


For purposes of determining compliance with this Section 3.4 , in the event that a proposed Restricted Payment (or portion thereof) meets the criteria of more than one of the categories of Restricted Payments described in clauses (i) through (xix) of Section 3.4(b) , or is entitled to be made pursuant to Section 3.4(a) , the Company shall be entitled to divide and classify such Restricted Payment (or portion thereof) on the date of its payment in any manner that complies with this Section 3.4 .

If the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary makes a Restricted Investment or a Permitted Investment and the Person in which such Investment was made subsequently becomes a Restricted Subsidiary, to the extent such Investment resulted in a reduction of the amounts calculated under Section 3.4(a) or any other provision of this Section 3.4 or the definition of Permitted Investment (which was not subsequently reversed), then such amount shall be increased by the amount of such reduction to the extent of the lesser of (x) the amount of such Investment and (y) the Fair Market Value of such Investment at the time such Person becomes a Restricted Subsidiary.

(d) The Company shall not permit any Unrestricted Subsidiary to become a Restricted Subsidiary except pursuant to the last sentence of the definition of “Unrestricted Subsidiary”. For purposes of designating any Restricted Subsidiary as an Unrestricted Subsidiary, all outstanding Investments by the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries (except to the extent repaid) in the Subsidiary so designated shall be deemed to be Restricted Payments in an amount determined as set forth in the definition of “Investment”. Such designation shall be permitted only if a Restricted Payment in such amount would be permitted at such time and if such Subsidiary otherwise meets the definition of an Unrestricted Subsidiary.

SECTION 3.5. Limitation on Liens . The Company will not, and will not permit any of its Restricted Subsidiaries to create, incur, assume or otherwise cause or suffer to exist or become effective any Lien of any kind (other than Permitted Liens) upon any of their property or assets, now owned or hereafter acquired, that secures Indebtedness of the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries without effectively providing that the Notes are secured equally and ratably with (or, if the Indebtedness to be secured by the Lien is subordinated in right of payment to the Notes or any Subsidiary Guarantee, prior to) the Indebtedness so secured for so long as such Indebtedness is so secured.

With respect to any Lien securing Indebtedness that was permitted to secure such Indebtedness at the time such Indebtedness was Incurred, such Lien shall also be permitted to secure any Increased Amount of such Indebtedness. The “ Increased Amount ” of any Indebtedness shall mean any increase in the amount of such Indebtedness in connection with any accrual of interest, the accretion of accreted value, the amortization of original issue discount, the payment of interest in the form of additional Indebtedness with the same terms, the payment of dividends on preferred stock in the form of additional shares of preferred stock of the same class, accretion of original issue discount or liquidation preference and increases in the amount of Indebtedness outstanding solely as a result of fluctuations in the exchange rate of currencies or increases in the value of property securing Indebtedness described in clause (vii) of the definition of “Indebtedness.”

 

-75-


SECTION 3.6. Limitation on Restrictions on Distributions from Restricted Subsidiaries .

(a) The Company shall not, and shall not permit any Restricted Subsidiary to create or otherwise cause or permit to exist any consensual encumbrance or consensual restriction on the ability of any Restricted Subsidiary to:

(i) pay dividends or make any other distributions on its Capital Stock to the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries, or with respect to any other interest or participation in, or measured by, its profits (it being understood that the priority of any Preferred Stock in receiving dividends or liquidating distributions prior to dividends or liquidating distributions being paid on Common Stock shall not be deemed a restriction on the ability to make distributions on Capital Stock);

(ii) make any loans or advances to the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary (it being understood that the subordination of loans or advances made to the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary to other Indebtedness Incurred by the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary shall not be deemed a restriction on the ability to make loans or advances); or

(iii) sell, lease or transfer any of its property or assets to the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary (it being understood that such transfers shall not include any type of transfer described in clause (i)  or (ii)  of this Section 3.6(a) ).

(b) The restrictions in Section 3.6(a) shall not prohibit encumbrances or restrictions existing under or by reason of:

(i) any encumbrance or restriction pursuant to an agreement in effect at or entered into on the Issue Date, including, without limitation, this Indenture, the Notes and the Subsidiary Guarantees in effect on such date;

(ii) any encumbrance or restriction with respect to a Person or assets pursuant to an agreement in effect on or before the date on which such Person became a Restricted Subsidiary or was acquired by, merged into or consolidated with the Company or a Restricted Subsidiary (other than Capital Stock or Indebtedness Incurred as consideration in, or to provide all or any portion of the funds or credit support utilized to consummate, the transaction or series of related transactions pursuant to which such Person became a Restricted Subsidiary or was acquired by, merged into or consolidated with the Company or in contemplation of the transaction) or such assets were acquired by the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary; provided , that any such encumbrance or restriction shall not extend to any Person or the assets or property of the Company or any other Restricted Subsidiary other than the Person and its Subsidiaries or the assets and property so acquired and that, in the case of Indebtedness, was permitted to be Incurred pursuant to this Indenture;

 

-76-


(iii) any encumbrance or restriction pursuant to an agreement effecting a Refinancing of Indebtedness Incurred pursuant to an agreement referred to in clause (i)  or (ii)  of this Section 3.6(b) or this clause (iii) or contained in any amendment, restatement, modification, renewal, supplement, refunding, replacement or Refinancing of an agreement referred to in clause (i) or (ii) of this Section 3.6(b) or this clause (iii) ; provided , however , that the encumbrances and restrictions with respect to such Restricted Subsidiary contained in any such agreement are no less favorable (as determined in Good Faith by the Company) in any material respect, taken as a whole, to the Holders of the Notes than the encumbrances and restrictions contained in such agreements referred to in clause (i)  or (ii)  of this Section 3.6(b) on the Issue Date or the date such Restricted Subsidiary became a Restricted Subsidiary or was merged into or consolidated with a Restricted Subsidiary, whichever is applicable;

(iv) in the case of Section 3.6(a)(iii) , encumbrances or restrictions arising in connection with Liens permitted to be Incurred under the provisions of Section 3.5 hereof that apply only to the assets subject to such Liens;

(v) purchase money obligations for property acquired and Capitalized Lease Obligations, in each case, that impose restrictions of the nature described in Section 3.6(a)(iii) on the property so acquired;

(vi) contracts for the sale of assets, including customary restrictions with respect to a Subsidiary of the Company pursuant to an agreement that has been entered into for the sale or disposition of all or a portion of the Capital Stock or assets of such Subsidiary;

(vii) restrictions on cash or other deposits or net worth imposed by customers or lessors or required by insurance, surety or bonding companies under contracts entered into in the ordinary course of business;

(viii) any customary provisions in leases, subleases or licenses and other agreements entered into by the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary in the ordinary course of business;

(ix) encumbrances or restrictions arising or existing by reason of applicable law or any applicable rule, regulation, order, permit or grant, including for the avoidance of doubt, any encumbrance or restriction on any Insurance Subsidiary by any governmental authority having the power to regulate such Insurance Subsidiary;

(x) encumbrances or restrictions contained in or arising under indentures or debt instruments or other debt arrangements Incurred or Preferred Stock issued by the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary subsequent to the Issue Date pursuant to Section 3.3 hereof that are not more restrictive, taken as a whole (as determined in Good Faith by the Company), than those applicable to the Company in this Indenture on the Issue Date;

(xi) encumbrances or restrictions contained in or arising under indentures or other debt instruments or other debt arrangements Incurred or Preferred Stock issued by the Company or any Subsidiary subsequent to the Issue Date pursuant to Section 3.3

 

-77-


hereof or contained or arising in connection with any Reinsurance Agreement or Statutory Reserve Financing or agreement entered into by an Insurance Subsidiary or Special Purpose Subsidiary; provided that such encumbrances and restrictions contained in any agreement or instrument will not materially adversely affect the Company’s ability to make anticipated principal or interest payments on the Notes or are otherwise customary for financings or arrangements of that type (in each case, as determined in Good Faith by the Company);

(xii) restrictions or conditions contained in any trading, netting, operating, construction, service, supply, purchase or other agreement to which the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries is a party and entered into in the ordinary course of business; provided that such agreement prohibits the encumbrance of solely the property or assets of the Company or such Restricted Subsidiary that are the subject of such agreement, the payment rights arising thereunder or the proceeds thereof and does not extend to any other asset or property of the Company or such Restricted Subsidiary or the assets or property of any other Restricted Subsidiary.

(xiii) customary provisions in joint venture agreements and other similar agreements;

(xiv) customary provisions contained in leases, licenses and other similar agreements entered into in the ordinary course of business; and

(xv) any instrument governing any Indebtedness or Capital Stock of a Person that is an Unrestricted Subsidiary as in effect on the date that such Person becomes a Restricted Subsidiary, which encumbrance or restriction is not applicable to any Person, or the properties or assets of any Person, other than the Person who became a Restricted Subsidiary or the property or assets of the Person who became a Restricted Subsidiary, and was not entered into in contemplation of the designation of such Subsidiary as a Restricted Subsidiary; provided that in the case of Indebtedness, the incurrence of such Indebtedness as a result of such Person becoming a Restricted Subsidiary was permitted by the terms of this Indenture.

SECTION 3.7. Limitation on Sales of Assets and Subsidiary Stock .

(a) The Company shall not, and shall not permit any of its Restricted Subsidiaries to, make any Asset Disposition following the Issue Date unless :

(i) the Company or such Restricted Subsidiary, as the case may be, receives consideration at least equal to the Fair Market Value (such Fair Market Value to be determined as of the date of contractually agreeing to such Asset Disposition) of the assets subject to such Asset Disposition; and

(ii) at least 75% of the consideration from such Asset Disposition received by the Company or such Restricted Subsidiary, as the case may be, is in the form of cash or Cash Equivalents.

 

-78-


The Company shall determine the Fair Market Value of any consideration from such Asset Disposition that is not cash or Cash Equivalents.

(b) Any Net Available Cash received by the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary from any Asset Disposition shall be applied at the Company’s election:

 

  (x) to prepay, repay or repurchase secured Indebtedness of the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary or to prepay, repay or repurchase any Indebtedness of the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries which is not expressly subordinated to the prior payment in full in cash of all Obligations with respect to the Notes, in the case of the Company, or the Subsidiary Guarantees, in the case of a Subsidiary Guarantor and, if the Indebtedness repaid is revolving credit Indebtedness, to correspondingly reduce commitments with respect thereto;

 

  (y) to repay, prepay or repurchase Indebtedness of a Non-Guarantor Subsidiary, or

 

  (z) to reinvest in or acquire assets (including Capital Stock or other securities purchased in connection with the acquisition of Capital Stock or property of another Person that is or becomes a Restricted Subsidiary of the Company or that would constitute a Permitted Investment under clause (2)  of the definition thereof) used or useful in a Related Business.

(c) All Net Available Cash that is not applied or invested (or committed pursuant to a written agreement to be applied or invested) as provided in subclauses (x) , (y)  or (z)  of the preceding paragraph within 365 days after receipt (or in the case of any amount committed to be so applied or reinvested, which are not actually so applied or reinvested within 180 days following such 365 day period) will be deemed to constitute “ Excess Proceeds .” Within 30 days after the aggregate amount of Excess Proceeds exceeds $25.0 million, the Company will make an offer (“ Asset Disposition Offer ”) to all Holders of Notes and all holders of other Indebtedness that is pari passu with the Notes or any Subsidiary Guarantee containing provisions similar to those set forth in this Indenture with respect to offers to purchase with the proceeds of sales of assets, to purchase the maximum principal amount of the Notes and such other pari passu Indebtedness that may be purchased out of the Excess Proceeds. The Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries may make an Asset Disposition Offer under this section using Net Available Cash prior to the time any such Net Available Cash becomes Excess Proceeds, in which case such Net Available Cash shall be deemed to have been applied within the time frame required by this Section 3.7 . The offer price in any Asset Disposition Offer will be equal to 100% of the principal amount of the Notes and such other pari passu Indebtedness plus accrued and unpaid interest thereon to, but excluding, the date of purchase (subject to the rights of Holders of record on any record date to receive payments of interest on the related Interest Payment Date), and will be payable in cash. If any Excess Proceeds remain after consummation of an Asset Disposition Offer (“ Unutilized Excess Proceeds ”), the Company may use such Excess Proceeds for any purpose not otherwise prohibited by this Indenture. If the aggregate

 

-79-


principal amount of the Notes and such other pari passu Indebtedness tendered into such Asset Disposition Offer exceeds the amount of Excess Proceeds, the Notes and such other pari passu Indebtedness shall be purchased on a pro rata basis based on the principal amount of the Notes and such other pari passu Indebtedness tendered. Upon completion of each Asset Disposition Offer, the amount of Excess Proceeds shall be reset at zero.

(d) The Asset Disposition Offer shall remain open for a period of 20 Business Days following its commencement, except to the extent that a longer period is required by applicable law (the “ Asset Disposition Offer Period ”). No later than five Business Days after the termination of the Asset Disposition Offer Period (the “ Asset Disposition Purchase Date ”), the Company shall purchase the principal amount of Notes required to be purchased pursuant to this Section 3.7 (the “ Asset Disposition Offer Amount ”) or, if less than the Asset Disposition Offer Amount has been so validly tendered and not properly withdrawn, all Notes validly tendered in response to the Asset Disposition Offer.

(e) On or before the Asset Disposition Purchase Date, the Company shall, to the extent lawful, accept for payment, on a pro rata basis to the extent necessary, the Asset Disposition Offer Amount of Notes or portions of Notes validly tendered and not properly withdrawn pursuant to the Asset Disposition Offer, or if less than the Asset Disposition Offer Amount has been validly tendered and not properly withdrawn, all Notes validly tendered and not properly withdrawn, in each case in minimum denominations of $1,000 (except that no Note shall be purchased in part if the remaining principal amount would be less than $2,000). The Company or the Paying Agent, as the case may be, shall promptly (but in any case not later than five Business Days after termination of the Asset Disposition Offer Period) mail or deliver to each tendering Holder of Notes an amount equal to the purchase price of the Notes validly tendered and not properly withdrawn by such holder and accepted by the Company for purchase, and the Company shall promptly issue a new Note, and the Trustee, upon receipt of an Authentication Order, shall authenticate and mail or deliver such new Note to such Holder, in a principal amount equal to any unpurchased portion of the Note surrendered; provided that each such new Note shall be in a minimum principal amount of $2,000 or an integral multiple of $1,000 in excess thereof. Any Note not so accepted shall be promptly mailed or delivered by the Company to the Holder thereof.

(f) For the purposes of this Section 3.7 , the following are deemed to be Cash Equivalents: (x) any liabilities (as shown on the Company’s or such Restricted Subsidiary’s most recent balance sheet or in the Notes thereto) of the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary of the Company (other than liabilities that are by their terms subordinated to the Notes) that are assumed by the transferee of any such assets (including, without limitation, liabilities relating to insurance products); (y) any Notes or other obligations or other securities or assets received by the Company or such Restricted Subsidiary of the Company from such transferee that are converted within 180 days by the Company or such Restricted Subsidiary into cash (to the extent of the cash received); and (z) any Designated Non-cash Consideration received by the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries in such Asset Dispositions having an aggregate Fair Market Value (determined in Good Faith by the Company), taken together with all other Designated Non-cash Consideration received pursuant to this clause (z)  that is at that time outstanding, not to exceed $25.0 million at the time of the receipt of such Designated Non-cash Consideration (with the Fair Market Value of each item of Designated Non-cash Consideration being measured at the time received and without giving effect to subsequent changes in value).

 

-80-


(g) The Company shall comply, to the extent applicable, with the requirements of Section 14(e) of the Exchange Act and any other securities laws or regulations in connection with the repurchase of Notes pursuant to this Section 3.7 . To the extent that the provisions of any securities laws or regulations conflict with provisions of this Section 3.7 , the Company shall comply with the applicable securities laws and regulations and shall not be deemed to have breached its obligations under this Section 3.7 .

(h) Pending the final application of any such Net Available Cash, the Company or its Restricted Subsidiaries may temporarily reduce revolving indebtedness under any Debt Facility or otherwise invest such Net Available Cash in Cash Equivalents.

SECTION 3.8. Limitation on Affiliate Transactions .

(a) The Company shall not, and shall not permit any of its Restricted Subsidiaries to enter into or conduct any transaction (including the purchase, sale, lease or exchange of any property or the rendering of any service) with any Affiliate of the Company (an “ Affiliate Transaction ”) involving payments of consideration in excess of $5.0 million unless:

(i) the terms of such Affiliate Transaction, when viewed together with any related Affiliate Transactions, are not materially less favorable to the Company or such Restricted Subsidiary, as the case may be, than those that could have been obtained in a comparable transaction at the time of such transaction in arm’s-length dealings with a Person who is not an Affiliate; and

(ii) in the event such Affiliate Transaction involves an aggregate consideration in excess of $15.0 million, the terms of such transaction have been approved by a majority of the disinterested members of the Board of Directors of the Company (and such majority determines that such Affiliate Transaction satisfies the criteria in clause (i)  above).

(b) The provisions of Section 3.8(a) shall not apply to:

(i) any (x) Restricted Payment permitted to be made pursuant to Section 3.4 hereof and (y) Permitted Investment in any Person that is an Affiliate of the Company solely as a result of the ownership of Investments in such Person by the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary;

(ii) any issuance of securities, or other payments, awards or grants in cash, securities or otherwise pursuant to, or the funding of, employment agreements and other compensation arrangements, options to purchase Capital Stock of the Company pursuant to restricted stock plans, long-term incentive plans, stock appreciation rights plans, participation plans or similar employee benefits plans, pension plans or similar plans or agreements or arrangements approved by the Board of Directors of the Company or the compensation committee thereof;

 

-81-


(iii) loans or advances to employees, officers or directors of the Company or any Subsidiary of the Company or Holdings (or any other direct or indirect parent of the Company) in the ordinary course of business, in an aggregate amount outstanding at any time not in excess of $2.0 million (without giving effect to the forgiveness of any such loan);

(iv) any transaction between or among the Company and any Restricted Subsidiary or between or among Restricted Subsidiaries, and any Guarantees issued by the Company or a Restricted Subsidiary for the benefit of the Company or a Restricted Subsidiary;

(v) the payment of reasonable and customary compensation (including fees, benefits, severance, change of control payments and incentive arrangements) to, and employee benefit arrangements, including, without limitation, split-dollar insurance policies, and indemnity or similar arrangements provided on behalf of, directors, officers, employees and agents of the Company or any of its Subsidiaries, or Holdings (or any other direct or indirect parent of the Company), whether by charter, bylaw, statutory or contractual provisions;

(vi) the existence of, and the performance of obligations of the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries under the terms of any agreement to which the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries is a party as of or on the Issue Date, as these agreements may be amended, modified, supplemented, extended or renewed from time to time; provided , however , that any future amendment, modification, supplement, extension or renewal entered into after the Issue Date shall be permitted to the extent that its terms, taken as a whole, are not more disadvantageous to the Holders of the Notes in any material respect, as determined in Good Faith by the Company, than the terms of the agreements in effect on the Issue Date;

(vii) any agreement between any Person and an Affiliate of such Person existing at the time such Person is acquired by or merged with or into or consolidated with the Company or a Restricted Subsidiary; provided that such agreement was not entered into in contemplation of such acquisition, merger or consolidation, or any amendment thereto (so long as any such amendment is not disadvantageous in any material respect to the Holders, as determined in Good Faith by the Company, when taken as a whole as compared to the applicable agreement as in effect on the date of such acquisition or merger);

(viii) insurance transactions, intercompany pooling and other reinsurance transactions entered into in the ordinary course of business;

(ix) any purchases by the Company’s Affiliates of Indebtedness of the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries the majority of which Indebtedness is placed with Persons who are not Affiliates and payments of principal and interest on such Indebtedness;

 

-82-


(x) arrangements for indemnification payments for directors and officers of the Company and its Subsidiaries or Holdings (or any other direct or indirect parent of the Company);

(xi) any issuance or sale of Capital Stock (other than Disqualified Stock) to Affiliates of the Company and the granting of registration and other customary rights in connection therewith or any contribution to the Capital Stock of the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary;

(xii) payments by the Company or any of its Subsidiaries to any Affiliate for any financial advisory, financing, underwriting or placement services or in respect of other investment banking activities, including in connection with acquisitions or divestitures, which payments are on arms’-length terms and are approved by a majority of the disinterested members of the Board of Directors of the Company in Good Faith;

(xiii) any transaction pursuant to which any Permitted Holder provides the Company and/or its Subsidiaries, at cost, with services, including services to be purchased from third-party providers, such as legal and accounting, tax, consulting, financial advisory, corporate governance, insurance coverage and other services which transaction is approved by a majority of the members of the Board of Directors or a committee thereof in Good Faith;

(xiv) transactions in which the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary, as the case may be, delivers to the Trustee a letter from an Independent Financial Advisor stating that such transaction is fair to the Company or such Restricted Subsidiary from a financial point of view or stating that the terms are not materially less favorable taken as a whole than those that might reasonably have been obtained by the Company or such Restricted Subsidiary in a comparable transaction at such time on an arms’ length basis from a Person that is not an Affiliate;

(xv) transactions with customers, clients, suppliers, joint ventures, joint venture partners, Unrestricted Subsidiaries or purchasers or sellers of goods and services and Investments by any Insurance Subsidiary in accordance with clause (18)  of the definition of “Permitted Investments”, in each case in the ordinary course of business (as determined by the Company in Good Faith) and on terms no less favorable than that available from non-affiliates (as determined by the Company in Good Faith) and otherwise not prohibited by this Indenture;

(xvi) any transaction with an Affiliate where the only consideration paid by the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary is Capital Stock of the Company (other than Disqualified Stock);

(xvii) the payment of all fees and expenses in connection with the offering of the Notes;

 

-83-


(xviii) any merger, consolidation or reorganization of the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary (otherwise permitted by this Indenture) with an Affiliate of the Company solely for the purpose of (a) reorganizing to facilitate an initial public offering of securities of the Company or a direct or indirect parent of the Company, (b) forming or collapsing a holding company structure or (c) reincorporating the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary in a new jurisdiction;

(xix) transactions between the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries and any Person that is an Affiliate solely because one or more of its directors is also a director of the Company or any direct or indirect parent of the Company; provided that such director abstains from voting as a director of the Company or such direct or indirect parent, as the case may be, on any matter involving such other Person;

(xx) any transaction entered into by an Insurance Subsidiary for which approval has been received from the applicable Insurance Regulatory Authority; provided that any direct involvement of the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries (other than such Insurance Subsidiary) in such transaction is on terms that are not materially less favorable taken as a whole than those that might reasonably have been obtained by the Company or such Restricted Subsidiary in a comparable transaction at such time on an arms’ length basis from a Person that is not an Affiliate, as determined by the Company in Good Faith; and

(xxi) the entry by the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries into a tax sharing agreement providing for payments consistent with Section 3.4(b)(xvii)(B) .

SECTION 3.9. Change of Control .

(a) If a Change of Control occurs, unless the Company has exercised its right to redeem all of the Notes as described under paragraph 6 of the applicable Notes Supplemental Indenture and all conditions precedent applicable to such redemption have been satisfied, each Holder shall have the right to require the Company to repurchase all or any part (in integral multiples of $1,000 except that no Note may be tendered in part if the remaining principal amount would be less than $2,000) of such Holder’s Notes at a purchase price in cash equal to 101% of the principal amount of the Notes plus accrued and unpaid interest, if any, to, but excluding, the date of purchase (subject to the right of Holders of record on the relevant Record Date to receive interest due on the relevant Interest Payment Date).

(b) Prior to or within 30 days following any Change of Control, except to the extent the Company has exercised its right to redeem all of the Notes under paragraph 6 of the applicable Notes Supplemental Indenture, the Company shall mail a notice (the “ Change of Control Offer ”) to each Holder or otherwise give notice in accordance with the applicable procedures of DTC, with a copy to the Trustee, stating:

(i) that a Change of Control Offer is being made and that all Notes properly tendered pursuant to such Change of Control Offer will be accepted for purchase by the Company at a purchase price in cash equal to 101% of the principal amount of such Notes plus accrued and unpaid interest, if any, to, but excluding, the date of purchase (subject to the right of Holders of record on a Record Date to receive interest on the relevant Interest Payment Date) (the “ Change of Control Payment ”);

 

-84-


(ii) the repurchase date (which shall be no earlier than 30 days nor later than 60 days from the date such notice is mailed or otherwise delivered in accordance with the applicable procedures of DTC) (the “ Change of Control Payment Date ”);

(iii) the procedures determined by the Company, consistent with this Indenture, that a Holder must follow in order to have its Notes repurchased;

(iv) that any Notes not tendered will continue to accrue interest in accordance with the terms of this Indenture;

(v) that, unless the Company defaults in the payment of the Change of Control Payment, all Notes accepted for payment pursuant to the Change of Control Offer will cease to accrue interest on the Change of Control Payment Date;

(vi) that Holders will be entitled to withdraw their election if the Paying Agent receives, not later than the close of business on the second Business Day preceding the Change of Control Payment Date, a facsimile transmission or letter setting forth the name of the Holder, the principal amount of the Notes delivered for purchase and a statement that such Holder is unconditionally withdrawing its election to have such Notes purchased;

(vii) If such notice is delivered prior to the occurrence of a Change of Control, stating that the Change of Control is conditional on the occurrence of such Change of Control; and

(viii) that Holders whose Notes are being purchased only in part will be issued new Notes equal in principal amount to the unpurchased portion of the Notes surrendered, which unpurchased portion must be equal to $2,000 in principal amount or an integral multiple of $1,000 in excess thereof.

(c) On the Change of Control Payment Date, the Company shall, to the extent lawful:

(i) accept for payment all Notes or portions of Notes (in principal amounts of $2,000 or larger integral multiples of $1,000 in excess thereof) properly tendered pursuant to the Change of Control Offer;

(ii) deposit with the Paying Agent an amount equal to the Change of Control Payment in respect of all Notes or portions of Notes validly tendered; and

(iii) deliver or cause to be delivered to the Trustee for cancellation the Notes so accepted together with an Officer’s Certificate stating the aggregate principal amount of Notes or portions of Notes being purchased by the Company.

(d) The Paying Agent shall promptly submit electronically or mail to each Holder of Notes so tendered the Change of Control Payment for such Notes, and upon receipt of an Authentication Order the Trustee shall promptly authenticate and mail (or cause to be transferred by book entry) to each Holder a new Note (it being understood that, notwithstanding

 

-85-


anything in this Indenture to the contrary, no Opinion of Counsel or Officer’s Certificate will be required for the Trustee to authenticate or deliver such new Note) equal in principal amount to any unpurchased portion of the Notes surrendered, if any; provided that each such new Note will be in a minimum principal amount of $2,000 or integral multiples of $1,000 in excess thereof.

(e) The Company shall not be required to make a Change of Control Offer following a Change of Control if (i) a third party makes the Change of Control Offer in the manner, at the times and otherwise in compliance with the requirements set forth in this Indenture applicable to a Change of Control Offer made by the Company and purchases all Notes validly tendered and not withdrawn under such Change of Control Offer or (ii) a notice of redemption for all of the outstanding Notes has been given pursuant to this Indenture unless and until there is a default in payment of the applicable redemption price, plus accrued and unpaid interest to, but excluding, the proposed Redemption Date. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary herein, a Change of Control Offer may be made in advance of a Change of Control, conditional upon such Change of Control, if a definitive agreement is in place for the Change of Control at the time of making the Change of Control Offer.

(f) The Company shall comply, to the extent applicable, with the requirements of Rule 14e-1 under the Exchange Act and any other securities laws or regulations thereunder in connection with the repurchase of Notes pursuant to a Change of Control Offer. To the extent that the provisions of any securities laws or regulations conflict with provisions of this Indenture, the Company shall comply with the applicable securities laws and regulations and shall not be deemed to have breached its obligations described in this Indenture by virtue of such compliance.

SECTION 3.10. Future Subsidiary Guarantors .

(a) The Company shall cause (i) each Wholly Owned Subsidiary (other than any Excluded Subsidiary) that is formed or acquired following the Issue Date and (ii) any other Restricted Subsidiary of the Company that guarantees any Capital Market Indebtedness of the Company or any Subsidiary Guarantor to execute and deliver to the Trustee a supplemental indenture to this Indenture, substantially in the form of Exhibit E hereto, pursuant to which such Restricted Subsidiary shall fully and unconditionally Guarantee, on a joint and several basis, the full and prompt payment of the principal of, premium, if any, and interest in respect of the Notes and all other obligations under this Indenture, on the terms set forth in Article X. In addition, the Company may cause any Restricted Subsidiary that is not a Subsidiary Guarantor so to guarantee payment of the Notes and become a Subsidiary Guarantor.

SECTION 3.11. Effectiveness of Covenants .

(a) After the Issue Date, following the first day: (i) the Notes have an Investment Grade Rating from both Rating Agencies; and (ii) no Default has occurred and is continuing under this Indenture; the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries shall not be subject to Sections 3.3 , 3.4 , 3.6 , 3.7 , 3.8 , 3.10 and 4.1(a)(iv) (collectively, the “ Suspended Covenants ”). Additionally, upon the commencement of a Suspension Period (as defined below), the amount of Excess Proceeds will be reset to zero.

 

-86-


(b) If at any time the Notes’ credit rating is downgraded from an Investment Grade Rating by any Rating Agency, then the Suspended Covenants shall thereafter be reinstated as if such covenants had never been suspended (the “ Reinstatement Date ”) and be applicable pursuant to the terms of this Indenture (including in connection with performing any calculation or assessment to determine compliance with the terms of this Indenture), unless and until the Notes subsequently attain an Investment Grade Rating and no Default or Event of Default is in existence (in which event the Suspended Covenants shall no longer be in effect for such time that the Notes maintain an Investment Grade Rating); provided , however , that no Default, Event of Default or breach of any kind shall be deemed to exist or have occurred under this Indenture, the Notes or the Subsidiary Guarantees with respect to the Suspended Covenants based on, and none of the Company or any of its Subsidiaries shall bear any liability for, any actions taken or events occurring during the Suspension Period (as defined below), or any actions taken at any time pursuant to any contractual obligation arising prior to the Reinstatement Date, regardless of whether such actions or events would have been permitted if the applicable Suspended Covenants remained in effect during such period. The period of time between the date of suspension of the covenants and the Reinstatement Date is referred to as the “ Suspension Period ”.

(c) On the Reinstatement Date, all Indebtedness Incurred during the Suspension Period will be deemed to have been outstanding on the Issue Date, so that it is classified as permitted under Section 3.3(b)(iv) . In addition, for purposes of Section 3.8 hereof, all agreements and arrangements entered into by the Company and any Restricted Subsidiary with an Affiliate of the Company during the Suspension Period prior to such Reinstatement Date will be deemed to have been entered into on or prior to the Issue Date and for purposes of Section 3.6 hereof all contracts entered into during the Suspension Period prior to such Reinstatement Date that contain any of the restrictions contemplated by such covenant will be deemed to have been existing on the Issue Date. Calculations made after the Reinstatement Date of the amount available to be made as Restricted Payments under Section 3.4 hereof will be made as though such Section 3.4 had been in effect since the Issue Date and throughout the Suspension Period. Accordingly, Restricted Payments made during the Suspension Period will reduce the amount available to be made as Restricted Payments under such Section 3.4 to the extent such Restricted Payments were not otherwise permitted to be made pursuant to clauses (i)  through (xix)  of Section 3.4(b) hereof; provided that the amount available to be made as Restricted Payments on the Reinstatement Date pursuant to the first paragraph shall not be reduced below zero solely as a result of such Restricted Payments made during a Suspension Period.

(d) During any period when the Suspended Covenants are suspended, the Board of Directors of the Company may not designate any of the Company’s Subsidiaries as Unrestricted Subsidiaries pursuant to this Indenture, unless such designation would have complied with Section 3.4 hereof as if such Section 3.4 would have been in effect during such period.

(e) The Company shall deliver to the Trustee an Officer’s Certificate notifying the Trustee of any Reinstatement Date or the commencement of any Suspension Period and certifying that such suspension or reinstatement complied with the foregoing provisions, and in no event shall the Trustee be charged with the knowledge of such Suspension Period or Reinstatement Date, except to the extent that a Trust Officer has received such Officer’s Certificate. In the case of a Suspension Period such notice shall list the Suspended Covenants.

 

-87-


SECTION 3.12. Compliance Certificate . The Company shall deliver to the Trustee within 120 days after the end of each fiscal year of the Company (commencing with the fiscal year ending September 30, 2013) an Officer’s Certificate signed by the principal executive officer, the principal financial officer or the principal accounting officer stating whether or not the signers know of any Default or Event of Default that occurred during such period. If they do, the certificate shall describe the Default or Event of Default, its status and what action the Company is taking or proposes to take with respect thereto.

SECTION 3.13. Statement by Officers as to Default . The Company shall deliver to the Trustee, within 30 days after the knowledge thereof if such event is still continuing, written notice in the form of an Officer’s Certificate of any Event of Default or any event which, with notice or the lapse of time or both, would constitute an Event of Default under Section 6.1(a)(i) , (ii) , (iii) , (iv) , (v) , (viii)  or (ix) , which shall include their status and what action the Company is taking or proposing to take in respect thereof.

ARTICLE IV

Successor Company and Successor Guarantor

SECTION 4.1. When Company May Merge or Otherwise Dispose of Assets .

(a) The Company shall not consolidate with or merge with or into (whether or not the Company is the surviving corporation), or sell, assign, convey, transfer, lease or otherwise dispose of all or substantially all of the properties and assets of the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries, taken as a whole, in one or more related transactions, to, any Person unless:

(i) if other than the Company, the resulting, surviving or transferee Person (the “ Successor Company ”) shall be a corporation, partnership or limited liability company organized and existing under the laws of the United States of America, any State of the United States, the District of Columbia or any territory thereof;

(ii) the Successor Company (if other than the Company) and, in the case of a Successor Company that is not a corporation, a corporate co-issuer, assumes all of the obligations of the Company under the Notes and this Indenture pursuant to a supplemental indenture or other documentation executed and delivered to the Trustee;

(iii) immediately after giving effect to such transaction (and treating any Indebtedness which becomes an obligation of the Company, the Successor Company or any Restricted Subsidiary as a result of such transaction as having been Incurred by the Company, the Successor Company or such Restricted Subsidiary at the time of such transaction), no Default or Event of Default shall have occurred and be continuing;

 

-88-


(iv) immediately after giving pro forma effect to such transaction and any related financing transactions, as if such transactions had occurred at the beginning of the applicable four-quarter period;

(A) the Company or the Successor Company, as applicable, would be able to Incur at least $1.00 of additional Indebtedness pursuant to Section 3.3(a) hereof; or

(B) the Fixed Charge Coverage Ratio for the Successor Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries would be greater than the Fixed Charge Coverage Ratio immediately prior to such transaction; and

(v) if the Successor Company is not the Company, each Subsidiary Guarantor (unless it is the other party to the transactions above, in which case clause (i)  of Section 4.1(b) shall apply) shall have by supplemental indenture confirmed that its Subsidiary Guarantee shall apply to such Person’s obligations in respect of this Indenture and the Notes.

(b) Without compliance with Sections 4.1(a)(iii) and (iv) :

(i) any Restricted Subsidiary may consolidate with, merge with or into or to the Company or a Subsidiary Guarantor so long as no Capital Stock of the Restricted Subsidiary is distributed to any Person other than the Company or a Subsidiary Guarantor, and

(ii) the Company may merge with an Affiliate of the Company solely for the purpose of reincorporating the Company in another jurisdiction to realize tax or other benefits, so long as the amount of Indebtedness of the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries is not increased thereby.

(c) Upon satisfaction of the conditions set forth in Section 4.1(a) or 4.1(b) , as applicable, the Company shall be released from its obligations under this Indenture and the Successor Company shall succeed to, and be substituted for, and may exercise every right and power of, the Company under this Indenture, but, in the case of a lease of all or substantially all its assets, the predecessor Company will not be released from the obligation to pay the principal of and interest on the Notes.

(d) Solely for the purpose of computing amounts under Sections 3.4(a)(3)(A) , (a)(3)(B) , (a)(3)(C) and (a)(3)(D) , the Successor Company shall only be deemed to have succeeded and be substituted for the Company with respect to periods subsequent to the effective time of such merger, consolidation, combination or transfer of assets.

SECTION 4.2. When a Subsidiary Guarantor May Merge or Otherwise Dispose of Assets .

(a) The Company shall not permit any Subsidiary Guarantor to consolidate with or merge with or into (whether or not the Subsidiary Guarantor is the surviving corporation), or sell, assign, convey, transfer, lease, convey or otherwise dispose of all or substantially all of its properties and assets, in one or more related transactions, to any Person (other than to the Company or another Subsidiary Guarantor), unless :

 

-89-


(i) if such entity remains a Subsidiary Guarantor, (A) the resulting, surviving or transferee Person (the “ Successor Guarantor ”) shall be a corporation, partnership, trust or limited liability company organized and existing under the laws of the United States of America, any State of the United States, the District of Columbia or any other territory thereof; (B) the Successor Guarantor, if other than such Subsidiary Guarantor, expressly assumes in writing by supplemental indenture (and other applicable documents), executed and delivered to the Trustee all the obligations of such Subsidiary Guarantor under the Subsidiary Guarantee and this Indenture and (C) immediately after giving effect to such transaction (and treating any Indebtedness which becomes an obligation of the Successor Guarantor or any Restricted Subsidiary as a result of such transaction as having been Incurred by the Successor Guarantor or such Restricted Subsidiary at the time of such transaction), no Default or Event of Default shall have occurred and be continuing; and

(ii) if such transaction constitutes an Asset Disposition, the transaction is made in compliance with Section 3.7 hereof (it being understood that only such portion of the Net Available Cash as is required to be applied on the date of such transaction in accordance with the terms of this Indenture needs to be applied in accordance therewith at such time), to the extent applicable.

(b) Notwithstanding the foregoing, any Subsidiary Guarantor may (i) merge with or into or transfer all or part of its properties and assets to another Subsidiary Guarantor or the Company or (ii) merge with a Restricted Subsidiary of the Company solely for the purpose of reincorporating the Subsidiary Guarantor in a State of the United States or the District of Columbia, as long as the amount of Indebtedness of such Subsidiary Guarantor and its Restricted Subsidiaries is not increased thereby.

(c) Upon satisfaction of the conditions set forth in Section 4.2(a) or (b) , the applicable Subsidiary Guarantor shall be released from its obligations under this Indenture and its Subsidiary Guarantee and the Successor Guarantor shall succeed to, and be substituted for, and may exercise every right and power of, a Subsidiary Guarantor under this Indenture, but, in the case of a lease of all or substantially all its assets, a Subsidiary Guarantor will not be released from its obligations under its Subsidiary Guarantee.

ARTICLE V

Redemption of Notes

SECTION 5.1. Applicability of Article . Notes of or within any series that are redeemable in whole or in part before their Stated Maturity shall be redeemable in accordance with their terms and (except as otherwise specified for Notes of any series in the applicable Notes Supplemental Indenture, as contemplated by Section 2.2 ) in accordance with this Article V.

 

-90-


SECTION 5.2. Right of Redemption .

(a) Notes of any series may be redeemed, in whole at any time, or in part from time to time, subject to the conditions and in accordance with the provisions set forth in paragraph 6 of the applicable Notes Supplemental Indenture, which are hereby incorporated by reference and made a part of this Indenture.

(b) In connection with any redemption of Notes (including with the Net Cash Proceeds of an Equity Offering), any such redemption may, at the Company’s discretion, be subject to one or more conditions precedent, including, but not limited to, consummation of any related Equity Offering. In addition, if such redemption or notice is subject to satisfaction of one or more conditions precedent, such notice shall state that, in the Company’s discretion, the redemption date may be delayed until such time as any or all such conditions shall be satisfied (or waived by the Company in its sole discretion), or such redemption may not occur and such notice may be rescinded in the event that any or all such conditions shall not have been satisfied (or waived by the Company in its sole discretion) by the redemption date, or by the redemption date so delayed.

SECTION 5.3. Election to Redeem; Notice to Trustee of Optional Redemptions . If the Company elects to redeem Notes pursuant to paragraph 6 of the applicable Notes Supplemental Indenture, the Company shall furnish to the Trustee, at least 5 Business Days (or such shorter period as the Trustee may agree) before notice of redemption is required to be mailed or caused to be mailed to Holders pursuant to Section 5.5 , an Officer’s Certificate setting forth (a) the paragraph or subparagraph of such Note and/or Section of this Indenture and or Notes Supplemental Indenture pursuant to which the redemption shall occur, (b) the Redemption Date, (c) the principal amount of the Notes to be redeemed and (d) the redemption price. The Company shall deliver to the Trustee such documentation and records as shall enable the Trustee to select the Notes to be redeemed pursuant to Section 5.4 .

SECTION 5.4. Selection by Trustee of Notes to Be Redeemed . Unless otherwise specified for Notes of any series in the applicable Notes Supplemental Indenture as contemplated by Section 2.2 , in the case of any partial redemption, selection of the Notes for redemption will be made by the Trustee in compliance with the requirements of the principal national securities exchange, if any, on which the Notes are listed or, if the Notes are not listed, then on as nearly a pro rata basis as possible or by lot or such other similar method in accordance with the Applicable Procedures (subject to such rounding as may be necessary so that Notes are redeemed in whole increments of $1,000 and no Note of $2,000 in principal amount or less shall be redeemed in part), and in accordance with the Applicable Procedures. If any Note is to be redeemed in part only, the notice of redemption relating to such Note will state the portion of the principal amount thereof to be redeemed. A new Note in principal amount equal to the unredeemed portion thereof will be issued in the name of the Holder thereof upon cancellation of the original Note in accordance with Section 5.8 .

The Trustee shall promptly notify the Company in writing of the Notes selected for redemption and, in the case of any Notes selected for partial redemption, the principal amount thereof to be redeemed.

 

-91-


For all purposes of this Indenture, unless the context otherwise requires, all provisions relating to redemption of Notes shall relate, in the case of any Note redeemed or to be redeemed only in part, to the portion of the principal amount of such Note which has been or is to be redeemed.

SECTION 5.5. Notice of Redemption . Unless otherwise specified for Notes of any series in the applicable Notes Supplemental Indenture as contemplated by Section 2.2 , the Company shall mail or cause to be mailed by first class mail, a notice of redemption to each Holder whose Notes are to be redeemed at its registered address or in accordance with the applicable procedures of DTC not less than 30 nor more than 60 days prior to a date fixed for redemption (a “ Redemption Date ”), to each Holder of Notes to be redeemed; provided , however , that redemption notices may be mailed more than 60 days prior to a Redemption Date if the notice is issued in connection with Article VIII . At the Company’s written request, the Trustee shall give notice of redemption in the Company’s name and at the Company’s expense; provided that the Company shall have delivered to the Trustee, at least 5 Business Days (or such shorter period as the Trustee may agree) before notice of redemption is required to be mailed or caused to be mailed to Holder pursuant to this Section 5.5 (unless a shorter notice shall be agreed to by the Trustee), an Officer’s Certificate requesting that the Trustee give such notice and setting forth the information to be stated in such notice as provided in the following paragraph.

All notices of redemption shall be prepared by the Company and shall state:

(a) the Redemption Date,

(b) the redemption price, if then determinable, and if not, then a method for determination, and the amount of accrued interest, if any, to, but excluding, the Redemption Date payable as provided in Section 5.7 , if any,

(c) if less than all outstanding Notes are to be redeemed, the identification of the particular Notes (or portion thereof) to be redeemed, as well as the aggregate principal amount of Notes to be redeemed and the aggregate principal amount of Notes to be outstanding after such partial redemption,

(d) in case any Note is to be redeemed in part only, the notice which relates to such Note shall state that on and after the Redemption Date, upon surrender of such Note, the Holder shall receive, without charge, a new Note or Notes of authorized denominations for the principal amount thereof remaining unredeemed,

(e) that on the Redemption Date the redemption price (and accrued interest, if any, to, but excluding, the Redemption Date payable as provided in Section 5.7 ) shall become due and payable upon each such Note, or the portion thereof, to be redeemed, and, unless the Company defaults in making the redemption payment, that interest on Notes called for redemption (or the portion thereof) shall cease to accrue on and after said date,

(f) the place or places where such Notes are to be surrendered for payment of the redemption price and accrued interest, if any,

 

-92-


(g) the name and address of the Paying Agent,

(h) that Notes called for redemption must be surrendered to the Paying Agent to collect the redemption price,

(i) the CUSIP number, and that no representation is made as to the accuracy or correctness of the CUSIP number, if any, listed in such notice or printed on the Notes, and

(j) the Section of this Indenture pursuant to which the Notes are to be redeemed.

SECTION 5.6. Deposit of Redemption Price . By no later than 12:00 p.m. (New York City time) on the Redemption Date, the Company shall deposit with the Trustee or with a Paying Agent (or, if the Company is acting as its own Paying Agent, segregate and hold in trust as provided in Section 2.5 ) an amount of money sufficient to pay the redemption price of, and accrued interest on, all the Notes which are to be redeemed on that date. The Trustee or the Paying Agent shall promptly return to the Company any money deposited with the Trustee or the Paying Agent by the Company in excess of the amounts necessary to pay the redemption price.

SECTION 5.7. Notes Payable on Redemption Date . Notice of redemption having been given as aforesaid, the Notes so to be redeemed shall, on the Redemption Date, become due and payable at the redemption price therein specified (together with accrued interest, if any, to, but excluding, the Redemption Date) (except as provided for in Section 5.2(b) ) and from and after such date (unless the Company shall default in the payment of the redemption price and accrued interest) such Notes shall cease to bear interest. Upon surrender of any such Note for redemption in accordance with said notice, such Note shall be paid by the Company at the redemption price, together with accrued interest, if any, to, but excluding, the Redemption Date (subject to the rights of Holders of record on the relevant Record Date to receive interest due on the relevant Interest Payment Date).

If any Note called for redemption shall not be so paid upon surrender thereof for redemption, the principal (and premium, if any) shall, until paid, bear interest from the Redemption Date at the rate borne by the Notes.

If a Redemption Date is on or after a Record Date and on or before the related Interest Payment Date, the accrued and unpaid interest, if any, shall be paid to the Person in whose name the Note is registered at the close of business on such Record Date, and no additional interest shall be payable to Holders whose Notes shall be subject to redemption by the Company.

SECTION 5.8. Notes Redeemed in Part . Any Note which is to be redeemed only in part (pursuant to the provisions of this Article) shall be surrendered at the office or agency of the Company maintained for such purpose pursuant to Section 2.4 (with, if the Company so requires, due endorsement by, or a written instrument of transfer in form satisfactory to the Company duly executed by, the Holder thereof or such Holder’s attorney duly authorized in writing), and the Company shall execute, and, upon receipt of an Authentication Order, the Trustee shall authenticate and make available for delivery to the Holder of such Note

 

-93-


at the expense of the Company, a new Note or Notes, of any authorized denomination as requested by such Holder, in an aggregate principal amount equal to and in exchange for the unredeemed portion of the principal of the Note so surrendered, provided that each such new Note shall be in a minimum principal amount of $2,000 and integral multiples of $1,000 in excess thereof.

ARTICLE VI

Defaults and Remedies

SECTION 6.1. Events of Default .

(a) Each of the following is an event of default (an “ Event of Default ”):

(i) default in any payment of interest on any Note when the same becomes due, and the such default continues for a period of 30 days;

(ii) default in the payment of principal of or premium, if any, on any Note when the same becomes due at its Stated Maturity, upon optional redemption, upon required repurchase, upon declaration of acceleration or otherwise;

(iii) failure by the Company to comply with its obligations under Section 3.9 hereof or Article IV hereof;

(iv) failure by the Company to comply for 60 days after written notice as provided below with any of its obligations under the Notes or this Indenture (except as contained in clauses (a)(i) through (a)(iii) of this Section 6.1 );

(v) the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries defaults under any mortgage, indenture or instrument under which there is issued or by which there is secured or evidenced any Indebtedness for money borrowed by the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries (or the payment of which is guaranteed by the Company or any of its Restricted Subsidiaries), other than Indebtedness owed to the Company or a Restricted Subsidiary, whether such Indebtedness or Guarantee now exists, or is created after the Issue Date, which default:

(A) is caused by a failure to pay principal on such Indebtedness at its final stated maturity within the grace period provided in the agreements or instruments governing such Indebtedness (“ payment default ”); or

(B) results in the acceleration of such Indebtedness prior to its stated final maturity;

and, in each case, the principal amount of any such Indebtedness, together with the principal amount of any other such Indebtedness under which there has been a payment default or the maturity of which has been so accelerated, aggregates $25.0 million or more (or its foreign currency equivalent);

 

-94-


(vi) the Company or a Significant Subsidiary or group of Restricted Subsidiaries that, taken together (as of the date of the latest audited consolidated financial statements for the Company and its consolidated Subsidiaries), would constitute a Significant Subsidiary pursuant to or within the meaning of any Bankruptcy Law (as defined below):

(A) commences a voluntary case or proceeding with respect to itself;

(B) consents to the entry of an order for relief against it in an involuntary case or proceeding;

(C) consents to the appointment of a Custodian (as defined below) of it or for substantially all of its property; or

(D) makes a general assignment for the benefit of its creditors; or takes any comparable action under any foreign laws relating to insolvency;

(vii) a court of competent jurisdiction enters an order or decree under any Bankruptcy Law that:

(A) is for relief against the Company or any Significant Subsidiary or a group of Restricted Subsidiaries that, taken together (as of the date of the latest audited financial statements for the Company and its consolidated Subsidiaries), would constitute a Significant Subsidiary, in an involuntary case;

(B) appoints a Custodian of the Company, any Significant Subsidiary or a group of Restricted Subsidiaries that, taken together (as of the date of the latest audited financial statements for the Company and its consolidated Subsidiaries), would constitute a Significant Subsidiary, for any substantial part of its property; or

(C) orders the winding up or liquidation of the Company, any Significant Subsidiary or a group of Restricted Subsidiaries that, taken together (as of the date of the latest audited financial statements for the Company and its consolidated Subsidiaries), would constitute a Significant Subsidiary;

and the order or decree remains unstayed and in effect for any period of 60 consecutive days;

(viii) failure by the Company or any Significant Subsidiary or group of Restricted Subsidiaries that, taken together (as of the date of the latest audited consolidated financial statements for the Company and its consolidated Subsidiaries), would constitute a Significant Subsidiary to pay final and non-appealable judgments aggregating in excess of $25.0 million (or its foreign currency equivalent) (net of any amounts that are covered by insurance), which judgments remain unsatisfied or undischarged for any period of 60 consecutive days during which a stay of enforcement of such judgments shall not be in effect; and

 

-95-


(ix) any Subsidiary Guarantee of a Significant Subsidiary or group of Restricted Subsidiaries that taken together (as of the date of the latest audited consolidated financial statements for the Company and its consolidated Subsidiaries), would constitute a Significant Subsidiary ceases to be in full force and effect (except as contemplated by the terms of this Indenture and the Subsidiary Guarantees) or is declared null and void in a judicial proceeding or any Subsidiary Guarantor that is a Significant Subsidiary or group of Subsidiary Guarantors that, taken together (as of the date of the latest audited consolidated financial statements of the Company and its consolidated Subsidiaries) would constitute a Significant Subsidiary denies or disaffirms its obligations under this Indenture or its Subsidiary Guarantee, and the Company fails to cause such Restricted Subsidiary or Restricted Subsidiaries, as the case may be, to rescind such denials or disaffirmations within 30 days.

The foregoing shall constitute Events of Default whatever the reason for any such Event of Default and whether it is voluntary or involuntary or is effected by operation of law or pursuant to any judgment, decree or order of any court or any order, rule or regulation of any administrative or governmental body.

Notwithstanding the foregoing, a default under clause (iv)  of this Section 6.1(a) shall not constitute an Event of Default until the Trustee or the Holders of at least 25% in principal amount of the then outstanding Notes notify the Company of the default and the Company does not cure such default within the time specified in clause (iv)  of this Section 6.1(a) after receipt of such notice. Such notice must specify the Default, demand that it be remedied and state that such notice is a “ Notice of Default .”

The term “ Bankruptcy Law ” means Title 11, United States Code, or any similar Federal or state law for the relief of debtors. The term “ Custodian ” means any receiver, trustee, assignee, liquidator, custodian or similar official under any Bankruptcy Law.

SECTION 6.2. Acceleration . If an Event of Default (other than an Event of Default specified in Section 6.1(a)(vi) or (vii)  with respect to the Company) occurs and is continuing, unless otherwise specified for Notes of any series in the applicable Notes Supplemental Indenture as contemplated by Section 2.2 , the Trustee by notice in writing specifying the Event of Default and that it is a “notice” to the Company, or the Holders of at least 25% in principal amount of the then outstanding Notes by notice to the Company and the Trustee, may, and the Trustee at the request of such Holders shall, declare the principal of, premium, if any, and accrued and unpaid interest, if any, on all the Notes to be due and payable. Upon such a declaration, such principal, premium, if any, and accrued and unpaid interest, if any, shall, subject to Section 6.4 , be immediately due and payable. In the event of a declaration of acceleration of the Notes because an Event of Default set forth in Section 6.1(a)(v) above has occurred and is continuing, unless otherwise specified for Notes of any series in the applicable Notes Supplemental Indenture as contemplated by Section 2.2 , such declaration of acceleration of the Notes shall be automatically rescinded and annulled if the default triggering such Event of Default pursuant to Section 6.1(a)(v) shall be remedied or cured by the Company or a Restricted Subsidiary or waived by the holders of the relevant Indebtedness within 30 days after the declaration of acceleration with respect thereto and if (1) the annulment of the acceleration of the Notes would not conflict with any judgment or decree of a court of competent jurisdiction and

 

-96-


(2) all existing Events of Default, except nonpayment of principal, premium or interest, if any, on the Notes that became due solely because of the acceleration of the Notes, have been cured or waived. If an Event of Default specified in Section 6.1(a)(vi) or (vii)  with respect to the Company occurs and is continuing, unless otherwise specified for Notes of any series in the applicable Notes Supplemental Indenture as contemplated by Section 2.2 , the principal of, premium, if any, and accrued and unpaid interest, if any, on all the Notes shall become and be immediately due and payable without any declaration or other act on the part of the Trustee or any Holders.

SECTION 6.3. Other Remedies . If an Event of Default occurs and is continuing, the Trustee may pursue any available remedy to collect the payment of principal of or interest on the Notes or to enforce the performance of any provision of the Notes, this Indenture (including sums owed to the Trustee and its agents and counsel) and the Subsidiary Guarantees.

The Trustee may maintain a proceeding even if it does not possess any of the Notes or does not produce any of them in the proceeding. A delay or omission by the Trustee or any Holder in exercising any right or remedy accruing upon an Event of Default shall not impair the right or remedy or constitute a waiver of or acquiescence in the Event of Default. No remedy is exclusive of any other remedy. All available remedies are cumulative to the extent permitted by law.

SECTION 6.4. Waiver of Past Defaults . Unless otherwise specified for Notes of any series in the applicable Notes Supplemental Indenture as contemplated by Section 2.2 , the Holders of a majority in principal amount outstanding (including without limitation, consents obtained in connection with a purchase of, or tender offer or exchange offer for, notes) Notes by notice to the Trustee may waive an existing Default or Event of Default and its consequences (except a Default or Event of Default in the payment of the principal of, premium or interest on a Note) and rescind any such acceleration with respect to the Notes and its consequences if (1) rescission would not conflict with any judgment or decree of a court of competent jurisdiction and (2) all existing Events of Default, other than the nonpayment of the principal of, premium, if any, and interest on the Notes that have become due solely by such declaration of acceleration, have been cured or waived.

SECTION 6.5. Control by Majority . Unless otherwise specified for Notes of any series in the applicable Notes Supplemental Indenture as contemplated by Section 2.2 , the Holders of a majority in principal amount of the then outstanding Notes may direct the time, method and place of conducting any proceeding for exercising any remedy available to the Trustee or of exercising any trust or power conferred on the Trustee. However, the Trustee may refuse to follow any direction that conflicts with law or this Indenture, the Notes or the Subsidiary Guarantees, or, subject to Sections 7.1 and 7.2 , that the Trustee determines in good faith is unduly prejudicial to the rights of other Holders or would involve the Trustee in personal liability; provided , however , that the Trustee may take any other action deemed proper by the Trustee that is not inconsistent with such direction. Prior to taking any action under this Indenture, the Trustee shall be entitled to indemnity satisfactory to it in its sole discretion against all losses, liabilities and expenses caused by taking or not taking such action.

 

-97-


SECTION 6.6. Limitation on Suits . Except to enforce the right to receive payment of principal, premium, if any, or interest when due, no Holder may pursue any remedy with respect to this Indenture or the Notes unless:

(i) the Holder has previously given to the Trustee written notice stating that an Event of Default is continuing;

(ii) the Holders of at least 25% in principal amount of the Notes then outstanding have made a written request to the Trustee to pursue the remedy;

(iii) such Holder or Holders have offered to the Trustee security or indemnity satisfactory to the Trustee against any loss, liability or expense;

(iv) the Trustee has not complied with the request within 60 days after receipt of the request and the offer of security or indemnity; and

(v) the Holders of a majority in principal amount of the then outstanding Notes do not give the Trustee a direction that is inconsistent with the request during such 60-day period.

A Holder may not use this Indenture to prejudice the rights of another Holder or to obtain a preference or priority over another Holder (it being understood that the Trustee does not have an affirmative duty to ascertain whether or not such actions or forbearances are unduly prejudicial to such Holders).

SECTION 6.7. Rights of Holders to Receive Payment . Notwithstanding any other provision of this Indenture, the right of any Holder to receive payment of principal of, premium (if any) or interest on the Notes held by such Holder, on or after the respective due dates expressed in the Notes, or to bring suit for the enforcement of any such payment on or after such respective dates, shall not be impaired or affected without the consent of such Holder.

SECTION 6.8. Collection Suit by Trustee . If an Event of Default specified in Section 6.1(a)(i) or (ii)  occurs and is continuing, the Trustee may recover judgment in its own name and as trustee of an express trust against the Company for the whole amount then due and owing (together with interest on any unpaid interest to the extent lawful) and the amounts provided for in Section 7.6 .

SECTION 6.9. Trustee May File Proofs of Claim . The Trustee may file such proofs of claim and other papers or documents as may be necessary or advisable in order to have the claims of the Trustee (including any claim for the reasonable compensation, expenses, disbursements and advances of the Trustee and its agents and counsel) and the Holders allowed in any judicial proceedings relative to the Company, its Subsidiaries or their respective creditors or properties and, unless prohibited by law or applicable regulations, may vote on behalf of the Holders in any election of a trustee in bankruptcy or other Person performing similar functions, and any Custodian in any such judicial proceeding is hereby authorized by each Holder to make payments to the Trustee and, in the event that the Trustee shall consent to the making of such payments directly to the Holders, to pay to the Trustee any amount due it for the reasonable compensation, expenses, disbursements and advances of the Trustee, its agents and its counsel,

 

-98-


and any other amounts due the Trustee under Section 7.6 . To the extent that the payment of any such compensation, expenses, disbursements and advances of the Trustee, either agents and counsel, and any other amounts due to the Trustee under Section 7.6 hereof out of the estate in any proceeding shall be denied for any reason, payment of the same shall be secured by a Lien on, and shall be paid out of, any and all distributions, dividends, money, securities and other properties that the Holder may be entitled to receive in such proceeding whether in liquidation or under any plan of reorganization or arrangement or otherwise. Nothing herein contained shall be deemed to authorize the Trustee to authorize or consent to or accept or adopt on behalf of any Holder any plan or reorganization, arrangement, adjustment or composition affecting the Notes or the rights of any Holder thereof, or to authorize the Trustee to vote in respect of the claim of any Holder in such proceeding.

SECTION 6.10. Priorities . The Trustee shall pay out any money or property received by it in the following order:

First: to the Trustee for amounts due to each of them under this Indenture;

Second: to Holders for amounts due and unpaid on the Notes for principal, premium, if any, and interest, ratably, without preference or priority of any kind, according to the amounts due and payable on the Notes for principal, premium, if any, and interest, respectively; and

Third: to the Company or, to the extent the Trustee receives any amount for any Subsidiary Guarantor, to such Subsidiary Guarantor, or as a court of competent jurisdiction shall direct.

The Trustee may fix a record date and payment date for any payment to Holders pursuant to this Section. At least 15 days before such record date, the Company shall mail to each Holder and the Trustee a notice that states the record date, the payment date and amount to be paid.

SECTION 6.11. Undertaking for Costs . In any suit for the enforcement of any right or remedy under this Indenture or in any suit against the Trustee for any action taken or omitted by it as Trustee, a court in its discretion may require the filing by any party litigant in the suit of an undertaking to pay the costs of the suit, and the court in its discretion may assess reasonable costs, including reasonable attorneys’ fees and expenses, against any party litigant in the suit, having due regard to the merits and good faith of the claims or defenses made by the party litigant. This Section does not apply to a suit by the Trustee, a suit by the Company, a suit by a Holder pursuant to Section 6.7 or a suit by Holders of more than 10% in outstanding principal amount of the Notes.

 

-99-


ARTICLE VII

Trustee

SECTION 7.1. Duties of Trustee .

(a) If an Event of Default has occurred and is continuing, the Trustee shall exercise the rights and powers vested in it by this Indenture and use the same degree of care and skill in their exercise as a prudent Person would exercise or use under the circumstances in the conduct of such Person’s own affairs; provided that if an Event of Default occurs and is continuing, the Trustee shall be under no obligation to exercise any of the rights or powers under this Indenture, the Notes or the Subsidiary Guarantees at the request or direction of any of the Holders unless such Holders have offered the Trustee indemnity or security satisfactory to the Trustee in its sole discretion, as applicable, against loss, liability or expense.

(b) Except during the continuance of an Event of Default:

(i) the Trustee undertakes to perform such duties and only such duties as are specifically set forth in this Indenture and no implied covenants or obligations shall be read into this Indenture against the Trustee; and

(ii) the Trustee may conclusively rely, as to the truth of the statements and the correctness of the opinions expressed therein, upon certificates or opinions furnished to the Trustee under this Indenture, the Notes and the Subsidiary Guarantees, as applicable.

However, in the case of any such certificates or opinions which by any provisions hereof are specifically required to be furnished to the Trustee, the Trustee shall examine such certificates and opinions to determine whether or not they conform to the requirements of this Indenture, the Notes and the Subsidiary Guarantees, as the case may be (but need not confirm or investigate the accuracy of mathematical calculations or other facts stated therein).

(c) The Trustee may not be relieved from liability for its own grossly negligent action, its own grossly negligent failure to act or its own willful misconduct, except that:

(i) this paragraph does not limit the effect of paragraph (b) of this Section;

(ii) the Trustee shall not be liable for any error of judgment made in good faith by a Trust Officer or Trust Officers unless it is proved in a final and non-appealable decision of a court of competent jurisdiction that the Trustee was grossly negligent in ascertaining the pertinent facts;

(iii) the Trustee shall not be liable with respect to any action it takes or omits to take in good faith in accordance with a direction received by it pursuant to Section 6.5 ; and

(d) The Trustee shall not be liable for interest on any money received by it except as the Trustee may agree in writing with the Company.

 

-100-


(e) Money held in trust by the Trustee need not be segregated from other funds except to the extent required by law.

(f) No provision of this Indenture, the Notes or the Subsidiary Guarantees shall require the Trustee to expend or risk its own funds or otherwise incur any financial liability in the performance of any of its duties hereunder or thereunder or in the exercise of any of its rights or powers, if it shall have reasonable grounds to believe that repayment of such funds or adequate indemnity against such risk or liability is not reasonably assured to it.

(g) Every provision of this Indenture relating to the conduct or affecting the liability of or affording protection to the Trustee shall be subject to the provisions of this Section.

(h) The Trustee shall be under no obligation to exercise any of the rights or powers vested in it by this Indenture at the request or direction of any of the Holders unless such Holders shall have offered to the Trustee, security, prefunding or indemnity satisfactory to it against the costs, expenses (including reasonable attorneys’ fees and expenses) and liabilities that might be incurred by it in compliance with such request or direction.

SECTION 7.2. Rights of Trustee .

(a) The Trustee may conclusively rely and shall be protected in acting upon any resolution, certificate, statement, instrument, opinion, notice, request, direction, consent, order, bond or any other paper or document believed by it to be genuine and to have been signed or presented by the proper Person or Persons. The Trustee need not investigate any fact or matter stated in the document.

(b) Before the Trustee acts or refrains from acting, it may require an Officer’s Certificate or an Opinion of Counsel or both. The Trustee shall not be liable for any action it takes or omits to take in good faith in reliance on an Officer’s Certificate or Opinion of Counsel.

(c) The Trustee may act through its attorneys and agents and shall not be responsible for the misconduct or negligence of any agent or attorney appointed with due care.

(d) The Trustee shall not be liable for any action it takes or omits to take in good faith which it believes to be authorized or within its rights or powers; provided , however , that the Trustee’s conduct, respectively, does not constitute willful misconduct or gross negligence as determined in a final and non-appealable decision of a court of competent jurisdiction.

(e) The Trustee may consult with counsel of its selection, and the advice or opinion of counsel with respect to legal matters relating to this Indenture, the Notes or the Subsidiary Guarantees shall be full and complete authorization and protection from liability in respect to any action taken, omitted or suffered by it hereunder or under the Notes or the Subsidiary Guarantees in good faith and in accordance with the advice or opinion of such counsel.

 

-101-


(f) The Trustee shall not be bound to make any investigation into any statement, warranty or representation, or the facts or matters stated in any resolution, certificate, statement, instrument, opinion, notice, request, direction, consent, order, bond or other paper or document made or in connection with this Indenture; moreover, the Trustee shall not be bound to make any investigation into (i) the performance or observance of any of the covenants, agreements or other terms or conditions set forth herein, (ii) the occurrence of any default, or the validity, enforceability, effectiveness or genuineness of this Indenture or any other agreement, instrument or document or (iii) the facts or matters stated in any resolution, certificate, statement, instrument, opinion, report, notice, request, direction, consent, order, bond, debenture, note other evidence of indebtedness or other paper or document, but the Trustee, in its discretion, may make such further inquiry or investigation into such facts or matters as it may see fit, and, if the Trustee shall determine to make such further inquiry or investigation, it shall be entitled to examine the books, records and premises of the Company, personally or by agent or attorney and shall incur no liability or additional liability of any kind by reason of such inquiry or investigation.

(g) The Trustee shall not be deemed to have knowledge of any Default or Event of Default except any Default or Event of Default of which a Trust Officer shall have (x) received written notification from the Company or Holders at the Corporate Trust Office of the Trustee and such notice references the Notes and this Indenture or (y) obtained “actual knowledge.” “ Actual knowledge ” shall mean the actual fact or statement of knowing by a Trust Officer without independent investigation with respect thereto.

(h) In no event shall the Trustee be responsible or liable for special, indirect, or consequential loss or damage of any kind whatsoever (including, but not limited to, loss of profit) irrespective of whether the Trustee has been advised of the likelihood of such loss or damage and regardless of the form of action.

(i) The rights, privileges, protections, immunities and benefits given to the Trustee, including, without limitation, its right to be indemnified, are extended to, and shall be enforceable by, the Trustee in each of its capacities hereunder.

(j) The Trustee may request that the Company deliver a certificate setting forth the names of individuals and/or titles of officers authorized at such time to take specified actions pursuant to this Indenture.

(k) The permissive rights of the Trustee enumerated herein shall not be construed as duties.

(l) The Company shall provide prompt written notice to the Trustee of any change to its fiscal year.

SECTION 7.3. Individual Rights of Trustee . The Trustee in its individual or any other capacity may become the owner or pledgee of Notes and may otherwise deal with the Company, the Subsidiary Guarantors or their Affiliates with the same rights it would have if it were not Trustee. Any Paying Agent, Registrar, co-registrar or co-paying agent may do the same with like rights. However, the Trustee must comply with Section 7.9 . In addition, the Trustee shall be permitted to engage in transactions with the Company; provided , however , that if the Trustee acquires any conflicting interest the Trustee must (i) eliminate such conflict within 90 days of acquiring such conflicting interest, (ii) apply to the SEC for permission to continue acting as Trustee or (iii) resign.

 

-102-


SECTION 7.4. Disclaimer . The Trustee shall not be responsible for and makes no representation as to the validity or adequacy of this Indenture, the Notes or the Subsidiary Guarantees, it shall not be accountable for the Company’s use of the Notes or the proceeds from the Notes, and it shall not be responsible for any statement of the Company in this Indenture or in any document issued in connection with the sale of the Notes or in the Notes other than the Trustee’s certificate of authentication or for the use or application of any funds received by any Paying Agent other than the Trustee.

SECTION 7.5. Notice of Defaults . If a Default occurs and is continuing and is known to the Trustee, the Trustee shall mail to each Holder, notice of the Default within 90 days after the Trustee obtains such knowledge. Except in the case of a Default in payment of principal of, premium, if any, or interest on any Note, the Trustee may withhold from the Holders notice of any continuing Default if the Trustee determines in good faith that withholding the notice is in the interests of Holders.

SECTION 7.6. Compensation and Indemnity . The Company shall pay to the Trustee from time to time such compensation for its services as the parties shall agree in writing from time to time. The Trustee’s compensation shall not be limited by any law on compensation of a trustee of an express trust. The Company shall reimburse the Trustee upon request for all reasonable out-of-pocket expenses incurred or made by it, including, but not limited to, costs of collection, costs of preparing and reviewing reports, certificates and other documents, costs of preparation and mailing of notices to Holders and reasonable costs of counsel, in addition to the compensation for its services. Such expenses shall include the reasonable compensation and expenses, disbursements and advances of the Trustee’s agents, counsel, accountants and experts. The Company shall indemnify the Trustee or any predecessor Trustee in each of its capacities hereunder (including Paying Agent, and Registrar), and each of their officers, directors, employees, counsel and agents, against any and all loss, liability or expense (including, but not limited to, reasonable attorneys’ fees and expenses) incurred by it in connection with the administration of this trust and the performance of its duties hereunder and under the Notes or the Subsidiary Guarantees, including the costs and expenses of enforcing this Indenture (including this Section 7.6 ), the Notes or the Subsidiary Guarantees and of defending itself against any claims (whether asserted by any Holder, the Company or otherwise). The Trustee shall notify the Company promptly of any claim for which it may seek indemnity. Failure by the Trustee to so notify the Company shall not relieve the Company of its obligations hereunder.

The Company shall defend the claim and the Trustee may have separate counsel and the Company shall pay the reasonable fees and expenses of such counsel. The Company need not reimburse any expense or indemnify against any loss, liability or expense incurred by the Trustee through its own willful misconduct, gross negligence or bad faith as determined in a final and non-appealable decision of a court of competent jurisdiction.

To secure the Company’s payment obligations in this Section, the Trustee shall have a lien prior to the Notes on all money or property held or collected by the Trustee other than money or property held in trust to pay principal of and interest on particular Notes. The right of the Trustee to receive payment of any amounts due under this Section 7.6 shall not be subordinate to any other liability or indebtedness of the Company.

 

-103-


The Company’s payment obligations pursuant to this Section and any lien arising hereunder shall survive the discharge of this Indenture and the resignation or removal of the Trustee. When the Trustee incurs expenses after the occurrence of a Default specified in Section 6.1(a)(vi) or (vii)  with respect to the Company, the expenses are intended to constitute expenses of administration under any Bankruptcy Law.

Pursuant to Section 10.1 , the obligations of the Company hereunder are jointly and severally guaranteed by the Subsidiary Guarantors.

The obligation of the Company under this Section 7.6 shall survive satisfaction and discharge of this Indenture or the earlier resignation or removal of the Trustee.

SECTION 7.7. Replacement of Trustee . The Trustee may resign at any time by so notifying the Company. The Holders of a majority in principal amount of the Notes may remove the Trustee by so notifying the Company and the Trustee in writing and may appoint a successor Trustee. The Company shall remove the Trustee if:

(i) the Trustee fails to comply with Section 7.9 ;

(ii) the Trustee is adjudged bankrupt or insolvent;

(iii) a receiver or other public officer takes charge of the Trustee or its property; or

(iv) the Trustee otherwise becomes incapable of acting.

If the Trustee resigns or is removed by the Company or by the Holders of a majority in principal amount of the Notes and such Holders do not reasonably promptly appoint a successor Trustee, or if a vacancy exists in the office of Trustee for any reason (the Trustee in such event being referred to herein as the retiring Trustee), the Company shall promptly appoint a successor Trustee.

A successor Trustee shall deliver a written acceptance of its appointment to the retiring Trustee and to the Company. Thereupon the resignation or removal of the retiring Trustee shall become effective, and the successor Trustee shall have all the rights, powers and duties of the Trustee under this Indenture. The successor Trustee shall mail a notice of its succession to Holders. The retiring Trustee shall promptly transfer all property held by it as Trustee to the successor Trustee, subject to the lien provided for in Section 7.6 .

If a successor Trustee does not take office within 60 days after the retiring Trustee resigns or is removed, the retiring Trustee or the Holders of at least 10% in principal amount of the Notes may petition, at the Company’s expense, any court of competent jurisdiction for the appointment of a successor Trustee.

 

-104-


If the Trustee fails to comply with Section 7.9 , unless the Trustee’s duty to resign is stayed, any Holder may petition any court of competent jurisdiction for the removal of the Trustee and the appointment of a successor Trustee.

Notwithstanding the replacement of the Trustee pursuant to this Section 7.7 , the Company’s obligations under Section 7.6 shall continue for the benefit of the retiring Trustee.

SECTION 7.8. Successor Trustee by Merger . If the Trustee consolidates with, merges or converts into, or transfers all or substantially all its corporate trust business or assets to, another corporation or banking association, the resulting, surviving or transferee corporation without any further act shall be the successor Trustee.

In case at the time such successor or successors by merger, conversion or consolidation to the Trustee shall succeed to the trusts created by this Indenture, any of the Notes shall have been authenticated but not delivered, any such successor to the Trustee may adopt the certificate of authentication of any predecessor trustee, and deliver such Notes so authenticated; and in case at that time any of the Notes shall not have been authenticated, any successor to the Trustee may authenticate such Notes either in the name of any predecessor hereunder or in the name of the successor to the Trustee; and in all such cases such certificates shall have the full force which it is anywhere in the Notes or in this Indenture provided that the certificate of the Trustee shall have.

SECTION 7.9. Eligibility; Disqualification . The Trustee shall have a combined capital and surplus of at least $50.0 million as set forth in its most recent filed annual report of condition.

ARTICLE VIII

Discharge of Indenture; Defeasance

SECTION 8.1. Discharge of Liability on Notes; Defeasance .

(a) When (i) (x) all Notes that have been authenticated, except lost, stolen or destroyed Notes that have been replaced or paid and Notes for whose payment money has been deposited in trust or segregated and held in trust by the Company and thereafter repaid to the Company or discharged from such trust, have been delivered to the Trustee for cancellation or (y) all outstanding Notes not theretofore delivered to the Trustee for cancellation have become due and payable by reason of making a notice of redemption pursuant to Section 5.5 hereof or otherwise, or will become due and payable within one year or may be called for redemption within one year under arrangements pursuant to Article V and the Company or any Subsidiary Guarantor irrevocably deposits or causes to be deposited with the Trustee as trust funds in trust solely for the benefit of the Holders in U.S. dollars, U.S. Government Obligations, or a combination thereof, in such amounts as shall be sufficient without consideration of any reinvestment of interest to pay and discharge the entire Indebtedness on such Notes not theretofore delivered to the Trustee for cancellation for principal, premium, if any, and accrued interest to, but excluding, the date of maturity or redemption, as the case may be; (ii) no Default or Event of Default shall have occurred and be continuing on the date of such deposit or shall

 

-105-


occur as a result of such deposit (other than a default resulting from borrowing of funds to be applied to such deposit and the grant of any Lien securing such borrowing); (iii) the Company or any Subsidiary Guarantor has paid or caused to be paid all sums payable by the Company on the date of deposit to the Trustee under this Indenture; and (iv) the Company has delivered irrevocable instructions to the Trustee under this Indenture to apply the deposited money toward the payment of such Notes at maturity or the Redemption Date, as the case may be, then this Indenture shall, subject to Section 8.1(c) , cease to be of further effect.

(b) Subject to Sections 8.1(c) and 8.2, the Company at any time may at its option terminate (i) all of the Company’s obligations under the Notes and this Indenture and have each Subsidiary Guarantor’s obligation discharged with respect to its Guarantee (“ legal defeasance option ”) or (ii) the obligations of the Company and the Subsidiary Guarantors under Sections 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5, 3.6, 3.7, 3.8, 3.9, 3.10 and 3.11 and the operation of Section 4.1(a)(iii) and (a)(iv) and Sections 6.1(a)(iii) (other than with respect to any Default under Section 3.12 or 3.13), 6.1(a)(iv), 6.1(a)(v), 6.1(a)(vi) (only with respect to Significant Subsidiaries or a group of Restricted Subsidiaries that, taken together (as of the latest audited financial statements of the Company and its consolidated Subsidiaries), 6.1(a)(vii) (only with respect to Significant Subsidiaries or a group of Restricted Subsidiaries that, taken together (as of the latest audited financial statements of the Company and its consolidated Subsidiaries) and 6.1(a)(viii) (“ covenant defeasance option ”). The Company may exercise their legal defeasance option notwithstanding their prior exercise of their covenant defeasance option. In the event that the Company terminates all of its obligations under the Notes and this Indenture (with respect to such Notes) by exercising their legal defeasance option or their covenant defeasance option, the obligations of each Subsidiary Guarantor under its Guarantee of such Notes shall be terminated simultaneously with the termination of such obligations.

If the Company exercises its legal defeasance option, payment of the Notes may not be accelerated because of an Event of Default. If the Company exercises its covenant defeasance option, payment of the Notes may not be accelerated because of an Event of Default specified in Section 6.1(a)(iii) (only with respect to the covenants subject to such covenant defeasance), 6.1(a)(iv) , 6.1(a)(v) , 6.1(a)(vi) (only with respect to Significant Subsidiaries or a group of Restricted Subsidiaries that, taken together (as of the latest audited financial statements of the Company and its consolidated Subsidiaries), would constitute a Significant Subsidiary), 6.1(a)(vii) (only with respect to Significant Subsidiaries or a group of consolidated Subsidiaries that, taken together (as of the latest audited financial statements of the Company and its consolidated Subsidiaries), would constitute a Significant Subsidiary), 6.1(a)(viii) or 6.1(a)(ix) or because of the failure of the Company to comply with Section 4.1(a)(iii) or (iv) .

Upon satisfaction of the conditions set forth herein and upon request of the Company, the Trustee shall acknowledge in writing the discharge of those obligations that the Company terminates.

(c) Notwithstanding the provisions of Sections 8.1(a) and (b), the Company’s obligations in Sections 2.3 , 2.4 , 2.5 , 2.6 , 2.7 , 2.10 , 2.11 , 2.13 , 3.1 , 6.7 , 6.8 , 7.1 , 7.2 , 7.6 , 7.7 , 8.1(b) (with respect to legal defeasance), 8.3 , 8.4 , 8.5 and 8.6 shall survive until the Notes have been paid in full. Thereafter, the Company’s obligations in Sections 6.7 , 7.6 , 8.4 and 8.5 shall survive.

 

-106-


SECTION 8.2. Conditions to Defeasance . The Company may exercise its legal defeasance option or its covenant defeasance option only if:

(i) the Company shall irrevocably deposit with the Trustee, in trust, for the benefit of the Holders, U.S. dollars or U.S. Government Obligations, or a combination of U.S. dollars and U.S. Government Obligations, in such amounts as shall be sufficient, in the opinion of a nationally recognized firm of independent public accountants in the event a deposit of U.S. Government Obligations is made, to pay the principal of, or interest and premium, if any, on the outstanding Notes issued hereunder on the Stated Maturity or on the applicable Redemption Date, as the case may be, and the Company must specify whether the Notes are being defeased to maturity or to a particular Redemption Date;

(ii) in the case of legal defeasance, the Company has delivered to the Trustee an Opinion of Counsel reasonably acceptable to the Trustee stating that, subject to customary assumptions and exclusions, (a) the Company has received from, or there has been published by, the U.S. Internal Revenue Service a ruling or (b) since the Issue Date, there has been a change in the applicable U.S. federal income tax law, in either case to the effect that, and based thereon such Opinion of Counsel shall confirm that, the Holders shall not recognize income, gain or loss for U.S. federal income tax purposes as a result of such legal defeasance and shall be subject to U.S. federal income tax on the same amounts, in the same manner and at the same times as would have been the case if such legal defeasance had not occurred;

(iii) in the case of covenant defeasance, the Company has delivered to the Trustee an Opinion of Counsel reasonably acceptable to the Trustee stating that, subject to customary assumptions and exclusions, the Holders of the respective outstanding Notes shall not recognize income, gain or loss for U.S. federal income tax purposes as a result of such covenant defeasance and shall be subject to U.S. federal income tax on the same amounts, in the same manner and at the same times as would have been the case if such covenant defeasance had not occurred;

(iv) no Default or Event of Default has occurred and is continuing on the date of such deposit (other than a Default or Event of Default resulting from the borrowing of funds to be applied to such deposit and the grant of any Lien securing such borrowings);

(v) the Company shall deliver to the Trustee an Officer’s Certificate stating that the deposit was not made by the Company with the intent of defeating, hindering, delaying or defrauding creditors of the Company or others; and

(vi) the Company shall deliver to the Trustee an Officer’s Certificate and an Opinion of Counsel (which Opinion of Counsel may be subject to customary assumptions and exclusions), each stating that all conditions precedent relating to the legal defeasance or the covenant defeasance, as the case may be, have been complied with.

 

-107-


SECTION 8.3. Application of Trust Money . The Trustee shall hold in trust money or U.S. Government Obligations deposited with it pursuant to this Article VIII . It shall apply the deposited money and the money from U.S. Government Obligations through the Paying Agent and in accordance with this Indenture to the payment of principal of and interest on the Notes.

SECTION 8.4. Repayment to Company . Anything herein to the contrary notwithstanding, the Trustee shall deliver or pay to the Company from time to time upon receipt of an Officer’s Certificate any money or U.S. Government Obligations held by it as provided in this Article VIII which are in excess of the amount thereof which would then be required to be deposited to effect legal defeasance or covenant defeasance, as applicable.

Subject to any applicable abandoned property law, the Trustee and the Paying Agent shall pay to the Company upon written request any money held by them for the payment of principal of or interest on the Notes that remains unclaimed for two years, and, thereafter, Holders entitled to the money must look to the Company for payment as general creditors.

SECTION 8.5. Indemnity for U.S. Government Obligations . The Company shall pay and shall indemnify the Trustee against any tax, fee or other charge imposed on or assessed against deposited U.S. Government Obligations or the principal and interest received on such U.S. Government Obligations.

SECTION 8.6. Reinstatement . If the Trustee or Paying Agent is unable to apply any money or U.S. Government Obligations in accordance with this Article VIII by reason of any legal proceeding or by reason of any order or judgment of any court or governmental authority enjoining, restraining or otherwise prohibiting such application, the obligations of the Company and each Subsidiary Guarantor under this Indenture, the Notes and the Subsidiary Guarantees shall be revived and reinstated as though no deposit had occurred pursuant to this Article VIII until such time as the Trustee or Paying Agent is permitted to apply all such money or U.S. Government Obligations in accordance with this Article VIII ; provided , however , that, if the Company or the Subsidiary Guarantors have made any payment of interest on or principal of any Notes because of the reinstatement of its obligations, the Company or the Subsidiary Guarantors, as the case may be, shall be subrogated to the rights of the Holders of such Notes to receive such payment from the money or U.S. Government Obligations held by the Trustee or Paying Agent.

ARTICLE IX

Amendments

SECTION 9.1. Without Consent of Holders . This Indenture, the Notes and the Subsidiary Guarantees may be amended or supplemented without notice to or consent of any Holder:

(i) to cure any ambiguity, omission, defect, mistake or inconsistency;

(ii) to provide for the assumption by a successor corporation of the obligations of the Company or any Subsidiary Guarantor under the Indenture, the Notes and the Subsidiary Guarantees;

 

-108-


(iii) to provide for or facilitate the issuance of uncertificated Notes in addition to or in place of certificated Notes;

(iv) to comply with the rules of any applicable depositary;

(v) to add Guarantees with respect to the Notes or to release a Subsidiary Guarantor from its obligations under its Subsidiary Guarantee or this Indenture in accordance with the applicable provisions of this Indenture;

(vi) to secure the Notes and the Subsidiary Guarantees;

(vii) to add to the covenants of the Company and its Restricted Subsidiaries or Events of Default for the benefit of the Holders or to make changes that would provide additional rights to the Holders, or to surrender any right or power herein conferred upon the Company or any Subsidiary Guarantor;

(viii) to make any change that does not adversely affect the rights of any Holder in any material respect;

(ix) to comply with any requirement of the SEC in connection with the qualification of this Indenture under the TIA, as amended, if applicable;

(x) to provide for the appointment of a successor trustee; provided that the successor trustee is otherwise qualified and eligible to act as such under the terms of this Indenture;

(xi) to conform the text of this Indenture, the Notes or the Subsidiary Guarantees to any provision of the “Description of the Notes” section of the Offering Memorandum or, with respect to any Additional Notes and any supplemental indenture or other instrument pursuant to which such Additional Notes are issued, to such “Description of notes” relating to the issuance of such Additional Notes solely to the extent that such “Description of notes” provides for terms of such Additional Notes that differ from the terms of the Initial Notes; or

(xii) to provide for or confirm the issuance of Additional Notes in accordance with the terms of this Indenture.

After an amendment or supplement under this Section becomes effective, the Company shall mail to Holders, or in accordance with the applicable procedures of DTC, a notice briefly describing such amendment or supplement. The failure to give such notice to all Holders, or any defect therein, shall not impair or affect the validity of an amendment or supplement under this Section. A consent to any amendment, supplement or waiver under this Indenture by any Holder given in connection with a tender of such Holder’s Note shall not be rendered invalid by such tender.

Upon the request of the Company accompanied by a Board Resolution authorizing the execution of any such amended or supplemental indenture, and upon receipt by the Trustee of the documents described in Sections 7.2 and 11.2 hereof, the Trustee shall join

 

-109-


with the Company and the Subsidiary Guarantors in the execution of any amended or supplemental indenture authorized or permitted by the terms of this Indenture, but the Trustee shall not be obligated to enter into such amended or supplemental indenture that affects its own rights, duties or immunities under this Indenture or otherwise.

SECTION 9.2. With Consent of Holders . This Indenture, the Notes or the Subsidiary Guarantees may be amended or supplemented with the consent of the Holders of a majority in principal amount of the Notes then outstanding (including without limitation, consents obtained in connection with a purchase of, or tender offer or exchange offer for, Notes). Any past default or compliance with the provisions of this Indenture, the Notes or the Subsidiary Guarantees may be waived with the consent of the Holders of a majority in principal amount of the Notes then outstanding (including, without limitation, consents obtained in connection with a purchase of, or tender offer or exchange offer for, Notes); provided that (x) if any such amendment or waiver will only affect one series of Notes (or less than all series of Notes) then outstanding under the Indenture, then only the consent of the Holders of a majority in principal amount of the Notes of such series then outstanding (including, without limitation, consents obtained in connection with a purchase of, or tender offer or exchange offer for, Notes) shall be required and (y) if any such amendment or waiver by its terms will affect a series of Notes in a manner different and materially adverse relative to the manner such amendment or waiver affects other series of Notes, then the consent of the Holders of a majority in principal amount of the Notes of such series then outstanding (including, without limitation, consents obtained in connection with a purchase of, or tender offer or exchange offer for, Notes) shall be required. However, without the consent of each Holder of an outstanding Note affected, no amendment, supplement or waiver may:

(i) reduce the principal amount of Notes whose Holders must consent to an amendment;

(ii) reduce the rate of or change the stated time for payment of interest on any Note;

(iii) reduce the principal of or extend the Stated Maturity of any Note;

(iv) waive a Default or Event of Default in the payment of principal of, or interest or premium, if any, on the Notes issued hereunder (except a rescission of acceleration of the Notes issued hereunder by the Holders of at least a majority in aggregate principal amount of the then outstanding Notes with respect to a nonpayment default and a waiver of the payment default that resulted from such acceleration);

(v) reduce the premium payable upon the redemption or repurchase of any Note or change the time at which any Note may be redeemed or repurchased in accordance with Section 3.9 hereof or Article V hereof, whether through an amendment or waiver of provisions in the covenants or otherwise;

(vi) make any Note payable in a currency other than that stated in the Note;

 

-110-


(vii) impair the right of any Holder to receive payment of principal, premium, if any, and interest on such Holder’s Notes on or after the due dates therefor or to institute suit for the enforcement of any payment on or with respect to such Holder’s Notes;

(viii) release any Subsidiary Guarantor that is a Significant Subsidiary or group of Restricted Subsidiaries that, taken together (as of the date of the latest audited consolidated financial statements for the Company and its consolidated Subsidiaries), would constitute a Significant Subsidiary from any of its obligations under its Subsidiary Guarantee or this Indenture, except in compliance with the terms thereof; or

(ix) make any change in the amendment provisions in this Section 9.2 as described in clauses (i)  through (viii)  above.

It shall not be necessary for the consent of the Holders under this Section to approve the particular form of any proposed amendment or supplement, but it shall be sufficient if such consent approves the substance thereof. A consent to any amendment, supplement or waiver under this Indenture by any Holder given in connection with a tender of such Holder’s Note shall not be rendered invalid by such tender.

Upon the request of the Company accompanied by a Board Resolution authorizing the execution of any such amended or supplemental indenture, and upon receipt by the Trustee of the documents described in Sections 7.2 and 11.2 hereof, the Trustee shall join with the Company and the Subsidiary Guarantors in the execution of any amended or supplemental indenture authorized or permitted by the terms of this Indenture and to make any further appropriate agreements and stipulations that may be therein contained, but the Trustee shall not be obligated to enter into such amended or supplemental indenture that affects its own rights, duties or immunities under this Indenture or otherwise.

After an amendment or supplement under the Indenture becomes effective, the Company is required to mail to the Holders, or in accordance with the Applicable Procedures, a notice briefly describing such amendment or supplement. The failure to give such notice to all the Holders, or any defect in the notice will not impair or affect the validity of the amendment or supplement.

SECTION 9.3. Effect of Consents and Waivers . A consent to an amendment, supplement or a waiver by a Holder of a Note shall bind the Holder and every subsequent Holder of that Note or portion of the Note that evidences the same debt as the consenting Holder’s Note, even if notation of the consent or waiver is not made on the Note. After an amendment or waiver becomes effective, it shall bind every Holder. An amendment or waiver made pursuant to Section 9.2 shall become effective upon receipt by the Trustee of the requisite number of written consents.

The Company may, but shall not be obligated to, fix a record date for the purpose of determining the Holders entitled to give their consent or take any other action described above or required or permitted to be taken pursuant to this Indenture. If a record date is fixed, then notwithstanding the immediately preceding paragraph, those Persons who were Holders at such record date (or their duly designated proxies), and only those Persons, shall be entitled to give such consent or revoke such consent or to take any such action, whether or not such Persons continue to be Holders after such record date.

 

-111-


SECTION 9.4. Notation on or Exchange of Notes . If an amendment changes the terms of a Note, the Trustee may require the Holder of the Note to deliver it to the Trustee. The Trustee may place an appropriate notation on the Note regarding the changed terms and return it to the Holder. Alternatively, if the Company or the Trustee so determines, the Company in exchange for the Note shall issue, and upon receipt of an Authentication Order the Trustee shall authenticate a new Note that reflects the changed terms. Failure to make the appropriate notation or to issue a new Note shall not affect the validity of such amendment.

SECTION 9.5. Trustee To Sign Amendments . The Trustee shall sign any amendment, supplement or waiver authorized pursuant to this Article IX if the amendment, supplement or waiver does not, in the sole determination of the Trustee, adversely affect the rights, duties, liabilities or immunities of the Trustee. In signing any amendment, supplement or waiver pursuant to this Article IX , the Trustee shall receive, and (subject to Sections 7.1 and 7.2 ) shall be fully protected in conclusively relying upon, an Officer’s Certificate and an Opinion of Counsel stating that such amendment, supplement or waiver is authorized or permitted by or complies with this Indenture and that such amendment, supplement or waiver is the legal, valid and binding obligation of the Company and the Subsidiary Guarantors party thereto, enforceable against the Company and the Subsidiary Guarantors party thereto in accordance with its terms, subject to customary exceptions. Notwithstanding the foregoing, no Opinion of Counsel will be required for the Trustee to execute any amendment or supplement adding a new Subsidiary Guarantor under this Indenture pursuant to Exhibit E hereto. For the avoidance of doubt, no Officer’s Certificate shall be required on the Issue Date for the execution of any Note Supplemental Indenture.

ARTICLE X

Subsidiary Guarantee

SECTION 10.1. Subsidiary Guarantee . Subject to the provisions of this Article X , each Subsidiary Guarantor hereby fully, unconditionally and irrevocably guarantees, as primary obligor and not merely as surety, jointly and severally with each other Subsidiary Guarantor, to each Holder of the Notes, to the extent lawful, and the Trustee the full and punctual payment when due, whether at maturity, by acceleration, by redemption or otherwise, of the principal of, premium, if any, and interest on the Notes and all other obligations of the Company under this Indenture and the Notes (including, without limitation, interest accruing after the filing of any petition in bankruptcy, or the commencement of any insolvency, reorganization or like proceeding, relating to the Company or any Subsidiary Guarantor whether or not a claim for post-filing or post-petition interest is allowed in such proceeding and the obligations under Section 7.6 ) (all the foregoing being hereinafter collectively called the “ Guarantor Obligations ”). Each Subsidiary Guarantor agrees (to the extent lawful) that the Guarantor Obligations may be extended or renewed, in whole or in part, without notice or further assent from it, and that it shall remain bound under this Article X notwithstanding any extension or renewal of any Guarantor Obligation.

 

-112-


Each Subsidiary Guarantor waives (to the extent lawful) presentation to, demand of, payment from and protest to the Company of any of the Guarantor Obligations and also waives (to the extent lawful) notice of protest for nonpayment. Each Subsidiary Guarantor waives (to the extent lawful) notice of any default under the Notes or the Guarantor Obligations.

Each Subsidiary Guarantor further agrees that its Subsidiary Guarantee herein constitutes a Guarantee of payment when due (and not a Guarantee of collection) and waives any right to require that any resort be had by any Holder to any security held for payment of the Guarantor Obligations.

Except as set forth in Section 4.2 , Section 10.2 and Article VIII hereof, the obligations of each Subsidiary Guarantor hereunder shall not be subject to any reduction, limitation, impairment or termination for any reason (other than payment of the Guarantor Obligations in full), including any claim of waiver, release, surrender, alteration or compromise, and shall not (to the extent lawful) be subject to any defense of setoff, counterclaim, recoupment or termination whatsoever or by reason of the invalidity, illegality or unenforceability of the Guarantor Obligations or otherwise. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, the obligations of each Subsidiary Guarantor herein shall not (to the extent lawful) be discharged or impaired or otherwise affected by (a) the failure of any Holder to assert any claim or demand or to enforce any right or remedy against the Company or any other person under this Indenture, the Notes or any other agreement or otherwise; (b) any extension or renewal of any thereof; (c) any rescission, waiver, amendment or modification of any of the terms or provisions of this Indenture, the Notes, or any other agreement; (d) the release of any security held by any Holder for the Guarantor Obligations or any of them; (e) the failure of any Holder to exercise any right or remedy against any other Subsidiary Guarantor; (f) any change in the ownership of the Company; (g) any default, failure or delay, willful or otherwise, in the performance of the Guarantor Obligations; or (h) any other act or thing or omission or delay to do any other act or thing which may or might in any manner or to any extent vary the risk of any Subsidiary Guarantor or would otherwise operate as a discharge of such Subsidiary Guarantor as a matter of law or equity.

Each Subsidiary Guarantor agrees that its Subsidiary Guarantee herein shall remain in full force and effect until payment in full of all the Guarantor Obligations or such Subsidiary Guarantor is released from its Subsidiary Guarantee in compliance with Section 4.2 , Section 10.2 or Article VIII hereof. Each Subsidiary Guarantor further agrees that its Subsidiary Guarantee herein shall continue to be effective or be reinstated, as the case may be, if at any time payment, or any part thereof, of principal of, premium, if any, or interest on any of the Guarantor Obligations is rescinded or must otherwise be restored by any Holder upon the bankruptcy or reorganization of the Company or otherwise.

In furtherance of the foregoing and not in limitation of any other right which any Holder has at law or in equity against any Subsidiary Guarantor by virtue hereof, upon the failure of the Company to pay any of the Guarantor Obligations when and as the same shall become due, whether at maturity, by acceleration, by redemption or otherwise, each Subsidiary Guarantor hereby promises to and shall, upon receipt of written demand by the Trustee, forthwith pay, or cause to be paid, in cash, to the Trustee or the Trustee on behalf of the Holders an amount equal to the sum of (i) the unpaid amount of such Guarantor Obligations then due and owing and

 

-113-


(ii) accrued and unpaid interest on such Guarantor Obligations then due and owing (but only to the extent not prohibited by law) (including interest accruing after the filing of any petition in bankruptcy or the commencement of any insolvency, reorganization or like proceeding relating to the Company or any Subsidiary Guarantor whether or not a claim for post-filing or post-petition interest is allowed in such proceeding).

Each Subsidiary Guarantor further agrees that, as between such Subsidiary Guarantor, on the one hand, and the Holders, on the other hand, (x) the maturity of the Guarantor Obligations guaranteed hereby may be accelerated as provided in this Indenture for the purposes of its Subsidiary Guarantee herein, notwithstanding any stay, injunction or other prohibition preventing such acceleration in respect of the Guarantor Obligations guaranteed hereby and (y) in the event of any such declaration of acceleration of such Guarantor Obligations, such Guarantor Obligations (whether or not due and payable) shall forthwith become due and payable by the Subsidiary Guarantor for the purposes of this Subsidiary Guarantee.

Each Subsidiary Guarantor also agrees to pay any and all reasonable costs and expenses (including reasonable attorneys’ fees) incurred by the Trustee or the Holders in enforcing any rights under this Section.

Neither the Company nor the Subsidiary Guarantors shall be required to make a notation on the Notes to reflect any Subsidiary Guarantee or any release, termination or discharge thereof and any such notation shall not be a condition to the validity of any Subsidiary Guarantee.

SECTION 10.2. Limitation on Liability; Termination, Release and Discharge .

(a) Any term or provision of this Indenture to the contrary notwithstanding, the obligations of each Subsidiary Guarantor hereunder shall be limited to the maximum amount as shall, after giving effect to all other contingent and fixed liabilities of such Subsidiary Guarantor and after giving effect to any collections from or payments made by or on behalf of any other Subsidiary Guarantor in respect of the obligations of such other Subsidiary Guarantor under its Subsidiary Guarantee or pursuant to its contribution obligations under this Indenture, result in the obligations of such Subsidiary Guarantor under its Subsidiary Guarantee not constituting a fraudulent conveyance or fraudulent transfer under federal or state law and not otherwise being void or voidable under any similar laws affecting the rights of creditors generally.

(b) A Subsidiary Guarantee by a Subsidiary Guarantor shall be automatically and unconditionally released and discharged, and each Subsidiary Guarantor and its obligations under the Subsidiary Guarantee and this Indenture shall be released and discharged:

(i) upon any sale, exchange or transfer (by merger or otherwise) of the Capital Stock of such Subsidiary Guarantor following which such Subsidiary Guarantor ceases to be a direct or indirect Restricted Subsidiary of the Company if such sale or disposition does not constitute an Asset Disposition or is made in compliance with Section 3.7 and Article IV hereof);

 

-114-


(ii) if such Subsidiary Guarantor is dissolved or liquidated in accordance with the provisions of this Indenture;

(iii) the release or discharge of the guarantee by such Subsidiary Guarantor of the Indebtedness that resulted in the creation of such Subsidiary Guarantee, except a discharge or release as a result of payment under such guarantee by such Subsidiary Guarantor (it being understood that a release subject to a contingent reinstatement is still a release, and if any such Indebtedness of such Subsidiary Guarantor under such guarantee is so reinstated, such Guarantee shall also be reinstated);

(iv) upon exercise of the Company’s legal defeasance option or covenant defeasance option or upon satisfaction and discharge of this Indenture, in each case, pursuant to the provisions of Article VIII hereof; and

(v) if the Company designates such Subsidiary Guarantor as an Unrestricted Subsidiary and such designation complies with the other applicable provisions of this Indenture.

(c) In the case of Section 10.2(b)(i) only, the Company shall deliver to the Trustee an Officer’s Certificate and an Opinion of Counsel, each stating that all conditions precedent provided for in this Indenture relating to such transaction have been complied with.

(d) The release of a Subsidiary Guarantor from its Subsidiary Guarantee and its obligations under this Indenture in accordance with the provisions of this Section 10.2 shall not preclude the future applications of Section 3.10 hereof to such Person.

SECTION 10.3. Right of Contribution . Each Subsidiary Guarantor hereby agrees that to the extent that any Subsidiary Guarantor shall have paid more than its proportionate share of any payment made on the obligations under the Subsidiary Guarantees, such Subsidiary Guarantor shall be entitled to seek and receive contribution from and against the Company or any other Subsidiary Guarantor who has not paid its proportionate share of such payment. The provisions of this Section 10.3 shall in no respect limit the obligations and liabilities of each Subsidiary Guarantor to the Trustee and the Holders and each Subsidiary Guarantor shall remain liable to the Trustee and the Holders for the full amount guaranteed by such Subsidiary Guarantor hereunder.

SECTION 10.4. No Subrogation . Notwithstanding any payment or payments made by each Subsidiary Guarantor hereunder, no Subsidiary Guarantor shall be entitled to be subrogated to any of the rights of the Trustee or any Holder against the Company or any other Subsidiary Guarantor or any collateral security or guarantee or right of offset held by the Trustee or any Holder for the payment of the Guarantor Obligations, nor shall any Subsidiary Guarantor seek or be entitled to seek any contribution or reimbursement from the Company or any other Subsidiary Guarantor in respect of payments made by such Subsidiary Guarantor hereunder, until all amounts owing to the Trustee and the Holders by the Company on account of the Guarantor Obligations are paid in full. If any amount shall be paid to any Subsidiary Guarantor on account of such subrogation rights at any time when all of the Guarantor Obligations shall not have been paid in full, such amount shall be held by such Subsidiary Guarantor in trust for the

 

-115-


Trustee and the Holders, segregated from other funds of such Subsidiary Guarantor, and shall, forthwith upon receipt by such Subsidiary Guarantor, be turned over to the Trustee in the exact form received by such Subsidiary Guarantor (duly indorsed by such Subsidiary Guarantor to the Trustee, if required), to be applied against the Guarantor Obligations.

ARTICLE XI

Miscellaneous

SECTION 11.1. Notices . Notices given by publication shall be deemed given on the first date on which publication is made, notices given by first-class mail, postage prepaid, shall be deemed given five calendar days after mailing and notices given by overnight courier guaranteeing next day delivery shall be deemed given the next Business Day after timely delivery to the courier. Any notice or communication shall be in writing and delivered in person, by facsimile (with respect to the Trustee only), mailed by first-class mail or overnight air courier guaranteeing next day delivery, addressed as follows:

if to the Company or to any Subsidiary Guarantor:

Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc.

1001 Fleet Street, 6 th Floor

Baltimore, MD 21202

Attention: General Counsel

if to the Trustee:

Wells Fargo Bank, National Association

Corporate Trust Services

MAC-N9311-115

625 Marquett Avenue, 11 th Floor

Minneapolis, MN 55479

Facsimile: 612.667.9825

The Company or the Trustee by notice to the other may designate additional or different addresses for subsequent notices or communications. Where this Indenture provides for notice in any manner, such notice may be waived in writing by the Person entitled to receive such notice, either before or after the event, and such waiver shall be the equivalent of such notice.

Any notice or communication mailed to a Holder shall be mailed to the Holder at the Holder’s address as it appears on the registration books of the Registrar and shall be sufficiently given if so mailed within the time prescribed.

Failure to mail a notice or communication to a Holder or any defect in it shall not affect its sufficiency with respect to other Holders. If a notice or communication is mailed in the manner provided above, it is duly given, whether or not the addressee receives it.

 

-116-


The Trustee agrees to accept and act upon instructions or directions pursuant to this Indenture sent by unsecured e-mail, facsimile transmission or other similar unsecured electronic methods. If the party elects to give the Trustee e-mail or facsimile instructions (or instructions by a similar electronic method) and the Trustee in its discretion elects to act upon such instructions, the Trustee’s understanding of such instructions shall be deemed controlling. The Trustee shall be liable for any losses, costs or expenses arising directly or indirectly from the Trustee’s reliance upon and compliance with such instructions notwithstanding such instructions conflict or are inconsistent with a subsequent written instruction. The party providing electronic instructions agrees to assume all risks arising out of the use of such electronic methods to submit instructions and directions to the Trustee, including without limitation the risk of the Trustee acting on unauthorized instructions, and the risk or interception and misuse by third parties.

Notwithstanding any other provision of this Indenture or any Note, where this Indenture or any Note provides for notice of any event (including any notice of redemption) to any Holder of an interest in a Global Note (whether by mail or otherwise), such notice shall be sufficiently given if given to DTC or any other applicable Depositary for such Note (or its designee) according to the applicable procedures of DTC or such Depositary.

SECTION 11.2. Certificate and Opinion as to Conditions Precedent . Upon any request or application by the Company to the Trustee to take any action under this Indenture, the Company shall furnish to the Trustee:

(i) an Officer’s Certificate in form and substance reasonably satisfactory to the Trustee stating that, in the opinion of the signers, all conditions precedent, if any, provided for in this Indenture relating to the proposed action have been complied with; and

(ii) an Opinion of Counsel in form and substance reasonably satisfactory to the Trustee stating that, in the opinion of such counsel, all such conditions precedent have been complied with.

SECTION 11.3. Statements Required in Certificate or Opinion . Each certificate or opinion with respect to compliance with a covenant or condition provided for in this Indenture shall include:

(i) a statement that the individual making such certificate or opinion has read such covenant or condition;

(ii) a brief statement as to the nature and scope of the examination or investigation upon which the statements or opinions contained in such certificate or opinion are based;

(iii) a statement that, in the opinion of such individual, he or she has made such examination or investigation as is necessary to enable him or her to express an informed opinion as to whether or not such covenant or condition has been complied with; and

(iv) a statement as to whether or not, in the opinion of such individual, such covenant or condition has been complied with.

 

-117-


In giving such Opinion of Counsel, counsel may rely as to factual matters on an Officer’s Certificate or on certificates of public officials.

SECTION 11.4. Rules by Trustee, Paying Agent and Registrar . The Trustee may make reasonable rules for action by, or a meeting of, Holders. The Registrar and the Paying Agent may make reasonable rules for their functions.

SECTION 11.5. Days Other than Business Days . If a payment date is not a Business Day, payment shall be made on the next succeeding day that is not a Business Day, and no interest shall accrue for the intervening period. If a regular Record Date is not a Business Day, the Record Date shall not be affected.

SECTION 11.6. Governing Law . This Indenture, the Notes and the Subsidiary Guarantees shall be governed by, and construed in accordance with, the laws of the State of New York.

SECTION 11.7. No Recourse Against Others . No past, present or future director, officer, employee, incorporator, member, partner or stockholder of the Company or any of the Subsidiary Guarantors shall have any liability for any obligations of the Company or its Restricted Subsidiaries under the Notes, this Indenture, the Subsidiary Guarantees, or for any claim based on, in respect of, or by reason of such obligations or their creation. Each Holder by accepting a Note waives and releases all such liability. The waiver and release shall be part of the consideration for the issuance of the Notes and the Subsidiary Guarantees.

SECTION 11.8. Successors . All agreements of the Company and each Subsidiary Guarantor in this Indenture and the Notes shall bind their respective successors. All agreements of the Trustee in this Indenture shall bind its successors.

SECTION 11.9. Multiple Originals . The parties may sign any number of copies (including PDF copies) of this Indenture. Each signed copy shall be an original, but all of them together represent the same agreement. One signed copy is enough to prove this Indenture.

SECTION 11.10. Table of Contents; Headings . The table of contents, cross-reference sheet and headings of the Articles and Sections of this Indenture have been inserted for convenience of reference only, are not intended to be considered a part hereof and shall not modify or restrict any of the terms or provisions hereof.

SECTION 11.11. Force Majeure . In no event shall the Trustee be responsible or liable for any failure or delay in the performance of its obligations hereunder arising out of or caused by, directly or indirectly, forces beyond its control, including, without limitation, strikes, work stoppages, accidents, acts of war or terrorism, civil or military disturbances, nuclear or natural catastrophes or acts of God, and interruptions, loss or malfunctions of utilities, communications or computer (software and hardware) services; it being understood that the Trustee shall use reasonable efforts which are consistent with accepted practices in the banking industry to resume performance as soon as practicable under the circumstances.

 

-118-


SECTION 11.12. USA Patriot Act . The parties hereto acknowledge that in accordance with Section 326 of the USA Patriot Act the Trustee and the Trust Officers, like all financial institutions and in order to help fight the funding of terrorism and money laundering, are required to obtain, verify, and record information that identifies each person or legal entity that establishes a relationship or opens an account. The parties to this agreement agree that they will provide the Trustee and the Trust Officers with such information as they may request in order to satisfy the requirements of the USA Patriot Act.

SECTION 11.13. Communication by Holders of Notes with other Holders of Notes . Holders of the Notes may communicate with other Holders of Notes with respect to their rights under this Indenture or the Notes.

[Remainder of Page Intentionally Left Blank]

 

-119-


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have caused this Indenture to be duly executed as of the date first written above.

 

FIDELITY & GUARANTY LIFE HOLDINGS, INC.

By:

  /s/ Leland C. Launer, Jr.
  Name: Leland C. Launer, Jr.
  Title: President & Chief Executive Officer
 

FIDELITY & GUARANTY LIFE BUSINESS SERVICES, INC.

 

By:

  /s/ Leland C. Launer, Jr.
  Name: Leland C. Launer, Jr.
  Title: President & Chief Executive Officer

S IGNATURE P AGE TO I NDENTURE


WELLS FARGO BANK, NATIONAL ASSOCIATION, as Trustee

By:

  /s/ Richard Prokosch
  Name: Richard Prokosch
  Title: Vice President

S IGNATURE P AGE TO I NDENTURE


EXHIBIT A

[FORM OF FACE OF NOTE]

[Global Note Legend, if applicable]

[Private Placement Legend, if applicable]

[Regulation S Temporary Global Note Legend, if applicable]

 

No. [              ]   

Principal Amount $[                          ],

as revised by the Schedule of Increases

or Decreases in the Global Note attached hereto

CUSIP NO.                 

FIDELITY & GUARANTY LIFE HOLDINGS, INC.

[        ]% Senior Note due 20[        ]

Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc., a Delaware corporation 1 , promises to pay to                          , or registered assigns, the initial principal amount set forth on the Schedule of Increases or Decreases in the Global Note attached hereto, as revised by the Schedule of Increases or Decreases in the Global Note attached hereto, on [            ], 20[ ].

Interest Payment Dates: [            ] and [            ].

Record Dates [            ] and [            ].

Additional provisions of this Note are set forth on the other side of this Note.

 

1   Replace with the name of any successor, if applicable.

 

A-1


FIDELITY & GUARANTY LIFE HOLDINGS, INC.

By:

   
  Name:
  Title:


TRUSTEE’S CERTIFICATE OF

AUTHENTICATION

WELLS FARGO BANK, NATIONAL ASSOCIATION

as Trustee, certifies that this is one of the

Notes referred to in the Indenture.

By:        
  Authorized Signatory   Date:


[FORM OF REVERSE SIDE OF NOTE]

[            ]% Senior Note due 20[            ]

1. Interest

Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc., a Delaware corporation (such corporation, and its successors and assigns under the Indenture hereinafter referred to, being herein called the “Company”), promises to pay interest on the principal amount of this Note at the rate per annum shown above.

The Company shall pay interest semiannually on [            ] and [            ] of each year, with the first interest payment to be made on [            ]. Interest on the Notes shall accrue [(or will be deemed to have accrued)] 2 from the most recent date to which interest has been paid on the Notes or, if no interest has been paid, from [            ] 3 . The Company shall pay interest on overdue principal or premium, if any (plus interest on such interest to the extent lawful), at the rate borne by the Notes to the extent lawful. Interest shall be computed on the basis of a 360-day year of twelve 30-day months.

2. Method of Payment

By no later than 12:00 p.m. (New York City time) on the date on which any principal of, premium, if any, or interest on any Note is due and payable, the Company shall irrevocably deposit with the Trustee or the Paying Agent money sufficient to pay such principal, premium, if any, and/or interest. The Company shall pay interest (except Defaulted Interest) to the Persons who are registered Holders of Notes at the close of business on [            ] and [            ] next preceding the Interest Payment Date unless Notes are cancelled, repurchased or redeemed after the record date and before the Interest Payment Date. Holders must surrender Notes to a Paying Agent to collect principal payments. The Company shall pay principal, premium, if any, and interest in money of the United States that at the time of payment is legal tender for payment of public and private debts. Payments in respect of Notes represented by a Global Note (including principal, premium, if any, and interest) shall be made by the transfer of immediately available funds to the accounts specified by the Depositary. The Company shall make all payments in respect of a Definitive Note (including principal, premium, if any, and interest) by mailing a check to the registered address of each Holder thereof.

3. Paying Agent and Registrar

Initially, Wells Fargo Bank, National Association, duly organized and existing under the laws of the United States of America and having a corporate trust office at MAC-N9311-115; 625 Marquett Avenue, 11th Floor; Minneapolis, MN 55479 4 (in such capacity the

 

 

2   Insert for Additional Note, if applicable.
3   Insert applicable date.
4   Replace with the name of any successor, if applicable.


Trustee ”), shall act as Paying Agent and Registrar. The Company may appoint and change any Paying Agent, Registrar or co-registrar without notice to any Holder. The Company or any of its domestically incorporated Wholly-Owned Subsidiaries may act as Paying Agent, Registrar or co-registrar.

4. Indenture

The Company issued the Notes under an Indenture dated as of March 27, 2013 (as it may be amended or supplemented from time to time in accordance with the terms thereof, the “ Indenture ”), among the Company, the Subsidiary Guarantors and the Trustee. The terms of the Notes include those stated in the Indenture. Capitalized terms used herein and not defined herein have the meanings ascribed thereto in the Indenture. The Notes are subject to all such terms, and Holders are referred to the Indenture for a statement of those terms. To the extent any provision of this Note conflicts with the express provisions of the Indenture, the provisions of the Indenture shall govern and be controlling.

The Notes are senior obligations of the Company. This Note is one of the [            ] 5 issued under the Indenture.

5. Guarantee

To guarantee the due and punctual payment of the principal, premium, if any, and interest (including post-filing or post-petition interest under any Bankruptcy Law) on the Notes and all other amounts payable by the Company under the Indenture and the Notes when and as the same shall be due and payable, whether at maturity, by acceleration or otherwise, according to the terms of the Notes and the Indenture, the Subsidiary Guarantors have fully and unconditionally guaranteed (and future guarantors, together with the Subsidiary Guarantors, shall fully and unconditionally Guarantee), jointly and severally, such obligations pursuant to the terms of the Indenture.

6. Redemption

The Notes are redeemable, at the Company’s option, in whole or in part, as provided in the Indenture and the [            ] 6 Supplemental Indenture, dated as of [            ] 7 , among the Company, the Subsidiary Guarantors and the Trustee (the “[            ] Notes Supplemental Indenture”).

 

5   Insert applicable series of Notes.
6   Insert applicable number.
7   Insert date of issuance of Notes.


7. Change of Control; Asset Sales

(a) If a Change of Control occurs, unless the Company has exercised its right to redeem all of the Notes under paragraph 6 of the [              ] Notes Supplemental Indenture and all conditions precedent applicable to such redemption have been satisfied, each Holder shall have the right to require the Company to repurchase all or any part (in integral multiples of $1,000 except that no Note may be tendered in part if the remaining principal amount would be less than $2,000) of such Holder’s Notes at a purchase price in cash equal to 101% of the principal amount of the Notes plus accrued and unpaid interest, if any, to, but excluding, the date of purchase (subject to the right of Holders of record on the relevant Record Date to receive interest due on the relevant Interest Payment Date) as provided in, and subject to the terms of, the Indenture.

(b) In the event of an Asset Disposition that requires the purchase of Notes pursuant to Section 3.7(c) of the Indenture, the Company shall be required to make an offer to all Holders to purchase Notes in accordance with Section 3.7(c) of the Indenture at an offer price in cash in an amount equal to 100% of the principal amount of the Notes, plus accrued and unpaid interest to, but excluding, the date of purchase (subject to the rights of Holders of record on any Record Date to receive payments of interest on the related Interest Payment Date). Holders of Notes that are the subject of an offer to purchase will receive an Asset Disposition Offer from the Company prior to any related purchase date and may elect to have such Note purchased pursuant to such offer by completing the form entitled “Option of Holder To Elect Purchase” attached hereto, or transferring its interest in such Note by book-entry transfer, to the Company or a Paying Agent at the address specified in the notice at least three Business Days before the Asset Disposition Purchase Date.

8. Denominations; Transfer; Exchange

The Notes are in registered form without coupons in minimum denominations of principal amount of $2,000 and whole multiples of $1,000 in excess thereof. A Holder may transfer or exchange Notes in accordance with the Indenture. The Registrar may require a Holder, among other things, to furnish appropriate endorsements or transfer documents and to pay any taxes and fees required by law or permitted by the Indenture. The Registrar need not register the transfer of or exchange any Notes for a period at the opening of business on a Business Day 15 days before an Interest Payment Date and ending on such Interest Payment Date.

[This Regulation S Temporary Global Note is exchangeable in whole or in part for one or more Global Notes only (i) on or after the termination of the 40-day distribution compliance period (as defined in Regulation S) and (ii) upon presentation of certificates (accompanied by an Opinion of Counsel, if applicable) required by Article 2 of the Indenture. Upon exchange of this Regulation S Temporary Global Note for one or more Global Notes, the Trustee shall cancel this Regulation S Temporary Global Note.] 8

9. Persons Deemed Owners

The registered Holder of this Note may be treated as the owner of it for all purposes. Only registered Holders shall have rights hereunder.

 

8   Include in Regulation S Temporary Global Note only.


10. Unclaimed Money

If money for the payment of the principal of or premium, if any, or interest remains unclaimed for two years, the Trustee or Paying Agent shall pay the money back to the Company at its request unless an abandoned property law designates another Person. After any such payment, Holders entitled to the money must look only to the Company and not to the Trustee for payment.

11. Discharge and Defeasance

Subject to certain conditions set forth in the Indenture, the Company at any time may terminate some or all of its obligations under the Notes and the Indenture if the Company deposits with the Trustee money or U.S. Government Obligations for the payment of principal and interest on the Notes to redemption or maturity, as the case may be.

12. Amendment, Waiver

Subject to certain exceptions set forth in the Indenture, (i) the Indenture, the Notes and the Subsidiary Guarantees may be amended with the written consent of the Holders of at least a majority in principal amount of the Notes then outstanding (including without limitation, consents obtained in connection with a purchase of, or tender offer or exchange offer for Notes) and (ii) any default (other than (x) with respect to nonpayment or (y) in respect of a provision that cannot be amended without the written consent of each Holder affected) or noncompliance with any provision may be waived with the written consent of the Holders of a majority in principal amount of the Notes then outstanding (including without limitation, consents obtained in connection with a purchase of, or tender offer or exchange offer for, Notes); provided that (x) if any such amendment or waiver will only affect one series of Notes (or less than all series of Notes) then outstanding under the Indenture, then only the consent of the Holders of a majority in principal amount of the Notes of such series then outstanding (including, without limitation, consents obtained in connection with a purchase of, or tender offer or exchange offer for, Notes) shall be required and (y) if any such amendment or waiver by its terms will affect a series of Notes in a manner different and materially adverse relative to the manner such amendment or waiver affects other series of Notes, then the consent of the Holders of a majority in principal amount of the Notes of such series then outstanding (including, without limitation, consents obtained in connection with a purchase of, or tender offer or exchange offer for, Notes) shall be required. Subject to certain exceptions set forth in the Indenture, without the consent of any Holder, the Company, the Subsidiary Guarantors and the Trustee may amend the Indenture, the Notes and the Subsidiary Guarantees in certain circumstances as set forth in the Indenture.

13. Defaults and Remedies 9

Under the Indenture, and subject to the terms and provisions of the Indenture, Events of Default include, without limitation: (i) default in any payment of interest on any Note when the same becomes due and the default continues for 30 days; (ii) default in payment of the

 

 

9   Revise in accordance with Section 2.2(8) of the Indenture, if applicable.


principal of or premium, if any, on any Note when the same becomes due at its Stated Maturity, upon optional redemption, upon required repurchase, upon declaration of acceleration or otherwise; (iii) failure by the Company to comply with its obligations under Section 3.9 or Article IV of the Indenture, (iv) failure by the Company or any Subsidiary Guarantor to comply with certain other provisions or agreements in the Indenture and the Notes, in certain cases subject to notice and lapse of time; (v) certain accelerations (including failure to pay within any grace period after final maturity) of other Indebtedness for money borrowed of the Company or any Restricted Subsidiary if the amount accelerated (or so unpaid) exceeds $25.0 million (or its foreign currency equivalent); (vi) certain events of bankruptcy or insolvency with respect to the Company or any Significant Subsidiary or group of Restricted Subsidiaries that, taken together would constitute a Significant Subsidiary; (vii) certain final and non-appealable judgments for the payment of money aggregating in excess of $25.0 million (or its foreign currency equivalent) (net of amounts that are covered by insurance); and (viii) any Subsidiary Guarantee of a Significant Subsidiary or group of Restricted Subsidiaries that when taken together would constitute a Significant Subsidiary ceases to be in full force and effect (except as contemplated by the terms of the Indenture and the Subsidiary Guarantees) or is declared null and void in a judicial proceeding or is denied or disaffirmed by such Significant Subsidiary or group of Restricted Subsidiaries, as the case may be, and is not rescinded.

If an Event of Default occurs and is continuing, the Trustee or Holders of at least 25% in aggregate principal amount of the then outstanding Notes may declare all the Notes to be due and payable immediately. Certain events of bankruptcy or insolvency with respect to the Company are Events of Default which shall result in the Notes being due and payable immediately upon the occurrence of such Events of Default.

Holders may not enforce the Indenture or the Notes except as provided in the Indenture. The Trustee may refuse to enforce the Indenture or the Notes unless each receives indemnity or security satisfactory to the Trustee. Subject to certain limitations, Holders of a majority in principal amount of the Notes may direct the Trustee in its exercise of any trust or power. The Trustee may withhold from Holders notice of any continuing Default or Event of Default (except a Default or Event of Default in payment of principal or interest) if it determines in good faith that withholding the notice is in the interests of Holders.

14. Trustee Dealings with the Company

Subject to certain limitations set forth in the Indenture, the Trustee under the Indenture, in its individual or any other capacity, may become the owner or pledgee of Notes and may otherwise deal with and collect obligations owed to it by the Company or its Affiliates and may otherwise deal with the Company or its Affiliates with the same rights it would have if it were not Trustee.

15. No Recourse Against Others

No past, present or future director, officer, employee, incorporator, member, partner or stockholder of the Company or any of the Subsidiary Guarantors shall have any liability for any obligations of the Company or its Restricted Subsidiaries under the Notes, the Indenture or the Subsidiary Guarantees or for any claim based on, in respect of, or by reason of, such obligations or their creation. By accepting a Note, each Holder waives and releases all such liability. The waiver and release shall be part of the consideration for the issue of the Notes and the Subsidiary Guarantees.


16. Authentication

This Note shall not be valid until an authorized signatory of the Trustee (or an authenticating agent acting on its behalf) signs the certificate of authentication on the other side of this Note.

17. Abbreviations

Customary abbreviations may be used in the name of a Holder or an assignee, such as TEN COM (=tenants in common), TEN ENT (=tenants by the entirety), JT TEN (=joint tenants with rights of survivorship and not as tenants in common), CUST (=custodian) and U/G/M/A (=Uniform Gift to Minors Act).

18. CUSIP Numbers

Pursuant to a recommendation promulgated by the Committee on Uniform Note Identification Procedures the Company has caused CUSIP numbers to be printed on the Notes. No representation is made as to the accuracy of such numbers as printed on the Notes and reliance may be placed only on the other identification numbers placed thereon.

19. Successor Entity

When a successor entity assumes, in accordance with the Indenture, all the obligations of its predecessor under the Notes and the Indenture, and immediately before and thereafter no Default or Event of Default exists and all other conditions of the Indenture are satisfied, the predecessor entity will be released from those obligations.

20. Governing Law

This Note shall be governed by, and construed in accordance with, the laws of the State of New York.

The Company shall furnish to any Holder upon written request and without charge to the Holder a copy of the Indenture. Requests may be made to:

Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc.

1001 Fleet Street, 6 th Floor

Baltimore, MD 21202

Attention: General Counsel


ASSIGNMENT FORM

To assign this Note, fill in the form below:

I or we assign and transfer this Note to

 

 

(Print or type assignee’s name, address and zip code)

 

  

 

(Insert assignee’s soc. sec. or tax I.D. No.)

and irrevocably appoint                  agent to transfer this Note on the books of the Company. The agent may substitute another to act for him.

 

Date:          Your Signature:      
  

 

        

 

  

 

Signature Guarantee:      
  

 

     
   (Signature must be guaranteed)   

 

  

 

Sign exactly as your name appears on the other side of this Note.

The signature(s) should be guaranteed by an eligible guarantor institution (banks, stockbrokers, savings and loan associations and credit unions with membership in an approved signature guarantee medallion program), pursuant to SEC Rule 17Ad-15.


[TO BE ATTACHED TO GLOBAL NOTES] [REGULATION S TEMPORARY GLOBAL NOTE]

SCHEDULE OF INCREASES OR DECREASES IN [GLOBAL NOTE][REGULATION S TEMPORARY GLOBAL NOTE]

The initial principal amount of the Note shall be $ [                      ]. The following increases or decreases in this Global Note have been made:

 

Date of

Exchange

  

Amount of

decrease in

Principal

Amount of this

Global Note

  

Amount of

increase in

Principal

Amount of this

Global Note

  

Principal

Amount of this

Global Note

following such

decrease or

increase

  

Signature of

authorized

signatory of

Trustee or Notes

Custodian


OPTION OF HOLDER TO ELECT PURCHASE

If you want to elect to have this Note purchased by the Company pursuant to Section 3.7 or 3.9 of the Indenture, check the box:

 

¨                      ¨
Section 3.7    Section 3.9

If you want to elect to have only part of this Note purchased by the Company pursuant to Section 3.7 or 3.9 of the Indenture, state the amount in principal amount (must be in minimum denominations of $2,000 or integral multiples of $1,000 in excess thereof): $

 

Date:

           Your Signature:        
          (Sign exactly as your name appears on the other side of the Note)

 

Signature Guarantee:

       
  

(Signature must be guaranteed)

  

The signature(s) should be guaranteed by an eligible guarantor institution (banks, stockbrokers, savings and loan associations and credit unions with membership in an approved signature guarantee medallion program), pursuant to SEC Rule 17Ad-15.


EXHIBIT B

FORM OF CERTIFICATE OF TRANSFER

Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc.

1001 Fleet Street, 6 th Floor

Baltimore, MD 21202

Attention: General Counsel

Wells Fargo Bank – DAPS Reorg.

MAC N9303-121

608 2nd Avenue South

Minneapolis, MN 55479

Telephone No.: (877) 872-4605

Fax No.: (866) 969-1290

Email: DAPSReorg@wellsfargo.com

Re: [            ]% Senior Notes due 20[ ]

Reference is hereby made to the Indenture, dated as of March 27, 2013 (the “ Indenture ”), among Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc., as issuer (the “ Company ”), the Subsidiary Guarantors named therein and Wells Fargo Bank, National Association, as trustee. Capitalized terms used but not defined herein shall have the meanings given to them in the Indenture.

             (the “ Transferor ”) owns and proposes to transfer the Note[s] or interest in such Note[s] specified in Annex A hereto, in the principal amount of $              in such Note[s] or interests (the “ Transfer ”), to              (the “ Transferee ”), as further specified in Annex A hereto. In connection with the Transfer, the Transferor hereby certifies that:

[CHECK ALL THAT APPLY]

 

1.            ¨    Check if Transferee will take delivery of a beneficial interest in the 144A Global Note or a Restricted Definitive
Note pursuant to Rule 144A
. The Transfer is being effected pursuant to and in accordance with Rule 144A under the
United States Securities Act of 1933, as amended (the “ Securities Act ”), and, accordingly, the Transferor hereby
further certifies that the beneficial interest or Definitive Note is being transferred to a Person that the Transferor
reasonably believes is purchasing the beneficial interest or Definitive Note for its own account, or for one or more
accounts with respect to which such Person exercises sole investment discretion, and such Person and each such
account is a “qualified institutional buyer” within the meaning of Rule 144A in a transaction meeting the requirements
of Rule 144A and such Transfer is in compliance with any applicable blue sky securities laws of any state of the
United States. Upon consummation of the proposed Transfer in accordance with the terms of the Indenture, the
transferred beneficial interest or Definitive Note will be subject to the restrictions on transfer enumerated in the Private
Placement Legend printed on the 144A Global Note and/or the Restricted Definitive Note and in the Indenture and the
Securities Act.

 

B-1


2.            ¨         Check if Transferee will take delivery of a beneficial interest in the Regulation S Temporary Global Note,
the Regulation S Permanent Global Note or a Restricted Definitive Note pursuant to Regulation S
. The
Transfer is being effected pursuant to and in accordance with Rule 903 or Rule 904 under the Securities Act and,
accordingly, the Transferor hereby further certifies that (i) the Transfer is not being made to a Person in the United
States and (x) at the time the buy order was originated, the Transferee was outside the United States or such
Transferor and any Person acting on its behalf reasonably believed and believes that the Transferee was outside
the United States or (y) the transaction was executed in, on or through the facilities of a designated offshore
securities market and neither such Transferor nor any Person acting on its behalf knows that the transaction was
prearranged with a buyer in the United States, (ii) no directed selling efforts have been made in contravention of
the requirements of Rule 903(b) or Rule 904(b) of Regulation S under the Securities Act, (iii) the transaction is not
part of a plan or scheme to evade the registration requirements of the Securities Act and (iv) if the proposed
transfer is being made prior to the expiration of the Restricted Period, the transfer is not being made to a U.S.
Person or for the account or benefit of a U.S. Person (other than an Initial Purchaser). Upon consummation of the
proposed transfer in accordance with the terms of the Indenture, the transferred beneficial interest or Definitive
Note will be subject to the restrictions on Transfer enumerated in the Private Placement Legend printed on the
Regulation S Permanent Global Note, the Regulation S Temporary Global Note and/or the Restricted Definitive
Note and in the Indenture and the Securities Act.
3.    ¨    Check and complete if Transferee will take delivery of a beneficial interest in the IAI Global Note or a Restricted Definitive Note pursuant to any provision of the Securities Act other than Rule 144A or Regulation S. The Transfer is being effected in compliance with the transfer restrictions applicable to beneficial interests in Restricted Global Notes and Restricted Definitive Notes and pursuant to and in accordance with the Securities Act and any applicable blue sky securities laws of any state of the United States, and accordingly the Transferor hereby further certifies that (check one):
      (a)      ¨       such Transfer is being effected pursuant to and in accordance with Rule 144 under the Securities Act;
      or
      (b)      ¨       such Transfer is being effected pursuant to an effective registration statement under the Securities Act and in compliance with the prospectus delivery requirements of the Securities Act;
      or

 

B-2


      (c)    ¨    such Transfer is being effected to an Institutional Accredited Investor and pursuant to an exemption from the registration requirements of the Securities Act other than Rule 144A, Rule 144, Rule 903 or Rule 904, and the Transferor hereby further certifies that it has not engaged in any general solicitation within the meaning of Regulation D under the Securities Act and the Transfer complies with the transfer restrictions applicable to beneficial interests in a Restricted Global Note or Restricted Definitive Notes and the requirements of the exemption claimed, which certification is supported by (1) a certificate executed by the Transferee in the form of Exhibit D to the Indenture and (2) an Opinion of Counsel provided by the Transferor or the Transferee (a copy of which the Transferor has attached to this certification), to the effect that such Transfer is in compliance with the Securities Act. Upon consummation of the proposed transfer in accordance with the terms of the Indenture, the transferred beneficial interest or Definitive Note will be subject to the restrictions on transfer enumerated in the Private Placement Legend printed on the IAI Global Note and/or the Restricted Definitive Notes and in the Indenture and the Securities Act.
4.            ¨         Check if Transferee will take delivery of a beneficial interest in an Unrestricted Global Note or of an Unrestricted Definitive Note .
      (a)    ¨    Check if Transfer is pursuant to Rule 144 . (i) The Transfer is being effected pursuant to and in accordance with Rule 144 under the Securities Act and in compliance with the transfer restrictions contained in the Indenture and any applicable blue sky securities laws of any state of the United States and (ii) the restrictions on transfer contained in the Indenture and the Private Placement Legend are not required in order to maintain compliance with the Securities Act. Upon consummation of the proposed Transfer in accordance with the terms of the Indenture, the transferred beneficial interest or Definitive Note will no longer be subject to the restrictions on transfer enumerated in the Private Placement Legend printed on the Restricted Global Notes, on Restricted Definitive Notes and in the Indenture.
     

(b)

   ¨    Check if Transfer is pursuant to Regulation S. (i) The Transfer is being effected pursuant to and in accordance with Rule 903 or Rule 904 under the Securities Act and in compliance with the transfer restrictions contained in the Indenture and any applicable blue sky securities laws of any state of the United States and (ii) the restrictions on transfer contained in the Indenture and the Private Placement Legend are not required in order to maintain compliance with the Securities Act. Upon consummation of the proposed Transfer in accordance with the terms of the Indenture,

 

B-3


          the transferred beneficial interest or Definitive Note will no longer be subject to the restrictions on transfer enumerated in the Private Placement Legend printed on the Restricted Global Notes, on Restricted Definitive Notes and in the Indenture.
   

(c)

   ¨    Check if Transfer is pursuant to other exemption . (i) The Transfer is being effected pursuant to and in compliance with an exemption from the registration requirements of the Securities Act other than Rule 144, Rule 903 or Rule 904 and in compliance with the transfer restrictions contained in the Indenture and any applicable blue sky securities laws of any State of the United States and (ii) the restrictions on transfer contained in the Indenture and the Private Placement Legend are not required in order to maintain compliance with the Securities Act. Upon consummation of the proposed Transfer in accordance with the terms of the Indenture, the transferred beneficial interest or Definitive Note will not be subject to the restrictions on transfer enumerated in the Private Placement Legend printed on the Restricted Global Notes or Restricted Definitive Notes and in the Indenture.

This certificate and the statements contained herein are made for your benefit and the benefit of the Company.

 

    [Insert Name of Transferor]
 

By:

     
    

 

 

       Name:      
       Title:      

Dated:                                      

 

B-4


ANNEX A TO CERTIFICATE OF TRANSFER

 

1. The Transferor owns and proposes to transfer the following:

[CHECK ONE OF (a) OR (b)]

 

    (a)    ¨    a beneficial interest in the:
         (i)    ¨       144A Global Note (CUSIP 12621E AG8), or
         (ii)    ¨       Regulation S Global Note (CUSIP U1746E AB9), or
         (iii)    ¨       IAI Global Note (CUSIP 12621E AH6), or
  (b)    ¨    a Restricted Definitive Note.

 

2. After the Transfer the Transferee will hold:

[CHECK ONE]

 

    (a)    ¨    a beneficial interest in the:
         (i)    ¨       144A Global Note (CUSIP 12621E AG8), or
         (ii)    ¨       Regulation S Global Note (CUSIP U1746E AB9), or
         (iii)    ¨       IAI Global Note (CUSIP 12621E AH6), or
     (iv)   

¨       Unrestricted Global Note CUSIP [ ], or

 

(b)

   ¨    a Restricted Definitive Note; or
 

(c)

   ¨    an Unrestricted Definitive Note,

in accordance with the terms of the Indenture.

 

B-5


EXHIBIT C

FORM OF CERTIFICATE OF EXCHANGE

Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc.

1001 Fleet Street, 6 th Floor

Baltimore, MD 21202

Attention: General Counsel

Wells Fargo Bank – DAPS Reorg.

MAC N9303-121

608 2nd Avenue South

Minneapolis, MN 55479

Telephone No.: (877) 872-4605

Fax No.: (866) 969-1290

Email: DAPSReorg@wellsfargo.com

Re: [            ]% Senior Notes due 20[ ]

Reference is hereby made to the Indenture, dated as of March 27, 2013 (the “ Indenture ”), among Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc., as issuer (the “ Company ”), the Subsidiary Guarantors named therein and Wells Fargo Bank, National Association, as trustee. Capitalized terms used but not defined herein shall have the meanings given to them in the Indenture.

             (the “ Owner ”) owns and proposes to exchange the Note[s] or interest in such Note[s] specified herein, in the principal amount of $              in such Note[s] or interests (the “ Exchange ”). In connection with the Exchange, the Owner hereby certifies that:

1. Exchange of Restricted Definitive Notes or Beneficial Interests in a Restricted Global Note for Unrestricted Definitive Notes or Beneficial Interests in an Unrestricted Global Note .

(a) ¨ Check if Exchange is from beneficial interest in a Restricted Global Note to beneficial interest in an Unrestricted Global Note . In connection with the Exchange of the Owner’s beneficial interest in a Restricted Global Note for a beneficial interest in an Unrestricted Global Note in an equal principal amount, the Owner hereby certifies (i) the beneficial interest is being acquired for the Owner’s own account without transfer, (ii) such Exchange has been effected in compliance with the transfer restrictions applicable to the Global Notes and pursuant to and in accordance with the United States Securities Act of 1933, as amended (the “Securities Act”), (iii) the restrictions on transfer contained in the Indenture and the Private Placement Legend are not required in order to maintain compliance with the Securities Act and (iv) the beneficial interest in an Unrestricted Global Note is being acquired in compliance with any applicable blue sky securities laws of any state of the United States.

(b) ¨ Check if Exchange is from beneficial interest in a Restricted Global Note to Unrestricted Definitive Note . In connection with the Exchange of the Owner’s beneficial interest in a Restricted Global Note for an Unrestricted Definitive Note, the Owner hereby certifies (i) the Definitive Note is being acquired for the Owner’s own account without

 

C-1


transfer, (ii) such Exchange has been effected in compliance with the transfer restrictions applicable to the Restricted Global Notes and pursuant to and in accordance with the Securities Act, (iii) the restrictions on transfer contained in the Indenture and the Private Placement Legend are not required in order to maintain compliance with the Securities Act and (iv) the Definitive Note is being acquired in compliance with any applicable blue sky securities laws of any state of the United States.

(c) ¨ Check if Exchange is from Restricted Definitive Note to beneficial interest in an Unrestricted Global Note . In connection with the Owner’s Exchange of a Restricted Definitive Note for a beneficial interest in an Unrestricted Global Note, the Owner hereby certifies (i) the beneficial interest is being acquired for the Owner’s own account without transfer, (ii) such Exchange has been effected in compliance with the transfer restrictions applicable to Restricted Definitive Notes and pursuant to and in accordance with the Securities Act, (iii) the restrictions on transfer contained in the Indenture and the Private Placement Legend are not required in order to maintain compliance with the Securities Act and (iv) the beneficial interest is being acquired in compliance with any applicable blue sky securities laws of any state of the United States.

(d) ¨ Check if Exchange is from Restricted Definitive Note to Unrestricted Definitive Note . In connection with the Owner’s Exchange of a Restricted Definitive Note for an Unrestricted Definitive Note, the Owner hereby certifies (i) the Unrestricted Definitive Note is being acquired for the Owner’s own account without transfer, (ii) such Exchange has been effected in compliance with the transfer restrictions applicable to Restricted Definitive Notes and pursuant to and in accordance with the Securities Act, (iii) the restrictions on transfer contained in the Indenture and the Private Placement Legend are not required in order to maintain compliance with the Securities Act and (iv) the Unrestricted Definitive Note is being acquired in compliance with any applicable blue sky securities laws of any state of the United States.

2. Exchange of Restricted Definitive Notes or Beneficial Interests in Restricted Global Notes for Restricted Definitive Notes or Beneficial Interests in Restricted Global Notes .

(a) ¨ Check if Exchange is from beneficial interest in a Restricted Global Note to Restricted Definitive Note . In connection with the Exchange of the Owner’s beneficial interest in a Restricted Global Note for a Restricted Definitive Note with an equal principal amount, the Owner hereby certifies that the Restricted Definitive Note is being acquired for the Owner’s own account without transfer. Upon consummation of the proposed Exchange in accordance with the terms of the Indenture, the Restricted Definitive Note issued will continue to be subject to the restrictions on transfer enumerated in the Private Placement Legend printed on the Restricted Definitive Note and in the Indenture and the Securities Act.

(b) ¨ Check if Exchange is from Restricted Definitive Note to beneficial interest in a Restricted Global Note . In connection with the Exchange of the Owner’s Restricted Definitive Note for a beneficial interest in the [CHECK ONE] ¨ 144A Global Note, ¨ Regulation S Global Note, ¨ IAI Global Note with an equal principal amount, the Owner hereby certifies (i) the beneficial interest is being acquired for the Owner’s own account without transfer and (ii) such Exchange has been effected in compliance with the transfer restrictions

 

C-2


applicable to the Restricted Global Notes and pursuant to and in accordance with the Securities Act, and in compliance with any applicable blue sky securities laws of any state of the United States. Upon consummation of the proposed Exchange in accordance with the terms of the Indenture, the beneficial interest issued will be subject to the restrictions on transfer enumerated in the Private Placement Legend printed on the relevant Restricted Global Note and in the Indenture and the Securities Act.

 

C-3


This certificate and the statements contained herein are made for your benefit and the benefit of the Company.

 

    [Insert Name of Transferor]
 

By:

     
    

 

 

       Name:      
       Title:      

Dated:                                  

 

C-4


EXHIBIT D

FORM OF CERTIFICATE FROM

ACQUIRING INSTITUTIONAL ACCREDITED INVESTOR

Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc.

1001 Fleet Street, 6 th Floor

Baltimore, MD 21202

Attention: General Counsel

Wells Fargo Bank – DAPS Reorg.

MAC N9303-121

608 2nd Avenue South

Minneapolis, MN 55479

Telephone No.: (877) 872-4605

Fax No.: (866) 969-1290

Email: DAPSReorg@wellsfargo.com

Re: [ ]% Senior Notes due 2021

Reference is hereby made to the Indenture, dated as of March 27, 2013 (the “ Indenture ”), among Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc., as issuer (the “ Company ”), the Subsidiary Guarantors named therein and Wells Fargo Bank, National Association, as trustee. Capitalized terms used but not defined herein shall have the meanings given to them in the Indenture.

In connection with our proposed purchase of $              aggregate principal amount of:

(a) ¨ a beneficial interest in a Global Note, or

(b) ¨ a Definitive Note,

we confirm that:

1. We understand that any subsequent transfer of the Notes or any interest therein is subject to certain restrictions and conditions set forth in the Indenture and the undersigned agrees to be bound by, and not to resell, pledge or otherwise transfer the Notes or any interest therein except in compliance with, such restrictions and conditions and the Securities Act of 1933, as amended (the “ Securities Act ”).

2. We understand that the offer and sale of the Notes have not been registered under the Securities Act, and that the Notes and any interest therein may not be offered or sold except as permitted in the following sentence. We agree, on our own behalf and on behalf of any accounts for which we are acting as hereinafter stated, that if we should sell the Notes or any interest therein, we will do so only (A) to the Company or any subsidiary thereof, (B) in accordance with Rule 144A under the Securities Act to a “qualified institutional buyer” (as defined therein), (C) to an institutional “accredited investor” (as defined below) that, prior to such transfer, furnishes (or has furnished on its behalf by a U.S. broker-dealer) to you and to the

 

D-1


Company a signed letter substantially in the form of this letter and an Opinion of Counsel in form reasonably acceptable to the Company to the effect that such transfer is in compliance with the Securities Act, (D) outside the United States in accordance with Rule 904 of Regulation S under the Securities Act, (E) pursuant to the provisions of Rule 144 under the Securities Act or (F) pursuant to an effective registration statement under the Securities Act, and we further agree to provide to any Person purchasing the Definitive Note or beneficial interest in a Global Note from us in a transaction meeting the requirements of clauses (A) through (E) of this paragraph a notice advising such purchaser that resales thereof are restricted as stated herein.

3. We understand that, on any proposed resale of the Notes or beneficial interest therein, we will be required to furnish to you and the Company such certifications, legal opinions and other information as you and the Company may reasonably require to confirm that the proposed sale complies with the foregoing restrictions. We further understand that the Notes purchased by us will bear a legend to the foregoing effect.

4. We are an institutional “accredited investor” (as defined in Rule 501(a)(1), (2), (3) or (7) of Regulation D under the Securities Act) and have such knowledge and experience in financial and business matters as to be capable of evaluating the merits and risks of our investment in the Notes, and we and any accounts for which we are acting are each able to bear the economic risk of our or its investment.

5. We are acquiring the Notes or beneficial interest therein purchased by us for our own account or for one or more accounts (each of which is an institutional “accredited investor”) as to each of which we exercise sole investment discretion.

You and the Company are entitled to rely upon this letter and are irrevocably authorized to produce this letter or a copy hereof to any interested party in any administrative or legal proceedings or official inquiry with respect to the matters covered hereby.

 

    [Insert Name of Accredited Investor]
 

By:

     
    

 

 

       Name:      
       Title:      

Dated:                                              

 

D-2


EXHIBIT E

FORM OF SUPPLEMENTAL INDENTURE TO BE DELIVERED BY SUBSEQUENT SUBSIDIARY GUARANTORS

SUPPLEMENTAL INDENTURE (this “ Supplemental Indenture ”), dated as of              , among              (the “ Guaranteeing Subsidiary ”), a subsidiary of FIDELITY & GUARANTY LIFE HOLDINGS, INC. (or its permitted successor), a Delaware corporation (the “ Company ”), and WELLS FARGO BANK, NATIONAL ASSOCIATION, a national banking association, as trustee (together with its successors and assigns, in such capacity, the “ Trustee ”) under the Indenture referred to below.

WHEREAS, the Company and the Subsidiary Guarantors have heretofore executed and delivered to the Trustee an indenture (the “ Indenture ”), dated as of March 27, 2013 providing for the issuance of [__]% Senior Notes due 20[_] (the “ Notes ”);

WHEREAS, the Indenture provides that under certain circumstances the Guaranteeing Subsidiary shall execute and deliver to the Trustee a supplemental indenture pursuant to which the Guaranteeing Subsidiary shall unconditionally guarantee all of the Company’s obligations under the Notes and the Indenture on the terms and conditions set forth herein (the “ Subsidiary Guarantee ”); and

WHEREAS, pursuant to Section 9.1 of the Indenture, the Trustee is authorized to execute and deliver this Supplemental Indenture.

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the foregoing and for other good and valuable consideration, the receipt of which is hereby acknowledged, the parties mutually covenant and agree for the benefit of the Holders of the Notes as follows:

1. Capitalized Terms . Capitalized terms used herein without definition shall have the meanings assigned to them in the Indenture.

2. Agreement to Guarantee . The Guaranteeing Subsidiary acknowledges that it has received and reviewed a copy of the Indenture and all other documents it deems necessary to review in order to enter into this Supplemental Indenture, and acknowledges and agrees to (i) join and become a party to the Indenture as indicated by its signature below; (ii) be bound by the Indenture, as of the date hereof, as if made by, and with respect to, each signatory hereto; and (iii) perform all obligations and duties required of a Guarantor pursuant to the Indenture. The Guaranteeing Subsidiary hereby agrees to provide an unconditional Subsidiary Guarantee on the terms and subject to the conditions set forth in the Indenture, including, but not limited to, Article X thereof.

3. Execution and Delivery . The Guaranteeing Subsidiary agrees that the Subsidiary Guarantee shall remain in full force and effect notwithstanding the absence of the endorsement of any notation of such Subsidiary Guarantee on the Notes.

4. No Recourse Against Others . No past, present or future director, officer, employee, incorporator, member, partner or stockholder of the Company or any of the Subsidiary

 

E-1


Guarantors shall have any liability for any obligations of the Company or its Restricted Subsidiaries under the Notes, the Indenture, this Supplemental Indenture, the Subsidiary Guarantees or for any claim based on, in respect of, or by reason of such obligations or their creation. Each Holder by accepting a Note waives and releases all such liability. The waiver and release shall be part of the consideration for the issuance of the Notes and the Subsidiary Guarantees.

5. Governing Law . THIS SUPPLEMENTAL INDENTURE SHALL BE GOVERNED BY, AND CONSTRUED IN ACCORDANCE WITH, THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF NEW YORK.

6. Counterparts . The parties may sign any number of copies of this Supplemental Indenture. Each signed copy shall be an original, but all of them together represent the same agreement. This Supplemental Indenture may be executed in multiple counterparts which, when taken together, shall constitute one instrument. The exchange of copies of this Supplemental Indenture and of signature pages by facsimile or PDF transmissions shall constitute effective execution and delivery of this Supplemental Indenture as to the parties hereto and may be used in lieu of the original Supplemental Indenture for all purposes. Signatures of the parties hereto transmitted by facsimile or PDF shall be deemed to be their original signatures for all purposes.

7. Effect of Headings . The Section headings herein have been inserted for convenience of reference only, are not intended to be considered a part hereof and shall not modify or restrict any of the terms or provisions hereof.

8. The Trustee . The Trustee shall not be responsible in any manner whatsoever for or in respect of the validity or sufficiency of this Supplemental Indenture or for or in respect of the recitals contained herein, all of which recitals are made solely by the Guaranteeing Subsidiary and the Company.

9. Benefits Acknowledged . The Guaranteeing Subsidiary’s Subsidiary Guarantee is subject to the terms and conditions set forth in the Indenture. The Guaranteeing Subsidiary acknowledges that it will receive direct and indirect benefits from the financing arrangements contemplated by the Indenture and this Supplemental Indenture and that the guarantee and waivers made by it pursuant to its Subsidiary Guarantee are knowingly made in contemplation of such benefits.

10. Successors . All agreements of the Guaranteeing Subsidiary in this Supplemental Indenture shall bind its successors, except as otherwise provided in this Supplemental Indenture. All agreements of the Trustee in this Supplemental Indenture shall bind their respective successors.

[Remainder of Page Intentionally Left Blank]

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this Supplemental Indenture to be duly executed, all as of the date first above written.

 

E-2


FIDELITY & GUARANTY LIFE HOLDINGS, INC.
By:    
  Name:
  Title:
[G UARANTEEING S UBSIDIARY ]
By:    
  Name:
  Title:

 

E-3


WELLS FARGO BANK, NATIONAL
ASSOCIATION, as Trustee
By:    
  Name:
  Title:

 

E-4


EXHIBIT F

FORM OF SUPPLEMENTAL INDENTURE ESTABLISHING A SERIES OF NOTES

FIDELITY & GUARANTY LIFE HOLDINGS, INC.

as Issuer

and

the Subsidiary Guarantors from time to time party to the Indenture

and

[NAME]

as Trustee

 

 

[        ] SUPPLEMENTAL INDENTURE

DATED AS OF [        ], 20[  ]

 

 

[        ]% Senior Notes Due 20[  ]

 

F-1


[            ] 10 SUPPLEMENTAL INDENTURE, dated as of [              ], 20[ ] (this “ Supplemental Indenture ”), among Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc. 11 (the “ Company ”), the Subsidiary Guarantors under the Indenture referred to below (the “ Subsidiary Guarantors ”), and Wells Fargo Bank, National Association, as Trustee under the Indenture referred to below.

W I T N E S S E T H:

WHEREAS, the Company, the Subsidiary Guarantors and the Trustee, are party to an Indenture, dated as of March 27, 2013 (as amended, supplemented, waived or otherwise modified, the “ Indenture ”), relating to the issuance from time to time by the Company of Notes;

WHEREAS, Section 9.1(xii) of the Indenture provides that the Company may provide for the issuance of Notes of any series as permitted by Section 2.2 therein;

WHEREAS, in connection with the issuance of the [        ] Notes (as defined herein), the Company has duly authorized the execution and delivery of this Supplemental Indenture to establish the forms and terms of the [        ] Notes as hereinafter described; and

WHEREAS, pursuant to Section 9.1 of the Indenture, the parties hereto are authorized to execute and deliver this Supplemental Indenture to amend the Indenture, without the consent of any Holder;

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the foregoing and for other good and valuable consideration, the receipt of which is hereby acknowledged, the Company, the Subsidiary Guarantors and the Trustee mutually covenant and agree for the benefit of the Holders of the Notes as follows:

1. Defined Terms . As used in this Supplemental Indenture, terms defined in the Indenture or in the preamble or recital hereto are used herein as so defined. The words “herein,” “hereof” and “hereby” and other words of similar import used in this Supplemental Indenture refer to this Supplemental Indenture as a whole and not to any particular section hereof.

2. Title of Notes . There shall be a series of Notes of the Company designated the “[  ]% 12 Senior Notes due 20[  ]” 13 (the “[            ] 14 Notes”).

3. Maturity Date . The final Stated Maturity of the [    ] Notes shall be [[    ], 20[  ]]. 15

 

10   Insert supplement number.
11   Replace company name with that of any successor, if applicable.
12   Insert interest rate.
13   Insert year during which the maturity date falls.
14   Insert title of notes.
15   Insert Maturity Date.

 

F-2


4. Interest and Interest Rates . Interest on the outstanding principal amount of [    ] Notes will accrue at the rate of [    ]% 16 per annum and will be payable semi-annually in arrears on [[    ] and [    ]] 17 in each year, commencing on [[    ], 20[  ]], 18 to holders of record on the immediately preceding [[    ] and [    ]], 19 respectively (each such [    ] and [    ], a “ Record Date ”). Interest on the [    ] Notes will accrue from the most recent date to which interest has been paid or provided for or, if no interest has been paid, from [    ], 20[ ], except that interest on any Additional [    ] Notes (as defined below) issued on or after the first Interest Payment Date will accrue (or will be deemed to have accrued) from the most recent date to which interest has been paid or duly provided for or, if no interest has been paid on such Additional [    ] Notes, from the Interest Payment Date immediately preceding the date of issuance of such Additional [    ] Notes (or if the date of issuance of such Additional [    ] Notes is an Interest Payment Date, from such date of issuance); provided that if any [    ] Note is surrendered for exchange on or after a record date for an Interest Payment Date that will occur on or after the date of such exchange, interest on such Note received in exchange thereof will accrue from such Interest Payment Date. Interest shall be computed on the basis of a 360-day year of twelve 30-day months.

5. [No] Limitation on Aggregate Principal Amount . The aggregate principal amount of [    ] Notes that may be authenticated, delivered and outstanding under the Indenture is [not limited] [limited to $[    ]]. 20 [The aggregate principal amount of the [    ] Notes shall initially be $[    ] 21 million.] 22 [The aggregate principal amount of the [    ] Notes issued pursuant to this Supplemental Indenture shall be $[    ] million.] 23 The Company may from time to time, without the consent of the Holders, create and issue Additional Notes having the same terms and conditions as the Notes in all respects except for issue date and, if applicable, issue price and the first date on which interest accrues and the first payment of interest thereon. Additional Notes issued in this manner will be consolidated with, and will form a single series with, the [    ] Notes (any such Additional Notes, “ Additional [    ] Notes ”), unless otherwise specified for Additional Notes in an applicable Notes Supplemental Indenture, or otherwise designated by the Company, as contemplated by Section 2.2 of the Indenture.

6. Redemption .

 

    Except as set forth in clauses (b), (c) and (d) of this Paragraph 6, the [    ] Notes are not redeemable until [    ] 24 . On and after [    ] 25 , the Company may redeem all or, from time to time, a part of the[    ] Notes at the following redemption prices (expressed as a percentage of principal amount of the [    ] Notes to be redeemed) plus accrued and unpaid interest on the [    ] Notes, if any, to, but

 

 

16   Insert interest rate.
17   Insert Interest Payment Dates.
18   Insert First Interest Payment Date.
19   Insert Record Dates.
20   Insert whether the applicable series of Notes will be limited or not.
21   Insert principal amount of issuance.
22   Insert for the initial notes of any applicable series.
23   Insert for the initial notes of any applicable series.
24   Insert date upon which Notes are callable.
25   Insert date upon which Notes are callable.

 

F-3


 

excluding, the applicable Redemption Date (subject to the right of Holders of record on the relevant Record Date to receive interest due on the relevant Interest Payment Date), if redeemed during the twelve-month period beginning on [    ] 26 of the years indicated below:

 

Redemption Period 27

   Price 28

20[  ]

   [    ]%

20[  ]

   [    ]%

20[  ]

   [    ]%

20[  ] and thereafter

   100.000%

 

    The Company may on any one or more occasions prior to [    ] 29 redeem up to [    ]% 30 of the original principal amount of the [    ] Notes (including any Additional [    ] Notes) with the Net Cash Proceeds of one or more Equity Offerings at a redemption price of [    ]% 31 of the principal amount thereof plus accrued and unpaid interest, if any, to, but excluding, the applicable Redemption Date (subject to the right of Holders of [    ] Notes on the relevant Record Date to receive interest due on the relevant Interest Payment Date); provided that

(i) at least [    ]% of the original principal amount of the [    ] Notes (including any Additional [    ] Notes) remains outstanding after each such redemption; and

(ii) the redemption occurs within 90 days after the closing of such Equity Offering.

 

    In addition, at any time prior to [    ] 32 , the Company may redeem the [    ] Notes, in whole or in part, at a redemption price equal to 100% of the principal amount thereof plus the Applicable Premium, plus accrued and unpaid interest, if any, to, but excluding, the Redemption Date (subject to the right of Holders of record on the relevant Record Date to receive interest due on the relevant Interest Payment Date).

 

26   Insert date upon which Notes are callable.
27   Insert years, adding or deleting lines if applicable.
28   Insert prices.
29   Insert date until which equity claw-back is applicable.
30   Insert maximum percentage for equity claw-back.
31   Insert premium.
32   Insert date upon which Notes are callable.

 

F-4


    If Holders of not less than [    ]% 33 in aggregate principal amount of the outstanding [    ] Notes validly tender and do not withdraw such Notes in a Change of Control Offer and the Company, or any third party making a Change of Control Offer in lieu of the Company as described under Section 3.9 of the Indenture, purchases all of the [    ] Notes validly tendered and not withdrawn by such Holders in such Change of Control Offer, the Company or such third party may elect, upon not less than 30 nor more than 60 days’ prior notice, to redeem all [    ] Notes that remain outstanding following the consummation of the Change of Control Offer at a redemption price equal to 101% of the principal amount thereof plus accrued and unpaid interest, if any, to but excluding, the applicable redemption date; provided that the Company or the applicable third party must provide any such notice of redemption within 30 days following the Change of Control Offer Payment Date.

 

    Any redemption pursuant to this paragraph 6 shall be made pursuant to the provisions of Section 5.1, and Sections 5.2 through 5.8 of the Indenture.

 

    For purposes of this paragraph 6, the following terms shall have the following meanings:

Applicable Premium ” means, as determined by the Company with respect to a Note on any Redemption Date, the greater of:

(1) 1.0% of the principal amount of such Note; and

(2) the excess, if any, of (a) the present value as of such Redemption Date of (i) the redemption price of such Note on [    ] 34 as set forth in Paragraph 6(a) hereof, plus (ii) the remaining scheduled interest payments due on such Note through [    ] 35 (excluding accrued but unpaid interest to the Redemption Date), computed using a discount rate equal to the Treasury Rate as of such Redemption Date plus 50 basis points, over (b) the then outstanding principal amount of such Note.

Treasury Rate ” means, as obtained by the Company, the yield to maturity at the time of computation of United States Treasury securities with a constant maturity (as compiled and published in the most recent Federal Reserve Statistical Release H.15 (519) that has become publicly available at least two Business Days prior to the Redemption Date (or, if such Statistical Release is no longer published, any publicly available source of similar market data)) most nearly equal to the period from the Redemption Date to [    ] 36 ; provided , however , that if the period from the Redemption Date to [    ] 37 is not equal to the constant maturity of a United States Treasury security for which a weekly average yield is given, the Treasury Rate shall be obtained by linear interpolation (calculated to the nearest one-twelfth of

 

 

33   Insert minimum tender percentage.
34   Insert date upon which Notes are callable.
35   Insert date upon which Notes are callable.
36   Insert date upon which Notes are callable.
37   Insert date upon which Notes are callable.

 

F-5


a year) from the weekly average yields of United States Treasury securities for which such yields are given, except that if the period from the Redemption Date to [    ] 38 is less than one year, the weekly average yield on actively traded United States Treasury securities adjusted to a constant maturity of one year will be used.

7. [         ] 39

8. Form . The [    ] Notes shall be issued substantially in the form set forth, or referenced, in Article II of the Indenture, and Exhibit A attached to the Indenture, in each case as provided for in Section 2.1 of the Indenture (as such form may be modified in accordance with Section 2.2 of the Indenture).

9. Governing Law . THIS SUPPLEMENTAL INDENTURE SHALL BE GOVERNED BY, AND CONSTRUED IN ACCORDANCE WITH, THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF NEW YORK.

10. Ratification of Indenture; Supplemental Indentures Part of Indenture . Except as expressly amended hereby, the Indenture is in all respects ratified and confirmed and all the terms, conditions and provisions thereof shall remain in full force and effect. This Supplemental Indenture shall form a part of the Indenture for all purposes, and every Holder of Notes heretofore or hereafter authenticated and delivered shall be bound hereby. The Trustee makes no representation or warranty as to the validity or sufficiency of this Supplemental Indenture or as to the accuracy of the recitals to this Supplemental Indenture.

11. Counterparts . The parties hereto may sign one or more copies of this Supplemental Indenture in counterparts, all of which together shall constitute one and the same agreement.

12. Headings . The section headings herein are for convenience of reference only and shall not be deemed to alter or affect the meaning or interpretation of any provisions hereof.

 

38   Insert date upon which Notes are callable.
39   Include appropriate provisions in accordance with Section 2.2(7) and/or Section 2.2(8) of the Indenture.

 

F-6


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this Supplemental Indenture to be duly executed as of the date first above written.

 

FIDELITY & GUARANTY LIFE HOLDINGS, INC.
By:    
  Name:
  Title:

 

[SUBSIDIARY GUARANTORS]
[                                                             ]
By:    
  Name:
  Title:

 

[NAME], as Trustee
By:    
  Authorized Officer

 

F-7

Exhibit 4.3

FIDELITY & GUARANTY LIFE HOLDINGS, INC.

as Issuer

and

the Subsidiary Guarantors from time to time party to the Indenture

and

WELLS FARGO BANK, NATIONAL ASSOCIATION

as Trustee

 

 

FIRST SUPPLEMENTAL INDENTURE

DATED AS OF MARCH 27, 2013

 

 

6.375% Senior Notes Due 2021

 

G-1


FIRST SUPPLEMENTAL INDENTURE, dated as of March 27, 2013 (this “ Supplemental Indenture ”), among Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc. (the “ Company ”), the Subsidiary Guarantors under the Indenture referred to below (the “ Subsidiary Guarantors ”), and Wells Fargo Bank, National Association, as Trustee under the Indenture referred to below.

W I T N E S S E T H:

WHEREAS, the Company, the Subsidiary Guarantors and the Trustee, are party to an Indenture, dated as of March 27, 2013 (as amended, supplemented, waived or otherwise modified, the “ Indenture ”), relating to the issuance from time to time by the Company of Notes;

WHEREAS, in connection with the issuance of the 2021 Notes (as defined herein), the Company has duly authorized the execution and delivery of this Supplemental Indenture to establish the forms and terms of the 2021 Notes as hereinafter described; and

WHEREAS, pursuant to Section 2.2 of the Indenture, the parties hereto are authorized to execute and deliver this Supplemental Indenture to amend the Indenture, without the consent of any Holder;

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the foregoing and for other good and valuable consideration, the receipt of which is hereby acknowledged, the Company, the Subsidiary Guarantors and the Trustee mutually covenant and agree for the benefit of the Holders of the Notes as follows:

1. Defined Terms . As used in this Supplemental Indenture, terms defined in the Indenture or in the preamble or recital hereto are used herein as so defined. The words “herein,” “hereof” and “hereby” and other words of similar import used in this Supplemental Indenture refer to this Supplemental Indenture as a whole and not to any particular section hereof.

2. Title of Notes . There shall be a series of Notes of the Company designated as the “6.375% Senior Notes due 2021” (the “2021 Notes”).

3. Maturity Date . The final Stated Maturity of the 2021 Notes shall be April 1, 2021.

4. Interest and Interest Rates . Interest on the outstanding principal amount of 2021 Notes will accrue at the rate of 6.375% per annum and will be payable semi-annually in arrears on April 1 and October 1 in each year, commencing on October 1, 2013 to holders of record on the immediately preceding March 15 and September 15, respectively (each such March 15 and September 15, a “ Record Date ”). Interest on the 2021 Notes will accrue from the most recent date to which interest has been paid or provided for or, if no interest has been paid, from March 27, 2013, except that interest on any Additional 2021 Notes (as defined below) issued on or after the first Interest Payment Date will accrue (or will be deemed to have accrued) from the most recent date to which interest has been paid or duly provided for or, if no interest has been paid on such Additional 2021 Notes, from the Interest Payment Date immediately preceding the date of issuance of such Additional 2021 Notes (or if the date of issuance of such Additional 2021 Notes

 

2


is an Interest Payment Date, from such date of issuance); provided that if any 2021 Note is surrendered for exchange on or after a record date for an Interest Payment Date that will occur on or after the date of such exchange, interest on such Note received in exchange thereof will accrue from such Interest Payment Date. Interest shall be computed on the basis of a 360-day year of twelve 30-day months.

5. No Limitation on Aggregate Principal Amount . The aggregate principal amount of 2021 Notes that may be authenticated, delivered and outstanding under the Indenture is not limited. The aggregate principal amount of the 2021 Notes issued pursuant to this Supplemental Indenture shall be $300.0 million. The Company may from time to time, without the consent of the Holders, create and issue Additional Notes having the same terms and conditions as the 2021 Notes in all respects except for issue date and, if applicable, issue price and the first date on which interest accrues and the first payment of interest thereon. Additional Notes issued in this manner will be consolidated with, and will form a single series with, the 2021 Notes (any such Additional Notes, “ Additional 2021 Notes ”), unless otherwise specified for Additional Notes in an applicable Notes Supplemental Indenture, or otherwise designated by the Company, as contemplated by Section 2.2 of the Indenture.

6. Redemption .

(a) Except as set forth in clauses (b), (c) and (d) of this paragraph 6, the 2021 Notes are not redeemable until April 1, 2016. On and after April 1, 2016, the Company may redeem all or, from time to time, a part of the 2021 Notes at the following redemption prices (expressed as a percentage of principal amount of the 2021 Notes to be redeemed) plus accrued and unpaid interest on the 2021 Notes, if any, to, but excluding, the applicable Redemption Date (subject to the right of Holders of record on the relevant Record Date to receive interest due on the relevant Interest Payment Date), if redeemed during the twelve-month period beginning on April 1 of the years indicated below:

 

Redemption Period

   Price  

2016

     104.781

2017

     103.188

2018

     101.594

2019 and thereafter

     100.000

(b) The Company may on any one or more occasions prior to April 1, 2016 redeem up to 35% of the original principal amount of the 2021 Notes (including any Additional 2021 Notes) with the Net Cash Proceeds of one or more Equity Offerings at a redemption price of 106.375% of the principal amount thereof plus accrued and unpaid interest, if any, to, but excluding, the applicable Redemption Date (subject to the right of Holders of 2021 Notes on the relevant Record Date to receive interest due on the relevant Interest Payment Date); provided that

 

3


(i) at least 65% of the original principal amount of the 2021 Notes (including any Additional 2021 Notes) remains outstanding after each such redemption; and

(ii) the redemption occurs within 90 days after the closing of such Equity Offering.

(c) In addition, at any time prior to April 1, 2016, the Company may redeem the 2021 Notes, in whole or in part, at a redemption price equal to 100% of the principal amount thereof plus the Applicable Premium, plus accrued and unpaid interest, if any, to, but excluding, the Redemption Date (subject to the right of Holders of record on the relevant Record Date to receive interest due on the relevant Interest Payment Date).

(d) If Holders of not less than 90% in aggregate principal amount of the outstanding 2021 Notes validly tender and do not withdraw such Notes in a Change of Control Offer and the Company, or any third party making a Change of Control Offer in lieu of the Company as described under Section 3.9 of the Indenture, purchases all of the 2021 Notes validly tendered and not withdrawn by such Holders in such Change of Control Offer, the Company or such third party may elect, upon not less than 30 nor more than 60 days’ prior notice, to redeem all 2021 Notes that remain outstanding following the consummation of the Change of Control Offer at a redemption price equal to 101% of the principal amount thereof plus accrued and unpaid interest, if any, to but excluding, the applicable redemption date; provided that the Company or the applicable third party must provide any such notice of redemption within 30 days following the Change of Control Offer Payment Date.

(e) Any redemption pursuant to this paragraph 6 shall be made pursuant to the provisions of Section 5.1 , and Sections 5.2 through 5.8 of the Indenture.

(f) For purposes of this paragraph 6, the following terms shall have the following meanings:

Applicable Premium ” means, as determined by the Company with respect to a 2021 Note on any Redemption Date, the greater of:

(1) 1.0% of the principal amount of such 2021 Note; and

(2) the excess, if any, of (a) the present value as of such Redemption Date of (i) the redemption price of such 2021 Note on April 1, 2016 as set forth in paragraph 6(a) hereof, plus (ii) the remaining scheduled interest payments due on such 2021 Note through April 1, 2016 (excluding accrued but unpaid interest to the Redemption Date), computed using a discount rate equal to the Treasury Rate as of such Redemption Date plus 50 basis points, over (b) the then outstanding principal amount of such 2021 Note.

 

4


Treasury Rate ” means, as obtained by the Company, the yield to maturity at the time of computation of United States Treasury securities with a constant maturity (as compiled and published in the most recent Federal Reserve Statistical Release H.15 (519) that has become publicly available at least two Business Days prior to the Redemption Date (or, if such Statistical Release is no longer published, any publicly available source of similar market data)) most nearly equal to the period from the Redemption Date to April 1, 2016; provided , however , that if the period from the Redemption Date to April 1, 2016 is not equal to the constant maturity of a United States Treasury security for which a weekly average yield is given, the Treasury Rate shall be obtained by linear interpolation (calculated to the nearest one-twelfth of a year) from the weekly average yields of United States Treasury securities for which such yields are given, except that if the period from the Redemption Date to April 1, 2016 is less than one year, the weekly average yield on actively traded United States Treasury securities adjusted to a constant maturity of one year will be used.

7. Form . The 2021 Notes shall be issued substantially in the form set forth, or referenced, in Article II of the Indenture, and Exhibit A attached to the Indenture, in each case as provided for in Section 2.1 of the Indenture (as such form may be modified in accordance with Section 2.2 of the Indenture).

8. Governing Law . THIS SUPPLEMENTAL INDENTURE SHALL BE GOVERNED BY, AND CONSTRUED IN ACCORDANCE WITH, THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF NEW YORK.

9. Ratification of Indenture; Supplemental Indentures Part of Indenture . Except as expressly amended hereby, the Indenture is in all respects ratified and confirmed and all the terms, conditions and provisions thereof shall remain in full force and effect. This Supplemental Indenture shall form a part of the Indenture for all purposes, and every Holder of Notes heretofore or hereafter authenticated and delivered shall be bound hereby. The Trustee makes no representation or warranty as to the validity or sufficiency of this Supplemental Indenture or as to the accuracy of the recitals to this Supplemental Indenture.

10. Counterparts . The parties hereto may sign one or more copies of this Supplemental Indenture in counterparts, all of which together shall constitute one and the same agreement.

11. Headings . The section headings herein are for convenience of reference only and shall not be deemed to alter or affect the meaning or interpretation of any provisions hereof.

 

5


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have caused this Supplemental Indenture to be duly executed as of the date first written above.

 

FIDELITY & GUARANTY LIFE HOLDINGS, INC.
By:   /s/ Leland C. Launer, Jr.
  Name: Leland C. Launer, Jr.
  Title: President & Chief Executive Officer

 

FIDELITY & GUARANTY LIFE

BUSINESS SERVICES, INC.

By:   /s/ Leland C. Launer, Jr.
  Name: Leland C. Launer, Jr.
  Title: President & Chief Executive Officer

 

S IGNATURE P AGE TO S UPPLEMENTAL I NDENTURE


WELLS FARGO BANK, NATIONAL ASSOCIATION, as Trustee
By:   /s/ Richard Prokosch
  Name: Richard Prokosch
  Title: Vice President

 

S IGNATURE P AGE TO S UPPLEMENTAL I NDENTURE

Exhibit 10.1

 

 

 

FIRST AMENDED AND RESTATED

STOCK PURCHASE AGREEMENT

BETWEEN

OM GROUP (UK) LIMITED

AND

HARBINGER OM, LLC

DATED AS OF FEBRUARY 17, 2011

 

 

 

 


TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

         Page  
Article I   
DEFINITIONS   

Section 1.1.

  Definitions      2   
Article II   
PURCHASE AND SALE OF THE SHARES   

Section 2.1.

  Purchase and Sale; Purchase Price      18   

Section 2.2.

  Closing      18   

Section 2.3.

  Escrow Agreement      18   

Section 2.4.

  Payment at Closing and Delivery of Shares      18   

Section 2.5.

  Other Closing Deliveries      19   

Section 2.6.

  Payments      19   

Section 2.7.

  Interest      20   

Section 2.8.

  Preparation and Delivery of Financial Statements; Determination of Purchase Price Adjustments      20   

Section 2.9.

  Post-Closing Purchase Price Adjustments      23   
Article III   
REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES OF SELLER   

Section 3.1.

  Organization and Authority of Seller      24   

Section 3.2.

  Organization, Authority and Qualification of the Transferred Companies      25   

Section 3.3.

  Capital Structure      25   

Section 3.4.

  No Conflict      26   

Section 3.5.

  Consents and Approvals      27   

Section 3.6.

  Financial Information      27   

Section 3.7.

  SEC Filings      28   

Section 3.8.

  Absence of Certain Changes or Events      28   

Section 3.9.

  Employee Benefits; Employees      28   

Section 3.10.

  Taxes      31   

Section 3.11.

  Compliance with Laws; Permits      33   

Section 3.12.

  Litigation      33   

Section 3.13.

  Material Contracts      34   

Section 3.14.

  Intellectual Property      34   

Section 3.15.

  Real Property      35   

Section 3.16.

  Brokers      35   

Section 3.17.

  Affiliate Transactions      35   

Section 3.18.

  Regulatory Filings      35   

 

-i-


Section 3.19.

  Investment Assets      36   

Section 3.20.

  Insurance Issued by Insurance Subsidiaries      36   

Section 3.21.

  Ceded Reinsurance      36   

Section 3.22.

  Insurance      37   

Section 3.23.

  Certain Securities Matters      37   

Section 3.24.

  Actuarial Report and Reserves      37   

Section 3.25.

  Risk-Based Capital      37   

Section 3.26.

  Environmental Matters      37   

Section 3.27.

  Financed Business      37   

Section 3.28.

  Disclaimer      38   
Article IV   
REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES OF BUYER   

Section 4.1.

  Formation and Authority of Buyer      38   

Section 4.2.

  No Conflict      39   

Section 4.3.

  Consents and Approvals      39   

Section 4.4.

  Securities Laws Matters      40   

Section 4.5.

  Litigation      40   

Section 4.6.

  [Intentionally omitted]      40   

Section 4.7.

  Brokers      40   

Section 4.8.

  Investigation      40   

Section 4.9.

  Financing; Guaranty      41   

Section 4.10.

  Disclaimer      41   
Article V   
COVENANTS   

Section 5.1.

  Conduct of Business of the Company      41   

Section 5.2.

  Access to Information      44   

Section 5.3.

  Reasonable Best Efforts      44   

Section 5.4.

  Consents, Approvals and Filings      44   

Section 5.5.

  Access to Books and Records      47   

Section 5.6.

  Public Announcements      48   

Section 5.7.

  Intercompany Obligations and Arrangements      49   

Section 5.8.

  Use of Names      49   

Section 5.9.

  Directors      50   

Section 5.10.

  Contact with Customers, Employees, Etc      51   

Section 5.11.

  Confidentiality      51   

Section 5.12.

  D&O Liabilities      52   

Section 5.13.

  Amendment of Tax Returns      52   

Section 5.14.

  Reserve Facility; CARVM Facility      53   

Section 5.15.

  Deed of Novation      55   

Section 5.16.

  Excluded Assets      55   

Section 5.17.

  Structuring Fee Tax Benefit      55   

 

-ii-


Section 5.18.

  Capitalization of Captive      55   

Section 5.19.

  Surplus Note Purchase Contracts      56   

Section 5.20.

  Pre-Closing Sale of Certain Investment Assets      56   

Section 5.21.

  Front Street Reinsurance Transaction      57   

Section 5.22.

  Amendment of 2008 CARVM Treaty      61   

Section 5.23.

  Proposed Wilton Reinsurance Transactions      61   
Article VI   
EMPLOYEE MATTERS   

Section 6.1.

  Employee Matters      63   
Article VII   
CONDITIONS PRECEDENT   

Section 7.1.

  Conditions to Each Party’s Obligations      67   

Section 7.2.

  Conditions to Obligations of Buyer      68   

Section 7.3.

  Conditions to Obligations of Seller      68   
Article VIII   
SURVIVAL OF REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES AND COVENANTS   

Section 8.1.

  Survival of Representations and Warranties      69   

Section 8.2.

  Survival of Covenants      69   
Article IX   
INDEMNIFICATION   

Section 9.1.

  Obligation to Indemnify      70   

Section 9.2.

  Indemnification Procedures; Certain Limitations      72   

Section 9.3.

  Exclusive Remedies      75   

Section 9.4.

  Reserves      75   
Article X   
TAX MATTERS   

Section 10.1.

  Tax Indemnity      76   

Section 10.2.

  Returns and Payments      78   

Section 10.3.

  Refunds      79   

Section 10.4.

  Contests      79   

Section 10.5.

  Payment      80   

Section 10.6.

  Cooperation and Exchange of Information      81   

Section 10.7.

  Miscellaneous      81   

 

-iii-


Article XI   
TERMINATION PRIOR TO CLOSING   

Section 11.1.

  Termination of Agreement      83   

Section 11.2.

  Survival      83   
Article XII   
GENERAL PROVISIONS   

Section 12.1.

  Fees and Expenses      83   

Section 12.2.

  Notices      84   

Section 12.3.

  Interpretation      85   

Section 12.4.

  Entire Agreement; Third-Party Beneficiaries      86   

Section 12.5.

  Governing Law      86   

Section 12.6.

  Assignment      86   

Section 12.7.

  Dispute Resolution; Enforcement      86   

Section 12.8.

  Severability; Amendment and Waiver      87   

Section 12.9.

  Specific Performance      87   

Section 12.10.

  Counterparts      88   

Section 12.11.

  WAIVER OF JURY TRIAL      88   

 

Schedule   
Schedule I    Transferred Subsidiaries
Exhibits   
Exhibit A    Guaranty
Exhibit B    Form of Deed of Novation
Exhibit C    Excluded Assets
Exhibit D    Form of Guarantee and Pledge Agreement
Exhibit E    Proposed Protected Assets
Exhibit F    Form of Protected Asset Agreement
Exhibit G    Form of Trademark License Agreement
Exhibit H    Form of Escrow Agreement
Exhibit I-1    Excluded Transactions
Exhibit I-2    Included Transactions
Exhibit J    Reserve Facility Term Sheet
Exhibit K    Reinsurance Transaction Term Sheet

 

-iv-


FIRST AMENDED AND RESTATED

STOCK PURCHASE AGREEMENT

This FIRST AMENDED AND RESTATED STOCK PURCHASE AGREEMENT, dated as of February 17, 2011 (this “ Agreement ”), is made between OM Group (UK) Limited, a company incorporated in England and Wales under registered number 03591572 (“ Seller ”), and Harbinger OM, LLC, a Delaware limited liability company (“ Buyer ”).

RECITALS

A. Seller owns all of the outstanding shares of Capital Stock of Old Mutual U.S. Life Holdings, Inc., a Delaware corporation (the “ Company ”).

B. The Company owns, directly or indirectly, all of the outstanding Capital Stock of each of the entities listed on Schedule I (collectively, the “ Transferred Subsidiaries ,” and together with the Company, the “ Transferred Companies ”).

C. Seller desires to sell to Buyer, and Buyer desires to purchase from Seller, all of the outstanding shares of Capital Stock of the Company (the “ Shares ”), on the terms and subject to the conditions set forth herein.

D. Buyer and Seller have entered into a Stock Purchase Agreement, dated as of August 5, 2010 (the “ Original Agreement ”), providing among other things for the sale of the Shares by Seller to Buyer.

E. Concurrently with the execution of the Original Agreement, and as a condition and inducement to Seller’s willingness to enter into the Original Agreement, Harbinger Capital Partners Master Fund I, Ltd., a Cayman Islands company (the “ Investor ”), provided a guaranty dated August 5, 2010 in favor of Seller (the “ Guaranty ”), in the form set forth in Exhibit A, upon the terms and subject to the conditions set forth therein.

F. Prior to the Closing, Investor proposes to assign 100% of the limited liability company interests of Buyer to Harbinger Group Inc., a Delaware corporation and a publicly traded Affiliate of Investor (“ HRG ”).

G. Buyer and Seller wish to amend and restate the Original Agreement in its entirety to read as set forth herein.

Accordingly, in consideration of the mutual covenants, conditions and agreements set forth herein and for other good and valuable consideration, the receipt and sufficiency of which are hereby acknowledged, Seller and Buyer agree that the Original Agreement is hereby amended and restated, and shall be superseded and replaced in its entirety, by this Agreement, and further agree as follows:


ARTICLE I

DEFINITIONS

SECTION 1.1. Definitions . For purposes of this Agreement, the following terms shall have the respective meanings set forth below:

2008 CARVM Treaty ” means the Reinsurance Agreement between OMFLIC and OM Re effective as of September 30, 2008.

Action ” means any claim, action, suit, litigation, arbitration or other proceeding by or before any Governmental Entity or arbitral body.

Actual Amounts ” has the meaning set forth in Section 2.8(b)(ii) .

Actual Closing Balance Sheet ” has the meaning set forth in Section 2.8(b)(i) .

Actual Closing Risk-Based Capital ” has the meaning set forth in Section 2.8(b)(ii) .

Actual Financial Deliverables ” has the meaning set forth in Section 2.8(b)(ii) .

Actual Statutory Capital ” has the meaning set forth in Section 2.8(b)(i) .

Actual Total Adjusted Capital ” has the meaning set forth in Section 2.8(b)(ii) .

Actuarial Report ” has the meaning set forth in Section 3.24 .

Additional Benefits Reserves ” has the meaning set forth in Section 5.14(a) .

Adjusted Purchase Price ” has the meaning set forth in Section 2.1 .

Adverse Reinsurance Transaction Condition or Restriction ” has the meaning set forth in Section 5.21(d) .

Affiliate ” means, with respect to any specified Person, any other Person that, at the time of determination, directly or indirectly through one or more intermediaries, Controls, is Controlled by, or is under common Control with, such first person.

Agreement ” has the meaning set forth in the introductory paragraph hereof.

Alternative Assets ” has the meaning set forth in Section 5.21(f)(i) .

Alternative Facility ” has the meaning set forth in Section 5.14(a) .

Amendment and Restatement Date ” means February 17, 2011.

 

-2-


Ancillary Agreements ” means, collectively, the Deed of Novation, the Guarantee and Pledge Agreement, the Protected Asset Agreement, the Trademark License Agreement and the Escrow Agreement.

Anniversary Bonus ” has the meaning set forth in Section 6.1(g) .

Annual Bonus ” has the meaning set forth in Section 6.1(f) .

Annuity Contract ” means any annuity, funding agreement, guaranteed investment contract or similar contract.

Base Purchase Price ” means $350,000,000.

Benefit Plans ” has the meaning set forth in Section 3.9(a) .

Business ” means the business conducted by the Transferred Companies as of the date of this Agreement.

Business Day ” means any day, other than a Saturday or a Sunday, on which commercial banks in New York, New York, and London, United Kingdom, are open for normal banking business.

Buyer ” has the meaning set forth in the introductory paragraph hereof.

Buyer Benefit Plans ” has the meaning set forth in Section 6.1(b) .

Buyer Indemnitees ” has the meaning set forth in Section 9.1(a) .

Buyer Material Adverse Effect ” means a material impairment or delay of the ability of Buyer or any Affiliate of Buyer to perform its material obligations under this Agreement or any Ancillary Agreement or to consummate the transactions contemplated hereby or thereby.

Buyer’s PP Reduction Materials ” has the meaning set forth in Section 5.21(f)(iii) .

Buyer’s Protected Information ” has the meaning set forth in Section 5.4(c) .

Capital Stock ” means capital stock of or other type of equity interest in a Person.

Captive ” has the meaning set forth in the Reserve Facility Term Sheet.

Captive Securities ” means surplus notes, capital stock, preferred shares or other equity or debt securities issued by the Captive.

Carrying Value ” has the meaning specified in the Protected Asset Agreement.

CARVM Business ” has the meaning set forth in Section 5.14(c) .

 

-3-


CARVM Facility ” has the meaning set forth in Section 5.14(c) .

Cash Purchase Price ” means an amount equal to (i) the Closing Purchase Price, minus (ii) the Protected Asset Amount.

Cause ” has the meaning ascribed to such term under the Transaction Incentive Awards Program.

CDS Rate ” means, as of the date of determination thereof, the average of offer-side fixed rates for credit-default swap protection offered with respect to senior unsecured debt obligations of Old Mutual plc, such protection having a term of five years, as quoted by three dealers selected by Seller; provided that: (a) if the Seller receives only two quotations, then the “CDS Rate” shall be an amount equal to the higher of such quotations; or (b) if the Seller receives only one quotation, then the “CDS Rate” shall be an amount equal to such quotation.

Ceded Reinsurance Agreement ” means any reinsurance or coinsurance treaty or agreement in force as of the date hereof to which any Insurance Subsidiary is a ceding party or any such treaty or agreement that has terminated or expired but under which any such Insurance Subsidiary continues to receive benefits.

Change of Control ” means any transaction pursuant to which Harbinger Capital Partners LLC and its Affiliates collectively (i) cease to own, directly or indirectly, in the aggregate at least 40% of the outstanding equity ownership or other economic interests in or voting securities or voting power of OMFLIC or any parent entity of OMFLIC or (ii) cease to Control OMFLIC or Buyer or any parent company of OMFLIC; provided that in no event shall an initial public offering of OMFLIC’s stock (or any transaction conducted in connection with such offering) be deemed a Change of Control.

Closing ” has the meaning set forth in Section 2.2 .

Closing Bonus ” has the meaning set forth in Section 6.1(g) .

Closing Date ” has the meaning set forth in Section 2.2 .

Closing Date Capital Shortfall Amount ” means the amount equal to the greater of (i) $0.00 and (ii) the excess of $818,604,559 over the sum of the Estimated Statutory Capital and the RBC Deficit (calculated based on the Estimated Financial Deliverables).

Closing Date Risk-Based Capital True-Up Amount ” means the amount equal to the RBC Deficit calculated based on the Estimated Financial Deliverables.

Closing Purchase Price ” means an amount equal to: (a) the Base Purchase Price; minus (b) an amount equal to the Closing Date Risk-Based Capital True-Up Amount; minus (c) an amount equal to the Closing Date Capital Shortfall Amount.

Code ” means the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended.

Company ” has the meaning set forth in Recital A .

 

-4-


Company Benefit Plans ” has the meaning set forth in Section 3.9(a) .

Company Group ” means any combined, unitary, consolidated or other group of which the Company is or has been a member of, or included in, for federal, state, local or foreign Tax purposes.

Company Material Adverse Effect ” means (a) when used with respect to the Transferred Companies, a material adverse effect on the financial condition or results of operations of the Transferred Companies, taken as a whole, but shall exclude any adverse effect resulting from, arising out of or relating to: (i) the United States or global economy generally or capital or financial markets generally, including changes in interest rates; (ii) political conditions generally; (iii) any occurrence or condition generally affecting any industry in which the Transferred Companies participate; (iv) any natural catastrophe events, hostility, sabotage, military action or any escalation or worsening thereof, acts of war or terrorism; (v) any change or proposed change in IFRS, SAP or applicable Law or the enforcement or implementation thereof; (vi) the negotiation, execution, delivery and performance of any of the Transaction Agreements, the consummation of the transactions contemplated by any of the Transaction Agreements or the public announcement of this Agreement or such transactions; (vii) any occurrence or condition arising out of the identity of or facts relating to Buyer; (viii) the value of, or changes or development in the value of, any of the investment assets of the Transferred Companies; or (ix) any failure of the Transferred Companies to achieve any projected earnings or premiums written or other financial projections or forecasts, provided that the underlying cause of such failure will not be excluded from the determination of a Company Material Adverse Effect by virtue of this clause (ix); or (b) when used with respect to Seller, an impairment or delay of the ability of Seller or any Affiliate of Seller to perform its material obligations under this Agreement or any Ancillary Agreement or to consummate the transactions contemplated hereby or thereby.

Company Savings Plan ” has the meaning set forth in Section 6.1(b) .

Company Severance Arrangements ” has the meaning set forth in Section 6.1(h) .

Compensation Tax Benefit ” has the meaning set forth in Section 6.1(f) .

Computer Software ” means currently used versions of all computer software applications needed to administer material portions of the Business, including all object code, all executables, and all available source code owned by the Transferred Companies relating thereto.

Confidentiality Agreement ” has the meaning set forth in Section 5.11(a) .

Contribution Amount ” has the meaning set forth in Section 5.18(a) .

Control ,” “ Controlled ” or “ Controlling ” means, as to any Person, the possession, directly or indirectly, of the power to direct or cause the direction of the management and policies of such Person, whether through the ownership of voting securities, by contract or otherwise.

Controlling Party ” has the meaning set forth in Section 10.4(c)(i) .

 

-5-


D&O Indemnified Person ” has the meaning set forth in Section 5.12 .

Deed of Novation ” means the deed of novation to be entered into by Seller, Buyer and the Company at the Closing substantially in the form of Exhibit B .

Deferred Amount ” has the meaning set forth in Section 6.1(f) .

Descriptive Materials ” has the meaning set forth in Section 4.8 .

Disclosure Schedule ” means the Disclosure Schedule delivered in connection with, and constituting a part of, this Agreement.

Discretionary Bonus ” has the meaning set forth in Section 6.1(g) .

Employee ” means each natural person who immediately prior to or as of the Closing Date is an active employee, independent contractor or director of any of the Transferred Companies whose duties relate primarily to the Business, including any such person who is absent from employment due to illness, vacation, injury, military service or other authorized absence (including an employee who is “disabled” within the meaning of the short-term disability plan currently in place for the applicable employer or who is on approved leave under the Family and Medical Leave Act of 1993, as amended).

Employee Incentive Plan ” means the Company Benefit Plan with such name set forth in Section 3.9(a) of the Disclosure Schedule.

Enforcement Proceeding ” has the meaning set forth in Section 9.1(a)(iv) .

Environmental Law ” means any Law relating to pollution or protection of the environment, including the use, handling, transportation, treatment, storage, disposal, release or discharge of Hazardous Materials.

Environmental Permit ” means any permit, approval, identification number, license or other authorization required under or issued pursuant to any Environmental Law.

ERISA ” means the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as amended.

ERISA Affiliate ” means any Person, trade or business that, together with Seller, is or was treated as a single employer for purposes of Section 414(b), (c), (m) or (o) of the Code or Section 4001(b) of ERISA.

Escrow Account ” has the meaning set forth in Section 2.3 .

Escrow Agent ” has the meaning set forth in Section 2.3 .

Escrow Agreement ” has the meaning set forth in Section 2.3 .

Estimated Amounts ” has the meaning set forth in Section 2.8(a)(ii) .

 

-6-


Estimated Closing Balance Sheet ” has the meaning set forth in Section 2.8(a)(i) .

Estimated Closing Risk-Based Capital ” has the meaning set forth in Section 2.8(a)(ii) .

Estimated Financial Deliverables ” has the meaning set forth in Section 2.8(a)(ii) .

Estimated Statutory Capital ” has the meaning set forth in Section 2.8(a)(i) .

Estimated Total Adjusted Capital ” has the meaning set forth in Section 2.8(a)(ii) .

Exchange Act ” means the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, and the rules and regulations of the SEC thereunder, as amended.

Excluded Assets ” means the investment assets of OMFLIC set forth on Exhibit C .

Excluded Taxes ” has the meaning set forth in Section 10.1(a) .

Expert Accountant ” means a nationally recognized independent certified public accounting firm in the United States mutually agreeable to Buyer and Seller.

Filing Party ” has the meaning set forth in Section 10.2(c) .

Final Actual Closing Balance Sheet ” has the meaning set forth in Section 2.8(g) .

Final Actual Closing Risk-Based Capital ” has the meaning set forth in Section 2.8(g) .

Final Actual Financial Deliverables ” has the meaning set forth in Section 2.8(g) .

Final Actual Total Adjusted Capital ” has the meaning set forth in Section 2.8(g) .

Financed Business ” has the meaning set forth in Section 5.14(a) .

Financial Statements ” has the meaning set forth in Section 3.6(a) .

Front Street ” has the meaning set forth in Section 5.21(b) .

Funds Withheld Account ” has the meaning set forth in Section 5.21(f) .

General Account ” has the meaning set forth in Section 3.9(g) .

Governmental Approval ” has the meaning set forth in Section 3.5 .

Governmental Entity ” means any domestic or foreign governmental, legislative, judicial, administrative or regulatory authority, agency, commission, body, court or entity.

 

-7-


Governmental Order ” means any order, writ, judgment, injunction, decree, stipulation, determination or award entered by or with any Governmental Entity.

Guarantee and Pledge Agreement ” means the guarantee and pledge agreement to be entered into at the Closing substantially in the form of Exhibit D .

Guaranty ” has the meaning set forth in Recital E .

Harbinger Capital Partners ” means Harbinger Capital Partners LLC or any of its Affiliates designated by Front Street to act as investment manager in connection with the Reinsurance Transaction as contemplated under the Reinsurance Transaction Term Sheet.

Hazardous Materials ” means (a) petroleum, petroleum products, by-products or breakdown products, radioactive materials, friable asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyls, and (b) any chemical, material or substance defined or regulated as toxic or as a pollutant, contaminant or waste under any Environmental Law.

Holding Company System Act ” means provisions of a jurisdiction’s insurance Laws governing control over insurers, transactions between insurers and affiliates and registration of holding companies.

HRG ” has the meaning set forth in Recital F .

HSR Act ” means the Hart Scott Rodino Antitrust Improvements Act of 1976.

IFRS ” means the International Financial Reporting Standards as adopted by the International Accounting Standards Board.

Indemnification Basket ” has the meaning set forth in Section 9.1(a)(A) .

Indemnification Cap ” has the meaning set forth in Section 9.1(a)(C) .

Indemnified Party ” has the meaning set forth in Section 9.2(a) .

Indemnifying Party ” has the meaning set forth in Section 9.2(a) .

Indemnity Claim ” has the meaning set forth in Section 9.2(a) .

Insurance Contract ” means any Life Insurance Contract or Annuity Contract issued or entered into by an Insurance Subsidiary in connection with the Business.

Insurance Reserves ” means any reserves, funds or provisions for losses, claims, premiums, expenses and other liabilities in respect of Insurance Contracts.

Insurance Subsidiaries ” means, collectively, OMFLIC and OMFLICNY.

Intellectual Property ” means: (a) patents, patent applications and statutory invention registrations, including reissues, divisions, continuations, continuations in part, renewals, extensions and reexaminations thereof, all patents that may issue on such applications,

 

-8-


and all rights therein provided by applicable Law; (b) Trademarks; (c) copyrightable works and works of authorship (including Computer Software), copyrights, registrations and applications for registration thereof, and all rights therein provided by applicable Law; (d) trade secrets; (e) the tangible embodiments of any of the foregoing; and (f) the right to sue for past infringement of any of the foregoing.

Intercompany Agreement ” means contracts, agreements, notes, leases, licenses and other instruments between any of the Transferred Companies, on the one hand, and Seller or any Affiliate of Seller (other than the Transferred Companies), on the other hand.

Intercompany Loan Agreements ” means, collectively, the Revolving Credit Facility and the Term Loan Agreement, each between Seller, as lender, and the Company, as borrower, and each dated February 25, 2009.

Interest Rate ” means Three-Month LIBOR.

Interim Financial Statements ” has the meaning set forth in Section 3.6(a) .

Investment Advisers Act ” means the Investment Advisers Act of 1940, and the rules and regulations of the SEC thereunder, as amended.

Investment Assets ” has the meaning set forth in Section 3.19 .

Investment Company Act ” means the Investment Company Act of 1940, and the rules and regulations of the SEC thereunder, as amended.

Investor ” has the meaning set forth in Recital E .

IRS ” means the Internal Revenue Service.

Key Person Incentive Retention Program ” means the Company Benefit Plan with such name set forth in Section 3.9(a) of the Disclosure Schedule.

Knowledge ” means, with respect to Seller, the actual knowledge of the individuals listed in Section 1.1(a) of the Disclosure Schedule.

Law ” means any federal, state, local or foreign law, statute or ordinance, common law or any rule, regulation, standard, judgment, order, writ, injunction, ruling, decree, arbitration award, agency requirement, license, permit, guidance, statement of practice or code of conduct of any Governmental Entity.

Leased Real Property ” has the meaning set forth in Section 3.15(b) .

Lien ” means any mortgage, deed of trust, pledge, hypothecation, security interest, encumbrance, claim, lien or charge of any kind.

Life Insurance Contract ” means any life insurance policy or contract.

Litigation Matter ” has the meaning set forth in Section 5.5(b) .

 

-9-


Losses ” means any and all liabilities, claims, expenses (including reasonable attorneys’ fees and expenses) and damages, but excluding lost profits, any claim based on diminution of value or any punitive, exemplary, consequential or similar damages, Taxes, and liabilities relating to Taxes.

Material Contract ” means (a) any contract, agreement, instrument or other legally binding obligation to which any of the Transferred Companies is a party (other than Intercompany Agreements, Real Property Leases and Insurance Contracts) which (i) calls for the payment by or on behalf of any of the Transferred Companies in excess of $150,000 per annum, or the delivery by any of the Transferred Companies of goods or services with a fair market value in excess of $150,000 per annum, during the remaining term thereof, (ii) provides for any of the Transferred Companies to receive any payments in excess of, or any property with a fair market value in excess of, $150,000 or more during the remaining term thereof, (iii) contains covenants materially restricting the ability of any of the Transferred Companies to compete in any line of business or geographical area, (iv) secures any indebtedness with any material liens on any assets or equity of any Transferred Company, (v) is a guaranty of any obligations of any party that is not a Transferred Company, (vi) is an agreement to acquire the equity or properties of any third party or to dispose of any equity or properties to any third party, other than in the Ordinary Course of Business, or (vii) is an agreement the termination of which would cause a Company Material Adverse Effect, (b) any material contract, agreement, instrument or other legally binding obligation between a Producer, on the one hand, and any Insurance Subsidiary, on the other hand, that relates solely to the Business; provided , however , that “Material Contract” excludes (x) any contract, agreement, instrument or other legally binding obligation that is terminable by any other party thereto on 30 days’ or less notice and (y) any Ceded Reinsurance Agreement under which the reinsurer is not an Affiliate of the Company and pursuant to which the ceding Insurance Subsidiary ceded gross statutory reserves of less than $15,000,000 as of December 31, 2009.

Methodology Change ” has the meaning set forth in Section 5.19 .

Negative Condition or Restriction ” has the meaning set forth in Section 7.1(a) .

New York Court ” has the meaning set forth in Section 12.7(b) .

Non-Controlling Party ” has the meaning set forth in Section 10.4(c) .

Non-Filing Party ” has the meaning set forth in Section 10.2(c) .

Non-Qualified Deferred Compensation Plan ” means the Benefit Plan with such name set forth in Section 3.9(a) of the Disclosure Schedule.

Non-Qualifying Change of Control ” means any Change of Control after the consummation of which OMFLIC would reasonably be expected to have a financial strength rating by A. M. Best Company of below “A-”, or a comparable rating from A.M. Best Company in the event that it changes its ratings designations.

Notice of Purchase Price Adjustment Disagreement ” has the meaning set forth in Section 2.8(e) .

 

-10-


Objecting Party ” has the meaning set forth in Section 2.8(e) .

Old Mutual plc Share Reward Plan ” means the Benefit Plan with such name set forth in Section 3.9(a) of the Disclosure Schedule.

OMFLIC ” means OM Financial Life Insurance Company, a Maryland-domiciled life insurance company.

OMFLICNY ” means OM Financial Life Insurance Company of New York, a New York-domiciled life insurance company.

OM Re ” means Old Mutual Reassurance (Ireland) Ltd., a limited reinsurance company with share capital organized under the laws of the Republic of Ireland.

OM Re Recapture Transaction ” means the recapture in full by OMFLIC of the Business ceded under the Ceded Reinsurance Agreements between OMFLIC and OM Re identified in Section 1.1(b) of the Disclosure Schedule.

OM Re Reinsurance Agreement Amendments ” means the amendments or restatements by OMFLIC and OM Re of the Ceded Reinsurance Agreements between OMFLIC and OM Re identified in Section 1.1(c) of the Disclosure Schedule substantially on the terms described in Section 1.1(d) of the Disclosure Schedule.

OMUSH ” means Old Mutual (US) Holdings, Inc., a Delaware corporation.

Ordinary Course of Business ” with respect to a Person means the ordinary course of business of such Person, consistent with past practice.

Original Agreement ” has the meaning set forth in Recital D .

Owned Intellectual Property ” means the Intellectual Property in which any of the Transferred Companies has or purports to have an ownership interest (solely, or jointly with any Person).

PAIR Amount ” has the meaning set forth in Section 6.1(f) .

Permits ” has the meaning set forth in Section 3.11(b) .

Permitted AUM ” has the meaning set forth in Section 5.21(f)(i) .

Permitted Liens ” means the following Liens: (a) Liens that secure debt that is reflected on the balance sheets included in the Financial Statements or the Statutory Statements; (b) statutory Liens for Taxes, assessments or other governmental charges or levies that are not yet due or payable or that are being contested in good faith by appropriate proceedings (with respect to which adequate accruals or reserves have been established in the Financial Statements or in the Statutory Statements in accordance with IFRS or SAP, as applicable); (c) statutory Liens of landlords and Liens of carriers, warehousemen, mechanics, materialmen, repairmen and other Liens imposed by Law for amounts not yet due; (d) Liens incurred or deposits made to a

 

-11-


Governmental Entity in connection with a governmental authorization, registration, filing, license, permit or approval; (e) Liens incurred or deposits made in the Ordinary Course of Business in connection with workers’ compensation, unemployment insurance or other types of social security; (f) defects of title, easements, rights-of-way, covenants, restrictions and other similar charges or encumbrances not materially interfering with the ordinary conduct of business; (g) Liens not created by any of the Transferred Companies that affect the underlying fee interest of any Leased Real Property; (h) Liens incurred in the Ordinary Course of Business securing obligations or liabilities that are not individually or in the aggregate material to the relevant asset or property, respectively; (i) gaps in the chain of title evident from the records of the relevant Governmental Entity maintaining such records; (j) zoning, building and other generally applicable land use restrictions; (k) Liens that have been placed by a third party on the fee title of the real property constituting the Leased Real Property or real property over which the Transferred Companies have easement rights; (l) Liens resulting from any facts or circumstances relating to Buyer or its Affiliates; (m) any set of facts an accurate up-to-date survey would show; provided such facts do not materially interfere with the present use of the relevant Leased Real Property by the Transferred Companies, respectively; (n) Liens or other restrictions on transfer imposed by applicable insurance Laws; (o) pledges or other collateral assignments of assets, including by means of a credit for reinsurance trust, to or for the benefit of cedents under reinsurance written by an Insurance Subsidiary, for purposes of statutory accounting credit; Liens granted under securities lending and borrowing agreements, repurchase and reverse repurchase agreements and derivatives entered into in the Ordinary Course of Business; and clearing and settlement Liens on securities and other investment properties incurred in the ordinary course of clearing and settlement transactions in such securities and other investment properties and holding them with custodians.

Person ” means any natural person, corporation, partnership, joint venture, limited liability company, association, trust, unincorporated organization or other legal entity.

Plan Assets ” shall have the meaning ascribed to such term under ERISA and the regulations issued thereunder.

Post-Closing Adjustment ” has the meaning set forth in Section 2.9(d) .

Post-Closing Date Capital Shortfall Amount ” has the meaning set forth in Section 2.9(c) .

Post-Closing Date Risk-Based Capital True-Up Amount ” has the meaning set forth in Section 2.9(a) .

Post-Closing PP Reduction ” has the meaning set forth in Section 5.21(f) .

Power Agent Incentive Reward Plan ” means the Company Benefit Plan with such name set forth in Section 3.9(a) of the Disclosure Schedule.

Pre-Closing Proposed Protected Asset Loss ” means, with respect to any Proposed Protected Asset sold to any Person that is not an Affiliate of OMFLIC between June 30, 2010 and the close of business on the third Business Day immediately preceding the Closing Date for gross sale proceeds that are less than the Proposed Protected Asset Book Value of such Proposed Protected Asset, the amount by which the Proposed Protected Asset Book Value of such asset exceeds such gross sale proceeds.

 

-12-


Producers ” means each insurance agent, marketer, underwriter, wholesaler, broker, distributor or other producer that wrote, sold, produced or marketed Insurance Contracts for any of the Insurance Subsidiaries.

Product ” means any insurance, annuity or investment product issued, marketed or sold by any Transferred Company.

Proposed Protected Asset ” means any asset listed on Exhibit E .

Proposed Protected Asset Book Value ” means, for any Proposed Protected Asset, the statutory book value as of June 30, 2010 of such Proposed Protected Asset as set forth on Exhibit E .

Proposed Wilton Reinsurance Transactions ” has the meaning set forth in Section 5.23(a) .

Protected Asset ” means any Proposed Protected Asset other than a Proposed Protected Asset that is sold prior to the Closing.

Protected Asset Agreement ” means the protected asset agreement to be entered into at the Closing substantially in the form of Exhibit F .

Protected Asset Amount ” means the excess of (i) $125,000,000 over (ii) an amount equal to one half of the aggregate amount of all Pre-Closing Proposed Protected Asset Losses; provided that in no event will the Protected Asset Amount exceed an amount equal to the aggregate Carrying Value of all of the Protected Assets as of the Closing Date.

Purchase Price Adjustment Consultation Period ” has the meaning set forth in Section 2.8(f) .

Purchase Price Adjustment Review Period ” has the meaning set forth in Section 2.8(c) .

RBC Deficit ” means, as of the Closing, the amount equal to the greater of (i) $0.00 and (ii) the amount, expressed in U.S. Dollars, equal to 300% of the Risk-Based Capital as of the Closing Date minus the Total Adjusted Capital as of the Closing Date.

RBC Instructions ” means the risk based capital instructions promulgated by the National Association of Insurance Commissioners as of any date at which Total Adjusted Capital and Risk Based Capital are determined.

Real Property Leases ” has the meaning set forth in Section 3.15(b) .

Reference Banks ” means four major banks in the London interbank market selected by Seller, acting in good faith and in a commercially reasonable manner.

 

-13-


Registered Intellectual Property ” means all Owned Intellectual Property that is registered, filed or issued under the authority of any Government Entity (or, in the case of an Internet domain name, with an Internet domain name registrar), or for which an application to register has been filed with any Governmental Entity.

Regulation AXXX ” has the meaning set forth in Section 3.27 .

Regulation XXX ” has the meaning set forth in Section 3.27 .

Reinsurance Transaction ” has the meaning set forth in Section 5.21(b) .

Reinsurance Transaction Term Sheet ” has the meaning set forth in Section 5.21(b) .

Remedial Efforts ” has the meaning set forth in Section 5.21(d) .

Replacement Date ” has the meaning set forth in Section 5.18(b) .

Replacement Facility ” has the meaning set forth in Section 5.14(b) .

Representatives ” as to any Person, means such Person’s directors, officers, partners (other than limited partners), managers, employees, Affiliates, representatives (including financial advisors, attorneys and accountants) or agents.

Reserve Facility ” has the meaning set forth in Section 5.14(a) .

Reserve Facility Term Sheet ” has the meaning set forth in Section 5.14(a) .

Risk-Based Capital ” means, as of any date of determination, OMFLIC’s company action level risk-based capital as of such date, determined in accordance with the Risk-Based Capital Calculation Methodology.

Risk-Based Capital Calculation Methodology ” means the method used to determine OMFLIC’s Total Adjusted Capital and Risk-Based Capital as of and for the period ended December 31, 2009, with such changes to the Risk Factors as are required by the RBC Instructions.

Risk Factors ” means the factors applied to asset, premium, claim, expense and reserve items as set forth in the RBC Instructions.

Sales Incentive Plan ” means the Company Benefit Plan with such name set forth in Section 3.9(a) of the Disclosure Schedule.

SAP ” means, as to any Insurance Subsidiary, the statutory accounting practices prescribed or permitted by the Commissioner (or equivalent title) of the state of domicile of such Insurance Subsidiary.

SEC ” has the meaning set forth in Section 3.7(a) .

 

-14-


SEC Reports ” has the meaning set forth in Section 3.7(a) .

Section 409A ” has the meaning set forth in Section 3.9(b) .

Securities Act ” means the Securities Act of 1933, and the rules and regulations of the SEC thereunder, as amended.

Seller ” has the meaning set forth in the introductory paragraph hereof.

Seller Indemnitees ” has the meaning set forth in Section 9.1(b) .

Seller Litigation Matters ” has the meaning set forth in Section 5.5(a) .

Seller Trademarks ” has the meaning set forth in Section 5.8(a) .

Separate Account ” has the meaning set forth in Section 3.9(g) .

Shares ” has the meaning set forth in Recital C .

Specified Actions ” has the meaning set forth in Section 9.1(a)(iii) .

Statutory Capital ” means, as of any date of determination, (i) the capital and surplus of OMFLIC determined in accordance with SAP (as reflected in line 38 of the “Liabilities, Surplus and Other Funds” page of the 2009 National Association of Insurance Commissioners’ Annual Statement Blank), plus (ii) the asset valuation reserve (as reflected in line 24.1 of such Annual Statement Blank), in each case as of such date.

Statutory Statements ” has the meaning set forth in Section 3.6(b) .

Stepped-Up Facility Fee ” means (x) Three-Month LIBOR plus (y) 2.85% per annum plus (z) the CDS Rate.

Subsequent Action ” has the meaning set forth in Section 9.1(a)(v) .

Subsidiary ” of any Person means another Person more than 50% of the total combined voting power of all classes of Capital Stock or other voting interests of which, more than 50% of the equity securities of which, is owned at the time of determination directly or indirectly by such first Person.

Success Bonus ” has the meaning ascribed to such term in the employment agreement dated February 1, 2009 between the Company and the chief executive officer of the Company, set forth in Section 3.9(a) of the Disclosure Schedule.

Target AUM ” has the meaning set forth in Section 5.21(f)(i) .

Tax Contest ” has the meaning set forth in Section 3.10(d) .

 

-15-


Tax Contest Expense ” means any Losses, including reasonable fees for attorneys and other outside consultants, incurred in contesting or otherwise in connection with any Taxes and Losses for which Seller has an indemnification obligation under Section 10.1(a) .

Tax Indemnified Party ” has the meaning set forth in Section 10.1(e) .

Tax Indemnifying Party ” has the meaning set forth in Section 10.1(e) .

Taxing Authority ” means the IRS and any other domestic or foreign Governmental Entity responsible for the administration and/or collection of any Tax.

Tax Return ” means all returns, reports, forms, estimates or information statements relating to or required to be filed in connection with any Tax or Tax return, including any amendment, attachment or supplement to any of the foregoing.

Taxes ” means all taxes, charges, fees, levies or other assessments, including any net income tax, corporation or franchise tax based on net income, any alternative or add-on minimum taxes, any gross income, capital gains, capital acquisitions, gross receipts, premium, sales, use, ad valorem, value-added, transfer, profits, license, payroll, employment, social security, social insurance, withholding, excise, severance, stamp, occupation, property (real or personal, tangible or intangible), environmental or windfall profit tax, custom duty or other tax, governmental fee or other like assessment, including any interest, penalty or addition thereto.

Third Party Claim ” has the meaning set forth in Section 9.2(b) .

Three-Month LIBOR ” means, as of any date of determination, the rate for deposits in U.S. dollars for a period of three months, in an amount that is representative for a single transaction in that market at that time, that appears on Bloomberg Page BBAM as of 11:00 a.m., London time, on such date of determination. If such rate does not appear on the Bloomberg Page BBAM, then Three-Month LIBOR for the relevant period will be determined on the basis of the rates at which deposits in U.S. dollars are offered by the Reference Banks at approximately 11:00 a.m., London time, on the date of determination with respect to such relevant period to prime banks in the London interbank market for a period of three months commencing on the first day of such relevant period and in an amount that is representative for a single transaction in that market at that time, assuming an actual/360 day count basis. Seller shall request the principal London office of each of the Reference Banks to provide a quotation of its rate. If at least two such quotations are provided, the rate for that relevant period will be the arithmetic mean of the quotations. If fewer than two quotations are provided as requested, the rate for that relevant period will be the arithmetic mean of the rates quoted by three major banks in New York City, selected by Seller, acting in good faith and in a commercially reasonable manner, at approximately 11:00 a.m., New York City time, on the first day of such relevant period for loans in U.S. dollars to leading European banks for a period of three months commencing on the first day of such relevant period and in an amount that is representative for a single transaction in that market at that time. If Seller is unable to obtain at least two rate quotations for such loans, the rate for that relevant period shall be Three-Month LIBOR as calculated for the immediately preceding period.

 

-16-


Total Adjusted Capital ” means, as of any date of determination, the amount of OMFLIC’s total adjusted capital as of such date, determined in accordance with the Risk-Based Capital Calculation Methodology.

Trademark License Agreement ” means the trademark license agreement to be entered into at the Closing substantially in the form of Exhibit G hereto.

Trademarks ” mean trademarks, service marks, trade dress, logos, Internet domain names, other similar designations of source or original and general intangibles of like nature, any and all common law rights thereto, and registrations and applications for registration thereof (including intent-to-use applications), all rights therein provided by applicable Law, and all reissues, extensions and renewals of any of the foregoing together with the goodwill symbolized by or associated with any of the foregoing.

Transaction Agreements ” means, collectively, this Agreement, the Ancillary Agreements and the Guaranty.

Transaction Incentive Award Program ” means the Benefit Plan with such name set forth in Section 3.9(a) of the Disclosure Schedule.

Transferred Companies ” has the meaning set forth in Recital B .

Transferred Subsidiaries ” has the meaning set forth in Recital B .

Transfer Taxes ” has the meaning set forth in Section 10.7(f) .

Transition Period ” has the meaning set forth in Section 6.1(b) .

Treasury Regulations ” means the regulations prescribed under the Code.

Trust Account ” has the meaning set forth in Section 5.21(f)(i) .

Vermont Permitted Practice ” means the Vermont Department of Banking, Insurance, Securities and Health Care Administration’s approval for the Captive to recognize as an admitted asset the face amount of the letters of credit or other financing held in respect of the Financed Business.

Wilton Commitment ” means the Agreement, dated as of January 26, 2011, between Buyer and Wilton Re U.S. Holdings, Inc.

Wire Transfer ” means a payment in immediately available funds by wire transfer in lawful money of the United States of America to such account or accounts as shall have been designated by notice to the paying party.

 

-17-


ARTICLE II

PURCHASE AND SALE OF THE SHARES

SECTION 2.1. Purchase and Sale; Purchase Price . Upon the terms and subject to the conditions of this Agreement, at the Closing, Seller shall sell all of the Shares to Buyer, and Buyer shall purchase all of the Shares from Seller. The purchase price for the Shares (as well as for the assignment of Seller’s rights under the Intercompany Loan Agreements pursuant to the Deed of Novation) is the Closing Purchase Price, as adjusted pursuant to Sections 2.8 and 2.9 and subject to the last sentence of Section 5.20 (the “ Adjusted Purchase Price ”). The parties acknowledge that an amount of such purchase price equal to the aggregate outstanding principal balance owing under the Intercompany Loan Agreements, plus any accrued but unpaid interest thereunder, shall be allocated to the purchase of Seller’s rights under the Intercompany Loan Agreements.

SECTION 2.2. Closing . Unless this Agreement shall have been terminated pursuant to Section 11.1 and subject to the satisfaction or waiver of each of the conditions set forth in Article VII , the closing of the purchase and sale of the Shares (the “ Closing ”) shall take place at 10:00 a.m. on the first Business Day of the calendar month next following the first calendar month during which all of the conditions set forth in Article VII are satisfied or waived (other than those conditions that by their nature are to be satisfied at the Closing, but subject to the satisfaction or waiver of those conditions at the Closing), at the offices of Dewey & LeBoeuf LLP, 1301 Avenue of the Americas, New York, New York, unless another date, time or place is agreed to in writing by the parties hereto; provided that if the final condition set forth in Article VII (other than those conditions that by their nature are to be satisfied at the Closing) to be satisfied or waived is so satisfied or waived in March of 2011, the Closing shall take place on April 4, 2011. The actual date and time of the Closing are referred to herein as the “ Closing Date .”

SECTION 2.3. Escrow Agreement . At the Closing, Buyer and Seller shall, and Seller shall cause OMFLIC to, enter into an escrow agreement with a banking institution of national standing mutually selected by the parties (the “ Escrow Agent ”) substantially in the form of Exhibit H , with such changes as the Escrow Agent shall reasonably require (the “ Escrow Agreement ”), for the establishment of an escrow account for the purpose of paying Seller’s obligations, if any, under the Protected Asset Agreement (the “ Escrow Account ”). Buyer shall fund the Escrow Account at Closing by delivering to the Escrow Agent an amount equal to the Protected Asset Amount.

SECTION 2.4. Payment at Closing and Delivery of Shares .

(a) Seller shall deliver to Buyer, not later than the second Business Day immediately preceding the Closing Date, (i) a statement certified by the Chief Financial Officer of OMFLIC setting forth in reasonable detail: (A) the amount of the gross proceeds of each sale of a Proposed Protected Asset to any Person that is not an Affiliate of OMFLIC; (B) a calculation of the aggregate amount of all Pre-Closing Proposed Protected Asset Losses; and (C) a calculation of the Protected Asset Amount, and (ii) copies of all trade confirmations relating to the sale of Proposed Protected Assets that resulted in Pre-Closing Proposed Protected Asset Losses.

 

-18-


(b) At the Closing, Buyer shall (i) deliver and pay to Seller by Wire Transfer an amount equal to the Cash Purchase Price and (ii) deliver and pay to the Escrow Agent by Wire Transfer for deposit in the Escrow Account an amount equal to the Protected Asset Amount. For the avoidance of doubt, the sum of the Cash Purchase Price and the Protected Asset Amount cannot exceed $350,000,000.

(c) At the Closing, Seller shall deliver to Buyer certificates representing all of the Shares, duly endorsed in blank or with stock powers or other proper instruments of assignment duly endorsed in blank, in proper form for transfer, with all appropriate stock Transfer Tax stamps affixed.

SECTION 2.5. Other Closing Deliveries . At the Closing, in addition to Buyer’s payments to Seller and the Escrow Agent as specified in Section 2.4(b) , Seller’s delivery of certificates representing all of the Shares as specified in Section 2.4(c) and as otherwise set forth herein:

(a) Seller shall deliver, or cause to be delivered, to Buyer the written resignations described in Section 5.9 ;

(b) Seller shall deliver, or cause to be delivered, to Buyer counterparts of each of the Ancillary Agreements duly executed by Seller or its applicable Affiliates;

(c) Buyer shall deliver, or cause to be delivered, to Seller counterparts of each of the Ancillary Agreements duly executed by Buyer or its applicable Affiliates;

(d) Seller shall deliver, or cause to be delivered, to Buyer a copy of a statement issued by the Company pursuant to Section 1.897-2(h) of the Treasury Regulations, certifying that the Shares are not a U.S. real property interest; and

(e) each party shall deliver, or cause to be delivered, to the other party such other documents as may be reasonably necessary to consummate the transactions contemplated by this Agreement.

Notwithstanding the foregoing, if there are no Protected Assets or if the Protected Asset Amount is less than $1.00, then the parties shall not enter into the Protected Asset Agreement or the Escrow Agreement and such agreements shall be deemed not to constitute Ancillary Agreements hereunder.

SECTION 2.6. Payments . Except to the extent explicitly provided otherwise herein, each party hereto shall make each payment due to the other party hereto (or its Affiliate) pursuant to this Agreement by no later than 12:00 p.m., New York City time, on the day when due (unless otherwise consented to by the party hereto (or its Affiliate) to whom such payment is due). Except to the extent explicitly provided herein to the contrary, all payments required to be made by a party hereto shall be made in cash.

 

-19-


SECTION 2.7. Interest . Except to the extent explicitly provided otherwise herein, all computations of interest with respect to any payment due to a Person under this Agreement shall be based on the Interest Rate on the basis of a year of 365 days, in each case for the actual number of days (including the first day but excluding the last day) occurring in the period for which such interest is payable. Whenever any payment under this Agreement will be due on a day other than a Business Day, such payment shall be made on the next succeeding Business Day, and such extension of time shall be included in the computation of payment of interest.

SECTION 2.8. Preparation and Delivery of Financial Statements; Determination of Purchase Price Adjustments .

(a) No later than five Business Days prior to the Closing Date, Seller, at its own expense, shall cause the Company to prepare in good faith and deliver to Buyer: (i) an estimated statutory balance sheet of OMFLIC as of the Closing Date (the “ Estimated Closing Balance Sheet ”) which sets forth Seller’s good faith estimate of the Statutory Capital on the Closing Date (the “ Estimated Statutory Capital ”); and (ii) a worksheet together with explanatory notes (such worksheet and explanatory notes, together with the Estimated Closing Balance Sheet, the “ Estimated Financial Deliverables ”), setting forth Seller’s good faith estimate of the Total Adjusted Capital on the Closing Date (the “ Estimated Total Adjusted Capital ”) and Risk-Based Capital on the Closing Date (the “ Estimated Closing Risk-Based Capital ” and, together with the Estimated Total Adjusted Capital, the “ Estimated Amounts ”). The Estimated Closing Balance Sheet shall (A) be prepared from the books and records of OMFLIC, (B) be prepared in accordance with SAP applied on a basis consistent with the application of SAP in the preparation of the Statutory Statement of OMFLIC as of and for the year ended December 31, 2009, (C) present Seller’s good faith estimate of the statutory financial position of OMFLIC as of the Closing Date in conformity with SAP applied on a basis consistent with the application of SAP in the preparation of the Statutory Statement of OMFLIC as of and for the year ended December 31, 2009, and (D) be prepared without giving effect to any of the transactions described on Exhibit I-1 but, for the avoidance of doubt, giving effect to the other transactions occurring before, at or in connection with the Closing, including those described on Exhibit I-2 . The Estimated Total Adjusted Capital and the Estimated Closing Risk-Based Capital shall be calculated in accordance with the Risk-Based Capital Calculation Methodology. Seller shall consult with Buyer and its accountants with respect to the preparation of the Estimated Financial Deliverables and give the Buyer and its accountants access to its working papers used in the preparation thereof and a reasonable opportunity to provide comments on drafts of the Estimated Financial Deliverables. Buyer and Seller shall use commercially reasonable efforts to negotiate a resolution of any differences in the Estimated Amounts reflected in such draft Estimated Financial Deliverables. The drafts of the Estimated Financial Deliverables prepared by Seller and the Estimated Amounts reflected therein, as revised to reflect any revisions thereto agreed to by Buyer and Seller, shall be the Estimated Financial Deliverables and the Estimated Amounts for purposes of this Article II ; provided that, if any disagreement between Seller and Buyer as to such Estimated Financial Deliverables and Estimated Amounts is not resolved by the Closing Date, the Estimated Financial Deliverables and Estimated Amounts prepared by Seller, as revised to reflect any agreed changes thereto but not any changes thereto that are not agreed, shall be the Estimated Financial Deliverables and the Estimated Amounts for purposes of this Article II .

 

-20-


(b) Buyer shall use its reasonable best efforts to engage KPMG (or, if KPMG notifies Buyer in writing that it is unwilling to be so engaged, a nationally recognized independent certified public accounting firm in the Unites States selected by Seller) to prepare and deliver to Seller no later than the date that is 90 days after the Closing Date: (i) an audited statutory balance sheet of OMFLIC as of the Closing Date (the “ Actual Closing Balance Sheet ”), accompanied by an unqualified audit opinion of KPMG (or such other firm that is engaged pursuant to the first parenthetical in Section 2.8(b) ), which sets forth the Statutory Capital on the Closing Date (the “ Actual Statutory Capital ”) and (ii) a worksheet together with explanatory notes (such worksheet and explanatory notes together with the Actual Closing Balance Sheet, the “ Actual Financial Deliverables ”), which sets forth Buyer’s good faith calculation, of the Total Adjusted Capital on the Closing Date (the “ Actual Total Adjusted Capital ”) and Risk-Based Capital on the Closing Date (the “ Actual Closing Risk-Based Capital ” and, together with the Actual Total Adjusted Capital, the “ Actual Amounts ”). The Actual Closing Balance Sheet shall (A) be prepared from the books and records of OMFLIC, (B) be prepared in accordance with SAP applied on a basis consistent with the application of SAP in the preparation of the Statutory Statement of OMFLIC as of and for the year ended December 31, 2009, (C) present the statutory financial position of OMFLIC as of the Closing Date in conformity with SAP applied on a basis consistent with the application of SAP in the preparation of the Statutory Statement of OMFLIC as of and for the year ended December 31, 2009, and (D) be prepared without giving effect to any of the transactions described on Exhibit I-1 but, for the avoidance of doubt, giving effect to the other transactions occurring before, at or in connection with the Closing, including those described on Exhibit I-2 . The Actual Total Adjusted Capital and the Actual Closing Risk-Based Capital shall be calculated in accordance with the Risk-Based Capital Calculation Methodology. Seller shall consult with Buyer and its accountants with respect to the preparation of the Actual Financial Deliverables. The fees and expenses of KPMG (or such other firm that is engaged pursuant to the first parenthetical in Section 2.8(b) ) in connection with the preparation of the Actual Financial Deliverables shall be shared equally between Seller and Buyer.

(c) During the 60 days immediately following Seller’s receipt of the Actual Financial Deliverables (the “ Purchase Price Adjustment Review Period ”) Buyer shall (i) permit Seller and its Representatives to review Buyer’s working papers and other supporting data, as well as all of the books, records and other relevant information, in each case, relating to the operations and finances of the Transferred Companies with respect to the period up to and including the Closing Date, (ii) make reasonably available the individuals in its employ responsible for, and knowledgeable about the information used in, the preparation of any Actual Financial Deliverable, in order to respond to the reasonable inquiries of Seller and (iii) otherwise cooperate in good faith with Seller and its Representatives in connection with Seller’s review.

(d) Buyer shall take all actions necessary or desirable to maintain and preserve all accounting books, records, policies and procedures on which the Actual Financial Deliverables are based or on which the Final Actual Financial Deliverables are to be based so as not to impede or delay the calculation of the Actual Amounts or the preparation of the Notice of Purchase Price Adjustment Disagreement or any Final Actual Financial Deliverable in the manner and utilizing the methods permitted by this Agreement.

 

-21-


(e) Either party (the “ Objecting Party ”) shall notify the other party in writing (a “ Notice of Purchase Price Adjustment Disagreement ”) prior to the expiration of the Purchase Price Adjustment Review Period if the Objecting Party disagrees with any of the Actual Financial Deliverables, or the calculation of any Actual Amount, as the case may be, which disagreement shall be limited to determinations with respect to (x) whether the Actual Closing Balance Sheet was prepared in accordance with SAP applied on a basis consistent with the application of SAP in the preparation of the Statutory Statement of OMFLIC as of and for the year ended December 31, 2009 or (y) any arithmetic error in the calculation of any line items in the Actual Closing Balance Sheet or of the Actual Amounts. Each Notice of Purchase Price Adjustment Disagreement shall set forth in reasonable detail the basis for such disagreement, the amounts involved and the Objecting Party’s determination of such Actual Financial Deliverables or Actual Amount, as the case may be. If a Notice of Purchase Price Adjustment Disagreement is not delivered by either party on or prior to the expiration date of the Purchase Price Adjustment Review Period, then the Actual Financial Deliverables and the calculation of the Actual Amounts, as the case may be, shall be deemed to have been accepted by the parties and shall become final and binding upon the parties in accordance with Section 2.8(g) .

(f) During the 30 day period immediately following the earlier to occur of (x) the expiration of the Purchase Price Adjustment Review Period and (y) the first date when both parties have delivered a Notice of Purchase Price Adjustment Disagreement (such 30 day period, the “ Purchase Price Adjustment Consultation Period ”), Buyer and Seller shall seek in good faith to resolve any disagreement they may have with respect to the matters specified in any Notice of Purchase Price Adjustment Disagreement.

(g) If, at the end of the Purchase Price Adjustment Consultation Period, Buyer and Seller have been unable to resolve all disagreements that they may have with respect to the matters specified in any Notice of Purchase Price Adjustment Disagreement, then Buyer and Seller shall submit all matters that remain in dispute with respect to such Notice of Purchase Price Adjustment Disagreement, including information that relates to items which may not be in dispute but are relevant to the disputed matters (along with a copy of the applicable Actual Financial Deliverables marked to indicate those line items that are in dispute), to the New York office of the Expert Accountant. Buyer and Seller shall cooperate in good faith to appoint the Expert Accountant as promptly as practicable. Buyer and Seller shall direct the Expert Accountant, acting as an expert and not as an arbitrator, to make, within 30 days after the submission of such matters to the Expert Accountant, or as soon as practicable thereafter, a final determination (on the basis of the Risk-Based Capital Calculation Methodology or SAP (applied on a basis consistent with the application of SAP in the preparation of the Statutory Statement of OMFLIC as of and for the year ended December 31, 2009), as applicable, and in each case in accordance with this Section 2.8(g) ) of the appropriate amount of each of the line items or Actual Amounts in the Actual Financial Deliverables as to which Buyer and Seller disagree as specified in a Notice of Purchase Price Adjustment Disagreement. The determination by the Expert Accountant shall be binding on Buyer and Seller, and otherwise shall be final, non-appealable and conclusive. With respect to each disputed line item or Actual Amount, as the case may be, such determination, if not in accordance with the position of either Buyer and Seller, shall not be in excess of the higher, nor less than the lower, of the amounts advocated by any Objecting Party in a Notice of Purchase Price Adjustment Disagreement or set forth in the applicable Actual Financial Deliverables with respect to such disputed line item or Actual Amount. For the avoidance of doubt, the Expert Accountant shall not review any line items or make any determination with respect to any matter other than those matters in any Notice of Purchase Price

 

-22-


Adjustment Disagreement that remain in dispute, unless the Expert Accountant’s review of such other line items is relevant to the disputed matters or such review or determination is reasonably necessary in order to resolve any disputes that arise from line items or matters that were not initially set forth in any Notice of Purchase Price Adjustment Disagreement but that subsequently arose as a result of the Expert Accountant’s review and determination of those matters in any Notice of Purchase Price Adjustment Disagreement that remain in dispute (in which case, such additional line items and matters shall be deemed to have been included in such Notice of Purchase Price Adjustment Disagreement). The Actual Financial Deliverables, the Actual Closing Balance Sheet and the calculation of the Actual Amounts (including the Actual Total Adjusted Capital and the Actual Closing Risk-Based Capital) that are final and binding on Buyer and Seller, as determined either through agreement of Buyer and Seller (deemed or otherwise) pursuant to Section 2.8(e) or through the determination of the Expert Accountant pursuant to this Section 2.8(g) , are referred to herein as the “ Final Actual Financial Deliverables ”, the “ Final Actual Closing Balance Sheet ”, the “ Final Actual Total Adjusted Capital ” and the “ Final Actual Closing Risk-Based Capital ”, respectively. The 30-day period for delivering the written award may be extended by the mutual written consent of Buyer and Seller or by the Expert Accountant for up to an additional 30 days for good cause shown. Notwithstanding anything else contained herein, neither Buyer nor Seller may assert that any award issued by the Expert Accountant is unenforceable because it has not been timely rendered.

(h) The cost of the Expert Accountant’s review and determination shall be shared equally by Buyer and Seller. During the review by the Expert Accountant, Buyer and Seller shall each make available to the Expert Accountant such individuals and such information, books, records and work papers, as may be reasonably required by the Expert Accountant to make its determination and otherwise take the actions contemplated to be taken by it under Section 2.8(g) .

(i) If Buyer or Seller (or the Expert Accountant) requests, pursuant to this Section 2.8 , access to the work papers and other supporting data of the independent accountants of the other party to this Agreement relating to the preparation of any Actual Financial Deliverables or Estimated Financial Deliverables or the calculation of the Actual Amounts or the Estimated Amounts, as the case may be, the providing party shall cause its independent accountants to make any such work papers and other supporting data available to the requesting party (including the Expert Accountant) and its independent accountants; provided , however , that the requesting party (including the Expert Accountant) has signed a customary confidentiality and hold harmless agreement relating to such access to working papers and other supporting data in form and substance reasonably acceptable to such independent accountants. The providing party shall promptly provide any consents requested by its independent accountants in connection with such access.

(j) The calculation of any adjustment made pursuant to this Section 2.8 is subject to the last sentence of Section 5.20 .

SECTION 2.9. Post-Closing Purchase Price Adjustments .

(a) The “ Post-Closing Date Risk-Based Capital True-Up Amount ” shall be the amount (whether positive or negative) equal to (i) the RBC Deficit calculated based on the Final Actual Financial Deliverables, if any, minus (ii) the Closing Date Risk-Based Capital True-Up Amount.

 

-23-


(b) The “ Post-Closing Date Capital Shortfall Amount ” shall be the amount (whether positive or negative) equal to (i) the greater of (A) $0.00 and (B) the excess of $818,604,559 over the sum of the Actual Statutory Capital and the RBC Deficit calculated based on the Final Actual Financial Deliverables minus (ii) the Closing Date Capital Shortfall Amount.

(c) The “ Post-Closing Adjustment ” shall be the amount equal to (i) the Post-Closing Date Risk-Based Capital True-Up Amount plus (ii) the Post-Closing Date Capital Shortfall Amount.

(d) Within two Business Days after the amount of the Post-Closing Adjustment is finally determined pursuant to this Section 2.9 (but subject to clause (e) of this Section 2.9 ):

(i) If the Post-Closing Adjustment is a positive amount, then Seller shall pay to Buyer by Wire Transfer an amount equal to the Post-Closing Adjustment; or

(ii) If the Post-Closing Adjustment is a negative amount, then Buyer shall pay to Seller by Wire Transfer an amount equal to the absolute value of the Post-Closing Adjustment.

(e) The calculation of any adjustment made pursuant to this Section 2.9 is subject to the last sentence of Section 5.20 .

ARTICLE III

REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES OF SELLER

Seller represents and warrants to Buyer as follows:

SECTION 3.1. Organization and Authority of Seller . Seller is a company limited by shares duly organized, validly existing and in good standing under the laws of England and Wales. Seller or the applicable Affiliate of Seller has the requisite organizational power and authority to enter into, consummate the transactions contemplated by and carry out its obligations under, each of the Transaction Agreements to which it is a party. The execution and delivery by Seller or the applicable Affiliate of Seller of each of the Transaction Agreements to which Seller or the applicable Affiliate of Seller is a party and the consummation by Seller or the applicable Affiliate of Seller of the transactions contemplated by such Transaction Agreements have been (or will be prior to the Closing) duly authorized by all requisite corporate or other similar organizational action on the part of Seller or the applicable Affiliate of Seller. Each of the Transaction Agreements to which Seller or the applicable Affiliate of Seller is a party has been, or upon execution and delivery thereof, will be, duly executed and delivered by Seller or the applicable Affiliate of Seller. Assuming due authorization, execution and delivery by the other parties hereto or thereto, each of the Transaction Agreements to which Seller or the applicable Affiliate of Seller is a party constitutes, or upon execution and delivery thereof, will constitute, the legal, valid and binding obligation of Seller or the applicable Affiliate of Seller,

 

-24-


enforceable against it in accordance with its terms, subject in each case to the effect of any applicable bankruptcy, reorganization, insolvency, moratorium, rehabilitation, liquidation, fraudulent conveyance, preferential transfer or similar Laws now or hereafter in effect relating to or affecting creditors’ rights and remedies generally and subject, as to enforceability, to the effect of general equitable principles (regardless of whether enforcement is sought in a proceeding in equity or at law).

SECTION 3.2. Organization, Authority and Qualification of the Transferred Companies . Each of the Transferred Companies is a corporation or other organization duly incorporated or organized, validly existing and in good standing under the Laws of its jurisdiction of incorporation or organization and has the requisite corporate or organizational power and authority to carry on its business as now being conducted, except where the failure to be so incorporated or organized, validly existing and in good standing would not, individually or in the aggregate, reasonably be expected to have a Company Material Adverse Effect. Each of the Transferred Companies is duly qualified as a foreign corporation or other organization to do business, and is in good standing (if applicable), in each jurisdiction in which the nature of its business or the ownership or leasing of its properties makes such qualification necessary, except where failures to so qualify or be in good standing would not, individually or in the aggregate, reasonably be expected to have a Company Material Adverse Effect.

SECTION 3.3. Capital Structure .

(a) The authorized Capital Stock of the Company consists of 1,000 shares of common stock, par value $0.01, of which 102.513761 shares are issued and outstanding. Except as set forth in the preceding sentence, no shares of Capital Stock of the Company are issued, reserved for issuance or outstanding. Section 3.3(a) of the Disclosure Schedule sets forth (i) all the authorized Capital Stock of each of the Transferred Subsidiaries and (ii) the number of shares (or other applicable units) of each class or series of Capital Stock of each of the Transferred Subsidiaries that are issued and outstanding, together with the registered holder thereof. All the outstanding shares (or other applicable units) of each class or series of Capital Stock of the Transferred Companies have been duly authorized and validly issued, are fully paid and nonassessable and were not issued in violation of any preemptive or subscription rights enforceable under applicable Law. There are no options, calls, warrants or convertible or exchangeable securities, or conversion, preemptive, subscription or other rights, or agreements, arrangements or commitments, in any such case, obligating or which may obligate the Transferred Companies to issue, sell, purchase, return or redeem any respective shares (or other applicable units) of their respective Capital Stock or securities convertible into or exchangeable for any respective shares (or other applicable units) of their respective Capital Stock. There are no shares (or other applicable units) of any Capital Stock of the Transferred Companies reserved for issuance. There are no capital appreciation rights, phantom stock plans, securities with participation rights or features, or similar obligations and commitments of the Transferred Companies. Seller owns of record and beneficially all of the Shares and indirectly owns all of the outstanding shares of Capital Stock of each of the Transferred Subsidiaries, free and clear of all Liens, other than any Liens arising as a result of the Transaction Agreements and restrictions on transfer imposed by applicable Laws. Upon the transfer and delivery of the Shares to Buyer at Closing, as contemplated herein, Buyer will acquire record and beneficial ownership of the

 

-25-


Shares, free and clear of all Liens, other than any restrictions on transfer imposed by applicable Laws, Liens arising as a result of the Transaction Agreements and any events or circumstances occurring after the Closing.

(b) Except for this Agreement and restrictions imposed by applicable Laws, there are no voting trusts, stockholder agreements, proxies or other rights or agreements in effect with respect to the voting, transfer or dividend rights of the Shares or of any shares (or other applicable units) of Capital Stock of any Transferred Subsidiary. Except as set forth in Section 3.3(b) of the Disclosure Schedule, none of the Transferred Companies holds any equity interest in any Person that is not a Transferred Subsidiary or that is not an Investment Asset or that would not have been an Investment Asset if beneficially owned by any of the Insurance Subsidiaries as of June 30, 2010.

(c) Except for a dividend in the amount of $33,725,245.97 paid by the Company to Seller on December 21, 2010 and a dividend in the amount of $59,000,000 paid by OMFLIC to the Company on December 20, 2010, none of the Transferred Companies has, since August 5, 2010, declared or paid any dividends on, made any distributions with respect to, or redeemed or repurchased any shares of, any class of its Capital Stock.

(d) As of December 31, 2010, the Statutory Capital of OMFLIC was in excess of $902,000,000.

SECTION 3.4. No Conflict . Provided that all consents, approvals, authorizations and other actions described in Section 3.5 have been obtained or taken, except as set forth in Section 3.4 of the Disclosure Schedule or as otherwise provided in this Article III and except as may result from any facts or circumstances relating to the identity or regulatory status of Buyer or its Affiliates, the execution and delivery by Seller or the applicable Affiliate of Seller of, and the consummation by Seller or the applicable Affiliate of Seller of the transactions contemplated by, the Transaction Agreements to which each is a party do not and will not (a) violate or conflict with the organizational documents of Seller or the applicable Affiliate of Seller or the Transferred Companies, (b) subject to the Governmental Approvals referred to in Section 3.5 , conflict with or violate in any material respect any Law or other Governmental Order applicable to Seller or the applicable Affiliate of Seller or the Transferred Companies or by which any of them or any of their respective properties or assets is bound or subject or (c) result in any breach of, or constitute a default (or event which, with the giving of notice or lapse of time, or both, would constitute a default) under, or give to any Person any rights of termination, acceleration or cancellation of, or result in the creation of any Lien (other than Permitted Liens) on any of the assets or properties of any of the Transferred Companies pursuant to, any Material Contract or any note, bond, loan or credit agreement, mortgage or indenture to which any of the Transferred Companies is a party or by which any of them or any of their respective properties or assets is bound or subject, except, in the case of clause (b) or (c), for any such conflicts, violations, breaches, defaults, terminations, accelerations, cancellations or creations that would not, individually or in the aggregate, reasonably be expected to have a Company Material Adverse Effect.

 

-26-


SECTION 3.5. Consents and Approvals . Except as may result from any facts or circumstances relating to the identity or regulatory status of Buyer or its Affiliates and except in connection, or in compliance, with (a) the notification and waiting period requirements of the HSR Act and (b) the approvals, filings, notifications and waiting periods imposed by applicable Laws that are set forth in Section 3.5 of the Disclosure Schedule, the execution and delivery by Seller or the applicable Affiliate of Seller of the Transaction Agreements do not, and the consummation by Seller or the applicable Affiliate of Seller of the transactions contemplated by the Transaction Agreements will not, require any consent, approval, license, permit, order, qualification, authorization of, or registration or other action by, or any filing with or notification to, any Governmental Entity (each, a “ Governmental Approval ”) to be obtained or made by Seller or the applicable Affiliate of Seller (including any of the Transferred Companies), except for any Governmental Approvals the failure of which to be obtained or made would not, individually or in the aggregate, reasonably be expected to have a Company Material Adverse Effect.

SECTION 3.6. Financial Information .

(a) Seller has previously delivered or made available to Buyer copies of (i) the consolidated balance sheet of the Company as of December 31, 2009 and the related statement of income for the year then ended, and (ii) the unaudited consolidated balance sheet of the Company as of June 30, 2010 and the related statement of income for the six month period then ended (the “ Interim Financial Statements ”). Except as set forth in Section 3.6(a) of the Disclosure Schedule, the foregoing financial statements (the “ Financial Statements ”) were prepared in accordance with IFRS applied on a consistent basis during the periods presented and fairly present in all material respects the financial position of the Company on a consolidated basis as of the dates thereof and the results of their operations for the periods then ended in conformity with IFRS (subject, in the case of the Interim Financial Statements, to normal yearend adjustments).

(b) Seller has previously delivered or made available to Buyer complete and correct copies of the statutory financial statements of each of the Insurance Subsidiaries, as filed with the applicable domestic regulator of such Insurance Subsidiary, in each case, for the year ended December 31, 2009 and for the three month period ended March 31, 2010 (the “ Statutory Statements ”). Except as otherwise specifically noted in the Statutory Statements or as set forth in Section 3.6(b) of the Disclosure Schedule, the Statutory Statements present fairly, in all material respects, the respective statutory financial condition of the Insurance Subsidiaries at the respective dates thereof, and the statutory results of operations for the periods then ended, in accordance with SAP (subject, in the case of any interim financial statements included in the Statutory Statements, to normal year-end adjustments, and to the absence of footnotes.

(c) Except (i) as set forth in the Financial Statements, the Statutory Statements or the SEC Reports, (ii) for liabilities and obligations incurred in the Ordinary Course of Business since December 31, 2009, (iii) as set forth in Section 3.6(c) of the Disclosure Schedule and (iv) for liabilities and obligations that would not, individually or in the aggregate, reasonably be expected to have a Company Material Adverse Effect, there are no liabilities or obligations of any of the Transferred Companies of any nature of a type that would be required under IFRS to be reflected on a consolidated financial statement of the Company or that would be required under SAP to be reflected on a statutory statement of an Insurance Subsidiary, in each case as of the date hereof.

 

-27-


SECTION 3.7. SEC Filings .

(a) Except as set forth in Section 3.7(a) of the Disclosure Schedule, the Insurance Subsidiaries, and their respective separate accounts, have filed or furnished all required reports, schedules, registration statements and other documents and exhibits thereto with or to the United States Securities and Exchange Commission (the “ SEC ”) since January 1, 2008 (the “ SEC Reports ”). As of their respective dates of filing with or furnishing to the SEC (or, if amended or supplemented by a filing prior to the date hereof, as of the date of such latest filing), the SEC Reports complied in all material respects with the requirements of the Securities Act or the Investment Company Act, as the case may be, and the rules and regulations of the SEC thereunder applicable to such SEC Reports, and none of the SEC Reports when filed with or furnished to the SEC (or, if amended or supplemented by a filing prior to the date hereof, as of the date of such latest filing) contained any untrue statement of a material fact or omitted to state a material fact required to be stated or incorporated by reference therein or necessary in order to make the statements therein, in the light of the circumstances under which they were made, not misleading. The financial statements of the Insurance Subsidiaries and their respective registered separate accounts included in the SEC Reports complied, as of their respective dates of filing with the SEC (or, if amended or supplemented by a filing prior to the date hereof, as of the date of such latest filing), in all material respects with all applicable accounting requirements and with the published rules and regulations of the SEC with respect thereto, have been prepared in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles or SAP, as applicable, applied on a consistent basis throughout the periods involved (except as may be indicated in the notes thereto) and fairly present in all material respects the consolidated financial position of the Insurance Subsidiaries and their respective registered separate accounts.

(b) Other than the SEC Reports, which are addressed in clause (a) of this Section 3.7 , and except as set forth in Section 3.7(b) of the Disclosure Schedule, each of the Transferred Companies, including the Insurance Subsidiaries and their separate accounts, have timely filed (after taking into account all grace periods or extensions) all reports, registrations and statements, together with any amendments required to be made with respect thereto, that they were required to file since January 1, 2008 with any Governmental Entity, and have paid all fees and assessments due and payable in connection therewith, except where the failure to file such report, registration or statement or to pay such fees and assessments would not, individually or in the aggregate, reasonably be expected to have a Company Material Adverse Effect.

SECTION 3.8. Absence of Certain Changes or Events . Other than in connection with the transactions contemplated by the Transaction Agreements or as reflected in the Disclosure Schedule (including Section 3.8 thereof), since December 31, 2009, each of the Transferred Companies has conducted its business in the Ordinary Course of Business, and there has not occurred: (i) any event or events having or that would reasonably be expected to have a Company Material Adverse Effect; or (ii) any event or events that would have resulted in a breach by Seller of Section 5.1 had such Section been binding on the Seller during such period.

SECTION 3.9. Employee Benefits; Employees .

(a) Seller has delivered or made available to Buyer complete and correct summaries of all: (i) “employee benefit plans,” as defined in Section 3(3) of ERISA, and

 

-28-


(ii) incentive, profit-sharing, stock option, stock purchase, other equity-based, employment, vacation or other leave, change in control, retention, severance, deferred compensation and other benefit plans, programs and agreements, in each case established or maintained by Seller or any of its Affiliates or to which Seller or any of its Affiliates contributes or is obligated to contribute, for the benefit of any Employees (collectively, the “ Benefit Plans ”). Section 3.9 of the Disclosure Schedule sets forth a list of all of the Benefit Plans, and of benefit plans for independent agents under which the Transferred Companies have any liability. Except as indicated in Section 3.9 of the Disclosure Schedule, all of the Benefit Plans are sponsored by a Transferred Company (such sponsored Benefit Plans, the “ Company Benefit Plans ”). Except as set forth in Section 3.9 of the Disclosure Schedule, none of the Company Benefit Plans covers employees or other individuals that are not employed by the Transferred Companies. No Employee performs services for the Transferred Companies primarily outside of the United States. None of the Benefit Plans is maintained outside the United States primarily for the benefit of Employees working outside the United States.

(b) Each Company Benefit Plan has been operated and administered in compliance with its terms and with applicable Law including ERISA and the Code, other than any non-compliance that individually and in the aggregate would not, individually or in the aggregate, reasonably be expected to have a Company Material Adverse Effect. Except for the Company Savings Plan, no Company Benefit Plan is an “employee pension benefit plan” within the meaning of Section 3(2) of ERISA. Each Benefit Plan that is intended to be tax-qualified under Section 401(a) of the Code is so qualified and a recent favorable determination or opinion letter has been issued by the IRS that the form of such plan meets the requirements of Section 401(a) of the Code. Except as indicated in Section 3.9(a) of the Disclosure Schedule, each Benefit Plan and other arrangement that is a “nonqualified deferred compensation plan” within the meaning of Section 409A of the Code (“ Section 409A ”) and the regulations issued thereunder has been operated in compliance with or exemption from Section 409A since January 1, 2005 and has been in documentary compliance with Section 409A since December 31, 2008.

(c) The Transferred Companies do not have any liability under Section 412 of the Code, Section 302 of ERISA or Title IV of ERISA with respect to any Benefit Plan or any other employee benefit plan of any ERISA Affiliate. The Transferred Companies do not have any liability with respect to any “multiemployer plan,” as defined in Section 3(37) of ERISA.

(d) All contributions required to be made under the terms of any Company Benefit Plan have been timely made when due.

(e) None of the Transferred Companies has any obligations for retiree welfare benefits other than (i) coverage mandated by applicable Law and (ii) coverage that continues during an applicable severance period.

(f) With respect to the Employees:

(i) except as set forth in Section 3.9(f)(i) of the Disclosure Schedule, as of the date of this Agreement, there is not in existence, nor has there been within the twelve months prior to the date hereof, any pending or, to the Knowledge of Seller,

 

-29-


threatened: (A) strike, slowdown, stoppage, picketing, interruption of work, lockout or any other dispute or controversy with or involving a labor organization or with respect to unionization or collective bargaining; (B) labor-related organizational effort, election activities, or request or demand for negotiations, recognition or representation; or (C) arbitration, claim of unfair labor practice, workers’ compensation claim, claim or investigation of wrongful discharge, claim or investigation of employment discrimination or retaliation, claim or investigation of sexual harassment, or other employment dispute of any nature, against any of the Transferred Companies that would, individually or in the aggregate, reasonably be expected to have a Company Material Adverse Effect;

(ii) (A) as of the date hereof and for the three year period preceding such date, none of the Transferred Companies is, or within such period has been, a party to or bound by any collective bargaining agreement, other agreement or understanding or work rules or practice with any labor union or any other similar organization; and (B) none of the Employees are subject to or covered by any such collective bargaining agreement, other agreement or understanding, work rules or practice, or arbitration award, or are represented by any labor organization;

(iii) except as set forth in Section 3.9(f)(iii) of the Disclosure Schedule, as of the date hereof and for the three year period preceding such date, each of the Transferred Companies: (A) is and has been in compliance with all applicable U.S. federal, state and local Laws and foreign Laws which relate to employment, wages, hours, leaves, disability, immigration, secondment and plant closings and layoffs (including the Worker Adjustment and Retraining Notification Act and comparable state, local or other Laws), except for such non-compliance as would not, individually or in the aggregate, reasonably be expected to have a Company Material Adverse Effect; and (B) is not liable for any arrears of wages, other compensation or benefits, or any taxes or penalties for failure to comply with any of the foregoing, except for such liability that would not, individually or in the aggregate, reasonably be expected to have a Company Material Adverse Effect;

(iv) except as set forth in Section 3.9(f)(iv) of the Disclosure Schedule, as of the date hereof, there is not pending or, to the Knowledge of Seller, threatened any Action or other claim against any of the Transferred Companies for actual violation of any right or obligation under any of the Company Benefit Plans (except for routine claims for benefits in the Ordinary Course of Business and plan operation); and

(v) except as set forth in Section 3.9(f)(v) of the Disclosure Schedule, the consummation of the transactions contemplated by this Agreement will not (either alone or together with any other event) entitle any Employee to severance, retention, change of control or other similar pay or benefits under, or accelerate the time of payment or vesting or trigger any payment of funding (through a grantor trust or otherwise) of compensation or benefits under, or increase the amount payable or trigger any other material obligation pursuant to, any Company Benefit Plan.

 

-30-


(g) No more than fifteen percent (15%) of the assets held in any “pooled separate account” or other similar collective investment account of the Transferred Companies within the meaning of ERISA or the regulations thereunder (each, a “ Separate Account ”) are Plan Assets. No more than two percent (2%) of the assets held in the “insurance company general account” of the Transferred Companies within the meaning of ERISA or the regulations thereunder (the “ General Account ”) are Plan Assets.

SECTION 3.10. Taxes . Except as set forth in Section 3.10 of the Disclosure Schedule:

(a) (i) All material Tax Returns required to be filed by or with respect to the Transferred Companies (or any predecessor entities) on or prior to the Closing Date have been timely filed or will have been timely filed (in each case, taking into account any applicable extensions) prior to the Closing Date, (ii) all such Tax Returns are true, correct and complete in all material respects and (iii) all Taxes shown as due on such filed Tax Returns and all other material Taxes (whether or not shown on any Tax Return) have (or by the Closing Date will have) been timely paid or remitted (taking into account any applicable extensions), as appropriate, to the proper Taxing Authority, except for Taxes for which reserves, provisions or accruals have been reflected or otherwise taken into account on the Financial Statements or the Statutory Statements, including for Taxes being contested in good faith. Each of the Transferred Companies has properly established reserves, provisions or accruals on the Financial Statements or Statutory Statements for all material Taxes not yet due and payable.

(b) All material Taxes required to have been withheld and paid in connection with amounts paid or owing by or with respect to the Transferred Companies to any employee, independent contractor, shareholder, creditor, or other third party have been withheld and paid.

(c) Except for agreements, documents and powers of attorney that have expired, no written agreement or other document extending, or having the effect of extending, the period of assessment, reassessment or collection of any Taxes of or relating to the Transferred Companies has been executed or filed with the IRS or any other Taxing Authority.

(d) No federal, state, local or foreign audit, investigation, dispute, disagreement, examination, refund litigation, adjustment in controversy, or other administrative proceeding or court proceeding with regard to Taxes (each a “ Tax Contest ”) exists or has been initiated in writing in respect of the Transferred Companies and neither Seller nor the Transferred Companies has received any written notice that any such Tax Contest is pending or threatened.

(e) No claim has been made in writing by any Taxing Authority in a jurisdiction where the Transferred Companies do not file Tax Returns that any of the Transferred Companies is or may be subject to taxation by that jurisdiction.

(f) Neither the execution and delivery of the Transaction Agreements nor the consummation of the transactions contemplated thereby will (either alone or in conjunction with any other event) result in or cause the payment or provision of benefits which are “excess parachute payments” as the term is defined in Section 280G of the Code.

(g) There are no Liens for Taxes upon any material property or other material assets of the Transferred Companies, except for Permitted Liens.

 

-31-


(h) None of the Transferred Companies has constituted either a “distributing corporation” or a “controlled corporation” under Section 355 of the Code (i) in the two years prior to the date hereof or (ii) in a distribution which could otherwise constitute part of a “plan” or “series of related transactions” (within the meaning of Section 355(e) of the Code) in conjunction with the transactions contemplated by the Transaction Agreements.

(i) None of the Transferred Companies will be required to include any material item of income in, or exclude any material item of deduction from, taxable income for any taxable period ending after the Closing Date as a result of any (i) adjustment pursuant to Section 481(a) of the Code by reason of a change in accounting method, (ii) “closing agreement” as described in Section 7121 of the Code (or any corresponding or similar provision of state, local or foreign income Tax Laws) executed on or prior to the Closing Date or (iii) intercompany transaction or excess loss account described in Treasury Regulations under Section 1502 of the Code (or any corresponding or similar provision of state, local or foreign Law), in each case, that resulted in lower taxable income in taxable periods or portions thereof ending on or before the Closing Date.

(j) Except for Fidelity & Guaranty Assignment, LLC, each of the Transferred Companies is, and has always been since its formation, classified as a corporation for U.S. federal income tax purposes and no claim has been made by the IRS that any of the Transferred Companies should be subject to a different classification.

(k) Since January 1, 2005, no private letter ruling of the IRS or material comparable rulings, concessions, arrangements or guidance issued by any other Taxing Authority in respect of the Transferred Companies has been received or requested.

(l) To the Knowledge of Seller, the Insurance Subsidiaries have satisfied all reporting, withholding and deposit requirements with respect to any qualified additional benefits payable under their Products so as to avoid such products being considered “modified endowment contracts” within the meaning of Section 7702A(a) of the Code.

(m) The Company and each Transferred Subsidiary is a member of the affiliated group (within the meaning of Section 1504(a)(1) of the Code) for which the Company files a federal consolidated income Tax Return as the common parent, and none of the Transferred Companies has been included in any other Company Group for any taxable period for which the statute of limitations has not expired.

(n) None of the Transferred Companies has any material liability for the Taxes of any Person (other than the Transferred Companies) under Section 1.1502-6 of the Treasury Regulations (or any similar provision of state, local or foreign Law), as a transferee or successor, or by contract.

(o) All material written communications to or from any Taxing Authorities with respect to Taxes of the Transferred Companies have been made available to Buyer to the extent such communications relate to (i) an outstanding matter that has not been disclosed on the Disclosure Schedule or (ii) a Tax liability that has not been (A) paid or accrued for or (B) otherwise taken into account on the Financial Statements or Statutory Statements.

 

-32-


(p) None of the Transferred Companies has engaged in any “listed transaction” as defined in Section 1.6011-4 of the Treasury Regulations or entered into any transaction or taken any position that could give rise to a substantial understatement penalty under Section 6662(d) of the Code.

(q) To the Knowledge of Seller, (i) the assets of any separate account maintained by an Insurance Subsidiary that is required to be diversified pursuant to Section 817(h) of the Code are adequately diversified within the meaning of Section 817(h) of the Code and (ii) no purchaser of any Product will be treated as an owner for Tax purposes of the assets of any separate account to which such Product account values have been allocated.

SECTION 3.11. Compliance with Laws; Permits .

(a) Except as set forth on Section 3.11(a) of the Disclosure Schedule, none of the Transferred Companies is in violation of any Laws or Governmental Orders applicable to it or its assets, properties or business (including any such Laws regulating the insurance business), except for violations that, individually or in the aggregate, would not reasonably be expected to have a Company Material Adverse Effect. As of the date of this Agreement, none of the Company or the Transferred Companies is a party to, or bound by, any Governmental Order that is material to the Business. Each of the Insurance Subsidiaries is in material compliance with its policies applicable to its collection, use of and disclosure of personal or private information of customers or consumers.

(b) Except as set forth in Section 3.11(b) of the Disclosure Schedule, each of the Transferred Companies holds all governmental qualifications, registrations, filings, licenses, permits, approvals or authorizations necessary to conduct the Business and to own or use its assets and properties, as such Business, assets and properties are conducted, owned and used on the date hereof (collectively, the “ Permits ”), except those the absence of which would not, individually or in the aggregate, reasonably be expected to have a Company Material Adverse Effect. All material Permits are valid and in full force and effect. As of the date hereof, none of the Transferred Companies is the subject of any pending or, to the Knowledge of Seller, threatened, Action seeking the revocation, suspension, termination, modification or impairment of any Permit, or the supervision of any Transferred Company pursuant to the application of any Law in respect of the level of capital held by such Transferred Company, except for those Actions that would not, individually or in the aggregate, reasonably be expected to have a Company Material Adverse Effect in the event that such Actions are successful. Except for limitations imposed by applicable Law that are applicable to insurance companies generally and except for limitations imposed after the date hereof, there is no Governmental Order that would be binding on any of the Transferred Companies following the Closing that prohibits or restricts the payment of shareholder dividends or other shareholder distributions by any of the Transferred Companies.

SECTION 3.12. Litigation . Except as set forth in Section 3.12 of the Disclosure Schedule, as of the date of this Agreement, there are no Actions (other than claims under or in connection with Insurance Contracts in the Ordinary Course of Business) pending or, to the Knowledge of Seller, threatened in writing against any of Seller or the Transferred Companies that, individually or in the aggregate, would reasonably be expected to have a Company Material Adverse Effect.

 

-33-


SECTION 3.13. Material Contracts . Section 3.13 of the Disclosure Schedule lists each of the Material Contracts as in effect on the date of this Agreement. Each Material Contract is a valid and binding obligation of the Transferred Company that is party thereto, as applicable, and, to the Knowledge of Seller and as of the date hereof, each other party to such Material Contract, except for such failures to be valid and binding as would not, individually or in the aggregate, reasonably be expected to have a Company Material Adverse Effect. Except as set forth on Section 3.13 of the Disclosure Schedule, each such Material Contract is enforceable against the Transferred Company that is party thereto, as applicable, and, to the Knowledge of Seller and as of the date hereof, each such other party, in accordance with its terms (subject in each case to the effect of any applicable bankruptcy, reorganization, insolvency, moratorium, rehabilitation, liquidation, fraudulent conveyance, preferential transfer or similar Laws now or hereafter in effect relating to or affecting creditors’ rights and remedies generally and subject, as to enforceability, to the effect of general equitable principles (regardless of whether enforcement is sought in a proceeding in equity or at law)). Except as set forth on Section 3.13 of the Disclosure Schedule, none of the Transferred Companies or, to the Knowledge of Seller and as of the date hereof, any other party to a Material Contract is in default under or breach of a Material Contract, and, to the Knowledge of Seller and as of the date hereof, there does not exist any event, condition or omission that would constitute such a default or breach (whether by lapse of time or notice or both), in each case, except as would not, individually or in the aggregate, reasonably be expected to have a Company Material Adverse Effect.

SECTION 3.14. Intellectual Property .

(a) The Transferred Companies own, or have enforceable rights or licenses to use, the material Intellectual Property used in the Business as currently conducted, except where such lack of ownership or rights would not, individually or in the aggregate, reasonably be expected to have a Company Material Adverse Effect.

(b) Section 3.14(b) of the Disclosure Schedule sets forth a complete and correct listing of all Registered Intellectual Property that is material to the conduct of the Business. For the avoidance of doubt, Buyer acknowledges and agrees that any Registered Intellectual Property listed on Section 3.14(b) of the Disclosure Schedule that is also a part of the Seller Trademarks will be retained by Seller in accordance with Section 5.8(a) and licensed to Buyer pursuant to the Trademark License Agreement.

(c) Except as set forth in Section 3.14(c) of the Disclosure Schedule, none of the Transferred Companies has received since January 1, 2008 any written notice of any infringement or misappropriation of the rights of any third party that has not been resolved with respect to any Intellectual Property used in the conduct of the Business. To the Knowledge of Seller, (i) no use by the Transferred Companies of any material Owned Intellectual Property or of any material Intellectual Property in the conduct of the Business infringes or misappropriates any material Intellectual Property right of any third party, except where such infringement or misappropriation would not, individually or in the aggregate, reasonably be expected to have a

 

-34-


Company Material Adverse Effect and (ii) no Person is infringing or misappropriating any material Owned Intellectual Property, except where such infringement or misappropriation would not, individually or in the aggregate, reasonably be expected to have a Company Material Adverse Effect.

(d) The Transferred Companies have established and maintain commercially reasonable security programs and privacy policies and are in material compliance with such programs and policies.

SECTION 3.15. Real Property .

(a) Except for any real property or interests in real property that are Investment Assets or are of the type that would have been Investment Assets if beneficially owned by any of the Insurance Subsidiaries as of December 31, 2009, none of the Transferred Companies owns any real property or interest in real property in fee as of the date hereof.

(b) Section 3.15(b) of the Disclosure Schedule sets forth a complete and correct list of all real property leased as of the date hereof by any of the Transferred Companies, as lessee, providing for annual fixed rents of $100,000 or more (all such property, the “ Leased Real Property ” and the leases pursuant to which the Leased Real Property is leased, the “ Real Property Leases ”). As of the date hereof, a Transferred Company has a valid and enforceable leasehold interest under each of the Real Property Leases, subject to Permitted Liens and to applicable bankruptcy, reorganization, insolvency, moratorium, rehabilitation, liquidation, fraudulent conveyance, preferential transfer or similar Laws now or hereinafter in effect relating to or affecting creditors’ rights and remedies generally and subject, as to enforceability, to the effect of general equitable principles (regardless of whether enforcement is sought in a proceeding in equity or at law), and, as of the date hereof, none of the Transferred Companies has received any written notice of any default under any Real Property Lease, and to the Knowledge of Seller, no event has occurred and no condition exists that, with notice or lapse of time, or both, would constitute a default by the Transferred Companies under any of the Real Property Leases, except, in each case, for such invalidity, unenforceability or defaults as would not, individually or in the aggregate, reasonably be expected to have a Company Material Adverse Effect.

SECTION 3.16. Brokers . Except for J.P. Morgan Securities Inc., for whose fees and expenses Seller is solely responsible, and Nomura Bank International plc, no broker, investment banker, financial advisor or other Person is entitled to any broker’s, finder’s, financial advisor’s or other similar fee or commission in connection with the transactions contemplated by this Agreement based upon arrangements made by or on behalf of Seller.

SECTION 3.17. Affiliate Transactions . Section 3.17 of the Disclosure Schedule lists all Intercompany Agreements in effect as of the date hereof.

SECTION 3.18. Regulatory Filings . Seller has made available for inspection by Buyer (a) any material reports of examination (including financial, market conduct and similar examinations) of any Insurance Subsidiary issued by any insurance regulatory authority, in any case, since December 31, 2007 and prior to the date hereof, (b) any material

 

-35-


reports of examination of any Transferred Companies that is a broker-dealer issued by any Governmental Entity, and (c) all material Holding Company System Act filings or submissions made by any Insurance Subsidiary with any insurance regulatory authority since December 31, 2007 and prior to the date hereof. All material deficiencies or violations noted in the examination reports described in the preceding clauses (a) and (b) above have been resolved to the reasonable satisfaction of the insurance department that noted such deficiencies or violations. None of the Insurance Subsidiaries is “commercially domiciled” under the Laws of any jurisdiction or is otherwise treated as domiciled in a jurisdiction other than its respective jurisdiction of organization.

SECTION 3.19. Investment Assets . Seller has provided to Buyer prior to the date hereof a complete and correct list of the investment assets beneficially owned by each of the Insurance Subsidiaries as of June 30, 2010 that are of the type required to be disclosed in Schedule B through DB of the Statutory Statements (collectively, the “ Investment Assets ”).

SECTION 3.20. Insurance Issued by Insurance Subsidiaries .

(a) Except as set forth in Section 3.20 of the Disclosure Schedule, all policy forms and rates in use by any of the Insurance Subsidiaries, and all endorsements, applications, and certificates pertaining thereto, as and where required by applicable Laws, have been either filed and approved or filed and non-disapproved by all applicable Governmental Entities, subject to such exceptions as would not, individually or in the aggregate, reasonably be expected to have a Company Material Adverse Effect.

(b) There are no material unpaid claims or assessments made against any Insurance Subsidiary by any state insurance guaranty associations or similar organizations in connection with such association’s insurance guaranty fund.

SECTION 3.21. Ceded Reinsurance . Section 3.21 of the Disclosure Schedule sets forth a complete and correct list, as of the date hereof, of all Ceded Reinsurance Agreements under which any of the Insurance Subsidiaries has ceded gross statutory reserves of $15,000,000 or more as of December 31, 2009 and has any existing rights or obligations, each of which Ceded Reinsurance Agreements is in full force and effect. Except as set forth in Section 3.13 of the Disclosure Schedule or except as would not, individually or in the aggregate, reasonably be expected to have a Company Material Adverse Effect, none of the Insurance Subsidiaries or, to the Knowledge of Seller and as of the date hereof, any of the other parties thereto, is in default under any such Ceded Reinsurance Agreement where such default gives rise to any right of termination or cancellation by the other party or parties thereto. Except as set forth in Section 3.21 of the Disclosure Schedule, since January 1, 2009 to the date hereof, (a) none of Seller or any of the Transferred Companies has received any written notice from any applicable reinsurer that any amount of reinsurance ceded by any of the Insurance Subsidiaries will be uncollectible or otherwise defaulted upon, and (b) no such reinsurer is in default or has otherwise failed to pay any material amount when due, except where such defaults or failures to pay have existed for less than 90 days or are otherwise not material after consideration of reserves held for such uncollectible receivables.

 

-36-


SECTION 3.22. Insurance . Except as set forth in Section 3.22 of the Disclosure Schedule, as of the date hereof, all current property and liability insurance policies covering the Transferred Companies are in full force and effect (and all premiums due and payable thereon have been paid in full on a timely basis), and no written notice of cancellation, termination or revocation or other written notice that any such insurance policy is no longer in full force or effect or that the issuer of any policy is not willing or able to perform its obligations thereunder has been received by any of the Transferred Companies and, to the Knowledge of Seller, none of the Transferred Companies is in default of any provision thereof, except for such defaults as would not, individually or in the aggregate, reasonably be expected to have a Company Material Adverse Effect.

SECTION 3.23. Certain Securities Matters . None of the Transferred Companies is required to be licensed as an investment adviser, as such term is defined in Section 202(a)(11) of the Investment Advisers Act, or as a broker or dealer as such terms are defined in Section 3(a) of the Exchange Act.

SECTION 3.24. Actuarial Report and Reserves . Seller has delivered to Buyer a complete and correct copy of the actuarial report dated February 8, 2010 prepared by Milliman, Inc. for the benefit of Seller and its Affiliates (the “ Actuarial Report ”). Seller used its commercially reasonable efforts to supply accurate and complete loss, loss adjustment expense and premium data to Milliman, Inc. for use in its preparation of the Actuarial Report and, to the Knowledge of Seller, no data provided in connection with the preparation of the Actuarial Report was inaccurate in any material respect.

SECTION 3.25. Risk-Based Capital . Seller has made available to Buyer complete and correct copies of all analyses and reports submitted by the Transferred Companies or any Insurance Subsidiary to any insurance regulatory authority during the 12 months prior to the date hereof relating to their respective risk-based capital calculations, and such analyses and reports were accurate in all material respects at the time they were submitted.

SECTION 3.26. Environmental Matters . To the Knowledge of Seller: (a) none of the Leased Real Properties is subject to a written notice, request for information or order from or agreement with a Governmental Entity or third party respecting the violation of any Environmental Law; (b) with respect to the Leased Real Properties, or the operation by the Transferred Companies of their respective businesses thereon, Seller has not received written notice of any material judicial or administrative proceedings pending or threatened arising under or relating to an Environmental Law; (c) the Transferred Companies are operating the Business in compliance in all material respects with applicable Environmental Laws; and (d) the Transferred Companies possess all material Environmental Permits that are necessary for the operation of the Business as conducted on the date hereof.

SECTION 3.27. Financed Business . All of the policies included in the Financed Business are subject to either (i) NAIC Model Valuation of Life Insurance Policies Model Regulation (“ Regulation XXX ”) or (ii) NAIC Actuarial Guideline 38 (“ Regulation AXXX ”) and will, at the closing of the Reserve Facility or Alternative Facility, have been recaptured by OMFLIC from OM Re and represent all of the policies in effect and written by OMFLIC through the date of the recapture that are subject to Regulation XXX and Regulation AXXX.

 

-37-


SECTION 3.28. Disclaimer .

(a) Except for the representations and warranties contained in this Article III , none of Seller or any of its Affiliates or its or their respective Representatives makes any other representation or warranty of any kind or nature whatsoever, oral or written, express or implied, with respect to Seller or any of its Affiliates (including the Transferred Companies), the Business, the Transaction Agreements or the transactions contemplated by the Transaction Agreements, including any relating to the financial condition, results of operations, assets or liabilities of any of the foregoing entities. Except for the representations and warranties contained in this Article III , (i) Seller disclaims, on behalf of itself, its Affiliates and its and their respective Representatives, any other representations or warranties, whether made by Seller or its Affiliates or its or their respective Representatives or any other Person, and (ii) Seller disclaims, on behalf of itself, its Affiliates and its and their respective Representatives, all liability and responsibility for any other representation, warranty, opinion, projection, forecast, advice, statement or information made, communicated or furnished (orally or in writing) to Buyer or its Affiliates or Representatives (including any opinion, projection, forecast, advice, statement or information that may have been or may be provided to Buyer or its Affiliates or Representatives by any Representative of Seller or any of its Affiliates). For the avoidance of doubt, none of Seller, its Affiliates or its or their respective Representatives makes any representations or warranties to Buyer or any other Person regarding the probable success or profitability of the Transferred Companies or the Business (whether before or after the Closing).

(b) Except to the extent the representations and warranties in this Article III relate expressly to Taxes, the representations and warranties made in Section 3.10 are the only representations and warranties made by Seller with respect to matters relating to Taxes (including Tax Returns, Tax allocation agreements, Tax claims and Tax Contests).

ARTICLE IV

REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES OF BUYER

Buyer represents and warrants to Seller as follows:

SECTION 4.1. Formation and Authority of Buyer . Buyer is a limited liability company duly organized, validly existing and in good standing under the Laws of the State of Delaware. Buyer or the applicable Affiliate of Buyer has all requisite corporate, limited liability company or other applicable organizational power and authority to enter into, consummate the transactions contemplated by and carry out its obligations under, each of the Transaction Agreements to which it is a party. The execution and delivery by Buyer or the applicable Affiliate of Buyer of each of the Transaction Agreements to which Buyer or the applicable Affiliate of Buyer is a party and the consummation by Buyer or the applicable Affiliate of Buyer of the transactions contemplated by such Transaction Agreements have been (or will be prior to the Closing) duly authorized by all requisite corporate or other similar organizational action on the part of Buyer or the applicable Affiliate of Buyer. Each of the

 

-38-


Transaction Agreements to which Buyer or the applicable Affiliate of Buyer is a party has been, or upon execution and delivery thereof, will be, duly executed and delivered by Buyer or the applicable Affiliate of Buyer. Assuming due authorization, execution and delivery by the other parties hereto or thereto, each of the Transaction Agreements to which Buyer or the applicable Affiliate of Buyer is a party constitutes, or upon execution and delivery thereof, will constitute, the legal, valid and binding obligation of Buyer or the applicable Affiliate of Buyer, enforceable against it in accordance with its terms, subject in each case to the effect of any applicable bankruptcy, reorganization, insolvency, moratorium, rehabilitation, liquidation, fraudulent conveyance, preferential transfer or similar Laws now or hereafter in effect relating to or affecting creditors’ rights and remedies generally and subject, as to enforceability, to the effect of general equitable principles (regardless of whether enforcement is sought in a proceeding in equity or at law).

SECTION 4.2. No Conflict . Provided that all consents, approvals, authorizations and other actions described in Section 4.3 have been obtained or taken, except as otherwise provided in this Article IV and except as may result from any facts or circumstances relating to the identity or regulatory status of Seller or the Transferred Companies, the execution and delivery by Buyer or the applicable Affiliate of Buyer of, and the consummation by Buyer or the applicable Affiliate of Buyer of the transactions contemplated by, the Transaction Agreements to which each is a party do not and will not (a) violate or conflict with the organizational documents of Buyer or the applicable Affiliate of Buyer, (b) subject to the Governmental Approvals referred to in Section 4.3 , conflict with or violate in any material respect any Law or other Governmental Order applicable to Buyer or the applicable Affiliate of Buyer by which any of them or any of their respective properties or assets is bound or subject or (c) result in any breach of, or constitute a default (or event which, with the giving of notice or lapse of time, or both, would constitute a default) under, or give to any Person any rights of termination, acceleration or cancellation of, or result in the creation of any Lien (other than Permitted Liens) on any of the assets or properties of Buyer or the applicable Affiliate of Buyer pursuant to, any material contract or any note, bond, loan or credit agreement, mortgage or indenture to which Buyer or any of its Affiliates is a party or by which any of them or any of their respective properties or assets is bound or subject, except, in the case of clauses (b) or (c), for any such conflicts, violations, breaches, defaults, terminations, accelerations, cancellations or creations that would not, individually or in the aggregate, reasonably be expected to have a Buyer Material Adverse Effect.

SECTION 4.3. Consents and Approvals . Except as may result from any facts or circumstances relating to the identity or regulatory status of Seller or its Affiliates and except in connection, or in compliance, with (a) the notification and waiting period requirements of the HSR Act and (b) the approvals, filings and notifications imposed by applicable Laws that are set forth in Section 4.3 of the Disclosure Schedule, the execution and delivery by Buyer or the applicable Affiliate of Buyer of the Transaction Agreements and the definitive documentation for the Reinsurance Transaction do not, and the consummation by Buyer or the applicable Affiliate of Buyer of the transactions contemplated by the Transaction Agreements and of the Reinsurance Transaction will not, require any Governmental Approval to be obtained or made by Buyer or any Affiliate of Buyer, except for any Governmental Approvals the failure of which to be obtained or made would not, individually or in the aggregate, reasonably be expected to have a Buyer Material Adverse Effect.

 

-39-


SECTION 4.4. Securities Laws Matters . The Shares are being acquired by Buyer for its own account and without a view to the public distribution or sale of the Shares or any interest in them. Buyer understands and agrees that it may not sell, transfer, assign, pledge or otherwise dispose of any of the Shares other than pursuant to a registered offering in compliance with, or in a transaction exempt from, the registration requirements of the Securities Act and applicable state and foreign securities Laws.

SECTION 4.5. Litigation . As of the date of this Agreement, there are no Actions pending or, to the knowledge of Buyer, threatened in writing against any of Buyer or its Affiliates that, individually or in the aggregate, would reasonably be expected to have a Buyer Material Adverse Effect.

SECTION 4.6. [Intentionally omitted]

SECTION 4.7. Brokers . Except for Bank of America, for whose fees and expenses Buyer is solely responsible, no broker, investment banker, financial advisor or other Person is entitled to any broker’s, finder’s, financial advisor’s or other similar fee or commission in connection with the transactions contemplated by this Agreement based upon arrangements made by or on behalf of Buyer.

SECTION 4.8. Investigation . Buyer acknowledges and agrees that it (a) has made its own inquiry and investigation into, and, based thereon, has formed an independent judgment concerning, the Transferred Companies and the Business and (b) has been furnished with or given adequate access to such information about the Transferred Companies and the Business as it has requested. Buyer further acknowledges and agrees that (i) the only representations, warranties, covenants and agreements made by Seller or any of its Affiliates or its or their respective Representatives are the representations, warranties, covenants and agreements made in this Agreement, (ii) except as set forth in Article III , none of Seller or any of its Affiliates or its or their respective Representatives makes any other representation or warranty of any kind or nature whatsoever, oral or written, express or implied, with respect to Seller or any of its Affiliates (including the Transferred Companies), the Business, the Transaction Agreements or the transactions contemplated by the Transaction Agreements, including any relating to the financial condition, results of operations, assets or liabilities of any of the foregoing entities and (iii) none of Seller or any of its Affiliates or its or their respective Representatives makes any representation or warranty as to (A) the operation of the Transferred Companies by Buyer or its Affiliates after the Closing in any manner or (B) the probable success or profitability of the Transferred Companies or the Business (whether before or after the Closing). Except for the representations and warranties contained in Article III , Buyer has not relied upon any other representations or warranties or any other information made or supplied by or on behalf of Seller or any of its Affiliates or its or their respective Representatives, and Buyer acknowledges and agrees that none of Seller or any of its Affiliates or its or their respective Representatives has any liability or responsibility for any other representation, warranty, opinion, projection, forecast, analysis, appraisal, advice, statement or information made, communicated, or furnished (orally or in writing) to Buyer or its Affiliates or their respective Representatives, including the Confidential Information Memorandum dated February, 2010, any management presentation information and any third party actuarial analysis (in each case, as the same may be amended or supplemented from time to time), and any opinion, projection, forecast, analysis,

 

-40-


appraisal, advice, statement, information or other material that may have been or may be provided to Buyer or any of its Affiliates by Seller or any of its Affiliates or its or their respective Representatives) (collectively, the “ Descriptive Materials ”), and Buyer acknowledges, agrees with and affirms the statements made in Section 9.4 (Reserves). With respect to any projections and forecasts in the Descriptive Materials, Buyer acknowledges that (I) there are uncertainties inherent in attempting to make such projections and forecasts, (II) it is familiar with such uncertainties, (III) it is not acting and has not acted in reliance on the Descriptive Materials or any such projections or forecasts so furnished to it and (IV) it shall have no claim against Seller or its Affiliates and their respective Representatives with respect to the Descriptive Materials or any such projection or forecast.

SECTION 4.9. Financing; Guaranty .

(a) Buyer has available to it, and as of the Closing will have available to it, funds that constitute all funds necessary for the payment of the aggregate amounts payable pursuant to Article II and of all related fees and expenses, in the case of fees and expenses as required to be paid or funded as of or prior to the Closing.

(b) On or prior to the date of this Agreement, the Investor has delivered to Seller a true and complete executed copy of the Guaranty. The Guaranty has not been (and as of the Closing will not have been) restated, amended or modified or any provision thereof waived. The Guaranty is, and as of the Closing will be, in full force and effect and is, and as of the Closing will be, a legal, valid and binding obligation of the Investor.

SECTION 4.10. Disclaimer . Except for the representations and warranties contained in this Article IV , neither Buyer nor any of its Affiliates or their respective Representatives makes any other representation or warranty of any kind or nature whatsoever, oral or written, express or implied, with respect to itself, its Affiliates, their respective businesses, the Transaction Agreements or the transactions contemplated by the Transaction Agreements. Except for the representations and warranties contained in this Article IV , (a) Buyer disclaims, on behalf of itself, its Affiliates and its and their respective Representatives, any other representations or warranties, whether made by Buyer or any of its Affiliates or their respective Representatives or any other Person, and (b) Buyer disclaims, on behalf of itself, its Affiliates and its and their respective Representatives, all liability and responsibility for any other representation, warranty, opinion, projection, forecast, advice, statement or information made, communicated or furnished (orally or in writing) to Seller or its Affiliates or their respective Representatives (including any opinion, projection, forecast, advice, statement or information that may have been or may be provided to Seller or its Affiliates or Representatives by any Representative of Buyer or any of its Affiliates).

ARTICLE V

COVENANTS

SECTION 5.1. Conduct of Business of the Company . During the period from the date of this Agreement until the Closing, except (a) as otherwise contemplated or expressly permitted by, or necessary to effectuate the transactions contemplated by, this

 

-41-


Agreement or the other Transaction Agreements, (b) for the matters set forth in Section 5.1 of the Disclosure Schedule, (c) as required by applicable Law or any Material Contract, (d) as Buyer otherwise consents in writing in advance (which consent will not be unreasonably withheld, delayed or conditioned), Seller shall cause each of the Transferred Companies to (x) conduct the Business in the Ordinary Course of Business, (y) use commercially reasonable efforts to preserve intact its business organizations and maintain material relationships with policyholders, Producers, suppliers and service providers of and to its respective businesses and others having business dealings with it and (z) not do any of the following:

(i) declare or pay any dividends on, or make any distributions with respect to, any class of its Capital Stock after December 31, 2010;

(ii) repurchase, redeem, repay or otherwise acquire any outstanding shares of Capital Stock or other securities of any of the Transferred Companies;

(iii) transfer, issue, sell or dispose of any shares of Capital Stock or other securities of any of the Transferred Companies or grant options, warrants, calls or other rights to purchase or otherwise acquire any shares of Capital Stock or other securities of any of the Transferred Companies;

(iv) effect any recapitalization, reclassification, stock split or like change in the capitalization of any of the Transferred Companies;

(v) amend the certificate of incorporation or by-laws (or other comparable organizational documents) of any of the Transferred Companies;

(vi) except with respect to changes intended to improve underwriting profitability (even if such changes have an effect of reducing premium volume), make any material change in the policies, practices or principles of any of the Insurance Subsidiaries in effect on the date hereof with respect to accounting methodology, reserving, underwriting or claims administration (other than any change required by IFRS, SAP or, in respect of underwriting or claims administration, in the Ordinary Course of Business);

(vii) purchase, sell, lease, exchange or otherwise dispose of or acquire any property or assets (other than (A) Proposed Protected Assets or Excluded Assets, (B) transactions occurring in the Ordinary Course of Business and not otherwise prohibited under this Section 5.1(z) , (C) the sale, exchange or other disposition of investment assets, which are the subject of Section 5.1(z)(viii) , and (D) pledges or other collateral assignments of assets, including by means of a credit for reinsurance trust, to or for the benefit of cedents under reinsurance written by an Insurance Subsidiary, for purposes of statutory accounting credit) or enter into any lease of real property or make any capital expenditure for which the aggregate consideration paid or payable in any individual transaction is in excess of $2,000,000 or in the aggregate in excess of $5,000,000, in each case other than in the Ordinary Course of Business;

(viii) sell, exchange, or otherwise dispose of any investment assets (other than Proposed Protected Assets and Excluded Assets, which may be sold,

 

-42-


exchanged or otherwise disposed of without restriction), provided that the Transferred Companies may sell, exchange or otherwise dispose of such investment assets to the extent that such transactions result in (A) aggregate cumulative gross capital gains not in excess of (1) $50,000,000 plus (2) an additional $50,000,000 of aggregate capital gains to the extent that such gains would be reflected in the statutory financial statements of OMFLIC or OMFLICNY, as the case may be, as additions to the interest maintenance reserve or (B) aggregate cumulative gross capital losses not in excess of (1) $50,000,000 plus (2) an additional $50,000,000 of aggregate capital losses to the extent that such losses would be reflected in the statutory financial statements of OMFLIC or OMFLICNY, as the case may be, as reductions to the interest maintenance reserve;

(ix) incur any financial indebtedness for borrowed money from third party lending sources (other than current trade accounts payable incurred in respect of property or services purchased in the Ordinary Course of Business and letters of credit issued in the Ordinary Course of Business) or assume, grant, guarantee or endorse, or otherwise as an accommodation become responsible for, the obligations of any Person, or make any loans or advances (other than advance commissions to Producers), for individual amounts in excess of $2,000,000 or in the aggregate in excess of $5,000,000 (or, in the case of loans or advances to Affiliates, for amounts in the aggregate in excess of $5,000,000);

(x) enter into, as a reinsured, any reinsurance or other similar contract, or enter into or amend (in any material respect) or renew or extend any Material Contract;

(xi) in any material respect, (A) grant, increase, or accelerate the vesting or payment of, or announce or promise to grant, increase or accelerate the vesting or payment of, any wages, salaries, bonuses, incentives, severance pay, other compensation, pension or other benefits payable or potentially available to any executive officers or directors of the Transferred Companies, including any increase or change pursuant to any Company Benefit Plan or (B) establish, adopt, increase or amend (or promise to take any such action(s)) any Benefit Plan or any benefits potentially available thereunder, in either case except as required by Law or by any contract in existence on the date hereof or involving increases or changes in the Ordinary Course of Business;

(xii) enter into, or amend in any material respect, any employment contracts with executive officers;

(xiii) settle or compromise any Action or threatened Action (in each case, except for claims under any Insurance Contracts within applicable policy limits), other than any settlement or compromise that involves cash payments, net of any insurance or reinsurance, of less than $5,000,000 in the aggregate;

(xiv) make, revoke, amend or change any material election concerning Taxes, settle or compromise any material Tax liability, file any amended Tax Return to the extent such amendment could negatively affect the Financial Statements or the Statutory Statements in a material manner, enter into any closing agreement with any Taxing Authority, extend or waive the application of any statute of limitations regarding the assessment, reassessment or collection of any material Tax, or enter into any Tax allocation agreement, Tax sharing agreement or Tax indemnity agreement;

 

-43-


(xv) enter into or renew any lease of real property with a term of longer than one year; or

(xvi) enter into any legally binding commitment with respect to any of the foregoing.

Notwithstanding anything contained in this Section 5.1 to the contrary, nothing contained herein shall limit or restrict the ability of Seller of any of its Affiliates to sell, liquidate or otherwise dispose of any Proposed Protected Asset or Excluded Asset.

SECTION 5.2. Access to Information . Seller shall cause the Transferred Companies to afford to Buyer and to the Representatives of Buyer reasonable access upon reasonable notice at reasonable times during normal business hours during the period prior to the Closing Date to their respective properties, books and records and, during such period, Seller shall cause the Transferred Companies or their Affiliates to furnish to Buyer such information concerning the Transferred Companies as Buyer may from time to time reasonably request, other than any such information that (a) is subject to an attorney-client or other legal privilege that might be impaired by such disclosure or (b) is subject to an obligation of confidentiality to an unaffiliated third party, unless such obligation is waived or is otherwise not applicable. All requests for access or information pursuant to this Section 5.2 shall be directed only to such Person or Persons as Seller shall designate in writing.

SECTION 5.3. Reasonable Best Efforts . Upon the terms and subject to the conditions and other agreements set forth in this Agreement, Seller and Buyer (a) shall execute and deliver, or shall cause to be executed and delivered, such documents and other papers and shall take, or shall cause to be taken, such further actions as may be reasonably required to carry out the provisions of the Transaction Agreements and give effect to the transactions contemplated by the Transaction Agreements in the most reasonably expeditious manner possible, (b) shall refrain from taking any actions (other than exercising such party’s rights hereunder) that could reasonably be expected to impair, delay or impede the Closing and (c) not in limitation of any other provision of this Agreement, shall use their respective reasonable best efforts to cause all the conditions to the obligations of the other party to consummate the transactions contemplated by this Agreement to be met as soon as reasonably practicable.

SECTION 5.4. Consents, Approvals and Filings .

(a) The parties shall use their reasonable best efforts to obtain as promptly as practicable all Governmental Approvals that may be or may become reasonably necessary, proper or advisable under the Transaction Agreements or applicable Law to consummate and make effective the transactions contemplated by the Transaction Agreements. The parties shall take all reasonable actions as may be requested by any such Governmental Entities to obtain such Governmental Approvals and cooperate with the reasonable requests of each other in seeking to obtain as promptly as practicable all such Governmental Approvals. Neither Seller nor Buyer shall take or cause to be taken any action that it is aware or reasonably should be

 

-44-


aware would have the effect of materially delaying, impairing or impeding the receipt of any such Governmental Approvals. In the event that a Governmental Entity requires that the terms of the Transaction Agreements be changed or altered in a manner that materially adversely affects the economic benefits reasonably expected to be derived by Buyer or Seller under the Transaction Agreements and in connection with the consummation of the transactions contemplated thereunder, taken as a whole, each of Buyer and Seller shall use its reasonable best efforts and cooperate and negotiate in good faith to agree to alternative terms that are acceptable to such Governmental Entity and provide benefits substantially similar to the benefits provided under the existing terms thereof. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Agreement, neither Seller nor Buyer shall be required to take any action under this Agreement pursuant to, or otherwise agree to or accept, any Negative Condition or Restriction.

(b) The parties shall promptly (and in no event more than five Business Days after the Amendment and Restatement Date) make, and cause their applicable Affiliates to make, all filings and notifications with all Governmental Entities that may be or may become reasonably necessary, proper or advisable under applicable Laws to consummate and make effective the transactions contemplated by the Transaction Agreements, including (i) Buyer causing an amended “Form A” or similar change of control applications to be filed in each jurisdiction where required by applicable insurance Laws with respect to the transactions contemplated by the Transaction Agreements, (ii) Buyer causing “Form E” or similar market share notifications to be filed in each jurisdiction where required by applicable insurance Laws with respect to the transactions contemplated by the Transaction Agreements, (iii) Seller and Buyer each making an appropriate filing of a notification and report form pursuant to the HSR Act (which filing, including the exhibits thereto, need not be shared or otherwise disclosed to the other party) with respect to the transactions contemplated by the Transaction Agreements, (iv) Seller and Buyer each making any other filing that may be required under any other antitrust or competition Law or by any Governmental Entity with jurisdiction over enforcement of any applicable antitrust or competition Laws, and (v) Seller and Buyer making, and causing their applicable Affiliates to make, any other filing that may be required under any insurance, financial services or similar applicable Law or by any Governmental Entity with jurisdiction over enforcement of any applicable insurance, financial services or similar Law. Seller and Buyer each agrees to supply, and cause its Affiliates to supply, promptly any additional information and documentary material that may be requested pursuant to the HSR Act or any other applicable Laws. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in Section 5.4(d) , Buyer shall have responsibility for the filing fees associated with its HSR Act filing, its “Form A” or similar change of control applications, its “Form E” or similar market share notifications and its “Form D” or other applications, and Seller and Buyer shall have responsibility for their other respective filing fees associated with any other required filings. Buyer and Seller agree that the amended Form A statements to be filed in New York and Maryland will include a description of the proposed assignment of all of the limited liability company interests of the Buyer to HRG and that the revised business plan of OMFLIC to be included with such amended Form A statements will contain a statement to the effect that the consummation of neither the Reinsurance Transaction nor any proposed reinsurance transaction with Wilton Reassurance Company or any of its Affiliates, including the Proposed Wilton Reinsurance Transactions, is a condition to the Closing. Buyer shall request that any review of any such transaction with Wilton Reassurance Company or any of its Affiliates be conducted separately from the review of the amended Form A statements so as to ensure that the Form A review process is not in any way delayed or

 

-45-


adversely affected thereby. For the avoidance of doubt and consistent with Section 5.21 , Buyer shall not, and shall cause its Affiliates not to, make any filing with or proposal to any Governmental Entity with respect to the Reinsurance Transaction or any aspect thereof until after the Closing (other than the withdrawal of the draft Form D filing that was made by or on behalf of Buyer with the Maryland Insurance Administration with respect to the Reinsurance Transaction on or around September 17, 2010, as required pursuant to Section 5.21(a) ).

(c) Subject to applicable Law relating to the sharing of information, each of Seller and Buyer shall promptly notify the other of any communication it or any of its Affiliates receives from any Governmental Entity relating to the matters that are the subject of this Agreement, permit counsel for the other party to review in advance, and consider in good faith the views of the other party in connection with, any proposed written communication to any Governmental Entity in connection with the transactions contemplated hereby, and provide each other with copies of all correspondence, filings or communications between such party or any of its Representatives, on the one hand, and any Governmental Entity or members of the staff of any Governmental Entity, on the other hand, subject to Section 5.2 ; except that, in the event any Governmental Entity requires or requests Buyer or any Affiliate of Buyer to provide, or in the event that any Governmental Approval involves Buyer providing: (i) personal financial information, including, but not limited to, any individual tax return or statement of net worth, or any other information that is of a personal or private nature, about any individual who is an officer, director, general partner or limited partner of Buyer, or of any Affiliate of Buyer, or (ii) information that constitutes a trade secret of Buyer (the information described in the preceding clauses (i) and (ii), “ Buyer’s Protected Information ”), Buyer shall have no obligation to provide to Seller, and Seller shall have no right to review, such Buyer’s Protected Information, Seller shall not seek Buyer’s Protected Information from any such Governmental Entity, and in the event any Governmental Entity were to share such information with Seller, Seller agrees upon discovering this fact, to cease reading any Buyer’s Protected Information, not to disclose such information to any third party, and to return it (otherwise unread) to Buyer. Subject to applicable Law, Buyer shall have the right to file Buyer’s Protected Information separately from other correspondence, filings or communications, or to redact Buyer’s Protected Information from such documents prior to sharing them with Seller. Neither Buyer nor Seller shall participate or agree to participate in any meeting with any Governmental Entity relating to the matters that are the subject of this Agreement unless it consults with Seller or Buyer, as applicable, in advance and, to the extent permitted by such Governmental Entity, gives Seller or Buyer, as applicable, the opportunity to attend and participate at such meeting (other than any such meeting or portion thereof that is devoted to Buyer’s Protected Information). Subject to the Confidentiality Agreement, Section 5.2 and Section 5.11 and the provisions above regarding Buyer’s Protected Information, Seller and Buyer shall coordinate and cooperate fully with each other in exchanging such information and providing such assistance as the other party may reasonably request in connection with the foregoing (including in seeking early termination of any applicable waiting periods under the HSR Act); provided , however , that the foregoing shall not require Seller or any of its Affiliates (including, prior to the Closing, the Transferred Companies) (x) to disclose any information that in the reasonable judgment of Seller or any of its Affiliates (including the Transferred Companies), as the case may be, would result in the disclosure of any trade secrets of third parties or violate any of its contractual obligations or obligations with respect to confidentiality or (y) to disclose any privileged information or confidential competitive information of Seller or any of its Affiliates (including the Transferred

 

-46-


Companies). Notwithstanding the foregoing in this Section 5.4(c) , Buyer’s obligations to notify Seller or any of its Affiliates with respect to communications received from a Taxing Authority, as well as the rights and obligations of the parties to this Agreement with respect to any Tax Contest, shall be governed solely by Article X . Neither party shall be required to comply with any of the foregoing provisions of this Section 5.4(c) to the extent that such compliance would be prohibited by applicable Law. The parties further covenant and agree not to extend any waiting period associated with any Governmental Approval or enter into any agreement with any Governmental Entity not to consummate the transactions contemplated by this Agreement, except with the prior written consent of the other party hereto.

(d) Seller and Buyer shall use their reasonable best efforts to obtain any other consents and approvals and make any other notifications that may be required in connection with the transactions contemplated by the Transaction Agreements; provided , however , that: (i) Seller shall not be required to commence or participate in litigation or offer or grant any accommodation to any third party to obtain any such consent or approval; (ii) Buyer and Seller shall use commercially reasonable efforts to minimize the costs of any consents or approvals and, subject to the last sentence of Section 5.4(b) , shall share equally in the costs of any such consents or approvals; (iii) notwithstanding the foregoing, Seller shall have no financial obligation for “kill fees” or other penalties arising from the early termination of any agreement (or portion thereof) arising from the change in the conduct of the business of the Transferred Companies at and after Closing; and (iv) for purposes of this Section 5.4(d) , Seller shall not be required to take any action with respect to any third party unless the taking of such action is required in order to satisfy any of the conditions set forth in Sections 7.1  or 7.2 and such condition has not been waived by Buyer.

SECTION 5.5. Access to Books and Records .

(a) Until the later of the tenth anniversary of the Closing or such longer period as may be required by any Governmental Entity or requested by Seller in connection with any Litigation Matter (provided that Seller shall give Buyer 30 days’ notice prior to such tenth anniversary of any such request), Buyer and its Affiliates shall afford promptly to Seller and its Affiliates and their respective Representatives access to the books and records, officers, employees, auditors and other advisors of the Transferred Companies relating to periods prior to and including the Closing Date to the extent reasonably required by Seller to enable it and its auditors to prepare (at Seller’s sole cost and expense) an audited consolidated balance sheet of the Company as of the Closing Date prepared in accordance with IFRS and for any other lawful business purpose relating to Seller’s prior ownership of the Transferred Companies, whether or not related to this Agreement, including any claims made by or against Seller or any of its Affiliates, whether involving any Governmental Entity or third party (including, in respect to the Litigation Matters set forth in Section 9.1(a) of the Disclosure Schedule and any other Litigation Matters described below (collectively, the “ Seller Litigation Matters ”), disputes, compliance, financial reporting (including financial audits of historical information), regulatory, Tax and accounting matters; provided , however , that access to books and records relating to Taxes shall be governed exclusively by Section 10.6 . Seller and its Affiliates may retain copies of all information and records relating to the Seller Litigation Matters, to the extent reasonably necessary as determined by Seller in its sole discretion. Buyer and its Affiliates (including the Transferred Companies after the Closing Date) and their Representatives and counsel will use

 

-47-


commercially reasonable efforts to neither dispose of nor destroy any of the books and records delivered to Buyer in connection with the Closing or the Seller Litigation Matters without first offering to turn over possession thereof to Seller, by written notice to Seller to the extent practicable at least 30 days prior to the proposed date of such disposition or destruction. Buyer shall, and shall cause the Transferred Companies to, implement an internal process to ensure the deletion of all data relating to Seller or its Affiliates from any computers, hard drives or other similar electronic devices prior to disposing of any such device, and such internal process shall conform in all material respects to the internal process currently in place at the Transferred Companies for deletion of data prior to disposition of such devices; provided , however , for the avoidance of doubt, that such deletion shall be made only after assurance that any such data relating to Seller or its Affiliates is retained by the Buyer or the Transferred Companies.

(b) From and after the Closing Date, Buyer shall reasonably cooperate (and shall cause the Transferred Companies to cooperate) with Seller in the defense or prosecution of any Litigation Matter whether instituted or threatened before or after the Closing Date against, by or on behalf of Seller, including any Litigation Matters against Seller’s Affiliates, officers, directors, or employees, relating to or arising out of the conduct of the business of Seller or any of its Affiliates prior to or after the Closing Date (including without limitation the Seller Litigation Matters, and other than litigation among Seller and Buyer and/or their Affiliates arising out of the transactions contemplated by this Agreement). Cooperation in connection with any such Litigation Matters shall include making any employee or former employee of the Seller or any of its Affiliates employed by a Transferred Company or Buyer available (upon reasonable notice and without unreasonably interfering with his or her professional obligations); to meet with Seller and its Affiliates and Representatives, regarding any matters in which he or she has been involved; to help Seller prepare for any proceeding (including, without limitation, depositions, consultation, discovery or trial); to provide truthful affidavits; and to assist with any audit, inspection, proceeding, investigation or other inquiry. Seller shall reimburse Buyer for any reasonable documented expenses incurred in providing such cooperation. For purposes of this Section 5.5 , “ Litigation Matter ” means any litigation, compliant, hearing, indictment, settlement, audit, claim, action, suit or proceeding, demand, grievance, citation, summons, subpoena, charge, inquiry, arbitral action, governmental inquiry, criminal prosecution or other investigation.

SECTION 5.6. Public Announcements . No party to this Agreement or any Affiliate or Representative of such party shall issue or cause the publication of any press release or public announcement or otherwise communicate with any news media in respect of this Agreement or the transactions contemplated by this Agreement without the prior written consent of the other party (which consent shall not be unreasonably withheld, conditioned or delayed), except as may be required by Law or applicable securities exchange rules, in which the case the party required to publish such press release or public announcement shall allow the other party a reasonable opportunity to comment on such press release or public announcement in advance of such publication. Prior to the Closing, neither of the parties to this Agreement, nor any of their respective Affiliates or Representatives, shall make any disclosure concerning plans or intentions relating to the customers, agents or employees of, or other Persons with significant business relationships with, the Transferred Companies (including any of the Producers) without first obtaining the prior written approval of the other party, which approval will not be unreasonably withheld, conditioned or delayed.

 

-48-


SECTION 5.7. Intercompany Obligations and Arrangements .

(a) Seller shall, and shall cause its Affiliates to, take such action and make such payments as may be necessary so that concurrently with the Closing, the Transferred Companies, on the one hand, and Seller and its Affiliates (other than the Transferred Companies), on the other hand, shall settle, discharge, offset, pay, repay in full, terminate or extinguish all intercompany loans, notes, and advances regardless of their maturity and all intercompany receivables and payables for the amount due, including any accrued and unpaid interest to but excluding the date of payment; provided , however , that this Section 5.7(a) shall not apply to any intercompany loans, notes, advances, receivables or payables (i) listed in Section 5.7(a) of the Disclosure Schedule, (ii) arising under any Intercompany Agreement set forth in Section 5.7(b) or Section 5.7(c) of the Disclosure Schedule, or (iii) arising under any Insurance Contract.

(b) Seller shall, and shall cause its Affiliates to, take such actions as may be necessary to terminate, concurrently with the Closing Date, all Intercompany Agreements; provided , however , that this Section 5.7(b) shall not apply to (i) any Intercompany Agreement set forth in Section 5.7(b) or Section 5.7(c) of the Disclosure Schedule or (ii) any Insurance Contract.

(c) Seller shall, and shall cause its Affiliates to, take such actions as may be necessary, concurrently with the Closing, to amend those Intercompany Agreements as identified and as set forth in Section 5.7(c) of the Disclosure Schedule.

SECTION 5.8. Use of Names .

(a) Buyer acknowledges and agrees that, except as provided herein or in the Ancillary Agreements, Buyer is not purchasing, acquiring or otherwise obtaining any right, title or interest in or to any Intellectual Property owned or licensed by Seller or any of its Affiliates (other than the Transferred Companies) including any Trademark of Seller or any of its Affiliates (other than the Transferred Companies) or any Trademark based upon such a Trademark, including those set forth in Section 5.8(a) of the Disclosure Schedule (collectively, the “ Seller Trademarks ”). Prior to or at the Closing, each of the Transferred Companies shall transfer to Seller or as Seller may direct any and all right, title or interest, including all associated goodwill, which any of the Transferred Companies may have in or to any of the Seller Trademarks. At Closing, Seller or an Affiliate of Seller shall enter into the Trademark License Agreement with Buyer for use of the Seller Trademarks by the Transferred Companies solely in the Transferred Companies’ existing businesses in the United States for the applicable period set forth in Section 5.8(c) , and, except as otherwise expressly provided in this Section 5.8 or in the Trademark License Agreement, neither Buyer nor any of its Affiliates shall have any rights in or to any of the Seller Trademarks. Neither Buyer nor any of the Transferred Companies shall seek to register any Trademark that is a derivation, translation, adaptation, combination or variation of any Seller Trademark or confusingly similar to a Seller Trademark.

(b) In the case where approval is not necessary from a Governmental Entity to change the name of a Transferred Company, at the Closing (or as soon thereafter as permitted under applicable Law), Buyer shall execute, or shall cause the execution of, such amended

 

-49-


organizational documents with respect to each Transferred Company such that such Transferred Company can effect a change in its name to a name not containing any of the Seller Trademarks. Promptly and in no event later than 10 Business Days after the Closing, Buyer shall cause the applicable Transferred Company to file such amended organizational documents (or to the extent not previously executed in order to comply with applicable Law, a final unexecuted copy of such documents) with the applicable Governmental Entity and take all other necessary action to fulfill its obligations set forth in this Section 5.8(b) . In the case where approval is necessary from a Governmental Entity to change the name of a Transferred Company or change any Trademark appearing on materials used in the Business, no later than 10 Business Days after the Closing (unless a longer period of time is required by applicable Law), Buyer shall promptly make or cause to be made the appropriate filing with the applicable Governmental Entity such that the applicable Transferred Company can effect a change in its name to a name not containing any of the Seller Trademarks or to remove any Seller Trademarks from any materials used in the Business and take all other necessary action to fulfill its obligations set forth in this Section 5.8(b) . Any new corporate name selected by Buyer pursuant to this Section 5.8(b) and any new Trademarks used on materials used in the Business shall comply with all applicable Laws.

(c) The term of the Trademark License Agreement shall not exceed 150 days from the Closing Date, except with respect to any name or material of the Transferred Companies used in the Business containing Seller Trademarks for which approval from a Government Entity is required to change the name or remove the Seller Trademark, in which case the term shall be extended solely for use of such name or material until 10 days following receipt of the applicable approval from the applicable Government Entity. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Section 5.8 , Buyer shall use commercially reasonable efforts to cause all of the Transferred Companies to cease using all Seller Trademarks as soon as practicable following the Closing. Upon the expiration of the term of the Trademark License Agreement as to any licensee, such licensee shall cease all use of the Seller Trademarks.

(d) Buyer, on behalf of itself and its Affiliates, agrees that irreparable damage would occur if this Section 5.8 were not performed in accordance with its specific terms or were otherwise breached. It is accordingly agreed that, without the necessity of posting bond or other undertaking to the extent permitted under applicable Law, Seller (or its successors or assigns) shall be entitled to proceed against Buyer and its Affiliates in law and/or in equity for such damages or other relief as a court may deem appropriate and shall be entitled to seek a temporary restraining order and/or preliminary and final injunctive or other equitable relief, including specific performance, to prevent breaches of this Section 5.8 . In the event that any Action is brought in equity to enforce the provisions of this Section 5.8 , no party hereto shall allege, and each party hereto hereby waives the defense or counterclaim, that there is an adequate remedy at law.

SECTION 5.9. Directors . Seller shall deliver to Buyer written resignations of the directors of the Transferred Companies listed in Section 5.9 of the Disclosure Schedule, such resignations to become effective upon the Closing.

 

-50-


SECTION 5.10. Contact with Customers, Employees, Etc . Prior to the Closing, each of Buyer and Seller shall, and shall cause its respective Affiliates and its and such Affiliates’ respective Representatives to, contact and communicate with the employees, consultants, customers, suppliers and distributors of the Transferred Companies regarding or in connection with the transactions contemplated hereby only after submitting any proposed communication to Seller or Buyer, as applicable, for its review and approval, which approval shall not be unreasonably withheld or delayed, except to the extent that such communication is substantially consistent with communications previously approved by Seller or Buyer, as applicable. After the Closing, Seller shall not, and shall cause its Affiliates and its and such Affiliates’ respective Representatives not to, contact and communicate with the employees, consultants, customers, suppliers and distributors of the Transferred Companies regarding or in connection with the transactions contemplated hereby, unless such contact or communication is first approved by Buyer.

SECTION 5.11. Confidentiality .

(a) The terms of the confidentiality agreement, dated September 28, 2009 (the “ Confidentiality Agreement ”), among Seller, Harbinger Capital Partners Master Fund I, Ltd., Harbinger Capital Partners Special Situations Fund, L.P., Credit Distressed Blue Line Master Fund, Ltd. and Global Opportunities Breakaway Ltd. are incorporated into this Agreement by reference and shall continue in full force and effect until the earlier to occur of the Closing Date and the date on which this Agreement is terminated in accordance with Section 11.1 . If, for any reason, the transactions contemplated by this Agreement are not consummated, the Confidentiality Agreement shall nonetheless continue in full force and effect in accordance with its terms.

(b) From and after the Closing, Seller and its Affiliates, on the one hand, and Buyer and its Affiliates (including the Transferred Companies), on the other hand, shall, and shall cause their respective Representatives to, maintain in confidence any written, oral or other information relating to or obtained from the other party or its Affiliates (including with respect to Buyer following the Closing, the Transferred Companies), except that the foregoing requirements of this Section 5.11(b) shall not apply to the extent that (i) any such information is or becomes generally available to the public other than (A) in the case of Buyer, as a result of disclosure by Seller or its Affiliates or any of their respective Representatives and (B) in the case of Seller, as a result of disclosure by Buyer or any of the Transferred Companies or any of their respective Affiliates, or any of their respective Representatives, (ii) any such information is required by applicable Law, Governmental Order or a Governmental Entity to be disclosed after prior notice has been given to the other party (including any report, statement, testimony or other submission to such Governmental Entity), (iii) any such information is reasonably necessary to be disclosed in connection with any Action or in any dispute with respect to the Transaction Agreements (including in response to any summons, subpoena or other legal process or formal or informal investigative demand issued to the disclosing party in the course of any litigation, investigation or administrative proceeding), (iv) any such information was or becomes available to such party on a non-confidential basis and from a source (other than a party to this Agreement or any Affiliate or Representative of such party) that is not bound by a confidentiality agreement with respect to such information or (v) any such information that after the Closing becomes known or available pursuant to or as a result of the carrying out of the provisions of an Ancillary Agreement (which information shall be governed by the confidentiality provisions set forth in such Ancillary Agreement). Each of the parties hereto shall instruct its Affiliates and Representatives having access to such information of such obligation of confidentiality.

 

-51-


(c) Notwithstanding anything in this Agreement to the contrary, the parties acknowledge and agree that Seller and its Affiliates and Buyer and its Affiliates may share any information relating to or obtained from Buyer and its Affiliates (including, after the Closing, the Transferred Companies) or Seller and its Affiliates, as applicable, with (i) any insurance regulatory authority or (ii) the IRS or any other Taxing Authority as Seller or Buyer, as applicable, deems necessary or advisable in its good faith judgment.

SECTION 5.12. D&O Liabilities . From and after the Closing Date, Buyer shall not, and shall cause the Transferred Companies not to, take any steps that would reasonably be expected to affect adversely the rights of any individual who served as a director or officer of any of the Transferred Companies at any time prior to the Closing Date (each, a “ D&O Indemnified Person ”) to be indemnified, either under Delaware Law or other applicable Law or the organizational documents of the Transferred Companies as they existed prior to the Closing Date, against any costs or expenses (including attorneys’ fees and expenses of investigation, defense and ongoing monitoring), judgments, penalties, fines, losses, charges, demands, actions, suits, proceedings, settlements, assessments, deficiencies, Taxes, interest, obligations, damages, liabilities or amounts paid in settlement incurred in connection with any claim, whether civil, criminal, administrative or investigative, arising out of or pertaining to matters existing or occurring at or prior to the Closing Date and relating to the fact that the D&O Indemnified Person was a director or officer of a Transferred Company, whether asserted or claimed prior to, at or after the Closing Date.

SECTION 5.13. Amendment of Tax Returns . After the Closing, Seller shall at Buyer’s request cause Old Mutual (US) Holdings Inc. and OMFLIC to file amended Tax Returns for the years 2008 and 2009, respectively, in a form reasonably satisfactory to Buyer, which amended Tax Returns shall reduce the amount of reserves determined under Section 807(d)(1) of the Code in connection with the 2008 CARVM Treaty (and any successor agreements) to the statutory reserve limit prescribed by the flush language of Section 807(d)(1) of the Code. If Buyer has requested Seller to cause amended Tax Returns to be filed pursuant to this Section 5.13 , notwithstanding any other provision of this Agreement, (i) OMFLIC’s Tax Returns for the year 2010 and the portion of any taxable year ending on or before the Closing Date shall be prepared and filed or amended and filed on a similar basis, (ii) Buyer shall be responsible for and indemnify the Seller Indemnitees against all Taxes and Losses that Seller would not have incurred, regardless of the taxable period to which such Taxes and Losses relate, but for the reduction of reserves and the amending of such Tax Returns (or the filing of Tax Returns for the year 2010 and the portion of any taxable year ending on or before the Closing Date on a similar basis) made pursuant to this Section 5.13 , and (iii) Buyer shall pay to Seller the amount of Taxes shown as due on such amended Tax Returns prior to the filing thereof and Seller shall cause such Taxes to be remitted to the appropriate Taxing Authority on the date such Tax Returns are filed; provided that the amount of Taxes and Losses for which Buyer shall be responsible and from and against which Buyer shall be required to indemnify and hold harmless the Seller Indemnitees pursuant to this Section 5.13 shall not exceed $20,000,000 with respect to Taxes and Losses that do not directly and exclusively result from such reduction in the amount of reserves and amendment of Tax Returns (or filing of Tax Returns for the year 2010 and the

 

-52-


portion of any taxable year ending on or before the Closing Date on a similar basis) pursuant to this Section 5.13 (for example, Taxes payable because of adjustments to Tax Returns unrelated to the reduction in the reserves), it being understood for the avoidance of doubt that the foregoing limitation shall not apply with respect to Taxes and Losses that directly and exclusively result from such reduction and amendment or filing. Seller makes no representation or warranty as to the Tax effect of or Tax treatment of or relating to the reduction of reserves and amendments made pursuant to this Section 5.13 and shall have no liability to Buyer or any of its Affiliates with respect thereto.

SECTION 5.14. Reserve Facility; CARVM Facility .

(a) Seller shall use its reasonable best efforts to consummate or cause to be consummated a reserve funding transaction immediately after the Closing substantially on the terms described in the term sheet (the “ Reserve Facility Term Sheet ”) set forth as Exhibit J (with such changes as may be required by applicable Governmental Entities, the “ Reserve Facility ”), with respect to (A) the term life and universal life portions of the Business specifically identified to be reinsured as provided in the Reserve Facility Term Sheet and (B) up to $200,000,000 of redundant reserves in respect of additional benefits under riders to life insurance policies, other than guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit riders, in the event that OMFLIC is required to increase its reserves with respect to such riders prior to December 31, 2012 (the “ Additional Benefits Reserves ”, and, collectively with such term life and universal life portions of the Business, the “ Financed Business ”). If Seller is unable to cause the Reserve Facility to be consummated, Seller shall immediately after the Closing provide or cause to be provided an alternative facility through existing or replacement letters of credit or other financing sponsored by Seller or an Affiliate of Seller (an “ Alternative Facility ”) that would enable OMFLIC to take full credit on its statutory financial statements (assuming OMFLIC’s statutory reserves are determined in accordance with the same methodologies that were used by OMFLIC immediately prior to the Closing in determining statutory reserves, consistently applied) for all Financed Business. If OMFLIC is required to increase the Additional Benefits Reserves after the establishment of the Reserve Facility or such Alternative Facility but prior to December 31, 2012, Seller shall promptly thereafter amend the Reserve Facility or such Alternative Facility to include such Additional Benefits Reserves or implement a new Alternative Facility so that OMFLIC can take credit on its statutory financial statements for the amount of such Additional Benefits Reserves. Seller shall make or cause to be made available the Reserve Facility or, if the Reserve Facility is not consummated or is terminated prior to December 31, 2012, any Alternative Facility established under this Section 5.14 and perform its and its Affiliates’ covenants and agreements under the Reserve Facility and any such Alternative Facility until the earliest to occur of: (i) replacement of the Reserve Facility and, to the extent funded, any such Alternative Facility by a facility that enables OMFLIC to take full credit on its statutory financial statements for all Financed Business; (ii) December 31, 2012; and (iii) the occurrence of a Non-Qualifying Change of Control. Buyer shall, or shall cause its Affiliates (including the Transferred Companies) to, pay a facility fee equal to 150 basis points, calculated on a per annum basis, multiplied by the outstanding amount of letters of credit (and/or other lender-provided security) maintained under the terms of the Reserve Facility and, to the extent funded, any Alternative Facility in accordance with the terms of the Reserve Facility and such Alternative Facility. Without limiting any other obligation of Buyer hereunder, Buyer shall reasonably cooperate with Seller to finalize as expeditiously as possible the Collateralization Model contemplated by the Reimbursement Agreement (as defined in the Reserve Facility Term Sheet) to be entered into in connection with the consummation of the Reserve Facility.

 

-53-


(b) As soon as practicable, but in any event no later than December 31, 2012, Buyer shall replace the Reserve Facility and, to the extent funded, any Alternative Facility with a facility that enables OMFLIC to take full credit on its statutory financial statements for all Financed Business (a “ Replacement Facility ”). If Buyer fails timely to obtain a Replacement Facility, Seller may, at its sole option, continue to make the Reserve Facility and, to the extent funded, the Alternative Facility available for successive three month periods until December 31, 2015 for a facility fee equal to the Stepped-Up Facility Fee. If Seller elects to make the Reserve Facility and, to the extent funded, the Alternative Facility available as described in the preceding sentence, the Seller will be deemed to have waived the failure of Buyer to timely obtain a Replacement Facility until the end of the applicable three month period in which Seller elects to cease making the Reserve Facility and, to the extent funded, the Alternative Facility available, until December 31, 2015 at which time Buyer shall automatically be deemed to be in default if a Replacement Facility has not been obtained. On the earlier of December 31, 2012 and the date that the Reserve Facility or Alternative Facility is replaced, Buyer shall pay to Seller by Wire Transfer the amount of any collateral posted by Seller or any of its Affiliates under the Reserve Facility or any Alternative Facility, and interest on such amount as set forth in Section 2.7 .

(c) Seller shall support or cause an Affiliate of Seller to support ceded annuity reserves through existing or replacement letters of credit or other financing sponsored by Seller or such Affiliate (the “ CARVM Facility ”) that enable OMFLIC to take full credit on its statutory financial statements (assuming OMFLIC’s statutory reserves are determined in accordance with the same methodologies that were used by OMFLIC immediately prior to the Closing in determining statutory reserves, consistently applied) for the annuity portion of the Business reinsured by OM Re from OMFLIC under the 2008 CARVM Treaty (the “ CARVM Business ”) until the earliest to occur of: (i) replacement of the CARVM Facility by a facility or facilities that enable OMFLIC to take full credit on its statutory financial statements for all CARVM Business; (ii) December 31, 2015; and (iii) the occurrence of a Non-Qualifying Change of Control. Buyer shall pay to Seller by Wire Transfer, quarterly in arrears on the last Business Day of each calendar quarter until the CARVM Facility is terminated or all obligations of Seller thereunder have been fully satisfied, a facility fee equal to 250 basis points, calculated on a per annum basis, multiplied by the outstanding amount of letters of credit (and/or other lender-provided security) maintained under the terms of the CARVM Facility.

(d) As soon as practicable but in any event not later than December 31, 2015, Buyer shall replace the CARVM Facility with a facility that enables OMFLIC to take full credit on its statutory financial statements for all CARVM Business. On the earlier of December 31, 2015 and the date that the CARVM Facility is replaced, Buyer shall pay to Seller by Wire Transfer the amount of any collateral posted by Seller or an Affiliate of Seller under the CARVM Facility, and interest on such amount as set forth in Section 2.7 .

(e) Buyer shall, and shall cause its Affiliates (including the Transferred Companies) to, perform its and their covenants and agreements under the Reserve Facility, any Alternative Facility and the CARVM Facility.

 

-54-


(f) As soon as practicable after the Closing, Buyer and Seller shall use their reasonable best efforts to cause the OM Re Reinsurance Agreement Amendments to become effective and the OM Re Recapture Transaction to be consummated.

(g) With respect to the transactions described in this Section 5.14 that are to be consummated after the Closing by Buyer or any of its Affiliates (including any of the Transferred Companies), Buyer shall, and shall cause such Affiliates to, timely consummate such transactions in accordance with this Section 5.14 .

SECTION 5.15. Deed of Novation . At the Closing, Seller and Buyer shall enter into the Deed of Novation, pursuant to which Seller will assign and transfer the Intercompany Loan Agreements, and all of Seller’s rights (including its right to the repayment of outstanding principal and accrued and unpaid interest thereon) and obligations thereunder, to Buyer, and Buyer will accept such assignment of rights and assume such obligations.

SECTION 5.16. Excluded Assets . Prior to the Closing Seller shall, or shall cause its Affiliates to, sell, liquidate or otherwise dispose of all of the Excluded Assets so that at the Closing, none of the Transferred Companies owns any of the Excluded Assets.

SECTION 5.17. Structuring Fee Tax Benefit . Buyer shall, or shall cause OMFLIC to, pay by Wire Transfer to Seller an amount equal to the net present value of the Tax benefits realized or reasonably expected to be realized by OMFLIC (calculated in accordance with the principles of Section 10.1(e) ) in connection with OMFLIC’s payment of the structuring fee in connection with the consummation of the Reserve Facility or an Alternative Facility, such payment to be made within 10 days of the date the Tax Return on which such Tax benefits are claimed is filed.

SECTION 5.18. Capitalization of Captive .

(a) In connection with the closing of the Reserve Facility or an Alternative Facility, Seller shall, or shall cause an Affiliate of Seller to, contribute an amount equal to the greater of (i) $95,000,000 and (ii) 300% of the Captive’s Company Action Level Risk-Based Capital (as defined in the Reserve Facility Term Sheet) (the “ Contribution Amount ”) to the capital of the Captive in exchange for Captive Securities. Thereafter, Buyer shall, or shall cause one of its Affiliates to, from time to time, contribute additional amounts to the capital of the Captive to the extent necessary to maintain the Captive’s Modified Total Adjusted Capital (as defined in the Reserve Facility Term Sheet) at not less than the greater of (i) $95,000,000 and (ii) 300% of the Captive’s Company Action Level Risk-Based Capital (as defined in the Reserve Facility Term Sheet). The Buyer shall, and shall cause OMFLIC and, if applicable, any of its Affiliates to, treat for U.S. federal income Tax purposes any such contribution to the capital of the Captive as a contribution of cash by Buyer through OMFLIC and, if applicable, any of its Affiliates.

(b) Upon the earlier to occur of December 31, 2012 and the date on which Buyer replaces the Reserve Facility and, to the extent implemented, the Alternative Facility, with a Replacement Facility pursuant to Section 5.14(b) (the “ Replacement Date ”), Buyer shall pay or cause to be paid to Seller by Wire Transfer an amount equal to the Contribution Amount in

 

-55-


exchange for the Captive Securities, which Seller shall deliver to Buyer or one of its Affiliates in accordance with the directions of Buyer. If Buyer fails timely to pay or cause to be paid such amount in full to Seller, Seller may, at its option, (i) declare an Event of Default (as defined in the Guarantee and Pledge Agreement) under the Guarantee and Pledge Agreement and pursue any applicable remedies thereunder, or (ii) extend the date by which such amounts shall be required to be paid to Seller for successive three month periods, provided that interest on any unpaid amount shall accrue at a rate equal to the Stepped-Up Facility Fee from the Replacement Date to the date such amounts, together with interest thereon, are paid in full. If Seller elects to extend the date by which such amounts shall be required to be paid to Seller as described in clause (ii) of the preceding sentence, Seller will be deemed to have waived the failure of Buyer to timely distribute to Seller an amount equal to the Contribution Amount in exchange for the Captive Securities until such date as Seller elects to cease extending the date by which such amounts shall be required to be paid to Seller.

SECTION 5.19. Surplus Note Purchase Contracts . If, between the Closing Date and June 30, 2012, the Maryland Insurance Administration causes, or the independent auditors of OMFLIC’s Statutory Statements require, OMFLIC to change the methodology used to determine the amount of capital it is required to hold for the risk of losses due to changes in interest rate levels for fixed indexed annuity contracts (the “ Methodology Change ”) in-force as of the Closing Date and the Methodology Change causes OMFLIC’s risk-based capital requirement to increase as measured against OMFLIC’s risk-based capital requirement calculated without giving effect to the Methodology Change, Seller shall purchase from OMFLIC surplus notes having an aggregate principal amount equal to the greater of (a) $0.00 and (b) the lesser of (i) $75,000,000 and (ii) the dollar amount calculated as the excess of (x) OMFLIC’s risk-based capital requirement calculated giving effect to the Methodology Change over (y) OMFLIC’s risk-based capital requirement calculated without giving effect to the Methodology Change. Such surplus notes shall: (A) have a five year term; (B) bear interest at the rate of 5% per annum; (C) comply with applicable requirements of the Maryland Insurance Administration; and (D) otherwise be on customary terms. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Seller shall not have any obligation to purchase such surplus notes if KPMG is not responsible for preparing OMFLIC’s audited statutory financial statements for the years ended and as of December 31, 2010 and December 31, 2011, unless Buyer and its Affiliates have used their reasonable best efforts to engage KPMG as outside auditor of OMFLIC’s statutory financial statements and KPMG has declined to serve in such capacity.

SECTION 5.20. Pre-Closing Sale of Certain Investment Assets . Seller shall consider in good faith any commercially reasonable written request by Buyer that, prior to the Closing, Seller cause the applicable Insurance Subsidiary to sell any Investment Asset that has a rating below NAIC 2, Baa3 from Moody’s or BBB- from S&P or is a structured security in order to take advantage of favorable market conditions and to substitute for each such Investment Asset either cash or a replacement Investment Asset designated by Buyer that (a) does not have a an NAIC, Moody’s or S&P rating that is lower than that of the Investment Asset proposed to be sold and (b) has a duration or term to maturity that is no more than twelve months longer or shorter than that of the Investment Asset proposed to be sold. Seller shall cause the applicable Insurance Subsidiary to effect any such requested sale and replacement unless Seller reasonably determines that such sale and replacement would have an adverse effect on Seller or such Insurance Subsidiary, provided that Seller shall have no obligation to consider or give effect to

 

-56-


any such sale and replacement request if the Investment Assets requested to be sold pursuant to such request, together with Investment Assets previously sold pursuant to this Section 5.20 , had an aggregate statutory book value as of June 30, 2010 of $300,000,000 or more. Notwithstanding anything in this Agreement to the contrary, to the extent that any sale effected at the request of Buyer pursuant to this Section 5.20 would, but for this sentence, result in an adjustment to the Base Purchase Price pursuant to Article II , such adjustment shall not be given effect, and the effect on capital (including Statutory Capital and Risk-Based Capital) of, or any gain or loss resulting from, any such sale will be disregarded for all purposes of Article II .

SECTION 5.21. Front Street Reinsurance Transaction .

(a) As promptly as practicable following the Amendment and Restatement Date, Buyer shall withdraw, or shall cause to be withdrawn, as appropriate, the draft Form D filing that was made by or on behalf of Buyer with the Maryland Insurance Administration with respect to the Reinsurance Transaction on or around September 17, 2010. Following the Amendment and Restatement Date, Buyer shall not, and shall cause its Affiliates not to, seek review by, or consent, advice or feedback from, the Maryland Insurance Administration or any other Governmental Entity of the Reinsurance Transaction or any aspect thereof until after the Closing.

(b) As promptly as practicable following the Closing, Buyer shall cause definitive documentation for a reinsurance transaction between OMFLIC and Front Street Re Ltd. (“ Front Street ”), substantially on the terms set forth in the term sheet attached hereto as Exhibit K (the “ Reinsurance Transaction Term Sheet ,” and such transaction, the “ Reinsurance Transaction ”), to be prepared in accordance with the terms and conditions set forth in the Reinsurance Transaction Term Sheet and, except as contemplated in Section 5.21(f)(i) , to contain no term or condition that (i) is inconsistent therewith in any respect that would have an adverse economic effect on Seller, or (ii) is inconsistent therewith in any material respect unless (in the case of the preceding clause (ii)), following written notice from Buyer to Seller that Buyer proposes to include in such definitive documentation terms or conditions that are inconsistent in a material respect with the Reinsurance Transaction Term Sheet, Seller reasonably determines that such proposed terms or conditions would not make receipt of any required Governmental Approval materially less likely. Buyer shall give Seller a reasonable opportunity to review and provide comments on such documentation prior to the submission of such documentation to any Governmental Entity.

(c) Following the Closing, Buyer shall as promptly as practicable make, and cause its applicable Affiliates to make, all filings and notifications with all Governmental Entities that may be or may become reasonably necessary, proper or advisable under applicable Laws to consummate and make effective the Reinsurance Transaction, including Buyer causing a “Form D” or other application to be filed in each jurisdiction where required by applicable insurance Laws in connection with the Reinsurance Transaction (including in connection with any proposed appointment by OMFLIC of Harbinger Capital Partners as investment manager for a portion of the assets in the Funds Withheld Account). Buyer shall commit in such filings to capitalize Front Street with at least $80,000,000 at or before the closing of the Reinsurance Transaction. Buyer shall have responsibility for the filing fees associated with its “Forms D” or other applications in connection with the Reinsurance Transaction.

 

-57-


(d) Following the Closing, Buyer shall, and shall cause its Affiliates, including OMFLIC to, use reasonable best efforts to obtain as promptly as practicable all Governmental Approvals that are necessary under applicable Law to consummate and make effective the Reinsurance Transaction. Buyer shall, and shall cause its Affiliates to, take all reasonable actions as may be requested by any such Governmental Entities to obtain as promptly as practicable after the Closing all such Governmental Approvals. The parties shall cooperate with the reasonable requests of each other in seeking such Governmental Approvals as promptly as practicable after the Closing. Neither Seller nor Buyer shall take or cause to be taken any action that it is aware or reasonably should be aware would have the effect of materially delaying, impairing or impeding the receipt of any such Governmental Approvals of the Reinsurance Transaction following the Closing. In the event that a Governmental Entity requires that the terms of the Reinsurance Transaction be changed or altered in a manner that materially and adversely affects the economic benefits reasonably expected to be derived by Buyer thereunder, each of Buyer and Seller shall use its reasonable best efforts and cooperate and negotiate in good faith to agree to alternative terms that are acceptable to such Governmental Entity and provide benefits substantially similar to the benefits provided under the existing terms thereof (“ Remedial Efforts ”); provided that neither party shall have an obligation to so negotiate in good faith such alternative terms for a period of more than 150 days; provided , further , that in the event Buyer reasonably believes that, even with the use of Remedial Efforts, any required Governmental Approval would be highly unlikely to be obtained or, if obtained, would be highly likely to impose an Adverse Reinsurance Transaction Condition or Restriction, Buyer may request Seller’s consent to shorten or eliminate the 150-day period for conducting Remedial Efforts and Seller shall consider such request in good faith. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Agreement, Buyer shall not be required to take any action under this Agreement pursuant to, or otherwise agree to or accept, any Adverse Reinsurance Transaction Condition or Restriction. “ Adverse Reinsurance Transaction Condition or Restriction ” means any condition or restriction imposed by a Governmental Entity: (A) that is not customarily imposed in transactions of the type contemplated by the terms of the Reinsurance Transaction; (B) that requires the taking of any action, including the inclusion in the definitive documentation for the Reinsurance Transaction of any terms or conditions that are in substance inconsistent with the substantive terms set forth in the Reinsurance Transaction Term Sheet, that would adversely affect in any material respect the economic benefits reasonably expected to be derived by Buyer in connection with the Reinsurance Transaction; (C) that restricts, precludes or conditions the appointment by Front Street (or OMFLIC, if applicable) of Harbinger Capital Partners as investment manager of assets to be deposited into the Trust Account or the Funds Withheld Account as contemplated in the Reinsurance Transaction Term Sheet with an aggregate value of at least $750,000,000 or restricts, prohibits or conditions the payment by Front Street to Harbinger Capital Partners of Harbinger Capital Partner’s customary compensation; or (D) that requires any substantive change to the investment guidelines applicable to the assets in the Trust Account or Funds Withheld Account as set forth in the Reinsurance Transaction Term Sheet.

(e) Subject to applicable Law relating to the sharing of information, Buyer shall promptly notify Seller of any communication it or any of its Affiliates receives from any Governmental Entity relating to the matters that are the subject of the Reinsurance Transaction, permit counsel for Seller to review in advance, and consider in good faith the views of Seller in connection with, any proposed written communication to any Governmental Entity in connection with the transactions contemplated by the Reinsurance Transaction, and provide Buyer with

 

-58-


copies of all correspondence, filings or communications between Buyer or its Affiliates or any of its or their Representatives, on the one hand, and any Governmental Entity or members of the staff of any Governmental Entity, on the other hand, subject to Section 5.2 ; except that, in the event any Governmental Entity requires or requests Buyer or any Affiliate of Buyer to provide, or in the event that any Governmental Approval involves Buyer providing Buyer’s Protected Information, Buyer shall have no obligation to provide to Seller, and Seller shall have no right to review, such Buyer’s Protected Information, Seller shall not seek Buyer’s Protected Information from any such Governmental Entity, and in the event any Governmental Entity were to share such information with Seller, Seller agrees upon discovering this fact, to cease reading any Buyer’s Protected Information, not to disclose such information to any third party, and to return it (otherwise unread) to Buyer. Subject to applicable Law, Buyer shall have the right to file Buyer’s Protected Information separately from other correspondence, filings or communications, or to redact Buyer’s Protected Information from such documents prior to sharing them with Seller. Buyer shall not, and shall cause its Affiliates to not, participate or agree to participate in any meeting with any Governmental Entity relating to the matters that are the subject of the Reinsurance Transaction unless it consults with Seller in advance and, to the extent permitted by such Governmental Entity, gives Seller the opportunity to attend and participate at such meeting (other than any such meeting or portion thereof that is devoted to Buyer’s Protected Information). Subject to the Confidentiality Agreement, Section 5.2 and Section 5.11 and the provisions above regarding Buyer’s Protected Information, Seller and Buyer shall coordinate and cooperate fully with each other in exchanging information and providing assistance as the other party may reasonably request in connection with the foregoing; provided , however , that the foregoing shall not require Seller or any of its Affiliates (x) to disclose any information that in the reasonable judgment of Seller or any of its Affiliates, as the case may be, would result in the disclosure of any trade secrets of third parties or violate any of its contractual obligations or obligations with respect to confidentiality or (y) to disclose any privileged information or confidential competitive information of Seller or any of its Affiliates. Neither party shall be required to comply with any of the foregoing provisions of this Section 5.21(e) to the extent that such compliance would be prohibited by applicable Law. Buyer further covenants and agrees not to extend any waiting period associated with any Governmental Approval for the Reinsurance Transaction or enter into any agreement with any Governmental Entity not to consummate the transactions contemplated by the Reinsurance Transaction, except with the prior written consent of Seller.

(f) The Purchase Price as finally determined in accordance with Article II is subject to reduction following the Closing Date as described below (the “ Post-Closing PP Reduction ”).

(i) If the Reinsurance Transaction or a substantially similar transaction with Front Street or another Affiliate of Buyer is approved by the Maryland Insurance Administration on or before the second anniversary of the Closing Date, the Post-Closing PP Reduction will be determined by comparing the Target AUM (defined below) with the value of assets in the reserve credit trust (the “ Trust Account ”) and the funds withheld account (the “ Funds Withheld Account ”) to be established as part of the Reinsurance Transaction that the Maryland Insurance Administration permits be managed by Harbinger Capital Partners at the time of the closing of such transaction (the “ Permitted AUM ”). If the Target AUM exceeds the Permitted AUM, the Post-Closing

 

-59-


PP Reduction shall be equal to the lesser of (x) $50,000,000 and (y) the product of (A) the dollar amount of such excess and (B) 0.20. For the avoidance of doubt, if the Target AUM is equal to or less than the Permitted AUM, there shall be no Post-Closing PP Reduction. The “ Target AUM ” shall be an amount equal to $1,000,000,000; provided , however , that in the event that Buyer or its Affiliates seek approval from the Maryland Insurance Administration to deposit any assets into the Trust Account that do not meet each of the requirements of the Reinsurance Transaction Term Sheet for permissible trust assets (any assets not meeting each of such requirements, the “ Alternative Assets ”), the Target AUM shall be reduced by the market value of Alternative Assets so sought to be deposited into the Trust Account at the closing of the reinsurance transaction that are not approved by the Maryland Insurance Administration. For the avoidance of doubt, the Reinsurance Transaction Term Sheet requires that the assets in the Trust Account be limited to assets meeting each of the following three requirements: (1) such assets are of the types which qualify as admitted assets under the laws of Maryland (disregarding any rating, duration or concentration limits contained therein to the extent applicable); (2) such assets are SVO listed; and (3) such assets are “ Trust Account Eligible Assets ” under the Trust Agreement Investment Guidelines. For the avoidance of doubt, the “Form D” filing or filings to be made by Buyer or its Affiliates in connection with the Reinsurance Transaction shall contemplate that Harbinger Capital Partners will manage assets in the Trust Account and Funds Withheld Account at the time of the closing of such transaction that have an aggregate value equal to $1,000,000,000.

(ii) If (A) the Reinsurance Transaction or a substantially similar transaction with Front Street or another Affiliate of Buyer is (1) disapproved in writing by the Maryland Insurance Administration, (2) not approved by the Maryland Insurance Administration on or before the date that is the second anniversary of the Closing Date, or (3) approved by the Maryland Insurance Administration, but such approval imposes any Adverse Reinsurance Transaction Condition or Restrictions, and (B) with respect to each of the preceding sub-clauses (1), (2) and (3), Buyer has performed its obligations under Section 5.21(d) with respect to Remedial Efforts, and Buyer is otherwise in compliance with each of its material obligations to seek such approval as set forth above in this Section 5.21 , the Post-Closing PP Reduction shall equal $50,000,000; provided , however , that if the Maryland Insurance Administration indicates to Buyer or any of its Affiliates in writing, by telephone or in a meeting that one of the reasons for the failure of the Reinsurance Transaction or a substantially similar transaction with Front Street or another Affiliate of Buyer to be so approved is the request by Buyer or its Affiliates to deposit Alternative Assets into the Trust Account, there shall be no Post-Closing PP Reduction.

(iii) Promptly following Buyer’s determination of the Post-Closing PP Reduction, if any, Buyer shall prepare and deliver to Seller a written notice containing: (a) the basis for the Post-Closing PP Reduction and supporting evidence thereof, including copies of Buyer’s or its Affiliates’ Form D filing, all correspondence between Buyer or its Affiliates and the Maryland Insurance Administration and any approval or disapproval order from the Maryland Insurance Administration in respect of the Reinsurance Transaction; (b) Buyer’s good faith calculation of the Post-Closing PP

 

-60-


Reduction setting forth in reasonable detail each of the components of such calculation; and (c) the work papers used by Buyer in preparing such calculation (collectively, “ Buyer’s PP Reduction Materials ”). Buyer shall also provide to Seller such additional information and documentation related to the Reinsurance Transaction and Buyer’s calculation of the Post-Closing PP Reduction as Seller may reasonably request. If Seller agrees with Buyer’s determination of the Post-Closing PP Reduction, Seller shall pay the amount of the Post-Closing PP Reduction to Buyer within 45 days following receipt by Seller of Buyer’s PP Reduction Materials and such additional information and documentation requested by Seller. If Seller disagrees with Buyer’s calculation of the Post-Closing PP Reduction, the parties shall resolve such disagreement in accordance with Section 12.7 . For the avoidance of doubt, Buyer shall be entitled to deliver to Seller its calculation of the Post-Closing PP Reduction at any time following the earlier to occur of (a) receipt of a written order of the Maryland Insurance Administration with regard to the Reinsurance Transaction and the exhaustion by Buyer of its obligations to seek approval of the Reinsurance Transaction as set forth above in this Section 5.21 , including its obligations under Section 5.21(d) with respect to Remedial Efforts and (b) the second anniversary of the Closing.

SECTION 5.22. Amendment of 2008 CARVM Treaty .

(a) If Seller reasonably determines that it is necessary or appropriate that the 2008 CARVM Treaty be amended in order to facilitate the replacement or refinancing of the CARVM Facility in effect as of the Amendment and Restatement Date, Buyer shall not withhold, delay or condition its consent to such amendment to the extent such amendment would not reasonably be expected to have a material and adverse economic effect on OMFLIC.

(b) If, after the Closing, Seller reasonably determines that it is necessary or appropriate that the 2008 CARVM Treaty be amended in order to facilitate the replacement or refinancing of the CARVM Facility in effect at the time of such determination and delivers to Buyer a notice that includes the text of any such proposed amendment and requests that Buyer cause OMFLIC to enter into such proposed amendment, Buyer shall cause OMFLIC to enter into such proposed amendment unless such proposed amendment would reasonably be expected to have a material and adverse economic effect on OMFLIC.

SECTION 5.23. Proposed Wilton Reinsurance Transactions .

(a) Between the Amendment and Restatement Date and the Closing Date, Buyer may make any filings with and provide any notifications to any Governmental Entities that may be required to consummate and make effective the reinsurance transactions contemplated by the Wilton Commitment (the “ Proposed Wilton Reinsurance Transactions ”), provided that in connection therewith Buyer informs such Governmental Entities in writing (with a concurrent copy to Seller) that the Reserve Facility will be implemented with respect to the Financed Business at or immediately after the Closing and that all of the Proposed Wilton Reinsurance Transactions are proposed to be implemented after the Closing and that such implementation is in no respect a condition to the Closing. If, at any time prior to the Closing, Seller reasonably determines that Buyer’s request for approval of any Proposed Wilton Reinsurance Transaction is delaying or otherwise adversely affecting the parties’ attempts to

 

-61-


obtain regulatory approvals for the transactions contemplated by this Agreement, Buyer shall, at Seller’s request, promptly withdraw such request and shall not make any new or amended approval requests with respect to any of the Proposed Wilton Reinsurance Transactions until after the Closing, but only to the extent compliance with Seller’s request would not constitute a breach of Buyer’s obligations under the Wilton Commitment. Subject to applicable Law relating to the sharing of information, each of Seller and Buyer shall promptly notify each other of any communication it or any of its Affiliates receives from any Governmental Entity prior to the Closing relating to the Proposed Wilton Reinsurance Transactions, permit counsel for the other party to review in advance, and consider in good faith the views of the other party in connection with, any proposed written communication to any Governmental Entity prior to the Closing in connection with the Proposed Wilton Reinsurance Transactions, and provide each other with copies of all pre-Closing correspondence, filings or communications relating to the Proposed Wilton Reinsurance Transactions between such party or any of its Representatives, on the one hand, and any Governmental Entity or members of the staff of any Governmental Entity, on the other hand, subject to Section 5.2 and Section 5.11 and provided that the limitations with respect to the sharing of Buyer’s Protected Information shall apply, mutatis mutandis , to any information required to be shared by Buyer with Seller pursuant to this Section 5.23(a) . Following the Closing, Buyer shall keep Seller reasonably informed on a regular basis as to the status of all regulatory approvals for the Proposed Wilton Reinsurance Transactions covering the Financed Business to be entered into after the Closing. Buyer shall also provide written notice to Seller of any proposed closing dates for any such transactions and provide such other information relating to such Proposed Wilton Reinsurance Transactions covering the Financed Business as Seller may reasonably request.

(b) Buyer shall timely comply in all material respects with its obligations under, and shall, subject to obtaining any required regulatory approvals, cause OMFLIC timely to enter into the transactions proposed to be entered into by it under, the Wilton Commitment. Buyer shall not agree to any amendment, modification or supplement of, or waive or decline to exercise any right under, the Wilton Commitment, nor shall Buyer assign any of its rights or obligations thereunder, without the prior written consent of Seller (which consent shall not be unreasonably withheld, delayed or conditioned). Buyer shall not agree to the termination of the Wilton Commitment without the prior written consent of Seller (which consent shall not be unreasonably withheld, delayed or conditioned), provided that Buyer may terminate, or cause OMFLIC to terminate, the Wilton Commitment or any of the Proposed Wilton Reinsurance Transactions upon a breach thereof by Wilton Re U.S. Holdings, Inc. or any of its affiliates who are parties thereto, if, as of the date of such termination, Buyer has entered into a binding agreement providing for a Replacement Facility which binding agreement is not materially less advantageous to Seller than the Wilton Commitment, including from the standpoint of the conditions precedent to the effectiveness of such Replacement Facility, whether such Replacement Facility will enable a replacement of the Reserve Facility as required pursuant to Section 5.14(b) , and whether such Replacement Facility will enable payment of the Contribution Amount pursuant to Section 5.18(b) . Notwithstanding the foregoing, Buyer’s obligations under this Section 5.23(b) shall terminate upon the replacement of the Reserve Facility in accordance with Section 5.14(b) and shall apply only to the terms and conditions of the Wilton Commitment and the Proposed Wilton Reinsurance Transactions to the extent applicable to the reinsurance of the Financed Business.

 

-62-


(c) Prior to the Closing, Seller shall reasonably cooperate, and cause OMFLIC to reasonably cooperate, (i) in the preparation and delivery of any notices, certificates and other documents or instruments required to be delivered by Buyer or OMFLIC pursuant to the Wilton Commitment prior to the closing of any of the Proposed Wilton Reinsurance Transactions and (ii) in connection with any filings or notifications to any Governmental Entities that may be required to consummate and make effective the Proposed Wilton Reinsurance Transactions. Seller shall not request of any such Governmental Entity that such Governmental Entity decline to grant any Governmental Approvals of the Proposed Wilton Reinsurance Transactions. Subject to the Confidentiality Agreement, Section 5.2 and Section 5.11 , Seller and Buyer shall coordinate and reasonably cooperate with each other in exchanging information and providing assistance as the other party may reasonably request in connection with the foregoing; provided , however , that the foregoing shall not require Seller or any of its Affiliates (x) to disclose any information that in the reasonable judgment of Seller or any of its Affiliates, as the case may be, would result in the disclosure of any trade secrets of third parties or violate any of its contractual obligations or obligations with respect to confidentiality or (y) to disclose any privileged information or confidential competitive information of Seller or any of its Affiliates. Neither party shall be required to comply with any of the foregoing provisions of this Section 5.23(c) to the extent that such compliance would be prohibited by applicable Law. Buyer shall reimburse Seller for any reasonable and documented out-of-pocket fees and expenses (including reasonable attorneys’ and other advisers’ fees and expenses) incurred by Seller after the Amendment and Restatement Date in connection with the cooperation contemplated in this Section 5.23(c) . For the avoidance of doubt, if the Closing occurs, Buyer shall not be required to reimburse Seller for any fees or expenses incurred by OMFLIC.

ARTICLE VI

EMPLOYEE MATTERS

SECTION 6.1. Employee Matters .

(a) The name of each Employee shall be set forth in Section 6.1 of the Disclosure Schedule.

(b) For a period of at least twelve (12) months after the Closing Date (the “ Transition Period ”), Buyer shall (i) either (A) assume and maintain for the benefit of the Employees the Company Benefit Plans at the compensation and benefit levels in effect on the date of this Agreement or (B) provide or cause to be provided to the Employees compensation and benefits pursuant to plans, agreements and arrangements of Buyer and its Affiliates (the “ Buyer Benefit Plans ”) that, taken as a whole, have a value that is not less favorable in the aggregate than the compensation and benefits provided to such Employees under the Company Benefit Plans immediately prior to the Closing Date, (ii) provide that each Employee shall receive base compensation at a rate not less than such Employee’s base compensation as in effect immediately prior to the Closing Date, and (iii) provide that each Employee shall be eligible for total incentive compensation opportunities that are no less favorable in the aggregate than the total incentive compensation opportunities provided to such Employee by Seller and its Affiliates immediately prior to the Closing Date and which shall include benefits equivalent to the benefits provided to the Employees under the Employee Incentive Plan, the Sales Incentive Plan, the

 

-63-


Transaction Incentive Award Program, the Key Person Incentive Retention Program, and the Success Bonus, as applicable to each Employee. Notwithstanding the foregoing, in all events, (I) Buyer shall assume and maintain the tax-qualified defined contribution plan maintained by the Company (“ Company Savings Plan ”) and any and all obligations thereunder or with respect to the sponsorship of such Company Savings Plan; (II) Buyer shall not be required to maintain a separate tax-qualified defined contribution plan for the benefit of the Employees; and (III) following the Closing, Buyer shall not take any action, or fail to take any action, which could result in any liability or obligation to Seller with respect to Company Savings Plan for the period commencing on the Closing Date. Subject to the foregoing, nothing herein is intended to limit the right of Buyer or the Transferred Companies (x) to terminate the employment of any Employee at any time, (y) to change or modify any incentive compensation or employee benefit plan or arrangement at any time and in any manner, or (z) to change or modify the terms or conditions of employment for any of their employees.

(c) To the extent Company Benefit Plans are not assumed and maintained in accordance with Section 6.1(b)(i)(A) , effective as of the Closing Date, each Employee shall be eligible to participate in the Buyer Benefit Plans on the same basis, including with respect to eligibility, and service and coverage rules, as such Employee’s participation in comparable Company Benefit Plans immediately prior to the Closing Date. With respect to the Buyer Benefit Plans, for purposes of determining eligibility to participate, level of benefits, vesting and vacation or paid time-off entitlement, but not for purposes of determining benefit accruals or early retirement subsidies under any defined benefit pension plan of Buyer or its Affiliates, each Employee’s service with the Transferred Companies (as well as service with any predecessor employer of the Transferred Companies, to the extent service with the predecessor employer is recognized by the Company Benefit Plans immediately prior to the Closing Date) shall be treated as service with Buyer or any of its Subsidiaries; provided , however , that such service need not be recognized to the extent that such recognition would result in any duplication of benefits earned under any Company Benefit Plan and any comparable Buyer Benefit Plan.

(d) Buyer shall cause the Transferred Companies to recognize and provide all accrued but unused vacation, sick pay and paid time off of the Employees as of the Closing Date; provided , however , that vacation, sick days and paid time off accrued (including vacation, sick days and paid time off carried over from prior years to the limit of the policies of the Transferred Companies) but not taken for the period beginning on January 1, 2010 and ending on the Closing Date shall not be forfeited under the Transferred Companies’ existing policy but shall be recognized by the Transferred Companies as of the Closing Date. Notwithstanding the foregoing, in the event that Seller or one of its Affiliates is required under applicable Law to make a payment in settlement of accrued vacation or paid time off of an Employee, Buyer shall reimburse and hold harmless Seller and its Affiliates for such payment.

(e) To the extent Company Benefit Plans are not assumed and maintained in accordance with Section 6.1(b)(i)(A) , Buyer shall waive, or cause to be waived, any pre-existing condition limitations, exclusions, actively at work requirements and waiting periods under Buyer Benefit Plan that is a welfare benefit plan in which Employees (and their eligible dependents) will be eligible to participate from and after the Closing Date, except to the extent that such preexisting condition limitations, exclusions, actively-at-work requirements and waiting periods would not have been satisfied or waived under the comparable Company Benefit Plan

 

-64-


immediately prior to the Closing Date. Buyer shall recognize, or cause to be recognized, the dollar amount of all co-payments, deductibles and similar expenses incurred by each Employee (and his or her eligible dependents) during the calendar year in which the Closing Date occurs (or if later, the plan year in which such Employee and his or her eligible dependents are put into a different plan) for purposes of satisfying such year’s deductible and co-payment limitations under the relevant welfare benefit plans in which they will be eligible to participate from and after the Closing Date.

(f) Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this Section 6.1 or otherwise, (i) the unpaid amount of each Employee’s annual incentive bonus under the Employee Incentive Plan and the Sales Incentive Plan for calendar year 2010 and, if the Closing Date occurs later than December 31, 2010, the ratable portion of the unpaid amount of each Employee’s annual incentive bonus under the Employee Incentive Plan and the Sales Incentive Plan for calendar year 2011 with respect to the period in 2011 up to the Closing Date, (ii) the unpaid amount due to each Employee under the Key Person Incentive Retention Program, (iii) the unpaid amount of the Success Bonus, (iv) the obligation for each participating Employee under the Non-Qualified Deferred Compensation Plan on the Closing Date (the “ Deferred Amount ”), and (v) the vested amount held for the benefit of each independent agent under the Power Agent Incentive Reward Plan (the “ PAIR Amount ”), shall be treated as a liability on the financial statements used to calculate the purchase price adjustment in accordance with the provisions of Sections 2.8 and 2.9 by the Transferred Companies, reduced by the Compensation Tax Benefit. On the Closing Date, Seller shall notify Buyer in writing of the amount that shall be paid to each Employee under the preceding clauses (i), (ii) and (iii) (the “ Annual Bonus ”) and the timing of payment in accordance with the terms of the applicable Company Benefit Plan. Buyer shall, or shall cause the Transferred Companies to, pay to each Employee (x) the Annual Bonus as set forth by Seller, (y) the Deferred Amount in accordance with the terms of the Non-Qualified Deferred Compensation Plan, and (z) the PAIR Amount in accordance with the terms of the Power Agent Incentive Reward Plan, and Buyer shall be solely responsible for any liability related to the Annual Bonus, the Deferred Amount or the PAIR Amount. “ Compensation Tax Benefit ” means the net present value of the Tax benefits realized or reasonably expected to be realized by Buyer, any of its Affiliates, or any of the Transferred Companies (calculated in accordance with the principles of Section 10.1(e) ) resulting from the actual payments made by Buyer, its Affiliates or the Transferred Companies pursuant to paragraph (f) or (g) of Section 6.1 .

(g) Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this Section 6.1 or otherwise, (x) on the Closing Date, Seller shall pay to Buyer, or at the direction of Buyer to the Transferred Companies, an amount equal to (i) the sum of the value of benefits due under the Old Mutual plc Share Reward Plan to participating Employees (in kind or in cash) and the first payment due to participating Employees under the Transaction Incentive Award Program (the “ Closing Bonus ”), reduced by (ii) the Compensation Tax Benefit, (y) upon the earlier of the date of the first anniversary of the Closing Date, and a date within 30 days of a participating Employee’s termination of employment with a Transferred Company for any reason other than Cause (as defined in the Transaction Incentive Award Program), Seller shall pay to Buyer an amount equal to (i) the second payment due to participating Employees under the Transaction Incentive Award Program (the “ Anniversary Bonus ”), reduced by (ii) the Compensation Tax Benefit, and (z) in Seller’s sole and absolute discretion, on the date of the first anniversary of the Closing Date, Seller shall pay to Buyer (i) an additional amount which in the aggregate with any prior

 

-65-


payments made under the Transaction Incentive Award Program to a participating Employee shall not exceed 150% of such participating Employee’s base salary as of the Closing Date (the “ Discretionary Bonus ”), reduced by (ii) the Compensation Tax Benefit. On the Closing Date, Seller shall notify Buyer in writing of the Closing Bonus that shall be paid to each Employee and on the date of the first anniversary of the Closing Date, Seller shall notify Buyer in writing of the Anniversary Bonus and the Discretionary Bonus, if any, that shall be paid to each Employee; provided that if a participating Employee’s employment with a Transferred Company terminates for any reason other than Cause prior to the Closing Date, Buyer shall notify Seller in writing within 10 days of such termination and Seller shall notify Buyer in writing within 10 days of receipt of such notice of the Anniversary Bonus that shall be paid to such terminated Employee. Buyer shall, or shall cause the Transferred Companies to, pay to each Employee the Closing Bonus, the Anniversary Bonus and the Discretionary Bonus, as disclosed in writing by Seller in accordance with this Section 6.1(g) , and Buyer shall be solely responsible for any liability related to the Closing Bonus, the Anniversary Bonus and the Discretionary Bonus.

(h) Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this Section 6.1 or otherwise, from and after the Closing Date, Buyer shall assume, honor and continue during the Transition Period or, if later, until all obligations thereunder have been satisfied, all of the Transferred Companies’ employment, incentive compensation, severance, retention, termination and change in control plans, policies, programs, agreements or arrangements (including with respect to any payments, benefits or rights arising as a result of the transactions contemplated by this Agreement (either alone or in combination with any other event)) listed as such in Section 3.9(a) of the Disclosure Schedule (the “ Company Severance Arrangements ”), in accordance with their respective terms without any amendment or modification, other than any amendment or modification required to comply with applicable Law and other than any amendment or modification made by the Transferred Companies pursuant to this Agreement effective at or prior to the Closing Date. For the avoidance of doubt, if an Employee’s employment is terminated within the time limits prescribed under an applicable Company Severance Arrangement as such time limits relate to the transactions contemplated by this Agreement, and under circumstances in which such Employee would be entitled to receive payments or benefits under such Company Severance Arrangement, the severance payments and benefits paid or made available to such Employee shall be no less favorable than those payments and benefits to which such Employee would have been entitled under the applicable Company Severance Arrangement as in effect immediately prior to the Closing Date (determined in a manner consistent with past practice prior to the Closing Date). From and after the Closing Date, neither Seller nor any of its Affiliates shall retain any responsibility for such payment obligations, regardless of when such amounts were earned or accrued.

(i) Buyer shall be responsible for providing the continuation of group health coverage required under by Section 4980B(f) of the Code to any Employees (and such Employees’ qualified beneficiaries) whose “qualifying event” within the meaning of Section 4980B(f) of the Code occurs before, on or after the Closing Date.

(j) Without limiting the generality of Section 9.1 , this Section 6.1 shall be binding upon and inure solely to the benefit of each of the parties to this Agreement, and nothing in this Section 6.1 , expressed or implied, is intended to confer upon any other person any rights or remedies of any nature whatsoever under or by reason of this Section 6.1 and no provision of

 

66


this Section 6.1 will create any third party beneficiary rights in any current or former employee, officer, director or individual independent contractor or agent of the Transferred Companies in respect of continued employment (or resumed employment) or service or any other matter.

ARTICLE VII

CONDITIONS PRECEDENT

SECTION 7.1. Conditions to Each Party’s Obligations . The respective obligations of each party to consummate the transactions contemplated by this Agreement are subject to the satisfaction or waiver on or prior to the Closing Date of the following conditions:

(a) Governmental Consents . All filings required to be made prior to the Closing Date with, and all consents, approvals, permits and authorizations required to be obtained prior thereto from, Governmental Entities, including those set forth in Sections 3.5 and 4.3 of the Disclosure Schedule, in connection with the consummation of the transactions contemplated by the Transaction Agreements shall have been made or obtained and shall be in full force and effect without the imposition on such party of any Negative Condition or Restriction. “ Negative Condition or Restriction ” means: (A) as to Buyer any condition or restriction imposed by a Governmental Entity: (1) that is not customarily imposed in transactions of the type contemplated by the Transaction Agreements; (2) that requires the taking of any action, including any amendment of any Transaction Agreement, that would materially adversely affect the economic benefits reasonably expected to be derived by Buyer under the Transaction Agreements and in connection with the consummation of the transactions contemplated thereunder, taken as a whole; (3) that materially adversely affects the ability of the Transferred Companies to conduct the Business in the same manner as the Business is currently being conducted; (4) that would have a Company Material Adverse Effect; or (5) that would require Buyer to make a capital contribution to either of the Insurance Subsidiaries other than as a result of the submission of a business plan by Buyer which contemplates increased writings by such Insurance Subsidiary or would result in a lowering of the risk based capital of such Insurance Subsidiary; and (B) as to Seller, any condition or restriction imposed by a Governmental Entity (1) that is not customarily imposed in transactions of the type contemplated by the Transaction Agreements or (2) that requires the taking of any action, including any amendment of any Transaction Agreement, that would materially and adversely affect the economic benefits reasonably expected to be derived by Seller and the Transaction Agreements and in connection with the continuation of the transactions contemplated thereunder, taken as a whole.

(b) HSR Act . The waiting period (and any extension thereof) applicable to the transactions contemplated hereby under the HSR Act shall have been terminated or shall have otherwise expired.

(c) No Injunctions or Restraints . No temporary restraining order, preliminary or permanent injunction or other order issued by any court of competent jurisdiction and no statute, rule or regulation of any Governmental Entity preventing the consummation of the purchase and sale of the Shares or any of the other transactions contemplated hereby shall be in effect; provided , however , that the party invoking this condition shall have used all reasonable efforts to have any such order or injunction vacated.

 

-67-


SECTION 7.2. Conditions to Obligations of Buyer . The obligations of Buyer to consummate the transactions contemplated by this Agreement are further subject to the satisfaction (or waiver by Buyer) on or prior to the Closing Date of the following conditions:

(a) Representations and Warranties . The representations and warranties of Seller in this Agreement shall be true and correct (without regard to any qualifications or references to “Company Material Adverse Effect,” “material” or other materiality qualifications or references contained in any specific representation or warranty) as of the Closing Date as though made on and as of the Closing Date (other than representations and warranties made as of another stated date, which representations and warranties shall have been true as of such date), except for those failures of such representations and warranties to be so true and correct that, individually or in the aggregate, have not had and would not reasonably be expected to have a Company Material Adverse Effect and except for any failure of the representations and warranties set forth in Section 3.3(d) , Section 3.9(g) or the last sentence of Section 3.9(b) to be so true and correct ( provided that this exception shall in no way limit the rights of any Buyer Indemnitee to indemnification pursuant to Article IX hereof with respect to any failure of the representations and warranties set forth in Section 3.3(d) , Section 3.9(g) or the last sentence of Section 3.9(b) to be so true and correct). Buyer shall have received a certificate signed on behalf of Seller by an executive officer of Seller to the effect set forth in this paragraph.

(b) Performance of Obligations of Seller . Seller shall have performed in all material respects all obligations required to be performed by it under this Agreement on or prior to the Closing Date, and Buyer shall have received a certificate signed on behalf of Seller by an executive officer of Seller to such effect.

(c) No Company MAE . There shall not have occurred since the date hereof and be continuing a Company Material Adverse Effect and Buyer shall have received a certificate signed on behalf of Seller by an executive officer of Seller to such effect.

(d) Ancillary Agreements . Seller shall have executed and delivered each of the Ancillary Agreements to which it is a party and shall have caused each applicable Affiliate of Seller to execute and deliver each of the Ancillary Agreements to which such Affiliate of Seller is a party.

SECTION 7.3. Conditions to Obligations of Seller . The obligations of Seller to consummate the transactions contemplated by this Agreement are further subject to the satisfaction (or waiver by Seller) on or prior to the Closing Date of the following conditions:

(a) Representations and Warranties . The representations and warranties of Buyer in this Agreement shall be true and correct (without regard to any qualifications or references to “Buyer Material Adverse Effect,” “material” or other materiality qualifications or references contained in any specific representation or warranty) as of the Closing Date as though made on and as of the Closing Date (other than representations and warranties made as of another stated date, which representations and warranties shall have been true as of such date),

 

-68-


except for those failures of such representations and warranties to be so true and correct that, individually or in the aggregate, have not had and would not reasonably be expected to have a Buyer Material Adverse Effect. Seller shall have received a certificate signed on behalf of Buyer by an executive officer of Buyer to the effect set forth in this paragraph.

(b) Performance of Obligations of Buyer . Buyer shall have performed in all material respects all obligations required to be performed by it under this Agreement on or prior to the Closing Date, and Seller shall have received a certificate signed on behalf of Buyer by an executive officer of Buyer to such effect.

(c) Ancillary Agreements . Buyer shall have executed and delivered each of the Ancillary Agreements to which it is a party and shall have caused each applicable Affiliate of Buyer to execute and deliver each of the Ancillary Agreements to which such Affiliate of Buyer is a party.

(d) Guaranty . The Guaranty shall be in full force and effect and the Investor shall have available to it all funds necessary for the performance of its obligations thereunder.

ARTICLE VIII

SURVIVAL OF REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES AND COVENANTS

SECTION 8.1. Survival of Representations and Warranties . All representations and warranties contained in this Agreement shall survive the Closing solely for purposes of Sections 9.1(a) and 9.1(b) and, subject to representations related to pending matters as described in Section 9.2(c) , shall terminate and expire at the close of business on the date that is 16 months after the Closing Date, at which time they will terminate (and no claims may be made for indemnification under Sections 9.1(a) and 9.1(b) thereafter); provided that (a) the representations and warranties contained in Sections 3.1 (Organization and Authority of Seller), the first sentence of 3.2 (Organization, Authority and Qualification of the Transferred Companies), and 3.3(a) and (b)  (Capital Structure) and 3.16 (Brokers), 4.1 (Incorporation and Authority of Buyer), 4.4 (Securities Laws Matters), 4.7 (Brokers) and 4.8 (Investigation) shall survive indefinitely or until the latest date permitted by applicable Law, and (b) the representations and warranties contained in Section 3.10 (Taxes) shall terminate and expire in accordance with the terms of Section 10.7(b) .

SECTION 8.2. Survival of Covenants . The covenants and agreements that by their terms apply or are to be performed in whole or in part after the Closing shall survive for the period provided in such covenants and agreements, if any, or until fully performed, and the covenants and agreements that by their terms apply or are to be performed in their entirety on or prior to the Closing shall terminate upon the later of the Closing and their performance in their entirety.

 

-69-


ARTICLE IX

INDEMNIFICATION

SECTION 9.1. Obligation to Indemnify .

(a) Subject to the expiration of the representations and warranties of Seller as provided in Article VIII and the limitations set forth in this Article IX , Seller agrees to indemnify and hold harmless each of Buyer, its Affiliates (including, after the Closing, the Transferred Companies), and their respective officers, directors, employees, partners, managers, agents, advisers and representatives (collectively, the “ Buyer Indemnitees ”) from and against all Losses to the extent arising from or related to:

(i) any breach of the representations and warranties of Seller contained in Article III of this Agreement (determined, for purposes of this Section 9.1(a) , without regard to any qualifications or references to “Company Material Adverse Effect,” “material,” or any other materiality qualifications or references contained in any specific representation or warranty);

(ii) any breach of any of the covenants and agreements of Seller contained in this Agreement;

(iii) any of the Actions listed in Section 9.1(a) of the Disclosure Schedule (the “ Specified Actions ”);

(iv) any administrative, civil or judicial civil or criminal enforcement proceeding brought by the United States Department of Justice, the SEC, any state attorney general or the New York State Insurance Department or the Maryland Insurance Administration (but not including any routine or periodic examinations or similar investigations) against any Transferred Company after the Closing that arises solely out of facts or circumstances that existed prior to the Closing (an “ Enforcement Proceeding ”);

(v) any lawsuit against any Transferred Company that (x) is filed after the Closing but that arises solely out of facts or circumstances that existed prior to the Closing and (y) constitutes a material “loss contingency” within the meaning of Statement of Financial Accounting Standards Codification Topic 450 in effect as of the date hereof and would be required to be disclosed in the consolidated financial statements of the Company if such financial statements were prepared in accordance with United States Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (a “ Subsequent Action ”); or

(vi) any inaccuracy in any representation or warranty, or breach of any covenant, made by Seller or any of its Affiliates to Nomura Bank International plc under the definitive agreements for the Reserve Facility or to the applicable counterparties under the definitive agreements for an Alternative Facility that is entered into because Seller is unable to consummate the Reserve Facility, other than (x) any such inaccuracy in a representation or warranty made by a Transferred Company to the extent such inaccuracy results from or arises out of facts and circumstances arising after the Closing,

 

-70-


(y) any such breach of a covenant by a Transferred Company to the extent such breach first occurs when such Transferred Company is not an Affiliate of Seller and (z) any Losses to the extent caused by Buyer or any of its Affiliates (including, after the Closing, the Transferred Companies).

The preceding clauses (i) through (vi) are subject to the following qualifications and limitations:

(A) Seller shall not have any liability under Section 9.1(a)(i) unless the aggregate of all Losses for which Seller would, but for this subclause (A), be liable, exceeds on a cumulative basis $1,875,000 (the “ Indemnification Basket ”), and then only to the extent of any such excess.

(B) Seller shall not have any liability under Section 9.1(a)(i) for any individual items where the Loss relating thereto is less than $100,000 (it being understood that substantially similar claims may be aggregated for purposes of this proviso).

(C) In any event, the maximum amount for which Seller shall be liable in the aggregate under Section 9.1(a)(i) shall not exceed $54,000,000 (the “ Indemnification Cap ”).

(D) Seller will be liable for no more than 80% of any Losses that, but for this subclause (D), would be indemnifiable under clause (iv) or clause (v) of this Section 9.1(a) .

(E) Any claim for indemnification by a Buyer Indemnitee with respect to any Enforcement Proceeding or Subsequent Action must be made prior to the date that is the third anniversary of the Closing Date, after which date no Buyer Indemnitee shall have any right to indemnification in respect of any Enforcement Proceeding or Subsequent Action (other than to the extent of any claims in respect thereof made prior to such date in accordance with the procedures set forth in Section 9.2 ).

(F) Seller will be liable for Losses with respect to any Specified Action only to the extent such Losses exceed the reserves and accruals with respect to such Specified Action on the Final Actual Closing Balance Sheet.

(G) Seller shall not have any liability under Section 9.1(a)(i) with respect to the inaccuracy or breach of the representations and warranties set forth in Section 3.3(d) if Actual Statutory Capital as finally determined pursuant to Section 2.8 is at least $902,000,000.

Notwithstanding the foregoing, none of the foregoing limitations shall apply with respect to any breach of Section 3.3(a) or (b)  or Section 3.9(f)(v) .

(b) Subject to the expiration of the representations and warranties of Buyer as provided in Article VIII and the limitations set forth in this Article IX , Buyer agrees to indemnify and hold harmless each of Seller, its Affiliates, and their respective officers, directors, employees, agents, advisers and representatives (collectively, the “ Seller Indemnitees ”) from and against all Losses to the extent arising from or related to (i) any breach of the representations and

 

-71-


warranties of Buyer contained in Article IV of this Agreement (determined, for purposes of this Section 9.1(b) , without regard to any qualifications or references to “Buyer Material Adverse Effect,” “material,” or any other materiality qualifications or references contained in any specific representation or warranty), (ii) any breach of any of the covenants and agreements of Buyer contained in this Agreement that survive the Closing or (iii) the provision by Seller or any of its Affiliates of the CARVM Facility and the Reserve Facility and any Alternative Facility, in each case, including with respect to any obligation to post collateral, reimburse for a draw on a letter of credit or contribute capital, except to the extent such Losses were caused by Seller; provided , however , that Buyer shall not have any liability under clause (i) above unless the aggregate of all Losses for which Buyer would, but for this proviso, be liable, exceeds on a cumulative basis an amount equal to the Indemnification Basket, and then only to the extent of any such excess; provided , further , that Buyer shall not have any liability under clause (i) above for any individual items where the Loss relating thereto is less than $100,000 (it being understood that substantially similar claims may be aggregated for purposes of this proviso). In any event, the maximum amount for which Buyer shall be liable in the aggregate under Section 9.1(b)(i) shall not exceed the Indemnification Cap.

SECTION 9.2. Indemnification Procedures; Certain Limitations .

(a) In order for a Buyer Indemnitee or a Seller Indemnitee (the “ Indemnified Party ”) to be entitled to any indemnification provided for under this Agreement in respect of, arising out of or involving a claim or demand made by, or an action, proceeding or investigation instituted by, any Person (whether or not a party to this Agreement) (an “ Indemnity Claim ”), such Indemnified Party must notify the party obligated to indemnify such Indemnified Party (the “ Indemnifying Party ”) in writing, and in reasonable detail, of the Indemnity Claim promptly, and in any event within 15 calendar days, after such Indemnified Party learns of the Indemnity Claim; provided , however , that failure to give such notification shall not affect the indemnification provided hereunder unless the Indemnifying Party shall have been prejudiced as a result of such failure. Such written notice, in order to be effective, shall (i) describe such Indemnity Claim in as much detail as is reasonably practicable, including all sections of this Agreement which form the basis for such claim; (ii) attach copies of all material written evidence thereof to the date of such notice to the extent reasonably necessary to enable the Indemnifying Party to assess the Indemnity Claim; and (iii) set forth the estimated amount of the Losses that have been or may be sustained by an Indemnified Party. Thereafter, the Indemnified Party shall deliver to the Indemnifying Party, within five calendar days after the Indemnified Party’s receipt thereof, copies of all notices and documents (including court papers) received by the Indemnified Party relating to the Indemnity Claim; provided , however , that failure to give such notification shall not affect the indemnification provided hereunder unless the Indemnifying Party shall have been prejudiced as a result of such failure.

(b) If an Indemnity Claim is made against an Indemnified Party by a third party (a “ Third Party Claim ”), the Indemnifying Party shall be entitled to participate in the defense thereof and, if it so chooses to assume the defense thereof with counsel selected by the Indemnifying Party. Should the Indemnifying Party so elect to assume the defense of a Third Party Claim, the Indemnifying Party shall not as long as it conducts such defense be liable to the Indemnified Party for legal expenses subsequently incurred by the Indemnified Party in connection with the defense thereof unless the Indemnified Party has available to it one or more

 

-72-


defenses or counterclaims that are inconsistent with one or more defenses or counterclaims that may be made by the Indemnifying Party. If the Indemnifying Party assumes such defense, the Indemnified Party shall have the right to participate in the defense thereof and to employ counsel, at its own expense (or at the Indemnifying Party’s expense, if the Indemnified Party has available to it one or more defenses or counterclaims that are inconsistent with one or more defenses or counterclaims that may be made by the Indemnifying Party), separate from the counsel employed by the Indemnifying Party, it being understood that the Indemnifying Party shall control such defense. The Indemnifying Party shall be liable for the fees and expenses of counsel employed by the Indemnified Party for any period during which the Indemnifying Party has not assumed the defense thereof. If the Indemnifying Party chooses to defend or prosecute any Third Party Claim, all of the parties hereto shall cooperate in the defense or prosecution thereof. Such cooperation shall include the retention and (upon the Indemnifying Party’s request) the provision to the Indemnifying Party of records and information which are relevant to such Third Party Claim, and making employees available on a mutually convenient basis to provide additional information and explanation of any material provided hereunder. Whether or not the Indemnifying Party shall have assumed the defense of a Third Party Claim, the Indemnifying Party shall have no liability with respect to any compromise or settlement of any such claim effected without its prior written consent (such consent not to be unreasonably withheld, delayed or conditioned), and the Indemnifying Party shall not admit any liability with respect to, or pay, settle, compromise or discharge, such Third Party Claim without the Indemnified Party’s prior written consent (which consent shall not be unreasonably withheld, delayed or conditioned); provided , however , that the Indemnifying Party may pay, settle, compromise or discharge any Third Party Claim without the written consent of the Indemnified Party if such settlement (i) includes a complete and unconditional release of the Indemnified Party from all liability in respect of such Third Party Claim, (ii) does not subject the Indemnified Party to any injunctive relief or other equitable remedy and (iii) does not include a statement or admission of fault, culpability or failure to act by or on behalf of the Indemnified Party. If the Indemnifying Party submits to the Indemnified Party a bona fide settlement offer that satisfies the requirements set forth in the proviso of the immediately preceding sentence and the Indemnified Party refuses to consent to such settlement, then thereafter the Indemnifying Party’s liability to the Indemnified Party with respect to such Third Party Claim shall not exceed the settlement amount included in such settlement offer, and the Indemnified Party shall either assume the defense of such Third Party Claim or pay the Indemnifying Party’s attorney’s fees and other out-of-pocket costs incurred thereafter in continuing the defense of such Third Party Claim. Notwithstanding anything else contained herein, Seller shall control the litigation matters referenced in clause (iii) of Section 9.1(a) in accordance with the terms of this Section 9.2(b) .

(c) The indemnities provided in this Agreement shall survive the Closing; provided , however , that the indemnities provided under Sections 9.1(a)(i) and 9.1(b)(i) shall terminate with respect to any representation or warranty when such representation or warranty terminates pursuant to Article VIII , except as to any item as to which the Person to be indemnified shall have, before the expiration of the applicable period, previously made a claim by delivering a notice to the Indemnifying Party meeting the requirements of this Agreement.

(d) Notwithstanding anything contained in this Agreement to the contrary, Losses of an Indemnified Party shall be determined without duplication of any other Loss for which an indemnification claim has been made or could be made under any other representation,

 

-73-


warranty, covenant, or agreement and shall be net of any insurance or other prior or subsequent recoveries (including under or pursuant to any insurance policy, indemnity, reimbursement agreement or contract pursuant to which or under which an Indemnified Party is a party or has rights) actually received by the Indemnified Party in connection with the facts giving rise to the right of indemnification. Each applicable Indemnified Party shall use its commercially reasonable efforts to recover from insurance policies or other applicable sources of recovery the maximum portion of any Losses of such Indemnified Party, but the reasonable costs of such recovery shall be deemed Losses indemnifiable hereunder (without regard to the dollar limits set forth in Section 9.1 ). If the applicable Indemnified Party shall have used its commercially reasonable efforts to recover any amounts recoverable under insurance policies or other applicable sources of recovery and shall not have recovered the applicable Losses, the applicable Indemnifying Party shall be liable for the amount by which such Losses exceeds the amounts actually recovered (subject to the limitations contained in this Article IX ), plus any reasonable costs of recovery (without regard to any such limitations). If the applicable Indemnified Party fails to use commercially reasonable efforts to recover any amounts recoverable under insurance policies or other applicable sources of recovery, the applicable Indemnifying Party shall not be required to indemnify the applicable Indemnified Party for that portion of any Losses that could reasonably be expected to have been recovered had the applicable Indemnified Party used such commercially reasonable efforts.

(e) Any indemnification obligation of an Indemnifying Party shall be subject to and calculated in accordance with the provisions of Section 10.1(e) .

(f) Notwithstanding anything contained herein to the contrary, no Indemnifying Party shall be liable for lost profits or any punitive, exemplary, consequential or similar damages, except for lost profits or punitive, exemplary, consequential or similar damages actually paid to a third party in a Third Party Claim by an Indemnified Party.

(g) The Indemnified Party shall use, and shall cause each of its Affiliates to use, its commercially reasonable efforts to mitigate any Losses upon and after becoming aware of any facts, matters, failures or circumstances that would reasonably be expected to result in any Losses that are indemnifiable hereunder.

(h) In the event of payment by or on behalf of any Indemnifying Party to any Indemnified Party (including pursuant to this Article IX ) in connection with any claim or demand by any Person other than the parties hereto or their respective Affiliates, such Indemnifying Party shall be subrogated to and shall stand in the place of such Indemnified Party as to any events or circumstances in respect of which such Indemnified Party may have any right, defense or claim relating to such claim or demand against any claimant or plaintiff asserting such claim or demand. Such Indemnified Party shall cooperate with such Indemnifying Party in a reasonable manner, and at the cost of such Indemnifying Party, in presenting any subrogated right, defense or claim.

(i) In the event a claim or any Action for indemnification under this Article IX has been finally determined, the amount of such final determination shall be paid (i) if the Indemnified Party is a Buyer Indemnitee, by Seller to the Indemnified Party and (ii) if the Indemnified Party is a Seller Indemnitee, by Buyer to the Indemnified Party, in each case on

 

-74-


demand by Wire Transfer. A claim or an Action, and the liability for and amount of damages therefor, shall be deemed to be “finally determined” for purposes of this Article IX when the parties to this Agreement have so determined by mutual agreement or, if disputed, when a final non-appealable Governmental Order has been entered into with respect to such claim or Action.

(j) Notwithstanding anything contained in this Agreement to the contrary, in the event that any fact, event or circumstance that results in an adjustment to the Base Purchase Price would also constitute a breach of or inaccuracy in any of Seller’s representations, warranties, covenants or agreements under this Agreement, Seller shall have no obligation to indemnify any Buyer Indemnitee with respect to such breach or inaccuracy.

SECTION 9.3. Exclusive Remedies . Each party acknowledges and agrees that: (a) prior to the Closing, other than in the case of intentional breach by Seller or its Affiliates or Representatives, the sole and exclusive remedy of Buyer for any breach or inaccuracy of any representation or warranty contained in this Agreement or any certificate or instrument delivered hereunder shall be, in the event that each of the conditions set forth in Article VII has not been satisfied or waived, refusal to close the purchase and sale of the Shares hereunder; (b) following the Closing, (i) the indemnification provisions of this Article IX and, with respect to Taxes, Article X , shall be the sole and exclusive remedies of the parties for any breach of the representations or warranties in this Agreement, and (ii) notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, no breach of any representation, warranty, covenant or agreement contained herein shall give rise to any right on the part of any party hereto to rescind this Agreement or any of the transactions contemplated hereby; and (c) following the Closing, the indemnification provisions of this Article IX and, with respect to Taxes, Section 5.13 and Article X shall be the sole and exclusive monetary remedies of the parties for any breach of the covenants and agreements contained herein that by their terms apply or are to be performed in whole or in part after the Closing.

SECTION 9.4. Reserves . Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this Agreement or the other Transaction Agreements, Buyer acknowledges and agrees that neither Seller nor any of its Affiliates makes any representation or warranty (express or implied), and nothing contained in this Agreement, any other Transaction Agreements or any other agreement, document or instrument to be delivered in connection with the transactions contemplated hereby or thereby is intended or shall be construed to be a representation or warranty (express or implied) of Seller or any of its Affiliates, for any purpose of this Agreement, the other Transaction Agreements, or any other agreement, document or instrument to be delivered in connection with the transactions contemplated hereby or thereby, with respect to: (a) the adequacy or sufficiency of the Insurance Reserves; (b) whether or not the Insurance Reserves were determined in accordance with any actuarial, statutory or other standard other than SAP as of the date hereof; (c) the effect of the adequacy or sufficiency of the Insurance Reserves on any “line item” or asset, liability or equity amount; or (d) the future experience or profitability arising from the Business or that the Insurance Reserves or the assets supporting such reserves have been or will be adequate or sufficient for the purposes for which they were established or that the reinsurance recoverables taken into account in determining the amount of such reserves will be collectible. Furthermore, Buyer acknowledges and agrees that no fact, condition, development or issue relating to the adequacy or sufficiency of the reserves of any of the Insurance Subsidiaries may be used, directly or indirectly, to demonstrate or support the breach of any representation, warranty, covenant or agreement contained in this Agreement, any other Transaction Agreement, or any other agreement, document or instrument to be delivered in connection with the transactions contemplated hereby and thereby.

 

-75-


ARTICLE X

TAX MATTERS

SECTION 10.1. Tax Indemnity .

(a) Indemnity . Seller agrees to indemnify and hold harmless Buyer and the Transferred Companies against the following Taxes and Losses and, except as otherwise provided in Section 10.4 , against any Tax Contest Expenses: (i) Taxes imposed on or with respect to the Transferred Companies for taxable periods ending on or before the Closing Date; (ii) with respect to taxable periods beginning before the Closing Date and ending after the Closing Date, Taxes imposed on or with respect to the Transferred Companies that are allocable, pursuant to Section 10.1(c) , to the portion of such period ending on the Closing Date; (iii) all liability for Taxes of Seller or any Affiliate of Seller (other than the Transferred Companies) which is or has ever been affiliated with the Transferred Companies, or with whom the Transferred Companies otherwise join or have ever joined in filing any consolidated, combined or unitary Tax Return prior to the Closing Date under Section 1.1502-6 of the Treasury Regulations (or any similar provision of state, local or foreign Law); (iv) any and all Taxes of any Person (other than the Transferred Companies) imposed on the Transferred Companies as a transferee or successor, by contract or pursuant to any law, rule or regulation, which Taxes relate to an event or transaction occurring on or before the Closing Date; (v) any and all Taxes and Losses arising from or related to the breach by Seller (determined without regard to any matters set forth in the Disclosure Schedule) of the representations and warranties provided in Section 3.10(f) ; (vi) in accordance with the terms set forth in Section 10.7(c) , any Taxes and Losses arising from or related to a breach (determined without regard to any matters set forth in the Disclosure Schedule and disregarding any Knowledge qualifiers) of the representations and warranties contained in Sections 3.10(l) and (q) , provided , however , that this Section 10.1(a)(vi) shall not cover any Taxes or Losses unless the relevant representation or warranty would have been breached based on all facts existing as of or before the Closing Date; (vii) all Transfer Taxes allocated to Seller pursuant to Section 10.7(f) ; and (viii) all Taxes for any taxable period attributable to the breach by Seller of any covenant or obligation under Section 5.1(z)(xiv) (except as set forth in Section 5.1 of the Disclosure Schedule) and this Article X ; provided , however , that Seller shall not have an obligation or liability to indemnify Buyer or the Transferred Companies pursuant to this Section 10.1(a) : (w) to the extent of the amount of any reserves, provisions or accruals for Taxes reflected on or otherwise taken into account on the Final Actual Closing Balance Sheet (such reserves, provisions and accruals to be determined in a manner consistent with past practice for determining such reserves, provisions and accruals and shall not reflect any position, election or method that is inconsistent with positions taken, elections made or methods used in prior periods in determining Taxes and preparing the Financial Statements or Statutory Statements (including positions which would have the effect of deferring income to periods for which Buyer is liable or accelerating deductions to periods for which Seller is liable)); (x) for any Taxes that result from any actual or deemed election (if any), other than an election occurring at the written direction of Seller, under Section 338 of the Code

 

-76-


or any similar provisions of state, local or foreign Law as a result of the purchase of the Shares; (y) for any Taxes imposed on the Transferred Companies or for which the Transferred Companies may otherwise be liable as a result of transactions occurring on the Closing Date (not contemplated by the Transaction Agreements) that are properly allocable (based on, among other relevant factors, the factors set forth in Treasury Regulations Section 1.1502-76(b)(1)(ii)(B)) to the day following the Closing Date; and (z) for any Taxes allocated to Buyer under Section 5.13 ((w)-(z) together, the “ Excluded Taxes ”). For the avoidance of doubt, Taxes for any taxable period shall be computed without regard to any carryback item.

(b) Buyer shall be responsible for all Taxes imposed on or with respect to the Transferred Companies and associated Tax Contest Expenses that are not allocated to Seller pursuant to Section 10.1(a) (including all Excluded Taxes).

(c) In the case of Taxes that are payable with respect to a taxable period that begins before the Closing Date and ends after the Closing Date, the portion of any such Tax that is allocable to the portion of the period ending on Closing Date shall be:

(i) in the case of Taxes that are either (x) based upon or related to income, profits, gains or receipts or (y) imposed in connection with any sale, disposal or other transfer or assignment of property (real or personal, tangible or intangible) (other than conveyances pursuant to this Agreement), deemed equal to the amount which would be payable if the taxable year ended on the Closing Date (such amount to be calculated based on reasonable estimates); and

(ii) in the case of Taxes imposed on a periodic basis with respect to the assets of the Transferred Companies, or otherwise measured by the level of any item, deemed to be the amount of such Taxes for the entire period (or, in the case of such Taxes determined on an arrears basis, the amount of such Taxes for the immediately preceding period), multiplied by a fraction the numerator of which is the number of calendar days in the period ending on the Closing Date and the denominator of which is the number of calendar days in the entire period.

(d) Notwithstanding any provision of this Agreement to the contrary, Buyer shall pay to Seller the excess of any reserves for Taxes reflected on or otherwise taken into account on the Final Actual Closing Balance Sheet over the amount of actual Tax liability paid with respect thereto. For these purposes, actual Tax liability shall be equal to the amount of the Tax liability related to such reserves reported on the applicable Tax Return filed for such taxable year. Such payment shall be made within 10 days of such relevant Tax Return having been filed, or in all other cases in which such liability is not reported on a Tax Return filed after the Closing Date, consistent with the provisions of Section 10.5 .

(e) If (i) a Tax Contest, an amendment of a Tax Return or any adjustment to a Tax liability that may be required increases an amount of Tax for which Seller or Buyer is liable pursuant to Section 10.1(a) or (b)  (the “ Tax Indemnifying Party ”) or (ii) an indemnification payment is made pursuant to Article IX , then the amount otherwise due or payable by the Tax Indemnifying Party under this Article X or the Indemnifying Party under Article IX , as the case may be, shall be (A) reduced by an amount equal to the net present value of the Tax benefits

 

-77-


attributable to the item for which an indemnification payment is required, or which are otherwise associated with the indemnification payment, are realized or reasonably expected to be realized by the indemnified party under this Article X (the “ Tax Indemnified Party ”) or the Indemnified Party under Article IX , as the case may be, calculated using a discount rate equal to the applicable federal rate (as determined based on the period of time within which the Tax benefits are reasonably expected to be realized) for the month in which the indemnification payment is made by the Tax Indemnifying Party or the Indemnifying Party, as applicable, and (B) increased to take into account any net Tax cost incurred by the Tax Indemnified Party or the Indemnified Party, as applicable, as a result of the receipt or accrual of payments under Article IX or this Article X (grossed up for such increase), in each case determined by treating the Tax Indemnified Party or Indemnified Party, as applicable, as recognizing all other items of income, gain, loss, deduction or credit before recognizing any item arising under clauses (i) or (ii) above.

SECTION 10.2. Returns and Payments .

(a) From the date of this Agreement through and after the Closing Date, Seller shall prepare and file or otherwise furnish in proper form to the appropriate Taxing Authority (or cause to be prepared and filed or so furnished) in a timely manner all Tax Returns that relate to the Transferred Companies that are due on or before the Closing Date. The Transferred Companies shall remit or cause to be remitted all Taxes due in respect of such Tax Returns. Seller shall (i) except as otherwise provided in Section 5.13 , cause such Tax Returns to be prepared and filed in a manner consistent with past practice and no position shall be taken, election made or method adopted that is inconsistent with positions taken, elections made or methods used in prior periods in filing such Tax Returns (including positions which would have the effect of deferring income to periods for which Buyer is liable or accelerating deductions to periods for which Seller is liable), except as required by Law and (ii) make a reasonable attempt to submit such Tax Returns to Buyer not later than 30 days prior to the due date for filing such Tax Returns but in no event less than seven days prior to the due date for filing such Tax Returns for review and approval by Buyer, which approval may not be unreasonably withheld, but may in all cases be withheld if such Tax Returns are not prepared in accordance with clause (i) of this sentence.

(b) Buyer shall be responsible for preparing and filing (or causing to be prepared and filed) all Tax Returns of the Transferred Companies not filed on or before the Closing Date, and the Transferred Companies shall remit or cause to be remitted all Taxes due in respect of such Tax Returns. With respect to all such Tax Returns that relate to taxable periods ending on or before the Closing Date or the portion ending on the Closing Date of any taxable period that begins before the Closing Date and ends after the Closing Date, (i) except as otherwise provided in Section 5.13 , Buyer shall file such Tax Returns in a manner consistent with past practice and no position shall be taken, election made or method adopted that is inconsistent with positions taken, elections made or methods used in prior periods in filing such Tax Returns (including positions which would have the effect of accelerating income to periods for which Seller is liable or deferring deductions to periods for which Buyer is liable), except as required by Law, and (ii) Buyer shall make a reasonable attempt to submit such Tax Returns to Seller not later than 30 days prior to the due date for filing such Tax Returns but in no event later than seven days prior to the due date for filing such Tax Returns (or, if such due date is within 30 days following the Closing Date, as promptly as practicable following the Closing Date) for review and approval by Seller, which approval may not be unreasonably withheld, but may in all cases be withheld if such Tax Returns are not prepared in accordance with clause (i) of this sentence.

 

-78-


(c) In any case where a party is required to file a Tax Return (the “ Filing Party ”) on which there is shown an amount of Tax that is allocable to the other party (the “ Non-Filing Party ”), the Non-Filing Party shall pay to the Filing Party the amount so allocated to it pursuant to Section 10.1 in accordance with the provisions of Section 10.5 .

(d) Notwithstanding any provision to the contrary, neither Buyer nor any Affiliate thereof (including the Transferred Companies) shall file an amended Tax Return relating to Tax matters that is reasonably likely to adversely affect Seller or any of its Affiliates without first obtaining Seller’s written consent, such consent to not be unreasonably withheld.

SECTION 10.3. Refunds . Any refund (including any interest with respect thereto) of or credit for Taxes of or relating to any of the Transferred Companies for any taxable period ending on or prior to the Closing Date or for any liability of Taxes for which Seller is liable and which Seller has borne pursuant to this Agreement shall be, if received by or otherwise credited to Buyer or the Transferred Companies, paid over promptly to Seller in accordance with the provisions of Section 10.5 (and all interest actually received from a Taxing Authority with respect to such a refund shall also be paid over to Seller at such time); provided , however , that any such refund or credit shall be for the account of Buyer to the extent that such refund or credit is reflected on or provided in the Final Actual Closing Balance Sheet or to the extent such refund or credit is attributable to a carryback of any Tax attribute of any of the Transferred Companies arising in a taxable period beginning after the Closing Date if such carryback is permitted by Section 10.7(e) ; provided further , however , that the amount of such refund or credit and any interest received with respect thereto that is paid to Seller shall be net of any Tax detriment in respect of such refund or credit suffered by Buyer or the Transferred Companies. Buyer and the Transferred Companies shall be entitled to retain, or receive immediate payment from Seller of, any refund or credit arising with respect to any of the Transferred Companies relating to Taxes with respect to any taxable period (or portion thereof) beginning after the Closing Date, any refund or credit included in the Final Actual Closing Balance Sheet and any refund or credit of any Taxes allocated to Buyer pursuant to Section 5.13 . All payments required to be made pursuant to this Section 10.3 shall be made within 30 days after receipt by Seller, Buyer or the Transferred Companies.

SECTION 10.4. Contests .

(a) After the Closing Date, Buyer shall promptly notify Seller or Seller shall promptly notify Buyer in writing of any written notice of a proposed assessment or claim in a Tax Contest of or relating to Buyer, Seller or the Transferred Companies which, if determined adversely to the taxpayer, would be grounds for indemnification under this Article X ; provided , however , that a failure to give such notice will not affect the rights of a party to indemnification under this Agreement except to the extent, if any, that such failure materially prejudices the other party.

 

-79-


(b) In the case of a Tax Contest that (i) relates to periods ending on or before the Closing Date or (ii) relates to a liability for Taxes for which Seller could have to indemnify Buyer or the Transferred Companies pursuant to this Agreement, Seller shall have the right to control the conduct of such Tax Contest; provided that Buyer shall have the right to participate in all such Tax Contests that are reasonably likely to result in an adverse material effect to Buyer or the Transferred Companies. If, following the delivery of a notice specified in Section 10.4(a) by Buyer on Seller, Seller does not elect to conduct a Tax Contest described in clause (i) or (ii) above (or ceases to actively conduct such a Tax Contest for a period of 60 days), Buyer shall be at liberty (without reference to Seller) to admit, compromise, settle, discharge or otherwise deal with such Tax Contest. Buyer shall control all other Tax Contests; provided that Seller shall have the right to participate in all Tax Contests that are reasonably likely to result in an adverse material effect to Seller. Notwithstanding the foregoing, if a Tax Contest involves amounts for which both Seller and Buyer (including the Transferred Companies) could be liable pursuant to the terms of this Article X , then the party with the larger potential liability shall control such Tax Contest and the other party shall have the right to participate.

(c) In the case of a Tax Contest that is reasonably likely to result in an adverse material effect to the party that does not control such Tax Contest (the “ Non-Controlling Party ”), (i) the party that controls such Tax Contest, as determined under Section 10.4(b) (the “ Controlling Party ”), shall take account of the reasonable comments of the Non-Controlling Party in relation to such a Tax Contest which are provided on a timely basis, (ii) no action shall be taken that is not full, true and accurate in all material respects, (iii) all correspondence and communications in relation to such a Tax Contest with the Taxing Authority which is a party to the Tax Contest shall be made through the advisers appointed by the Controlling Party to act on behalf of the Transferred Companies and shall be copied to the Non-Controlling Party, and (iv) the Controlling Party shall inform the Non-Controlling Party of any notification request for a meeting (including any telephonic meeting) with or visit by any Taxing Authority and shall ensure that a representative of the Non-Controlling Party is present at any such meeting (if so requested in writing by the Non-Controlling Party).

(d) Except as set forth in Section 10.4(b) , none of Buyer, the Transferred Companies or any Affiliate of any of the foregoing, nor Seller or any Affiliate of Seller, shall enter into any compromise or agree to settle any claim pursuant to any Tax Contest that would adversely affect the other party for any year without the written consent of the other party, which consent may not be unreasonably withheld or delayed. Buyer and Seller agree to cooperate, and Buyer agrees to cause the Transferred Companies to cooperate, in the defense against or compromise of any Tax Contest.

SECTION 10.5. Payment . Except as otherwise provided in Section 5.13 , payment by the party liable under Section 10.1 of any amount due under this Article X in respect of Taxes, Losses or Tax Contest Expenses shall be made (a) if such amount is not the subject of a claim, dispute, or Action for indemnification under this Article X , at least five Business Days before the earlier of (i) the latest date on which that Tax is payable to the relevant Taxing Authority in order to avoid incurring any liability to interest, fines, charges, surcharges, additions or penalties or (ii) the due date of the applicable estimated or final Tax Return required to be filed by the Filing Party on which is required to be reported Tax for which the Non-Filing Party is responsible under Section 10.1 and (b) if such amount is the subject of a claim, dispute or

 

-80-


Action for indemnification under this Article X , when such claim, dispute or Action is finally determined. A claim, dispute or Action, and the liability for and amount of Taxes, Losses or Tax Contest Expenses related thereto, shall be deemed to be “finally determined” for purposes of this Article X when the parties to this Agreement have so determined by mutual agreement or, if disputed, when a final non-appealable Governmental Order has been entered into with respect to such claim or Action, provided that an appeal to the United States Supreme Court or equivalent court in a foreign jurisdiction shall not be considered in determining whether a Governmental Order is non-appealable.

SECTION 10.6. Cooperation and Exchange of Information . Seller and Buyer agree to provide each other with such cooperation and information as either of them reasonably may request of the other in filing any Tax Return, amended Tax Return or claim for refund, determining a liability for Taxes or a right to a refund of Taxes, participating in or conducting any audit or other proceeding in respect of Taxes of the Transferred Companies. Such cooperation and information shall include providing copies of relevant Tax Returns or relevant portions thereof, together with accompanying schedules, related work papers and documents relating to rulings or other determinations by any Taxing Authority. Seller, Buyer and the Transferred Companies shall make their employees available on a basis mutually-convenient to both parties to provide explanations of any documents or information provided hereunder. Each of Seller, Buyer and the Transferred Companies shall retain all Tax Returns, schedules and work papers, records and other documents in its possession relating to Tax matters of the Transferred Companies for each taxable period first ending after the Closing Date and for all prior taxable periods until the later of (a) the expirations of the statutes of limitations of the taxable periods to which such Tax Returns and other documents relate, without regard to extensions (except to the extent that the other party has been notified in writing of such extensions for the respective Tax periods) or (b) seven years following the due date (without extension) for such Tax Returns, provided that neither Buyer and the Transferred Companies on the one hand, nor Seller on the other, shall dispose of any of the foregoing items without first offering such items to the other. Any information obtained under this Section 10.6 shall be kept confidential except as may be otherwise necessary in connection with the filing of Tax Returns or claims for refund or in connection with any Tax Contest.

SECTION 10.7. Miscellaneous .

(a) Notwithstanding any provision in this Agreement to the contrary, the obligations of the parties set forth in this Article X shall be unconditional and absolute and shall remain in effect until 30 days after the expiration of the applicable statute of limitations (as extended); provided , however , that such obligations to indemnify, defend and hold harmless will not terminate with respect to any individual item as to which an indemnified Party shall have, before the expiration of the applicable period, previously made a claim by delivering a written notice (stating in reasonable detail the basis of such claim) to the applicable indemnifying Party.

(b) The representations and warranties contained in Section 3.10 (Taxes) shall terminate and expire on and as of the Closing Date and from such date shall have no further force or effect, except that the representations and warranties contained in Section 3.10(f) shall terminate and expire upon the expiration of the applicable statute of limitations.

 

-81-


(c) Notwithstanding any provision in this Agreement to the contrary, (i) Buyer shall be entitled to bring a claim for Taxes, Losses or matters covered by Section 10.1(a)(vi) only if such claim is attributable to the period that ends prior to the date that is one year after the Closing Date; (ii) the parties hereto agree to work together in good faith to mitigate any losses or damages for which Seller has an indemnification obligation covered by Section 10.1(a)(vi) ; and (iii) Seller shall have no indemnification obligation for any breach of the representations and warranties contained in Sections 3.10(l) and (q)  that is attributable to the period beginning one year after the Closing Date.

(d) Notwithstanding any provision in this Agreement to the contrary, all matters relating to Taxes shall be governed exclusively by Sections 3.10 , 5.1(z)(xiv) , 5.13 , 5.17 , 6.1(f) (regarding offset for Compensation Tax Benefits), 6.1(g) (regarding offset for Compensation Tax Benefits), 7.1(d) , 8.1 (only to the extent Taxes or Section 3.10 is specifically referenced), 9.2(e) , 9.3 and this Article X .

(e) None of Buyer or its Affiliates shall (or shall cause or permit the Transferred Companies to) carry back into any Tax Return for any taxable period ending on or before the Closing Date any Tax attribute of any of the Transferred Companies arising in a taxable period beginning after the Closing Date without the prior written consent of Seller unless such carry back is required by Law or such carryback is to a separate company Tax Return or to a Tax Return including only Transferred Companies.

(f) All excise, sales, use, transaction, conveyance, stock transfer, value-added, transfer (including real property transfer or gains), stamp, documentary, filing, recordation, and other similar Taxes, levies, or assessments, together with any interest, additions or penalties with respect thereto and any interest in respect of such additions or penalties, resulting from the transactions contemplated by this Agreement (“ Transfer Taxes ”) shall be borne equally by Buyer (50%) and Seller (50%). The party responsible under applicable Law for filing any Tax Return with respect to Transfer Taxes will prepare and file all such Tax Returns and other documentation with respect to any such Transfer Taxes and, if required by applicable Law, the other parties (including the Transferred Companies and the Transferred Subsidiaries, if applicable) will join in the execution of any such Tax Returns and other documentation. The parties shall cooperate in good faith to prepare and file such Tax Returns and the costs of preparing such Tax Returns shall be borne by Seller.

(g) Without limiting this Article X , any Tax allocation or sharing agreement or arrangement, whether or not written, that may have been entered into by Seller, its Affiliates or any of their subsidiaries (other than the Transferred Companies), on the one hand, and the Transferred Companies, on the other hand, shall be terminated as to the Transferred Companies as of the Closing Date, and no payments which are owed by or to the Transferred Companies pursuant thereto shall be payable thereafter.

(h) Seller and Buyer agree to treat all payments made by either of them to or for the benefit of the other (including any payments to the Transferred Companies) under this Agreement (including, but not limited to, for the avoidance of doubt, any payments required to be made under Sections 5.17 , 5.21 , 6.1(f) or 6.1(g) ) as adjustments to the Adjusted Purchase Price or as capital contributions for Tax purposes and agree that such treatment shall govern for purposes hereof, unless otherwise required by applicable Law.

 

-82-


ARTICLE XI

TERMINATION PRIOR TO CLOSING

SECTION 11.1. Termination of Agreement . This Agreement may be terminated at any time prior to the Closing:

(a) by Seller or Buyer in writing, in the event of the issuance of a final, non-appealable Governmental Order that prohibits or restrains any party from consummating the transactions contemplated hereby;

(b) by Seller or Buyer in writing, if the Closing has not occurred on or prior to April 4, 2011, unless the failure of the Closing to occur results from the failure of the party seeking to terminate this Agreement to materially perform each of its obligations under this Agreement required to be performed by it on or prior to the Closing Date;

(c) by (i) Seller if there shall have been a breach by Buyer of any of its representations, warranties, covenants or obligations contained herein, which breach would result in the failure to satisfy any condition set forth in Section 7.1 or Section 7.3 or (ii) Buyer if there shall have been a breach by Seller of any of its representations, warranties, covenants or obligations contained herein, which breach would result in the failure to satisfy any condition set forth in Section 7.1 or Section 7.2 , and in any such case such breach shall be incapable of being cured or, if capable of being cured, shall not have been cured within 30 days after written notice thereof shall have been received by the party alleged to be in breach; or

(d) at any time on or prior to the Closing Date, by mutual written consent of Seller and Buyer.

SECTION 11.2. Survival . If this Agreement is terminated and the transactions contemplated hereby are not consummated as described above, this Agreement will become null and void and of no further force and effect, except for (a) the provisions of Article I , Section 5.6 , Section 5.11 , Article XI and Article XII and (b) rights and obligations arising from any breach of this Agreement prior to such termination.

ARTICLE XII

GENERAL PROVISIONS

SECTION 12.1. Fees and Expenses . Except as may be otherwise specified in the Transaction Agreements, whether or not the purchase and sale of the Shares is consummated, each party hereto shall pay its own fees and expenses incident to preparing for, entering into and carrying out this Agreement and the Ancillary Agreements and the consummation of the transactions contemplated hereby and thereby. Notwithstanding the foregoing, at the Closing, Seller shall reimburse Buyer for any reasonable and documented out-of-pocket fees and expenses (including reasonable attorneys’ and other advisers’ fees and expenses) incurred by or on behalf of Front Street in connection with the Reinsurance Transaction prior to the Closing up to $5,000,000.

 

-83-


SECTION 12.2. Notices . All notices, requests, demands, waivers and other communications required or permitted to be given or made under this Agreement shall be in writing and shall be deemed to have been duly given or made (and shall be deemed to have been duly given or made upon receipt) if (a) delivered personally, (b) mailed by certified or registered mail (postage prepaid, return receipt requested) or (c) sent by facsimile with receipt confirmed (followed by delivery of an original via overnight courier service), as follows (or at such other address for a party as shall be specified by like notice):

 

  (a) if to Buyer, to:

c/o Harbinger Capital Partners LLC

450 Park Avenue, 30th Floor

New York, NY 10022

Fax: (212) 338-5801

Attention: General Counsel

with copies to:

Chadbourne & Parke LLP

30 Rockefeller Plaza

New York, NY 10112

Fax: (646) 701-1002

Attention: Jonathan M.A. Melmed

and

Debevoise & Plimpton LLP

919 Third Avenue

New York, NY 10022

Fax: (212) 909-6836

Attention: Nicholas F. Potter

 

  (b) if to Seller, to:

Old Mutual plc

5 th Floor, Old Mutual Place

2 Lambeth Hill

London, EC4V 4GG, United Kingdom

Fax: +44 20 7002 7209

Attention: Group Company Secretary

 

-84-


with a copy to:

Dewey & LeBoeuf LLP

1301 Avenue of the Americas

New York, NY 10019

Fax: (212) 259-6333

Attention: Alexander M. Dye

                 Kirk Lipsey

SECTION 12.3. Interpretation . When a reference is made in this Agreement to an Article, a Section, a clause, an Exhibit or a Schedule, that reference is to an Article, a Section or a clause of, or an Exhibit or a Schedule to, this Agreement unless otherwise indicated. Any reference to “the date hereof” or “the date of this Agreement” shall refer to the date of the Original Agreement and not to the Amendment and Restatement Date unless the context otherwise requires. Any fact or item disclosed in any Section of the Disclosure Schedule will be deemed disclosed in all other sections of the Disclosure Schedule to which the relevance of such fact or item is reasonably apparent. Disclosure of any item in the Disclosure Schedule will not be deemed an admission that such item represents a material item, fact, exception of fact, event or circumstance or that occurrence or non-occurrence of any change or effect related to such item would result in a Company Material Adverse Effect or a Buyer Material Adverse Effect. The table of contents and headings contained in this Agreement are for reference purposes only and will not affect in any way the meaning or interpretation of this Agreement. Whenever the words “include,” “includes” or “including” are used in this Agreement, they will be deemed to be followed by the words “without limitation,” whether or not they are in fact following by those words or words of like import. Whenever the singular is used herein, the same will include the plural, and whenever the plural is used herein, the same will include the singular, where appropriate. All Exhibits, Schedules and the Disclosure Schedule annexed hereto or referred to herein are hereby incorporated in and made a part of this Agreement as if set forth in full herein. Any capitalized term used in any Exhibit, Schedule or Section of the Disclosure Schedule but not otherwise defined therein will have the meaning given to such term in this Agreement. Any reference to “days” means calendar days unless Business Days are expressly specified. If any action under this Agreement is required to be done or taken on a day that is not a Business Day, then such action shall be required to be done or taken not on such day but on the first succeeding Business Day thereafter. “Writing,” “written” and comparable terms refer to printing, typing and other means of reproducing words (including electronic media) in a visible form. References from or through any date mean, unless otherwise specified, from and including or through and including, respectively. The Transaction Agreements are to be construed without regard to any presumption or rule requiring construction or interpretation against the party drafting or causing any instrument to be drafted. References to any statute, listing rule, rule, standard, regulation or other Law will be deemed to include a reference to the corresponding rules and regulations, if any, and each of them as amended, modified, supplemented, consolidated, replaced or rewritten from time to time. References to any Section of any statute, listing rule, rule, standard, regulation or other Law will be deemed to include any successor to such section. References to “$” or “dollars” are references to United States dollars.

 

-85-


SECTION 12.4. Entire Agreement; Third-Party Beneficiaries . Except as otherwise expressly provided in the Transaction Agreements, the Transaction Agreements constitute the entire agreement of the parties hereto with respect to the subject matter of the Transaction Agreements and supersede all prior agreements and undertakings, both written and oral, other than the Confidentiality Agreement to the extent not in conflict with this Agreement, between or on behalf of Seller and/or its Affiliates, on the one hand, and Buyer and/or its Affiliates, on the other hand, with respect to the subject matter of the Transaction Agreements. Except as provided in Section 5.12 with respect to D&O Indemnified Persons, in Article IX with respect to Buyer Indemnitees and Seller Indemnitees, and in Article X with respect to the parties entitled to indemnification thereunder, this Agreement is for the sole benefit of the parties to this Agreement and their permitted successors and assigns and nothing in this Agreement, express or implied, is intended to or shall confer upon any other Person (including any policyholder of any of the Insurance Subsidiaries) any legal or equitable right, benefit or remedy of any nature whatsoever under or by reason of this Agreement.

SECTION 12.5. Governing Law . This Agreement shall be governed by, and construed in accordance with, the Laws of the State of New York, regardless of the Laws that might otherwise govern under applicable principles of conflicts of laws thereof.

SECTION 12.6. Assignment . Neither this Agreement nor any of the rights, interests or obligations under this Agreement shall be assigned, in whole or in part, by operation of law or otherwise by either of the parties without the prior written consent of the other party, and any such assignment that is not consented to shall be null and void; provided , however , that Seller shall consent to any such assignment by Buyer to an Affiliate of Buyer if such assignment would not reasonably be expected to impair or delay the consummation of the transactions contemplated by any Transaction Agreement (whether from a regulatory standpoint or otherwise) or otherwise adversely affect any of the benefits reasonably expected to be derived by Seller under any of the Transaction Agreements. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, no such assignment shall operate as a release of or otherwise limit Buyer’s obligations hereunder. Subject to the preceding sentence, this Agreement shall be binding upon, inure to the benefit of, and be enforceable by, the parties and their respective successors and assigns.

SECTION 12.7. Dispute Resolution; Enforcement .

(a) In the event of any dispute arising under this Agreement, prior to the commencement of litigation, a senior officer of Buyer and a senior officer of Seller shall attempt in good faith to resolve the dispute consistent with the terms of this Agreement. If they are unable to resolve the dispute in this manner within a reasonable period of time, the parties may pursue judicial remedies with respect to such dispute.

(b) Each of Seller and Buyer hereby irrevocably and unconditionally submits to the exclusive jurisdiction of any court of the United States of America or any state court, which in either case is located in the City of New York (each, a “ New York Court ”) for purposes of enforcing this Agreement or determining any claim arising from or related to the transactions contemplated by this Agreement. In any such action, suit or other proceeding, each of Seller and Buyer irrevocably and unconditionally waives and agrees not to assert by way of motion, as a defense or otherwise any claim that it is not subject to the jurisdiction of any such New York Court, that such action, suit or other proceeding is not subject to the jurisdiction of any such New York Court, that such action, suit or other proceeding is brought in an inconvenient forum or that

 

-86-


the venue of such action, suit or other proceeding is improper; provided , however , that nothing set forth in this sentence shall prohibit either Seller or Buyer from removing any matter from one New York Court to another New York Court. Each of Seller and Buyer also agrees that any final and unappealable judgment against a party hereto in connection with any action, suit or other proceeding shall be conclusive and binding on such party and that such award or judgment may be enforced in any court of competent jurisdiction, either within or outside of the United States of America. A certified or exemplified copy of such award or judgment shall be conclusive evidence of the fact and amount of such award or judgment. Seller and Buyer agree that any process or other paper to be served in connection with any action or proceeding under this Agreement shall, if delivered, sent or mailed in accordance with Section 12.2 , constitute good, proper and sufficient service thereof.

SECTION 12.8. Severability; Amendment and Waiver .

(a) Whenever possible, each provision or portion of any provision of this Agreement shall be interpreted in such manner as to be effective and valid under applicable Law, but if any provision or portion of any provision of this Agreement is held to be invalid, illegal or unenforceable in any respect under any applicable Law or rule in any jurisdiction, such invalidity, illegality or unenforceability shall not affect any other provision or portion of any provision in such jurisdiction, and this Agreement shall be reformed, construed and enforced in such jurisdiction as if such invalid, illegal or unenforceable provision or portion of any provision had never been contained herein.

(b) This Agreement may be amended, and the terms hereof may be waived, only by a written instrument signed by each of the parties or, in the case of a waiver, by the party waiving compliance.

(c) No delay on the part of any party in exercising any right, power or privilege hereunder shall operate as a waiver thereof, nor shall any waiver on the part of any party of any right, power or privilege, nor any single or partial exercise of any such right, power or privilege, preclude any further exercise thereof or the exercise of any other such right, power or privilege.

SECTION 12.9. Specific Performance . Subject to Section 9.3 , the parties agree that irreparable damage would occur in the event that any of the provisions of this Agreement were not performed in accordance with their specific terms or were otherwise breached. Subject to Section 9.3 , it is accordingly agreed that, without the necessity of posting bond or other undertaking, the parties shall be entitled to an injunction or injunctions to prevent breaches of this Agreement and to enforce specifically the terms and provisions of this Agreement in accordance with this Agreement, this being in addition to any other remedy to which such party is entitled at law or in equity. In the event that any Action is brought in equity to enforce the provisions of this Agreement, no party hereto shall allege, and each party hereto hereby waives the defense or counterclaim, that there is an adequate remedy at law.

 

-87-


SECTION 12.10. Counterparts . This Agreement and each of the other Transaction Agreements may be executed in one or more counterparts, and by the different parties to each such agreement in separate counterparts, each of which when executed will be deemed to be an original but all of which taken together will constitute one and the same agreement. Delivery of an executed counterpart of a signature page to any Transaction Agreement by facsimile or other means of electronic transmission shall be as effective as delivery of a manually executed counterpart of any such Agreement.

SECTION 12.11. WAIVER OF JURY TRIAL . EACH PARTY TO THIS AGREEMENT ACKNOWLEDGES AND AGREES THAT ANY CONTROVERSY WHICH MAY ARISE UNDER THE TRANSACTION AGREEMENTS IS LIKELY TO INVOLVE COMPLICATED AND DIFFICULT ISSUES, AND THEREFORE EACH SUCH PARTY HEREBY IRREVOCABLY AND UNCONDITIONALLY WAIVES ANY RIGHT SUCH PARTY MAY HAVE TO A TRIAL BY JURY IN RESPECT OF ANY LITIGATION DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO THIS AGREEMENT OR THE OTHER TRANSACTION AGREEMENTS, OR THE TRANSACTIONS CONTEMPLATED BY THIS AGREEMENT OR THE OTHER TRANSACTION AGREEMENTS OR THE FORMATION, BREACH, TERMINATION OR VALIDITY OF THIS AGREEMENT OR ANY OTHER TRANSACTION AGREEMENT. EACH PARTY HERETO CERTIFIES AND ACKNOWLEDGES THAT (I) NO REPRESENTATIVE, AGENT OR ATTORNEY OR ANY OTHER PARTY HAS REPRESENTED, EXPRESSLY OR OTHERWISE, THAT SUCH OTHER PARTY WOULD NOT, IN THE EVENT OF LITIGATION, SEEK TO ENFORCE THE FOREGOING WAIVER, (II) EACH PARTY HERETO UNDERSTANDS AND HAS CONSIDERED THE IMPLICATIONS OF THIS WAIVER, (III) EACH PARTY HERETO MAKES THIS WAIVER VOLUNTARILY AND (IV) EACH PARTY HERETO HAS BEEN INDUCED TO ENTER INTO THIS AGREEMENT BY, AMONG OTHER THINGS, THE MUTUAL WAIVERS AND CERTIFICATIONS OF THIS SECTION 12.11 . ANY PARTY HERETO MAY FILE AN ORIGINAL COUNTERPART OR A COPY OF THIS AGREEMENT WITH ANY COURT AS WRITTEN EVIDENCE OF THE CONSENT OF THE PARTIES TO THE WAIVER OF THEIR RIGHT TO TRIAL BY JURY.

[Remainder of this page intentionally left blank.]

 

-88-


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Seller and Buyer have caused this First Amended and Restated Stock Purchase Agreement to be signed by their respective officers thereunto duly authorized, all as of the date first written above.

 

OM GROUP (UK) LIMITED
By   /s/ M.C. MURRAY
  Name:   M.C. MURRAY
  Title:   Authorized Signatory
HARBINGER OM, LLC
By   /s/ Philip Falcone
  Name:   Philip Falcone
  Title   CEO & President

Signature Page to First Amended and Restated

Stock Purchase Agreement

Exhibit 10.2

 

 

 

GUARANTEE AND PLEDGE AGREEMENT

made by

HARBINGER OM, LLC,

and

each other Grantor party hereto

in favor of

OM GROUP (UK) LIMITED

Dated as of April 6, 2011

 

 

 


TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

         Page  

SECTION 1. DEFINED TERMS

     1   

1.1

  Definitions      1   

1.2

  Other Definitional Provisions      3   

SECTION 2. GUARANTEE AND GRANT OF SECURITY INTEREST

     4   

2.1

  Guarantee      4   

2.2

  Pledge      5   

SECTION 3. REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES

     6   

3.1

  Title; No Other Liens      6   

3.2

  Perfected First Priority Liens      6   

3.3

  Jurisdiction of Organization; Chief Executive Office      6   

3.4

  Pledged Equity Interests      6   

SECTION 4. COVENANTS

     7   

4.1

  Delivery of Instruments and Security Certificates      7   

4.2

  Payment of Obligations      7   

4.3

  Maintenance of Perfected Security Interest; Further Documentation      8   

4.4

  Changes in Name, etc.      8   

4.5

  Notice of Liens      8   

4.6

  Pledged Equity Interests      8   

SECTION 5. REMEDIAL PROVISIONS

     9   

5.1

  Pledged Equity Interests      9   

5.2

  Code and Other Remedies      10   

5.3

  Sales of Collateral      11   

5.4

  Deficiency      11   

SECTION 6. THE SECURED PARTY

     11   

6.1

  Secured Party’s Appointment as Attorney-in-Fact, etc.      11   

6.2

  Duty of Secured Party      12   

6.3

  No Obligations or Liability to any Grantor      13   

6.4

  Additional Security      13   

6.5

  Release of the Pledge and Security Interest Created Hereby      13   

6.6

  Financing Statements      13   

SECTION 7. MISCELLANEOUS

     13   

7.1

  Amendments in Writing      13   

7.2

  Notices      13   

7.3

  No Waiver by Course of Conduct; Cumulative Remedies      14   

7.4

  Enforcement Expenses; Indemnification      14   

7.5

  Successors and Assigns      14   

7.6

  Counterparts      14   

7.7

  Severability      14   

7.8

  Section Headings      14   

7.9

  Integration      15   

 

i


7.10

  GOVERNING LAW      15   

7.11

  Submission To Jurisdiction; Waivers      15   

7.12

  WAIVER OF JURY TRIAL      15   

7.13

  Rights of Parties      16   

SCHEDULES

 

Schedule 1 Pledged Equity Interests
Schedule 2 Perfection Matters
Schedule 3 Jurisdictions of Organization and Chief Executive Offices


GUARANTEE AND PLEDGE AGREEMENT

GUARANTEE AND PLEDGE AGREEMENT, dated as of April 6, 2011 (as amended, restated, supplemented or otherwise modified from time to time, this “ Agreement ”), made by HARBINGER OM, LLC, a Delaware limited liability company (the “ Buyer ”) and each grantor from time to time party hereto (the Buyer and such grantors being referred to herein individually, a “ Grantor ”, and collectively, jointly and severally, the “ Grantors ”), in favor of OM GROUP (UK) LIMITED, a company limited by shares organized under the laws of England and Wales (the “ Secured Party ”).

W I T N E S S E T H :

A. The Buyer and the Secured Party are parties to that certain Amended and Restated Stock Purchase Agreement, dated as of February 17, 2011 (as amended, restated, or otherwise modified from time to time, the “ Stock Purchase Agreement ”), pursuant to which, among other things, the Secured Party has agreed to sell, and the Buyer has agreed to acquire, all of the outstanding shares of capital stock of Old Mutual U.S. Life Holdings, Inc., a Delaware corporation (the “ Company ”), subject to all of the terms and conditions set forth in the Stock Purchase Agreement.

B. This Agreement is the agreement referred to in the Stock Purchase Agreement as the Guarantee and Pledge Agreement, and its execution is a condition precedent to the obligations of the parties set forth in the Stock Purchase Agreement.

C. Effective upon the Closing under the Stock Purchase Agreement, the Buyer has acquired legal and beneficial ownership of the Pledged Equity Interests (as defined below) in the Company.

D. To induce the Secured Party to enter into and consummate the transactions contemplated by the Stock Purchase Agreement, each Grantor desires to assign and transfer, pledge and grant to the Secured Party a security interest in the Collateral (as defined below) to secure the Secured Obligations, as provided herein.

Accordingly, in consideration of the foregoing, and for other good and valuable consideration, the receipt and sufficiency of which are hereby acknowledged, each Grantor hereby agrees with the Secured Party as follows:

SECTION 1. DEFINED TERMS

1.1 Definitions .

(a) Unless otherwise defined herein, terms defined in the Stock Purchase Agreement and used herein shall have the meanings given to them in the Stock Purchase Agreement and the following terms are used herein as defined in the UCC: Certificated Security and Control.

(b) The following terms shall have the following meanings:

Agreement ”: as defined in the Preamble.


Bankruptcy Event ” shall be deemed to occur, with respect to any Grantor, if (a) such Grantor shall commence any case, proceeding or other voluntary action seeking to have an order for relief entered with respect to it, or seeking to adjudicate it bankrupt or insolvent, or seeking liquidation, arrangement, adjustment, winding-up, reorganization, dissolution, composition under the Bankruptcy Law or other relief with respect to it or its debts; (b) such Grantor shall apply for, or consent or acquiesce to, the appointment of, a receiver, administrator, administrative receiver, liquidator, sequestrator, trustee or other official with similar powers for itself or any substantial part of its assets; (c) such Grantor shall make a general assignment for the benefit of its creditors; (d) an involuntary case shall be commenced seeking liquidation or reorganization of such Grantor under the Bankruptcy Law, or seeking issuance of a warrant of attachment, execution or distraint, or any similar proceedings shall be commenced against such Grantor under any other applicable law and (i) such Grantor consents to the institution of the involuntary case against it, (ii) the petition commencing the involuntary case is not dismissed within 60 days of its filing, (iii) an interim trustee is appointed to take possession of all or a portion of the property, and/or to operate all or any part of the business of such Grantor and such appointment is not vacated or otherwise discharged within 60 days or (iv) an order for relief shall have been issued or entered therein; or (e) a decree or order of a court having jurisdiction in the premises for the appointment of a receiver, administrator, administrative receiver, liquidator, sequestrator, trustee or other official having similar powers, over such Grantor or all or a part of its property shall have been entered; (f) any other similar relief shall be granted against such Grantor under any applicable Bankruptcy Law, or such Grantor shall file a petition or consent or shall otherwise institute any similar proceeding under any other applicable law, or shall take any action in furtherance of, or indicating its consent to, approval of, or acquiescence in any of the acts set forth above in this definition; or (g) such Grantor shall generally not, or shall be unable to, or shall admit in writing its inability to, pay its debts as they become due.

Bankruptcy Law ” means Title 11, United States Code, and any other existing or future law (or any successor law or statute) of any jurisdiction, domestic (including state and federal) or foreign, relating to bankruptcy, insolvency, reorganization, conservatorship, moratorium or similar law for the relief of debtors.

Buyer ”: as defined in the Preamble.

Certificated Security ”: as defined in the UCC.

Collateral ”: as defined in Section 2.2.

Default ”: any default in the payment or performance by Buyer when due of the Secured Obligations.

Event of Default ”: (a) any Bankruptcy Event and any Default that is not capable of cure and (b) any Default that is capable of cure if such Default has not been cured within 7 calendar days after notice thereof.

GAAP ”: generally accepted accounting principles in the United States of America as in effect from time to time.

Grantor ”: as defined in the Preamble.

Guaranteed Obligations ”: the full and timely payment and performance of all obligations, liabilities, or undertakings of Buyer under Sections 5.14, 5.18 and 9.1(b) of the Stock Purchase Agreement and under this Agreement, including all interest (including any interest that accrues after the commencement of any bankruptcy, insolvency or similar proceeding) and any and all costs and fees (including attorney’s fees and expenses), and expenses that that the Buyer is required to pay pursuant to any of the foregoing, by law or otherwise.

 

2


Guarantor ”: each Grantor other than the Buyer.

Instrument ”: as defined in the UCC.

Issuers ”: the Company and OMFLIC and each Person other than the Buyer that becomes a direct or indirect owner of Capital Stock of the Company or OMFLIC.

Pledged Equity Interests ”: any and all Capital Stock in the Issuers now owned or hereafter acquired by any Grantor (including the shares of Capital Stock listed on Schedule 1), together with any other shares, options, warrants, interests or rights of any nature whatsoever in respect of the Capital Stock of any Issuer, including any rights to acquire any Capital Stock, that may be issued or granted to, or held by, any Grantor.

Proceeds ”: all “proceeds” as such term is defined in Section 9-102(a)(64) of the UCC and, in any event, shall include, without limitation, all dividends, instruments, cash and other property or rights of any kind received or receivable or otherwise distributed or distributable with respect to any Pledged Equity Interests.

Secured Obligations ”: (a) in the case of the Buyer, the full and timely payment and performance of all obligations, liabilities, or undertakings of Buyer under Sections 5.14, 5.18 and 9.1(b) of the Stock Purchase Agreement and under this Agreement, including all interest (including any interest that accrues after the commencement of any bankruptcy, insolvency or similar proceeding) and any and all costs and fees (including attorney’s fees and expenses), and expenses that that the Buyer is required to pay pursuant to any of the foregoing, by law or otherwise and (b) in the case of each Grantor other than the Buyer, the Guaranteed Obligations and all interest (including any interest that accrues after the commencement of any bankruptcy, insolvency or similar proceeding) and any and all costs and fees (including attorney’s fees and expenses), and expenses that that such Grantor is required to pay pursuant to this Agreement, by law or otherwise.

Secured Party ”: as defined in the Preamble.

Securities Act ”: the Securities Act of 1933, as amended.

Security Certificate ”: as defined in the UCC.

Stock Purchase Agreement ”: as defined in the Recitals.

UCC ”: the Uniform Commercial Code as in effect, from time to time, in the State of New York; provided that if by reason of mandatory provisions of law, the perfection or the effect of perfection or non-perfection and priority of the security interests in any Collateral is governed by the Uniform Commercial Code as in effect in a jurisdiction other than New York, “UCC” shall mean the Uniform Commercial Code as in effect in such other jurisdiction for purposes of the provisions hereof relating to perfection or effect of perfection or non-perfection and priority.

1.2 Other Definitional Provisions .

(a) The words “hereof,” “herein”, “hereto” and “hereunder” and words of similar import when used in this Agreement shall refer to this Agreement as a whole and not to any particular provision of this Agreement, and Section and Schedule references are to this Agreement unless otherwise specified.

(b) The word “including” means “including without limitation”.

 

3


(c) The meanings given to terms defined herein shall be equally applicable to both the singular and plural forms of such terms.

SECTION 2. GUARANTEE AND GRANT OF SECURITY INTEREST

2.1 Guarantee .

(a) Each Guarantor hereby unconditionally, absolutely and irrevocably, guarantees, as primary obligor and not merely as surety, to the Secured Party the prompt and complete payment and performance by the Buyer when due (whether at the stated maturity, by acceleration or otherwise) of the Guaranteed Obligations. This guarantee is a guarantee of payment, not merely of collection.

(b) Notwithstanding any payment made by any Guarantor hereunder or any set-off or application of funds of any Guarantor by the Secured Party, no Guarantor shall be entitled to be subrogated to any of the rights of the Secured Party against the Buyer or any Guarantor or any collateral security or guarantee or right of offset held by the Secured Party for the payment of the Guaranteed Obligations, nor shall any Guarantor seek or be entitled to seek any contribution or reimbursement from the Buyer or any other Guarantor in respect of payments made by such Guarantor hereunder, until all amounts owing to the Secured Party on account of the Guaranteed Obligations are paid in full. If any amount shall be paid to any Guarantor on account of such subrogation rights at any time when all of the Guaranteed Obligations shall not have been paid in full, such amount shall be held by such Guarantor in trust for the Secured Party, segregated from other funds of such Guarantor, and shall, forthwith upon receipt by such Guarantor, be turned over to the Secured Party in the exact form received by such Guarantor (duly indorsed by such Guarantor to the Secured Party, if required), to be applied against the Guaranteed Obligations, whether matured or unmatured, in such order as the Secured Party may determine.

(c) Each Guarantor shall remain obligated hereunder notwithstanding that, without any reservation of rights against such Guarantor and without notice to or further assent by such Guarantor, any demand for payment of any of the Guaranteed Obligations made by the Secured Party may be rescinded by the Secured Party and any of the Guaranteed Obligations continued, and the Guaranteed Obligations, or the liability of any other Person upon or for any part thereof, or any collateral security or guarantee therefor or right of offset with respect thereto, may, from time to time, in whole or in part, be renewed, extended, amended, modified, accelerated, compromised, waived, surrendered or released by the Secured Party, and the Stock Purchase Agreement and the Ancillary Agreements and any other documents executed and delivered in connection therewith may be amended, modified, supplemented or terminated, in whole or in part, as the Secured Party may deem advisable from time to time, and any collateral security, guarantee or right of offset at any time held by the Secured Party for the payment of the Guaranteed Obligations may be sold, exchanged, waived, surrendered or released. The Secured Party shall have no obligation to protect, secure, perfect or insure any Lien at any time held by it as security for the Guaranteed Obligations or for the guarantee contained in this Section 2.1 or any property subject thereto.

(d) Each Guarantor waives any and all notice of the creation, renewal, extension or accrual of any of the Guaranteed Obligations and notice of or proof of reliance by the Secured Party upon the guarantee contained in this Section 2.1 or acceptance of the guarantee contained in this Section 2.1; the Guaranteed Obligations, and any of them, shall conclusively be deemed to have been created, contracted or incurred, or renewed, extended, amended or waived, in reliance upon the guarantee contained in this Section 2.1; and all dealings between the Buyer and the Guarantors, on the one hand, and the Secured Party, on the other hand, likewise shall be conclusively presumed to have been had or consummated in

 

4


reliance upon the guarantee contained in this Section 2.1. Each Guarantor waives diligence, presentment, protest, demand for payment and notice of default or nonpayment to or upon the Buyer or such Guarantor with respect to the Guaranteed Obligations. Each Guarantor understands and agrees that the guarantee contained in this Section 2.1 shall be construed as a continuing, absolute and unconditional guarantee of payment without regard to (a) the validity or enforceability of the Stock Purchase Agreement or the Ancillary Agreements, any of the Guaranteed Obligations or any other collateral security therefor or guarantee or right of offset with respect thereto at any time or from time to time held by the Secured Party, (b) any defense, set-off or counterclaim (other than a defense of payment or performance) which may at any time be available to or be asserted by the Buyer or any other Person against the Secured Party or (c) any other circumstance whatsoever (with or without notice to or knowledge of the Buyer or any Guarantor) which constitutes, or might be construed to constitute, an equitable or legal discharge of Buyer for the Guaranteed Obligations, or of any Guarantor under the guarantee contained in this Section 2.1, in bankruptcy or in any other instance. When making any demand hereunder or otherwise pursuing its rights and remedies hereunder against any Guarantor, the Secured Party may, but shall be under no obligation to, make a similar demand on or otherwise pursue such rights and remedies as it may have against the Buyer or any other Person or against any collateral security or guarantee for the Guaranteed Obligations or any right of offset with respect thereto, and any failure by the Secured Party to make any such demand, to pursue such other rights or remedies or to collect any payments from the Buyer, or any other Person or to realize upon any such collateral security or guarantee or to exercise any such right of offset, or any release of the Buyer, or any other Person or any such collateral security, guarantee or right of offset, shall not relieve such Guarantor of any obligation or liability hereunder, and shall not impair or affect the rights and remedies, whether express, implied or available as a matter of law, of the Secured Party against such Guarantor. For the purposes hereof “demand” shall include the commencement and continuance of any legal proceedings.

(e) To the extent not prohibited by applicable law, the guarantee contained in this Section 2.1 shall continue to be effective, or be reinstated, as the case may be, if at any time payment, or any part thereof, of any of the Guaranteed Obligations is rescinded or must otherwise be restored or returned by the Secured Party upon the insolvency, bankruptcy, dissolution, liquidation or reorganization of the Buyer or any Guarantor, or upon or as a result of the appointment of a receiver, intervenor or conservator of, or trustee or similar officer for, the Buyer or any Guarantor or any substantial part of its property, or otherwise, all as though such payments had not been made.

(f) Anything contained in this Agreement to the contrary notwithstanding, the obligations of each Guarantor hereunder shall be limited to a maximum aggregate amount equal to the greatest amount that would not render such Guarantor’s obligations hereunder subject to avoidance as a fraudulent transfer or conveyance under Section 548 of Title 11 of the United States Code or any provision of applicable state law.

2.2 Pledge . Each Grantor hereby assigns and transfers to the Secured Party, and hereby grants to the Secured Party, a security interest in all of the following property now owned or at any time hereafter acquired by such Grantor or in which such Grantor now has or at any time in the future may acquire any right, title or interest (collectively, the “ Collateral ”), as security for the prompt and complete payment and performance when due (whether at the stated maturity, by acceleration or otherwise) of the Secured Obligations:

(a) all Pledged Equity Interests, including the Pledged Equity Interests listed on Schedule 1;

(b) all certificates or other writings representing or evidencing any of the foregoing;

 

5


(c) all books and records pertaining to the Collateral; and

(d) all Proceeds of any and all of the foregoing.

SECTION 3. REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES

Each Grantor hereby represents and warrants to the Secured Party:

3.1 Title; No Other Liens . Except for the security interest granted to the Secured Party pursuant to this Agreement, such Grantor owns each item of the Collateral upon which it purports to grant a security interest hereunder free and clear of any and all Liens or claims of others that have been created by such Grantor. No financing statement or other public notice with respect to all or any part of such Collateral is on file or of record in any public office, except such as have been filed in favor of the Secured Party.

3.2 Perfected First Priority Liens . The security interests granted pursuant to this Agreement constitute valid security interests in all of the Collateral in favor of the Secured Party as security for the Secured Obligations, enforceable in accordance with the terms hereof. Upon the filing of UCC financing statements naming each applicable Grantor as “debtor”, naming the Secured Party as “secured party” and describing the Collateral, in the filing offices listed next to such Grantor’s name on Schedule 2, the security interests granted shall be perfected to the extent any such security interest may be perfected by the filing of a financing statement. In the case of the Pledged Equity Interests consisting of Certificated Securities, in addition to filing of such UCC financing statements, upon delivery of the certificates representing such Certificated Securities to the Secured Party, in each case duly endorsed or accompanied by duly executed instruments of assignment or transfer in blank, the security interest granted to the Secured Party in such Certificated Securities will constitute security interests therein perfected by “control” (within the meaning of the UCC) prior to all other Liens and, assuming the Secured Party has no notice of an adverse claim, subject to no adverse claims.

3.3 Jurisdiction of Organization; Chief Executive Office . On the date hereof, such Grantor’s jurisdiction of organization, identification number from the jurisdiction of organization (if any), and the location of such Grantor’s chief executive office or sole place of business or principal residence, as the case may be, are specified on Schedule 3. Buyer has furnished to the Secured Party a certified charter, certificate of incorporation or other organizational document and long-form good standing certificate as of a date that is recent to the date hereof.

3.4 Pledged Equity Interests .

(a) The shares of Capital Stock pledged by such Grantor hereunder constitute all the issued and outstanding shares of all classes of the Capital Stock of each Issuer owned by such Grantor.

(b) Such Grantor is the record and beneficial owner of, and has good and marketable title to, the Pledged Equity Interests pledged by it hereunder, free of any and all Liens or options in favor of, or claims of, any other Person that have been created by such Grantor, except the security interest created by this Agreement.

(c) All Capital Stock pledged by such Grantor is in certificated form.

 

6


(d) Schedule 1 is true and correct and complete in all material respects. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing: (i) all of the shares of Capital Stock included in the Pledged Equity Interests pledged by such Grantor are, except to the extent registered in the name of the Secured Party or its nominee pursuant to this Agreement, registered in the name of such Grantor and (ii) there are no other authorized, issued or outstanding shares of Capital Stock of any Issuer than Capital Stock constituting Collateral.

(e) Such Grantor is a corporation duly organized, validly existing and in good standing under the laws of its jurisdiction of organization and has all requisite power and authority to enter into and carry out the terms of this Agreement.

(f) The execution, delivery and performance of this Agreement will not result in any violation of or be in conflict with or constitute a default under any term of such Grantor’s certificate of incorporation or by-laws or other constituent documents or any agreement or instrument to which such Grantor is a party or by which it is bound or any term of any Law.

(g) No consent or approval of, or declaration or filing with, any Governmental Entity or regulatory body is required for the valid execution, delivery and performance of this Agreement, other than filings which may required by applicable insurance laws with respect to the exercise of remedies and except as may be required under applicable securities laws in connection with the sale of any Pledged Equity Interests.

(h) This Agreement has been duly authorized, executed and delivered by such Grantor and constitutes its legal, valid and binding obligation, enforceable against such Grantor in accordance with its terms, except to the extent that such enforcement may be limited by applicable bankruptcy, insolvency, reorganization, moratorium and similar laws of general application relating to or affecting the rights and remedies of creditors and rights of creditors of insurers, and by general equitable principles.

SECTION 4. COVENANTS

Each Grantor covenants and agrees with the Secured Party that, from and after the date of this Agreement until the Secured Obligations shall have been paid and performed in full:

4.1 Delivery of Instruments and Security Certificates . If any of the Collateral shall be a or become evidenced by any Instrument or Security Certificate, such Instrument or Security Certificate (and any other previously undelivered Instrument or Security Certificate shall be immediately delivered to the Secured Party, duly indorsed in a manner satisfactory to the Secured Party, to be held as Collateral pursuant to this Agreement.

4.2 Payment of Obligations . Each Grantor will pay and discharge or otherwise satisfy at or before maturity or before they become delinquent, as the case may be, all taxes, assessments and governmental charges or levies imposed upon the Collateral upon which it purports to grant a security interest hereunder or in respect of income or profits therefrom, as well as all claims of any kind against or with respect to the Collateral, except that no such charge need be paid if the amount or validity thereof is currently being contested in good faith by appropriate proceedings, reserves in conformity with GAAP with respect thereto have been provided on the books of such Grantor and such proceedings could not reasonably be expected to result in the sale, forfeiture or loss of any material portion of the Collateral or any interest therein.

 

7


4.3 Maintenance of Perfected Security Interest; Further Documentation .

(a) Each Grantor shall maintain the security interest created by this Agreement as a perfected security interest having at least the priority described in Section 3.2 and shall defend such security interest against the claims and demands of all Persons whomsoever.

(b) Each Grantor will furnish to the Secured Party from time to time statements and schedules further identifying and describing the Collateral in which a security interest is purported to be granted by Grantor pursuant to this Agreement and such other reports in connection therewith as the Secured Party may reasonably request, all in reasonable detail.

(c) At any time and from time to time, upon the written request of the Secured Party, and at the sole expense of the applicable Grantor, each Grantor will promptly and duly execute and deliver, and have recorded, such further instruments and documents and take such further actions as the Secured Party may reasonably request for the purpose of obtaining or preserving the full benefits of this Agreement and of the rights and powers herein granted including, filing any financing or continuation statements under the Uniform Commercial Code (or other similar laws) in effect in any jurisdiction with respect to the security interests created hereby and taking any actions necessary to enable the Secured Party to obtain “control” (within the meaning of the UCC) with respect to any Pledged Equity Interests.

4.4 Changes in Name, etc . Each Grantor will not, except upon 30 days’ prior written notice to the Secured Party and delivery to the Secured Party of all additional executed financing statements and other documents reasonably requested by the Secured Party to maintain the validity, perfection and priority of the security interests provided for herein, (i) change its jurisdiction of organization or the location of its chief executive office or sole place of business or principal residence from that referred to in Section 3.3 or (ii) change its name.

4.5 Notice of Liens . Each Grantor will advise the Secured Party promptly, in reasonable detail, of any Lien (other than the Lien created hereby) on any of the Collateral.

4.6 Pledged Equity Interests .

(a) If any Grantor shall become entitled to receive or shall receive any certificate (including, without limitation, any certificate representing a dividend or a distribution in connection with any reclassification, increase or reduction of capital or any certificate issued in connection with any reorganization), option or rights in respect of the Capital Stock of any Issuer, whether in addition to, in substitution of, as a conversion of, or in exchange for, any of the Pledged Equity Interests, or otherwise in respect thereof, such Grantor shall accept the same as the agent of the Secured Party, hold the same in trust for the Secured Party and deliver the same forthwith to the Secured Party in the exact form received, duly indorsed by such Grantor to the Secured Party, if required, together with an undated instrument of transfer covering such certificate duly executed in blank by such Grantor, to be held by the Secured Party, subject to the terms hereof, as additional security for the Secured Obligations. Any sums paid upon or in respect of the Pledged Equity Interests upon the liquidation or dissolution of any Issuer shall be paid over to the Secured Party to be held by it hereunder as additional security for the Secured Obligations, and in case any distribution of capital shall be made on or in respect of the Pledged Equity Interests or any property shall be distributed upon or with respect to the Pledged Equity Interests pursuant to the recapitalization or reclassification of the capital of any Issuer or pursuant to the reorganization thereof, the property so distributed shall be delivered to the Secured Party to be held by it hereunder as additional security for the Secured Obligations. If any sums of money or property so paid or distributed in respect of the Pledged Equity Interests shall be received by any Grantor, such Grantor shall, until such money or property is paid or delivered to Secured Party, hold such money or property in trust for the Secured Party, segregated from other funds of the such Grantor, as additional security for the Secured Obligations.

 

8


(b) Without the prior written consent of the Secured Party, the Grantors will not (i) vote to enable, or take any other action to permit, any Issuer to issue any Capital Stock of any nature or to issue any other securities convertible into or granting the right to purchase or exchange for any Capital Stock of any nature of any Issuer other than issuances in connection with employee stock option plans or other employee incentive plans, which issuances do not, in the aggregate, exceed 20 percent of the Capital Stock of any Issuer, (ii) sell, assign, transfer, exchange, or otherwise dispose of, or grant any option with respect to, the Pledged Equity Interests or Proceeds thereof, provided that any Grantor may transfer, subject to the Lien created hereby, the Capital Stock of any Issuer to (x) any wholly owned Subsidiary of a Grantor or (y) any other Person (other than in a Non-Qualifying Change of Control) if by a supplement to this Agreement in form and substance satisfactory to the Secured Party (A) such wholly owned Subsidiary or other Person becomes a Guarantor and a Grantor hereunder and grants to the Secured Party a security interest in the Capital Stock of such Issuer, (B) the applicable Grantor grants a security interest in the Capital Stock in any such wholly owned Subsidiary and (C) all steps necessary or desirable in the opinion of the Secured Party are taken to perfect the security interests in the Capital Stock of such Issuer and the Capital Stock of any such wholly owned Subsidiary or (iii) create, incur or permit to exist any Lien or option in favor of, or any claim of any Person with respect to, any of the Pledged Equity Interests or Proceeds thereof, or any interest therein, except for the security interests created by this Agreement.

SECTION 5. REMEDIAL PROVISIONS

5.1 Pledged Equity Interests .

(a) Unless an Event of Default shall have occurred and be continuing and the Secured Party shall have given notice to the Grantors of the Secured Party’s intent to exercise its corresponding rights pursuant to Section 5.1(b) (provided that no such notice shall be required in the case of a Bankruptcy Event), the Grantors shall be permitted to receive and use all cash dividends and other distributions paid in respect of the Pledged Equity Interests and to exercise all voting and corporate or other organizational rights with respect to the Pledged Equity Interests; provided, however, that no vote shall be cast or corporate or other organizational right exercised or other action taken which, in the Secured Party’s reasonable judgment, would impair the Collateral or which would be inconsistent with or result in any violation of any provision of the this Agreement or the Stock Purchase Agreement.

(b) If an Event of Default shall occur and be continuing and the Secured Party shall give notice of its intent to exercise such rights to the Grantors (provided that no such notice shall be required in the case of a Bankruptcy Event of Default), (i) the Secured Party shall have the right to receive any and all cash dividends, payments or other Proceeds paid in respect of the Pledged Equity Interests and make application thereof to the Secured Obligations, in such order as the Secured Party may determine, and (ii) at the Secured Party’s option any or all of the Pledged Equity Interests shall be registered in the name of the Secured Party or its nominee, and the Secured Party or its nominee may thereafter exercise (x) all voting, corporate and other rights pertaining to such Pledged Equity Interests at any meeting of shareholders of the relevant Issuer or Issuers or otherwise and (y) any and all rights of conversion, exchange and subscription and any other rights, privileges or options pertaining to such Pledged Equity Interests as if it were the absolute owner thereof (including, without limitation, the right to exchange at its discretion any and all of such Pledged Equity Interests upon the merger, consolidation, reorganization, recapitalization or other fundamental change in the corporate or other organizational structure of any Issuer, or upon the exercise by any Grantor or the Secured Party of any right, privilege or option

 

9


pertaining to such Pledged Equity Interests, and in connection therewith, the right to deposit and deliver any and all of the Pledged Equity Interests with any committee, depositary, transfer agent, registrar or other designated agency upon such terms and conditions as the Secured Party may determine), all without liability except to account for property actually received by it, but the Secured Party shall have no duty to the Grantors to exercise any such right, privilege or option and shall not be responsible for any failure to do so or delay in so doing.

(c) Each Grantor will execute and deliver, or cause to be executed and delivered, to the Secured Party all such proxies and other instruments as the Secured Party may reasonably request for the purpose of enabling the Secured Party to exercise the voting and other rights which it is entitled to exercise pursuant to Section 5.1(b).

(d) Each Grantor hereby authorizes and instructs each Issuer of any Pledged Equity Interests pledged by such Grantor hereunder to (i) comply with any instruction received by it from the Secured Party in writing that (x) states that an Event of Default has occurred and is continuing and (y) is otherwise in accordance with the terms of this Agreement, without any other or further instructions from such Grantor, and such Grantor agrees that each Issuer shall be fully protected in so complying, and (ii) unless otherwise expressly permitted hereby, pay any dividends or other payments with respect to the Pledged Equity Interests directly to the Secured Party.

5.2 Code and Other Remedies . If an Event of Default shall occur and be continuing, the Secured Party may exercise, in addition to all other rights and remedies granted to it in this Agreement, the Stock Purchase Agreement and any other instrument or agreement securing, evidencing or relating to the Secured Obligations, all rights and remedies of a secured party under the UCC or any other applicable law. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, the Secured Party, without demand of performance or other demand, presentment, protest, advertisement or notice of any kind (except any notice required by law referred to below) to or upon any Grantor or any other Person (all and each of which demands, defenses, advertisements and notices are hereby waived), may in such circumstances forthwith collect, receive, appropriate and realize upon the Collateral, or any part thereof, and/or may forthwith sell, lease, assign, give option or options to purchase, or otherwise dispose of and deliver the Collateral or any part thereof (or contract to do any of the foregoing), in one or more parcels at public or private sale or sales, at any exchange, broker’s board or office of the Secured Party or elsewhere upon such terms and conditions as it may deem advisable and at such prices as it may deem best, for cash or on credit or for future delivery without assumption of any credit risk. The Secured Party shall have the right upon any such public sale or sales, and, to the extent permitted by law, upon any such private sale or sales, to purchase the whole or any part of the Collateral so sold, free of any right or equity of redemption in the Grantors, which right or equity is hereby waived and released. Each Grantor further agrees, at the Secured Party’s request, to assemble the Collateral and make it available to the Secured Party at places which the Secured Party shall reasonably select, whether at and Grantor’s premises or elsewhere. The Secured Party shall apply the net proceeds of any action taken by it pursuant to this Section 5.2, after deducting all reasonable costs and expenses of every kind incurred in connection therewith or incidental to the care or safekeeping of any of the Collateral or in any way relating to the Collateral or the rights of the Secured Party hereunder, including, without limitation, reasonable attorneys’ fees and disbursements, to the payment and satisfaction in whole or in part of the Secured Obligations, in such order as the Secured Party may elect, and only after such application and after the payment by the Secured Party of any other amount required by any provision of law, including, without limitation, Section 9-615(a)(3) of the UCC, need the Secured Party account for the surplus, if any, to the Grantors. To the extent permitted by applicable law, each Grantor waives all claims, damages and demands it may acquire against the Secured Party arising out of the exercise by them of any rights hereunder. If any notice of a proposed sale or other disposition of Collateral shall be required by law, such notice shall be deemed reasonable and proper if given at least 10 days before such sale or other disposition.

 

10


5.3 Sales of Collateral .

(a) Each Grantor recognizes that the Secured Party may be unable to effect a public sale of any or all the Pledged Equity Interests, by reason of certain prohibitions contained in the Securities Act and applicable state securities laws or otherwise, and may be compelled to resort to one or more private sales thereof to a restricted group of purchasers which will be obliged to agree, among other things, to acquire such securities for their own account for investment and not with a view to the distribution or resale thereof. Each Grantor acknowledges and agrees that any such private sale may result in prices and other terms less favorable than if such sale were a public sale and, notwithstanding such circumstances, agrees that any such private sale shall be deemed to have been made in a commercially reasonable manner. The Secured Party shall be under no obligation to delay a sale of any of the Pledged Equity Interests for the period of time necessary to permit the Issuer thereof to register such securities for public sale under the Securities Act, or under applicable state securities laws, even if such Issuer would agree to do so.

(b) Each Grantor agrees to use its best efforts to do or cause to be done all such other acts as may be necessary to make such sale or sales of all or any portion of the Pledged Equity Interests pursuant to this Section 5.3 valid and binding and in compliance with any and all other applicable laws. Each Grantor further agrees that a breach of any of the covenants contained in this Section 5.3 will cause irreparable injury to the Secured Party, that the Secured Party have no adequate remedy at law in respect of such breach and, as a consequence, that each and every covenant contained in this Section 5.3 shall be specifically enforceable against each such Grantor, and each Grantor hereby waives and agrees not to assert any defenses against an action for specific performance of such covenants except for a defense that no Event of Default has occurred.

5.4 Deficiency . The Grantors shall remain liable for any deficiency if the proceeds of any sale or other disposition of the Collateral are insufficient to pay the Secured Obligations and the fees and disbursements of any attorneys employed by the Secured Party to collect such deficiency.

SECTION 6. THE SECURED PARTY

6.1 Secured Party’s Appointment as Attorney-in-Fact, etc .

(a) Each Grantor hereby irrevocably constitutes and appoints the Secured Party and any officer or agent thereof, with full power of substitution, as its true and lawful attorney-in-fact with full irrevocable power and authority in the place and stead of such Grantor and in the name of such Grantor or in its own name, for the purpose of carrying out the terms of this Agreement, to take any and all appropriate action and to execute any and all documents and instruments which may be necessary or desirable to accomplish the purposes of this Agreement, and, without limiting the generality of the foregoing, each Grantor hereby gives the Secured Party the power and right, on behalf of such Grantor, without notice to or assent by such Grantor, to do any or all of the following:

(i) pay or discharge taxes and Liens levied or placed on or threatened against the Collateral;

(ii) to receive, indorse and collect any other instruments or documents in connection with the Collateral;

 

11


(iii) execute, in connection with any sale provided for in Section 5, any indorsements, assignments or other instruments of conveyance or transfer with respect to the Collateral; and

(iv) (1) direct any party liable for any payment under any of the Collateral to make payment of any and all moneys due or to become due thereunder directly to the Secured Party or as the Secured Party shall direct; (2) commence and prosecute any suits, actions or proceedings at law or in equity in any court of competent jurisdiction to collect the Collateral or any portion thereof and to enforce any other right in respect of any Collateral; (3) defend any suit, action or proceeding brought against such Grantor with respect to any Collateral; (4) settle, compromise or adjust any such suit, action or proceeding and, in connection therewith, give such discharges or releases as the Secured Party may deem appropriate; and (5) generally, sell, transfer, pledge and make any agreement with respect to or otherwise deal with any of the Collateral as fully and completely as though the Secured Party were the absolute owner thereof for all purposes, and do, at the Secured Party’s option and such Grantor’s expense, at any time, or from time to time, all acts and things which the Secured Party deems necessary to protect, preserve or realize upon the Collateral and the Secured Party’s security interests therein and to effect the intent of this Agreement, all as fully and effectively as such Grantor might do.

Anything in this Section 6.1(a) to the contrary notwithstanding, the Secured Party agrees that it will not exercise any rights under the power of attorney provided for in this Section 6.1(a) unless an Event of Default shall have occurred and be continuing.

(b) For so long as an Event of Default shall have occurred and be continuing, if any Grantor fails to perform or comply with any of its agreements contained herein, the Secured Party, at its option, but without any obligation so to do, may perform or comply, or otherwise cause performance or compliance, with such agreement. No such action will create any liability on the part of the Secured Party to any Grantor.

(c) The expenses of the Secured Party incurred in connection with actions undertaken as provided in this Section 6.1, together with interest thereon at a rate per annum equal to the Interest Rate, from the date of payment by the Secured Party to the date reimbursed by the Grantors, shall be payable by the Grantors to the Secured Party on demand.

(d) Each Grantor hereby ratifies all that said attorneys shall lawfully do or cause to be done by virtue hereof. All powers, authorizations and agencies contained in this Agreement are coupled with an interest and are irrevocable until this Agreement is terminated and the security interests created hereby are released.

6.2 Duty of Secured Party . The Secured Party’s sole duty with respect to the custody, safekeeping and physical preservation of the Collateral in its possession, under Section 9-207 of the UCC or otherwise, shall be to deal with it in the same manner as the Secured Party deals with similar property for its own account. Neither the Secured Party nor any of its officers, directors, employees or agents shall be liable for failure to demand, collect or realize upon any of the Collateral or for any delay in doing so or shall be under any obligation to sell or otherwise dispose of any Collateral upon the request of any Grantor or any other Person or to take any other action whatsoever with regard to the Collateral or any part thereof. The powers conferred on the Secured Party hereunder are solely to protect the Secured Party’s interests in the Collateral and shall not impose any duty upon the Secured Party to exercise any such powers. The Secured Party shall be accountable only for amounts that it actually receives as a result of the exercise of such powers, and neither it nor any of its officers, directors, employees or agents shall be responsible to any Grantor for any act or failure to act hereunder, except for its own gross negligence or willful misconduct.

 

12


6.3 No Obligations or Liability to any Grantor . The rights and powers of the Secured Party hereunder are not contingent upon the pursuit by the Secured Party of any right or remedy against any Grantor or against any other Person which may be or become liable in respect of any of the Secured Obligations or against any other collateral security or guarantee therefor or right of offset with respect thereto. The Secured Party will not be liable for any failure to demand, collect or realize upon all or any part of the Collateral or for any delay in doing so, nor is Secured Party under any obligation to sell or otherwise dispose of any Collateral upon the request of any Grantor or any other Person or to take any other action whatsoever with regard to the Collateral or any part thereof. No action or inaction on the part of Secured Party hereunder will release any Grantor from any of its obligations hereunder or under the Stock Purchase Agreement, or constitute an assumption of any such obligations on the part of the Secured Party, or cause the Secured Party to become subject to any obligation or liability to any Grantor. The Secured Party has no obligation to perform any of the obligations or duties of any Grantor as holder of Pledged Equity Interests of the Issuers.

6.4 Additional Security . Without notice to or consent of any Grantor and without impairment of the security interest and rights granted pursuant to this Agreement, the Secured Party may accept, from the Issuers or from any other Person or Persons, additional security for the Secured Obligations. Neither the existence of the security created by this Agreement nor the acceptance of any such additional security will prevent the Secured Party from resorting first to either the Collateral or such additional security, in each case without affecting the Secured Party’s rights granted pursuant to this Agreement.

6.5 Release of the Pledge and Security Interest Created Hereby . Upon payment in full and satisfaction of the Secured Obligations, the Secured Party will, promptly upon the written request of the Buyer, return to the Buyer all Collateral held by the Secured Party and execute and deliver to, or as directed in writing by, the Buyer appropriate instruments or UCC termination statements (in due form for recording or filing) sufficient to release the Collateral from the pledge and security interest created hereby.

6.6 Financing Statements . Pursuant to any applicable law, each Grantor authorizes the Secured Party to file or record financing statements and other filing or recording documents or instruments with respect to the Collateral without the signature of such Grantor in such form and in such offices as the Secured Party deems appropriate to perfect the security interests of the Secured Party under this Agreement. Each Grantor hereby ratifies and authorizes the filing by the Secured Party of any financing statement with respect to the Collateral made prior to the date hereof.

SECTION 7. MISCELLANEOUS

7.1 Amendments in Writing . None of the terms or provisions of this Agreement may be waived, amended, supplemented or otherwise modified except in a writing signed by the Grantors and the Secured Party.

7.2 Notices . All notices, requests, demands and other communications to or upon (i) the Secured Party or Buyer hereunder shall be effected in the manner provided for in the Stock Purchase Agreement and (ii) each Grantor other than Buyer shall be effected in the manner provided for in the Stock Purchase Agreement using the contact information for such Grantor set forth on the signature pages hereof.

 

13


7.3 No Waiver by Course of Conduct; Cumulative Remedies . The Secured Party shall not by any act (except by a written instrument pursuant to Section 7.1), delay, indulgence, omission or otherwise be deemed to have waived any right or remedy hereunder or to have acquiesced in any Default or Event of Default. No failure to exercise, nor any delay in exercising, on the part of the Secured Party, any right, power or privilege hereunder shall operate as a waiver thereof. No single or partial exercise of any right, power or privilege hereunder shall preclude any other or further exercise thereof or the exercise of any other right, power or privilege. A waiver by the Secured Party of any right or remedy hereunder on any one occasion shall not be construed as a bar to any right or remedy which the Secured Party would otherwise have on any future occasion. The rights and remedies herein provided are cumulative, may be exercised singly or concurrently and are not exclusive of any other rights or remedies provided by law.

7.4 Enforcement Expenses; Indemnification .

(a) Each Grantor agrees to pay or reimburse the Secured Party for all its costs and expenses incurred in collecting the Secured Obligations or otherwise enforcing or preserving any rights under this Agreement, including, without limitation, the fees and disbursements of counsel to the Secured Party.

(b) Each Grantor agrees to pay, and to save the Secured Party harmless from, any and all liabilities with respect to, or resulting from any delay in paying, any and all stamp, excise, sales or other taxes which may be payable or determined to be payable with respect to any of the Collateral or in connection with any of the transactions contemplated by this Agreement.

(c) Each Grantor agrees to pay, and to save the Secured Party harmless from, any and all liabilities, obligations, losses, damages, penalties, actions, judgments, suits, costs, expenses or disbursements of any kind or nature whatsoever owed to third parties with respect to the execution, delivery, enforcement, performance and administration of this Agreement.

(d) All amounts owing under this Section 7.4 shall accrue interest until paid in full at the Interest Rate. All such amounts shall constitute Secured Obligations and shall be payable on demand.

(e) The agreements in this Section 7.4 shall survive repayment of the Secured Obligations and all other amounts payable under the Stock Purchase Agreement and hereunder.

7.5 Successors and Assigns . This Agreement shall be binding upon the successors and assigns of the Grantors and shall inure to the benefit of the Secured Party and its successors and assigns; provided that a Grantor may not assign, transfer or delegate any of its rights or obligations under this Agreement without the prior written consent of the Secured Party.

7.6 Counterparts . This Agreement may be executed by one or more of the parties to this Agreement on any number of separate counterparts, and all of said counterparts taken together shall be deemed to constitute one and the same instrument.

7.7 Severability . Any provision of this Agreement which is prohibited or unenforceable in any jurisdiction shall, as to such jurisdiction, be ineffective to the extent of such prohibition or unenforceability without invalidating the remaining provisions hereof, and any such prohibition or unenforceability in any jurisdiction shall not invalidate or render unenforceable such provision in any other jurisdiction.

7.8 Section Headings . The Section headings used in this Agreement are for convenience of reference only and are not to affect the construction hereof or be taken into consideration in the interpretation hereof.

 

14


7.9 Integration . The Stock Purchase Agreement, this Agreement and the other Ancillary Documents represent the entire agreement of the Grantors and the Secured Party with respect to the subject matter hereof and thereof, and there are no promises, undertakings, representations or warranties by the Grantors or the Secured Party relative to subject matter hereof and thereof not expressly set forth or referred to herein or therein.

7.10 GOVERNING LAW . THIS AGREEMENT SHALL BE GOVERNED BY, AND CONSTRUED IN ACCORDANCE WITH, THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF NEW YORK, REGARDLESS OF THE LAWS THAT MIGHT OTHERWISE GOVERN UNDER APPLICABLE PRINCIPLES OF CONFLICTS OF LAWS OTHER THAN SECTIONS 5-1401 AND 5-1402 OF THE NEW YORK GENERAL OBLIGATIONS LAW, PROVIDED THAT IF BY REASON OF MANDATORY PROVISIONS OF LAW. THE PERFECTION OR THE EFFECT OF PERFECTION OR NON-PERFECTION OR THE PRIORITY OF THE SECURITY INTERESTS IN ANY COLLATERAL IS GOVERNED BY THE LAW OF ANOTHER JURISDICTION, THE LAW OF SUCH JURISDICTION SHALL GOVERN.

7.11 Submission To Jurisdiction; Waivers . Each Grantor hereby irrevocably and unconditionally:

(a) submits for itself and its property to the exclusive jurisdiction of any court of the United States of America or any state court, which in either case is located in the City of New York (each, a “ New York Court ”) for purposes of enforcing this Agreement or determining any claim arising from or related to the transactions contemplated by this Agreement. In any such action, suit or other proceeding, each of Seller and each Grantor irrevocably and unconditionally waives and agrees not to assert by way of motion, as a defense or otherwise any claim that it is not subject to the jurisdiction of any such New York Court, that such action, suit or other proceeding is not subject to the jurisdiction of any such New York Court, that such action, suit or other proceeding is brought in an inconvenient forum or that the venue of such action, suit or other proceeding is improper; provided, however, that nothing set forth in this sentence shall prohibit either Seller or the Buyer from removing any matter from one New York Court to another New York Court. Each of Seller and each Grantor also agrees that any final and unappealable judgment against a party hereto in connection with any action, suit or other proceeding shall be conclusive and binding on such party and that such award or judgment may be enforced in any court of competent jurisdiction, either within or outside of the United States of America. A certified or exemplified copy of such award or judgment shall be conclusive evidence of the fact and amount of such award or judgment. Seller and each Grantor agree that any process or other paper to be served in connection with any action or proceeding under this Agreement shall, if delivered, sent or mailed in accordance with Section 7.2, constitute good, proper and sufficient service thereof.

7.12 WAIVER OF JURY TRIAL . EACH PARTY TO THIS AGREEMENT ACKNOWLEDGES AND AGREES THAT ANY CONTROVERSY WHICH MAY ARISE UNDER THE TRANSACTION AGREEMENTS IS LIKELY TO INVOLVE COMPLICATED AND DIFFICULT ISSUES, AND THEREFORE EACH SUCH PARTY HEREBY IRREVOCABLY AND UNCONDITIONALLY WAIVES ANY RIGHT SUCH PARTY MAY HAVE TO A TRIAL BY JURY IN RESPECT OF ANY LITIGATION DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO THIS AGREEMENT OR THE OTHER TRANSACTION AGREEMENTS, OR THE TRANSACTIONS CONTEMPLATED BY THIS AGREEMENT OR THE OTHER TRANSACTION AGREEMENTS OR THE FORMATION, BREACH, TERMINATION OR VALIDITY OF THIS AGREEMENT OR ANY OTHER TRANSACTION AGREEMENT. EACH PARTY HERETO CERTIFIES AND ACKNOWLEDGES THAT (I) NO REPRESENTATIVE, AGENT OR ATTORNEY OR ANY OTHER PARTY HAS REPRESENTED, EXPRESSLY OR OTHERWISE, THAT SUCH

 

15


OTHER PARTY WOULD NOT, IN THE EVENT OF LITIGATION, SEEK TO ENFORCE THE FOREGOING WAIVER, (II) EACH PARTY HERETO UNDERSTANDS AND HAS CONSIDERED THE IMPLICATIONS OF THIS WAIVER, (III) EACH PARTY HERETO MAKES THIS WAIVER VOLUNTARILY AND (IV) EACH PARTY HERETO HAS BEEN INDUCED TO ENTER INTO THIS AGREEMENT BY, AMONG OTHER THINGS, THE MUTUAL WAIVERS AND CERTIFICATIONS OF THIS SECTION 7.12. ANY PARTY HERETO MAY FILE AN ORIGINAL COUNTERPART OR A COPY OF THIS AGREEMENT WITH ANY COURT AS WRITTEN EVIDENCE OF THE CONSENT OF THE PARTIES TO THE WAIVER OF THEIR RIGHT TO TRIAL BY JURY.

7.13 Rights of Parties . Notwithstanding anything in this Agreement to the contrary, the rights of each party hereto, including all rights under Section 5, are subject to the compliance with all mandatory provisions of applicable law.

 

16


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, each of the undersigned has caused this Guarantee and Pledge Agreement to be duly executed and delivered as of the date first above written.

 

“Grantors”

 

HARBINGER OM, LLC

By:   /s/ Francis T. McCarron
  Title: Executive Vice President
OLD MUTUAL U.S. LIFE HOLDINGS, INC.
By:   /s/ Barry G. Ward
  Title: Executive Vice President and CFO
“Secured Party”
OM GROUP (UK) LIMITED
By:   /s/ Phillip Broadley
  Title: Finance Director


Schedule 1

DESCRIPTION OF PLEDGED EQUITY INTERESTS

Name of Grantor: Harbinger OM, LLC

Name of Issuer: Old Mutual U.S. Life Holdings, Inc.

Type of Capital Stock: Shares of Common Stock

Number of Shares of Issuer: 102.513761

Stock Certificate Number: 6

Percentage of Capital Stock of Issuer: 100%

Name of Grantor: Old Mutual U.S. Life Holdings, Inc.

Name of Issuer: OM Financial Life Insurance Company

Type of Capital Stock: Shares of Common Stock

Number of Shares of Issuer: 30,000.00

Stock Certificate Number: 8

Percentage of Capital Stock of Issuer: 100%


Schedule 2

FILINGS AND OTHER ACTIONS

REQUIRED TO PERFECT SECURITY INTERESTS

Uniform Commercial Code Filings

UCC-1 Financing Statements to be filed on behalf of each Grantor with the Delaware Secretary of State.

Other Actions

Delivery to the Secured Party of certificates representing all of the Pledged Equity Interests, along with stock powers with respect to such Pledged Equity Interests duly endorsed in blank, in proper form for transfer.


Schedule 3

LOCATION OF JURISDICTION OF ORGANIZATION AND CHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICE

 

Name of Grantor

 

Jurisdiction of
Organization

 

Location of Chief
Executive Office

Harbinger OM, LLC

  Delaware   450 Park Ave., 30 th Floor
New York, NY 10022

Old Mutual U.S. Life Holdings, Inc.

  Delaware   1001 Fleet St., 6 th Floor
Baltimore, MD 21202

Exhibit 10.3

 

 

 

LEASE AGREEMENT

between

HARBOR EAST PARCEL C—COMMERCIAL, LLC

(as Landlord)

and

OLD MUTUAL BUSINESS SERVICES, INC.

(as Tenant)

Dated: September 30, 2010

Effective: October 1, 2010

 

 

 


TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

         Page  

1.

  Definitions; Recitals      1   

2.

  Delivery of Leased Premises      9   

3.

  Rent and Additional Charges      10   

4.

  Common Areas      15   

5.

  Services and Utilities      15   

6.

  Use of Leased Premises      19   

7.

  Care of Leased Premises      22   

8.

  Rules and Regulations      23   

9.

  Tenant’s Alterations      23   

10.

  Name of Building; Tenant’s Signs      26   

11.

  Tenant’s Insurance      27   

12.

  Landlord’s Insurance      28   

13.

  Damage by Fire or Other Casualty      30   

14.

  Condemnation      33   

15.

  Assignment and Subletting      34   

16.

  Default Provisions      35   

16A.

  Landlord Default Provisions      37   

17.

  Guaranty      38   

18.

  Bankruptcy Termination Provision      38   

19.

  Landlord May Perform Tenant’s Obligations      39   

20.

  Subordination/Non-Disturbance      39   

21.

  Attornment      40   

 

i


22.

  Quiet Enjoyment      41   

23.

  Landlord’s Right of Access to Leased Premises      41   

24.

  Limitation on Landlord’s Liability      42   

25.

  Estoppel Certificates      43   

26.

  Surrender of Leased Premises      44   

27.

  Holding Over      44   

28.

  Arbitration      44   

29.

  Parking      44   

30.

  Transfer of Landlord’s Interest      45   

31.

  Leasing Commissions      45   

32.

  Recordation      45   

33.

  Commercial Purposes      46   

34.

  General Provisions      46   

35.

  Options to Extend Term      48   

36.

  Contraction Option      50   

37.

  Storage Space      51   

38.

  Satellite Dish      52   

39.

  Intentionally Deleted      53   

40.

  Subject to REA      53   

41.

  Costs of Enforcement      53   

42.

  Rule Against Perpetuities      53   

 

ii


EXHIBITS

 

A Floor Plan of Leased Premises (6 th and 7 th Floors)

 

A-1 Floor Plan of Leased Premises (Portion of 4 th Floor) (to be attached)

 

B Project Description

 

C Specifications for Office Cleaning

 

D Rules and Regulations

 

E Determination of Rentable Area

 

F Description of Land

 

G Form of Guaranty

 

H Subordination, Non-Disturbance and Attornment Agreement

 

I Intentionally Omitted

 

J Security

 

iii


LEASE AGREEMENT

THIS LEASE AGREEMENT is made as of this 30 th day of September, 2010, with an effective date of October 1, 2010 (the “Effective Date”), between (i)  HARBOR EAST PARCEL C – COMMERCIAL, LLC , a Maryland limited liability company (hereinafter referred to as “Landlord”), and (ii)  OLD MUTUAL BUSINESS SERVICES, INC. , a Maryland corporation (hereinafter referred to as “Tenant”).

RECITALS :

WHEREAS , Landlord and OM Financial Life Insurance Company (successor to Fidelity and Guaranty Life Insurance Company (“Original Tenant”)) are parties to that certain Lease Agreement dated June 20, 2000, as amended by that certain First Amendment to Lease dated July 25, 2001 (the “Original Lease”), pursuant to which Landlord leased to Original Tenant those premises consisting of the sixth and seventh floors (the “Existing Premises”) in the office building having an address of 1001 Fleet Street, Baltimore, Maryland 21202 (the “Building”) and as more particularly set forth in the Original Lease;

WHEREAS , Original Tenant assigned all of its interest in and to the Original Lease to Tenant;

WHEREAS , the term of the Original Lease expires on September 30, 2010;

WHEREAS , the parties desire to enter into this Lease for the purpose of setting forth their entire agreement with respect to the lease from and after the Effective Date of the Existing Premises as well as certain additional premises on the fourth floor of the Building.

NOW, THEREFORE , in consideration of the foregoing recitals and for other good and valuable consideration, the receipt and sufficiency of which are hereby acknowledged, Landlord and Tenant agree as follows:

1. Definitions; Recitals.

(a) General Interpretive Principles . For purposes of this Lease, except as otherwise expressly provided or unless the context otherwise requires, (i) the terms defined in this Section have the meanings assigned to them in this Section and include the plural as well as the singular, and the use of any gender herein shall be deemed to include the other genders; (ii) accounting terms not otherwise defined herein have the meanings assigned to them in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles; (iii) references herein to “Sections,” “subsections,” “paragraphs” and other subdivisions without reference to a document are to designated Sections, subsections, paragraphs and other subdivisions of this Lease; (iv) a reference to a subsection without further reference to a Section is a reference to such subsection as contained in the same Section in which the reference appears, and this rule shall also apply to paragraphs and other subdivisions; (v) the words “herein,” “hereof,” “hereunder” and other words of similar import refer to this Lease as a whole and not to any particular provision; and (vi) the word “including” means “including, but not limited to.”


(b) Definitions . As used in this Lease the following words and phrases shall have the meanings indicated:

Additional Charges : All amounts payable by Tenant to Landlord under this Lease other than Basic Rent. All Additional Charges shall be deemed to be additional rent and all remedies applicable to the non-payment of Basic Rent shall be applicable thereto.

Additional Insureds : Any Mortgagee of the Land or the Building, or both, Landlord’s management agent for the Building and, if Landlord is a lessee of the Land or the Building, or both, the fee owner.

Affiliate : When used with respect to a Person, any corporation, partnership, joint venture, trust or individual controlled by, under common control with, or which controls such Person (the term “control” for these purposes shall mean the ability, whether by the ownership of shares or other equity interests, by contract or otherwise, to elect a majority of the directors of a corporation, to make management decisions on behalf of, or independently to select the managing partner of, a partnership, or otherwise to have the power independently to remove and then select a majority of those individuals exercising managerial authority over an entity, and control shall be conclusively presumed in the case of the ownership of fifty (50%) or more of the equity interests).

Alterations : Any alterations, installations, improvements, additions, renovations or physical changes to the Leased Premises (other than Building Standard Work) made by or on behalf of Tenant or any Person claiming through or under Tenant before or after the Lease Commencement Date.

Base Building : The Building constructed on the Land by Landlord in accordance with plans and specification prepared by Landlord’s architect, in its current “as-is” condition.

Base Year : Calendar year 2010.

Base Year for Real Estate Taxes : July 1, 2010 to June 30, 2011.

 

2


Basic Rent : For each Lease Year, an amount equal to the product obtained by multiplying the then-applicable Rentable Area by the Rent per Square Foot for such Lease Year. Basic Rent for the Existing Premises shall be as follows:

EXISTING PREMISES BASIC RENT

 

Lease Year

   Rate Per Sq. Ft.      Annual Base Rent     Monthly Base Rent  

10/1/2010 – 9/30/2011

   $ 29.00       $ 1,666,630.00      $ 138,885.83   

10/1/2011 – 9/30/2012

   $ 29.00       $ 1,666,630.00      $ 138,885.83   

10/1/2012 – 9/30/2013

   $ 29.87       $ 1,716,628.90      $ 143,052.41   

10/1/2013 – 9/30/2014

   $ 30.77       $ 1,768,315.90      $ 147,362.66   

10/1/2014 – 9/30/2015

   $ 31.69       $ 1,821,224.30      $ 151,768.69   

10/1/2015 – 9/30/2016

   $ 32.64       $ 1,875,820.80      $ 156,318.40   

10/1/2016 – 9/30/2017

   $ 33.62       $ 1,932,141.40      $ 161,011.78   

10/1/2017 – 9/30/2018

   $ 34.63       $ 1,990,186.10      $ 165,848.84   

10/1/2018 – 9/30/2019

   $ 35.67       $ 2,049,954.90      $ 170,829.57   

10/1/2019 – 9/30/2020

   $ 36.74       $ 2,111,447.80      $ 175,953.98   

10/1/2020 – 5/31/2021

   $ 37.84       $

$

 

2,174,664.80

1,449,776.48

(8 months

  

 

  $ 181,222.06   

Basic Rent for the 4th Floor Space shall commence as of the date the 4th Floor Space becomes part of the Leased Premises in accordance with Section 2 hereof, which date the parties anticipate will be June 1, 2011.

Building : The office building located on the Land, which has a mailing address of 1001 Fleet Street, Baltimore, Maryland 21202.

Building Rentable Area : The total net rentable area in the Building, as determined by Landlord’s architect from the architectural plans for the Building, without field measurement, in accordance with the provisions of Exhibit E to this Lease is two hundred seven thousand two hundred thirty-two (207,232) square feet.

Business Days : All days except Saturdays, Sundays and Legal Holidays.

Common Areas : All areas, spaces and improvements within the Building and on the Land which are provided by Landlord, without a separate charge, for the non-exclusive convenience and use of the tenants of the Building and their agents, employees and invitees, including public elevators, lobbies, corridors, escalators, stairways and stairwells, public restrooms and comfort stations, truck loading areas and entrances and exits designated by Landlord for ingress and egress.

Default Interest Rate : A fluctuating rate per annum equal to the lesser of (i) the sum of (x) the prime rate of Bank of America, N.A. (or similar commercial bank if Bank of America, N.A. ceases to exist), said prime rate to change from time to time as and when the change is announced as being effective, and (y) three percent (3%), or (ii) the maximum rate of interest chargeable under applicable law, if any, with respect to the applicable payment.

Event of Default : Any of the events set forth in Section 16(a) as an event of default.

 

3


Floor : A floor of the Building located above the foundation slab or above a below-grade area which is designated as a cellar or a basement. The term “Floor” preceded by a number shall mean the indicated floor of the Building.

Initial After-Hours HVAC Rate : Sixty-Five Dollars ($65) per hour per Floor for the first Lease Year.

Insurance Requirements : The usual and customary provisions and requirements of all policies of fire, property damage and liability insurance from time to time maintained by Landlord, and all rules and regulations promulgated by any Board of Fire Insurance Underwriters or fire insurance rating organization, applicable from time to time to the Building, the Land or the Parking Facilities.

Land : The parcel of real property described in Exhibit F to this Lease.

Landlord : The landlord named herein and any subsequent owner or lessee, from time to time, of Landlord’s interest in the Land and/or the Building during the period of such owner’s or lessee’s ownership.

Landlord’s Notice Address : c/o H&S Properties Development Corp., 650 South Exeter Street, Suite 200, Baltimore, Maryland 21202, Attention: George Philippou, Esquire.

Lease : This Lease Agreement, as amended from time to time, and all Exhibits, Riders and Addenda attached hereto.

Lease Commencement Date : October 1, 2010.

Lease Year : The period commencing on the Lease Commencement Date and ending on the last day of the month which completes twelve (12) full calendar months after the Lease Commencement Date, and each twelve (12) month period thereafter commencing on the first day after the end of the immediately preceding Lease Year, except that the last Lease Year shall end on the last day of the Term.

Leased Premises : The entire sixth (6th) and seventh (7th) Floors of the Building, and designated as Suites 600 and 700 and outlined on the floor plan attached as Exhibit A to this Lease. Subject to Section 2, as of June 1, 2011, the Leased Premises shall also include a portion of the fourth (4th) Floor of the Building as shown on the floor plan to be attached as Exhibit A-1 .

Leasehold Estate : Tenant’s interest in the Leased Premises pursuant to this Lease.

Leasing Broker : Chesapeake Real Estate Group, LLC.

 

4


Legal Holidays : New Years Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, Christmas Day, the days on which Martin Luther King’s Birthday, President’s Day, Memorial Day, Columbus Day and Veterans Day are observed and those holidays designated by an Executive Order of the President of the United States or by Act of Congress.

Legal Requirements : All laws, statutes, ordinances, orders, rules, regulations and requirements, including all mandatory energy conservation requirements applicable to the Building, of all federal, state and municipal governments, and the appropriate agencies, officers, departments, boards and commissions thereof, whether now or hereafter in force, applicable to the Land, the Building, the Parking Facilities and the Leased Premises, or any part thereof; all applicable local, State and Federal laws and regulations relating to the use on, storage in, and the removal from, the Land and/or the Building of hazardous or toxic material, petro-chemical products or asbestos or products containing asbestos; and all covenants, conditions and restrictions of record affecting the use or occupancy of the Building.

Material Change : A material change in Tenant’s business plan or climate such as (i) the sale of all or a material portion of Tenant, (ii) a change in control of Tenant, (iii) a significant downsizing of Tenant’s workforce to less than one hundred thirty (130) people for two (2) consecutive calendar quarters, (iv) a relocation of Tenant’s headquarters to outside the State of Maryland, or (v) a material reorganization of one or more of the product lines of Tenant.

Mortgage : Any mortgage, deed of trust or other security instrument of record creating an interest in or affecting title to the Land or the Building, or both, or any part thereof, including a leasehold mortgage or subleasehold mortgage, and any and all renewals, modifications, consolidations or extensions of any such instrument; Mortgagee shall mean the holder or beneficiary of any Mortgage.

Operating Expenses : The aggregate of all reasonable and customary costs and expenses incurred on an accrual basis by Landlord in connection with the management, operation, maintenance, repair, cleaning, safety and administration of the Leased Premises, the Building, the Land, the Parking Facilities, and the common areas of the Project, including employees’ wages, salaries, welfare and pension benefits and other fringe benefits; payroll taxes; Real Estate Taxes (but only to the extent of the amount of increases in Real Estate Taxes over the Real Estate Taxes paid in the Base Year for Real Estate Taxes); telephone service; painting of Common Areas; exterminating service; detection and security services; sewer rents and charges; premiums for fire and casualty, liability, rent, workmen’s compensation, sprinkler, water damage and other insurance; repairs and maintenance; building supplies; uniforms and dry cleaning; snow removal; the total cost (including all capacity, energy and usage charges) of obtaining and providing electricity or heating and cooling and life safety power generation from Trigen-Inner Harbor East LLC (or any successor entity, including, without limitation, Veolia Energy Inner Harbor East, LLC) or any other electricity or utility provider and the cost of obtaining and providing water and other public utilities to the Common Areas; trash removal; janitorial and cleaning supplies; cleaning and janitorial services; landscaping maintenance; window cleaning; service contracts for the maintenance of elevators, boilers, HVAC and other mechanical,

 

5


plumbing and electrical equipment; fees for all licenses and permits required for the ownership and operation of the Land, the Building and the Parking Facilities; business license fees and taxes, including those based on Landlord’s rental revenue from the Building (but not including federal, state or local income taxes); sales and use taxes payable in connection with tangible personal property and services purchased for the management, operation, maintenance, repair, cleaning, safety and administration of the Land, the Building and the Parking Facilities; accounting fees relating to the determination of Operating Expenses and Operating Expense increases and the preparation of statements required by tenants’ leases; management fees, whether or not paid to any Person having an interest in or under common ownership with Landlord; fees paid in connection with the challenge of any proposed assessment which would result in an increase in the Real Estate Taxes; purchase and installation of indoor plants in the Common Areas; purchase and installation of additional landscaping not included in the original landscaping plan for the Building and replacement or substitute landscaping; and all other expenses now or hereafter reasonably and customarily incurred in connection with the operation, maintenance, and management of comparable office buildings in the Baltimore, Maryland metropolitan area. If Landlord makes an expenditure for a capital improvement to the Land, the Building or the Parking Facilities, whether by installing energy conservation or labor-saving devices either to (a) reduce Operating Expenses or (b) comply with Legal Requirements that become effective after the date hereof, and if, under generally accepted accounting principles, such expenditure is not a current expense, then, the cost thereof shall be amortized over a period equal to the useful life of such repair, determined in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, and the amortized cost allocated to each calendar year during the Term, together with an interest amount calculated on the unamortized portion thereof using the then-current prime interest rate of Bank of America, N.A., shall be treated as an Operating Expense. The cost of all repairs required to maintain the Building as a first-class office building, other than those related to structural or building systems, shall be treated as an Operating Expense even if the cost would otherwise be classified as a capital expenditure under generally accepted accounting principles provided, however, that the cost thereof shall be amortized over a period equal to the useful life of such improvement, determined in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, and the amortized cost allocated to each calendar year during the Term, together with an interest amount calculated on the unamortized portion thereof using the then-current prime interest rate of Bank of America, N.A. Refunds of Real Estate Taxes (reduced by Landlord’s reasonable expenses in obtaining such refunds), amounts payable by tenants of the Building for after-hours heating or air-conditioning and for excess electrical usage, recoveries of expenses and other separate charges made to tenants of the Building for special services and (to the extent that Operating Expenses include the cost of any repair or reconstruction work) the amount of any insurance recoveries (net of the costs of collection), all determined on an accrual basis, shall be credited against Operating Expenses in computing the amount thereof. Operating Expenses shall not include financing or mortgage costs; depreciation expense; advertising for vacant space or building promotion; leasing commissions; executive salaries; the cost of tenant improvements; ground rent; legal fees for leasing vacant space in the Building or enforcing Landlord’s rights under leases with tenants for space in the Building; the cost of capital improvements, except to the extent expressly permitted above; or, utility charges for providing utilities to tenants in the Building (it being understood that Tenant’s rent payable hereunder is

 

6


“net of utilities”). Notwithstanding the above, beginning in Calendar year 2012, Landlord shall cap the aggregate increase on Landlord’s controllable Operating Expenses, which shall herein mean all Operating Expenses except for Real Property Taxes, Common Area utilities, insurance, snow and ice removal, security services, and wages and benefits, at a maximum of one hundred five percent (105%) over the previous Calendar Year.

Operating Expenses are subject to adjustment as provided in Section 3(d).

Operating Expense Increase : As defined in Section 3(b).

Original Lease Commencement Date : September 7, 2000.

Parking Facilities : The above grade parking structure located in the Building. Subject to the provisions of this Lease, Tenant shall be provided with forty (40) spaces (the “Parking Spaces”) in the Parking Facilities.

Peer Group Buildings : First-class, Class A office buildings in downtown Baltimore of comparable age, quality and location as the Building.

Person : A natural person, a partnership, a corporation and any other form of business or legal association or entity.

Project : That certain project located in Baltimore City, Maryland known as Harbor East more particularly shown on Exhibit B attached hereto, of which the Building and the Land are a part, which Project includes commercial, residential and hotel uses.

Real Estate Taxes : All taxes, assessments, vault rentals, and other charges, if any, general, special or otherwise, including all assessments for schools, public betterments and general or local improvements, including without limitation the Waterfront Partnership Special Benefit District tax, levied or assessed upon or with respect to the ownership of and/or all other taxable interests in the Building and the Land imposed by any public or quasi-public authority having jurisdiction and personal property taxes levied or assessed on Landlord’s personal property used in connection with the management, operation, maintenance, repair, cleaning, safety and administration of the Land and the Building. Real Estate Taxes shall not include any federal or state estate or inheritance taxes or taxes on income, rent taxes, business license fees and arena, business improvement district or similar taxes. A tax bill or true copy thereof, together with any explanatory or detailed statement of the area or property covered thereby, submitted by Landlord to Tenant shall be conclusive evidence of the amount of taxes assessed or levied, as well as of the items taxed. If any real property tax or assessment levied against the land, buildings or improvements covered thereby or the rents reserved therefrom shall be evidenced by improvement or other bonds, or in other form, which may be paid in annual installments only the amount paid or payable in any calendar year, including the interest, if any, thereon, shall be included as Real Estate Taxes for that calendar year.

 

7


Rent per Square Foot : Twenty-Nine Dollars ($29.00) per square foot of Rentable Area during each of the first and second Lease Years. For each Lease Year (or part of a Lease Year) thereafter during the Term, the Rent per Square Foot shall be an amount equal to one hundred three percent (103%) of the Rent per Square Foot for the immediately preceding Lease Year.

Rentable Area : The net rentable area of the Leased Premises comprised of the entire sixth (6 th ) and seventh (7 th ) Floors is fifty-seven thousand four hundred seventy (57,470) square feet. Subject to Section 2, as of June 1, 2011, the Rentable Area shall increase to include a portion of the fourth (4 th ) Floor consisting of approximately six thousand Four Hundred Fifty-Seven (6,457) square feet. As soon as possible following the Effective Date, Landlord’s architect shall determine the exact square footage of the 4th Floor Space, without field measurement, in accordance with the provisions of Exhibit E , at which time the parties agree to enter into an amendment to this Lease to (i) set forth the Rentable Area of the 4th Floor Space, (ii) include a chart showing the Basic Rent for the Leased Premises (including the 4th Floor Space), (iii) attach Exhibit A-1 , (iv) attach a revised Exhibit E , and (iv) amend Section 5(a)(1) to include the percent of the electricity and Trigen Charges costs with respect to the 4th Floor that will be billed to Tenant.

Rules and Regulations : The rules and regulations attached as Exhibit D to this Lease as modified from time to time by Landlord pursuant to Section 8.

Security Deposit : None.

Taking : A taking of property, or any interest therein or right appurtenant or accruing thereto, by condemnation or eminent domain or by action or proceedings, or agreement in lieu thereof, pursuant to governmental authority.

Tenant : The tenant named herein and any permitted assignee under Section 15.

Tenant’s Associates : Tenant’s subtenants, agents, employees, invitees, licensees, customers and clients, and guests or contractors of any of the foregoing.

Tenant’s Notice and Billing Address : Old Mutual Business Services, Inc., 1001 Fleet Street, Suite 600, Baltimore, Maryland 21202, Attention: General Counsel.

Tenant’s Personal Property : All furniture, furnishings, business machines, equipment and other moveable property installed in the Leased Premises by, or at the expense of, Tenant and not affixed to the Land or the Building.

Tenant’s Proportionate Share : The percentage (rounded off to two decimal points) used to determine the amount of certain expenses to be borne by Tenant as provided herein. The parties acknowledge that (i) the Building is used for both commercial and retail uses, and (ii) the Building, of which the Leased Premises is a part, is operated in conjunction with the other buildings and common areas comprising the Project, and that some, but not all Operating Expenses are shared so that different expense items may apply to less than all of the Building and/or the Project, as applicable. Accordingly, “ Tenant’s Proportionate Share

 

8


shall be equal to a fraction, the numerator of which shall be the then-applicable Rentable Area of the Leased Premises and the denominator of which shall be the rentable area in that portion of the Project or the Building, as applicable, (whether leased or occupied or not) as to which the expense element applies, as determined by Landlord in good faith in accordance with reasonable commercial leasing and property management practices.

Term : The period commencing on the Lease Commencement Date and ending on May 31, 2021, but in any event the Term shall end on any date when this Lease is sooner terminated.

Unavoidable Delays : Delays caused by strikes, acts of God, lockouts, labor difficulties, riots, explosions, sabotage, accidents, shortages or inability to obtain labor or materials, Legal Requirements, governmental restrictions, enemy action, civil commotion, fire or other casualty or similar causes beyond the reasonable control of Landlord or Tenant.

(c) The Recitals set forth above are hereby incorporated by reference and made a part of this Lease as if fully stated herein.

2. Delivery of Leased Premises .

(a) On the Lease Commencement Date, Tenant shall continue to lease the portion of the Leased Premises consisting of the Existing Premises in its current “as is” condition.

(b) As of the date hereof, the portion of the Leased Premises located on the fourth floor, which is identified on Exhibit A-1 (the “ 4 th Floor Space ”), is leased to another tenant in the Building (the “ Existing 4 th Floor Tenant ”). Notwithstanding any other provision in this Lease to the contrary, Landlord and Tenant expressly acknowledge and agree that delivery of the 4 th Floor Space is contingent on the termination of the existing lease with respect to the 4 th Floor Space (the “ 4 th Floor Space Termination Agreement ”), and Landlord shall have no obligation to deliver such 4 th Floor Space unless such existing lease is terminated.

(c) Landlord shall use commercially reasonable efforts to obtain the 4th Floor Space Termination Agreement as soon as possible after the date hereof, which agreement will permit Landlord to deliver the 4 th Floor Space to Tenant on June 1, 2011. If Landlord is unable to obtain the 4 th Floor Space Termination Agreement on or before December 1, 2010, then Tenant may negotiate with the Existing 4 th Floor Tenant to enter into an assignment or sublease pursuant to which Tenant will have the right to occupy and use the 4 th Floor Space. If Tenant enters into such assignment or sublease before Landlord obtains the 4 th Floor Space Termination Agreement, then the 4 th Floor Space shall not be part of the Leased Premises until the expiration of any such assignment or sublease.

 

9


(d) Upon Landlord’s delivery of the 4 th Floor Space to Tenant (which delivery shall not occur before June 1, 2011), Tenant shall accept the 4 th Floor Space in its then-current “as-is” condition, and the 4 th Floor Space shall become part of the Leased Premises hereunder. If Landlord is unable to deliver the 4 th Floor Space to Tenant on June 1, 2011, but is able to do so after that date, then, subject to the remaining provisions of this Section 2, the 4 th Floor Space shall become part of the Leased Premises on the date of such delivery.

(e) Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this Lease, the 4 th Floor Space shall not be part of the Leased Premises for any purpose whatsoever until such time, if at all, as Landlord delivers the 4 th Floor Space to Tenant.

3. Rent and Additional Charges .

(a) Payment of Rent and Additional Charges . Tenant shall pay the Basic Rent for each Lease Year in equal monthly installments commencing on the Lease Commencement Date and thereafter on the first day of each month (or part of a month) during the Term. For clarification, the Basic Rent due and all other calculations based on Rentable Area, as of the Lease Commencement Date, shall be based on a Rentable Area of fifty-seven thousand four hundred seventy (57,470) square feet and, subject to Section 2 hereof, from and after June 1, 2011, shall be based on the Rentable Area of the entire sixth (6 th ) and seventh (7 th ) Floors and a portion of the fourth (4 th ) Floor, unless the same is further modified pursuant to terms of this Lease. The Basic Rent and all Additional Charges shall be paid promptly when due, in lawful money of the United States, without notice or demand and without deduction, diminution, abatement, counterclaim or setoff of any amount or for any reason whatsoever, except as otherwise expressly provided in subsection (b) and in Sections 13(b) and 14(a), to Landlord at Landlord’s Notice Address or at such other address or to such other Person (including a successor to Landlord’s interest in the Building) as Landlord may from time to time designate. If Tenant makes any payment to Landlord by check, such payment shall be by check of Tenant and Landlord shall not be required to accept the check of any other Person, and any check received by Landlord shall be deemed received subject to collection. If any check is mailed by Tenant, Tenant shall post such check in sufficient time prior to the date when payment is due so that such check will be received by Landlord on or before the date when payment is due. Tenant shall assume the risk of lateness or failure of delivery of the mails, and no lateness or failure of the mails will excuse Tenant from its obligation to make the payment in question when required under this Lease. If, during the Term, Landlord receives two or more checks from Tenant which are returned by Tenant’s bank for insufficient funds or are otherwise returned unpaid, Tenant agrees that all checks thereafter shall be either bank, certified or cashiers’ checks. All bank service charges resulting from any bad checks shall be borne by Tenant. The rent reserved under this Lease shall be the total of all Basic Rent and Additional Charges, increased and adjusted as elsewhere herein provided, payable during the entire Term and, accordingly, the methods of payment provided for herein, namely, annual and monthly rental payments, are for convenience only and are made on account of the total rent reserved hereunder. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Lease to the contrary, neither Basic Rent nor Tenant’s Proportionate Share of Operating Expense Increase (as hereinafter defined) shall include the cost of utilities provided directly to or serving the Leased Premises, the cost of which Tenant shall pay directly to the applicable utility provider or Landlord, as applicable.

 

10


(b) Payment of Operating Expenses . Commencing with the 2011 calendar year, Tenant shall pay as Additional Charges Tenant’s Proportionate Share of any increase in Operating Expenses over the Operating Expenses due in the Base Year for each calendar year (the “ Operating Expense Increase ”).

(i) Landlord shall make a reasonable estimate of Tenant’s Proportionate Share of Operating Expense Increase for each calendar year after the Base Year (based on the projected increase in Real Estate Taxes payable over the Base Year for Real Estate Taxes to be included in such calendar year, the other Operating Expenses for the preceding calendar year and anticipated increases in other Operating Expenses for the current calendar year). Tenant shall pay to Landlord a properly pro-rated share of the estimated amount of Tenant’s Proportionate Share of Operating Expense Increases for each calendar year on the first day of each month in advance, beginning on the first day of the first calendar year after the Base Year.

(ii) If Landlord’s estimate of Tenant’s Proportionate Share of Operating Expense Increase for any calendar year is not received by Tenant on or before January 1 of the calendar year, Tenant shall continue to pay the monthly installments of Tenant’s Operating Expense Increase at the rate established for the immediately preceding calendar year until Tenant receives a new estimate for the calendar year. Within thirty (30) days after receipt of a new estimate of Tenant’s Proportionate Share of Operating Expense Increase for the calendar year, Tenant shall pay to Landlord in a lump sum the arrearages in the monthly estimates for each month in the calendar year before receipt of the estimate, if any, and shall pay the remaining monthly installments for the calendar year on the first day of each month in advance during the balance of the calendar year.

(iii) Within one hundred twenty (120) days after the end of each calendar year, including the Base Year, Landlord shall submit to Tenant an itemized statement prepared by Landlord (the “ Annual Operating Expense Statement ”) setting forth in reasonable detail the Operating Expenses for such calendar year and the amount (if any) of Tenant’s Proportionate Share of Operating Expense Increase for such calendar year. If Tenant’s Proportionate Share of Operating Expense Increase so stated is more than the amount (if any) theretofore paid by Tenant for Operating Expense Increase based on Landlord’s estimate for the calendar year, Tenant shall pay to Landlord the deficiency after the submission of the Annual Operating Expense Statement. Such payment shall be made with the next payment of Basic Rent due at least thirty (30) days after receipt by Tenant of all such information. If Tenant’s Proportionate Share of Operating Expense Increase so stated is less than the amount (if any) theretofore paid by Tenant for Operating Expense Increase based on Landlord’s estimate for the calendar year, Landlord shall credit the excess against the next monthly installment of Basic Rent thereafter payable by Tenant under this Lease, except that Landlord shall refund the excess (if any) for the calendar year within which the last Lease Year ends to Tenant within fifteen (15) days after submission of the Annual Operating Expense Statement for such calendar year.

 

11


(iv) If the Lease Commencement Date shall not coincide with the beginning of a calendar year, the amount of Operating Expenses payable for the initial calendar year shall be pro-rated on a daily basis between Landlord and Tenant based on the number of days in the initial calendar year occurring on and after the Lease Commencement Date. If the last day of the Term shall not coincide with the end of a calendar year, the amount of Operating Expenses payable for the calendar year in which the last day of the Term occurs shall be pro-rated on a daily basis between Landlord and Tenant based on the number of days in which this Lease is in effect. Tenant’s obligation under this subsection to pay Operating Expense increases and Landlord’s obligation to reimburse Tenant for an overpayment of Operating Expenses shall survive the expiration of the Term or the earlier termination of this Lease.

(c) Tenant’s Right to Audit the Annual Operating Expense Statement . Tenant shall have the right to audit Landlord’s books and records with respect to the Annual Operating Expense Statement for any calendar year at any time within one hundred twenty (120) days after Tenant receives such Annual Operating Expense Statement. Tenant shall have the right to audit no more than one (1) time in any calendar year. The cost of any such audit shall be paid by Tenant, except that, if it is determined on the basis of such audit (or if, in accordance with the following provisions, it is otherwise ultimately determined) that the amount of Tenant’s Proportionate Share of Operating Expense Increase for the calendar year in question was overstated by more than five percent (5%), then the cost of the audit shall be paid by Landlord and Landlord shall pay to Tenant any overpayment as set forth below, together with interest at the prime rate of Bank of America, N.A. from the date of Tenant’s payment. Landlord shall pay to Tenant any overpayment of Tenant’s Proportionate Share of Operating Expense Increase for the calendar year in question within thirty (30) days after the amount of the overpayment has been established by the audit. If Tenant fails to exercise its right of audit within the one hundred twenty (120) day period, the amount of Tenant’s Proportionate Share of Operating Expense Increase for the calendar year shall be conclusively established as the amount set forth in the Annual Operating Expense Statement for such calendar year delivered by Landlord to Tenant pursuant to subsection (b). If, however, Tenant timely exercises its right of audit, the amount of Tenant’s Proportionate Share of Operating Expense Increase for such calendar year shall be conclusively established as the amount determined as a result of such audit unless, within ninety (90) days after receipt of a report of the same from the auditors selected by Tenant, Landlord, at its expense, shall contest the amount thereof, in which event the amount of Tenant’s Proportionate Share of Operating Expense Increase shall be conclusively established by an arbitration proceeding conducted pursuant to Section 28.

(d) Gross Up of Operating Expenses .

(i) If the average occupancy level of the Building for any calendar year (including the Base Year) is less than ninety-five percent (95%), the Operating Expenses for such calendar year (excluding Real Estate Taxes) shall be increased by the additional Operating Expenses (excluding Real Estate Taxes), as reasonably estimated by Landlord, that would have been incurred by Landlord in providing the same services provided to Tenant (and included in Operating Expenses) if the average occupancy level of the Building for the calendar year had been ninety-five percent (95%). For purposes of the preceding sentence, the “average occupancy level of the Building” for any calendar year shall be the arithmetic average of the Building Rentable Area occupied by tenants on the first day of each month during the calendar year.

 

12


(ii) If during any real estate tax year (including the Base Year for Real Estate Taxes), the Building is subject to any real estate tax abatements or credits (for example, because it lies within an enterprise zone), then Real Estate Taxes for such real estate tax years (including the Base Year for Real Estate Taxes, if applicable) shall be increased by the additional Real Estate Taxes, as reasonably estimated by Landlord, that would have been assessed but for such real estate tax abatements or credits.

(e) Interest . If Tenant fails to make any payment of Basic Rent or Additional Charges within ten (10) days after the due date thereof, interest shall accrue on the unpaid portion thereof from the due date at the Default Interest Rate, and shall be payable on demand.

(f) Accord and Satisfaction . No payment by Tenant or receipt by Landlord of any lesser amount than the amount stipulated to be paid hereunder shall be deemed other than on account of the earliest stipulated Basic Rent or Additional Charges nor shall any endorsement or statement on any check or letter be deemed an accord and satisfaction, and Landlord may accept any check or payment without prejudice to Landlord’s right to recover the balance due or to pursue any other remedy available to Landlord.

(g) Late Payment Charge . If Tenant fails to pay any Basic Rent or Additional Charges within ten (10) days after the same become due, Tenant shall also pay to Landlord on demand a late payment service charge (to cover Landlord’s administrative and overhead expenses of processing late payments and not to be a penalty) equal to the greater of One Hundred Dollars ($100) or five percent (5%) of such unpaid sum; provided, however, that if the late payment was due to a bank error, Tenant shall not be liable for the late payment service charge. Such payment shall not excuse the untimely payment of rent, nor the obligation to pay interest thereon.

(h) Adjustment of Basic Rent for Increases in Rent per Square Foot . Whenever there is a change in the Rent per Square Foot during a Lease Year pursuant to any of the provisions of this Lease, the Basic Rent for the Lease Year in which the change occurs shall be adjusted as of the date on which the change becomes effective so that the Basic Rent for the period before the change becomes effective shall be determined by the Rent per Square Foot in effect immediately before the change and the Basic Rent for the period after the change becomes effective shall be determined by the new Rent per Square Foot in effect immediately after the change. Tenant shall continue to pay the Basic Rent at the monthly amount in effect immediately before the change becomes effective until notified by Landlord of an increase in the Basic Rent resulting from the increase in the Rent per Square Foot. Within thirty (30) days after receipt of a notice from Landlord of the increase in the Basic Rent resulting from the increase in the Rent per Square Foot, Tenant shall pay to Landlord, in a lump sum, an amount equal to the difference between (i) the Basic Rent, adjusted to reflect the increase in the Rent per Square Foot, for the period beginning on the date on which the increase in the Rent per Square Foot became effective and ending on the first day of the month in which Tenant receives Landlord’s notice of the increase, and (ii) the Basic Rent previously paid by Tenant to Landlord for the same period.

 

13


(i) No Setoff . Except as otherwise provided herein, Tenant shall not have the right to setoff or deduct any amount allegedly owed by Landlord to Tenant under this Lease from any of the Basic Rent or Additional Charges payable by Tenant under this Lease. Tenant’s sole remedy with respect to any claim against Landlord shall be to commence an independent legal action against Landlord.

(j) Early Termination Right . Notwithstanding anything in this Lease to the contrary, in the event of a Material Change, Tenant shall have (i) a one-time option to terminate this Lease (the “ First Termination Option ”) effective on April 30, 2014 (the “ First Termination Effective Date ”), and (ii) a one-time option to terminate this Lease (the “ Second Termination Option ” and, together with the First Termination Option, the “ Termination Option ”) effective on September 30, 2018 (the “ Second Termination Effective Date ” and, together with the First Termination Effective Date, the “ Termination Effective Date ”), provided that in either instance (i) Tenant shall have given Landlord not less than thirty (30) days written notice of Tenant’s exercise of such Termination Option (the “ Termination Notice ”), and (ii) Tenant shall have paid to Landlord the Termination Fee (as defined below). Landlord shall notify Tenant of the amount of the Termination Fee within fifteen (15) days of Landlord’s receipt of the Termination Notice and the Termination Fee shall be due and payable (i) one-half (1/2) within fifteen (15) days after Landlord delivers to Tenant a statement of the Termination Fee, and (ii) one-half (1/2) by the Termination Effective Date. The failure of Tenant to make any payment of the Termination Fee as and when due shall render Tenant’s election to terminate this Lease pursuant to this subsection void. The “ Termination Fee ” shall equal the sum of (A) the unamortized amount of Landlord’s transaction costs, including, without limitation, any brokerage and leasing commissions paid by Landlord and Landlord’s reasonable attorneys’ fees and expenses, as amortized over a ten (10) year period, at an interest rate of eight percent (8%) (the “Leasing Costs”), plus (B) an amount equal to the then-applicable Basic Rent and Additional Charges multiplied by twelve (12) less the number of months notice given by Tenant. For example, if Tenant provides six (6) months notice of its election to exercise the Termination Option, then the amount of the Termination Fee would be the Leasing Costs plus an amount equal to six (6) months (12-6) of the then-applicable Basic Rent and Additional Charges. Any disputes with respect to the Termination Fee shall not delay the payment of the Termination Fee but shall ultimately be resolved, upon written request of either party, by arbitration under Section 28 hereof. In the event Tenant prevails in such arbitration, Landlord shall pay to Tenant any over-payment of the Termination Fee within thirty (30) days after the determination by the arbiter. If Tenant shall effectively exercise the Termination Option as set forth in this Section 3(j), Tenant shall surrender to Landlord the Leased Premises as of the Termination Effective Date in the condition required hereunder. Tenant’s failure to timely surrender the Leased Premises to Landlord upon the Termination Effective Date shall subject Tenant to the holdover provisions of Section 27. No later than October 1, 2011, Landlord shall notify Tenant of Landlord’s total transaction costs incurred in connection with this Lease, including a reasonable itemization thereof.

 

14


4. Common Areas .

(a) Throughout the Term, Tenant and Tenant’s Associates shall have the non-exclusive right, in common with others, to use the Common Areas. Landlord shall have the right at any time, without Tenant’s consent, (i) to change the arrangement or location of entrances, passageways, doors, doorways, corridors, stairs or other public portions of the Land, the Building and the Parking Facilities, provided any such change does not unreasonably obstruct Tenant’s access to the Leased Premises or the Parking Facilities; (ii) to grant to any Person an exclusive right to conduct a particular business or undertaking in the Building that is not inconsistent with Tenant’s permitted use of the Leased Premises; (iii) to use and/or lease the roof of the Building and the Common Areas for any purposes not inconsistent with the terms of this Lease; (iv) to subdivide the Land or to combine the Land with other adjoining real property; (v) to add additional floors to the Building and the Parking Facilities, to erect additional buildings on the Land and to erect temporary scaffolds and other devices in connection with the construction, repair and maintenance of the Land or the Building, or both; and (vi) to relocate or alter the existing Parking Facilities and to add new parking areas in connection with any future development of new buildings on the Land or on adjoining real property owned by Landlord or an Affiliate of Landlord. Landlord’s exercise of any of the foregoing rights shall not constitute an actual or constructive eviction, in whole or in part, or entitle Tenant to any abatement or diminution of rent, or relieve Tenant from any of its obligations under this Lease, or impose any liability upon Landlord, by reason of inconvenience or annoyance to Tenant, or injury to or interruption of Tenant’s business, or otherwise. Landlord shall use reasonable efforts to mitigate such inconvenience or annoyance (but with no obligation to employ labor at overtime or other premium pay rates). Landlord shall not obstruct Tenant’s access to the loading dock. Any changes to the Common Areas shall be in keeping with the Peer Group Buildings.

(b) Lunchroom and Deck/Patio . Tenant and Tenant’s Associates, at no additional cost, shall have the right, along with other tenants of the Building, to utilize the lunchroom and deck/patio area located on the fourth (4 th ) Floor of the Building, provided that Tenant understands and agrees that the costs associated with maintaining, cleaning and repairing the lunchroom and deck/patio areas are included in Operating Expenses. Tenant further understands and agrees that (i) Landlord shall not be responsible for stocking the lunchroom, and (ii) the lunchroom shall be considered a common area of the Building and factored in the core factor of the Building.

5. Services and Utilities .

(a) Building Services . Throughout the Term, Landlord agrees that the Building will be maintained in the same manner as other Peer Group Buildings, and that, subject to Unavoidable Delays and Legal Requirements, it will furnish, or cause to be furnished, the following services:

(1) Subject to the provisions of subsections (b) and (c), normal and usual electricity for lighting, heating, ventilating and cooling the Leased Premises and Building to maintain temperatures comparable to those of Peer Group Buildings, and Landlord will supply an additional five (5) watts of electricity per square foot of Rentable Area for the operation of ordinary office equipment; provided, however, such utilities, including without limitation the total costs (including all capacity, energy and usage charges) of obtaining and providing electricity or heating and cooling and life safety power generation from Trigen-Inner Harbor East

 

15


LLC (or any successor entity, including, without limitation, Veolia Energy Inner Harbor East, LLC) (the “ Trigen Charges ”), provided to the Leased Premises shall be sub-metered and Tenant shall pay the cost of all such utilities directly to the applicable utility provider, except that, subject to Section 2, the electricity and Trigen Charges with respect to the portion of the Leased Premises comprised of the 4 th Floor Space shall be billed to Tenant by Landlord on a monthly basis and shall be an amount equal to the Trigen Charges for the preceding month multiplied by a percent based on the percentage of the 4 th Floor occupied by Tenant;

(2) Adequate supplies for toilet rooms located in the Common Areas and in the Leased Premises (if any);

(3) Cleaning and janitorial services after business hours on Business Days in accordance with the standards set forth in Exhibit C to this Lease;

(4) Hot and cold running water in the toilet rooms located in the Common Areas and at valved outlets at the locations in the Leased Premises (if any) shown on Tenant’s Space Layout;

(5) Subject to the provisions of subsections (d), heating, ventilating and air-conditioning to the Leased Premises between the hours of 8:00 A.M. and 7:00 P.M. on Business Days and Martin Luther King’s Birthday, President’s Day, Columbus Day and Veteran’s Day and between the hours of 8:00 A.M. and 1:00 P.M. on Saturdays unless Saturday is a Legal Holiday in accordance with the standards set forth in subsection (f);

(6) Automatically operated elevator service twenty-four (24) hours a day, seven (7) days a week, but Landlord may limit the number of elevators in the Building in operation at times other than during normal business hours on Business Days;

(7) All electric bulbs and fluorescent tubes in light fixtures in the Common Areas and Building Standard light fixtures in the Leased Premises shall be promptly replaced when necessary;

(8) A security access system for the Common Areas of the Building as shown on Exhibit J ;

(9) Sufficient access cards, to be used in conjunction with the security system, to provide each employee of Tenant with a card, and a system for disarming and replacing cards as employees leave or are replaced; and

(10) Access to fiber optic cable service for Tenant’s telecommunications requirements, including internet access.

(b) Electricity . Landlord shall not be liable in any way to Tenant for any failure or defect in the supply or character of electrical energy furnished to the Leased Premises by reason of any requirement, act or omission of the public utility or Trigen Inner Harbor East LLC or any other service provider providing the Building with electricity. Tenant’s use of

 

16


electrical energy in the Leased Premises shall not at any time exceed the capacity of any of the electrical conductors and equipment in or otherwise serving the Leased Premises. Tenant shall not install or operate in the Leased Premises any electrically operated equipment which uses electric current in excess of the capacity specified in paragraph (1) of subsection (a) without Landlord’s prior consent, which consent may be conditioned upon Tenant’s agreement to pay the cost of any additional wiring or electrical equipment or installations which may be required for the operation of such equipment. In order to ensure that such normal capacity is not exceeded and to avert a possible adverse effect upon the Building electrical service Tenant shall give notice to Landlord before Tenant connects to the Building electrical distribution system any electrically operated equipment other than lamps, typewriters, personal computers, computer room, copy machines and similar small office machines. Any feeders or risers to supply Tenant’s electrical requirements in addition to those originally installed, and all other equipment proper and necessary in connection with such feeders or risers, shall be installed by Landlord upon Tenant’s request, at the sole cost and expense of Tenant, but only if, in Landlord’s reasonable judgment, such additional feeders or risers are permissible under all Legal Requirements and Insurance Requirements and the installation of such feeders or risers will not cause permanent damage or injury to the Building or cause or create a dangerous condition or unreasonably interfere with other tenants of the Building.

(c) Intentionally Omitted .

(d) After-Hours Heating and Air-Conditioning . Landlord shall provide heat and air-conditioning at times in addition to those specified in paragraph (5) of subsection (a) at Tenant’s expense, if Tenant gives Landlord notice before 3:00 P.M. (in the case of after-hours service on weekdays) and before 3:00 P.M. on Fridays or the day preceding a Legal Holiday (in the case of after-hours service on Saturdays, Sundays or Legal Holidays). Landlord shall have the right throughout the Term to charge Tenant for after-hours use of heat or air-conditioning at an hourly rate which represents Landlord’s reasonable estimate of its actual cost of providing such after-hours service, including labor, cost of electricity and wear and tear on equipment, plus an allowance of ten percent (10%) thereof to cover general overhead. During the first Lease Year, Landlord’s charge for after-hours service shall not exceed the Initial After-Hours HVAC Rate. If the same after-hours service is also requested by other tenants on the same floor of the Building as Tenant, the charge therefor to each tenant requesting such after-hours service shall be a pro-rated amount based upon the square footage of the leased premises of all tenants on the same floor requesting such after-hours services. Tenant shall pay such charges to Landlord within fifteen (15) days after Tenant’s receipt of an invoice therefor.

(e) Landlord’s Right to Maintain Pipes, Conduits, etc . Landlord reserves the right to erect, install, use, maintain and repair pipes, ducts, conduits, cables, plumbing, vents and wires in, to and through the Leased Premises as and to the extent that Landlord may now or hereafter deem to be necessary or appropriate for the proper operation and maintenance of the Building, or other tenants’ installations in the Building, and the right at all times to transmit water, heat, air-conditioning and electric current through such pipes, conduits, cables, plumbing, vents and wires. In exercising its rights under this subsection, Landlord shall use reasonable efforts to minimize interference with Tenant’s business in the Leased Premises (but with no

 

17


obligation to employ labor at overtime or other premium pay rates). Tenant may request that work done pursuant to this subsection be performed after normal business hours at Tenant’s sole expense provided, however, that if work is being done in the Leased Premises for the sole benefit of another Tenant, the overtime charges would be the responsibility of that tenant.

(f) HVAC Specifications . Landlord represents to Tenant that the HVAC system for the Leased Premises has been designed to provide for the comfortable occupancy of the Leased Premises at temperatures consistent with those provided in Peer Group Buildings, subject to Legal Requirements. Landlord shall not be responsible if the normal operation of the Building air-conditioning system shall fail to provide conditioned air within comfortable temperatures levels (i) in any portions of the Leased Premises which have a connected electrical load for all purposes (including lighting and power) in excess of eight (8) watts per square foot of Rentable Area or which have a human occupancy factor in excess of one individual for each one hundred (100) square feet of Rentable Area (the average electrical load and human occupancy factors for which the Building air-conditioning system is designed), (ii) because of the rearrangement of partitioning or other Alterations made by or on behalf of Tenant or any Person claiming through or under Tenant, or (iii) because of the failure by Tenant or its employees to use the HVAC system in the manner in which it was designed to be used. Tenant agrees to observe and comply with all reasonable rules from time to time prescribed by Landlord for the proper functioning and protection of the HVAC systems in the Building.

(g) Cessation of HVAC and Mechanical Services . Landlord reserves the right to stop the service of heating, air-conditioning, ventilating, elevator, plumbing, electricity or other mechanical systems or facilities in the Building, if necessary by reason of accident or emergency, or for repairs, alterations, replacements, additions or improvements which, in the reasonable judgment of Landlord, are desirable or necessary, until said repairs, alterations, replacements, additions or improvements shall have been completed. The exercise of such right by Landlord shall not constitute an actual or constructive eviction, in whole or in part, or relieve Tenant from any of its obligations under this Lease, or impose any liability upon Landlord or its agents by reason of inconvenience or annoyance to Tenant, or injury to, or interruption of, Tenant’s business, or otherwise, or entitle Tenant to any abatement or diminution of rent. Except in cases of emergency repairs, Landlord will give Tenant reasonable advance notice of any contemplated stoppage of any such systems or facilities. In all cases, Landlord will use due diligence to complete any such repairs, alterations, replacements, additions or improvements with reasonable promptness. Landlord shall also perform any such work in a manner reasonably designed to minimize interference with Tenant’s normal business operations (but with no obligation to employ labor at overtime or other premium pay rates).

(h) Unavoidable Delays in Providing Building Services . Landlord does not make any warranty that the services to be provided by this Section will be free from any irregularity or stoppage. Landlord shall use due diligence to correct any such irregularity or stoppage. However, if Landlord fails to supply, or is delayed in supplying, any service expressly or impliedly to be supplied by Landlord under this Lease, or is unable to provide the Parking Facilities, or is unable to make, despite a good faith effort to do so, or is delayed in making, any repairs, alterations, additions, improvements or decorations, or is unable to supply, or is delayed

 

18


in supplying, any equipment or fixtures, and if such failure, delay or inability results from Unavoidable Delays, such failure, delay or inability shall not constitute an actual or constructive eviction, in whole or in part, or relieve Tenant from any of its obligations under this Lease, or impose any liability upon Landlord or its agents by reason of inconvenience to Tenant, or injury to, or interruption of, Tenant’s business, or otherwise, or entitle Tenant to any abatement or diminution of rent; provided, however, should any disruption in service or utilities which is caused by Landlord’s negligence and which has any material adverse impact on Tenant’s business last beyond five (5) consecutive days, Tenant shall be entitled to abate one day of Basic Rent for each day of further disruption of services.

6. Use of Leased Premises .

(a) Permitted Use . Tenant and its permitted subtenants shall use and occupy the Leased Premises solely for general office purposes in accordance with the applicable Legal Requirements; zoning regulations; the Land Disposition dated August 22, 1990 by and between Inner Harbor View Associates Limited Partnership, Harbor East Limited Partnership and the Mayor and City Council of Baltimore, as amended, and consistent with the character and dignity of the Building, and shall not use or permit or suffer the use of the Leased Premises for any other purpose whatsoever without the prior written consent of Landlord. Landlord represents that the Building can be used for general office purposes. Tenant shall control its business and control Tenant’s Associates in such a manner as not to create a nuisance or interfere with, annoy or disturb other tenants or Landlord in the management of the Building. Tenant shall not permit or suffer the Leased Premises to be occupied by anyone other than Tenant except as provided by Section 15. Tenant shall at all times have access to the Leased Premises, the Building, and the Parking Facilities twenty-four (24) hours a day, seven (7) days a week, subject, however, in all respects to all the terms contained in this Lease. However, Landlord may regulate and restrict access to the Building and the Parking Facilities at times other than normal business hours on Business Days for security purposes so long as Tenant’s employees, agents and business invitees have reasonable access to the Leased Premises, and the Parking Facilities without unreasonable inconvenience.

(b) Payment of Taxes . Throughout the Term, Tenant covenants and agrees to pay ten (10) days before delinquency any and all taxes, assessments and public charges levied, assessed or imposed upon Tenant’s business conducted in the Leased Premises, upon the Leasehold Estate or upon Tenant’s Personal Property other than Real Estate Taxes.

(c) Restrictions on Use . Throughout the Term, Tenant shall not: (i) use or permit or suffer the use of any portion of the Leased Premises, the Building or the Parking Facilities for any unlawful purpose; (ii) use the plumbing facilities for any purpose other than that for which they were constructed, or dispose of any foreign substances therein; (iii) place a load on any floor exceeding the floor load per square foot which such floor was designed to carry in accordance with the plans and specifications of the Building; (iv) strip, overload, damage or deface the Leased Premises, the Common Areas or the Parking Facilities, or the fixtures therein or used therewith; (v) move any bulky furniture or equipment into or out of the Leased Premises except at such times and using such loading docks, entrances and elevators as Landlord may

 

19


from time to time designate; (vi) install in the Leased Premises any other equipment of any kind or nature which will or may necessitate any changes, replacements or additions to, or in the use of, the water system, FIVAC system, plumbing system, or electrical system serving the Leased Premises or the Building, unless the Alterations involved in making such changes, replacements or additions have been approved by Landlord in writing and made pursuant to Section 9(a); or (vii) make any penetrations into the slab of the Leased Premises without having the area to be penetrated x-rayed to assure that the cables located within the slab will not be damaged as the result of any proposed drilling, cutting or penetration of the slab by Tenant.

(d) Compliance with Legal Requirements . Landlord represents and warrants to Tenant that the Building was built in accordance with all the then-applicable Legal Requirements. Throughout the Term and any Renewal Periods, Landlord shall maintain the Common Areas, Building structure, and all Building systems in compliance with all Legal Requirements, in good condition, and in keeping with the first class nature of the Building and Project. Tenant, at its expense, shall make any Alterations required after the Original Lease Commencement Date to comply with Legal Requirements to the extent the obligation to comply with such Legal Requirements arises from Tenant’s use or manner of use of the Leased Premises. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Tenant shall not be required to make any repairs or alterations to the Leased Premises required to comply with any Legal Requirements with respect to the structural elements originally provided by Landlord, which shall include: the roof, the exterior of the walls, the concrete slab floor (as distinguished from floor coverings), the exposed structural joists and deck making up the ceiling coverings), and the areas above and beneath the Leased Premises, except if such repair or alteration is required because of: (i) Tenant’s particular use of the Leased Premises; (ii) any work, improvements or changes to the Leased Premises made by Tenant; or (iii) any act or omission of Tenant, its agents, employees, contractors or invitees. However, Tenant shall be required to make any repairs or alterations to the Leased Premises that are required to comply with any Legal Requirements, with respect to any nonstructural repair or alteration, which shall include repair or alteration to the interior walls, doors, improvements, additions or fixtures in the Leased Premises, whether or not the same were originally provided by Landlord. Tenant shall not use or occupy the Leased Premises, or permit the Leased Premises, the Building or the Parking Facilities to be used or occupied in violation of any Legal Requirements. Specifically, Tenant is obligated to comply with all provisions of the Americans with Disabilities Act with respect to (i) Alterations made to the Leased Premises; and (ii) Tenant’s occupancy and use of the Leased Premises. If, after the commencement of the Term, any governmental authority shall contend or declare that the Leased Premises are being used for a purpose which is in violation of any Legal Requirements, Tenant shall, upon five (5) days’ notice from Landlord or such period of time specified in the notice of such violation, immediately discontinue such use of the Leased Premises. If thereafter the governmental authority asserting such violation, commences or continues proceedings against Landlord for Tenant’s failure to discontinue such use, in addition to any and all rights, privileges and remedies given to Landlord under this Lease for default therein, Landlord shall have the right to terminate this Lease forthwith provided, however, that Landlord may not terminate this Lease prior to Tenant’s exercise of all applicable due process rights. Tenant shall save, defend, indemnify and hold harmless Landlord from and against any and all liability for any such violation or violations.

 

20


(e) Compliance with Insurance Requirements . Tenant shall not do, or permit anything to be done, in or upon the Leased Premises, the Building or the Parking Facilities, or bring or keep anything therein, which shall increase the premiums payable for casualty and property damage insurance for the Land, the Building or the Parking Facilities or on any property located therein. If, by reason of the failure of Tenant to comply with the provisions of this subsection, the premiums payable for casualty and property damage insurance for the Land, the Building or the Parking Facilities shall at any time be higher than they otherwise would be, then Tenant shall reimburse Landlord and any other tenant of the Building, on demand, for that part of all premiums for any insurance coverage that shall have been charged because of such violation by Tenant and which Landlord or such other tenant, or both, shall have paid on account of an increase in the rate or rates in its own policies of insurance.

(f) No Flammable Substances . Tenant shall not bring or permit to be brought or kept in or on the Leased Premises any flammable, combustible or explosive substance except standard cleaning fluid, standard equipment and materials (including magnetic tape) customarily used in conjunction with business machines and equipment of the type used from time to time by Tenant in reasonable quantities.

(g) Hazardous Substances . Tenant shall not (either with or without negligence) cause or permit the escape, disposal or release of any biologically or chemically active or other hazardous substances or materials. Tenant shall not allow the storage or use of such substances or materials in any manner not sanctioned by law or by the highest standards prevailing in the industry for the storage and use of such substances or materials, nor allow to be brought into the Leased Premises any such materials or substances except to use in the ordinary course of Tenant’s business, and then only after written notice is given to Landlord of the identity of such substances or materials provided, however, that Tenant does not have to notify Landlord of the usage of customary cleaning supplies or other common office products. Hazardous substances and materials shall include those described in the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and Liability Act of 1980, as amended, 42 U.S.C. Section 9601 et seq ., the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act, as amended, 42 U.S.C. Section 6901 et seq ., any applicable state or local laws and the regulations adopted under these acts. If any lender or governmental agency shall ever require testing to ascertain whether or not there has been any release of hazardous materials by Tenant or Persons acting under Tenant or at Tenant’s direction, then the reasonable costs thereof shall be reimbursed by Tenant to Landlord upon demand as Additional Charges if such requirement applies to the Leased Premises and if such release was caused by Tenant or persons acting under Tenant or at Tenant’s direction. In addition, Tenant shall execute affidavits, representations and the like from time to time at Landlord’s request concerning Tenant’s best knowledge and belief regarding the presence of hazardous substances or materials on the Leased Premises. In all events, Tenant shall indemnify Landlord in the manner elsewhere provided in this Lease from any release of hazardous materials on the Leased Premises occurring while Tenant is in possession, or elsewhere if caused by Tenant or Persons acting under Tenant or at Tenant’s direction. Landlord has provided Tenant with a copy of a Phase I Environmental Site Assessment Inner Harbor East—Parcel C prepared by Engineering Consulting Services, Ltd. and dated September 24, 1999 and a copy of a Phase I Environmental Site Assessment of 1001 Fleet Street, Baltimore, Maryland, prepared by Hillman

 

21


Environmental Group, LLC and dated October 1, 2002 (collectively, the “ Environmental Report ”). Landlord represents and warrants to Tenant that it has no knowledge of any Hazardous Substances on the site, other than as noted in the Environmental Report. Landlord represents and warrants to Tenant that Landlord will not directly, nor knowingly permit others to, cause or permit the escape, disposal or release of any Hazardous Substances anywhere on the Land or within the Parking Facilities and the Building and Landlord will indemnify and hold Tenant harmless from any liability, cost or expense resulting from a violation of these provisions if caused by Landlord or persons acting at Landlord’s direction.

7. Care of Leased Premises .

(a) Maintenance and Repairs by Tenant . Tenant shall act with care in its use and occupancy of the Leased Premises and the fixtures therein and, at Tenant’s sole cost and expense, shall furnish its own electric bulbs and fluorescent tubes for all light fixtures in the Leased Premises which are not Building Standard fixtures and, except as otherwise provided in Section 13, shall make all repairs and replacements to the Leased Premises, structural or otherwise, necessitated or caused by the willful or negligent acts or omissions of Tenant, Tenant’s Associates or any Person claiming through or under Tenant or by the use or occupancy or manner of use or occupancy of the Leased Premises by Tenant, Tenant’s Associates or any such Person. Without affecting Tenant’s obligations set forth in the preceding sentence, Tenant, at Tenant’s sole cost and expense, shall also (i) make all repairs and replacements, as and when necessary, to Alterations, and (ii) perform all maintenance and make all repairs and replacements, as and when necessary, to any air-conditioning equipment, private elevators, escalators, conveyors or mechanical systems (other than the standard equipment and systems serving the Building) which may be installed in the Leased Premises by Landlord or Tenant for the benefit of and upon request of Tenant. In addition to the foregoing, all damage or injury to the Leased Premises or its fixtures, appurtenances and equipment or to the Building or to its fixtures, appurtenances and equipment caused by Tenant moving property in or out of the Building or by installation or removal of furniture, fixtures or other property by Tenant shall be repaired, restored or replaced promptly by Tenant, at its sole cost and expense, to the reasonable satisfaction of Landlord. All such aforesaid repairs, restoration and replacements shall be in quality and class equal to the original work or installation and shall be made in accordance with accepted construction practices.

(b) Landlord’s Responsibility for Maintenance and Repairs . Except as otherwise provided in subsection (a), Landlord shall make or cause to be made the following repairs as and when necessary: (i) structural repairs to the Building; (ii) (except for repairs to any supplemental HVAC systems installed by Tenant) repairs required in order to provide the elevator, plumbing, electrical, HVAC and other services to be furnished by Landlord pursuant to this Lease; (iii) maintenance and repairs to exterior portions of the Building, including the windows, balconies and roof; (iv) repairs to the Common Areas unless caused by the misconduct or negligent action of Tenant or Tenant’s Associates; and (v) replace all light bulbs in the Premises except for those located in lamps located on the desks of Tenant’s employees. Landlord shall perform its obligations under this subsection in accordance with accepted construction practices so as to minimize interference with Tenant’s business in the Leased Premises (but with no obligation to employ labor at overtime or other premium pay rates) and shall perform its obligations in accordance with the standards of the Peer Group Buildings.

 

22


8. Rules and Regulations .

Tenant shall, and shall cause Tenant’s Associates to, comply with and observe all reasonable rules and regulations concerning the use, management, operation, safety and good order of the Leased Premises, the Common Areas, the Parking Facilities and the Building which may from time to time be promulgated by Landlord, provided that such rules and regulations are not inconsistent with the provisions of this Lease and do not materially interfere with Tenant’s use of the Leased Premises or impose monetary obligations on Tenant. Initial rules and regulations, which shall be effective until amended by Landlord, are attached as Exhibit D to this Lease. Tenant shall be deemed to have received notice of any amendment to the rules and regulations when a copy of such amendment has been delivered to Tenant at the Leased Premises or has been delivered to Tenant in the manner prescribed for the giving of notices. Tenant may not dispute the reasonableness of any additional rule or regulation unless Tenant’s intention to do so is asserted by notice given to Landlord within sixty (60) days after notice is given to Tenant of the adoption of any such additional rule or regulation. Landlord shall not be responsible to Tenant for any violation of the Rules and Regulations, or the covenants or agreements contained in any other lease, by any other tenant of the Building, or such tenant’s subtenants, agents, employees, invitees, licenses, customers and clients, or guests or contractors of any of the foregoing, and Landlord may waive in writing, or otherwise, any or all of the Rules and Regulations with respect to any one or more tenants provided, however, that Landlord shall enforce the Rules and Regulations in a non-discriminatory manner.

9. Tenant’s Alterations .

(a) Tenant’s Alterations . Tenant shall not make or perform, or permit the making or performance of, any Alterations without Landlord’s prior consent, which shall not be unreasonably withheld or delayed. Notwithstanding the foregoing provisions of this subsection or Landlord’s consent to any Alterations, all Alterations made during the Term shall be made and performed in conformity with and subject to the following provisions: (i) all Alterations shall be made and performed at Tenant’s sole cost and expense and at such time; (ii) all Alterations shall be made only by contractors or mechanics approved by Landlord, which approval shall not be unreasonably withheld or delayed; (iii) no Alteration shall affect any part of the Building other than the Leased Premises or adversely affect any service required to be furnished by Landlord to Tenant or to any other tenant or occupant of the Building; (iv) Tenant shall submit to Landlord reasonably detailed plans and specifications for each proposed Alteration and shall not commence any such Alteration without first obtaining Landlord’s approval of such plans and specifications, which approval will not be unreasonably withheld or delayed, but Landlord shall have the right to withhold its consent to Alterations involving structural changes or changes affecting the Common Areas or the Building for any reason whatsoever; (v) all Alterations in or to the electrical facilities in or serving the Leased Premises shall be subject to the provisions of Section 5(b); (vi) notwithstanding Landlord’s approval of plans and specifications for any Alteration, all Alterations shall be made and performed in full compliance with all Legal

 

23


Requirements and Insurance Requirements and in accordance with the Rules and Regulations; (vii) all materials and equipment to be incorporated in the Leased Premises as a result of all Alterations shall be of good quality; (viii) Tenant shall require any contractor performing Alterations to carry and maintain at all times during the performance of the Alterations, at no expense to Landlord, (I) a policy of Commercial General Liability Insurance, including contractor’s liability coverage, completed operations coverage and contractor’s protective liability coverage, naming Landlord and (at Landlord’s request) the Additional Insureds, as additional insureds, with such policy to afford protection to the limit of not less than Three Million Dollars ($3,000,000) combined single limit annual aggregate for bodily injury, death and property damage, and (II) workmen’s compensation or similar insurance in the form and amounts required by the laws of the jurisdiction in which the Building is located; and (ix) Tenant shall carry (or shall cause its contractor to carry) at all times during the performance of the Alterations, at no expense to Landlord, a policy of Builders Risk Insurance written on the Completed Value Form covering the Alterations in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the replacement cost thereof. In the event of any dispute between the parties as to whether or not Landlord has acted reasonably in any case with respect to which Landlord is required, pursuant to the provisions of this subsection (a) to do so, Tenant’s sole remedy shall be to submit such dispute to arbitration pursuant to Section 28. If the determination in any such arbitration shall be adverse to Landlord, Landlord nevertheless shall not be liable to Tenant for breach of Landlord’s covenant to act reasonably, and Tenant’s sole remedy in such event shall be to proceed with the proposed Alterations.

(b) Intentionally Deleted .

(c) Tenant’s Right to Cure . If Tenant shall be in default under this Section by reason of the making of any Alteration not hereby authorized or by reason of failure to give any notice or to obtain any approval required herein, Tenant may cure such default within the applicable grace period provided in this Lease for curing such default by immediately commencing the removal of such Alteration and restoring the Leased Premises to the condition they were in before the Alteration was made.

(d) Title to, and Removal of, Alterations . Title to all Alterations made by Tenant, at its expense, after the Lease Commencement Date shall be and remain in Tenant throughout the Term, but on the expiration or earlier termination of this Lease Tenant hereby covenants and agrees that title to all Alterations not previously removed from the Leased Premises pursuant to this subsection, and the right to possess and use the same, shall automatically pass to and be vested in Landlord without payment or consideration of any kind. Although the provisions of the preceding sentence are intended to be self-executing, Tenant hereby agrees, upon such earlier expiration or termination of this Lease, to execute any further deed, bill of sale or document requested by Landlord to confirm Landlord’s title to Alterations and Tenant’s grant and conveyance thereof to Landlord pursuant to this subsection. As long as an Event of Default has not occurred and is not continuing, Tenant may, at its expense, remove from the Leased Premises before the expiration of the Term any Alterations made by Tenant after the Lease Commencement Date provided Landlord shall have consented to such removal before the Alteration was made. Tenant shall repair all damage to the Leased Premises caused by

 

24


the removal of such Alterations and Tenant shall repair, including all necessary replacements, all adjoining surfaces to a condition equivalent to Building Standard Work. Any Alterations which Tenant has the right to remove and which are not removed from the Leased Premises at the expiration of the Term shall be deemed to have been abandoned by Tenant and may be disposed of by Landlord without thereby incurring liability to Tenant.

(e) Removal of Tenant’s Personal Property . All of Tenant’s Personal Property shall remain the property of Tenant and may, at its expense, be removed from the Leased Premises at any time during the Term. Tenant shall, at its expense, remove all of Tenant’s Personal Property at the expiration of the Term. Tenant shall repair all damage to the Leased Premises caused by the removal of Tenant’s Personal Property to the condition it was in before the installation of the item removed, ordinary wear and tear excepted. Any of Tenant’s Personal Property which is not removed from the Leased Premises at the expiration of the Term shall be deemed to have been abandoned by Tenant and may be disposed of by Landlord without thereby incurring liability to Tenant.

(f) Landlord’s Right to Remove Alterations and Tenant’s Personal Property . If Tenant fails to remove Alterations or Tenant’s Personal Property and make the repairs required by subsections (d) or (e), Landlord shall have the right to remove such Alterations or Tenant’s Personal Property or make such repairs and Tenant shall reimburse Landlord, on demand, for any reasonable costs incurred by Landlord as a result of such removal or repair.

(g) Mechanics’ Liens . Notice is hereby given that Landlord shall not be liable to any Person for any labor or materials furnished or to be furnished to Tenant upon credit, and that no mechanic’s, materialman’s or other lien for any such labor or materials shall attach to or affect the reversion or other estate or interest of Landlord in and to the Leased Premises, the Building or the Land. Whenever and as often as any mechanic’s lien or materialman’s lien shall have been filed against the Leased Premises, the Building or the Land based upon any act or interest of Tenant or of anyone claiming through or under Tenant, or if any lien with respect thereto shall have been filed affecting any materials, machinery or fixtures used in the construction, repair or operation thereof or annexed thereto by Tenant or anyone claiming through or under Tenant, Tenant shall, at its expense, immediately take such action by bonding, deposit or payment as will remove or satisfy the lien or other security interest. If Tenant fails to remove or discharge the lien or other security interest within forty-five (45) days after receipt of demand therefor by Landlord, Landlord, in addition to any other remedy under this Lease and without waiving or releasing Tenant’s default in not timely discharging the lien or security interest, may pay the amount secured by such lien or security interest or discharge the same by deposit and the amount so paid or deposited shall be collectible as Additional Charges. The provisions of this subsection shall not be applicable to liens filed with respect to work done for Tenant’s account by Landlord at Landlord’s expense.

 

25


(h) Plans . Promptly after the completion of any Alterations, Tenant shall deliver to Landlord a complete set of “as built” drawings showing the Alterations in place.

10. Name of Building; Tenant’s Signs .

(a) Name . Landlord expressly reserves the right to have the Building designated by a street number or numbers and to affix to the Building, at locations designated by Landlord, signs indicating any such number or numbers and the name of the Building. The name of the Building shall reflect the address of the Building.

(b) Exterior Signs . Except as set forth below in subsection (d), Landlord has not granted to Tenant any rights in or to the roof or the exterior surfaces of the perimeter walls of the Building, control of which is hereby reserved to Landlord. Tenant shall not display or erect any lettering, signs, advertisements, awnings or other projections on the exterior of the Leased Premises without the prior written consent of Landlord and the City of Baltimore or without Landlord’s prior written consent in the interior of the Leased Premises. Landlord shall provide at Tenant’s expense customary suite entry door lettering identifying Tenant in the style and color selected by Landlord for the Building. The number, size, color, style and configuration of such lettering shall be determined by Landlord.

(c) Building Directory . Landlord shall provide a directory in the main lobby of the Building, at its expense, upon which Landlord, as part of Operating Expenses, will affix Tenant’s name and a reasonable number of names of its officers, partners or employees as designated by Tenant. Landlord shall also, at Tenant’s expense, affix Tenant’s name upon a directory located on the exterior of the Building. The size, color and style of such directory and names affixed thereto shall be selected by Landlord. Landlord and Tenant acknowledge and agree that Tenant’s existing directory signage satisfies the provisions of this subsection (c).

(d) Rooftop Signs . Subject to use of the roof by Trigen-Inner Harbor East, LLC (or its successor entity) and Sylvan Learning Systems, Inc., Landlord agrees to allow Tenant, at Tenant’s sole cost and expense, to erect signage on any vacant space on the roof of the Building, the size, shape, location and illumination of such signage to be mutually agreed to by Landlord and Tenant and further subject to the review and approval of Baltimore City. It is anticipated that Tenant’s rooftop signage will be on both sides of the roof structure and shall have prominent rooftop position proportionate to all other signs on the Building based on the square footage leased by Tenant in the Building. Landlord and Tenant acknowledge and agree that Tenant’s existing rooftop sign satisfies the provisions of this subsection (d). From time to time, Tenant, at its cost, may change the name on Tenant’s existing rooftop sign or make other alterations to Tenant’s existing rooftop sign as long as (i) each new or altered sign complies with applicable law, (ii) each new or altered sign is of the same size or smaller, must fit in the existing space and shall be of similar appearance and brightness as the existing sign, and (iii) each new name selected by Tenant for the sign pertains to Tenant’s business ( i.e. , Tenant may not sell signage rights to a third party.)

 

26


11. Tenant’s Insurance .

(a) Liability and Property Damage Insurance . Tenant, at Tenant’s sole cost and expense, shall obtain and maintain in effect throughout the Term a policy of Commercial General Liability Insurance (ISO form or equivalent) naming Landlord and (at Landlord’s request) the Additional Insureds as additional insureds, protecting Landlord, Tenant and, if applicable, the Additional Insureds against liability for bodily injury, death and property damage occurring upon or in the Leased Premises, with such policy to afford protection to the limit of not less than Two Million Dollars ($2,000,000) with respect to bodily injury or death or damage to property arising from any one occurrence and Four Million Dollars ($4,000,000) from the aggregate of all occurrences within each policy year. Tenant shall also maintain property damage covering Alterations and Tenant’s Personal Property. If the policy also covers locations other than the Leased Premises, the policy shall include a provision to the effect that the aggregate limit of Four Million Dollars ($4,000,000) shall apply separately at the Leased Premises and that the insurer will provide notice to Landlord if the aggregate is reduced either by payment of claims or the establishment of reserves for claims if the payments or reserves exceed Two Hundred Fifty Thousand Dollars ($250,000). If the aggregate limit of Four Million Dollars ($4,000,000) is reduced by the payment of a claim or the establishment of a reserve, Tenant agrees to take immediate steps to have the aggregate limit restored by endorsement to the existing policy or the purchase of an additional insurance policy which complies with this subsection. Tenant may self-insure the coverage required in this Section 11.

(b) Property Damage Insurance . Tenant, at Tenant’s sole cost and expense, shall obtain and maintain throughout the Term a policy of property damage insurance on Alterations and Tenant’s Personal Property in an amount sufficient to prevent Tenant from becoming a co-insurer.

(c) Worker’s Compensation Insurance . If and to the extent required by law, Tenant, at Tenant’s sole cost and expense, shall obtain and maintain Worker’s Compensation and Employer’s Liability Insurance or similar insurance in form and amounts required by law, provided that any such Employer’s Liability Insurance will afford protection to the limit of not less than Five Hundred Thousand Dollars ($500,000).

(d) Policy Requirements . The insurance policies required to be obtained by Tenant under this Section: (i) shall be issued by an insurance company of recognized responsibility qualified to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Building is located which is rated A- or better (and is in a Financial Size Category of Class VIII or higher) by Best’s Key Rating Guide or which has an equivalent financial rating from a comparable insurance rating organization, and (ii) shall provide (and each certificate evidencing the existence of such insurance policy shall certify) that the insurance policy shall not be canceled or amended (other than to increase the amount of coverage) unless Landlord shall have received thirty (30) days’ prior written notice of such cancellation or amendment. All limits of liability required by subsection (a) may be satisfied by maintaining a policy of primary insurance and a policy or policies of excess liability insurance. Neither the issuance of any insurance policy required under this Lease nor the minimum limits specified herein with respect to Tenant’s insurance coverage shall be deemed to limit or restrict in any way Tenant’s liability arising under or out of this Lease.

 

27


(e) Evidence of Insurance . On or before the Lease Commencement Date, and at least 15 days before the expiration of the expiring certificate previously furnished, Tenant shall deliver to Landlord a certificate of insurance evidencing the issuance of each insurance policy required to be obtained by Tenant under this Section.

(f) Landlord’s Indemnification . Except for the willful or negligent acts or omissions (where applicable law imposes a duty to act) of Landlord or its agents, employees or contractors, Tenant hereby agrees to indemnify and hold harmless Landlord, the Additional Insureds and the officers, directors, agents and employees of, and the partners in, Landlord and the Additional Insureds, from and against any and all claims, losses, actions, damages, liabilities and expenses (including reasonable attorneys’ fees and disbursements) that (i) arise from or are in connection with Tenant’s possession, use, occupancy, management, repair, maintenance or control of all or any part of the Leased Premises, the making or removal of Alterations and the performance of all related construction work, or that relate in any other manner to the business conducted by Tenant in the Leased Premises, or (ii) arise from or are in connection with any willful or negligent act or omission of Tenant or Tenant’s Associates, or (iii) result from any default, breach, violation or nonperformance of this Lease or any provision therein by Tenant, or (iv) arise from injury or death to individuals or damage to property sustained on or about the Leased Premises. Tenant shall, at its own cost and expense, upon notice thereof from Landlord, defend any and all actions, suits and proceedings which may be brought against Landlord, the Additional Insureds and the officers, directors, agents and employees of, and the partners in, Landlord and the Additional Insureds, or any of them, with respect to the foregoing or in which Landlord, the Additional Insureds and the officers, directors, agents and employees of, and the partners in, Landlord and the Additional Insureds, or any of them, may be impleaded. Tenant shall pay, satisfy and discharge any and all final money judgments which may be recovered against Landlord, the Additional Insureds and the officers, directors, agents and employees of, and the partners in, Landlord and the Additional Insureds, or any of them, in connection with the foregoing.

(g) Contractual Liability Insurance . Tenant agrees to keep and maintain as part of the coverage of its policy(ies) of liability insurance contractual liability coverage or a contractual liability endorsement covering Tenant’s liability to Landlord for bodily injury or damage to property of others under subsection (g), in the same limits required by subsection (a).

(h) Prohibition Against Concurrent Insurance . All property damage and liability insurance shall be written as primary insurance. Tenant shall not take out separate insurance concurrent in form or contributing in the event of loss with any property damage or liability insurance carried by Landlord for the Building unless Landlord is included therein as an insured.

12. Landlord’s Insurance .

(a) Property Damage Insurance . Landlord, at its cost and expense, but subject to Section 3(b), shall obtain and maintain throughout the Term a policy of property damage insurance covering the Building and the Parking Facilities, but not Alterations or Tenant’s Personal Property, providing all-risk coverage in such amount as any first Mortgagee of the Building may from time to time require or in such greater amount as Landlord may from time to time determine.

 

28


(b) Liability Insurance . Landlord, at Landlord’s cost and expense, but subject to Section 3(b), shall obtain and maintain in effect throughout the Term a policy of Commercial General Liability Insurance (ISO form or equivalent) insuring Landlord against liability for bodily injury, death and property damage occurring upon, in or about the Land, the Building and the Parking Facilities, with such policy to afford protection to the limit of not less than Five Million Dollars ($5,000,000) combined single limit annual aggregate for bodily injury, death and property damage. All insurance required to be held by Landlord pursuant to this Lease shall be issued and underwritten by insurance companies licensed to do insurance business, by and in good standing under the laws of the State of Maryland. Such companies shall have and maintain a rating of A:XII or better by A.M. Best Co.

(c) Blanket Policy . Landlord shall have the right to comply with and to satisfy its obligations under subsections (a) and (b) by means of any so-called blanket policy or policies of insurance covering this and other liability and locations of Landlord and its Affiliates, provided that such policy or policies by the terms thereof shall allocate to the Building and the liabilities to be insured under this Section an amount not less than the amount of insurance required to be carried pursuant to this Section, so that the proceeds from such insurance shall not be less than the amount of proceeds that would be available if Landlord were insured under a unitary policy.

(d) Waiver of Subrogation . Landlord and Tenant shall each include in each of its property damage insurance policies, including Landlord’s policies of rent insurance and Tenant’s policies of business interruption insurance, if any, a waiver of the insurer’s right of subrogation against the other party and the officers, directors, agents and employees of, and the partners in, the other party (and, in the case of Tenant’s policies, against the Additional Insureds and their respective officers, directors, agents and employees), or, if such waiver at any time becomes unobtainable (i) an express agreement that such policy shall not be invalidated if the insured waives or has waived before the loss the right of recovery against any party responsible for an insured casualty, or (ii) any other form of permission for the release of such responsible party, provided such waiver, agreement or permission is obtainable under normal commercial insurance practice at the time. If such waiver, agreement or permission is not, or ceases to be, obtainable without additional charge or at all, the insured party shall so notify the other party promptly after notice thereof. If the other party agrees in writing to pay the insurer’s additional charge therefor, such waiver, agreement or permission shall (if obtainable) be included in the policy. Landlord and Tenant hereby acknowledge and agree that such waiver is obtainable under normal commercial insurance practice on the date of this Lease at no additional charge.

(e) Tenant’s Indemnification . Except for the willful or negligent acts or omissions (where applicable law imposes a duty to act) of Tenant or its agents, employees or contractors, Landlord hereby agrees to indemnify and hold harmless Tenant, the officers, directors, agents and employees of, and the partners in, Tenant, from and against any and all claims, losses, actions, damages, liabilities and expenses (including reasonable attorneys’ fees and disbursements) that arise from or are in connection with Tenant’s, its employees’ or invitees’ use or occupancy of all or any part of the common areas of the Building.

 

29


13. Damage by Fire or Other Casualty .

In the event of loss of, or damage to, the Leased Premises or the Building by fire or other casualty, the rights and obligations of Landlord and Tenant shall be as follows:

(a) Repair of Damage . If all or any part of the Leased Premises is damaged by fire or other casualty, Tenant shall give prompt notice thereof to Landlord. Landlord, upon receiving such notice, shall proceed promptly and with reasonable diligence, subject to Unavoidable Delays, to repair, or cause to be repaired, such damage, but not damage to Alterations or Tenant’s Personal Property, in a manner reasonably designed to minimize interference with Tenant’s occupancy (but with no obligation to employ labor at overtime or other premium pay rates). If all or any part of the Common Areas is damaged by fire or other casualty, Landlord shall proceed promptly and with reasonable diligence, subject to Unavoidable Delays, to repair, or cause to be repaired, such damage, in a manner designed to minimize interference with Tenant’s occupancy (but with no obligation to employ labor at overtime or other premium pay rates).

(b) Abatement of Basic Rent and Additional Charges . If all or any part of the Leased Premises are rendered untenantable by reason of damage caused by a fire or other casualty, whether to the Leased Premises or the Building and the damaged part is not being used by Tenant, the Basic Rent and Additional Charges shall be abated for the proportion of the Leased Premises rendered untenantable for the period between the date of the fire or other casualty and the date when the damage which Landlord is obligated to repair shall have been repaired or the date on which this Lease is terminated pursuant to subsection (c), whichever occurs first. However, if, before the date when all of the damage required to be repaired by Landlord shall have been repaired, any part of the Leased Premises so damaged shall be repaired to the condition required by subsection (e), then the amount by which the Basic Rent and Additional Charges shall be abated shall be equitably apportioned for the period beginning on the date of completion of such repair to the extent Tenant can use the repaired area. If Tenant reoccupies a portion of the Leased Premises during the period of repair, the Basic Rent and Additional Charges allocable to such reoccupied portion, based upon the proportion which the reoccupied portion of the Leased Premises bears to the total area of the Leased Premises, shall be payable by Tenant from the date of such occupancy. If, by reason of some action or inaction on the part of Tenant or Tenant’s Associates after the occurrence of an insured peril, Landlord or the Additional Insureds shall be unable to collect all of the insurance proceeds applicable to the damage or destruction of the Leased Premises or the Building caused by such insured peril, then, without prejudice to any other remedy which may be available to Landlord against Tenant, the abatement of rent provided for in this subsection shall not be effective to the extent of uncollectible insurance proceeds. For purposes of this Section, all or a part of the Leased Premises shall be deemed to be “untenantable” if, because of the fire or other casualty, Tenant is unable to use all or such part of the Leased Premises for the uses permitted by Section 6(a).

 

30


(c) Termination of Lease by Landlord or Tenant . If as a result of fire or other casualty more than one-half (1/2) of the Building Rentable Area is rendered untenantable, Landlord within sixty (60) days after the date of the fire or casualty may terminate this Lease by notice to Tenant, specifying a date, not less than twenty (20) nor more than forty (40) days after the giving of the notice, on which the Term shall expire as fully and completely as if such date were the date herein originally fixed for the expiration of the Term. If the Leased Premises are damaged as a result of fire or other casualty and if Landlord reasonably determines that the damage to the Leased Premises (but not the damage to Alterations or Tenant’s Personal Property) is so extensive that the damage cannot be substantially repaired within ninety (90) days after the receipt of insurance proceeds but in any event, no later than two hundred seventy (270) days after the date of the fire or other casualty (except for Unavoidable Delays), Landlord shall notify Tenant of that fact. Within thirty (30) days after receipt of Landlord’s notice, Tenant may terminate this Lease by notice to Landlord, specifying a date, not less than twenty (20) nor more than forty (40) days after the giving of such notice, on which the Term shall expire as fully and completely as if such date were the date originally fixed for the expiration of the Term, except that Tenant shall not have the right to terminate this Lease if the fire or other casualty was caused by the willful act or omission of Tenant or Tenant’s Associates. If either Landlord or Tenant terminates this Lease pursuant to this subsection, the Basic Rent and Additional Charges shall be apportioned as of the date of such termination. Any dispute between Landlord and Tenant concerning the time periods within which the Leased Premises can be repaired should be submitted to arbitration pursuant to Section 28. If neither Landlord nor Tenant so elects to terminate this Lease, then Landlord shall proceed to repair the damage to the Building and the damage to the Leased Premises (but not the damage to Alterations or Tenant’s Personal Property, if any shall have occurred), and the Basic Rent and Additional Charges shall meanwhile be apportioned and abated all as provided in subsection (b).

(d) Insurance Proceeds . The proceeds payable under all policies of property damage insurance maintained by Landlord on the Building shall belong to and be the property of Landlord, and Tenant shall not have any interest in such proceeds. Tenant agrees to look to its own policies of property damage insurance in the event of damage to Alterations or Tenant’s Personal Property.

(e) Limitation on Landlord’s Duty to Repair . Landlord shall not be required to repair or replace Alterations or Tenant’s Personal Property, but Landlord’s only obligation under subsection (a) shall be to repair or replace the portions of the Building and the Building Standard Work to the condition necessary to enable Tenant, in accordance with accepted construction practices, to begin the performance of the repair or replacement of Above Building Standard Work. In addition to the abatement set forth in subsection (b), Tenant’s Basic Rent and Additional Changes shall be abated for the period during which Tenant is replacing or repairing the Alterations and Tenant’s Personal Property, provided that such abatement shall only be in effect for the earlier of ninety (90) days after Landlord’s work hereunder is completed or the substantial completion of Tenant’s work. Landlord shall not be obligated to make any payment to Tenant for damages or compensation for inconvenience, loss of business or annoyance arising from any damage to or repair or restoration of any portion of the Leased Premises or of the Building.

 

31


(f) Inapplicability of Other Laws . The provisions of this Section shall be considered an express agreement governing any instance of damage or destruction of the Building or the Leased Premises by fire or other casualty, and any law now or hereafter in force providing for such a contingency in the absence of express agreement shall have no application.

(g) Landlord Released from Liability . As long as Tenant’s policies of property damage insurance include the waiver of subrogation or agreement or permission to release liability referred to in Section 12(d), Tenant hereby waives (and agrees to cause all other occupants of the Leased Premises to execute and deliver to Landlord instruments waiving) any right of recovery against Landlord, the Additional Insureds and any of their respective officers, directors, agents, employees, partners, contractors or invitees, for any loss or damage to Alterations or Tenant’s Personal Property caused by fire or other insured peril. If at any time any of Tenant’s policies shall not include a waiver of subrogation or agreement or permission or similar provisions, the waiver set forth in the preceding sentence shall, upon notice given by Tenant to Landlord, be of no further force or effect from and after the giving of such notice (or, if the insurer shall not grant a waiver for all of the required parties, the waiver shall be of no force or effect only with respect to the required parties not included in the waiver). If Tenant fails to obtain and maintain the policy of property damage insurance required by Section 11(b), Tenant hereby waives (and agrees to cause all occupants of the Leased Premises to execute and deliver to Landlord instruments waiving) any right of recovery against Landlord, the Additional Insureds and any of their respective officers, directors, agents, employees, partners, contractors and invitees for any loss or damage to Alterations or Tenant’s Personal Property caused by fire or other perils of the type that would have been insured against by a policy of property damage insurance if Tenant had obtained the policy and the policy had been in effect on the date of the fire or other insured peril.

(h) Tenant Released from Liability . As long as Landlord’s policies of property damage insurance include the waiver of subrogation or agreement or permission to release liability referred to in Section 12(d), Landlord hereby waives any right of recovery against Tenant, any other permitted occupant of the Leased Premises and any of their respective officers, directors, agents, employees, partners, contractors or invitees for any loss or damage to the Building caused by fire or other insured peril. If at any time any of Landlord’s policies of property damage insurance shall not include such waiver of subrogation or agreement or permission or similar provisions, the waiver set forth in the foregoing sentence shall be of no further force or effect (or, if the insurer shall not grant waiver for all of the required parties, the waiver shall be of no force or effect only with respect to the required parties not included in the waiver). If Landlord fails to obtain and maintain the policy of property damage insurance required by Section 12(a), Landlord hereby waives any right of recovery against Tenant, and any of their respective officers, directors, agents, employees, partners, contractors and invitees for any loss or damage to Alterations or Landlord’s Personal Property caused by fire or other perils of the type that would have been insured against by a policy of property damage insurance if Landlord had obtained the policy and the policy had been in effect on the date of the fire or other insured peril.

 

32


14. Condemnation .

(a) Effect of Taking . In the event of a Taking of the whole of the Leased Premises, this Lease shall terminate as of the date of such Taking. If only a part of the Leased Premises shall be so taken then, except as otherwise provided in this subsection, this Lease shall continue in force and effect, but from and after the date of the Taking, the Basic Rent and Additional Charges shall be equitably reduced on the basis of the Rentable Area so taken. If a part of the Building shall be taken, and if either (i) the part of the Building so taken contains more than twenty-five percent (25%) of the Rentable Area immediately before such Taking, or (ii) in Landlord’s reasonable opinion, it shall be impracticable to continue to operate the Building, then Landlord, at Landlord’s option, may give to Tenant within sixty (60) days after the date upon which Landlord shall have received notice of the Taking, a thirty (30) days’ notice of termination of this Lease. If a part of the Building shall be taken, and if either (i) the part of the Building so taken contains more than thirty-five percent (35%) of the Rentable Area immediately before such Taking, or (ii) by reason of such Taking all or substantially all of the Leased Premises becomes untenantable (within the meaning of Section 13(b)) and Tenant does not, in fact, use all or substantially all of the Leased Premises for the uses permitted by Section 6(a), then Tenant, at Tenant’s option, may give to Landlord within sixty (60) days after the date upon which Tenant shall have received notice of such Taking, a thirty (30) days’ notice of termination of this Lease. If a thirty (30) days’ notice of termination is given by Landlord or Tenant, this Lease shall terminate upon the earlier of (x) the date on which title to the part of the Building taken vests in the condemning authority, or (y) the expiration of the thirty (30) day period. If this Lease is terminated pursuant to the foregoing provisions of this subsection, then, to the extent permitted by applicable law and such Taking, Tenant shall have access to the Leased Premises in order to remove Tenant’s Personal Property and any other property which Tenant is entitled to remove pursuant to this Lease during the period of thirty (30) days from the date Tenant is permitted access therefor. If a Taking occurs which does not result in the termination of this Lease, Landlord shall repair, alter and restore the remaining portions of the Leased Premises (but not Alterations) to their former condition to the extent that the same may be feasible.

(b) Award . Landlord shall have the exclusive right to receive any and all awards made with respect to the Leased Premises, the Building and the Land accruing by reason of a Taking or by reason of anything lawfully done in pursuance of public or other authority. Tenant hereby releases and assigns to Landlord all of Tenant’s rights to such awards and covenants to deliver such further assignments and assurances thereof as Landlord may from time to time request. Tenant shall not have the right to claim any award for the value of the Leasehold Estate, but Tenant shall have the right to make its own claim against the condemning authority for a separate award for the value of Alterations made by Tenant, at its expense, and any of Tenant’s Personal Property, for moving and relocation expenses and for business damages and/or consequential damages, as may be allowed by law which do not constitute part of the compensation for the Building or the Land, or both, and do not diminish the amount of the award to which Landlord would otherwise be entitled.

 

33


15. Assignment and Subletting .

(a) So long as Tenant remains primarily liable for the obligations of Tenant under this Lease, Tenant may, subject to the terms and requirements of this Lease, including the use restrictions in Section 6, assign its Leasehold Estate and/or sublet all or part of the Leased Premises (i) to any Affiliate of Tenant, and (ii) subject to Landlord’s approval, not to be unreasonably withheld or delayed, to any other party. Provided Tenant is not in default under the terms of this Lease, any rent collected by Tenant in connection with an assignment or a sublease, shall be and remain the property of Tenant, whether or not equal to, less than or in excess of the Basic Rent and Additional Charges payable hereunder; however, any true profits from rents collected by Tenant shall be shared between Tenant and Landlord on an equal basis. For purposes of this Lease, true profits shall mean the difference between the rent collected by Tenant from an assignee or sublessee for any portion of the Leased Premises and the rent paid by Tenant to Landlord for such portion of the Leased Premises under the terms hereof less any third party expenses incurred in connection with the assignment or subletting, including (i) costs incurred in obtaining the subtenant, such as broker’s fees, (ii) costs incurred in preparing the space for the subtenant, (iii) costs incurred in having space vacant or underutilized prior to securing the subtenant, and (iv) associated costs, such as legal and accounting fees, project manager fees, etc.

(b) Documentation . Within thirty (30) days after the consummation or an assignment or subletting Tenant shall deliver to Landlord (i) in the case of an assignment, an original or copy of the instrument of assignment in form reasonably satisfactory to Landlord, duly executed by Tenant and assignee, in which such assignee shall agree to observe and perform, and to be personally bound by, all of the terms, covenants and conditions of this Lease on Tenant’s part to be observed and performed after the date of such assignment, or (ii) in the case of a subletting, an original or copy of the sublease signed by Tenant and the subtenant.

(c) Landlord’s Right to Collect Rent . If the Leasehold Estate is assigned, whether or not in violation of the provisions of this Section, Landlord may collect rent from the assignee. If the Leased Premises or any part thereof are sublet to, or occupied or used by, any Person other than Tenant, whether or not in violation of this Section, Landlord, after an Event of Default has occurred and while such Event of Default is continuing, may collect rent from the subtenant, user or occupant. In either case, Landlord shall apply the amount collected to the Basic Rent and Additional Charges payable under this Lease, but neither any such assignment, subletting, occupancy or use, whether with or without Landlord’s prior consent, nor any such collection or application shall be deemed to be a waiver of any term, covenant or condition of this Lease or the acceptance by Landlord of such assignee, subtenant, occupant or user as Tenant. The consent by Landlord to any assignment or subletting shall not relieve Tenant from its obligation to obtain the express prior consent of Landlord to any further assignment or subletting, if such consent is required hereunder. The listing of any name other than that of Tenant on any door of the Leased Premises or on any directory in the Building, or otherwise, shall not operate to vest in the Person so named any right or interest in this Lease or in the Leased Premises or be deemed to constitute, or serve as a substitute for, any prior consent of Landlord required under this Section, and it is understood that any such listing shall constitute a

 

34


privilege extended by Landlord which shall be revocable at Landlord’s will by notice to Tenant. Neither an assignment of the Leasehold Estate nor a subletting, occupancy or use of the Leased Premises or any part thereof by any Person other than Tenant, nor the collection of rent by Landlord from any Person other than Tenant as provided in this subsection, nor the application of any such rent as provided in this subsection shall, in any circumstances, relieve Tenant from its obligation fully to observe and perform the terms, covenants and conditions of this Lease on Tenant’s part to be observed and performed, except under the terms of subsection (b) above.

16. Default Provisions .

(a) Events of Default . Each of the following events shall be deemed to be, and is referred to in this Lease as, an “Event of Default”:

(1) A default by Tenant in making any payment of Basic Rent on the day such payment is due and payable which continues for more than ten days after Landlord shall have given Tenant a written notice specifying such default, provided, however, Landlord shall not be obligated to give written notice of such default more than two (2) times in any Lease Year;

(2) A default by Tenant in making any payment of Additional Charges on the day such payment is due and payable which continues for more than ten days after Landlord shall have given Tenant a written notice specifying such default;

(3) The neglect or failure of Tenant to perform or observe any of the terms, covenants or conditions contained in this Lease on Tenant’s part to be performed or observed (other than those referred to in paragraphs (1) above and (4) and (5) below) which is not remedied by Tenant (i) within thirty (30) days after Landlord shall have given to Tenant notice specifying such neglect or failure, or (ii) in the case of any such neglect or failure which cannot with due diligence and in good faith be cured within thirty (30) days, within such additional period, if any, as may be reasonably required to cure such default with due diligence and in good faith provided that Tenant commences the curing of the same within the thirty (30) day period and completes the cure within 120 days after Landlord’s notice to Tenant (it being intended that, in connection with any such default which is not susceptible of being cured with due diligence and in good faith within thirty (30) days, the time within which the Tenant is required to cure such default shall be extended for such additional period as may be necessary for the curing thereof with due diligence and in good faith but in no event longer than one hundred twenty (120) days from the date of Landlord’s notice), it being agreed that any default which is not cured within one hundred twenty (120) days shall become an Event of Default;

(4) The assignment, transfer, mortgaging or encumbering of this Lease or the subletting of the Leased Premises in a manner not permitted by Section 15; or

(5) The taking of this Lease or the Leased Premises, or any part thereof, upon execution or by other process of law directed against Tenant, or upon or subject to any attachment at the instance of any creditor of or claimant against Tenant, which execution or attachment shall not be discharged or disposed of within forty-five (45) days after the levy thereof.

 

35


(b) Landlord’s Rights upon Event of Default . Upon the occurrence of an Event of Default, Landlord shall have the right, at its election, then or at any time thereafter, either:

(1) To give notice to Tenant that this Lease will terminate on a date to be specified in such notice, which date may be five (5) days from the date of such notice or any day thereafter, and on the date specified in such notice Tenant’s right to possession of the Leased Premises shall cease and this Lease shall thereupon be terminated, but Tenant shall remain liable as provided in subsection (c); or

(2) Without demand or notice, to reenter and take possession of the Leased Premises, or any part thereof, and repossess the same as of Landlord’s former estate and expel Tenant and those claiming through or under Tenant and remove the effects of both or either, either by summary proceedings, or by action at law or in equity, without being deemed guilty of any manner of trespass and without prejudice to any remedies for arrears of rent or preceding breach of covenant.

If Landlord elects to reenter under paragraph (2), Landlord may terminate this Lease, or, from time to time, without terminating this Lease, may relet the Leased Premises, or any part thereof, as agent for Tenant for such term or terms and at such rental or rentals and upon such other terms and conditions as Landlord may deem advisable, with the right to make alterations and repairs to the Leased Premises. No such reentry or taking of possession of the Leased Premises by Landlord shall be construed as an election on Landlord’s part to terminate this Lease unless a written notice of such intention is given to Tenant under paragraph (1) or unless the termination thereof is decreed by a court of competent jurisdiction. Tenant waives any right to the service of any notice of Landlord’s intention to reenter provided for by any present or future law.

(c) Tenant’s Liability for Damages . If Landlord terminates this Lease pursuant to subsection (b), Tenant shall remain liable (in addition to accrued liabilities) to the extent legally permissible for (i) the sum of (A) all Basic Rent, Additional Charges and additional rent provided for in this Lease until the date this Lease would have expired had such termination not occurred accelerated and due and payable as of the date of default, and (B) any and all reasonable expenses incurred by Landlord in reentering the Leased Premises, repossessing the same, making good any default of Tenant, putting the same in proper repair, reletting the same (including any and all reasonable attorneys’ fees and disbursements and reasonable brokerage fees incurred in so doing), and any and all expenses which Landlord may incur during the occupancy of any new tenant (other than expenses of a type that are Landlord’s responsibility under the terms of this Lease); less (ii) the net proceeds of any reletting actually received by Landlord. Tenant agrees to pay to Landlord the difference between items (i) and (ii) above with respect to each month during the Term, at the end of such month. Any suit brought by Landlord to enforce collection of such difference for any one month shall not prejudice

 

36


Landlord’s right to enforce the collection of any difference for any subsequent month. In addition to the foregoing, Tenant shall pay to Landlord, whether or not the Lease is terminated such sums as the court which has jurisdiction thereover may adjudge reasonable as attorneys’ fees with respect to any successful legal proceeding or action instituted by Landlord to enforce the provisions of this Lease. Landlord shall have the right, at its sole option, to relet the whole or any part of the Leased Premises for the whole of the unexpired Term, or longer, or from time to time for shorter periods, for any rental then obtainable, giving such concessions of rent and making such special repairs, alterations, decorations and paintings for any new tenant as Landlord, in its sole and absolute discretion, may deem advisable. Tenant’s liability under this subsection shall survive the institution of summary proceedings and the issuance of any warrant thereunder. Landlord shall act in a commercially reasonable manner to relet the Leased Premises and otherwise mitigate its damages, but shall not be obligated to relet the Leased Premises if other space is available in the Building.

(d) Liquidated Damages . If Landlord terminates this Lease pursuant to Section 16(b), Landlord shall have the right, at any time, at its option, to require Tenant to pay to Landlord, on demand, as liquidated and agreed final damages in lieu of Tenant’s liability under Section 16(c), an amount equal to the difference between (i) Basic Rent and Additional Charges, computed on the basis of the then-current annual rate of Basic Rent and Additional Charges and all fixed and determinable increases in Basic Rent which would have been payable from the date of such demand to the date when this Lease would have expired, if it had not been terminated, and (ii) the fair market rental value of the Leased Premises over the same period (net of all expenses and all vacancy periods reasonably projected by Landlord), which difference shall be discounted to the date of such demand at an annual rate of interest equal to the then-current yield on actively traded U.S. Treasury bonds with July-December, 2010 maturities, as published in the Federal Reserve Statistical Release for the week before the date of such termination, plus one hundred fifty (150) basis points. Upon payment of such liquidated and agreed final damages, Tenant shall be released from all further liability under this Lease with respect to the period after the date of such demand.

(e) Rights and Remedies Cumulative . The rights and remedies herein conferred are cumulative and not exclusive of any other rights or remedies, and shall be in addition to every other right, power, and remedy that Landlord may have, whether specifically granted herein, or presently or hereafter existing at law, in equity, or by statute.

16A. Landlord Default Provisions .

(a) Landlord Default . Each of the following events shall be deemed to be, and is referred to in this Lease as, a “ Landlord Default ”:

The neglect or failure of Landlord to perform or observe any of the terms, covenants or conditions contained in this Lease on Landlord’s part to be performed or observed which is not remedied by Landlord (i) within thirty (30) days after Tenant shall have given to Landlord notice specifying such neglect or failure, or (ii) in the case of any such neglect or failure which cannot with due diligence and in good faith be cured within thirty (30) days, within

 

37


such additional period, if any, as may be reasonably required to cure such default with due diligence and in good faith provided that Landlord commences the curing of the same within the 30-day period and completes the cure within one hundred twenty (120) days after Tenant’s notice to Landlord (it being intended that, in connection with any such default which is not susceptible of being cured with due diligence and in good faith within thirty (30) days, the time within which the Landlord is required to cure such default shall be extended for such additional period as may be necessary for the curing thereof with due diligence and in good faith but in no event longer than one hundred twenty (120) days from the date of Tenant’s notice), it being agreed that any default which is not cured within one hundred twenty (120) days shall become a Landlord Default.

(b) Tenant’s Rights upon Landlord Default . If Landlord commits a Landlord Default, Tenant may (i) recover from Landlord all damages suffered by Tenant as a result of the Landlord Default (subject to any limitations on Landlord’s liability otherwise provided in this Lease), (ii) obtain injunctive or other equitable relief against Landlord (but only to the extent such relief is otherwise available under applicable law), or (iii) without waiving any claim for damages, cure such Landlord Default, and any amount paid or any contractual liability incurred by Tenant in so doing shall be deemed paid or incurred for the account of Landlord, and Landlord shall reimburse Tenant therefor plus interest at the Default Interest Rate. If Landlord fails to pay any such amount to Tenant within thirty (30) days of Tenant’s billing Landlord therefor, and Landlord does not dispute either the basis for the alleged Landlord Default or Tenant’s bill, Tenant shall have the right to set off such amount against up to twenty-five percent (25%) of each future monthly payment of Basic Rent and Additional Charges until Tenant is fully reimbursed for such amount. In addition, if Tenant obtains a final judgment against Landlord as a result of a Landlord Default, Tenant shall have the right to set off all post-judgment amounts due against all future monthly payments of Basic Rent and Additional Charges until Tenant is fully reimbursed. Landlord shall be liable to Tenant for all reasonable attorneys’ fees and costs incurred by Tenant as a result of a Landlord Default.

(c) Rights and Remedies Cumulative . The rights and remedies herein conferred are cumulative and not exclusive of any other rights or remedies, and shall be in addition to every other right, power, and remedy that Tenant may have, whether specifically granted herein, or presently or hereafter existing at law, in equity, or by statute.

17. Guaranty . Tenant shall provide a Guaranty in the form attached hereto as Exhibit G (the “ Guaranty ”) from OM Financial Life Insurance Company (“ Guarantor ”) as security for the performance of Tenant’s covenants and obligations under this Lease for the Term.

18. Bankruptcy Termination Provision .

At Landlord’s election, this Lease shall automatically terminate and expire, without the performance of any act or the giving of any notice by Landlord, upon the occurrence of any of the following events: (1) Tenant’s admitting in writing its inability to pay its debts generally as they become due, or (2) the commencement by Tenant of a voluntary case under the

 

38


federal bankruptcy laws, as now constituted or hereafter amended, or any other applicable federal or state bankruptcy, insolvency or other similar law, or (3) the entry of a decree or order for relief by a court having jurisdiction in respect of Tenant in an involuntary case under the federal bankruptcy laws, as now constituted or hereafter amended, or any other applicable federal or state bankruptcy, insolvency or other similar law, and the continuance of any such decree or order unstayed and in effect for a period of thirty (30) consecutive days, or (4) Tenant’s making an assignment of all or a substantial part of its property for the benefit of its creditors, or (5) Tenant’s seeking or consenting to or acquiescing in the appointment of, or the taking of possession by, a receiver, trustee or custodian for all or a substantial part of its property, or (6) the entry of a court order without Tenant’s consent, which order shall not be vacated, set aside or stayed within thirty (30) days from the date of entry, appointing a receiver, trustee or custodian for all or a substantial part of its property. The provisions of this Section shall be construed with due recognition for the provisions of the federal bankruptcy laws, where applicable, but shall be interpreted in a manner which results in a termination of this Lease in each and every instance, and to the fullest extent, that such termination is permitted under the federal bankruptcy laws, it being of prime importance to the Landlord to deal only with tenants who have, and continue to have, a strong degree of financial strength and financial stability.

19. Landlord May Perform Tenant’s Obligations .

If Tenant shall fail to keep or perform any of its obligations as provided in this Lease with respect to (a) maintenance of insurance, (b) repairs and maintenance of the Leased Premises, (c) compliance with Legal Requirements or Insurance Requirements, or (d) the making of any other payment or performance of any other obligation, then, except in a non-monetary default where Tenant is diligently pursuing a cure and no emergency exists, Landlord may (but shall not be obligated to do so) upon the continuance of such failure on Tenant’s part for ten (10) days after notice to Tenant, or without notice in the case of an emergency, and without waiving or releasing Tenant from any obligation, and as an additional but not exclusive remedy, make any such payment or perform any such obligation. All sums so paid by Landlord and all necessary incidental costs and expenses, including attorneys’ fees and disbursements, incurred by Landlord in making such payment or performing such obligation, together with interest thereon from the date of payment at the Default Interest Rate, shall be deemed additional rent and shall be paid to Landlord within thirty (30) days after demand or, at Landlord’s option, may be added to any installment of Basic Rent thereafter falling due, and if not so paid by Tenant, Landlord shall have the same rights and remedies as in the case of a default by Tenant in the payment of Basic Rent.

20. Subordination/Non-Disturbance .

(a) Non-Disturbance . Within ninety (90) days of the Lease Commencement Date, Landlord shall procure for the benefit of Tenant a non-disturbance agreement from any Mortgagee, substantially in the form attached hereto as Exhibit H . In addition, in conjunction with any closing on financing or refinancing for the Building during the Term, Landlord shall procure for the benefit of Tenant a non-disturbance agreement from each Mortgagee substantially in the form attached hereto as Exhibit H .

 

39


(b) Mortgages . Subject to Section 20(a) above, this Lease and the Leasehold Estate shall be subject and subordinate in priority to any existing or future Mortgage on the Building. If at any time or from time to time during the Term, a Mortgagee or prospective Mortgagee requests that this Lease have priority over the lien of such Mortgage and all renewals, modifications, replacements, consolidations and extensions thereof and all advances made thereunder any interest thereon, Tenant shall, within thirty (30) days after receipt of a request therefor from Landlord, execute, acknowledge and deliver any and all reasonable documents and instruments confirming the priority of this Lease.

(c) Mortgagee’s Right to Cure . If (i) the Building or the Land, or both, or Landlord’s leasehold estate in the Building or the Land, or both, is at any time subject to a Mortgage, and (ii) this Lease, or the Basic Rent and Additional Charges payable under this Lease, is assigned to the Mortgagee, and (iii) Tenant is given notice of such assignment, including the name and address of the assignee, then, in that event, Tenant shall not terminate this Lease or make any abatement in the Basic Rent or Additional Charges payable hereunder for any default on the part of Landlord without first giving notice, in the manner provided elsewhere in this Lease for the giving of notices, to such Mortgagee, specifying the default in reasonable detail, and affording such Mortgagee a reasonable opportunity to make performance, at its election, for and on behalf of Landlord, except that (x) the Mortgagee shall have at least thirty (30) days to cure the default; (y) if such default cannot be cured with reasonable diligence and continuity within thirty (30) days, the Mortgagee shall have any additional time as may be reasonably necessary to cure the default with reasonable diligence and continuity not to exceed one hundred eighty days (180) days; and (z) if the default cannot reasonably be cured without the Mortgagee having obtained possession of the Building, the Mortgagee shall have such additional time as may be reasonably necessary under the circumstances to obtain possession of the Building and thereafter to cure the default with reasonable diligence and continuity not to exceed one hundred eighty (180) days. If more than one Mortgagee makes a written request to Landlord to cure the default, the Mortgagee making the request whose lien is the most senior shall have such right. This provision shall not preclude prudent and reasonable action by Tenant in the event of an emergency.

21. Attornment .

In the event of (a) a transfer of Landlord’s interest in the Building, (b) the termination of any ground or underlying lease of the Building or the Land, or both, or (c) the purchase or other acquisition of the Building or Landlord’s interest therein in a foreclosure sale or by deed in lieu of foreclosure under any Mortgage or pursuant to a power of sale contained in any Mortgage, then in any of such events Tenant shall, at the request of Landlord or Landlord’s successor in interest, attorn to and recognize the transferee or purchaser of Landlord’s interest or the lessor under the terminated ground or underlying lease, as the case may be, as Landlord under this Lease for the balance then remaining of the Term, and thereafter this Lease shall continue as a direct lease between such Person, as “ Landlord ,” and Tenant, as “ Tenant ,” except that such lessor, transferee or purchaser shall not be liable for any act or omission of Landlord before such lease termination or before such Person’s succession to title, nor be subject to any offset, defense or counterclaim accruing before such lease termination or before such Person’s succession to title, nor be bound by any payment of Basic Rent or Additional Charges before such lease termination or before such Person’s

 

40


succession to title for more than one month in advance. Except as set forth above, the new landlord shall agree to undertake all obligations of Landlord hereunder. Tenant shall, within ten (10) days after request by Landlord or the transferee or purchaser of Landlord’s interest or the lessor under the terminated ground or underlying lease, as the case may be, execute and deliver an instrument or instruments confirming the foregoing provisions of this Section. Tenant hereby waives the provisions of any present or future law or regulation which gives or purports to give Tenant any right to terminate or otherwise adversely affect this Lease, or the obligations of Tenant hereunder, upon or as a result of the termination of any such ground or underlying lease or the completion of any such foreclosure and sale.

22. Quiet Enjoyment .

Landlord covenants that Tenant, upon paying the Basic Rent and the Additional Charges provided for in this Lease, and upon performing and observing all of the terms, covenants, conditions and provisions of this Lease on Tenant’s part to be kept, observed and performed, shall quietly hold, occupy and enjoy the Leased Premises during the Term without hindrance, ejection or molestation by Landlord or any Person lawfully claiming through or under Landlord.

23. Landlord’s Right of Access to Leased Premises .

(a) Landlord’s Right of Entry . Landlord and its agents, employees and contractors shall have the following rights in and about the Leased Premises: (i) to enter the Leased Premises at all reasonable times to examine the Leased Premises or for any of the purposes set forth in this Section or for the purpose of performing any obligation of Landlord under this Lease or exercising any right or remedy reserved to Landlord in this Lease, and if, in the case of an emergency, Tenant or its officers, partners, agents or employees shall not be personally present or shall not open and permit an entry into the Leased Premises at any time when such entry shall be necessary, forcibly to enter the Leased Premises; (ii) to exhibit the Leased Premises to others at reasonable times and for reasonable purposes after notifying Tenant and obtaining Tenant’s consent, which shall not be unreasonably withheld. Tenant may accompany Landlord and restrict sensitive areas of the Leased Premises; (iii) to make such repairs, alterations, improvements or additions, or to perform such maintenance, including the maintenance of all plumbing, electrical and other mechanical facilities installed by Landlord, as Landlord may deem necessary or desirable consistent with the terms and conditions of this Lease; and (iv) to make such repairs, alterations or improvements, or to perform maintenance, of all HVAC, elevator, plumbing, electrical and other mechanical facilities installed by Landlord, as may be required from time to time by this Lease to be made or performed by Landlord. Landlord agrees to give reasonable advance notice before it exercises its rights under this subsection, except that Landlord may enter the Leased Premises without notice in the case of an emergency creating an imminent risk of injury to person or damage to property.

 

41


(b) Landlord’s Reservation of Rights in Adjacent Areas . Landlord reserves the right to use, including access thereto through the Leased Premises, all parts (except surfaces facing the interior of the Leased Premises) of all exterior walls, windows and doors bounding the Leased Premises (including exterior Building walls, corridor walls, doors and entrances), all terraces and roofs adjacent to the Leased Premises, all space in or adjacent to the Leased Premises used for shafts, stacks, stairways, chutes, pipes, conduits, ducts, fan rooms, heating, air-conditioning, plumbing, electrical and other mechanical facilities installed by Landlord, service closets and other Building facilities. Nothing contained in this Section shall impose any obligation upon Landlord with respect to the operation, maintenance, alteration or repair of the Leased Premises or the Building, except as expressly provided in this Lease.

(c) Effect of Landlord’s Entry . The exercise by Landlord or its agents, employees or contractors of any right reserved to Landlord in this Section shall not constitute an actual or constructive eviction, in whole or in part, or entitle Tenant to any abatement or diminution of rent, or relieve Tenant from any of its obligations under this Lease, or impose any liability upon Landlord, or its agents, or upon any lessor under any ground or underlying lease, by reason of inconvenience or annoyance to Tenant, or injury to or interruption of Tenant’s business, or otherwise. Landlord agrees to exercise its rights under this Section in a manner reasonably designed to minimize interference with Tenant’s normal business operations, without any obligation, however, to employ labor at overtime or other premium pay rates.

24. Limitation on Landlord’s Liability .

(a) Accidents, etc . Except for damages resulting from the willful or grossly negligent act or omission (where applicable law imposes a duty to act) of Landlord, its agents and employees, Landlord shall not be liable to Tenant or Tenant’s Associates for any damage or loss to the property of Tenant or others located in or on the Leased Premises, the Building or the Land, or for any accident or injury, including death, to Persons or for any loss, compensation or claim, including claims for interruption or loss of Tenant’s business, based on, arising out of or resulting from the necessity of maintaining or repairing any portion of the Building or the Parking Facilities; the use or operation (by Tenant or any other Person or Persons whatsoever) of any elevators, or heating, cooling, electrical, plumbing or other equipment or apparatus; the termination of this Lease by reason of, or the occurrence of, damage or destruction of the Building or the Leased Premises; any fire, robbery, theft, and/or any other casualty; any unlawful breach of Landlord’s security system for the Building; any leaking in any part or portion of the Leased Premises or the Building; any water, wind, rain, or snow that may leak into, or flow from, any part of the Leased Premises or the Building; any acts or omissions of any occupant of any space in the Building; any water, gas, steam, fire, explosion, electricity or falling plaster; the bursting, stoppage or leakage of any pipes, sewer pipes, drains, conduits, appliances, sprinkler system, plumbing or other works; or any other cause whatsoever whether similar or dissimilar to the foregoing.

(b) Parking Facilities . Except for damages resulting from the willful or negligent act or omission (where applicable law imposes a duty to act) of Landlord, its agents and employees, Landlord shall not be liable for any damage or loss to any automobile (or any personal property therein) parked in or on the Parking Facilities or any other part of the Land, or for any injury sustained by any individual in, on or about the Parking Facilities or any other part of the Land.

 

42


(c) Liability Limited to Landlord’s Estate . Notwithstanding any provision to the contrary, Tenant agrees that (i) the liability of Landlord and Landlord’s Partners for the satisfaction of any Claim shall be limited to Landlord’s Estate, (ii) no other properties or assets of Landlord, Landlord’s Partners or the officers, directors, agents or employees of Landlord or any of Landlord’s Partners shall be subject to levy, execution or other enforcement procedures for the satisfaction of any Claim or any judgment based on a Claim, and (iii) if Tenant acquires a lien on or interest in any other properties or assets of Landlord, any of Landlord’s Partners or any of the officers, directors, agents or employees of Landlord or any of Landlord’s Partners by judgment or otherwise, Tenant shall promptly release such lien on or interest in such other properties and assets by executing, acknowledging and delivering to Landlord an instrument to that effect prepared by Landlord’s attorneys. For purposes of this subsection, (x) the term “Landlord’s Estate” shall mean the estate and property of Landlord in and to the Building and the Land, (y) the term “Claim” shall mean any claim which Tenant may have against Landlord arising out of or in connection with this Lease, the relationship of landlord and tenant or Tenant’s use of the Leased Premises, and (z) the term “Landlord’s Partners” shall mean, in the case of a Landlord which is a partnership, the Persons who are partners in such partnership.

(d) This Section 24 is not intended to restrict Tenant from suing Landlord for a breach of its contractual obligations hereunder.

25. Estoppel Certificates .

Tenant agrees from time to time, within thirty (30) days after request therefor by Landlord, to execute, acknowledge and deliver to Landlord a statement in writing certifying to Landlord, any Mortgagee, any assignee of a Mortgagee, or any purchaser, of the Building or the Land, or both, or any other Person designated by Landlord, as of the date of such statement, (i) that Tenant is in possession of the Leased Premises; (ii) that this Lease is unmodified and in full force and effect (or, if there have been modifications, that this Lease is in full force and effect as modified and setting forth such modifications); (iii) whether or not there are then existing any set-offs or defenses known to Tenant against the enforcement of any right or remedy of Landlord, or any duty or obligation of Tenant, hereunder (and, if so, specifying the same in detail); (iv) the dates, if any, to which any Basic Rent or Additional Charges have been paid in advance; (v) that Tenant has no knowledge of any uncured defaults on the part of Landlord under this Lease (or, if Tenant has knowledge of any such uncured defaults, specifying the same in detail); (vi) that Tenant has no knowledge of any event having occurred that authorizes the termination of this Lease by Tenant (or, if Tenant has such knowledge, specifying the same in detail); (vii) the amount of any Security Deposit held by Landlord; and (viii) any additional facts pertaining to this Lease reasonably requested by Landlord or any such Mortgagee, assignee of a Mortgagee or purchaser. Tenant shall also from time to time, but no more than once per Lease year, within ten (10) days after request therefor by Landlord, deliver to Landlord a statement of financial position of Tenant, as of the most currently available date, prepared and signed by a an officer of the Tenant. Tenant acknowledges that time is of the essence for the delivery by Tenant of the statements referred to in this Section.

 

43


26. Surrender of Leased Premises .

(a) Possession of Leased Premises . Tenant shall, on or before the last day of the Term, except as otherwise expressly provided elsewhere in this Lease, remove all of Tenant’s Personal Property and peaceably and quietly leave, surrender and yield up to the Landlord the Leased Premises, free of subtenancies, broom clean and in good order and condition except for reasonable wear and tear, damage by fire or other casualty, or conditions requiring repair by Landlord hereunder at Landlord’s expense.

(b) Inspection of Leased Premises . At the time Tenant surrenders the Leased Premises at the end of the Term, or within three days thereafter, Landlord and Tenant, or their respective agents, shall make an inspection of the Leased Premises and shall prepare and sign an inspection form to describe the condition of the Leased Premises at the time of surrender.

27. Holding Over .

If Tenant shall hold over possession of the Leased Premises after the end of the Term without the consent of the Landlord, Tenant shall be deemed to be occupying the Leased Premises as a Tenant from month to month, at one hundred fifty percent (150%) of the Basic Rent, adjusted to a monthly basis provided that the first thirty (30) days shall be at the regular rate. Any hold over of possession of all or any part of the Leased Premises after the end of the Term shall be subject to all other conditions, provisions and obligations of this Lease, including the obligation to pay Additional Charges, insofar as the same are applicable, or as the same shall be adjusted, to a month-to-month tenancy.

28. Arbitration .

In any case in which it is provided by the terms of this Lease that any matter shall be determined by arbitration, then such arbitration shall be in accordance with the Commercial Arbitration Rules then in effect of the American Arbitration Association. The arbitration proceeding shall be conducted in Baltimore City, Maryland, by one arbitrator selected in accordance with the Commercial Arbitration Rules. Judgment upon the award rendered by the arbitrator may be entered in any court having jurisdiction thereof. All direct and reasonable costs of the arbitration proceeding, including compensation of the arbitrator but excluding any compensation paid to counsel, agents, employees, and witnesses of either party, shall be borne equally by the parties or as the arbitrator shall determine.

29. Parking .

Subject to the provisions of Section 36, Tenant shall be guaranteed forty (40) Parking Spaces within the Parking Facilities for the Term.

 

44


(a) Tenant agrees to use the Parking Facilities for the parking of passenger automobiles and vans and for no other purposes.

(b) During the initial Term, there shall be no separate charge for parking. Parking during any Renewal Period shall be provided at market rates.

(c) Landlord and Tenant hereby acknowledge and agree that that certain Parking Agreement dated as of June 20, 2000 between Landlord and Original Tenant has terminated and is of no further force and effect.

30. Transfer of Landlord’s Interest .

If the original Landlord named in this Lease, or any successor to the original Landlord’s interest in the Building, conveys or otherwise disposes of its interest in the Land and/or the Building, then upon such conveyance or other disposition all liabilities and obligations on the part of the original Landlord, or such successor Landlord, as Landlord under this Lease, which accrue after such conveyance or disposition shall cease and terminate and each successor Landlord shall, without further agreement, be bound by Landlord’s covenants and obligations under this Lease, but only during the period of such successor Landlord’s ownership of the Building. A copy of the recorded deed conveying the interest in the Building shall be satisfactory evidence of a successor Landlord’s interest.

31. Leasing Commissions .

Landlord and Tenant each represent and warrant to the other that, except for the Leasing Broker, neither of them has employed or dealt with any broker or finder in carrying on the negotiations relative to this Lease. Landlord and Tenant shall each indemnify and hold harmless the other from and against any claim or claims for brokerage or other commission arising from or out of any breach of the foregoing representation and warranty. Landlord recognizes that the Leasing Broker is entitled to the payment of a commission for services rendered in the negotiation and obtaining of this Lease, and Landlord has agreed to pay such commission pursuant to a separate agreement.

32. Recordation .

Tenant shall not record this Lease without the written consent of Landlord. Upon Landlord’s request or with Landlord’s written consent, the parties agree to execute a short form of this Lease for recording purposes, containing such items as Landlord believes appropriate or desirable and excluding any economic terms, the expense thereof to be borne by Landlord. If such a short form of this Lease is recorded, upon the termination of this Lease, Tenant shall execute, acknowledge, and deliver to Landlord all right, title, and interest of Tenant in and to the Premises arising from this Lease or otherwise, all without cost or expense to Tenant.

 

45


33. Commercial Purposes .

The parties stipulate that the Premises is being leased exclusively for business, commercial, manufacturing, mercantile, or industrial purposes within the meaning of Section 8-110(a) of the Real Property Article of the Annotated Code of Maryland, and that the provisions of Section 8-110(b) of such Article (or any future statute) pertaining to the redemption of reversionary interests under leases shall be inapplicable.

34. General Provisions .

(a) Binding Effect . The terms contained in this Lease shall be binding upon, and shall inure to the benefit of, the parties hereto and, subject to the provisions of Section 15, each of their respective legal representatives, successors and assigns.

(b) Governing Law . It is the intention of the parties hereto that this Lease shall be construed and enforced in accordance with the laws of the jurisdiction in which the Building is located.

(c) Waivers . No failure by either party to insist upon the strict performance of any term of this Lease or to exercise any right or remedy consequent upon a breach thereof, and no acceptance by Landlord of full or partial rent during the continuance of any such breach, shall constitute a waiver of any such breach or of any such term. No term of this Lease to be kept, observed or performed by Landlord or by Tenant, and no breach thereof, shall be waived, altered or modified except by a written instrument executed by Landlord or by Tenant, as the case may be. No waiver of any breach shall affect or alter this Lease, but each and every term of this Lease shall continue in full force and effect with respect to any other then existing or subsequent breach thereof.

(d) Notices . Every notice, request, consent, approval or other communication (hereafter in this subsection collectively referred to as “notices” and singly referred to as a “notice”) which Landlord or Tenant is required or permitted to give to the other pursuant to this Lease shall be in writing and shall be delivered personally or by overnight courier service or shall be sent by certified or registered mail, return receipt requested, first-class postage prepaid, if to Landlord, at Landlord’s Notice Address, or if to Tenant, at Tenant’s Notice Address, or at any other address designated by either party by notice to the other party pursuant to this subsection. Any notice delivered to a party’s designated address by (a) personal delivery, (b) recognized overnight national courier service, or (c) registered or certified mail, return receipt requested, shall be deemed to have been received by such party at the time the notice is delivered to such party’s designated address. Confirmation by the courier delivering any notice given pursuant to this subsection shall be conclusive evidence of receipt of such notice. Landlord and Tenant each agrees that it will not refuse or reject delivery of any notice given hereunder, that it will acknowledge, in writing, receipt of the same upon request by the other party and that any notice rejected or refused by it shall be deemed for all purposes of this Lease to have been received by the rejecting party on the date so refused or rejected, as conclusively established by the records of the U.S. Postal Service or the courier service. Notices are deemed given upon receipt or when delivery is refused.

 

46


(e) Entire Agreement . This Lease contains the final and entire agreement between said parties, and they shall not be bound by any terms, statements, conditions or representations, oral or written, express or implied, not contained in this Lease. However, the terms of this Lease shall be modified, if so required, for the purpose of complying with or fulfilling the requirements of any Mortgagee secured by a first Mortgage that may now be or hereafter become a lien on the Building, provided, however, that such modification shall not be in substantial derogation or diminution of any of the rights of the parties hereunder, nor increase any of the obligations or liabilities of the parties hereunder.

(f) Jury Trial . Landlord and Tenant each hereby waives all right to trial by jury in any claim, action, proceeding or counterclaim by either Landlord or Tenant against the other on any matters arising out of or in any way connected with this Lease, the relationship of Landlord and Tenant and/or Tenant’s use or occupancy of the Leased Premises.

(g) Venue . Tenant hereby waives any objection to the venue of any action filed by Landlord against Tenant in any state or federal court in the jurisdiction in which the Building is located, and Tenant further waives any right, claim or power, under the doctrine of forum non conveniens or otherwise, to transfer any such action filed by Landlord to any other court.

(h) Corporate Authority . Tenant represents and warrants that it is authorized to execute this Lease.

(i) Time of the Essence . Time is of the essence in the performance of all Tenant’s and Landlord’s obligations under this Lease.

(j) Invalidity and Reduction of Charges . If any provision of this Lease shall be invalid, illegal or unenforceable, the validity, legality and enforceability of the remaining provisions shall not be affected thereby and the remainder of this Lease shall not be affected by such holding and shall be fully valid and enforceable. In the event any late charge, interest rate or other payment provided herein exceeds the maximum applicable charge legally allowed, such late charge, interest rate or other payment shall be reduced to the maximum legal charge, rate or amount.

(k) Captions . The captions in this Lease are for convenience only and shall not affect the interpretation of the provisions hereof.

(l) No Partnership . This Lease is not intended to create a partnership or joint venture between Landlord and Tenant in the conduct of their respective businesses.

(m) Counterparts . This Lease may be executed in several counterparts, each of which shall be deemed to be an original, but all of which together shall constitute one and the same instrument.

 

47


(n) Authority . If Tenant is a corporation, partnership or other legal entity, the individual who executes and delivers this Lease on behalf of Tenant represents and warrants to Landlord that he or she is duly authorized to do so.

(o) No Offer . The submission of an unsigned counterpart of this Lease to Tenant shall not constitute an offer or option to lease the Leased Premises. This Lease shall become effective and binding only upon the execution and delivery by Landlord and Tenant.

(p) Subordination of Landlord’s Lien . Following a written request from Tenant, Landlord shall subordinate any contractual or statutory lien it may have on Tenant’s equipment, furniture, moveable trade fixtures and other personal property kept at the Premises to the lien of any bona fide vendor or lender providing financing for Tenant as long as the subordination agreement is reasonably satisfactory to Landlord.

35. Options to Extend Term .

(a) Renewal Options . Tenant shall have the option to renew the Term provided in Section 1(b) (the “ Initial Term ”) for two (2) additional periods of five (5) years each (each a “ Renewal Period ”). Each renewal option shall be exercisable by Tenant by giving notice of the exercise of such renewal option (the “ Renewal Election ”) to Landlord at least twelve (12) months before the expiration of the Initial Term, in the case of the first renewal option, or at least (12) months before the expiration of the first Renewal Period, in the case of the second renewal option. Tenant may not exercise the renewal option for either renewal period if an Event of Default has occurred and has not been cured at the time of renewal. If Tenant timely exercises the options to renew this Lease in accordance with the provisions of this Section, then the Term shall be extended accordingly. Except as otherwise expressly provided in this Section, each Renewal Period shall be upon the same terms, covenants and conditions set forth in this Lease with respect to the Initial Term and Tenant’s obligations to pay Operating Expenses pursuant to Section 3(b) shall continue without interruption during each Renewal Period. All references in this Lease to the “Term” shall include each Renewal Period for which Tenant shall have effectively exercised its renewal option.

(b) Rent per Square Foot During Renewal Periods .

(1) Fair Market Rent . The Rent for the first Lease Year in each Renewal Period shall be an amount equal to the fair rental value (per rentable square foot) of the Leased Premises plus one hundred percent (100%) of the fair rental value (market rate) of the Parking Spaces guaranteed by Section 29 as of the first day of such Renewal Period as determined by mutual agreement between Landlord and Tenant or by appraisal by one or more commercial real estate brokers in the manner provided in subsection (2), but in no event shall the Basic Rent in the first Lease Year of any Renewal Period be less than the Basic Rent paid during the last year of the Initial Term or first Renewal Period, as applicable. For each Lease Year (or part of a Lease Year) thereafter during such Renewal Period, the Rent Per Square Foot shall be an amount equal to one hundred three percent (103%) of the Rent Per Square Foot for the immediately preceding Lease Year.

 

48


(2) Method of Determining Basic Rent . If Tenant desires to exercise the applicable renewal option provided by subsection (a), and if Landlord and Tenant are unable mutually to agree on the Rent for the first Lease Year in such Renewal Period at least four hundred twenty (420) days before the end of the last Lease Year in the Initial Term or in the first Renewal Period, as applicable, Tenant shall notify Landlord of its desire to determine the Rent Per Square Foot by appraisal pursuant to this subsection not more than four hundred fifty (450) days and not less than four hundred twenty (420) days before the end of the last Lease Year in the Initial Term or in the first Renewal Period, as applicable, and in such notice Tenant shall designate the broker appointed by it. The giving of such notice shall not constitute an exercise of the option by Tenant. Within twenty (20) days thereafter, Landlord shall, by notice to Tenant, designate a second broker. If Landlord does not so designate a second broker within the twenty (20) day period, the first broker appointed by Tenant shall proceed to make his valuation, in which case the fair rental value of the Leased Premises including the fair rental value (market rate) of the Parking Spaces guaranteed by Section 29 for the first Lease Year in such Renewal Period shall be the amount determined by the first broker. Otherwise, each broker shall make an independent determination of the fair rental value of the Leased Premises including the fair rental value (market value) of the Parking Spaces as of the first Lease Year of such Renewal Period. If the two brokers so appointed agree on the fair rental value of the Leased Premises including the fair rental value (market value) of the Parking Spaces guaranteed by Section 29 within fifteen (15) days after the appointment of the second broker, the fair rental value of the Leased Premises including the fair rental value of the Parking Spaces guaranteed by Section 29 for the first Lease Year in such Renewal Period shall be the amount determined by them. If the two brokers so appointed do not agree on the fair rental value of the Leased Premises including the fair rental value (market rate) of the Parking Spaces guaranteed by Section 29 within fifteen (15) days after the appointment of the second broker, but if the difference between the fair rental value determined by each broker is not more than One Dollar ($1.00) per square foot, the fair rental value of the Leased Premises including the fair rental value (market rate) of the Parking Spaces guaranteed by Section 29 for the first Lease Year in such Renewal Period shall be an amount equal to the quotient obtained by dividing the sum of the fair rental value determined by each broker by two. If the two brokers so appointed do not agree on the fair rental value, and if the difference between the fair rental value determined by each broker is more than One Dollar ($1.00) per square foot, the two brokers shall jointly appoint a third broker. If the two brokers so appointed shall be unable, within fifteen (15) days after the appointment of the second broker, either (i) to agree on the fair rental value of the Leased Premises including the fair rental value (market rate) of the Parking Spaces guaranteed by Section 29 (or to disagree on such value with a difference of One Dollar ($1.00) or less per square foot) or (ii) to agree on the appointment of a third broker, they shall give written notice of such failure to agree to the parties, and, if the parties fail to agree upon the selection of a third broker within ten (10) days after the brokers appointed by the parties give such notice, then within ten (10) days thereafter either of the parties upon notice to the other party may request such appointment by the then President of the Baltimore City Board of Realtors (or any organization successor thereto), or in his failure to act, may apply for such appointment to the Circuit Court for Baltimore City, Maryland. If a third broker is appointed, he shall make his valuation within fifteen (15) days after his appointment and the fair rental value of the Leased Premises including the fair rental value (market rate) of

 

49


the Parking Spaces guaranteed by Section 29 for the first Lease Year of such Renewal Period shall be an amount equal to the quotient obtained by dividing the sum of the fair rental values determined by the two brokers who were closest to each other in amount, by two. Notwithstanding anything in the foregoing to the contrary, Tenant shall exercise its option for any Renewal Period within thirty (30) days of the date Basic Rent for the applicable Renewal Period is determined and in any event at least twelve (12) months prior to the expiration of the Initial Term or the first Renewal Period, as applicable.

(3) Qualifications of Brokers and Method of Valuation . Each broker appointed pursuant to subsection (2) shall be an individual of recognized competence who has had a minimum of ten (10) years’ experience in the leasing of commercial office space in the metropolitan Baltimore, Maryland area. All valuations of the fair rental value of the Leased Premises shall be in writing and shall be expressed in terms of an annual rent per square foot of Rentable Area. Each broker shall determine the fair rental value of the Leased Premises, as a whole, as of the first day of the first Lease Year in the applicable Renewal Period on the basis of all relevant factors affecting fair rental value, including the actual Operating Expenses for the calendar year ending during the Lease Year immediately preceding such Renewal Period, and any tenant concessions (such as free rent and improvement allowances), then being offered to new tenants leasing space in the Building and other comparable buildings in Harbor East. The party appointing each broker shall be obligated, promptly after receipt of the valuation report prepared by the broker appointed by such party, to deliver a copy of such valuation report to the other party in the manner provided elsewhere in this Lease for the giving of notices. If a third broker is appointed, the third broker shall be directed, at the time of his appointment, to deliver copies of his valuation report, promptly after its completion, to Landlord and Tenant in the manner provided elsewhere in this Lease for the giving of notices.

(4) Expenses of Brokers . The expenses of each of the first two brokers appointed pursuant to subsection (d) shall be borne by the party appointing such broker. The expenses of the third broker appointed pursuant to subsection (d) shall be paid one-half by Landlord and one-half by Tenant.

36. Contraction Option .

Subject to the terms and conditions of this Section 36, in the event of a Material Change, which for purposes of this Section 36 only shall also include the outsourcing of functions performed from the Leased Premises such that the number of people working from the Leased Premises is one hundred thirty (130) or less for two (2) consecutive calendar quarters, Tenant shall have the option (the “ Contraction Option ”) to eliminate from the Leased Premises one (1) full Floor comprising either the sixth (6th) Floor or the seventh (7th) Floor (the “ Contraction Space ”), effective as of April 30, 2012 (the “ Contraction Option Effective Date ”). In addition, as of the Contraction Option Effective Date, the number of Parking Spaces provided to Tenant under Section 29 shall reduce to twenty (20). The Contraction Option shall be subject to and conditioned upon Tenant giving written notice (the “ Contraction Notice ”) to Landlord of such election no later than nine (9) months following the Lease Commencement Date. In the event of the exercise of the Contraction Option, Tenant shall pay the Contraction Fee (as defined

 

50


below) to Landlord. Landlord shall notify Tenant of the amount of the Contraction Fee within thirty (30) days of Landlord’s receipt of the Contraction Notice and the Contraction Fee shall be due and payable (i) one-half within fifteen (15) days after Landlord delivers to Tenant a statement of the Contraction Fee, and (ii) one-half by the Contraction Option Effective Date. The failure of Tenant to make any payment of the Contraction Fee as and when due shall render Tenant’s exercise of the Contraction Option void. The “Contraction Fee” shall equal the unamortized amount of Landlord’s transaction costs allocable to the Contraction Space, including, without limitation, brokerage and leasing commissions, and Landlord’s reasonable attorneys’ fees and expenses, as of the Contraction Option Effective Date, as amortized over a ten (10) year period, at an interest rate of eight percent (8%). Any disputes with regard to the Contraction Fee shall not delay the due dates therefore but shall ultimately be resolved, upon written request of either party, by arbitration under Section 28 hereof. In the event Tenant prevails in such arbitration, Landlord shall pay to Tenant any overpayment of the Contraction Fee within thirty (30) days after the determination by the arbiter. If Tenant shall effectively exercise the Contraction Option as set forth in this Section 36, Tenant shall surrender to Landlord the Contraction Space as of the Contraction Option Effective Date in the condition required under this Lease for the surrender of the Leased Premises and Tenant shall, on or before the Contraction Option Effective Date, at Tenant’s sole cost and expense, remove the internal staircase between the sixth (6th) and seventh (7th) Floors and repair any and all damage caused thereby, all to the reasonable satisfaction of Landlord. Tenant’s failure to timely surrender the Contraction Space to Landlord upon the Contraction Option Effective Date shall subject Tenant to the holdover provisions of Section 27 with respect to such space.

37. Storage Space .

Tenant shall continue to be provided with one thousand (1,000) square feet of storage space in the Building during the Term, including any Renewal Term, in the same location as currently located within the Building. The storage space is being leased in its “as-is” condition to Tenant and shall have heating, ventilating and air-conditioning service, at no additional cost to Tenant, as exists as of the Lease Commencement Date. In addition, Tenant may make improvements to the storage space subject to Landlord’s approval, which shall not be unreasonably withheld. Tenant shall pay to Landlord, as Additional Charges, rent for the storage space as follows:

INITIAL TERM

 

Lease Year

   Rate Per
Sq. Ft.
     Annual Storage
Space Rent
    Monthly Storage
Space Rent
 

10/1/2010 – 9/30/2011

   $ 8.06       $ 8,060.00      $ 671.67   

10/1/2011 – 9/30/2012

   $ 8.30       $ 8,300.00      $ 691.67   

10/1/2012 – 9/30/2013

   $ 8.55       $ 8,550.00      $ 712.50   

10/1/2013 – 9/30/2014

   $ 8.81       $ 8,810.00      $ 734.17   

10/1/2014 – 9/30/2015

   $ 9.07       $ 9,070.00      $ 755.83   

10/1/2015 – 9/30/2016

   $ 9.34       $ 9,340.00      $ 778.33   

10/1/2016 – 9/30/2017

   $ 9.62       $ 9,620.00      $ 801.67   

10/1/2017 – 9/30/2018

   $ 9.91       $ 9,910.00      $ 825.83   

10/1/2018 – 9/30/2019

   $ 10.21       $ 10,210.00      $ 850.83   

10/1/2019 – 9/30/2020

   $ 10.52       $ 10,520.00      $ 876.67   

10/1/2020 – 5/31/2021

   $ 10.84       $

$

 

10,840.00

7,226.64

(8 months

  

  

  $ 903.33   

 

51


FIRST RENEWAL PERIOD

 

Lease Year

   Rate Per
Sq. Ft.
     Annual Storage
Space Rent
     Monthly Storage
Space Rent
 

6/1/2021 – 5/31/2022

   $ 11.17       $ 11,170.00       $ 930.83   

6/1/2022 – 5/31/2023

   $ 11.51       $ 11,510.00       $ 959.17   

6/1/2023 – 5/31/2024

   $ 11.86       $ 11,860.00       $ 988.33   

6/1/2024 – 5/31/2025

   $ 12.22       $ 12,220.00       $ 1,018.33   

6/1/2025 – 5/31/2026

   $ 12.59       $ 12,590.00       $ 1,049.17   

SECOND RENEWAL PERIOD

 

Lease Year

   Rate Per
Sq. Ft.
     Annual Storage
Space Rent
     Monthly Storage
Space Rent
 

6/1/2026 – 5/31/2027

   $ 12.97       $ 12,970.00       $ 1,080.83   

6/1/2027 – 5/31/2028

   $ 13.36       $ 13,360.00       $ 1,113.33   

6/1/2028 – 5/31/2029

   $ 13.76       $ 13,760.00       $ 1,146.67   

6/1/2029 – 5/31/2030

   $ 14.17       $ 14,170.00       $ 1,180.83   

6/1/2030 – 5/31/2031

   $ 14.60       $ 14,600.00       $ 1,216.67   

38. Satellite Dish .

Landlord shall continue to make available to Tenant, without any rental or other charge, except as provided below, an area on the Roof, in its present location, measuring approximately twenty (20) feet by twenty (20) feet, together with an easement thereto, for the purposes of the continued operation and maintenance of a receiving satellite dish and communications equipment. The size and type of such satellite dish and equipment shall be at the sole discretion of Tenant subject only to applicable governmental regulations. The continued operation, including any replacement, repair or maintenance, of the satellite dish and equipment shall be at the sole cost and expense of Tenant and Tenant shall promptly repair any damage to the Roof resulting from the operation, replacement, repair or maintenance of such satellite dish and equipment.

Tenant shall also pay reasonable administrative expenses incurred by Landlord, if any, arising out of or in connection with the replacement, repair and operation of such satellite dish and equipment. If as a direct cause of Tenant’s operation of such satellite dish and equipment, Landlord is unable to lease all or any part of the remainder of the Roof to prospective tenants, then Tenant shall be obligated to pay rent on that portion of the Roof it occupies at

 

52


market rates. Landlord further agrees that it will not lease any other portion of the Roof to any tenant or permit any tenant to use the Roof in a manner which will materially and adversely affect Tenant’s use of the Roof for the purposes intended hereby. Tenant may terminate its use of the Roof at any time during the Term, or any renewals, upon written notice to Landlord. Following such notice, Tenant shall remove the satellite dish and equipment and promptly repair any damage to the Roof resulting from such removal.

39. Intentionally Deleted .

40. Subject to REA .

This Lease shall be subject to the Reciprocal Easement Agreement dated May 26, 1999 and recorded at Liber SEB No. 8595, folio 343 as confirmed in Liber SEB No. 8796, folio 017 and as amended on February 29, 2000, and any and all easements granted to Trigen-Inner Harbor East, LLC to construct and operate the Trigen plant to be located on the roof of the Building and to the lease dated February 29, 2000 between Trigen-Inner Harbor East, LLC and Landlord.

41. Costs of Enforcement .

In the event that Landlord or Tenant shall bring an action to recover any sum due hereunder or for any breach hereunder and shall obtain a judgment in its favor, or in the event that Landlord or Tenant shall retain an attorney for the purpose of collecting any sum due hereunder or construing or enforcing any of the terms or conditions hereof or protecting its interest in any bankruptcy, receivership, or insolvency proceeding or otherwise against the other, the prevailing party shall be entitled to recover all reasonable costs and expenses incurred, including reasonable attorneys’ and legal assistants’ fees prior to trial, at trial, and on appeal and for post-judgment proceedings.

42. Rule Against Perpetuities .

Notwithstanding any provision in this Lease to the contrary, if the Term has not commenced within three (3) years after the date of this Lease, this Lease shall automatically terminate on the third (3rd) anniversary of the date hereof. The sole purpose of this provision is to avoid any possible interpretation that this Lease violates the Rule Against Perpetuities or other rule of law against restraints on alienation.

[SIGNATURES APPEAR ON FOLLOWING PAGE.]

 

53


IN WITNESS WHEREOF , Landlord and Tenant have caused this Lease to be signed by their duly authorized partners or officers as of the day and year first above written.

 

WITNESS:    

LANDLORD :

 

HARBOR EAST PARCEL C—COMMERCIAL, LLC

    By:   Harbor East Parcel C—Manager, LLC, its sole
      Managing Member
     
    By:   Presidential Investors Limited Partnership,
      LLLP, its sole Member
     
    By:   H&S Properties Development Corp.,
      its sole General Partner
/s/ Patricia Ann Berkey     By:   /s/ Michael S. Beatty   (SEAL)
      Name: Michael S. Beatty  
      Title: President  

 

WITNESS:     TENANT :  
    OLD MUTUAL BUSINESS SERVICES, INC.  
/s/ Witness (illegible)     By:   /s/ Barry G. Ward   (SEAL)
      Name: Barry G. Ward  
      Title: Executive Vice President & CFO  

 

54

Exhibit 10.4

LEASE

FALLBROOK TOWN CENTER

SOUTHEAST RETAIL BUILDING

575 FALLBROOK BLVD.

LINCOLN, NEBRASKA 68521

Fidelity & Guaranty

Life Business Services,

Inc.

Suite #202


TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

         Page  

Definitions

  

Specific Provisions of the Lease

  

Article 1 Specific Provisions, Exhibits and Special Conditions

     2   
1.1  

Premises

     2   
1.2  

Dates & Term

     2   
1.3  

Parking

     3   
1.4  

Monthly Rent

     3   
1.5  

Security Deposit

     3   
1.6  

Permitted Use of Premises

     3   
1.7  

Landlord’s Address

     3   
1.8  

Tenant’s Address

     4   
1.9  

Exhibits

     4   
1.10  

Special Conditions

     4   

General Conditions of the Lease

  

Article 2 Premises

     4   
2.1  

Demise

     4   
2.2  

Rights Reserved to Landlord

     5   

Article 3 Term

     5   
3.1  

Term of Lease

     5   
3.2  

Definition of Lease Year

     5   

Article 4 Rent and Certain Other Amounts Payable by Tenant

     5   
4.1  

Base Rent

     5   
4.2  

Area Calculations

     6   
4.3  

Tenant’s Proportionate Share

     7   
4.4  

Operating Expense Rent

     7   
4.5  

Definition of Building and Second Floor Operating Expenses

     9   
4.6  

Definition of Town Center Operating Expenses

     10   
4.7  

Reimbursement For Repairs

     11   
4.8  

Late Payment Charges

     11   
4.9  

Tax on Rent and Other Payments

     11   
4.10  

Conveyance Tax

     12   

 

i


4.11  

No Rent Reduction

     12   
4.12  

Relief of Rent Obligation for Landlord’s Delay

     12   

Article 5 Business Operations

     12   
5.1  

Permitted Use of Premises

     12   
5.2  

Prohibited Use of Premises

     12   
5.3  

Hours of Operation

     13   
5.4  

Parking

     13   
5.5  

Signage

     13   
5.6  

Security

     13   
5.7  

Name

     14   

Article 6 Services Provided by Landlord

     14   
6.1  

Standard Services

     14   
6.2  

Interior Common Area Maintenance

     15   
6.3  

Exterior Common Area Maintenance

     15   
6.4  

Security Services

     15   
6.5  

Discontinuance of Service

     15   
6.6  

Energy and Water Shortage

     15   
6.7  

Charge for Providing Extraordinary Property and Services

     15   
6.8  

Limitation on Liability

     16   
6.9  

Service Contracts

     16   

Article 7 Improvements, Alterations and Renovations by Tenant

     16   
7.1  

Preconditions to Improvements, Alterations and Renovations

     16   
7.2  

Consent Required

     16   
7.3  

Governmental Permits

     17   
7.4  

Insurance

     17   
7.5  

Protection Against Liens

     17   
7.6  

Alterations Belong to Landlord

     18   
7.7  

Exterior Improvements

     18   

Article 8 Repairs by Tenant

     18   
8.1  

Repairs by Tenant

     18   
8.2  

Right to Cure Tenant’s Default

     18   

Article 9 Improvements and Repairs by Landlord

     19   
9.1  

Alterations, Additions or Capital Improvements by Landlord

     19   
9.2  

Repairs by Landlord

     19   

 

ii


Article 10 Assignment, Subletting and Mortgaging by Tenant

     19   
10.1  

Intent

     19   
10.2  

Consent Required

     19   
10.3  

Assumption by Assignee

     20   
10.4  

Continuing Liability

     20   

Article 11 Subordination, Attornment and Mortgage Requirements

     20   
11.1  

Subordination and Attornment

     20   
11.2  

Requirements of Landlord’s Mortgagee

     20   
11.3  

Estoppel Certificates

     21   

Article 12 Indemnification

     21   

Article 13 Insurance

     21   
13.1  

Landlord’s Insurance

     21   
13.2  

Tenant’s Insurance

     22   
13.3  

Policy Forms

     23   
13.4  

Certificates of Insurance

     24   
13.5  

Increased Hazards

     24   
13.6  

Waiver of Subrogation

     24   

Article 14 Damage and Restoration

     25   
14.1  

Repairs by Landlord

     25   
14.2  

Repairs by Tenant

     26   
14.3  

Abatement of Rent

     26   

Article 15 Condemnation

     26   
15.1  

Termination of Lease as to Portion Taken

     26   
15.2  

Options to Terminate

     26   

Article 16 Environmental Matters

     27   
16.1  

Prudent Environmental Management Practices

     27   
16.2  

Survival

     27   

Article 17 Default by Tenant

     28   
17.1  

Anticipatory Repudiation

     28   
17.2  

Definition of Default

     28   
17.3  

Landlord’s Remedies

     29   
17.4  

Remedies are Cumulative

     30   

 

iii


Article 18 Possession, Surrender and Termination

     31   
18.1  

Possession

     31   
18.2  

Holding Over With Landlord’s Consent

     31   
18.3  

Surrender

     31   
18.4  

Tenant’s Right to Terminate

     32   
18.5  

Compliance with Applicable Law

     32   
18.6  

Continuing Obligations

     32   

Article 19 Access of Landlord to the Premises

     33   
19.1  

Right of Access

     33   
19.2  

No Restricted Access

     33   
19.3  

Prospective Tenants

     33   
Article 20 Waiver      34   
20.1  

Waiver

     34   

Article 21 Landlord’s Liability

     34   
21.1  

Landlord’s Failure to Perform

     34   
21.2  

Non-Liability of Landlord

     34   
21.3  

Damage Caused by Other Tenants and Persons

     35   
21.4  

Sale or Assignment by Landlord

     35   
21.5  

Limitation on Liability

     35   
21.6  

Commercial Purposes

     35   

Article 22 Force Majeure

     35   

Article 23 Interest

     36   

Article 24 Miscellaneous

     36   
24.1  

Limitation of Interests

     36   
24.2  

Time of Essence

     36   
24.3  

Execution by Landlord

     36   
24.4  

Renewal

     36   
24.5  

Notices

     36   
24.6  

Reimbursement of Landlord’s Processing Costs

     37   
24.7  

Severability

     37   
24.8  

Entire Agreement

     37   
24.9  

Successors

     37   
24.10  

Joint and Several Obligations

     37   
24.11  

Choice of Law

     37   
24.12  

Article and Section Headings

     37   

 

iv


24.13  

Short-Form Lease

     37   
24.14  

Dispute Resolution

     38   
24.15  

Right of First Refusal

     38   

Signature Page

Exhibits

 

v


DEFINITIONS

Premises . The term “Premises,” includes and shall be deemed to include the space demised hereunder and all improvements comprising or built in the space hereby demised, whether in existence at the time of execution of this Lease or installed thereafter. The space demised hereunder shall consist of the area indicated by the cross-hatched portion of Exhibit A-1 and is bounded by the interior surfaces of the perimeter walls and windows, the surfaces of interior load-bearing walls, the top of the floor slab and the bottom of the floor or roof slab of the floor or roof above.

Improvements . The term “Improvements” shall include all improvements existing at the commencement of the Term or at any time thereafter built by anyone in the Premises, including, without limitation, all walls and partitions; all interior finishes including wall and floor coverings; all ceilings and ceiling mounted light fixtures; all interior windows and window coverings; all doors and hardware, all mechanical, plumbing, fire protection, telecommunications, security and electrical systems, devices and equipment; and all other fixtures of all kinds serving other portions of the Building which may pass through the Premises.

Fixtures . The term “Fixtures” or “Trade Fixtures” shall include all personal property, furnishings and equipment presently located in or thereafter installed by or at the expense of Tenant, affixed to the Premises and used in the operation of the Tenant’s business. Such Fixtures shall remain the property of Tenant and Tenant may remove the same or any part thereof at any time during the term hereof, provided that Tenant, at its sole cost and expense, shall make any repairs to the Premises occasioned by such removal.

Building . The term “Building” means the building located at the southeast corner of Fallbrook Blvd. and NW 6 th Street, identified by street address 575 Fallbrook Blvd., Lincoln, Nebraska, 68521, and as shown on Exhibit A-2 .

Property . The term “Property” means the parcel of ground identified by the City of Lincoln as Lot 4, Block 4, Fallbrook 17 th Addition, upon which the Building is located and includes all improvements thereon.

Town Center . The term “Town Center” means all buildings and all improvements which may exist from time-to-time on all of the property shown in Exhibit A-2 , identified by the City of Lincoln as Lot 1, Block 1; Lot 1, Block 2; Lot 1, Block 3; Lots 1-4, Block 4; and Lots 1-2, Block 5 all in Fallbrook 17 th Addition. The Town Center shall include all streets, roadways, parking areas and sidewalks adjacent thereto to the extent that they are constructed and maintained as private improvements.


THIS LEASE, made and entered into this 14 th day of November 2011 by and between NEBCO, INC., a Nebraska corporation, (the “ Landlord ”), and Fidelity & Guaranty Life Business Services, Inc. (the “ Tenant ”).

SPECIFIC PROVISIONS OF THE LEASE

ARTICLE 1

SPECIFIC PROVISIONS, EXHIBITS AND SPECIAL CONDITIONS

The following Specific Provisions contained in Article 1 of this Lease (“ Specific Provisions ”) are an integral part of this lease. References in the Specific Provisions, Exhibits and other sections are for convenience and designate some of the General Conditions, Exhibits and other sections where Specific Provisions are discussed. Each reference in this lease to any of the Specific Provisions shall be construed to incorporate all the terms under each such Specific Provision. If there are any conflicts between the provisions of the Specific Provisions, the General Conditions contained in Articles 2 through 24 , inclusive (“ General Conditions ”), and any Exhibits attached hereto, the terms of the Specific Provisions and thereafter the terms of the General Conditions shall control.

1.1 Premises .

(a) Floor: SECOND Suite Number: 202

(b) Rentable Area: 3,405 Sq. Ft. (2,957 Usable) as outlined in Exhibit A-1

(c) Proportionate Share of the Building: 7.76%

(d) Proportionate Share of the Second Floor: 15.94%

(e) Proportionate Share of the Town Center: 2.15% of 137,653 planned buildable sq. ft.

1.2 Dates & Term .

(a) The “ Commencement Date ” of the Lease shall be 2/1/2012.

(b) The initial “ Term ” of this lease shall be for Five (5) Years and Zero (0) Months, commencing on the Commencement Date and ending no later than midnight on 1/31/2017 (“ Termination Date ”).

(c) Tenant’s obligation to pay Base Rent shall commence on 2/1/2012. Thereafter, Base Rent shall be payable as provided in Article 4 .

 

2


(d) Tenant’s obligation to pay Operating Expense Rent shall commence on 2/1/2012. Thereafter, Operating Expense Rent shall be payable as provided in Article 4 .

1.3 Parking . All building employees and Second Floor tenants shall park in the rear (Southeast) side parking lot. Fallbrook Blvd & 6 th St. parking magazines shall be for visitors and 1 st floor retail clientele.

1.4 Monthly Rent .

(a) Base Rent . Tenant shall pay on a monthly basis 1/12 th of the annual rent scheduled below payable as defined in Article 4 .

 

Period

   Per Square Foot Per Year of Rentable Area

Year One

     $ 15.00  

Year Two

     $ 15.30  

Year Three

     $ 15.60  

Year Four

     $ 15.92  

Year Five

     $ 16.24  

(b) Operating Expense Rent . In addition to the Base Rent payable by Tenant, Tenant shall pay monthly Tenant’s Proportionate Share of estimated Building Operating Expenses and Town Center Operating Expenses as defined in Article 4 .

(c) Tenant’s Base Rent Rate reflects an 2% annual escalator.

(d) Upon 120 days’ notice to Landlord, Tenant may elect to extend the term of this lease for a period of Five (5) additional years pursuant to the current terms of the lease. A 2% escalator on base rent will still apply using the next year in succession after Year 5 of the current terms (i.e. – Year 6 will start at $16.56 and so on).

1.5 Security Deposit . $8512.50 (Two Month’s Rent) Security Deposit shall be refundable upon full performance of Lease terms herein.

1.6 Permitted Use of Premises . The Premises are to be used for Professional Office space and Tenant is entitled to quiet enjoyment of the Premises in connection with the use of the Premises as such.

1.7 Landlord’s Address .

Nebco, Inc.

1815 Y Street

Lincoln, Nebraska 68508

P: 402-434-1212, F 402-434-1799

 

3


1.8 Tenant’s Address .

Fidelity & Guaranty Life Business Services, Inc.

c/o Russell Laws

1001 Fleet Street

Baltimore, MD 21202

1.9 Exhibits . The following drawings and Special Provisions are attached hereto as Exhibits and by this reference are made a part of this Lease:

Exhibit A-1: Floor Plan Indicating the Premises

Exhibit A-2: Site Plan of Town Center Indicating Building and Premises Location

Exhibit B-1: Rules and Regulations – Building

Exhibit B-2: Rules and Regulations – Town Center

Exhibit C: Landlord and Tenant’s Construction Obligations

Exhibit D: Tenant Signage

Exhibit E: Hours of Operation

1.10 Special Conditions .

GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE LEASE

ARTICLE 2

PREMISES

2.1 Demise . Landlord hereby leases to Tenant, and Tenant hereby leases and hires from Landlord, upon the terms and conditions herein set forth, those certain premises described in Section 1 and all subdivisions thereof, which are identified on Exhibit A-1 attached hereto. The Premises are situated in the Southeast Retail Building, 575 Fallbrook Blvd, Lincoln, Nebraska 68521, identified on Exhibit A-2 attached hereto, in the Fallbrook Town Center. In addition to the Premises, Tenant shall, as an appurtenance thereto, have full right of access to the Premises over and across such entrances, lobbies, halls and corridors, as Landlord may from time to time designate and provide for common use by tenants in the Building. Additionally, Tenant shall have full right of use of walkways, roadways, driveways and parking areas as Landlord may from time to time designate and provide for the common use of tenants in the Town Center.

 

4


2.2 Rights Reserved to Landlord . It is understood and acknowledged that this Lease shall be subject to any encumbrance shown on the title to the property on which the Building is located as such encumbrances affect Landlord’s interests in the property described therein, and that, except for the rights specifically and expressly granted to Tenant by this Lease, Landlord reserves all rights to the Premises, including but not limited the right to grant or relocate easements for the Building or in regard to the Premises, the exclusive rights to use those sections of the building not within the Premises, the exclusive rights to maintain, use, and/or repair utility and similar structures in and about the Premises and the Building, and the exclusive right to increase, change, reduce, or alter the size, configuration, layout, and/or location of any entrance or other common area in the Building.

ARTICLE 3

TERM

3.1 Term of Lease . Subject to sooner termination as hereinafter provided, the Term of this Lease shall commence on the Commencement Date, and shall end on the Termination Date.

3.2 Definition of Lease Year . “ Lease Year ” means a period of twelve (12) consecutive full calendar months. The number of Lease Years comprising the Term is specified in Section 1.2 above. The first Lease Year shall begin on the Commencement Date, if such Commencement Date shall occur on the first day of a calendar month. If the Commencement Date does not fall on the first day of a calendar month, the first Lease Year shall commence on the first day of the calendar month immediately following the month in which the Term would otherwise have commenced. Each succeeding Lease Year shall commence on the anniversary date of the first Lease Year.

ARTICLE 4

RENT AND CERTAIN OTHER AMOUNTS PAYABLE BY TENANT

4.1 Base Rent . Commencing on the Commencement Date, Tenant shall pay to Landlord monthly in advance throughout the Term, Base Rent for the Premises in the amount(s) specified in Article 1 of this Lease, in United States currency, over and above all other charges herein set forth and without any set-off or counterclaim whatsoever; provided, however, that rent shall be subject to adjustment as provided in this Lease. Rent payable for any portion less than all of a calendar month shall be prorated on a per diem (thirty (30) day month basis). All payments of rent after the first payment shall be paid without notice on or before the first day of each and every calendar month during the Term or any extension thereof.

 

5


4.2 Area Calculations .

(a) Building Rentable Area . Since the First and Second Floors will function independently, they will be treated independently in calculating their respective Rentable Areas. Therefore, the Building Rentable Area shall be the sum of First Floor Rentable Area and Second Floor Rentable Area as defined below. The Rentable Areas are subject to adjustment from time to time to correct any error in measurement or if changes are made to the Building, and Tenant’s Proportionate Share shall be adjusted accordingly.

(b) First Floor Useable Area . First Floor Usable Area shall mean that area of the First Floor computed by measuring to the interior finish of exterior or other permanent walls, and to the inside face of exterior glass walls where at least fifty percent (50%) of the outer Building wall is glass. No deductions shall be made for columns and projections necessary to the Building.

(c) First Floor Rentable Area shall be derived by adding the area of the first floor building service rooms and Building Common areas to the First Floor Useable Area.

(d) First Floor Load Factor shall be derived by dividing the First Floor Rentable Area by the First Floor Useable Area.

(e) Second Floor Useable Area . The Second Floor is intended to become permanently configured for multi-tenant occupancy. Therefore, Useable Area shall mean that area of the Building actually useable to a tenant and does not include corridors, janitor rooms, mechanical and electrical rooms, washrooms or building lobby areas. The Useable Area shall be computed by measuring to the interior finish of exterior or other permanent walls, and to the inside face of exterior glass walls where at least fifty percent (50%) of the outer Building wall is glass. No deductions shall be made for columns and projections necessary to the Building.

(f) Second Floor Rentable Area shall be derived by adding the area of the first floor elevator/stair lobby, the elevator equipment room, the second floor elevator/stair lobby, the second floor restrooms, other second floor building service rooms and the second floor common corridor, to the Second Floor Useable Area.

(g) Second Floor Load Factor shall be derived by dividing the Second Floor Rentable Area by the Second Floor Useable Area.

(h) Tenant Usable Area shall mean that area of the Premises computed by measuring to the interior finish of exterior or other permanent walls, to the interior finish of corridor walls (if any), to the center of partitions that separate the Premises from adjoining premises not leased by Tenant, and to the inside face of exterior glass walls where at least fifty percent (50%) of the outer Building wall is glass. No deductions shall be made for columns and projections necessary to the Building.

(i) Tenant Rentable Area shall be derived by multiplying the Tenant’s Useable Area by the applicable Floor Load Factor.

 

6


4.3 Tenant’s Proportionate Share .

(a) Tenant’s Proportionate Share of the Building shall be calculated by dividing the Tenant’s Rentable Area by the Building’s Rentable Area.

(b) Tenant’s Proportionate Share of the Second Floor , if applicable, shall be calculated by dividing the Tenant’s Rentable Area by the Second Floor Rentable Area.

(c) Tenant’s Proportionate Share of the Town Center shall be calculated by dividing the Tenant’s Rentable Area by the Town Center Rentable Area.

4.4 Operating Expense Rent .

(a) Payment of Operating Expense Rent . Prior to the beginning of each calendar year during the term of this Lease, Landlord shall make its best estimate of Tenant’s Operating Expense Rent for that calendar year, and Landlord may revise that estimate from time to time during that calendar year, in accordance with changing conditions provided that Landlord provides Tenant with documentation satisfactory to Tenant that justifies the revision. For each and every calendar month during the Term, Tenant shall pay to Landlord in addition to the base rent specified above and at the same time and place as such rent is payable to Landlord, one-twelfth of Tenant’s estimated Operating Expense Rent. Said fraction of the estimated Operating Expense Rent shall be paid in advance, without any offsets or deductions. Operating Expense Rent for any portion less than all of a calendar month shall be prorated on a per diem (thirty (30) day month) basis. After the end of each calendar year, Landlord shall compute the actual Operating Expenses for such calendar year and notify Tenant of any correction from the estimated Operating Expenses for the preceding calendar year as soon as reasonably possible after the end of each such year. Within thirty (30) days after the giving of notice that the actual Operating Expenses were greater than the estimated Operating Expenses, Tenant shall pay to Landlord an amount equal to Tenant’s Proportionate Share of the excess of the actual Building Operating Expenses over the estimated Operating Expenses for the preceding year. Should it be determined that the actual Operating Expenses for any calendar year were less than the estimated Operating Expenses, Tenant shall be entitled to a credit against future payments of rent, or a refund in the case of the last year of the Term, in an amount equal to Tenant’s Proportionate Share of the difference between the actual Operating Expenses and the estimated Operating Expenses. Operating Expenses shall not include financing and mortgage costs, depreciation expense, advertising for vacant space or building promotion, executive salaries, the cost of tenant vacant space or improvements, ground rent, leasing commissions, the cost of tenant improvements, legal fees for leasing vacant space in the building or enforcing Landlord’s rights under leases with tenants for space in the building, the cost of capital improvements, or, utility charges for providing utilities to other tenants in the building.

 

7


(b) Building Operating Expense Rent shall be equal to Tenant’s Proportionate Share of the Building Operating Expenses as defined below.

(c) Second Floor Operating Expense Rent shall be equal to Tenant’s Proportionate Share of the Second Floor Operating Expenses as defined below.

(d) Town Center Operating Expense Rent shall be equal to Tenant’s Proportionate Share of the Town Center Operating Expenses as defined below.

(e) Normalization of Variable Building Expenses . For the purpose of determining Variable Building Operating Expenses and that Proportionate Share of Operating Expense Rent payable by Tenant pursuant to this Article 4 , the calculation shall be based on a full calendar year (except for the initial year in which the Building is operated) and Operating Expense Rent shall be deemed to have accrued uniformly during such calendar year. In the event, during any calendar year (including the initial operating year), the Building is less than ninety-five percent (95%) occupied at all times, the Operating Expenses shall be adjusted to reflect the Operating Expenses of the Building as though ninety-five percent (95%) were occupied at all times. Accordingly, for the purpose of calculating the tenant’s pro rata share of Operating Expenses, all expenses which vary with the occupancy of the Building shall be multiplied by a fraction, the denominator of which shall be the average percentage occupancy of the rentable area of the Building for the time period in question and the numerator of which is ninety-five percent (95%). Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained herein, in no event shall Landlord be permitted to charge or collect more than the actual Operating Expenses incurred in any calendar year. The Tenant’s Proportionate Share of these Operating Expenses shall be commensurate with the Tenant’s Proportionate Share of the Building as defined in Section 1.1 above. Variable Operating Expenses shall be defined as those expenses that vary with the Tenant’s occupancy; Water, Electricity, Refuse, Janitorial Supplies, etc. (i.e. – if actual Variable Building Operating Expense is $50,000 and the building is 50% occupied, the calculation for Tenant’s Proportionate Share of Operating Expense Rent is as follows: ($50,000 x (.95/.50)) x 7.76%.)

(f) Normalization of Town Center Expenses . Since the Buildings and Improvements of the Town Center will be constructed and occupied over time, certain adjustments will be necessary in order that Tenants pay an appropriate share of the costs of operating and maintaining certain improvements. Therefore, until such time as all Buildings indicated on Exhibit A-2 have been constructed, Building Operating Expenses as defined below, shall include the costs to clean, maintain, remove snow and repair the sidewalks, landscaping, light fixtures, and furnishings that exist between the Building and street curbs of NW 6 th Street and Fallbrook Blvd.; and the parking area behind the Building along with the utility yard, fences, walls, gates, light fixtures, accessories, furnishings associated therewith. At such time as all Buildings in the Town Center have been constructed, these Operating Expenses shall become Town Center Operating Expenses and shall be shared by all Tenants of the Town Center.

 

8


(g) Proration at Termination . The final payment under this Section for the calendar year in which this Lease terminates shall be prorated, based on the actual Operating Expenses for such year, through the termination of this Lease, and any Operating Expense Rent shall be due or a refund of overpayment made thirty (30) days after notification to Tenant of any adjustment.

(h) Statement of Operating Expenses . Landlord shall have available for inspection by Tenant during normal business hours a written statement showing in reasonable detail Landlord’s actual Operating Expenses for the previous calendar year after any notice required by this Lease has been given.

(i) Exhibits Reflecting Operating Expenses . All of the Operating Expenses identified and provided for in this paragraph 4.4 and its subdivisions shall be summarized in an Exhibit A-3 which may be created after execution of this lease, but shall be initialed by the parties and incorporated into this Lease by this reference.

4.5 Definition of Building and Second Floor Operating Expenses .

(a) Building Operating Expenses shall mean all of the actual expenses incurred or paid on account of the operation, cleaning, maintenance, repair, safety, management and security of the entire Building along with certain Expenses defined in Section 4.4(f) above, when applicable. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, Building Operating Expenses shall include; real property taxes and any assessments or charges made under any betterment or improvement law or otherwise attributable to the Property whether owned in fee or held under a ground lease including the cost and expenses of any contest by appropriate legal proceedings of the amount or validity of such taxes; insurance including fire and extended coverage, vandalism and malicious mischief, difference in conditions coverage, public liability and property damage and worker’s compensation insurance customarily carried by owners of retail or mixed-use buildings; utilities; operation, maintenance and repair of: the building structural system; the exterior building enclosure and all associated components; the interior building common areas; heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems including automated controls; electrical distribution systems; electrical fixtures; fire detection, alarm and suppression systems; security system; electronic door access control system; and trash disposal. Building Operating Expenses shall include fees for legally required permits and licenses; the cost of management contracts or the cost of equivalent management services; supplies, wages, salaries and benefits of employees used in maintenance and general operations along with payroll taxes and similar governmental charges with respect thereto; the acquisition cost, rental fees and/or purchase price, or in lieu of purchase price, the annual depreciation allocable thereto, of all supplies, tools, machines and equipment used in operation and maintenance; audit and bookkeeping expenses; legal fees and expenses; financing expenses relating to operation and management; taxes upon or

 

9


measured by Landlord’s gross income to the extent that such taxes have not already been recovered under Section 4.9 herein below, but excluding taxes upon or measured by Landlord’s net income; and personal property taxes, if any. The Building Operating Expenses may include the cost of alterations, additions and capital improvements required by any laws, codes, regulations or ordinances now or hereafter in effect, or made by Landlord to reduce energy requirements or which would have the effect of reducing the expenses which would otherwise be included in Building Operating Expenses, but shall not include other capital expenditures or depreciation on real property. Upon reasonable request by Tenant, Landlord shall supply documentation to Tenant sufficient to allow Tenant to verify the amount due by Tenant under this paragraph for Building Operating Expenses. These expenses shall be attributed to all tenants of the Building according to their proportionate share of the Building.

(b) The Second Floor is intended to become permanently configured for multi-tenant occupancy. As such, it requires exit stairs, an elevator, elevator lobbies, a corridor and restrooms that will benefit only Second Floor tenants. Therefore, the costs to clean, maintain and repair said stairs, lobbies, corridors and restrooms; and the costs to license, inspect, clean, maintain and repair the elevator and its associated equipment; to the extent that the costs can be reasonably ascertained, shall be attributed only to tenants of the Second Floor of the Building according to their proportionate share of the Second Floor.

4.6 Definition of Town Center Operating Expenses .

(a) Town Center Operating Expenses shall mean all of the actual expenses incurred or paid on account of the operation, cleaning, maintenance, repair, safety, management and security of the entire Town Center. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, Town Center Operating Expenses shall include: real property taxes and any assessments or charges made under any betterment or improvement law or otherwise attributable to all or a portion of the Town Center property whether owned in fee or held under a ground lease including the cost and expenses of any contest by appropriate legal proceedings of the amount or validity of such taxes and not otherwise identified as part of a specific building’s Operating Expenses; Business Park or other similar Association fees; insurance including fire and extended coverage, vandalism and malicious mischief, difference in conditions coverage, public liability and property damage and worker’s compensation insurance customarily carried by owners of retail or mixed-use complexes; utilities; and the operation, cleaning, maintenance, repair, safety and security of any building or structure constructed upon the Town Center common areas. The Town Center Operating Expenses shall include the cleaning, maintenance, repair, safety, security and snow removal of all streets, drives, parking areas, utility yards, fences, walls, gates, sidewalks, light fixtures, furnishings, equipment, accessories, decorations, trees, grates, shrubs, ground cover, lawns, water features, and other improvements throughout the Town Center. Upon reasonable request by Tenant, Landlord shall supply documentation to Tenant sufficient to allow Tenant to verify the amount due by Tenant under this paragraph for Town Center Operating Expenses. These expenses shall be attributed to all tenants of all buildings in the Town Center according to their proportionate share of the Town Center.

 

10


4.7 Reimbursement For Repairs . Notwithstanding anything contained in Sections 4.5 and 4.6 above to the contrary, Tenant shall reimburse Landlord for all expenses incurred by Landlord in repairing any damage to the Premises, the Building or to the Town Center, which is attributable to the conduct of Tenant and/or Tenant’s directors, officers, partners, trustees, employees, agents, licensees, contractors and invitees (herein collectively called “ Tenant’s Affiliates ”). Landlord shall give Tenant notice of such damage and, except in cases of building safety, or to prevent further damage, shall give Tenant thirty (30) days to make repairs to the satisfaction of the Landlord. If Tenant fails to make the necessary repairs, the Landlord may undertake the same. Thereafter, Landlord shall notify Tenant of the amount of any such repair expenses, and upon demand Tenant shall reimburse Landlord. Any such reimbursement received by Landlord shall be credited to such portion of the Building Operating Expenses or the Town Center Operating Expenses as shall be attributable to the expenses incurred by Landlord in repairing such damage.

4.8 Late Payment Charges . Every installment of rent and every other payment due hereunder from Tenant to Landlord which shall not be paid within thirty (30) days after the same shall have become due and payable shall bear interest as provided in this Lease, after Landlord has provided thirty (30) days notice. It is also agreed that since collection of any amount past due imposes an administrative cost on Landlord, in addition to any fees of collection agents or attorneys or other out-of-pocket costs, Tenant will pay to Landlord a sum to reimburse Landlord for such administrative costs equal to the greater of $100.00 or five percent (5%) of the billing or other written demand rendered or made by Landlord, computed on the total amount of each such billing or demand but not to exceed one such billing or demand per month.

4.9 Tax on Rent and Other Payments . In addition to rent, Tenant shall also pay over and reimburse unto Landlord on each rental payment date during the Term or as otherwise provided in this Lease an amount equal to that portion of the State general excise or gross income tax, if any, assessed against Landlord and attributable to the rent and any other payments made by or on behalf of Tenant under the terms of this Lease or any other similar taxes imposed on Landlord on such payments in the nature of a gross receipts tax, sales tax, privilege tax or the like (excluding federal or state net income taxes) whether imposed by the United States of America, State of Nebraska, Lancaster County, City of Lincoln or any other duly authorized tax body, and Tenant shall also pay any and all increases in said taxes from time to time. The amount payable by Tenant shall be an amount which, when added to such rental or other payment, shall yield to the Landlord, after deduction of all such taxes or duties payable by Landlord with respect to such payments, an amount equal to that which Landlord would have realized from such payments had no such tax been imposed. It is the intent of this Section 4.9 and of the

 

11


other provisions of this Lease to insure that the rent and other sums to be paid to Landlord by Tenant will be received by Landlord without diminution by any tax, assessment, charge or levy of any nature whatever, except United States and State of Nebraska net income taxes, and the terms and conditions of this Lease shall be liberally construed to effect such purpose.

4.10 Conveyance Tax . Tenant shall pay to Landlord, as additional rent, an amount equal to the conveyance tax, if any, imposed in respect to this Lease pursuant to Nebraska Revised Statutes, as amended, or any rules and regulations promulgated thereunder, and Tenant shall execute such documents as are necessary in connection with such tax.

4.11 No Rent Reduction . Except as specifically provided elsewhere in this Lease or by applicable law or statute, Tenant shall not be entitled to any suspension, abatement or reduction of rent, nor to the recovery of any sums for any loss or damage on account of the interruption of the use of the Premises or of any of the services required to be furnished by Landlord hereunder by reason of delays beyond the reasonable control of Landlord or Landlord’s contractors, or for noise, dust, or general inconvenience caused by construction within the Building, the Town Center, or adjacent thereto.

4.12 Relief of Rent Obligation for Landlord’s Delay . Tenant shall not be obligated to pay rent until the Premises are delivered for occupancy upon substantial completion of improvements to the Shell as contemplated in Exhibit C . If Landlord’s delay causes a delay in ability to deliver for occupancy, Tenant will not be obligated to pay rent until delivery of substantially completed Premises as described in Exhibit C . Tenant acknowledges that some items, as described in Exhibit C , are specific to the Tenant’s leased space and shall be constructed along with Tenant Improvement construction and not be deemed to be due to Landlord’s delay if delivered past Commencement Date due to Tenant Improvement delivery schedule.

ARTICLE 5

BUSINESS OPERATIONS

5.1 Permitted Use of Premises . The Premises may be used and occupied only for the purpose(s) set forth in this Lease and for no other purpose(s), except as consented to in writing by Landlord, which consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. Tenant will comply, at its own expense, with all laws, ordinances, governmental rules, and regulations applicable to the Premises.

5.2 Prohibited Use of Premises . No illegal or unlawful use shall be made of the Premises, nor shall any such act be done in or about the Premises. Tenant shall not commit or allow to be committed any waste upon the Premises, or any public or private nuisance or other act or thing which disturbs the quiet enjoyment of any other tenant. Tenant shall not display any merchandise or conduct any sales outside the Premises or in any way obstruct the sidewalks, drives, roadways or parking areas except as consented to in writing by Landlord, which consent shall not be unreasonably withheld.

 

12


5.3 Hours of Operation . Tenant shall keep regular business hours and notify Landlord upon closing or being unattended for more than 72 hours. Nothing in this agreement shall prevent Tenant or it’s designates from having 24/7 access to the leased premises. Tenant acknowledges that this access will be controlled by the Building Management System access control from time to time during hours set forth by Landlord.

5.4 Parking . The Town Center shall contain parking areas for the use of tenants, employees, residents and their guests, clients and customers, having such number of parking spaces for passenger type vehicles as Landlord deems appropriate, subject to the requirements of the City of Lincoln as those requirements may exist from time to time. The Landlord shall have the right to adopt and promulgate reasonable nondiscriminatory rules and regulations including the right to designate parking areas for the use of tenant vehicles, employees of tenants, customers, guests and clients of tenants or residents, and to restrict parking areas from use by tenant vehicles, employees of tenants or residents, and to adopt reasonable enforcement procedures. Landlord’s right to adopt the foregoing shall not restrict any of Tenant’s rights with respect to parking without Tenant being given the right to review and approve any proposed policy. Unless specifically provided for in this Lease, nothing herein shall be interpreted as a reservation or guarantee that certain parking spaces will be made available at all times to Tenant, Tenant’s employees, or Tenant’s patrons.

5.5 Signage . Tenant shall be entitled to identification on all interior and exterior building directories that identify 2 nd floor tenants and on the Tenant’s suite entry. Tenant shall not place or maintain any sign on the Premises without Landlord’s written consent which may be given or withheld at Landlord’s sole discretion. Upon receipt of Landlord’s consent, Tenant may install and maintain the approved signs subject to any and all permits, inspections and fees required by the City of Lincoln. Except to the extent permitted by Landlord, Tenant shall not, without Landlord’s prior written consent, which may be given or withheld in Landlord’s sole discretion, post, place or in any manner display any sign, notice, picture, placard or poster, or any advertising matter whatsoever, anywhere in or about the Premises or upon the Building at places visible, either directly or indirectly as an outline or shadow on a glass pane, from anywhere outside the Premises.

5.6 Security . At Tenant’s sole cost and expense, Tenant shall be solely responsible for providing security for the Premises and Landlord shall have no responsibility therefore; any such security system shall be consented to by Landlord, in writing, prior to any installation by Tenant The building is equipped with a building management system that will provide Tenant controlled access at all hours as requested by Tenant.

 

13


5.7 Name . Tenant may use “Fallbrook” or “Fallbrook Town Center” or other name as stipulated by Landlord as its advertised address or part of its advertised address. The right to use such name for such purpose for the term of this Lease is hereby licensed by Landlord to Tenant. Landlord retains all property and intellectual rights in the name and all associated graphics, and Tenant does not acquire or have any rights in or to such name other than expressly granted by Landlord in this Section 5.8 .

ARTICLE 6

SERVICES PROVIDED BY LANDLORD

6.1 Standard Services .

(a) Water . As a Building Operating Expense, Landlord shall pay for all water use within the Building. Landlord reserves the right to install a sub-meter on water service lines to any Tenant that uses extraordinary amounts of water. Each Tenant shall be responsible for and pay for the installation of water heaters.

(b) Sewer . As a Building Operating Expense, Landlord shall pay for sanitary sewer usage.

(c) Gas . The Premises shall be equipped with an independent gas meter. Tenant shall be responsible for and pay for all gas usage within the Premises. As a Building Operating Expense, Landlord shall pay for all gas use in the common areas of the Building.

(d) Electric . The First Floor premises shall be equipped with an independent electric meter. Tenant shall be responsible for and pay for all electric usage within the Premises. The Second Floor premises shall take electric service from the Second Floor house main panel in Second Floor mechanical room. As a Building Operating Expense, Landlord shall pay for all electrical use in the common areas of the Building.

(e) Telecommunications . Tenant shall contract for its own telecommunications and/or data service.

(f) Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning . As a Building Operating Expense, Landlord shall maintain the system, and all components, wherever located in the Building.

(g) Janitorial . Tenant shall contract for janitorial services within the Premises. As a Building Operating Expense, Landlord shall provide and/or contract for customary janitorial services to the building common areas.

 

14


(h) Trash Removal . Tenant shall contract for trash removal from the Premises to the building’s common trash receptacle. As a Building Operating Expense, Landlord shall provide and/or contract for trash removal from the common trash receptacle.

(i) Landscape Maintenance . As a Town Center Operating Expense, Landlord shall provide landscape maintenance

(j) Snow Removal . As a Town Center Operating Expense, Landlord shall provide and/or contract for snow removal.

6.2 Interior Common Area Maintenance . As a Building Operating Expense, Landlord shall maintain the interior common areas of the Building as defined in Section 4.3 above.

6.3 Exterior Common Area Maintenance . As a Town Center Operating Expense, Landlord shall maintain the exterior common areas of the Town Center as defined in Section 4.4 above.

6.4 Security Services . Nothing contained herein shall obligate Landlord to provide security systems, devices or procedures and the parties agree that nothing in this Lease is intended to impose a duty upon Landlord to provide security systems for the Premises, Building, and/or Town Center except for the building management system that provides controlled access to the building and 2 nd floor.

6.5 Discontinuance of Service . Landlord reserves the right, on thirty (30) days prior written notice to Tenant, to cut-off and discontinue any or all services without liability to Landlord, whenever and during any period in which bills for the same remain unpaid by Tenant. Any such action by Landlord pursuant to the immediately preceding sentence shall not be construed by Tenant or any other party interpreting this Lease as an eviction or disturbance of possession of Tenant or an election by Landlord to terminate this Lease on account of such nonpayment.

6.6 Energy and Water Shortage . Should it become necessary or desirable because of recommendations or directives of public authorities to reduce energy or water consumption within the Building, Tenant will reduce its energy and water consumption in accordance with reasonable, uniform and non-discriminatory standards established by Landlord, provided it does not impair Tenant’s ability to conduct business.

6.7 Charge for Providing Extraordinary Property and Services . If any property or services other than those required to be provided by Landlord to Tenant under this Lease are provided by Landlord at the request of Tenant or for the benefit of Tenant, Tenant shall pay Landlord for such extraordinary property or services. Landlord shall notify Tenant of the amount of any such payment due from time to time, and Tenant shall make such payment to Landlord at Landlord’s office, on or before the first day of the calendar month immediately following the calendar month in which any such notice is given.

 

15


6.8 Limitation on Liability . Landlord shall not be liable for any damages caused by the services to be provided by Landlord hereunder, or for interruption, malfunction or curtailment of any of said services caused by maintenance, labor disturbances or labor disputes (whether caused by Landlord or otherwise), accidents, repairs, wars, riots and other causes beyond the reasonable control of Landlord, nor shall Landlord be liable, for loss of or injury to persons or property, or any consequential loss or damage, however occurring, through or in connection with or incidental to the furnishing of any such service. No such interruption, malfunction or curtailment shall relieve Tenant from any of its obligations under this Lease or constitute or be construed as a constructive or other eviction of Tenant or disturbance of Tenant’s use and possession of the Premises or Town Center or breach by Landlord of any of its obligations hereunder.

6.9 Service Contracts . Any service which Landlord is required to furnish pursuant to the provisions of this Lease may, at Landlord’s option, be furnished in whole or in part by employees of Landlord or its managing agent for the Building, or by one or more third persons.

ARTICLE 7

IMPROVEMENTS, ALTERATIONS AND RENOVATIONS BY TENANT

7.1 Preconditions to Improvements, Alterations and Renovations . The provisions of this Article shall apply to any alterations, improvements or additions undertaken by Tenant subsequent to the Commencement Date.

7.2 Consent Required . Tenant shall be allowed to make cosmetic alterations within the Premises without the consent of Landlord. Cosmetic alterations include painting, wall covering, and other similar activities. Tenant shall not make alterations, improvement or additions in or to the Premises which would be considered structural in nature, such as moving walls or doors, modifications to the mechanical and electrical systems, or other similar activities, nor make any repairs requiring any such alterations, improvements or additions (hereinafter referred to as “ Tenant Work ”), without the prior written consent of Landlord, which consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. As a condition to any such consent, Tenant shall comply with and/or satisfy each of the following conditions: (a) Tenant shall obtain Landlord’s written approval of Tenant’s construction contractor(s) and architect, which approval shall not be unreasonably withheld; (b) Tenant shall submit plans and specifications for Tenant Work and obtain Landlord’s written approval at least thirty (30) days prior to such date, (c) Tenant shall certify, either by Tenant’s architect and/or engineer or upon completion, that Tenant Work fully complies with all applicable laws, ordinances, regulations, and rules, including without limitation, the Americans With Disabilities Act or any other similar federal, state or local laws or ordinances and the regulations promulgated there under. If, during the Term, any change, alteration, addition or correction in or to the Premises or any portion thereof is required by any law, rule or regulation or any governmental authority, Landlord shall first give its written consent thereto and such change, alteration,

 

16


addition or correction shall then be made by Tenant at its sole expense. Landlord shall not be liable for any failure by Tenant to comply with the requirements of the Disability Access Laws with respect to the Premises during the Term hereof and Tenant expressly releases and agrees to hold Landlord harmless from any and all liability for any failure by Tenant to so comply.

7.3 Governmental Permits . Tenant shall be responsible for and obtain all governmental approvals necessary to commence construction obtained, including but not limited to a building permit. Any Tenant Work not acceptable to any governmental authority or agency having or exercising jurisdiction over such work shall be promptly replaced at Tenant’s sole expense, notwithstanding any failure by Landlord to object to any such work, and Landlord shall have no responsibility therefor.

7.4 Insurance . In addition to any other insurance required under this Lease, during construction of any Tenant Work, Tenant or Tenant’s contractor shall maintain a comprehensive general liability insurance policy satisfactory to Landlord in form, content and amount of coverage, insuring Landlord, Tenant and such other parties as Landlord shall specify against loss or damage to third parties or their property from hazards normally insured against in the construction industry with respect to construction of the Tenant Work. Tenant shall provide Landlord with certificates of insurance certifying that such insurance is effective prior to commencing construction.

7.5 Protection Against Liens . Tenant shall promptly pay all contractors, subcontractors and material suppliers, and shall keep the Premises, the Building and the Town Center free from any liens or encumbrances arising out of any work performed by or for Tenant, materials furnished for Tenant or obligations incurred by Tenant. As a condition precedent to Tenant’s payments of sums owed by Tenant to its contractors and material suppliers, Tenant shall require such contractors, their subcontractors and material suppliers to submit lien releases to Tenant in form and content satisfactory to Landlord and Tenant shall include a provision in any contract for the performance of service, labor, and/or the provision of materials on the Premises providing that, as a condition precedent to the performance of any such service Tenant’s contractor and its subcontractors and/or suppliers agree to waive any rights to claim a lien that may exist or may come to exist as a result of their provision of services, labor, and/or material at the Premises. Tenant agrees to indemnify, defend, and hold Landlord harmless from and against any and all claims for mechanic’s, material suppliers or other liens in connection with any Tenant Work. If a mechanic’s or material suppliers lien shall be filed against the Premises, the Building or the Town Center for or purporting to be for labor or material alleged to have been furnished or to be furnished to or for Tenant, Tenant shall bond against or discharge said lien within five (5) days after the filing of same. If Tenant fails to bond against or discharge said lien as aforesaid, Landlord may pay the amount of such lien or discharge same by deposit or by bonding against such lien. Any amount paid or expense incurred by Landlord pursuant to this Section shall be paid by Tenant to Landlord upon demand, together with interest thereon from the date of payment by Landlord at the rate provided below.

 

17


7.6 Alterations Belong to Landlord . All alterations, additions, or improvements to the Premises, whether temporary or permanent, made either by Landlord or Tenant shall be for the benefit of Tenant, shall be deemed to become an integral part of the Premises and at end of Term, shall remain or be removed as provided below.

7.7 Exterior Improvements . Tenant shall not install any exterior light, shade, awning, satellite dish, antenna or any other device or make any exterior decoration or painting, or make any changes to the store front without Landlord’s prior written consent which may be given or withheld in Landlord’s sole discretion.

ARTICLE 8

REPAIRS BY TENANT

8.1 Repairs by Tenant . Tenant will keep and maintain the Premises, and all improvements by whomsoever constructed at any time in the Premises or outside the Premises to the extent that such improvements service the Premises only, in good, clean condition and repair. Tenant hereby waives any right to make repairs at Landlord’s expense or to deduct the cost thereof from rent or any other sums to be paid hereunder by Tenant to Landlord. Tenant shall not make changes to locks on doors or add, disturb or in any way change any plumbing, heating and air-conditioning system, fire sprinkler system or wiring without first obtaining the written consent of Landlord, which consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. All damage or injury done to the Premises by Tenant or by any persons who may be in or upon the Premises shall be promptly repaired by Tenant in quality and style not less than as originally installed by Landlord or Tenant, at Tenant’s sole cost and expense, to the satisfaction of Landlord. All repairs to the structure of the Building, including the roof, mechanical, electrical and fire sprinkler systems, shall be done by or under the direction of Landlord as provided herein. Except as otherwise provided in this Lease, Landlord shall have no obligation to repair the Premises or any improvements therein.

8.2 Right to Cure Tenant’s Default . If Tenant fails to make proper repairs or alterations in accordance with this Lease and to the reasonable satisfaction of Landlord as soon as reasonably possible after Landlord’s written demand, Landlord may make such repairs or alterations without liability to Tenant for any loss or damage which may accrue to Tenant’s stock or other property or to Tenant’s business by reason thereof. Upon completion of such repairs or alterations, Landlord shall notify Tenant of the cost of any such repair or alteration expenses, and Tenant shall reimburse Landlord therefor pursuant to and in accordance with the provisions of this Lease.

 

18


ARTICLE 9

IMPROVEMENTS AND REPAIRS BY LANDLORD

9.1 Alterations, Additions or Capital Improvements by Landlord . Landlord may make any alterations, additions or capital improvements required by law or which Landlord may deem necessary for the preservation, safety or improvement of the Premises, the Building or the Town Center. If such alterations or improvements are done solely for the purposes of reducing expenses which would otherwise be included in Building Operating Expenses or the Town Center Operating Expenses, the cost thereof shall be deemed to be a part of the Building Operating Expenses or the Town Center Operating Expenses as described herein.

9.2 Repairs by Landlord . Landlord shall repair or if required, replace the structural elements, including the roof, exterior enclosure, elevator, mechanical, electrical and fire sprinkler systems of the Building, including, without limitation, those within the Premises, as the same may exist from time to time. The cost of repairs shall be deemed to be a part of the Building Operating Expenses. The cost of total replacement shall be at Landlord’s cost and expense. Except for emergencies which directly affect the Tenant’s business operations, Landlord shall have no obligation to make repairs under this section until a reasonable time after discovery of the need for such repairs. If such repairs are necessitated by the act or omission of Tenant or Tenant’s Affiliates, the cost of such repair shall be borne by Tenant.

ARTICLE 10

ASSIGNMENT, SUBLETTING AND MORTGAGING BY TENANT

10.1 Intent . The Landlord desires a Lease with a singularly responsible party who will diligently fulfill the terms of the Lease. The Tenant desires to be such a party for the life of the Lease. However, if at some future time, it would be mutually beneficial to have a substitute Tenant, or another party to share the Lease obligations of the Tenant; Landlord and Tenant will endeavor to negotiate a mutually beneficial agreement which may include assignment of this Lease or subletting of all or a portion of the Premises.

10.2 Consent Required . Tenant shall not, without the prior written consent of Landlord, sell, assign, mortgage, pledge, encumber or otherwise transfer or dispose of this Lease or any interest herein, or sublet the Premises or any part thereof. Landlord shall have the right to withhold such consent in its sole discretion. Any of the foregoing acts without such consent shall be void and constitute a default under this Lease. A condition precedent to any consent of Landlord shall be Tenant’s agreement to pay to Landlord any costs and expenses reasonably incurred by Landlord in connection with such consent, including for review by and consultation with Landlord’s legal counsel, securing credit reports, administrative overhead and the like. Any such consent by Landlord shall not, unless otherwise agreed, release Tenant from any of Tenant’s obligations hereunder, or be deemed to be consent to any subsequent sale, assignment, mortgage, pledge, encumbrance, transfer, disposition or subletting. No sale, assignment, subletting, mortgaging, pledge, encumbrance, transfer or disposition shall be allowed to be made by Tenant if there is any default by Tenant under the terms of this Lease.

 

19


10.3 Assumption by Assignee . Each assignee or transferee shall assume and be deemed to have assumed this Lease and shall be and remain liable jointly and severally with Tenant for the payment of the rent, additional rent and adjustments of rent, and for due performance of all the terms, covenants, conditions and agreements herein contained on Tenant’s part to be performed for the Term. No assignment shall be binding on Landlord unless such assignee or Tenant shall deliver to Landlord a counterpart of such assignment and an instrument in recordable form and satisfactory to Landlord which contains a covenant of assumption by the assignee, but the failure or refusal of the assignee to execute such instrument of assumption shall not release or discharge the assignee from its liability as set forth above.

10.4 Continuing Liability . No sale, assignment or sublease of Tenant’s interest in the Premises, if approved by Landlord, shall in any way release Tenant from any liability or responsibility assumed by Tenant under this Lease, unless otherwise agreed.

ARTICLE 11

SUBORDINATION, ATTORNMENT AND MORTGAGE REQUIREMENTS

11.1 Subordination and Attornment . This Lease shall be subject to and subordinate at all times to such liens and encumbrances as are now on or as Landlord may hereafter impose on the Town Center, the Building or the Premises, and on Landlord’s interest or estate herein without the necessity of any further instrument or act on the part of Tenant to effectuate such subordination. In confirmation of such subordination, Tenant agrees to promptly execute and deliver any instrument that any such lien holder may reasonably require to evidence such subordination provided that Tenant has twenty (20) days to review and propose changes to such instrument. If any such holder of a lien or purchaser on foreclosure of such lien shall require, Tenant shall attorn to it and this Lease shall then continue in effect in the event of acquisition of the interest of Landlord by such lien holder or purchaser on foreclosure of such lien.

11.2 Requirements of Landlord’s Mortgagee . If Landlord shall elect to transfer this Lease or subject it to a mortgage or other interest of a third party, of if any proceedings are brought for the foreclosure of or sale of the Town Center, the Building or the Premises under any mortgage, whether or not this Lease is terminated by such foreclosure or sale, Tenant agrees that it will, upon request by the Landlord and/or purchaser, attorn to the purchaser upon any foreclosure or sale and recognize such purchaser as Landlord under this Lease. Tenant agrees to execute on request a nondisturbance and attornment agreement and any other necessary documents to effectuate Tenant’s agreement under this paragraph, provided that Tenant has twenty (20) days to review and propose changes to any such agreement, it being the intent hereof that if this Lease should be terminated

 

20


by such foreclosure or sale, it shall, upon request by the purchaser, be reinstated as a Lease between the purchaser and Tenant. Tenant, upon request of any party in interest, shall execute such instrument or instruments as shall be requested by Landlord to continue this Lease with respect to any subsequent interest acquired by any third party.

11.3 Estoppel Certificates . Tenant shall, at any time and from time to time, upon not less than twenty (20) days’ prior written notice from Landlord, execute, acknowledge and deliver to Landlord a statement in writing certifying that this Lease is unmodified and in full force and effect (or, if modified, stating the nature of such modification and certifying that this Lease, as so modified, is in full force and effect), the dates to which the rental and other charges, if any, are paid in advance, and acknowledging that there are not, to Tenant’s knowledge, any uncured defaults on the part of Landlord hereunder, and that there are no events or conditions then in existence which, with the passage of time or notice or both, would constitute a default on the part of Landlord hereunder, or specifying such default, events or conditions, if any are claimed. It is expressly understood and agreed that any such statement may be relied upon by any prospective purchaser or encumbrance of all or any portion of the Town Center, the Building or the Premises.

ARTICLE 12

INDEMNIFICATION

Subject to all of the provisions of this Lease, Landlord and Tenant agree to indemnify, defend and save each other harmless from any and all claims for bodily injury (including death) or property damage made against one party hereto if (1) arising from any breach or default by either party (including its agents, invitees, employees or contractors) in the performance of any covenant or agreement on its part to be performed pursuant to the provisions of this Lease, or (2) occurring within or on the Property and arising from the misconduct or negligence of either party (including its agents, invitees, employees or contractors). This indemnity shall include all court costs, environmental damages and losses, attorneys’ fees, expenses and liabilities incurred by either party and shall survive termination of this Lease.

ARTICLE 13

INSURANCE

13.1 Landlord’s Insurance .

(a) Commercial General Liability Insurance . As an Operating Expense, Landlord shall at all times during the Term maintain a policy or policies of “commercial general liability” insurance, with a general aggregate limit of not less than $2,000,000.00, and with a per occurrence limit of not less than $1,000,000.00. Provided that the amount of such coverage or coverages does not decrease below the limits stated above, Landlord, in its sole and absolute discretion may periodically reevaluate the scope of the risks covered and the liability limits of such insurance policies and, if necessary, increase or decrease such coverage or liability limits in order to provide coverage of risks and liability limits which a prudent businessman would provide under similar circumstances.

 

21


(b) Property and Casualty Insurance . As an Operating Expense, Landlord shall at all times during the Term keep all structural portions of the Building (excepting leasehold improvements, furniture, fixtures and equipment of any tenant of the Building) and all other improvements located adjacent thereto insured against (a) all of the risks covered by a standard “Special Form” endorsement, and (b) such other hazards or risks Landlord, in its sole discretion, deems it necessary to insure against. This coverage shall be in an amount equal to the full replacement cost of such improvements without deduction for depreciation, shall be written on an “Agreed Value” basis, and at Landlord’s option may have a further endorsement showing coverage for the loss of rental income and extra expenses incurred after an insured occurrence during the period of restoration of the improvements.

13.2 Tenant’s Insurance .

(a) Commercial General Liability Insurance . Tenant shall maintain at its own expense during the Term a policy or policies of “commercial general liability” insurance in form and with coverage satisfactory to and approved by Landlord, with limits not less than those set forth above. The commercial general liability insurance shall specifically cover general liability, personal and advertising liability, medical payments and products/completed operations liability. Such insurance shall be primary, shall name Landlord as an Additional Insured, and shall specifically insure performance by Tenant of the provisions of this lease, including the indemnifications provided herein; provided, however, that the limits of such insurance shall not limit the liability of Tenant under, said Article 12 above. If required by Landlord, Tenant shall also obtain pollution liability insurance if the same is commercially available. Tenant shall also increase the liability limits or the scope of the risks covered by such insurance policies to such higher levels or such broader scope of risks as Landlord may from time to time reasonably specify. The coverage required hereunder shall state that Tenant’s insurance shall apply separately to each insured against whom a claim is made or a suit is brought, except with respect to the limits of the insurer’s liability. If Tenant’s liability policy or policies cover locations other than the Premises, such policy or policies shall contain an endorsement stating that “general aggregate” limits of liability apply separately to the Premises. If such insurance shall become reduced to fifty percent (50%) or less of the limits of liability set forth in this Lease, Tenant shall immediately at its own expense purchase insurance to reinstate the limits of liability required by this Lease.

(b) Leasehold Improvements . Tenant shall at its own expense and at all times during the Term keep all of the leasehold improvements (excepting only the structural components of the Building and demising partitions and including, but not limited to all electrical, mechanical and other fixtures and equipment located above Tenant’s ceiling, but below the concrete slab of the floor above and below Tenant’s flooring, but above the

 

22


concrete slab of the floor below), and Tenant’s trade fixtures, merchandise and personal property from time to time in, on or upon the Premises, insured against (a) all of the risks covered by a standard “Special Form” endorsement, and (b) such other hazards or risks which a prudent businessman would insure against. This coverage shall be in an amount equal to the full replacement cost of such leasehold improvements, electrical, mechanical and other fixtures without deduction for depreciation and shall be written on an “Agreed Value” basis. Any policy proceeds shall be used for the, repair or replacement of the property damaged or destroyed unless this Lease shall cease and terminate under its applicable provisions. If the Premises are not be repaired or restored following damage or destruction in accordance with other provisions herein, Landlord shall receive from such insurance proceeds an amount equal to the Agreed Value of Tenant’s leasehold improvements.

(c) Worker’s Compensation and Employer’s Liability Insurance . Tenant shall maintain at its own expense during the Term a policy or policies of “worker’s compensation” insurance with minimum limits as required by Nebraska Statutes and the rules and regulations promulgated thereunder, and a policy or policies of “employer’s liability” insurance. Both policies shall be in form and with coverages satisfactory to and approved by Landlord. Tenant shall increase the liability limits or the scope of the risks covered by such insurance policies to such higher levels or such broader scope of risks as Landlord may reasonably specify.

13.3 Policy Forms . Policies shall be for the mutual and joint benefit and protection of Landlord, Tenant, Landlord’s mortgagee, if any, and others hereinabove mentioned. All property damage policies shall name Landlord as an additional loss payee, and shall contain a provision that Landlord, although named as an additional loss payee shall nevertheless be entitled to recover under said policies for any loss occasioned to it, its servants, agents and employees by reason of the acts, omissions and/or negligence of Tenant. As often as any such policy shall expire or terminate, renewal or additional policies shall be procured and maintained by Tenant in like manner and to like extent. All policies of insurance delivered to Landlord must:

(a) provide that the liability of the insurer thereunder shall not be affected by, and that the insurer shall not claim, any right of set-off, counterclaim, apportionment, proration, or contribution by reason of, any other insurance obtained by or for Landlord, Tenant, or any person claiming by, through, or under any of them;

(b) contain no provision relieving the insurer from liability for loss occurring while the hazard to buildings, improvements and fixtures is increased, whether or not within the knowledge or control of, or because of any breach of warranty or condition or any other act or neglect by Landlord, Tenant, or any person claiming by, through, or under any of them;

 

23


(c) provide that such policy may not be cancelled, whether or not requested by Tenant, except upon the insurer giving at least sixty (60) days’ prior written notice thereof to Landlord, Tenant, and every other person in interest who has requested such notice;

(d) contain a waiver by the insurer of any right of subrogation to any right of Tenant against Landlord for property damage, or any person claiming by, through, or under Tenant;

(e) be written as primary policies, not contributing with and not in excess with any coverage that Landlord may carry.

13.4 Certificates of Insurance . On or before the Commencement Date, or the date Landlord delivers possession of the Premises to Tenant, whichever occurs first, Tenant shall deposit with Landlord current certificates of insurance issued by the insurance carriers certifying that Tenant has in effect all the insurance required in this Lease, if applicable. Tenant shall also deposit current copies of all insurance policies and endorsements required by these Sections. Thereafter, all amendments and subsequent endorsements to such policies shall be delivered to Landlord as and when the same become effective. All certificates of such insurance policies shall be delivered to Landlord at least thirty (30) days prior to the expiration of each such policy.

13.5 Increased Hazards . Upon demand, Tenant agrees to immediately pay Landlord the amount of any increase in Landlord’s property insurance premiums during the which result from Tenant doing any act in or about the Premises which increases Landlord’s property insurance rates and/or premiums, whether or not Landlord has consented to such act on the part of Tenant. If Tenant installs in Premises any electrical equipment which constitutes an overload on the electrical lines of the Premises, Tenant shall at its own expense make whatever changes are necessary to comply with the requirements of the insurance underwriters and any governmental authority having jurisdiction thereover, but nothing contained herein shall be deemed to constitute Landlord’s consent to such overloading.

13.6 Waiver of Subrogation . Each of tenant’s insurance policies shall include a waiver of the insurer’s rights of subrogation against Landlord. Tenant shall look solely to the proceeds of its respective casualty insurance policy (and to its own funds to the extent it is self-insured) to compensate it for any such loss, damage or destruction.

 

24


ARTICLE 14

DAMAGE AND RESTORATION

14.1 Repairs by Landlord .

(a) If the Premises or any portion of the Building shall be damaged or destroyed by any casualty insurable under standard fire and extended coverage policies, or if the Building shall be damaged by any other type of casualty to an extent less than twenty-five per cent (25%) of what had been the assessed value of the Building for real property tax purposes immediately prior to such other type of casualty, Landlord shall, except as otherwise provided in this Lease and subject to any delay or inability from causes beyond its control, repair and/or rebuild the same substantially to what had been the condition thereof immediately prior to such damage or destruction, and rent shall be abated proportionately as provided in this Lease.

(b) If the Building shall be destroyed or shall be damaged to the extent of twenty-five per cent (25%) or more of what had been the assessed value thereof for real property tax purposes immediately prior to the casualty, and such casualty shall not have been insurable under standard fire and extended coverage policies, then Landlord may, at its option, either terminate this Lease or elect to repair such damage or rebuild the Building. If Landlord elects to repair or rebuild the Building, it shall perform such repair or rebuilding as provided in herein, and rent shall be abated proportionately as provided in this Lease. Within thirty (30) days after any such casualty, Landlord shall notify Tenant whether Landlord intends to repair or rebuild the Building, accompanied by a schedule showing the time required for such rebuilding. If Landlord elects not to repair or rebuild, this Lease shall terminate effective as of the date of Landlord’s notice that Landlord does not intend to rebuild, and all further obligations of both parties hereunder shall cease (other than those which shall theretofore have accrued).

(c) Tenant’s Right to Terminate . If the damage to the Building materially affects the Tenant’s Premises, the Tenant shall have the right to terminate this Lease if (1) the Landlord’s reconstruction schedule, reasonably and professionally created, indicates that the damage to the Premises cannot be repaired within ninety (90) days from the date of the damage, or (2) Landlord commences and proceeds with due diligence but fails to complete the repair of the damage as required herein within the ninety (90) day period, subject to an extension of time by agreement of both parties for an excusable delay. Tenant may terminate this Lease as follows: for the reason stated in clause (1) above, by notice to the Landlord within twenty (20) days from the date on which the reconstruction schedule is delivered to Tenant; or if for the reason stated in clause (2) above, by such notice within twenty (20) days from the end of the ninety (90) day period, as it may have been extended by an excusable delay.

 

25


14.2 Repairs by Tenant . Notwithstanding anything contained in Section 14.1 above to the contrary, in the event of any damage or destruction affecting the Premises, Tenant shall, unless this Lease is terminated pursuant to Section 14.1(b) above, forthwith replace or fully repair all improvements, trade fixtures, equipment, display cases and other property originally installed by Tenant in the Premises. Except as otherwise provided in this Lease, Landlord shall have no interest in the proceeds of any insurance carried by Tenant with respect to Tenant’s interest in the Premises or this Lease, and Tenant shall have no interest in the proceeds of any insurance carried by Landlord.

14.3 Abatement of Rent . During any period in which, by reason of any damage or destruction not resulting from the acts or omissions of Tenant or Tenant’s Affiliates, there is interference with the operation of Tenant’s business in the Premises, Base Rent and Operating Expense Rent shall be appropriately abated for the proporation of the premises rendered untenable for the period commencing with such destruction or damage and ending with the completion by Landlord of such repair.

ARTICLE 15

CONDEMNATION

15.1 Termination of Lease as to Portion Taken . Tenant hereby covenants and agrees with Landlord that in the event the Premises, or any part thereof, are taken, damaged consequentially or otherwise, or condemned by public authority, this lease shall terminate, as to the part so taken, as of the date title shall vest in the said public authority, and the rental reserved shall be adjusted so that Tenant shall be required to pay rent equitably reduced for the portion of the Premises taken, damaged or rendered inaccessible to Tenant. Tenant’s Proportionate Share of Building Operating Expenses and Town Center Operating Expenses shall also be equitably reduced to reflect such condemnation. On any such termination due to condemnation, the rent and other charges, if any, payable hereunder shall be prorated as of the date of such termination, provided that rent shall be payable by Tenant to Landlord for any holdover tenancy according to the provisions of this Lease.

15.2 Options to Terminate . In the event of any condemnation as contemplated in this Lease, Landlord shall have the right to terminate this Lease by giving Tenant written notice of termination within sixty (60) days after such taking. If more than twenty-five percent (25%) of the Premises is taken by condemnation or not reasonably accessible to Tenant and if the remaining part is thereby rendered unfit for Tenant’s use in Tenant’s sole determination, Tenant shall have the right to terminate this Lease by giving Landlord written notice of termination within thirty (30) days after possession is lost or title passes, whichever shall first occur. Any such termination shall be effective as of the last day of the calendar month next following the month in which such notice is given.

 

26


ARTICLE 16

ENVIRONMENTAL MATTERS

16.1 Prudent Environmental Management Practices . Notwithstanding any contrary provisions of this Lease whatsoever, neither party shall use, nor permit the use of, the Premises, the Building or the Land so as to create or result in, directly or indirectly, (a) any sudden or gradual spill, leak, discharge, escape, seepage, infiltration, abandonment, dumping, disposal or storage of any hazardous or industrial waste, substance or contamination, effluent, sewage, pollution or detrimental or deleterious material or substance (including without limitation asbestos), nor the disposal, storage or abandonment on the Land of any material, tank or container holding or contaminated by any of the foregoing or residues thereof, nor the installation of any material or product containing or composed of any of the foregoing, in, on, from under or above the Land (the foregoing occurrences being hereinafter collectively called “ Environmental Hazard ”), or (b) any violation, or state of facts or condition which would result in a violation, of any federal, state or local statute, law, code, rule, regulation or order applicable to any Environmental Hazard (the foregoing being hereinafter collectively called “ Legal Violation ”). In the event of the violation of the foregoing by either party, in additional to all other rights and remedies available under this Lease, regardless of when the existence of the Environmental Hazard or Legal Violation is determined, the party responsible for such Legal Violation shall, immediately upon notice from the other party, at the party’s sole cost and expense, either (a) take all action necessary to test, identify, and monitor the Environmental Hazard and to remove the Environmental Hazard from the Land and dispose of the same and restore the Land and/or Building to the condition existing prior to such removal, and/or to remedy any Legal Violation, all in accordance with applicable federal, state and local statutes, laws, codes, rules, regulations or orders; or (b) reimburse the other party for all costs and expenses incurred in testing, investigating, identifying and monitoring the Environmental Hazard in removing and disposing of the Environmental Hazard and in restoring the Land, and/or in remedying any Legal Violation. Each party shall defend with legal counsel reasonably acceptable to the other party, indemnify and save harmless the other party against and from all liabilities, obligations, damages, penalties, claims, costs, charges and expenses, including architects’ and attorneys’ fees and disbursements which may be imposed upon or incurred by or asserted, whether by any governmental authority, by reason of any violation or alleged violation of any of the foregoing provisions of this Section.

16.2 Survival . Each covenant, agreement, representation, warranty and indemnification contained in this Article shall survive the termination of this Lease and shall remain effective until all such obligations have been completely performed and satisfied.

 

27


ARTICLE 17

DEFAULT BY TENANT

17.1 Anticipatory Repudiation . If Tenant notifies Landlord or otherwise unequivocally demonstrates an intention to repudiate this lease and Tenant’s obligations hereunder prior to the Commencement Date, Landlord may, at its option, deem such action as a breach of this lease. In addition to any other rights or remedies available to Landlord hereunder or by law, Landlord may retain all Base Rent paid pursuant to the provisions of this Lease as damages incurred as a result of Tenant’s repudiation of its obligations hereunder. Such damages shall include, without limitation, the costs and expenses of reletting the Premises including without limitation, the costs of alterations and repairs, dividing and subdividing of the Premises in connection therewith, brokerage commissions or other similar expenses paid on account of this lease and any subsequent reletting of the Premises, reasonable attorneys’ fees incurred in the negotiating of this lease and any replacement lease. In addition to the above Tenant shall pay to Landlord all costs and expenses incurred by Landlord for leasehold improvements made to the Premises in preparation of Tenant’s occupancy of the Premises to the extent such damages are not collected through Landlord’s reasonable reletting efforts.

17.2 Definition of Default . In addition to other instances of default specifically set forth in this Lease, Tenant is in default under this Lease if: (a) Tenant shall fail to pay rent or any part thereof within thirty (30) days after the same becomes due, after Landlord has provided thirty (30) days notice to Tenant of such failure to pay rent; (b) Tenant shall fail to pay any other charge, assessment or amount it is obligated to pay hereunder within the time period specified, or if no time period is specified, within thirty (30) days after the same becomes due provided that Landlord has provided thirty (30) days notice to Tenant; (c) Tenant shall fail to observe or perform any of the other covenants herein contained, and on Tenant’s part to be observed and performed, and such default shall continue for thirty (30) days after written notice thereof is given to Tenant, or if such default in observance or performance of such other covenants cannot reasonably be cured within said thirty (30) day period, then such longer time as may be required, provided that tenant shall within said period commence such cure and thereafter diligently prosecute the same to completion; (d) if Tenant then owning this Lease shall become bankrupt, or file any debtor proceedings, or any case or proceeding, voluntary or involuntary, be filed by or against Tenant as debtor under any provision of the Federal Bankruptcy Code and such proceeding shall not be dismissed or discharged within thirty (30) days from the date of the filing thereof, or if any case or proceeding be filed by or against Tenant under any State statute governing any debtor-creditor rights, seeking to have an order or decree rendered against Tenant directing any readjustment, arrangement, composition or reduction of Tenant’s debts, liabilities or obligations, or making any assignment for the benefit of creditors; (e) Tenant shall vacate or abandon the Premises; (f) Tenant shall cease to occupy the Premises or shall remove substantially all of Tenant’s personal property therefrom; (g) this Lease or any estate or interest of Tenant hereunder shall

 

28


become subject to any attachment or judgment, or to any lien, charge or encumbrance not consented to by Landlord pursuant to the provisions of this Lease; (h) any guarantor of this Lease shall default under any guaranty of this Lease, or shall repudiate or revoke any such guaranty of any obligation under such guaranty, or any event described above shall occur respecting any guarantor of this Lease.

17.3 Landlord’s Remedies . In the event of default:

(a) Right of Re-entry . Landlord may at once re-enter the Premises or any part thereof in the name of the whole and, upon or without such entry, at its option, terminate this Lease and may expel and remove from the Premises Tenant and any persons claiming under Tenant and its and their effects without being deemed guilty of any trespass or becoming liable for any loss or damage occasioned thereby, without prejudice to any other right or remedy of action, including summary possession, which Landlord may have for rent or any other indebtedness owing by Tenant hereunder, whether theretofore or thereafter accruing or to accrue, or damages for any preceding or other breach of contract.

(b) Summary Possession . Whether or not Landlord shall have taken any action above permitted, Landlord may bring an action for summary possession in case of such default, and in any such action, service of prior notice or demand is hereby expressly waived. Landlord, at its option, may assert its claim for unpaid rents in such action or may institute a separate action for the recovery of rent.

(c) Removal of Persons and Property . In the event of such resumption of possession under this Lease, whether by summary proceedings or otherwise, Landlord, or any receiver appointed by a court having jurisdiction, may dispossess and remove all persons and property from the Premises, and any property so removed may be stored in any public warehouse or elsewhere at the cost of and for the account of Tenant. Landlord shall not be responsible for the care or safekeeping thereof, and Tenant hereby waives any and all claims against Landlord and Landlord’s Affiliates for loss, destruction, and/or damages or injury which may be occasioned in the exercise of any of the aforesaid acts.

(d) Damages, Attorneys’ Fees and Costs . Any party in default of this Lease shall be responsible for and shall pay all damages, attorneys’ fees and costs which may have been incurred by the other party as a result of such default.

(e) Election to Terminate Lease . No re-entry or taking of possession of the Premises by Landlord shall be construed as an election to terminate this Lease, unless a written notice that this Lease is terminated is given or an order is secured stating that this Lease is terminated. The effective date of termination of this Lease shall be as of the date set forth or provided in the notice or order aforementioned, as the case may be.

 

29


(f) Reletting of Premises . Landlord may from time to time, upon termination of this Lease, relet the Premises or any part thereof for the account of Tenant or any part thereof, for all or any portion of the remainder of the Term to a tenant or tenants satisfactory to Landlord, and at such rental or rentals as may, in the exercise of reasonable efforts, be obtained, with the right of Landlord to put the Premises in good order and condition and to make reasonable alterations and repairs to facilitate such reletting at Tenant’s expense. Landlord shall receive such rentals and apply them, first to the payment of the expenses of recovering possession of the Premises and the re-renting thereof, including without limitation, all attorneys’ fees and brokers’ commissions, together with such expenses as Landlord may have incurred in putting the Premises in good order and condition or in making such alterations and repairs, and then to the payment of rent and to the fulfillment of the covenants of Tenant, the balance, if any, to be paid over to Tenant, provided that Tenant shall remain liable for any deficiency, which deficiency Tenant agrees to pay monthly as the same may accrue. Notwithstanding any such reletting without termination, Landlord may at any time thereafter elect to terminate this Lease for such previous breach.

(g) Liquidated Damages . In the event this Lease is terminated by reason of any breach of the Lease by Tenant or because of any other event entitling Landlord to so terminate as hereinabove set forth, all remaining lease payments contained herein shall become immediately due and payable to compensate Landlord for damages. Said damages shall include the cost of putting the Premises in good order and condition, the cost (including commissions) of reletting the Premises and any deficiency between the remaining rent provided herein and the amount Landlord is able to lease the Premises to another tenant for the remainder of the term. Landlord shall use its best efforts to relet the Premises. To the extent the accelerated lease payments exceed Landlord’s damages, the excess amount shall be returned to the Tenant.

(h) Broker’s Fee . On any termination of this Lease under the provisions of this Lease, Tenant shall, without limitation as to any other liability to Landlord hereunder, become liable to Landlord for the then unamortized portion of any broker’s or real estate agent’s commission paid by Landlord for or in connection with the execution of this Lease (amortization to be computed on a straight-line basis over the full Term).

17.4 Remedies are Cumulative . Each and all of the remedies given to Landlord hereunder are cumulative and the exercise of one right or remedy by Landlord shall not impair Landlord’s right to any other remedy.

 

30


ARTICLE 18

POSSESSION, SURRENDER AND TERMINATION

18.1 Possession . If Landlord, for any reason whatsoever, cannot deliver possession of the Premises to Tenant at the commencement of the Term, this lease shall not be void or voidable nor shall Landlord be liable to Tenant for any loss or damage resulting therefrom. No delay in delivery of possession shall operate to extend the Term hereof.

18.2 Holding Over With Landlord’s Consent . Any holding over after the expiration of the Term with the consent of Landlord shall be construed to be a tenancy from month-to-month at the then current monthly Basic Rent, and shall otherwise be on the terms and conditions herein specified. If at the expiration or other termination of this lease, without the consent of Landlord, Tenant continues in possession of the Premises, either actually or constructively, then Tenant shall be liable to Landlord for any and all consequential damages sustained by Landlord as a result of such continued possession and shall pay monthly rent in an amount equal to two hundred percent (200%) of the monthly Basic Rent due and paid or still owing by Tenant during the immediately preceding rent period in addition to Building Operating Expenses, additional rent and any other sums due and owing hereunder.

18.3 Surrender . Unless Landlord specifically directs Tenant in writing to leave any leasehold improvements or fixtures in the Premises no later than sixty (60) days prior to the Termination Date, upon the expiration of the Term (or sooner termination, if applicable), Tenant shall, at Tenant’s sole cost and expense, remove from the Premises all of Tenant’s leasehold improvements, including without limitation, interior and exterior signs, trade fixtures and equipment, and other such items that have been installed or placed on the Premises by Tenant, by Tenant’s predecessors in interest, or which have been installed or placed therein for the benefit of or on behalf of Tenant or Tenant’s predecessors (all of which are hereinafter referred to as “ Tenant’s Property ”), and Tenant shall repair all damage resulting from such removal. Tenant shall thereupon surrender the Premises to Landlord together with all keys to the Premises at the place then fixed for the payment of rent and shall inform Landlord of all combinations on locks, safes and vaults, if any, in the Premises. If this lease is terminated prior to its natural expiration due to Tenant’s failure to fully and faithfully perform all of the terms, covenants and conditions of this lease to be performed by Tenant, Tenant shall nevertheless remove Tenant’s Property from the Premises in the manner aforesaid within thirty (30) days after receipt of written direction to do so from Landlord. If Tenant fails to remove any of Tenant’s Property as provided above, Landlord may, but is not obligated to, at Tenant” expense, remove all of Tenant’s Property, not so removed and repair all damage to the Premises resulting from such removal and may, but is not obligated to, at Tenant’s expense, store the same in any public or private warehouse. Landlord shall have no liability to Tenant for any loss or damage to Tenant’s Property, caused by or resulting from such removal or otherwise. Tenant’s obligation to observe or perform this covenant shall survive the expiration or other termination of this lease. Any of Tenant’s Property which is unclaimed by Tenant subsequent to sixty (60) days after the termination of this lease shall be considered abandoned and may be disposed of at Landlord’s discretion.

 

31


18.4 Tenant’s Right to Terminate . Notwithstanding anything in this Lease to the Contrary, in the event of a Material Change (as defined below), Tenant shall have the right to terminate the lease by providing Landlord ninety (90) days notice and paying Landlord a Termination Fee (as defined below).

(a) Material Change . A material change in Tenant’s business plan or climate such as (i) the sale of all or a material portion of Tenant, (ii) a change in control of Tenant, (iii) a significant downsizing of Tenant’s workforce to less than 10 people for two (2) consecutive calendar quarters, (iv) a relocation of Tenant’s business operations to outside the State of Nebraska, or (v) a material reorganization of one or more of the product lines of Tenant.

(b) Termination Fee . The Termination Fee shall equal the un-ammortized amount of the Tenant Improvement Allowance provided by Landlord as defined in Exhibit C , plus 6 months base rent at time of termination, plus 6 months Tenant’s share of Building Operating Expenses.

18.5 Compliance with Applicable Law . Prior to surrender or earlier termination of this Lease, if requested by Landlord, Tenant shall, provide Landlord with reasonable evidence satisfactory to Landlord, that Tenant has fully and completely complied with all laws, regulations, ordinances or orders of any governmental authority having jurisdiction therefor, including without limitation, full compliance with all Environmental Laws which shall include taking all actions as are necessary to return the Premises and surrounding area to the condition existing prior to the introduction of any Hazardous Substances onto the Premises.

18.6 Continuing Obligations . As a condition precedent to Tenant’s surrender of this Lease, Tenant shall fully comply with all of its obligations, duties and responsibilities hereunder, the completion of which shall be reasonably determined by Landlord. Tenant shall not be deemed to have surrendered this Lease, nor shall this Lease be deemed to be terminated, nor shall Landlord be required to accept Tenant’s purported surrender of possession of the Premises, unless and until Tenant shall have so complied with Tenant’s obligations under this Article and the failure to so comply shall be a material breach of this Lease. Until the terms, covenants and conditions of this Lease are fully complied with, Tenant shall continue to pay monthly rent as provided in this Lease (regarding holdover tenants without the Landlord’s consent), shall continue to pay all Operating Expenses and other additional rent and shall fully comply with the terms and conditions of this Lease until such time as the terms of this Article are fully complied with. Nothing contained in this Article shall diminish or otherwise limit Tenant’s covenant and agreement to indemnify, defend and hold the Landlord harmless under any other provision of this Lease beyond the termination or surrender of this Lease.

 

32


ARTICLE 19

ACCESS OF LANDLORD TO THE PREMISES

19.1 Right of Access . Tenant shall permit Landlord and its agents to enter the Premises at all reasonable times to inspect and examine the same and determine the state of repair and condition thereof, to maintain the Building, to perform any service provided by Landlord to Tenant hereunder, and to make repairs, alterations and additions to, and to inspect and examine, any portion of the Building, including duct work, utilities and similar facilities within the Premises, with the right to erect and maintain such scaffolding, canopies, fences and props as may be required, and all without any rebate of rent or liability to Tenant for any loss of occupation or quiet enjoyment of the Premises thereby occasioned, provided, however, that all such work shall be done promptly and in such manner and during such hours as to cause as little interference as is reasonably possible. Tenant will also permit the Landlord and Landlord’s agents, at all reasonable times during the Term, to enter the Premises to perform any inspections and/or analysis of the Premises to assure Landlord of Tenant’s compliance with applicable Environmental Laws and with the requirements of this Lease, and to perform disability access surveys to assure Landlord of Tenant’s compliance with applicable Disability Access Laws, provided that such work shall be done in such a manner and during such times as to cause minimal interruption with Tenant’s quiet enjoyment of the Premises. If such inspection or analysis indicates that Tenant’s occupancy or operation of its business on the Premises may be in violation of any Environmental Laws or Disability Access Laws, then Tenant shall immediately take whatever action is required to bring the Premises and Tenant’s operations into compliance with all applicable laws, regulations, statutes, ordinances, and similar regulatory rule and/or requirement. Landlord shall give Tenant prior notice of any such entry except in emergencies.

19.2 No Restricted Access . No additional locks, other devices or systems which would restrict access to the Premises shall be placed upon any doors without the prior written consent of Landlord. Landlord’s consent to installation of anti-crime warning devices or security systems shall not be unreasonably withheld; provided Landlord shall not be required to give such consent unless Tenant provides Landlord with a means of access to the Premises for emergency and routine maintenance purposes. If Landlord provides cleaning, janitorial or recycling services to tenants of the Building, then unless access to the Premises is provided during the hours when such service are normally rendered, Landlord shall not be responsible for providing such services to the Premises or to those portions thereof which are inaccessible. Landlord’s inability to provide cleaning services to inaccessible areas shall not entitle Tenant to any adjustment in rent.

19.3 Prospective Tenants . Tenant will also permit Landlord to bring prospective tenants upon the Premises to view the same at reasonable times from time to time within one hundred twenty (120) days prior to the expiration of the Term.

 

33


ARTICLE 20

WAIVER

20.1 Waiver . Landlord’s failure to take advantage of any default or breach of covenant on the part of Tenant shall not be construed as a waiver thereof, nor shall any custom or practice which may grow up between Landlord and Tenant in the course of administering this Lease be construed to waive or to lessen the right of Landlord to insist upon the performance by Tenant of any term, covenant or condition hereof, or to waive or lessen the right of Landlord to exercise any rights given Landlord on account of any such default. A waiver by Landlord of a particular breach or default shall not be deemed to be a waiver of the same or any other subsequent breach or default. The acceptance of rent or any other sum due hereunder shall not be, or be construed to be, a waiver of any breach of any term, covenant or condition of this Lease, whether or not Landlord has knowledge of such breach at the time of such acceptance.

ARTICLE 21

LANDLORD’S LIABILITY

21.1 Landlord’s Failure to Perform . Landlord shall not be deemed to be in default in the performance of any obligation required by it under this Lease unless and until it has failed to perform such obligation within fifteen (15) days after written notice has been delivered by Tenant to Landlord, specifying wherein Landlord has failed to perform such obligation; provided that if the nature of Landlord’s obligation is such that more than fifteen (15) days are required for its performance, Landlord shall complete performance of its obligation no later than thirty (30) days after receiving written notice of default from Tenant. Notwithstanding the above, Tenant shall have the right to terminate this lease if Landlord fails to complete performance within thirty (30) days of notice from Tenant and Tenant in Tenant’s reasonable opinion cannot continue to operate its business on the leased premises.

21.2 Non-Liability of Landlord . Landlord shall not be liable for any damage done or occasioned by or from the electrical system or appliance connected thereto, odors, smoke, noise no matter what the source, plumbing, sewer or cesspool systems, upon or about the Premises, the Building, or the Town Center, nor for damages occasioned by water being upon or coming through the roof, trapdoor, walls, windows, doors, pipes, water heaters or otherwise. Landlord shall not be liable for any damage to Tenant’s leasehold improvements, fixtures, personal property, business records, or merchandise resulting from fire or other insurable hazards, regardless of the cause thereof; and Tenant hereby releases Landlord from all liability for such damage. In addition, Landlord shall not be liable for the failure of any utility service provider to supply utilities to Tenant, and any and all damages arising from such failure shall be borne by Tenant, and Tenant specifically releases Landlord from any and all damages directly or indirectly caused by such failure of utility service to the Premises.

 

34


21.3 Damage Caused by Other Tenants and Persons . Landlord shall not be liable or responsible for any loss or damage sustained by Tenant, the Premises, Tenant’s Property, Tenant’s agents, employees, clients, business guests, invitees, or subtenants, by reason of the acts, omissions, negligence or malice of any other tenants, employees and agents of such tenants, other occupants or licensees of the Building, or any owners or occupants of adjoining or contiguous properties, or of any other persons.

21.4 Sale or Assignment by Landlord . The term “ Landlord ” as used in this Lease shall be limited to mean and include only the owner or owners at the time in question of the Property of which the Building and the Premises are a part; each Landlord shall be automatically freed and relieved from all liability respecting the performance of any covenants or obligations on the part of Landlord contained in this Lease upon a sale, conveyance or assignment of its interest in the Property, except as to obligations already accrued. Upon any such sale, conveyance or assignment, the buyer, grantee or assignee shall become responsible for all of the covenants and conditions herein contained and on the part of Landlord to be observed or performed after the time of such sale or conveyance.

21.5 Limitation on Liability . In the event Landlord is a trust or partnership, if Landlord fails to perform any covenant or obligation on the part of Landlord contained in this Lease, Tenant may proceed only against the trust or partnership and may recover only from the assets of the trust or partnership or the interest of the general partners in the partnership, and any money judgment recovered by Tenant shall be satisfied only out of the proceeds of sale recovered upon execution of such judgment and levied thereon against the right, title and interest of the Landlord in the Building or the Property. Tenant shall have no right to proceed against or recover any deficiency from any trustee or partner of Landlord, individually or collectively, or Landlord’s Affiliates, except to the extent provided in the preceding sentence. The same is true for Tenant in the event that Tenant is a partnership or corporation unless the officers, directors or partners have executed personal guarantees in connection with the obligations of this Lease.

21.6 Commercial Purposes . The parties stipulate that the Premises is being leased exclusively for business, commercial, mercantile, restaurant or retail purposes as such terms are consistent with local zoning ordinances or Nebraska statutes.

ARTICLE 22

FORCE MAJEURE

Unless otherwise specifically provided herein, if either Landlord or Tenant shall be delayed or hindered in or prevented from the performance of any act required hereunder by reason of strikes, lockouts, labor disputes or disturbances, inability to procure materials, failure of power, restrictive governmental laws or regulations, riots, insurrection, war or any other reason of a like nature not the fault of the party delayed in performing work or doing acts required by this Lease, then performance of such act shall be excused for the period of the delay, and the period for the performance of such act shall be extended for a period equivalent to the period of such delay.

 

35


ARTICLE 23

INTEREST

Interest shall be charged to Tenant on late payments of rent and other sums due hereunder from the date such payment becomes due until it is received by Landlord, at the rate of ten (10) percent annual interest.

ARTICLE 24

MISCELLANEOUS

24.1 Limitation of Interests . Nothing herein shall be construed as creating or transferring to Tenant any interest in the Property or the Building not specifically identified in this Lease. Any diminution or shutting off of light or air by any structure which may be erected on lands adjacent to or in the vicinity of the Building shall in no way affect this Lease, abate rent or otherwise impose any liability on Landlord.

24.2 Time of Essence . Time is of the essence of this lease.

24.3 Execution by Landlord . The submission of this examination does not constitute a reservation of or lease the Premises, and this Lease shall become as a Lease only upon execution and delivery thereof by and between Tenant and Landlord.

24.4 Renewal . Except for Tenant’s rights to extend granted hereunder, Landlord shall have no obligation to extend or renew this Lease upon termination or to enter into another lease of the Premises with Tenant upon termination of this Lease. Upon termination of this Lease, Landlord may lease the Premises to whomever it chooses for the operation therein of a business that is the same as or different from that operated by Tenant in the Premises.

24.5 Notices . All notices hereunder shall be given or served for all purposes by being sent as registered or certified mail, delivered to addressee only, postage prepaid addressed to Tenant at its post office address hereinabove set forth or at such other post office address as Tenant may from time to time designate in writing by notice to Landlord, or to Landlord at its office hereinabove set forth or at such other post office address as Landlord may from time to time designate to Tenant, or (b) delivered personally to Tenant (if Tenant is an individual), to a partner of Tenant (if Tenant is a partnership), or to an officer of Tenant (if Tenant is a corporation), or (c) delivered to a partner or Landlord. Any such notice shall be deemed conclusively to have been given or served three (3) days after the date of such delivery, or upon the date of such personal delivery. If there is more than one Tenant, mailing or personal service to anyone thereof shall be construed as notice to all Tenants.

 

36


24.6 Reimbursement of Landlord’s Processing Costs . Tenant shall reimburse Landlord for all costs and expenses (including attorneys’ and other professional fees) incurred by Landlord in processing all consents and approvals requested of Landlord by tenant including, but not limited to, the preparation and review of all documents, plans or specifications in connection therewith. Provided that the Tenant has approved in advance, the amounts of such costs and expenses shall be payable to Landlord on demand and, if not paid, shall carry interest as above provided in this Lease. Failure to pay such amounts shall also constitute a default under this Lease entitling the Landlord to exercise its rights upon default by Tenant.

24.7 Severability . If for any reason whatever any of the provisions hereof shall be unenforceable or ineffective, all other provisions shall be and remain in full force and effect.

24.8 Entire Agreement . The provisions of this Lease constitute the entire agreement of Landlord and Tenant. No terms, conditions, warranties, promises or undertakings of any nature whatever, express or implied, exist except as herein expressly set forth.

24.9 Successors . Except as provided in this Lease, all of the covenants, agreements, terms and conditions contained herein shall apply to, accrue to and be binding upon Landlord and Tenant and their respective heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns.

24.10 Joint and Several Obligations . In any case where this Lease is signed by more than one person as Tenant, the obligations of such persons hereunder shall be joint and several.

24.11 Choice of Law . This Lease shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of Nebraska and the exclusive venue for any action filed hereunder shall be courts State or Federal in Lancaster County Nebraska.

24.12 Article and Section Headings . The article and section headings herein are for convenience of reference, and shall in no way define, limit or describe the scope or intent of any provisions of this Lease.

24.13 Short-Form Lease . This Lease shall not be recorded by either Landlord or Tenant; provided, however, that upon request by either party, the other party will execute and deliver to any party requesting the same a recordable short-form counterpart of this Lease, stating the names of the parties, the Term, the description of the Premises, and the nature of any options for renewal. Requesting party shall provide the form and shall pay the reasonable costs associated with the preparation of the short-form lease.

 

37


24.14 Dispute Resolution .

(a) Negotiation . If, after their best efforts to settle any dispute, claim, question, or disagreement arising out of or relating to this Agreement (“ Dispute ”), the parties cannot satisfactorily resolve the Dispute, either party may deliver written notice (a “ Dispute Notice ”) to the other describing the Dispute and requesting a remedy thereof.

(b) Mediation . In the event a dispute shall arise between the parties to lease, the parties agree to participate in a mediation in accordance with the mediation procedures of United States Arbitration & Mediation. If the parties cannot agree upon a mediator, each shall select one name from a list of mediators maintained by any bona fide dispute resolution provider; the two selected will then choose a third person who will then serve as mediator. The parties agree to have business leaders from each company participate in the mediation, including being present in the mediation session(s). The parties will have thirty (30) days in which to commence the first mediation session following the conclusion of their good faith negotiations. The parties agree that any mediated settlement agreement may be converted to an arbitration award or judgment and enforced according to the governing rules of civil procedure. The parties further confirm that their motivating purpose in selecting mediation is find a solution that serves their respective and mutual interests, including their continuing business and professional relationship.

24.15 Right of First Refusal . Tenant shall be given notice of further available space on the 2 nd floor of the Premises within fifteen (15) days of Landlord’s knowledge of availability of any termination of any other lease on the 2 nd floor of the Premises. Notice will be provided with the intent to offer the space for lease by Tenant. Landlord shall provide to Tenant the first option to lease the space within the terms of this Section 24.15 . Tenant shall have Ten (10) business days to notify Landlord of intent to Lease available space and shall execute a Lease agreement on such space within Fifteen (15) days of said notice or forego the Right of First Refusal upon which Landlord may then Lease the space to other parties.

END OF GENERAL CONDITIONS

SIGNATURE PAGE FOLLOWS

 

38


All terms, covenants, and conditions contained in the Specific Provisions, the General Conditions and any Exhibits attached hereto are made a part of this Lease and are hereby incorporated herein by this reference.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have executed this lease as of the date first written above.

 

LANDLORD     NEBCO, INC. , a Nebraska corporation
    By:   /s/ Robert E. Miller
      Robert E. Miller, Vice President

 

TENANT    

FIDELITY & GUARANTY LIFE

BUSINESS SERVICES, INC. , a Delaware Corporation

    By:   /s/ Christopher S. Heming
      Christopher S. Henming
      SVP, Operations & IT

 

39

Exhibit 10.6

FIDELITY & GUARANTY LIFE EMPLOYEE INCENTIVE PLAN

1. Establishment and Purpose

Fidelity & Guaranty Life Business Services, Inc., a Delaware corporation (the “ Company ”), hereby establishes the Fidelity & Guaranty Life Employee Incentive Plan (the “ Plan ”), effective April 7, 2011. The purpose of the Plan is to promote the long-term growth and profitability of the Company by (a) providing eligible employees with incentives to contribute to the financial success of the Company through their services, (b) motivating eligible employees and rewarding achievement of Company and individual business goals, and (c) enabling the Company to attract, retain, and reward the best-available talent.

2. Eligibility

All permanent full-time or part-time employees of the Company, other than employees who are eligible to participate in the Company’s Sales Incentive Plan, may be eligible for a benefit under this Plan, subject to the terms of the Plan. Temporary employees and consultants are not eligible for any benefit under the Plan. The Administrator (defined in Section 5) may determine, in its discretion, which employees may be eligible for a benefit under the Plan.

3. Bonuses

(a) Annual Target . The Company will communicate to eligible employees their individual annual target bonus opportunity. The target bonus opportunity will be a percentage of the employee’s Earned Salary. “ Earned Salary ” means, for purposes of the Plan, the employee’s regular base salary actually earned during the applicable calendar year performance period, before reduction for 401(k) plan and section 125 plan (cafeteria plan) contributions, but excluding overtime compensation.

(b) Performance Metrics . The actual amount of a bonus payable to an eligible employee for a calendar year performance period will be determined, in the discretion of the Administrator, by comparing actual Company performance to Company financial goals set by the Administrator for the calendar year performance period, and considering the individual’s performance rating determined as part of the Company’s annual performance management process. The relative weight of Company performance and individual performance in determining an actual bonus amount will be determined by the Administrator.

(c) Determination of Bonus Amounts . As soon as administratively practicable after the end of the calendar year performance period, the Company’s business unit heads will determine an amount of each eligible employee’s potential bonus, if any, based on performance and recommend an amount to the Company’s Vice President, Human Resources (the “ VP ”). Actual payment to eligible employees, other than those who report directly to the Company’s Chief Executive Officer (“ CEO ”), must be first approved by the VP and the CEO. Actual payment to eligible employees who report directly to the CEO must be first approved by the Compensation Committee of Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc. (the “ Compensation Committee ”).

4. Payment of Bonuses

(a) Eligibility for Payment of Bonus . To be eligible to receive a bonus payment under this Plan, the eligible employee must (i) work as a Company employee for more than three full months during the calendar year performance period, (ii) be employed by and continue to perform services for the Company in good standing through January 1 of the calendar year immediately following the calendar year performance period, (iii) have a rating of “Meets Expectations” or higher on the employee’s performance evaluation for the calendar year performance period, (iv) not be on a Performance Improvement Plan as of December 31 of the calendar year performance period or as of the date of payment of the bonus, and (v) not have been terminated by the Company for “cause,” as determined in the Company’s discretion, before payment of the bonus.

(b) Timing and Form of Payment . If the Administrator determines that bonuses will be paid for a calendar year performance period, then the Company will pay the bonuses to eligible employees in (i) cash or (ii) a combination of cash, a grant of stock options (subject to vesting over time), and/or other consideration, as determined in the sole discretion of the Administrator, between January 1 and April 30 of the year after the performance year. Stock Options grants are subject to approval by the Compensation Committee and the Compensation Committee will determine the terms and conditions of any grant or other consideration in its discretion.


5. Administration

(a) Administration of the Plan . The Plan shall be administered by the CEO and the VP (collectively, the “ Administrator ”). The day-to-day operation of the Plan, including activities such as employee notifications and communications with respect to the Plan, will be undertaken by the VP.

(b) Powers of the Administrator . The Administrator shall have all the powers vested in it hereunder, such powers to include authority, in its sole and absolute discretion, to determine whether any bonuses will be paid for any year, and the amount of any bonus.

The Administrator shall have full power and authority to take any other action necessary to carry out the purpose and intent of the Plan, including, but not limited to, the authority to: (i) determine the eligible persons to whom, and the time or times at which a bonus shall be granted; (ii) impose any term, limitation, restriction, and condition upon any bonus as the Administrator shall deem appropriate; (iii) determine whether an employee is employed in good standing with the Company or has otherwise satisfied the requirements for a bonus to become payable; and (iv) establish any objective or condition for earning a bonus and determining whether a bonus will be paid for a calendar year performance period.

The Administrator shall have full power and authority, in its sole and absolute discretion, to administer, construe, and interpret the Plan and all other documents relevant to the Plan and any bonus issued thereunder, to establish, amend, rescind, and interpret any rule, regulation, agreement, guideline, and instrument for the administration of the Plan and for the conduct of its business as the Administrator deems necessary or advisable, and to correct any defect, supply any omission, or reconcile any inconsistency in the Plan or in any bonus in the manner and to the extent the Administrator shall deem it desirable to carry it into effect.

(c) Non-Uniform Determinations . The Administrator’s determinations under the Plan (including, but not limited to, determinations of the persons to receive a bonus, amount, and terms and provisions of such bonus) need not be uniform and may be made by the Administrator selectively among persons who receive, or are eligible to receive, a bonus, whether or not such persons are similarly situated.

(d) No Liability . To the maximum extent permitted by law, no officer, director, manager, employee, or designee of the Administrator shall be liable for any action taken or decision made in good faith relating to the Plan or any bonus thereunder.

(e) Effect of Administrator’s Decision . Any action taken and decision made by the Administrator on any matter relating to the Plan pursuant to the powers vested in it hereunder shall be in the Administrator’s sole and absolute discretion and shall be conclusive and binding on all parties concerned, including the Company, its stockholders, and any employee of the Company, and their respective successors in interest.

(f) Discretionary Nature of Plan . The Administrator has full discretion to determine whether any bonuses will be paid with respect to any calendar year performance period, and the amount of any bonus that may be paid. No bonus is guaranteed. The Administrator may decide not to pay a bonus for a year even if eligibility requirements are met and performance goals are attained.

6. Miscellaneous

(a) Withholding of Taxes . The Company may deduct from the bonus payments or from any other amount due the employee any tax required to be withheld with respect to any bonus.

(b) Right to Offset . To the extent permitted by law, the Company shall have the right to offset against its obligation to pay any portion of a bonus any outstanding amount of whatever nature that the employee then owes to the Company.

 

- 2 -


(c) Transferability. No bonus or opportunity therefor shall be transferable or assignable by any employee.

(d) Termination, Amendment, and Modification of the Plan . The Administrator may terminate, amend, or modify the Plan or any portion thereof at any time. Except as otherwise determined by the Administrator, termination of the Plan shall not affect the Administrator’s ability to exercise the powers granted to it hereunder with respect to any bonus granted before the date of such termination.

(e) Non-Guarantee of Employment . Nothing in the Plan shall confer to any person the right to continued employment with the Company or any affiliate for any period of time or interfere in any way with the right of the Company to terminate such employment at any time with or without cause or notice. The Plan shall not be construed as a contract of employment between the Company and any employee.

(f) No Trust or Fund Created . Neither the Plan nor any bonus shall create or be construed to create a trust or separate fund of any kind or a fiduciary relationship between the Company and any employee. The Company shall not be required to set aside or otherwise earmark any asset to ensure payment of any bonuses under the Plan, and no employee shall have any claim of right to any asset of the Company as a result of being eligible to receive a bonus or any bonus becoming payable. To the extent that any employee acquires a right to receive any payment from the Company pursuant to a bonus, such right shall be no greater than the right of any general unsecured creditor of the Company.

(g) Governing Law . The validity, construction, and effect of the Plan and of any rule, regulation, determination, or decision made by the Administrator relating to the Plan, and any right of any person having or claiming to have any interest thereunder, shall be determined exclusively in accordance with the laws of the State of Maryland, without regard to its conflict of laws principles.

(h) Section 409A . The Plan is intended to be exempt from Section 409A of the Internal Revenue Code and the guidance thereunder (“ Section 409A ”). Should any provision of the Plan be found by the Administrator not to satisfy an exemption from Section 409A or otherwise comply with Section 409A, such provision shall be modified and given effect (retroactively if necessary), in the sole discretion of the Administrator and without the consent of any employee, in such manner as the Administrator determines to be necessary or appropriate. Notwithstanding the forgoing, no provision of the Plan shall be construed as a guarantee by the Company of any particular tax effect to any employee.

(i) Headings . All headings in the Plan are for reference purposes only and shall not affect the meaning or interpretation of the Plan.

(j) Severability . Should any provision of the Plan be held by a court of competent jurisdiction to be unenforceable or invalid for any reason, the remaining provisions of the Plan shall not be affected by such holding and shall continue in full force in accordance with their terms.

(k) Entire Agreement . The Plan constitutes the entire agreement with respect to the subject matter contained hereunder, and there are no agreements, understandings, restrictions, representations, or warranties between any employee and the Company other than those provided hereunder.

(l) Limitations on Actions . Any right of any employee or former employee against the Company arising out of or in connection with the Plan or any bonus shall terminate, and any cause of action against the Company shall be barred, after the end of the one-year period starting on the date the action was taken or decision made from which such right or cause of action arose.

 

- 3 -

Exhibit 10.7

FIDELITY & GUARANTY LIFE HOLDINGS, INC.

STOCK INCENTIVE PLAN

Article I

Purpose

The purposes of this Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc. Stock Incentive Plan (the “ Plan ”) are to promote the long-term success of Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc. (the “ Company ”) and to motivate retain and reward key executives and other selected employees of the Company.

Article II

Definitions

Whenever used herein, the following terms shall have the respective meanings set forth below:

Adjustment Event ” means any dividend payable in capital stock, stock split, share combination, recapitalization, reorganization, merger, consolidation, split-up, spin-off, combination, exchange of shares or other similar event affecting the Common Stock and, for the avoidance of doubt, shall not include any cash dividend.

Administrator ” means the compensation committee of the Board or such other committee as the Board shall designate from time to time.

Alternative Award ” has the meaning set forth in Section 8.2.

Board ” means the board of directors of the Company.

Cause ” shall, as to any Participant who is party to an employment agreement with the Company or a Subsidiary, have the meaning set forth in such employment agreement, or, in the absence of such an employment agreement, shall mean the Participant ( i ) shall have been convicted, indicted for, or entered a plea of nolo contendere to, any felony or any other act involving fraud, theft, misappropriation, dishonesty, or embezzlement, ( ii ) shall have committed intentional and willful acts of misconduct that materially impair the goodwill or business of the Company or cause material damage to its or their property, goodwill, or business or ( iii ) shall have willfully refused to, or willfully failed to, perform in any material respect his duties, provided, however, that no such termination for Cause shall be effective unless the Participant does not cure such refusal or failure to the Company’s reasonable satisfaction as soon as practicable after the Company gives the Participant written notice identifying such refusal or failure (and, in any event, within ten (10) calendar days after receipt of such written notice). The determination as to whether “Cause” has occurred shall be made by the


Administrator, which shall have the authority to waive the consequences under the Plan of the existence or occurrence of any of the events, acts or commissions constituting “Cause.” A termination for Cause shall be deemed to include a determination following a Participant’s termination of employment for any reason that circumstances existed prior to such termination sufficient for the Company or one of its Subsidiaries to have terminated such Participant’s employment for Cause.

Change in Control ” means the first to occur of the following events after the Grant Date ( i ) the sale, transfer or other disposition of all or substantially all of the assets of the Company to one or more persons or entities that are not, immediately prior to such sale, transfer or other disposition, affiliates of the Company; ( ii ) the acquisition, directly or indirectly, by any person, entity or “group” (as defined in Section 13(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended), other than the Company, any Subsidiary, Harbinger Group or any of their respective affiliates, of a majority of the combined voting power of the Company’s then outstanding voting securities; ( iii ) the merger or consolidation of the Company, as a result of which persons who were stockholders of the Company immediately prior to such merger or consolidation, do not, immediately thereafter, own, directly or indirectly, a majority of the combined voting power entitled to vote generally in the election of directors of the merged or consolidated company; or ( iv ) the liquidation or dissolution of the Company other than a liquidation or dissolution for the purposes of effecting a corporate restructuring or reorganization as a result of which persons who were stockholders of the Company immediately prior to such liquidation or dissolution continue to own immediately thereafter, directly or indirectly, a majority of the combined voting power entitled to vote generally in the election of directors of the entity that owns, directly or indirectly, substantially all of the assets of the Company following such transaction.

Change in Control Price ” means the price per share of Common Stock offered in conjunction with any transaction resulting in a Change in Control. If any part of the offered price is payable other than in cash, the Change in Control Price shall be determined in good faith by the Administrator.

Code ” means the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended, and the regulations promulgated thereunder.

Common Stock ” means the common stock of the Company, par value .01.

Company ” has the meaning set forth in Article I.

Disability ” shall, as to any Participant who is party to an employment agreement with the Company or a Subsidiary containing a definition of Disability, have the meaning set forth in such employment agreement, or, in the absence of such an employment agreement, shall mean a long-term disability as defined in the Company’s long-term disability policy or program then applicable to such Participant.

 

2


Fair Market Value ” means, as of any date prior to a Public Offering, the per share fair market value on such date of a share of Common Stock as determined in good faith by the Administrator, in compliance with Section 409A of the Code. In making a determination of Fair Market Value, the Administrator shall give due consideration to such factors as it deems appropriate, including, but not limited to, the earnings and other financial and operating information of the Company in recent periods, the potential value of the Company as a whole, the future prospects of the Company and the industries in which it competes, the history and management of the Company, the general condition of the securities markets, the fair market value of securities of companies engaged in businesses similar to those of the Company and any recent valuation of the Common Stock that shall have been performed by an independent valuation firm (although nothing herein shall obligate the Administrator to obtain any such independent valuation). Following a Public Offering, Fair Market Value shall mean the closing price for a share of Common Stock on the primary national exchange (including NASDAQ) on which such shares are then traded on the trading day immediately preceding the date as of which such Fair Market Value is determined.

Grant Date ” means, with respect to an Option granted pursuant to the Plan, the date on which such Option is granted.

Harbinger Group ” means Harbinger Group Inc.

Option ” means a right granted pursuant to Section 6.1 of the Plan to a Participant to purchase one share of Common Stock. No Option shall be deemed an incentive stock option within the meaning of Section 422 of the Code.

Option Agreement ” means an agreement between the Company and a Participant embodying the terms of any Options granted pursuant to the Plan and in the form approved by the Administrator from time to time for such purpose, which agreement may contain such other terms and conditions as the Administrator may determine; provided that such other terms and conditions are not inconsistent with the provisions of this Plan.

Participant ” means an officer, employee, non-employee director or consultant of or to the Company or any Subsidiary who has been granted an Option under the Plan; provided that, in the case of the death of a Participant, the term “Participant” refers to a beneficiary designated pursuant to Section 11.5 or the legal guardian or other legal representative acting in a fiduciary capacity on behalf of the Participant’s estate or heirs under applicable state law and court supervision.

Plan ” has the meaning set forth in Article I.

Public Offering ” means the first day as of which sales of Common Stock are made to the public in the United States pursuant to an underwritten public offering of the Common Stock led by one or more underwriters at least one of which is an underwriter of nationally recognized standing.

 

3


Subscription Agreement ” means a stock subscription agreement between a Participant and the Company embodying the terms of any stock purchase made pursuant to the Plan and in a form approved by the Administrator from time to time for such purpose.

Subsidiary ” means any corporation, limited liability company, partnership or other entity of which a majority of the outstanding voting stock or voting power is beneficially owned directly or indirectly by the Company.

Article III

Administration

Section 3.1 Administrator . The Plan shall be administered by the Administrator. The Administrator may prescribe, amend and rescind rules and regulations relating to the administration of the Plan, provide for conditions and assurances it deems necessary or advisable to protect the interests of the Company and make all other determinations necessary or advisable for the administration and interpretation of the Plan. Any authority exercised by the Administrator under the Plan shall be exercised by the Administrator in its sole discretion. Determinations, interpretations or other actions made or taken by the Administrator under the Plan or under Options granted under the Plan shall be final, binding and conclusive for all purposes and upon all persons.

Section 3.2 Authority of the Administrator . The Administrator has the exclusive power, authority and discretion to:

(a) Grant Options;

(b) Designate Participants;

(c) Determine the number of Options to be granted to a Participant;

(d) Determine the terms and conditions of any Option granted under the Plan, including but not limited to, the exercise price, any restrictions or limitations on the Option, any schedule for vesting, lapse of forfeiture restrictions or restrictions on the exercisability of an Option and accelerations or waivers thereof, and events of forfeiture based in each case on such considerations as the Administrator in its sole discretion determines;

 

4


(e) Accelerate the vesting or lapse of restrictions of any outstanding Option, based in each case on such considerations as the Administrator in its sole discretion determines;

(f) Determine whether, to what extent and under what circumstances an Option may be settled in, or the exercise price of an Option may be paid in, cash, Common Stock, Options, or other property, or any Option may be canceled, forfeited or surrendered;

(g) Prescribe the form of each Option Agreement;

(h) Decide all other matters that must be determined in connection with an Option;

(i) Establish, adopt or revise any rules and regulations as it may deem necessary or advisable to administer the Plan and appoint such agents as it shall deem appropriate for the proper administration of the Plan;

(j) Amend the Plan or any Option Agreement as provided in Article X; and

(k) Make all other decisions and determinations that may be required under the Plan or as the Administrator deems necessary or advisable to administer the Plan.

Section 3.3 Delegation of Authority . The Administrator, in its sole discretion and on such terms and conditions as it may provide, may delegate all or any part of its authority and powers under the Plan to one or more directors or officers of the Company.

Article IV

Shares Subject to the Plan

Section 4.1 Number of Shares . Subject to adjustment as provided in Section 4.3, the maximum number of shares of Common Stock that may be issued under the Plan or be subject to Options may not exceed 205,028 shares. The shares of Common Stock to be delivered under the Plan may consist, in whole or in part, of authorized but unissued shares of Common Stock that are not reserved for any other purpose.

Section 4.2 Canceled, Terminated or Forfeited Options . If any Option expires or is for any reason forfeited, canceled or otherwise terminated, the Shares subject to such Option shall again be available for grant under the Plan.

Section 4.3 Adjustment in Capitalization . In the event of any Adjustment Event affecting the Common Stock, the Administrator shall make an equitable and proportionate anti-dilution adjustment to offset any resultant change in the pre-share price of the Common Stock and preserve the intrinsic value of Options granted under the Plan.

 

5


Such mandatory adjustment may include a change in any or all of ( a ) the number and kind of shares of Common Stock which thereafter may be awarded under the Plan (including, but not limited to, adjusting any limits on the number and types of awards that may be made under the Plan), ( b ) the number and kind of shares of Common Stock subject to outstanding Options, and ( c ) the grant, exercise or conversion price with respect to any Option. In addition, the Administrator may make provisions for a cash payment to a Participant or a person who has an outstanding Option. The number of shares of Common Stock subject to any Option shall be rounded to the nearest whole number. Any such adjustment shall be consistent with sections 424 and 409A of the Code to the extent the Options subject to adjustment are subject to such sections of the Code.

Article V

Eligibility and Participation

Options may be granted only to individuals who are employees, officers, non-employee directors or consultants of or to the Company or a Subsidiary, as determined by the Administrator.

Article VI

Stock Options

Section 6.1 Grant of Options . The Administrator is authorized to grant Options to Participants at such time as it shall determine. Options granted pursuant to the Plan shall not be “incentive stock options” as defined in the Code. Each Option granted to a Participant shall be evidenced by an Option Agreement that shall specify the number of shares of Options granted, the exercise price at which shares of Common Stock may be purchased pursuant to the Options, the duration of such Options (not to exceed the seventh anniversary of the Grant Date), and such other terms as the Administrator shall determine.

Section 6.2 Exercise Price . The exercise price per share of Common Stock to be purchased upon exercise of an Option shall not be less than the Fair Market Value of a share of Common Stock on the Grant Date.

Section 6.3 Vesting and Exercisability of Options . Options shall become vested or exercisable in accordance with the vesting schedule or upon the attainment of such performance criteria as shall be specified by the Administrator on or before the Grant Date. Unless otherwise determined by the Administrator on or before the Grant Date, one-third of the Options granted to a Participant shall vest and become exercisable on each of the first three anniversaries of the Grant Date, subject to the Participant remaining employed through such dates. The Administrator may accelerate the vesting or exercisability of any Option, all Options or any class of Options at any time and from time to time.

 

6


Section 6.4 Exercise of Options . The Administrator shall establish procedures governing the exercise of Options, which procedures shall, unless the Administrator determines otherwise, generally require that prior written notice of exercise be given and that the exercise price be paid in full in cash, cash equivalents or other readily-available funds at the time of exercise, or, if so permitted by the Administrator (and on such conditions as the Administrator shall determine), ( a ) by tender of any shares of Common Stock owned by such Participant for at least a six month period for all or a portion of the applicable exercise price and/or minimum required withholding taxes, ( b ) through a net issuance arrangement pursuant to which a number of shares of Common Stock subject to the portion of the Option being exercised, having a Fair Market Value equal to the applicable exercise price plus the required minimum withholding taxes, are retained by the Company, or (c) following a Public Offering, by using a broker assisted cashless exercise program acceptable to the Administrator. Unless the Administrator shall determine otherwise, prior to a Public Offering, as a condition to exercise of any Option, a Participant shall enter into a Subscription Agreement applicable to the shares of Common Stock issuable pursuant to the Option.

Section 6.5 Term of Options . In no event shall any Option be exercisable more than seven years after the Grant Date.

Article VII

Termination of Employment

Section 7.1 Treatment of Options . Unless otherwise determined by the Administrator on or before the Grant Date, if a Participant’s employment with the Company terminates, such Participant’s outstanding Options shall be treated as set forth below.

(a) Termination by the Company for Cause . Unless otherwise determined by the Administrator, if a Participant’s employment with the Company is terminated for Cause, any outstanding Options held by the Participant, vested or unvested, shall be immediately forfeited and canceled, effective as of the date of the Participant’s termination of employment.

(b) Termination for Any Other Reason . The treatment of a Participant’s Options upon a termination of employment for any reason other than for Cause shall be as set forth in the Participant’s Option Agreement pertaining to such Options.

Section 7.2 Call Rights Upon Termination of Employment Prior to a Public Offering . Each Subscription Agreement shall provide that the Company and Harbinger Group shall have successive rights prior to a Public Offering to purchase all or any portion of a Participant’s Common Stock upon any termination of employment, at such time and at a purchase price per share equal to the Fair Market Value of a share of

 

7


Common Stock as of the date specified in the Subscription Agreement (or, if the Participant’s employment is terminated for Cause, for a purchase price per share equal to the lesser of ( a ) the Fair Market Value of a share of Common Stock as of the date specified in the Subscription Agreement and ( b ) such Participant’s per share purchase price).

Article VIII

Change in Control

Section 8.1 Vesting and Cancellation . Unless otherwise determined by the Administrator or as provided in Section 8.2, in the event of a Change in Control, ( a ) time-based vesting restrictions on all outstanding Options that vest based on the passage of time shall lapse and such time-based Options shall vest and ( b ) to the extent performance hurdles applicable to outstanding performance-vesting Options have been satisfied immediately prior to the Change in Control as determined by the Administrator in its full discretion, unvested outstanding performance-based Options shall vest. Any performance-based Options that do not vest in accordance with the preceding sentence shall immediately be forfeited and canceled. Upon such Change in Control, each Option that vests prior to or in connection with the Change in Control shall be canceled in exchange for a payment in an amount or with a value equal to the excess, if any, of the Change in Control Price over the exercise price for such Option.

Section 8.2 Alternative Award . Notwithstanding Section 8.1, no cancellation, acceleration or other payment shall occur with respect to any Options in connection with a Change in Control if the Administrator reasonably determines in good faith, prior to the occurrence of a Change in Control, that such Options shall be honored or assumed, or new rights substituted therefor following the Change in Control (such honored, assumed or substituted award, an “ Alternative Award ”), provided that any Alternative Award must:

(a) Give the Participant who held such Option rights and entitlements substantially equivalent to or better than the rights and terms applicable under such Option, including, but not limited to, an identical or better exercise and vesting schedule, and identical or better timing and methods of payment; and

(b) Have terms such that if, following a Change in Control, a Participant’s employment is involuntarily or constructively terminated (other than for Cause) at a time when any portion of the Alternative Award is unvested, the unvested portion of such Alternative Award shall immediately vest in full and such Participant shall receive a cash payment equal to the excess (if any) of the fair market value of the stock subject to the Alternative Award on the date of surrender over the price that such Participant would be required to pay to exercise such Alternative Award or shall have an immediate right to exercise such Alternative Award and receive shares that are then publicly-traded.

 

8


Section 8.3 Limitation of Benefits . Unless otherwise provided in the Option Agreement, if, whether as a result of accelerated vesting, the grant of an Alternative Award or otherwise, a Participant would receive any payment, deemed payment or other benefit as a result of Section 8.1 or Section 8.2 that, together with any other payment, deemed payment or other benefit a Participant may receive under any other plan, program, policy or arrangement, would constitute an “excess parachute payment” under Section 280G of the Code, then, notwithstanding anything in this Plan to the contrary, the payments, deemed payments or other benefits such Participant would otherwise receive under Section 8.1 shall be reduced to the extent necessary to eliminate any such excess parachute payment and such Participant shall have no further rights or claims with respect thereto. If the preceding sentence would result in a reduction of the payments, deemed payments or other benefits a Participant would otherwise receive in more than an immaterial amount, the Company will use commercially reasonable efforts to seek the approval of the Company’s shareholders in the manner provided for in Section 280G(b)(5) of the Code and the regulations thereunder with respect to such reduced payments or other benefits (if the Company is eligible to do so), so that such payments would not be treated as “parachute payments” for these purposes (and therefore would cease to be subject to reduction pursuant to this Section 8.3).

Article IX

Authority to Vary Terms or Establish Foreign Plans

The Administrator may vary the terms of Options granted under the Plan, or establish sub-plans under the Plan to authorize the grant of awards that have additional or different terms or features from those otherwise provided for in the Plan, if and to the extent the Administrator determines necessary or appropriate to permit the grant of awards that are best suited to further the purposes of the Plan and to comply with applicable securities laws in a particular jurisdiction or provide terms appropriate suited for Participants in such jurisdiction in light of the tax laws of such jurisdiction while being as consistent as otherwise possible with the terms of Options under the Plan; provided that this Article IX shall not be deemed to authorize any increase in the number of shares of Common Stock available for issuance under the Plan set forth in Section 4.1.

Article X

Amendment, Modification and Termination of the Plan

The Administrator may terminate or suspend the Plan at any time, and may amend or modify the Plan from time to time. No amendment, modification, termination or suspension of the Plan shall have a substantial adverse effect on the economic terms of any Options previously granted pursuant to the Plan without the consent of the Participant holding such Option or the consent of a majority of Participants holding similar Options (such majority to be determined based on the number of shares covered by such Options). Shareholder approval of any such amendment, modification, termination or suspension shall be obtained to the extent mandated by applicable law, or if otherwise deemed appropriate by the Administrator.

 

9


Article XI

Miscellaneous

Section 11.1 Nontransferability of Awards . Except as otherwise provided herein, or as the Administrator may permit on such terms as it shall determine or, following vesting, as provided in an applicable Subscription Agreement, the Participant shall not sell, transfer, pledge, assign, hedge, encumber or otherwise alienate or hypothecate any shares of Common Stock issued pursuant to the Plan to any Person other than the Company or by will or by the laws of descent and distribution and provided that the deceased Participant’s beneficiary or the representative of his or her estate acknowledges and agrees in writing, in a form reasonably acceptable to the Company, to be bound by the provisions of the Plan, the Option Agreement, any Subscription Agreement as if such beneficiary or estate were the Participant. All rights with respect to Options granted to a Participant under the Plan shall be exercisable during the Participant’s life-time by such Participant only (or, in the event of the Participant’s Disability, such Participant’s legal representative). Following a Participant’s death, all rights with respect to Options that were outstanding at the time of such Participant’s death and have not terminated shall be exercised by his designated beneficiary or by his estate in the absence of a designated beneficiary.

Section 11.2 Tax Withholding . The Company or the Subsidiary employing a Participant shall have the power to withhold, or to require such Participant to remit to the Company or such Subsidiary, an amount (in cash, from other compensation payable to the Participant, or in shares of Common Stock granted under the Plan) sufficient to satisfy all U.S. federal, state, local and any non-U.S. withholding tax or other governmental tax, charge or fee requirements in respect of any award granted or payment made under the Plan.

Section 11.3 No Guarantee of Employment or Participation . Nothing in the Plan or in any agreement granted hereunder shall interfere with or limit in any way the right of the Company or any Subsidiary to terminate any Participant’s employment or retention at any time, or confer upon any Participant any right to continue in the employ or retention of the Company or any Subsidiary. No Employee shall have a right to be selected as a Participant or, having been so selected, to receive any Options.

Section 11.4 No Limitation on Compensation; No Impact on Benefits . Nothing in the Plan shall be construed to limit the right of the Company or any Subsidiary to establish other plans or to pay compensation to its officers, employees, non-employee directors or consultants, in cash or property, in a manner that is not expressly authorized under the Plan. Except as may otherwise be specifically and unequivocally stated under any employee benefit plan, policy or program, no amount payable in respect of any

 

10


Option shall be treated as compensation for purposes of calculating a Participant’s rights under any such plan, policy or program. The selection of an individual as a Participant shall neither entitle such individual to, nor disqualify such individual from, participation in any other award or incentive plan.

Section 11.5 No Rights to Damages . Nothing in the Plan or in any Option Agreement shall impose upon the Company, any Subsidiary or the Administrator any liability in connection with the provision, loss or payment of benefits or rights under the Plan, the exercise of discretion under the Plan or the failure or refusal of any person to exercise discretion under the Plan, and/or a Participant ceasing to be a person eligible to be a Participant under the Plan for any reason as a result of a termination of employment or service.

Section 11.6 Beneficiary Designation . Pursuant to such rules and procedures as the Administrator may from time to time establish, a Participant may name a beneficiary or beneficiaries (who may be named contingently or successively) by whom any right under the Plan is to be exercised in case of such Person’s death. Each designation will revoke all prior designations by the same Participant, shall be in a form reasonably prescribed by the Administrator, and will be effective only when filed by the Participant in writing with the Administrator during the Participant’s lifetime.

Section 11.7 Requirements of Law . The granting of Options and the issuance of shares of Common Stock pursuant to the Plan shall be subject to all applicable laws, rules and regulations, and to such approvals by any governmental agencies or national securities exchanges as may be required. No Options shall be granted under the Plan, and no shares of Common Stock shall be issued under the Plan, if such grant or issuance would result in a violation of applicable law, including U.S. federal securities laws and any applicable state or non-U.S. securities laws.

Section 11.8 Freedom of Action . Nothing in the Plan or any Option Agreement shall be construed as limiting or preventing the Company or any Subsidiary from taking any action that it deems appropriate or in its best interest (as determined in its sole and absolute discretion) and no Participant (or person claiming by or through a Participant) shall have any right relating to the diminishment in the value of any Option as a result of any such action. The foregoing shall not constitute a waiver by a Participant, in the Participant’s capacity as a shareholder of the Company, of any breach of fiduciary duty.

Section 11.9 Unfunded Plan; Plan Not Subject to ERISA . The plan is an unfunded plan and Participants shall have the status of unsecured creditors of the Company. The Plan is not intended to be subject to the Employee Retirement Income and Security Act of 1974, as amended.

Section 11.10 Term of Plan . The Plan shall be effective as of November 2, 2011, (the “ Effective Date ”) and shall continue in effect, unless sooner terminated pursuant to Article X, until the seventh anniversary of such date. The provisions of the Plan shall continue thereafter to govern all outstanding Options.

 

11


Section 11.11 No Shareholder Rights . No Participant shall have any of the rights of a shareholder of the Company unless and until shares of Common Stock are in fact issued to such Participant in connection with an Option.

Section 11.12 Titles and Headings . The titles and headings of the sections in this Plan are for convenience of reference only and, in the event of any conflict, the text of the Plan, rather than such titles or headings, shall control.

Section 11.13 Gender and Number . Except where otherwise indicated by the context, any masculine term used herein shall also include the feminine; the plural shall include the singular and the singular shall include the plural.

Section 11.14 Use of the term “Employ ”. The words “employment,” “employ” and corollary terms used herein and in any Option Agreement with respect to a non-employee director or consultant shall be construed to refer to such non-employee director’s service as a non-employee member of the board of directors of the Company or such consultant’s service as a consultant to the Company. The phrase “employment with the Company” and corollary terms used herein and in any Option Agreement with respect to an officer or employee shall be construed to refer to the employment with the Company and/or any Subsidiary of the Company that actually employs such officer or employee.

Section 11.15 Fractional Shares . No fractional shares shall be issued in settlement of an Option under the Plan.

Section 11.16 Governing Law . THIS PLAN, AND ALL AGREEMENTS HEREUNDER, SHALL BE GOVERNED BY AND CONSTRUED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE LAW OF THE STATE OF DELAWARE, WITHOUT REGARD TO THE APPLICATION OF RULES OF CONFLICTS OF LAW THAT WOULD APPLY THE LAWS OF ANY OTHER JURISDICTION.

Section 11.17 Arbitration . Any dispute, controversy or claim arising out of or pursuant to the Plan, any agreement entered into pursuant to the Plan or any undertakings, covenants and agreements incorporated by reference into this Plan shall be submitted to and finally determined by binding arbitration to be held in New York, New York at the American Arbitration Association, before one arbitrator under an in accordance with the American Arbitration Association’s Commercial Rules, with each party to be responsible for its own attorney’s fees and costs incurred in connection therewith. In the event that this arbitration provision is determined by a court with appropriate jurisdiction to be unenforceable, the Company and each Participant under the Plan, waives the right, if any, to a trial by jury of any claim that would have been subject to arbitration under this Section 11.16.

 

12


Section 11.18 409A Compliance . This Plan and the Option Agreements entered into pursuant to the Plan are intended to be exempt from or comply with the requirements of Section 409A of the Code and shall be construed and interpreted in accordance with such intent.

 

13

Exhibit 10.8

FIDELITY & GUARANTY LIFE HOLDINGS, INC.

STOCK INCENTIVE PLAN

(as amended and restated December 31, 2012)

Article I

Purpose

The purposes of this Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc. Stock Incentive Plan (the “ Plan ”) are to promote the long-term success of Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc. (the “ Company ”) and to motivate retain and reward key executives and other selected employees of the Company.

Article II

Definitions

Whenever used herein, the following terms shall have the respective meanings set forth below:

Adjustment Event ” means any dividend payable in capital stock, stock split, share combination, recapitalization, reorganization, merger, consolidation, split-up, spin-off, combination, exchange of shares or other similar event affecting the Common Stock and, for the avoidance of doubt, shall not include any cash dividend.

Administrator ” means the compensation committee of the Board or such other committee as the Board shall designate from time to time.

Alternative Award ” has the meaning set forth in Section 9.2.

Award ” means any Restricted Stock granted to any Participant under the Plan.

Award Agreement ” means an agreement between the Company and a Participant embodying the terms of any Award granted pursuant to the Plan and in the form approved by the Administrator from time to time for such purpose, which agreement may contain such other terms and conditions as the Administrator may determine; provided that such other terms and conditions are not inconsistent with the provisions of the Plan.

Board ” means the board of directors of the Company.

Cause ” shall, as to any Participant who is party to an employment agreement with the Company or a Subsidiary, have the meaning set forth in such employment agreement, or, in the absence of such an employment agreement, shall mean the Participant ( i ) shall have been convicted, indicted for, or entered a plea of nolo contendere to, any felony or any other act involving fraud, theft, misappropriation, dishonesty, or embezzlement, ( ii ) shall have committed intentional and willful acts of


misconduct that materially impair the goodwill or business of the Company or cause material damage to its or their property, goodwill, or business or ( iii ) shall have willfully refused to, or willfully failed to, perform in any material respect his duties, provided, however, that no such termination for Cause shall be effective unless the Participant does not cure such refusal or failure to the Company’s reasonable satisfaction as soon as practicable after the Company gives the Participant written notice identifying such refusal or failure (and, in any event, within ten (10) calendar days after receipt of such written notice). The determination as to whether “Cause” has occurred shall be made by the Administrator, which shall have the authority to waive the consequences under the Plan of the existence or occurrence of any of the events, acts or commissions constituting “Cause.” A termination for Cause shall be deemed to include a determination following a Participant’s termination of employment for any reason that circumstances existed prior to such termination sufficient for the Company or one of its Subsidiaries to have terminated such Participant’s employment for Cause.

Change in Control ” means the first to occur of the following events after the Grant Date ( i ) the sale, transfer or other disposition of all or substantially all of the assets of the Company to one or more persons or entities that are not, immediately prior to such sale, transfer or other disposition, affiliates of the Company; ( ii ) any “person” or “group” (as such terms are used in Sections 13(d) and 14(d) of the Exchange Act) becomes the ultimate owner, directly or indirectly, of 35% or more of the voting power of the Common Stock of the Company other than the Company, any Subsidiary, Harbinger Group or any of their respective affiliates (a “Permitted Holder”); provided that such event shall not be deemed a Change in Control so long as one or more Permitted Holders shall own, directly or indirectly, more of the voting power of the Common Stock of the Company than such person or group; ( iii ) the merger or consolidation of the Company, as a result of which persons who were stockholders of the Company immediately prior to such merger or consolidation, do not, immediately thereafter, own, directly or indirectly, a majority of the combined voting power entitled to vote generally in the election of directors of the merged or consolidated company; or ( iv ) the liquidation or dissolution of the Company other than a liquidation or dissolution for the purposes of effecting a corporate restructuring or reorganization as a result of which persons who were stockholders of the Company immediately prior to such liquidation or dissolution continue to own immediately thereafter, directly or indirectly, a majority of the combined voting power entitled to vote generally in the election of directors of the entity that owns, directly or indirectly, substantially all of the assets of the Company following such transaction. With respect to grants made under the Plan prior to December 31, 2012, the prior definition of Change in Control in clause (ii) will apply if more favorable to the Participant.

 

2


Change in Control Price ” means the price per share of Common Stock offered in conjunction with any transaction resulting in a Change in Control. If any part of the offered price is payable other than in cash, the Change in Control Price shall be determined in good faith by the Administrator.

Code ” means the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended, and the regulations promulgated thereunder.

Common Stock ” means with respect to Awards or Option grants before December 31, 2012, the Class A common stock of the Company, par value .01 and with respect to Awards or Option grants on or after December 31, 2012, the Class B common stock of the Company, par value .01. Class B common stock is non-voting stock.

Company ” has the meaning set forth in Article I.

Disability ” shall, as to any Participant who is party to an employment agreement with the Company or a Subsidiary containing a definition of Disability, have the meaning set forth in such employment agreement, or, in the absence of such an employment agreement, shall mean a long-term disability as defined in the Company’s long-term disability policy or program then applicable to such Participant.

Fair Market Value ” means, as of any date prior to a Public Offering, the per share fair market value on such date of a share of Common Stock as determined in good faith by the Administrator, in compliance with Section 409A of the Code. In making a determination of Fair Market Value, the Administrator shall give due consideration to such factors as it deems appropriate, including, but not limited to, the earnings and other financial and operating information of the Company in recent periods, the potential value of the Company as a whole, the future prospects of the Company and the industries in which it competes, the history and management of the Company, the general condition of the securities markets, the fair market value of securities of companies engaged in businesses similar to those of the Company and any recent valuation of the Common Stock that shall have been performed by an independent valuation firm (although nothing herein shall obligate the Administrator to obtain any such independent valuation). Following a Public Offering, Fair Market Value shall mean the closing price for a share of Common Stock on the primary national exchange (including NASDAQ) on which such shares are then traded on the trading day immediately preceding the date as of which such Fair Market Value is determined.

Grant Date ” means, with respect to an Award or Option granted pursuant to the Plan, the date on which such Award or Option is granted.

Harbinger Group ” means Harbinger Group Inc.

 

3


Option ” means a right granted pursuant to Section 6.1 of the Plan to a Participant to purchase one share of Common Stock. No Option shall be deemed an incentive stock option within the meaning of Section 422 of the Code.

Option Agreement ” means an agreement between the Company and a Participant embodying the terms of any Options granted pursuant to the Plan and in the form approved by the Administrator from time to time for such purpose, which agreement may contain such other terms and conditions as the Administrator may determine; provided that such other terms and conditions are not inconsistent with the provisions of this Plan.

Participant ” means an officer, employee, non-employee director or consultant of or to the Company or any Subsidiary who has been granted an Award or Option under the Plan; provided that, in the case of the death of a Participant, the term “Participant” refers to a beneficiary designated pursuant to Section 12.5 or the legal guardian or other legal representative acting in a fiduciary capacity on behalf of the Participant’s estate or heirs under applicable state law and court supervision.

Plan ” has the meaning set forth in Article I.

Public Offering ” means with respect to a class of Common Stock, the first day as of which sales of such Common Stock are made to the public in the United States pursuant to an underwritten public offering of such Common Stock led by one or more underwriters at least one of which is an underwriter of nationally recognized standing.

Restricted Stock ” means shares of Common Stock subject to a Restriction Period granted to a Participant under the Plan.

Restriction Period ” means the period during which any Restricted Stock is subject to forfeiture and/or restrictions on transfer pursuant to the terms of the Plan.

Subscription Agreement ” means a stock subscription agreement between a Participant and the Company embodying the terms of any stock purchase made or awarded pursuant to the Plan and in a form approved by the Administrator from time to time for such purpose.

Subsidiary ” means any corporation, limited liability company, partnership or other entity of which a majority of the outstanding voting stock or voting power is beneficially owned directly or indirectly by the Company.

 

4


Article III

Administration

Section 3.1 Administrator . The Plan shall be administered by the Administrator. The Administrator may prescribe, amend and rescind rules and regulations relating to the administration of the Plan, provide for conditions and assurances it deems necessary or advisable to protect the interests of the Company and make all other determinations necessary or advisable for the administration and interpretation of the Plan. Any authority exercised by the Administrator under the Plan shall be exercised by the Administrator in its sole discretion. Determinations, interpretations or other actions made or taken by the Administrator under the Plan or under Awards or Options granted under the Plan shall be final, binding and conclusive for all purposes and upon all persons.

Section 3.2 Authority of the Administrator . The Administrator has the exclusive power, authority and discretion to:

(a) Grant Awards or Options;

(b) Designate Participants;

(c) Determine the number of Awards or Options to be granted to a Participant;

(d) Determine the terms and conditions of any Award or Option granted under the Plan, including but not limited to, the exercise price, any restrictions or limitations on the Award or Option, any schedule for vesting, lapse of forfeiture restrictions and accelerations or waivers thereof, and events of forfeiture or restrictions on the exercisability of an Option based in each case on such considerations as the Administrator in its sole discretion determines;

(e) Accelerate the vesting or lapse of restrictions of any outstanding Award or Option, based in each case on such considerations as the Administrator in its sole discretion determines;

(f) Determine whether, to what extent and under what circumstances an Option may be settled in, or the exercise price of an Option may be paid in, cash, Common Stock, Options, or other property, or any Award or Option may be canceled, forfeited or surrendered;

(g) Prescribe the form of each Award or Option Agreement;

(h) Decide all other matters that must be determined in connection with an Award or Option;

(i) Establish, adopt or revise any rules and regulations as it may deem necessary or advisable to administer the Plan and appoint such agents as it shall deem appropriate for the proper administration of the Plan;

(j) Amend the Plan or any Award or Option Agreement as provided in Article XI; and

 

5


(k) Make all other decisions and determinations that may be required under the Plan or as the Administrator deems necessary or advisable to administer the Plan.

Section 3.3 Delegation of Authority . The Administrator, in its sole discretion and on such terms and conditions as it may provide, may delegate all or any part of its authority and powers under the Plan to one or more directors or officers of the Company.

Article IV

Shares Subject to the Plan

Section 4.1 Number of Shares . Subject to adjustment as provided in Section 4.3, the maximum number of shares of Common Stock that may be issued under the Plan or be subject to Options may not exceed 205,028 shares of Class A Common Stock and 400,000 shares of Class B Common Stock. The shares of Common Stock to be delivered under the Plan may consist, in whole or in part, of authorized but unissued shares of Common Stock that are not reserved for any other purpose.

Section 4.2 Canceled, Terminated or Forfeited Options . If any Option expires or if an Award or Option is for any reason forfeited, canceled or otherwise terminated or otherwise settled without the issuance of Common Stock, the Shares subject to such Award or Option shall again be available for grant under the Plan. Options or Awards that the Committee reasonably determines will be settled in cash shall not reduce the Plan maximum.

Section 4.3 Adjustment in Capitalization . In the event of any Adjustment Event affecting the Common Stock, the Administrator shall make an equitable and proportionate anti-dilution adjustment to offset any resultant change in the pre-share price of the Common Stock and preserve the intrinsic value of Awards and Options granted under the Plan. Such mandatory adjustment may include a change in any or all of ( a ) the number and kind of shares of Common Stock which thereafter may be awarded under the Plan (including, but not limited to, adjusting any limits on the number and types of awards that may be made under the Plan), ( b ) the number and kind of shares of Common Stock subject to outstanding Awards or Options, and ( c ) the grant, exercise or conversion price with respect to any Award or Option. In addition, the Administrator may make provisions for a cash payment to a Participant or a person who has an outstanding Award or Option. The number of shares of Common Stock subject to any Award or Option shall be rounded to the nearest whole number. Any such adjustment shall be consistent with sections 424 and 409A of the Code to the extent the Awards or Options subject to adjustment are subject to such sections of the Code.

 

6


Article V

Eligibility and Participation

Awards or Options may be granted only to individuals who are employees, officers, non-employee directors or consultants of or to the Company or a Subsidiary, as determined by the Administrator.

Article VI

Stock Options

Section 6.1 Grant of Options . The Administrator is authorized to grant Options to Participants at such time as it shall determine. Options granted pursuant to the Plan shall not be “incentive stock options” as defined in the Code. Each Option granted to a Participant shall be evidenced by an Option Agreement that shall specify the number of shares of Options granted, the exercise price at which shares of Common Stock may be purchased pursuant to the Options, the duration of such Options (not to exceed the seventh anniversary of the Grant Date), and such other terms as the Administrator shall determine.

Section 6.2 Exercise Price . The exercise price per share of Common Stock to be purchased upon exercise of an Option shall not be less than the Fair Market Value of a share of Common Stock on the Grant Date.

Section 6.3 Vesting and Exercisability of Options . Options shall become vested or exercisable in accordance with the vesting schedule or upon the attainment of such performance criteria as shall be specified by the Administrator on or before the Grant Date. Unless otherwise determined by the Administrator on or before the Grant Date, one-third of the Options granted to a Participant shall vest and become exercisable on each of the first three anniversaries of the Grant Date, subject to the Participant remaining employed through such dates. The Administrator may accelerate the vesting or exercisability of any Option, all Options or any class of Options at any time and from time to time.

Section 6.4 Exercise of Options . The Administrator shall establish procedures governing the exercise of Options, which procedures shall, unless the Administrator determines otherwise, generally require that prior written notice of exercise be given and that the exercise price be paid in full in cash, cash equivalents or other readily-available funds at the time of exercise, or, if so permitted by the Administrator (and on such conditions as the Administrator shall determine), ( a ) by tender of any shares of Common Stock owned by such Participant for at least a six month period for all or a portion of the applicable exercise price and/or minimum required withholding taxes, ( b ) through a net issuance arrangement pursuant to which a number of shares of Common Stock subject to the portion of the Option being exercised, having a Fair Market Value equal to the applicable exercise price plus the required minimum withholding taxes, are retained by

 

7


the Company, or (c) following a Public Offering with respect to the class of Common Stock subject to the Option, by using a broker assisted cashless exercise program acceptable to the Administrator. Unless the Administrator shall determine otherwise, prior to a Public Offering of the class of Common Stock subject to the Option, as a condition to exercise of any Option, a Participant shall enter into a Subscription Agreement applicable to the shares of Common Stock issuable pursuant to the Option.

Section 6.5 Term of Options . In no event shall any Option be exercisable more than seven years after the Grant Date.

Article VII

Restricted Stock

Section 7.1 Awards of Restricted Stock . The Administrator is authorized to grant Restricted Stock to Participants at such time or times and on such terms and conditions as it shall determine. Restricted Stock granted to a Participant shall be evidenced by an Award Agreement that shall specify the number of shares of Restricted Stock that are being granted to the Participant, the vesting conditions applicable to such Restricted Stock, the rights and obligations of the Participant with respect to such Restricted Stock, and such other terms and conditions as the Administrator shall determine (including, if determined by the Administrator, payment of a portion of the Fair Market Value thereof).

Section 7.2 Conditions to Grant . Unless otherwise determined by the Administrator, it shall be a condition to the issuance of Restricted Stock that the Participant who receives such Award enter into a Subscription Agreement annexed to the related Award Agreement or, if a Subscription Agreement is not so annexed, as otherwise provided to the Participant.

Section 7.3 Vesting Conditions . Awards of Restricted Stock shall vest in accordance with the vesting conditions specified in the applicable Award Agreement. These vesting conditions may include, without limitation and alone or in any combination, the continued provision of services to the Company or any of its Subsidiaries or the achievement of individual, corporate, business unit or other performance goals. Unless otherwise determined by the Administrator on or before the Grant Date, one-third of the Restricted Shares granted to a Participant shall vest on each of the first three anniversaries of the Grant Date, subject to the Participant remaining employed through such dates. Awards of Restricted Stock (prior to the vesting thereof) may not be sold, transferred, pledged, assigned or otherwise alienated or hypothecated other than as permitted by the Administrator.

Section 7.4 Stockholder Rights ; Unless otherwise determined by the Administrator at the time of grant, a Participant granted Restricted Stock shall have all of the rights of a shareholder with respect to the class of Common Stock awarded including, without limitation, the right to receive dividends thereon. The class of Common Stock awarded shall be non-voting stock.

 

8


Section 7.5 Administrator Discretion . Notwithstanding anything else contained in this Plan to the contrary, the Administrator may accelerate the vesting of any Restricted Stock or any class or series of Restricted Stock for any reason on such terms and subject to such conditions, as the Administrator shall determine, at any time and from time to time.

Section 7.6 Repurchase . Pursuant to Section 8.2, shares in respect of an Award under the Plan for which the Restriction Period has lapsed will be subject to the applicable repurchase provisions of the Subscription Agreement.

Section 7.7 Certificates for Restricted Stock . Restricted Stock granted under the Plan may be evidenced in such manner as the Administrator shall determine. If certificates representing Restricted Stock are registered in the name of the Participant, such certificates shall bear an appropriate legend referring to the terms, conditions, and restrictions applicable to such Restricted Stock, and the Company or another custodian selected by the Company shall retain physical possession of the certificate.

Article VIII

Termination of Employment

Section 8.1 Treatment of Options . Unless otherwise determined by the Administrator on or before the Grant Date, if a Participant’s employment with the Company terminates, such Participant’s outstanding Options shall be treated as set forth below.

(a) Termination by the Company for Cause . Unless otherwise determined by the Administrator, if a Participant’s employment with the Company is terminated for Cause, any outstanding Options held by the Participant, vested or unvested, shall be immediately forfeited and canceled, effective as of the date of the Participant’s termination of employment.

(b) Termination for Any Other Reason . The treatment of a Participant’s Options upon a termination of employment for any reason other than for Cause shall be as set forth in the Participant’s Option Agreement pertaining to such Options.

Section 8.2 Treatment of Restricted Stock . Unless otherwise determined by the Administrator on or before the date of an Award, if a Participant’s employment with the Company terminates, such Participant’s Restricted Stock shall be treated as set forth below.

 

9


(a) Termination by the Company for Cause . Unless otherwise determined by the Administrator, if a Participant’s employment with the Company is terminated for Cause, any unvested Restricted Stock shall be immediately forfeited and cancelled and the treatment of any vested Restricted Stock shall be subject to the terms of the Subscription Agreement as described in Section 8.3.

(b) Termination for Any Other Reason . Unless otherwise determined by the Administrator, upon termination of a Participant’s employment with the Company for any reason other than Cause, any unvested Restricted Stock held by the Participant shall be immediately forfeited and cancelled.

Section 8.3 Call Rights Upon Termination of Employment Prior to a Public Offering . Each Subscription Agreement shall provide that the Company and Harbinger Group shall have successive rights prior to a Public Offering to purchase all or any portion of a Participant’s Common Stock upon any termination of employment, at such time and at a purchase price per share equal to the Fair Market Value of a share of Common Stock as of the date specified in the Subscription Agreement (or, if the Participant’s employment is terminated for Cause, for a purchase price per share equal to the lesser of ( a ) the Fair Market Value of a share of Common Stock as of the date specified in the Subscription Agreement and ( b ) such Participant’s per share purchase price).

Article IX

Change in Control

Section 9.1 Vesting and Cancellation of Options . Unless otherwise determined by the Administrator or as provided in Section 9.2, in the event of a Change in Control, ( a ) time-based vesting restrictions on all outstanding Options that vest based on the passage of time shall lapse and such time-based Options shall vest and ( b ) to the extent performance hurdles applicable to outstanding performance-vesting Options have been satisfied immediately prior to the Change in Control as determined by the Administrator in its full discretion, unvested outstanding performance-based Options shall vest. Any performance-based Options that do not vest in accordance with the preceding sentence shall immediately be forfeited and canceled. Upon such Change in Control, each Option that vests prior to or in connection with the Change in Control shall be canceled in exchange for a payment in an amount or with a value equal to the excess, if any, of the Change in Control Price over the exercise price for such Option.

Section 9.2 Alternative Award . Notwithstanding Section 9.1 or 9.3, no cancellation, acceleration or other payment shall occur with respect to any Options or vesting or lapse of restrictions with respect to any Award in connection with a Change in Control if the Administrator reasonably determines in good faith, prior to the occurrence of a Change in Control, that such Options shall be honored or assumed, or new rights

 

10


substituted therefor following the Change in Control (such honored, assumed or substituted award, an “ Alternative Award ”), provided that any Alternative Award must:

(a) Give the Participant who held such Award or Option rights and entitlements substantially equivalent to or better than the rights and terms applicable under such Award or Option, including, but not limited to, an identical or better exercise and vesting schedule, and identical or better timing and methods of payment; and

(b) Have terms such that if, following a Change in Control, a Participant’s employment is involuntarily or constructively terminated (other than for Cause) at a time when any portion of the Alternative Award is unvested, (i) in the case of an option the unvested portion of such Alternative Award shall immediately vest in full and such Participant shall receive a cash payment equal to the excess (if any) of the fair market value of the stock subject to the Alternative Award on the date of surrender over the price that such Participant would be required to pay to exercise such Alternative Award or shall have an immediate right to exercise such Alternative Award and receive shares that are then publicly-traded and (ii) in the case of an Award, the unvested portion of such Alternative Award shall vest.

Section 9.3 Vesting of Restricted Stock Awards . Unless otherwise determined by the Administrator or as provided in Section 9.2, in the event of a Change in Control, the Restricted Period applicable to an Award of Restricted Stock shall lapse upon a Change in Control and all such shares shall vest and become non-forfeitable.

Section 9.4 Limitation of Benefits . Unless otherwise provided in the Award or Option Agreement, if, whether as a result of accelerated vesting, lapse of restrictions, the grant of an Alternative Award or otherwise, a Participant would receive any payment, deemed payment or other benefit as a result of Section 9.1, 9.2 or 9.3 that, together with any other payment, deemed payment or other benefit a Participant may receive under any other plan, program, policy or arrangement, would constitute an “excess parachute payment” under Section 280G of the Code, then, notwithstanding anything in this Plan to the contrary, the payments, deemed payments or other benefits such Participant would otherwise receive under Sections 9.1, 9.2 and 9.3 shall be reduced to the extent necessary to eliminate any such excess parachute payment and such Participant shall have no further rights or claims with respect thereto. If the preceding sentence would result in a reduction of the payments, deemed payments or other benefits a Participant would otherwise receive in more than an immaterial amount, the Company will use commercially reasonable efforts to seek the approval of the Company’s shareholders in the manner provided for in Section 280G(b)(5) of the Code and the regulations thereunder with respect to such reduced payments or other benefits (if the Company is eligible to do so), so that such payments would not be treated as “parachute payments” for these purposes (and therefore would cease to be subject to reduction pursuant to this Section 9.4).

 

11


Article X

Authority to Vary Terms or Establish Foreign Plans

The Administrator may vary the terms of Awards or Options granted under the Plan, or establish sub-plans under the Plan to authorize the grant of awards that have additional or different terms or features from those otherwise provided for in the Plan, if and to the extent the Administrator determines necessary or appropriate to permit the grant of awards that are best suited to further the purposes of the Plan and to comply with applicable securities laws in a particular jurisdiction or provide terms appropriate suited for Participants in such jurisdiction in light of the tax laws of such jurisdiction while being as consistent as otherwise possible with the terms of Awards or Options under the Plan; provided that this Article X shall not be deemed to authorize any increase in the number of shares of Common Stock available for issuance under the Plan set forth in Section 4.1.

Article XI

Amendment, Modification and Termination of the Plan

The Administrator may terminate or suspend the Plan at any time, and may amend or modify the Plan from time to time. No amendment, modification, termination or suspension of the Plan shall have a substantial adverse effect on the economic terms of any Awards or Options previously granted pursuant to the Plan without the consent of the Participant holding such Award or Option or the consent of a majority of Participants holding similar Awards or Options (such majority to be determined based on the number of shares covered by such Awards or Options). Shareholder approval of any such amendment, modification, termination or suspension shall be obtained to the extent mandated by applicable law, or if otherwise deemed appropriate by the Administrator.

Article XII

Miscellaneous

Section 12.1 Nontransferability of Awards . Except as otherwise provided herein, or as the Administrator may permit on such terms as it shall determine or, following vesting, as provided in an applicable Subscription Agreement, the Participant shall not sell, transfer, pledge, assign, hedge, encumber or otherwise alienate or hypothecate any shares of Common Stock issued pursuant to the Plan to any Person other than the Company or by will or by the laws of descent and distribution and provided that the deceased Participant’s beneficiary or the representative of his or her estate acknowledges and agrees in writing, in a form reasonably acceptable to the Company, to be bound by the provisions of the Plan, the Award or Option Agreement, or any Subscription Agreement as if such beneficiary or estate were the Participant. All rights with respect to Awards or Options granted to a Participant under the Plan shall be exercisable during the Participant’s life-time by such Participant only (or, in the event of the Participant’s Disability, such Participant’s legal representative). Following a Participant’s death, all rights with respect to Awards or Options that were outstanding at the time of such Participant’s death and have not terminated shall be exercised by his designated beneficiary or by his estate in the absence of a designated beneficiary.

 

12


Section 12.2 Tax Withholding . The Company or the Subsidiary employing a Participant shall have the power to withhold, or to require such Participant to remit to the Company or such Subsidiary, an amount (in cash, from other compensation payable to the Participant, or in shares of Common Stock granted under the Plan) sufficient to satisfy all U.S. federal, state, local and any non-U.S. withholding tax or other governmental tax, charge or fee requirements in respect of any award granted or payment made under the Plan.

Section 12.3 No Guarantee of Employment or Participation . Nothing in the Plan or in any agreement granted hereunder shall interfere with or limit in any way the right of the Company or any Subsidiary to terminate any Participant’s employment or retention at any time, or confer upon any Participant any right to continue in the employ or retention of the Company or any Subsidiary. No Employee shall have a right to be selected as a Participant or, having been so selected, to receive any Awards or Options.

Section 12.4 No Limitation on Compensation; No Impact on Benefits . Nothing in the Plan shall be construed to limit the right of the Company or any Subsidiary to establish other plans or to pay compensation to its officers, employees, non-employee directors or consultants, in cash or property, in a manner that is not expressly authorized under the Plan. Except as may otherwise be specifically and unequivocally stated under any employee benefit plan, policy or program, no amount payable in respect of any Award or Option shall be treated as compensation for purposes of calculating a Participant’s rights under any such plan, policy or program. The selection of an individual as a Participant shall neither entitle such individual to, nor disqualify such individual from, participation in any other award or incentive plan.

Section 12.5 No Rights to Damages . Nothing in the Plan or in any Award or Option Agreement shall impose upon the Company, any Subsidiary or the Administrator any liability in connection with the provision, loss or payment of benefits or rights under the Plan, the exercise of discretion under the Plan or the failure or refusal of any person to exercise discretion under the Plan, and/or a Participant ceasing to be a person eligible to be a Participant under the Plan for any reason as a result of a termination of employment or service.

Section 12.6 Beneficiary Designation . Pursuant to such rules and procedures as the Administrator may from time to time establish, a Participant may name a beneficiary or beneficiaries (who may be named contingently or successively) by whom any right under the Plan is to be exercised in case of such Person’s death. Each designation will revoke all prior designations by the same Participant, shall be in a form reasonably prescribed by the Administrator, and will be effective only when filed by the Participant in writing with the Administrator during the Participant’s lifetime.

 

13


Section 12.7 Requirements of Law . The granting of Awards and Options and the issuance of shares of Common Stock pursuant to the Plan shall be subject to all applicable laws, rules and regulations, and to such approvals by any governmental agencies or national securities exchanges as may be required. No Options or Awards shall be granted under the Plan, and no shares of Common Stock shall be issued under the Plan, if such grant or issuance would result in a violation of applicable law, including U.S. federal securities laws and any applicable state or non-U.S. securities laws.

Section 12.8 Freedom of Action . Nothing in the Plan or any Award or Option Agreement shall be construed as limiting or preventing the Company or any Subsidiary from taking any action that it deems appropriate or in its best interest (as determined in its sole and absolute discretion) and no Participant (or person claiming by or through a Participant) shall have any right relating to the diminishment in the value of any Award or Option as a result of any such action. The foregoing shall not constitute a waiver by a Participant, in the Participant’s capacity as a shareholder of the Company, of any breach of fiduciary duty.

Section 12.9 Unfunded Plan; Plan Not Subject to ERISA . The plan is an unfunded plan and Participants shall have the status of unsecured creditors of the Company. The Plan is not intended to be subject to the Employee Retirement Income and Security Act of 1974, as amended.

Section 12.10 Term of Plan . The Plan shall be effective as of November 2, 2011, (the “ Effective Date ”) and shall continue in effect, unless sooner terminated pursuant to Article XI, until the seventh anniversary of such date. The provisions of the Plan shall continue thereafter to govern all outstanding Awards and Options.

Section 12.11 No Shareholder Rights . Except as provided in Section 7.4, no Participant shall have any of the rights of a shareholder of the Company unless and until shares of Common Stock are in fact issued to such Participant in connection with an Award or Option.

Section 12.12 Titles and Headings . The titles and headings of the sections in this Plan are for convenience of reference only and, in the event of any conflict, the text of the Plan, rather than such titles or headings, shall control.

Section 12.13 Gender and Number . Except where otherwise indicated by the context, any masculine term used herein shall also include the feminine; the plural shall include the singular and the singular shall include the plural.

 

14


Section 12.14 Use of the term “Employ ”. The words “employment,” “employ” and corollary terms used herein and in any Award or Option Agreement with respect to a non-employee director or consultant shall be construed to refer to such non-employee director’s service as a non-employee member of the board of directors of the Company or such consultant’s service as a consultant to the Company. The phrase “employment with the Company” and corollary terms used herein and in any Award or Option Agreement with respect to an officer or employee shall be construed to refer to the employment with the Company and/or any Subsidiary of the Company that actually employs such officer or employee.

Section 12.15 Fractional Shares . No fractional shares shall be issued in settlement of an Option under the Plan or issued or delivered pursuant to the Plan.

Section 12.16 Governing Law . THIS PLAN, AND ALL AGREEMENTS HEREUNDER, SHALL BE GOVERNED BY AND CONSTRUED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE LAW OF THE STATE OF DELAWARE, WITHOUT REGARD TO THE APPLICATION OF RULES OF CONFLICTS OF LAW THAT WOULD APPLY THE LAWS OF ANY OTHER JURISDICTION.

Section 12.17 Arbitration . Any dispute, controversy or claim arising out of or pursuant to the Plan, any agreement entered into pursuant to the Plan or any undertakings, covenants and agreements incorporated by reference into this Plan shall be submitted to and finally determined by binding arbitration to be held in New York, New York at the American Arbitration Association, before one arbitrator under an in accordance with the American Arbitration Association’s Commercial Rules, with each party to be responsible for its own attorney’s fees and costs incurred in connection therewith. In the event that this arbitration provision is determined by a court with appropriate jurisdiction to be unenforceable, the Company and each Participant under the Plan, waives the right, if any, to a trial by jury of any claim that would have been subject to arbitration under this Section 12.16.

Section 12.18 409A Compliance . This Plan and the Option and Award Agreements entered into pursuant to the Plan are intended to be exempt from or comply with the requirements of Section 409A of the Code and shall be construed and interpreted in accordance with such intent.

 

15

Exhibit 10.9

Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc.

Dividend Equivalent Plan

Article I

Purpose

The purpose of the Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc. Dividend Equivalent Plan (the “ Plan ”), effective as of November 2, 2011, is to provide incentives for officers, directors, key employees and consultants of the Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc. (the “ Company ”) whose performance in fulfilling the responsibilities of their positions is expected to have a positive impact on the profitability and future growth of the Company.

Article II

Certain Definitions

2.1 Whenever used herein, the following terms shall have the respective meanings set forth below:

Administrator ” means the compensation committee of the Board or such other committee as the Board shall designate from time to time.

Board ” means the board of directors of the Company.

Change in Control ” means the first to occur of the following events after the Grant Date ( i ) the sale, transfer or other disposition of all or substantially all of the assets of the Company to one or more persons or entities that are not, immediately prior to such sale, transfer or other disposition, affiliates of the Company; ( ii ) the acquisition, directly or indirectly, by any person, entity or “group” (as defined in Section 13(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended), other than the Company, any Subsidiary, Harbinger Group or any of their respective affiliates, of a majority of the combined voting power of the Company’s then outstanding voting securities; ( iii ) the merger or consolidation of the Company, as a result of which persons who were stockholders of the Company immediately prior to such merger or consolidation, do not, immediately thereafter, own, directly or indirectly, a majority of the combined voting power entitled to vote generally in the election of directors of the merged or consolidated company; or ( iv ) the liquidation or dissolution of the Company other than a liquidation or dissolution for the purposes of effecting a corporate restructuring or reorganization as a result of which persons who were stockholders of the Company immediately prior to such liquidation or dissolution continue to own immediately thereafter, directly or indirectly, a majority of the combined voting power entitled to vote generally in the election of directors of the entity that owns, directly or indirectly, substantially all of the assets of the Company following such transaction.


Code ” means the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended, and the regulations promulgated thereunder.

Common Stock ” means the common stock of the Company, par value .01.

Company ” has the meaning set forth in Article I.

Dividend Equivalent ” means the right, granted pursuant to Section 5.1 of the Plan, to receive a payment in cash, in an amount equal to the ordinary cash dividends declared and paid in each calendar year starting in the year in which the Dividend Equivalent is granted through the year immediately prior to the year in which the Dividend Equivalent vests with respect to a Participant’s Option Shares, but only while the related Stock Option is outstanding and unexercised; provided that if the Participant exercises the related Stock Option in a cashless exercise following which the Participant does not hold any Common Stock in respect of such Stock Option, the portion of the Dividend Equivalent with respect to such Stock Option shall continue to accrue value for dividends declared through the year in which such portion of the Dividend Equivalent otherwise vests. Ordinary cash dividends shall include payments made to Harbinger Group for repayment of indebtedness with the per share value determined by dividing such loan repayment amount by the number of outstanding shares provided that for 2011 the total number of outstanding shares shall be considered to be 10,251,376.1 for purposes of this Plan.

Dividend Equivalent Agreement ” means an agreement between the Company and a Participant embodying the terms of any Dividend Equivalents granted pursuant to the Plan and in the form approved by the Administrator from time to time for such purpose, which agreement may contain such other terms and conditions as the Administrator may determine; provided that such other terms and conditions are not inconsistent with the provisions of this Plan.

Grant Date ” means, with respect to a Dividend Equivalent granted pursuant to the Plan, the date on which such Dividend Equivalent is granted.

Harbinger Group ” means Harbinger Group Inc.

Minimum Net Dividend Value ” the minimum Net Dividend Value that must be achieved in a particular period in order for a Dividend Equivalent to vest.

Net Dividend Value ” means the aggregate value of cash dividends declared and paid by the Company to Harbinger Group (including for this purpose payments made to Harbinger Group by the Company for repayment of indebtedness) minus the aggregate value of all cash contributions from Harbinger Group to the Company in a particular period.

 

2


Option Shares ” means shares of Common Stock underlying a Participant’s Stock Options (as may be adjusted from time to time, pursuant to the terms thereof) with respect to which a Dividend Equivalent is granted.

Participant ” means an officer, employee, non-employee director or consultant of or to the Company or any Subsidiary who has been granted a Dividend Equivalent under the Plan; provided that, in the case of the death of a Participant, the term “Participant” refers to a beneficiary designated pursuant to Section 12.5 or the legal guardian or other legal representative acting in a fiduciary capacity on behalf of the Participant’s estate or heirs under applicable state law and court supervision.

Performance Period ” means each period of time set forth under the heading “Performance Period” in the tables set forth in Section 5.3(a) and Section 5.3(b) during which performance is measured for the purpose of determining whether a Dividend Equivalent has vested.

Plan ” means the Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc. Dividend Equivalent Plan.

Settlement Date ” means the date on which the Dividend Equivalents are settled pursuant to Article VII.

Stock Option ” means a right granted pursuant to the Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc. Plan to a Participant to purchase one share of Common Stock.

Subsidiary ” means any corporation, limited liability company, partnership or other entity of which a majority of the outstanding voting stock or voting power is beneficially owned directly or indirectly by the Company.

Vesting Date ” shall have the meaning set forth in Section 5.3(a).

Article III

Administration

3.1 Administrator . The Plan shall be administered by the Administrator. The Administrator may prescribe, amend and rescind rules and regulations relating to the administration of the Plan, provide for conditions and assurances it deems necessary or advisable to protect the interests of the Company and make all other determinations necessary or advisable for the administration and interpretation of the Plan. Any authority exercised by the Administrator under the Plan shall be exercised by the Administrator in its sole discretion. Determinations, interpretations or other actions made or taken by the Administrator under the Plan or under Dividend Equivalents granted under the Plan shall be final, binding and conclusive for all purposes and upon all persons.

 

3


3.2 Authority of the Administrator . The Administrator has the exclusive power, authority and discretion to:

(a) Grant Dividend Equivalents;

(b) Designate Participants;

(c) Determine the number of Dividend Equivalents to be granted to a Participant;

(d) Determine the terms and conditions of any Dividend Equivalent granted under the Plan, including but not limited to, any restrictions or limitations on the Dividend Equivalent, any schedule for vesting and accelerations or waivers thereof, and events of forfeiture based in each case on such considerations as the Administrator in its sole discretion determines;

(e) Accelerate the vesting of any outstanding Dividend Equivalent, based in each case on such considerations as the Administrator in its sole discretion determines;

(f) Determine whether, to what extent and under what circumstances a Dividend Equivalent may be settled in cash, or any Dividend Equivalent may be canceled, forfeited or surrendered;

(g) Prescribe the form of each Dividend Equivalent Agreement;

(h) Decide all other matters that must be determined in connection with a Dividend Equivalent;

(i) Establish, adopt or revise any rules and regulations as it may deem necessary or advisable to administer the Plan and appoint such agents as it shall deem appropriate for the proper administration of the Plan;

(j) Amend the Plan or any Dividend Equivalent Agreement as provided in Article XI; and

(k) Make all other decisions and determinations that may be required under the Plan or as the Administrator deems necessary or advisable to administer the Plan.

3.3 Delegation of Authority . The Administrator, in its sole discretion and on such terms and conditions as it may provide, may delegate all or any part of its authority and powers under the Plan to one or more directors or officers of the Company.

 

4


Article IV

Eligibility and Participation

Dividend Equivalents may be granted only to individuals who are employees, officers, non-employee directors or consultants of or to the Company or a Subsidiary, as determined by the Administrator.

Article V

Dividend Equivalents

5.1 Grant of Dividend Equivalents . Dividend Equivalents may be granted to Participants at such time or times as shall be determined by the Administrator. The Grant Date of any Dividend Equivalents under the Plan will be the date on which the Dividend Equivalent is awarded by the Administrator, or such other date as the Administrator shall determine in its sole discretion. Dividend Equivalents shall be evidenced in writing in a Dividend Equivalent Agreement containing such provisions not inconsistent with the Plan as the Administrator shall determine, including customary representations, warranties and covenants with respect to securities law matters.

5.2 Stock Dividends . The amount payable with respect to a Dividend Equivalent shall only include the value of cash dividends declared and paid with respect to Common Stock and shall not include the value of any dividends paid in capital stock.

5.3 Vesting .

(a) Initial Vesting . Except as otherwise provided in Section 8.1 or as otherwise determined by the Administrator on or before the Grant Date, subject to the continuous employment of a Participant with the Company through March 31, 2014 (the “ Vesting Date ”), a Dividend Equivalent shall become vested on the Vesting Date if (i) the Net Dividend Value for calendar year 2011 equals or exceeds $40 million, ( ii ) the Net Dividend Value for each of calendar years 2012 and 2013 equals or exceeds $30 million and ( iii ) the Net Dividend Value for calendar years 2011, 2012 and 2013 together equals or exceeds $120 million.

For the avoidance of doubt, if, in each of the Performance Periods set forth in the chart below, the Net Dividend Value equals or exceeds the Minimum Net Dividend Value set forth opposite each such Performance Period in the chart below, then the Dividend Equivalents shall vest on the Vesting Date subject to the continued employment requirement.

 

Performance Period

   Minimum Net Dividend
Value
 

2011

   $ 40 million   

2012

   $ 30 million   

2013

   $ 30 million   

2011-2013

   $ 120 million   

 

5


Any Dividend Equivalent that does not vest in accordance with this Section 5.3(a) shall remain outstanding until otherwise forfeited pursuant to the terms of the Plan. Any Dividend Equivalent that vests in accordance with this Section 5.3(a) shall be settled in accordance with Article VII.

(b) Supplemental Vesting . If a Dividend Equivalent does not vest on the Vesting Date in accordance with Section 5.3(a), then, subject to the continued employment of the Participant with the Company through the first anniversary of the Vesting Date, a Dividend Equivalent shall become vested on the first anniversary of the Vesting Date if ( i ) the Net Dividend Value for calendar year 2011 equals or exceeds $40 million, ( ii ) the Net Dividend Value for each of the calendar years 2012 and 2013 equals or exceeds $30 million and ( iii ) the Net Dividend Value for calendar years 2011, 2012, 2013 and 2014 together equals or exceeds $160 million.

For the avoidance of doubt, if, any Dividend Equivalent does not vest in accordance with Section 5.3(a), but in each of the Performance Periods set forth in the chart below, the Net Dividend Value equals or exceeds the Minimum Net Dividend Value set forth opposite each such Performance Period in the chart below, then the Dividend Equivalents shall vest on the first anniversary of the Vesting Date subject to the continued employment requirement.

 

Performance Period

   Minimum Net Dividend
Value
 

2011

   $ 40 million   

2012

   $ 30 million   

2013

   $ 30 million   

2011-2014

   $ 160 million   

Any Dividend Equivalent that has not vested in accordance with Section 5.3(a) and that does not vest in accordance with this Section 5.3(b) shall immediately be forfeited and terminate. Any Dividend Equivalent that vests in accordance with this Section 5.3(b) shall be settled in accordance with Article VII.

Article VI

Forfeiture

6.1 Normal Forfeiture Date . Unless earlier terminated pursuant to Section 6.2 or Section 8.1, unvested Dividend Equivalents shall be forfeited and terminate on the earlier of ( i ) April 1, 2015 and ( ii ) January 1 of the year following any single calendar year Performance Period in which the Net Dividend Value is less than the Minimum Net Dividend Value for such single calendar year Performance Period. Vested Dividend Equivalents shall terminate upon settlement in accordance with Article VII.

 

6


6.2 Termination of Employment . If a Participant’s employment with the Company terminates for any reason, (i) any Dividend Equivalents held by such Participant that have not vested on or before the effective date of such termination of employment shall be forfeited and terminate immediately upon such termination of employment and ( ii ) any vested Dividend Equivalents held by such Participant on the effective date of such termination of employment shall be settled as set forth in Article VII.

Article VII

Settlement

Subject to Article IX, the Company shall deliver to a Participant in settlement of a Dividend Equivalent that has vested, a payment in cash equal to the amount of such Dividend Equivalent on or as soon as administratively practical following the earlier of ( a ) the date on which such Dividend Equivalent vests in accordance with Section 5.3 or ( b ) the date of a Change in Control, and in any event, in each case, no later than March 15 of the year following the year in which such Dividend Equivalent vests. Upon settlement, the Dividend Equivalent shall immediately terminate. From and after the Settlement Date, the Participant shall have no further rights under the Plan pursuant to such Dividend Equivalent.

Article VIII

Change in Control

8.1 Accelerated Vesting . Except as otherwise determined by the Administrator, in the event of a Change in Control, if the Minimum Net Dividend Value has been achieved in each single calendar year Performance Period since and including 2011 through the end of the year prior to the year in which the Change in Control occurs, all outstanding Dividend Equivalents shall vest immediately prior to such Change in Control and vested Dividend Equivalents (after giving effect to this Section 8.1) shall be settled as set forth in Article VII.

8.2 Limitation of Benefits . If, whether as a result of accelerated vesting or otherwise, a Participant would receive any payment, deemed payment or other benefit as a result of the operation of Section 8.1 that, together with any other payment, deemed payment or other benefit the Participant may receive under any other plan, program, policy or arrangement, would constitute an “excess parachute payment” under section 280G of the Code, then, notwithstanding anything in the Plan to the contrary, the payments, deemed payments or other benefits the Participant would otherwise receive under Section 8.1 shall be reduced to the extent necessary to eliminate any such excess parachute payment and the Participant shall have no further rights or claims with respect thereto. If the preceding sentence would result in a reduction of the payments, deemed payments or

 

7


other benefits the Participant would otherwise receive on an after-tax basis in more than an immaterial amount, the Company will use its commercially reasonable efforts to seek the approval of the Company’s shareholders in the manner provided for in section 280G(b)(5) of the Code and the regulations thereunder with respect to such reduced payments or other benefits (if the Company is eligible to do so), so that such payments would not be treated as “parachute payments” for these purposes (and therefore would cease to be subject to reduction pursuant to this Section 8.2).

Article IX

Tax Withholding

The Company or one of its Subsidiaries shall have the power to withhold, or to require a Participant to remit to the Company, an amount (in cash, from other compensation payable to the Participant, or in shares of Common Stock) sufficient to satisfy all U.S. federal, state, local and any non-U.S. withholding tax or other governmental tax, charge or fee requirements in respect of any Dividend Equivalents, cash or other payment delivered at settlement or otherwise under the Plan (whether at grant, vesting, settlement or any other date) and the Company may withhold the payment of Common Stock, cash or other payment until such requirements are satisfied.

Article X

No Funding Obligations

The Dividend Equivalents granted under the Plan are intended to be “unfunded” awards for incentive compensation. With respect to any distributions not yet made to a Participant pursuant to a Dividend Equivalent, nothing contained in the Plan shall give such Participant any rights that are greater than those of a general creditor of the Company. Participants and their beneficiaries, heirs, successors and assigns shall have no legal or equitable rights, interests or claims in any property or assets of the Company.

Article XI

Amendment, Modification and Termination of the Plan

The Administrator may terminate or suspend the Plan at any time, and may amend or modify the Plan for time to time. No amendment, modification, termination or suspension of the Plan shall have a substantial adverse effect on the economic terms of any Dividend Equivalents previously granted pursuant to the Plan without the consent of the Participant holding such Dividend Equivalent or the consent of a majority of Participants holding similar Dividend Equivalents (such majority to be determined based on the number of Dividend Equivalents). Shareholder approval of any such amendment, modification, termination or suspension shall be obtained to the extent mandated by applicable law, or if otherwise deemed appropriate by the Administrator.

 

8


Article XII

Miscellaneous

12.1 Non-Transferability of Dividend Equivalents . Except as otherwise provided herein or as the Administrator, in its sole discretion, may permit on such terms as it shall determine, the Dividend Equivalents are not assignable or transferable, in whole or in part, and they may not, directly or indirectly, be offered, transferred, sold, pledged, assigned, alienated, hypothecated or otherwise disposed of or encumbered (including, but not limited to, by gift, operation of law or otherwise) other than by will or by the laws of descent and distribution to the estate of a Participant upon the Participant’s death or with the Company’s consent.

12.2 No Guarantee of Employment or Participation . Nothing in the Plan or in any agreement granted hereunder shall interfere with or limit in any way the right of the Company or any Subsidiary to terminate any Participant’s employment or retention at any time, or confer upon any Participant any right to continue in the employ or retention of the Company or any Subsidiary. No employee shall have a right to be selected as a Participant or, having been so selected, to receive any Dividend Equivalents.

12.3 No Limitation on Compensation; No Impact on Benefits . Nothing in the Plan shall be construed to limit the right of the Company or any Subsidiary to establish other plans or to pay compensation to its officers, employees, non-employee directors or consultants, in cash or property, in a manner that is not expressly authorized under the Plan. Except as may otherwise be specifically and unequivocally stated under any employee benefit plan, policy or program, no amount payable in respect of any Dividend Equivalent shall be treated as compensation for purposes of calculating a Participant’s rights under any such plan, policy or program. The selection of an individual as a Participant shall neither entitle such individual to, nor disqualify such individual from, participation in any other award or incentive plan.

12.4 No Rights to Damages . Nothing in the Plan or in any Dividend Equivalent Agreement shall impose upon the Company, any Subsidiary or the Administrator any liability in connection with the provision, loss or payment of benefits or rights under the Plan, the exercise of discretion under the Plan or the failure or refusal of any person to exercise discretion under the Plan, and/or a Participant ceasing to be a person eligible to be a Participant under the Plan for any reason as a result of a termination of employment or service.

12.5 Beneficiary Designation . Pursuant to such rules and procedures as the Administrator may from time to time establish, a Participant may name a beneficiary or beneficiaries (who may be named contingently or successively) by whom any right under the Plan is to be exercised in case of such Person’s death. Each designation will revoke all prior designations by the same Participant, shall be in a form reasonably prescribed by the Administrator, and will be effective only when filed by the Participant in writing with the Administrator during the Participant’s lifetime.

 

9


12.6 Notices . All notices and other communications required or permitted to be given under the Plan shall be in writing and shall be deemed to have been given if delivered personally or sent by certified or express mail, return receipt requested, postage prepaid, or by any recognized international equivalent of such delivery, to the Company or the Participant, as the case may be, at the following addresses or to such other address as the Company or the Participant, as the case may be, shall specify by notice to the other:

(a) if to the Company, to it at:

Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc.

1001 Fleet Street, 6th Floor

Baltimore, MD 21202

Att: General Counsel

With a copy to:

Harbinger Group, Inc.

450 Park Ave, 30th Floor

New York New York 10022

Att: General Counsel

(b) if to the Participant, to the Participant at his or her most recent address as shown on the books and records of the Company or Subsidiary employing the Participant.

All such notices and communications shall be deemed to have been received on the date of delivery if delivered personally or on the third business day after the mailing thereof.

12.7 Applicable Law . The Plan shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the law of the State of Delaware regardless of the application of rules of conflict of law that would apply the laws of any other jurisdiction.

12.8 Arbitration . Any dispute, controversy or claim arising out of or pursuant to this Plan, any agreement entered into pursuant to the Plan or any undertakings, covenants and agreements incorporated by reference into this Plan shall be submitted to and finally determined by binding arbitration to be held in New York, New York at the American Arbitration Association, before one arbitrator under an in accordance with the American Arbitration Association’s Commercial Rules, with each party to be responsible for its own attorney’s fees and costs incurred in connection therewith. In the event that this arbitration provision is determined by a court with appropriate jurisdiction to be unenforceable, the Company and each Participant under the Plan, waives the right, if any, to a trial by jury of any claim that would have been subject to arbitration under this Section 12.8 .

 

10


12.9 Use of the term “Employ ”. The words “employment,” “employ” and corollary terms used herein and in any Dividend Equivalent Agreement with respect to a non-employee director or consultant shall be construed to refer to such non-employee director’s service as a non-employee member of the board of directors of the Company or such consultant’s service as a consultant to the Company. The phrase “employment with the Company” and corollary terms used herein and in any Dividend Equivalent Agreement with respect to an officer or employee shall be construed to refer to the employment with the Company and/or any Subsidiary of the Company that actually employs such officer or employee.

12.10 409A Compliance . This Plan and the Dividend Equivalent Agreements entered into pursuant to the Plan are intended to be exempt from or comply with the requirements of Section 409A of the Code and shall be construed and interpreted in accordance with such intent.

12.11 Titles and Headings . The titles and headings of the sections in the Plan are for convenience of reference only and shall not affect the meaning or interpretation of the Plan.

12.12 Gender and Number . Except where otherwise indicated by the context, any masculine term used herein shall also include the feminine; the plural shall include the singular and the singular shall include the plural.

 

11

Exhibit 10.10

Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc.

2012 Dividend Equivalent Plan

Article I

Purpose

The purpose of the Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc. 2012 Dividend Equivalent Plan (the “ Plan ”), effective as of December 31, 2012, is to provide incentives for officers, directors, key employees and consultants of the Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc. (the “ Company ”) whose performance in fulfilling the responsibilities of their positions is expected to have a positive impact on the profitability and future growth of the Company.

Article II

Certain Definitions

2.1 Whenever used herein, the following terms shall have the respective meanings set forth below:

Administrator ” means the compensation committee of the Board or such other committee as the Board shall designate from time to time.

Board ” means the board of directors of the Company.

Change in Control ” means the first to occur of the following events after the Grant Date ( i ) the sale, transfer or other disposition of all or substantially all of the assets of the Company to one or more persons or entities that are not, immediately prior to such sale, transfer or other disposition, affiliates of the Company; ( ii ) any “person” or “group” (as such terms are used in Sections 13(d) and 14(d) of the Exchange Act) becomes the ultimate owner, directly or indirectly, of 35% or more of the voting power of the Common Stock of the Company other than the Company, any Subsidiary, Harbinger Group or any of their respective affiliates (a “Permitted Holder”); provided that such event shall not be deemed a Change in Control so long as one or more Permitted Holders shall own, directly or indirectly, more of the voting power of the Common Stock of the Company than such person or group; ( iii ) the merger or consolidation of the Company, as a result of which persons who were stockholders of the Company immediately prior to such merger or consolidation, do not, immediately thereafter, own, directly or indirectly, a majority of the combined voting power entitled to vote generally in the election of directors of the merged or consolidated company; or ( iv ) the liquidation or dissolution of the Company other than a liquidation or dissolution for the purposes of effecting a corporate restructuring or reorganization as a result of which persons who were stockholders of the Company immediately prior to such liquidation or dissolution continue to own immediately thereafter, directly or indirectly, a majority of the combined voting power entitled to vote generally in the election of directors of the entity that owns,


directly or indirectly, substantially all of the assets of the Company following such transaction. With respect to grants made under the Plan prior to December 31, 2012, the prior definition of Change in Control in clause (ii) will apply if more favorable to the Participant.

Code ” means the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended, and the regulations promulgated thereunder.

Common Stock ” means the Class A and/or Class B common stock of the Company, par value .01.

Company ” has the meaning set forth in Article I.

Dividend Equivalent ” means, (i) for a Dividend Equivalent granted with respect to a Stock Option, the right, granted pursuant to Section 5.1 of the Plan, to receive a payment in cash, in an amount equal to sum of (a) the ordinary cash dividends declared and paid per share of Class B Common Stock plus (b) the value per share of Class B Common Stock of the Indebtedness Repayments paid in each calendar year starting in the year in which the Dividend Equivalent is granted through the year immediately prior to the year in which the Dividend Equivalent vests; provided that the amount described in (i)(a) hereof shall only be payable while the related Stock Option is outstanding and unexercised or, where the Participant exercises the related Stock Option in a cashless exercise following which the Participant does not hold any Common Stock in respect of such Stock Option, the portion of the Dividend Equivalent with respect to such Stock Option shall continue to accrue value for dividends declared through the year immediately prior to the year in which such portion of the Dividend Equivalent otherwise vests; and (ii) with respect to a Restricted Share, the right, granted pursuant to Section 5.1 of the Plan, to receive a payment in cash, in an amount equal to value per share of Class B Common Stock of the sum of the Indebtedness Repayments paid in each calendar year starting in the year in which the Dividend Equivalent is granted through the year immediately prior to the year in which the Dividend Equivalent vests. For the avoidance of doubt, a Dividend Equivalent granted with respect to a Restricted Share shall not include any right to payments in respect of ordinary cash dividends.

Dividend Equivalent Agreement ” means an agreement between the Company and a Participant embodying the terms of any Dividend Equivalents granted pursuant to the Plan and in the form approved by the Administrator from time to time for such purpose, which agreement may contain such other terms and conditions as the Administrator may determine; provided that such other terms and conditions are not inconsistent with the provisions of this Plan.

Grant Date ” means, with respect to a Dividend Equivalent granted pursuant to the Plan, the date on which such Dividend Equivalent is granted.

 

2


Harbinger Group ” means Harbinger Group Inc.

Indebtedness Repayments ” means payments made to Harbinger Group for repayment of indebtedness with the value per share of Common Stock determined by dividing such loan repayment amount by the number of outstanding shares of Class A and Class B Common Stock.

Minimum Net Dividend Value ” the minimum Net Dividend Value that must be achieved in a particular period in order for a Dividend Equivalent to vest.

Net Dividend Value ” means the aggregate value of cash dividends declared and paid by the Company to Harbinger Group (including for this purpose Indebtedness Repayments) minus the aggregate value of all cash contributions from Harbinger Group to the Company in a particular period.

Participant ” means an officer, employee, non-employee director or consultant of or to the Company or any Subsidiary who has been granted a Dividend Equivalent under the Plan; provided that, in the case of the death of a Participant, the term “Participant” refers to a beneficiary designated pursuant to Section 12.5 or the legal guardian or other legal representative acting in a fiduciary capacity on behalf of the Participant’s estate or heirs under applicable state law and court supervision.

Performance Period ” means each period of time set forth under the heading “Performance Period” in the tables set forth in Section 5.3(a) and Section 5.3(b) during which performance is measured for the purpose of determining whether a Dividend Equivalent has vested.

Plan ” means the Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc. 2012 Dividend Equivalent Plan.

Restricted Share s” means restricted shares of Class B Common Stock with respect to which a Dividend Equivalent is granted.

Settlement Date ” means the date on which the Dividend Equivalents are settled pursuant to Article VII.

Stock Option ” means a right granted pursuant to the Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc. Plan to a Participant to purchase one share of Class B Common Stock.

Subsidiary ” means any corporation, limited liability company, partnership or other entity of which a majority of the outstanding voting stock or voting power is beneficially owned directly or indirectly by the Company.

Vesting Date ” shall have the meaning set forth in Section 5.3(a).

 

3


Article III

Administration

3.1 Administrator . The Plan shall be administered by the Administrator. The Administrator may prescribe, amend and rescind rules and regulations relating to the administration of the Plan, provide for conditions and assurances it deems necessary or advisable to protect the interests of the Company and make all other determinations necessary or advisable for the administration and interpretation of the Plan. Any authority exercised by the Administrator under the Plan shall be exercised by the Administrator in its sole discretion. Determinations, interpretations or other actions made or taken by the Administrator under the Plan or under Dividend Equivalents granted under the Plan shall be final, binding and conclusive for all purposes and upon all persons.

3.2 Authority of the Administrator . The Administrator has the exclusive power, authority and discretion to:

(a) Grant Dividend Equivalents;

(b) Designate Participants;

(c) Determine the number of Dividend Equivalents to be granted to a Participant;

(d) Determine the terms and conditions of any Dividend Equivalent granted under the Plan, including but not limited to, any restrictions or limitations on the Dividend Equivalent, any schedule for vesting and accelerations or waivers thereof, and events of forfeiture based in each case on such considerations as the Administrator in its sole discretion determines;

(e) Accelerate the vesting of any outstanding Dividend Equivalent, based in each case on such considerations as the Administrator in its sole discretion determines;

(f) Determine whether, to what extent and under what circumstances a Dividend Equivalent may be settled in cash, or any Dividend Equivalent may be canceled, forfeited or surrendered;

(g) Prescribe the form of each Dividend Equivalent Agreement;

(h) Decide all other matters that must be determined in connection with a Dividend Equivalent;

 

4


(i) Establish, adopt or revise any rules and regulations as it may deem necessary or advisable to administer the Plan and appoint such agents as it shall deem appropriate for the proper administration of the Plan;

(j) Amend the Plan or any Dividend Equivalent Agreement as provided in Article XI; and

(k) Adjust the number or terms of the Dividend Equivalents held by the Participants to the extent necessary or appropriate to reflect any stock dividend, extraordinary dividend, stock split or share combination or any recapitalization, merger, consolidation, exchange of shares, spin-off, liquidation or dissolution of the Company or other similar transaction affecting the Common Stock.

(l) Make all other decisions and determinations that may be required under the Plan or as the Administrator deems necessary or advisable to administer the Plan.

3.3 Delegation of Authority . The Administrator, in its sole discretion and on such terms and conditions as it may provide, may delegate all or any part of its authority and powers under the Plan to one or more directors or officers of the Company.

Article IV

Eligibility and Participation

Dividend Equivalents may be granted only to individuals who are employees, officers, non-employee directors or consultants of or to the Company or a Subsidiary, as determined by the Administrator.

Article V

Dividend Equivalents

5.1 Grant of Dividend Equivalents . Dividend Equivalents may be granted to Participants at such time or times as shall be determined by the Administrator. The Grant Date of any Dividend Equivalents under the Plan will be the date on which the Dividend Equivalent is awarded by the Administrator, or such other date as the Administrator shall determine in its sole discretion. Dividend Equivalents shall be evidenced in writing in a Dividend Equivalent Agreement containing such provisions not inconsistent with the Plan as the Administrator shall determine, including customary representations, warranties and covenants with respect to securities law matters.

5.2 Stock Dividends . The amount payable with respect to a Dividend Equivalent shall not include the value of any dividends paid in capital stock.

 

5


5.3 Vesting .

(a) Initial Vesting . Except as otherwise provided in Section 8.1 or as otherwise determined by the Administrator on or before the Grant Date, subject to the continuous employment of a Participant with the Company through March 31, 2016 (the “ Vesting Date ”), a Dividend Equivalent shall become vested on the Vesting Date if (i) the Net Dividend Value for each of calendar years 2013, 2014 and 2015 equals or exceeds $40 million and ( iii ) the Net Dividend Value for calendar years 2013, 2014 and 2015 together equals or exceeds $128 million.

For the avoidance of doubt, if, in each of the Performance Periods set forth in the chart below, the Net Dividend Value equals or exceeds the Minimum Net Dividend Value set forth opposite each such Performance Period in the chart below, then the Dividend Equivalents shall vest on the Vesting Date subject to the continued employment requirement.

 

Performance Period

   Minimum Net Dividend
Value
 

2013

   $ 40 million   

2014

   $ 40 million   

2015

   $ 40 million   

2013-2015

   $ 128 million   

Any Dividend Equivalent that does not vest in accordance with this Section 5.3(a) shall remain outstanding until otherwise forfeited pursuant to the terms of the Plan. Any Dividend Equivalent that vests in accordance with this Section 5.3(a) shall be settled in accordance with Article VII.

(b) Supplemental Vesting . If a Dividend Equivalent does not vest on the Vesting Date in accordance with Section 5.3(a), then, subject to the continued employment of the Participant with the Company through the first anniversary of the Vesting Date, a Dividend Equivalent shall become vested on the first anniversary of the Vesting Date if ( i ) the Net Dividend Value for each of the calendar years 2013, 2014 and 2015 equals or exceeds $40 million and ( iii ) the Net Dividend Value for calendar years 2013, 2014, 2015 and 2016 together equals or exceeds $176 million.

For the avoidance of doubt, if, any Dividend Equivalent does not vest in accordance with Section 5.3(a), but in each of the Performance Periods set forth in the chart below, the Net Dividend Value equals or exceeds the Minimum Net Dividend Value set forth opposite each such Performance Period in the chart below, then the Dividend Equivalents shall vest on the first anniversary of the Vesting Date subject to the continued employment requirement.

 

Performance Period

   Minimum Net Dividend
Value
 

2013

   $ 40 million   

2014

   $ 40 million   

2015

   $ 40 million   

2013-2016

   $ 176 million   

 

6


Any Dividend Equivalent that has not vested in accordance with Section 5.3(a) and that does not vest in accordance with this Section 5.3(b) shall immediately be forfeited and terminate. Any Dividend Equivalent that vests in accordance with this Section 5.3(b) shall be settled in accordance with Article VII.

Article VI

Forfeiture

6.1 Normal Forfeiture Date . Unless earlier terminated pursuant to Section 6.2 or Section 8.1, unvested Dividend Equivalents shall be forfeited and terminate on the earlier of ( i ) April 1, 2017 and ( ii ) January 1 of the year following any single calendar year Performance Period in which the Net Dividend Value is less than the Minimum Net Dividend Value for such single calendar year Performance Period. Vested Dividend Equivalents shall terminate upon settlement in accordance with Article VII.

6.2 Termination of Employment . If a Participant’s employment with the Company terminates for any reason, (i) any Dividend Equivalents held by such Participant that have not vested on or before the effective date of such termination of employment shall be forfeited and terminate immediately upon such termination of employment and ( ii ) any vested Dividend Equivalents held by such Participant on the effective date of such termination of employment shall be settled as set forth in Article VII.

Article VII

Settlement

Subject to Article IX, the Company shall deliver to a Participant in settlement of a Dividend Equivalent that has vested, a payment in cash equal to the amount of such Dividend Equivalent on or as soon as administratively practical following the earlier of ( a ) the date on which such Dividend Equivalent vests in accordance with Section 5.3 or ( b ) the date of a Change in Control, and in any event, in each case, no later than March 15 of the year following the year in which such Dividend Equivalent vests. Upon settlement, the Dividend Equivalent shall immediately terminate. From and after the Settlement Date, the Participant shall have no further rights under the Plan pursuant to such Dividend Equivalent.

 

7


Article VIII

Change in Control

8.1 Accelerated Vesting . Except as otherwise determined by the Administrator, in the event of a Change in Control, if the Minimum Net Dividend Value has been achieved in each single calendar year Performance Period since and including 2013 through the end of the year prior to the year in which the Change in Control occurs, all outstanding Dividend Equivalents shall vest immediately prior to such Change in Control and vested Dividend Equivalents (after giving effect to this Section 8.1) shall be settled as set forth in Article VII.

8.2 Limitation of Benefits . If, whether as a result of accelerated vesting or otherwise, a Participant would receive any payment, deemed payment or other benefit as a result of the operation of Section 8.1 that, together with any other payment, deemed payment or other benefit the Participant may receive under any other plan, program, policy or arrangement, would constitute an “excess parachute payment” under section 280G of the Code, then, notwithstanding anything in the Plan to the contrary, the payments, deemed payments or other benefits the Participant would otherwise receive under Section 8.1 shall be reduced to the extent necessary to eliminate any such excess parachute payment and the Participant shall have no further rights or claims with respect thereto. If the preceding sentence would result in a reduction of the payments, deemed payments or other benefits the Participant would otherwise receive on an after-tax basis in more than an immaterial amount, the Company will use its commercially reasonable efforts to seek the approval of the Company’s shareholders in the manner provided for in section 280G(b)(5) of the Code and the regulations thereunder with respect to such reduced payments or other benefits (if the Company is eligible to do so), so that such payments would not be treated as “parachute payments” for these purposes (and therefore would cease to be subject to reduction pursuant to this Section 8.2).

Article IX

Tax Withholding

The Company or one of its Subsidiaries shall have the power to withhold, or to require a Participant to remit to the Company, an amount (in cash, from other compensation payable to the Participant, or in shares of Common Stock) sufficient to satisfy all U.S. federal, state, local and any non-U.S. withholding tax or other governmental tax, charge or fee requirements in respect of any Dividend Equivalents, cash or other payment delivered at settlement or otherwise under the Plan (whether at grant, vesting, settlement or any other date) and the Company may withhold the payment of Common Stock, cash or other payment until such requirements are satisfied.

Article X

No Funding Obligations

The Dividend Equivalents granted under the Plan are intended to be “unfunded” awards for incentive compensation. With respect to any distributions not yet made to a Participant pursuant to a Dividend Equivalent, nothing contained in the Plan shall give such Participant any rights that are greater than those of a general creditor of the Company. Participants and their beneficiaries, heirs, successors and assigns shall have no legal or equitable rights, interests or claims in any property or assets of the Company.

 

8


Article XI

Amendment, Modification and Termination of the Plan

The Administrator may terminate or suspend the Plan at any time, and may amend or modify the Plan for time to time. No amendment, modification, termination or suspension of the Plan shall have a substantial adverse effect on the economic terms of any Dividend Equivalents previously granted pursuant to the Plan without the consent of the Participant holding such Dividend Equivalent or the consent of a majority of Participants holding similar Dividend Equivalents (such majority to be determined based on the number of Dividend Equivalents). Shareholder approval of any such amendment, modification, termination or suspension shall be obtained to the extent mandated by applicable law, or if otherwise deemed appropriate by the Administrator.

Article XII

Miscellaneous

12.1 Non-Transferability of Dividend Equivalents . Except as otherwise provided herein or as the Administrator, in its sole discretion, may permit on such terms as it shall determine, the Dividend Equivalents are not assignable or transferable, in whole or in part, and they may not, directly or indirectly, be offered, transferred, sold, pledged, assigned, alienated, hypothecated or otherwise disposed of or encumbered (including, but not limited to, by gift, operation of law or otherwise) other than by will or by the laws of descent and distribution to the estate of a Participant upon the Participant’s death or with the Company’s consent.

12.2 No Guarantee of Employment or Participation . Nothing in the Plan or in any agreement granted hereunder shall interfere with or limit in any way the right of the Company or any Subsidiary to terminate any Participant’s employment or retention at any time, or confer upon any Participant any right to continue in the employ or retention of the Company or any Subsidiary. No employee shall have a right to be selected as a Participant or, having been so selected, to receive any Dividend Equivalents.

12.3 No Limitation on Compensation; No Impact on Benefits . Nothing in the Plan shall be construed to limit the right of the Company or any Subsidiary to establish other plans or to pay compensation to its officers, employees, non-employee directors or consultants, in cash or property, in a manner that is not expressly authorized under the Plan. Except as may otherwise be specifically and unequivocally stated under any employee benefit plan, policy or program, no amount payable in respect of any Dividend Equivalent shall be treated as compensation for purposes of calculating a Participant’s rights under any such plan, policy or program. The selection of an individual as a Participant shall neither entitle such individual to, nor disqualify such individual from, participation in any other award or incentive plan.

 

9


12.4 No Rights to Damages . Nothing in the Plan or in any Dividend Equivalent Agreement shall impose upon the Company, any Subsidiary or the Administrator any liability in connection with the provision, loss or payment of benefits or rights under the Plan, the exercise of discretion under the Plan or the failure or refusal of any person to exercise discretion under the Plan, and/or a Participant ceasing to be a person eligible to be a Participant under the Plan for any reason as a result of a termination of employment or service.

12.5 Beneficiary Designation . Pursuant to such rules and procedures as the Administrator may from time to time establish, a Participant may name a beneficiary or beneficiaries (who may be named contingently or successively) by whom any right under the Plan is to be exercised in case of such Person’s death. Each designation will revoke all prior designations by the same Participant, shall be in a form reasonably prescribed by the Administrator, and will be effective only when filed by the Participant in writing with the Administrator during the Participant’s lifetime.

12.6 Notices . All notices and other communications required or permitted to be given under the Plan shall be in writing and shall be deemed to have been given if delivered personally or sent by certified or express mail, return receipt requested, postage prepaid, or by any recognized international equivalent of such delivery, to the Company or the Participant, as the case may be, at the following addresses or to such other address as the Company or the Participant, as the case may be, shall specify by notice to the other:

(a) if to the Company, to it at:

Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc.

1001 Fleet Street, 6th Floor

Baltimore, MD 21202

Att: General Counsel

With a copy to:

Harbinger Group, Inc.

450 Park Ave, 30th Floor

New York New York 10022

Att: General Counsel

(b) if to the Participant, to the Participant at his or her most recent address as shown on the books and records of the Company or Subsidiary employing the Participant.

 

10


All such notices and communications shall be deemed to have been received on the date of delivery if delivered personally or on the third business day after the mailing thereof.

12.7 Applicable Law . The Plan shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the law of the State of Delaware regardless of the application of rules of conflict of law that would apply the laws of any other jurisdiction.

12.8 Arbitration . Any dispute, controversy or claim arising out of or pursuant to this Plan, any agreement entered into pursuant to the Plan or any undertakings, covenants and agreements incorporated by reference into this Plan shall be submitted to and finally determined by binding arbitration to be held in New York, New York at the American Arbitration Association, before one arbitrator under an in accordance with the American Arbitration Association’s Commercial Rules, with each party to be responsible for its own attorney’s fees and costs incurred in connection therewith. In the event that this arbitration provision is determined by a court with appropriate jurisdiction to be unenforceable, the Company and each Participant under the Plan, waives the right, if any, to a trial by jury of any claim that would have been subject to arbitration under this Section 12.8 .

12.9 Use of the term “Employ ”. The words “employment,” “employ” and corollary terms used herein and in any Dividend Equivalent Agreement with respect to a non-employee director or consultant shall be construed to refer to such non-employee director’s service as a non-employee member of the board of directors of the Company or such consultant’s service as a consultant to the Company. The phrase “employment with the Company” and corollary terms used herein and in any Dividend Equivalent Agreement with respect to an officer or employee shall be construed to refer to the employment with the Company and/or any Subsidiary of the Company that actually employs such officer or employee.

12.10 409A Compliance . This Plan and the Dividend Equivalent Agreements entered into pursuant to the Plan are intended to be exempt from or comply with the requirements of Section 409A of the Code and shall be construed and interpreted in accordance with such intent.

12.11 Titles and Headings . The titles and headings of the sections in the Plan are for convenience of reference only and shall not affect the meaning or interpretation of the Plan.

12.12 Gender and Number . Except where otherwise indicated by the context, any masculine term used herein shall also include the feminine; the plural shall include the singular and the singular shall include the plural.

 

11

Exhibit 10.11

EMPLOYMENT AGREEMENT

This Employment Agreement (the “ Agreement ”), dated as of June 27, 2011, is made by and between FIDELITY & GUARANTEE LIFE BUSINESS SERVICES, INC. (the “ Company ”) and LELAND C. LAUNER, JR. (the “ Executive ”), hereinafter also referred to individually as “Party” and together as “Parties.”

W I T N E S S E T H :

WHEREAS, HARBINGER GROUP INC. (“ Harbinger ”) is the principal investor in the Company;

WHEREAS, the Company desires to employ the Executive pursuant to the terms and conditions contained in this Agreement; and

WHEREAS, the Executive desires to accept such employment pursuant to the terms and conditions contained in this Agreement.

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the promises, and of the mutual covenants and agreements hereinafter contained, the Company and the Executive agree as follows:

1. Term . The Executive’s employment under this Agreement commenced on April 6, 2011 (the “ Effective Date ”). Unless earlier terminated pursuant to Section 7 below, the Executive’s employment pursuant to this Agreement shall be for a period from the Effective Date through December 31, 2012 (the “ Initial Term ”). Effective upon the expiration of the Initial Term and of each Additional Term (as defined below), Executive’s employment hereunder shall be deemed to be automatically extended, upon the same terms and conditions, for an additional period of one year (each, an “ Additional Term ”) unless either Party gives written notice to the other Party at least thirty (30) days but not more than ninety (90) days prior to the expiration of the Initial Term or such Additional Term, as the case may be, of the Party’s election not to extend the Initial Term or Additional Term. The period during which Executive is employed pursuant to this Agreement, including any extension thereof in accordance with the preceding sentence, shall be referred to as the “ Term ”.

2. Title . During the Term, the Executive shall serve as the President and Chief Executive Officer of the Company and Chairman of the Company’s board of directors.

3. Reporting . During the Term, the Executive shall report to the board of directors of Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc. (the “ Holdings Board ”).


4. Duties . During the Term, the Executive shall be responsible for such duties and have such authority and responsibilities as are consistent with his position that may be assigned to him from time to time by the Holdings Board. The Executive agrees to devote his full time, attention, skill, and energy to the duties set forth herein and to the business of the Company, and to use his best efforts to promote the success of the Company’s business. During the Term, at the request of the Holdings Board, the Executive may also serve as an officer or director of and shall perform certain services for subsidiaries and affiliates of the Company.

During the Term, the Executive shall devote substantially all of his business time and attention and his best efforts to the performance of his duties and responsibilities under this Agreement and shall not engage in any other business activity, except as may be approved by the Holdings Board; provided that nothing in this Agreement shall prohibit the Executive from ( i ) engaging in religious, charitable or other community or non-profit activities that do not impair the Executive’s ability to fulfill the Executive’s duties and responsibilities under this Agreement; ( ii ) investing the Executive’s personal assets in any business that does not compete with the Company, where the Executive is not obligated or required to, and shall not in fact, devote any substantial managerial efforts or ( iii ) holding directorships in other companies after obtaining the consent of the Holdings Board; provided further that none of the activities permitted in clauses (i) through (iii) individually or in the aggregate interfere with the performance of the Executive’s duties under this Agreement.

5. Location . During the Term, the Executive shall be based in the Company’s office in Baltimore, Maryland; provided that, subject to the Executive fulfilling all required business needs, the Executive may work one or two days per week from an office in his home. However, the Executive acknowledges that in order to effectively perform his duties, he may be required to travel to such other places by such means and on such occasions as the Company may require.

6. Compensation and Benefits .

(a) Base Salary . During the Term, the Executive shall receive an annual base salary of US $700,000. The Executive’s base salary shall be payable in accordance with the Company’s normal payroll practices. Such base salary shall be subject to periodic review, and may be increased at the sole discretion of the Holdings Board. The annual base salary payable to Executive under this Section 6, as the same may be increased from time to time, shall hereinafter be referred to as the “ Base Salary .”

(b) Bonus . During the Term, the Executive shall be eligible to receive an annual bonus in accordance with the terms of the Company’s annual bonus program, as such program may be amended, suspended or terminated from time to time, subject to and based on the attainment by Executive and/or the Company of applicable performance

 

2


targets to be set by management of Harbinger Group Inc. within 45 days of the date hereof. The Executive shall be eligible for an annual target bonus opportunity during the Initial Term in an amount equal to 100% of his Base Salary. Actual bonus payout may be more or less than target, based on Company and individual performance during the performance-measurement period. In order to receive any such bonus, except as otherwise provided in Section 8 hereof, the Executive must be actively employed by the Company on the date on which such bonus is scheduled to be paid to the Executive. Payment of the annual bonus, if any, shall be made no later than 2  1 2 months after the end of the relevant fiscal year.

(c) Signing Bonus . The Executive shall be paid a special cash bonus of $350,000, which Executive acknowledges has been received in full.

(d) Equity . As soon as practicable after the Effective Date but no later than December 31, 2011, the Executive will be granted nonqualified stock options to purchase shares of common stock of Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc. (the “ Options ”) with a grant date fair market value of $700,000, which shall vest and become exercisable in equal annual installments on the first three anniversaries of the date granted and shall have an exercise price per share equal to the fair market value of a share of common stock of Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc. on the grant date. On or before the one-year anniversary of such grant, the Executive will be granted a second set of Options with a grant date fair market value of $700,000, which shall vest and become exercisable in equal annual installments on the first three anniversaries of the date granted and shall have an exercise price per share equal to the fair market value of a share of common stock of Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc. on the grant date. The terms and conditions of the Options shall be set forth in a stock option agreement to be entered into between the Executive and Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc. at the time such Options are granted and shall include, but not be limited to, the following: ( i ) the Options shall be subject to the terms and provisions of a stock incentive plan (the “ Plan ”) to be adopted by Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc., ( ii ) the Options shall have an expiration date that is ten (10) years from the date of grant (subject to early termination upon certain types of termination of employment or cancellation of the awards in a change in control), ( iii ) the vesting of the Options shall accelerate upon a change in control if the Options are not honored or assumed, or new rights substituted therefor following the change in control ( iv ) the Options shall be forfeited upon termination of employment by the Company for Cause.

(e) Vacation . During the Term, the Executive shall be entitled to 4 weeks of paid vacation annually, exclusive of United States legal holidays, during a calendar year and during each full year of employment, provided that the scheduling of the Executive’s vacation does not interfere with the Company’s normal business operations. Unused vacation days may not be carried over from one calendar year to the next, and shall be forfeited at the close of each calendar year.

 

3


(f) Benefits . During the Term, and provided that the Executive satisfies, and continues to satisfy, any individual plan eligibility requirements, the Executive shall be eligible to participate in, and receive benefits under, benefit programs maintained by the Company for its senior executives on terms and conditions set forth in such plans (as amended from time to time).

(g) Reimbursement of Business Expenses . The Company shall reimburse the Executive for all reasonable and properly documented expenses incurred or paid by him in connection with the performance of his duties hereunder; provided that the Executive submits a request for such expense reimbursement together with such supporting documentation as the Company may require within thirty (30) days after such expenses are incurred and the Company shall reimburse all properly documented expenses no later than thirty (30) days after submission of such request for reimbursement and in any event no later than March 15th of the calendar year following the year in which such expenses were incurred.

(h) Housing Allowance . During the Term, the Company shall reimburse the Executive for reasonable expenses incurred for housing in the Baltimore, Maryland area up to a maximum of $2500 per month; provided that the Executive submits a request for such housing reimbursement together with such supporting documentation as the Company may require within thirty (30) days after such expenses are incurred and the Company shall reimburse all properly documented expenses no later than thirty (30) days after submission of such request for reimbursement and in any event no later than March 15 th of the calendar year following the year in which such expenses were incurred.

(i) Withholdings . All payments made under this Agreement shall be subject to any and all Federal, state and local taxes and other withholdings to the extent required by applicable law. The Company shall have the power to withhold, or require Executive to remit to the Company promptly upon notification of the amount due, an amount sufficient to satisfy the statutory minimum amount of all Federal, state, local and foreign withholding tax requirements with respect to any payment of cash, or issuance or delivery of any other property hereunder to Executive or any third party, and the Company may defer any such payment of cash or issuance or delivery of such other property until such requirements are satisfied.

(j) Rules and Procedures . The Executive shall be provided with details of the Company’s rules and procedures. These rules and procedures (as amended from time to time) shall form part of the Executive’s contract of employment. To the extent that such rules and procedures conflict with the terms of this Agreement, the latter shall govern the terms of Executive’s employment.

 

4


7. Separation from Service .

(a) Due to Death . The Executive’s employment with the Company shall automatically terminate immediately upon his death.

(b) Due to Disability . If the Executive incurs a “Disability” (as defined below) during the Term, then the Holdings Board, in its sole discretion, shall be entitled to terminate the Executive’s employment upon written notice to the Executive. For purposes of this Agreement, “ Disability ” means that the Executive, as a result of illness or incapacity, is unable to perform substantially his required duties for a period of four (4) consecutive months or for any aggregate period of six (6) months in any twelve (12) month period. A termination of the Executive’s employment by the Company for Disability shall be communicated to the Executive by written notice and shall be effective on the tenth (10th) business day after receipt of such notice by the Executive, unless the Executive returns to full-time performance of his duties before such tenth (10th) business day.

(c) By the Company . During the Term, the Company shall be entitled to terminate the Executive’s employment with or without “Cause” by providing written notice to the Executive, provided that if the Company terminates the Executive’s employment without Cause (and not as a result of a Disability), then the Company must provide at least two (2) weeks of advance written notice of such decision to the Executive. No advance notice period is required for a termination by the Company for Cause. The Company reserves the right to withdraw any and all duties and responsibilities from the Executive, and to exclude the Executive from the Company’s premises, during such two-week notice period. For purposes of this Agreement, the Executive shall be deemed terminated for “ Cause ” if the Company terminates the Executive’s employment in writing after the Executive ( i ) shall have been convicted, indicted for, or entered a plea of nolo contendere to, any felony or any other act involving fraud, theft, misappropriation, dishonesty, or embezzlement, ( ii ) shall have committed intentional and willful acts of misconduct that materially impair the goodwill or business of the Company or cause material damage to its or their property, goodwill, or business or ( iii ) shall have willfully refused to, or willfully failed to, perform in any material respect his duties hereunder, provided, however, that no such termination for Cause under this Section 7(c) shall be effective unless the Executive does not cure such refusal or failure to the Company’s reasonable satisfaction as soon as practicable after the Company gives the Executive written notice identifying such refusal or failure (and, in any event, within ten (10) calendar days after receipt of such written notice). For purposes of determining Cause, no act or failure to act by the Executive shall be considered “willful” unless it is done or omitted to be done by the Executive in bad faith and without reasonable belief that his action or omission was in the best interests of the Company. Any act, or failure to act, based upon authority given pursuant to a resolution duly adopted by the Holdings Board or based upon the written advice of counsel for the

 

5


Company, shall be presumed to be done by the Executive in good faith and in the best interests of the Company. Any voluntary termination by the Executive in anticipation of a termination for Cause under this Section 7(c) shall be deemed a termination for Cause.

(d) By the Executive . (i) During the Term, the Executive shall be entitled to terminate his employment with the Company with or without Good Reason by providing the Company with at least sixty (60) days of advance written notice of such decision. Upon the receipt of such written notice by the Company, the Company may accelerate the sixty-day notice period in order to make such termination effective prior to the expiration of the notice period. The Company shall only be required to compensate the Executive through the effective date of his separation from service, except as otherwise provided in Section 8. The Company reserves the right to withdraw any and all duties and responsibilities from the Executive, and to exclude the Executive from the Company’s premises, during such sixty-day notice period.

(ii) The Executive shall have “Good Reason” to terminate his employment with the Company upon the occurrence of one or more of the following events without either ( x ) the Executive’s express prior written consent or ( y ) full cure within 30 days after the Executive gives written notice to the Company requesting cure, such notice to be given by the Executive no later than 60 days after the date he first learns that the event has occurred; provided that the Executive terminates his employment no later than four (4) months following the date the Executive learns of the event constituting Good Reason: ( A ) any material diminution in the Executive’s title, responsibilities or authorities, ( B ) the assignment to the Executive of duties that are materially inconsistent with his duties as the President and Chief Executive Officer of the Company; ( C ) any change in the reporting structure so that the Executive reports to any person or entity other than the Holdings Board; ( D ) the relocation of the Executive’s principal office, or principal place of employment, to a location that is outside the Baltimore, Maryland metropolitan area; ( E ) a breach by the Company of any material terms of this Agreement; or ( F ) any failure of the Company to obtain the assumption (in writing or by operation of law) of its obligations under this Agreement by any successor to all or substantially all of its business or assets upon consummation of any merger, consolidation, sale, liquidation, dissolution or similar transaction.

8. Compensation Upon Separation from Service .

(a) By Reason of Death or Disability . If the Executive incurs a separation from service with the Company by reason of his death or Disability pursuant to Section 7(a) or 7(b) above, then the Company shall pay to the Executive (or his estate, as appropriate) ( i ) his then current Base Salary through the termination date, ( ii ) any accrued but unused vacation days as of the termination date, and ( iii ) any earned and unpaid bonuses for any previously completed bonus years (clauses (i) through (iii) collectively, the “ Accrued Obligations ”), within thirty (30) days after the date of separation from

 

6


service. In addition, subject to Section 8(g) below, if the Executive incurs a separation from service with the Company by reason of his death or Disability pursuant to Section 7(a) or 7(b) above, then the Company shall pay to the Executive (or his estate, as appropriate) by the March 15 th following the year in which such separation of service occurs an amount equal to a pro rata share of the Executive’s bonus for the year in which such separation from service occurs (but not including the requirement to be employed on the payment date) in an amount equal to the Executive’s bonus multiplied by the number of days the Executive was employed by the Company in such bonus year divided by 365 (the “ Pro Rata Bonus ”). Thereafter, the Company shall have no further obligations to the Executive.

(b) By the Company for Cause . If the Executive incurs a separation from service as a result of termination of employment by the Company for Cause pursuant to Section 7(c) above, then the Company shall pay to the Executive the Accrued Obligations within thirty (30) days after the date of the Executive’s separation from service due to Cause. Thereafter, the Company shall have no further obligations to the Executive.

(c) By the Company without Cause or by the Executive for Good Reason . Subject to Sections 8(g) and 19(b), if the Executive incurs a separation from service as a result of termination of employment by the Company without Cause (and not as a result of death or a Disability) pursuant to Section 7(c) above or by the Executive for Good Reason pursuant to Section 7(d)(ii) above, then the Company shall pay or provide to the Executive:

(i) the Accrued Obligations, within thirty (30) days after the date of such separation from service;

(ii) the Pro Rata Bonus by the March 15 th of the year following the year in which the separation from service occurs; and

(iii) continued payment of Base Salary through the remainder of the Term, or, if longer, for six (6) months following such separation from service. In addition, the Company may, at its option and in its sole discretion, elect on or before the thirtieth (30th) day following such separation from service to pay to the Executive continued Base Salary for an additional period not to exceed two hundred seventy (270) days beyond the expiration of the expiring Term, provided that the Executive agrees to comply with the requirements of Section 13 for the duration of such extended period and each of the Executive’s other obligations under this Agreement, including without limitation the requirements of Section 8(g) below. All amounts owing under this clause (c)(iii) shall be payable in accordance with normal payroll practices.

Any amounts payable to the Executive pursuant to any stock option agreement entered into between the Executive and Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc. shall be payable by Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc. as provided in such stock option agreement. Other than as set forth in this subsection, the Company shall have no further obligations to the Executive.

 

7


(d) By the Executive without Good Reason . If the Executive incurs a separation from service with the Company as a result of termination of employment by the Executive without Good Reason pursuant to Section 7(d)(i) above, then the Company shall pay to the Executive the Accrued Obligations within thirty (30) days of his separation from service. Thereafter, the Company shall have no further obligations to the Executive.

(e) Non-Renewal of the Term by the Company . If the Executive incurs a separation of service in the event that the Company elects not to renew the Term pursuant to Section 1 above, the Company ( 1 ) shall pay to the Executive continued Base Salary for a period of three (3) months from the date the Company notifies the Executive of any such election (such continued Base Salary shall be provided concurrently with and shall not duplicate any Base Salary otherwise payable through the remainder of the Term), and ( 2 ) may, at its option and in its sole discretion, elect on or before the thirtieth (30 th ) day following delivery of such notice of non-renewal to pay to the Executive continued Base Salary for an additional period not to exceed two hundred seventy (270) days beyond the expiration of the expiring Term, provided that the Executive agrees to comply with the requirements of Section 13 for the duration of such extended period and each of the Executive’s other obligations under this Agreement, including without limitation the requirements of Section 8(g) below.

(f) Termination of Employment prior to May 1, 2013 . Notwithstanding anything in Section 8(c) or Section 8(e) above to the contrary, if the Executive incurs a separation from service as a result of termination of employment by the Company without Cause (and not as a result of death or a Disability) pursuant to Section 7(c) above, by the Executive for Good Reason pursuant to Section 7(d)(ii) above or due to non-renewal of the Term by the Company following the completion of the Initial Term pursuant to Section 1 above, in each case prior to May 1, 2013, then the Executive shall not be entitled to the amounts described in Section 8(c) or Section 8(e), but shall be entitled to the amounts described in this Section 8(f)

(i) the Accrued Obligations, within thirty (30) days after the date of such separation from service; and

(ii) a lump sum payment equal to the difference between ( 1 ) $4,200,000 and ( 2 ) the aggregate value of the following payments with respect to the period commencing on or after the Effective Date of the Initial Term: ( x ) Executive’s Base Salary pursuant to Section 6(a) either paid or in the case of Accrued Obligations, payable, ( y ) Executive’s annual bonus pursuant to

 

8


Section 6(b) either paid or in the case of Accrued Obligations, payable and ( z ) compensation paid or payable within 45 days following the Executive’s separation from service (as defined in Section 409A of the United States Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the “ Code ”), and the regulations and other guidance issued thereunder (“ Section 409A ”)) with respect to the stock options granted to the Executive pursuant to Section 6(d) or otherwise, including any options to purchase shares of stock of an affiliate of the Company that, in either case, have been exercised. Payment pursuant to this Section 8(f)(ii) shall be made within 60 days after the date of the Executive’s separation from service.

(g) General Release and Other Requirements . Notwithstanding any other provision of this Agreement to the contrary, as a condition to receiving any payments other than the Accrued Obligations that may be made pursuant to this Section 8, the Executive (or the executor or administrator of his estate in the event of Executive’s death) must execute and not revoke a general release agreement in a form provided by the Company within thirty (30) days of the Executive’s separation from service with the Company and must comply with the Executive’s obligations under this Agreement. Notwithstanding anything else in this Section 8, except as otherwise required by Section 19(b) of this Agreement and subject to the Executive’s execution of a release agreement in accordance with this Section 8(g), payment of any amounts pursuant to this Section 8 (other than the Accrued Obligations) that would otherwise be paid in the first thirty (30) days following the Executive’s separation from service shall be paid on the 31 st day following such separation from service.

(h) Termination in Connection with a Change in Control . Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Agreement, to the extent that any of the payments and benefits provided for under this Agreement or any other agreement or arrangement between the Company and Executive (collectively, the “ Payments ”) ( i ) constitute a “parachute payment” within the meaning of Section 280G of the Code and ( ii ) but for this Section 8(h), Executive would be subject to the excise tax imposed by Section 4999 of the Code (the “ Excise Tax ”), then ( 1 ) the Payments shall be reduced to the amount that would result in no portion of the Payments being subject to the Excise Tax and the Executive shall have no further rights or claims with respect thereto and ( 2 ) if any portion of the Payments that would be reduced pursuant to clause (1) would not be so reduced if the stockholder approval requirements of Section 280G(b)(5) of the Code are satisfied, then the Company shall use commercially reasonable efforts to cause such portion of the Payments to be submitted for such approval prior to the event giving rise to such Payments.

 

9


9. Confidential Information .

(a) Non-Use and Non-Disclosure of Confidential Information . The Executive acknowledges that during the course of his employment with the Company, he will have access to information about the Company, and its clients and suppliers that is confidential and/or proprietary in nature, and that belongs to the Company. As such, at all times, both during the Term and thereafter, the Executive shall hold in the strictest confidence, and not use or attempt to use except for the benefit of the Company, and not disclose to any other person or entity (without the prior written authorization of the Company) any “Confidential Information” (as defined below). Notwithstanding anything contained in this Section 9, the Executive shall be permitted to disclose any Confidential Information to the extent required by validly issued legal process or court order, provided that the Executive notifies the Company immediately of any such legal process or court order in an effort to allow the Company to challenge such legal process or court order, if the Company so elects, prior to the Executive’s disclosure of any Confidential Information.

(b) Definition of Confidential Information . For purposes of this Agreement, “ Confidential Information ” means all data or information regarding the Company not generally known outside of the Company whether prepared or developed by or for the Company or received by the Company from any outside source, including without limitation any trade secrets and Inventions (as defined below); customer files, sales reports, customer lists, sales invoices, any business marketing, financial or sales records, formulae, methods of operation, software and related manuals, data, plan or survey, management organization information (including but not limited to data and other information relating to members of the Board, the Company or any of its affiliates or to the management of the Company or any of its affiliates) and any other record or information relating to the present or future business or products of the Company. All Confidential Information and copies thereof are the sole property of the Company. “Confidential Information” does not include information that the Executive has received lawfully prior to becoming employed with the Company, information that the Company has voluntarily disclosed to the public without restriction, or information that has otherwise lawfully entered the public domain.

10. Return of Company Property . Upon the termination of the Executive’s employment with the Company (whether upon the expiration of the Term or thereafter), or at any time during such employment upon request by the Company, the Executive shall promptly deliver to the Company and not keep in his possession, recreate or deliver to any other person or entity, any and all property and all documents and data of any nature and in whatever medium that belongs to the Company, or that belongs to any other third party and is in the Executive’s possession as a result of his employment with the Company, including without limitation, computer hardware and software, palm pilots, pagers, cell phones, other electronic equipment, records, data, client lists and information, supplier lists and information, notes, reports, correspondence, financial information, account information, product information, files and other documents and information, including any and all copies of the foregoing.

 

10


11. Intellectual Property .

(a) Prior Inventions . Except as disclosed to the Company in writing, contemporaneous with the Executive’s execution of this Agreement (which writing describes with particularity all inventions, original works of authorship, developments, improvements and trade secrets which were made by the Executive prior to the commencement of his employment with the Company, which belong solely to the Executive or belong to the Executive jointly with others (collectively referred to as “ Prior Inventions ”), which relate in any way to any of the Company’s proposed businesses, products, services or research and development, and which are not assigned to the Company herein), the Executive represents that there are no Prior Inventions. If in the course of the Executive’s employment with the Company (whether during the Term or otherwise), he incorporates into any Company product, process, service or machine, a Prior Invention owned by the Executive or in which he has an interest, then the Company is hereby granted and shall have a non-exclusive, royalty-free, irrevocable, perpetual, worldwide license (with the right to sublicense) to make, have made, copy, modify, make derivative works of, use, sell and otherwise distribute such Prior Invention as part of or in connection with such product, process, service or machine

(b) Assignment of Inventions . The Executive shall promptly make full written disclosure to the Company, shall hold in trust for the sole right and benefit of the Company and hereby assigns to the Company or its designee, all his right, title and interest throughout the world in and to any and all inventions, original works of authorship, developments, concepts, know-how, improvements or trade secrets, whether or not patentable or registerable under copyright or similar laws, which he may solely or jointly conceive or develop or reduce to practice, or cause to be developed or reduced to practice, during his employment with the Company (whether during the Term or otherwise) that ( i ) relate at the time of conception, development or reduction to practice to the actual or demonstrably proposed business or research and development activities of the Company, ( ii ) result from or relate to any work performed for the Company, whether or not during normal business hours or ( iii ) are developed through the use of Confidential Information (collectively referred to as “ Inventions ”). The Executive further acknowledges that all Inventions that are made by him (solely or jointly with others) within the scope of and during the period of his employment with the Company (whether during the Term or otherwise) are “works made for hire” (to the greatest extent permitted by applicable law) and are compensated by his salary, unless regulated otherwise by applicable law.

(c) Maintenance of Invention Records . The Executive shall keep and maintain adequate and current written records of all Inventions made by him (solely or jointly with others) during his employment with the Company (whether during the Term or otherwise). The records may be in the form of notes, sketches, drawings, flow charts, electronic data or recordings, laboratory notebooks or any similar format. The records

 

11


shall be available to and remain the sole property of the Company at all times. The Executive shall not remove such records from the Company’s business premises except as expressly permitted by Company policy which may, from time to time, be revised at the sole discretion of the Company.

(d) Further Assistance . The Executive shall assist the Company or its designee, at the Company’s expense, in every way to secure the Company’s rights in any Inventions and any copyrights, patents, trademarks, trade secrets, moral rights or other intellectual property rights relating thereto in any and all countries, including without limitation, the disclosure to the Company of all pertinent information and data with respect thereto, the execution of all applications, specifications, oaths, assignments, records and all other instruments which the Company shall deem necessary in order to apply for, obtain, maintain and transfer such rights and in order to assign and convey to the Company, its successors, assigns and nominees the sole and exclusive rights, title and interest in and to such Inventions, and any copyrights, patents, trademarks, trade secrets, moral rights or other intellectual property rights relating thereto. The Executive acknowledges that his obligation to execute, or cause to be executed, when it is in his power to do so, any such instrument or papers shall continue after the termination of his employment with the Company until the expiration of the last such intellectual property right in any country. If the Company is unable, because of the Executive’s mental or physical incapacity or unavailability for any other reason, to secure his signature to apply for or to pursue any application for any patents or copyright registrations covering Inventions assigned to the Company above, then the Executive hereby irrevocably designates and appoints the Company and its duly authorized officers and agents as his agent and attorney in fact, to act for and in his behalf and stead to execute and file any such applications and to do all other lawfully permitted acts to further the application for, prosecution, issuance, maintenance or transfer of letters patent or copyright registrations thereon with the same legal force and effect as if originally executed by the Executive. The Executive hereby waives and irrevocably quitclaims to the Company any and all claims, of any nature whatsoever, which he now or hereafter has for infringement of any and all Inventions assigned to the Company.

12. Conditions to Employment and No Prior Restrictions .

(a) Conditions to Employment . It is a condition precedent for employment under this Agreement that the Executive is not acting in breach of contract as regards any previous employer, including without limitation pursuant to any non-competition, non-solicitation or other similar covenant or agreement, by entering into employment pursuant to this Agreement.

 

12


(b) No Prior Restrictions . The Executive represents and warrants that his employment with the Company and the execution of this Agreement shall not violate, or cause him to be in breach of, any obligation or covenant made to any current or former employer or other third party, including without limitation pursuant to any non-competition, non-solicitation or other similar covenant or agreement, and that during the course of his employment with the Company (whether during the Term or otherwise), he shall not take any action that would violate or breach any legal obligation which he may have to any current or former employer or other third party. To the knowledge of the Executive, his current or former employer has not alleged or claimed any such violation or breach or taken or threatened any action to prohibit the Executive from becoming employed by the Company.

13. Non-Competition and Non-Solicitation . The Executive agrees that during his employment by the Company and (except as otherwise provided in Section 8(e)) for six months thereafter, he shall not, directly or indirectly, engage or be interested in (as owner, partner, stockholder, employee, director, officer, agent, fiduciary, consultant or otherwise), with or without compensation, any business engaged in the insurance or reinsurance business in the United States, Bermuda or any other geographic area in which the Company operates at any time during the 6-month or other applicable period prior to the termination of such employment or reasonably expects to operate as of the date of the termination of such employment. The Executive also agrees that for one year after his termination of employment, he shall not, directly or indirectly, solicit the employment or retention of (or attempt, directly or indirectly, to solicit the employment or retention of or participate in or arrange the solicitation of the employment or retention of) any senior employee or consultant who is to his knowledge then employed or retained by the Company, or by any of its subsidiaries or affiliates with whom the Executive has had material personal dealings at any time during the 6-month or other applicable period prior to the date of such termination. Notwithstanding the foregoing, nothing in this Section 13 shall prohibit the Executive from ( i ) performing services, with or without compensation, for, or engaging or being interested in, any business or entity that does not directly relate to business activities that compete directly and materially with a material business of the Company or its subsidiaries or ( ii ) acquiring or holding not more than five percent of any class of publicly-traded securities of any business. The Executive agrees that the restrictions set out in this Section 13 are reasonable and necessary to protect the legitimate business interests of the Company both during and after the termination of employment.

14. Non-Disparagement . Both during and after the Executive’s employment with the Company, the Executive shall not disparage, portray in a negative light or take any action that would be harmful to, or lead to unfavorable publicity for, the Company, Harbinger or any of their respective current or former clients, suppliers, officers, directors, employees, agents, consultants, contractors, owners, parents, subsidiaries or divisions, whether in public or private, including without limitation, in any and all interviews, oral statements, written materials, electronically displayed materials and materials or information displayed on Internet-related sites.

 

13


15. Confidentiality . The Executive agrees to keep the terms and conditions of this Agreement strictly confidential and shall not reveal either the financial terms or any other term of this Agreement to any other person or entity, provided that the Executive shall be able to disclose the terms and conditions of this Agreement to his immediate family, and legal and tax advisors after securing their similar commitment of confidentiality. It is understood that this confidentiality provision takes effect immediately and shall remain in effect after the termination of the Executive’s employment.

16. Equitable Relief . The Executive acknowledges that the remedy at law for his breach of Sections 9, 10, 11, 13, 14 and 15 above will be inadequate, and that the damages flowing from such breach will not be readily susceptible to being measured in monetary terms. Accordingly, upon a violation of any part of such sections, the Company shall be entitled to immediate injunctive relief (or other equitable relief) and may obtain a temporary order restraining any further violation. No bond or other security shall be required in obtaining such equitable relief, and the Executive hereby consents to the issuance of such equitable relief. As such, to the extent there is no adequate remedy at law, and equitable relief only is sought, the parties hereto select state court in New York City as the exclusive forum to resolve their disputes, and both parties submit to personal jurisdiction. Nothing in this Section 16 shall be deemed to limit the Company’s remedies at law or in equity for any breach by the Executive of any of the parts of Sections 9, 10, 11, 13, 14 and 15 which may be pursued or availed of by the Company.

17. Judicial Modification . The Executive acknowledges that it is the intent of the parties hereto that the restrictions contained or referenced in Sections 9, 11, 13, 14 and 15 above be enforced to the fullest extent permissible under the laws of each jurisdiction in which enforcement is sought. If any of the restrictions contained or referenced in such sections is for any reason held by an arbitrator or court to be excessively broad as to duration, activity, geographical scope or subject, then such restriction shall be construed or judicially modified so as to thereafter be limited or reduced to the extent required to be enforceable in accordance with applicable law.

18. Arbitration . Any dispute or controversy between the parties hereto, whether during the Term or otherwise, including without limitation, any and all matters relating to this Agreement, the Executive’s employment with the Company and the cessation thereof, and all matters arising under any federal, state or local statute, rule or regulation, or principle of contract law or common law, including but not limited to any and all medical leave statutes, wage-payment statutes, employment discrimination statutes and any other equivalent federal, state or local statute, shall be settled by arbitration administered by the American Arbitration Association (“ AAA ”) in New York City pursuant to the AAA’s National Rules for the Resolution of Employment Disputes (or their equivalent), which arbitration shall be confidential, final and binding to the fullest extent permitted by law. Each Party hereto shall be responsible for paying its own attorneys’ fees and costs incurred under this Section 18.

 

14


Each party hereby agrees to and does take the following action:

(a) irrevocably submits to the jurisdiction of Maryland for the purpose of enforcing the award or decision in any such proceeding;

(b) waives, and agrees not to assert, by way of motion, as a defense or otherwise, in any such suit, action or proceeding, any claim that ( i ) the Party is not subject personally to the jurisdiction of the above-named courts, ( ii ) the Party’s property is exempt or immune from attachment or execution, ( iii ) the suit, action or proceeding is brought in an inconvenient forum, ( iv ) the venue of the suit, action or proceeding is improper or ( v ) this Employment Agreement or the subject matter hereof may not be enforced in or by such court;

(c) waives, and agrees not to seek any review by a court in another jurisdiction that may be called upon to enforce the judgment of any of the above-referenced courts; and

(d) consents to service of process by registered or certified United States mail, postage-prepaid, return receipt requested, or an equivalent governmental mail service, at the address set forth in the Notices provision of this Agreement.

Each Party agrees that such Party’s submission to jurisdiction and consent to service of process by United States registered or certified mail, or an equivalent governmental mail service, is for the express benefit of the other Party. Final judgment against either Party in any action, suit or proceeding may be enforced in other jurisdictions by suit, action or proceeding on the judgment, or in any other manner provided by or pursuant to the laws of such other jurisdiction.

19. Section 409A .

(a) Section 409A . This Agreement shall be construed to be in compliance with or exempt from Section 409A. For purposes of this Agreement, the term “separation from service” has the meaning set forth in Section 409A.

(b) Six Month Wait . Notwithstanding anything else to the contrary in this Agreement, if ( i ) the Executive is entitled to receive payments or benefits under this Agreement by reason of his separation from service other than as a result of his death, ( ii ) the Executive is a “specified employee” (within the meaning of Section 409A) of a company, the stock of which is publicly traded, for the period in which the payment or benefits would otherwise commence, and ( iii ) such payment or benefit would otherwise

 

15


subject the Executive to any tax, interest or penalty imposed under Section 409A (or any regulation promulgated thereunder) if the payment or benefit would commence within six months of a termination of the Executive’s employment with the Company, then such payment or benefit required under this Agreement shall not commence until the day immediately following the six-month anniversary of the termination of the Executive’s employment.

20. Notices . All notices, requests, demands and other communications provided for in this Agreement shall be sufficient if in writing and delivered in person or sent by a nationally recognized overnight courier service or by registered or certified United States mail, as appropriate, postage-prepaid, return receipt requested, or an equivalent governmental mail service, to the following addresses, or such other addresses as the Parties may furnish in accordance with this Section 20:

If to the Company:

Fidelity & Guarantee Life Business Services, Inc.

1001 Fleet Street

Baltimore, Maryland

Attn: General Counsel

With a simultaneous copy to:

Nicholas Potter, Esq.

Debevoise & Plimpton LLP

919 Third Avenue New York,

New York 10022

Fax No.: 212-521-7459

If to the Executive:

Leland C. Launer, Jr.

9 Green Way

New Providence, NJ 07974;

Notice pursuant to this Section 20 shall be effective on the date of delivery in person or by courier, or three (3) days after the date mailed.

21. Severability . In the event that any of the provisions of this Agreement, or the application of any such provisions to the Executive or the Company with respect to obligations hereunder, is held to be unlawful or unenforceable by any court or arbitrator, the remaining portions of this Agreement will remain in full force and effect and will not be invalidated or impaired in any manner.

 

16


22. Waiver . No waiver by any party hereto of the breach of any term or covenant contained in this Agreement, whether by conduct or otherwise, in any one or more instances, shall be deemed to be, or construed as, a further or continuing waiver of any such breach, or a waiver of any other term or covenant contained in this Agreement.

23. Entire Agreement . This Agreement contains the entire agreement between the Executive and the Company with respect to the subject matter of this Agreement, and supersedes any and all prior agreements and understandings, oral or written, between the Executive and the Company with respect to the subject matter of this Agreement.

24. Amendments . This Agreement may be amended only by an agreement in writing signed by the Executive and an authorized representative of the Company (other than the Executive).

25. Successors and Assigns . Because the Executive’s obligations under this Agreement are personal in nature, the Executive’s obligations may only be performed by the Executive and may not be assigned by him. This Agreement is binding upon the Executive’s successors, heirs, executors, administrators and other legal representatives, and shall inure to the benefit of the Company and its subsidiaries, successors and assigns. The Company may assign its rights and obligations under this Agreement without prior written approval of Executive upon the transfer of all or substantially all of the business and/or assets of the Company (by whatever means).

26. Consultation with Counsel . The Executive acknowledges that he has had a full and complete opportunity to consult with counsel of his own choosing concerning the terms, enforceability and implications of this Agreement.

27. Attorneys’ Fees . Subject to appropriate documentation of fees and services, the Company agrees to reimburse the Executive for reasonable attorneys’ fees incurred for the review and negotiation of this Agreement, up to a maximum amount of $10,000, but reduced to reflect any applicable tax withholdings required at law.

28. No Other Representations . The Executive acknowledges that the Company has made no representations or warranties to the Executive concerning the terms, enforceability or implications of this Agreement other than as reflected in this Agreement.

29. Headings . The titles and headings of sections and subsections contained in this Agreement are included solely for convenience of reference and shall not control the meaning or interpretation of any of the provisions of this Agreement.

30. Counterparts . This Agreement may be executed in any number of counterparts, each of which so executed shall be deemed to be an original, and such counterparts shall together constitute but one agreement.

 

17


31. Governing Law . This Agreement shall be governed by, and construed in accordance with, the laws of the State of New York, without giving effect to its conflict of laws principles.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have executed this Agreement as of the date first written above.

 

FIDELITY & GUARANTEE LIFE

BUSINESS SERVICES, INC.

By:   /s/Frie Marhoun
Name: Frie Marhoun
Title: Secretary

 

EXECUTIVE
/s/Leland C. Launer, Jr.
Leland C. Launer, Jr.

 

18

Exhibit 10.12

AMENDMENT TO EMPLOYMENT AGREEMENT

This amendment to Employment Agreement dated as of November 1, 2012 is made by and between FIDELITY & GUARANTY LIFE BUSINESS SERVICES, INC. (the “ Company ”) and LELAND C. LAUNER, JR. (“ Executive ”).

W I T N E S S T H

WHEREAS, the Company and the Executive entered into an employment agreement, dated as of June 27, 2011, (the “ Employment Agreement ”) and

WHEREAS, the Company and the Executive desire to amend the Employment Agreement to provide that in lieu of exclusively the options as described in Section 6(d) thereof, the Executive may also receive restricted shares of common stock of Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc. so long as the grant date is not later than December 31, 2012;

NOW, THEREFORE, effective as of November 1, 2012, the Employment Agreement is amended as follows:

1. The second sentence of Section 6(d) is amended and restated as follows:

“On or before December 31, 2012, the Executive will be granted additional equity in Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc. which may be in the form of restricted shares of common stock of Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc. (the “ Restricted Stock ”) or Options with a grant date fair market value of $700,000, which in the case of Options shall vest and become exercisable in equal annual installments on the first three anniversaries of the date granted and shall have an exercise price per share equal to the fair market value of a share of common stock of Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc. on the grant date.”


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have executed this Agreement as of the date first written above.

 

FIDELITY & GUARANTY LIFE

BUSINESS SERVICES, INC.

By:   /s/ Rose Boehm
  Name: Rose Boehm
  Title: SUP HR

 

EXECUTIVE
/s/ Leland C. Launer, Jr.
Leland C. Launer, Jr.

 

2

Exhibit 10.13

EMPLOYMENT AGREEMENT

This Amended and Restated Employment Agreement (the “ Agreement ”), dated as of March 21, 2013, is made by and between FIDELITY & GUARANTY LIFE BUSINESS SERVICES, INC. (the “ Company ”) and LELAND C. LAUNER, JR. (the “ Executive ”), hereinafter also referred to individually as “Party” and together as “Parties.”

W I T N E S S E T H :

WHEREAS, the Executive and the Company entered into an employment agreement dated as of 6/27 , 2011 (the “ Original Agreement ”);

WHEREAS, the Executive and the Company have mutually agreed to amend and restate the Original Agreement as set forth herein.

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the promises, and of the mutual covenants and agreements hereinafter contained, the Company and the Executive agree as follows:

1. Term . The Executive’s employment under this Agreement will commence on May 1, 2013 (the “ Effective Date ”). Unless earlier terminated pursuant to Section 7 below, the Executive’s employment pursuant to this Agreement shall be for a period from the Effective Date through April 30, 2014 (the “ Initial Term ”). Effective upon the expiration of the Initial Term and of each Additional Term (as defined below), Executive’s employment hereunder shall be deemed to be automatically extended, upon the same terms and conditions, for an additional period of one year (each, an “ Additional Term ”) unless either Party gives written notice to the other Party at least thirty (30) days but not more than ninety (90) days prior to the expiration of the Initial Term or such Additional Term, as the case may be, of the Party’s election not to extend the Initial Term or Additional Term. The period during which Executive is employed pursuant to this Agreement, including any extension thereof in accordance with the preceding sentence, shall be referred to as the “ Term ”.

2. Title . During the Term, the Executive shall serve as the President and Chief Executive Officer of the Company.

3. Reporting . During the Term, the Executive shall report to the board of directors of Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc. (the “ Holdings Board ”).

4. Duties . During the Term, the Executive shall be responsible for such duties and have such authority and responsibilities as are consistent with his position that may be assigned to him from time to time by the Holdings Board. The Executive agrees to devote his full time, attention, skill, and energy to the duties set forth herein and to the


business of the Company, and to use his best efforts to promote the success of the Company’s business. During the Term, at the request of the Holdings Board, the Executive may also serve as an officer or director of and shall perform certain services for subsidiaries and affiliates of the Company.

During the Term, the Executive shall devote substantially all of his business time and attention and his best efforts to the performance of his duties and responsibilities under this Agreement and shall not engage in any other business activity, except as may be approved by the Holdings Board; provided that nothing in this Agreement shall prohibit the Executive from ( i ) engaging in religious, charitable or other community or non-profit activities that do not impair the Executive’s ability to fulfill the Executive’s duties and responsibilities under this Agreement; ( ii ) investing the Executive’s personal assets in any business that does not compete with the Company, where the Executive is not obligated or required to, and shall not in fact, devote any substantial managerial efforts or ( iii ) holding directorships in other companies after obtaining the consent of the Holdings Board; provided further that none of the activities permitted in clauses (i) through (iii) individually or in the aggregate interfere with the performance of the Executive’s duties under this Agreement.

5. Location . During the Term, the Executive shall be based in the Company’s office in Baltimore, Maryland; provided that, subject to the Executive fulfilling all required business needs, the Executive may work two weeks per month from an office in his home. However, the Executive acknowledges that in order to effectively perform his duties, he may be required to travel to such other places by such means and on such occasions as the Company may require.

6. Compensation and Benefits.

(a) Base Salary . During the Term, the Executive shall receive an annual base salary of US $700,000. The Executive’s base salary shall be payable in accordance with the Company’s normal payroll practices. Such base salary shall be subject to periodic review, and may be increased at the sole discretion of the Holdings Board. The annual base salary payable to Executive under this Section 6, as the same may be increased from time to time, shall hereinafter be referred to as the “ Base Salary .”

(b) Bonus . During the Term, the Executive shall be eligible to receive an annual bonus in accordance with the terms of the Company’s annual bonus program, as such program may be amended, suspended or terminated from time to time, subject to and based on the attainment by Executive and/or the Company of applicable performance targets to be set by management of Harbinger Group Inc. within 45 days of the date hereof. The Executive shall be eligible for an annual target bonus opportunity during the Initial Term in an amount equal to 100% of his Base Salary. Actual bonus payout may be more or less than target, based on Company and individual performance during the

 

2


performance-measurement period. In order to receive any such bonus, except as otherwise provided in Section 8 hereof, the Executive must be actively employed by the Company on the date on which such bonus is scheduled to be paid to the Executive. Payment of the annual bonus, if any, shall be made no later than 2  1 2 months after the end of the relevant fiscal year.

(c) Equity . Stock options granted and restricted stock awarded before the Effective Date shall be governed by the terms of the Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc. Stock Incentive Plan, as may be amended from time to time (the (“ Plan ”), the Employee Stock Option Agreements between the Executive and Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc. (“ FGLH ”) dated as of December 31, 2011 and December 31, 2012, and the Restricted Stock Agreement between the Executive and FGLH dated as of December 31, 2012 (collectively, the “ Equity Award Agreements ”), provided, however, that amendments to the Equity Award Agreements (to the effect that the third tranche of the options granted on November 2, 2011, equal to one-third of such options, the second tranche of the options granted on December 31, 2012, equal to one-third of such options, and the second tranche of the restricted stock granted on December 31, 2012, equal to one-third of such restricted stock award, which are currently scheduled to vest, respectively on November 2, 2014 and December 31, 2014, shall vest on (x) April 30, 2014, if the Executive remains employed by the Company through April 30, 2014, or (y) the Executive’s last day of employment, if the Executive’s employment is terminated by the Company for a reason other than death, Cause or Disability (as those capitalized terms are defined below), or the Executive resigns for Good Reason (as defined below), before April 30, 2014) will be executed concurrently with the execution of this Agreement. For each Additional Term in which the Executive is employed by the Company as of the first day of such Additional Term, the Executive will be granted by December 31 of such Additional Term a set of stock options (“ Options ”) and/or restricted stock (“ Restricted Stock ”) with a grant date fair market value of $700,000, which shall vest and become exercisable in equal annual installments on the first three anniversaries of the date granted, and which Options shall have an exercise price per share equal to the fair market value of a share of common stock of FGLH on the grant date. The terms and conditions of Options and Restricted Stock granted in any Additional Term shall be set forth in a stock option agreement and/or restricted stock agreement to be entered into between the Executive and FGLH at the time such Options are granted and/or Restricted Stock is awarded, and shall include, but not be limited to, the following: ( i ) the Options and Restricted Stock shall be subject to the terms and provisions of the Plan, ( ii ) the Options shall have an expiration date that is seven (7) years from the date of grant (subject to early termination upon certain types of termination of employment or cancellation of the awards in a change in control), ( iii ) the vesting of the Options shall accelerate upon a change in control if the Options are not honored or assumed, or new rights substituted therefor following the change in control, and ( iv ) the Options and unvested Restricted Stock shall be forfeited upon termination of employment by the Company for Cause.

 

3


(d) Vacation . During the Term, the Executive shall be entitled to 4 weeks of paid vacation annually, exclusive of United States legal holidays, during a calendar year and during each full year of employment, provided that the scheduling of the Executive’s vacation does not interfere with the Company’s normal business operations. Unused vacation days may not be carried over from one calendar year to the next, and shall be forfeited at the close of each calendar year.

(e) Benefits . During the Term, and provided that the Executive satisfies, and continues to satisfy, any individual plan eligibility requirements, the Executive shall be eligible to participate in, and receive benefits under, benefit programs maintained by the Company for its senior executives on terms and conditions set forth in such plans (as amended from time to time).

(f) Reimbursement of Business Expenses . The Company shall reimburse the Executive for all reasonable and properly documented expenses incurred or paid by him in connection with the performance of his duties hereunder, including without limitation the cost of business class fares for business travel, and travel expenses incurred for business travel that begins or ends at the Executive’s home (including travel and Baltimore hotel expenses for travel from Tampa to Baltimore); provided that the Executive submits a request for such expense reimbursement together with such supporting documentation as the Company may require within thirty (30) days after such expenses are incurred and the Company shall reimburse all properly documented expenses no later than thirty (30) days after submission of such request for reimbursement and in any event no later than March 15 th of the calendar year following the year in which such expenses were incurred. The amount of expenses eligible for reimbursement during any tax year of the Executive shall not affect the expenses eligible for reimbursement in any other tax year. The right to reimbursement provided in this Agreement is not subject to liquidation or exchange for another benefit.

(g) Withholdings . All payments made under this Agreement shall be subject to any and all Federal, state and local taxes and other withholdings to the extent required by applicable law. The Company shall have the power to withhold, or require Executive to remit to the Company promptly upon notification of the amount due, an amount sufficient to satisfy the statutory minimum amount of all Federal, state, local and foreign withholding tax requirements with respect to any payment of cash, or issuance or delivery of any other property hereunder to Executive or any third party, and the Company may defer any such payment of cash or issuance or delivery of such other property until such requirements are satisfied.

(h) Rules and Procedures . The Executive shall be provided with details of the Company’s rules and procedures. These rules and procedures (as amended from time to time) shall form part of the Executive’s contract of employment. To the extent that such rules and procedures conflict with the terms of this Agreement, the latter shall govern the terms of Executive’s employment.

 

4


7. Separation from Service .

(a) Due to Death . The Executive’s employment with the Company shall automatically terminate immediately upon his death.

(b) Due to Disability . If the Executive incurs a “Disability” (as defined below) during the Term, then the Holdings Board, in its sole discretion, shall be entitled to terminate the Executive’s employment upon written notice to the Executive. For purposes of this Agreement, “ Disability ” means that the Executive, as a result of illness or incapacity, is unable to perform substantially his required duties for a period of four (4) consecutive months or for any aggregate period of six (6) months in any twelve (12) month period. A termination of the Executive’s employment by the Company for Disability shall be communicated to the Executive by written notice and shall be effective on the tenth (10th) business day after receipt of such notice by the Executive, unless the Executive returns to full-time performance of his duties before such tenth (10th) business day.

(c) By the Company . During the Term, the Company shall be entitled to terminate the Executive’s employment with or without “Cause” by providing written notice to the Executive, provided that if the Company terminates the Executive’s employment without Cause (and not as a result of a Disability), then the Company must provide at least two (2) weeks of advance written notice of such decision to the Executive. No advance notice period is required for a termination by the Company for Cause. The Company reserves the right to withdraw any and all duties and responsibilities from the Executive, and to exclude the Executive from the Company’s premises, during such two-week notice period. For purposes of this Agreement, the Executive shall be deemed terminated for “ Cause ” if the Company terminates the Executive’s employment in writing after the Executive ( i ) shall have been convicted, indicted for, or entered a plea of nolo contendere to, any felony or any other act involving fraud, theft, misappropriation, dishonesty, or embezzlement, ( ii ) shall have committed intentional and willful acts of misconduct that materially impair the goodwill or business of the Company or cause material damage to its or their property, goodwill, or business or ( iii ) shall have willfully refused to, or willfully failed to, perform in any material respect his duties hereunder, provided, however, that no such termination for Cause under this Section 7(c) shall be effective unless the Executive does not cure such refusal or failure to the Company’s reasonable satisfaction as soon as practicable after the Company gives the Executive written notice identifying such refusal or failure (and, in any event, within ten (10) calendar days after receipt of such written notice). For purposes of determining Cause, no act or failure to act by the Executive shall be considered “willful” unless it is done or omitted to be done by the Executive in bad faith and without

 

5


reasonable belief that his action or omission was in the best interests of the Company. Any act, or failure to act, based upon authority given pursuant to a resolution duly adopted by the Holdings Board or based upon the written advice of counsel for the Company, shall be presumed to be done by the Executive in good faith and in the best interests of the Company. Any voluntary termination by the Executive in anticipation of a termination for Cause under this Section 7(c) shall be deemed a termination for Cause.

(d) By the Executive . (i) During the Term, the Executive shall be entitled to terminate his employment with the Company with or without Good Reason by providing the Company with at least sixty (60) days of advance written notice of such decision. Upon the receipt of such written notice by the Company, the Company may accelerate the sixty-day notice period in order to make such termination effective prior to the expiration of the notice period. The Company shall only be required to compensate the Executive through the effective date of his separation from service, except as otherwise provided in Section 8. The Company reserves the right to withdraw any and all duties and responsibilities from the Executive, and to exclude the Executive from the Company’s premises, during such sixty-day notice period.

(ii) The Executive shall have “Good Reason” to terminate his employment with the Company upon the occurrence of one or more of the following events without either ( x ) the Executive’s express prior written consent or ( y ) full cure within 30 days after the Executive gives written notice to the Company requesting cure, such notice to be given by the Executive no later than 60 days after the date he first learns that the event has occurred; provided that the Executive terminates his employment no later than four (4) months following the date the Executive learns of the event constituting Good Reason: (A) any material diminution in the Executive’s title, responsibilities or authorities, ( B ) the assignment to the Executive of duties that are materially inconsistent with his duties as President and Chief Executive Officer of the Company; ( C ) any change in the reporting structure so that the Executive reports to any person or entity other than the Holdings Board; ( D ) a breach by the Company of any material terms of this Agreement; or ( E ) any failure of the Company to obtain the assumption (in writing or by operation of law) of its obligations under this Agreement by any successor to all or substantially all of its business or assets upon consummation of any merger, consolidation, sale, liquidation, dissolution or similar transaction.

8. Compensation Upon Separation from Service .

(a) By Reason of Death or Disability . If the Executive incurs a separation from service with the Company by reason of his death or Disability pursuant to Section 7(a) or 7(b) above, then the Company shall pay to the Executive (or his estate, as appropriate) ( i ) his then current Base Salary through the termination date, ( ii ) any accrued but unused vacation days as of the termination date, and ( iii ) any earned and unpaid bonuses for any previously completed bonus years (clauses (i) through (iii) collectively,

 

6


the “ Accrued Obligations ”), within thirty (30) days after the date of separation from service. In addition, subject to Section 8(f) below, if the Executive incurs a separation from service with the Company by reason of his death or Disability pursuant to Section 7(a) or 7(b) above, then the Company shall pay to the Executive (or his estate, as appropriate) by the March 15 th following the year in which such separation of service occurs an amount equal to a pro rata share of the Executive’s bonus for the year in which such separation from service occurs (but not including the requirement to be employed on the payment date) in an amount equal to the Executive’s bonus multiplied by the number of days the Executive was employed by the Company in such bonus year divided by 365 (the “ Pro Rata Bonus ”). Thereafter, the Company shall have no further obligations to the Executive.

(b) By the Company for Cause . If the Executive incurs a separation from service as a result of termination of employment by the Company for Cause pursuant to Section 7(c) above, then the Company shall pay to the Executive the Accrued Obligations within thirty (30) days after the date of the Executive’s separation from service due to Cause. Thereafter, the Company shall have no further obligations to the Executive.

(c) By the Company without Cause or by the Executive for Good Reason . Subject to Sections 8(f) and 19(b), if the Executive incurs a separation from service as a result of termination of employment by the Company without Cause (and not as a result of death or a Disability) pursuant to Section 7(c) above or by the Executive for Good Reason pursuant to Section 7(d)(ii) above, then the Company shall pay or provide to the Executive:

(i) the Accrued Obligations, within thirty (30) days after the date of such separation from service;

(ii) the Pro Rata Bonus by the March 15 th of the year following the year in which the separation from service occurs; and

(iii) continued payment of Base Salary through the remainder of the Term, or, if longer, for six (6) months following such separation from service. In addition, the Company may, at its option and in its sole discretion, elect on or before the thirtieth (30 th ) day following such separation from service to pay to the Executive continued Base Salary for an additional period not to exceed two hundred seventy (270) days beyond the expiration of the expiring Term, provided that the Executive agrees to comply with the requirements of Section 13 for the duration of such extended period and each of the Executive’s other obligations under this Agreement, including without limitation the requirements of Section 8(f) below. All amounts owing under this clause (c)(iii) shall be payable in accordance with normal payroll practices.

 

7


Any amounts payable to the Executive pursuant to any stock option agreement entered into between the Executive and Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc. shall be payable by Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc. as provided in such stock option agreement. Other than as set forth in this subsection, the Company shall have no further obligations to the Executive.

(d) By the Executive without Good Reason . If the Executive incurs a separation from service with the Company as a result of termination of employment by the Executive without Good Reason pursuant to Section 7(d)(i) above, then the Company shall pay to the Executive the Accrued Obligations within thirty (30) days of his separation from service. Thereafter, the Company shall have no further obligations to the Executive.

(e) Non-Renewal of the Term by the Company . If the Executive incurs a separation of service in the event that the Company elects not to renew the Term pursuant to Section 1 above, the Company ( 1 ) shall pay to the Executive continued Base Salary for a period of three (3) months from the date the Company notifies the Executive of any such election (such continued Base Salary shall be provided concurrently with and shall not duplicate any Base Salary otherwise payable through the remainder of the Term), and ( 2 ) may, at its option and in its sole discretion, elect on or before the thirtieth (30 th ) day following delivery of such notice of non-renewal to pay to the Executive continued Base Salary for an additional period not to exceed two hundred seventy (270) days beyond the expiration of the expiring Term, provided that the Executive agrees to comply with the requirements of Section 13 for the duration of such extended period and each of the Executive’s other obligations under this Agreement, including without limitation the requirements of Section 8(f) below.

(f) General Release and Other Requirements . Notwithstanding any other provision of this Agreement to the contrary, as a condition to receiving any payments other than the Accrued Obligations that may be made pursuant to this Section 8, the Executive (or the executor or administrator of his estate in the event of Executive’s death) must execute and not revoke a general release agreement in a form provided by the Company within thirty (30) days of the Executive’s separation from service with the Company and must comply with the Executive’s obligations under this Agreement. Notwithstanding anything else in this Section 8, except as otherwise required by Section 19(b) of this Agreement and subject to the Executive’s execution of a release agreement in accordance with this Section 8(f), payment of any amounts pursuant to this Section 8 (other than the Accrued Obligations) that would otherwise be paid in the first thirty (30) days following the Executive’s separation from service shall be paid on the 31st day following such separation from service.

 

8


(g) Termination in Connection with a Change in Control . Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Agreement, to the extent that any of the payments and benefits provided for under this Agreement or any other agreement or arrangement between the Company and Executive (collectively, the “ Payments ”) ( i ) constitute a “parachute payment” within the meaning of Section 280G of the Code and ( ii ) but for this Section 8(g), Executive would be subject to the excise tax imposed by Section 4999 of the Code (the “ Excise Tax ”), then ( 1 ) the Payments shall be reduced to the amount that would result in no portion of the Payments being subject to the Excise Tax and the Executive shall have no further rights or claims with respect thereto and ( 2 ) if any portion of the Payments that would be reduced pursuant to clause (1) would not be so reduced if the stockholder approval requirements of Section 280G(b)(5) of the Code are satisfied, then the Company shall use commercially reasonable efforts to cause such portion of the Payments to be submitted for such approval prior to the event giving rise to such Payments.

9. Confidential Information .

(a) Non-Use and Non-Disclosure of Confidential Information . The Executive acknowledges that during the course of his employment with the Company, he will have access to information about the Company, and its clients and suppliers that is confidential and/or proprietary in nature, and that belongs to the Company. As such, at all times, both during the Term and thereafter, the Executive shall hold in the strictest confidence, and not use or attempt to use except for the benefit of the Company, and not disclose to any other person or entity (without the prior written authorization of the Company) any “Confidential Information” (as defined below). Notwithstanding anything contained in this Section 9, the Executive shall be permitted to disclose any Confidential Information to the extent required by validly issued legal process or court order, provided that the Executive notifies the Company immediately of any such legal process or court order in an effort to allow the Company to challenge such legal process or court order, if the Company so elects, prior to the Executive’s disclosure of any Confidential Information.

(b) Definition of Confidential Information . For purposes of this Agreement, “ Confidential Information ” means all data or information regarding the Company not generally known outside of the Company whether prepared or developed by or for the Company or received by the Company from any outside source, including without limitation any trade secrets and Inventions (as defined below); customer files, sales reports, customer lists, sales invoices, any business marketing, financial or sales records, formulae, methods of operation, software and related manuals, data, plan or survey, management organization information (including but not limited to data and other information relating to members of the Board, the Company or any of its affiliates or to the management of the Company or any of its affiliates) and any other record or information relating to the present or future business or products of the Company. All Confidential Information and copies thereof are the sole property of the Company. “Confidential Information” does not include information that the Executive has received lawfully prior to becoming employed with the Company, information that the Company has voluntarily disclosed to the public without restriction, or information that has otherwise lawfully entered the public domain.

 

9


10. Return of Company Property . Upon the termination of the Executive’s employment with the Company (whether upon the expiration of the Term or thereafter), or at any time during such employment upon request by the Company, the Executive shall promptly deliver to the Company and not keep in his possession, recreate or deliver to any other person or entity, any and all property and all documents and data of any nature and in whatever medium that belongs to the Company, or that belongs to any other third party and is in the Executive’s possession as a result of his employment with the Company, including without limitation, computer hardware and software, palm pilots, pagers, cell phones, other electronic equipment, records, data, client lists and information, supplier lists and information, notes, reports, correspondence, financial information, account information, product information, files and other documents and information, including any and all copies of the foregoing.

11. Intellectual Property .

(a) Prior Inventions . Except as disclosed to the Company in writing, contemporaneous with the Executive’s execution of this Agreement (which writing describes with particularity all inventions, original works of authorship, developments, improvements and trade secrets which were made by the Executive prior to the commencement of his employment with the Company, which belong solely to the Executive or belong to the Executive jointly with others (collectively referred to as “ Prior Inventions ”), which relate in any way to any of the Company’s proposed businesses, products, services or research and development, and which are not assigned to the Company herein), the Executive represents that there are no Prior Inventions. If in the course of the Executive’s employment with the Company (whether during the Term or otherwise), he incorporates into any Company product, process, service or machine, a Prior Invention owned by the Executive or in which he has an interest, then the Company is hereby granted and shall have a non-exclusive, royalty-free, irrevocable, perpetual, worldwide license (with the right to sublicense) to make, have made, copy, modify, make derivative works of, use, sell and otherwise distribute such Prior Invention as part of or in connection with such product, process, service or machine

(b) Assignment of Inventions . The Executive shall promptly make full written disclosure to the Company, shall hold in trust for the sole right and benefit of the Company and hereby assigns to the Company or its designee, all his right, title and interest throughout the world in and to any and all inventions, original works of authorship, developments, concepts, know-how, improvements or trade secrets, whether or not patentable or registerable under copyright or similar laws, which he may solely or jointly conceive or develop or reduce to practice, or cause to be developed or reduced to practice, during his employment with the Company (whether during the Term or

 

10


otherwise) that ( i ) relate at the time of conception, development or reduction to practice to the actual or demonstrably proposed business or research and development activities of the Company, ( ii ) result from or relate to any work performed for the Company, whether or not during normal business hours or ( iii ) are developed through the use of Confidential Information (collectively referred to as “ Inventions ”). The Executive further acknowledges that all Inventions that are made by him (solely or jointly with others) within the scope of and during the period of his employment with the Company (whether during the Term or otherwise) are “works made for hire” (to the greatest extent permitted by applicable law) and are compensated by his salary, unless regulated otherwise by applicable law.

(c) Maintenance of Invention Records . The Executive shall keep and maintain adequate and current written records of all Inventions made by him (solely or jointly with others) during his employment with the Company (whether during the Term or otherwise). The records may be in the form of notes, sketches, drawings, flow charts, electronic data or recordings, laboratory notebooks or any similar format. The records shall be available to and remain the sole property of the Company at all times. The Executive shall not remove such records from the Company’s business premises except as expressly permitted by Company policy which may, from time to time, be revised at the sole discretion of the Company.

(d) Further Assistance . The Executive shall assist the Company or its designee, at the Company’s expense, in every way to secure the Company’s rights in any Inventions and any copyrights, patents, trademarks, trade secrets, moral rights or other intellectual property rights relating thereto in any and all countries, including without limitation, the disclosure to the Company of all pertinent information and data with respect thereto, the execution of all applications, specifications, oaths, assignments, records and all other instruments which the Company shall deem necessary in order to apply for, obtain, maintain and transfer such rights and in order to assign and convey to the Company, its successors, assigns and nominees the sole and exclusive rights, title and interest in and to such Inventions, and any copyrights, patents, trademarks, trade secrets, moral rights or other intellectual property rights relating thereto. The Executive acknowledges that his obligation to execute, or cause to be executed, when it is in his power to do so, any such instrument or papers shall continue after the termination of his employment with the Company until the expiration of the last such intellectual property right in any country. If the Company is unable, because of the Executive’s mental or physical incapacity or unavailability for any other reason, to secure his signature to apply for or to pursue any application for any patents or copyright registrations covering Inventions assigned to the Company above, then the Executive hereby irrevocably designates and appoints the Company and its duly authorized officers and agents as his agent and attorney in fact, to act for and in his behalf and stead to execute and file any such applications and to do all other lawfully permitted acts to further the application for, prosecution, issuance, maintenance or transfer of letters patent or copyright registrations

 

11


thereon with the same legal force and effect as if originally executed by the Executive. The Executive hereby waives and irrevocably quitclaims to the Company any and all claims, of any nature whatsoever, which he now or hereafter has for infringement of any and all Inventions assigned to the Company.

12. Conditions to Employment and No Prior Restrictions .

(a) Conditions to Employment . It is a condition precedent for employment under this Agreement that the Executive is not acting in breach of contract as regards any previous employer, including without limitation pursuant to any non-competition, non-solicitation or other similar covenant or agreement, by entering into employment pursuant to this Agreement.

(b) No Prior Restrictions . The Executive represents and warrants that his employment with the Company and the execution of this Agreement shall not violate, or cause him to be in breach of, any obligation or covenant made to any current or former employer or other third party, including without limitation pursuant to any non-competition, non-solicitation or other similar covenant or agreement, and that during the course of his employment with the Company (whether during the Term or otherwise), he shall not take any action that would violate or breach any legal obligation which he may have to any current or former employer or other third party. To the knowledge of the Executive, his current or former employer has not alleged or claimed any such violation or breach or taken or threatened any action to prohibit the Executive from becoming employed by the Company.

13. Non-Competition and Non-Solicitation . The Executive agrees that during his employment by the Company and (except as otherwise provided in Section 8(e)) for six months thereafter, he shall not, directly or indirectly, engage or be interested in (as owner, partner, stockholder, employee, director, officer, agent, fiduciary, consultant or otherwise), with or without compensation, any business engaged in the insurance or reinsurance business in the United States, Bermuda or any other geographic area in which the Company operates at any time during the 6-month or other applicable period prior to the termination of such employment or reasonably expects to operate as of the date of the termination of such employment. The Executive also agrees that for one year after his termination of employment, he shall not, directly or indirectly, solicit the employment or retention of (or attempt, directly or indirectly, to solicit the employment or retention of or participate in or arrange the solicitation of the employment or retention of) any senior employee or consultant who is to his knowledge then employed or retained by the Company, or by any of its subsidiaries or affiliates with whom the Executive has had material personal dealings at any time during the 6-month or other applicable period prior to the date of such termination. Notwithstanding the foregoing, nothing in this Section 13 shall prohibit the Executive from ( i ) performing services, with or without compensation, for, or engaging or being interested in, any business or entity that does not directly relate

 

12


to business activities that compete directly and materially with a material business of the Company or its subsidiaries or ( ii ) acquiring or holding not more than five percent of any class of publicly-traded securities of any business. The Executive agrees that the restrictions set out in this Section 13 are reasonable and necessary to protect the legitimate business interests of the Company both during and after the termination of employment.

14. Non-Disparagement . Both during and after the Executive’s employment with the Company, the Executive shall not disparage, portray in a negative light or take any action that would be harmful to, or lead to unfavorable publicity for, the Company, Harbinger or any of their respective current or former clients, suppliers, officers, directors, employees, agents, consultants, contractors, owners, parents, subsidiaries or divisions, whether in public or private, including without limitation, in any and all interviews, oral statements, written materials, electronically displayed materials and materials or information displayed on Internet-related sites.

15. Confidentiality . The Executive agrees to keep the terms and conditions of this Agreement strictly confidential and shall not reveal either the financial terms or any other term of this Agreement to any other person or entity, provided that the Executive shall be able to disclose the terms and conditions of this Agreement to his immediate family, and legal and tax advisors after securing their similar commitment of confidentiality. It is understood that this confidentiality provision takes effect immediately and shall remain in effect after the termination of the Executive’s employment.

16. Equitable Relief . The Executive acknowledges that the remedy at law for his breach of Sections 9, 10, 11, 13, 14 and 15 above will be inadequate, and that the damages flowing from such breach will not be readily susceptible to being measured in monetary terms. Accordingly, upon a violation of any part of such sections, the Company shall be entitled to immediate injunctive relief (or other equitable relief) and may obtain a temporary order restraining any further violation. No bond or other security shall be required in obtaining such equitable relief, and the Executive hereby consents to the issuance of such equitable relief. As such, to the extent there is no adequate remedy at law, and equitable relief only is sought, the parties hereto select state court in New York City as the exclusive forum to resolve their disputes, and both parties submit to personal jurisdiction. Nothing in this Section 16 shall be deemed to limit the Company’s remedies at law or in equity for any breach by the Executive of any of the parts of Sections 9, 10, 11, 13, 14 and 15 which may be pursued or availed of by the Company.

17. Judicial Modification . The Executive acknowledges that it is the intent of the parties hereto that the restrictions contained or referenced in Sections 9, 11, 13, 14 and 15 above be enforced to the fullest extent permissible under the laws of each jurisdiction in which enforcement is sought. If any of the restrictions contained or

 

13


referenced in such sections is for any reason held by an arbitrator or court to be excessively broad as to duration, activity, geographical scope or subject, then such restriction shall be construed or judicially modified so as to thereafter be limited or reduced to the extent required to be enforceable in accordance with applicable law.

18. Arbitration . Any dispute or controversy between the parties hereto, whether during the Term or otherwise, including without limitation, any and all matters relating to this Agreement, the Executive’s employment with the Company and the cessation thereof, and all matters arising under any federal, state or local statute, rule or regulation, or principle of contract law or common law, including but not limited to any and all medical leave statutes, wage-payment statutes, employment discrimination statutes and any other equivalent federal, state or local statute, shall be settled by arbitration administered by the American Arbitration Association (“ AAA ”) in New York City pursuant to the AAA’s National Rules for the Resolution of Employment Disputes (or their equivalent), which arbitration shall be confidential, final and binding to the fullest extent permitted by law. Each Party hereto shall be responsible for paying its own attorneys’ fees and costs incurred under this Section 18.

Each party hereby agrees to and does take the following action:

(a) irrevocably submits to the jurisdiction of Maryland for the purpose of enforcing the award or decision in any such proceeding;

(b) waives, and agrees not to assert, by way of motion, as a defense or otherwise, in any such suit, action or proceeding, any claim that ( i ) the Party is not subject personally to the jurisdiction of the above-named courts, ( ii ) the Party’s property is exempt or immune from attachment or execution, ( iii ) the suit, action or proceeding is brought in an inconvenient forum, ( iv ) the venue of the suit, action or proceeding is improper or ( v ) this Employment Agreement or the subject matter hereof may not be enforced in or by such court;

(c) waives, and agrees not to seek any review by a court in another jurisdiction that may be called upon to enforce the judgment of any of the above-referenced courts; and

(d) consents to service of process by registered or certified United States mail, postage-prepaid, return receipt requested, or an equivalent governmental mail service, at the address set forth in the Notices provision of this Agreement.

(e) Each Party agrees that such Party’s submission to jurisdiction and consent to service of process by United States registered or certified mail, or an equivalent governmental mail service, is for the express benefit of the other Party. Final judgment against either Party in any action, suit or proceeding may be enforced in other jurisdictions by suit, action or proceeding on the judgment, or in any other manner provided by or pursuant to the laws of such other jurisdiction.

 

14


19. Section 409A .

(a) Section 409A . This Agreement shall be construed to be in compliance with or exempt from Section 409A. For purposes of this Agreement, the term “separation from service” has the meaning set forth in Section 409A.

(b) Six Month Wait . Notwithstanding anything else to the contrary in this Agreement, if ( i ) the Executive is entitled to receive payments or benefits under this Agreement by reason of his separation from service other than as a result of his death, ( ii ) the Executive is a “specified employee” (within the meaning of Section 409A) of a company, the stock of which is publicly traded, for the period in which the payment or benefits would otherwise commence, and ( iii ) such payment or benefit would otherwise subject the Executive to any tax, interest or penalty imposed under Section 409A (or any regulation promulgated thereunder) if the payment or benefit would commence within six months of a termination of the Executive’s employment with the Company, then such payment or benefit required under this Agreement shall not commence until the day immediately following the six-month anniversary of the termination of the Executive’s employment.

20. Notices . All notices, requests, demands and other communications provided for in this Agreement shall be sufficient if in writing and delivered in person or sent by a nationally recognized overnight courier service or by registered or certified United States mail, as appropriate, postage-prepaid, return receipt requested, or an equivalent governmental mail service, to the following addresses, or such other addresses as the Parties may furnish in accordance with this Section 20:

If to the Company:

Fidelity & Guaranty Life Business Services, Inc.

1001 Fleet Street

Baltimore, Maryland

Attn: General Counsel

With a simultaneous copy to:

Jay P. Warren, Esq.

Bryan Cave LLP

1290 Avenue of the Americas

New York, New York 10104

Fax No.: 212-541-1466

 

15


If to the Executive:

Leland C. Launer, Jr.

14 West Spanish Main

Tampa, FL 33609

Notice pursuant to this Section 20 shall be effective on the date of delivery in person or by courier, or three (3) days after the date mailed.

21. Severability . In the event that any of the provisions of this Agreement, or the application of any such provisions to the Executive or the Company with respect to obligations hereunder, is held to be unlawful or unenforceable by any court or arbitrator, the remaining portions of this Agreement will remain in full force and effect and will not be invalidated or impaired in any manner.

22. Waiver . No waiver by any party hereto of the breach of any term or covenant contained in this Agreement, whether by conduct or otherwise, in any one or more instances, shall be deemed to be, or construed as, a further or continuing waiver of any such breach, or a waiver of any other term or covenant contained in this Agreement.

23. Entire Agreement . This Agreement contains the entire agreement between the Executive and the Company with respect to the subject matter of this Agreement, and supersedes any and all prior agreements and understandings, oral or written, between the Executive and the Company with respect to the subject matter of this Agreement.

24. Amendments . This Agreement may be amended only by an agreement in writing signed by the Executive and an authorized representative of the Company (other than the Executive).

25. Successors and Assigns . Because the Executive’s obligations under this Agreement are personal in nature, the Executive’s obligations may only be performed by the Executive and may not be assigned by him. This Agreement is binding upon the Executive’s successors, heirs, executors, administrators and other legal representatives, and shall inure to the benefit of the Company and its subsidiaries, successors and assigns. The Company may assign its rights and obligations under this Agreement without prior written approval of Executive upon the transfer of all or substantially all of the business and/or assets of the Company (by whatever means).

26. Consultation with Counsel . The Executive acknowledges that he has had a full and complete opportunity to consult with counsel of his own choosing concerning the terms, enforceability and implications of this Agreement.

27. Attorneys’ Fees . Subject to appropriate documentation of fees and services, the Company agrees to reimburse the Executive for reasonable attorneys’ fees incurred for the review and negotiation of this Agreement, up to a maximum amount of $10,000, but reduced to reflect any applicable tax withholdings required at law.

 

16


28. No Other Representations . The Executive acknowledges that the Company has made no representations or warranties to the Executive concerning the terms, enforceability or implications of this Agreement other than as reflected in this Agreement.

29. Headings . The titles and headings of sections and subsections contained in this Agreement are included solely for convenience of reference and shall not control the meaning or interpretation of any of the provisions of this Agreement.

30. Counterparts . This Agreement may be executed in any number of counterparts, each of which so executed shall be deemed to be an original, and such counterparts shall together constitute but one agreement.

31. Governing Law . This Agreement shall be governed by, and construed in accordance with, the laws of the State of New York, without giving effect to its conflict of laws principles.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have executed this Agreement as of the date first written above.

 

FIDELITY & GUARANTEE LIFE BUSINESS SERVICES, INC.
By:   /s/ Rose Boehm
Name: Rose Boehm
Title: SVP – Human Resources

 

EXECUTIVE
/s/ Leland C. Launer, Jr.
Leland C. Launer, Jr.

 

17

Exhibit 10.14

AGREEMENT

THIS AGREEMENT (the “Agreement”) is made by and between Old Mutual Business Services, Inc., a Delaware corporation with an address at 1001 Fleet Street, Baltimore, Maryland (“Old Mutual”), and Rajesh Krishnan, an individual with a residence at 5202 Tilbury Way, Baltimore, MD 21212 (“Executive”), as of December 21, 2009.

WHEREAS, the parties wish to continue their employment relationship and wish to formalize the terms and conditions of that relationship, together with the treatment of Executive upon his/her departure from Old Mutual in the future;

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of Old Mutual’s continued employment of Executive, and the mutual obligations and rights set forth in this Agreement, the parties agree as follows:

1. DEFINITIONS

 

  (a) “Client” or “Client List” means all Past, Present and Potential Clients as defined below;

Company” means Old Mutual and its direct and indirect subsidiaries, its direct parent and its direct parent’s direct and indirect subsidiaries;

“Compensation” means Executive’s salary and any bonus that may be awarded in the Company’s sole discretion;

“Compensation Year” means a calendar year in which Executive earns compensation;

“Confidential Information” means all secret, confidential or otherwise non-public information, knowledge or data relating to the Group, and their respective businesses or financial affairs, whether or not in writing, including but not limited to information related to: their suppliers and their businesses; prices charged to and terms of business with their customers; their marketing plans and sales forecasts; their financial information, results and forecasts; their proposals or plans for the acquisition or disposal of a company or business or any part thereof; their proposals or plans for any expansion or reduction of activities; their employees, including the employees’ performance, compensation and benefits; their research activities, inventions, trade secrets, designs, formulas and product lines; any information provided to the Company in confidence by its affiliates, customers, suppliers or other parties; and the identify and other information concerning and related to Clients;

“Disability” means Executive’s inability to perform his/her duties on a full-time basis for 180 days during any 12 month period as a result of incapacity due to mental or physical illness, even with reasonable accommodations;

 

1


“Employment Period” means the period of time when Executive is employed by the Company, including any Notice Period set forth in Section 5.2(A) below;

“Group” means the Company and the Group Companies, collectively and singularly;

“Group Company” means any company that is an indirect parent or holding company (up to and including the ultimate parent or holding company) of the Company and any direct or indirect subsidiary of any such indirect parent or holding company other than the Company;

“Notice Period” means the period set forth in Section 5.2(A) ending three (3) months from the date of written notice to terminate Executive’s employment;

“Past Client” means any person or entity who had been an advisee, investment advisory or insurance customer, distributor or client of the Company;

“Potential Client” means any person or entity to whom the Company has offered (by means of a personal meeting, telephone call, or a letter or written proposal specifically directed to the particular person or entity) to serve as investment adviser or to provide or distribute insurance products but which is not at such time an advisee, investment advisory or insurance customer, distributor or client of the Company or any person or entity for which a plan exists to make such an offer; persons or entities solicited or to be solicited solely by non-personalized form letters and blanket mailings are excluded from this definition;

“Present Client” means any person or entity who is an advisee, investment advisory or insurance customer, distributor or client of the Company.

“Termination Date” means the date when Executive ceases to be an employee of the Group;

 

  (b) References to Sections are, unless otherwise stated, to Sections of this Agreement; and

 

  (c) Headings to Sections are for convenience only and shall not affect the construction or interpretation of this Agreement.

2. EMPLOYMENT

2.1. Executive’s employment with the Company is “at will,” meaning that Executive may resign at any time for any reason and the Company may discharge Executive at any time for any reason, subject only to any obligation to provide notice as set forth in Section 5.2(A) below. Therefore, beyond any obligation to give notice as set forth in Section 5.2(A) below, nothing in this Agreement obligates Executive to remain in the Company’s employ for any period of time, and the Company has no obligation to employ Executive for any definite or indefinite period of time.

 

2


2.2. Executive represents that the performance of this Agreement and his/her duties as an employee of the Company does not and will not breach (i) any pre-existing agreement to refrain from competing, directly or indirectly, with the business of any previous employer or any other party, (ii) any pre-existing agreement to keep in confidence proprietary information, knowledge or data acquired by Executive prior to his/her employment with the Company, or (iii) any other terms or obligations to which he/she is bound.

3. SCOPE OF EMPLOYMENT

3.1. Executive will faithfully, diligently and efficiently perform such duties on behalf of the Company as the Company may assign to him/her. Executive agrees to abide by the rules, regulations, instructions, personnel practices and policies of the Company, including any changes which may be adopted from time to time. Executive’s actions shall at all times be consistent with, and pursued solely to further the interests of the Company. Under no circumstances will Executive take any action contrary to the best interests of the Company at any time during the Employment Period.

3.2. Executive shall devote his/her full time and attention to the affairs of the Company and shall not undertake any outside employment, with or without compensation, without written permission of the President or CEO of Old Mutual US Life specifying the outside activity in which Executive may engage.

3.3. Executive shall not have an ownership interest in any company that is a competitor of the Group, except that Executive may have a passive investment in any such company to the extent that (1) the investment does not constitute more than 1% of the competitor’s ownership, and (2) the investment is an immaterial percentage of Executive’s net worth.

4. COMPENSATION AND BENEFITS

4.1. Compensation : Executive’s Compensation will be determined in the Company’s sole discretion.

4.2. Benefits : Executive shall be eligible to receive the various benefits offered by the Company to its executive employees as may be determined from time to time by the Company. These benefits may be modified or eliminated from time to time at the sole discretion of the Company. Where a particular benefit is subject to a formal plan (for example, medical insurance), eligibility to participate in and receive the particular benefit shall be governed solely by the applicable plan document.

4.3. Expenses : Executive shall be entitled to reimbursement for reasonable out-of-pocket expenses incurred for the Group’s business (including travel and entertainment) in accordance with the policies, practices and procedures of the Company.

 

3


5. TERMINATION OF EMPLOYMENT

5.1. Termination For Cause : The Company may terminate Executive’s employment for Cause immediately upon written notice. Upon termination of Executive’s employment with the Company in accordance with this Section 5.1, all Compensation and benefits will cease and Executive shall not be entitled to receive any other Compensation, payments or benefits, except (a) earned wages or accrued vacation time that remain due and payable, and (b) benefits to the extent that Executive is entitled to accrued benefits under the express terms of any plan governing such benefits and to the extent that such benefits cannot be cancelled under either the terms of the relevant plan documents or applicable law. Executive will have the right to elect to continue his/her health and dental insurance after the Termination Date to the extent permitted by the Consolidated Omnibus Budget Reconciliation Act of 1985, as amended (“COBRA”). Such coverage shall be at Executive’s expense and is not the responsibility of the Company.

“Cause” means the Company’s determination, in its sole discretion, that: (i) Executive has breached Executive’s obligations under this Agreement; (ii) Executive has failed to perform duties assigned to Executive in a manner satisfactory to the Company, subject to the obligation of the Company to provide Executive with prior notice providing reasonable detail of the bases for the unsatisfactory performance and an opportunity to correct the performance deficiencies; (iii) Executive has engaged in acts of dishonesty or moral turpitude, or any unlawful conduct; or (iv) Executive has engaged in conduct that is likely to affect adversely the business and/or the reputation of the Company.

5.2. Termination For Reasons Other Than Cause :

(A) Termination With Notice Period : Either party may terminate Executive’s employment for any reason other than for Cause, Disability or Death by giving the other party three (3) months’ notice in writing; terminations for Cause are governed by Section 5.1 above, for Disability by Section 5.2(C) below and Death by Section 5.2(D) below.

(i) By The Company:

(a) Continuation of Compensation and Benefits : In the event that the Company provides notice to Executive under this Section 5.2(A), then for the duration of the Notice Period Executive shall continue to receive the base salary that he/she received immediately prior to the notice of termination and shall continue to be eligible to receive all benefits to which he/she is entitled as an employee of the Company. Executive shall not be entitled to any bonus (either in full or pro rata) otherwise payable after the date on which notice is given, nor except as provided below shall Executive receive any Compensation or be eligible for any benefits after the Termination Date, including but not limited to salary and medical, dental, life and disability benefits. Executive will have the right to elect to continue his/her health and dental insurance after the Termination Date to the extent permitted by COBRA. Except as provided below, any COBRA coverage will be at Executive’s own expense and is not the responsibility of the Company.

 

4


(b) Severance : Provided Executive signs and delivers, and does not revoke, a general release in a form acceptable to the Company in its sole discretion, (x) Executive shall be entitled to receive a severance payment equal to two (2) weeks of base salary for every full year that Executive was employed by the Group, subject to a minimum payment of twenty six (26) weeks base salary and a maximum payment of fifty two (52) weeks base salary, and (y) if Executive properly elects COBRA coverage, the Company will make payments to the insurance provider(s) equal to the amount due for Executive’s COBRA coverage payments for a period of time equal to the number of weeks of Executive’s severance payments or until Executive is eligible to receive health benefits under another medical plan, which ever is sooner (by way of example only, if Executive is entitled to a severance payment equal to thirty weeks base salary because he/she has been employed by the Company for 15 years, the Company will make monthly payments to the COBRA insurance provider for the first thirty weeks of COBRA coverage, assuming Executive has executed and not revoked the release and has not otherwise become eligible to receive benefits under another medical plan). Executive agrees to give the Company notice immediately if he/she becomes eligible to receive benefits under another medical plan. The severance payment based on tenure with the Company shall be paid in a lump sum promptly following the expiration of the Notice Period and the expiration of any revocation period to which Executive may be entitled as provided in the release agreement. The release agreement will provide, among other things, for the general release of any and all claims that Executive may have against the Group and its officers, directors, employees and agents, whether known or unknown, and whether at common law or arising under any statute, including but not limited to statutes relating to discrimination and whistleblowing, and also will require Executive to keep the terms of the release confidential, subject to appropriate carve outs as required by law. Executive shall not be entitled to any other payment of any kind, except (a) as expressly provided in this Agreement, (b) earned wages or accrued vacation time that remain due and payable, and (c) benefits to the extent that Executive is entitled to accrued benefits under the express terms of any plan governing such benefits and to the extent that such benefits cannot be cancelled under either the terms of the relevant plan documents or applicable law.

(i) By Executive : In the event that Executive provides notice to the Company under Section 5.2(A), Executive shall not be entitled to any bonus (either in full or pro rata) otherwise payable after the date on which notice is given or any other compensation, payment or benefits of any kind, except (a) for the duration of the Notice Period, Executive shall continue to receive the base salary that he/she received immediately prior to the notice of termination and shall continue to be eligible to receive all benefits to which he/she is entitled as an employee of the Company, (b) earned wages or accrued vacation time that remain due and payable after the Termination Date, and (c) benefits payable after the Termination Date to the extent that Executive is entitled to accrued benefits under the express terms of any plan governing such benefits and to the extent that

 

5


such benefits cannot be cancelled under either the terms of the relevant plan documents or applicable law. Executive will have the right to elect to continue his/her health and dental insurance after the Termination Date to the extent permitted by COBRA. Such coverage shall be at Executive’s expense and is not the responsibility of the Company.

(B) Conduct During the Notice Period : During the Notice Period, Executive remains employed by the Company and shall not commence employment with any other employer, and is subject to all the obligations, rules, policies and practices of the Company, including the obligation to act solely in the best interest of the Company. During the Notice Period, Executive shall perform such duties and tasks as the Company may assign to Executive, provided however that the Company reserves the right to have Executive stay away from the Company’s premises and not contact any Group employee or Client.

(C) Disability : The Company may terminate Executive’s employment on written notice to Executive that the Company has determined that a Disability of Executive has occurred. Should the Company terminate this Agreement by reason of Executive’s Disability, all Compensation and benefits will cease effective on the Termination Date, and Executive shall have no right to any further payments or benefits except (a) to the extent that Executive is entitled to wages, accrued but unused vacation time or accrued benefits under the express terms of any plan governing such benefits, and (b) a pro-rata bonus for the period when Executive was performing his/her regular duties on a full-time basis.

(D) Death : Executive’s employment shall terminate automatically upon Executive’s death. All Compensation and benefits will cease effective on the date of Executive’s death, except that Executive’s estate shall be eligible to receive Executive’s bonus, if any, for the period up through Executive’s death; in the event Executive’s death is prior to the end of a Compensation Year, the bonus shall be pro rated based upon the number of days Executive worked during the Compensation Year.

(E) Share Incentive Scheme : The Company will inform Old Mutual plc that Executive’s employment has terminated, and any unvested shares granted under the Restricted Share Plan, the Share Reward Plan and any other plan under which shares may be granted to Executive (collectively, the “Plan”) will be released to Executive at the discretion of the Old Mutual Board following the Termination Date, subject to any terms of the Plan and subject to any statutory withholdings.

(F) IRC Section 409A Compliance : The parties intend that the payments and benefits to which Executive could become entitled in connection with a termination of employment shall comply with or are exempt from the definition of “nonqualified deferred compensation” under Section 409A of the Internal Revenue Code. In this regard, notwithstanding anything in this Agreement to the contrary, all cash amounts that become payable under this Agreement shall be paid no later than March 15 of the year following the year in which such amounts are earned or become payable. In the event that it is determined that the terms of this Agreement do not comply with Section 409A of the

 

6


Code, the parties will negotiate reasonably and in good faith to amend the terms of this Agreement so that it complies (in a manner that preserves the economic value of the payments and benefits to which Executive may become entitled) so that payments are made within the time period and in a manner permitted by the applicable Treasury Regulations.

5.3. Upon termination (or suspension) of Executive’s Employment, regardless of the reason, Executive shall deliver to the Company all books, documents and materials described in Section 6 below, and all computers, blackberries, other personal data devices, phones, credit cards, keys and other property of the Group that are in Executive’s possession or control.

5.4. Termination of Executive’s employment with the Company for any reason shall constitute Executive’s resignation as an officer, director, trustee and/or any and all other positions held by him with any subsidiary or any pooled investment vehicle organized or advised by the Group, effective automatically. Executive shall execute any and all documents and take any and all action reasonably requested by the Group to acknowledge and effect such resignations.

6. FURTHER COVENANTS.

6.1. All Business to Be the Property of the Company; Assignment of Intellectual Property .

(A) Executive agrees that any and all presently existing investment advisory and insurance business of the Company and all business developed by Executive or any other employee of the Company, including without limitation all investment advisory and insurance contracts, distribution agreements, fees, commissions, compensation records, performance records, Client Lists, agreements and any other incident of any business developed or sought by the Company or earned or carried on by Executive during his/her employment with the Company are and shall be the exclusive property of the Company for its sole use, and (where applicable) shall be payable directly to the Company. Executive grants to the Company Executive’s entire right, title and interest throughout the world, if any, in and to all research, information, Client Lists, product lists, distributor lists, identities, investment profiles and particular needs and characteristics of Clients, performance records, and all other investment advisory, insurance, technical and research data made, conceived, developed and/or acquired by Executive solely, jointly or in common with others during the period of Executive’s employment by the Company, that relate to the Company’s business as it was or is now rendered or as it may, from time to time, hereafter be rendered or proposed to be rendered during the Employment Period.

(B) Any inventions and any copyrightable material developed by Executive in the scope of his/her employment with the Company shall be promptly disclosed to the Company and will be “works for hire” owned by the Company. Executive will, at the Company’s expense, do whatever is necessary to transfer to the Company, and document its ownership of, any such property.

 

7


6.2. Confidentiality . Executive shall not, either during the period of Executive’s employment with the Company or thereafter, use for Executive’s own benefit or disclose to or use for the benefit of any person outside the Company, any information not already lawfully available to the public concerning Confidential Information, whether Executive has such information in Executive’s memory or embodied in writing or other tangible or electronic form. All Confidential Information, and all originals and copies of any Confidential Information, and any other written material relating to the business of the Company, including information stored electronically, shall be the sole property of the Company. Executive acknowledges and agrees that the Confidential Information has been and will be developed by the effort and expense of the Company; that such Confidential Information has economic value to the Company and would have significant economic value to the Company’s competitors if divulged; that the Confidential Information is not available to the Company’s competitors; and that keeping the Confidential Information from the Company’s competitors has economic value to the Company. Upon the termination of Executive’s employment in any manner or for any reason, Executive shall promptly surrender to the Company all originals and copies of any Confidential Information, and Executive shall not thereafter retain or use any Confidential Information for any purpose.

6.3. Client Information . Executive acknowledges that while employed by the Company, Executive will have contact with and become aware of the Company’s Clients and distributors and the representatives of those Clients and distributors, names and addresses, specific client and distributor needs and requirements, and leads and references to Potential Clients (together with the Client List, collectively, the “Client Information”). Executive agrees that the Client Information constitutes a trade secret and otherwise is a valuable asset of the Company. Executive further agrees that the Client Information has been and will be developed by the Company and would have significant economic value to the Company’s competitors if divulged; that the Client Information is not available to the Company’s competitors; that keeping the Client Information confidential from the Company’s competitors has economic value to the Company; and that the Company takes reasonable steps to protect the confidentiality of the Client Information.

6.4. Restrictive Covenants .

(A) For one (1) year following the Termination Date, irrespective of the reason for the termination, Executive shall not, directly or indirectly, solicit or attempt to solicit, or assist others in soliciting or attempting to solicit any Client of the Company for the purpose of providing investment advisory or insurance services or products or distribution services. Executive agrees that the restriction contained in this Section is necessary to protect the Company’s business and property in which the Company has made a considerable investment, and to prevent misuse of the Confidential and Client Information. For purposes of this Section 6.4(A), Client means:

“Past Client” means any person or entity who had been an advisee, investment advisory or insurance customer, distributor or client of the Company during the one (1) year period immediately preceding the termination of Executive’s employment with the Company and with which Executive dealt while at the Company or which became known to Executive during the course of his/her employment at the Company.

 

8


“Potential Client” means any person or entity to whom the Company has offered (by means of a personal meeting, telephone call, or a letter or written proposal specifically directed to the particular person or entity) within the one (1) year immediately preceding the termination of Executive’s employment to serve as investment adviser or to provide or distribute insurance products but which is not at such time an advisee, investment advisory or insurance customer, distributor or client of the Company and with which Executive dealt while at the Company or which became known to Executive during the course of his/her employment at the Company; this definition includes persons or entities for which a plan exists to make such an offer, but excludes persons or entities solicited or to be solicited solely by non-personalized form letters and blanket mailings.

“Present Client” means any person or entity who at the time of Executive’s termination of employment is an advisee, investment advisory or insurance customer, distributor or client of the Company and with which Executive dealt while at the Company or which became known to Executive during the course of his/her employment at the Company.

(B) For one (1) year following the termination of Executive’s employment with the Company, irrespective of the reason for the termination, Executive shall not directly or indirectly solicit, recruit, induce away, or attempt to solicit, recruit, or induce away, or hire (i) any employee, director, officer or agent of, contractor or consultant to the Company, or (ii) any employee, director, officer or agent of, contractor or consultant to any Group Company (other than the Company) with whom Executive had contact during Executive’s employment with the Company. For purposes of this paragraph, “contact” means any personal interaction whatsoever between the individual and Executive.

(C) Executive and the Company agree that the period of time and the unlimited geographic area applicable to the covenants of this Section are reasonable and necessary to protect the legitimate business interests and goodwill of the Group in view of (1) Executive’s senior executive position within the Company, (2) the geographic scope and nature of the business in which the Company is engaged, (3) Executive’s knowledge of the Company’s business and (4) Executive’s relationships with the Clients.

6.5. Executive shall comply with (a) every applicable rule of law and (b) the rules and regulations of regulatory authorities insofar as the same are applicable to his/her employment with the Company.

6.6. Executive shall not disparage, portray in a negative light or make any statement which would be harmful to, or lead to unfavorable publicity for, the Group, or any of their current or former directors, officers or employees, including without limitation, in any and all interviews, oral statements, written materials, electronically displayed materials and materials or information displayed on internet or internet-related sites; provided however, that this Agreement does not apply to the extent Executive is making truthful statements when required by law or by order of a court or other legal body having jurisdiction or when responding to an inquiry from any governmental or regulatory organization.

 

9


6.7. At no time after the Termination Date shall Executive represent him/herself as being interested in or employed by or in any way connected with the Group, other than as a former employee of the Company. After the Termination Date, Executive shall not in the course of carrying on any trade or business claim, represent or otherwise indicate any present association with the Group or for the purpose of carrying on or obtaining or retaining any business or customers claim, represent or otherwise indicate any past association with the Group.

6.8. Executive agrees to (i) provide truthful and reasonable cooperation, including but not limited to his/her appearance at interviews and depositions, in all legal matters, including but not limited to regulatory and litigation proceedings relating to his/her employment or area of responsibility at the Group, whether or not such matters have already been commenced and through the conclusion of such matters or proceedings, and (ii) to provide to the Group’s counsel all documents in Executive’s possession or control relating to such regulatory or litigation matters. Old Mutual will reimburse Executive for all reasonable travel expenses in connection with such cooperation.

6.9. The provisions of this Agreement, including but not limited to this Section 6, shall continue to apply with full force and effect should Executive transfer between or among the Group, wherever situated, or otherwise become employed by any other member of the Group, or be promoted or reassigned to any position. In the event that Executive becomes employed by a member of the Group other than the Company, this Agreement shall be read to substitute the other company’s name wherever the Company is referenced and the Company’s rights under this Agreement shall be assigned to Executive’s new employer and Executive consents to such assignment.

6.10. The Company shall have the right to communicate Executive’s ongoing obligations under this Agreement to any entity or individual with whom Executive becomes employed by or otherwise engaged following termination of employment with the Company and Executive consents to the Company making that communication.

6.11. To the extent any of the covenants of this Section 6 or any other provisions of this Agreement shall be deemed illegal or unenforceable by a court or other tribunal of competent jurisdiction with respect to (i) geographic area, (ii) time period, (iii) any activity or capacity covered by such covenant or contractual provision, or (iv) any other term or provision of such covenant or contractual provision, the covenant or contractual provision shall be construed to the maximum breadth determined to be legal and enforceable and the illegality or unenforceability of any one covenant or contractual provision shall not effect the legality and enforceability of the other covenants or contractual provisions.

6.12. Executive acknowledges that his/her agreement to comply with these restrictions was an inducement for the Company to continue to employ Executive and to enter into this Agreement with Executive.

 

10


7. GENERAL

7.1. This Agreement and any disputes relating to the parties’ relationship or the termination of that relationship, whether arising in law or equity and whether based on contract, tort or statutory rights, shall be deemed to have been made in the state of Maryland, shall take effect as an instrument under seal, and the validity, interpretation and performance of this Agreement shall be governed by, and construed in accordance with, the internal law of the state of Maryland, without giving effect to conflict-of-law principles. Both parties agree that any action, demand, claim or counterclaim (collectively, any “Legal Action”) relating to this Agreement or any other disputes relating to the parties’ relationship or the termination of that relationship, whether arising in law or equity and whether based on contract, tort or statutory rights, shall be commenced exclusively in Maryland in any state or federal court of competent jurisdiction. Both parties acknowledge material witnesses and documents would be located in Maryland and neither party shall assert that Maryland is an inconvenient or otherwise inappropriate venue for the resolution of any dispute. Both parties further agree that any disputes relating to this Agreement or any other disputes relating to the parties’ relationship or the termination of that relationship, whether based on contract, tort or statutory rights, shall be resolved by a judge alone, and both parties waive and forever renounce the right to a trial before a civil jury.

7.2. This agreement may be executed in counterparts.

7.3. This Agreement contains the entire agreement of the parties and supersedes all oral or written employment, consulting or similar agreements, understandings or arrangements between Executive, on the one hand, and the Group, on the other hand relating to Executive’s employment or the termination of his/her employment. In entering into this Agreement, neither party is relying on any oral or written representation, promise, agreement or understanding that is not set forth in this Agreement, and both parties expressly disclaim any reliance on any oral or written representation, promise, agreement or understanding not set forth in this Agreement.

7.4. This Agreement may not be amended or modified other than by a written agreement executed by both parties. The writing executed by the Company must be by the CEO of Old Mutual. This Agreement is binding upon and inures to the benefit of both parties and their respective successors and assigns, including any corporation with which or into which the Company may be merged or which may succeed to its assets or business, although the obligations of Executive are personal, are not assignable and may be performed only by him/her.

7.5. All notices and other communications required under this Agreement shall be in writing and shall be given by hand delivery to the other party, by overnight delivery service, signature required, or by registered or certified mail, return receipt requested, postage prepaid, addressed as follows:

 

If to Executive:   

Rajesh Krishnan

5202 Tilbury Way

Baltimore, MD 21212

If to the Company:   

Old Mutual Business Services, Inc.

1001 Fleet Street

Baltimore, MD 21202

Attn: William Rothenbach

 

11


With a copy to:   

Old Mutual plc

5th Floor, Old Mutual Place

2 Lambeth Hill

London EC4V 4GG

Attn: Don Schneider

or to such other address as either party shall have furnished to the other in writing in accordance with this provision. Notices and communications shall be effective when delivered to the addressee or if addressee refuses delivery, on the date delivery was first attempted.

7.6. Executive’s or the Company’s failure to insist upon strict compliance with any provision of this Agreement or the failure to assert any right Executive or the Company may have hereunder shall not be deemed to be a waiver of such provision or right or any other provision or right under this Agreement.

7.7. All provisions in this Agreement that relate to compensation or benefits (including but not limited to, salary, bonuses and employee benefits) are operative only to the extent that Executive continues to be employed by the Company as of the time that the payment or award of any of the above would be due except as otherwise provided for in Section 5 or under the express terms of any benefit plans. If Executive is no longer employed as of that time, none of the Compensation or benefits otherwise due shall be payable to Executive except (a) as expressly provided in Section 5 of this Agreement, (b) for earned but unpaid wages or accrued but not used vacation or (c) under the express terms of any benefit plans to the extent that such benefits cannot be cancelled under either the terms of the relevant plan documents or applicable law.

7.8. Executive acknowledges and agrees that the Company’s remedy at law for any breach of the provisions of this Agreement would be inadequate and that for breach of such provisions the Company shall, in addition to such other remedies as may be available to it at law or in equity or as provided in this Agreement, be entitled to temporary, preliminary and permanent injunctive relief as well as to enforce its rights by an action for specific performance to the extent permitted by law. Executive expressly consents to the granting of temporary, preliminary and permanent injunctive relief and/or specific performance for breach of this Agreement.

7.9. The Company shall have the right to set off any damages incurred by the Group against any amounts due to Executive by the Group except for Executive’s salary and other sums that are non-forfeitable wages under the law or otherwise protected from offset or seizure by law. In addition to, and without limiting in any way the Company’s rights and remedies as set forth in this Agreement or in law or equity, Executive agrees that if Executive engages in any activities prohibited by this Agreement, Executive will pay over to the Company all compensation or revenue received in connection with such activities.

7.10. All compensation and benefits payable under this Agreement shall be subject to withholding by the Company of all applicable taxes. The parties further understand and agree that should any relevant law (including without limitation any regulatory interpretations thereof) change between the time of execution of this Agreement and the payment of the various

 

12


payments to Executive called for by the Agreement, the parties will revise the Agreement accordingly in a good faith attempt to ensure ongoing compliance with such law upon mutual agreement of the parties, staying as consistent as possible to the financial and other business terms of this Agreement, but in any case Executive hereby agrees that all personal income taxes on his/her compensation and benefits under this Agreement and all penalties and interest with respect to such personal income taxes, if any, are his/her own responsibility.

7.11. Executive and the Company represent and acknowledge that the consideration that each has received under this Agreement is sufficient and adequate for the obligations that each has agreed to undertake, and expressly waives any right to assert that they have not received adequate consideration for agreeing to the obligations undertaken in this Agreement.

7.12. Executive acknowledges and represents that he/she understands his/her obligations and rights under this Agreement, has had adequate time to consider it and has had adequate time and opportunity to ask any questions and obtain any advice he/she felt necessary or appropriate. No one has placed any pressure on Executive to execute this Agreement prior to the expiration of a reasonable time for him/her to read it, ask any questions and obtain any advice he/she felt necessary or appropriate. Executive enters into this Agreement freely and voluntarily.

7.13. The officer executing this Agreement on behalf of Old Mutual has the authority to enter into this Agreement, and Executive is relying on his/her authority to do so.

IN WITNESS whereof this Agreement has been executed the day and year first above written.

 

EXECUTIVE
/s/ Rajesh Krishnan
By:   Rajesh Krishnan

 

OLD MUTUAL BUSINESS SERVICES
/s/ William F. Rothenbach
By:   William F. Rothenbach
Its:   Senior Vice President-Human Resources and Director

 

13

Exhibit 10.15

AGREEMENT

THIS AGREEMENT (the “Agreement”) is made by and between Old Mutual Business Services, Inc., a Delaware corporation with an address at 1001 Fleet Street, Baltimore, Maryland (“Old Mutual”), and John P. O’Shaughnessy, an individual with a residence at 1000 Fell Street, Apt. 510, Baltimore, MD 21231 (“Executive”), as of December 21, 2009.

WHEREAS, the parties wish to continue their employment relationship and wish to formalize the terms and conditions of that relationship, together with the treatment of Executive upon his/her departure from Old Mutual in the future;

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of Old Mutual’s continued employment of Executive, and the mutual obligations and rights set forth in this Agreement, the parties agree as follows:

1. DEFINITIONS

 

  (a) “Client” or “Client List” means all Past, Present and Potential Clients as defined below;

“Company” means Old Mutual and its direct and indirect subsidiaries, its direct parent and its direct parent’s direct and indirect subsidiaries;

“Compensation” means Executive’s salary and any bonus that may be awarded in the Company’s sole discretion;

“Compensation Year” means a calendar year in which Executive earns compensation;

“Confidential Information” means all secret, confidential or otherwise non-public information, knowledge or data relating to the Group, and their respective businesses or financial affairs, whether or not in writing, including but not limited to information related to: their suppliers and their businesses; prices charged to and terms of business with their customers; their marketing plans and sales forecasts; their financial information, results and forecasts; their proposals or plans for the acquisition or disposal of a company or business or any part thereof; their proposals or plans for any expansion or reduction of activities; their employees, including the employees’ performance, compensation and benefits; their research activities, inventions, trade secrets, designs, formulas and product lines; any information provided to the Company in confidence by its affiliates, customers, suppliers or other parties; and the identify and other information concerning and related to Clients;


“Disability” means Executive’s inability to perform his/her duties on a full-time basis for 180 days during any 12 month period as a result of incapacity due to mental or physical illness, even with reasonable accommodations;

“Employment Period” means the period of time when Executive is employed by the Company, including any Notice Period set forth in Section 5.2(A) below;

“Group” means the Company and the Group Companies, collectively and singularly;

“Group Company” means any company that is an indirect parent or holding company (up to and including the ultimate parent or holding company) of the Company and any direct or indirect subsidiary of any such indirect parent or holding company other than the Company;

“Notice Period” means the period set forth in Section 5.2(A) ending three (3) months from the date of written notice to terminate Executive’s employment;

“Past Client” means any person or entity who had been an advisee, investment advisory or insurance customer, distributor or client of the Company;

“Potential Client” means any person or entity to whom the Company has offered (by means of a personal meeting, telephone call, or a letter or written proposal specifically directed to the particular person or entity) to serve as investment adviser or to provide or distribute insurance products but which is not at such time an advisee, investment advisory or insurance customer, distributor or client of the Company or any person or entity for which a plan exists to make such an offer; persons or entities solicited or to be solicited solely by non-personalized form letters and blanket mailings are excluded from this definition;

“Present Client” means any person or entity who is an advisee, investment advisory or insurance customer, distributor or client of the Company.

“Termination Date” means the date when Executive ceases to be an employee of the Group;

 

  (b) References to Sections are, unless otherwise stated, to Sections of this Agreement; and

 

2


(c) Headings to Sections are for convenience only and shall not affect the construction or interpretation of this Agreement.

2. EMPLOYMENT

2.1 Executive’s employment with the Company is “at will,” meaning that Executive may resign at any time for any reason and the Company may discharge Executive at any time for any reason, subject only to any obligation to provide notice as set forth in Section 5.2(A) below. Therefore, beyond any obligation to give notice as set forth in Section 5.2(A) below, nothing in this Agreement obligates Executive to remain in the Company’s employ for any period of time, and the Company has no obligation to employ Executive for any definite or indefinite period of time.

2.2 Executive represents that the performance of this Agreement and his/her duties as an employee of the Company does not and will not breach (i) any pre-existing agreement to refrain from competing, directly or indirectly, with the business of any previous employer or any other party, (ii) any pre-existing agreement to keep in confidence proprietary information, knowledge or data acquired by Executive prior to his/her employment with the Company, or (iii) any other terms or obligations to which he/she is bound.

3. SCOPE OF EMPLOYMENT

3.1 Executive will faithfully, diligently and efficiently perform such duties on behalf of the Company as the Company may assign to him/her. Executive agrees to abide by the rules, regulations, instructions, personnel practices and policies of the Company, including any changes which may be adopted from time to time. Executive’s actions shall at all times be consistent with, and pursued solely to further the interests of the Company. Under no circumstances will Executive take any action contrary to the best interests of the Company at any time during the Employment Period.

3.2 Executive shall devote his/her full time and attention to the affairs of the Company and shall not undertake any outside employment, with or without compensation, without written permission of the President or CEO of Old Mutual US Life specifying the outside activity in which Executive may engage.

3.3 Executive shall not have an ownership interest in any company that is a competitor of the Group, except that Executive may have a passive investment in any such company to the extent that (1) the investment does not constitute more than 1% of the competitor’s ownership, and (2) the investment is an immaterial percentage of Executive’s net worth.

 

3


4. COMPENSATION AND BENEFITS

4.1 Compensation : Executive’s Compensation will be determined in the Company’s sole discretion.

4.2 Benefits : Executive shall be eligible to receive the various benefits offered by the Company to its executive employees as may be determined from time to time by the Company. These benefits may be modified or eliminated from time to time at the sole discretion of the Company. Where a particular benefit is subject to a formal plan (for example, medical insurance), eligibility to participate in and receive the particular benefit shall be governed solely by the applicable plan document.

4.3 Expenses : Executive shall be entitled to reimbursement for reasonable out-of-pocket expenses incurred for the Group’s business (including travel and entertainment) in accordance with the policies, practices and procedures of the Company.

5. TERMINATION OF EMPLOYMENT

5.1 Termination For Cause : The Company may terminate Executive’s employment for Cause immediately upon written notice. Upon termination of Executive’s employment with the Company in accordance with this Section 5.1, all Compensation and benefits will cease and Executive shall not be entitled to receive any other Compensation, payments or benefits, except (a) earned wages or accrued vacation time that remain due and payable, and (b) benefits to the extent that Executive is entitled to accrued benefits under the express terms of any plan governing such benefits and to the extent that such benefits cannot be cancelled under either the terms of the relevant plan documents or applicable law. Executive will have the right to elect to continue his/her health and dental insurance after the Termination Date to the extent permitted by the Consolidated Omnibus Budget Reconciliation Act of 1985, as amended (“COBRA”). Such coverage shall be at Executive’s expense and is not the responsibility of the Company.

“Cause” means the Company’s determination, in its sole discretion, that: (i) Executive has breached Executive’s obligations under this Agreement; (ii) Executive has failed to perform duties assigned to Executive in a manner satisfactory to the Company, subject to the obligation of the Company to provide Executive with prior notice providing reasonable detail of the bases for the unsatisfactory performance and an opportunity to correct the performance deficiencies; (iii) Executive has engaged in acts of dishonesty or moral turpitude, or any unlawful conduct; or (iv) Executive has engaged in conduct that is likely to affect adversely the business and/or the reputation of the Company.

 

4


5.2 Termination For Reasons Other Than Cause :

(A) Termination With Notice Period : Either party may terminate Executive’s employment for any reason other than for Cause, Disability or Death by giving the other party three (3) months’ notice in writing; terminations for Cause are governed by Section 5.1 above, for Disability by Section 5.2(C) below and Death by Section 5.2(D) below.

(i) By The Company:

(a) Continuation of Compensation and Benefits : In the event that the Company provides notice to Executive under this Section 5.2(A), then for the duration of the Notice Period Executive shall continue to receive the base salary that he/she received immediately prior to the notice of termination and shall continue to be eligible to receive all benefits to which he/she is entitled as an employee of the Company. Executive shall not be entitled to any bonus (either in full or pro rata) otherwise payable after the date on which notice is given, nor except as provided below shall Executive receive any Compensation or be eligible for any benefits after the Termination Date, including but not limited to salary and medical, dental, life and disability benefits. Executive will have the right to elect to continue his/her health and dental insurance after the Termination Date to the extent permitted by COBRA. Except as provided below, any COBRA coverage will be at Executive’s own expense and is not the responsibility of the Company.

(b) Severance : Provided Executive signs and delivers, and does not revoke, a general release in a form acceptable to the Company in its sole discretion, (x) Executive shall be entitled to receive a severance payment equal to two (2) weeks of base salary for every full year that Executive was employed by the Group, subject to a minimum payment of twenty six (26) weeks base salary and a maximum payment of fifty two (52) weeks base salary, and (y) if Executive properly elects COBRA coverage, the Company will make payments to the insurance provider(s) equal to the amount due for Executive’s COBRA coverage payments for a period of time equal to the number of weeks of Executive’s severance payments or until Executive is eligible to receive health benefits under another medical plan, whichever is sooner (by way of example only, if Executive is entitled to a severance payment equal to thirty weeks base salary because he/she has been

 

5


employed by the Company for 15 years, the Company will make monthly payments to the COBRA insurance provider for the first thirty weeks of COBRA coverage, assuming Executive has executed and not revoked the release and has not otherwise become eligible to receive benefits under another medical plan). Executive agrees to give the Company notice immediately if he/she becomes eligible to receive benefits under another medical plan. The severance payment based on tenure with the Company shall be paid in a lump sum promptly following the expiration of the Notice Period and the expiration of any revocation period to which Executive may be entitled as provided in the release agreement. The release agreement will provide, among other things, for the general release of any and all claims that Executive may have against the Group and its officers, directors, employees and agents, whether known or unknown, and whether at common law or arising under any statute, including but not limited to statutes relating to discrimination and whistleblowing, and also will require Executive to keep the terms of the release confidential, subject to appropriate carve outs as required by law. Executive shall not be entitled to any other payment of any kind, except (a) as expressly provided in this Agreement, (b) earned wages or accrued vacation time that remain due and payable, and (c) benefits to the extent that Executive is entitled to accrued benefits under the express terms of any plan governing such benefits and to the extent that such benefits cannot be cancelled under either the terms of the relevant plan documents or applicable law.

(ii) By Executive : In the event that Executive provides notice to the Company under Section 5.2(A), Executive shall not be entitled to any bonus (either in full or pro rata) otherwise payable after the date on which notice is given or any other compensation, payment or benefits of any kind, except (a) for the duration of the Notice Period, Executive shall continue to receive the base salary that he/she received immediately prior to the notice of termination and shall continue to be eligible to receive all benefits to which he/she is entitled as an employee of the Company, (b) earned wages or accrued vacation time that remain due and payable after the Termination Date, and (c) benefits payable after the Termination Date to the extent that Executive is entitled to accrued benefits under the express terms of any plan governing such benefits and to the extent that such benefits cannot be cancelled under either the terms of the relevant plan documents or applicable law. Executive will have the right to elect to continue his/her health and dental insurance after the Termination Date to the extent permitted by COBRA. Such coverage shall be at Executive’s expense and is not the responsibility of the Company.

 

6


(B) Conduct During the Notice Period : During the Notice Period, Executive remains employed by the Company and shall not commence employment with any other employer, and is subject to all the obligations, rules, policies and practices of the Company, including the obligation to act solely in the best interest of the Company. During the Notice Period, Executive shall perform such duties and tasks as the Company may assign to Executive, provided however that the Company reserves the right to have Executive stay away from the Company’s premises and not contact any Group employee or Client.

(C) Disability : The Company may terminate Executive’s employment on written notice to Executive that the Company has determined that a Disability of Executive has occurred. Should the Company terminate this Agreement by reason of Executive’s Disability, all Compensation and benefits will cease effective on the Termination Date, and Executive shall have no right to any further payments or benefits except (a) to the extent that Executive is entitled to wages, accrued but unused vacation time or accrued benefits under the express terms of any plan governing such benefits, and (b) a pro-rata bonus for the period when Executive was performing his/her regular duties on a full-time basis.

(D) Death : Executive’s employment shall terminate automatically upon Executive’s death. All Compensation and benefits will cease effective on the date of Executive’s death, except that Executive’s estate shall be eligible to receive Executive’s bonus, if any, for the period up through Executive’s death; in the event Executive’s death is prior to the end of a Compensation Year, the bonus shall be pro rated based upon the number of days Executive worked during the Compensation Year.

(E) Share Incentive Scheme : The Company will inform Old Mutual plc that Executive’s employment has terminated, and any unvested shares granted under the Restricted Share Plan, the Share Reward Plan and any other plan under which shares may be granted to Executive (collectively, the “Plan”) will be released to Executive at the discretion of the Old Mutual Board following the Termination Date, subject to any terms of the Plan and subject to any statutory withholdings.

(F) IRC Section 409A Compliance : The parties intend that the payments and benefits to which Executive could become entitled in connection with a termination of employment shall comply with or are exempt from the definition of “nonqualified deferred compensation” under Section 409A of the

 

7


Internal Revenue Code. In this regard, notwithstanding anything in this Agreement to the contrary, all cash amounts that become payable under this Agreement shall be paid no later than March 15 of the year following the year in which such amounts are earned or become payable. In the event that it is determined that the terms of this Agreement do not comply with Section 409A of the Code, the parties will negotiate reasonably and in good faith to amend the terms of this Agreement so that it complies (in a manner that preserves the economic value of the payments and benefits to which Executive may become entitled) so that payments are made within the time period and in a manner permitted by the applicable Treasury Regulations.

5.3 Upon termination (or suspension) of Executive’s Employment, regardless of the reason, Executive shall deliver to the Company all books, documents and materials described in Section 6 below, and all computers, blackberries, other personal data devices, phones, credit cards, keys and other property of the Group that are in Executive’s possession or control.

5.4 Termination of Executive’s employment with the Company for any reason shall constitute Executive’s resignation as an officer, director, trustee and/or any and all other positions held by him with any subsidiary or any pooled investment vehicle organized or advised by the Group, effective automatically. Executive shall execute any and all documents and take any and all action reasonably requested by the Group to acknowledge and effect such resignations.

6. FURTHER COVENANTS.

6.1 All Business to be the property of the Company; Assignment of Intellectual Property .

(A) Executive agrees that any and all presently existing investment advisory and insurance business of the Company and all business developed by Executive or any other employee of the Company, including without limitation all investment advisory and insurance contracts, distribution agreements, fees, commissions, compensation records, performance records, Client Lists, agreements and any other incident of any business developed or sought by the Company or earned or carried on by Executive during his/her employment with the Company are and shall be the exclusive property of the Company for its sole use, and (where applicable) shall be payable directly to the Company. Executive grants to the Company Executive’s entire right, title and interest throughout the world, if any, in and to all research, information, Client Lists, product lists, distributor lists, identities, investment profiles and particular needs and characteristics of Clients, performance records, and all other investment advisory, insurance, technical and research data made, conceived, developed and/or

 

8


acquired by Executive solely, jointly or in common with others during the period of Executive’s employment by the Company, that relate to the Company’s business as it was or is now rendered or as it may, from time to time, hereafter be rendered or proposed to be rendered during the Employment Period.

(B) Any inventions and any copyrightable material developed by Executive in the scope of his/her employment with the Company shall be promptly disclosed to the Company and will be “works for hire” owned by the Company. Executive will, at the Company’s expense, do whatever is necessary to transfer to the Company, and document its ownership of, any such property.

6.2 Confidentiality . Executive shall not, either during the period of Executive’s employment with the Company or thereafter, use for Executive’s own benefit or disclose to or use for the benefit of any person outside the Company, any information not already lawfully available to the public concerning Confidential Information, whether Executive has such information in Executive’s memory or embodied in writing or other tangible or electronic form. All Confidential Information, and all originals and copies of any Confidential Information, and any other written material relating to the business of the Company, including information stored electronically, shall be the sole property of the Company. Executive acknowledges and agrees that the Confidential Information has been and will be developed by the effort and expense of the Company; that such Confidential Information has economic value to the Company and would have significant economic value to the Company’s competitors if divulged; that the Confidential Information is not available to the Company’s competitors; and that keeping the Confidential Information from the Company’s competitors has economic value to the Company. Upon the termination of Executive’s employment in any manner or for any reason, Executive shall promptly surrender to the Company all originals and copies of any Confidential Information, and Executive shall not thereafter retain or use any Confidential Information for any purpose.

6.3 Client Information . Executive acknowledges that while employed by the Company, Executive will have contact with and become aware of the Company’s Clients and distributors and the representatives of those Clients and distributors, names and addresses, specific client and distributor needs and requirements, and leads and references to Potential Clients (together with the Client List, collectively, the “Client Information”). Executive agrees that the Client Information constitutes a trade secret and otherwise is a valuable asset of the Company. Executive further agrees that the Client Information has been and will be developed by the Company and would have significant economic value to the Company’s competitors if divulged; that the Client Information is not available to the Company’s competitors; that keeping the Client Information confidential from the Company’s competitors has economic value to the Company; and that the Company takes reasonable steps to protect the confidentiality of the Client Information.

 

9


6.4 Restrictive Covenants .

(A) For one (1) year following the Termination Date, irrespective of the reason for the termination, Executive shall not, directly or indirectly, solicit or attempt to solicit, or assist others in soliciting or attempting to solicit any Client of the Company for the purpose of providing investment advisory or insurance services or products or distribution services. Executive agrees that the restriction contained in this Section is necessary to protect the Company’s business and property in which the Company has made a considerable investment, and to prevent misuse of the Confidential and Client Information. For purposes of this Section 6.4(A), Client means:

“Past Client” means any person or entity who had been an advisee, investment advisory or insurance customer, distributor or client of the Company during the one (1) year period immediately preceding the termination of Executive’s employment with the Company and with which Executive dealt while at the Company or which became known to Executive during the course of his/her employment at the Company.

“Potential Client” means any person or entity to whom the Company has offered (by means of a personal meeting, telephone call, or a letter or written proposal specifically directed to the particular person or entity) within the one (1) year immediately preceding the termination of Executive’s employment to serve as investment adviser or to provide or distribute insurance products but which is not at such time an advisee, investment advisory or insurance customer, distributor or client of the Company and with which Executive dealt while at the Company or which became known to Executive during the course of his/her employment at the Company; this definition includes persons or entities for which a plan exists to make such an offer, but excludes persons or entities solicited or to be solicited solely by non-personalized form letters and blanket mailings.

“Present Client” means any person or entity who at the time of Executive’s termination of employment is an advisee, investment advisory or insurance customer, distributor or client of the Company and with which Executive dealt while at the Company or which became known to Executive during the course of his/her employment at the Company.

(B) For one (1) year following the termination of Executive’s employment with the Company, irrespective of the reason for the termination, Executive shall not directly or indirectly solicit, recruit, induce away, or attempt to solicit, recruit, or induce away, or hire (i) any employee, director, officer or agent of, contractor or consultant to the Company, or (ii) any employee, director,

 

10


officer or agent of, contractor or consultant to any Group Company (other than the Company) with whom Executive had contact during Executive’s employment with the Company. For purposes of this paragraph, “contact” means any personal interaction whatsoever between the individual and Executive.

(C) Executive and the Company agree that the period of time and the unlimited geographic area applicable to the covenants of this Section are reasonable and necessary to protect the legitimate business interests and goodwill of the Group in view of (1) Executive’s senior executive position within the Company, (2) the geographic scope and nature of the business in which the Company is engaged, (3) Executive’s knowledge of the Company’s business and (4) Executive’s relationships with the Clients.

6.5 Executive shall comply with (a) every applicable rule of law and (b) the rules and regulations of regulatory authorities insofar as the same are applicable to his/her employment with the Company.

6.6 Executive shall not disparage, portray in a negative light or make any statement which would be harmful to, or lead to unfavorable publicity for, the Group, or any of their current or former directors, officers or employees, including without limitation, in any and all interviews, oral statements, written materials, electronically displayed materials and materials or information displayed on interne or internet-related sites; provided however, that this Agreement does not apply to the extent Executive is making truthful statements when required by law or by order of a court or other legal body having jurisdiction or when responding to an inquiry from any governmental or regulatory organization.

6.7 At no time after the Termination Date shall Executive represent him/herself as being interested in or employed by or in any way connected with the Group, other than as a former employee of the Company. After the Termination Date, Executive shall not in the course of carrying on any trade or business claim, represent or otherwise indicate any present association with the Group or for the purpose of carrying on or obtaining or retaining any business or customers claim, represent or otherwise indicate any past association with the Group.

6.8 Executive agrees to (i) provide truthful and reasonable cooperation, including but not limited to his/her appearance at interviews and depositions, in all legal matters, including but not limited to regulatory and litigation proceedings relating to his/her employment or area of responsibility at the Group, whether or not such matters have already been commenced and through the conclusion of such matters or proceedings, and (ii) to provide to the Group’s counsel all documents in Executive’s possession or control relating to such regulatory or litigation matters. Old Mutual will reimburse Executive for all reasonable travel expenses in connection with such cooperation.

 

11


6.9 The provisions of this Agreement, including but not limited to this Section 6, shall continue to apply with full force and effect should Executive transfer between or among the Group, wherever situated, or otherwise become employed by any other member of the Group, or be promoted or reassigned to any position. In the event that Executive becomes employed by a member of the Group other than the Company, this Agreement shall be read to substitute the other company’s name wherever the Company is referenced and the Company’s rights under this Agreement shall be assigned to Executive’s new employer and Executive consents to such assignment.

6.10 The Company shall have the right to communicate Executive’s ongoing obligations under this Agreement to any entity or individual with whom Executive becomes employed by or otherwise engaged following termination of employment with the Company and Executive consents to the Company making that communication.

6.10 To the extent any of the covenants of this Section 6 or any other provisions of this Agreement shall be deemed illegal or unenforceable by a court or other tribunal of competent jurisdiction with respect to (i) geographic area, (ii) time period, (iii) any activity or capacity covered by such covenant or contractual provision, or (iv) any other term or provision of such covenant or contractual provision, the covenant or contractual provision shall be construed to the maximum breadth determined to be legal and enforceable and the illegality or unenforceability of any one covenant or contractual provision shall not effect the legality and enforceability of the other covenants or contractual provisions.

6.11 Executive acknowledges that his/her agreement to comply with these restrictions was an inducement for the Company to continue to employ Executive and to enter into this Agreement with Executive.

7. GENERAL

7.1 This Agreement and any disputes relating to the parties’ relationship or the termination of that relationship, whether arising in law or equity and whether based on contract, tort or statutory rights, shall be deemed to have been made in the state of Maryland, shall take effect as an instrument under seal, and the validity, interpretation and performance of this Agreement shall be governed by, and construed in accordance with, the internal law of the state of Maryland, without giving effect to conflict-of-law principles. Both parties agree that any action, demand, claim or counterclaim (collectively, any “Legal Action”) relating to this Agreement or any other disputes relating to the parties’ relationship or the termination of that relationship, whether arising in law or equity and whether based on contract, tort or statutory rights, shall be commenced exclusively in Maryland in any state or federal court of competent

 

12


jurisdiction. Both parties acknowledge material witnesses and documents would be located in Maryland and neither party shall assert that Maryland is an inconvenient or otherwise inappropriate venue for the resolution of any dispute. Both parties further agree that any disputes relating to this Agreement or any other disputes relating to the parties’ relationship or the termination of that relationship, whether based on contract, tort or statutory rights, shall be resolved by a judge alone, and both parties waive and forever renounce the right to a trial before a civil jury.

7.2 This agreement may be executed in counterparts.

7.3 This Agreement contains the entire agreement of the parties and supersedes all oral or written employment, consulting or similar agreements, understandings or arrangements between Executive, on the one hand, and the Group, on the other hand relating to Executive’s employment or the termination of his/her employment. In entering into this Agreement, neither party is relying on any oral or written representation, promise, agreement or understanding that is not set forth in this Agreement, and both parties expressly disclaim any reliance on any oral or written representation, promise, agreement or understanding not set forth in this Agreement.

7.4 This Agreement may not be amended or modified other than by a written agreement executed by both parties. The writing executed by the Company must be by the CEO of Old Mutual. This Agreement is binding upon and inures to the benefit of both parties and their respective successors and assigns, including any corporation with which or into which the Company may be merged or which may succeed to its assets or business, although the obligations of Executive are personal, are not assignable and may be performed only by him/her.

7.5 All notices and other communications required under this Agreement shall be in writing and shall be given by hand delivery to the other party, by overnight delivery service, signature required, or by registered or certified mail, return receipt requested, postage prepaid, addressed as follows:

 

  If to Executive: John P. 0’ Shaughnessy
    1000 Fell Street — Apt. 510
    Baltimore, MD 21231

 

  If to the Company: Old Mutual Business Services, Inc.
    1001 Fleet Street
    Baltimore, MD 21202
    Attn: William Rothenbach

 

13


  With a copy to: Old Mutual plc
    5 th Floor, Old Mutual Place
    2 Lambeth Hill
    London EC4V 4GG
    Attn: Don Schneider

or to such other address as either party shall have furnished to the other in writing in accordance with this provision. Notices and communications shall be effective when delivered to the addressee or if addressee refuses delivery, on the date delivery was first attempted.

7.6 Executive’s or the Company’s failure to insist upon strict compliance with any provision of this Agreement or the failure to assert any right Executive or the Company may have hereunder shall not be deemed to be a waiver of such provision or right or any other provision or right under this Agreement.

7.7 All provisions in this Agreement that relate to compensation or benefits (including but not limited to, salary, bonuses and employee benefits) are operative only to the extent that Executive continues to be employed by the Company as of the time that the payment or award of any of the above would be due except as otherwise provided for in Section 5 or under the express terms of any benefit plans. If Executive is no longer employed as of that time, none of the Compensation or benefits otherwise due shall be payable to Executive except (a) as expressly provided in Section 5 of this Agreement, (b) for earned but unpaid wages or accrued but not used vacation or (c) under the express terms of any benefit plans to the extent that such benefits cannot be cancelled under either the terms of the relevant plan documents or applicable law.

7.8 Executive acknowledges and agrees that the Company’s remedy at law for any breach of the provisions of this Agreement would be inadequate and that for breach of such provisions the Company shall, in addition to such other remedies as may be available to it at law or in equity or as provided in this Agreement, be entitled to temporary, preliminary and permanent injunctive relief as well as to enforce its rights by an action for specific performance to the extent permitted by law. Executive expressly consents to the granting of temporary, preliminary and permanent injunctive relief and/or specific performance for breach of this Agreement.

7.9 The Company shall have the right to set off any damages incurred by the Group against any amounts due to Executive by the Group except for Executive’s salary and other sums that are non-forfeitable wages under the law or otherwise protected from offset or seizure by law. In addition to, and without limiting in any way the Company’s rights and remedies as set forth in this Agreement or in law or equity, Executive agrees that if Executive engages in any activities prohibited by this Agreement, Executive will pay over to the Company all compensation or revenue received in connection with such activities.

 

14


7.10 All compensation and benefits payable under this Agreement shall be subject to withholding by the Company of all applicable taxes. The parties further understand and agree that should any relevant law (including without limitation any regulatory interpretations thereof) change between the time of execution of this Agreement and the payment of the various payments to Executive called for by the Agreement, the parties will revise the Agreement accordingly in a good faith attempt to ensure ongoing compliance with such law upon mutual agreement of the parties, staying as consistent as possible to the financial and other business terms of this Agreement, but in any case Executive hereby agrees that all personal income taxes on his/her compensation and benefits under this Agreement and all penalties and interest with respect to such personal income taxes, if any, are his/her own responsibility.

7.11 Executive and the Company represent and acknowledge that the consideration that each has received under this Agreement is sufficient and adequate for the obligations that each has agreed to undertake, and expressly waives any right to assert that they have not received adequate consideration for agreeing to the obligations undertaken in this Agreement.

7.12 Executive acknowledges and represents that he/she understands his/her obligations and rights under this Agreement, has had adequate time to consider it and has had adequate time and opportunity to ask any questions and obtain any advice he/she felt necessary or appropriate. No one has placed any pressure on Executive to execute this Agreement prior to the expiration of a reasonable time for him/her to read it, ask any questions and obtain any advice he/she felt necessary or appropriate. Executive enters into this Agreement freely and voluntarily.

7.13 The officer executing this Agreement on behalf of Old Mutual has the authority to enter into this Agreement, and Executive is relying on his/her authority to do so.

IN WITNESS whereof this Agreement has been executed the day and year first above written.

 

EXECUTIVE
/s/ John P. O’Shaughnessy
By: John P. O’Shaughnessy

 

15


OLD MUTUAL BUSINESS SERVICES
/s/ William F. Rothenbach

By:   William F. Rothenbach

Its:   Senior Vice President-Human Resources and Director

 

16

Exhibit 10.16

THE EXECUTIVE NONQUALIFIED EXCESS PLAN

PLAN DOCUMENT


THE EXECUTIVE NONQUALIFIED EXCESS PLAN

Section 1. Purpose:

By execution of the Adoption Agreement, the Employer has adopted the Plan set forth herein, and in the Adoption Agreement, to provide a means by which certain management Employees or Independent Contractors of the Employer may elect to defer receipt of current Compensation from the Employer in order to provide retirement and other benefits on behalf of such Employees or Independent Contractors of the Employer, as selected in the Adoption Agreement. The Plan is intended to be a nonqualified deferred compensation plan that complies with the provisions of Section 409A of the Internal Revenue Code (the “Code”). The Plan is also intended to be an unfunded plan maintained primarily for the purpose of providing deferred compensation benefits for a select group of management or highly compensated employees under Sections 201(2), 301(a)(3) and 401(a)(1) of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 (“ERISA”) and independent contractors. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Plan, this Plan shall be interpreted, operated and administered in a manner consistent with these intentions. In the event of any conflict in the terms of this Plan Document and the Adoption Agreement, the terms of this Plan Document shall control.

Section 2. Definitions:

As used in the Plan, including this Section 2, references to one gender shall include the other, unless otherwise indicated by the context:

2.1 “Active Participant” means, with respect to any day or date, a Participant who is in Service on such day or date; provided, that a Participant shall cease to be an Active Participant (i) immediately upon a determination by the Committee that the Participant has ceased to be an Employee or Independent Contractor, or (ii) at the end of the Plan Year that the Committee determines the Participant no longer meets the eligibility requirements of the Plan.

 

2


2.2 “Adoption Agreement” means the written agreement pursuant to which the Employer adopts the Plan. The Adoption Agreement is a part of the Plan as applied to the Employer.

2.3 “Beneficiary” means the person, persons, entity or entities designated or determined pursuant to the provisions of Section 13 of the Plan.

2.4 “Board” means the Board of Directors of the Company, if the Company is a corporation. If the Company is not a corporation, “Board” shall mean the Company.

2.5 “Change in Control Event” means an event described in Section 409A(a)(2)(A)(v) of the Code (or any successor provision thereto) and the regulations thereunder.

2.6 “Committee” means the persons or entity designated in the Adoption Agreement to administer the Plan. If the Committee designated in the Adoption Agreement is unable to serve, the Employer shall satisfy the duties of the Committee provided for in Section 9.

2.7 “Company” means the company designated in the Adoption Agreement as such.

2.8 “Compensation” shall have the meaning designated in the Adoption Agreement.

2.9 “Crediting Date” means the date designated in the Adoption Agreement for crediting the amount of any Participant Deferral Credits or Employer Credits to the Deferred Compensation Account of a Participant.

 

3


2.10 “Deferred Compensation Account” means the account maintained with respect to each Participant under the Plan. The Deferred Compensation Account shall be credited with Participant Deferral Credits and Employer Credits, credited or debited for deemed investment gains or losses, and adjusted for payments in accordance with the rules and elections in effect under Section 8. The Deferred Compensation Account of a Participant shall include any In-Service or Education Account of the Participant, if applicable.

2.11 “Disabled” means Disabled within the meaning of Section 409A of the Code and the regulations thereunder. Generally, this means that the Participant is unable to engage in any substantial gainful activity by reason of any medically determinable physical or mental impairment which can be expected to result in death or can be expected to last for a continuous period of not less than 12 months, or is, by reason of any medically determinable physical or mental impairment which can be expected to result in death or can be expected to last for a continuous period of not less than 12 months, receiving income replacement benefits for a period of not less than three months under an accident and health plan covering Employees of the Employer.

2.12 “Education Account” is an In-Service Account which will be used by the Participant for educational purposes.

2.13 “Effective Date” shall be the date designated in the Adoption Agreement.

2.14 “Employee” means an individual in the Service of the Employer if the relationship between the individual and the Employer is the legal relationship of employer and employee. An individual shall cease to be an Employee upon the Employee’s separation from Service.

 

4


2.15 “Employer” means the Company, as identified in the Adoption Agreement, and any Participating Employer which adopts this Plan. An Employer may be a corporation, a limited liability company, a partnership or sole proprietorship.

2.16 “Employer Credits” means the amounts credited to the Participant’s Deferred Compensation Account by the Employer pursuant to the provisions of Section 4.2.

2.17 “Grandfathered Amounts” means, if applicable, the amounts that were deferred under the Plan and were earned and vested within the meaning of Section 409A of the Code and regulations thereunder as of December 31, 2004. Grandfathered Amounts shall be subject to the terms designated in the Adoption Agreement.

2.18 “Independent Contractor” means an individual in the Service of the Employer if the relationship between the individual and the Employer is not the legal relationship of employer and employee. An individual shall cease to be an Independent Contractor upon the termination of the Independent Contractor’s Service. An Independent Contractor shall include a director of the Employer who is not an Employee.

2.19 “In-Service Account” means a separate account to be kept for each Participant that has elected to take in-service distributions as described in Section 5.4. The In-Service Account shall be adjusted in the same manner and at the same time as the Deferred Compensation Account under Section 8 and in accordance with the rules and elections in effect under Section 8.

2.20 “Normal Retirement Age” of a Participant means the age designated in the Adoption Agreement.

 

5


2.21 “Participant” means with respect to any Plan Year an Employee or Independent Contractor who has been designated by the Committee as a Participant and who has entered the Plan or who has a Deferred Compensation Account under the Plan; provided that if the Participant is an Employee, the individual must be a highly compensated or management employee of the Employer within the meaning of Sections 201(2), 301(a)(3) and 401(a)(1) of ERISA.

2.22 “Participant Deferral Credits” means the amounts credited to the Participant’s Deferred Compensation Account by the Employer pursuant to the provisions of Section 4.1.

2.23 “Participating Employer” means any trade or business (whether or not incorporated) which adopts this Plan with the consent of the Company identified in the Adoption Agreement.

2.24 “Participation Agreement” means a written agreement entered into between a Participant and the Employer pursuant to the provisions of Section 4.1

2.25 “Performance-Based Compensation” means compensation where the amount of, or entitlement to, the compensation is contingent on the satisfaction of preestablished organizational or individual performance criteria relating to a performance period of at least twelve months. Organizational or individual performance criteria are considered preestablished if established in writing within 90 days after the commencement of the period of service to which the criteria relates, provided that the outcome is substantially uncertain at the time the criteria are established. Performance-based compensation may include payments based upon subjective performance criteria as provided in regulations and administrative guidance promulgated under Section 409A of the Code.

 

6


2.26 “Plan” means The Executive Nonqualified Excess Plan, as herein set out and as set out in the Adoption Agreement, or as duly amended. The name of the Plan as applied to the Employer shall be designated in the Adoption Agreement.

2.27 “Plan-Approved Domestic Relations Order” shall mean a judgment, decree, or order (including the approval of a property settlement agreement) which is:

2.27.1 Issued pursuant to a State’s domestic relations law;

2.27.2 Relates to the provision of child support, alimony payments or marital property rights to a Spouse, former Spouse, child or other dependent of the Participant;

2.27.3 Creates or recognizes the right of a Spouse, former Spouse, child or other dependent of the Participant to receive all or a portion of the Participant’s benefits under the Plan;

2.27.4 Requires payment to such person of their interest in the Participant’s benefits in a lump sum payment at a specified time that shall not result in an impermissible delay of payment under Section 409A of the Code;

2.27.5 Meets such other requirements established by the Committee; and

2.27.6 Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this Section, constitutes a “domestic relations order” as such term is defined in Section 414(p)(1)(B) of the Code.

2.28 “Plan Year” means the twelve-month period ending on the last day of the month designated in the Adoption Agreement; provided that the initial Plan Year may have fewer than twelve months.

2.29 “Qualifying Distribution Event” means (i) the Separation from Service of the Participant, (ii) the date the Participant becomes Disabled, (iii) the death of the Participant, (iv) the time specified by the Participant for an In-Service or Education Distribution, (v) a Change in Control Event, or (vi) an Unforeseeable Emergency, each to the extent provided in Section 5.

 

7


2.30 “Seniority Date” shall have the meaning designated in the Adoption Agreement.

2.31 “Separation from Service” or “Separates from Service” means a “separation from service” within the meaning of Section 409A of the Code.

2.32 “Service” means employment by the Employer as an Employee. For purposes of the Plan, the employment relationship is treated as continuing intact while the Employee is on military leave, sick leave, or other bona fide leave of absence if the period of such leave does not exceed six months, or if longer, so long as the Employee’s right to reemployment is provided either by statute or contract. If the Participant is an Independent Contractor, “Service” shall mean the period during which the contractual relationship (or, in the case of multiple contracts between the Employer and the Participant, any contractual relationship) exists between the Employer and the Participant. The contractual relationship is not terminated if the Participant anticipates a renewal of the contract or becomes an Employee.

2.33 “Service Bonus” means any bonus paid to a Participant by the Employer which is not Performance-Based Compensation.

2.34 “Specified Employee” means an employee who meets the requirements for key employee treatment under Section 416(i)(1)(A)(i), (ii) or (iii) of the Code (applied in accordance with the regulations thereunder and without regard to Section 416(i)(5) of the Code) at any time during the twelve-month period ending on December 31 of each year (the “identification date”). Unless binding corporate action is taken to establish different rules for determining Specified Employees for all plans of the Company and its controlled group members that are subject to Section 409A of the Code, the foregoing

 

8


rules and the other default rules under the regulations of Section 409A of the Code shall apply. If the person is a key employee as of any identification date, the person is treated as a Specified Employee for the twelve-month period beginning on the first day of the fourth month following the identification date.

2.35 “Spouse” means, except as otherwise provided in the Plan, a Participant’s spouse as such term is defined in section 7 of the Defense of Marriage Act of 1996. “Surviving Spouse” means the surviving Spouse of a Participant.

2.36 “Unforeseeable Emergency” means an “unforeseeable emergency” within the meaning of Section 409A of the Code.

2.37 “Years of Service” means each Plan Year of Service completed by the Participant. For vesting purposes, Years of Service shall be calculated from the date designated in the Adoption Agreement and Service shall be based on service with the Company and all Participating Employers.

Section 3. Participation:

The Committee in its discretion shall designate each Employee or Independent Contractor who is eligible to participate in the Plan. A Participant who separates from Service with the Employer and who later returns to Service will not be an Active Participant under the Plan except upon satisfaction of such terms and conditions as the Committee shall establish upon the Participant’s return to Service, whether or not the Participant shall have a balance remaining in the Deferred Compensation Account under the Plan on the date of the return to Service.

 

9


Section 4. Credits to Deferred Compensation Account:

4.1 Participant Deferral Credits. To the extent provided in the Adoption Agreement, each Active Participant may elect, by entering into a Participation Agreement with the Employer, to defer the receipt of Compensation from the Employer by a dollar amount or percentage specified in the Participation Agreement. The amount of Compensation the Participant elects to defer, the Participant Deferral Credit, shall be credited by the Employer to the Deferred Compensation Account maintained for the Participant pursuant to Section 8. The following special provisions shall apply with respect to the Participant Deferral Credits of a Participant:

4.1.1 The Employer shall credit to the Participant’s Deferred Compensation Account on each Crediting Date an amount equal to the total Participant Deferral Credit for the period ending on such Crediting Date.

4.1.2 An election pursuant to this Section 4.1 shall be made by the Participant by executing and delivering a Participation Agreement to the Committee. Except as otherwise provided in this Section 4.1, the Participation Agreement shall become effective with respect to such Participant as of the first day of January following the date such Participation Agreement is received by the Committee. A Participant’s election may be changed at any time prior to the last permissible date for making the election as permitted in this Section 4.1, and shall thereafter be irrevocable. The election of a Participant shall continue in effect for subsequent years until modified by the Participant as permitted in this Section 4.1.

4.1.3 A Participant may execute and deliver a Participation Agreement to the Committee within 30 days after the date the Participant first becomes eligible to participate in the Plan to be effective as of the first payroll period commencing immediately following the date the Participation Agreement is fully executed by the Participant. Whether a Participant is treated as newly eligible for participation under this Section shall be determined in accordance with Section 409A of the Code and the regulations thereunder, including (i) rules that treat all elective deferral account balance plans as one plan, and (ii) rules that treat a previously eligible employee as newly eligible if his benefits had been previously distributed or if he has been ineligible for 24 months. For Compensation that is earned based upon a specified performance period (for example, an annual bonus), where a deferral election is made under this Section but after the beginning of the performance period, the election will only apply to the portion of the Compensation equal to the total amount of the Compensation for the service period multiplied by the ratio of the number of days remaining in the performance period after the election over the total number of days in the performance period.

4.1.4 A Participant may unilaterally modify a Participation Agreement (either to terminate, increase or decrease the portion of his future Compensation which is subject to deferral within the percentage limits set forth in Section 4.1 of the Adoption Agreement) by providing a written modification of the Participation Agreement to the Committee. The modification shall become effective as of the first day of January following the date such written modification is received by the Committee.

 

10


4.1.5 If the Participant performed services continuously from the later of the beginning of the performance period or the date upon which the performance criteria are established through the date upon which the Participant makes an initial deferral election, a Participation Agreement relating to the deferral of Performance-Based Compensation may be executed and delivered to the Committee no later than the date which is 6 months prior to the end of the performance period, provided that in no event may an election to defer Performance-Based Compensation be made after such Compensation has become readily ascertainable.

4.1.6 If the Employer has a fiscal year other than the calendar year, Compensation relating to Service in the fiscal year of the Employer (such as a bonus based on the fiscal year of the Employer), of which no amount is paid or payable during the fiscal year, may be deferred at the Participant’s election if the election to defer is made not later than the close of the Employer’s fiscal year next preceding the first fiscal year in which the Participant performs any services for which such Compensation is payable.

4.1.7 Compensation payable after the last day of the Participant’s taxable year solely for services provided during the final payroll period containing the last day of the Participant’s taxable year (i.e., December 31) is treated for purposes of this Section 4.1 as Compensation for services performed in the subsequent taxable year.

4.1.8 The Committee may from time to time establish policies or rules consistent with the requirements of Section 409A of the Code to govern the manner in which Participant Deferral Credits may be made.

4.1.9 If a Participant becomes Disabled, or applies for and is eligible for a distribution on account of an Unforeseeable Emergency during a Plan Year or as required due to a hardship distribution under Section 1.401(k)-1(d)(3) of the Code, his deferral election shall be cancelled in accordance with Treasury Regulation section 1.409A-3(j)(4)(xii) or Treasury Regulation section 1.409A-3(j)(4)(viii), as applicable. Solely for purposes of this Section 4.1.9, a Participant is Disabled only if he or she has a disability described in Treasury Regulation section 1.409A-3(j)(4)(xii).

4.2 Employer Credits. If designated by the Employer in the Adoption Agreement, the Employer shall cause the Committee to credit to the Deferred Compensation Account of each Active Participant an Employer Credit as determined in accordance with the Adoption Agreement. A Participant must make distribution elections with respect to any Employer Credits credited to his Deferred Compensation Account by the deadline that would apply under Section 4.1 for distribution elections with respect to Participant Deferral Credits credited at the same time, on a Participation Agreement that is timely executed and delivered to the Committee pursuant to Section 4.1.

 

11


4.3 Deferred Compensation Account. All Participant Deferral Credits and Employer Credits shall be credited to the Deferred Compensation Account of the Participant as provided in Section 8.

Section 5. Qualifying Distribution Events:

5.1 Separation from Service. If the Participant Separates from Service with the Employer, the vested balance in the Deferred Compensation Account shall be paid to the Participant by the Employer as provided in Section 7. Notwithstanding the foregoing, no distribution shall be made earlier than six months after the date of Separation from Service (or, if earlier, the date of death) with respect to a Participant who as of the date of Separation from Service is a Specified Employee of a corporation the stock in which is traded on an established securities market or otherwise. Any payments to which such Specified Employee would be entitled during the first six months following the date of Separation from Service shall be accumulated and paid on the first day of the seventh month following the date of Separation from Service.

5.2 Disability. If the Employer designates in the Adoption Agreement that distributions are permitted under the Plan when a Participant becomes Disabled, and the Participant becomes Disabled while in Service, the vested balance in the Deferred Compensation Account shall be paid to the Participant by the Employer as provided in Section 7.

5.3 Death. If the Participant dies while in Service, the Employer shall pay a benefit to the Participant’s Beneficiary in the amount designated in the Adoption Agreement. Payment of such benefit shall be made by the Employer as provided in Section 7.

 

12


5.4 In-Service or Education Distributions. If the Employer designates in the Adoption Agreement that in-service or education distributions are permitted under the Plan, a Participant may designate in the Participation Agreement to have a specified amount credited to the Participant’s In-Service or Education Account for in-service or education distributions at the date specified by the Participant. In no event may an in-service or education distribution of an amount be made before the date that is two years after the first day of the year in which such amount was credited to the In-Service or Education Account. Notwithstanding the foregoing, if a Participant incurs a Qualifying Distribution Event prior to the date on which the entire balance in the In-Service or Education Account has been distributed, then the balance in the In-Service or Education Account on the date of the Qualifying Distribution Event shall be paid as provided under Section 7.1 for payments on such Qualifying Distribution Event.

5.5 Change in Control Event. If the Employer designates in the Adoption Agreement that distributions are permitted under the Plan upon the occurrence of a Change in Control Event, the Participant may designate in the Participation Agreement to have the vested balance in the Deferred Compensation Account paid to the Participant upon a Change in Control Event by the Employer as provided in Section 7.

 

13


5.6 Unforeseeable Emergency. If the Employer designates in the Adoption Agreement that distributions are permitted under the Plan upon the occurrence of an Unforeseeable Emergency event, a distribution from the Deferred Compensation Account may be made to a Participant in the event of an Unforeseeable Emergency, subject to the following provisions:

5.6.1 A Participant may, at any time prior to his Separation from Service for any reason, make application to the Committee to receive a distribution in a lump sum of all or a portion of the vested balance in the Deferred Compensation Account (determined as of the date the distribution, if any, is made under this Section 5.6) because of an Unforeseeable Emergency. A distribution because of an Unforeseeable Emergency shall not exceed the amount required to satisfy the Unforeseeable Emergency plus amounts necessary to pay taxes reasonably anticipated as a result of such distribution, after taking into account the extent to which the Unforeseeable Emergency may be relieved through reimbursement or compensation by insurance or otherwise or by liquidation of the Participant’s assets (to the extent the liquidation of such assets would not itself cause severe financial hardship) or by stopping current deferrals under the Plan pursuant to Section 4.1.9.

5.6.2 The Participant’s request for a distribution on account of Unforeseeable Emergency must be made in writing to the Committee. The request must specify the nature of the financial hardship, the total amount requested to be distributed from the Deferred Compensation Account, and the total amount of the actual expense incurred or to be incurred on account of the Unforeseeable Emergency.

5.6.3 If a distribution under this Section 5.6 is approved by the Committee, such distribution will be made as soon as practicable (but no later than 60 days) following the date it is approved. The processing of the request shall be completed as soon as practicable (but no later than 60 days) from the date on which the Committee receives the properly completed written request for a distribution on account of an Unforeseeable Emergency. If a Participant’s Separation from Service occurs after a request is approved in accordance with this Section 5.6.3, but prior to distribution of the full amount approved, the approval of the request shall be automatically null and void and the benefits which the Participant is entitled to receive under the Plan shall be distributed in accordance with the applicable distribution provisions of the Plan.

5.6.4 The Committee may from time to time adopt additional policies or rules consistent with the requirements of Section 409A of the Code to govern the manner in which such distributions may be made so that the Plan may be conveniently administered.

Section 6. Vesting:

A Participant shall be fully vested in the portion of his Deferred Compensation Account attributable to Participant Deferral Credits, and all income, gains and losses attributable thereto. A Participant shall become fully vested in the portion of his Deferred Compensation Account attributable to Employer Credits, and income, gains and losses

 

14


attributable thereto, in accordance with the vesting schedule and provisions designated by the Employer in the Adoption Agreement. If a Participant’s Deferred Compensation Account is not fully vested upon Separation from Service, the portion of the Deferred Compensation Account that is not fully vested shall thereupon be forfeited.

Section 7. Distribution Rules:

7.1 Payment Options. The Employer shall designate in the Adoption Agreement the payment options which may be elected by the Participant (lump sum, annual installments, or a combination of both). Different payment options may be made available for each Qualifying Distribution Event, and different payment options may be available for different types of Separations from Service, all as designated in the Adoption Agreement. For this purpose, a Separation from Service Upon a Change in Control Event means a Separation from Service within thirty (30) days following a Change in Control Event. The Participant shall elect in the Participation Agreement the method under which the vested balance in the Deferred Compensation Account will be distributed from among the designated payment options. The Participant may at such time elect a different method of payment for each Qualifying Distribution Event as specified in the Adoption Agreement. If the Participant is permitted by the Employer in the Adoption Agreement to elect different payment options and does not make a valid election, the vested balance in the Deferred Compensation Account will be distributed as a lump sum.

Notwithstanding the foregoing, if certain Qualifying Distribution Events occur prior to the date on which the vested balance of a Participant’s Deferred Compensation Account is completely paid pursuant to this Section 7.1 following the occurrence of certain initial Qualifying Distribution Events, the following rules apply:

7.1.1 If the initial Qualifying Distribution Event is a Separation from Service or Disability, and the Participant subsequently dies, the remaining unpaid vested balance of a Participant’s Deferred Compensation Account shall be paid as a lump sum.

 

15


7.1.2 If the initial Qualifying Distribution Event is a Change in Control Event, and any subsequent Qualifying Distribution Event occurs (except an In-Service or Education Distribution described in Section 2.29(iv)), the remaining unpaid vested balance of a Participant’s Deferred Compensation Account shall be paid as provided under Section 7.1 for payments on such subsequent Qualifying Distribution Event, provided that any such payments made as provided under Section 7.1 do not impermissibly defer payment of the remaining unpaid vested balance.

7.2 Timing of Payments. Payment shall be made in the manner elected by the Participant and shall commence as soon as practicable after (but no later than 60 days after) the distribution date elected for the Qualifying Distribution Event. In the event the Participant fails to make a valid election of the payment method, the distribution will be made in a single lump sum payment as soon as practicable after (but no later than 60 days after) the Qualifying Distribution Event. A payment may be further delayed to the extent permitted in accordance with regulations and guidance under Section 409A of the Code.

7.3 Installment Payments. If the Participant elects to receive installment payments upon a Qualifying Distribution Event, the payment of each annual installment shall be made on the anniversary of the date of the first installment payment, and the amount of the annual installment shall be adjusted on such anniversary for credits or debits to the Participant’s account pursuant to Section 8 of the Plan. Such adjustment shall be made by dividing the balance in the Deferred Compensation Account on such date by the number of annual installments remaining to be paid hereunder; provided that the last annual installment due under the Plan shall be the entire amount credited to the Participant’s account on the date of payment.

 

16


7.4 De Minimis Amounts. Notwithstanding any payment election made by the Participant, if the Employer designates a pre-determined de minimis amount in the Adoption Agreement, the vested balance in the Deferred Compensation Account of the Participant will be distributed in a single lump sum payment if at the time of a permitted Qualifying Distribution Event the vested balance does not exceed such pre-determined de minimis amount; provided, however, that such distribution will be made only where the Qualifying Distribution Event is a Separation from Service, death, Disability (if applicable) or Change in Control Event (if applicable). Such payment shall be made on or before the later of (i) December 31 of the calendar year in which the Qualifying Distribution Event occurs, or (ii) the date that is 2-1/2 months after the Qualifying Distribution Event occurs. In addition, the Employer may distribute a Participant’s vested balance at any time if the balance does not exceed the limit in Section 402(g)(1)(B) of the Code and results in the termination and liquidation of the Participant’s entire interest in the Plan and all agreements, methods, programs, or other arrangements that are treated as a single nonqualified deferred compensation plan for purposes of Treasury Regulation section 1.409A-1(c)(2).

7.5 Subsequent Elections. With the consent of the Committee, a Participant may delay or change the method of payment of the Deferred Compensation Account subject to the following requirements:

7.5.1 The new election may not take effect until at least 12 months after the date on which the new election is made.

7.5.2 If the new election relates to a payment for a Qualifying Distribution Event other than the death of the Participant, the Participant becoming Disabled, or an Unforeseeable Emergency, the new election must provide for the deferral of the payment for a period of at least five years from the date such payment would otherwise have been made.

7.5.3 If the new election relates to a payment from the In-Service or Education Account, the new election must be made at least 12 months prior to the date of the first scheduled payment from such account.

 

17


For purposes of this Section 7.5 and Section 7.6, a payment is each separately identified amount to which the Participant is entitled under the Plan; provided, that entitlement to a series of installment payments is treated as the entitlement to a single payment.

7.6 Acceleration Prohibited. The acceleration of the time or schedule of any payment due under the Plan is prohibited except as expressly provided in regulations and administrative guidance promulgated under Section 409A of the Code (such as accelerations for domestic relations orders and employment taxes). Generally, it is not an acceleration of the time or schedule of payment if the Employer waives or accelerates the vesting requirements applicable to a benefit under the Plan. In no event shall a Company decision to accelerate vesting be given effect where doing so would result in an acceleration of amounts being distributed that is not permitted under Section 409A of the Code.

Section 8. Accounts; Deemed Investment; Adjustments to Account:

8.1 Accounts. The Committee shall establish a book reserve account, entitled the “Deferred Compensation Account,” on behalf of each Participant. The Committee shall also establish an In-Service or Education Account as a part of the Deferred Compensation Account of each Participant, if applicable. The amount credited to the Deferred Compensation Account shall be adjusted pursuant to the provisions of Section 8.3.

8.2 Deemed Investments. The Deferred Compensation Account of a Participant shall be credited with an investment return determined as if the account were invested in one or more investment funds made available by the Committee. The Participant shall elect the investment funds in which his Deferred Compensation Account shall be deemed to be invested. Such election shall be made in the manner prescribed by

 

18


the Committee and shall take effect upon the entry of the Participant into the Plan. The investment election of the Participant shall remain in effect until a new election is made by the Participant. In the event the Participant fails for any reason to make an effective election of the investment return to be credited to his account, the investment return shall be determined by the Committee.

8.3 Adjustments to Deferred Compensation Account. With respect to each Participant who has a Deferred Compensation Account under the Plan, the amount credited to such account shall be adjusted by the following debits and credits, at the times and in the order stated:

8.3.1 The Deferred Compensation Account shall be debited each business day with the total amount of any payments made from such account since the last preceding business day to him or for his benefit. Unless otherwise specified by the Employer, each deemed investment fund will be debited pro-rata based on the value of the investment funds as of the end of the preceding business day.

8.3.2 The Deferred Compensation Account shall be credited on each Crediting Date with the total amount of any Participant Deferral Credits and Employer Credits to such account since the last preceding Crediting Date.

8.3.3 The Deferred Compensation Account shall be credited or debited on each day securities are traded on a national stock exchange with the amount of deemed investment gain or loss resulting from the performance of the investment funds elected by the Participant in accordance with Section 8.2. The amount of such deemed investment gain or loss shall be determined by the Committee and such determination shall be final and conclusive upon all concerned.

Section 9. Administration by Committee:

9.1 Membership of Committee. If the Committee consists of individuals appointed by the Board, they will serve at the pleasure of the Board. Any member of the Committee may resign, and his successor, if any, shall be appointed by the Board.

 

19


9.2 General Administration. The Committee shall be responsible for the operation and administration of the Plan and for carrying out its provisions. The Committee shall have the full authority and discretion to make, amend, interpret, and enforce all appropriate rules and regulations for the administration of this Plan and decide or resolve any and all questions, including interpretations of this Plan, as may arise in connection with this Plan. Any such action taken by the Committee shall be final and conclusive on any party. To the extent the Committee has been granted discretionary authority under the Plan, the Committee’s prior exercise of such authority shall not obligate it to exercise its authority in a like fashion thereafter. The Committee shall be entitled to rely conclusively upon all tables, valuations, certificates, opinions and reports furnished by any actuary, accountant, controller, counsel or other person employed or engaged by the Employer with respect to the Plan. The Committee may, from time to time, employ agents and delegate to such agents, including employees of the Employer, such administrative or other duties as it sees fit.

9.3 Indemnification. To the extent not covered by insurance, the Employer shall indemnify the Committee, each employee, officer, director, and agent of the Employer, and all persons formerly serving in such capacities, against any and all liabilities or expenses, including all legal fees relating thereto, arising in connection with the exercise of their duties and responsibilities with respect to the Plan, provided however that the Employer shall not indemnify any person for liabilities or expenses due to that person’s own gross negligence or willful misconduct.

Section 10. Contractual Liability, Trust:

10.1 Contractual Liability. Unless otherwise elected in the Adoption Agreement, the Company shall be obligated to make all payments hereunder. This obligation shall constitute a contractual liability of the Company to the Participants, and such payments shall be made from the general funds of the Company. The Company

 

20


shall not be required to establish or maintain any special or separate fund, or otherwise to segregate assets to assure that such payments shall be made, and the Participants shall not have any interest in any particular assets of the Company by reason of its obligations hereunder. To the extent that any person acquires a right to receive payment from the Company, such right shall be no greater than the right of an unsecured creditor of the Company.

10.2 Trust. The Employer may establish a trust to assist it in meeting its obligations under the Plan. Any such trust shall conform to the requirements of a grantor trust under Revenue Procedures 92-64 and 92-65 and at all times during the continuance of the trust the principal and income of the trust shall be subject to claims of general creditors of the Employer under federal and state law. The establishment of such a trust would not be intended to cause Participants to realize current income on amounts contributed thereto, and the trust would be so interpreted and administered.

Section 11. Allocation of Responsibilities:

The persons responsible for the Plan and the duties and responsibilities allocated to each are as follows:

11.1 Board.

 

  (i) To amend the Plan;

 

  (ii) To appoint and remove members of the Committee; and

 

  (iii) To terminate the Plan as permitted in Section 14.

11.2 Committee.

 

  (i) To designate Participants;

 

  (ii) To interpret the provisions of the Plan and to determine the rights of the Participants under the Plan, except to the extent otherwise provided in Section 16 relating to claims procedure;

 

21


  (iii) To administer the Plan in accordance with its terms, except to the extent powers to administer the Plan are specifically delegated to another person or persons as provided in the Plan;

 

  (iv) To account for the amount credited to the Deferred Compensation Account of a Participant;

 

  (v) To direct the Employer in the payment of benefits;

 

  (vi) To file such reports as may be required with the United States Department of Labor, the Internal Revenue Service and any other government agency to which reports may be required to be submitted from time to time; and

 

  (vii) To administer the claims procedure to the extent provided in Section 16.

Section 12. Benefits Not Assignable; Facility of Payments:

12.1 Benefits Not Assignable. No portion of any benefit credited or paid under the Plan with respect to any Participant shall be subject in any manner to anticipation, alienation, sale, transfer, assignment, pledge, encumbrance or charge, and any attempt so to anticipate, alienate, sell, transfer, assign, pledge, encumber or charge the same shall be void, nor shall any portion of such benefit be in any manner payable to any assignee, receiver or any one trustee, or be liable for his debts, contracts, liabilities, engagements or torts. Notwithstanding the foregoing, in the event that all or any portion of the benefit of a Participant is transferred to the former Spouse of the Participant incident to a divorce, the Committee shall maintain such amount for the benefit of the former Spouse until distributed in the manner required by a Plan-Approved Domestic Relations Order as defined in Section 2.27 and in accordance with Section 12.2. The former Spouse shall be entitled to the same rights as the Participant with respect to such benefit.

Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this Section 12.1 or in Section 12.2, (a) if a Plan-Approved Domestic Relations Order would result in an acceleration of the time or schedule of a payment under the Plan, then such Plan-Approved Domestic Relations Order shall be respected, but (b) if a Plan-Approved Domestic Relations Order would defer or delay the time or schedule of a payment under the Plan, then such payment shall commence at the time and in the form that it would otherwise be paid under the Plan.

 

22


12.2 Plan-Approved Domestic Relations Orders. The Committee shall establish procedures for determining whether an order directed to the Plan is a Plan-Approved Domestic Relations Order. If the Committee determines that an order is a Plan-Approved Domestic Relations Order, the Committee shall cause the payment of amounts pursuant to or segregate a separate account as provided by (and to prevent any payment or act which might be inconsistent with) the Plan-Approved Domestic Relations Order, to the extent permitted by Section 12.1.

12.3 Payments to Minors and Others. If any individual entitled to receive a payment under the Plan shall be physically, mentally or legally incapable of receiving or acknowledging receipt of such payment, the Committee, upon the receipt of satisfactory evidence of his incapacity and satisfactory evidence that another person or institution is maintaining him and that no guardian or committee has been appointed for him, may cause any payment otherwise payable to him to be made to such person or institution so maintaining him. Payment to such person or institution shall be in full satisfaction of all claims by or through the Participant to the extent of the amount thereof.

Section 13. Beneficiary:

The Participant’s beneficiary shall be the person, persons, entity or entities designated by the Participant on the beneficiary designation form provided by and filed with the Committee or its designee. If the Participant does not designate a beneficiary, the beneficiary shall be his Surviving Spouse. If the Participant does not designate a beneficiary and has no Surviving Spouse, the beneficiary shall be the Participant’s estate.

 

23


The designation of a beneficiary may be changed or revoked only by filing a new beneficiary designation form with the Committee or its designee. If a beneficiary (the “primary beneficiary”) is receiving or is entitled to receive payments under the Plan and dies before receiving all of the payments due him, the balance to which he is entitled shall be paid to the contingent beneficiary, if any, named in the Participant’s current beneficiary designation form. If there is no contingent beneficiary, the balance shall be paid to the estate of the primary beneficiary. Any beneficiary may disclaim all or any part of any benefit to which such beneficiary shall be entitled hereunder by filing a written disclaimer with the Committee before payment of such benefit is to be made. Such a disclaimer shall be made in a form satisfactory to the Committee and shall be irrevocable when filed. Any benefit disclaimed shall be payable from the Plan in the same manner as if the beneficiary who filed the disclaimer had predeceased the Participant.

Section 14. Amendment and Termination of Plan:

The Company may amend any provision of the Plan or terminate the Plan at any time; provided, that in no event shall such amendment or termination reduce the balance in any Participant’s Deferred Compensation Account as of the date of such amendment or termination, nor shall any such amendment affect the terms of the Plan relating to the payment of such Deferred Compensation Account. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the following special provisions shall apply:

14.1 Termination in the Discretion of the Employer. Except as otherwise provided in Sections 14.2, the Company in its discretion may terminate the Plan and distribute benefits to Participants subject to the following requirements and any others specified under Section 409A of the Code:

14.1.1 All arrangements sponsored by the Employer that would be aggregated with the Plan under Section 1.409A-1(c) of the Treasury Regulations are terminated.

 

24


14.1.2 No payments other than payments that would be payable under the terms of the Plan if the termination had not occurred are made within 12 months of the termination date.

14.1.3 All benefits under the Plan are paid within 24 months of the termination date.

14.1.4 The Employer does not adopt a new arrangement that would be aggregated with the Plan under Section 1.409A-1(c) of the Treasury Regulations providing for the deferral of compensation at any time within 3 years following the date of termination of the Plan.

14.1.5 The termination does not occur proximate to a downturn in the financial health of the Employer.

14.2 Termination Upon Change in Control Event. If the Company terminates the Plan within thirty days preceding or twelve months following a Change in Control Event, the Deferred Compensation Account of each Participant shall become fully vested and payable to the Participant in a lump sum within twelve months following the date of plan termination, subject to the requirements of Section 409A of the Code and Treasury Regulation section 1.409A-3(j)(4)(ix)(B).

Section 15. Communication to Participants:

The Employer shall make a copy of the Plan available for inspection by Participants and their beneficiaries during reasonable hours at the principal office of the Employer.

Section 16. Claims Procedure:

The following claims procedure shall apply with respect to the Plan:

16.1 Filing of a Claim for Benefits. If a Participant or Beneficiary (the “claimant”) believes that he is entitled to benefits under the Plan which are not being paid to him or which are not being accrued for his benefit, he shall file a written claim therefore with the Committee.

 

25


16.2 Notification to Claimant of Decision. Within 90 days after receipt of a claim by the Committee (or within 180 days if special circumstances require an extension of time), the Committee shall notify the claimant of the decision with regard to the claim. In the event of such special circumstances requiring an extension of time, there shall be furnished to the claimant prior to expiration of the initial 90-day period written notice of the extension, which notice shall set forth the special circumstances and the date by which the decision shall be furnished. If such claim shall be wholly or partially denied, notice thereof shall be in writing and worded in a manner calculated to be understood by the claimant, and shall set forth: (i) the specific reason or reasons for the denial; (ii) specific reference to pertinent provisions of the Plan on which the denial is based; (iii) a description of any additional material or information necessary for the claimant to perfect the claim and an explanation of why such material or information is necessary; and (iv) an explanation of the procedure for review of the denial and the time limits applicable to such procedures, including a statement of the claimant’s right to bring a civil action under ERISA following an adverse benefit determination on review. Notwithstanding the foregoing, if the claim relates to a disability determination, the Committee shall notify the claimant of the decision within 45 days (which may be extended for an additional 30 days if required by special circumstances).

 

26


16.3 Procedure for Review. Within 60 days following receipt by the claimant of notice denying his claim, in whole or in part, or, if such notice shall not be given, within 60 days following the latest date on which such notice could have been timely given, the claimant may appeal denial of the claim by filing a written application for review with the Committee. Following such request for review, the Committee shall fully and fairly review the decision denying the claim. Prior to the decision of the Committee, the claimant shall be given an opportunity to review pertinent documents and to submit issues and comments in writing.

16.4 Decision on Review. The decision on review of a claim denied in whole or in part by the Committee shall be made in the following manner:

16.4.1 Within 60 days following receipt by the Committee of the request for review (or within 120 days if special circumstances require an extension of time), the Committee shall notify the claimant in writing of its decision with regard to the claim. In the event of such special circumstances requiring an extension of time, written notice of the extension shall be furnished to the claimant prior to the commencement of the extension. Notwithstanding the foregoing, if the claim relates to a disability determination, the Committee shall notify the claimant of the decision within 45 days (which may be extended for an additional 45 days if required by special circumstances).

16.4.2 With respect to a claim that is denied in whole or in part, the decision on review shall set forth specific reasons for the decision, shall be written in a manner calculated to be understood by the claimant, and shall set forth:

 

  (i) the specific reason or reasons for the adverse determination;

 

  (ii) specific reference to pertinent Plan provisions on which the adverse determination is based;

 

  (iii) a statement that the claimant is entitled to receive, upon request and free of charge, reasonable access to, and copies of, all documents, records, and other information relevant to the claimant’s claim for benefits; and

 

  (iv) a statement describing any voluntary appeal procedures offered by the Plan and the claimant’s right to obtain the information about such procedures, as well as a statement of the claimant’s right to bring an action under ERISA section 502(a).

16.4.3 The decision of the Committee shall be final and conclusive.

 

27


16.5 Action by Authorized Representative of Claimant. All actions set forth in this Section 16 to be taken by the claimant may likewise be taken by a representative of the claimant duly authorized by him to act in his behalf on such matters. The Committee may require such evidence as either may reasonably deem necessary or advisable of the authority to act of any such representative.

Section 17. Miscellaneous Provisions:

17.1 Set off. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Plan, the Employer may reduce the amount of any payment otherwise payable to or on behalf of a Participant hereunder (net of any required withholdings) at the time payment is due by the amount of any loan, cash advance, extension of credit or other obligation of the Participant to the Employer that is incurred in the ordinary course of the service relationship between the Participant and the Employer, and the Participant shall be deemed to have consented to such reduction. Such reduction must be made on an after-tax basis and at the same time and in the same amount as the amount otherwise would have been due and collected from the Participant. In addition, the Employer may at any time offset a Participant’s Deferral Compensation Account by an amount equal to such amount (but not greater than $5,000 in a taxable year of the Employer) to collect any such amount in accordance with the requirements of Section 409A of the Code. Such offset must be made at the same time and in the same amount as the amount otherwise would have been due and collected from the Participant.

17.2 Notices. Each Participant who is not in Service and each Beneficiary shall be responsible for furnishing the Committee or its designee with his current address for the mailing of notices and benefit payments. Any notice required or permitted to be given to such Participant or Beneficiary shall be deemed given if directed to such address and

 

28


mailed by regular United States mail, first class, postage prepaid. If any check mailed to such address is returned as undeliverable to the addressee, mailing of checks will be suspended until the Participant or Beneficiary furnishes the proper address. This provision shall not be construed as requiring the mailing of any notice or notification otherwise permitted to be given by posting or by other publication.

17.3 Lost Distributees. A benefit shall be deemed forfeited if the Committee is unable to locate the Participant or Beneficiary to whom payment is due on or before the fifth anniversary of the date payment is to be made or commence; provided, that the deemed investment rate of return pursuant to Section 8.2 shall cease to be applied to the Participant’s account following the first anniversary of such date; provided further, however, that such benefit shall be reinstated if a valid claim is made by or on behalf of the Participant or Beneficiary for all or part of the forfeited benefit.

17.4 Reliance on Data. The Employer and the Committee shall have the right to rely on any data provided by the Participant or by any Beneficiary. Representations of such data shall be binding upon any party seeking to claim a benefit through a Participant, and the Employer and the Committee shall have no obligation to inquire into the accuracy of any representation made at any time by a Participant or Beneficiary.

17.5 Receipt and Release for Payments. Subject to the provisions of Section 17.1, any payment made from the Plan to or with respect to any Participant or Beneficiary, or pursuant to a disclaimer by a Beneficiary, shall, to the extent thereof, be in full satisfaction of all claims hereunder against the Plan and the Employer with respect to the Plan. The recipient of any payment from the Plan may be required by the Committee, as a condition precedent to such payment, to execute a receipt and release

 

29


with respect thereto in such form as shall be acceptable to the Committee, subject to the following sentences of this Section 17.5. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in the Plan, to the extent the Employer requires a recipient of any payment from the Plan to execute a receipt and release with respect to a payment under this Plan, then the receipt and release must be signed and become irrevocable on or before the 60 th day following the relevant Qualifying Distribution Event, and payment will be made on such 60 th day.

If such receipt and release is not signed or does not become irrevocable on or before such 60 th day, the recipient shall forfeit the payment.

17.6 Headings. The headings and subheadings of the Plan have been inserted for convenience of reference and are to be ignored in any construction of the provisions hereof.

17.7 Continuation of Employment. The establishment of the Plan shall not be construed as conferring any legal or other rights upon any Employee or any persons for continuation of employment, nor shall it interfere with the right of the Employer to discharge any Employee or to deal with him without regard to the effect thereof under the Plan.

17.8 Merger or Consolidation; Assumption of Plan. No Employer shall consolidate or merge into or with another corporation or entity, or transfer all or substantially all of its assets to another corporation, partnership, trust or other entity (a “Successor Entity”) unless such Successor Entity shall assume the rights, obligations and liabilities of the Employer under the Plan and upon such assumption, the Successor Entity shall become obligated to perform the terms and conditions of the Plan. Nothing herein shall prohibit the assumption of the obligations and liabilities of the Employer under the Plan by any Successor Entity.

 

30


17.9 Construction. The Employer shall designate in the Adoption Agreement the state according to whose laws the provisions of the Plan shall be construed and enforced, except to the extent that such laws are superseded by ERISA and the applicable requirements of the Code.

17.10 Taxes. The Employer or other payor may withhold a benefit payment under the Plan or a Participant’s wages, or the Employer may reduce a Participant’s Account balance, in order to meet any federal, state, or local or employment tax withholding obligations with respect to Plan benefits, as permitted under Section 409A of the Code. The Employer or other payor shall report Plan payments and other Plan-related information to the appropriate governmental agencies as required under applicable laws.

Section 18. Transition Rules:

This Section 18 does not apply to plans newly established on or after January 1, 2009.

18.1 2005 Election Termination. Notwithstanding Section 4.1.4, at any time during 2005, a Participant may terminate a Participation Agreement, or modify a Participation Agreement to reduce the amount of Compensation subject to the deferral election, so long as the Compensation subject to the terminated or modified Participation Agreement is includible in the income of the Participant in 2005 or, if later, in the taxable year in which the amounts are earned and vested.

18.2 2005 Deferral Election. The requirements of Section 4.1.2 relating to the timing of the Participation Agreement shall not apply to any deferral elections made on or before March 15, 2005, provided that (a) the amounts to which the deferral election relate have not been paid or become payable at the time of the election, (b) the Plan was in

 

31


existence on or before December 31, 2004, (c) the election to defer compensation is made in accordance with the terms of the Plan as in effect on December 31, 2005 (other than a requirement to make a deferral election after March 15, 2005), and (d) the Plan is otherwise operated in accordance with the requirements of Section 409A of the Code.

18.3 2005 Termination of Participation; Distribution. Notwithstanding anything in this Plan to the contrary, at any time during 2005, a Participant may terminate his or her participation in the Plan and receive a distribution of his Deferred Compensation Account balance on account of that termination, so long as the full amount of such distribution is includible in the Participant’s income in 2005 or, if later, in the taxable year of the Participant in which the amount is earned and vested.

18.4 Payment Elections. Notwithstanding the provisions of Sections 7.1 or 7.5 of the Plan, a Participant may elect on or before December 31, 2008, the time or form of payment of amounts subject to Section 409A of the Code provided that such election applies only to amounts that would not otherwise be payable in the year of the election and does not cause an amount to paid in the year of the election that would not otherwise be payable in such year.

 

/s/ Eric L. Marhoun
By: Eric L. Marhoun
12/31/10

 

32

Exhibit 10.17

NOTE: Execution of this Adoption Agreement creates a legal liability of the Employer with significant tax consequences to the Employer and Participants. The Employer should obtain legal and tax advice from its professional advisors before adopting the Plan. Principal Life Insurance Company disclaims all liability for the legal and tax consequences which result from the elections made by the Employer in this Adoption Agreement. In the event of any conflict in the terms of this Adoption Agreement and the Plan Document, the terms of the Plan Document shall control.

THE EXECUTIVE NONQUALIFIED “EXCESS” PLAN

ADOPTION AGREEMENT

THIS AGREEMENT is the adoption by Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc. (formerly known as Old Mutual U.S. Life Holdings, Inc.) (the “Company”) of the Executive Nonqualified Excess Plan (“Plan”).

W I T N E S S E T H:

WHEREAS, the Company desires to adopt the Plan as an unfunded, nonqualified deferred compensation plan; and

WHEREAS, the provisions of the Plan are intended to comply with the requirements of Section 409A of the Code and the regulations thereunder and shall apply to amounts subject to section 409A; and

WHEREAS, the Company has been advised by Principal Life Insurance Company to obtain legal and tax advice from its professional advisors before adopting the Plan,

NOW, THEREFORE, the Company hereby adopts the Plan in accordance with the terms and conditions set forth in this Adoption Agreement:

ARTICLE I

Terms used in this Adoption Agreement shall have the same meaning as in the Plan, unless some other meaning is expressly herein set forth. The Employer hereby represents and warrants that the Plan has been adopted by the Employer upon proper authorization and the Employer hereby elects to adopt the Plan for the benefit of its Participants as referred to in the Plan. By the execution of this Adoption Agreement, the Employer hereby agrees to be bound by the terms of the Plan.

ARTICLE II

The Employer hereby makes the following designations or elections for the purpose of the Plan:

 

2.6    Committee:     The duties of the Committee set forth in the Plan shall be satisfied by:
   ___    (a)    Company.
   XX    (b)    The administrative committee appointed by the Board to serve at the pleasure of the Board.
   ___    (c)    Board.
   ___    (d)    Other (specify): ____________________________________________________.


2.8    Compensation: The “Compensation” of a Participant shall mean all of a Participant’s:
   XX    (a)    Base salary.
   ___    (b)    Service Bonus.
   XX    (c)    Performance-Based Compensation earned in a period of 12 months or more.
   ___    (d)    Commissions.
   ___    (e)    Compensation received as an Independent Contractor reportable on Form 1099.
   XX    (f)    Other: Sales Incentive Plan Compensation and Long Term Incentive Plan Compensation .
2.9    Crediting Date: The Deferred Compensation Account of a Participant shall be credited with the amount of any Participant Deferral to such account at the time designated below:
   ___    (a)    The last business day of each Plan Year.
   ___    (b)    The last business day of each calendar quarter during the Plan Year.
   ___    (c)    The last business day of each month during the Plan Year.
   ___    (d)    The last business day of each payroll period during the Plan Year.
   ___    (e)    Each pay day as reported by the Employer.
   XX    (f)    Any business day on which Participant Deferrals are received by the Provider.
   ___    (g)    Other: __________________________________________________.

2.13

   Effective Date:
   ___    (a)    This is a newly-established Plan, and the Effective Date of the Plan is __________________________.
   XX    (b)    This is an amendment and restatement of a plan named See Exhibit C with an effective date of See Exhibit C that was amended and restated on See Exhibit C . The Effective Date of this amended and restated Plan is See Exhibit C . This is amendment number See Exhibit C .
        

___        (i)             All amounts in Deferred Compensation Accounts shall be subject to the provisions of this amended and restated Plan.

        

XX         (ii)            Any Grandfathered Amounts shall be subject to the Plan rules in effect on October 3, 2004.

2.20

   Normal Retirement Age: The Normal Retirement Age of a Participant shall be:
   XX    (a)    Age 65 .

 

2


   ___    (b)    The later of age ___ or the ___ anniversary of the participation commencement date. The participation commencement date is the first day of the first Plan Year in which the Participant commenced participation in the Plan.
   ___    (c)    Other: ___________________________________________________.

2.23

   Participating Employer(s): As of the Effective Date, the following Participating Employer(s) are parties to the Plan:

 

Employer Name

  

Address

  

Telephone No.

  

EIN

Fidelity & Guaranty Life

Holdings, Inc.

   1001 Fleet Street, Baltimore, MD 21202, 7th Floor    (410) 895-0100    48-1245662

Fidelity & Guaranty Life

Business Services, Inc.

   1001 Fleet Street, Baltimore, MD 21202, 7th Floor    (410) 895-0100    43-1914674

Fidelity & Guaranty Life

Insurance Agency, Inc.

   1001 Fleet Street, Baltimore, MD 21202, 7th Floor    (410) 895-0100    52-1387769

Fidelity & Guaranty Life

Insurance Company

   1001 Fleet Street, Baltimore, MD 21202, 7th Floor    (410) 895-0100    52-6033321

Fidelity & Guaranty Life

Insurance Company of

New York

   2500 Westchester Avenue, Suite 200, Purchase, NY 10577       13-1972800

 

2.26    Plan: The name of the Plan is The Executive Nonqualified Deferred Compensation Plan of Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc..
2.28    Plan Year: The Plan Year shall end each year on the last day of the month of December .
2.30    Seniority Date: The date on which a Participant has:
   XX    (a)    Attained age 65 .
   ___    (b)    Completed ___ Years of Service from First Date of Service.
   ___    (c)    Attained age ___ and completed ___ Years of Service from First Date of Service.
   ___    (d)    Attained an age as elected by the Participant.
   ___    (e)    Not applicable — distribution elections for Separation from Service are not based on Seniority Date.
4.1    Participant Deferral Credits: Subject to the limitations in Section 4.1 of the Plan, a Participant may elect to have his Compensation (as selected in Section 2.8 of this Adoption Agreement) deferred within the annual limits below by the following percentage or amount as designated in writing to the Committee:
   XX    (a)   

Base salary:

 

minimum deferral: _______%

maximum deferral: $______ or 50 %

 

3


   ___    (b)   

Service Bonus:

 

minimum deferral: _______%

maximum deferral: $______ or            %

   XX    (c)   

Performance-Based Compensation:

 

minimum deferral: _______%

maximum deferral: $______ or 100 %

   ___    (d)   

Commissions:

 

minimum deferral: _______%

maximum deferral: $______ or ____%

   ___    (e)   

Form 1099 Compensation:

 

minimum deferral: _______%

maximum deferral: $______ or ____%

   XX    (f)   

Other: Sales Incentive Plan Compensation and Long Term Incentive Plan Compensation:

 

minimum deferral: _______%

maximum deferral: $______ or 100 %

   ___    (g)    Participant deferrals not allowed.
4.2    Employer Credits: Employer Credits will be made in the following manner:
   XX    (a)    Employer Discretionary Credits: The Employer may make discretionary credits to the Deferred Compensation Account of each Active Participant in an amount determined as follows:
        

XX         (i)             An amount determined each Plan Year by the Employer. Also See Exhibit D .

        

___        (ii)            Other: ______________________________________________.

   ___    (b)    Other Employer Credits: The Employer may make other credits to the Deferred Compensation Account of each Active Participant in an amount determined as follows:
        

___        (i)             An amount determined each Plan Year by the Employer

        

___        (ii)            Other: __________________.

   ___    (c)    Employer Credits not allowed.
5.2    Disability of a Participant:
   ___    (a)    Participants may elect upon initial enrollment to have accounts distributed upon becoming Disabled.
   XX    (b)    Participants may not elect to have accounts distributed upon becoming Disabled.

 

4


5.3

   Death of a Participant: If the Participant dies while in Service, the Employer shall pay a benefit to the Beneficiary in an amount equal to the vested balance in the Deferred Compensation Account of the Participant determined as of the date payments to the Beneficiary commence, plus:
   ___    (a)    An amount to be determined by the Committee.
   ___    (b)    Other: ______________________________________________.
   XX    (c)    No additional benefits.
5.4    In-Service or Education Distributions: In-Service and Education Accounts are permitted under the Plan:
   XX — Also See Exhibit A (a) In-Service Accounts are allowed with respect to:
        

___       Participant Deferral Credits only.

        

___       Employer Credits only.

        

XX        Participant Deferral and Employer Credits.

         In-service distributions may be made in the following manner:
        

XX        Single lump sum payment.

        

___       Annual installments over a term certain not to exceed ___ years.

         Education Accounts are allowed with respect to:
        

___       Participant Deferral Credits only.

        

___       Employer Credits only.

        

XX        Participant Deferral and Employer Credits.

         Education Accounts may be made in the following manner:
        

XX        Single lump sum payment.

        

XX        Annual installments over a term certain not to exceed 6   years.

         If applicable, amounts not vested at the time payments due under this Section cease will be:
        

___       Forfeited.

        

___       Distributed at Separation from Service if vested at that time.

5.5    Change in Control Event:
   XX    (a)    Participants may elect upon initial enrollment to have accounts distributed upon a Change in Control Event.
   ___    (b)    Participants may not elect to have accounts distributed upon a Change in Control Event.
5.6    Unforeseeable Emergency Event:
   XX    (a)    Participants may apply to have accounts distributed upon an Unforeseeable Emergency event.
   ___    (b)    Participants may not apply to have accounts distributed upon a Unforeseeable Emergency event.

 

5


6.    Vesting: An Active Participant shall be fully vested in the Employer Credits made to the Deferred Compensation Account upon the first to occur of the following events:
   XX    (a)    Normal Retirement Age.
   XX    (b)    Death.
   XX    (c)    Disability.
   ___    (d)    Change in Control Event.
   ___    (e)    Other: ________________________________________________.
   XX    (f)    Satisfaction of the vesting requirement as specified below:
      XX    Employer Discretionary Credits:
        

___        (i)             Immediate 100% vesting.

        

___        (ii)            100% vesting after ___ Years of Service.

        

___        (iii)           100% vesting at age ___.

        

XX         (iv)            Number of Years of Service                      Vested Percentage

                                                      Less than 1                                                      0 %
                                                                      1                                                     20 %
                                                                      2                                                     40 %
                                                                      3                                                     60 %
                                                                      4                                                     80 %
                                                                      5 or more                                     100 %
                                                                      6                                                          %
                                                                      7                                                        %
                                                                      8                                                        %
                                                                      9                                                        %
                                                                     10                                                        %
         For this purpose, Years of Service of a Participant shall be calculated from the date designated below:
        

XX         (1)            First Day of Service.

        

___        (2)            Effective Date of Plan Participation.

        

___        (3)            Each Crediting Date. Under this option (3), each Employer Credit shall vest based on the Years of Service of a Participant from the Crediting Date on which each Employer Discretionary Credit is made to his or her Deferred Compensation Account.

 

6


      ___    Other Employer Credits:
        

___        (i)             Immediate 100% vesting.

        

___        (ii)            100% vesting after ___ Years of Service.

        

___        (iii)           100% vesting at age ___.

        

___        (iv)            Number of Years of Service                      Vested Percentage

                                                       Less than 1                                                 ___%
                                                                       1                                                 ___%
                                                                       2                                                 ___%
                                                                       3                                                 ___%
                                                                       4                                                 ___%
                                                                       5                                                 ___%
                                                                       6                                                 ___%
                                                                       7                                                 ___%
                                                                       8                                                 ___%
                                                                       9                                                 ___%
                                                                      10 or more                                  ___%
         For this purpose, Years of Service of a Participant shall be calculated from the date designated below:
        

___        (1)          First Day of Service.

        

___        (2)          Effective Date of Plan Participation.

        

___        (3)          Each Crediting Date. Under this option (3), each Employer Credit shall vest based on the Years of Service of a Participant from the Crediting Date on which each Employer Discretionary Credit is made to his or her Deferred Compensation Account.

7.1    Payment Options: Any benefit payable under the Plan upon a permitted Qualifying Distribution Event may be made to the Participant or his Beneficiary (as applicable) in any of the following payment forms, as selected by the Participant in the Participation Agreement:
   (a)    Separation from Service prior to Seniority Date, or Separation from Service if Seniority Date is Not Applicable
      XX   

(i)         A lump sum.

     

XX

  

(ii)       Annual installments over a term certain as elected by the Participant not to exceed 5 years. Distribution shall commence on the first business day of the calendar quarter following the date of the Qualifying Distribution Event and shall occur annually thereafter.

      XX   

(iii)       Other: See Exhibit B

   (b)    Separation from Service on or After Seniority Date, If Applicable
      XX   

(i)          A lump sum.

 

7


      XX   

(ii)        Annual installments over a term certain as elected by the Participant not to exceed 5 years. Distribution shall commence on the first business day of the calendar quarter following the date of the Qualifying Distribution Event and shall occur annually thereafter.

      XX   

(iii)       Other: See Exhibit B

   (c)    Separation from Service Within Thirty Days Following a Change in Control Event
      XX   

(i)         A lump sum.

      XX   

(ii)        Annual installments over a term certain as elected by the Participant not to exceed 5 years. Distribution shall commence on the first business day of the calendar quarter following the date of the Qualifying Distribution Event and shall occur annually thereafter.

      XX   

(iii)       Other: See Exhibit B

   (d)    Death
      XX   

(i)         A lump sum.

      XX   

(ii)        Annual installments over a term certain as elected by the Participant not to exceed 5 years. Distribution shall commence on the first business day of the calendar quarter following the date of the Qualifying Distribution Event and shall occur annually thereafter.

      XX   

(iii)       Other: See Exhibit B

   (e)    Disability
      ___   

(i)         A lump sum.

      ___   

(ii)        Annual installments over a term certain as elected by the Participant not to exceed 5 years. Distribution shall commence on the first business day of the calendar quarter following the date of the Qualifying Distribution Event and shall occur annually thereafter.

      ___   

(iii)       Other: _______________

      If applicable, amounts not vested at the time payments due under this Section cease will be:
      ___    Forfeited.
      ___    Distributed at Separation from Service if vested at that time.
   (f)    Change in Control Event
      XX   

(i)         A lump sum.

      XX   

(ii)        Annual installments over a term certain as elected by the Participant not to exceed 5 years. Distribution shall commence on the first business day of the calendar quarter following the date of the Qualifying Distribution Event and shall occur annually thereafter.

 

8


      XX   

(iii)       Other: See Exhibit B

      If applicable, amounts not vested at the time payments due under this Section cease will be:
      ___    Forfeited.
      XX    Distributed at Separation from Service if vested at that time.
7.4    De Minimis Amounts.
   XX    (a)    Notwithstanding any payment election made by the Participant, the vested balance in the Deferred Compensation Account of the Participant will be distributed in a single lump sum payment at the time designated under the Plan if at the time of a permitted Qualifying Distribution Event that is either a Separation from Service, death, Disability (if applicable) or Change in Control Event (if applicable) the vested balance does not exceed $ 25,000 . In addition, the Employer may distribute a Participant’s vested balance at any time if the balance does not exceed the limit in Section 402(g)(1)(B) of the Code and results in the termination and liquidation of the Participant’s entire interest in the Plan and all agreements, methods, programs, or other arrangements that are treated as a single nonqualified deferred compensation plan for purposes of Treasury Regulation section 1.409A-1(c)(2).
   ___    (b)    There shall be no pre-determined de minimis amount under the Plan; however, the Employer may distribute a Participant’s vested balance at any time if the balance does not exceed the limit in Section 402(g)(1)(B) of the Code and results in the termination and liquidation of the Participant’s entire interest in the Plan and all agreements, methods, programs, or other arrangements that are treated as a single nonqualified deferred compensation plan for purposes of Treasury Regulation section 1.409A-1(c)(2).
10.1    Contractual Liability: Liability for payments under the Plan shall be the responsibility of the:
   XX    (a)    Company.
   ___    (b)    Employer or Participating Employer who employed the Participant when amounts were deferred.
14.    Amendment and Termination of Plan: Notwithstanding any provision in this Adoption Agreement or the Plan to the contrary, Section 5.4 of the Plan shall be amended to add to the end thereof the text provided in the attached Exhibit A .
   ___    There are no amendments to the Plan.
17.9    Construction: The provisions of the Plan shall be construed and enforced according to the laws of the State of Delaware , except to the extent that such laws are superseded by ERISA and the applicable provisions of the Code.

 

9


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this Agreement has been executed as of the day and year stated below.

 

Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc.

Name of Employer

By:    
  Authorized Person
Date    

 

10


EXHIBIT A

The following shall be added to the end of Section 5.4, “In-Service or Education Distributions”:

Subject to Section 7.6 of the Plan, with respect to amounts not vested at the time payments due under this section cease, a distribution shall be made on each anniversary date of the in-service distribution event of all such amounts that vested during the twelve-month period preceding the applicable anniversary date.

 

11


EXHIBIT B

Section 7.1 Payment Options:

 

  (iii) Upon initial enrollment, instead of electing to receive payment pursuant to clause (i) or (ii), a Participant may elect to receive or commence payment of his or her Account (or portions thereof) by electing a form and time of distribution on the Participation Agreement, as explained therein, as follows:

Permissible forms of distribution:

(a) a lump sum,

(b) installment payments payable over a specified number of years in regular and periodic intervals that are no more frequent than monthly, or

(c) a specified percentage paid as a lump sum, with the remaining percentage paid as installment payments payable over a specified number of years in regular and periodic intervals that are no more frequent than monthly.

Permissible times at which distribution may commence:

(a) a specified date following the Qualifying Distribution Event as permitted by the Participation Agreement, or

(b) the lapse of a specified increment of time following the Qualifying Distribution Event (for example, the Participant could elect 1 st anniversary of the Qualifying Distribution Event, or the Participant could elect April 15 th following the 5 th anniversary of the Qualifying Distribution Event).

A Participant may make a one-time subsequent election to delay the date(s) or change the form of payment elected pursuant to this clause (iii) to a later date(s). Such subsequent election is subject to Section 7.5 of the Plan and may not take effect until at least 12 months after the date on which such subsequent election is made and, except where the Qualifying Distribution Event is death, must provide for the deferral of payment for a period of at least five years from the date such payment would otherwise have commenced or been made.

 

12


EXHIBIT C

Section 2.13 Effective Date: This is an amendment and restatement of the adoption agreement for a plan named The Executive Nonqualified Deferred Compensation Plan of Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc. with an original plan effective date of October 1, 2001. This amendment and restatement of the adoption agreement was adopted on May 23, 2011 and is effective as of April 6, 2011 (the “Current Restatement”). The Current Restatement is the sixth amendment and restatement of the adoption agreement.

Unless otherwise expressly stated herein, benefits accrued on or after January 1, 2005 are governed by the amended and restated version of the Plan in effect at the time such benefits accrued. Any Grandfathered Amounts shall be subject to the Plan rules in effect on October 3, 2004.

 

13


EXHIBIT D

The Company may credit an Employer Credit to the Deferred Compensation Account of certain Active Participants as follows:

 

1. On or before December 31 of each calendar year, the Company may credit to the Deferred Compensation Account of each Active Participant who is a Senior Vice President of the Company an Employer Credit with respect to such calendar year.

 

2. The Employer Credit made to an Active Participant’s Deferred Compensation Account for each calendar year, if any, shall be equal to 5% of such Active Participant’s current annual base salary. The Employer Credit, if any, is not subject to Company or individual performance factors.

 

3. To the extent of any conflict between the terms of this Exhibit D and the terms of the Plan, the Plan shall govern.

 

4. This Employer Credit may from time to time also be referred to as the Executive Supplemental Retirement Contribution.

 

14

Exhibit 21.1

Subsidiaries of Fidelity & Guaranty Life, a Delaware corporation

 

Entity

   Jurisdiction

Fidelity & Guaranty Life Business Services, Inc.

   Delaware

Fidelity & Guaranty Life Holdings, Inc.

   Delaware

Fidelity & Guaranty Life Assignment, LLC

   Maryland

Fidelity & Guaranty Life Brokerage, Inc.

   Maryland

Fidelity & Guaranty Life Insurance Agency, Inc.

   Maryland

Fidelity & Guaranty Life Insurance Company

   Maryland

Fidelity & Guaranty Life Insurance Company of New York

   New York

Raven Reinsurance Company

   Vermont

Exhibit 23.2

Consent of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

The Board of Directors and Shareholder

Fidelity & Guaranty Life and Subsidiaries:

We consent to the use of our report included herein and to the reference to our firm under the heading “Experts” in the prospectus.

/s/ KPMG LLP

October 16, 2013

Baltimore, MD